Designation: B 740 – 02

Standard Specification for

Copper-Nickel-Tin Spinodal Alloy Strip1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 740; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope * E 290 Test Method for Bend Testing of Material for Duc-
1.1 This specification establishes requirements for copper- tility3
nickel-tin alloy strip in the following alloys: E 478 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper
Nominal Composition Weight %
Alloys4
Copper Alloy UNS No.
Copper Nickel Tin
C72700 85 9 6 3. General Requirements
C72900 77 15 8
C72650 87.5 7.5 5
3.1 The following sections of Specification B 248 constitute
a part of this specification:
1.2 Units—The values stated in inch-pound units and the 3.1.1 Terminology,
values stated in SI units in Table 5 are to be regarded as 3.1.2 Materials and Manufacture,
standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical 3.1.3 Dimensions and Permissible Variations,
conversions to SI units and are provided for information only 3.1.4 Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance,
and are not considered standard. 3.1.5 Sampling,
3.1.6 Significance of Numerical Limits,
2. Referenced Documents
3.1.7 Inspection,
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date 3.1.8 Rejection and Rehearing,
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the 3.1.9 Certification,
extent referenced herein: 3.1.10 Test Reports, and
2.2 ASTM Standards: 3.1.11 Packaging and Package Marking.
B 248 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought 3.2 In addition, when a section with a title identical to that
Copper and Copper-Alloy Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled referenced in 3.1 above appears in this specification, it contains
Bar2 additional requirements that supplement those appearing in
B 598 Practice for Determining Offset Yield Strength in Specification B 248.
Tension for Copper Alloys2
B 601 Classification for Temper Designations for Copper 4. Terminology
and Copper Alloys—Wrought and Cast2 4.1 For definitions of terms related to copper and copper
B 820 Test Method for Bend Test for Formability of Copper alloys, refer to Terminology B 846.
Alloy Spring Material2
B 846 Terminology for Copper and Copper Alloys2 5. Ordering Information
E 3 Guide for Preparation of Metallographic Specimens3 5.1 Include the following information in orders for prod-
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3 ucts:
E 75 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper-Nickel 5.1.1 Specification number and date,
and Copper-Nickel-Zinc Alloys4 5.1.2 Quantity,
5.1.3 Copper Alloy UNS number (see 1.1),
1
5.1.4 Form of material: strip,
This specification is under the ASTM Committee B05on Copper and Copper
Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.01 on Plate, Sheet, and 5.1.5 Temper (see 7.1),
Strip. 5.1.6 Dimensions: thickness and width, and length if appli-
Current edition approved July 10, 2002. Published September 2002. Originally cable,
published as B 740 – 84. Last previous edition B 740 – 96.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01.
5.1.7 How furnished: rolls or coils, stock lengths with or
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01. without ends, specific lengths with or without ends, and
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 740 – 02
5.1.8 Type of edge other than slit, for example, rounded
corners, rounded edges, or full-rounded edges.
5.1.9 When material is purchased for agencies of the U.S.
government, this shall be specified in the contract or purchase
order, and the material shall conform to the Supplementary
Requirements as defined in the current edition of Specification
B 248.
5.2 The following options are available and should be
specified at the time of placing of the order when required:
5.2.1 Width and straightness tolerances, if different from
those required in Specification B 248.
5.2.2 Special thickness tolerances if required,
5.2.3 Certification if required,
5.2.4 Mill test report if required, and
5.2.5 Special tests or exceptions, if any.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 The material shall conform to the requirements specified
in Table 1.
6.2 These specification limits do not preclude the presence
of other elements. Limits for unnamed elements may be
established by agreement between manufacturer or supplier
and purchaser. Copper may be given as remainder and taken as
the difference between the sum of all elements analyzed and
100 %. When all the elements in the table including copper are
analyzed, their sum shall be 99.7 % min.
7. Temper
7.1 The standard tempers of material are as designated in
Table 2, Table 3, and Table 4. Tempers are as follows: TB00
(solution heat treated), or with varying additional degrees of
cold rolling TD01 to TD12 (solution heat treated with varying
degrees of cold rolling); spinodal hardened from these appro-
priate tempers TX00 or TS01 to TS12 (spinodal hardened from
the appropriate solution heat treated or solution heat treated
and cold rolled temper); or Mill Hardened TM00 to TM08
(mill hardened).
7.2 Other tempers are available and shall be subject to
agreement between supplier or manufacturer and purchaser.
8. Grain Size for Annealed Tempers
8.1 Product over 0.010 in. (0.25 mm) in thickness shall have
an average grain-size not exceeding the limits prescribed in
Table 5. The determinations are made on the separate samples
and in a plane perpendicular to the surface.
9. Mechanical Property Requirements
9.1 Tensile Strength Requirements:
9.1.1 The solution heat-treated or solution heat-treated and
cold-worked material shall conform to the tensile property
requirements specified in Table 2, when tested in accordance
with Test Methods E 8.
9.1.2 The spinodal heat-treated material shall conform to
the tensile property requirements specified in Table 3. Spinodal
heat-treatment parameters are given in 11.1.
9.1.3 The mill-hardened material shall conform to the ten-
sile property requirements specified in Table 4.
10. Performance Requirements
10.1 Bend Testing—The bend test is a method for evaluating
the ductility of mill-hardened copper-nickel-tin spinodal alloy
strip in thicknesses of 0.004 to 0.020 in. (0.102 to 0.508 mm),
inclusive.
10.1.1 Material in tempers TM00, TM02, TM04, and TM06
shall conform to the bend test requirements specified in Table
4 when tested in accordance with 14.2.1.
11. Spinodal Heat Treatment
11.1 Solution-heat-treated or solution-heat-treated and cold-
worked material is normally spinodal hardened by the pur-
chaser after forming or machining. For the purpose of deter-
mining conformance to the mechanical properties of Table 3, a
sample of the as-supplied strip of alloys C72700 and C72900
material shall be heat treated at 662 6 9°F (3506 5°C) for 11⁄2
h 6 5 min and a sample of the as-supplied strip of alloy
C72650 shall be heat treated at 725 6 9°F (385 6 5°C) for 2
h 6 5 min. Other heat-treating temperatures and times may be
preferred for end products of this material.
11.2 Special combinations of properties such as increased
ductility, electrical conductivity, dimensional accuracy, endur-
ance life, improved stress relaxation resistance, resistance to
elastic drift, and hysteresis in springs may be obtained by
special spinodal-hardening treatments. The mechanical re-
quirements of Table 3 do not apply to such special heat
treatments.
11.3 Mill-hardened products have been spinodal heat treated
by the manufacturer. Further thermal treatment is not normally
required.
12. Retests
12.1 If any lot of material fails to conform to the require-
ments of this specification due to inadequate heat treatment,
new samples of material may be resubmitted for test after heat
treatment. Only two such reheat treatments shall be permitted.
12.2 If any lot of material fails to conform to the bend test
requirements of this specification, one retest is permitted if

TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements

Composition, %
Copper Copper, A Nickel, Manga- Nio- Magne-
Previous Lead, Iron,A Zinc,A
Alloy UNS incl incl Tin nese,A bium,A sium,A
Designation max max max
No. Silver Cobalt max max max
C72650 Cu-7.5Ni-5Sn remainder 0.01 0.10 0.10 7.0–8.0 4.5–5.5 0.10 ... ...
C72700 Cu-9Ni-6Sn remainder 0.02B 0.50 0.50 8.5–9.5 5.5–6.5 0.05-0.30 0.10 0.15
C72900 Cu-15Ni-8Sn remainder 0.02B 0.50 0.50 14.5–15.5 7.5–8.5 0.30 0.10 0.15
A
The total of the elements Pb, Fe, Zn, Mn, Nb, and Mg not to exceed 0.7 %.
B
0.005 % Pb, max for hot rolling.

2
 B 740 – 02
TABLE 2 Tensile Property Requirements
Tempers: Solution Heat-Treated
Solution Heat-Treated and Cold Worked
YieldD
Temper Designations Tensile
Strength
Copper Alloy Strength, Elongation
(0.05 % Offset),
UNS No. ksiA (MPa)B in 2 in., %
E ksiA (MPa)B
Standard Former min–maxC
min–maxC
C72650 TB00 Solution HT 55–70 21—32 32
(380—480) (145–220)
C72650 TD01 Solution HT and Cold Worked 1⁄4 Hard 60–75 45–60 18
(415–515) (310–415)
C72650 TD02 Solution HT and Cold Worked 1⁄2 Hard 75—85 55–75 5
(515—585) (380–515)
C72650 TD03 Solution HT and Cold Worked 3⁄4 Hard 80–90 68–82 4
(550–620) (470–565)
C72650 TD04 Solution HT and Cold Worked Hard 85–95 77–90 2
(585–655) (530–620)
C72700 TB00 Solution HT 60–80 23–33 30
(410–550) (160–230)
C72700 TD01 Solution HT and Cold Worked 1⁄4 Hard 72–95 48–64 12
(500–660) (330–440)
C72700 TD02 Solution HT and Cold Worked 1⁄2 Hard 82–108 57–80 6
(570–740) (390–550)
C72700 TD04 Solution HT and Cold Worked Hard 97–125 77–100 3
(670–860) (530–690)
C72700 TD08 Solution HT and Cold Worked Spring 110–140 95–115 2
(760–970) (660–790)
C72700 TD12 Solution HT and Cold Worked Special Spring 115–150 105–125 ...
(790–1030) (720–860)
C72900 TB00 Solution HT 64–85 24–40 32
(440–585) (165–275)
C72900 TD01 Solution HT and Cold Worked ⁄ Hard
14 75–100 50–66 18
(515–690) (345–455)
C72900 TD02 Solution HT and Cold Worked 1⁄2 Hard 85–110 65–84 8
(585–760) (450–580)
C72900 TD03 Solution HT and Cold Worked 3⁄4 Hard 95-120 80-100 3
(655-825) (550-690)
C72900 TD04 Solution HT and Cold Worked Hard 100–130 85–108 ...
(690–895) (585–745)
C72900 TD08 Solution HT and Cold Worked Spring 122–145 100–125 ...
(840–1000) (690–860)
C72900 TD12 Solution HT and Cold Worked Special Spring 135–155 110–130 ...
(930–1070) (760–895)
A
1 ksi = 1000 psi.
B
See Appendix X1.
C
Max for reference.
D
As per Practice B 598.
E
As per Classification B 601.

only one of the three specimens fails the test. No retest is 14.1.1 Composition shall be determined, in case of dis-
permitted if two or more specimens fail this test. agreement, as follows:
Element Test Methods
13. Specimen Preparation Copper E 75
Nickel E 478
13.1 Tension test specimens shall be prepared as specified in Tin E 75
Test Methods E 8. The longitudinal axis of the specimen shall Lead E 75
be parallel to the direction of rolling unless otherwise specified. Iron E 75
Zinc E 75
13.2 Specimens for the determination of grain size shall be Manganese E 75
prepared in accordance with Guide E 3.
13.3 For bend testing, three specimens, 1⁄2 6 1⁄16 in. (12.70 14.2 Other Tests:
6 1.59 mm) in width of any convenient length, with the rolling 14.2.1 Bend Test—The axis of the bend shall be at an angle
direction perpendicular to the 1⁄2 in. dimension, shall be of 90° to the direction of rolling, unless otherwise specified.
prepared and tested in accordance with Test Method B 820. The test specimens shall be bent 90 6 5° around the test radius.
To pass the test, all three specimens tested from a lot must
14. Test Methods withstand the 90° bend without visible cracks or fracture when
14.1 Chemical Analysis: observed on the convex surface of the bend at a magnification

3
 B 740 – 02
TABLE 3 Tensile Property Requirements
Tempers: Solution Heat Treated and Spinodally Hardened;A
Solution Heat Treated, Cold Worked and Spinodally HardenedA
YieldE
Temper Designations Tensile
Strength
Copper Alloy Strength, Elongation
(0.05 % Offset),
UNS No. ksiB (MPa)C in 2 in., %
F ksiB (MPa)C
Standard Former min–maxD
min–maxD
C72650 TX00 Spinodal HT 120–140 60—95 6
(825—965) (415–655)
C72650 TS01 ⁄ Hard and Spinodal HT
14 130–140 90–115 8
(900–965) (620–790)
C72650 TS02 ⁄ Hard and Spinodal HT
12 135–145 100–125 6
(930—1000) (690–860)
C72650 TS03 ⁄ Hard and Spinodal HT
34 140–150 105–130 6
(965–1035) (725–895)
C72650 TS04 Hard and Spinodal HT 140–155 110–135 4
(965–1070) (760–930)
C72700 TX00 Spinodal HT 100–130 55–99 15
(690–900) (380–680)
C72700 TS01 ⁄ Hard + Spinodal HT
14 115–140 85–112 10
(790–970) (590–770)
C72700 TS02 ⁄ Hard + Spinodal HT
12 125–150 100–123 6
(860–1030) (690–850)
C72700 TS04 Hard + Spinodal HT 135–160 115–135 4
(930–1100) (790–930)
C72700 TS08 Spring + Spinodal HT 145–179 125–150 3
(1000–1230) (860–1030)
C72700 TS12 Special Spring + Spinodal HT 150–180 130–160 2
(1030–1240) (900–1100)
C72900 TX00 Spinodal HT 120–150 95–120 6
(825–1035) (655–825)
C72900 TS01 ⁄ Hard + Spinodal HT
14 130–160 105–130 4
(895–1105) (725–895)
C72900 TS02 ⁄ Hard + Spinodal HT
12 145–175 125–150 3
(1000–1205) (860–1035)
C72900 TS03 ⁄ Hard + Spinodal HT
34 155–185 135–160 2
(1070–1275) (930–1105)
C72900 TS04 Hard + Spinodal HT 165–195 145–170 2
(1140–1345) (1005–1170)
C72900 TS08 Spring + Spinodal HT 175–205 155–185 ...
(1205–1415) (1070–1275)
C72900 TS12 Special Spring + Spinodal HT 180–225 160–200 ...
(1240–1550) (1105–1380)
A
662 6 9°F (350 6 5°C) for 11⁄2h 6 5 min (C72700, C72900); 725 6 9°F (385 6 5°C) for 2 h 6 5 min (C72650).
B
1 ksi = 1000 psi.
C
See Appendix X1.
D
Max for reference.
E
As per Practice B 598.
F
As per Classification B 601.

of 103. The test radius shall be within 66 % of the nominal 15. Keywords
radius up to 0.010 in. (0.254 mm), and within 64 % for radii 15.1 age hardening; copper-nickel-tin; spinodal; strip; UNS
0.010 in. (0.254 mm) and over. C72650; UNS C72700; UNS C72900

4
 B 740 – 02
TABLE 4 Mechanical Property Requirements Copper Alloy UNS Nos. C72650 and C72900—Mill Hardened Tempers
Yield Yield
Temper Designations Tensile Minimum
Copper Strength StrengthD Elongation
Strength, 90° Bad Way
Alloys (0.2 % offset)C, (0.05 % offset) in 2 in., %
ksiA (MPa)B Bend Ratio
UNS No. StandardG ksiA (MPa)B ksiA (MPa)B min
Former min–max (R/t)F
min–max min–maxE
C72650 TM00 AM 100–120 70–90 65–85 18 1
(690–825) (480–620) (450–555)
C72650 TM02 ⁄ HM
12 115–135 90–110 85–105 10 2.5
(790–930) (620–760) (585–725)
C72650 TM04 HM 115–135 100–120 95–115 10 3.7
(790–930) (690–830) (655–790)
C72650 TM06 XHM 120–140 105–125 100–120 10 5
(825–965) (725–860) (690–825)
C72650 TM08 XHMS 130–145 115–135 105–125 6 5.5
(895–1000) (790-930) (725-860)
C72900 TM00 AM 95–115 75–95 70–90 22 0
(655–790) (515–655) (480–620)
C72900 TM02 ⁄ HM
12 105–125 90–110 80–105 15 0.5
(725–860) (620–760) (550–725)
C72900 TM04 HM 115–135 105–125 95–120 10 1
(790–930) (725–860) (655–825)
C72900 TM06 XHM 130–150 120–145 105–130 6 6
(895–1035) (825–1000) (725–895)
C72900 TM08 XHMS 150–180 140–170 125–150 2 ...
(1035–1225) (965–1170) (860–1035)
A
1 ksi = 1000 psi.
B
See Appendix X1.
C
For reference.
D
As per Practice B 598.
E
Max for reference.
F
As per Practice B 820. The “t” equals the measured average strip thickness to be tested. The “R” equals the bend radius.
G
As per Classification B 601.

TABLE 5 Grain Size Requirements for Copper Alloy UNS Nos.

C72700 and C72900—Tempers TB00, TX00, and TM00
Maximum
Thickness, Average
in. (mm)A Grain Size,
mmB
Up to 0.030 (0.762) 0.035
Over 0.030 to 0.090 (0.762 to 2.28) 0.045
Over 0.090 to 0.188 (2.28 to 4.78)C 0.060
A
See Appendix X1.
B
Although no minimum grain size is required, this material must be fully
recrystallized.
C
As per Classification B 601.

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. METRIC EQUIVALENTS

X1.1 The SI unit for strength properties now shown is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI). The
derived SI unit for force is the newton (N), which is defined as
that force which when applied to a body having a mass of one
kilogram gives it an acceleration of one metre per second
squared (N = kg·m/s2). The derived SI unit for pressure or
stress is the newton per square metre (N/m2), which has been
named the pascal (Pa) by the General Conference on Weights
and Measures. Since 1 ksi = 6 894 757 Pa, the metric equiva-
lents are expressed as megapascal (MPa), which is the same as
MN/m2 and N/mm2.

5
 B 740 – 02
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B05 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (B 740 – 96)
that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) In Table 1, the correction of iron and zinc limits for UNS (2) The addition of minimum bend test ratios to Table 4.
72650, and manganese range for C 72700. Also, the substitu- (3) Editorial and format changes as required for a 5-year
tion of the chemical symbol Nb, for the obsolete Cb, in review.
footnote A of the table.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 742 – 90 (Reapproved 2000)
Standard Specification for
Fine Silver Electrical Contact Fabricated Material1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 742; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers fine silver grade 99.9 % in
fabricated form. The forms covered are tubing, rod, wire, strip,
and sheet for electrical contact applications.
1.2 The electrical contact properties may vary dependent
upon the method of manufacture (refer to 6.3).
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. It is also the
responsibility of the user to become familiar with all hazards,
including those identified in the appropriate Material Safety
Data Sheet for this material as provided by the manufacturer.
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The SI units may be approximate.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 413 Specification for Refined Silver2
B 476 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought
Precious Metal Electrical Contact Materials2
3. Classification
3.1 This specification presently defines only one grade of
fine silver, 99.90 % minimum silver. It differs from the Grade
99.90 referred to in Specification B 413 in that the chemical
limits are slightly different. The reason for this is that Speci-
fication B 413 refers to “refined silver in cast bar form,”
whereas this Specification covers fabricated forms. The prop-
erties of silver are greatly dependent upon the amount and type
of elements present, up to 0.10 %.
3.2 Other types of silver containing appreciably lesser
amounts of impurities, and those with additives for special
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B2.05 on Precious Metals.
Current edition approved Aug. 31, 1990. Published January 1991. Originally
published as B 742 – 85. Last previous edition B 742 – 85.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
purposes, are not covered by this specification, because the
mechanical properties can be appreciably different.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information:
4.1.1 Quantity (weight usually in troy ounces, or number of
units).
4.1.2 Name of material (fine silver).
4.1.3 Temper.
4.1.4 Dimensions; thickness, width, length, diameter, coil
size, or other pertinent sizes.
4.1.4.1 Form of Material: sheet, strip, disks, blanks, wire,
shaped wire, or other.
4.1.4.2 Form Furnished: flat lengths, coils, rod, straight
lengths, or other.
4.1.5 ASTM designation and date of issue.
4.1.6 Additions to the specification and supplementary re-
quirements, if required.
5. General Requirements
5.1 The provisions of Specification B 476 shall apply to all
materials produced to this specification.
6. Manufacture
6.1 The materials used for making this product shall be of
such quality and purity that the finished material will conform
to the requirements and properties prescribed in this specifica-
tion.
6.2 The material shall be produced by either hot or cold
working operations. It should be finished by such cold working
and annealing as may be necessary to meet the properties
specified.
6.3 After the initial shipment and approval has been made,
the supplier must notify the purchaser prior to making any
significant changes in process techniques, basic formulation, or
other factors that might affect the quality or the electrical
contact characteristics, such as weld resistance or erosion. Such
changes in process shall be immediately brought to the
attention of the purchaser for determination of the necessity for
requalification.
 B 742 – 90 (2000)
7. Chemical Composition 8.2 Since it is not always possible to tension test some parts
7.1 Material produced under this specification shall meet the and shapes, the user and supplier should reach an agreement
requirements of chemical composition prescribed in Table 1. with respect to the type of hardness tests and the acceptable
7.2 By agreement between the purchaser and the manufac- range that should be applicable.
turer, analysis may be required and limits established for 8.3 All test specimens shall be full size when practical.
elements or compounds not specified in the table of chemical 8.4 All tests shall be conducted at room temperature, 65 to
composition. 85°F (18 to 29°C).
8. Mechanical Properties
8.1 The material shall conform to the mechanical properties 9. Inspection and Testing
prescribed in Table 2 or Table 3. 9.1 All material produced to this specification shall be
inspected as detailed in the provisions of Specification B 476.
TABLE 1 Chemical CompositionA
Element Weight % 10. Certification
Silver 99.90 min (by difference)
Silver and copper 99.95 min 10.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
Copper 0.10 max producer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished to the
Nickel 0.002 max
Cadmium 0.005 max purchaser that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested,
Zinc 0.005 max and inspected in accordance with this specification and has
Lead 0.025 max
Iron 0.005 max
been found to meet the requirements. When specified in the
Aluminum 0.002 max purchase order or contract, a report of the test results shall be
Bismuth 0.001 max furnished.
Total others 0.05 max
Total of all impurities 0.10 max
A
Elements, such as phosphorus, sodium, and lithium are not natural impurities
11. Keywords
in this grade of silver and thus are not normally found in any appreciable quantities.
However, since they may be detrimental for certain electrical contact applications,
11.1 contact; electrical contact; fine silver; silver; wrought
limits for these and other elements may be established by agreement between the
purchaser and manufacturer. Refer to 7.2.

2
 B 742 – 90 (2000)
TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties of Sheet and Strip

NOTE 1—These hardness values are listed as “Typical,” because of the difficulty in establishing a range meaningful for all the thicknesses possible.
If the purchaser desires hardness specifications, rather than tensile strengths, he shall reach agreement with the supplier as to the proper and suitable
hardness scale and range for the particular size and form ordered.
Ultimate Tensile Typical
Reduction Minimum
Percent Strength, psi (MPa) (see Note 1)
in B & S Elongation
Temper Reduction Hardness
Numbers in 2-in.
(Reference) Rockwell,
(Reference) Minimum Maximum (51 mm), %
15 T
Annealed 0 0 24 000 (165) 30 000 (207) 25 59 max
1⁄2 H 2 21 30 000 (207) 37 000 (255) 8 72
Hard 4 37 37 000 (255) 44 000 (303) 3 76
Spring 8 60 44 000 (303) 51 000 (352) 1 80

TABLE 3 Mechanical Properties of Wire and Rod

Reduction Ultimate Tensile Minimum
Percent
in B & S Strength, psi (MPa) Elongation
Temper Reduction
Numbers in 2 in.
(Reference) Minimum Maximum
(Reference) (51 mm), %
Annealed 0 0 24 000 (165) 30 000 (207) 25
1⁄8 H 1⁄2 11 26 000 (179) 33 000 (228) 15
1⁄4 H 1 21 30 000 (207) 37 000 (255) 4
1⁄2 H 2 37 39 000 (269) 46 000 (317) 4
Hard 4 60 42 000 (290) 49 000 (338) 2
Spring 8 84 46 000 (317) 54 000 (372) 1

SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS

The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
inquiry, contract, or order, for agencies of the U.S. Government.

S1. Referenced Documents
S1.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
S1.1.1 Federal Standards 3
Fed. Std. No. 102 Preservation. Packaging and Packing
Levels.
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
S1.1.2 Military Standards 3
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
S2. Quality Assurance
S2.1 Responsibility for Inspection—Unless otherwise speci-
fied in the contract or purchase order, the manufacturer is
responsible for the performance of all inspection and test
requirements specified. Except as otherwise specified in the
3
Available from Standardization Documents, Order Desk, Bldg. 4, Section D,
700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, ATTN: NPODS.
contract or purchase order, the manufacturer may use his own
or any other suitable facilities for the performance of the
inspection and test requirements unless disapproved by the
purchaser at the time the order is placed. The purchaser shall
have the right to perform any of the inspections and tests set
forth when such inspections and tests are deemed necessary to
assure that the material conforms to prescribed requirements.
S3. Preparation for Delivery
S3.1 Preservation, Packaging, Packing
S3.1.1 Civil Agencies—The requirements of Fed. Std. No.
102 shall be referenced for definitions of the various levels of
packaging protection.
S3.2 Marking:
S3.2.1 Military Agencies—In addition to any special mark-
ing required by the contract or purchase order, marking for
shipment shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-129.
S3.2.2 Civil Agencies—In addition to any special marking
required by the contract or purchase order, marking for
shipment shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123.

3
 B 742 – 90 (2000)
APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. TYPICAL PROPERTY VALUES

X1.1 The following is a list of typical property values that NOTE X1.1—The typical values listed for conductivity and resistivity
are useful for engineering calculations in electrical contact can vary. They depend upon the purity and the temper. For this reason,
design and application. even ranges of 95 to 103 % IACS for electrical conductivity and 1.67 to
1.81 µV·cm for resistivity can be exceeded.
Electrical conductivity, % IACS 100 (Note X1.1) NOTE X1.2—The freezing point of silver is a defined fixed point,
(volume basis)
Resistivity, µV·cm 1.72 (Note X1.1)
according to the International Practical Temperature Scale of 1968.4
Freezing point 961.93°C (1763.5°F) (Note X1.2)
Density approximately 20°C 10.49 Mg/m3(g/cm3)
Coefficient of thermal expansion, 19.68 µm/m·K (10.93 µin./in.°F) 4
For further information, refer to Symposium on Evolution of the International
Linear at 0 to 20°C Practical Temperature Scale of 1968, ASTM STP 565, ASTM, 1968.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 741 – 95 (Reapproved 2000)
Standard Test Method for
Porosity In Gold Coatings On Metal Substrates By Paper
Electrography 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 741; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers equipment and techniques for
determining porosity in gold coatings, particularly electrode-
posits and clad metals used on electrical contacts.
1.2 This test method is designed to show whether the
porosity level is less or greater than some value which by
experience is considered by the user to be acceptable for the
intended application.
1.3 This test method is suitable for flat surfaces, or with
appropriate fixtures, for gently curved surfaces.
1.4 A variety of other porosity testing methods are described
in Guide B 765 and in the literature. Detailed critical reviews
of porosity testing are also available.2 , 3 , 4 Other porosity test
methods are B735, B798, B799, and B809.
1.5 This test method is specifically designed for use with
gold coatings (>95 % gold) on substrates of copper and nickel
and their alloys. Although not covered in this standard,
variations of this test method may be found useful in evaluating
coatings other than gold.
1.6 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard. The values in parenthesis are for information only.
1.7 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to its use. For a specific
precautionary statement, see Note 1.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.11 on Electrical Contact Test Methods.
Current edition approved April 15, 1995. Published June 1995. Originally
published as B 741 – 85. Last previous edition B 741 – 90.
2
For example: Nobel, F. J., Ostrow, B. D., and Thompson, D. W., “Porosity
Testing of Gold Deposits,” Plating, Vol 52, 1965, p. 1001.
3
Clarke, M., in “Properties of Electrodeposits—Their Measurement and Signifi-
cance,” Edited by Sard, R., Leidheiser, H., and Ogburn, F. The Electrochemical
Society, Princeton, NJ, 1975.
4 5
Krumbein, S. J., “Porosity Testing of Contact Platings,” Proceedings, Connec-
tor and Interconnection Technology Symposium, Oct. 1987, Phila., PA, p. 47.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
B 276 Test Method for Apparent Porosity in Cemented
Carbides 5
B 374 Terminology Relating to Electroplating 6
B 537 Practice for Rating of Electroplated Panels Subjected
to Atmospheric Exposure 5
B 542 Terminology Relating to Electrical Contacts and
Their Use 5
B 735 Test Method for Porosity in Gold Coatings on Metal
Substrates by Nitric Acid Vapor 6
B 765 Guide for Selection of Porosity Tests for Electrode-
posits on Related Metallic Coatings 5
B 798 Test Method for Porosity in Gold or Palladium
Coatings on Metal Substrates by Gel-Bulk Electrography 6
B 799 Test Method for Porosity in Gold and Palladium
Coatings by Sulfurous Acid/Sulfur-Dioxide Vapor 6
B 809 Test Method for Porosity in Metallic Coatings by
Humid Sulfur Vapor (“Flowers-of-Sulfur”) 5
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Many terms used in this test method are
defined in Terminology B 542 and terms relating to metallic
coatings are defined in Terminology B 374.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 decorations—those reaction products emanating from
the pores that provide visual contrast with the paper.
3.2.2 measurement area (or 88significant surface’’)—the
surface that is examined for the presence of porosity. The
significant surfaces or measurement areas of the part to be
tested shall be indicated on the drawing of the part or by
provision of suitably marked samples.
3.2.3 Discussion—For specification purposes, the signifi-
cant surfaces or measurement areas are often defined as those
portions of the surface that are essential to the serviceability or
function of the part, such as its contact properties, or which can
be the source of corrosion products or tarnish films that
interfere with the function of the part.
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
 B 741
3.2.4 metallic coatings—include platings, claddings, or
other metallic layers applied to the substrate. The coating can
comprise a single metallic layer or a combination of metallic
layers.
3.2.5 porosity—the presence of any discontinuity, crack, or
hole in the coating that exposes a different underlying metal.
3.2.6 underplate—a metallic coating layer between the
substrate and the topmost layer or layers. The thickness of an
underplate is usually greater than 0.8 µm (30 µin.).
4. Summary of Test Methods
4.1 This test method uses chemically impregnated moist-
ened paper pressed against the specimen surface at controlled
pressure. 7 Current is passed from the specimen, which is
anodic, to an inert cathode, at a fixed voltage for a specified
time. Base metal ions at pore sites migrate to the paper where
a reaction occurs. Depending on the reagents employed, this
gives either colored products or colorless products that can be
made visible by developing the paper in appropriate chemical
vapors or solutions.
4.2 This porosity test involves corrosion reactions in which
the products delineate defect sites in coatings. Since the
chemistry and properties of these products may not resemble
those found in natural or service environments, these tests are
not recommended for prediction of the electrical performance
of contacts unless correlation is first established with service
experience.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Gold coatings are often specified for the contacts of
separable electrical connectors and other devices. Electrode-
posits are the form of gold that is most used on contacts,
although it is also employed as clad metal and as weldments on
the contact surface. The intrinsic nobility of gold enables it to
resist the formation of insulating oxide films that could
interfere with reliable contact operation.
5.2 In order that the nobility of gold be assured, porosity,
cracks, and other defects in the coating that expose base metal
substrates and underplates must be minimal or absent, except
in those cases where it is feasible to use the contacts in
structures that shield the surface from the environment or
where corrosion inhibiting surface treatments for the deposit
are employed. The level of porosity in the coating that may be
tolerable depends on the severity of the environment to the
underplate or substrate, design factors for the contact device
like the force with which it is mated, circuit parameters, and the
reliability of contact operation that it is necessary to maintain.
Also, when present, the location of pores on the surface is
important. If the pores are few in number and are outside of the
zone of contact of the mating surfaces, their presence can often
be tolerated.
5.3 Methods for determining pores on a contact surface are
most suitable if they enable their precise location and numbers
to be determined. This test method is well suited to determin-
ing pore location. It is also well suited to determine the number
7
Noonan, H. N., “Electrographic Determination of Porosity in Gold Electrode-
posits,” Plating, Vol 53, 1966, pp. 461–470.
2
of pores per unit area up to a limit where the pore indications
begin to overlap to the extent that counting individual indica-
tions is not feasible.
5.4 The relationship of porosity levels revealed by particular
tests to contact behavior must be made by the user of these tests
through practical experience or by judgment. Thus, absence of
porosity in the coating may be a requirement for some
applications, while a few pores in the contact zone may be
acceptable for another.
5.5 The severity of porosity-determining tests may vary
from procedures capable of detecting all porosity to procedures
that detect only highly porous conditions. The test method in
this document is regarded as severe.
5.6 This test method is highly sensitive and is capable of
detecting virtually all porosity or other defects in gold coatings
that could participate in substrate corrosion reactions. The test
is rapid, simple, and inexpensive. It provides good pore
delineation in areas where there are several pores. The time for
this test is usually on the order of 60 s.
5.7 Since the results are printed on paper, a permanent
record of the porosity is obtained.
6. Limitations
6.1 This test is considered destructive in that it reveals the
presence of porosity by attacking the base metal areas and by
undercutting the gold coating at pore sites or at the edges of the
gold coated areas. Any parts exposed to this test shall not be
placed in service.
6.2 The paper electrographic procedure is used for gold
coatings on substrates of copper or copper alloys with or
without a nickel underlayer. This test is faster than the sulfur
dioxide, nitric acid vapor, and gel bulk electrographic tests, but
it requires that the test specimen be flat or of such shape that a
uniform clamping force can be applied.
6.3 This test is intended to be used for quantitative descrip-
tions of porosity (such as number of pores per unit area or per
contact) only on coatings that have a pore density sufficiently
low that the corrosion sites are well separated and can be
readily resolved. As a general guideline this can be achieved
for pore densities up to about 100/cm2. Above this value the
tests may still be useful for the qualitative detection and
comparisons of porosity.
7. Apparatus
7.1 Regulated Variable Power Supply is required. The volt-
age shall have a ripple of less than 0.1 V at the working voltage
and be adjustable from 0 to 5 V with the capability of being set
to 60.2 V. The power supply shall not develop a voltage
transient that exceeds the test value by more than 0.1 V. The
voltmeter shall have a range of at least 0 to 7 V, capable of
readings to 0.2-V resolution. The ammeter shall have a range
of at least 0 to 10 mA with 0.5-mA resolution.
7.2 Press for Clamping Test Specimen and Paper Togeth-
er is required. The clamping force shall be adjustable so that
clamping pressures on the specimen from 0 to 3.4 MPa (0 to
500 lb/in2) can be produced. A means of measuring clamping
force must be provided. The accuracy of the force measure-
ment must be adequate to assure that the clamping pressure can
be measured with an accuracy of 60.3 MPa (650 lb/in2). The
 B 741
member applying the pressure shall be fabricated from
corrosion-resistant metal such as aluminum, stainless steel, or
titanium. A pressure member made from these materials shall
be lightly abraded periodically to remove the passivating layer
that develops with use. An alternative is to plate the member
with a coating of gold sufficiently thick and nonporous to
eliminate corrosion. The pressure member is connected to the
negative terminal of the power supply and the test specimen to
the positive. (see Fig. 1)
7.3 Dye Transfer Paper— cut in pieces large enough to
cover the test specimen.
7.4 Timer shall be used to determine the length of the test.
7.5 Stereomicroscope having 10X magnification and an
illuminator are required for inspection of the electrographic
print after the test.
8. Reagents
8.1 Use reagent or “certified” grade chemicals in the prepa-
ration of all solutions. In the case of ethanol, reagent grade
ethanol, or “specially-denatured” (with methyl and isopropyl
alcohols only) may be used.
9. Solutions
NOTE 1—Precaution: Observe good laboratory practice in handling all
chemicals so as to avoid contact of chemicals with the operator’s skin or
eyes.
9.1 Method Procedure A—Two Step Method:
9.1.1 The electrolyte is 0.01 M with respect to both sodium
chloride and sodium carbonate. It is prepared by dissolving
0.59 g of sodium chloride and 1.06 g sodium carbonate in
deionized water and adding deionized water to make 1 L.
9.1.2 The developing solution is prepared by first dissolving
the dimethylglyoxime in ethyl alcohol to make a 1 % solution.
This ethanol solution is then combined with an equal volume of
deionized water to which a few drops of ammonia have been
added. Pore decorations on paper with this developing solution
are red for nickel ions and green-to-brown for copper ions.
FIG. 1 Schematic Diagram of the Paper-Electrography Test
Method
3
NOTE 2—Caution should be exercised in interpreting the results of this
test with certain substrates or underplates which may passivate with time.
An example is tin-nickel, a 1:1 intermetallic alloy having a weight
composition of approximately 65 % Sn-35 % Ni. This material is reactive
in these porosity tests when freshly plated, but becomes passive when
exposed to air over a period of days to weeks. The“ apparent” porosity of
gold at pore sites over such materials may appear to diminish with time,
following plating.
9.1.3 An alternative developing solution may be prepared
by dissolving 0.25 g of rubeanic acid (dithio oxamide, NH2-
CSCSNH 2) in 100 mL of ethanol. The ethanol may be warmed
gently to aid in dissolving the solids. Pore decorations on paper
treated with this solution are green for copper ions and purple
for nickel ions, although the purple may be masked by the
green from any copper ions present.
9.2 Method Procedure B—Single Step Method:
9.2.1 This method uses a combined indicator-electrolyte
solution prepared by adding 20 g/L sodium chloride and
20 g/L of the disodium salt of dimethylglyoxime
(CH3C:NONaC:NONaCH3·8H 2O) to deionized water. A new
solution shall be prepared every two weeks or if the solution
appears other than colorless, whichever occurs first. The
solution shall be stored in a closed container. Pore decorations
on paper treated with this solution are green for copper ions
and red for nickel ions.
10. Procedure
10.1 Handle specimens as little as possible, and only with
tweezers, microscope-lens tissue, or clean, soft cotton gloves.
Prior to the test, inspect the samples under 103 magnification
for evidence of particulate matter. If present, such particles
shall be removed by blowing them off with clean, oil-free air.
If this is not successful discard the sample. Then, clean the
samples with solvents or solutions that do not contain chlori-
nated hydrocarbons, CFC’s or other known ozone-destroying
compounds. The procedure outlined in Note 3 has been found
to give satisfactory results for platings with mild to moderate
surface contamination.
NOTE 3—Suggested cleaning procedure:
(1) Keep individual contacts separated if there is a possibility of
damage to the measurement areas during the various cleaning steps.
(2) Clean samples for 5 min in an ultrasonic cleaner which contains a
hot (65–85°C) 2 % aqueous solution of a mildly alkaline (pH 7.5–10)
detergent (such as Micro or Sparkleen).
(3) After ultrasonic cleaning, rinse samples under warm running tap
water for at least 5 s.
(4) Rinse samples ultrasonically for 2 min in fresh deionized water to
remove the last detergent residues.
(5) Immerse in fresh methanol or isopropanol, and ultrasonically
“agitate” for at least 30 s in order to remove the water from the samples.
(6) Remove and dry samples until the alcohol has completely evapo-
rated. If an air blast is used as an aid to drying, the air shall be oil free,
clean, and dry.
(7) Do not touch measurement area of the samples with bare fingers
after cleaning.
(8) Re-inspect samples (under 103 magnification) for particulate matter
on the surface. If particulates are found, repeat the cleaning steps. Surface
cleanliness is extremely important; contaminants, such as plating salts,
organic films, and metal flakes may give erroneous indications of defects,
and are unacceptable.
 B 741
10.2 Soak the dye transfer paper in the electrolyte solution
for at least 15 but less than 45 min (preferably 20 to 25 min).
Remove excess electrolyte from the paper by blotting with a
filter paper. Do not use paper that has been in contact with the
electrolyte for more than 45 min, since the emulsion on the
paper may be excessively softened. This could cause difficulty
later in the procedure.
NOTE 4—A good technique when conducting many tests is to initially
immerse three to five strips of paper, then add one strip as one is removed.
This allows continuous testing with about 5 min between samples.
10.3 Place the paper emulsion side (glossy side) down on
the test specimen and slide it under the clamping member.
Connect the clamping member to the negative terminal of the
power supply and the test specimen to the positive terminal.
10.4 Adjust the clamping force and the voltage. Values that
have been found satisfactory are a clamping force sufficient to
produce 1.0 MPa (150 psi) pressure, a voltage of 2 V 6 10 %,
and a time of 60 s, 63 s. (see 7.2 for comments on acceptable
pressure accuracy).
10.4.1 If the clamping pressure is too low, background color
from the reagents and base metal appearing at pore sites and
coating edges may obscure the color decorations. If the
pressure is too high, so much electrolyte may be squeezed from
the treated paper that few or no decorations will appear in the
print. This condition can be detected by testing a specimen on
which a scratch through the coating has been made.
10.4.2 The observed current typically falls in the range from
0.05 to 0.5 mA/cm2 (0.3 to 3.0 mA/in.2) of specimen area.
Much lower values indicate an electrical problem such as poor
contact due to a passivating layer or contamination. The low
current condition produces an inaccurate porosity print. A
high-current reading, that is, off scale, indicates a short circuit
between the electrodes. This can occur if the paper is out of
position. In either event, repeat the test with a new specimen.
10.5 Turn off the power, release the clamp, and carefully
peel the paper away from the specimen.
10.6 If Procedure A with the separate electrolyte and devel-
oping solutions is in use, dip the paper in the developing
solution or wipe with a cloth saturated with developing
solution. Then place the paper face down on some soft paper
toweling and press with a roller to remove the excess devel-
oping solution. The paper can then be left to dry face up for
about 5 min (heating is usually not necessary with the paper
recommended in 7.3). Pore sites will appear as colored spots
(pore decorations) on the white paper. The paper may be kept
as a permanent record.
10.6.1 If Procedure B is used, no further development is
required.
10.7 Alternatively, the paper may be dried in an oven
operating between 50 and 70°C. Drying time will vary depend-
ing on temperature and the size of the paper. Remove the paper
immediately when it is dry; prolonged heating may cause the
paper to turn brown.
10.8 Examine the print under direct illumination (at an
angle of 75 to 90° to the surface). Either an incandescent lamp
or fluorescent ring light may be used.
10.9 If pores are to be counted, duplicate counts shall be
made of each, and the two readings averaged. Pore decorations
4
are often counted according to size. A useful sizing technique
is to tabulate the pores in accordance with three size ranges.
These are (approximately):
10.9.1 A 0.005-in. (0.13 mm) diameter or less.
10.9.2 Between 0.005 and 0.015-in. (0.13 and 0.38-mm)
diameter.
10.9.3 Greater than 0.015-in. (>0.38-mm) diameter. For
sizing purposes, the longest dimension is taken as the diameter.
If two or more, generally circular spots, overlap but appear to
have separate origins, each is counted as an individual pore and
classified in the appropriate size range.
NOTE 5—It is often difficult to determine if decorations on the print
which intersect the edge of the gold-coated area originate from defects in
the gold or from the base metal normally present beyond the edge of the
gold. It is, therefore, suggested that the supplier and user agree upon a
procedure for treating such decorations. If the edge of the coated area is
not critical in the performance of the part, it may be appropriate to
disregard decorations which appear to originate from locations within
0.005 in. (0.13 mm) of the coating edge.
11. Interpretation of Results and Report
11.1 Report:
11.1.1 The porosity evaluation shall be determined and
reported in accordance with one or more of the options
described in Guide B 765.
11.1.2 Option 1—The number and size of the pores in the
significant area. This is converted to a pore density in terms of
number of pores per square centimetre.
11.1.3 Option 2—The percentage of total area covered by
the pores.
11.1.4 Option 3—The area, in square millimetres, of the
largest spot on the significant surface.
11.2 Interpretation of Results:
11.2.1 In option 1, count individual pores at 103 magnifi-
cation in the significant area of the coating, as defined by the
specification or drawing of the product. In Option 2, compare
results with panels shown in Test Method B 276 and Practice
B 537, to those supplied as criteria by the purchaser. In Option
3, scan for the largest defect.
11.2.2 Criteria (Pass-Fail)—Pass-fail criteria, such as pore
count greater than 50/cm2(Option 1), or an area greater than
1 % (Option 2), or a spot or crack with a total area greater than
2.5 mm2 (Option 3), should be chosen in conformance to the
intended function of the coating and the intended use of the
objected coated. Such criteria should be agreed upon between
the supplier and purchaser.
12. Precision and Bias
12.1 Precision—The precision of this test method is being
investigated with gold-plated coupons having a nickel under-
plate. Round-robin results from a series of four runs in each
laboratory with a test of similar severity gave coefficients of
variation of less than 20 % in each of three participating
laboratories. 8 However, poorer precision was obtained when
the results of the different laboratories were compared.
8
Krumbein, S. J., and Holden, C. A., “Porosity Testing of Metallic Coatings,”
Testing of Metallic and Inorganic Coatings, ASTM STP 947, Harding, W. B. and
DiBari, G. A. eds., ASTM, 1987, p. 193.
 B 741
12.2 Bias—The porosity of commercially produced contact 13. Keywords
platings is a property with potentially large sample-to sample
13.1 electrography; paper; gold coatings; gold platings;
variability. 8 Since there is no acceptable reference material
metallic coatings; paper electrography; plating porosity; poros-
suitable for determining the bias for porosity testing, bias has
ity testing
not been determined.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 743 – 00

Standard Specification for

Seamless Copper Tube in Coils1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 743; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope * B 193 Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor

1.1 This specification establishes the requirements for seam- Materials3
less copper tube in coils, suitable for use in refrigeration and air B 224 Classification of Coppers2
conditioning or other uses, such as oil lines, gasoline lines, and B 251 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought
so forth. Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube2
1.2 Units—The values stated in inch-pound units are stan- B 577 Test Methods for Detection of Cuprous Oxide (Hy-
dard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical con- drogen Embrittlement Susceptibility) in Copper2
versions to SI units, which are provided for information only B 601 Practice for Temper Designations for Copper and
and are not considered standard. Copper Alloys—Wrought and Cast2
1.3 The tube shall be produced of the following coppers. E 2 Methods of Preparation of Micrographs of Metals and
Unless otherwise specified, tubes made from any one of these Alloys (Including Recommended Practice for Photography
coppers may be supplied: as Applied to Metallography)4
Copper Alloy Previously Used
E 3 Practice for Preparation of Metallographic Specimens5
UNS No. Designation Type of Copper E 8 Test Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials6
E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
C10200 OF Oxygen-free without residual deoxidantsA
C10300 ... Oxygen-free, extra low phosphorusA
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials5
C10800 ... Oxygen-free, low phosphorusA E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
C12000 DLP Phosphorized, low residual phosphorus Determine Conformance with Specifications5
C12200 DHP Phosphorized, high residual phosphorus
A
E 53 Test Methods for Determination of Copper in Unal-
See Classification B 224.
loyed Copper by Gravimetry7
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
E 62 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper and
as the standard. The SI values given in parentheses are
Copper Alloys (Photometric Methods)7
provided for information only.
E 112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size5
1.5 The following safety hazards caveat pertains to the test
E 243 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Exami-
method portion, Section 19, of this specification. This standard
nation of Copper and Copper-Alloy Tubes8
does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any,
E 255 Practice for Sampling Copper and Copper Alloys for
associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
Determination of Chemical Composition9
standard to establish appropriate safety and health practices
E 846 Terminology for Copper and Copper Alloys2
and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior
to use. 3. General Requirements
2. Referenced Documents 3.1 The following sections of Specification B 251 constitute
a part of this specification:
2.1 ASTM Standards:
3.1.1 Sampling,
B 153 Test Method for Expansion (Pin Test) of Copper and
3.1.2 Number of tests and retests,
Copper-Alloy Pipe and Tubing2
3.1.3 Dimensions and permissible variations,
B 170 Specification for Oxygen-Free Electrolytic Copper—
3.1.4 Test specimens, and
Refinery Shapes2

3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03.
1 4
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper Discontinued. See 1982 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
5
and Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.04 on Pipe Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
6
and Tube. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
7
Current edition approved March 10, 2000. Published May 2000. Originally Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
8
published as B 743 – 85. Last previous edition B 743 – 95. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
2 9
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.04.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 743 – 00
3.1.5 Significance of numerical limits.
3.2 In addition, when a section with a title identical to those
referenced in 2.1 appears in this specification, it contains
additional information which supplements those appearing in
Specification B 251. In case of conflict, this specification shall
prevail.
4. Terminology
4.1 Definitions—For the definitions of terms related to
copper and copper alloys, refer to Terminology B 846.
4.1.1 coil, n—length of the product wound into a series of
connected turns. The unqualified term“ coil” as applied to tube
usually refers to a bunched coil.
4.1.1.1 bunched, adj—coil in which the turns are bunched
and held together such that the cross section of the bunched
turns is approximately circular.
4.1.1.2 level or traverse wound, adj—coil in which the turns
are wound into layers parallel to the axis of the coil such that
successive turns in a given layer are next to one another
(sometimes called “helical coil”).
4.1.1.3 single layer flat, adj—coil in which the product is
spirally wound into a single disk-like layer (sometimes called
“pan-cake coil” or “single layer spirally wound coil”).
4.1.1.4 double layer flat, adj—coil in which the product is
spirally wound into two connected disk-like layers such that
one layer is on top of the other (sometimes called “double layer
pan-cake coil” or “double layer spirally wound coil”).
4.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
4.2.1 unaided eye, n—visual inspection, without the use of
special equipment or enhancement excepting the use of cor-
rective lenses.
5. Ordering Information
5.1 Orders for materials under this specification shall in-
clude the following information:
5.1.1 ASTM designation and year of issue,
5.1.2 Copper UNS No. (for example, C12200), if required
(see 1.4 and 7.1),
5.1.3 Temper (see Section 8).
5.1.4 Dimensions, diameter, and wall thickness. Dimen-
sional tolerances, if other than those included in this specifi-
cation, are required,
5.1.5 Length (see 16.1),
5.1.6 Type of coil (see 4.1),
5.1.7 Total quantity of each item,
5.2 The following options are available and shall be speci-
fied at the time of placing the order, when required:
5.2.1 Embrittlement test (see 13.3.1),
5.2.2 Refrigeration or air-conditioning grade (see 17.3),
5.2.3 If coil ends are to be sealed (see 13.4.1.1),
5.2.4 Eddy-current test (see 13.1.1),
5.2.5 Expansion test (see 12.1.1),
5.2.6 Electrical resistivity requirement (see 10.1),
5.2.7 Certification (see Section 23),
5.2.8 Mill test report.
6. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 Material:
6.1.1 The material of manufacture shall be cast billet, bar,
tube, and so forth of Copper Alloys Nos. C10200, C10300,
C10800, C12000, or C12200 and of such purity and soundness
as to be suitable for processing in to the product prescribed
herein.
6.2 Manufacture:
6.2.1 The tube shall be manufactured by such hot and cold
working processes needed to produce a homogenous, uniform
wrought structure in the finished product.
6.2.1.1 It shall be cold-drawn to the finish size and wall
thickness.
6.2.1.2 When the cold-drawn temper is required, the final
drawing operation shall be such as to meet the specified
temper.
6.2.1.3 When the annealed temper is required, the tube shall
be annealed after the final cold draw.
7. Chemical Composition
7.1 The material shall conform to the compositional require-
ments listed in Table 1 for the copper specified in the ordering
information.
8. Temper
8.1 H (Drawn) Temper—The temper of drawn tube shall be
designated as H58 (drawn, general purpose).
8.2 O (Annealed) Temper—The temper of annealed tube
shall be designated as 050 (light anneal) and 060 (soft anneal)
(see Table 2). Tempers are defined in Practice B 601.
9. Grain Size of Annealed Tempers
9.1 Samples of annealed temper tubes shall be examined at
a magnification of 75 diameters. The microstructure shall show
complete recrystallization and shall have an average grain size
within the limits specified in Table 3, when tested in accor-
dance with Test Method E 112.
10. Physical Property Requirements
10.1 Electrical Resistivity—When specified in the contract
or purchase-order, tube ordered for electrical conductor appli-
cation produced from Copper UNS No. C10200, C10300, or
C12000 shall have an electrical mass resistivity, V.g/m2, not to

TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements

Composition, %
Element Copper Alloy UNS No.
C10200A C10300 C10800 C12000 C12200
Copper,B min 99.95 ... ... 99.90 99.9
Copper + phosphorus, min ... 99.95 99.95 ... ...
Phosphorus ... 0.001–0.005 0.005–0.012 0.004–0.012 0.015–0.040
A
Oxygen in C10200 shall be 10 ppm max.
B
Silver counting as copper.

2
 B 743 – 00
TABLE 2 Mechanical Property Requirements of Drawn-Temper and Annealed-Temper Tube
Rockwell Hardness
Wall Thickness, Tensile Strength Min, Yield StrengthB Min, Elongation in 2 in.,
Temper Designation Scale Value
in. (mm) ksiA (Mpa) ksiA (Mpa) min %
H58 Less than 0.020 N/A N/A 36 (250) 30 (205) N/A
0.020 and over 30TC 30 min 36 (250) 30 (205) N/A
O50 Less than 0.015 N/A N/A 30 (205) 9 (62) 40
0.015 to 0.035 15TC 65 max 30 (205) 9 (62) 40
(0.381 to 0.889)
Over .035 FC 55 max 30 (205) 9 (62) 40
(0.889)
O60 Less than 0.015 N/A N/A 30 (205) 6 (40) 40
0.015 to 0.035 15TC 60 max 30 (205) 6 (40) 40
(0.381 to 0.889)
Over 0.35 FC 50 max 30 (205) 6 (40) 40
(0.889)
A
ksi = 1000 psi.
B
Yield strength to be determined at 0.5 % extension under load.
C
Rockwell hardness values apply to tubes having an inside diameter of 5⁄16 in. (7.92 mm) or over, and Rockwell hardness test shall be made on the inside surface of
the tube. When suitable equipment is not available for determining the specific Rockwell hardness, other Rockwell scales and values may be specified subject to agreement
between the purchaser and supplier.

TABLE 3 Grain Size of Annealed Tempers 13. Other Requirements

Temper Average Grain Size, mm
O60 0.040 min
13.1 Nondestructive Examination for Defects:
O50 0.040 max 13.1.1 Upon agreement between the manufacturer and the
purchaser, each tube shall be subjected to an eddy-current test.
13.1.2 Tubes shall be tested normally in the drawn temper;
however, they may be tested in the annealed temper at the
exceed the limits in Table 4 for the specified copper and temper
option of the manufacturer.
when tested in accordance with Test Method B 193.
13.1.3 Testing shall follow the procedures of Practice E 243
11. Mechanical Property Requirements except for the determination of “end effect.”
11.1 Tensile and Yield Strength—The product shall conform NOTE 1—End effect is that length of the tube, which travels through the
to the requirements in Table 2 for the specified temper. coil until the testing unit, has stabilized and is able to detect flaws. The
11.2 Rockwell Hardness: magnitude of the spike, generated when an end passes through the test
11.2.1 For product of the H58 temper and Rockwell hard- coils is such that it disrupts testing momentarily.
ness values are given for reference purposes only. 13.1.4 Unless otherwise agreed upon between the manufac-
11.2.2 For product of the O (annealed) temper, the product turer, or supplier, and the purchaser, the manufacturer shall
shall conform to the Rockwell hardness values contained in have the option of calibrating the test equipment using either
Table 2. notches or drilled holes. If agreement cannot be reached,
drilled holes shall be used.
12. Performance Requirements 13.1.4.1 Notch-depth standards rounded to the nearest 0.001
12.1 Expansion Requirement: in. (0.025 mm) shall be 22 % of the nominal bottom-wall
12.1.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order, thickness.
specimens of the annealed product shall be capable of being 13.1.4.2 Drilled-hole standards shall be 0.025 in. (0.635
expanded in accordance with Test Method B 153 with an mm) diameter for tubes up to and including 3⁄4 in. (19.05 mm)
expansion of the outside diameter in the following percentage: specified diameter and 0.31 in. (0.785 mm) diameter for tubes
Outside Diameter, Expansion of Outside over 3⁄4 in. (19.05 mm) specified diameter.
in. (mm) Diameter, %
13.1.5 Tubes that do not actuate the signaling device on the
0.750 (19.1) and under 40 eddy-current tester shall be considered in conformance with the
Over 0.750 (19.1) 30
requirements of this test.
12.1.2 The expanded tube shall show no cracking or rupture 13.1.6 Tubes, rejected for irrelevant signals because of
visible to the unaided eye. moisture, soil, and like effects, may be reconditioned and
retested.
13.1.7 Tubes that are reconditioned and retested (see 13.1.6)
TABLE 4 Copper UNS No.
shall be considered in conformance with the requirements of
NOTE 1—Refer to Appendix X1 for the International Annealed Copper this specification, if they do not cause output signals beyond
Standard (IACS) electrical conductivity equivalents. the acceptable limits.
Temper C10200 C10300 C12000 13.1.8 Eddy-current discontinuities will be identified on
O50, O60 0.153 28 0.156 14 0.170 31
H58 0.15737 0.159 40 0.174 18 coils in excess of 200 ft (61 m) in length for subsequent
removal by the purchaser.

3
 B 743 – 00
13.1.9 At the customer’s discretion, the permissible number
of identified eddy current discontinuities may be specified.
13.2 Cuprous Oxide Requirement—Samples of Copper
UNS No. C10200, C10300, and C12000 shall be significantly
free of cuprous oxide as determined by Procedure A of Test
Methods B 577. In case of dispute, a referee method in
accordance with Procedure C shall be used.
13.3 Embrittlement—Samples of Copper UNS Nos.
C10200, C10300, C10800, C12000, and C12200 shall be
capable of passing the embrittlement test of Procedure B of
Test Methods B 577. The actual performance of this test is not
mandatory under the terms of this specification unless specified
in the ordering information. In case of a dispute, a referee
method in accordance with Procedure C shall be used.
13.4 Cleanness Requirement:
13.4.1 When refrigeration or air conditioning grade is speci-
fied, the tube shall be capable of meeting the following
cleanness requirement described in 13.4.1.1.
13.4.1.1 The inside of the tube, with closed ends, shall be
sufficiently clean such that when the interior of the tube is
washed with a suitable solvent, such as re-distilled chloroform
or redistilled trichloroethylene, the residue remaining upon
evaporation of the solvent shall not exceed 0.0035 g/ft2 (0.038
g/m2) of interior surface. See 19.3 for the test method.
13.4.1.2 The term “capable of” in the context of this
requirement shall mean that the testing and reporting of
individual lots need not be performed by the producer of the
product, if capability of the manufacturing process to meet this
requirement has previously been established; however, should
subsequent testing by either the producer or purchaser establish
that the product does not meet this requirements, the product
shall be subject to either rejection, or recall or both.
14. Expansion Test
14.1 The annealed material shall be capable of being ex-
panded in accordance with Test Method B 153 with an expan-
sion of the outside diameter in the following percentage:
Outside Diameter, Expansion of Outside
in. (mm) Diameter, %
0.750 (19.1) and under 40
Over 0.750 (19.1) 30
14.2 The expanded tube shall show no cracking or rupture
visible to the unaided eye. The term “unaided eye” as used
herein permits the use of corrective spectacles necessary to
obtain normal vision.
15. Nondestructive Testing
15.1 Upon agreement between the manufacturer and the
purchaser, tube shall be subjected to an eddy-current test.
15.2 The tube shall be passed through an eddy-current test
unit adjusted to provide information on the suitability of the
tube for the intended application. Testing shall follow the
procedures of Practice E 243 except for the determination of
“end effect.”
15.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon between the manufac-
turer and the purchaser, the manufacturer shall have the option
of calibrating the test equipment using either notches or drilled
holes. Notch depth standards rounded to the nearest 0.001 in.
4
(0.025 mm) shall be 22 % of the nominal wall thickness.
Drilled hole standards shall be 0.025 in. (0.635 mm) diameter
for tubes up to and including 3⁄4-in. specified diameter. Alter-
natively, when a manufacturer uses speed insensitive equip-
ment that can select a maximum unbalance signal, a maximum
unbalance signal of 0.3 % may be used.
15.4 Unless otherwise specified, eddy-current discontinui-
ties, as detected, will be identified on coils in excess of 200 ft
(6096 cm) in length for subsequent removal by the purchaser.
15.5 At the customer’s discretion, the permissible number
of identified eddy-current discontinuities may be specified.
16. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
16.1 For coil lengths, see Table 5 of this specification. If
coils are produced to a specified nominal weight, no coil shall
weigh less than 40 % of the nominal weight, and no more than
20 % of the coils in a lot shall weigh less than 70 % of the
nominal weight unless otherwise agreed between supplier and
purchaser.
17. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
17.1 The product shall be free of defects of a nature that
interfere with normal commercial applications, except as noted
in 13.1.8.
17.2 The product shall be well cleaned and free of dirt.
17.3 Product of refrigeration and air conditioning grade
shall meet the cleanness requirement of 13.4.
18. Specimen Preparation
18.1 Chemical Analysis:
18.1.1 Sample preparation shall be in accordance with
Practice E 255.
18.1.2 Analytical specimen preparation shall be the respon-
sibility of the reporting laboratory.
18.2 Electrical Resistivity:
18.2.1 The test specimen shall be full size and shall be the
full cross section of the material it represents, when possible.
18.2.2 When the test specimen is taken from material in
bulk, care must be taken that the properties are not appreciably
altered in the preparation.
NOTE 2—Plastic deformation tends to work-harden a material and raise
its resistivity, while heating tends to anneal the material with a subsequent
reduction in resistivity.
18.3 Microscopical Examination—Samples preparation
shall be in accordance with Test Method B 577.
18.4 Embrittlement Test—Samples preparation shall be in
accordance with Test Method B 577.
TABLE 5 Methods of Test
Test ASTM Designation
Chemical analysisA B 170, E 53, E 62
Tension E8
Rockwell hardness E 18
Grain size E 2, E 3, E 112
Expansion (pin test) B 153
A
Reference to Specification B 170 is to the suggested chemical methods in the
annex thereof. When Committee E-1 has tested and published methods for
assaying the low level impurities in copper, the annex in Specification B 170 will be
eliminated.
 B 743 – 00
18.5 Grain-Size—The test specimen shall be prepared in
accordance with Test Method E 3 and shall approximate a
radial longitudinal-section of the tube.
18.6 Expansion Test Specimen—Test specimens shall con-
form to the requirements of the specimen preparation section of
Test Method B 153.
18.7 Cleanness Test Specimen—A section of straight tube,
or a section of a straightened tube from the outside end of a
coil, not less than 5 ft (1.5 m), shall be selected.
19. Test Methods
19.1 In the case of disagreement, the properties enumerated
in this specification shall be determined in accordance with the
ASTM test methods listed in Table 6.
19.2 Tension Test:
19.2.1 Tension-test specimens shall be of the full-section of
the tube and shall conform to the requirements of specimens
for tube section, of Test Method E 8, unless the limitations of
the testing machine preclude the use of such a specimen. Test
specimens conforming to type No. 1, Fig. 9, of Test Methods
E 8, may be used when a full-section specimen cannot be
tested.
19.2.2 Whenever different tension-test results are obtained
from both full-size and machined test specimens, the results
obtained from full-size test specimens shall be used to deter-
mine conformance to the requirements of this specification.
19.2.3 Tension-test results on products produced under this
specification are not seriously affected by variations in speed of
testing. A considerable range of testing speed is permissible;
however, the rate of stressing to the yield strength should not
exceed 100 ksi/min (690 MPa/min.) Above the yield strength,
the movement per minute of the testing-machine head under
load should not exceed 0.5 in./in. (0.5 mm/mm) of gage length
(or distance between grips for full section specimens).
19.3 Cleanness Test:
19.3.1 A section of a straightened tube from the outside end
of a coil, not less than 5 ft (1.5 m), shall be selected. One end
of the tube shall be closed, and the tube shall be filled with
solvent to 1⁄8 of capacity. The opposite end shall be closed and
the tube shall be rolled back and forth on horizontal supports to
thoroughly wash the inside surface. The closure shall be
removed and the solvent shall be poured into a suitable
weighed-container. The solvent in the container shall be
evaporated to dryness on a low-temperature hot plate or sand
bath. Overheating of the container shall be avoided to prevent
charring of the residue. The container then shall be dried in an
oven at 212 to 230°F (100 to 110°C) for 10 min, cooled in a
desiccator, and weighed. A blank determination shall be run
with the same volume of solvent and the gain in weight for the
blank shall be subtracted from the weight of the residue
TABLE 6 Methods of Test
Test ASTM Designation
Grain size E 112
Expansion (pin test) B 153
Eddy current E 243
Chemical analysis
Copper E 53
Phosphorus E 62
5
sample. The corrected weight shall then be calculated in grams
of residue per internal area of the tube in square feet.
19.3.2 The quantity of the solvent used will vary with the
size of the tube being examined. The quantity of solvent used
for the blank run shall be the same as that used for cleaning the
tube sample.
19.3.3 The sample must be prepared in such a manner as to
prevent the inclusion in the residue of copper chips or dust
resulting from the cutting of the sample.
20. Significance of Numerical Limits
20.1 For purpose of determining compliance with the speci-
fied limits for requirements of the properties listed in Table 7,
an observed value or calculated value shall be rounded as
indicated in accordance with the rounding method of Practice
E 29.
21. Inspection
21.1 The manufacturer shall inspect and make the necessary
tests to verify that the product furnished conforms to the
requirements of this specification.
21.2 If, in addition, the purchaser elects to perform his own
inspection, the manufacturer shall afford the inspector all
reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy him that the
tubes are being furnished in accordance with this specification.
22. Rejection and Rehearing
22.1 Products that fail to conform to the requirements of this
specification may be rejected. Rejection shall be reported to the
manufacturer or supplier promptly. In addition, written notifi-
cation of rejection shall follow. In case of dissatisfaction with
the results of the test, the manufacturer or supplier may make
claim for a rehearing.
23. Certification
23.1 When specified on the purchase order, the manufac-
turer shall furnish to the purchaser a certificate stating that each
lot has been sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with
this specification and has met the requirements.
24. Mill Test Report
24.1 When specified on the purchase order, the manufac-
turer shall furnish to the purchaser a test report showing results
of the tests required by the specification.
25. Packaging and Package Marking
25.1 The material shall be separated by size, composition,
and temper, and prepared for shipment in such a manner as to
ensure acceptance by common carrier for transportation.
TABLE 7 Rounding Units
Rounded Unit for Observed
Property
or Calculated Value
Chemical composition hardness nearest unit in the last righthand
place of figures of the specified
limit
Tensile strength nearest ksi (nearest 5 MPa)
Expansion nearest 1 %
Grain size:
Up to 0.055 mm, incl nearest multiple of 0.005 mm
Over 0.055 to 0.160 mm, incl nearest 0.01 mm
 B 743 – 00
25.2 Each shipping unit shall be legibly marked with the 26. Keywords
purchase order number, metal or alloy designation, temper,
26.1 coils; copper tubes; seamless
size, gross and net weight, total length or piece count, or both,
and name of supplier. The specification number shall be shown,
when specified.

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. INTERNATIONAL ANNEALED COPPER STANDARD (ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY EQUIVALENTS)

TABLE X1.1 Electrical Conductivity Equivalents

Electrical
Electrical Resistivity, Conductivity, Conductivity,
Resistivity,
V.gm/m2 % %
V.gm/m2
0.151 76 101.00 0.159 40 96.16
0.153 28 100.00 0.170 31 90
0.156 14 98.16 0.174 18 88
0.157 37 97.40 ... ...

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B05 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue of B 743 - 95
that may impact this standard.

(1) General rewrite of the specification to conform with the
Committee B05 Outline of Form. Included in the rewrite is the
further utilization of Specification B 251.
(2) The electrical resisivity requirement was added to the
Physical Property section.
(3) Appendix X1 on Metrics was deleted.
(4) Appendix X1 on Conductivity was added.
(5) The Mechanical Properties table was rearranged, and the
yield strength of O60 temper was lowered.
(6) The Mechanical Properties section was changed to clarify
the Rockwell hardness requirement.
(7) The Ordering Information section was amended.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 744/B 744M – 99
Standard Specification for
Aluminum Alloy Sheet for Corrugated Aluminum Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 744/B 744M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers aluminum alloy sheets used in
the fabrication of corrugated aluminum pipe intended for use
for storm water drainage, underdrains, culverts, and similar
uses. The material is furnished corrugated in cut lengths, and
uncorrugated in coils and cut lengths.
1.2 This specification is applicable to orders in either
inch-pound units (as B 744) or SI units (as B 744M). Inch-
pound units and SI units are not necessarily equivalent. SI units
are shown in brackets in the text; they are the applicable values
when the material is ordered to B 744M.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate2
B 209M Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate [Metric]2
B 666/B 666M Practice for Identification Marking of Alu-
minum and Magnesium Products2
2.2 American National Standards:2
H35.2 Dimensional Tolerances for Aluminum Mill Products
H35.2M Dimensional Tolerances for Aluminum Mill Prod-
ucts [Metric]
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 fabricator—the producer of the pipe.
3.1.2 manufacturer—the producer of the sheet.
3.1.3 purchaser—the purchaser of the finished pipe.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for materials under this specification shall in-
clude the following information:
4.1.1 Name of material (aluminum alloy sheet for corru-
gated aluminum pipe),
4.1.2 This specification designation (including number,
year, and revision letter if applicable), as B 744 – ____ for
inch-pound units or B 744M – ____ for SI units, and
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-7 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.08 on
Aluminum Culvert.
Current edition approved May 10, 1999. Published August 1999. Originally
published as B 744/B 744M – 85. Last previous edition B 744/B 744M – 95.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
4.1.3 Specified sheet thickness, using only those thicknesses
listed in Table 1.
4.1.4 For sheet ordered in coils:
4.1.4.1 Sheet width,
4.1.4.2 Coil size requirements (specify maximum outside
diameter (OD), acceptable inside diameter (ID), and maximum
weight), and
4.1.4.3 Total quantity (mass).
4.1.5 For sheet ordered flat in cut lengths:
4.1.5.1 Sheet width and length,
4.1.5.2 Total quantity (mass or number of sheets), and
4.1.5.3 Maximum mass or number of sheets in a lift.
4.1.6 For sheet ordered corrugated:
4.1.6.1 Sheet width (overall) and length,
4.1.6.2 Corrugation size (pitch and depth) (see 8.4),
4.1.6.3 Total quantity (mass or number of sheets), and
4.1.6.4 Maximum mass or number of sheets in a lift.
4.2 Additionally, orders for materials under this specifica-
tion shall include the following information when requested by
the purchaser:
4.2.1 Whether certification is required.
NOTE 1—Typical ordering descriptions are as follows: (1) Aluminum
alloy sheet for corrugated aluminum pipe, conforming to ASTM
B 744 – ____; 0.060-in. thickness; 1000 sheets, 251⁄2by 60 in., with 22⁄3 by
1⁄2 in. corrugations; maximum 300 sheets per lift. (2) Aluminum alloy
sheet for corrugated aluminum pipe, conforming to ASTM
B 744M – ____; 2.67-mm thickness by 760-mm width; 25 000 kg total;
coils 1200 mm OD max, 600 mm ID min, 5000 kg max each coil; certified
with test report.
5. Chemical Composition
5.1 The sheet material shall conform to the chemical com-
position limits in Specifications B 209 [B 209M].
6. Mechanical Requirements
6.1 The sheet material shall conform to the requirements for
mechanical properties specified in Specification B 209
[B 209M], when tested prior to corrugating or other fabrica-
tion.
NOTE 2—Sheet material tested after corrugating and other fabricating
should conform to the specified tensile and yield strength requirements,
but due to cold working, conformance to the elongation requirements may
not be obtained.
7. General Requirements
7.1 Aluminum alloy sheets or coils supplied under this
 B 744/B 744M
TABLE 1 Sheet ThicknessA TABLE 3 Covering Width Tolerance For Corrugated Sheet
Specified Thickness Minimum Thickness Tolerance Over
Covering Width, in. [mm] and Under
in. mm in. mm
in. [mm]
0.036 0.91 0.034 0.84
To 24 [610], inclusive ⁄ [6.5]
14
0.048 1.22 0.045 1.14
Over 24 [610] to 36 [915], inclusive ⁄ [9.5]
38
0.060 1.52 0.057 1.44
Over 36 [915] to 48 [1220], inclusive 1⁄2 [13]
0.075 1.91 0.072 1.82
0.105 2.67 0.101 2.55
0.135 3.43 0.130 3.29
0.164 4.17 0.158 3.99 TABLE 4 Corrugated Sheet Lip Dimensions
A
Thickness is measured at any point on the sheet not less than 3⁄8 in. or [10 mm] Nominal Corrugation Lip Dimension
from an edge, and if corrugated, on the tangents of corrugations. Size Minimum Maximum
in. mm in. mm in. mm
specification shall conform to the applicable requirements of 22⁄3 by 1⁄2 68 by 13 3⁄4 19 ⁄
15 16 24
3 by 1 75 by 25 7⁄8 22 11⁄8 28
Specification B 209 [B 209M] (as appropriate) for alclad alloy
6 by 1 150 by 25 7⁄8 22 11⁄2 38
3004-H34 for both helical and riveted pipe or alclad alloy
3004–H32 for helical pipe.
8. Dimensions and Tolerances 9.2 The fabricator or the purchaser may make such tests as
8.1 Sheet thickness shall conform to dimensions prescribed are necessary to determine the acceptability of the material or
in Table 1. to verify the correctness of a certification.
8.2 The thickness of cladding shall be as specified in 9.3 Mechanical properties shall be determined on sheet
Specification B 209 [B 209M]. prior to corrugating or other fabricating, except tests may be
8.3 Permissible variations in flat width, length and square- made after fabrication by the purchaser for tensile and yield
ness shall be in accordance with ANSI H35.2 [H35.2M]. strengths.
8.4 Corrugations shall form smooth continuous curves and 10. Rejection
tangents. The dimensions of the corrugations shall be in
accordance with Table 2. 10.1 Material tested by the purchaser and found not con-
8.5 Covering width of corrugated sheet shall be in accor- forming to this specification may be rejected.
dance with Table 3. Covering width is the distance between the 11. Certification
crests of the extreme corrugations. There is no established
tolerance for overall width since the covering width and lip 11.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
dimensions are the governing factors for the formed product. manufacturer’s certification shall be furnished to the purchaser
The lip dimension of corrugated sheet shall be in accordance of the sheet (fabricator) or to the purchaser of the finished pipe
with Table 4. This dimension is measured along the radial stating that samples representing each lot have been tested and
curvature from the crest of the corrugation to the edge of the inspected in accordance with this specification and the require-
sheet. ments have been met. When specified in the purchase order or
contract, a report of the mechanical test results and the
9. Sampling and Testing chemical composition limits shall be furnished.
9.1 Sampling and testing shall be according to Specification NOTE 3—As the identity of the sheet is not maintained from the original
B 209 [B 209M]. The manufacturer shall make adequate tests ingot production, if numerical results are required by the purchaser, tests
and measurements to ensure that the material produced com- should be performed on the finished sheet.
plies with this specification.
9.1.1 Test results including chemical composition, mechani- 12. Product Marking
cal properties, and cladding thickness shall be maintained by 12.1 Each corrugated sheet furnished for use in annular
the sheet manufacturer for seven years and shall be made corrugated pipe shall be identified by the sheet manufacturer
available to the fabricator and purchaser upon request, for showing the following:
examination at the manufacturer’s facility unless otherwise 12.1.1 Name or trademark of sheet manufacturer,
agreed upon. 12.1.2 Alloy and temper,
TABLE 2 Corrugation Requirements
Inside Radius
Nominal Size Maximum PitchA Minimum DepthB
Nominal Minimum
B744—All values in in.
22⁄3 by 1⁄2 27⁄8 0.48 11/16 0.5
3 by 1 31⁄4 0.95 9/16 0.5
6 by 1 61⁄4 0.95 2.2 2.0

B744M—All values in mm
68 by 13 73 12 17 12
75 by 25 83 24 14 12
150 by 25 160 24 56 51
A
Pitch is measured from crest to crest of corrugations, at 90° to the direction of the corrugations.
B
Depth is measured as the vertical distance from a straightedge resting on the corrugation crests to the bottom of the intervening valley.

2
 B 744/B 744M
12.1.3 Specified thickness, 12.3 The marking shall be applied to the sheet by a
12.1.4 Date of corrugating by a six-digit number indicating permanent method such as coining in accordance with Practice
in order the year, month, and day of the month, and B 666 [B 666M].
12.1.5 ASTM designation number.
12.2 Coils and cut-length flat sheets shall be similarly 13. Keywords
marked by the manufacturer (except 12.1.4) at 2 to 5-ft [0.6 to
1.5 m] intervals, or the information shall be included on a tag 13.1 aluminum pipe; aluminum sheet; culvert
so that the fabricator can mark the sheet at the time of
fabrication.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States. Individual
reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at 610-832-9585
(phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (http://www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 746/B 746M – 02

Standard Specification for

Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Structural Plate for Field-Bolted
Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and Arches1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 746/B 746M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope 60 000 psi Tensile Strength3

1.1 This specification covers corrugated aluminum alloy A 325 Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat
structural plate used in the construction of pipe, pipe-arches, Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength3
arches, underpasses, box culverts, and special shapes for field A 449 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel
assembly. Appropriate fasteners are also described. The pipe, Bolts and Studs3
arches, and other shapes are generally used for drainage A 563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts3
purposes, pedestrian and vehicular underpasses, and utility A 563M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
tunnels. Aluminum box culvert shapes are covered in Specifi- [Metric]3
cation B 864/B 864M. A 930 Practice for Life-Cycle Cost Analysis of Corrugated
1.2 This specification does not include requirements for Metal Pipe Used for Culverts, Storm Sewers, and Other
bedding, backfill, or the relationship between earth cover load Buried Conduits2
and plate thickness of the pipe. Experience has shown that the B 209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
successful performance of this product depends upon the Sheet and Plate4
proper selection of plate thickness, type of bedding and B 209M Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
backfill, controlled manufacture in the plant, and care in the Sheet and Plate [Metric]4
installation. The purchaser must correlate the above factors and B 221 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
also the corrosion and abrasion requirements of the field Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes4
installation with the plate thickness. The structural design of B 221M Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
corrugated aluminum structural plate pipe and the proper Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]4
installation procedures are given in Practices B 790/B 790M B 666/B 666M Practice for Identification Marking of Alu-
and B 789/B 789M, respectively. A procedure for using life- minum and Magnesium Products4
cycle cost analysis techniques to evaluate alternate drainage B 695 Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically
system designs using corrugated metal pipe is given in Practice Deposited on Iron and Steel5
A 930. B 789/B 789M Practice for Installing Corrugated Alumi-
1.3 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units num Structural Plate Pipe for Culverts and Sewers4
are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in B 790/B 790M Practice for Structural Design of Corrugated
each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system Aluminum Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and Arches for Culverts,
shall be used independently of the other. Storm Sewers, and Other Buried Conduits4
B 864/B 864M Specification for Corrugated Aluminum
2. Referenced Documents Box Culverts4
2.1 ASTM Standards: E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
A 153/A 153M Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Determine Conformance with Specifications6
Iron and Steel Hardware2 F 467 Specification for Nonferrous Nuts for General Use3
A 307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, F 467M Specification for Nonferrous Nuts for General Use
[Metric]3
F 468 Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws,
1
and Studs for General Use3
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.08 on
Aluminum Culvert.
3
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2002. Published November 2002. Last Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.08.
4
previous edition B 746/B 746M–01. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
2 5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.06. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 746/B 746M – 02
F 468M Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap
Screws, and Studs for General Use [Metric]3
F 568M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally
Threaded Metric Fasteners3
F 593 Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap
Screws, and Studs3
F 594 Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts3
F 738M Specification for Stainless Steel Metric Bolts,
Screws, and Studs3
F 836M Specification for Style 1 Stainless Steel Metric
Nuts3
2.2 American National Standards:7
B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Inch Series
B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts
B18.2.3.6M Bolts, Metric, Heavy Hex
B18.2.4.6M Hex Nuts, Heavy, Metric
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 arch—a part circle shape spanning an open invert
between the footings on which it rests.
3.1.2 box culvert—a rectangular box with short-radius in
upper corners and a long-radius crown. It can be with full
invert or with footing pads.
3.1.3 fabricator—the producer of the components for the
finished product.
3.1.4 flat plate—sheet or plate used to fabricate structural
plate.
3.1.5 manufacturer—the producer of the flat plate and
accessories.
3.1.6 pipe—a conduit having full circular shape; also, in a
general context, all structure shapes covered by this specifica-
tion.
3.1.7 pipe-arch—an arch shape with an approximate semi-
circular crown, small-radius corners, and large-radius invert.
3.1.8 pipe, horizontal ellipse—an elliptically shaped pipe
with the horizontal diameter approximately 20 % greater than
the nominal diameter.
3.1.9 pipe, vertically elongated—an elliptically shaped pipe
with the vertical diameter up to 10 % greater than the nominal
diameter.
3.1.10 purchaser—the purchaser of the finished product.
3.1.11 special shape—a shape, other than described else-
where in this section, suitable for fabrication with structural
plate.
3.1.12 structural plate—a corrugated and curved plate
which is field assembled with other structural plates to form the
required structure.
7
Available from American National Standards Institute, 25 W. 43rd St., 4th
Floor, New York, NY 10036.
3.1.13 vehicular underpass—a high arch shape with an
approximate semicircular crown, large-radius sides, small-
radius corners between sides and invert, and large-radius
invert.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information as necessary to adequately describe
the desired product:
4.1.1 Name of material (aluminum alloy structural plate and
accessories),
4.1.2 Description of structure (see Section 3),
4.1.3 Number of structures,
4.1.4 ASTM designation and year of issue, as B 746–___
for inch-pound units or B 746M–___ for SI units.
4.1.5 Dimensions of structure (diameter or span and rise,
and length, etc.) (see 7.2),
4.1.6 Thickness of plate (see 7.1),
4.1.7 Type of bolts; whether aluminum, stainless steel, or
steel bolts are required or permitted. If not specified, steel bolts
and nuts shall be furnished (see 5.3 and Note 2),
4.1.8 End treatment (bevel, skew, grade or slope correc-
tions, or other special provision if required by the project plans
or specifications),
4.1.9 Special requirements (including extrusion reinforce-
ment locations and shapes), if required, and
4.1.10 Certification, if required.
NOTE 1—Typical ordering descriptions are as follows: (1) Structural
plates and fasteners for two aluminum alloy structural plate pipes, per
ASTM B 746–___, 180-in. dia., 0.100-in. plate thickness, each 140-ft
nominal centerline length with end treatment as shown on plans. (2)
Structural plates and fasteners for one aluminum alloy structural plate pipe
arch, per ASTM B 746–___, 3860 mm span by 2460 mm rise, 3.81 mm
plate thickness, 27.0 m nominal centerline length with square ends.
5. Materials
5.1 Flat Plate—Insofar as applicable, flat plate shall con-
form to the requirements of Specification B 209 or B 209M.
The plates shall be fabricated from alloy 5052-H141. The
mechanical properties for alloy 5052-H141 shall conform to
the requirements of Table 1.
5.2 Extrusions—The extrusions for circumferential or lon-
gitudinal stiffeners, or secondary structural components, shall
be fabricated from aluminum alloys 6061-T6 or 6063-T6
conforming to Specification B 221 or B 221M.
5.3 Assembly Fasteners—Except as provided elsewhere in
this section, bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements
specified in Table 2 and Table 3. The bearing surface of both
bolts and nuts shall be shaped to a 1-in. (25-mm) radius
spherical surface, or to a uniform taper of approximately 22° to
form a conical surface. In lieu of bolts and nuts with the special
bearing surface, standard type bolts and nuts with special

TABLE 1 Mechanical Properties of Aluminum Structural Plate, Alloy 5052-H141A

Tensile Strength, Yield Strength Elongation, %
Specified Thickness
min (0.2 % offset), min min in 2 in. or
in. mm ksi MPa ksi MPa 50 mm
0.100–0.150 2.54–3.81 35.5 245 24.0 165 6
0.175–0.250 4.44–6.35 34.0 235 24.0 165 8
A
To determine conformance with this specification, each value for tensile strength and for yield strength shall be rounded to the nearest 0.1 ksi (1 MPa) and each value
for elongation to the nearest 0.5%, both in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.

2
 B 746/B 746M – 02
TABLE 2 (B 746) Bolt and Nut Requirements
Bolts Nuts
General Dimensions ANSI B18.2.1 Heavy Hex ANSI B18.2.2 Heavy Hex
Steel Bolts and Nuts A 307A A 563 Grade A
Zinc Coating A 153/A 153M or B 695 Class 50 A 153/A 153M or B 695 Class 50
Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts F 593 Alloy Group 1, 2, or 3 F 594 Alloy Group 1, 2, or 3
Aluminum Bolts and Nuts F 468 Alloy 6061-T6 F 467 Alloy 6061-T6
Nominal Diameter, in. 3⁄4 3⁄4

A
Bolts conforming to Specifications A 325 or A 449 with suitable nuts may be substituted.

TABLE 3 (B 746M) Bolt and Nut Requirements

Bolts Nuts
General Dimensions ANSI B18.2.3.6M Heavy Hex ANSI B18.2.4.6M Heavy Hex
Steel Bolts and Nuts F 568M Class 4.6A A 563M Class 5
Zinc Coating A 153/A 153M or B 695 Class 50 A 153/A 153M or B 695 Class 50
Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts F 738M Alloy Group A1, A2, or A4 F 836M Alloy Group A1, A2, or A4
Aluminum Bolts and Nuts F 468M Alloy 6061-T6 F 467M Alloy 6061-T6
Nominal Diameter, metric size M 20 M 20
A
Bolts through Class 8.8 with suitable nuts may be substituted.

washers may be used. The number of nuts and bolts of each than 10 in. (250 mm). The diameter of the bolt holes in the
size and length furnished shall be 2 % in excess of the longitudinal seams shall not exceed the bolt diameter by more
theoretical number required to field erect the structure or than 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) except those in the plate corners. Bolt holes
structures. Bolt lengths shall be such as to result in at least “full in circumferential seams, including plate corners, may be
nut” engagement when tightened in place. slotted with a width equal to the bolt diameter plus 1⁄4 in. (3
NOTE 2—Aluminum bolts and nuts, due to lower strength properties
mm) and a length equal to the bolt diameter plus 3⁄8 in. (10
than steel bolts, have lower allowable design seam strengths in pipe with mm). The minimum distance from the center of a hole to the
all plate thicknesses, but especially so for plate thicknesses greater than edge of a plate shall be 13⁄4 times the diameter of the bolt.
0.175 in. (4.44 mm). The purchaser should indicate which bolts and nuts Holes shall be provided as required for connecting headwall
are acceptable or required based on his design calculations. Corrosion anchors, bearings, and miscellaneous attachments.
should be considered in selecting bolt types for use in corrosive environ- 6.4 Special Plates—Plates for forming skewed ends, bev-
ments. eled ends, or curved alignment shall be accurately cut to fit the
6. Fabrication order plans. Cut edges of plates shall be free of notches,
gouges, or burrs and shall present a workmanlike finish.
6.1 Structural plates shall be fabricated from flat sheets or
Legible identification shall be placed on each special plate to
plates, corrugated in accordance with 6.2, punched for bolted
designate its proper position in the finished structure and
lap seams in accordance with 6.3 and curved to the required
referenced to the approved erection drawings.
radius.
6.5 Extrusions—Extrusions for longitudinal or circumferen-
6.2 Corrugations—Corrugations shall form smooth con-
tial structural reinforcing, if required, shall be as sized and
tinuous curves and tangents. Corrugations shall form annular
located on the order plans, and fabricated from aluminum alloy
rings (complete or partial) about the axis of the structure. The
6061-T6. Extrusions for receiving angles or receiving channels
dimensions of the corrugations shall be in accordance with
on arches or other less critical structural members, if required,
Table 4.
shall be as sized and located on the order plans, and shall be
6.3 Bolt Holes—The bolt holes shall be punched so that all
fabricated from aluminum alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T6.
plates having like dimensions, curvature, and same number of
bolts per foot of seam shall be interchangeable. Longitudinal 7. Dimensions
seams shall have holes for four bolts per corrugation, with two 7.1 Plate Thickness—Plate thickness shall be as specified
holes in each valley and two holes in each crest, with the holes by the purchaser from the specified plate thickness listed in
placed 13⁄4 in. (45 mm) apart. Circumferential seams in the Table 5 (Note 3). For corrugated plate, the thickness shall be
finished product shall provide for a bolt spacing of not more measured on the tangents of the corrugations.
TABLE 4 Corrugation Requirements NOTE 3—The purchaser should determine the required thickness ac-
cording to the design criteria in Practice B 790/B 790M.
Nominal Maximum Minimum Inside Radius
Size PitchA DepthB Nominal Minimum 7.2 Cross-Section Dimensions—Cross-section dimensions,
B 746—All values in in. such as diameter, span and rise, and radius of curvature, shall
9 by 21⁄2 9 3⁄8 23⁄8 21⁄4 2.0
B 746M—All values in mm be measured to the inside crest of corrugations. The average
230 by 64 238 60 57 51 diameter of circular pipe, based on two measurements at 90° to
A
Pitch is measured from crest to crest of corrugations, at 90° to the direction of each other, shall not vary more than 62 % from the calculated
the corrugations. inside diameter shown in Table 6. The span and rise of pipe
B
Depth is measured as the vertical distance from a straightedge resting on the
corrugation crests parallel to the axis of the pipe, to the bottom of the intervening arch, arch, underpass, and other noncircular structures shall be
valley. as specified within 62 %.

3
 B 746/B 746M – 02
TABLE 5 Plate ThicknessA 9. Sampling and Testing
Specified Thickness Minimum Thickness 9.1 Sampling and testing of plate shall be according to
in. mm in. mm Specification B 209 or B 209M. Sampling and testing of other
0.100 2.54 0.093 2.36 materials shall be according to the specification referenced.
0.125 3.18 0.118 3.00 The manufacturer shall make adequate tests and measurements
0.150 3.81 0.138 3.51
0.175 4.44 0.161 4.09 to ensure that the material produced complies with this
0.200 5.08 0.186 4.72 specification.
0.225 5.72 0.209 5.31 9.1.1 Test results including chemical composition and me-
0.250 6.35 0.232 5.89
A
chanical properties shall be maintained by the manufacturer for
Thickness is measured at any point on the plate not less than 3⁄8 in. or 10 mm
from an edge, and if corrugated, on the tangents of corrugations.
seven years and shall be made available to the fabricator and
purchaser upon request, for examination at the manufacturer’s
TABLE 6 Diameter of Circular Pipe, 9 by 2.5 in. (230 by 65 mm),
facility unless otherwise agreed upon.
Corrugation 9.2 The fabricator or the purchaser may make such tests as
Nominal Diameter Calculated Inside
are necessary to determine the acceptability of the material or
Specified Diameter to verify the correctness of a certification.
in. mm in. mm 9.3 Mechanical properties shall be determined on plate prior
60 1525 58.7 1490
to corrugating or other fabricating, except tests may be made
66 1675 64.8 1645 after fabrication by the purchaser for tensile and yield
72 1830 70.9 1805 strengths.
78 1980 77.0 1955
84 2135 83.2 2115
90 2285 89.3 2265 10. Rejection and Rehearing
96 2440 95.4 2425
102 2590 101.6 2580
10.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
108 2745 107.7 2735 this specification shall be rejected. Rejection shall be reported
114 2895 113.8 2890 to the manufacturer or fabricator promptly and in writing. In
120 3050 119.9 3050
126 3200 126.1 3200
case of dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the manu-
132 3355 132.2 3360 facturer or fabricator may make claim for a rehearing.
138 3505 138.3 3515
144 3660 144.4 3670
150 3810 150.6 3825
11. Certification
156 3960 156.7 3980 11.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
162 4115 162.8 4135
168 4265 169.0 4290
manufacturer’s certification shall be furnished to the purchaser
174 4420 175.1 4445 of the plate (fabricator), or manufacturer’s and fabricator’s
180 4570 181.2 4600 certification shall be furnished to the purchaser of the finished
186 4725 187.3 4760
192 4875 193.5 4910
pipe, stating that samples representing each lot have been
198 5030 199.6 5070 tested and inspected in accordance with this specification and
204 5180 205.7 5225 the requirements have been met. When specified in the
210 5335 211.8 5380
216 5485 218.0 5535 purchase order or contract, a report of the mechanical test
222 5640 224.1 5695 results and the chemical composition limits shall be furnished.
228 5790 230.2 5845
234 5945 236.3 6005 NOTE 5—As the identity of the plate is not maintained from the original
240 6095 242.5 6160 ingot production, if numerical results are required by the purchaser, tests
246 6250 248.6 6315 should be performed on the finished plate.
252 6400 254.7 6470
258 6555 260.9 6630
264 6705 267.0 6780
12. Product Marking
270 6860 273.1 6940 12.1 Each plate shall be identified by showing the follow-
276 7010 279.2 7090
282 7165 285.4 7250
ing:
288 7315 291.5 7405 12.1.1 Name or trademark of plate manufacturer,
294 7470 297.6 7560 12.1.2 Name of fabricator, if other than the manufacturer,
300 7620 303.7 7715
306 7770 309.9 7870
12.1.3 Alloy and temper,
312 7925 316.0 8025 12.1.4 Specified thickness,
12.1.5 Identification symbols showing date of fabricating by
NOTE 4—The purchaser should consult the fabricator to determine the a six digit number indicating in order the year, month, and day
standard dimensions for the various types of structures, other than circular of the month, and
structure. 12.1.6 ASTM designation number.
12.2 The remarking shall be so placed that when the
8. Workmanship structure is erected, the identification will appear on the inside.
8.1 Plates, fasteners, and accessories shall be of uniform 12.3 The marking shall be applied to the plate by a
quality consistent with good manufacturing and inspection permanent method such as coining in accordance with Practice
practices. B 666/B 666M.

4
 B 746/B 746M – 02
13. Keywords
13.1 aluminum structural plate; arches; culverts; field bolted
structures; pipe; pipe arches

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 745/B 745M – 97

Standard Specification for

Corrugated Aluminum Pipe for Sewers and Drains1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 745/B 745M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope * Metal Pipe Used for Culverts, Storm Sewers, and Other
1.1 This specification covers corrugated aluminum pipe Buried Conduits2
intended for use for storm water drainage, underdrains, the B 209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
construction of culverts, and similar uses. Pipe covered by this Sheet and Plate4
specification is not normally used for the conveyance of B 209M Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
sanitary or industrial wastes. Sheet and Plate [Metric]4
1.2 This specification does not include requirements for B 221 Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
bedding, backfill, or the relationship between earth cover load Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes4
and sheet thickness of the pipe. Experience has shown that the B 221M Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
successful performance of this product depends upon the Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes [Metric]4
proper selection of sheet thickness, type of bedding and B 316/B 316M Specification for Aluminum and
backfill, controlled manufacture in the plant, and care in the Aluminum-Alloy Rivet and Cold-Heading Wire and Rods4
installation. The purchaser must correlate the above factors and B 633 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc
also the corrosion and abrasion requirements of the field on Iron and Steel5
installation with the sheet thickness. The structural design of B 666/B 666M Practice for Identification Marking of Alu-
corrugated aluminum pipe and the proper installation proce- minum and Magnesium Products4
dures are given in Practices B 790/B 790M and B 788/ B 695 Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically
B 788M, respectively. A procedure for using life-cycle cost Deposited on Iron and Steel5
analysis techniques to evaluate alternative drainage system B 744/B 744M Specification for Aluminum Alloy Sheet for
designs using corrugated metal pipe is given in Practice A 930. Corrugated Aluminum Pipe4
1.3 This specification is applicable to orders in either B 788/B 788M Practice for Installing Factory-Made Cor-
inch-pound units as B 745 or SI units as B 745M. Inch-pound rugated Aluminum Culverts and Storm Sewer Pipe4
units and SI units are not necessarily equivalent. SI units are B 790/B 790M Practice for Structural Design of Corru-
shown in brackets in the text; they are the applicable values gated Aluminum Pipe, Pipe Arches, and Arches for Cul-
when the material is ordered to B 745M. verts, Storm Sewers, and Other Buried Conduits4
C 443 Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer
2. Referenced Documents and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets6
2.1 ASTM Standards: D 1056 Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—
A 153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Sponge or Expanded Rubber7
Steel Hardware2 F 467 Specification for Nonferrous Nuts for General Use3
A 307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, F 467M Specification for Nonferrous Nuts for General Use
60 000 PSI Tensile Strength3 [Metric]3
A 563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts3 F 468 Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws,
A 563M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts and Studs for General Use3
[Metric]3 F 468M Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap
A 930 Practice for Life-Cycle Cost Analysis of Corrugated Screws, and Studs for General Use [Metric]3
F 568 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally
Threaded Metric Fasteners3
F 593 Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-7 on Light Screws, and Studs3
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.08 on
Aluminum Culvert.
4
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 1997. Published June 1998. Originally Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
5
publishedas B 745/B 745M – 85. Last previous edition B 745/B 745M – 95. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
2 6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.06. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.05.
3 7
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 15.08. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 08.01.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 745/B 745M
F 594 Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts3 5.1.5 Diameter of circular pipe (8.1.1), or span and rise of
F 738M Specification for Stainless Steel Metric Bolts, pipe-arch section (8.2.1),
Screws, and Studs3 5.1.6 Length, either total length or length of each piece and
F 836M Specification for Stainless Steel Metric Nuts3 number of pieces,
2.2 AASHTO Standard:8 5.1.7 Description of corrugations (7.2),
T 249 Test for Helical Lock Seam Corrugated Pipe 5.1.8 Sheet thickness (8.1.2),
5.1.9 Coupling bands, number, and type (9.1) if special type
3. Terminology is required,
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: 5.1.10 Gaskets for coupling bands, if required (9.3),
3.1.1 fabricator—the producer of the pipe. 5.1.11 For perforated pipe, the class of perforations. If no
3.1.2 manufacturer—the producer of the sheet. class is specified for Type III pipe, Class 1 perforations will be
3.1.3 purchaser—the purchaser of the finished product. furnished. Type IIIR pipe is furnished with Class 4 perforations
only (8.3.2.1 and 8.3.2.3).
4. Classification
5.1.12 Certification, if required (13.1), and
4.1 The corrugated aluminum pipe covered by this specifi- 5.1.13 Special requirements.
cation is classified as follows:
4.1.1 Type I—This pipe shall have a full circular cross- 6. Materials
section, with a single thickness of corrugated sheet, fabricated
6.1 Aluminum Sheet for Pipe—All pipe fabricated under
with annular (circumferential) or helical corrugations.
this specification shall be formed from aluminum-alloy sheet
4.1.2 Type IA—This pipe shall have a full circular cross-
conforming to Specification B 744/B 744M.
section, with an outer shell of corrugated sheet and an inner
6.2 Aluminum Sheet for Coupling Bands— The sheet used
liner of smooth (uncorrugated) sheet, fabricated with helical
in fabricating coupling bands shall conform to Specification
corrugations and lock seams.
B 744/B 744M.
4.1.3 Type IR—This pipe shall have a full circular cross-
6.3 Rivets—The material used for rivets in riveted pipe shall
section, with a single thickness of smooth sheet, fabricated
conform to the requirements of Specification B 316/B 316M
with helical ribs projecting outwardly.
for alloy 6053-T4, with the following mechanical properties:
4.1.4 Type II—This pipe shall be a Type I pipe which has
Tensile Strength, min, ksi [MPa] 25 [170]
been reformed into a pipe-arch, having an approximately flat Yield Strength, min, ksi [MPa] 14 [95]
bottom. Shear Strength, min, ksi [MPa] 15 [105]
4.1.5 Type IIA—This pipe shall be a Type IA pipe which has Elongation in 2 in., 50 mm, or 4x dia., min, % 16
been reformed into a pipe-arch, having an approximately flat If bolts and nuts are substituted for rivets (see 7.3.1), they
bottom. shall meet the following requirements for either steel bolts and
4.1.6 Type IIR—This pipe shall be a Type IR pipe which has nuts, stainless steel bolts and nuts, or aluminum alloy bolts and
been reformed into a pipe-arch, having an approximately flat nuts:
bottom. Bolts Nuts
4.1.7 Type III—This pipe, intended for use as underdrains or
for underground disposal of water, shall be a Type I pipe which For B745 pipe
(Steel) A307 A563, Gr. A
has been perforated to permit the in-flow or out-flow of water. (Stainless Steel) F593, Alloy Grp 1, 2, or 3 F594, Alloy Grp 1, 2, or 3
4.1.8 Type IIIR—This pipe, intended for the underground (Aluminum Alloy) F468, Alloy 6061-T6 F467, Alloy 6061-T6
disposal of water or for subsurface drainage, shall be a Type IR For B745M pipe
(Steel) F568, Cl. 4.6 A563M, Cl. 5
pipe which has been perforated to permit the outflow or inflow (Stainless Steel) F738M, Alloy Grp A1, A2, F836, Alloy Grp A1, A2,
of water. or A4 or A4
4.2 Perforations in Type III pipe are classified as Class 1 or (Aluminum Alloy) F468M, Alloy 6061-T6 F467M, Alloy 6061-T6

Class 2 and perforations in Type IIIR pipe are classified as
Class 4, as described in 8.3.2.
5. Ordering Information
5.1 Orders for material to this specification shall include the
following information as necessary, to adequately describe the
desired product:
5.1.1 Name of material (corrugated aluminum pipe),
5.1.2 ASTM designation and year of issue, as B 745-_ for
inch-pound units or B 745M-_ for SI units,
5.1.3 Type of pipe (4.1),
5.1.4 Method of fabrication for Type I and Type II pipe
(7.1),
8
Available from American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials, 444 North Capitol Street NW, Suite 225, Washington, DC 20001.
The steel bolts and nuts shall be hot-dip galvanized in
conformance with Specification A 153, or be mechanically
galvanized in conformance with Specification B 695 Class 40.
6.4 Hardware for Coupling Bands—Bolts and nuts for
coupling bands shall conform to the requirements shown in 6.3
except for the coating on steel bolts and nuts. Steel bolts, nuts,
and other threaded steel items used with coupling bands shall
be zinc coated by one the following processes: hot-dip process
as provided in Specification A 153, electroplating process as
provided in Specification B 633 Class FE/ZN 8 or mechanical
process as provided in Specification B 695 Class 8. Other steel
hardware items used with coupling bands shall be zinc coated
by one of the following processes: hot-dip process as provided
in Specification A 153; electroplating process as provided in
Specification B 633 Class FE/ZN 25; or mechanical process as
provided in Specification B 695 Class 25. Aluminum angles

2
 B 745/B 745M
and lugs shall conform to the requirements of Specification TABLE 1 Corrugation Requirements for Type I, IA, II, IIA, and III
B 221 or B 221M for alloy 6063-T6. Pipe
6.5 Gaskets—If gaskets are used in couplings, they shall be Maximum Minimum Inside RadiusC
Nominal Size
a band of expanded rubber meeting the requirements of PitchA DepthB Nominal Minimum
Specification D 1056 for the “RE” closed cell grades, or B 745 (in.)
O-rings meeting the requirements of Specification C 443.
11⁄2 by 1⁄4D 17⁄8 0.24 ⁄
9 32 0.25
7. Fabrication 22⁄2 by1⁄2 27⁄8 0.48E 11 16⁄ 0.5
3 by 1 31⁄4 0.95 ⁄
9 16 0.5
7.1 General Requirements—Pipe shall be fabricated in full 6 by 1 61⁄4 0.95 2.2 2.0
circular cross-section.
B 745M (mm)
7.1.1 Type I pipe shall have annular corrugations with lap
joints fastened with rivets or shall have helical corrugations 38 by 6.5D 48 6.0 7 6.5
with a continuous lock seam extending from end to end of each 68 by 13 73 12E 17 12
75 by 25 83 24 14 12
length of pipe. As there are important differences in the 150 by 25 160 24 56 51
structural characteristics of annular, riveted pipe versus helical A
Pitch is measured from crest to crest of corrugations, at 90° to the direction of
pipe, it is important for the purchaser to stipulate, for Type I the corrugations.
B
and Type II pipe, the method of fabrication desired. If the Depth is measured as the vertical distance from a straightedge resting on the
corrugation crests parallel to the axis of the pipe, to the bottom of the intervening
method of fabrication is not stated in the ordering information, valley.
the fabrication method shall be at the option of the fabricator. C
Minimum inside radius requirement does not apply to a corrugation containing
7.1.2 Type IA pipe shall be fabricated with a smooth liner a helical lock seam.
D
The corrugation size of 11⁄2 by 1⁄4 in. [38 x 6.5 mm] is available only in helically
and helically corrugated shell integrally attached at helical lock corrugated pipe.
seams extending from end to end of each length of pipe. The E
For pipe 12 to 21 in. [300 to 525 mm] dia. inclusive, the minimum corrugation
shell shall have corrugations of nominal 22⁄3 (or 3 in. [68 or 75 depth shall be 0.42 in. [11 mm].
mm] pitch.
7.1.3 Type IR pipe shall be fabricated with helical ribs depending on sheet thickness, corrugation size, and diameter of
projecting outward with a continuous lock seam extending pipe. For pipe with 1 in. [25 mm] deep corrugations, 1⁄2-in.
from end to end of each length of pipe. [Metric M12] diameter bolts and nuts may be used in lieu of
7.2 Corrugations—The corrugations shall be either annular rivets on a one-for-one replacement ratio. Circumferential
or helical as provided in 7.1. The direction of the crests and seams shall be riveted using rivets of the same size as for
valleys of helical corrugations shall not be less than 60° from longitudinal seams and shall have a maximum rivet spacing of
the axis of the pipe for pipe diameters larger than 21 in. [525 6 in. [150 mm], measured on centers, except that six rivets will
mm], and not less than 45° from the axis for pipe diameters of be sufficient in 12-in. [300 mm] diameter pipe.
21 in. [525 mm] and smaller. 7.3.2 All rivets shall be driven cold in such a manner that
7.2.1 For Type I and IA pipe, corrugations shall form the sheets shall be drawn tightly together throughout the entire
smooth continuous curves and tangents. The dimensions of the lap. The center of a rivet shall be no closer than twice its
corrugations shall be in accordance with Table 1 for the size diameter from the edge of the sheet. The distance between the
indicated in the order. centerlines of the two rows of rivets, where two rows are
7.2.2 For Type IR pipe, the corrugations shall be essentially required, shall not be less than 11⁄2 in. [38 mm]. All rivets shall
rectangular ribs projecting outward from the pipe wall. The have neat, workmanlike, and full hemispherical heads or heads
dimensions and spacings of the ribs shall be in accordance with of a form acceptable to the purchaser, shall be driven without
Table 2 for the size indicated in the order. See also Fig. 1. For bending, and shall completely fill the hole.
the 111⁄2 in. [292 mm] rib spacing, a stiffener shall be included 7.4 Helical Lock Seams—The lock seam for Type I pipe
midway between the ribs, if the sheet between the ribs does not shall be formed in the tangent element of the corrugation
include a lock seam. This stiffener shall have a nominal radius profile with its center near the neutral axis of the corrugation
of 0.25 in. [6.4 mm] and a minimum height of 0.20 in. [5.1 profile. The lock seam for Type IA pipe shall be in the valley
mm] toward the outside of the pipe. of the corrugation, shall be spaced not more than 30 in. [760
NOTE 1—The nominal dimensions and properties for smooth corruga- mm] apart, and shall be formed from both the liner and the
tions and for ribs are given in Practice B 790/B 790M. shell in the same general manner as Type I helical lock seam
pipe. The lock seam for Type IR shall be formed in the flat zone
7.3 Riveted Seams—The longitudinal seams shall be stag-
of the pipe wall, midway between two ribs.
gered to the extent that no more than three thicknesses of sheet
7.4.1 The edges of the sheets within the cross-section of the
are fastened by any rivet. Pipe to be reformed into pipe-arch
lock seam shall lap at least 5⁄32 in. [4.0 mm] for pipe 10 in. [250
shape shall also meet the longitudinal seam requirement of
mm] or less in diameter and at least 5⁄16 in. [7.9 mm] for pipe
8.2.2.
greater than 10 in. [250 mm] in diameter, with an occasional
NOTE 2—Fabrication of pipe without longitudinal seams in 120° of arc, tolerance of minus 10 % of lap width allowable. The lapped
so that the pipe may be installed without longitudinal seams in the invert, surfaces shall be in tight contact. The profile of the sheet shall
is subject to negotiation between the purchaser and fabricator. include a retaining offset adjacent to the 180° fold (as described
7.3.1 The size of rivets, number per corrugation, and width in AASHTO T249) of one sheet thickness on one side of the
of lap at the longitudinal seam shall be as stated in Table 3, lock seam, or one-half sheet thickness on both sides of the lock

3
 B 745/B 745M
TABLE 2 Rib Requirements for Type IR Pipe
Rib
Nominal Size Bottom Outside BottomD Outside Top Outside TopD Outside
Width, MinA Depth, MinB Spacing, MaxC
Radius, Min Radius, Max Avg. Radius, Min Radius, Max Avg.
in.
⁄ by 3⁄4 by 71⁄2
34 0.68 0.73 73⁄4 0.10 0.25 0.10+t 0.25+t
3⁄4 by 1 by 111⁄2 0.68 0.95 113⁄4 0.10 0.25 0.10+t 0.25+t
mm
19 by 19 by 190 17 19 197 2.5 6.0 2.5+t 6.0+t
19 by 25 by 292 17 24 298 2.5 6.0 2.5+t 6.0+t
A
Width is a dimension of the inside of the rib but is measured on the outside of the pipe (outside of the rib). It shall meet or exceed the stated minimum width plus two
wall thicknesses, that is, 2T + 0.68 in. [2 t + 17 mm].
B
Depth is an average of the ribs within a sheet width measured from the inside by placing a straight edge across the open rib and measuring to the bottom of the rib.
C
Spacing is an average of three adjacent rib spacings for 3⁄4by 3⁄4 by 71⁄2 in. [19 by 19 by 190 mm] pipe and two adjacent rib spacings for 3⁄4 by 1 by 111⁄2 in. [19 by
25 by 292 mm] pipe measured center-to-center of the ribs, at 90° to the direction of the ribs.
D
The averages of the two top rib radii and of the two bottom radii shall be within the minimum and maximum tolerances. The term outside radius refers to the surface
outside of the pipe. See Fig. 1.

TABLE 4 Specified Aluminum Alloy Sheet Thicknesses and Lock

Seam Tensile Strength
Specified Sheet ThicknessA,B Lock Seam Tensile Strength, min.
in. mm lbf/in. kN/m
0.036 0.91 100 17
0.048 1.22 145 25
0.060 1.52 170 30
0.075 1.91 245 43
0.105 2.67 425 74
0.135 3.43 550 96
0.164 4.17 700 122
FIG. 1 Outside Radius of the Pipe (see Table 2)
A
Thicknesses listed are those included in Specification B 744/B 744M.
B
For Type IA pipe, the lock seam tensile strength requirement shall be based on
TABLE 3 Riveted Longitudinal Seams the thickness of the corrugated shell.
Nominal Corrugation Size
Specified Sheet
22⁄3 3 1⁄2 in. 3 3 1 in. 6 3 1 in.
Thickness
68 3 13 mm A,B
75 3 25 mmC,D 150 3 25 mmE,D 7.5 End Finish:
Rivet Diameters, min.
in. mm
in. mm in. mm in. mm
7.5.1 To facilitate field jointing, the ends of individual pipe
0.060 1.52 5⁄16 8.0 3⁄8 9.5 1⁄2 12.7 sections with helical corrugations or ribs may be rerolled to
0.075 1.91 5⁄16 8.0 3⁄8 9.5 1⁄2 12.7 form annular corrugations extending at least two corrugations
0.105 2.67 3⁄8 9.5 1⁄2 12.7 1⁄2 12.7
0.135 3.43 3⁄8 9.5 1⁄2 12.7 1⁄2 12.7
from the pipe end, or to form an upturned flange meeting the
0.164 4.17 3⁄8 9.5 1⁄2 12.7 1⁄2 12.7 requirements in 7.5.3, or both. The diameter of ends shall not
A
One rivet each valley for pipe diameters 36 in. [900 mm] and smaller. Two exceed that of the pipe barrel by more than the depth of the
rivets each valley for pipe diameters 42 in. [1050 mm] and larger. corrugation. All types of pipe ends, whether rerolled or not,
B
Minimum width of lap: 11⁄2 in. [38 mm] for pipe diameters 36 in. [900 mm] and shall be matched in a joint such that the maximum difference
smaller, and 3 in. [75 mm] for pipe diameters 42 in. [1050 mm] and larger.
C
Two rivets each valley for all pipe diameters. in the diameter of abutting pipe ends is 1⁄2in. [13 mm].
D
E
Minimum width of lap: 3 in. [75 mm] for pipe of all diameters. 7.5.2 When pipe with helical corrugations or ribs is rerolled
Two rivets each crest and valley for all pipe diameters.
to form annular corrugations in the ends, the usual size of
annular corrugations is 22⁄3 (by 1⁄2 in. [68 by 13 mm].
seam, at the fabricator’s option. There shall be no visual cracks 7.5.3 If a flanged finish is used on the ends of individual
in the metal, loss of metal-to-metal contact, or excessive pipe sections to facilitate field jointing, the flange shall be
angularity on the interior of the 180° fold of metal at the uniform in width, be not less than 1⁄2 in. [13 mm] wide, and
completion of forming the lock seam. The lock seam shall be shall be square to the longitudinal axis of the pipe.
mechanically staked (indented) at periodic intervals, or other- 7.5.4 The ends of all pipe which will form the inlet and
wise specially constructed to prevent slippage. outlet of culverts, fabricated of sheets having normal thick-
7.4.2 Specimens cut from production pipe normal to and nesses of 0.075 in. [1.91 mm] and less, shall be reinforced in
across the lock seam shall develop the tensile strength as a manner approved by the purchaser, when specified.
provided in Table 4, when tested according to AASHTO T249.
For Type IA pipe, the lock seam strength shall be as tabulated 8. Pipe Requirements
based on the thickness of the corrugated shell. 8.1 Type I, Type IA, and Type IR Pipe:
7.4.3 When the ends of helically corrugated lock seam pipe 8.1.1 Pipe Dimensions—The nominal diameter of the pipe
have been rerolled to form annular corrugations, either with or shall be as stated in the order, selected from the sizes listed in
without a flanged end finish, the lock seam in the rerolled end Table 5. The size of corrugations which are standard for each
shall not contain any visible cracks in the base metal and the size of pipe are also shown in Table 5. The average inside
tensile strength of the lock seam shall be not less than 60 % of diameter of circular pipe and pipe to be reformed into
that required in 7.4.2. pipe-arches shall not vary more than 1 % or 1⁄2 in. [13 mm],

4
 B 745/B 745M
TABLE 5 Pipe Sizes
Minimum Outside
Nominal Inside Diameter Corrugation SizesA
CircumferenceB
11⁄2 by 1⁄4 in. 22⁄3 (by 1⁄2 in. 3 by 1 in. 6 by 1 in.
in. mm Ribbed PipeC in. mm
38 by 6.5 mm 68 by 13 mm 75 by 25 mm 150 by 25 mm
4 100 X 11.4 284
6 150 X 17.7 441
8 200 X 24.0 598
10 250 X 30.2 755
12 300 X 36.5 912
15 375 X X 46.0 1148
18 450 X X 55.4 1383
21 525 X X 64.8 1620
24 600 X X 74.2 1854
27 675 X X 83.6 2091
30 750 X X X 93.1 2325
33 825 X X X 102.5 2561
36 900 X X X 111.9 2797
42 1050 X X X 130.8 3269
48 1200 X X X X 149.6 3739
54 1350 X X X X 168.4 4209
60 1500 X X X X 187.0 4675
66 1650 X X X X 205.7 5142
72 1800 X X X X 224.3 5609
78 1950 X X X 243.0 6075
84 2100 X X X 261.7 6542
90 2250 X X 280.3 7008
96 2400 X X 299.0 7475
102 2550 X X 317.6 7941
108 2700 X X 336.3 8408
114 2850 X X 355.0 8874
120 3000 X 373.6 9341
A
An “X” indicates standard corrugation sizes for each nominal diameter of pipe.
B
Measured in valley of annular corrugations. Not applicable to helically corrugated pipe.
C
Rib sizes 3⁄4 by 3⁄4 by 71⁄2 in. [19 by 19 by 190 mm] and 3⁄4 by 1 by 111⁄2 in. [19 by 25 by 292 mm].

whichever is greater, from the nominal diameter when mea-
sured on the inside crest of the corrugations. Alternately, for
pipe having annular corrugations, conformance with the inside
diameter requirement may be determined by measuring the
outside circumference, for which minimum values are given in
Table 5.
NOTE 3—The outside circumference of helically corrugated pipe is
influenced by the corrugation size and the angle of the corrugations,
affecting the number of corrugations crossed, therefore no minimum
circumferential measurement can be specified.
8.1.2 Sheet Thickness—Sheet thickness shall be as specified
by the purchaser from the specified sheet thicknesses listed in
Table 4 (Note 4 and Note 5). For Type IA pipe, the thickness
of both the shell and the liner shall be given; the thickness of
the corrugated shell shall be at least 60 % of the thickness of
the equivalent Type I pipe; the liner shall have a nominal
thickness of at least 0.036 in. [0.91 mm]; and the sum of the
specified thicknesses of shell and liner shall equal or exceed the
specified thickness of an equivalent pipe of identical corruga-
tions as the shell according to the design criteria in the Practice
B 790/B 790M.
NOTE 4—The sheet thicknesses indicated in Table 4 are the thicknesses
listed as available in Specification B 744/B 744M.
NOTE 5—The purchaser should determine the required thickness for
Type I, IA, or IR pipe, or Type I, IA or IR pipe to be reformed into Type
II, IIA or IIR pipe according to the design criteria in Practice B 790, or
other appropriate guidelines. Specified thickness of 0.036 in. [0.91 mm] is
generally used only for Type IA pipe.
8.1.3 When specified by the purchaser, the finished pipe
shall be factory elongated to the extent specified. The elonga-
tion shall be accomplished by the use of a mechanical
apparatus which will produce a uniform deformation through-
out the length of the section.
NOTE 6—When corrugated aluminum pipe is designed according to
Practice B 790 and installed according to Practice B 788, vertical elonga-
tion (factory or field) is not required for structural purposes.
8.2 Type II, Type IIA, and Type IIR Pipe:
8.2.1 Pipe-Arch Dimensions—Pipe furnished as Type II,
IIA, or IIR shall be made from Type I, IA, or IR pipe
respectively, and shall be reformed to provide a pipe-arch
shape. All applicable requirements for Types I, IA, or IR pipe
shall be met by finished Types II, IIA, and IIR respectively.
Pipe-arches shall conform to the dimensional requirements of
Table 6, Table 7, or Table 8 [Table 9, Table 10, or Table 11]. All
dimensions shall be measured from the inside crest of corru-
gations for Type II pipe or from the inside liner or surface for
Types IIA or IIR pipe, respectively.
8.2.2 Longitudinal Seams—Longitudinal seams of riveted
pipe-arches shall not be placed in the corner radius.
8.2.3 Reforming Type IR pipe into Type IIR pipe-arch shall
be done in such a manner as to avoid damage to the external
ribs.
8.3 Type III and IIIR Pipe:
8.3.1 Type III and IIIR pipe shall have a full circular
cross-section and shall conform to the requirements for Type I
or Type IR pipe, and in addition shall contain perforations
conforming to one of the classes described in 8.3.2.
8.3.2 Perforations—The perforations in Type III pipe shall
conform to the requirements for Class 1 or Class 2 as specified
in the order and described in 8.3.2.1 and 8.3.2.2 respectively.

5
 B 745/B 745M
TABLE 6 Pipe-Arch Requirements— TABLE 9 Pipe-Arch Requirements—
22⁄3 by 1⁄2 in. Corrugations [68 by 13 mm Corrugations]
Pipe Arch Equiv. SpanA, RiseA, Min. Corner Max BB, Min.
Equiv.
Size, in. Dia, in. in. in. Radius, in. in. Pipe Arch SpanA, RiseA, Corner
Dia, Max BB, mm
Size, mm mm mm Radius,
17 3 13 15 17 13 3 51⁄4 mm
mm
21 3 15 18 21 15 3 6
24 3 18 21 24 18 3 71⁄4 430 3 330 375 430 330 75 135
28 3 20 24 28 20 3 8 530 3 380 450 530 380 75 155
35 3 24 30 35 24 3 91⁄2 610 3 460 525 610 460 75 185
42 3 29 36 42 29 31⁄2 101⁄2 710 3 510 600 710 510 75 205
49 3 33 42 49 33 4 111⁄2 780 3 560 675 780 560 75 225
57 3 38 48 57 38 5 131⁄2 885 3 610 750 870 630 75 240
64 3 43 54 64 43 6 15 970 3 690 825 970 690 75 255
71 3 47 60 71 47 7 161⁄2 1060 3 740 900 1060 740 90 265
77 3 52 66 77 52 8 18 1240 3 840 1050 1240 840 100 290
83 3 57 72 83 57 9 20 1440 3 970 1200 1440 970 130 345
1620 3 1100 1350 1620 1100 155 380
A
A tolerance of 61 in. or 2 % of equivalent diameter, whichever is greater, is
1800 3 1200 1500 1800 1200 180 420
permissible in span and rise.
B 1950 3 1320 1650 1950 1320 205 460
B is defined as the vertical dimension from a horizontal line across the widest
2100 3 1450 1800 2100 1450 230 510
portion of the arch to the lowest portion of the base.
A
A tolerance of 625 mm or 2 % of equivalent diameter, whichever is greater, is
permissible in span and rise.
TABLE 7 Pipe-Arch Requirements— B
B is defined as the vertical dimension from a horizontal line across the widest
3 by 1 in. Corrugations portion of the arch to the lowest portion of the base.
Pipe Arch Equiv. SpanA, RiseA, Min. Corner
Size, in. Dia., in. in. in. Radius, in. TABLE 10 Pipe Arch Requirements—
53 3 41 48 53–2.4 41 + 2.4 7 [75 by 25 mm Corrugations]
60 3 46 54 60–2.7 46 + 2.7 8
Pipe Arch Equiv. SpanA, RiseA, Min. Corner
66 3 51 60 66–3.0 51 + 3.0 9
Size, mm Dia, mm mm mm Radius, mm
73 3 55 66 73–3.3 55 + 3.3 12
81 3 59 72 81–3.6 59 + 3.6 14 1340 3 1050 1200 1340–60 1050 + 60 180
87 3 63 78 87–4.4 63 + 4.4 14 1520 3 1170 1350 1520–70 1170 + 70 205
95 3 67 84 95–4.8 67 + 4.8 16 1670 3 1300 1500 1670–75 1300 + 75 230
103 3 71 90 103–5.2 71 + 5.2 16 1850 3 1400 1650 1850–85 1400 + 85 305
112 3 75 96 112–5.6 75 + 5.6 18 2050 3 1500 1800 2050–95 1500 + 95 355
117 3 79 102 117–5.9 79 + 5.9 18 2200 3 1620 1950 2200–110 1620 + 110 355
128 3 83 108 128–6.4 83 + 6.4 18 2400 3 1720 2100 2400–120 1720 + 120 410
137 3 87 114 137–6.9 87 + 6.9 18 2600 3 1820 2250 2800–130 1820 + 130 410
142 3 91 120 142–7.1 91 + 7.1 18 2840 3 1920 2400 2840–145 1920 + 145 460
A 2970 3 2020 2550 2970–150 2020 + 150 460
Negative and positive numbers listed with span and rise dimensions are
3240 3 2120 2700 3240–165 2120 + 165 460
negative and positive tolerances, zero tolerance in opposite direction.
3470 3 2220 2850 3470–175 2220 + 175 460
3800 3 2320 3000 3600–180 2320 + 180 460
TABLE 8 Pipe-Arch Requirements— A
Negative and positive numbers listed with span and rise dimensions are
⁄ by 3⁄4by 71⁄2 in. and 3⁄4 by 1 by 111⁄2 in. Rib Corrugations
34
negative and positive tolerances, zero tolerance in opposite direction.
Pipe Arch Equiv. SpanA, RiseA, Min Corner
Size, in. Dia., in. in. in. Radius, in. TABLE 11 Pipe Arch Requirements—
20 3 16 18 20–1.0 16 + 1.0 5 [19 by 19 by 190 mm and 19 by 25 by 292 mm Rib Corrugations]
23 3 19 21 23–1.0 19 + 1.0 5
Pipe Arch Equiv. SpanA, RiseA, Min Corner
27 3 21 24 27–1.5 21 + 1.5 5
Size, mm Dia, mm mm mm Radius, mm
33 3 26 30 33–1.5 26 + 1.5 5
40 3 31 36 40–1.8 31 + 1.8 5 500 3 410 450 500–25 410 + 25 130
46 3 36 42 46–2.1 36 + 2.1 6 580 3 490 525 580–25 490 + 25 130
53 3 41 48 53–2.4 41 + 2.4 7 680 3 540 600 680–40 540 + 40 130
60 3 46 54 60–2.7 46 + 2.7 8 830 3 670 750 830–40 670 + 40 130
66 3 51 60 66–3.0 51 + 3.0 9 1010 3 790 900 1010–45 790 + 45 130
73 3 55 66 73–3.3 55 + 3.3 12 1160 3 920 1050 1160–55 920 + 55 155
81 3 59 72 81–3.6 59 + 3.6 14 1340 3 1050 1200 1340–60 1050 + 60 180
A 1520 3 1170 1350 1520–70 1170 + 70 205
Negative and positive numbers listed with span and rise dimensions are
1670 3 1300 1500 1670–75 1300 + 75 230
negative and positive tolerances, zero tolerance in opposite direction.
1850 3 1400 1650 1850–85 1400 + 85 305
2050 3 1500 1800 2050–95 1500 + 95 355
The perforations in Type IIIR pipe shall conform to the A
Negative and positive numbers listed with span and rise dimensions are
requirements for Class 4 as described in 8.3.2.3. Class 1 negative and positive tolerances, zero tolerance in opposite direction.
perforations are for pipe intended to be used for subsurface
drainage. Class 2 and Class 4 perforations are for pipe intended in. [9.5 mm]; and shall be arranged in rows parallel to the axis
to be used for subsurface disposal of water, but pipe containing of the pipe. The perforations shall be located on the inside
these classes of perforations may also be used for subsurface crests or along the neutral axis of the corrugations, with one
drainage. perforation in each row for each corrugation. Pipe connected
8.3.2.1 Class 1 Perforations—The perforations shall be by couplings or bands may be unperforated within 4 in. [100
approximately circular and cleanly cut; shall have nominal mm] of each end of each length of pipe. The rows of
diameters of not less than 3⁄16 in. [4.8 mm] nor greater than 3⁄8 perforations shall be arranged in two equal groups placed

6
 B 745/B 745M
symmetrically on either side of a lower unperforated segment TABLE 12 Rows of Perforations, Height H of the Centerline of
corresponding to the flow line of the pipe. The spacing of the the Uppermost Rows Above the Invert, and Chord Length L of
Unperforated Segment, for Class 1 Perforations
rows shall be uniform. The distance between the center lines of
rows shall be not less than 1 in. [25 mm]. The minimum Internal Dia of Pipe Rows of H, maxB L, minB
Perfor-
number of longitudinal rows of perforations, the maximum in. mm ationsA in. mm in. mm
heights of the centerlines of the uppermost rows above the 4 100 2 1.8 46 2.6 64
bottom of the invert, and the inside chord lengths of the 6 150 4 2.8 69 3.8 96
unperforated segments illustrated in Fig. 2 shall be as specified 8 200 4 3.7 92 5.1 128
10 250 4 4.6 115 6.4 160
in Table 12. 12 300 6 5.5 138 7.7 192
15 400 6 6.9 172 9.6 240
NOTE 7—Pipe with Class 1 perforations is generally available in 18 450 6 8.3 207 11.5 286
diameters from 4 to 21 in. [100 to 525 mm] inclusive, although perforated 21 500 6 9.7 241 13.4 336
pipe in larger sizes may be obtained. 24 and larger 600 and larger 8 C C C C

8.3.2.2 Class 2 Perforations—The perforations shall be
circular holes with nominal diameters of 5⁄16 to 3⁄8in. [8.0 to 9.5
mm], or slots with nominal width of 3⁄16 to 5⁄16in. [4.8 to 8.0
mm] and maximum length of 1⁄2in. [12.7 mm]. The perforations
shall be uniformly spaced around the full periphery of the pipe.
The perforations shall provide an opening area of not less than
3.3 sq in./sq ft [230 sq cm/sq m] of pipe surface based on
nominal diameter and length of pipe.
NOTE 8—Thirty perforations, 3⁄8in. diameter, per square foot [323
perforations, 9.5-mm diameter, per square meter] satisfies the inlet area
requirement for Class 2 perforations.
8.3.2.3 Class 4 Perforations—The perforations shall be
circular holes with nominal diameters of 5⁄16 to 3⁄8in. [8.0 to 9.5
mm], or slots with a nominal width of 3⁄16 to 5⁄1 6in. [4.8 to 8.0
mm] and a maximum length of 1⁄2 in. [12.7 mm]. All perfora-
tions shall occur in the flat sheet between spiral ribs or
lockseam with the center of any hole no closer than 3⁄4 in. [19.0
mm] from the outside edge of a rib. The perforations shall be
uniformly spaced around the full periphery of the pipe. The
perforations shall provide an opening area of not less than 2.0
sq in./sq ft [140 sq cm/sq m] of pipe surface based on the
FIG. 2 Circumferential Location of Class 1 Perforations
A
Minimum number of rows. A greater number of rows for increased inlet area
shall be subject to agreement between purchaser and fabricator. Note that the
number of perforations per foot [metre] in each row (and inlet area) is dependent
on the corrugation pitch.
B
See Fig. 2 for location of dimensions H and L.
C
H (max) = 0.46D; L (min) = 0.64D, where D = internal diameter of pipe, inches
or millimetres as appropriate.
nominal diameter and length of pipe.
NOTE 9—There is no provision for Class 3 perforations in this speci-
fication.
9. Coupling Bands
9.1 Types of Coupling Bands—Field joints for each type of
corrugated aluminum pipe shall maintain pipe alignment dur-
ing construction and prevent infiltration of fill material during
the life of the installation.
9.1.1 Coupling bands may be of the following types:
9.1.1.1 Bands with annular corrugations;
9.1.1.2 Bands with helical corrugations;
9.1.1.3 Bands with projections (dimples);
9.1.1.4 Channel bands for upturned flanges, with or without
annular corrugations;
9.1.1.5 Flat bands; and
9.1.1.6 Smooth sleeve-type couplers.
9.1.2 Except as provided in 9.1.3-9.1.6, the type of coupling
furnished shall be at the option of the fabricator unless the type
is specified in the order.
NOTE 10—Bands are classified according to their ability to resist shear,
moment, and tensile forces as described in Practice B 788/B 788M, and
identified as “standard joints” and “special joints”. The four types of bands
listed in 9.1.1.1-9.1.1.4, and meeting the requirements of 9.2, are expected
to meet the requirements for “standard joints”. Some may also be able to
meet the requirements for “special joints”, but such capability should be
determined by analysis or test.
9.1.3 Coupling bands with annular corrugations shall be
used only with pipe with annular corrugations, or helical pipe
in which the ends have been rerolled to form annular corruga-
tions. The corrugations in the band shall have the same
dimensions as the corrugations in the pipe end, or may be of a
special design to engage either the first or the second corruga-
tion from the end of each pipe. The band may also include a
U-shaped channel to accommodate upturned flanges on the
pipe.
9.1.4 Coupling bands with helical corrugations shall be used
only with pipe with helically corrugated ends. The corrugations
in the bands shall be designed to properly mesh with the
corrugations in the pipe.

7
 B 745/B 745M
9.1.5 Coupling bands with projections (dimples) may be TABLE 14 Coupling Band Width Requirements
used with pipe with either annular or helical corrugations. The Coupling Band Width, min
Nominal Nominal
bands shall be formed with the projections in annular rows with Corrugation Pipe Annular Helically Bands
one projection for each corrugation of helical pipe. Bands 101⁄2 SizeA Inside DiaB Corrugated Corrugated With
Bands Bands Projections
in. [265 mm] wide shall have two annular rows of projections,
and bands 161⁄4 and 26 in. [415 and 660 mm] wide shall have B 745 (in.)

four annular rows of projections. 11⁄2 by 1⁄4 4 to 10 101⁄2 7 101⁄2

9.1.6 Channel bands may be used only with pipe having 22⁄3 by 1⁄2 12 to 36 7 12 101⁄2
upturned flanges on the pipe ends. 42 to 72 101⁄2 12 101⁄2
78 to 120C 101⁄2 12 161⁄4
9.1.7 When specified by the purchaser, flat bands may be 3 by 1 30 to 72 12 14 101⁄2
used on pipe with helically corrugated ends, annular corrugated 78 to 120 12 14 161⁄4
pipe, or helical pipe on which the ends have been rerolled to 6 by 1 48 to 114 24 24 26

form annular corrugations. B 745M (mm)

9.1.8 Smooth sleeve-type couplers may be used with Type
III pipe of 12-in. [300-mm] diameter or smaller. 38 by 6.5 100 to 250 265 180 265
68 by 13 300 to 900 180 300 265
9.2 Requirements—Coupling bands shall be fabricated to 1050 to 1800 265 300 265
lap on an equal portion of each of the pipe sections to be 1950 to 3000C 265 300 415
75 by 25 750 to 1800 300 350 265
connected. The ends of the bands shall lap or be fabricated to 1950 to 3000 300 350 415
form a tightly closed joint upon installation. Coupling bands 150 by 25 1200 to 2650 600 600 660
shall conform to the requirements in Table 13 based on the A
For helically corrugated pipe with rerolled ends, the nominal corrugation size
sheet thickness of the pipe to be connected, except as provided refers to the dimensions of the end corrugations in the pipe.
B
in 9.2.1 and 9.2.2. The band width shall be not less than as Equivalent diameter of Type II, Type IIA, and Type IIR pipe.
C
Diameters through 120 in. [3000 mm] for annular corrugated bands used on
shown in Table 14. The bands shall be connected in a manner rerolled ends of helically corrugated pipe.
approved by the purchaser with suitable aluminum or galva-
nized steel devices such as: angles, or integrally or separately
[22-mm] diameter for larger pipe diameters, having 1⁄2 in. [13
formed and attached flanges, bolted with bolts as described in
mm] deep end corrugations. Rubber O-ring gaskets shall be
6.4; bars and straps; wedge lock and straps; or lugs. Coupling
13⁄8-in. [35-mm] diameter for pipe having 1 in. [25 mm] deep
bands shall be fastened with the following size of bolts: pipe
end corrugations.
diameters 18 in. [450 mm] and less—3⁄8-in. [Metric M10] dia.;
pipe diameters 21 in. [525 mm] and greater—1⁄2-in. [Metric NOTE 11—Riveted pipe is not water tight, having small openings at the
M12] dia. intersection of longitudinal and circumferential seams. Therefore this type
9.2.1 If flanges are provided on the pipe ends, the coupling of fabrication should not be used where water tightness is a concern unless
the pipe is bituminous coated or lined prior to installation.
may also be made by interlocking the flanges with a preformed
channel band or other band incorporating a locking channel not 9.4 Other types of coupling bands or fastening devices
less than 3⁄4 in. [19 mm] in width. The depth of the channel which are equally effective as those described, and which
shall be not less than 1⁄2 in. [13 mm]. The channel band shall comply with the joint performance criteria of Practice B 788/
have a minimum nominal thickness of 0.075 in. [1.91 mm]. B 788M, may be used when approved by the purchaser.
9.2.2 Smooth sleeve type couplings shall be aluminum sheet
having a nominal thickness of not less than 0.036 in. [0.91 10. Workmanship
mm], or as an option, may be a plastic sleeve to provide 10.1 The completed pipe shall show careful, finished work-
equivalent strength. The coupling shall be close-fitting, to hold manship in all particulars. Pipe which has been damaged, either
the pipe firmly in alignment without the use of sealing during fabrication or in shipping, may be rejected unless
compounds or gaskets. The coupling shall contain a device so repairs are made which are satisfactory to the purchaser.
that the coupling will lap equally on the two pipes being joined. Among others, the following defects shall be considered as
The overall length of the coupling shall be equal to or greater constituting poor workmanship:
than the nominal diameter of the pipe. 10.1.1 Variation from a straight centerline;
9.3 Gaskets—Where infiltration or exfiltration is a concern, 10.1.2 Elliptical shape in pipe intended to be round;
the couplings may be required to have gaskets. The closed-cell 10.1.3 Dents or bends in the metal;
expanded rubber gaskets shall be a continuous band, approxi- 10.1.4 Lack of rigidity;
mately 7 in. [180 mm] wide and approximately 3⁄8in. [9.5 mm] 10.1.5 Illegible markings on the aluminum sheet;
thick. Rubber O-ring gaskets shall be 13⁄16-in. [20-mm] diam- 10.1.6 Ragged or diagonal sheared edges;
eter for pipe diameters of 36 in. [900 mm] or smaller, and 7⁄8-in. 10.1.7 Uneven laps in riveted pipe;
10.1.8 Loose, unevenly lined, or unevenly spaced rivets;
TABLE 13 Coupling Band Thickness and
Nominal Pipe Thickness Nominal Coupling Band Thickness, min 10.1.9 Loosely formed lockseams.
in. mm in. mm
0.105 and thinner 2.67 and thinner 0.048 1.22 11. Inspection
0.135 3.43 0.060 1.52
0.164 4.17 0.075 1.91 11.1 When agreement is made as part of the purchase
contract, the purchaser or his representative shall have free

8
 B 745/B 745M
access to the fabricating plant for inspection, and every facility
shall be extended to him for this purpose. This inspection shall
include an examination of the pipe for the items in 10.1 and the
specific requirements of this specification applicable to the type
of pipe and method of fabrication.
11.2 On a random basis, samples may be taken for chemical
analysis and mechanical property determination for check
purposes. These samples will be secured from fabricated pipe
or from sheets or coils of the material used in fabrication of the
pipe. Testing shall be as described in Specification B 209 or
B 209M.
12. Rejection
12.1 Pipe failing to conform to the requirements of this
specification may be rejected. This requirement applies not
only to the individual pipe, but to any shipment as a whole
where a substantial number of pipe are defective. If the average
deficiency in length of any shipment of pipe is greater than
1 %, the shipment may be rejected.
13. Certification
13.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
manufacturer’s or fabricator’s certification, or both, shall be
furnished to the purchaser stating that samples representing
each lot have been tested and inspected in accordance with this
specification and have been found to meet the requirements for
the material described in the order. When specified in the order,
a report of the mechanical test results and chemical composi-
tion limits shall be furnished.
NOTE 12—As the identity of the sheet is not maintained from the
original ingot production, if numerical results are required by the
purchaser, tests should be performed on the finished sheet.
14. Product Marking
14.1 If the aluminum alloy sheet was not marked by the
manufacturer as indicated in Specification B 744/B 744M, it
shall be marked by the fabricator as described in 14.2, during
the course of corrugating the sheet and fabricating the pipe.
14.2 Each corrugated sheet used in annular corrugated pipe,
and each 2 to 5 ft [0.6 to 1.5 m] of coiled sheet used in helically
corrugated pipe, shall be identified by the fabricator showing
the following:
14.2.1 Name of sheet manufacturer,
14.2.2 Identification of the pipe fabricator, if different than
the sheet manufacturer,
14.2.3 Alloy and temper,
14.2.4 Specified thickness,
14.2.5 Fabricator’s date of corrugating or forming into pipe
by a six digit number indicating in order the year, month, and
day of the month, and
14.2.6 ASTM designation number.
14.3 The marking shall be applied to the sheet by a
permanent method such as coining in accordance with Practice
B 666/B 666M. This identification shall appear on the outside
of the pipe.
15. Keywords
15.1 aluminum culvert; aluminum storm drains; culvert
pipe; storm drain pipe

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

This section identifies the principal changes to this standard process in use to produce this product. Appropriate correspond-
that have been incorporated since the last issue. ing revisions to sectional properties are incorporated in B 790/
(1) Increase the maximum rib corner radius in Table 2 for both B 790M.
rib profiles to correspond with the manufacturing

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

9
 Designation: B 747 – 02

Standard Specification for

Copper-Zirconium Alloy Sheet and Strip1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 747; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope * 3.1.4 Number of Tests and Retests,

1.1 This specification establishes the requirements for sheet 3.1.5 Specimen Preparation,
and strip of Copper Alloy UNS C15100. 3.1.6 Significance of Numerical Limits,
1.2 Values stated in inch-pound units are the standard. SI 3.1.7 Inspection,
values given in parentheses are for information only. 3.1.8 Rejection and Rehearing,
3.1.9 Certification,
2. Referenced Documents 3.1.10 Test Reports,
2.1 ASTM Standards: 3.1.11 Packaging and Package Marking, and
B 193 Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor 3.1.12 Supplementary Requirements.
Materials2
4. Terminology
B 248 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought
Copper and Copper-Alloy Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled 4.1 For definition of terms related to copper and copper
Bar3 alloys, refer to Terminology B 846.
B 601 Practice for Temper Designations for Copper and 5. Ordering Information
Copper Alloys—Wrought and Cast3
B 846 Terminology for Copper and Copper Alloys3 5.1 Orders for product under this specification should in-
E 3 Guide for Preparation of Metallographic Specimens4 clude the following information:
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials4 5.1.1 ASTM designation number and year of issue,
E 53 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper5 5.1.2 Quantity (of each size),
E 62 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper and 5.1.3 Copper Alloy UNS No. (see 1.1),
Copper Alloys (Photometric Methods)5 5.1.4 Form of material (sheet or strip),
E 112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size4 5.1.5 Temper (see 8.1),
E 255 Practice for Sampling of Copper and Copper Alloys 5.1.6 Dimensions (thickness, width, length, if applicable),
for Determination of Chemical Composition5 5.1.7 How furnished (rolls, specific lengths with or without
E 478 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper ends, stock lengths with or without ends),
Alloys5 5.1.8 Type of edge, if required (slit, sheared, sawed, square
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)6 corners, rounded corners, rounded edges, or full-rounded
edges),
3. General Requirements 5.1.9 Type of width and straightness tolerances, if required
3.1 The following sections of Specification B 248 constitute (slit metal tolerances, square sheared metal tolerances, sawed
a part of this specification: metal tolerances, straightened or edge-rolled metal tolerances),
3.1.1 Terminology, and
3.1.2 Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance, 5.2 In addition, when material is purchased for the U.S.
3.1.3 Sampling, Government, it shall conform to the Supplemental require-
ments as defined in Specification B 248 when specified in the
contract or purchase order.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper 6. Material and Manufacture
and Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.01 on Plate,
Sheet, and Strip. 6.1 Material:
Current edition approved April 10, 2002. Published June 2002. Originally 6.1.1 The material of manufacture shall be a cast bar, slab,
published as B 747 – 85. Last previous edition B 747 – 96.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03.
cake, billet, etc. of Copper Alloy UNS No. C15100 of such
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01. purity and soundness as to be suitable for processing in to the
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01. products prescribed herein.
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05. 6.1.2 In the event heat identification or traceability is
6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 747
required, the purchaser shall specify the details desired. TABLE 2 Tensile Strength and Grain Size Requirements
Temper DesignationA Tensile Strength, ksiB (MPa)C Grain Size,
NOTE 1—Due to the discontinuous nature of the processing of castings mmD
into wrought products, it is not always practical to identify a specific Standard Former Min Max
casting analysis with a specific quantity of finished material. OS015 annealed ... ... 0.030 max
H01 quarter hard 40 (275) 45 (310) ...
6.2 Manufacture: H02 half hard 43 (295) 51 (350) ...
6.2.1 The product shall be manufactured by such hotwork- H03 three-quarter 47 (325) 56 (385) ...
ing, cold-working, and annealing processes as to produce a hard
H04 hard 53 (365) 62 (430) ...
uniform wrought structure in the finished product. H06 extra hard 59 (405) 65 (450) ...
6.2.2 The product shall be hot- or cold-worked to the H08 spring 64 (445) 71 (490) ...
finished size and subsequently annealed, when required, to A
Standard designations defined in Practice B 601.
B
meet the temper properties specified. C
ksi = 1000 psi.
See Appendix X1.
6.3 Edges: D
Although no minimum grain size is required, this material must be fully
6.3.1 Slit edges shall be furnished unless otherwise speci- recrystallized.
fied in the contract or purchase order.
TABLE 3 Electrical Resistivity
7. Chemical Composition
Equivalent
Electrical Resistivity
7.1 The product shall conform to the chemical composition Temper at 20°C (68°F),
Conductivity at 20°C
prescribed in Table 1. (68°F),
max, V·g/m2
% IACS, min
7.2 These composition limits do not preclude the presence Annealed (OS015) 0.16136 95
of other elements. Limits may be established and analysis Rolled (H01, H02, 0.17031 90
required for unnamed elements by agreement between the H03, H04, H06,
H08)
manufacturer or supplier and the purchaser.
7.3 When all elements listed in Table 1 are analyzed, the
sum of results shall be 99.9 % minimum. 12.1.1 Thickness.
12.1.2 Width—Slit metal and slit metal with rolled edges.
8. Temper 12.1.3 Square Sheared Metal; Sawed Metal.
8.1 The tempers, as defined in Practice B 601, available 12.1.4 Length:
under this specification are as designated in Table 2. 12.1.4.1 Length Tolerances for Specific and Stock Lengths
With and Without Ends.
9. Grain Size for Annealed Temper 12.1.4.2 Schedule of Lengths (Specific and Stock) With
9.1 Grain size for OS015 temper product shall be as given in Ends.
Table 2 when tested in accordance with Test Methods E 112. 12.1.4.3 Length Tolerances for Square Sheared Metal.
12.1.4.4 Length Tolerances for Sawed Metal.
10. Physical Property Requirements 12.1.5 Straightness:
10.1 Electrical Resistivity Requirements: 12.1.5.1 Slit Metal or Slit Metal Either Straightness or Edge
10.1.1 The product shall conform to the requirements of Rolled.
Table 3 by temper when tested in accordance with Test Method 12.1.5.2 Square Sheared Metal.
B 193. 12.1.5.3 Sawed Metal.
12.1.6 Edges:
11. Mechanical Property Requirements 12.1.6.1 Square Edges.
11.1 Tensile Strength Requirements: 12.1.6.2 Rounded Corners.
11.1.1 Tempers H01, H02, H03, H04, H06, and H08 shall 12.1.6.3 Rounded Edges.
conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 2 when tested 12.1.6.4 Full Rounded Edges.
in accordance with Test Methods E 8. Tensile strength shall be
13. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
the basis for acceptance or rejection of product in these
tempers. 13.1 The material shall be free of defects, but blemishes of
a nature that do not interfere with normal commercial opera-
12. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations tions are acceptable. It shall be well-cleaned and free of dirt. A
12.1 The following titled sections and tables in Specifica- superficial film or residual light lubricant is normally present
tion B 248 are a part of this specification: and is acceptable unless otherwise specified.
13.2 The surface finish and appearance shall be the normal
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
commercial quality for the alloy, thickness, and temper or-
dered. When application information is provided with purchase
Composition, %
Element
order, the surface shall be that commercially producible for the
Copper Alloy
UNS No. C15100
application. Superficial films of discoloration, or lubricants, or
tarnish inhibitors are permissible unless otherwise specified.
Copper (including Ag) 99.8 % min
Zirconium 0.05–0.15 14. Sampling
Cu + sum of named elements 99.9 % min
14.1 Sampling—The lot size, portion size, and selection of

2
 B 747
sample pieces shall be as follows:
14.1.1 Lot Size—40 000 lb (18 144 kg) or less material of
the same mill form, temper, and thickness, subject to inspection
at one time.
14.1.2 Portion Size—Sample pieces shall be selected from
eight individual pieces, and shall be taken so as to be
representative of those pieces. If the lot consists of less than
eight pieces, a sample shall be taken from each individual
piece.
14.2 Chenical Analysis:
14.2.1 The sample for chemical analysis shall be taken in
accordance with Practice E 255 for product in its final form
taken from the pieces selected in 14.1.2 and combined into one
composite sample. The minimum weight of the composite
sample shall be 150 g.
14.2.2 Instead of sampling as directed in 14.2.1, the manu-
facturer shall have the option of sampling at the time the
castings are poured or samples taken from the semifinished
product. If the manufacturer determines the chemical compo-
sition of the material during the course of manufacture, he shall
not be required to sample and analyze the finished product.
14.2.2.1 When samples are taken at the time the castings are
poured, at least one sample shall be taken from each group of
castings poured from the same source of molten metal.
14.2.2.2 When samples are taken from semifinished prod-
uct, a sample shall be taken to represent each 10 000 lbs (5 000
kg) or fraction thereof, except that no more than one sample
shall be required per piece.
14.2.2.3 Only one sample need be taken from the semifin-
ished product of one cast bar from a single melt charge
continuously processed.
14.3 Samples for all Other Tests—Samples for all other tests
shall be taken from the sample portions selected in 14.1.2 and
be of an convenient size to accomodated the test and comply
with the requirements of the appropriate product specificatiion
and test method.
from samples selected in accordance with 14.1.2 fails to
conform to the specified limits, analysis shall be made on a
new composite sample prepared from the pieces selected in
accordance with 14.1.2.
15.4.2 If one of the two tests made to determine any of the
mechanical or grain size requirementss fails to meet a specified
limit, this test shall be repeated on the remaining pieces,
maximum of two, selected in accordance with 14.1.2, and the
results of both of these tests shall comply with the specified
requirements.
15.4.3 If any test specimen shows defective machining or
develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
15.5 Chemical Analysis, shall be determined as the average
of at least two replicate determinations for each element
specified.
16. Specimen Preparation
16.1 In the grain size test, all specimens shall be prepared as
specified in Method E 3.
16.2 In the tension test, all strip less than 3⁄4 in. wide shall be
pulled in full size when practicable. Machined test specimens
shall be as specified in Test Method E 8, Fig. 1 for sheet type
specimens.
16.3 Chemical Composition—The composite sample for
laboratory analysis shall, in case of disagreement, be prepared
in accordance with Practice E 255.
17. Test Methods
17.1 The properties and chemical compositions enumerated
in the specifications shall, in case of disagreement, be deter-
mined in accordance with the following ASTM test methods:
Test ASTM Designation
Chemical Analysis E 53, E 62, E 478
Tension E8
Grain E 112
Electrical Resistivity B 193

15. Number of Tests and Retests 18. Significance of Numerical Limits

15.1 Tests
15.1.1 Chemical Requirements:
15.1.2 When samples are taken at the time the castings are
poured, at least one sample shall be analyzed for each group of
castings poured simultaneously from the same source of
molten metal.
15.1.3 When samples are taken from the semifinished or
18.1 For purposes of determining compliance with the
specified property limits for the properties listed in the follow-
ing table, an observed value of a calculated value shall be
rounded as indicated in accordance with the rounding method
of Practice E 29:
Property Rounded Unit for Observed
or Calculated Value

finished product, at least one sample representative of the Chemical composition nearest unit in the last right-hand place
product of each cast bar from a single melt charge continuously Hardness of figures of the specified limits.
processed with heat identity maintained shall be analyzed. Tensile strength nearest ksi (nearest 5 MPa)
Grain size:
15.2 Mechanical Properties and Grain Size—Unless other- Up to 0.055 mm, incl nearest multiple of 0.005 mm
wise provided in the product specification, test specimens shall Over 0.055 to 0.160 mm, incl nearest 0.01 mm
be taken from two of the sample pieces selected in accordance Elongation:
5 % and over nearest 1 %
with 14.1.2. The required tests shall be made on each of the
specimens so selected. 19. Inspection
15.3 Other Tests—For other tests, test specimens shall be 19.1 The manufacture shall inspect and make the test
taken from four of the sample pieces selected in accordance necessary to verify that the product furnished conforms to the
with 14.1.2. The required tests shall be made on each of the requirements of this specification.
specimens so selected. 19.2 If, in addition, source inspection of the material by the
15.4 Retests: purchaser is agreed upon by the manufacturer and the pur-
15.4.1 If the chemical analysis of the specimens prepared chaser as part of the purchase contract, the nature of the

3
 B 747
facilities needed to satisfy the inspector representing the
purchaser that the product is being furnished in accordance
with this specification shall be included in the agreement. All
tests and the inspection shall be conducted so as not to interfere
unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
19.3 The manufacturer and the purchaser, by mutual agree-
ment, may accomplish the final inspection simultaneously.
20. Rejection and Rehearing
20.1 Rejection:
20.1.1 Product that fails to conform to the specified require-
ments when inspected or tested by the purchaser or his agent
may be rejected.
20.1.2 Rejection should be reported to the manufacturer or
supplier promptly and in writing.
20.1.3 In case of dissatisfaction with the results of the test,
the manufacturer or supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
20.2 Rehearing—A a result of product rejection, the manu-
facturer or supplier may make a claim for a retest to be
conducted by the manufacturer or supplier and the purchaser.
Samples of the rejected product shall be taken in accordance
with this product specification and subjected to test by both
parties using the test methods (s) specified in this product
specification, or alternatively, upon agreement of both parties,
an independent laboratory may be selected for the test(s) using
the test methods(s) specified in this product specification.
21. Certification
21.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, the
purchaser shall be furnished certifications that samples repre-
sentimg each lot have been tested or inspected as directed in
this specification and the requirements have been met.
22. Test Report
22.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
report of the test results shall be furnished.
23. Packing, Marking, Shipping, and Preservation
23.1 Packaging—The product shall be separated by size,
composition, and temper, and prepared for shipment in such a
manner as to ensure acceptance by common carrier for
transportation and to afford protection from the normal hazads
of transportation.
24. Keywords
24.1 copper-zirconium; sheet and strip

SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS

An extensive five-year review was conducted. Most sections were revised in order to conform to
Society requirements and to improve clarity of product requirements.

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. METRIC EQUIVALENTS

X1.1 The SI unit for strength properties now shown is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI). The
derived SI unit for force is the newton (N), which is defined as
that force which when applied to a body having a mass of one
kilogram gives it an acceleration of one metre per second
squared (N = kg m/s2). The derived SI unit for pressure or
stress is the newton per square metre (N/m2), which has been
named the pascal (Pa) by the General Conference on Weights
and Measures. Since 1 ksi = 6 894 757 Pa the metric equiva-
lents are expressed as megapascal (MPa), which is the same as
MN/m2 and N/mm2.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B05 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (B 747 – 96)
that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) Added many sections to this specification to meet current (2) Table 1 was changed to match CDA chemical composition.
outline of form.

4
 B 747
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 748 – 90 (Reapproved 2001)
Standard Test Method for
Measurement of Thickness of Metallic Coatings by
Measurement of Cross Section with a Scanning Electron
Microscope1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 748; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers the measurement of metallic
coating thicknesses by examination of a cross section with a
scanning electron microsope (SEM).
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
E 3 Guide for Preparation of Metallographic Specimens2
E 766 Practice for Calibrating the Magnification of a Scan-
ning Electron Microscope2
3. Summary of Test Method
3.1 A test specimen is cut, ground, and polished for metal-
lographic examination by an SEM of a cross section of the
coating. The measurement is made on a conventional micro-
graph or on a photograph of the video waveform signal for a
single scan across the coating.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 This test method is useful for the direct measurement of
the thicknesses of metallic coatings and of individual layers of
composite coatings, particularly for layers thinner than nor-
mally measured with the light microscope.
4.2 This test method is suitable for acceptance testing.
4.3 This test method is for the measurement of the thickness
of the coating over a very small area and not of the average or
minimum thickness per se.
4.4 Accurate measurements by this test method generally
require very careful sample preparation, especially at the
greater magnifications.
4.5 The coating thickness is an important factor in the
performance of a coating in service.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on Metallic
and Inorganic Coatings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B08.10 on
Test Methods.
Current edition approved Feb. 23, 1990. Published April 1990. Originally
published as B 748 – 85. Last previous edition B 748 – 85.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
5. Equipment
5.1 The scanning electron microscope shall have a resolu-
tion of at least 50 nm. Suitable instruments are available
commercially.
6. Factors Affecting the Measurement Reliability
6.1 Surface Roughness—If the coating or its substrate is
rough relative to the coating thickness, one or both of the
interfaces bounding the coating cross section may be too
irregular to permit accurate measurement of the average
thickness in the field of view.
6.2 Taper of Cross Section—If the plane of the cross section
is not perpendicular to the plane of the coating, the measured
thickness will be greater than the true thickness. For example,
an inclination of 10° to the perpendicular will contribute a
1.5 % error. True thickness, (t), equals measured thickness,
(tm), multiplied by the cosine of the angle of inclination (u):
t = t m 3 cos(u). (See X1.3.2.)
6.3 Specimen Tilt—Any tilt of the specimen (plane of the
cross section) with respect to the SEM beam, may result in an
erroneous measurement. The instrument should always be set
for zero tilt.
6.4 Oblique Measurement—If the thickness measurement is
not perpendicular to the plane of the coating, even when there
is no taper (6.2) or tilt (6.3), the measured value will be greater
than the true thickness. This consideration applies to the
conventional micrograph (9.3.1) and to the directon of the
single video waveform scans (9.3.2).
6.5 Deformation of Coating—Detrimental deformation of
the coating can be caused by excessive temperature or pressure
during the mounting and preparation of cross sections of soft
coatings.
6.6 Rounding of Edge of Coating—If the edge of the coating
cross section is rounded, that is, if the coating cross section is
not completely flat up to its edges, the observed thickness may
differ from the true thickness. Edge rounding can be caused by
improper mounting, grinding, polishing, or etching.
6.7 Overplating of Specimen—Overplating of the test speci-
men serves to protect the coating edges during preparation of
cross sections and thus to prevent an erroneous measurement.
Removal of coating material during surface preparation for
overplating can cause a low thickness measurement.
 B 748
6.8 Etching—Optimum etching will produce a clearly de-
fined and narrow dark line at the interface of two metals. A
wide or poorly defined line can result in an inaccurate
measurement.
6.9 Smearing—Polishing may leave smeared metal that
obscures the true boundary between the two metals and results
in an inaccurate measurement. This may occur with soft metals
like lead, indium, and gold. To help identify whether or not
there is smearing, repeat the polishing, etching, and measure-
ment several times. Any significant variations in readings
indicates possible smearing.
6.10 Poor Contrast—The visual contrast between metals in
the SEM is poor when their atomic numbers are close together.
For example, bright and semibright nickel layers may not be
discriminable unless their common boundary can be brought
out sufficiently by appropriate etching and SEM techniques.
For some metal combinations, energy dispersive X-ray tech-
niques (see X1.4.5) or backscatter image techniques (see
X1.4.6) may be helpful.
6.11 Magnification:
6.11.1 For any given coating thickness, measurement errors
tend to increase with decreasing magnification. If practical, the
magnification should be chosen so that the field of view is
between 1.5 and 33 the coating thickness.
6.11.2 The magnification readout of an SEM is often poorer
than the 5 % accuracy often quoted and the magnification has
been found for some instruments to vary by 25 % across the
field. Magnification errors are minimized by appropriate use of
an SEM stage micrometer and appropriate experimental pro-
cedure. (See Practice E 766.)
6.12 Uniformity of Magnification—Because the magnifica-
tion may not be uniform over the entire field, errors can occur
if both the calibration and the measurement are not made over
the same portion of the field. This can be very important.
6.13 Stability of Magnification:
6.13.1 The magnification of an SEM often changes or drifts
with time. This effect is minimized by mounting the stage
micrometer and test specimen side by side on the SEM stage so
as to keep the transfer time short.
6.13.2 A change in magnification can occur when adjust-
ments are made with the focusing and other electronic SEM
controls. Such a change is prevented by not using the electronic
focus controls or other electronic SEM controls after photo-
graphing the stage micrometer scale except to focus with the
mechanical X, Y, and Z controls. Appropriate manipulation of
the X, Y, and Z controls will bring the specimen surface to the
focal point of the SEM beam.
6.14 Stability of Micrographs—Dimensional changes of
micrographs can take place with time and with temperature and
humidity changes. If the calibration micrograph of the stage
micrometer scale and the micrograph of the test specimen are
kept together and time is allowed for stabilization of the
photographic paper, errors from this source will be minimized.
7. Preparations of Cross Sections
7.1 Prepare, mount, grind, polish, and etch the test specimen
so that the following occurs:
7.1.1 The cross section is perpendicular to the plane of the
coating,
2
7.1.2 The surface is flat and the entire width of the coating
image is simultaneously in focus at the magnification to be
used for the measurement,
7.1.3 All material deformed by cutting or cross sectioning is
removed,
7.1.4 The boundaries of the coating cross section are sharply
defined by contrasting appearance, or by a narrow, well-defined
line, and
7.1.5 If the video waveform signal is to be measured, the
signal trace is flat except across the two boundaries of the
coating.
7.2 For further guidance see Appendix X1.
8. Calibration of Magnification
8.1 Calibrate the SEM with an SEM stage micrometer and
determine the magnification factor, M, in accordance with
Practice E 766 (see X1.4.2). Other calibration methods may be
used if it can be demonstrated that they are sufficiently accurate
for meeting the requirement of Section 12.
8.2 If practical, the stage micrometer and the test specimen
shall be mounted side by side on the SEM stage.
9. Procedure
9.1 Operate the SEM in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
9.2 Take into account the factors listed in Sections 6 and 12.
9.3 Make a micrograph of the test specimen under the same
conditions and instrument settings as used for the calibration
and make an appropriate measurement of the micrograph
image. Carry out this step in accordance with 9.3.1 or 9.3.2.
9.3.1 Conventional Micrograph:
9.3.1.1 With the boundaries of the coating clearly and
sharply defined, make conventional micrographs of the SEM
stage micrometer scale and of the test specimen.
9.3.1.2 Measure the micrographs to at least the nearest 0.1
mm using a diffraction plate reader or equivalent device. If this
is not practical, it may be because poor sample preparation is
causing the boundaries of the coating to be poorly defined.
9.3.2 Video Waveform Signal:
9.3.2.1 Photograph the video waveform signal for a single
scan across the coating cross section and across the SEM stage
micrometer scale.
9.3.2.2 To measure the coating, measure the horizontal
distance between the inflection points of the vertical portions of
the scan at the boundaries of the coating. Make the measure-
ments to the nearest 0.1 mm using a diffraction plate reader or
equivalent device.
9.3.3 For further guidance see Appendix X1.
10. Calculation and Expression of Results
10.1 Calculate the thickness according to the expression:
T 5 1000 3 d/M (1)
where:
T = coating thickness, in µm,
d = linear distance on micrograph, in mm, and
M = magnification factor as defined in Practice E 766.
 B 748
11. Report
11.1 The report of the measurements shall give the follow-
ing information:
11.1.1 Date measurements were made,
11.1.2 The title, number, and year of issue of this test
method,
11.1.3 Identification of the test specimen(s),
11.1.4 Location of measurement on test specimen(s),
11.1.5 The measured values and their arithmetic mean,
11.1.6 The calibrated magnification as measured with an
SEM micrometer scale immediately before the test specimen
measurements,
11.1.7 Type of measurement: conventional micrograph or
video waveform signal,
11.1.8 Any unusual feature of the measurement that might
affect the results, and
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. TECHNIQUES OF SPECIMEN PREPARATION AND USE OF THE SEM
X1.1 Introduction
X1.1.1 The preparation of specimens and measurement of
coating thickness are greatly dependent on individual tech-
niques and there is a variety of suitable techniques available.
(See Guide E 3.) It is not reasonable to specify only one set of
techniques, and it is impractical to include all suitable tech-
niques. The techniques described in this appendix are intended
as guidance.
X1.2 Mounting
X1.2.1 To prevent rounding of the edge of the coating cross
section, the free surface of the coating should be supported so
that there is no space between the coating and its support. This
is usually achieved by overplating the coating with a coating at
least 10 µm thick of a metal of similar hardness to the coating.
The overplate should also give an electron signal intensity
different from that of the coating. The mounting material or
sample surface must be electrically conducting and grounded
to prevent a surface charge buildup in the SEM.
X1.3 Grinding and Polishing
X1.3.1 It is essential to keep the cross section surface of the
mount perpendicular to the coating. This is facilitated by
incorporating additional pieces of a similar metal in the plastic
mounting, near the outer edges, by periodically changing the
direction of grinding (rotating through 90° and by keeping the
grind time and pressure to a minimum). If, before grinding,
reference marks are inscribed on the sides of the mount, any
inclination from horizontal is easily measurable. Grind the
mounted specimens on suitable abrasive paper, using an
acceptable lubricant, such as water, and apply minimum
pressure to avoid bevelling the surface. Initial grinding should
employ 100 or 180 grade abrasive to reveal the true specimen
profile and to remove any deformed metal. Subsequently, use
3
11.1.9 Name of individual responsible for the measure-
ments.
12. Precision and Bias
12.1 The instrument, its operation, and its calibration shall
be such that the uncertainty of the measurements shall be less
than 0.1 µm or 10 %, whichever is larger.
12.2 For a thin gold coating, one laboratory reported mea-
surement uncertainty of 0.039 µm for the SEM stage microme-
ter scale, 0.02 µm for the measurement of the calibration
micrographs, and 0.02 µm for measurement of the video
waveform signal scan. Based on practical experience, a repeat-
ability of 0.1 µm or better may be assumed.
Grades 240, 320, 500, and 600 without exceeding grinding
times of 30 to 40 s on each paper; alter the direction of
scratches by 90° for each change of paper. Then polish
successively with 6 to 9, 1, and 0.5-µm diamond on microcloth.
Some metallographers prefer the use of 0.3- and 0.05-µm
alumina.
X1.3.2 A convenient way to check for tapering of the cross
section is to mount a small diameter rod or wire with the
specimen so that the perpendicular cross section of the rod is
parallel to that of the coating. If a taper is present, the cross
section of the rod will be elliptical.
X1.3.3 If the video waveform signal scan technique is used,
it is important that scratches be completely removed and that
overpolishing does not selectively remove one of the metals
more than the other so that the signal scan is distorted. With
careful polishing, it is often unnecessary to use chemical
etches.
X1.4 Use of SEM
X1.4.1 If the image of the cross section, as revealed in a
conventional micrograph, is measured; and if the boundaries of
the coating cross section are revealed solely by the photo-
graphed contrast between the two materials; the apparent width
of the coating cross section can vary, depending on the contrast
and brightness settings. The variation can be as great as 10 %
without any change in instrument magnification. To minimize
the resulting uncertainty, adjust the contrast and brightness so
that the image contains surface detail of the materials on either
side of each boundary.
X1.4.2 Because the magnification of an SEM can change
spontaneously with time and can change as a result of changing
other instrument settings, it is advisable to calibrate the
instrument immediately before or after measurement of the test
 B 748
specimen. For critical measurements, the average of measure-
ments made before and after measurement of the test specimen
should be used. This assures that no change in the magnifica-
tion occurred and it provides information about the precision of
the calibration.
X1.4.3 If the video waveform trace is measured, the mea-
surement is made of the horizontal distance between the
inflection points at the boundaries. The inflection point is half
way between the horizontal traces of the two materials.
X1.4.4 For a video-waveform trace, select a portion of the
polished specimen that yields a flat, smooth signal.
X1.4.5 Many SEMs are equipped with energy dispersive
X-ray spectroscopy (EDS) which can be helpful in identi-fying
the metal-coating layers. At best the resolution of EDS is about
1 µm and often it is poorer.
X1.4.6 The use of backscatter images instead of secondary
electron images can also be helpful in distinguishing metal
layers with atomic numbers as close together as 1.0 and with a
resolution of 0.1 µm.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 749 – 03
Standard Specification for
Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 749; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers lead sheet, strip, and plate of
various alloys intended for use in chemical plants, sound
attenuation, roofing, vibration dampening, flashing and
weather stripping, waterproofing, and radiation shielding.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 29 Specification for Refined Lead2
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3
E 10 Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materi-
als3
E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials3
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications4
E 37 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Pig Lead5
E 87 Methods for Chemical Analysis of Lead, Tin, Anti-
mony, and Their Alloys (Photometric Methods)6
E 112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size3
3. Terminology Definitions
3.1 lot—shall consist of all the lead sheet, strip, or plate of
the same alloy produced by one manufacturer and offered for
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.02 on Refined Lead, Tin Antimony, and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved, June 10, 2003. Published July 2003. Originally
approved in 1985. Last previous edition approved in 1997 as B 749 - 97.
2
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
6
Discontinued—see 1984 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
delivery at one time for sampling and inspection from one
manufacturing or smelting heat.
3.2 plate—any product over 0.187 in. (4.75 mm) in thick-
ness and over 10 in. (254 mm) in width.
3.3 sheet—products 0.187 in. (4.75 mm) and under in
thickness and 24 in. (610 mm) or more in width.
3.4 strip—any product 0.187 in. (4.75 mm) and under in
thickness and less than 24 in. (610 mm) in width.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material to this specification shall include the
following information:
4.1.1 Alloy (chemical composition) with variations speci-
fied.
4.1.2 Type (strip, sheet, or plate).
4.1.3 Condition including mechanical properties where ap-
plicable.
4.1.4 Dimensions.
4.1.5 Number of Pieces.
4.1.6 Certification—State if certification is required.
4.1.7 Sampling—Type of sampling required and whether
samples product (check) analysis shall be furnished.
4.1.8 Inspection Requirements—If purchaser wishes to wit-
ness tests or inspection of material at the place of manufacture,
the purchase order must so state indicating which tests or
inspections are to be witnessed.
4.1.9 Optional Requirements:
4.1.9.1 Strip and Sheet—Whether to be furnished in coils or
in cut straight lengths.
4.1.9.2 Sheet and Plate—Whether to be furnished in spe-
cially flattened condition.
4.1.9.3 Wrought Products—Minimum reduction required.
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 The lead sheet, strip, or plate shall be manufactured by
rolling or extruding the product from a lead work piece of
chemical composition specified in Table 1 or other specified
composition. The work piece may be prepared by conventional
casting into a mold or by continuous casting. Lead sheet or
strip may also be produced by direct continuous casting to the
desired thickness.
 B 749 – 03
TABLE 1 Chemical RequirementsA,B TABLE 2 Permissible Thickness Variation
Composition (Weight Percent) NOTE 1—For ordering information, lead 1 in. thick weighs approxi-
Low Bismuth mately 60 lb/ft 2.
Low Silver Refined Pure Pure Lead, Chemical-Copper
Grade Maximum
Pure Lead, Lead, maxD max LeadE
Specified Maximum Maximum Over Alternate,
maxC
Thickness, in. Under, in. Over, in. in. (see section 8.13
Sb 0.0005 0.0005 0.001 0.001 max 8.1.3
As 0.0005 0.0005 0.001 0.001 max
0.015–0.100 0.005 0.005
Sn 0.0005 0.0005 0.001 0.001 max
0.101–0.130 0.006 0.006 0.031
Sb As and Sn ... ... 0.002 0.002 max
0.131–0.150 0.007 0.007 0.031
Cu 0.0010 0.0010 0.0015 0.040–0.080
0.151–0.170 0.008 0.008 0.031
Ag 0.0010 0.0075 0.010 0.020 max
0.171–0.190 0.009 0.009 0.031
Bi 0.0015 0.025 0.05 0.025 max
0.191–0.210 0.010 0.010 0.031
Zn 0.0005 0.001 0.001 0.001 max
0.211–0.230 0.011 0.011 0.031
Te 0.0001 0.0001 ... ...
0.231–0.250 0.012 0.012 0.031
Ni 0.0002 0.0002 0.0005 0.002 max
0.251–0.270 0.013 0.013 0.031
Fe 0.0002 0.001 0.001 0.002 max
0.271–0.290 0.014 0.014 0.031
Lead (min) by 99.995 99.97 99.94 99.90
0.291–0.310 0.015 0.015 0.031
difference
0.311–0.400 0.016 0.020 0.031
UNS Number L50006 L50021 L50049 L51121
0.401–0.500 0.016 0.025 0.031
A
The following applies to all specified limits in Table 1: For the purpose of 0.501–0.600 0.016 0.030 0.031
determining conformance with this specification, an observed value obtained from 0.601–0.630 0.016 0.031 0.031
the analysis shall be rounded off “to the nearest unit” in the last right hand place Above–0.630 0.016 0.031 0.031
of figures used in expressing the limiting value, in accordance with the rounding
method of Practice E 29.
B
By agreement between the purchaser and the supplier, analyses may be
required and limits established for elements or compounds not specified in Table
1. 8.1.3 Alternative Thickness—When specified, lead plate, as
C
This grade is intended for chemical applications where low silver and low
bismuth contents are required. well as strip sheet over 0.100 in. (2.54 mm) shall not vary in
D
E
This grade is intended for lead acid battery applications. thickness by more than + 0.031 in. (0.79 mm) and − 0 in. (0
This grade is intended for applications requiring corrosion protection and
formability.
mm).
8.1.4 Where specified and agreed to between manufacturer
and purchaser, thickness variation looser or tighter than listed
6. Chemical Composition above may be applied.
6.1 Lead sheet, strip, and plate shall conform to the chemi- 8.2 Width and Length:
cal composition limits specified in the purchase order. The 8.2.1 Rolls—lead sheet or strip in rolls shall not vary from
appropriate ASTM or UNS alloy may be designated where the ordered width by more than + 0.250 in. (6.35 mm)
applicable. Table 1 lists the chemical requirements of several or − 0.250 in. (6.35 mm) and for length of 25 ft (8 m) or less
grades of lead for information purposes. shall be within 0.2 % of the ordered length. For length greater
NOTE 1—Soft lead sheet, strip, and plate is generally produced from
than 25 ft (8 m), the length tolerance shall be negotiated
Specification B 29 grade copper-bearing lead. between the producer and the buyer.
8.2.2 Cut Pieces—Lead sheet, strip, or plate in flat cut
6.2 If a product (check) analysis is performed by the
pieces shall not vary from the ordered length or width by more
purchaser, the material shall conform to the product analysis
than 6 0.125 in. (3.18 mm).
variation in chemical composition specified in the purchase
agreement or in the applicable alloy specification. 8.2.3 Slit Strip—Slit strip in coils shall not vary from the
ordered width by more than 0.062 in. (1.59 mm).
7. Mechanical Properties 8.3 Straightness:
7.1 The material shall conform to the mechanical properties 8.3.1 The edgewise curvature (depth of curvature) of flat
specified in the purchase order by way of testing (see Section strip, sheet, or plate shall not exceed 0.05 in. multiplied by the
12). length in feet of the piece (0.04 mm multiplied by the length in
centimeters).
8. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations 8.3.2 Straightness of coiled strip material is subject to
8.1 Thickness: agreement between manufacturer and purchaser.
8.1.1 Sheet and Strip—For sheet and strip up to 0.100 in. 8.4 Squareness—For products of all thickness, the angle
(2.54 mm), the variation in thickness shall not be more between adjacent sides shall be 90 6 15° (1⁄16 in. in 24 in.),
than + 0.008 in. (0.200 mm) or − 0.006 in. (0.130 mm) or any (1.59 mm in 610 mm). Alternatively, for cut length 10 ft (3 m)
combination but not less than a range of 0.014 in. (0.330 mm) and less, the length of the diagonals from end to end shall be
from the ordered thickness. For sheet and strip ordered in within 0.25 in. (6.2 mm) of each other.
thickness over 0.100 in., the maximum variation shall not be 8.5 Flatness—Flatness of the product sheet when specified
more than 65 % of the thickness specified as shown in Table shall be as agreed upon between manufacturer and purchaser.
2. 8.6 Any special tolerance other than those specified in the
8.1.2 Plate—The plate shall not vary more than 65 % of above sections shall be agreed upon between manufacturer and
the specified thickness as shown in Table 2. purchaser.

2
 B 749 – 03
9. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
9.1 The lead products shall be uniform in quality and
hardness, smooth, commercially straight and flat, and free of
injurious imperfections such as pits, dents, scratches, lamina-
tions, grit, foreign matter, porosity, or waves that may affect the
serviceability of material.
10. Sampling
10.1 A lot shall not exceed 10 000 lb (4540 kg). A lot for
alloys requiring mechanical testing shall be further limited to
the sheet having the same total material reduction and heat
treatment (as required) cycles from the same manufacturing or
smelting heat.
10.1.1 Identification—All material shall be identified by lot
number. Where material cannot be identified by heat, a lot shall
consist of not more than 1000 lb (454 kg) in the same thickness
and condition, except for plates weighing over 1000 lb, in
which case the one piece shall constitute the lot.
10.2 Test Material Selection:
10.2.1 Chemical Analysis—Representative samples shall be
taken either during pouring the casting prior to working or
during subsequent processing, such as rolling or cutting.
10.2.1.1 Where required, a product (check) sample shall be
taken and supplied to the purchaser. The analysis of the product
sample is the responsibility of the purchaser.
10.2.2 Mechanical Properties—Samples of the material to
provide test specimens for mechanical properties, hardness,
and grain size shall be taken from such locations in a lot as to
be representative of that lot.
10.3 Number of Tests:
10.3.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per lot.
10.3.2 Hardness—One test per lot.
10.3.3 Grain Size—One test per lot.
11. Specimen Preparation
11.1 Tension test specimens, if required, shall be taken in
the direction of rolling from the material in the final condition
of rolling and heat treatment or in the case of continuously cast
sheet in the casting direction and “as cast”’ state.
11.1.1 Tension test specimens shall be any of the standard or
subsize specimens shown in Test Methods E 8.
11.2 Hardness test specimens if required shall be taken from
the material in the final condition of rolling and heat treatment.
Tests shall use Rockwell “R” scale or 10 mm ball and 100 kg
load Brinell test.
11.2.1 The minimum thickness of a sample for hardness
testing shall be 10 times the depth of the impression. All
hardness tests must be obtained within 24 h after the final
processing for use.
12. Test Methods
12.1 The following test methods for determining chemical
composition, mechanical properties, and other properties of the
3
material shall be determined in cases of disagreement in
accordance with the following methods:
12.1.1 Chemical Analysis—Methods E 37 and E 87.
12.1.2 Tension—Test Methods E 8.
12.1.3 Hardness:
12.1.3.1 Rockwell “R” and Test Methods E 18.
12.1.3.2 Brinell and Test Method E 10.
12.1.4 Grain Size—Methods E 112.
13. Inspection
13.1 Inspection of the material shall be made as agreed upon
by manufacturer and purchaser as part of the purchase contract.
14. Rejection and Rehearing
14.1 Material not conforming to any part of this specifica-
tion or to authorized modifications, will be subject to rejection
of the entire lot of material.
14.2 Retests for mechanical properties shall be permitted if
performed within one week of final processing for use.
14.3 Independent Tests—In the event of a dispute arising as
to the compliance of the lead alloy strip, sheet, or plate with the
requirements set forth in this specification, the purchaser may
require the submission of product (check) samples to an
independent laboratory for testing. The costs of such testing
shall be borne by the purchaser.
15. Certification
15.1 Upon request of the purchaser in a contract or order, a
manufacturer’s certification that the material was manufactured
and tested in accordance with this specification, together with
a report of the actual test results from each lot, shall be
furnished.
16. Product Marking
16.1 Each bundle or shipping container shall be marked
with the name of the alloy, the condition, this specification
number, the size, thickness, gross, net and tare weight, lot
number, consignor and consignee address, contract or purchase
order number, and any other such information as may be
defined in the contract or order.
16.2 Lead plate over 1⁄2 in. thick, when required in the
contract or purchase order, shall be marked along one edge
with the alloy designation, manufacturer’s brand name, heat or
lot number, and customer’s number. The markings shall be
made with nonsoluble ink or point and shall be repeated at
intervals of not greater than 3 ft along the edge of the plate.
17. Packaging and Package Marking
17.1 The purchaser must state in the order or contract any
special packaging, crating, or transportation required.
18. Keywords
18.1 lead plate; lead sheet; lead strip; wrought lead
 B 749 – 03
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 750 – 03

Standard Specification for

GALFAN1 (Zinc-5 % Aluminum-Mischmetal) Alloy in Ingot
Form for Hot-Dip Coatings2
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 750; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* TABLE 1 GALFAN, Zn-5Al-MM Alloy Ingot Chemical

RequirementsA,B,C,D,E
1.1 This specification covers GALFAN, zinc-5 %
UNS Z38510
aluminum-mischmetal (Zn-5Al-MM) alloy (UNS Z38510)3 in Element
Composition,%
ingot form for remelting for use in the production of hot-dip
AluminumF 4.2–6.2
coatings on steel. Alloy composition is specified in Table 1. Cerium + lanthanum, total 0.03–0.10
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded Iron, max 0.075
Silicon, max 0.015
as the standard. The values stated in parentheses are for LeadG, max 0.005
information only. CadmiumG, max 0.005
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the TinG, max 0.002
OthersH, each, max 0.02
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the OthersH, total, max 0.04
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar Zinc Remainder
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate A
For purposes of acceptance and rejection, the observed value or calculated
Material Data Sheet for this product/material as provided by value obtained from analysis should be rounded to the nearest unit in the last
the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and health right-hand place of figures, used in expressing the specified limit, in accordance
with the rounding procedure prescribed in Section 3 of Practice E 29.
practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory limi- B
By agreement between purchaser and supplier, analysis may be required and
tations prior to use. limits established for elements or compounds not specified in the table of chemical
composition.
C
2. Referenced Documents GALFAN, Zn-5Al-MM alloy ingot for hot-dip coatings may contain antimony,
copper, and magnesium in amounts of up to 0.002, 0.1, and 0.05 %, respectively.
2.1 ASTM Standards: No harmful effects have ever been noted due to the presence of these elements
B 899 Terminology Relating to Non-ferrous Metals and up to these concentrations and, therefore, analyses are not required for these
elements.
Alloys4 D
Magnesium may be specified by the buyer up to 0.1 % maximum.
E
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Zirconium and titanium may each be specified by the buyer up to 0.02 %
maximum.
Determine Conformance with Specifications5 F
Aluminum may be specified by the buyer up to 8.2 % maximum.
E 47 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Zinc Die- G
Lead and cadmium, and to a lesser extent tin and antimony, are known to
Casting Alloys6 cause intergranular corrosion in zinc-aluminum alloys. For this reason it is
important to maintain the levels of these elements below the limits specified.
E 88 Practice for Sampling Nonferrous Metals and Alloys H
Except antimony, copper, magnesium, zirconium, and titanium.
in Cast Form for Determination of Chemical Composition7
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)8
E 1277 Test Method for Chemical Analysis of Zinc–5 % GF-1 Standard Practice for Determination of Cerium and
Aluminum–Mischmetal Alloys by ICP Emission Spec- Lanthanum Compositions in GALFAN Alloy (5 %
trometry7 -0.04 % La-0.04 % Ce-Bal SHG Zn)9
2.2 Other Standard: 3. Terminology
3.1 Terms shall be defined in accordance with Terminology
1
GALFAN is a registered trademark of the GALFAN Information Center, Inc. B 899.
2
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on 3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
3.2.1 mischmetal—a naturally occurring mixture of rare-
B02.04 on Zinc and Cadmium.
Current edition approved June 10, 2003. Published August 2003. Originally earth elements in metallic form, primarily cerium and lantha-
approved in 1985. Last previous edition approved in 1999 as B 750 – 99e1. num.
3
UNS number in conformance with Practice E 527. 3.3 Abbreviations:
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
6
Withdrawn; see 1998 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
7 9
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05. Available from International Lead Zinc Research Organization, 2525 Meridian
8
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01. Parkway, P.O. Box 12036, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709 – 2036.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 750 – 03
3.3.1 MM—mischmetal.
3.3.2 Zn-5Al-MM—zinc-5 % aluminum mischmetal.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for ingot under this specification shall include
the following information:
4.1.1 Quantity in pounds,
4.1.2 Alloy (Table 1),
4.1.3 Size, if not manufacturer’s standard,
4.1.4 Specification number and year of issue,
4.1.5 Inspection (Section 9), and
4.1.6 Product marking (Section 12).
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 The alloys may be made by any approved process.
5.2 The material covered by this specification shall be free
from dross, slag, or other harmful contamination.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 Limits—The alloys shall conform to the requirements as
to chemical composition prescribed in Table 1. Conformance
shall be determined by the producer by analyzing samples
taken at the time ingots are made. If the producer has
determined the chemical composition of the metal during the
course of manufacture, he shall not be required to sample and
analyze the finished product.
7. Sampling
7.1 If the alloy is in the form of standard ingots at the
customer’s plant, the sample for chemical analysis shall be
taken in accordance with 7.1.1 to 7.1.5, inclusive.
7.1.1 Selection of Portion—A portion representative of the
total shipment or order shall be selected at random for the final
sample. The portion preferably shall be taken during loading or
unloading. At least one ingot shall be taken from every 10 000
lb (4530 kg), or fraction thereof, of each lot of alloy in the
shipment. From smaller lots, five ingots shall be taken.
7.1.2 Preparation of Sample—Each ingot shall be cleaned
thoroughly to rid the surface of extraneous material and drilled
or sawed, without lubricant in accordance with 7.1.3 or 7.1.4.
The drillings or sawings shall be subjected to the action of a
strong magnet to remove any adventitious iron with which the
sample may have become contaminated from the drill or saw.
7.1.3 Drilling—Two holes shall be drilled, preferably from
the bottom or brand side of each ingot, at two points located
along one diagonal of the ingot so that each point is halfway
between the center and one extremity of the diagonal. If two
holes from each ingot do not yield the weight of sample
prescribed in 7.1.5, a third hole shall be drilled at the center of
each ingot. Each hole shall be bored completely through the
ingot, care being taken to avoid starting the drill in a depression
and to adjust the feed to give drillings 0.010 to 0.020 in. (0.25
to 0.51 mm) in thickness. The drill used preferably shall be one
twisted from flat stock. The diameter of the drill shall be 5⁄16 in.
(7.9 mm). The drillings shall be broken or cut with clean shears
into pieces not over 1⁄2 in. in length and mixed thoroughly.
7.1.4 Sawing—Using, preferably, a heat treated high-speed
steel saw, make two cuts completely across the ingot from one
long side to the other. Each cut shall be approximately half way
2
between the center and each end. The width of the saw cut shall
be sufficient to give the weight of sample prescribed in 7.1.5,
and cuttings from all the ingots shall be mixed thoroughly to
form a uniform sample.
7.1.5 Size of Sample and Storage—The prepared sample
shall weigh at least 300 g. The properly mixed sample shall be
split into three equal parts, each of which shall be placed in a
sealed package, one for the manufacturer, one for the pur-
chaser, and one for a referee, if necessary. Tight, leakproof,
paper sample envelopes or cardboard cartons may be used to
hold the sample.
7.2 If the alloy is in shapes other than standard ingots, the
sampling procedure shall be agreed upon between the manu-
facturer or seller and the purchaser.
7.3 An optimal method of sampling for analysis may be by
melting together representative portions of each ingot selected,
and then sampling the liquid composite by casting suitable
specimens for either spectrographic or chemical analysis.
7.4 Samples for Spectrochemical and Other Methods of
Analysis—Samples for spectrochemical and other methods of
analysis shall be suitable for the form of material being
analyzed and the type of analytical method used.
7.5 Aspects of sampling and sample preparation not covered
specifically in this specification shall be carried out in accor-
dance with Practice E 88.
8. Analytical Methods
8.1 Method of Analysis—The determination of chemical
composition shall be made in accordance with suitable chemi-
cal (Test Method E 47 for tin), ICP argon plasma spectrometric
(Test Method E 1227) or other methods. In case of dispute, the
results secured by Test Method E 1277 shall be the basis of
acceptance.
8.2 A standard practice for X-ray fluorescence spectrometry
for determination of cerium and lanthanum in a zinc-5 %
aluminum alloy has been established by the International Lead
Zinc Research Organization (Standard Practice GF-1). In case
of dispute, the results secured by Test Method E 1277 shall be
the basis of acceptance.
9. Inspection
9.1 If the purchaser desires that his representative inspect or
witness the inspection and testing of the product prior to
shipment, such agreement shall be made by the purchaser and
producer or supplier as part of the contract or purchaser order.
9.2 When such inspection or witness of inspection and
testing is agreed upon, the producer or supplier shall afford the
purchaser’s representative all reasonable facilities to satisfy
him that the product meets the requirements of this specifica-
tion. Inspection and tests shall be conducted so there is no
unnecessary interference with the producer’s operations.
10. Rejection and Rehearing
10.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
supplier may make claim for a rehearing. If the rehearing
 B 750 – 03
establishes that the material does not conform to the require- 12.2 Each bundle or skid shall be identified with the
ments of this specification, as much of the rejected original producer’s heat, lot, or other identification mark.
material as possible shall be returned to the producer or
supplier. 13. Packaging and Package Marking
11. Certification 13.1 Unless otherwise specified, the ingot shall be packaged
11.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, the to provide adequate protection during normal handling and
manufacturer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished to transportation. Each package shall contain only one alloy
the purchaser stating that samples representing each lot have unless otherwise agreed upon.
been manufactured, tested, and inspected in accordance with
this specification and the requirements have been met. When 14. Keywords
specified in the purchase order or contract, a report of the test
results shall be furnished. 14.1 GALFAN; hot dip coating alloy; zinc alloy; zinc-5 %
aluminum mischmetal alloy
12. Product Marking
12.1 All ingots shall be properly marked for identification
with the producer’s name or brand.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B02 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(B 750 - 99e1) that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) Trade name GALFAN was added to the title, 1.1, Table 1
and Keywords.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 752 – 01

Standard Specification for

Castings, Zirconium-Base, Corrosion Resistant, for General
Application1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 752; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 3.2.1 castings—a lot shall consist of all castings produced

1.1 This specification covers zirconium and zirconium-alloy
castings for general corrosion-resistant and industrial applica-
tions.
1.2 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI units
are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, the
SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system shall
be used independently of the other. Combining values from the
two systems may result in nonconformance with the specifi-
cation.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
A 802/A 802M Practice for Steel Castings, Surface Accep-
tance Standards, Visual Examination2
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3
E 10 Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materi-
als3
E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials3
E 23 Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of
Metallic Materials3
E 94 Guide for Radiographic Testing4
E 142 Method for Controlling Quality of Radiographic
Testing4
E 165 Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination4
E 446 Reference Radiographs for Steel Castings Up to 2 in.
(51 mm) in Thickness4
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 pour—shall consist of all material melted and cast at
one time.
3.2 Lot Definitions:
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B10 on
Reactive and Refractory Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of
Subcommittee B10.02 on Zirconium and Hafnium.
Current edition approved Nov. 10, 2001. Published January 2002. Originally
published as B 752 – 85. Last previous edition B 752 – 97.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.02.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
from the same pour.
3.2.2 ingot—no definition required.
3.2.3 rounds, flats, tubes, and wrought powder metallurgical
products (single definition, common to nuclear and non-
nuclear standards)—a lot shall consist of a material of the
same size, shape, condition, and finish produced from the same
ingot or powder blend by the same reduction schedule and the
same heat treatment parameters. Unless otherwise agreed
between manufacturer and purchaser, a lot shall be limited to
the product of an 8 h period for final continuous anneal, or to
a single furnace load for final batch anneal.
3.2.4 sponge—a lot shall consist of a single blend produced
at one time.
3.2.5 weld fittings—definition is to be mutually agreed upon
between manufacturer and the purchaser.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for castings to this specification shall include the
following, as required to describe the requirements adequately.
4.1.1 Description of the castings by pattern number or
drawing (dimensional tolerances shall be included on the
casting drawing),
4.1.2 Quantity,
4.1.3 Grade Designation (see Table 1),
4.1.4 Options in the specification, and
4.1.5 Supplementary requirements desired, including the
standards of acceptance.
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 Material for this specification shall be melted by con-
ventional processes used for reactive metals. Typical methods
include the consumable electrode and inductoslag melting
processes.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 Pour Analysis— An analysis of each pour shall be made
by the producer from a sample such as a casting or test bar that
is representative of the pour. The chemical composition deter-
mined shall conform to the requirements specified for the
relevant grade in Table 1.
6.1.1 The elements listed in Table 1 are intentional alloying
additions of elements which are inherent to the manufacture of

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 752
TABLE 1 Chemical RequirementsA 7. Heat Treatment
Grade Designation, 7.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all castings
Composition, %
will be supplied in the as-cast condition except when post-weld
702C 704C 705C
heat treatment is required.
Zirconium and hafnium, 98.8 97.1 95.1 7.2 If post-weld heat treatment is required, it shall consist of
min.
Hafnium, max 4.5 4.5 4.5 a stress relief performed at 1050 6 50°F [565 6 25°C] for a
Iron and chro- 0.3 0.3 0.3 minimum of 1⁄2h at temperature plus an additional 1⁄2h at
mium, max temperature per inch of thickness for section sizes greater than
Hydrogen, max 0.005 0.005 0.005
Nitrogen, max 0.03 0.03 0.03 1 in. [25 mm]. After heat treatment, the castings should be
Carbon, max 0.1 0.1 0.1 cooled in air or in the furnace to ambient temperature unless
Oxygen, max 0.25 0.3 0.3 otherwise agreed upon between the purchaser and producer.
Phosphorus, max 0.01 0.01 0.01
Tin ... 1.0 to 2.0 ...
Niobium ... ... 2.0 to 3.0
8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
A
By agreement between the purchaser and the producer, analysis may be 8.1 All castings shall be made in a workmanlike manner and
required and limits established for elements and compounds not specified in this shall conform to the dimensions in drawings furnished by the
table.
purchaser before manufacturing is started. If the pattern is
supplied by the purchaser, the dimensions of the casting shall
primary zirconium, zirconium sponge, mill product or castings. be as predicted by the pattern.
6.1.1.1 Elements other than those listed in Table 1 are 8.2 The surface of the casting shall be free of adhering mold
deemed to be capable of occurring in the grades listed in Table material, scale, cracks, and hot tears as determined by visual
1 by and only by way of unregulated or unanalyzed scrap examination. Other surface discontinuities shall meet the visual
additions to the pour. Therefore, pour analysis for elements not acceptance standards specified in the order. Practice A 802/
listed in Table 1 shall be considered to be in excess of the intent A 802M or other visual standards may be used to define
of this specification. acceptable surface discontinuities and finish. Unacceptable
6.2 When agreed upon by producer and purchaser and surface discontinuities shall be removed, and their removal
requested by the purchaser in his written purchase order, verified by visual examination of the resultant cavities.
chemical analysis shall be completed for specific residual
elements not listed in this specification. 9. Repair by Welding
6.3 Product Analysis— A product analysis may be made by 9.1 If repairs are required, these shall be made using a
the purchaser on a representative casting from any lot. Because welding procedure and operators certified to quality require-
of the possibility of oxygen or other interstitial contamination, ments established by the producer. The procedures developed
samples for oxygen, carbon, hydrogen, and nitrogen analysis shall be consistent with standard practices recommended for
shall be taken no closer than 1⁄4in. [6.3 mm] to a cast surface reactive metal alloys. The producer shall maintain documenta-
except that castings too thin for this shall be analyzed on tion on procedure and welder qualifications. Procedure modi-
representative material. The chemical composition determined fications or special arrangements shall be as agreed upon
shall conform to the analysis in Table 1 within the check between the producer and purchaser.
analysis variations shown in Table 2 or shall be subject to 9.2 Weld repairs shall be considered major in the case of a
rejection by the purchaser. casting that has leaked on a hydrostatic test or when the depth
6.4 In the event of disagreement between the manufacturer of the cavity after preparation for repair exceeds 20 % of the
and the purchaser on the conformance of the material to the actual wall thickness or 1 in. [25 mm], whichever is smaller, or
requirements of this specification or any special test specified when the surface area of the cavity exceeds approximately 10
by the purchase, a mutually acceptable referee shall perform in.2 [6500 mm2]. All other weld repairs shall be considered
the tests in question. The results of the referee’s testing shall be minor. Major and minor repairs shall be subject to the same
used in determining conformance of the material to this quality standards as are used to inspect the castings.
specification. 9.3 The composition of the deposited weld metal shall be
within the chemical requirements for each grade established in
TABLE 2 Check Analysis Tolerances Table 1.
Maximum
Permissible 9.4 All castings with major weld repairs shall be stress
Variation relieved after repair in accordance with 7.2. Stress relief after
Element of Range,
in Check
Weight, %
Analysis minor repairs is not required for grades 702C and 704C except
Nitrogen 0.03 + 0.006
by agreement between the producer and the purchaser. Grade
Carbon 0.10 + 0.02 705C must be stress relieved after any weld repair.
Hydrogen 0.005 + 0.001
Iron and chromium 0.30 + 0.06 10. Inspection
Oxygen 0.25 + 0.05
Hafnium 4.50 + 0.50 10.1 The producer shall afford the purchaser’s inspector all
Phosphorus 0.010 + 0.003 reasonable facilities necessary to satisfy him that the material
Tin 1.0 to 2.0 60.02 is being produced and furnished in accordance with this
Niobium 2.0 to 3.0 60.015
Residuals 0.10 + 0.02 specification. Foundry inspection by the purchaser shall not
interfere unnecessarily with the producer’s operations. All tests

2
 B 752
and inspections, with the exception of product analysis (6.3),
shall be made at the place of manufacture, testing, or inspection
unless otherwise agreed upon.
11. Rejection
11.1 Any rejection based on test reports shall be reported to
the producer within 60 days from the receipt of the test reports
by the purchaser.
11.2 Material that shows unacceptable discontinuities as
determined by the acceptance standards specified on the order,
subsequent to acceptance at the producer’s works, will be
rejected, and the producer shall be notified within 60 days, or
as otherwise agreed upon.
12. Product Marking
12.1 Unless otherwise specified, the following shall apply:
12.1.1 Castings shall be marked for material identification
with the ASTM specification number (B 752) and grade
symbol, that is, 702C, 704C, or 705C.
12.1.2 The producer’s name or identification mark and the
pattern number shall be cast or stamped using low stress
stamps on all castings. Small size castings may be such that
marking must be limited consistent with the available area.
12.1.3 The marking of lot numbers on individual castings
shall be agreed upon between the producer and the purchaser.
12.1.4 Marking shall be in such a position as not to injure
the usefulness of the casting.
13. Keywords
13.1 castings; corrosion-resistant; zirconium; zirconium al-
loys

SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS

Supplementary requirements shall be applied only when specified by the purchaser. Details of the
supplementary requirements shall be agreed upon between the producer and purchaser. The specified
tests shall be performed by the producer prior to shipment of the castings.

S1. Radiographic Examination S4. Certification

S1.1 The castings shall be examined for internal defects by
means of X rays or gamma rays. The procedure shall be in
accordance with Guide E 94 and Method E 142, and types and
degrees of discontinuities shall be judged by Reference Radio-
graphs E 446. The extent of examination and basis for accep-
tance shall be agreed upon between the producer and pur-
chaser.
S2. Liquid Penetrant Examination
S2.1 The castings shall be examined for surface disconti-
nuities by means of liquid penetrant examination. The exami-
nation shall be in accordance with Test Method E 165. Areas to
be inspected, methods and types of liquid penetrants to be used,
developing procedure, and basis for acceptance shall be agreed
upon between the producer and purchaser.
S3. Examination of Weld Preparation
S3.1 Cavities prepared for welding as a result of surface
discontinuities, such as cracks, open porosity, and so forth shall
be examined by means of liquid penetrant examination in order
to verify removal of such discontinuities.
S3.2 Weld repairs that are made to eliminate discontinuities
that are detected by radiography shall be re-radiographed to
verify that unacceptable discontinuities have been removed.
S4.1 A test report shall be furnished. The test report shall
contain the results of the actual chemical analysis and other
tests specified by the purchaser.
S4.2 Each test report shall be signed by an authorized agent
of the seller or producer.
S4.3 The test report shall be furnished within 5 days of
shipment of the castings.
S5. Prior Approval of Major Weld Repairs
S5.1 Major weld repairs as defined and agreed upon be-
tween the producer and purchaser shall be subject to the prior
approval of the purchaser.
S6. Tension Test
S6.1 Tensile properties shall be determined on material
representing each pour. Properties shall be determined in the
as-cast condition unless the purchase order requires the prop-
erties be determined in the final condition after all heat
treatments (including isostatic pressing) have been completed
or unless otherwise specified in the purchase order. The results
shall conform to the requirements specified in Table 3.
S6.2 Test bars may be obtained from special test blocks cast
for that purpose or cut from castings processed with a lot.
S6.3 Tensile tests shall be made in accordance with the
requirements of Test Methods E 8. Tensile properties shall be

TABLE 3 Tensile and Hardness Requirements

Tensile Yield Elongation
Hardness,
Strength, Strength, 0.2 % in 1 in. Hardness,
Grade Rockwell,
min Offset, min [51 mm] HB, max
max
ksi MPa ksi MPa length, min, %
702C 55 [380] 40 [276] 12 210 B96
704C 60 [413] 40 [276] 10 235 B99
705C 70 [483] 50 [345] 12 235 B99

3
 B 752
determined using a strain rate of 0.003 to 0.007 in./in./min
[0.005 to 0.007 mm/mm/min] through the yield strength.
S6.4 If any test specimen shows defective machining or
develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted from the same pour.
S7. Hardness Test
S7.1 Hardness shall be determined on each lot. Hardness
shall be determined in the as-cast condition unless the purchase
order requires the hardness be determined in the final condition
after all heat treatments (including isostatic pressing) have
been completed or unless otherwise specified in the purchase
order. The results shall conform to the requirements specified
in Table 3.
S7.2 Hardness shall be determined on a sample cast for that
purpose, or on a casting randomly selected from a lot. If a
casting is used for a hardness sample, indentations shall be
made in a surface that will not be subsequently machined.
Hardness values reported shall be representative of the base
metal of the castings and not of any surface contamination
caused by mold-metal interactions.
S7.3 Hardness tests shall be made in accordance with the
requirements of Test Methods E 10 or E 18.
S8. Hot Isostatic Pressing (HIP)
S8.1 Hot Isostatic Pressing (HIP) shall be used to improve
as-cast properties or remove internal defects, or both. Tempera-
ture, time at temperature, and atmosphere shall be agreed upon
between supplier and purchaser.
S8.2 HIP may be substituted for required thermal treatment
provided all requirements for that treatment are met and
temperatures detrimental to the material properties are not
reached.
S9. Charpy Impact Test
S9.1 Charpy impact test properties shall be determined on
material representing each lot. Three Charpy V-notch speci-
mens shall be made from a test piece and tested in accordance
with Test Methods E 23. They shall be tested at room tempera-
ture unless otherwise agreed upon by the manufacturer and
purchaser and reported as absorbed energy. The condition of
the sample material and the acceptance limit shall be agreed to
by both the purchaser and the supplier.

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. RATIONALE (COMMENTARY)

X1.1 This specification is intended for use by purchasers or
producers, or both, of reactive metal castings for defining the
requirements and ensuring the properties of castings for unique
corrosion-resistant applications, that is, not for commodity
items which must meet all potential purchasers’ requirements.
X1.1.1 Users are advised to use the specification as a basis
for obtaining castings that will meet minimum acceptance
requirements established and revised by consensus of the
members of the committee.
X1.1.2 User requirements considered more stringent may be
met by the addition to the purchase order of one or more
supplementary requirements, which may include, but are not
limited to, those listed in Sections S1 through S8.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 751 – 03

Standard Specification for

General Requirements for Nickel and Nickel Alloy Welded
Tube1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 751; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification contains various requirements that,
with the exception of Sections 6 and 7, are mandatory
requirements to the following ASTM nickel and nickel alloy,
longitudinally welded tubular product specifications:
Title of Specification
Designation2,3
Welded UNS N08020, N08024, and UNS N08026 Alloy Tubes
Welded UNS N08120, UNS N08800, UNS N08810, UNS
N08811 Alloy Tubes
Welded Nickel-Chromium-Iron Alloy (UNS N06600, UNS
N06603, UNS N06025, and UNS N06045) Tubes
Welded Nickel and Nickel-Cobalt Alloy Tube
UNS N08904, UNS N08925, and UNS N08926 Welded Tube
UNS N08366 and UNS N08367 Welded Tube
Welded UNS N06625, N06219, and N08825 Alloy Tubes
Ni-Cr-Mo-Co-W-Fe-Si Alloy (UNS N06333) Welded Tube
Welded Nickel (UNS N02200/UNS N02201) and Nickel Cop-
per Alloy (UNS N04400) Tube
1.2 One or more of the test requirements of Section 6 apply
only if specifically stated in the product specification or in the
purchase order.
1.3 In case of conflict between a requirement of the product
specification and a requirement of this general specification,
only the requirement of the product specification need be
satisfied.
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 880 Specification for General Requirements for Chemical
Check Analysis Limits for Nickel, Nickel Alloys and
Cobalt Alloys2
ASTM E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials4
E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
B 468
B 515
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials4
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
B 516 Determine Conformance with Specifications5
B 626 E 39 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel6
B 674 E 76 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel-Copper
B 676 Alloys7
B 704
B 726 E 112 Test Methods for Determining the Average Grain
B 730 Size4
E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
and Tubing8
E 273 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of the Weld
Zone of Welded Pipe and Tubing8
E 309 Practice for Eddy-Current Examination of Steel Tu-
bular Products Using Magnetic Saturation8
E 426 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Exami-
nation of Seamless and Welded Tubular Products, Austen-
itic Stainless Steel and Similar Alloys8
E 571 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Exami-
nation of Nickel and Nickel Alloy Tubular Products8
E 1473 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel,
Cobalt, and High-Temperature Alloys7
2.2 Other Documents:
SNT-TC-1A Recommended Practice for Nondestructive
Personnel Qualification and Certification9
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:

1 4
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
5
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
6
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys. Discontinued; See Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
7
Current edition approved June 10, 2003. Published July2003. Originally ap- Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
8
proved in 1985. Last previous edition approved in 2002 as B 751 - 02. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
2 9
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04. Available from The American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT), P.O.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01. Box 28518, 1711 Arlingate Ln., Columbus, OH 43228-0518.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 751 – 03
3.1.1 average diameter—the average of the maximum and TABLE 2 Permissible Variations in LengthA
minimum outside diameters, as determined at any one cross Outside Diameter, in. (mm) Cut Length, in. (mm)
section of the tube. Over Under
Cold-finished: under 2 (50.8) 18⁄ (3.2) 0
3.1.2 nominal wall—a specified wall thickness with a plus Hot-finished: 2 (50.8) and over 3⁄16 (4.8) 0
and minus tolerance from the specified thickness. all sizes 3⁄16 (4.8) 0
3.1.3 thin wall tube—tube with specified wall thickness 3 % A
These permissible variations in length apply to tube in straight lengths. They
or less of the specified outside diameter. apply to cut lengths up to and including 24 ft (7.3 m). For lengths over 24 ft an
additional over-tolerance of 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) for each 10 ft (3.0 m) or fraction thereof
3.1.4 welded tube—a hollow product of round or any other shall be permissible up to a maximum additional over-tolerance of 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm).
cross section having a continuous periphery.

4. Dimensions and Permissible Variations

4.1 Diameter and Wall Thickness—Individual measure-
ments shall not exceed the tolerances specified in Table 1. The
permissible variation in outside diameter is not sufficient to
provide for ovality in thin-walled tubes. For thin-walled tubes
the maximum and minimum diameters at any cross section
shall not deviate from the nominal diameter by more than twice
the permissible variation in outside diameter given in the table;
however, the mean diameter at that cross section must still be
within the permissible variation.
4.2 Length—When material is ordered cut-to-length, the
length shall conform to the permissible variations prescribed in
Table 2.
4.3 Straightness—Material shall be reasonably straight and
free of bends and kinks.
4.4 Ends—Ends shall be plain or cut and deburred.
5. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
5.1 The material shall be uniform in quality and temper,
smooth, and free of imperfections that would render it unfit for
use.
6. Test Requirements
6.1 Flange Test:
6.1.1 A length of tube not less than three times the specified
diameter or 4 in. (102 mm), whichever is longer, shall be
capable of having a flange turned over at a right angle to the
body of the tube without cracking or showing imperfections
rejectable under the provisions of the product specification.
The width of the flange shall not be less than 15 % of the tube
diameter.
6.1.2 The flanged specimen shall not exhibit through wall
cracking or any cracking observable without magnification.
6.2 Flattening Test:
6.2.1 A length of tube not less than 4 in. (102 mm), shall be
flattened under a load applied gradually at room temperature
until the distance between the platens is five times the wall
thickness. The weld shall be positioned 90° from the direction
of the applied flattening force.
6.2.2 The flattened specimen shall not exhibit cracks.
6.2.3 Superficial ruptures resulting from surface imperfec-
tions shall not be a cause for rejection.
6.3 Flare Test—The flare test shall consist of flaring a test
specimen with an expanding tool having an included angle of
60° until the specified outside diameter has been increased by
30 %. The flared specimen shall not exhibit cracking through
the wall.
6.4 Pressure (Leak Test):
6.4.1 Hydrostatic—Each tube with an outside diameter 1⁄8
in. (3 mm) and larger, and with wall thickness of 0.015 in.
(0.38 mm) and over, shall be tested by the manufacturer to an
internal hydrostatic pressure of 1000 psi (6.9 MPa) provided
that the fiber stress calculated in accordance with the following
equation does not exceed the allowable fiber stress, S, indicated
as follows:
P 5 2St/D (1)
where:
P = hydrostatic test pressure, psi (MPa),
S = allowable fiber stress, for material in the condition
(temper) furnished as specified in the product speci-
fication (S is calculated as the lower of 2⁄3 of the
specified minimum 0.2 % offset yield strength or 1⁄4 of
the specified minimum ultimate strength for the ma-
terial),
t = minimum wall thickness, in. (mm), equal to the
specified average wall minus the permissible minus
wall tolerance, or the specified minimum wall thick-
ness, and
D = outside diameter of the tube, in. (mm).
6.4.1.1 The test pressure must be held for a minimum of
5 s.

TABLE 1 Permissible Variations for Outside Diameter and Wall Thickness of Welded TubeA,B
Permissible Variations
Thickness of
Specified Outside Diameter Outside Diameter of Thickness of
Specified Minimum Wall,%
Specified Nominal Wall, %
in. (mm) + − + − + −
Over 0.125 (3.2) to ⁄ (16), excl
58 0.004 (0.13) 0.005 (0.10) 12.5 12.5 28 0
5⁄8 (16) to 11⁄2 (38), incl 0.0075 (0.19) 0.0075 (0.19) 12.5 12.5 28 0
Over 11⁄2 (38) to 3 (76), incl 0.010 (0.25) 0.010 (0.25) 12.5 12.5 28 0
Over 3 (76) to 41⁄2 (114), incl 0.015 (0.38) 0.015 (0.38) 12.5 12.5 28 0
Over 41⁄2 (114) to 6 (152), incl 0.020 (0.51) 0.020 (0.51) 12.5 12.5 28 0
A
These permissible variations in outside diameter apply only to material as finished at the mill before subsequent swaging, expanding, bending, polishing, or other
fabricating operations.
B
The ovality provisions of 4.1 apply.

2
 B 751 – 03
NOTE 1—Testing at a pressure greater than 1000 psi can be done as
agreed upon by the purchaser and manufacturer provided that the
allowable fiber stress is not exceeded.
6.4.2 Pneumatic (Air Underwater) Test— Each tube with a
nominal wall thickness exceeding 0.025 in. (0.64 mm) shall be
tested at a minimum pressure of 150 psi (1.05 MPa). The test
pressure for tubes having a nominal wall thickness of 0.025 in.
(0.64 mm) and under shall be 75 psi (0.52 MPa) minimum. The
test pressure shall be held for a minimum of 5 s. Visual
examination is to be made when the material is submerged and
under pressure. The full length of material must be examined
for leaks.
6.4.3 If any tube shows leaks during hydrostatic or pneu-
matic testing, it shall be rejected.
6.5 Nondestructive Examination:
6.5.1 Each tube shall be examined by a nondestructive
examination method in accordance with Practices E 213,
E 309, E 426, or E 571. Upon agreement, Practice E 273 shall
be employed in addition to one of the full periphery tests. The
range of tube sizes that may be examined by each method shall
be subject to the limitations in the scope of that practice. In
case of conflict between these methods and practices and this
specification, the requirements of this specification shall pre-
vail
6.5.2 The following information is for the benefit of the user
of this specification.
6.5.2.1 Calibration standards for the nondestructive electric
test are convenient standards for calibration of nondestructive
testing equipment only. For several reasons, including shape,
orientation, width, etc., the correlation between the signal
produced in the electric test from an imperfection and from
calibration standards is only approximate. A purchaser inter-
ested in ascertaining the nature (type, size, location, and
orientation) of discontinuities that can be detected in the
specific application of these examinations should discuss this
with the manufacturer of the tubular product.
6.5.2.2 The ultrasonic examination referred to in this speci-
fication is intended to detect longitudinal discontinuities having
a reflective area similar to or larger than the calibration
reference notches specified in 6.5.8. The examination may not
detect circumferentially oriented imperfections or short, deep
defects.
6.5.2.3 The eddy current examination referenced in this
specification has the capability of detecting significant discon-
tinuities, especially of the short abrupt type. Practices E 309
and E 426 contain additional information regarding the capa-
bilities and limitations of eddy-current examination.
6.5.2.4 The hydrostatic test referred to in 6.4.1 is a test
method provided for in many product specifications. This test
has the capability of finding defects of a size permitting the test
fluid to leak through the tube wall and may be either visually
seen or detected by a loss of pressure. This test may not detect
very tight, through-the-wall defects or defects that extend an
appreciable distance into the wall without complete penetra-
tion.
3
6.5.2.5 A purchaser interested in ascertaining the nature
(type, size, location, and orientation) of discontinuities that can
be detected in the specific application of these examinations
should discuss this with the manufacturer of the tubular
products.
6.5.3 Time of Examination:
Nondestructive examination for specification acceptance
shall be performed after all deformation processing, heat
treating, welding, and straightening operations. This require-
ment does not preclude additional testing at earlier stages in the
processing.
6.5.4 Surface Condition:
6.5.4.1 All surfaces shall be free of scale, dirt, grease, paint,
or other foreign material that could interfere with interpretation
of test results. The methods used for cleaning and preparing the
surfaces for examination shall not be detrimental to the base
metal or the surface finish.
6.5.4.2 Excessive surface roughness or deep scratches can
produce signals that interfere with the test.
6.5.5 Extent of Examination:
6.5.5.1 The relative motion of the tube and the transduc-
er(s), coil(s), or sensor(s) shall be such that the entire tube
surface is scanned, except for end effects as noted in 6.5.5.2.
6.5.5.2 The existence of end effects is recognized, and the
extent of such effects shall be determined by the manufacturer,
and, if requested, shall be reported to the purchaser. Other
nondestructive tests may be applied to the end areas, subject to
agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
6.5.6 Operator Qualifications:
6.5.6.1 The test unit operator shall be certified in accordance
with SNT TC-1-A, or an equivalent documented standard
agreeable to both purchaser and manufacturer.
6.5.7 Test Conditions:
6.5.7.1 For examination by the ultrasonic method, the mini-
mum nominal transducer frequency shall be 2.0 MHz, and the
maximum transducer size shall be 1.5 in. (38 mm).
6.5.7.2 For eddy current testing, the excitation coil fre-
quency shall be chosen to ensure adequate penetration, yet
provide good signal-to-noise ratio. The maximum coil fre-
quency shall be:
Specified Wall Thickness, in. (mm) Maximum Frequency, kHz
<0.050 in. (1.25 mm) 100
0.050 to 0.150 (1.25 to 3.80 mm) 50
>0.150 (3.80 mm) 10
6.5.8 Reference Standards:
6.5.8.1 Reference standards of convenient length shall be
prepared from a length of tube of the same grade, specified size
(outside diameter and wall thickness), surface finish, and heat
treatment condition as the tubing to be examined.
6.5.8.2 For eddy current testing, the reference standard shall
contain, at the option of the manufacturer, any one of the
following discontinuities:
(a) Drilled Hole—The reference standard shall contain
three or more holes, equally spaced circumferentially around
the tube and longitudinally separated by a sufficient distance to
allow distinct identification of the signal from each hole. The
holes shall be drilled radially and completely through the tube
wall, with care being taken to avoid distortion of the tube while
 B 751 – 03
drilling. The holes shall no be larger than 0.031 in. (0.8 mm) in
diameter. As an alternative, the producer may choose to drill
one hole and run the calibration standard through the test coil
three times, rotating the tube approximately 120° each time
More passes with smaller angular increments may be used,
provided testing of the full 360° of the coil is obtained. For
welded tubing, if the weld is visible, one of the multiple holes
or the single hole shall be drilled in the weld.
(b) Transverse Tangential Notch—Using a round tool or
file with a 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) diameter, a notch shall be milled or
filed tangential to the surface and transverse to the longitudinal
axis of the tube. Said notch shall have a depth not exceeding
12 1⁄2 % of the specified wall thickness of the tube or 0.04 in.
(0.1 mm), whichever is greater.
(c) Longitudinal Notch—A notch 0.031 in. (0.8 mm) or less
in width shall be machined in a radial plane parallel to the tube
axis on the outside surface of the tube, to have a depth not
exceeding 12 1⁄2 % of the specified wall thickness of the tube
or 0.004 in. (0.1 mm), whichever is greater. The length of the
notch shall be compatible with the testing method.
6.5.8.3 For ultrasonic testing, the reference ID and OD
notches shall be any one of the three common notch shapes
shown in Practice E 213, at the option of the manufacturer. The
depth of the notches shall not exceed 12 1⁄2 % of the specified
wall thickness of the tube or 0.004 in. (0.1 mm), whichever is
greater. The width of the notch shall not exceed two times the
depth. For welded tubing, the notches shall be placed in the
weld, if the weld is visible.
6.5.8.4 More or smaller reference discontinuities, or both,
may be used by agreement between the purchaser and the
manufacturer.
6.5.9 Standardization Procedure:
6.5.9.1 The test apparatus shall be standardized at the
beginning and end of each series of tubes of the same specified
size (diameter and wall thickness), grade and heat treatment
condition, and at intervals not exceeding 4 h during the
examination of such tubing. More frequent standardizations
may be performed at the manufacturer’s option or may be
required upon agreement between the purchaser and the
manufacturer.
6.5.9.2 The test apparatus shall also be standardized after
any change in test system settings, change of operator, equip-
ment repair, or interruption due to power loss or shutdown.
6.5.9.3 The reference standard shall be passed through the
test apparatus at the same speed and test system settings as the
tube to be tested, except that, at the manufacturer’s discretion,
the tubes may be tested at a higher sensitivity.
6.5.9.4 The signal-to-noise ratio for the reference standard
shall be 2.5:1 or greater, and the reference signal amplitude for
each discontinuity shall be at least 50 % of full scale of the
display. In establishing the noise level, extraneous signals from
identifiable surface imperfections on the reference standard
may be ignored. When reject filtering is used during UT
testing, linearity must be demonstrated.
6.5.9.5 If, upon any standardization, the reference signal
amplitude has decreased by at least 29 % (3.0 dB), the test
apparatus shall be considered out of standardization. The test
system settings may be changed, or the transducer(s), coil(s),
4
or sensor(s) adjusted, and the unit restandardized, but all tubes
tested since the last acceptable standardization must be re-
tested.
6.5.10 Evaluation of Imperfections:
6.5.10.1 Tubing producing a test signal equal to or greater
than the lowest signal produced by the reference standard shall
be designated suspect, shall be clearly marked or identified,
and shall be separated from the acceptable tubing.
6.5.10.2 Such suspect tubing shall be subject to one of the
following three dispositions:
(a) The tubes shall be rejected without further examination,
at the discretion of the manufacturer.
(b) If the test signal was produced by imperfections such as
scratches, surface roughness, dings, straightener marks, loose
ID bead and cutting chips, steel die stamps, stop marks, tube
reducer ripple, or chattered flash trim, the tubing shall be
accepted or rejected depending on visual observation of the
severity of the imperfection, the type of signal it produces on
the testing equipment used, or both.
(c) If the test signal was produced by imperfections that
cannot be identified, or was produced by cracks or crack-like
imperfections, the tubing shall be rejected.
6.5.10.3 Any tubes with imperfections of the types in
6.5.10.2, (a) and (b), exceeding 0.004 in. (0.1 mm) or 12 1⁄2 %
of the specified minimum wall thickness (whichever is greater)
in depth shall be rejected.
6.5.10.4 Rejected tubes may be reconditioned and retested
providing the wall thickness is not decreased to less than that
required by this or the product specification. If grinding is
performed, the outside diameter in the area of grinding may be
reduced by the amount so removed. To be accepted, recondi-
tioned tubes must pass the nondestructive examination by
which they were originally rejected.
6.6 Chemical Composition:
6.6.1 In case of disagreement, the chemical composition
shall be determined in accordance with Table 3.
TABLE 3 Chemical Composition
UNS No. Prefixes ASTM Method
N02 E 39
N04 E 76
N06, N08 E 1473
6.6.2 The material shall conform to the chemical require-
ments prescribed in the individual specification.
6.6.3 The product (check) analysis of the material shall meet
the requirements for the ladle analysis within the tolerance
limits prescribed in Specification B 880.
6.7 Tension Test:
6.7.1 Tension testing shall be conducted in accordance with
Test Methods E 8.
6.7.2 The material shall conform to the tensile properties
prescribed in the individual specification.
6.8 Hardness Test—Hardness testing shall be conducted in
accordance with Test Methods E 18.
6.9 Grain Size—The measurement of average grain size
may be carried out by the planimetric method, the comparison
method, or the intercept method described in Test Methods
 B 751 – 03
E 112. In case of dispute, the “referee” method for determining
average grain size shall be the intercept method.
6.10 For purposes of determining compliance with the
specified limits for requirements of the properties listed in the
following table, an observed value or a calculated value shall
be rounded in accordance with the rounding method of Practice
E 29:
Requirements
Rounded Unit for Observed
or Calculated Value
Chemical composition nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures
and tolerances of the specified limit
Tensile strength and yield nearest 1000 psi (7 MPa)
strength
Elongation nearest 1 %
7. Sampling
7.1 Lot—A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one
heat.
7.1.1 A lot for all other testing shall consist of all material
from the same heat, nominal size (excepting length), and
condition (temper). When final heat treatment is in a batch-type
furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes of the same size
and the same heat which are heat-treated in the same furnace
charge. When the final heat treatment is in a continuous
furnace, a lot shall include all tubes of the same size and heat,
annealed in the same furnace at the same temperature, time at
temperature, and furnace speed, except not to exceed 20 000
lb.
7.1.2 Where material cannot be identified by heat, a lot shall
consist of not more than 500 lb (277 kg) of material of the same
alloy in the same condition (temper) and nominal size (except-
ing length).
NOTE 2—For tension, hardness, flare flattening, and flange test require-
ments, the term lot applies to all tubes prior to cutting.
7.2 Test Material Selection:
7.2.1 Chemical Analysis—Representative samples from
each lot shall be taken during pouring or subsequent process-
ing.
7.2.2 Mechanical and Other Properties— Samples of the
material to provide test specimens for mechanical and other
properties shall be taken from such locations in each lot as to
be representative of that lot. Test specimens shall be taken from
material in the final condition (temper).
8. Retests and Retreatment
8.1 Retests—If the results of the mechanical tests of any
group or lot do not conform to the requirements specified in the
individual specification, retests may be made on additional
tubes of double the original number from the same group or lot,
each of which shall conform to the requirements specified.
8.2 Retreatment—If the individual tube or the tubes selected
to represent any group or lot fail to conform to the test
requirements, the individual tubes or the group or lot repre-
sented may be reheat treated and resubmitted for test. Not more
than two reheat treatments shall be permitted.
9. Specimen Preparation
9.1 Room Temperature Tensile Specimen— Material shall
be tested in the direction of fabrication. Whenever possible, the
5
tube shall be tested in full tubular size. When testing in full
tubular size is not possible, longitudinal strip specimens or the
largest possible round specimen shall be used. In the event of
disagreement when full tubular testing is not possible, a
longitudinal strip specimen with reduced gage length as
contained in Test Methods E 8 shall be used.
9.2 Hardness Specimen—The hardness specimen shall be
prepared in accordance with Test Methods E 18. The test shall
be made on the inside diameter surface of a specimen cut from
the end or on the inside of the tube near the end, at the option
of the manufacturer.
9.3 Grain Size—If required, the grain size specimen shall be
a transverse sample representing full wall thickness.
10. Inspection
10.1 Inspection of the material shall be agreed upon by the
purchaser and the supplier as part of the purchase contract.
11. Rejection and Rehearing
11.1 Material tested by the purchaser that fails to conform to
the requirements of this specification may be rejected. Rejec-
tion should be reported to the producer or supplier promptly
and in writing. In case of dissatisfaction with the results of the
test, the producer or supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
12. Certification
12.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
manufacturer’s certification shall be furnished to the purchaser
stating that the material has been manufactured, tested, and
inspected in accordance with this specification, and that the test
results on representative samples meet specification require-
ments. When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
report of the test results shall be furnished.
13. Product Marking
13.1 Material Marking:
13.1.1 The name or brand of the manufacturer, the name of
the material or UNS number, the letters ASTM, the product
specification number, heat number, class and nominal size shall
be legibly marked on each piece 3⁄4 in. (19.0 mm) and over in
outside diameter, provided the length is not under 3 ft (914
mm). The material marking shall be by any method that will
not result in harmful contamination.
13.1.2 For material less than 3⁄4 in. (19.0 mm) in outside
diameter and material under 3 ft (914 mm) in length, the
information specified in 13.1.1 shall be either legibly marked
on each piece or marked on a tag securely attached to the
bundle or box in which the tube is shipped at the option of the
manufacturer.
13.2 Packaging—The following information shall be
marked on the material or included on the package, or on a
label or tag attached thereto: The name of the material or UNS
number, heat number, condition (temper), the letters ASTM,
the product specification number, the size, gross, tare and net
weight, consignor and consignee address, contract or order
number, or such other information as may be defined by the
contract or purchase order.
 B 751 – 03
14. Keywords
14.1 welded tube

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 753 – 01

Standard Specification for

Thermostat Component Alloys1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 753; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope that commonly used methods of surface preparation, or pre-

1.1 This specification describes requirements for alloys to bond cleaning will allow bonding of the entire mating surfaces.
be used as components in the manufacture of bonded multi- Since surface condition can vary for different alloys and
component thermostat metal strip. More specifically it de- because bonding practices vary, product surface condition can
scribes alloys having composition, and thermal expansion be agreed upon between supplier and purchaser.
suitable for application in thermostat metal sheet and strip. 5. Chemical Composition
2. Referenced Documents 5.1 The material shall be manufactured to the chemical
2.1 ASTM Standards: compositions shown in Table 1.
A 480 Specification for General Requirements for Flat- 5.2 The manufacturer will insure uniformity of composition
Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and throughout a heat lot to provide uniform thermal expansion and
Strip2 electrical resistivity properties.
B 63 Test Method for Resistivity of Metallically Conduct- 6. Thermal Expansion Requirements
ing Resistance and Contact Materials3
B 388 Specification for Thermostat Metal Sheet and Strip3 6.1 Samples tested in accordance with 6.2 shall exhibit
E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell thermal expansion properties described in Table 2.
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials4 6.2 One test sample representing each heat lot shall be
E 228 Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid machined to a suitable specimen configuration, heat treated in
Materials with a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer5 accordance with instructions in Table 2, and Test Method
E 228.
3. Ordering Information
7. Electrical Resistivity
3.1 Orders for this material under this specification shall
include the following information: 7.1 The electrical resistivity measured at room temperature
3.1.1 Alloy type, as in Test Method B 63 on suitably prepared and annealed
3.1.2 Size, specimens shall conform to Table 3.
3.1.3 Surface finish, 8. Temper
3.1.4 Marking and packaging, and
3.1.5 Certification, if required. 8.1 This product will be supplied in the annealed condition.
8.2 Hardness shall be measured on representative samples
4. General Requirements from each heat treat lot and reported as Rockwell B hardness.
4.1 The material shall be free of scale, slivers, cracks, 8.3 Hardness values shall conform to the requirements in
seams, corrosion and other defects as best commercial practice Table 4 tested as in Test Methods E 18.
will permit. Surfaces shall be uniform and sufficiently clean so 9. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
9.1 Permissible variations in thickness and width shall
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on adhere to those described in Specification A 480. These are
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee shown in Table 5.
B02.10 on Thermostat Metals.
Current edition approved May 10, 2001. Published July 2001.Originally pub-
9.2 Edge camber shall conform to Specification A 480.
lished as B 753 - 86. Last previous edition B 753 - 86 (1998). (Edge camber for widths >1-1⁄2 in. shall be a maximum 1⁄4in. on
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.03. any 8-ft length.)
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04. 9.3 Maximum deviation across the width of the strip at a
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02. given location shall not exceed 3 % of the nominal thickness.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 753
9.4 Slitting burr shall be no greater than 10 % of the 11.2 Marking shall contain the following information:
thickness. 11.2.1 Manufacturer’s name,
10. Certification 11.2.2 Alloy type,
10.1 The manufacturer shall provide the purchaser with a 11.2.3 Heat number,
certification containing the following information: 11.2.4 Size,
10.1.1 Alloy type, 11.2.5 Shipped weight, and
10.1.2 Specification number,
11.2.6 Purchaser’s order number.
10.1.3 Dimensions,
10.1.4 Chemical composition by heat number,
12. Investigation of Claims
10.1.5 Coefficient thermal expansion,
10.1.6 Hardness, 12.1 Where any material fails to meet the requirements of
10.1.7 Quantity shipped, the specification, the material so designated shall be handled in
10.1.8 Purchase order number, accordance with a mutual agreement between purchaser and
10.1.9 Resistivity (optional), and seller.
10.1.10 Manufacturer’s name.
11. Packaging and Marking 13. Keywords
11.1 Packaging and unit size shipped shall be subject to 13.1 alloys; chemical composition; components; controlled
agreement between purchaser and supplier. Packaging will be thermal expansion; electrical resistivity; hardness; temper;
sufficient to prevent damage or spoilage in transit. thermostat metal strip

TABLE 1 Suggested Compositions For Thermostat Alloys All Elements Indicated As Weight Percent

NOTE 1—Composition requirements show major elements as being nominal. These nominal requirements indicate they are to be adjusted by the
manufacturer so that the alloys meet the requirements for thermal expansion shown in Table 2. Other elements not shown, may be present in residual
amounts. These shall not be present in sufficient quantity as to significantly affect the performance in the intended application.

Alloy
T-10 T-20 T-22 T-18 T-19 T-14 T-25
Description
Carbon 0.1 max 0.05 max 0.12 nom 0.15 max 0.5 nom 0.5 max 0.15 max
Manganese 72.0 nom 6.5 nom 0.60 max 0.80 max 1.0 nom 9.0 nom 1.0 max
Silicon, max 0.25 0.3 0.30 0.50 0.40 0.30 1.0
Phosphorus, max 0.030 0.02 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
Sulfur, max 0.030 0.01 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
Chromium 0.25 max ... 3.0 nom 11.0 nom 2.0 nom ... 8.0 nom
Nickel, nom 10.0 20.0 22.0 18.0 19.0 14.0 25.0
Copper 18.0 nom ... ... ... ... ... ...
Aluminum ... ... ... ... ... 5.0 nom ...
Cobalt ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Iron 1.0 max balance balance balance balance balance balance
Alloy
Description T-50 T-45 T-42 T-40 T-39 T-36 T-99
Carbon, max 0.15 max 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15
Manganese, max 0.60 max 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.35
Silicon, max 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.35
Phosphorus, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.015
Sulfur, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.010
Chromium, max 0.50 max 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.25 0.50
Nickel, nom 50.0 nom 45.0 42.0 40.0 39.0 36.0 99.5
Copper ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.25 max
Aluminum ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Cobalt, max 0.50 max 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Iron balance balance balance balance balance balance 0.40 max

2
 B 753
TABLE 2 Linear Expansion Coefficients For Thermostat Alloys Values Shown Are 10−6/F° From 77°F (25°C) To Temperatures Indicated A

Alloy 200°F 300°F 500°F 700°F

Anneal Temperature °F (°C) C
Description (93°C) (149°C) B (260°C) (371°C)
T-10 15.1 15.4 (64 %) 15.6 16.6 1450 (788)
T-20 10.9 11.1 (61–4 %) 11.4 11.5 1600 (871)
T-22 10.7 10.75 (64.5 %) 10.9 10.9 1600 (871)
T-18 10.0 10.0 (64 %) 10.2 10.4 2000 (1093)
T-19 11.1 10.8 (64 %) 11.2 11.2 1900 (1038)
T-14 9.8 10.4 (64 %) 10.7 10.9 2000 (1093)
T-25 9.8 9.8 (64 %) 10.0 10.1 1800 (982)
T-50 5.7 5.6 (68 %) 5.7 5.6 1600 (871)
T-45 4.4 4.3 (68 %) 4.1 4.0 1600 (871)
T-42 3.1 3.0 (68 %) 2.9 3.0 1600 (871)
T-40 2.0 2.2 (68 %) 2.2 3.0 1600 (871)
T-39 1.3–1.9 1.4–2.0 1.5–2.0 2.8–3.3 1600 (871)
T-36 0.5–1.1 0.8–1.4 2.0–2.7 3.7–4.4 1600 (871)
T-99 7.4 7.5 (64 %) 7.8 8.2 1300 (704)
A
Linear Thermal Expansion Coefficients shown in English units in the above table can be converted to metric units (10−6/°C) by multiplying the value in the table by
1.8.
B
Required thermal expansion coefficient for each alloy class at 300°F (149°C) are shown with allowable tolerance. Values shown at 200°F (93°C). 500°F (260°C) and
700°F (371°C) are typical and are provided for information only.
C
Anneal temperature is shown for each class of alloy to be treated prior to thermal expansion testing. Anneal to be performed in protective atmosphere (Non-oxidizing)
for minimum one (1) hour, using heating rates up to 1000°F/h, (538°C/h) and cooling at rates 100 to 500°F (38 to 260°C) per hour.

TABLE 3 Nominal Electrical Resistivity of Thermostat Alloys Values Shown Are Ohm Circular Mil/Ft. (Microhm-CM)

NOTE 1—When required, electrical resistivity shall meet the nominal values shown, within a tolerance of 64 %.
NOTE 2—Measurements are to be conducted on samples of uniform dimensions in accordance with Test Method B 63, on fully annealed specimens
representing each heat treat lot. Measurements are to be made at room temperature. 68 to 77°F (20 to 25°C).

Alloy Designation
T-10 T-20 T-22 T-18 T-19 T-14 T-25 T-50 T-45 T-42 T-40 T-39 T-36 T-99
1020 472 461 475 468 660 515 245 330 370 380 425 485 51
(170) (78.5) (77) (79) (78) (110) (85.6) (40.7) (54.8) (61.5) (63.2) (70.6) (80.6) (8.5)

TABLE 4 Maximum Rockwell B Hardness Required For Thermostat Alloys

NOTE 1—Hardness (Rb) shall be measured for representative samples from each heat treat lot processed at the same time.

Alloy Designation
T-10 T-20 T-22 T-18 T-19 T-14 T-25 T-50 T-45 T-42 T-40 T-39 T-36 T-99
65 70 66 73 78 90 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 64

3
 B 753
TABLE 5 Permissible Variations In Dimensions For Thermostat
Alloy Strip A

NOTE 1—Thickness measurements are taken at least 3⁄8 in. (9.52 mm) in from edge of the strip. Tolerances are applicable to measurements at all
locations.

Permissible Variations In Thickness Values Shown Over And Under, in. (mm)
Widths
Specified Thickness 3 / 16 (4.76) to 6 (152.4) to
6 (152.4) 13 (330.2)
0.035 (0.89) to 0.050 (1.27) incl 0.0025 (0.064) 0.0035 (0.089)
0.050 (1.27) to 0.069 (1.75) incl 0.003 (0.08) 0.0035 (0.089)
0.069 (1.75) to 0.100 (2.54) incl 0.003 (0.08) 0.004 (0.10)
0.100 (2.54) to 0.125 (3.18) incl 0.004 (0.10) 0.0045 (0.114)
0.125 (3.18) to 0.161 (4.09) incl 0.0045 (0.114) 0.0045 (0.114)
0.161 (4.09) to 0.187 (4.76) incl 0.005 (0.13) 0.005 (0.13)

Permissible Variations In Width, No. 3 Slit Edge Strip Values

Shown Over And Under, in. (mm)
Widths
Specified Thickness 0.5 (12.7) to 6 (152.4) to 9 (228.6) to
6 (152.4) 9 (228.6) 13 (330.2)
0.068 (1.73) and under 0.005 (0.13) 0.005 (0.13) 0.010 (0.25)
0.099 (2.51) to 0.069 (1.75) incl 0.008 (0.20) 0.010 (0.25) 0.010 (0.25)
0.160 (4.06) to 0.100 (2.54) incl 0.010 (0.25) 0.016 (0.41) 0.016 (0.41)
0.1875 (4.76) to 0.161 (4.09) incl 0.016 (0.41) 0.020 (0.51) 0.020 (0.51)
A
This table is from Specification A 480. For sizes not listed in the table above, refer to appropriate table in Specification A 480.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 754 – 89 (Reapproved 1999)e1

Standard Test Method for

Measuring and Recording the Deviations from Flatness in
Copper and Copper Alloy Strip1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 754; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

e1 NOTE—Editorial changes were made throughout this standard in March 2000.

1. Scope * 2.1.5 wavy edges (waves—edge wave)—a continuous pat-

1.1 This test method describes a procedure for the measure-
ment of distortions in thin metal strip and the application of
these measurements to an equation that will indicate the
deviation from flatness.
1.2 The distortions to be measured in this test method are
dish, wavy edges, buckle, longitudinal corrugation, and her-
ringbone.
1.3 This test method is not intended to include the measure-
ment of coil set or longitudinal curl, camber or edgewise
curvature, or twist.
1.4 This test method is limited to metal strip 0.003 to 0.020
in. (0.08 to 0.50 mm) thick and not more than 6.0 in. (150.0
mm) wide.
1.5 The values stated in inch-pound units are the standard.
The values given in parentheses are for information only.
1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Terminology
2.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
2.1.1 buckle (center bulge or oil can)—alternate bulges and
hollows recurring along the length of a strip with the edges
remaining relatively flat.
2.1.2 dish (cross or transverse bow)—the departure from
flatness across the full width of the strip in the form of a single
arc, excluding burrs.
2.1.3 herringbone—a series of long continuous waves run-
ning at various angles to the rolling direction.
2.1.4 longitudinal corrugation—a condition similar to dish
except that the sense of curvature changes sign at least once
across the width of the strip.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper
and Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.06 on
Methods of Test.
Current edition approved June 30, 1989. Published August 1989. Originally
published as B 754 – 86. Last previous edition B 754 – 89 (1994)e1.
tern of waves or wrinkles along the edges of the strip, with a
relatively flat center portion.
3. Significance and Use
3.1 This test method is intended for measuring distortion in
strip used for making close tolerance parts. Since distortion in
this strip would influence the shape of the part being produced
and cause difficulties in feeding through close-fitting dies and
other manufacturing equipment, it is important that this mate-
rial be flat.
3.2 This test method provides a universal procedure for
measuring the irregularities that cause the deviation from
flatness.
3.3 This test method allows the purchaser and manufacturer
to inspect strip with a standard technique to a mutually agreed
upon and acceptable percentage deviation from flatness.
4. Apparatus
4.1 Surface Plate, to be used as a reference flat. It must have
a large enough surface area to accommodate the maximum size
test specimen. It shall be flat within 0.0002 in. (0.005 mm) per
1 in. (25 mm).
4.2 Micrometer, for measuring metal thickness. It shall be
graduated in 0.0001-in. (0.0025-mm) increments.
4.3 Height Gage, for measuring the height of irregularities.
The arm of this gage must be long enough to extend beyond the
center of the widest strip to be measured. It shall be graduated
in 0.001-in. (0.025-mm) increments.2
4.4 Steel Rule, for measuring the lengths of the irregulari-
ties. It shall be graduated in 0.02-in. (0.50-mm) increments.
5. Test Specimens
5.1 The test specimen shall be the full-finished slit width of
the strip and cut long enough so that measurement will not be
influenced by the distortions referred to in 1.3.
5.2 When cutting specimens, caution must be taken to
prevent additional distortion.
2
An electronic touch sensitive system, which will not distort the sample, has
been found to be acceptable.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 754 – 89 (1999)e1
6. Procedure
6.1 Measure the thickness of the specimen at six locations,
near each corner and at midwidth at each end, to the nearest
0.001 in. (0.03 mm) using the micrometer. The average of these
six readings will be used as T.
6.2 Place the test strip unrestrained on the surface plate. If
the specimen is not flat, compare the irregularities observed
with the illustrations shown in Figs. 1-5 to determine the type
of distortion and how it should be measured.
6.3 Using the height gage, measure the highest point H of
each of the irregularities to the nearest 0.001 in. (0.03 mm). See
Figs. 1-6.
6.4 Using the steel rule, measure the length L between the
points where the outer radii of the most significant irregularity
touches the surface plate, to the nearest 0.02 in. (0.50 mm). See
Figs. 1-7.
6.5 Repeat this procedure as often as necessary to satisfy
quality level requirements, recording each measurement.
7. Calculation or Interpretation of Results
7.1 Apply the values for T, H, and L obtained for each
irregularity to the following equation to determine the percent-
age of deviation from flat.
H2T
Deviation from flat, % 5 L 3 100 (1)
Compare the results to the agreed upon limits. The larger the
percentage, the greater the deviation from flat.
8. Report
8.1 The nominal thickness, width, temper, alloy number,
and form of product should be reported.
8.2 The number and type of distortions measured and the
thickness, height, length, and percent deviation from flatness
for each should be reported.
9. Precision and Bias
9.1 The precision of this test method is dependent upon the
sensitivity of the measuring apparatus.
9.2 This test method has no bias because the values of
deviation from flatness are direct measurements based on the
accuracy of the test apparatus and the observations of the
inspector.
10. Keywords
10.1 flatness measurement; strip flatness

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B05 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue of B 754 - 89
(Reapproved 1994)e1 that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) No technical changes have been made to this standard.

Incidental wording changes have been inserted to comply with
the new Outline of Form.

FIG. 1 Dish

2
 B 754 – 89 (1999)e1

FIG. 2 Wavy Edges

NOTE 1—For illustration only. Section to show measuring.

FIG. 3 Buckle

FIG. 4 Longitudinal Corrugation

3
 B 754 – 89 (1999)e1

FIG. 5 Herringbone

FIG. 6 Measuring Height of Irregularity With Height Gage

FIG. 7 Measuring Length of Irregularity With Steel Rule

4
 B 754 – 89 (1999)e1
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 756 – 00

Standard Specification for

Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten Alloy (UNS
N06110) Rod and Bar1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 756; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Mechanical Properties

1.1 This specification covers nickel-chromium- Yield

Elongation
Condition and Diameter Tensile Strength
molybdenum-tungsten (UNS N06110)2 in the form of hot- or Distance Between Strength (0.2%
in 2 in.
or 50 mm
worked rod and bar and cold-worked rod in the conditions Parallel Surfaces in. min, ksi Offset),
or 4D, min,
shown in Table 1. (mm) (MPa) min, ksi
%
(MPa)
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
Cold-worked rods and
as the standards. The SI units in parentheses are provided for hot-worked rod and bar,
information only. annealed:
Up to 4 (102), incl 95 (655) 45 (310) 60
2. Referenced Documents Over 4 (102) to 10 (254), incl 90 (621)
A
40 (276)
A
50
A
Forging quality (all sizes)
2.1 ASTM Standards: A
Forging quality is furnished to chemical requirements and surface inspection
B 755 Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum- only. No tensile properties are required.
Tungsten Alloys (UNS N06110) Plate, Sheet, and Strip3
B 880 Specification for General Requirements for Chemical
Check Analysis Limits for Nickel, Nickel Alloys, and 4. Ordering Information
Cobalt Alloys3
4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials4
requirements that are necessary for the safe and satisfactory
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
performance of material ordered under this specification.
Determine Conformance with Specifications5
Examples of such requirements include, but are not limited to,
E 1473 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel,
the following:
Cobalt, and High–Temperature Alloys6
4.1.1 ASTM Designation.
3. Terminology 4.1.2 UNS Number.
4.1.3 Section—Rod (round) or bar (square or rectangular).
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
4.1.4 Dimensions—Dimensions including length.
3.1.1 bar—material of rectangular (flats) or square solid
4.1.5 Condition (see Appendix).
section up to and including 10 in. (254 mm) in width and 1⁄8 in.
4.1.6 Finish (Section 8).
(3.2 mm) and over in thickness in straight lengths.
4.1.7 Quantity—Feet, (or metres) or number pieces.
DISCUSSION — Hot-worked rectangular bar in widths 10 in.
4.1.8 Certification— State if certification is required (see
and under may be furnished as hot-rolled plate with sheared or
Section 15).
cut edges in accordance with Specification B, provided the
4.1.9 Samples for Product (Check)Analysis—State whether
mechanical property requirements of Specification B are met.
samples for product (check) analysis should be furnished (see
3.1.2 rod—material of round solid section furnished in
5.2).
straight lengths.
4.1.10 Purchaser Inspection (see Section 13)—If purchaser
wishes to witness test or inspection of material at place of
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on manufacture, the purchase order must so state indicating which
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee test or inspections are to be witnessed.
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2000. Published November 2000. Originally 5. Chemical Composition
published as B 756 – 86. Last previous edition B 756 – 98a.
2
New designation established in accordance with ASTM E527 and SAE J1086, 5.1 The material shall conform to the composition limits
Recommended Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
3
specified in Table 2.
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
4 5.2 If a product (check) analysis is performed by the
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02. purchaser, the material shall conform to the product (check)
6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06. analysis variations per B 880.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 756
TABLE 2 Chemical Requirements TABLE 4 Permissible Variations in Diameter or Distance
Composition Between Parallel Surfaces of Hot-Worked Rod and Bar
Element Limits, Permissible Variations from
% Specified Dimension, in. (mm)A Specified Dimensions, in. (mm)
C 0.15 max + −
Mn 1.0 max
Si 1.0 max Rod and bar, hot-worked:
P 0.015 max 1 (25.4) and under 0.016 (0.41) 0.016 (0.41)
S 0.015 max Over 1 (25.4) to 2 (50.8), incl 0.031 (0.79) 0.016 (0.41)
Cr 28.0 min Over 2 (50.8) to 4 (101.6), incl 0.047 (1.19) 0.031 (0.79)
33.0 max Over 4 (101.6) 0.125 (3.18) 0.063 (1.60)
Cb 1.0 max Rod, rough-turned or ground:
Co (if determined) 1.0 max Under 1 (25.4) 0.005 (0.13) 0.005 (0.13)
Mo 9.0 min 1 (25.4) and over 0.031 (0.79) 0
12.0 max Forging quantity rod:B
Fe 1.0 max Under 1 (25.4) 0.005 (0.13) 0.005 (0.13)
Al 1.0 max 1 (25.4) and over 0.031 (0.79) 0
Ti 1.0 max A
Dimensions apply to diameter of rods, to distance between parallel surfaces of
W 1.0 min squares, and separately to width and thickness of rectangles.
4.0 max B
Spot grinding is permitted to remove minor surface imperfections. The depth
NiA 51.0 min of these spot ground areas shall not exceed 3 % of the diameter of the rod.
Cu 0.50 max
A
Element shall be determined arithmetically by difference.
7.5 Straightness:
7.5.1 The permissible variations in straightness of cold-
6. Mechanical and Other Properties worked rod as determined by the departure from straightness
6.1 Mechanical Properties—The material shall conform to shall be as prescribed in Table 7.
the mechanical properties specified in Table 1. 7.5.2 The permissible variations in straightness of hot-
worked rod and bar as determined by the departure from
7. Dimensions and Permissible Variations straightness shall be as specified in Table 8.
7.1 Diameter, Thickness, or Width—The permissible varia-
8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
tions from the specified dimensions of cold worked rod shall be
as prescribed in Table 3, and of hot-worked rod and bar as 8.1 The material shall be uniform in quality and condition,
prescribed in Table 4. smooth, commercially straight or flat, and free of injurious
7.2 Out-of-Round— Hot-worked rods and cold-worked rods imperfections.
(except forging quality) all sizes, in straight lengths, shall not
9. Sampling
be out-of-round by more than one half the total permissible
variations in diameter shown in Table 3 and Table 4, except for 9.1 Lot Definition:
hot-worked rods 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) in diameter and under, which 9.1.1 A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one heat.
may be out-of-round by the total permissible variations in 9.1.2 A lot for mechanical properties testing shall consist of
diameter shown in Table 4. all material from the same heat, nominal diameter or thickness,
7.3 Machining Allowances for Hot-Worked Materials— and condition.
When the surfaces of hot-worked products are to be machined, 9.1.2.1 Where material cannot be identified by heat, a lot
the allowances prescribed in Table 5 are recommended for shall consist of not more than 500 lb (227 kg) of material in the
normal machining operations. same size and condition except that a single piece weighing
7.4 Length—The permissible variations in length of cold- over 500 lb shall be considered as one lot.
worked and hot-worked rod and bar shall be as prescribed in 9.2 Test Material Selection:
Table 6. 9.2.1 Chemical Analysis—Representative samples from
7.4.1 Rods and bars ordered to random or nominal lengths each lot shall be taken during pouring or subsequent process-
will be furnished with either cropped or saw-cut ends; material ing.
ordered to cut lengths will be furnished with square saw-cut or 9.2.1.1 Product (check) analysis shall be wholly the respon-
machined ends. sibility of the purchaser.
9.2.2 Mechanical Properties—Samples of the material to
provide test specimens for mechanical properties shall be taken
TABLE 3 Permissible Variations in Diameter of Cold-Worked Rod
from such locations in each lot as to be representative of that
Permissible Variations from Specified lot.
Specified Dimensions, Dimension, in. (mm)
in. (mm)
+ − 10. Number of Tests
⁄ (1.6) to ⁄ (4.8), excl
1 16 3 16 0 0.002 (0.05) 10.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per lot.
3⁄16 (4.8) to 1⁄2 (12.7), excl 0 0.003 (0.08)
1⁄2 (12.7) to 15⁄16 (23.8), incl 0.001 (0.03) 0.002 (0.05) 10.2 Tension—One test per lot.
Over 15⁄16(23.8) to 115⁄16(49.2), 0.0015 (0.04) 0.003 (0.08)
incl 11. Specimen Preparation
Over 115⁄16 (49.2) to 21⁄2(63.5), 0.002 (0.05) 0.004 (0.10)
incl 11.1 Tension test specimens shall be taken from material in
the final condition and tested in the direction of fabrication.

2
 B 756
TABLE 5 Normal Machining Allowances for Hot-Worked Material
Normal Machining Allowance,
in. (mm)
Finished-Machined Dimensions for
Finishes as Indicated Below, Distance For Rectangular Bar
in. (mm)A On Diameter, Between Parallel
for Rods Surfaces of On On
Square Bars Thickness Width

Hot-workedB
Up to 7⁄8(22.2), incl ⁄ (3.2)
18 18⁄ (3.2) ⁄ (3.2)
18 ⁄ (4.8)
3 16

Over 7⁄8 to 1 7⁄8(22.2 to 47.6), incl ⁄ (3.2)

18 ⁄
3 16 (4.8) ⁄ (3.2)
18 ⁄ (4.8)
3 16

Over 17⁄8 to 27⁄8 (47.6 to 73.0), incl 3⁄16 (4.8) 1⁄4(6.4) ... 3⁄16 (4.8)

Over 27⁄8 to 313⁄16 (73.0 to 96.8), incl 1⁄4 (6.4) ... ... 3⁄16 (4.8)

Over 313⁄16 (96.8) 1⁄4 (6.4) ... ... 3⁄8 (9.5)

Hot-worked rods, rough-turned or rough

ground:C
15⁄16 to 4 (23.8 to 101.6), incl in diameter ⁄ (1.6)
1 16 ... ... ...
Over 4 to 12 (101.6 to 304.8), incl in ⁄ (3.2)
18 ... ... ...
diameter
A
Dimensions apply to diameter of rods, to distance between parallel surfaces of square bar, and separately to width and thickness of rectangular bar.
B
The allowances for hot-worked material in Table 5 are recommended for rods machined in lengths of 3 ft (0.91 m) or less and for bars machined in lengths of 2 ft (0.61
m) or less. Hot-worked material to be machined in longer lengths should be specified showing the finished cross-sectional dimension and the length in which the material
will be machined in order that the manufacturer may supply material with sufficient oversize, including allowance for out-of-straightness.
C
Applicable to 3 ft (0.91 m) max length.

TABLE 6 Permissible Variations in Length of Rods and Bars

Random Mill Lengths:
Hot-worked—6 to 24 ft (1.83 to 7.31 m) long with not more than 25 weight % between 6 and 9 ft (1.83 and 2.74 m)A
Cold-worked—6 to 20 ft (1.83 to 6.1 m) long with not more than 25 weight % between 6 and 10 ft (1.83 and 3.05 m).
Multiple lengths—Furnished in multiples of a specified unit length, within the length limits indicated above. For each multiple, an allowance of 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) will
be made for cutting, unless otherwise specified. At the manufacturer’s option, individual specified unit lengths may be furnished.
Nominal lengths—Specified nominal lengths having a range of not less than 2 ft (610 mm) with no short lengths allowedB
Cut lengths:
A specified length to which all rods and bars will be cut with a permissible variation of plus 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm), minus 0 for sizes 8 in. (203 mm) and less in diameter
or distance between parallel surfaces. For larger sizes, the permissible variation shall be + 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm), − 0.
A
For hot-worked sections weighing over 25 lb/ft (37 kg/m) and for smooth forged products, all sections, short lengths down to 2 ft (610 mm) may be furnished.
B
For cold-worked rod under 1⁄2in. (12.7 mm) in diameter ordered to nominal or stock lengths with a 2-ft (610-mm) range, at least 93 % of such material shall be within
the range specified; the balance may be in shorter lengths but in no case shall lengths less than 4 ft (1220 mm) be furnished.

TABLE 7 Permissible Variations in Straightness of Cold-Worked TABLE 8 Permissible Variations in Straightness of Hot-Worked
Rods Rods and BarsA
Specified Diameter, Permissible Variations, Permissible Variations,
Finish
in. (mm)A in. (mm) in./ft (mm/m)B
Depth of Chord: Rods and bars, hot-worked 0.050 (4.2)C
0.030 (0.76) per ft Rounds-hot-worked, rough 0.050 (4.2)C
⁄ (12.7) to 2 1⁄2 (63.5), incl
12 (305 mm) of length ground or rough turned
A
Not applicable to forging quality.
A B
Material under 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) shall be reasonably straight and free of sharp Material under 1⁄2in. (12.7 mm) shall be reasonably straight and free of sharp
bends and kinks. bends and kinks.
C
The maximum curvature (depth of chord) shall not exceed the values indicated
11.1.1 All rod and bar shall be tested in full cross section multiplied by the length in feet.

size when possible. When a full cross section size test cannot
be performed, the largest possible round specimen shown in
Test Methods E 8 shall be used. Longitudinal strip specimens Test ASTM Designation
shall be prepared in accordance with Test Methods E 8 for
Chemical analysis E 1473
rectangular bar up to 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm), inclusive, in thicknesses Tension E8
that are too wide to be pulled full size. Rounding procedure E 29

12. Test Methods
12.1 The chemical composition, mechanical, and other
properties of the material as enumerated in this specification
shall be determined in case of disagreement, in accordance
with the following methods:
12.2 For purposes of determining compliance with the
specified limits for requirements of the properties listed in the
following table, an observed value or a calculated value shall
be rounded as indicated below, in accordance with the round-
ing method of Practice E 29:

3
 B 756
Test Rounded Unit for Observed Or 15. Certification
Calculated Value
Chemical composition and tolerance nearest unit in the last right-hand 15.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
(when expressed in decimals) place of figures of the specified producer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished to the
limit. If two choices are possible, purchaser that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested,
as when the digits dropped are
exactly a 5, or a 5 followed only and inspected in accordance with this specification and has
by zeros, choose the one ending been found to meet the requirements. When specified in the
in an even digit with zero de- purchase order or contract, a report of the test results shall be
fined as an even digit.
Tensile strength and yield strength nearest 1000 psi (6.9 MPa) furnished.
Elongation nearest 1 %
16. Product Marking
13. Inspection
13.1 Inspection of the material shall be made as agreed upon 16.1 The following information shall be marked on the
between the manufacturer and the purchaser as part of the material or included on the package, or on a label or tag
purchase contract. attached thereto: The name of the material or UNS, heat
number, condition (temper), this specification number, the size,
14. Rejection and Rehearing gross, tare and net weight, consignor and consignee address,
14.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of contract or order number, or such other information as may be
this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported defined in the contract or order.
to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the tests, the producer or 17. Keywords
supplier may make the claim for a rehearing. 17.1 rod; bar; N06110

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. PROCURABLE CONDITIONS AND FINISHES

X1.1 The various conditions and finishes in which rod and
bar are procurable are as follows:
X1.1.1 Hot-worked, annealed—soft, with a tightly adherent
dark oxide.
X1.1.2 Hot-worked, annealed, and pickled—Same as
X1.1.1 except descaled for removal of mill oxide. Provides for
better surface inspection than does hot-worked, annealed
material and often employed where welding is involved where
removal of mill oxide is desired.
NOTE X1.1—Annealing prior to pickling may be required in order to
reduce the mill oxide since uniform pickling of an unreduced oxide is
difficult.
X1.1.3 Hot-worked, annealed, and rough ground—Similar
to X1.1.1 except rough ground.
X1.1.4 Hot-worked, annealed, and rough-turned—Sim ilar
to X1.1.1 except rough turned with a broad nosed tool similar
to a bar peeling operation and thus may not be straight.
Intended generally for machining where an overhauled surface
is desired, essentially for machined step down shafts or part
machined in short lengths of 3 ft (0.91 m) or less.
X1.1.5 Hot-worked, forging quality—Rough turned and
spot ground, as necessary, for sizes 1 in. (25.4 mm) in
diameter; rough ground and spot ground for sizes under 1 in. in
diameter. Material is selected from heats of known, good hot
malleability.
NOTE X1.2—For sizes 21⁄2 in. (63.5 mm) in diameter and less, cold-
worked rod may be used also for forging by virtue of the fact such rod
have been overhauled for removal of mechanical surface defect prior to
cold-working. In such cases, the user should run pilot forging tests to
ensure himself that such material has the desired hot malleability range.
X1.1.6 Cold-worked, annealed, and pickled hot-worked,
overhauled, cold-worked, annealed, descaled, and straightened.
Annealed for softness and with a dull matte finish.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 755 – 00

Standard Specification for

Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten Alloys (UNS
N06110) Plate, Sheet, and Strip1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 755; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 4.1.1 ASTM designation.

1.1 This specification covers rolled nickel-chromium-
molybdenum-tungsten alloys (UNS N06110)2 plate, sheet, and
strip.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The SI units in parentheses are provided for
information only.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 756 Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-
Tungsten Alloy (UNS N06110) Rod and Bar3
B 880 Specification for General Requirements for Chemical
Check Analysis Limits for Nickel, Nickel Alloys and
Cobalt Alloys3
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials4
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications5
E 1473 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel,
Cobalt, and High-Temperature Alloys6
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 The terms given in Table 1 shall apply.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
requirements that are necessary for the safe and satisfactory
performance of material ordered under this specification.
Examples of such requirements include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2000. Published November 2000. Originally
published as B 755 – 86. Last previous edition B 755 – 98a.
2
New designation established in accordance with ASTM E527 and SAE J1086,
Recommended Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06.
4.1.2 Alloy name or UNS number.
4.1.3 Condition—Table 2 and Appendix X1.
4.1.4 Finish—Appendix X1.
4.1.5 Dimensions—Thickness, width, and length.
4.1.6 Quantity.
4.1.7 Optional Requirements:
4.1.7.1 Sheet and Strip—Whether to be furnished in coil, in
cut straight lengths, or in random straight lengths, and
4.1.7.2 Plate—How plate is to be cut (Table 3 and Table 4).
4.1.8 Certification—State if certification is required (see
Section 15).
4.1.9 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—Whether
samples for product (check) analysis should be furnished (see
5.2).
4.1.10 Purchaser Inspection—If the purchaser wishes to
witness tests or inspection of material at place of manufacture,
the purchase order must so state indicating which tests or
inspections are to be witnessed (see Section 13).
5. Chemical Composition
5.1 The material shall conform to the composition limits
specified in Table 5.
5.2 If a product (check) analysis is performed by the
purchaser, the material shall conform to the product (check)
analysis variations per B 880.
6. Mechanical Properties
6.1 The material shall conform to the mechanical properties
specified in Table 2.
7. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
7.1 Thickness and Weight:
7.1.1 Plate—For plate up to 2 in. (50.8 mm), inclusive, in
thickness, the permissible variation under the specified thick-
ness and permissible excess in overweight shall not exceed the
amounts prescribed in Table 6.
7.1.1.1 For use with Table 6, plate shall be assumed to
weigh 0.303 lb/in.3(8.386 g/cm3).

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 755
TABLE 1 Product Description
Product Thickness, in. (mm) Width, in. (mm)
Hot-rolled plateA ⁄ (4.8)
3 16 and over (Table 4 and Table 5) (Table 7)B
Hot-rolled sheetA 0.018 to 0.250 (0.46 to 6.4), incl (Table 6) (Table 9)
Cold-rolled sheetC 0.018 to 0.250 (0.46 to 6.4), incl (Table 6) (Table 9)
Cold rolled stripC 0.005 to 0.250 (0.13 to 6.4), incl (Table 6) (Table 9)
A
Material 3⁄16 to 1⁄4 in. (4.8 to 6.4 mm), incl, in thickness may be furnished as sheet or plate provided the material meets the specification requirements for the condition
ordered.
B
Hot-rolled plate, in widths 10 in. (254 mm) and under, may be furnished as hot-finished rectangles with shared or cut edges in accordance with Specification B 446
provided the mechanical property requirements of this specification are met.
C
Material under 48 in. (1219 mm) in width may be furnished as sheet or strip provided the material meets the specification requirements for the condition ordered.

TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties for Plate, Sheet, and Strip (All 7.6 Squareness (Sheet)—For sheets of all thicknesses, the
Thicknesses and Sizes Unless Otherwise Indicated) angle between adjacent sides shall be 90 6 0.15° (1⁄16 in. in 24
Yield strengthA Elongation in 2 in. in.) 1.6 mm in 610 mm).
Condition Tensile strength,
(0.2% offset), min, or 50 mm (or 4D)
(Temper) min, ksi (MPa)
ksi (MPa) min,%B
7.7 Flatness—Standard flatness tolerances for plate shall
conform to the requirements of Table 11.
Hot-Rolled PlateC
Annealed 95 (655) 45 (310) 50
Hot-Rolled Sheet 8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
Annealed 95 (655) 45 (310) 50
Cold-Rolled Sheet
8.1 The material shall be uniform in quality and temper,
Annealed 95 (655) 45 (310) 50 smooth, commercially straight or flat, and free of injurious
Cold-Rolled Strip imperfections.
Annealed 95 (655) 45 (310) 50
A
Yield strength requirementc do not apply to material under 0.020 in. (0.51 mm) 9. Sampling
in thickness.
B
Not applicable for thicknesses under 0.010 in. (0.25 mm). 9.1 Lot Definition:
C
Applicable to 2.75 in. (70 mm) thickness and below. 9.1.1 A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one heat.
9.1.2 A lot for mechanical testing shall consist of all
material from the same heat, nominal thickness, and condition.
7.1.2 Plate—For plate over 2 in. (50.8 mm) in thickness, the 9.1.2.1 Where material cannot be identified by heat, a lot
permissible variations over the specified thickness shall not shall consist of not more than 500 lb (227 kg) of material in the
exceed the amounts prescribed in Table 7. same thickness and condition, except for plates weighing over
7.1.3 Sheet and Strip—The permissible variations in thick- 500 lb in which case only one specimen shall be taken.
ness of sheet and strip shall be as prescribed in Table 8. The 9.2 Test Material Selection:
thickness of strip and sheet shall be measured with the 9.2.1 Chemical Analysis—Representative samples from
micrometer spindle 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm) or more from either edge each lot shall be taken during pouring or subsequent process-
for material 1 in. (25.4 mm) or over in width and at any place ing.
on the strip under 1 in. in width. 9.2.1.1 Product (check)Analysis—Product analysis shall be
7.2 Width or Diameter: wholly the responsibility of the purchaser.
7.2.1 Plate—The permissible variations in width or rectan- 9.2.2 Mechanical Properties—Samples of the material to
gular plates and diameter of circular plates shall be as provide test specimens for mechanical properties shall be taken
prescribed in Table 3 and Table 9. from such locations in each lot as to be representative of that
7.2.2 Sheet and Strip—The permissible variations in width lot.
for sheet and strip shall be as prescribed in Table 10.
7.3 Length: 10. Number of Tests
7.3.1 Sheet and strip of all sizes may be ordered to cut 10.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per lot.
lengths, in which case a variation of 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) over the 10.2 Mechanical Properties—One test per lot.
specified length shall be permitted.
7.3.2 Permissible variations in length of rectangular plate 11. Specimen Preparation
shall be as prescribed in Table 4. 11.1 Tension test specimens shall be taken from material in
7.4 Straightness: the final condition (temper) and tested transverse to the
7.4.1 The edgewise curvature (depth of chord) of flat sheet, direction of rolling when width will permit.
strip, and plate shall not exceed 0.05 in. multiplied by the 11.2 Tension test specimens shall be any of the standard or
length in feet (0.04 mm multiplied by the length in centime- subsize specimens shown in Test Methods E 8.
ters). 11.3 In the event of disagreement, referee specimens shall
7.4.2 Straightness for coiled material is subject to agree- be as follows:
ment between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 11.3.1 Full thickness of the material, machined to the form
7.5 Edges: and dimensions shown for the sheet-type specimen in Test
7.5.1 Sheet and strip shall have sheared or slit edges. Methods E 8 for material under 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) in thickness.
7.5.2 Plate shall have sheared or cut (machines, abrasive 11.3.2 The largest possible round specimen shown in Test
cut, powder cut, or inert arc cut) edges, as specified. Methods E 8 for material 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) and over.

2
 B 755
TABLE 3 Permissible Variations in WidthA of Sheared, Plasma Torch-Cut, and Abrasive-Cut Rectangular PlateBC
Permissible Variations in Widths for Widths Given, in. (mm)
Over 30 to Over 72 to Over 108 to Over 144
Up to 30 72 108 144 to 160
Specified Thickness
(760), incl (760 to 1830), (1830 to 2740), (2740 to 3660), (3660 to 4070),
incl incl incl incl
+ – + – + – + – + –
Inches
Sheared:D
3⁄16 to 5⁄16, excl ⁄
3 16 ⁄
18 ⁄
14 ⁄
18 ⁄
38 ⁄
18 ⁄
12 ⁄
18 ... ...
5⁄16 to 1⁄2, excl ⁄
14 ⁄
18 ⁄
38 ⁄
18 ⁄
38 ⁄
18 ⁄
12 ⁄
18 ⁄
58 ⁄
18

1⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl 3⁄8 1⁄8 3⁄8 1⁄8 1⁄2 1⁄8 5⁄8 1⁄8 3⁄4 1⁄8

3⁄4 to 1, excl 1⁄2 1⁄8 1⁄2 1⁄8 5⁄8 1⁄8 3⁄4 1⁄8 7⁄8 1⁄8

1 to 11⁄4, incl 5⁄8 1⁄8 5⁄8 1⁄8 3⁄4 1⁄8 7⁄8 1⁄8 1 1⁄8

Abrasive-cut:E,F
3⁄16 to 11⁄4, incl 18 ⁄ ⁄
18 18 ⁄ ⁄
18 18 ⁄ ⁄
18 18 ⁄ ⁄
18 18 ⁄ ⁄
18

Over 11⁄4 to 23⁄4, incl ⁄

3 16 ⁄
18 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
18 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
18 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
18 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
18

Plasma torch-cut:G
3⁄16 to 2, excl 12 ⁄ 0 12 ⁄ 0 12 ⁄ 0 12 ⁄ 0 12 ⁄ 0
2 to 23⁄4, incl 58 ⁄ 0 58 ⁄ 0 58 ⁄ 0 58 ⁄ 0 58 ⁄ 0
Millimetres
Sheared:D
4.8 to 7.9, excl 4.8 3.2 6.4 3.2 9.5 3.2 12.7 3.2 ... ...
7.9 to 12.7, excl 6.4 3.2 9.5 3.2 9.5 3.2 12.7 3.2 15.9 3.2
12.7 to 19.1, excl 9.5 3.2 9.5 3.2 12.7 3.2 15.9 3.2 19.1 3.2
19.1 to 25.4, excl 12.7 3.2 12.7 3.2 15.8 3.2 19.1 3.2 22.2 3.2
25.4 to 31.8, incl 15.9 3.2 15.9 3.2 19.1 3.2 22.2 3.2 25.4 3.2
Abrasive-cut:E,F
4.8 to 31.8, incl 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2
Over 31.8 to 69.8, incl 4.8 3.2 4.8 3.2 4.8 3.2 4.8 3.2 4.8 3.2
Plasma torch-cut:G
4.8 to 50.8, excl 12.7 0 12.7 0 12.7 0 12.7 0 12.7 0
50.8 to 69.8, incl 15.9 0 15.9 0 12.7 0 12.7 0 12.7 0
A
Permissible variations in width for powder- or inert arc-cut plate shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
B
Permissible variations in machined, powder-, or inert arc-cut circular plate shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
C
Permissible variations in plasma torch-cut sketch plates shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
D
The minimum sheared width is 24 in. (610 mm).
E
The minimum abrasive-cut width is 2 in. (50.8 mm) and increases to 4 in. (101.6 mm) for thicker plates.
F
These tolerances are applicable to lengths of 240 in. (6100 mm), max. For lengths over 240 in., an additional 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) is permitted, both plus and minus.
G
The tolerance spread shown for plasma torch cutting may be obtained all on the minus side, or divided between the plus and minus side if so specified by the purchaser.

12. Test Methods 13. Inspection

12.1 The chemical composition, mechanical, and other 13.1 Inspection of the material shall be made as agreed upon
properties of the material as enumerated in this specification between the manufacturer and the purchaser as part of the
shall be determined, in case of disagreement, in accordance purchase contract.
with the following methods:
Test ASTM Designation 14. Rejection and Rehearing
Chemical analysis E 1473
Tension E8 14.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
Rounding procedure E 29
this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
12.2 For purposes of determining compliance with the to the producer promptly and in writing. In case of dissatisfac-
specified limits for requirements of the properties listed in the tion with the results of the test, the producer or supplier may
following table, an observed value or a calculated value shall make claim for a rehearing.
be rounded in accordance with the rounding method of Practice
E 29. 15. Certification
Rounded Unit for Observed or
Test
Calculated Value 15.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
Chemical composition, and Nearest unit in the last right-hand place of fig-
tolerances (when expressed ures of the specified limit. If two choices are
producer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished to the
in decimals) possible, as when the digits dropped are ex- purchaser that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested,
actly a 5, or a 5 followed only by zeros, and inspected in accordance with this specification and has
choose the one ending in an even digit, with
zero defined as an even digit. been found to meet the requirements. When specified in the
Tensile strength and yield nearest 1000 psi (6.9 MPa) purchase order or contract, a report of the test results shall be
strength
Elongation nearest 1 %
furnished.

3
 B 755
TABLE 4 Permissible Variations in LengthA of Sheared, Plasma-Torch-Cut,B and Abrasive-Cut Rectangular PlateC
Permissible Variation in Length for Lengths Given, in. (mm)
Over 60 Over 96 Over 120 Over 240 Over 360 Over 450
Up to 60 to 96 to 120 to 240 to 360 to 450 to 540 Over 540
Specific Thickness
(1520), incl (1520 to 2440), (2440 to 3050), (3050 to 6096), (6096 to 9144), (9144 to (11 430 to (13 716)
incl incl incl incl 11 430), incl 13 716), incl
Plus Minus Plus Minus Plus Minus Plus Minus Plus Minus Plus Minus Plus Minus Plus Minus
Inches
Sheared:D
3⁄16 to 5⁄16, excl ⁄
3 16 ⁄
18 ⁄
14 ⁄
18 ⁄
38 ⁄
18 ⁄
12 ⁄
18 ⁄
58 ⁄
18 ⁄
34 ⁄
18 ⁄
78 ⁄
18 ... ...
5⁄16 to 1⁄2, excl ⁄
38 ⁄
18 ⁄
12 ⁄
18 ⁄
12 ⁄
18 ⁄
12 ⁄
18 ⁄
58 ⁄
18 ⁄
34 ⁄
18 ⁄
78 ⁄
18 1 ⁄
18

1⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl 1⁄2 1⁄8 1⁄2 1⁄8 5⁄8 1⁄8 5⁄8 1⁄8 3⁄4 1⁄8 7⁄8 1⁄8 11⁄8 1⁄8 13⁄8 1⁄8

3⁄4 to 1, excl 5⁄8 1⁄8 5⁄8 1⁄8 5⁄8 1⁄8 3⁄4 1⁄8 7⁄8 1⁄8 11⁄8 1⁄8 13⁄8 1⁄8 15⁄8 1⁄8

1 to 11⁄4, incl 3⁄4 1⁄8 3⁄4 1⁄8 3⁄4 1⁄8 7⁄8 1⁄8 11⁄8 1⁄8 13⁄8 1⁄8 15⁄8 1⁄8 ... ...
Abrasive-cut:E
3⁄16 to 11⁄4, incl 18 ⁄ ⁄
18 18 ⁄ ⁄
18 18 ⁄ ⁄
18 18 ⁄ ⁄
18 18 ⁄ ⁄
18 18 ⁄ ⁄
18 ... ... ... ...
over 11⁄4 to 23⁄4, incl ⁄
3 16 ⁄
18 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
18 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
18 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
18 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
18 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
18 ... ... ... ...
Plasma-torch-cut:E
3⁄16 to 2, excl 12 ⁄ 0 12 ⁄ 0 12 ⁄ 0 12 ⁄ 0 12 ⁄ 0 12 ⁄ 0 ⁄
12 0 ⁄
12 0
2 to 23⁄4, incl 58 ⁄ 0 58 ⁄ 0 58 ⁄ 0 58 ⁄ 0 58 ⁄ 0 58 ⁄ 0 ⁄
58 0 ⁄
58 0
Millimetres
Sheared:D
4.8 to 7.94, excl 4.8 3.2 6.4 3.2 9.5 3.2 12.7 3.2 15.9 3.2 19.0 3.2 22.2 3.2 ... ...
7.94 to 12.7, excl 9.5 3.2 12.7 3.2 12.7 3.2 12.7 3.2 15.9 3.2 19.0 3.2 22.2 3.2 25.4 3.2
12.7 to 19.0, excl 12.7 3.2 12.7 3.2 15.9 3.2 15.9 3.2 19.0 3.2 22.2 3.2 28.6 3.2 34.9 3.2
19.0 to 25.4, excl 15.9 3.2 15.9 3.2 15.9 3.2 19.0 3.2 22.2 3.2 28.6 3.2 34.9 3.2 41.3 3.2
25.4 to 31.8, incl 19.0 3.2 19.0 3.2 19.0 3.2 22.2 3.2 28.6 3.2 34.9 3.2 41.3 3.2 ... ...

Abrasive-cut:E
4.8 to 31.8, incl 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 ... ... ... ...
over 31.8 to 69.9, incl 4.8 3.2 4.8 3.2 4.8 3.2 4.8 3.2 4.8 3.2 4.8 3.2 ... ... ... ...
Plasma-torch-cut:F
4.8 to 50.8, excl 12.7 0 12.7 0 12.7 0 12.7 0 12.7 0 12.7 0 12.7 0 12.7 0
50.8 to 69.8, incl 15.9 0 15.9 0 15.9 0 15.9 0 15.9 0 15.9 0 15.9 0 15.9 0
A
Permissible variations in length for powder- or inert arc-cut plate shall be agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
B
The tolerance spread shown for plasma torch cutting may be obtained all on the minus side or divided between the plus and minus sides if so specified by the purchaser.
C
Permissible variations in machined, powder- or inert arc-cut circular plate shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
D
The minimum sheared length is 24 in. (610 mm).
E
Abrasive cut applicable to a maximum length of 144 to 400 in. (3658 to 10 160 mm) depending on the thickness and width ordered.
F
The tolerance spread shown for plasma torch-cut sketch plates shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.

TABLE 5 Chemical Requirements

Composition
Element
Limits, %
C 0.15 max
Mn 1.0 max
Si 1.0 max
P 0.015 max
S 0.015 max
Cr 28.0 min
33.0 max
Cb 1.0 max
W 1.0 min
4.0 max
Mo 9.0 min
12.0 max
Fe 1.0 max
Al 1.0 max
Ti 1.0 max
NiA 51.0 min
Cu 0.50 max
A
Element shall be determined arithmetically by difference.

16. Product Marking 17. Keywords

16.1 Each bundle or shipping container shall be marked 17.1 plate; sheet; strip; N06110
with the name of the material or UNS number; condition
(temper); this specification number; the size; gross, tare, and
net weight; consignor and consignee address; contract or order
number.

4
 B 755
TABLE 6 Permissible Variations in Thickness and Overweight of Rectangular Plates

NOTE 1—All plates shall be ordered to thickness and not to weight per square foot. No plate shall vary more than 0.01 in. (0.3 mm) under the thickness
ordered, and the overweight of each lotA in each shipment shall not exceed the amount given in the table. Spot grinding is permitted to remove surface
imperfections, such as spots not to exceed 0.01 in. under the specified thickness.
Permissible Excess in Average WeightB,C per Square Foot of Plates for Widths Given in Inches (Millimetres) Expressed in
Percentage of Nominal Weights
Specified Thickness,
in. (mm) 48 to 60 60 to 72 72 to 84 84 to 96 96 to 108 108 to 120 120 to 132 132 to 144 144 to 160
Under 48
(1220 to (1520 to (1830 to (2130 to (2440 to (2740 to (3050 to (3350 to (3660 to
(1220)
1520), excl 1830), excl 2130), excl 2440, excl 2740), excl 3050), excl 3350), excl 3660), excl 4070), excl
⁄ to 5⁄16 (4.8 to 7.9), excl
3 16 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.5 18.0 ... ...
⁄ to 3⁄8 (7.9 to 9.5), excl
5 16 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.5 18.0 ... ...
3⁄8 to 7⁄16 (9.5 to 11.1), excl 7.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.5 18.0 19.5
7⁄16 to 1⁄2 (11.1 to 12.7), excl 6.0 7.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.5 18.0
1⁄2 to 5⁄8 (12.7 to 15.9), excl 5.0 6.0 7.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.5
5⁄8 to 3⁄4 (15.9 to 19.1), excl 4.5 5.5 6.0 7.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0
3⁄4 to 1 (19.1 to 25.4), excl 4.0 4.5 5.5 6.0 7.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5
1 to 2 (25.4 to 50.8), incl 4.0 4.0 4.5 5.5 6.0 7.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0
A
The term “lot” applied to this table means all of the plates of each group width and each group thickness.
B
The permissible overweight for lots of circular and sketch plates shall be 25 % greater than the amounts given in this table.
C
The weight of individual plates shall not exceed the nominal weight by more than 11⁄4times the amount given in the table and Footnote B.

TABLE 7 Permissible Variations in Thickness for Rectangular Plates Over 2 in. (51 mm) in Thickness

NOTE 1—Permissible variation under specified thickness, 0.01 in. (0.3 mm).
Permissible Variations, in. (mm), over Specified
Thickness for Widths Given, in. (mm)
36 to 60 (915 to 60 to 84 (1520 to 84 to 120 (2130 to 120 to 132 (3050 to 132 (3350 and
Specified Thickness, in. (mm) To 36 (915), excl
1520), excl 2130), excl 3050), excl 3350), excl over)
Over 2 to 23⁄4 (51 to 69.8), incl ⁄
1 16 (1.6) 3⁄32 (2.4) 7⁄64 (2.8) 1⁄8(3.2) 1⁄8 (3.2) 9⁄64 (3.6)

TABLE 8 Permissible Variations in Thickness of Sheet and Strip

(Permissible Variations, Plus and Minus, in Thickness, in. (mm), for Widths Given in in. (mm))
SheetA
Hot-Rolled Cold-Rolled
Specified Thickness,
in. (mm), incl Over 48 to 60 Over 48 to 60
48 (1220) and 48 (1220) and
(1220 to 1520), (1220 to 1520),
Under Under
incl incl
0.018 to 0.025 (0.5 to 0.6) 0.003 (0.08) 0.004 (0.10) 0.002 (0.05) 0.003 (0.08)
Over 0.025 to 0.034 (0.6 to 0.9) 0.004 (0.10) 0.005 (0.13) 0.003 (0.08) 0.004 (0.10)
Over 0.034 to 0.043 (0.9 to 1.1) 0.005 (0.13) 0.006 (0.15) 0.004 (0.10) 0.005 (0.13)
Over 0.043 to 0.056 (1.1 to 1.4) 0.005 (0.13) 0.006 (0.15) 0.004 (0.10) 0.005 (0.13)
Over 0.056 to 0.070 (1.4 to 1.8) 0.006 (0.15) 0.007 (0.18) 0.005 (0.13) 0.006 (0.15)
Over 0.070 to 0.078 (1.8 to 1.9) 0.007 (0.18) 0.008 (0.20) 0.006 (0.15) 0.007 (0.18)
Over 0.078 to 0.093 (1.9 to 2.4) 0.008 (0.20) 0.009 (0.23) 0.007 (0.18) 0.008 (0.20)
Over 0.093 to 0.109 (2.4 to 2.8) 0.009 (0.23) 0.010 (0.25) 0.007 (0.18) 0.009 (0.23)
Over 0.109 to 0.125 (2.8 to 3.2) 0.010 (0.25) 0.012 (0.31) 0.008 (0.20) 0.010 (0.25)
Over 0.125 to 0.140 (3.2 to 3.6) 0.012 (0.31) 0.014 (0.36) 0.008 (0.20) 0.010 (0.25)
Over 0.140 to 0.171 (3.6 to 4.3) 0.014 (0.36) 0.016 (0.41) 0.009 (0.23) 0.012 (0.31)
Over 0.171 to 0.187 (4.3 to 4.8) 0.015 (0.38) 0.017 (0.43) 0.010 (0.25) 0.013 (0.33)
Cold-Rolled StripA,B
Specified Thickness, in. (mm), incl Widths 12 in. (305 mm) and under, plus
and minus
Up to 0.050 (1.27), incl 0.0015 (0.038)
Over 0.050 to 0.093 (1.27 to 2.39) 0.0025 (0.063)
Over 0.093 to 0.125 (2.39 to 3.18) 0.004 (0.11)
A
Measured 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm) or more from edge except for strip under 1 in. (25.4 mm) in width which is measured at any place.
B
Standard sheet tolerances apply for thickness over 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) and for all thicknesses of strip over 12 in. (305 mm) wide.

5
 B 755
TABLE 9 Permissible Variations in Diameter for Circular Plates
Sheared Plate
Permissible Variations Over Specified Diameter
Specified Diameter, in. (mm) for Thickness Given, in. (mm)A
To 3⁄8 (9.5), incl
20 to 32 (508 to 813), excl 1⁄4 (6.4)

32 to 84 (813 to 2130), excl 5⁄16 (7.9)

84 to 108 (2130 to 2740), excl 3⁄8 (9.5)

108 to 140 (2740 to 3580), incl 7⁄16 (11.1)

Plasma Torch-Cut PlateB

Permissible Variations in Specified Diameter
for Thickness Given, in. (mm)C
Specified Diameter, 3 16⁄ to 2 (4.8 to 50.8), 2 to 23⁄4 (50.8 to 69.8),
in. (mm)A Thickness max, excl incl
in. (mm)
Plus Minus Plus Minus
19 to 20 (483 to 508), excl 2 ⁄ (69.8)
34 ⁄
12 (12.7) 0 ⁄ (15.9)
58 0
20 to 22 (508 to 559), excl 23⁄4 (69.8) ⁄
12 (12.7) 0 ⁄ (15.9)
58 0
22 to 24 (559 to 610), excl 21⁄2 (63.5) ⁄
12 (12.7) 0 ⁄ (15.9)
58 0
24 to 28 (610 to 711), excl 21⁄4 (57.3) 1⁄2 (12.7) 0 5⁄8 (15.9) 0
28 to 32 (711 to 812), excl 2 (50.8) 1⁄2 (12.7) 0 5⁄8 (15.9) 0
32 to 34 (812 to 864), excl 13⁄4 (44.5) 1⁄2 (12.7) 0 ... ...
34 to 38 (864 to 965), excl 11⁄2 (38.1) 1⁄2 (12.7) 0 ... ...
38 to 40 (965 to 1020), excl 11⁄4 (31.8) 1⁄2 (12.7) 0 ... ...
40 to 140 (1020 to 3560), incl 23⁄4 (69.8) 1⁄2 (12.7) 0 5⁄8 (15.9) 0
A
No permissible variations under.
B
Permissible variations in plasma torch-cut sketch plates shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
C
The tolerance spread shown may also be obtained all on the minus side or divided between the plus and minus sides if so specified by the purchaser.

TABLE 10 Permissible Variations in Width of Sheet and Strip

Permissible Variations
Specified Thickness, Specified Width, in Specified Width,
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
Plus Minus
Sheet
Up to 0.250 (6.35) All 0.125 (3.18) 0
Strip
Under 0.075 (1.9) Up to 12 (305), incl 0.007 (0.18) 0.007 (0.18)
Over 12 to 48 (305 to 1219), incl 0.062 (1.6) 0
0.075 to 0.100 (1.9 to 2.5), incl Up to 12 (305), incl 0.009 (0.23) 0.009 (0.23)
Over 12 to 48 (305 to 1219), incl 0.062 (1.6) 0
Over 0.100 to 0.125 (2.5 to 3.2), incl Up to 12 (305), incl 0.012 (0.30) 0.012 (0.30)
Over 12 to 48 (305 to 1219), incl 0.062 (1.6) 0
Over 0.125 to 0.160 (3.2 to 4.1), incl Up to 12 (305), incl 0.016 (0.41) 0.016 (0.41)
Over 12 to 48 (305 to 1219), incl 0.062 (1.6) 0
Over 0.160 to 0.187 (4.1 to 4.7), incl Up to 12 (305), incl 0.020 (0.51) 0.020 (0.51)
Over 12 to 48 (305 to 1219), incl 0.062 (1.6) 0

6
 B 755
TABLE 11 Permissible Variations From Flatness of Rectangular, Circular, and Sketch Plates

NOTE 1—Permissible variations apply to plates up to 12 ft (3.66 m) in length, or to any 12 ft of longer plates.
NOTE 2—If the longer dimension is under 36 in. (914 mm) the permissible variation is not greater than 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm).
NOTE 3—The shorter dimension specified is considered the width, and the permissible variation in flatness across the width does not exceed the tubular
amount of that dimension.
NOTE 4—The maximum deviation from a flat surface does not customarily exceed the tabular tolerance for the longer dimension specified.
Permissible Variations from a Flat Surface for Thickness and Widths Given, in. (mm)
Specified To 48 48 to 60 60 to 72 72 to 84 84 to 96 96 to 108 108 to 120 120 to 144 144
Thickness (1220), (1220 to (1520 to (1830 to (2130 to (2440 to (2740 to (3050 to (3660)
excl 1520), excl 1830), excl 2130), excl 2440), excl 2740), excl 3050), excl 3660), excl and over
Inches
⁄ to ⁄ , excl
3 16 14 1⁄
12 2⁄18 2⁄12 23⁄4 31⁄4 31⁄4 ... ... ...
⁄ to 3⁄8, excl
14 13⁄8 11⁄2 17⁄8 21⁄4 23⁄4 27⁄8 31⁄8 33⁄4 ...
3⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl 1 11⁄8 13⁄8 11⁄2 17⁄8 21⁄4 21⁄2 27⁄8 31⁄2
1⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄4 15⁄8 21⁄4 21⁄4 21⁄4 23⁄4
3⁄4 to 1, excl 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄2 15⁄8 17⁄8 2 21⁄4
1 to 2, excl 1 11⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄8 13⁄8 13⁄8 13⁄8 11⁄2 2
2 to 23⁄4, incl 1⁄2 5⁄8 3⁄4 7⁄8 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄2 13⁄4
Millimetres
4.8 to 6.4, excl 38.1 54.0 63.5 69.8 82.6 82.6 ... ... ...
6.4 to 9.5, excl 34.9 38.1 47.6 57.2 69.8 73.0 79.4 95.2 ...
9.5 to 12.7, excl 25.4 28.6 34.9 38.1 47.6 57.2 63.5 73.0 88.9
12.7 to 19.0, excl 25.4 28.6 31.8 31.8 41.3 57.2 57.2 57.2 69.8
19.0 to 25.4, excl 25.4 28.6 31.8 31.8 38.1 41.3 47.6 50.8 57.2
25.4 to 50.8, excl 25.4 28.6 28.6 28.6 34.9 34.9 34.9 38.1 50.8
50.8 to 70.0, incl 12.7 15.9 19.0 22.2 25.4 28.6 31.8 38.1 44.4

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. CONDITIONS AND FINISHES NORMALLY SUPPLIED

X1.1 Scope X1.3 Sheet

X1.1.1 This appendix lists the conditions and finishes in X1.3.1 Hot-rolled, annealed, and descaled.
which plate, sheet, and strip are normally supplied. These are X1.3.2 Cold-rolled, annealed, and descaled or bright an-
subject to change and the manufacturer should be consulted for nealed.
the latest information available.
X1.2 Plate X1.4 Strip
X1.2.1 Hot-rolled, annealed, and descaled. X1.4.1 Cold-rolled, annealed, descaled, or bright annealed.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

7
 Designation: B 757 – 00

Standard Specification for

Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten-Alloys (UNS
N06110) Welded Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 757; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope E 571 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Exami-

1.1 This specification covers welded UNS N061102 pipe in nation of Nickel and Nickel Alloy Tubular Products6
the annealed condition (temper) for general corrosion applica- 2.2 ANSI Standards:
tions. B2.1 Pipe Threads9
1.2 This specification covers pipe sizes in schedules shown B36.19 Stainless Steel Pipe9
in Table 1.
3. Classification
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The SI units in parentheses are provided for 3.1 Class 1—Welded, cold-worked, annealed, and nonde-
information only. structively tested in accordance with 11.4.1.
1.4 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the 3.2 Class 2—Welded, cold-worked, annealed, and nonde-
test method portion, Section 13, of this specification: This structively tested in accordance with 11.4.2.
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, 4. Ordering Information
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health 4.1 Orders for material to this specification shall include the
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita- following information:
tions prior to use. 4.1.1 Alloy Name or UNS number.
4.1.2 ASTM Designation.
2. Referenced Documents 4.1.3 Dimensions:
2.1 ASTM Standards: 4.1.3.1 Pipe size (see Table 1).
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3 4.1.3.2 Length (specific or random).
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to 4.1.4 Class (see 11.4).
Determine Conformance with Specifications4 4.1.5 Quantity (feet or number of pieces).
E 38 Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel-Chromium 4.1.6 Certification—State if certification is required (see
and Nickel-Chromium-Iron Alloys5 Section 16).
E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe 4.1.7 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
and Tubing6 samples for product (check) analysis should be furnished
E 354 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of High- (10.2).
Temperature, Electrical, Magnetic, and Other Similar Iron, 4.1.8 Purchaser Inspection—If purchaser wishes to witness
Nickel, and Cobalt Alloys7 tests or inspection of material at place of manufacture, the
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)8 purchase order must so state indicating which tests or inspec-
tions are to be witnessed (see Section 14).
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on 5. Materials and Manufacture
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee 5.1 Pipe shall be made from flat-rolled alloy by an auto-
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2000. Published November 2000. Originally
matic welding process with no addition of filler metal. Subse-
published as B 757-90. Last previous edition B 757-99. quent to welding and prior to final annealing, the material shall
2
New designation established in accordance with ASTM E527 and SAEJ 1086, be cold-worked in either the weld metal only or both weld and
Recommended Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS). base metal.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
5
Discontinued—see 1989 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
7 9
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05. Available from American National Standards Institute, 11 W. 42nd St., 13th
8
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01. Floor, New York, NY 10036.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 757
TABLE 1 Dimensions of Welded PipeA

NOTE 1—The following table is a partial reprint of Table 1 of the American National Standard for Stainless Steel Pipe (ANSI B36.19).
NOTE 2—The decimal thicknesses for the respective pipe sizes represent their nominal wall dimensions.
Nominal Wall Thickness, in. (mm)
Nominal Pipe Outside Diameter
Size in. in. (mm) Schedule Schedule Schedule
5SA 10S 40S
⁄
18 0.405 (10.29) ... 0.049 (1.25) 0.068 (1.73)
⁄
14 0.540 (13.72) ... 0.065 (1.65) 0.088 (2.24)
3⁄8 0.675 (17.15) ... 0.065 (1.65) 0.091 (2.31)
1⁄2 0.840 (21.34) 0.065 (1.65) 0.083 (2.11) 0.109 (2.77)
3⁄4 1.050 (26.67) 0.065 (1.65) 0.083 (2.11) 0.113 (2.87)
1 1.315 (33.40) 0.065 (1.65) 0.109 (2.77) 0.133 (3.38)
11⁄4 1.660 (42.16) 0.065 (1.65) 0.109 (2.77) 0.140 (3.56)
11⁄2 1.900 (48.26) 0.065 (1.65) 0.109 (2.77) 0.145 (3.68)
2 2.375 (60.33) 0.065 (1.65) 0.109 (2.77) 0.154 (3.91)
21⁄2 2.875 (73.03) 0.083 (2.11) 0.120 (3.05) ...
3 3.500 (88.90) 0.083 (2.11) 0.120 (3.05) ...
31⁄2 4.000 (101.6) 0.083 (2.11) 0.120 (3.05) ...
4 4,500 (114.3) 0.083 (2.11) 0.120 (3.05) 0.237 (6.02)
5 5.563 (141.3) 0.109 (2.77) 0.134 (3.40) ...
6 6.625 (168.3) 0.109 (2.77) 0.134 (3.40) ...
A
Schedules 5S and 10S wall thicknesses do not permit threading in accordance with the American National Standard for Pipe Threads (ANSI B2.1).

TABLE 3 Product (Check) Analysis Chemical Composition

5.2 Pipe shall be furnished with oxide removed. When Variations
bright annealing is used, descaling is not necessary.
Variation Under min or
Specified Limit of Over max of the
6. Chemical Composition Element
Element, % incl Specified
Limit of Elements
6.1 The material shall conform to the composition limits
specified in Table 2. Ni over 40.0 to 60.0 0.35
Cr over 25.0 to 35.0 0.25
6.2 If a product (check) analysis is performed by the Fe up to 1.0 0.05
purchaser, the material shall conform to the product (check) Mo over 9.0 to 12.0 0.15
analysis variations in Table 3. W over 1.0 to 4.0 0.07
C over 0.0 to 0.20 0.01
Mn up to 1.0 0.05
7. Mechanical and Other Requirements Si over 0.25 to 1.0 0.05
P up to 0.04 0.005
7.1 Mechanical Properties—The material shall conform to S up to 0.02 0.003
the mechanical properties specified in Table 4. over 0.02 to 0.06 0.005
7.2 Flattening Test—A section of pipe not less than 4 in. Al over 0.10 to 1.0 0.05
Ti over 0.10 to 0.50 0.03
(102 mm) in length shall be capable of withstanding, without over 0.50 to 1.0 0.04
cracking, flattening under a load applied gradually at room over 1.0 to 2.0 0.05
temperature until the distance between the platens is five times Cb over 0.1 to 1.0 0.04
Cu up to 0.50 0.03
the wall thickness. The weld shall be positioned 90° from the
direction of the applied flattening force.
7.2.1 Superficial ruptures resulting from surface imperfec- TABLE 4 Mechanical Property Requirements
tions shall not be a cause for rejection.
Yield strength Elongation
Tensile strength 0.2 % offset in 2 in. or
Alloy
min, psi (MPa) min, psi 50 mm,
TABLE 2 Chemical RequirementsA (MPa) min, %
Composition Limits,% UNS N06110 95000 (655) 45000 (310) 60
UNS
N06110
Ni 51.0 min 7.3 Nondestructive Test Requirements—Tube shall be sub-
Cr 28.0–33.0 jected to a pressure test or nondestructive electric test at the
Fe 1.0 max
Mo 9.0–12.0
manufacturer’s option (see 13.2).
W 1.0–4.0 7.3.1 Acceptance and Rejection—Material producing a sig-
C 0.15 max nal equal to or greater than the calibration imperfection shall be
Mn 1.0 max
Si 1.0 max
subject to rejection.
P 0.015 max 7.3.1.1 Test signals produced by imperfections that cannot
S 0.015 max be identified or produced by cracks or crack-like imperfections
Al 1.0 max
Ti 1.0 max
shall result in rejection of the pipe, subject to rework and retest.
Cu 0.5 max To be accepted, the material shall pass the same electric test to
Cb 1.0 max which it was originally subjected provided that the dimensional
A
Element may be determined arithmetically by difference. requirements are met.

2
 B 757
7.3.1.2 If the imperfection is judged as injurious, the pipe TABLE 6 Permissible Variations in LengthsA
shall be rejected but may be reconditioned and retested Outside diameter in. Cut length, in. (mm)
providing the dimensional requirements are met. To be ac- (mm) Over Under
Under 2 (50.8) ⁄ (3)
18 0
cepted, retested material shall meet the original electric test 2 (50.8) and over 3⁄16 (5) 0
requirements. A
These permissible variations in length apply to pipe before bending. They
7.3.1.3 If the imperfection is explored to the extent that it apply to cut lengths up to and including 24 ft (7.3 m). For lengths over 24 ft, an
can be identified as noninjurious, the material may be accepted additional over-tolerance of 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) for each 10 ft (3.0 m) or fraction thereof
shall be permissible up to a maximum additional over-tolerance of 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm).
without further test provided the imperfection does not en-
croach on the minimum wall thickness.
10.1.2 A lot for mechanical properties and flattening testing,
8. Dimensions and Permissible Variations shall consist of all material from the same heat, nominal size
8.1 Diameter and Wall Thickness—Outside diameter and (excepting length), and condition (temper).
nominal wall thickness shall not exceed the permissible varia- 10.2 Test Material Selection:
tions prescribed in Table 5. 10.2.1 Chemical Analysis—Representative samples from
8.1.1 Material having a specified wall thickness that is 3 % each lot shall be taken during pouring or subsequent process-
or less of the outside diameter cannot be straightened properly ing.
without a certain amount of ovality resulting in the diameter. 10.2.1.1 Product (check) analysis shall be wholly the re-
The limits to this ovality are stated in Footnote C to Table 5. sponsibility of the purchaser.
8.2 Straightness— Material shall be reasonably straight and 10.2.2 Mechanical Properties and Flattening Testing—
free of bends or kinks. Samples of the material to provide test specimens shall be
8.3 Length—Variations from the specified length shall not taken from such locations in each lot as to be representative of
exceed the amounts prescribed in Table 6. that lot.

9. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance 11. Number of Tests

9.1 The material shall be uniform in quality and temper, 11.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per lot.
smooth, commercially straight, and free of injurious imperfec- 11.2 Mechanical Properties—One test per lot.
tions. 11.3 Flattening—One test per lot.
11.4 Nondestructive:
10. Sampling 11.4.1 Class 1—Each piece in each lot shall be subjected
to one of the following four tests, hydrostatic, pneumatic (air
10.1 Lot Definition: underwater), eddy current, or ultrasonic.
10.1.1 A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one heat. 11.4.2 Class 2—Each piece in each lot shall be subjected
to a leak test and an electric test as follows:
TABLE 5 Permissible Variations in Outside DiameterA and Wall 11.4.2.1 Leak Test—Hydrostatic or pneumatic (air under-
ThicknessB water).
Permissible Variations in Outside 11.4.2.2 Electric Test—Eddy current or ultrasonic.
IPS Diameter, in. (mm)C 11.4.3 The manufacturer shall have the option to test to
+ − Class 1 or 2 and select the nondestructive test methods, if not
⁄
18 0.005(0.13) 0.005(0.13) specified by the purchaser.
1⁄4 0.005(0.13) 0.005(0.13)
3⁄8 0.0075(0.19) 0.0075(0.19) 12. Specimen Preparation
1⁄2 0.0075(0.19) 0.0075(0.19)
3⁄4 0.010(0.25) 0.0075(0.19) 12.1 Tension test specimens shall be taken from material in
1 0.010(0.25) 0.0075(0.19) the final condition (temper) and tested in the direction of
11⁄4 0.010(0.25) 0.010(0.25)
11⁄2 0.015(0.38) 0.010(0.25)
fabrication.
2 0.018(0.46) 0.010(0.25) 12.1.1 Whenever possible, all material shall be tested in full
21⁄2 0.018(0.46) 0.010(0.25) tubular size. When testing in full tubular size is not possible,
3 0.025(0.64) 0.010(0.25)
31⁄2 0.025(0.64) 0.015(0.38)
longitudinal strip specimens shall be used. In the event of
4 0.025(0.64) 0.015(0.38) disagreement when full tubular testing is not possible, a
5 0.025(0.64) 0.020(0.51) longitudinal strip specimen with reduced gage length as
6 0.025(0.64) 0.030(0.76)
contained in Test Methods E 8 shall be used.
A
These permissible variations in outside diameter apply only to material as
finished at the mill before subsequent swaging, expanding, bending, polishing, or 13. Test Methods
other fabricating operations.
B
Wall thickness variation shall not exceed 612 % of the nominal wall thickness. 13.1 The chemical composition, mechanical, and other
C
Ovality is the difference between maximum and minimum outside diameter
measured at any one cross section. There is no additional tolerance for ovality on
properties of the material as enumerated in this specification
material having a nominal wall thickness of more than 3 % of the outside diameter. shall be determined, in case of disagreement, in accordance
On this material, the average of maximum and minimum outside diameter with the following methods:
measurements will fall within the outside diameter tolerance shown in the table
above. An additional ovality allowance of twice the outside diameter tolerance Test ASTM Designation
spreads shown above, applied one half plus and one half minus, is allowed for Chemical analysis E 38, E 354A
material having nominal wall thickness of 3 % or less of nominal outside diameter. Tension E8

3

Rounding proce- E 29
dure
A
Methods E 38 is to be used only for elements not covered by Test Methods
E 354.
13.2 Nondestructive Tests:
13.2.1 Hydrostatic Test—Test each piece at a pressure not
exceeding 1000 psi (6.9 MPa), calculated as follows:
P 5 2St/D, or
S 5 PD/2t
where:
P = hydrostatic test pressure, psi or MPa;
S = allowable fiber stress as follows: UNS N06110-35000
psi (242 MPa);
t = specified wall thickness, in. or mm; and
D = specified outside diameter, in. or mm.
13.2.1.1 Hold the test pressure for a minimum of 5 s.
13.2.1.2 Make visual examination when the material is
under pressure. Examine the full length of material for leaks. If
any pipe shows leaks during the hydrostatic test, reject it.
13.2.2 Pneumatic (Air Underwater) Test—Test each piece
at a pressure of 150 psi (1.05 MPa).
13.2.2.1 Hold the test pressure for a minimum of 5 s.
13.2.2.2 Make visual examination when the material is
submerged and is under pressure. Examine the full length of
material for leaks. If any piece shows leaks during the test,
reject it.
13.2.3 Electric Test—Give each pipe an electric test in
accordance with either Practice E 213 or Practice E 571. For
eddy-current testing, the calibration pipe shall contain, at the
option of the producer, any one of the following discontinuities
to establish a minimum sensitivity level for rejection. The
discontinuity shall be placed in the weld if visible.
13.2.3.1 Drill Hole—Drill a hole, not larger than 0.031 in.
(0.79 mm) in diameter, radially and completely through the
wall, taking care to avoid distortion of the material while
drilling.
13.2.3.2 Transverse Tangential Notch—Using a round file
or tool with a 1⁄4-in. (6.4 mm) diameter, file or mill a notch
tangential to the surface and transverse to the longitudinal axis
of the material. Said notch shall have a depth not exceeding
121⁄2 % of the specified wall thickness of the material or 0.004
in. (0.102 mm), whichever is greater.
13.2.3.3 Longitudinal Notch—Machine a notch 0.031 in.
(0.79 mm) or less in width in a radial plane parallel to the
material axis on the outside surface of the pipe to have a depth
not exceeding 121⁄2 % of the specified wall thickness of the
material or 0.004 in. (0.102 mm), whichever is greater. The
length of the notch shall be compatible with the testing method.
13.2.3.4 For ultrasonic testing, a longitudinal calibration
notch shall be on the outside diameter and inside diameter. The
depth of the notch shall not exceed 121⁄2 % of the specified wall
thickness of the material or 0.004 in. (0.10 mm), whichever is
greater. Place the notch in the weld if visible.
B 757
13.3 For purposes of determining compliance with the
specified limits for requirements of the properties listed in the
following table, an observed value, or a calculated value shall
be rounded as indicated below, in accordance with the round-
ing method of Practice E 29:
Rounded unit for observed or
Test
calculated value
Chemical Composition Nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures
(1) and tolerances (when of the specified limit. If two choices are possible, as
expressed in dec when the digits dropped are exactly a 5 or a 5 fol-
(2)
imals). lowed only by zeros, choose the one ending in an
even digit, with zero defined as an even digit.
Tensile strength, yield Nearest 1000 psi (6.9 MPa)
strength
Elongation Nearest 1 %
14. Inspection
14.1 Inspection of the material shall be agreed upon be-
tween the purchaser and the supplier as part of the purchaser
contract.
15. Rejection and Rehearing
15.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
16. Certification
16.1 Upon request of the purchaser in the contract or order,
a manufacturer’s certification that the material was manufac-
tured and tested in accordance with this specification together
with a report of the test results shall be furnished.
17. Product Marking
17.1 Material—The name or brand of the manufacturer, the
trade name of the material or UNS number, the letters ASTM,
the specification number, heat number, class, and nominal size
shall be legibly stenciled on each piece 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) and
over in outside diameter, provided the length is not under 3 ft
(914 mm). The material marking shall be by any method that
will not result in harmful contamination.
17.1.1 For material less than 1⁄2 in. in outside diameter and
material under 3 ft in length, the information specified in 17.1
shall be either stenciled or marked on a tag securely attached to
the bundle or box in which the pipe is shipped.
18. Packaging and Package Marking
18.1 Each bundle or shipping container shall be marked
with the name or brand of the manufacturer, the trade name of
the material or UNS number, the letters ASTM, the specifica-
tion number, heat number, class and nominal size; gross, tare,
and net weight; consignor and consignee address; contract or
order number; or such other information as may be defined in
the contract or order.
4
 B 757
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 758 – 00

Standard Specification for

Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten Alloys (UNS
N06110) Welded Tube1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 758; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)8

1.1 This specification covers welded UNS N061102 tube in
the annealed condition (temper) for general corrosion applica-
tions.
1.2 This specification covers outside diameter and nominal
wall tube.
1.2.1 The tube sizes covered by this specification are 1⁄8 to 5
in. (3.2 to 127 mm) in outside diameter and 0.015 to 0.148 in.
(0.4 to 3.8 mm), inclusive, in wall thickness.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The SI units in parentheses are provided for
information only.
1.4 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test method portion, Section 13, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
tions prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications4
E 38 Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel-Chromium
and Nickel-Chromium-Iron Alloys5
E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
and Tubing6
E 354 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of High-
Temperature, Electrical, Magnetic, and Other Similar Iron,
Nickel, and Cobalt Alloys7
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2000. Published November 2000. Originally
published as B 758 – 86. Last previous edition B 758 – 99.
2 base metal.
New designation established in accordance with ASTM E527 and SAE J1086,
Recommended Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
5
Discontinued—see 1989 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
7 8
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
E 571 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Exami-
nation of Nickel and Nickel Alloy Tubular Products6
3. Classification
3.1 Class 1—Welded, cold-worked, annealed, and nonde-
structively tested in accordance with 11.5.1.
3.2 Class 2—Welded, cold-worked, annealed, and nonde-
structively tested in accordance with 11.5.2.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material conforming to this specification
shall include the following information:
4.1.1 Alloy name or UNS number.
4.1.2 ASTM designation and year of issue.
4.1.3 Dimensions:
4.1.3.1 Outside diameter and nominal wall thickness.
NOTE 1—Tube produced to outside diameter and minimum wall may be
furnished upon agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
4.1.3.2 Length (specific or random).
4.1.4 Class (see 11.5).
4.1.5 Quantity (feet or number of pieces).
4.1.6 Certification—State if certification is required (Sec-
tion 16).
4.1.7 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State
whether samples for product (check) analysis should be fur-
nished (10.2).
4.1.8 Purchaser Inspection—If purchaser wishes to wit-
ness tests or inspection of material at place of manufacture, the
purchase order must so state indicating which tests or inspec-
tions are to be witnessed (Section 14).
5. Material and Manufacture
5.1 Tube shall be made from flat-rolled alloy by an auto-
matic welding process with no addition of filler metal. Subse-
quent to welding and prior to final annealing, the material shall
be cold-worked in either the weld metal only or both weld and
5.2 Tube shall be furnished with oxide removed. When
bright annealing is used, descaling is not necessary.
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 758
6. Chemical Composition TABLE 2 Product (Check) Analysis Chemical Composition
Variations
6.1 The material shall conform to the composition limits
Variation under
specified in Table 1. min or over
Specified Limit of
6.2 If a product (check) analysis is performed by the Element
Element %
max of the
purchaser, the material shall conform to the product (check) Specified Limit
of Element
analysis variations in Table 2.
Nickel over 20.00 to 30.00, incl 0.25
over 30.00 to 40.00, incl 0.30
7. Mechanical and Other Properties Tungsten over 1.00 to 4.00, incl 0.04
7.1 Mechanical Properties—The material shall conform to Iron over 0.75 to 2.50, incl 0.05
Manganese up to 1.00, incl 0.03
the mechanical properties specified in Table 3. Carbon up to 0.20, incl 0.01
7.2 Flattening Test—A section of tube not less than 4 in. Silicon over 0.25 to 0.50, incl 0.03
(102 mm) in length shall be capable of withstanding, without over 0.50 to 1.00, incl 0.05
Sulfur up to 0.02, incl 0.003
cracking, flattening under a load applied gradually at room Chromium over 25.00 to 35.00, incl 0.25
temperature until the distance between the platens is five times Aluminum over 0.10 to 0.50, incl 0.05
the wall thickness. The weld shall be positioned 90° from the over 0.50 to 1.00, incl 0.10
Titanium over 0.10 to 0.50, incl 0.03
direction of the applied flattening force. over 0.50 to 1.00, incl 0.04
7.2.1 Superficial ruptures resulting from surface imperfec- Columbium + up to 1.0, incl 0.04
tions shall not be a cause for rejection. Tantalum
Molybdenum over 5.0 to 20.0, incl 0.15
7.3 Flange Test—A section of tube shall be capable of Phosphorus up to 0.04, incl 0.005
having a flange turned over at a right angle to the body of the
tube without through-wall cracking. The width of the flange
shall not be less than 15 % of the tube diameter. TABLE 3 Mechanical Property Requirements
7.4 Nondestructive Test Requirements— Tube shall be sub- Yield Strength Elongation
Tensile Strength
jected to nondestructive tests (see 13.2) at the manufacturer’s Alloy min, psi
0.2 % offset in 2 in. or
option. min, psi 50 mm,
(MPa)
(MPa) min, %
7.4.1 For ultrasonic testing, a longitudinal calibration notch UNS N06110 95 000 (655) 45 000 (310) 60
shall be made on the outside diameter and inside diameter. The
depth of the notch shall not exceed 121⁄2 % of the specified wall
thickness of the material or 0.004 in. (0.10 mm), whichever is
To be accepted, the material shall pass the same electric test to
greater. Place the notch in the weld if visible.
which it was originally subjected provided that the dimensional
7.4.2 Acceptance and Rejection—Material producing a sig-
requirements are met.
nal equal to or greater than the calibration imperfections shall
7.4.2.2 If the imperfection is judged as injurious, the tube
be subject to rejection.
shall be rejected but may be reconditioned and retested
7.4.2.1 Test signals produced by imperfections that cannot
providing the dimensional requirements are met. To be ac-
be identified or produced by cracks or crack-like imperfections
cepted, retested material shall meet the original electric test
shall result in rejection of the tube, subject to rework and retest.
requirements.
7.4.2.3 If the imperfection is explored to the extent that it
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
can be identified as noninjurious, the material may be accepted
Product (Check) without further test provided the imperfection does not en-
Analysis Varia-
Composition tions under min croach on the minimum wall thickness.
Element
Limits, % or over max, of
the Specified 8. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
Limit of Element
8.1 Diameter and Wall Thickness—Outside diameter and
C 0.15 max 0.01
Mn 1.0 max 0.05 nominal wall thickness shall not exceed the permissible varia-
Si 1.0 max 0.05 tions prescribed in Table 4.
P 0.015 max 0.005 8.1.1 Material having a specified wall thickness that is 3 %,
S 0.015 max 0.003
Cr 28.0 min 0.25 or less, of the outside diameter cannot be straightened properly
33.0 max 0.25 without a certain amount of ovality resulting in the diameter.
Cb 1.0 max 0.05 The limits to this ovality are stated in Footnote B to Table 4.
Co (if determined) 1.0 max 0.05
Mo 9.0 min 0.15 8.2 Straightness—Material shall be reasonably straight and
12.0 max 0.15 free of bends or kinks.
Fe 1.0 max 0.07 8.3 Length—Variations from the specified length shall not
Al 1.0 max 0.05
Ti 1.0 max 0.05 exceed the amounts prescribed in Table 5.
W 1.0 min 0.10
4.0 max 0.10 9. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
NiA 51.0 min 0.35
Cu 0.5 max 0.03 9.1 The material shall be uniform in quality and temper,
A
Element shall be determined arithmetically by difference. smooth, commercially straight, and free of injurious imperfec-
tions.

2
 B 758
TABLE 4 Permissible Variations in Outside DiameterA and Wall Thickness
Permissible Variations
Specified Outside Diameter, in.
Outside Diameter, in. (mm)B Wall Thickness, %
(mm)
Plus Minus Plus Minus
⁄ (3.2) to 5⁄8 (15.9), excl
18 0.005 (0.13) 0.005 (0.13) 12.5 12.5
5⁄8(15.9) to 11⁄2 (38.1), incl 0.0075 (0.19) 0.0075 (0.19) 10.0 10.0
Over 11⁄2 (38.1) to 31⁄2 (88.9), incl 0.010 (0.25) 0.010 (0.25) 10.0 10.0
Over 31⁄2 (88.9) to 41⁄2 (114.3), incl 0.015 (0.38) 0.015 (0.38) 10.0 10.0
Over 41⁄2 (114.3) to 5 (127), incl 0.020 (0.51) 0.020 (0.51) 12.5 12.5
A
These permissible variations in outside diameter apply only to material as finished at the mill before subsequent swaging, expanding, bending, polishing, or other
fabricating operations.
B
Ovality is the difference between maximum and minimum outside diameter measured at any one cross section. There is no additional tolerance for ovality on material
having a nominal wall thickness of more than 3 % of the outside diameter. On this material, the average of maximum and minimum outside diameter measurements will
fall within the outside diameter tolerance shown in the table above. An additional ovality allowance of twice the outside diameter tolerance spreads shown above, applied
one half plus and one half minus, is allowed for material having nominal wall thickness of 3 % or less of nominal outside diameter.

TABLE 5 Permissible Variations in LengthA 12. Specimen Preparation

Cut Length, in. 12.1 Tension test specimens shall be taken from material in
Outside Diameter
(mm)
in. (mm)
Over Under the final condition (temper) and tested in the direction of
Under 2 (50.8) ⁄ (3)
18 0 fabrication.
2 (50.8) and over 3⁄16 (5) 0 12.1.1 Whenever possible, all material shall be tested in full
A
These permissible variations in length apply to tube before bending. They apply tubular size. When testing in full tubular size is not possible,
to cut lengths up to and including 24 ft (7.3 m). For lengths over 24 ft, an additional
over-tolerance of 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) for each 10 ft (3.0 m) or fraction thereof shall be longitudinal strip specimens shall be used. In the event of
permissible up to a maximum additional over-tolerance of 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm). disagreement when full tubular testing is not possible, a
longitudinal strip specimen with reduced gage length as
contained in Test Methods E 8 shall be used.
10. Sampling
10.1 Lot Definition: 13. Test Methods
10.1.1 A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one heat. 13.1 The chemical composition, mechanical, and other
10.1.2 A lot for mechanical properties, flattening, and flange properties of the material as enumerated in this specification
testing shall consist of all material from the same heat, nominal shall be determined, in case of disagreement, in accordance
size (excepting length), and condition (temper). with the following methods:
10.2 Test Material Selection: Test ASTM Designation
10.2.1 Chemical Analysis—Representative samples from Chemical analysis E 38, E354A
Tension E8
each lot shall be taken during pouring or subsequent process- Rounding procedure E 29
ing. A
Methods E 38 is to be used only for elements not covered by Test Methods
10.2.1.1 Product (check) analysis shall be wholly the re- E 354.
sponsibility of the purchaser. 13.2 Nondestructive Tests:
10.2.2 Mechanical Properties, Flattening, and Flange 13.2.1 Hydrostatic Test—Test each piece at a pressure not
Testing—Samples of the material to provide test specimens exceeding 1000 psi (6.9 MPa), calculated as follows:
shall be taken from such locations in each lot as to be
P 5 2St/D, or (1)
representative of that lot.
S 5 PD/2t (2)
11. Number of Tests
where:
11.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per lot. P = hydrostatic test pressure, psi or MPa;
11.2 Mechanical Properties—One test per lot. S = allowable fiber stress as follows: UNS N06110-35000
11.3 Flattening—One test per lot. psi (242 MPa);
11.4 Flange—One test per lot. t = specified wall thickness in. or mm; and
11.5 Nondestructive Tests: D = specified outside diameter, in. or mm.
11.5.1 Class 1—Each piece in each lot shall be subjected to 13.2.1.1 Hold the test pressure for a minimum of 5 s.
one of the following four tests: hydrostatic, pneumatic (air 13.2.1.2 Make visual examination when the material is
underwater), eddy current, or ultrasonic. under pressure. Examine the full length of material for leaks. If
11.5.2 Class 2—Each piece in each lot shall be subjected to any tube shows leaks during the hydrostatic test, reject it.
a leak test and an electric test as follows: 13.2.2 Pneumatic (Air Underwater) Test— Test each piece
11.5.2.1 Leak Test—Hydrostatic or pneumatic (air underwa- at a pressure of 150 psi (1.05 MPa).
ter). 13.2.2.1 Hold the test pressure for a minimum of 5 s.
11.5.2.2 Electric Test—Eddy current or ultrasonic. 13.2.2.2 Make visual examination when the material is
11.5.3 The manufacturer shall have the option to test to submerged and is under pressure. Examine the full length of
Class 1 or 2 and select the nondestructive test methods, if not material for leaks. If any piece shows leaks during the test,
specified by the purchaser. reject it.

3
 B 758
13.2.3 Electric Test—Give each tube an electric test in
accordance with either Practice E 213 or Practice E 571. For
eddy-current testing, the calibration tube shall contain, at the
option of the producer, any of the following discontinuities to
establish a minimum sensitivity level for rejection. The dis-
continuity shall be placed in the weld if visible.
13.2.3.1 Drilled Hole—Drill a hole, not larger than 0.031-
in. (0.79-mm) diameter radially and completely through the
wall, taking care to avoid distortion of the material while
drilling.
13.2.3.2 Transverse Tangential Notch—Using a round file
or tool with a 1⁄4-in. (6.4 mm) diameter, file or mill a notch
tangential to the surface and transverse to the longitudinal axis
of the material. Said notch shall have a depth not exceeding
121⁄2 % of the specified wall thickness of the material or 0.004
in. (0.102 mm), whichever is greater.
13.2.3.3 Longitudinal Notch—Machine a notch 0.031 in.
(0.79 mm) or less in width in a radical plane parallel to the
material axis on the outside surface of the tube to have a depth
not exceeding 121⁄2 % of the specified wall thickness of the
material or 0.004 in. (0.102 mm), whichever is greater. The
length of the notch shall be compatible with the testing method.
13.3 Rounding Method—For the purpose of determining
compliance with the specified limits for requirements of the
properties listed in the following table, an observed value, or a
calculated value, shall be rounded as indicated below, in
accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29:
Rounded Unit for Observed or
Test
Calculated Value
Chemical composition and toler- Nearest unit in the last right-hand place of
ances (when expressed in deci- figures of the specified limit. If two choices
mals) are possible, as when the digits dropped are
exactly a 5 or a 5 followed only by zeros,
choose the one ending in an even digit, with
zero defined as an even digit.
Tensile strength, yield strength Nearest 1000 psi (6.9 MPa)
Elongation Nearest 1 %
15. Rejection and Rehearing
15.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
16. Certification
16.1 Upon request of the purchaser in the contract or order,
a manufacturer’s certification that the material was manufac-
tured and tested in accordance with this specification together
with a report of the test results shall be furnished.
17. Product Marking
17.1 Material—The name or brand of the manufacturer, the
trade name of the material or UNS number, the letters ASTM,
the specification number, heat number, class and nominal size
shall be legibly stenciled on each piece 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) and
over in outside diameter, provided the length is not under 3 ft
(914 mm). The material marking shall be by any method that
will not result in harmful contamination.
17.1.1 For material less than 1⁄2 in. in outside diameter and
material under 3 ft in length, the information specified in 17.1
shall be either stenciled or marked on a tag securely attached to
the bundle or box in which the tube is shipped.
17.2 Packaging—Each bundle or shipping container shall
be marked with the name or brand of the manufacturer, the
trade name of the material or UNS number, the letters ASTM,
this specification number, heat number, class, and nominal size;
gross, tare, and net weight; consignor and consignee address;
contract or order number; or such other information as may be
defined in the contract or order.

14. Inspection 18. Keywords

14.1 Inspection of the material shall be agreed upon be-
18.1 nickel-chromium-molybdenum-tungsten; UNS
tween the purchaser and the supplier as part of the purchaser
N06110; welded tube
contract.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 759 – 00

Standard Specification for

Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten Alloys (UNS
N06110) Pipe and Tube1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 759; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Mechanical Properties

1.1 This specification2 cover nickel-chromium- Tensile Yield Strength Elongation

Strength, (0.2 % offset), in 2 in. or
molybdenum-tungsten alloys (UNS N06110)3 in the form of Condition min, ksi min, ksi 50 mm (or
cold-worked seamless pipe and tube in the conditions shown in (MPa) (MPa) 4D), min,
Table 1. %
Cold-worked annealed 95 (655) 45 (310) 60
1.2 Hot-worked material is available. Properties and per-
missible tolerances are to be agreed upon between the manu-
facturer and purchaser. 3.1.4 Finish.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded 3.1.5 Dimensions.
as the standard. The SI units in parentheses are provided for 3.1.5.1 Tube—Specify outside diameter and nominal or
information only. minimum wall.
1.4 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the 3.1.5.2 Pipe—Specify standard pipe size and schedule.
test method portion, Section 8, of this specification: This 3.1.5.3 Length—Cut to length or random.
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, 3.1.6 Quantity—Feet (or metres) or number of pieces.
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user 3.1.7 Hydrostatic Pressure Requirements—Specify test
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health pressure if other than required by 8.1.
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita- 3.1.8 Certification— State if certification is required.
tions prior to use. 3.1.9 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
2. Referenced Documents samples for product (check) analysis should be furnished (see
4.2).
2.1 ASTM Standards: 3.1.10 Purchaser Inspection—If purchaser wishes to wit-
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3 ness tests or inspection of material at place of manufacture, the
B 829 Spec for General Req. for Nickel and Nickel Alloys purchase order must so state indicating which tests or inspec-
Seamless Pipe and Tube3 tions are to be witnessed (Section 9).
3. Ordering Information 3.1.11 Small-Diameter and Light-Wall Tube (Converter
Sizes).
3.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
requirements that are necessary for the safe and satisfactory 4. Chemical Composition
performance of material ordered under this specification. 4.1 The material shall conform to the composition limits
Examples of such requirements include, but are not limited to, specified in Table 2.
the following: 4.2 If a product (check) analysis is performed by the
3.1.1 Alloy name or UNS number. purchaser, the material shall conform to the product (check)
3.1.2 ASTM Designation. analysis variations in B 829.
3.1.3 Condition.
5. Mechanical and Other Properties
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on 5.1 Mechanical Properties—The material shall conform to
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee the tensile properties specified in Table 2.
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys. 5.2 Pressure and Nondestructive Electric Test—Each pipe
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2000. Published November 2000.
2 and tube shall be subjected to either a pressure test or the
For ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code application, see related Specifi-
cation SB-167 in Section II of that Code. nondestructive electric test at the manufacturer’s option. The
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04. purchaser may specify which test is to be used.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 759 – 00
TABLE 2 Chemical Requirements turer to an internal hydrostatic pressure of 1000 psi (6.9 MPa)
Element
Composition provided that the fiber stress calculated in accordance with the
Limits, % following equation does not exceed the allowable fiber stress S,
C 0.15 max indicated as follows:
Mn 1.0 max
Si 1.0 max P 5 2St/D (1)
P 0.015 max
S 0.015 max where:
Cr 28.0 min/33.0 max P = hydrostatic test pressure, psi (or MPa),
Cb 1.0 max
W 1.0 min/4.0 max
S = allowable fiber stress, for material in the condition
Mo 9.0 min/12.0 max (temper) furnished as follows: Cold worked annealed:
Fe 1.0 max 30 000 psi (242 MPa)
Al 1.0 max
Ti 1.0 max
t = minimum wall thickness, in. (or mm), equal to the
NiA 51.0 min specified nominal wall minus the permissible minus
Cu 0.50 max wall tolerance, or the specified minimum wall thick-
A
Element shall be determined arithmetically by difference. ness, and,
D = outside diameter of the pipe or tube, in. (or mm).
5.2.1 Any leaking areas may be cut out and the pipe retested 8.1.1 When so agreed upon by the manufacturer and the
as above. purchaser, pipe or tube may be tested to 11⁄2 times the
5.2.2 Test signals produced by imperfections such as the allowable fiber stress given in 8.1.
following, may be judged as injurious or noninjurious, depend- 8.2 Pneumatic Test:
ing on visual observation of their severity or the type of signal 8.2.1 With no foreign material or moisture on the internal
they produce on the testing equipment used, or both. surface, pressurize the tube internally to 150 psi (1034 Pa)
5.2.2.1 Dinges, minimum with uncontaminated compressed air while submerg-
5.2.2.2 Straightener marks, ing it in water of a clarity that permits unobstructed examina-
5.2.2.3 Scratches, tion of the tube.
5.2.2.4 Steel die stamps, and 8.2.2 The tube shall be well-lighted, preferably by under-
5.2.2.5 Stop marks. water illumination.
8.2.3 Correct any evidence of air leakage of the pneumatic
6. Sampling couplings prior to testing.
6.1 Test Material Selection: 8.2.4 After holding the pressure for not less than 5 s after the
6.1.1 Chemical Analysis—Representative samples from surface of the water has become calm, inspect the entire length
each lot shall be taken during pouring or subsequent process- of the tube.
ing. 8.3 Nondestructive Electric Test:
6.1.1.1 Product (check) analysis shall be wholly the respon- 8.3.1 Test each tube with a nondestructive electric test in
sibility of the purchaser. accordance with Practice E 426. It is the intent of this test to
reject tube containing injurious defects.
7. Number of Tests 8.3.2 The calibration tube shall contain, at the option of the
7.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per lot. producer, either of the following discontinuities to establish a
7.2 Tension—One test per lot. minimum sensitivity level for rejection.
7.3 Pressure and Nondestructive Electric Test—Each tube 8.3.3 Drilled Hole— Drill a hole not larger than 0.031 in.
shall be subjected to either a pressure test or the nondestructive (0.79 mm) diameter radially and completely through the tube
electric test at the manufacturer’s option. The purchaser may wall, taking care to avoid distortion of the tube while drilling.
specify which test is to be used. 8.3.4 Transverse Tangential Notch—Using a round tool or
file with a 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) diameter, file or mill a notch
8. Test Methods tangential to the surface and transverse to the longitudinal axis
8.1 Hydrostatic Test— Each pipe or tube with an outside of the tube. Said notch shall have a depth not exceeding 121⁄2 %
diameter 1⁄8in. (3 mm) and larger and with wall thickness of of the specified wall thickness of the tube or 0.004 in. (0.102
0.015 in. (0.38 mm) and over shall be tested by the manufac- mm), whichever is greater.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

2
 B 759 – 00

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 760 – 86 (Reapproved 1999)

Standard Specification for

Tungsten Plate, Sheet, and Foil1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 760; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Chemical Composition/Check Analysis

1.1 This specification covers unalloyed tungsten plate, Composition, Permissable Variations in
Element
max, % Check Analysis, %
sheet, and foil.
C 0.010 60.002
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded O 0.010 + 10 % relative
as the standard. N 0.010 + 0.0005
Fe 0.010 + 0.001
2. Terminology Ni 0.010 + 0.001
Si 0.010 + 0.001
2.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
2.1.1 foil—any product less than 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) in
thickness. requirements of the chemical composition prescribed in Table
2.1.2 plate—any product 3⁄16 in. (4.75 mm) or more in 1.
thickness. 5.2 Check Analysis:
2.1.3 sheet—any product 0.187 in. (4.75 mm) or less in 5.2.1 Check analysis is an analysis made by the purchaser or
thickness, to a minimum of 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) in thickness. the manufacturer of the metal after it has been processed into
finished mill forms, and is either for the purpose of verifying
3. Ordering Information the composition of a heat or lot, or to determine variations in
3.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include the composition within a heat or lot.
the following information: 5.2.2 Check analysis tolerances do not broaden the specified
3.1.1 Material identification and temper designation, heat analysis requirements but cover variations between labo-
3.1.2 Product form (Section 2), ratories in the measurement of chemical content.
3.1.3 Chemical requirements (Table 1), 5.2.3 The manufacturer shall not ship material that is
3.1.4 Tolerances (Section 6, Table 2, and Fig. 1), outside the limits specified in Table 1, with the exception of
3.1.5 Workmanship and quality level requirements (Section oxygen and nitrogen, whose percentage may vary with the
7), method of manufacture.
3.1.6 Packaging (Section 13), 5.2.4 Check analysis limits shall be as specified in Table 1.
3.1.7 Marking (Section 12),
6. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
3.1.8 Certification and reports (Section 11), and
3.1.9 Disposition of rejected material (Section 10). 6.1 The thickness tolerances on tungsten products covered
by this specification shall be as specified in Table 2.
4. Materials and Manufacture 6.2 The width tolerances shall be as agreed upon between
4.1 The various tungsten flat products covered by this the manufacturer and the purchaser. In general, shearing
specification shall be produced using common rolling, forging, tolerance will be6 1⁄16 in. (61.6 mm) and slitting tolerance will
or extrusion equipment, as normally found in primary mill be61⁄32 in. (60.8 mm).
product plants. The ingot metal is consolidated employing 6.3 The length and camber tolerances shall be as agreed
either the powder metallurgy or vacuum-arc-casting process. upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. In general,
length and camber tolerances will show a maximum deviation
5. Chemical Composition of + 1⁄16 in., − 0/ft (1.6 mm/m) of length.
5.1 The tungsten ingots or billets for conversion to finished 6.4 Flatness tolerances on tungsten flat products shall be as
products covered by this specification shall conform to the follows:
Flatness Deviation,
Thickness, in.(mm) max,%
0.005–0.187 (0.13–4.75) 4
1 3/16–5/8 (4.75–15.9) 5
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-10 on
Reactive and Refractory Metals and Alloysand is the direct responsibility of 6.4.1 Determine flatness deviation (Fig. 1) as follows:
Subcommittee B10.04on Molybdenum and Tungsten.
Current edition approved Feb. 28, 1986. Published April 1986. Flatness deviation, % 5 ~H/L! 3 100

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 760
TABLE 2 Permissible Thickness Variations
Specified Width, Specified Thickness, Thickness Tolerance,A
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
12 (305) and under 0.005–0.010 (0.13–0.25), incl 60.001 (60.0254)
over 0.010–0.020 (0.25–0.51), incl 60.002 (60.0508)
over 0.020 (0.51) 610 %
Over 12–24 (305–610), over 0.010–0.025 (0.25–0.64), incl 60.0025 (60.0635)
incl over 0.025 (0.64) 610 %
A
Tolerances for foil shall be as agreed upon between the producer and the purchaser.

Flatness Deviation, % 5 (H/L) x 100

H 5 maximum distance between flat surface and lower surface of sheet.

L 5 minimum distance between highest point on sheet and point of contact with flat surface.
FIG. 1 Plate and Sheet Flatness Tolerances

where: with the methods approved for referee purposes by ASTM.

H 5 maximum vertical distance between a flat reference
surface and the lower surface of the flat product, and
L 5 minimum horizontal distance between the highest
point of the flat product where H is determined, and the
point of contact of the lower surface of the flat product
with a flat reference surface.
7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
7.1 Tungsten plate, sheet, and foil shall be free of injurious
external and internal imperfections of a nature that will
interfere with the purpose for which it is intended.
7.2 Material may be supplied with as-rolled, as-cleaned,
as-machined, or as-ground finish.
7.3 The manufacturer shall be permitted to remove surface
imperfections provided such removal does not reduce the
dimensions below the minimum permitted by the tolerances for
that dimension.
8. Sampling
8.1 Care shall be exercised to ensure that the sample
selected for testing is representative of the material and form
and is not contaminated by the sampling procedure.
Where such methods are not available, methods of analysis as
mutually agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser
shall be employed.
10. Rejection
10.1 Material not conforming to this specification or to
authorized modifications shall be subject to rejection. Unless
otherwise specified, rejected material may be returned to the
manufacturer at the manufacturer’s expense unless the pur-
chaser receives, within 4 weeks of notice of rejection, other
instructions for disposition.
11. Certification
11.1 If requested, the manufacturer shall supply at least
three copies of a report of the chemical analysis of each heat or
powder metallurgy product from the powder lot represented in
the shipment, and reports of the result of tests of each size of
each heat or powder lot to determine properties.
11.2 The report shall include the purchase order number,
heat or powder lot number, this specification number, type and
temper condition, nominal thickness, and quantity and number
of items covered by the shipment.

9. Methods of Chemical Analysis 12. Product Marking

9.1 The chemical composition enumerated in this specifica- 12.1 Unless otherwise specified, each plate or sheet shall be
tion shall in case of disagreement, be determined in accordance legibly and conspicuously marked or tagged with the number

2
 B 760
of this specification, material type and temper condition, heat this specification must be packaged by box or other suitable
or lot number, manufacturer’s identification, and the nominal protective containers and shall be so marked as to indicate the
thickness gage in inches. All markings must withstand ordinary nature of any special handling required.
handling and shall be capable of removal with standard
cleaning solvents. 14. Keywords
12.2 Coiled sheet and foil shall be similarly marked at the
outside end of each coil. 14.1 foil; plate; sheet; tungsten

13. Packaging and Package Marking

13.1 Unless otherwise specified, material purchased under

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 762 – 90 (Reapproved 1999)
Standard Test Method of
Variables Sampling of Metallic and Inorganic Coatings1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 762; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method provides sampling plans that are
intended for use in the inspection of metallic and inorganic
coatings on products for the purpose of deciding whether
submitted lots of coated products comply with the specifica-
tions applicable to the coating.
1.2 The sampling plans are variables plans. In plans of this
type, several articles of product are drawn from a production
lot. A characteristic of the coating on the drawn articles is
measured. The values obtained are used to estimate the number
of articles in the lot that do not conform to a numerical limit,
for example a minimum thickness. The number is compared to
a maximum allowable.
1.3 Variables plans can only be used when the characteristic
of interest is measurable, the test method gives a numerical
measure of the characteristic, and the specification places a
numerical limit on the measured value. It is also necessary that
the variation of the characteristic from article to article in a
production lot be normally distributed (see Appendix X2).
Each article must be tested in the same way (for example,
coating thickness must be measured at the same location, see
X2.7) so that the values from article to article are comparable.
If one or more of these conditions are not met, a variables plan
cannot be used. Instead, an attributes plan must be used. These
are given in Test Method B 602 and Guide B 697.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 602 Test Method for Attribute Sampling of Metallic and
Inorganic Coatings2
B 697 Guide for Selection of Sampling Plans for Inspection
of Electrodeposited Metallic and Inorganic Coatings2
2.2 Military Standards:
1
This method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-8 on Metallic and
Inorganic Coatingsand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B08.10on
General Test Methods.
Current edition approved Oct. 15, 1990. Published November 1990. Originally
published as B 762 – 86. Last previous edition B 762 – 86.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
MIL-STD-105 Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspec-
tion by Attributes3
MIL-STD-414 Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspec-
tion by Variables for Percent Defective3
2.3 Other:
ANSI/ASQC Z1.9-1979 Sampling Procedures and Tables
for Inspection by Variables for Percent Non-
Conformance4
ANSI/ASQC Z1.4-1981 Sampling Procedures and Tables
for Inspection by Attributes4
3. Terminology Definitions
3.1 destructive test—a test that destroys the tested article or
makes it nonconforming to a requirement.
3.2 nondestructive test—a test that neither destroys the
tested article nor makes it nonconforming to a requirement.
3.3 inspection lot—a collection of articles of the same kind
that is submitted to inspection for acceptance or rejection as a
group.
3.4 sample—articles randomly selected from an inspection
lot whose quality is used to decide whether or not the
inspection lot is of acceptable quality.
3.5 standard deviation—a measure of dispersion equal to
the square root of the mean of the squares of the deviations
from the arithmetic mean of the distribution (see 9.2.6).
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 The plans in this test method provide the same protec-
tion as the attributes plans in Table 1, Table 2, and Table 3 of
Test Method B 602 and are interchangeable with them when
the conditions necessary for variables sampling exist. This
method has no plan comparable to Table 4 of Test Method
B 602, because variables plans are subject to an excessive
probability of error when the number of nonconforming
articles in a lot is expected to be approximately 1% or less as
it is for the Table 4 plan. Also for this reason, comparable
variables plans are not given for the smallest lot sizes of Table
1 and Table 2 of Test Method B 602. The plans of Table 4,
Table 1, and Table 2 in Test Method B 602 are described as
Level I, Level II, and Level III respectively. For consistency,
Table 1 and Table 2 of this method are described as Level II
3
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
4
Available from the American National Standards Institute, 11 W. 42nd St., 13th
Floor, New York, NY 10036.
 B 762
TABLE 1 Level II—Sampling Plans for Nondestructive Tests, TABLE 4 Level III—Sampling Plans for Nondestructive Tests,
Standard Deviation KnownA Standard Deviation UnknownA
Inspection 50/50 Inspection 50/50
n k AQL LQL AOQL n k AQL LQL AOQL
Lot Size Point Lot Size Point
91 through 7 1.664 1.1 12 4.8 2.4 51 through 12 1.433 1.7 19 7.6 3.8
280 150
281 through 12 1.649 1.7 10 5.0 2.6 151 through 19 1.410 2.6 16 7.9 3.7
500 280
501 through 16 1.712 1.7 8.2 4.4 2.3 281 through 29 1.470 2.8 13 7.1 3.8
1 200 500
1 201 through 25 1.704 2.1 7.4 4.4 2.5 501 through 48 1.494 3.3 11 6.7 3.8
3 200 1 200
3 201 through 36 1.778 2.0 5.9 3.8 2.2 1 201 through 66 1.551 3.2 9.4 6.0 3.5
10 000 3 200
10 001 through 52 1.829 2.0 4.9 3.4 2.1 3 201 through 102 1.618 3.1 7.7 5.3 3.2
35 000 16 000
Over 35 000 82 1.893 1.9 4.0 2.9 1.9 16 001 through 159 1.680 3.0 6.4 4.6 3.0
A 35 000
The AQL, LQL, 50/50 Point, and AOQL are in percent.
Over 35 000 248 1.717 3.0 5.6 4.3 2.9
A
The AQL, LQL, 50/50 Point, and AOQL are in percent.
TABLE 2 Level II—Sampling Plans for Nondestructive Tests,
Standard Deviation UnknownA
Inspection 50/50
4.3 Generally, thickness is the only characteristic of a
n k AQL LQL AOQL
Lot Size Point coating that meets the conditions of a variables plan given in
91 through 16 1.663 1.0 12 4.8 2.4 1.3. For that reason, the plans in this method are designed to be
280 used when the specification for the characteristic in question is
281 through 29 1.649 1.7 10 5.0 2.6
500
a minimum value, which is the usual case for coating thickness.
501 through 40 1.713 1.7 8.2 4.3 2.2 Variables plans can be used when the limit is a maximum and
1 200 when there are both a minimum and a maximum. Plans for
1 201 through 61 1.704 2.1 7.4 4.4 2.5
3 200
these cases are given in the references.
3 201 through 92 1.778 2.0 5.9 3.8 2.2 4.4 The sampling plans in Table 1 and Table 2 of this
10 000 method are considered to be standard for nondestructive testing
10 001 through 137 1.825 2.0 4.9 3.4 2.0
35 000
and will be used unless the buyer specifies otherwise. Table 5
Over 35 000 223 1.893 1.9 4.0 3.0 1.9 and Table 6 will be used for destructive testing; these plans use
A
The AQL, LQL, 50/50 Point, and AOQL are in percent. smaller samples to reduce the cost of inspection with a
resultant reduction of the ability to distinguish between con-
forming and nonconforming lots.
since they are comparable to Table 1 of Test Method B 602, 4.5 Additional variables plans are given in Appendix X3.
and Table 3 and Table 4 are described as Level III. Also found there are instructions for the calculation of plans for
4.2 The main advantage of a variables sampling plan over needs that are not covered.
an attributes plan is that fewer articles need to be inspected to
obtain the same protection. For example, a sample of 12 using 5. Significance and Use
variables can give the same protection as a sample of 50 using 5.1 Sampling inspection permits the estimation of the over-
attributes. On the other hand, more expensive test methods may all quality of a group of product articles through the inspection
be required to yield the measurements required by variables of a relatively small number of product articles drawn from the
sampling. group.
5.2 The specification of a sampling plan provides purchas-
TABLE 3 Level III—Sampling Plans for Nondestructive Tests, ers and sellers a means of identifying the minimum quality
Standard Deviation KnownA level that is considered to be satisfactory.
Inspection 50/50 5.3 Because sampling plans yield estimates of the quality of
n k AQL LQL AOQL
Lot Size Point a product, the results of the inspection are subject to error.
51 through 6 1.432 1.8 18 7.6 3.8 Through the selection of a sampling plan, the potential error is
150 known and controlled.
151 through 10 1.411 2.7 16 7.9 4.1
280 5.4 Sampling inspection is used when a decision must be
281 through 14 1.470 2.8 13 7.1 3.5 made about what to do with a quantity of articles. This quantity
500
501 through 23 1.492 3.3 11 6.8 3.8
1 200 TABLE 5 Sampling Plans for Destructive Tests, Standard
1 201 through 30 1.551 3.2 9.4 6.0 3.5 Deviation KnownA
3 200
50/50
3 201 through 44 1.618 3.1 7.7 5.3 3.2 Inspection Lot Size n k AQL LQL
Point
16 000
16 001 through 66 1.680 3.0 6.4 4.6 3.0 26 through 1 200 5 1.262 2.3 25 10
35 000 1 201 through 35 000 10 1.411 2.7 16 7.9
Over 35 000 103 1.719 3.0 5.6 4.4 2.9 Over 35 000 14 1.519 2.5 12 6.5
A A
The AQL, LQL, 50/50 Point, and AOQL are in percent. The AQL, LQL, and 50/50 Point are in percent.

2

TABLE 6 Sampling Plans for Destructive Tests, Standard
Deviation UnknownA
50/50
Inspection Lot Size n k AQL LQL
Point
26 through 1 200 9 1.181 2.8 27
1 201 through 35 000 19 1.412 2.5 16
Over 35 000 34 1.497 2.8 12
A
The AQL, LQL, and 50/50 Point are in percent.
may be a shipment from a supplier, articles that are ready for
a subsequent manufacturing operation, or articles ready for
shipment to a customer.
5.5 In sampling inspection, a relatively small number of
articles (the sample) is selected randomly from a larger number
of articles (the inspection lot); the sample is inspected for
conformance to the requirements placed on the articles. Based
on the results, a decision is made whether or not the lot
conforms to the requirements.
5.6 Since only a portion of a production lot is inspected, the
quality of the uninspected articles is not known. The possibility
exists that some of the uninspected articles are nonconforming.
Therefore, basic to any sampling inspection plan is the will-
ingness of the buyer to accept lots that contain some noncon-
forming articles. The number of nonconforming articles in
accepted lots is controlled by the size of the sample and the
criteria of acceptance that are placed on the sample.
5.7 Acceptance sampling plans are used for the following
reasons:
5.7.1 When the cost of inspection is high and the conse-
quences of accepting a nonconforming article are not serious.
5.7.2 When 100 % inspection is fatiguing and boring and,
therefore, likely to result in errors.
5.7.3 When inspection requires a destructive test, sampling
inspection must be used.
5.8 In acceptance sampling by variables, the coating char-
acteristic of each article in the sample is measured. Using the
arithmetic mean of these values, the standard deviation of the
process, and the factor k that is found in the Tables, a number
is calculated (see 9.3). If this number equals or exceeds the
specified minimum, the inspection lot conforms to the require-
ments. If it is less, the lot does not conform. If the standard
deviation of the process is not known, the standard deviation of
the sample is calculated and used.
5.9 The use of a sampling plan involves the balancing of the
costs of inspection against the consequences of accepting an
undesirable number of nonconforming articles. There is always
a risk that a random sample will not describe correctly the
characteristics of the lot from which it is drawn, and that an
unacceptable lot will be accepted or an acceptable lot will be
rejected. The larger the sample, the smaller this risk but the
larger the cost of inspection.
5.10 To understand the risks, consider that if every article in
an inspection lot conforms to its requirements, every article in
the sample will conform also. Such lots will be accepted (Note
1). If only a few articles in an inspection lot are nonconform-
ing, the sample probably will indicate that the lot is acceptable;
but there is a small probability that the sample will indicate that
the lot is unacceptable. The larger the proportion of noncon-
forming articles in an inspection lot, the more likely it will be
B 762
that the sample will indicate that the lot is unacceptable. If
every article in an inspection lot is nonconforming, a sample
will always indicate that the lot is unacceptable.
12 NOTE 1—Throughout this method, it is assumed that no mistakes are
7.9 made in sampling, measurement, and calculation.
6.7
5.11 The probability of accepting an inspection lot that
contains nonconforming items is often described in terms of
the Acceptable Quality Level (AQL) and the Limiting Quality
Level (LQL). The AQL is the quality level that is considered to
be acceptable. The LQL is a quality level that is considered to
be barely tolerable. A sampling plan is selected that has a high
probability of accepting lots of AQL quality and of rejecting
lots of LQL quality. In this method, the AQL given for a
sampling plan is the quality level of lots (expressed as the
percentage of nonconforming articles) that have a 95 % prob-
ability of being accepted. The LQL is the quality level of lots
that have a 10 % probability of being accepted or, in other
words, a 90 % probability of being rejected. The tables in this
method give the AQL and LQL of each plan. They also give the
50/50 point, the quality level of a lot that is just as likely to be
accepted as rejected.
5.12 The disposition of nonconforming inspection lots is
beyond the scope of this method because, depending on the
circumstances, lots may be returned to the supplier, kept and
used, put to a different use, scrapped, reworked, or dealt with
in some other way. An alternative is rectifying inspection in
which rejected lots are screened and used.
5.13 In rectifying inspection, when an inspection lot is
rejected, all of the articles in the lot are inspected and
nonconforming ones are removed. They may be replaced with
conforming articles. The now 100 % conforming lot is ac-
cepted. With this practice, the average quality level for a series
of lots taken as a whole will be better because of the addition
of the 100 % conforming lots. When the incoming lots are of a
good quality level, the average quality level of a series of lots
will be even better when the rejected lots are screened and
resubmitted. When incoming lots are of a poor quality level,
the average quality of a series of accepted lots will again be
good because many of the incoming lots will be rejected and
upgraded. At intermediate quality levels of incoming lots, the
average quality level of a series of accepted lots will again be
improved, but it will not be improved as much as in either of
the above cases; and there will be an intermediate quality level
where the degree of improvement is the least. This improved
quality level is called the Average Outgoing Quality Limit
(AOQL). It is the worst condition that can occur under
rectifying inspection. The tables give the AOQL for each plan.
There is no AOQL for the plans used with destructive tests
because destructive tests cannot be used to screen rejected lots.
NOTE 2—The AOQLs given in the tables are strictly correct only when
the sample is small with respect to the lot. If this is not the case, the correct
AOQL will be smaller than the tabulated value. The correct values are
obtained by multiplying the tabulated values by the following equation:
1 2 sample size/lot size (1)
5.14 Rectifying inspection will substantially increase the
cost of inspection if the incoming lots are much worse than
AQL quality.
3
 B 762
5.15 Rectifying inspection is used only when required by tionship to the other articles. Random sampling procedures are
the purchaser. given in the Appendixes.
6. Ordering Information 9. Calculations
6.1 Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the sam- 9.1 Calculate the arithmetic mean of the measured charac-
pling plans given in Table 1 and Table 2 will be used for teristic by adding the values obtained for the articles and
nondestructive testing, and the plans given in Table 5 and Table dividing the number of articles that were tested using the
6 for destructive testing. following equation:
6.2 When either a nondestructive or a destructive test can be
n
used to inspect an article for conformance to a particular
(
i51
Xi
requirement, the purchaser should specify which test is to be X̄ 5 (2)
used. When a test is neither clearly nondestructive nor destruc- n
tive, the purchaser should specify which it is considered to be. where:
NOTE 3—The nature of a destructive test can be such that the tested X̄ 5 arithmetic mean of the measured values,
article can be reclaimed, for example by stripping and reapplying the Xi 5 measured value,
coating. Other tests can destroy the coating in nonessential locations, in n
5 sum of the measured values, and
which case the article can still be functional. In these instances, the ( Xi
i51
purchaser needs to decide and state whether the tests are to be considered
destructive or nondestructive.
6.3 Rectifying inspection will be used only when specified n 5 number of articles tested.
by the purchaser. When rectifying inspection is used, noncon- 9.2 If the standard deviation of the coating process is
forming articles will be replaced with conforming ones only known, continue the calculations as directed in 9.3. The
when specified by the purchaser. symbol for the standard deviation for the process is s. If the
standard deviation for the process is not known, calculate an
7. Formation of Inspection Lot estimated value from the measurements obtained from the
7.1 An inspection lot shall be formed from articles that are sample as directed in 9.2.1 through 9.2.6. The symbol for this
of the same kind, that have been produced to the same estimated standard deviation is s.
specification, and that have been coated by a single supplier at 9.2.1 Subtract the arithmetic mean from the first measured
one time or at approximately the same time under essentially value using the following equation:
identical conditions. X1 2 X̄ (3)
NOTE 4—These requirements are intended to ensure that the lot is
9.2.2 Calculate the square of the difference obtained in 9.2.1
homogeneous and that variations between articles in the lot are the result
only of the inherent variation of the production process (see Appendix using the following equation:
X1). ~X1 2 X̄!2 (4)
8. Sampling 9.2.3 Repeat 9.2.1 and 9.2.2 for each measured value.
8.1 General—A sample shall be selected randomly from the 9.2.4 Add all of the squares obtained in 9.2.2 and 9.2.3
inspection lot. If the test method to be used is nondestructive, using the following equation:
the sample size shall be that directed in 8.2. If the test method n

is destructive, the sample size shall be that directed in 8.3. ~X1 2 X̄!2 1 ~X2 2 X̄!2 1 ... 1 ~X n 2 X̄! 2 5 ( ~X1 2 X̄!2
i51
(5)
8.2 Nondestructive Tests—For nondestructive testing, the
9.2.5 Divide the sum obtained in 9.2.4 by one less than the
size of the sample shall be that specified for the sampling plan
number of articles that were tested using the following equa-
level that is required by the purchaser. The sampling plans are
tion:
given for Level II in Table 1 and Table 2 and for Level III in
n
Table 3 and Table 4. If the purchaser does not specify the level,
Level II shall be used. The plans in Table 1 and Table 3 shall
( ~Xi 2 X̄!2
i51
n21 (6)
be used when the standard deviation of the coating process is
known. Table 2 and Table 1 plans shall be used when the 9.2.6 Calculate the square root of the value obtained in
standard deviation is not known and must be estimated from 9.2.5 using Eq 6. This is standard deviation, s.

Œ
the sample values. n
8.3 Destructive Tests—For destructive testing, the size of ( ~Xi 2 X̄!2
the sample shall be that specified in Table 5 when the standard i51
s5 n21 (7)
deviation of the process is known and Table 6 when it is not
known. NOTE 5—The following equation can also be used:

Œ
8.4 The sample shall be drawn randomly from the inspec-
tion lot, that is, in a manner that ensures each article an equal ~ (Xi! 2
(X i 2 2
chance of being selected regardless of other considerations n
s5 n21 (8)
such as location in the inspection lot, appearance, quality,
location on a fixture during coating, and chronological rela- 9.3 Using the k that is in the table and the standard deviation

4

from 9.2, calculate the following number when the standard
deviation is known:
X̄ 2 ks
or, calculate the following when the standard deviation is not
known:
X̄ 2 ks (10)
10. Inspection and Lot Classification
10.1 Inspection—Each article in the sample shall be in-
spected as directed in the applicable coating standard.
B 762
10.2 Lot Classification:
10.2.1 The number calculated in 9.3 shall be compared to
(9) the minimum number stated in the coating specification. If the
number in 9.3 equals or exceeds the specified minimum, the lot
conforms to the requirements. If it is less than the specified
minimum, the lot does not conform.
10.2.2 When specified by the purchaser, nonconforming lots
shall be 100 % inspected, and nonconforming articles shall be
removed. When required by the purchaser, the nonconforming
articles shall be replaced with conforming articles.

APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. DRAWING OF SAMPLES

X1.1 The success of acceptance sampling is totally depen-
dent on the sample being drawn from the lot at random.
Random sampling means that the selection of an article for the
sample is totally by chance and that every article in the lot is
equally likely to be selected. If the articles in the inspection lot
are thoroughly mixed, such as barrel-plated articles, a sample
drawn from anywhere in the lot will be random (see X2.5).
Rack-plated articles cannot be sampled this way unless thor-
ough mixing is done before sampling, otherwise a random
sampling procedure must be used. Methods of random sam-
pling are described in the following paragraphs.
X1.2 When random numbers are used to select a sample,
each article in the lot is identified by a different number. If the
units have serial numbers, the serial numbers can be used. The
numbers of the articles that are to be inspected are selected
from a table of random numbers such as Table X1.1. Other
tables of random numbers can be obtained from books on
statistics. Some pocket calculators are designed to generate
random numbers.
X1.3 As an example, assume that a sample of 12 articles is
to be selected from an inspection lot of 80 articles. The articles
are numbered 1 through 80. A pencil is allowed to fall blindly
at some number in Table X1.1. Starting at this point, a coin is
tossed to decide whether to go up or down the column; heads,
up; tails, down. If the pencil falls on column 10, line 11, and
the coin is tails; the decision is to read down the column until
12 numbers are chosen. Take the first two digits in each group
of five digits. The selection of random numbers is made as
follows: the 85’s are rejected because they are over 80, and the
second 06 is rejected because it has already appeared. The
sample then consists of articles numbered 31, 20, 8, 26, 53, 65,
64, 46, 22, 6, 41, and 67.
X1.4 When product items are arranged in an order without
regard to quality, such as articles in a tray, a sample can be
drawn by using the constant interval procedure. Here, a
constant interval is maintained between the items drawn for the
sample. For example, every 9th, 19th, or 24th unit is selected.
The first item drawn from the lot can be determined from the
table of random numbers. All other items are then drawn at a
constant interval following the first item. The constant interval
is determined by dividing the lot size by the sample size.
X1.5 As an example, assume that a lot of 3000 items is to
be inspected. In accordance with Table 3, a sample of 30 items
is to be drawn. The constant interval is 100 (3000 divided by
30). A random number from 1 to 100 is selected either from a
table or by another appropriate method. After the first item is
taken, the remaining items in the required sample are drawn by
selecting every 100th item from the lot until 30 are selected.
X1.6 References (1 through 10)5 give additional informa-
tion and procedures on random sampling.
X1.7 The numbers of a random sample can be generated by
the following microsoft BASIC computer program:
5
The boldface numbers in parentheses refer to the list of references appended to
this method.

5
 B 762
10 REM—Program to select random samples for testing 180 PRINT “MATRIX LOADED”
30 PRINT “ENTER LOT SIZE” 190 PRINT “FOR A LOT SIZE OF ”;L:LPRINT “FOR A LOT SIZE OF”;L
40 INPUT L 200 PRINT “AND A SAMPLE SIZE OF”;S:LPRINT “AND A SAMPLE SIZE OF
50 PRINT “ENTER SAMPLE SIZE” ”;S
60 INPUT S 205 PRINT “THE SAMPLE NUMBERS ARE:”:LPRINT “THE SAMPLE NUM-
70 DIM A(L) BERS ARE:”
80 FOR K 5 1 TO L 210 FOR R 5 1 TO S
90 A(K) 5 0 220 M 5 INT(L*RND(1) + 1)
100 NEXT K 230 IF A(M) 5 0 THEN 220
110 PRINT “MATRIX ZEROED” 240 PRINT A(M);“,”;:LPRINT A(M);“,”;
120 RANDOMIZE PEEK(11) 250 NEXT R
130 FOR K 5 1 TO L 260 PRINT “END OF SAMPLE LIST”:LPRINT “END OF SAMPLE LIST”
140 N 5 INT(L*RND(1) + 1) 270 END
150 IF A(N)<>0 THEN 140
160 A(N) 5 K
170 NEXT K

TABLE X1.1 Table of Random Numbers

Column
Line
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
1 10480 15011 01536 02011 81647 91646 69179 14194 62590 36207 20969 99570 91291 90700
2 22368 46573 25595 85393 30995 89198 27982 53402 93965 34095 52666 19174 39615 99505
3 24130 48360 22527 97265 76393 64809 15179 24830 49340 32081 30680 19655 63348 58629
4 42167 93093 06243 61680 07856 16376 39440 53537 71341 57004 00849 74917 97758 16379
5 37570 39975 81837 16656 06121 91782 60468 81305 49684 60672 14110 06927 01263 54613
6 77921 06907 11008 42751 27756 53498 18602 70659 90655 15053 21916 81825 44394 42880
7 99562 72905 56420 69994 98872 31016 71194 18738 44013 48840 63213 21069 10634 12952
8 96301 91977 05463 07972 18876 20922 94595 56869 69014 60045 18425 84903 42508 32307
9 89579 14342 63661 10281 17453 18103 57740 84378 25331 12566 58678 44947 05585 56941
10 85475 36857 53342 53988 53060 59533 38867 62300 08158 17983 16439 11458 18593 64952
11 28918 69578 88231 33276 70997 79936 56865 05859 90106 31595 01547 85590 91610 78188
12 63553 40961 48235 03427 49626 69445 18663 72695 52180 20847 12234 90511 33703 90322
13 09429 93969 52636 92737 88974 33488 36320 17617 30015 08272 84115 27156 30613 74952
14 10365 61129 87529 85689 48237 52267 67689 93394 01511 26358 85104 20285 29975 89868
15 07119 97336 71048 08178 77233 13916 47564 81056 97735 85977 29372 74461 28551 90707
16 51085 12765 51821 51259 77452 16308 60756 92144 49442 53900 70960 63990 75601 40719
17 02368 21382 52404 60268 89368 19885 55322 44819 01188 65255 64835 44919 05944 55157
18 01011 54092 33362 94904 31273 04146 18594 29852 71585 85030 51132 01915 92747 64951
19 52162 53916 46369 58586 23216 14513 83149 98736 23495 64350 94738 17752 35156 35749
20 07056 97628 33787 09998 42698 06691 76988 13602 51851 46104 88916 19509 25625 58104
21 48663 91245 85828 14346 09172 30168 90229 04734 59193 22178 30421 61666 99904 32812
22 54164 58492 22421 74103 47070 25306 76468 26384 58151 06646 21524 15227 96909 44592
23 32639 32363 05597 24200 13363 38005 94342 28728 35806 06912 17012 64161 18296 22851
24 29334 27001 87637 87308 58731 00256 45834 15398 46557 41135 10367 07684 36188 18510
25 02488 33062 28834 07351 19731 92420 60952 61280 50001 67658 32586 86679 50720 94953
26 81525 72295 04839 96423 24878 82651 66566 14778 76797 14780 13300 87074 79666 95725
27 29676 20591 68086 26432 46901 20849 89768 81536 86645 12659 92259 57102 80428 25280
28 00742 57392 39064 66432 84673 40027 32832 61362 98947 96067 64760 64584 96096 98253
29 05366 04213 25669 26422 44407 44048 37937 63904 45766 66134 75470 66520 34693 90449
30 91921 26418 64117 94305 26766 25940 39972 22209 71500 64568 91402 42416 07844 69618
31 00582 04711 87917 77341 42206 35126 74087 99547 81817 42607 43808 76655 62028 76630
32 00725 69884 62797 56170 86324 88072 76222 36086 84637 93161 76038 65855 77919 88006
33 69011 65795 95876 55293 18988 27354 26575 08625 40801 59920 29841 80150 12777 48501
34 25976 57948 29888 88604 67917 48708 18912 82271 65424 69774 33611 54262 85963 03547
35 09763 83473 73577 12908 30883 18317 28290 35797 05998 41688 34952 37888 38917 88050
36 91567 42595 27958 30134 04024 86385 29880 99730 55536 84855 29080 09250 79656 73211
37 17955 56349 90999 49127 20044 59931 06115 20542 18059 02008 73708 83517 36103 42791
38 46503 18584 18845 49618 02304 51038 20655 58727 28168 15475 56942 53389 20562 87338
39 92157 80634 94824 78171 84610 82834 09922 25417 44137 48413 25555 21246 35509 20468
40 14577 62765 35605 81263 39667 47358 56873 56307 61607 49518 89656 20103 77490 18062
41 98427 07523 33362 64270 01638 92477 66969 98420 04880 45585 46565 04102 46880 45709
42 34914 63976 88720 82765 34476 17032 87589 40836 32427 70002 70663 88863 77775 69348
43 70060 28277 39475 46473 23219 53416 94970 25832 69975 94884 19661 72828 00102 66794
44 53976 54914 06990 67245 68350 82948 11398 42878 80287 88267 47363 46634 06541 97809
45 76072 29515 40980 07391 58745 25774 22987 80059 39911 96189 41151 14222 60697 59583
46 90725 52210 83974 29992 65831 38857 50490 83765 55657 14361 31720 57375 56228 41546
47 64364 67412 33339 31926 14883 24413 59744 92351 97473 89286 35931 04110 23726 51900
48 08962 00358 31662 25388 61642 31072 81249 35648 56891 69352 48373 45578 78547 81788
49 95012 68379 93526 70765 10592 04542 76463 54328 02349 17247 28865 14777 62730 92277
50 15664 10493 20492 38391 91132 21999 59516 81652 27195 48223 46751 22923 32261 85653
51 16408 81899 04153 53381 79401 21438 83035 92350 36693 31238 59649 91754 72772 02338
52 18629 81953 05520 91962 04739 13092 97662 24822 94730 06496 35090 04822 86774 98289
53 73115 35101 47498 87637 99016 71060 88824 71013 18735 20286 23153 72924 35165 43040
54 57491 16703 23167 49323 45021 33132 12544 41035 80780 45393 44812 12515 98931 91202

6
 B 762

TABLE X1.1 Continued

Column
Line
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
55 30405 83946 23792 14422 15059 45799 22716 19792 09983 74353 68668 30429 70735 25499
56 16631 35006 85900 98275 32388 52390 16815 69298 82732 38480 73817 32523 41961 44437
57 96773 20206 42559 78985 05300 22164 24369 54224 35083 19687 11052 91491 60383 19746
58 38935 64202 14349 82674 66523 44133 00697 35552 35970 19124 63318 29686 03387 59846
59 31624 76384 17403 53363 44167 64486 64758 75366 76554 31601 12614 33072 60332 92325
60 78919 19474 23632 27889 47914 02584 37680 20801 72152 39339 34806 08930 85001 87820
61 03931 33309 57047 74211 63445 17361 62825 39908 05607 91284 68833 25570 38818 46920
62 74426 33278 43972 10119 89917 15665 52872 73823 73144 88662 88970 74492 51805 99378
63 09066 00903 20795 95452 92648 45454 09552 88815 16553 51125 79375 97596 16296 66092
64 42238 12426 87025 14267 20979 04508 64535 31355 86064 29472 47689 05974 52468 16834
65 16153 08002 26504 41744 81959 65642 74240 56302 00033 67107 77510 70625 28725 34191
66 21457 40742 29820 96783 29400 21840 15035 34537 33310 06116 95240 15957 16572 06004
67 21581 57802 02050 89728 17937 37621 47075 42080 97403 48626 68995 43805 33386 21597
68 55612 78095 83197 33732 05810 24813 86902 60397 16489 03264 88525 42786 05269 92532
69 44657 66999 99324 51281 84463 60563 79312 93454 68876 25471 93911 25650 12682 73572
70 91340 84979 46949 81973 37949 61023 43997 15263 80644 43942 89203 71795 99533 50501
71 91227 21199 31935 27022 84067 05462 35216 14486 29891 68607 41867 14951 91696 85065
72 50001 38140 66321 19924 72163 09538 12151 06878 91903 18749 34405 56087 82790 70925
73 65390 05224 72958 28609 81406 39147 25549 48542 42627 45233 57202 94617 23772 07896
74 27504 96131 83944 41575 10573 08619 64482 73923 36152 05184 94142 25299 84387 34925
75 37169 94851 39117 89632 00959 16487 65536 49071 39782 17095 02330 73401 00275 48280
76 11508 70225 51111 38351 19444 66499 71945 05422 13442 78675 84081 66938 93654 59894
77 37449 30362 06694 54690 04052 53115 62757 95348 78662 11163 81651 50245 34971 52924
78 46515 70331 85922 38329 57015 15765 97161 17869 45349 61796 66345 81073 49106 79860
79 30986 81223 42416 58353 21532 30502 32305 86482 05174 07901 54339 58861 74818 46942
80 63798 64995 46583 09785 44160 78128 83991 42865 92520 83531 80377 35909 81250 54238
81 82486 84846 99254 67632 43218 50076 21361 64816 51202 88124 41870 52689 51275 83556
82 21885 32906 92431 09060 64297 51674 64126 62570 26123 05155 59194 52799 28225 85762
83 60336 98782 07408 53458 13564 59089 26445 29789 85205 41001 12535 12133 14645 23541
84 43937 46891 24010 25560 86355 33941 25786 54990 71899 15475 95434 98227 21824 19585
85 97656 63175 89303 16275 07100 92063 21942 18611 47348 20203 18534 03862 78095 50136
86 03299 01221 05418 38982 55758 92237 26759 86367 21216 98442 08303 56613 91511 75928
87 79626 06486 03574 17668 07785 76020 79924 25651 83325 88428 85076 72811 22717 50585
88 85636 68335 47539 03129 65651 11977 02510 26113 99447 68645 34327 15152 55230 93448
89 18039 14367 61337 06117 12143 46609 32989 74014 64708 00533 35398 58408 13261 47908
90 08362 15656 60627 36478 65648 16764 53412 09013 07832 41574 17639 82163 60859 75567
91 79556 29068 04142 16268 15387 12856 66227 38358 22478 73373 88732 09443 82558 05250
92 92608 82674 27072 32534 17075 27698 98204 63863 11951 34648 88022 56148 34925 57031
93 23982 25835 40055 67006 12293 02753 14827 23235 35071 99704 37543 11601 35503 85171
94 09915 96306 05908 97901 28395 14186 00821 80703 70426 75647 76310 88717 37890 40129
95 59037 33300 26695 62247 69927 76123 50842 43834 86654 70959 79725 93872 28117 19233
96 42488 78077 69882 61657 34136 79180 97526 43092 04098 73571 80799 76536 71255 64239
97 46764 86273 63003 93017 31204 36692 40202 35275 57306 55543 53203 18098 47625 88684
98 03237 45430 55417 63282 90816 17349 88298 90183 36600 78406 06216 95787 42579 90730
99 86591 81482 52667 61582 14972 90053 89534 76036 49199 43716 97548 04379 46370 28672
100 38534 01715 94964 87288 65680 43772 39560 12918 86537 62738 19636 51132 25739 56947

X2. NORMAL DISTRIBUTION

X2.1 Articles produced by a manufacturing process are variation and, thus, of little consequence.
never identical. Minor variations in the process occur that
X2.2 Along the horizontal, X axis in Fig. X2.1 is plotted the
affect the characteristics of the articles. Such variations often
numerical value of the characteristic that is being considered,
occur at random and tend to cancel each other out. Under these
for example, the thickness of the coating. The area beneath the
conditions, the articles are quite similar to each other. Less
curve and above the X axis represents all of the articles in a
often, the chance variations do not cancel out as expected and
production lot. The arithmetic mean thickness is X̄, which is at
some articles will differ from the typical. As a result, it often is
the middle of the curve. The vertical line at X̄ divides the curve
the case that most of the articles produced by a controlled
in half so that half of the area is to the left, thicknesses less than
process are closely grouped around an average condition, while
the mean, and half is to the right, thicknesses greater than the
smaller numbers deviate more from the average, and the
mean. It can be seen that if a plating thickness specification is
greater the deviation the fewer articles there are. Frequently
given as a minimum value, and if the mean thickness of the lot
this distribution of the articles can be closely described by a
equals the specification value, the thickness of the plating on
mathematical equation which, when plotted, gives the bell-
half of the parts will be below the specification limit; that is,
shaped curve shown in Fig. X2.1. This is called a normal or
half of the article will be nonconforming. Usually, it is required
Gaussian distribution.
that most of the articles be conforming, which means that the
NOTE X2.1—There is also a random variation introduced by the mean thickness has to exceed the specified minimum. The
measurement method. This normally is small relative to the product standard deviation can be used to determine by how much.

7
 B 762

FIG. X2.1 Normal Distribution

X2.3 If the mean thickness is one standard deviation higher
than the specified minimum thickness, the thickness will be
less than the specified minimum on 16 % of the articles. If the
mean is two standard deviations above the specification value,
there will be about 2.3 % nonconforming articles in the lot.
Hence, if the standard deviation of the process is known, a
mean thickness can be calculated that will ensure that no more
than a given percentage (for example, the AQL) of a lot will be
nonconforming. Once a lot of articles is produced, a random
sample of the articles can be inspected and their mean
calculated. If the mean is equal to or larger than the required
mean, it is known that the percentage of nonconforming
articles in the lot is no more than the AQL. Actually, the mean
of the sample can be different from that of the lot. In variables
plans, an additional factor is placed in the calculation to allow
for this. In processes where the standard deviation is not known
and the sample standard deviation is used in the calculation,
there is another potential error. This is guarded against by using
larger samples.
X2.4 It is important to remember that variables sampling
plans are based on the normal curve. If the product of a
manufacturing process is not distributed normally, the use of a
variables plan based on the normal curve will give invalid
results. Therefore, statistical tests should be made of a process
to confirm that the product characteristic is approximately
normally distributed before a variables plan is used in the
sampling inspection of the product. Tests for normality are
described in Ref. (9).
X2.5 The distribution of plating thickness on barrel-plated
articles tends to be normal, provided good barrel plating
practices are observed. A production lot that consists of several
barrel loads will also be normal if the loads are produced under
essentially the same conditions. But if two or more loads that
have different average thicknesses are mixed, the mixed lot
may not conform to the normal distribution.
X2.6 The distribution of coating thickness on products that
are processed on racks may or may not be normal. Tests of
normality are required to determine if a variables plan can be
used in these cases.
X2.7 The thickness of the coating must be measured at the
same location on every article in the sample. If this is not done,
the variation in thickness that occurs naturally over the surface
of a product will result in invalid values for the average and the
standard deviation.

X3. ADDITIONAL SAMPLING PLANS

TABLE X3.1 Sampling Plans, Standard Deviation Known

AQL, %
LQL, 1 2 5 10
%
50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50
n k AOQL n k AOQL n k AOQL n k AOQL
Point Point Point Point
5 18 1.943 2.6 1.4 51 1.824 3.4 2.1 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
10 8 1.740 4.1 2.0 14 1.619 5.3 2.8 65 1.441 7.5 4.9 ... ... ... ...
15 5 1.600 5.5 2.8 8 1.481 6.9 3.5 23 1.303 9.6 5.6 142 1.144 13 9.5
20 4 1.493 6.8 3.4 6 1.373 8.5 4.3 13 1.193 12 6.3 44 1.034 15 9.9
25 3 1.396 8.1 4.2 5 1.283 10 5.0 7 1.009 14 6.9 23 0.940 17 11

8
 B 762
X3.1 Table X3.1 and Table X3.2 provide additional sam- X3.2 The plans in Table X3.1 and Table X3.2 provide
pling plans that may be useful in situations where the standard AQL’s of 1, 2, 5, and 10 % and LQL’s of 5, 10, 15, 20, and
plans of Tables 2-6 are unsuitable. The plans of Table X3.1 are 25 %. To select a plan, go to the table, find the column headed
to be used when the standard deviation of the process is known. with the desired AQL, read down to the row headed by the
The plans of Table X3.2 are to be used when the standard desired LQL, and note the sample size (n) and k.
deviation is not known.
TABLE X3.2 Sampling Plans, Standard Deviation Unknown
AQL, %
LQL, 1 2 5 10
%
50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50
n k AOQL n k AOQL n k AOQL n k AOQL
Point Point Point Point
5 53 1.943 2.6 1.4 136 1.824 3.4 2.1 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
10 20 1.739 4.1 2.1 33 1.620 5.3 2.7 132 1.441 7.5 4.9 ... ... ... ...
15 14 1.601 5.5 2.7 17 1.482 6.9 3.5 43 1.303 9.6 5.6 236 1.144 13 9.5
20 8 1.492 6.8 3.5 11 1.372 8.5 4.3 23 1.193 12 6.3 68 1.034 15 10
25 6 1.398 8.1 4.3 8 1.278 10 5.0 15 1.099 14 7.1 34 0.940 17 11

X4. CALCULATIONS OF VARIABLES SAMPLING PLANS

X4.1 The equations in this appendix can be used to X4.3 Using z1 and z2, calculate n and k. Round the value of
calculate the sample size ( n) and the k value of variables n to the nearest whole number. Use Eq X4.1 and Eq X4.2 when
sampling plans where: the standard deviation is known and Eq X4.3 and Eq X4.4
X4.1.1 The coating requirement is stated as a lower limit; when the standard deviation is not known. The equations are
X4.1.2 The probability of accepting product of AQL quality derived in Ref (9), Chapters 11 and 12.
is 0.95 (95 %); and X4.3.1 Standard deviation known:
X4.1.3 The probability of accepting product of LQL quality h 5 8.564/~z1 2 z 2!2 (X4.1)
is 0.10 (10 %).
k 5 ~=n~z1 1 z 2! 2 0.3633!/2=n (X4.2)
X4.2 First, select the AQL and LQL values. Next, go to Use the rounded value of n to calculate k.
Table X4.1 and find the values of z that correspond to the AQL X4.3.2 Standard deviation unknown:
and LQL. For AQL’s and LQL’s that are not given in the table, k 5 0.4379 z1 1 0.5621 z 2 (X4.3)
the z’s can be calculated by interpolation. The z corresponding 2 2
to the AQL is z1, and the one corresponding to the LQL is z2. n 5 4.2822 ~2 1 k !/~z1 2 z 2! (X4.4)
X4.4 Sample calculations are as follows:
Desired AQL 5 2 %
TABLE X4.1 Values of z Used in Designing Variables Sampling
Plans Desired LQL 5 10 %
AQL or LQL
Standard Deviation of Process Known
z Select z’s from Table X4.1
%Nonconforming
1 2.326
For AQL of 2 % z1 5 2.054
2 2.054 For LQL of 10 % z2 5 1.282
3 1.889
4 1.751 X4.4.1 Calculate n as follows:
5 1.645
6 1.555 n 5 8.564/~2.054 5 1.282! 2 5 14.4 (X4.5)
7 1.476 Round to 14.
8 1.405
9 1.341 X4.4.2 Calculate k as follows:
10 1.282
12.5 1.150
k 5 ~=14 ~2.054 1 1.282! 2 0.3633!/2=14 5 1.619 (X4.6)
15 1.036 X4.4.3 Note that these are the values of n and k given in
20 0.8416
25 0.6745 Table X4.1 for an AQL of 2 %, an LQL of 10 %, and a known
standard deviation.

9
 B 762
REFERENCES

(1) Military Handbook MIL-HDBK-53, “Guide for Sampling Inspection.”
(2) General Services Administration Handbook FSS P4440.1, Guide for
the Use of MIL-STD-105.
(3) Duncan, Acheson J., “Acceptance Sampling Plans,” Standardization
News, ASTM, Vol 3, No. 9, September 1975, pp. 8–9.
(4) Duncan, Acheson, J., “An Introduction to Acceptance Sampling
Plans,” ibid, pp. 10–14.
(5) Duncan, Acheson, J., “What Sampling Plan to Use,” ibid, pp. 15–19.
(6) Reynolds, John, H., “Sampling Plans for Mandatory Standards,”
Standardization News, ASTM, Vol 5, No. 3, March 1977, pp. 8–12.
(7) Dodge, H. F., and Romig, H. G., Sampling Inspection Tables, Single
and Double Sampling, Second Edition, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, NY, 1959.
(8) Bowker, A. H., and Goode, H. P., Sampling Inspection by Variables,
McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York, NY, 1952.
(9) Duncan, Acheson, J., Quality Control and Industrial Statistics, 4th
Edition, Richard D. Irwin, Inc., Homewood, IL, 1976.
(10) Manual on Presentation of Data and Control Chart Analysis, ASTM
STP15D, ASTM, 1983.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

10
 Designation: B 761 – 02
Standard Test Method for
Particle Size Distribution of Metal Powders and Related
Compounds by X-Ray Monitoring of Gravity Sedimentation
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 761; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope *
1.1 This test method covers the determination of particle
size distributions of metal powders. Experience has shown that
this test method is satisfactory for the analysis of elemental
tungsten, tungsten carbide, molybdenum, and tantalum pow-
ders, all with an as-supplied Fisher number of 6 µm or less, as
determined by Test Method B 330. Other metal powders (for
example, elemental metals, carbides, and nitrides) may be
analyzed using this test method with caution as to significance
until actual satisfactory experience is developed (see 7.2). The
procedure covers the determination of particle size distribution
of the powder in the following two conditions:
1.1.1 As the powder is supplied (as-supplied), and
1.1.2 After the powder has been deagglomerated by rod
milling as described in Practice B 859.
1.2 This test method is applicable to particles of uniform
density and composition having a particle size distribution
range of 0.1 up to 100 µm.
1.2.1 However, the relationship between size and sedimen-
tation velocity used in this test method assumes that particles
sediment within the laminar flow regime. This requires that the
particles sediment with a Reynolds number of 0.3 or less.
Particle size distribution analysis for particles settling with a
larger Reynolds number may be incorrect due to turbulent flow.
Some materials covered by this test method may settle with
Reynolds number greater than 0.3 if particles greater than 25
µm are present. The user of this test method should calculate
the Reynolds number of the largest particle expected to be
present in order to judge the quality of obtained results.
Reynolds number (Re) can be calculated using the flowing
equation
D3~r – r0!r0g
Re 5
18h2
where
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B09 on Metal
Powders and Metal Powder Products and is the direct responsibility of Subcom-
mittee B09.03 on Refractory Metal Powders.
Current edition approved Nov. 10, 2002. Published December 2002. Originally
approved in 1986. Last previous edition approved in 1998 as B 761 – 98.
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
D = the diameter of the largest particle expected to be
present,
r = the particle density,
r0 = the suspending liquid density,
g = the acceleration due to gravity, and
h = is the suspending liquid viscosity.
A table of the largest particles that can be analyzed with
Reynolds number of 0.3 or less in water at 35°C is given for a
number of metals in Table 1. A column of the Reynolds number
calculated for a 30–µm particle sedimenting in the same liquid
system is given for each material also.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. Specific hazard
information is given in Section 7.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 330 Test Method for Average Particle Size of Powders of
Refractory Metals and Their Compounds by the Fisher
Sub-Sieve Sizer2
B 821 Guide for Liquid Dispersion of Metal Powders and
Related Compounds for Particle Size Analysis2
B 859 Practice for De-agglomeration of Refractory Metal
Powders and Their Compounds Prior to Particle Size
Analysis2
E 456 Terminology Related to Quality and Statistics3
E 691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method3
(1)
3. Summary of Test Method
3.1 A carefully dispersed homogeneous suspension of the
powder is permitted to settle in a cell scanned by a collimated
X-ray beam of constant intensity. The net X-ray signal is
inversely proportional to the sample concentration in the
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
1
 B 761 – 02
TABLE 1 Maximum Diameter of Metal Powders and Related Compounds That Can Be Analyzed with Reynolds Number of 0.3 or Less in
Water at 35°C
Particle Composition Particle Density Maximum Particle Diameter Reynolds Number for 30 µmA
Cobalt 8.90 33.19 0.22
Copper 8.92 33.16 0.22
Iron 7.86 34.79 0.19
Molybdenum 10.20 31.55 0.26
Nickel 8.90 33.19 0.22
Tantalum 16.60 26.46 0.44
Tantalum carbide 13.90 28.19 0.36
Titanium carbide 4.93 41.88 0.11
Tungsten 19.35 25.06 0.51
Tungsten carbide 15.63 27.03 0.41
Vanadium 6.11 38.37 .014
Vanadium carbide 5.77 39.26 0.13
A
Reynolds number calculated for 30 µm particle sedimenting in water at 35°C, with a density of 0.9941 g/cm3 and viscosity of 0.7225 cp.

dispersing medium, and the particle diameter is related to the
position of the X-ray beam relative to the top of the cell.
Cumulative mass percent versus equivalent spherical diameter
are recorded to yield a particle size distribution curve.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 This test method is useful to both suppliers and users of
powders, as outlined in 1.1 and 1.2, in determining particle size
distribution for product specifications, manufacturing control,
development, and research.
4.2 Users should be aware that sample concentrations used
in this test method may not be what is considered ideal by some
authorities, and that the range of this test method extends into
the region where Brownian movement could be a factor in
conventional sedimentation. Within the range of this test
method, neither the sample concentration nor Brownian move-
ment are believed to be significant.
4.3 Reported particle size measurement is a function of both
the actual particle dimension and shape factor as well as the
particular physical or chemical properties being measured.
Caution is required when comparing data from instruments
operating on different physical or chemical parameters or with
different particle size measurement ranges. Sample acquisition,
handling, and preparation can also affect reported particle size
results.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Gravitational sedimentation particle size analyzer utiliz-
ing X-ray extinction to determine particle concentration.
6. Reagents and Materials
6.1 Purity of Reagents—Reagent grade chemicals shall be
used in all tests. Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended that
all reagents conform to the specifications of the Committee on
Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society where
such specifications are available.4 Other grades may be used,
4
Reagent Chemicals, American Chemical Society Specifications, American
Chemical Society, Washington, DC. For suggestions on the testing of reagents not
listed by the American Chemical Society, see Analar Standards for Laboratory
Chemicals, BDH Ltd., Poole, Dorset, U.K., and the United States Pharmacopeia
and National Formulary, U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. (USPC), Rockville,
MD.
provided it is first ascertained that the reagent is of sufficiently
high purity to permit its use without lessening the accuracy of
the determination.
6.2 Dispersing Medium—Dissolve 0.10 g of sodium hex-
ametaphosphate [(NaPO3)6] in 1000 mL of distilled or deion-
ized water.
6.3 Cleaning Solution—Dissolve 0.5 g of laboratory deter-
gent in 1000 mL of distilled or deionized water, or prepare a
0.1 % solution by volume of Triton X-100 using distilled or
deionized water.5
7. Hazards
7.1 Precautions applying to the use of low intensity X-ray
units should be observed.
7.2 Most carbides and nitrides are brittle materials and may
be partially deagglomerated or fractured, or both, during the
manufacturing process. Different manufacturing processes or
changes in the process may affect the apparent particle size
distribution as determined by this test method. Thus, caution
should be used in evaluating the results, especially for brittle
materials.
8. Sample Preparation
8.1 For the as-supplied particle size distribution determina-
tions, this step is not needed.
8.2 For laboratory-milled particle size distribution determi-
nations, use the rod milling technique as outlined in Practice
B 859.
9. Procedure
9.1 See the manufacturer’s manual for general operating
instructions.
9.2 Set up the instrument in the “percent finer than” mode if
necessary. Ensure proper operating conditions by periodically
performing base line scan and beam split test if necessary.
9.3 Add appropriate sample weight to the amount of dis-
persing medium suggested in analyzer instruction manual.
NOTE 1—Suggested approximate starting weights for tungsten and
tungsten carbide are listed in Table 2.
5
Triton X-100 is a trademarked product of Rohm & Haas, Philadelphia, PA and
is available from a number of laboratory supply companies.

2
 B 761 – 02
TABLE 2 Suggested Approximate Starting Weights for Tungsten
or Tungsten Carbide
Nominal Fisher Number According
WeightA, g per 25 mL of
to B 330 of As-Supplied Powder,
Dispersing Medium
µm
1 0.21
2 0.23
3 0.26
4 0.28
5 0.30
6 0.33
A
The amount of sample required will vary. Increase or decrease the sample
weight as needed to provide the level of X-ray attenuation recommended in
analyzer instruction manual.
9.4 Sample Dispersion—Follow procedure recommended in
Guide B 821.
9.5 Temperature Adjustment:
9.5.1 If the temperature of the solution is above that of the
cell chamber after ultrasonic dispersion, cool the solution to
within 1°C of the cell chamber prior to the introduction into the
cell chamber by stirring and pumping outside the cell chamber
(see Note 2). This cooling must be accomplished as soon as
possible.
NOTE 2—It may be convenient to use a separate magnetic stirrer and
stirring rod.
9.5.2 If the temperature is below the cell chamber tempera-
ture, load the sample into the cell or sample chamber of the
analyzer and allow sample to circulate until sample tempera-
ture is within 1°C of the cell chamber.
9.6 Load the prepared sample into analyzer according to
analyzer instruction manual.
9.7 Follow analyzer instruction manual to begin analysis of
sample. Be sure to include the use of any necessary sedimen-
tation parameters where necessary.
NOTE 3—Be aware that bubbles may need to be removed from the
analysis cell prior to analysis. Some instrumentation perform an automatic
scan for bubbles and, if detected, follow with a bubble elimination routine.
NOTE 4—It is recommended that the stirrer be turned off simulta-
neously with activation of the instrument.
9.8 Rinse the sedimentation cell and sample chamber thor-
oughly three times with fresh dispersing medium, according to
analyzer instruction manual. If it is necessary to clear the cell
further at this time, rinse three times with the dilute cleaning
solution, followed by an additional cycle of rinses with fresh
dispersing medium.
9.9 It is advised that a repeat analysis be performed on a
separately weighed portion of the sample, thus providing two
distributions on the same powder.
10. Report
10.1 A copy of all the data, either in graphical or tabular
form, shall be supplied.
3
11. Precision and Bias
11.1 Precision—The results of an interlaboratory study to
determine the precision of this test method are available in
Research Report No. B09–1011,6 which is a report on a study
done in nine laboratories on two tungsten carbide powders in
the rod-milled condition. Although this is not in conformance
with the requirements of Practice E 691 (three materials are
required; six or more recommended), the user of this test
method may infer its precision from this interlaboratory study.
The pertinent conclusions are presented below:
11.1.1 The within-laboratory repeatability limit, r, for the
median particle size (r as defined by Terminology E 456), was
found to be estimated by the following equation:
r — 0.133M – 0.009 (2)
where
M = the measured median particle size (µm), in the range of
1.4 to 4.2 µm (r = 0.15 to 0.55 µm in this range).
Duplicate median particle size results from the same laboratory
should not be considered suspect unless they differ by more
than r.
11.1.2 The between-laboratory reproducibility limit, R, for
the median particle size (R as defined by Terminology E 456)
was found to be estimated by the following equation:
R 5 0.482M – 0.489 (3)
where
M = the measured median particle size (µm) in the range of
1.4 to 4.2 µm (R = 0.19 to 1.54 µm in this range).
Median particle size results from two different laboratories
should not be considered suspect unless they differ by more
than R.
11.2 Bias—No absolute method of determining powder
particle size exists, nor are there any universally recognized
standard or reference powders for this measurement. There-
fore, it is not possible to discuss the bias results by this test
method.
12. Keywords
12.1 metal powders; particle size; particle size distribution;
powdered metals; refractory metal powders; sedimentation
particle size distribution
6
Supporting data have been filed at ASTM International Headquarters and may
be obtained by requesting Research Report RR: B09–1011.
 B 761 – 02
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B09 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (B 761 – 98)
that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) A precaution concerning Reynolds number of sedimenting
particles was added to the Scope in paragraph 1.2.1. Rationale:
Since the quality of the results of this test method depend on
the use of conditions that provide sedimentation within a
laminar flow regime, it is important that the user of the test
method be able to determine when such conditions exist.
Paragraph 1.2.1 facilitates this determination.
(2) Section 11, Precision and Bias, was revised as a result of a
completed interlaboratory study. Rationale: Results of the
completed interlaboratory study allowed calculation of ex-
pected precision of this technique.
(3) Documents referenced in the revised section 11 were added
to the list of referenced documents in Section 2.
(4) Reynolds numbers for 30 µm particles and maximum
diameter sedimenting with Reynolds number of 0.3, are given
for a number of materials in Table 1. Rationale: Since the
quality of the results of this test method depend on the use of
conditions that provide sedimentation within a laminar flow
regime, it is important that the user of the test method be able
to determine when such conditions exist. Table 1 facilitates this
determination.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 763 – 98

Standard Specification for

Copper Alloy Sand Castings for Valve Application1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 763; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope * E 10 Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materi-

1.1 This specification establishes requirements for copper als4
alloy sand castings for valve applications. Nominal composi- E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)5
tions of the alloys defined by this specification are shown in 3. General Requirements
Table 1.2
3.1 The following sections of Specification B 824 form a
NOTE 1—This specification does not cover Copper Alloy UNS Nos. part of this specification.
C83600, C92200, C96200, and C96400. These alloys are also used in
3.1.1 Terminology (Section 3),
valve applications. They are covered by the following specifications:
3.1.2 Other Requirements (Section 6),
C83600, B 62
C92200, B 61 3.1.3 Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations (Sec-
C96200, B 369 tion 7),
C96400, B 369 3.1.4 Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance (Section 8),
1.2 The castings produced under this specification are used 3.1.5 Sampling (Section 9),
in products which may be manufactured in advance and 3.1.6 Number of Tests and Retests (Section 10),
supplied for sale from stock by the manufacturer. 3.1.7 Specimen Preparation (Section 11),
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded 3.1.8 Test Methods (Section 12),
as the standard. SI values given in parentheses are for infor- 3.1.9 Significance of Numerical Limits (Section 13),
mation only. 3.1.10 Inspection (Section 14),
3.1.11 Rejection and Rehearing (Section 15),
2. Referenced Documents 3.1.12 Certification (Section 16),
2.1 The following documents in the current issue of the 3.1.13 Test Report (Section 17),
Book of Standards form a part of this specification to the extent 3.1.14 Product Marking (Section 18),
referenced herein: 3.1.15 Packaging and Package Marking (Section 19),
2.2 ASTM Standards: 3.1.16 Supplementary Requirements.
B 61 Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings3
B 62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal 4. Ordering Information
Castings3 4.1 Orders for castings under this specification should
B 208 Practice for Preparing Tension Test Specimens for include the following information:
Copper-Base Alloys for Sand, Permanent Mold, Centrifu- 4.1.1 Specification title, number, and year of issue,
gal, and Continuous Castings3 4.1.2 Quantity of castings,
B 369 Specification for Copper-Nickel Alloy Castings3 4.1.3 Copper Alloy UNS Number and temper (as-cast,
B 824 Specification for General Requirements for Copper heat-treated, etc.),
Alloy Castings3 4.1.4 Pattern or drawing number and condition (as-cast,
machined, etc.),
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-5 on Copper 4.1.5 When castings are purchased for agencies of the U.S.
and Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.05 on Government, the Supplementary Requirements of Specifica-
Castings and Ingots for Remelting.
Current edition approved May 10, 1998. Published January 1999. Originally
tion B 824 may be specified.
published as B 763 – 86. Last previous edition B 763 – 96. 4.2 The following requirements are optional and should be
2
The UNS system for copper and copper alloys (see Practice E 527) is a simple specified in the purchase order when required.
expansion of the former standard designation system accomplished by the addition
of a prefix “C” and a suffix “00”. The suffix can be used to accommodate
4
composition variations of the base alloy. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
3 5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 763
TABLE 1 Nominal Compositions
Alumi- Man- Sili-
Classification Copper Alloy UNS No. Commercial Designation Copper Tin Lead Zinc Nickel Iron Bismuth
num ganese con
Leaded red brass C83450 88 21⁄2 2 61⁄2 1 ... ... ... ... ...
C83800 83-4-6-7 or commercial red brass 83 4 6 7 ... ... ... ... ... ...
Leaded semi-red brass C84400 81-3-7-9 or valve composition 81 3 7 9 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C84800 76-21⁄2-61⁄2-15, or semi-red brass 76 21⁄2 61⁄2 15 ... ... ... ... ... ...
Leaded yellow brass C85200 high-copper yellow brass 72 1 3 24 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C85400 commercial No. 1 yellow brass 67 1 3 29 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C85700 leaded naval brass 61 1 1 37 ... ... ... ... ... ...
High-strength yellow brass C86200 high-strength manganese bronze 63 ... ... 27 ... 3 4 3 ... ...
C86300 high-strength manganese bronze 61 ... ... 27 ... 3 6 3 ... ...
C86400 leaded manganese bronze 58 1 1 38 ... 1 1⁄2 1⁄2 ... ...
C86500 No. 1 manganese bronze 58 ... ... 39 ... 1 1 1 ... ...
C86700 leaded manganese bronze 58 1 1 34 ... 2 2 2 ... ...
Silicon bronze and silicon C87300 silicon bronze 95 ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 4 ...
brass C87400 silicon brass 82 ... 1⁄2 14 ... ... ... ... 31⁄2 ...
C87500 silicon brass 82 ... ... 14 ... ... ... ... 4 ...
C87600 silicon bronze 89 ... ... 6 ... ... ... ... 5 ...
C87610 silicon bronze 92 ... ... 4 ... ... ... ... 4 ...
Bismuth semi-red brass C89844 bismuth brass 841⁄2 4 ... 8 ... ... ... ... ... 3
Tin bronze and leaded tin C90300 88-8-0-4, or modified “G” bronze 88 8 ... 4 ... ... ... ... ... ...
bronze
C90500 88-10-0-2, on “G” bronze 88 10 ... 2 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C92300 87-8-1-4, or Navy PC 87 8 1 4 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C92600 87-10-1-2 87 10 1 2 ... ... ... ... ... ...
High-lead tin bronze C93200 83-7-7-3 83 7 7 3 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C93500 85-5-9-1 85 5 9 1 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C93700 80-10-10 80 10 10 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C93800 78-7-15 78 7 15 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C94300 71-5-24 71 5 24 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Nickel-tin bronze and C94700 nickel-tin bronze grade “A” 88 5 ... 2 5 ... ... ... ... ...
leaded nickel-tin bronze C94800 leaded nickel-tin bronze grade “B” 87 5 1 2 5 ... ... ... ... ...
C94900 leaded nickel-tin bronze grade “C” 80 5 5 5 5 ... ... ... ... ...
Aluminum bronze C95200 Grade A 88 ... ... ... ... 3 9 ... ... ...
C95300 Grade B 89 ... ... ... ... 1 10 ... ... ...
C95400 Grade C 85 ... ... ... ... 4 11 ... ... ...
C95410 84 ... ... ... 2 4 10 ... ... ...
Silicon aluminum bronze C95600 Grade E 91 ... ... ... ... ... 7 ... 2 ...
Nickel aluminum bronze C95500 Grade D 81 ... ... ... 4 4 11 ... ... ...
C95800 81.3 ... ... ... 4.5 4 9 1.2 ... ...
Leaded nickel bronze C97300 12 % leaded nickel silver 57 2 9 20 12 ... ... ... ... ...
C97600 20 % leaded nickel silver 64 4 4 8 20 ... ... ... ... ...
C97800 25 % leaded nickel silver 66 5 2 2 25 ... ... ... ... ...
Special alloys C99400 87 ... ... 4.4 3.0 3.0 1.6 ... 1.0 ...
C99500 87 ... ... 1.5 4.5 4.0 1.7 ... 1.3 ...

4.2.1 Chemical analysis of residual elements (6.3), may vary by manufacturer.

4.2.2 Pressure test or soundness requirements (Specification 5.3 Separately cast test bar coupons representing castings
B 824), made in Copper Alloy UNS Nos. C94700HT, C95300HT,
4.2.3 Approval of weld repair and records of repair (Section C95400HT, C95410HT, and C95500HT shall be heat treated
9), with the castings.
4.2.4 Certification (Specification B 824),
4.2.5 Foundry test report (Specification B 824),
6. Chemical Composition
4.2.6 Witness inspection (Specification B 824),
4.2.7 Product marking (Specification B 824), 6.1 The castings shall conform to the requirements for
4.2.8 Castings for seawater service (5.1). major elements shown in Table 2.
5. Materials and Manufacture 6.2 These specification limits do not preclude the presence
of other elements. Limits may be established and analysis
5.1 For better corrosion resistance in sea water applications,
required for unnamed elements agreed upon between the
castings in Copper Alloy UNS No. C95800 shall be given a
manufacturer or supplier and the purchaser. Copper or zinc
temper anneal heat treatment at 1250 6 50°F (675 6 10°C) for
may be given as remainder and may be taken as the difference
6-h minimum. Cooling shall be by the fastest means possible
that will not cause excessive distortion or cracking. between the sum of all elements analyzed and 100 %. When all
5.2 Copper Alloy UNS Nos. C94700, C95300, C95400, named elements in Table 2 are analyzed, their sum shall be as
C95410, and C95500 may be supplied in the heat-treated specified in Table 3.
condition to obtain the higher mechanical properties shown in 6.3 It is recognized that residual elements may be present in
Table 4. Suggested heat treatments for these alloys and copper cast copper-base alloys. Analysis shall be made for residual
alloy UNS No. C95520 are given in Table 5. Actual practice elements only when specified in the purchase order.

2
 TABLE 2 Chemical Requirements
Composition, % max Except as Indicated

Copper Major Elements Residual Elements

Alloy Nickel Nickel
UNS Alu- Manga- Sili- Bis- Anti- Phos- Alu- Manga- Sili-
Copper Tin Lead Zinc Iron incl Iron incl Sulfur Lead
No. minum nese con muth mony phorus minum nese con
Cobalt Cobalt
C83450 87.0–89.0 2.0–3.5 1.5–3.0 5.5–7.5 ... 0.75–2.0 ... ... ... ... 0.30 0.25 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C83800 82.0–83.8 3.3–4.2 5.0–7.0 5.0–8.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... 0.30 0.25 ... 0.08 0.03 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C84400 78.0–82.0 2.3–3.5 6.0–8.0 7.0–10.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... 0.40 0.25 ... 0.08 0.02 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C84800 75.0–77.0 2.0–3.0 5.5–7.0 13.0–17.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... 0.40 0.25 ... 0.08 0.02 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C85200 70.0–74.0 0.7–2.0 1.5–3.8 20.0–27.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.6 0.20 1.0 0.05 0.02 0.005 ... 0.05 ...
C85400 65.0–70.0 0.50–1.5 1.5–3.8 24.0–32.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.7 ... 1.0 ... ... 0.35 ... 0.05 ...
C85700 58.0–64.0 0.50–1.5 0.8–1.5 32.0–40.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.7 ... 1.0 ... ... 0.55 ... 0.05 ...
C86200 60.0–66.0 0.20 0.20 22.0–28.0 2.0–4.0 ... 3.0–4.9 2.5–5.0 ... ... ... ... 1.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C86300 60.0–66.0 0.20 0.20 22.0–28.0 2.0–4.0 ... 5.0–7.5 2.5–5.0 ... ... ... ... 1.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C86400 56.0–62.0 0.50–1.5 0.50–1.5 34.0–42.0 0.40–2.0 ... 0.50–1.5 0.10–1.0 ... ... ... ... 1.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C86500 55.0–60.0 1.0 0.40 36.0–42.0 0.40–2.0 ... 0.50–1.5 0.10–1.5 ... ... ... ... 1.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C86700 55.0–60.0 1.5 0.50–1.5 30.0–38.0 1.0–3.0 ... 1.0–3.0 1.0–3.5 ... ... ... ... 1.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C87300 94.0 min ... 0.20 0.25 ... ... ... 0.8–1.5 3.5–5.0 ... 0.20 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C87400 79.0 min ... 1.0 12.0–16.0 ... ... ... ... 2.5–4.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.80 ... ... ...
C87500 79.0 min ... 0.50 12.0–16.0 ... ... ... ... 3.0–5.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.50 ... ... ...
C87600 88.0 min ... 0.50 4.0–7.0 ... ... ... ... 3.5–5.5 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C87610 90.0 min ... 0.20 3.0–5.0 0.20 ... ... ... 3.0–5.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.25 ... ...
C89844 83.0–86.0 3.0–5.0 ... 7.0–10.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... 2.0–4.0 0.30 0.25 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 0.2
C90300 86.0–89.0 7.5–9.0 0.30 3.0–5.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... 0.20 0.20 ... 0.05 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C90500 86.0–89.0 9.0–11.0 0.30 1.0–3.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... 0.20 0.20 ... 0.05 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C92300 85.0–89.0 7.5–9.0 0.30–1.0 2.5–5.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... 0.25 0.25 ... 0.05 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...

3
C92600 86.0–88.5 9.3–10.5 0.8–1.5 1.3–2.5 ... 0.7A ... ... ... ... 0.20 0.25 ... 0.05 0.03 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C93200 81.0–85.0 6.3–7.5 6.0–8.0 2.0–4.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... 0.20 0.35 ... 0.08 0.15 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C93500 83.0–86.0 4.3–6.0 8.0–10.0 2.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... 0.20 0.30 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
B 763

C93700 78.0–82.0 9.0–11.0 8.0–11.0 0.8 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... 0.15 0.50 ... 0.08 0.15 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C93800 75.0–79.0 6.3–7.5 13.0–16.0 0.8 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... 0.15 0.80 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C94300 67.0–72.0 4.5–6.0 23.0–27.0 0.8 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... 0.15 0.80 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C94700 85.0–90.0 4.5–6.0 0.10B 1.0–2.5 ... 4.5–6.0 ... ... ... ... 0.25 0.15 ... 0.05 0.05 0.005 0.20 0.005 ...
C94800 84.0–89.0 4.5–6.0 0.30–1.0 1.0–2.5 ... 4.5–6.0 ... ... ... ... 0.25 0.15 ... 0.05 0.05 0.005 0.20 0.005 ...
C94900 79.0–81.0 4.0–6.0 4.0–6.0 4.0–6.0 ... 4.0–6.0 ... ... ... ... 0.30 0.25 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 0.10 0.005 ...
C95200 86.0 min ... ... ... 2.5–4.0 ... 8.5–9.5 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C95300 86.0 min ... ... ... 0.80–1.5 ... 9.0–11.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C95400 83.0 min ... ... ... 3.0–5.0 1.5 10.0–11.5 0.50 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C95410 83.0 min ... ... ... 3.0–5.0 1.5–2.5 10.0–11.5 0.50 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C95500 78.0 min ... ... ... 3.0–5.0 3.0–5.5 10.0–11.5 3.5 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C95600 88.0 min ... ... ... ... 0.25 6.0–8.0 ... 1.8–3.2 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C95800 79.0 min ... 0.03 ... 3.5–4.5C 4.0–5.0C 8.5–9.5 0.80–1.5 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.10 ...
C97300 53.0–58.0 1.5–3.0 8.0–11.0 17.0–25.0 1.5 11.0–14.0 ... ... ... ... ... 0.35 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 0.50 0.15 ...
C97600 63.0–67.0 3.5–4.5 3.0–5.0 3.0–9.0 1.5 19.0–21.5 ... ... ... ... ... 0.25 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 1.0 0.15 ...
C97800 64.0–67.0 4.0–5.5 1.0–2.5 1.0–4.0 1.5 24.0–27.0 ... ... ... ... ... 0.20 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 1.0 0.15 ...
C99400 remainder ... 0.25 0.5–5.0 1.0–3.0 1.0–3.5 0.5–2.0 0.5 0.5–2.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C99500 remainder ... 0.25 0.5–2.0 3.0–5.0 3.5–5.5 0.5–2.0 0.5 0.5–2.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

A
In determining copper minimum copper may be calculated as copper plus nickel.
B
It is possible that the mechanical requirements of Copper Alloy UNS No. C94700 (heat treated) will not be obtained if the lead content exceeds 0.01 %.
C
Iron content shall not exceed the nickel content.
 B 763
TABLE 3 Sum of all Known Elements Analyzed C95500, C95600, C95800, C99400, and C99500 test bar
Copper Alloy UNS No. Copper Plus Known Elements, % min castings shall be cast to the form and dimensions shown in
C83450 99.3 Figs. 1 or 2 of Practice B 208. For all other alloys listed in this
C83800 99.3 specification test bars shall be cast to the form and dimensions
C84400 99.3
C84800 99.3
shown in Figs. 2, 3 or 4 of Practice B 208.
C85200 99.1
C85400 98.9 9. Test Methods
C85700 98.7
C86200 99.0 9.1 Analytical chemical methods are given in Specification
C86300 99.0 B 824 (Section 12).
C86400 99.0 9.2 Brinell hardness readings, if specified on the purchase
C86500 99.0
C86700 99.0 order, shall be taken in the grip end of the tension test bar and
C87300 99.5 shall be made in accordance with Test Method E 10, with the
C87400 99.2
exception that a 3000-kg load shall be used.
C87500 99.5
C87600 99.5
C87610 99.5 10. Casting Repair
C89844 99.3
C90300 99.4 10.1 Copper Alloy UNS Nos. C95200, C95300, C95400,
C90500 99.7 C95410, C95500, C95600, and C95800 included in this speci-
C92300 99.3 fication are generally weldable. Weld repairs may be made at
C92600 99.3
C93200 99.2 the manufacturer’s discretion provided each excavation does
C93500 99.4 not exceed 20 % of the casting section or wall thickness or 4 %
C93700 99.0 of the casting surface area.
C93800 98.9
C94300 99.0 10.2 Excavations that exceed those described in 10.1 may
C94700 99.3 be made at the manufacturer’s discretion except that when
C94800 99.3 specified in the purchase order (4.1.8) the weld procedure shall
C94900 99.2
C95200 99.0 be approved by the purchaser and the following records shall
C95300 99.0 be maintained:
C95400 99.5 10.2.1 A sketch or drawing showing the dimensions, depth,
C95410 99.5
C95500 99.5 and location of excavations,
C95600 99.0 10.2.2 Post-weld heat treatment, when applicable,
C95800 99.5 10.2.3 Weld repair inspection results,
C97300 99.0
C97600 99.7 10.2.4 Casting identification number,
C97800 99.6 10.2.5 Weld procedure identification number,
C99400 99.7
C99500 99.7
10.2.6 Welder identification, and
10.2.7 Name of inspector.
10.3 The casting shall not be impregnated without approval
7. Mechanical Properties of the purchaser.
7.1 Mechanical properties shall be determined from sepa- 10.4 The castings shall not be plugged.
rately cast test bars, and shall meet the requirements shown in 10.5 Other Copper Alloy UNS Numbers in this specification
Table 4. are not weldable.

8. Sampling 11. Keywords

8.1 Copper Alloy UNS Nos. C86200, C86300, C86400, 11.1 copper alloy castings; copper-base alloy castings; valve
C86500, C86700, C95200, C95300, C95400, C95410, castings

4
 B 763
TABLE 4 Mechanical Requirements

Copper Alloy Tensile Strength, min Yield Strength,A min Elongation in 2 in. or
Brinell Hardness
No.B (3000-kg
UNS No. ksiC MPaD ksiC MPaD 50 mm, min, %
Load), min
C83450 30 207 14 97 25 ...
C83800 30 207 13 90 20 ...
C84400 29 200 13 90 18 ...
C84800 28 193 12 83 16 ...
C85200 35 241 12 83 25 ...
C85400 30 207 11 76 20 ...
C85700 40 276 14 97 15 ...
C86200 90 621 45 310 18 ...
C86300 110 758 60 414 12 ...
C86400 60 414 20 138 15 ...
C86500 65 448 25 172 20 ...
C86700 80 552 32 221 15 ...
C87300 45 310 18 124 20 ...
C87400 50 345 21 145 18 ...
C87500 60 414 24 165 16 ...
C87600 60 414 30 207 16 ...
C87610 45 310 18 124 20 ...
C89844 28 193 13 90 15 ...
C90300 40 276 18 124 20 ...
C90500 40 276 18 124 20 ...
C92300 36 248 16 110 18 ...
C92600 40 276 18 124 20 ...
C93200 30 207 14 97 15 ...
C93500 28 193 12 83 15 ...
C93700 30 207 12 83 15 ...
C93800 26 179 14 97 12 ...
C94300 24 165 ... ... 10 ...
C94700 45 310 20 138 25 ...
C94700(HT) 75 517 50 345 5 ...
C94800 40 276 20 138 20 ...
C94900 38 262 15 103 15 ...
C95200 65 450 25 170 20 110
C95300 65 450 25 170 20 110
C95300(HT) 80 550 40 275 12 160
C95400 75 515 30 205 12 150
C95400(HT) 90 620 45 310 6 190
C95410 75 515 30 205 12 150
C95410(HT) 90 620 45 310 6 190
C95500 90 620 40 275 6 190
C95500(HT) 110 760 60 415 5 200
C95600 60 415 28 195 10 ...
C95800E 85 585 35 240 15 ...
C97300 30 207 15 103 8 ...
C97600 40 276 17 117 10 ...
C97800 50 345 22 152 10 ...
C99400 60 414 30 207 20 ...
C99500 70 483 40 276 12 ...
A
Yield strength shall be determined as the stress producing an elongation under load of 0.5 %, that is 0.01 in. (0.254 mm) in a gage length of 2 in. (50.8 mm).
B
For information only.
C
ksi 5 1000 psi.
D
See appendix.
E
As cast or temper annealed.

5
 B 763
TABLE 5 Suggested Heat Treatments Copper Alloy
Solution Treatment Annealing Treatment
Copper Alloy
(not less than 1 h followed (not less than 2 h followed by
UNS No.
by water quench), °F (°C) air cool), °F (°C)
C95300 1585–1635 1150–1225
(860–890) (620–660)
C95400
C95410 1600–1675 1150–1225
C95500 (870–910) (620–660)
Solution Treatment (not Precipitation Hardening
less than 2 h followed (5 h)
by water quench)
C94700 1425–1475 580–620
(775–800) (305–325)

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. METRIC EQUIVALENTS

X1.1 The SI unit for strength properties now shown is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI). The
derived SI unit for force is the newton (N), which is defined as
that force when applied to a body having a mass of one
kilogram gives it an acceleration of one metre per second
squared (N 5 kg · m/s2). The derived SI unit for pressure or
stress is the newton per square metre (N/m2), which has been
named the pascal (Pa) by the General Conference on Weights
and Measures. Since 1 ksi 5 6 894 757 Pa the metric equiva-
lents are expressed as megapascal (MPa) which is the same as
MN/m2 and N/mm2.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B-5 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (B 763 – 96)
that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) Added Alloy C89844, bismuth semi-red brass, to Table 1, (2) Added “Bismuth” column to Table 1.
Table 2, Table 3, and Table 4. (3) Added “Bismuth” and “Lead” columns to Table 2.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 764 – 04
Standard Test Method for
Simultaneous Thickness and Electrode Potential
Determination of Individual Layers in Multilayer Nickel
Deposit (STEP Test)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 764; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method closely estimates the thickness of
individual layers of a multilayer nickel electrodeposit and the
potential differences between the individual layers while being
anodically stripped at constant current density.2,3
1.2 This test method does not cover deposit systems other
than multilayer electroplated nickel deposits.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards: 4
B 456 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cop-
per Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chro-
mium
B 504 Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Me-
tallic Coatings by the Coulometric Method
D 1193 Specification for Reagent Water
3. Summary of Test Method
3.1 This procedure is a modification of the well-known
coulometric method of thickness testing (Test Method B 504).
It is also known as the anodic dissolution or electrochemical
stripping method.
1
This method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on Metallic and
Inorganic Coatings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B08.10 on Test
Methods.
Current edition approved April 1, 2004. Published April 2004. Originally
approved in 1986. Last previous edition approved in 2003 as B 764 – 94 (2003).
2
For discussion of this test, see Harbulak, E. P., “Simultaneous Thickness and
Electrochemical Potential Determination of Individual Layers in Multilayer Nickel
Deposits,” Plating and Surface Finishing, Vol 67, No. 2, February 1980, pp. 49–54.
3
U.S. Patent 4,310,389. Assignee: The Chrysler Corp., Highland Park, MI
48203.
4
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
3.2 Coulometric thickness testing instruments are based on
the anodic dissolution (stripping) of the deposit at constant
current, while the time is measured to determine thickness. As
commonly practiced, the method employs a small cell that is
filled with an appropriate electrolyte, and the test specimen
serves as the bottom of the cell. To the bottom of the cell is
attached a rubber or plastic gasket whose opening defines the
measuring (stripping, anodic) area. If a metallic cell is used, the
rubber gasket also electrically insulates the test specimen from
the cell. With the specimen as the anode and the cell or agitator
tube as the cathode, a constant direct current is passed through
the cell until the nickel layer is dissolved. A sudden change in
voltage between the electrodes occurs when a different metallic
layer starts to dissolve.
3.3 Each different metal or species of the same metal
requires a given voltage to keep the current constant while
being stripped. As one nickel layer is dissolved away and the
next layer becomes exposed, there will be a voltage change
(assuming a constant current and difference in the electro-
chemical characteristics of the two nickel layers). The elapsed
time at which this voltage change occurs (relative to the start of
the test or previous voltage change) is a measure of the deposit
thickness.
3.4 At the same time, the amplitude of the voltage change
can be observed. That is, the ease (or difficulty) with which one
layer can be dissolved or stripped with reference to another
layer can be compared. The lower the voltage needed the more
active the metal or the greater the tendency to corrode
preferentially to a more noble metal adjacent to it.
3.5 Where the metallic layers are of such a similar nature
that change of the stripping voltage is small, there can be
problems in detecting this change if the voltage between the
deplating cell (cathode) and the sample (anode) is measured.
As the sample is dissolved anodically, cathodic processes are
occurring on the deplating cell (cathode) surface that can also
give rise to voltage changes, due to alterations of the cathode
surface, thus obscuring the anode voltage change. This diffi-
culty can be avoided by measuring the potential of the
dissolving anodic sample with respect to an unpolarized third
electrode (reference) placed in the cell. By recording this
potential any difference in electrochemical activity between
 B 764 – 04
layers is more readily detected. The equipment may be
calibrated against standards with known STEP values.
3.6 The thickness of any specific nickel layer may be
calculated from the quantity of electricity used (current multi-
plied by time), area dissolved, electrochemical equivalent of
nickel, anode efficiency, and density of the nickel layer.
3.7 Commercial instruments using this principle are avail-
able. They are usually a combination coulometric and STEP
instrument. Reference standards are available to calibrate the
instrument. The STEP Test, as is the Coulometric Test, is rapid
and destructive to the coating.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 The ability of a multilayer nickel deposit to enhance
corrosion resistance is a function of the difference in the
electrode potentials of the nickel layers (as measured individu-
ally at a fixed current density in a given electrolyte versus a
reference electrode) and the thicknesses of the layers. The
potential differences must be sufficient to cause the bright
nickel or top layer to corrode preferentially and sacrificially
with respect to the semi-bright nickel layer beneath it.
4.2 This test procedure allows the measurement of these
potential differences directly on an electroplated part rather
than on separate foil specimens in such a way that time
determines the thickness of each layer, while the potential
difference between nickel layers is an indication of the corro-
sion resistance of the total nickel deposit.
4.3 The interpretation and evaluation of the results of this
test should be by agreement between the purchaser and the
manufacturer.
NOTE 1—This test may be used as a quality assurance test of the
multilayer nickel coatings applied in production. It should be understood
that due to many factors that influence the progress of corrosion during
actual use of the part, the performance of different multilayer nickel
deposits in the test cannot be taken as an absolute indicator of the relative
corrosion resistance of these deposits in service.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Composition of the Electrolyte5:
Nickel Chloride (NiCl2·6H2O) 300g/L
Sodium Chloride (NaCl) 50g/L
Boric Acid (H3BO3) 25g/L
pH 3.0A
A
The pH may be adjusted with diluted hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide, as
required, and is more critical than the composition of the electrolyte.
Prepared in Purified Water—Type IV or better as specified
in Specification D 1193.
5.2 Constant Current Source—This should supply a con-
stant current that can be varied between 0 and 50 mA (typical
25 to 35 mA). A current of 30 mA corresponds to a stripping
rate of 7.8 µm/min at 100 % current efficiency when used with
a gasket providing 0.08 cm2 stripping area. (This is achieved
with the solution stated in 5.1.) Most commercial coulometric
thickness testers can be used as the current source.
5
Electrolyte can be obtained commercially that meets the requirements of this
test.
2
5.3 Electrolyte Agitation Source—All commercial coulom-
etric thickness testers incorporate a means to agitate the
solution. It is possible to purchase these types of units
separately, if so desired, to be used externally in conjunction
with other power supplies.
5.4 Recorder—Any time-based recorder with an input im-
pedance of at least 1.0 MV and capable of running at
approximately 0.5 mm/s (3 cm/min) can be used.
5.5 Deplating Cell—The cell may be similar in construction
to commercially available coulometric deplating cells. It is
usually a cup-shaped cell of either 316 stainless steel, copper-
nickel alloy, or plastic that engages a round rubber or plastic
gasket to the work piece or sample. The opening through the
cell and gasket allows contact of the electrolyte to the test
specimen and defines the stripping area.
NOTE 2—A coulometric deplating cell could be constructed of plastic
using a cylindrical stainless steel or copper-nickel alloy sheet cathode
located in the larger upper area of the cup. The advantages of such a cell
are the prevention of whisker growth and the choking off of the small bore
opening, and the ease of cathode removal for cleaning or replacement.
5.6 Reference Electrode—Either silver or platinum wire of
approximately 1.5 mm in diameter can be used. Silver is
probably the better choice due to its ability to form a
silver-silver chloride electrode when used in a chloride con-
taining electrolyte. The tip of the reference electrode should
extend so that the distance between the tip of the electrode and
the bottom of the agitator tube is approximately 5 mm.
NOTE 3—It is necessary to condition the silver electrode before using in
order to form the silver-silver chloride surface. This is easily done by
anodically treating approximately a 75-mm length of wire in 1 N
hydrochloric acid solution for 10 to 15 s using 35-mA anodic current. This
will form a gray film on the wire, which should always be present. Once
the gray film is formed, it is not necessary to repeat the conditioning
treatment unless the film has been removed. It may be advisable, however,
to recondition the electrode after a prolonged period of inactivity or when
the electrode has been allowed to remain dry for an extended period of
time. Drying off the electrode should be avoided by immersion in either
the hydrochloric acid conditioning solution, the step test solution, or
distilled water when not in use.
NOTE 4—A ceramic junction reference electrode that does not require
conditioning is available commercially.
5.7 Millivolt Meter (optional)—When using a sensitive and
well-calibrated recorder, a millivolt meter is not necessary. If
one is desired, however, any sensitive, high-input impedance
meter can be used. A standard pH meter with a millivolt setting
would be satisfactory. The meter should have a range from 0 to
2000 mV. If a millivolt meter is used which has low-output
impedance facilities, it can be used in parallel to drive the
recorder and will serve as a buffer amplifier. Most laboratory
pH meters have such output terminals.
6. Procedure
6.1 Set up equipment as recommended by the manufacturer.
If necessary, turn on the recorder and the millivolt meter and
allow them to warm up.
6.2 If chromium is present on the nickel surface, remove it
with concentrated hydrochloric acid. Make sure the nickel
surface is clean. Rinse well and dry off the surface.
 B 764 – 04
NOTE 5—Chromium can be removed by using the coulometric deplat-
ing cell as is done on many commercial coulometric testers. If this is done,
secure the cell and gasket to the test piece as in 6.3 and 6.4 but do not
insert the electrode assembly. Fill the cell with a common test stripping
solution for chromium (Test Method B 504) and hook up only the cell and
test piece to the power supply. Apply the current until all the chromium
has been removed. A dense blanket of bubbles on the surface of the sample
indicates that all the chromium is removed. Remove the stripping solution
from the cell without moving or disturbing the seal of the gasket to the test
surface. Wash the cell three times with purified water (Type IV or better
as specified in Specification D 1193) and once with the step test solution.
Proceed to 6.5.
6.3 Position the test specimen in a secure horizontal position
so that the chromium-stripped nickel surface is directly beneath
the cell gasket.
6.4 Lower the coulometric deplating cell assembly; secure
by sealing the gasket to the nickel surface. A flat test area of
approximately 10 mm in diameter is desirable but not required.
The criterion is that there be no leakage of the electrolyte. If
leakage does occur, discontinue test and start a new one.
6.5 Fill the coulometric deplating cell to the appropriate
level with the step test solution making sure that no air is
trapped within the solution.
6.6 Lower the reference electrode assembly into the coulo-
metric deplating cell, if necessary. The positioning of the
reference electrode should be such that the distance from the
end of the electrode to the test specimen is reproducible to
within 1 mm and be held constant throughout the test.
NOTE 6—The insertion depth of the electrolyte agitation tube which
includes the reference electrode is important and should always be the
same. The difference of potential rather than the absolute potential is the
important measurement.
6.7 Check all electrical connections. Make sure all connec-
tions are secure and that no corrosion exists at the contact
points and that all contact points are secure.
6.8 Start the recorder (turn on milliampere meter, if used).
The recorder must be calibrated in order to determine the
thickness of the nickel layers. This may be accomplished by
using commercially available thickness standards or by apply-
ing Faraday’s Law. The latter requires information about the
current, corroding area, electrochemical equivalent of nickel,
density of nickel, efficiency, and the time base of the recorder
(see 6.11).
6.9 Turn on the constant current source and agitator, which
in turn will start the deplating reaction. Continue recording
until the surface underlying the nickel is reached. This end
point can be recognized graphically by a sudden change in
voltage. If the basis metal is zinc, iron, or steel, the voltage will
decrease; if it is copper or brass, the voltage will increase.
6.10 Stop the test by turning off the agitator, constant
current source, recorder, and milliampere meter. Remove the
electrode assembly, if necessary, and empty the cell of the
stripping solution. Wash the cell three times with purified water
(Type IV or better as specified in Specification D 1193) before
continuing to the next test.
6.11 This test is based on a measured current-time relation-
ship necessary to remove a given amount of nickel from a
specific area.
3
Example: if the constant current source produces 30 mA, the
recorder time base is 30 mm/min, and the deplating area is 0.08
cm2, it would take 19.2 s to deplate 2.5 µm of nickel. The chart
would travel 9.6 mm. A general equation that may be used is as
follows:
~SL! ~A! ~I!
5T (1)
~0.303! S
where:
SL = chart scan length, mm,
S = chart speed, mm/min,
I = cell current, mA,
A = deplating area, cm,
T = nickel thickness, µm, and
0.303 = constant calculated from the electrochemical
equivalent and density of nickel.
NOTE 7—Commercial units are available that will modify and may
simplify the above procedure.
7. Factors Affecting the Accuracy of the Method
7.1 Excessive Metal Build-Up in Coulometric Deplating
Cell—Excessive buildup of deposited nickel or the formation
of “whiskers” on the inside of the coulometric deplating cell
(cathode), especially near the gasket hole, can cause erratic
results and produce “noisy” curves. When buildup is observed,
remove it completely according to the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions or as follows:
7.1.1 If a metallic cell is used as a cathode:
7.1.1.1 Ream with a round, fine file. (A drill or reamer may
be used.)
7.1.1.2 Soak for 15 to 20 s in a solution of four parts
concentrated sulfuric acid and one part concentrated nitric acid.
If 316 stainless steel is used for the cell, it may be soaked in
concentrated nitric acid until all nickel is dissolved.
7.1.1.3 Rinse in water (Type IV or better as specified in
Specification D 1193) and dry.
7.1.1.4 Repeat 7.1.1.1 to 7.1.1.3 as many times as necessary
to remove all metallic buildup. This cleaning process should be
done after every ten tests or more frequently, if necessary.
NOTE 8—It has been found that giving the coulometric deplating cell
(cathode) a nickel strike prior to using will help prevent erratic buildup or
treeing around the gasket hole and cleaning will not be required as often.
7.1.2 If a metallic agitator tube is used as a cathode:
7.1.2.1 Place a stainless steel or nickel plate under the
gasket, lower the cell, and rinse it with DI water.
7.1.2.2 Fill the cell with 2 to 2.5 M H2SO4, reverse the
polarity of the current and strip the nickel from agitator tube. A
cleaning current of about 55 mA for about 45 s should suffice.
If the nickel is not completely removed, drain the cell, refill it
with H2SO4, and repeat the cleaning.
7.1.2.3 Wash the cell thoroughly with water.
7.1.2.4 If the tube still looks coated, remove the coating by
rubbing the agitation tube with a soft rubber eraser, followed
by washing with water.
7.2 Reference Electrode Preparation—If the electrode has
not been used for a day or has been allowed to dry for a period
of time, one or two conditioning runs will have to be made
prior to running a meaningful test. (See Note 2.)
 B 764 – 04
7.3 Cleanliness of Test Surface—Make sure the surface area
to be tested is free of water breaks, foreign material, etc. Nickel
surfaces that have been exposed to air for some time may have
become passive. Abrade lightly prior to testing to remove any
oxide films present. (Abrading mildly with an eraser usually
suffices: if not, clean with dilute sulfuric acid.)
7.4 Anode Area Variation—Use only enough pressure on
the gasket to seal it to the test area without solution leaks.
Excess pressure can distort the gasket and change the anode
area affecting the thickness results. If test results vary signifi-
cantly, examine the resulting deplated area with a magnifying
glass to determine if the area has varied in size. Small
variations in the anodic area can give large variations in test
results. The area defined by the gasket can vary significantly
between gaskets. When a different gasket is used, recalibrate
the instrumentation.
7.5 Electrical Noise—To obtain good, smooth curves,
eliminate all electrical noise caused by extraneous voltage
fluctuations. Using a buffer amplifier with the shortest leads
possible to the cell to drive the recorder may be required to
obtain usable results. Shielding the leads to the test cell will
also help. If the curves are extremely noisy (erratic), make at
least two curves on the same area to determine if the results are
meaningful and consistent. It may be necessary to insert an
electrical filter in the line source ahead of the constant current
supply.
7.6 Insertion Depth of Agitation Tube—If the agitation tube
contains the reference electrode, insert the tube in the cell to
the same depth each time (see 6.6), but not so deep as to“
shield” or interfere with the area being stripped.
7.7 Incomplete Dissolution of the Nickel—Even though an
apparent end point is observed, the nickel may not be com-
pletely dissolved. There may be small islands of nickel left, or
the periphery of the depleted area may be irregular or uneven.
This may be associated with a tilt of the cell relative to the
coating surface. Examine the test area with a magnifying lens
FIG. 1 T-Shaped Reference Electrode Assembly
4
after each test to insure that all the nickel has been dissolved
from the test area. If nickel is present, rerun the test until the
test area does not contain any nickel.
8. Interpretation of Results
8.1 The data obtained from this test will be shown on the
recorded graph, which plots the thickness (stripping time) of
nickel on the X-axis versus the millivolt (potential) of the
nickel layers on the Y-axis. The thicknesses of the individual
layers (or time differential) is measured between the steps or
breaks in the curve along the x-axis while the electrode
potential difference is determined by the change in amplitude
of the curve on the Y-axis. It is desirable that at least two tests,
within 6 to 8 mm of each other, be made on each test area and
the results averaged.
8.2 Interpretation of Curve—Referring to Fig. 1, it can be
seen that there are steps or breaks (changing potential) or steps
in the curve when moving left to right (increasing thickness).
NOTE 9—The values given in Fig. 1 are included only to simplify the
discussion for the Interpretation of Results. The actual values obtained
during testing will depend on the nature of the equipment, experimental
technique, the specific characteristics of the electroplating processes used
to produce the multilayer coatings and other details. It is emphasized that
the curve in Fig. 1 is an idealization of an actual result. Although the
potential differences are reproducible, the values of the individual poten-
tials may shift depending on the experimental results.
8.2.1 Microdiscontinuous Nickel —The first break or step, A
to C, in the solid curve is small and occurs at a nickel thickness
of approximately 3 µm in Fig. 1. The deposit represented by
this curve, from 0 to 3 µm, is a nickel strike which might be
used to induce microdiscontinuity in the chromium deposited
over this strike, see Note 10. In Fig. 1, the difference in activity
between this nickel strike deposit, B (750 mV), and the bright
nickel deposit, C (730 mV), is 20 mV. This makes the deposit
less active (cathodic) than the bright nickel deposit.
NOTE 10—This nickel deposit is referred to as microdiscontinuous
 B 764 – 04
nickel when it contains inert particles (particle nickel) to produce
micro-porous chromium or when it is microcracked (stressed nickel
deposit) to produce microcracked chromium. When the nickel strike
deposit is not used to produce discontinuities in the chromium, it can be
referred to as 9noble nickel9 if its electrode potential (millivolt activity) is
more noble (less active) than the adjacent bright nickel deposit.
8.2.2 Bright Nickel—After the first section of the curve
ending at about 3 µm, the curve in Fig. 1 experiences another
break or step at the 15 µm thickness mark in the figure, point
D. This represents at least 12 µm of bright nickel (see 8.2.4)
with a potential of 730 mV.
8.2.3 High Potential Nickel Strike —The line D to F in Fig.
1 between 15 µm and 18 µm represents the shape of the curve
of a high potential nickel strike that in this case is 3 µm thick.
For it to be classified as a high potential strike, it must have an
electrode potential more active than the adjacent bright nickel
deposit. In this example, the 705 mV (E) high potential nickel
strike is 25 mV more active than the 730 mV bright nickel
deposit (D).
8.2.4 Semi-bright Nickel—In Fig. 1, a large potential change
occurs, F to H. This slope is the result of the cell transitioning
from dissolving the last of the higher activity bright nickel and
starting to dissolve the lower activity semi-bright nickel
deposits. In Fig. 1, the semi-bright nickel has an electrode
potential that is 145 mV less active (cathodic) than the bright
nickel deposit. This is the STEP value for this multi-layered
nickel coating. Determining the thickness of the bright and
semi-bright nickel deposits, as in Fig. 1, normally involves
making an estimate. Since the distance along the x-axis
between points F and H is when the cell is transiting between
the bright and the semi-bright nickel deposits, assigning half of
the thickness to both deposits is usually an acceptable proce-
dure. This thickness is usually very small compared to the
thickness between C and D for the bright and H and I for the
semi-bright nickels. Alternative procedures are presented in
8.2.6 and 8.4.
FIG. 2 Midpoint Nickel Thickness Curve
5
NOTE 11—The step in the curve is never a straight perpendicular line.
As the bright nickel is dissolved, the plotted potential is associated only
with the bright nickel until the semi-bright nickel is exposed and starts to
dissolve. At this point, the measured potential increases and continues to
increase until only semi-bright nickel is exposed except for bright nickel
on the walls of the pit formed by dissolution of the nickel. From this point
on the recorded potential is due primarily to the semi-bright nickel.
NOTE 12—Most corrosion studies have demonstrated that for the best
corrosion results, if a nickel strike is used between the chromium deposit
and the bright nickel, it should have an electrochemical electrode potential
equal to, or preferably more noble (less active) than the bright nickel
deposit. The semi-bright nickel deposit should also be more noble (less
active) than the bright nickel deposit (see Specification B 456).
8.2.5 Substrate—The line after at about 40 µm in Fig. 1
represents the direction the curve will take if a steel substrate
is under the semi-bright nickel deposit. The curve would turn
up if a copper substrate was used.
8.2.6 Thickness and STEP Measurements—Since the rise of
the actual STEP curve is normally not a nearly straight line as
depicted in Fig. 1, it is best to read the thickness at the midpoint
on the rising portion of the curve (see Fig. 2 and 8.4) if it is
difficult to assign a millivolt reading due to the shape of the
curve, see 8.4 and Notes 13 and 14.
8.3 When a STEP value is referenced, such as in a standard,
it refers to the electrode potential in millivolts between the
bright nickel and the semi-bright nickel deposits. In Fig. 1, the
STEP is 145 mV. When additional STEP values are presented,
they must include the deposit being referenced and its relative
activity to the deposit in which it is paired. In Fig. 1, the STEP
for the high potential nickel strike is 25 mV more active than
the bright nickel deposit.
8.4 In some instances, the obtained curves may show
irregularities such as drift (deviation from a straight line) in the
plot for the semi-bright nickel, the bright nickel deposit, or
both. The drift may be more noticeable with thick multilayer
deposits. The curve also may exhibit a greater than normal drift
or elongation of the step (rising portion of the plot). In order to
 B 764 – 04
minimize error in interpreting this type of curve, the millivolt
reading for the bright nickel is taken 2 µm before the rise of the
curve, point A on Fig. 2 (the point at which the semi-bright
nickel is first exposed in the cell), and the mV reading for the
semi-bright nickel is taken 2 µm after the rise of the curve,
point B on Fig. 2 (the point at which the potential reading is
due predominantly to the exposure of only the semi-bright
nickel). Where the multilayer nickel contains a thin layer of a
high potential deposit, the potential of the bright nickel will be
taken at a point 2 µm before the dip in the curve attributed to
the high potential layer. Use of an indicating (digital display)
meter is helpful if the chart is periodically annotated (every 15
to 30 s) with the display reading.
NOTE 13—Due to the much thinner 9microdiscontinuous nickel9 and
9high potential nickel9 strikes, compared to the bright and semi-bright
nickel deposits, an estimate of their potentials and thickness is sometimes
all that is obtainable.
NOTE 14—Another method is to determine the point of inflection of the
curve, which is the point of maximum slope. If it is not evident to the eye,
the use of a straight edge can be helpful. The straight edge is lined up with
the step portion of the curve as shown in Fig. 2. The segment of the plot
with the maximum slope should be of finite length, line C-D in Fig. 2, and
the midpoint of the segment can be taken.
9. Precision and Bias
9.1 In the case of multilayer nickel coatings, the measure-
ment uncertainty or precision of the method has been studied
on electroplated panels. Results based on measurements made
in three laboratories showed that the thickness of semi-bright
and bright nickel layers can be determined with a standard
deviation of 61.65 µm with a variance of 9.2 %. The potential
difference between semi-bright and bright nickel can be mea-
sured with a standard deviation of 63.7 mV with a variance of
2.6 %.
NOTE 15—The relatively high variance in the thickness measurements,
9.2 %, was due to actual variation in coating thickness at various points on
the panel. This was confirmed by measuring thickness by the microscopi-
cal method at points close or adjacent to the spots used in the STEP tests.
The results were in close agreement, that is, the variation in local thickness
displayed in the STEP test measurements was also observed in the
microscopical measurements. Also, the electrode potential results from
tests made at different current-density locations on a single sample can
vary greatly due to the different characteristics of nickel electroplated at
different current densities.
9.2 Measurements made on primary standard reference
materials6 that certify the thickness, thickness uniformity, and
the potential difference between the semi-bright and bright
nickel layer showed that thickness could be measured with a
standard deviation of 60.5 µm with a variance of 2.1 %. The
potential difference was measured with a standard deviation of
60.82 mV with a variance of 0.7 %.
9.3 3 Determination of the bias or accuracy of the method
has not been studied in detail. Note 12 suggests, however, that
the STEP test provides as accurate a determination of the local
nickel thickness as does the microscopical method.
10. Keywords
10.1 potential; STEP; thickness
6
Primary Standard Reference Material (SRM) Number 2350 for calibrating this
method is available from the National Bureau of Standards, Office of Standard
Reference Materials, Gaithersburg, MD 20899.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 766 – 86 (Reapproved 2003)
Standard Specification for
Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 766; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the requirements for electrode-
posited cadmium coatings on products of iron, steel, and other
metals.
NOTE 1—Cadmium is deposited as a coating principally on iron and
steel products. It can also be electrodeposited on aluminum, brass,
beryllium copper, copper, nickel, and powder metallurgy parts.
1.2 The coating is provided in various thicknesses up to and
including 25 µm either as electrodeposited or with supplemen-
tary finishes.
1.3 Cadmium coatings are used for corrosion resistance and
for corrosion prevention of the basis metal part. The as-
deposited coating (Type I) is useful for the lowest cost
protection in a mild or noncorrosive environment where early
formation of white corrosion products is not detrimental or
harmful to the function of a component. The prime purpose of
the supplementary chromate finishes (Types II and III) on the
electroplated cadmium is to increase corrosion resistance.
Chromating will retard or prevent the formation of white
corrosion products on surfaces exposed to various environmen-
tal conditions as well as delay the appearance of corrosion from
the basis metal.
1.4 Cadmium plating is used to minimize bi-metallic corro-
sion between high-strength steel fasteners and aluminum in the
aerospace industry. Undercutting of threads on fastener parts is
not necessary as the cadmium coating has a low coefficient of
friction that reduces the tightening torque required and allows
repetitive dismantling.
1.5 Cadmium-coated parts can easily be soldered without
the use of corrosive fluxes. Cadmium-coated steel parts have a
lower electrical contact resistance than zinc-coated steel. The
lubricity of cadmium plating is used on springs for doors and
latches and for weaving machinery operating in high humidity.
Corrosion products formed on cadmium are tightly adherent.
Unlike zinc, cadmium does not build up voluminous corrosion
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on
Metallic and Inorganic Coatings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B08.08.04on Soft Metals.
Current edition approved Feb. 10, 2003. Published May 2003. Originally
approved in 1986. Last previous edition approved in 1998 as B 766 – 86 (1998).
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
products on the surface. This allows for proper functioning
during corrosive exposure of moving parts, threaded assem-
blies, valves, and delicate mechanisms without jamming with
debris.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following standards form a part of this document to
the extent referenced herein.
2.2 ASTM Standards:
A 165 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cad-
mium on Steel2
B 117 Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus3
B 183 Practice for Preparation of Low-Carbon Steel for
Electroplating4
B 201 Practice for Testing Chromate Coatings on Zinc and
Cadmium Surfaces4
B 242 Practice for Preparation of High-Carbon Steel for
Electroplating4
B 253 Guide for Preparation of Aluminum Alloys for Elec-
troplating4
B 254 Practice for Preparation of and Electroplating on
Stainless Steel4
B 281 Practice for Preparation of Copper and Copper-Base
Alloys for Electroplating and Conversion Coatings4
B 320 Practice for Preparation of Iron Castings for Electro-
plating4
B 322 Practice for Cleaning Metals Prior to Electroplating4
B 343 Practice for Preparation of Nickel for Electroplating
with Nickel4
B 374 Terminology Relating to Electroplating4
B 487 Test Method for Measurement of Metal and Oxide
Coating Thicknesses by Microscopical Examination of a
Cross Section4
B 499 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thick-
nesses by the Magnetic Method: Nonmagnetic Coatings on
Magnetic Basis Metals4
2
Discontinued; see 1987 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05. Replaced
by Specification B 766.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.02.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
 B 766 – 86 (2003)
B 504 Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Me- NOTE 3—It is strongly recommended that production items be pro-
tallic Coatings by the Coulometric Method4 cessed as either Type II or Type III.
B 507 Practice for Design of Articles to Be Electroplated on 5. Ordering Information
Racks4
B 558 Practice for Preparation of Nickel Alloys for Electro- 5.1 In order to make the application of this specification
plating4 complete, the purchaser needs to supply the following infor-
B 567 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thickness mation to the seller in the purchase order or other governing
by the Beta Backscatter Method4 document:
B 568 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thickness 5.1.1 The name, designation, and date of issue of this
by X-Ray Spectrometry4 specification.
B 571 Practice for Qualitative Adhesion Testing of Metallic 5.1.2 Deposit by class and type (4.1 and 4.2).
Coatings4 5.1.3 Composition and metallurgical condition of the sub-
B 602 Test Method for Attribute Sampling of Metallic and strate to be coated. Application to high-strength steel parts
Inorganic Coatings4 (6.2).
B 697 Guide for Selection of Sampling Plans for Inspection 5.1.4 Heat treatment for stress relief, whether it has been
of Electrodeposited Metallic and Inorganic Coatings4 performed or is required (6.3).
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials5 5.1.5 Additional undercoat, if required (6.5).
F 519 Method for Mechanical Hydrogen Embrittlement 5.1.6 Plating process variation, if required (6.6).
Evaluation of Plating Processes and Service Environments6 5.1.7 Hydrogen embrittlement relief, if required (6.7).
2.3 Federal Standard: 5.1.8 Desired color of the Type II film (6.8.2).
QQ-P-416 Plating, Cadmium (Electrodeposited)7 5.1.9 Location of significant surfaces (7.1.2).
2.4 International Standard: 5.1.10 Coating luster (7.5).
ISO 2082 Metallic Coatings—Electroplated Coatings of 5.1.11 Whether non-destructive or destructive tests are to be
Cadmium on Iron or Steel8 used in cases of choice (Note 14).
2.5 Military Standard: 5.1.12 Configuration, procedures, and tensile load for hy-
MIL-STD-1312 Fasteners, Test Methods9 drogen embrittlement relief test (9.4, 10.6, Supplementary
Requirements S2, and S3).
3. Terminology 5.1.13 Whether certification is required (Section 12).
5.1.14 Whether supplementary requirements are applicable.
3.1 Definitions—Definitions of terms used in this specifica-
tion are in accordance with Terminology B 374. 6. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 Nature of Coating—The coating shall be essentially
4. Classification pure cadmium produced by electrodeposition usually from an
4.1 Classes—Electrodeposited cadmium coatings shall be alkaline cyanide solution.
classified on the basis of thickness as follows: 6.2 High Tensile Strength Steel Parts— Steel parts having
Class Minimum Thickness, µm an ultimate tensile strength greater than 1650 MPa (approxi-
mately 50 HRC) shall not be plated by electrodeposition unless
25 25
12 12
authorized by the purchaser.
8 8 6.3 Stress Relief—Steel parts having an ultimate tensile
5 5 strength of 1050 MPa (approximately 35 HRC) and above, and
NOTE 2—Cadmium coatings thicker than 12 µm are normally not that have been machined, ground, cold-formed, or cold-
economical. straightened shall be heat-treated at 190 6 15°C for 5 h or
4.2 Types—Electrodeposited cadmium coatings shall be more for stress relief before cleaning and coating.
identified by types on the basis of supplementary treatment 6.4 Preparatory Procedures—The basis metal shall be sub-
required as follows: jected to such cleaning procedures as necessary to ensure a
4.2.1 Type I—As electrodeposited without supplementary surface satisfactory for subsequent electroplating. Materials
treatment. used for cleaning shall have no damaging effects on the basis
4.2.2 Type II—With supplementary colored chromate treat- metal resulting in pits, intergranular attack, stress corrosion
ment. cracking, or hydrogen embrittlement. If necessary, cleaning
4.2.3 Type III—With supplementary colorless chromate materials for steel parts should be evaluated in accordance with
treatment. Method F 519.
NOTE 4—For basis metal preparation, the following standards should be
employed depending upon the metallurgical composition: Practices B 183,
5
B 242, B 253, B 254, B 281, B 320, B 322, B 343 and B 558.
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 15.03. 6.5 Substrate—Cadmium shall be deposited directly on the
7

8
Available from U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington DC 20402. basis metal part without an undercoat of another metal except
Available from American National Standards Institute, 25 W. 43rd St., 4th
Floor, New York, NY 10036.
when the part is either stainless steel or aluminum and its
9
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700 alloys. An undercoat of nickel is permissible on stainless steel.
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS. With aluminum and aluminum alloys, the oxide layer shall be

2
 B 766 – 86 (2003)
removed and replaced by a metallic zinc layer in accordance
with Guide B 253. For better adherence, a copper strike or a
nickel coating may be applied to the zinc layer before
electroplating with the cadmium.
6.6 Plating Process—The plating shall be applied after all
basis metal heat treatments and mechanical operations, such as
machining, brazing, welding, forming, and perforating of the
article, have been completed.
6.7 Hydrogen Embrittlement Relief— Steel parts having a
tensile strength of 1200 MPa (approximately 38 HRC) and
higher shall be baked at 190 6 15°C for 8 h or more within 4
h after electroplating to provide hydrogen embrittlement relief.
Electroplated springs and other parts subject to flexure shall not
be flexed, loaded, or used before the hydrogen embrittlement
relief treatment. The baking treatment for hydrogen embrittle-
ment relief shall be done before the application of any
supplementary chromate treatment. When specified, freedom
from embrittlement shall be determined.
NOTE 5—For high-strength steels, greater than 1300 MPa or approxi-
mately 40 HRC, it is strongly recommended that the baking time be
extended to 23 h or more to ensure hydrogen embrittlement relief.
NOTE 6—Electroplated steel parts, passivated by the baking operation
for hydrogen embrittlement relief, require reactivation before the chro-
mate treatment. This application, immersion in a dilute acid solution,
should be done as soon as practical. If the chromating solution contains
sulfuric acid, then the reactivating solution should be 1 part of sulfuric
acid (sp gr 1.83) by volume added to 99 parts of water. If the chromating
solution contains hydrochloric acid, then the reactivating solution should
be 1 part of hydrochloric acid (sp gr 1.16) by volume added to 99 parts of
water. Duration of immersion should be as brief as is consistent with the
nature of the work. Separately racked items can be reactivated in
approximately 5 s, whereas a perforated container of barrel-plated parts
requires approximately 15 s.
6.8 Chromate Treatment:
6.8.1 Chromate treatments for Types II and III shall be done
in or with special aqueous acidic solutions composed of
hexavalent chromium along with certain anions that act as
catalyst or film-forming compounds to produce a continuous
smooth protective film. Chromic acid and nitric acid bright
dips shall not be used for treatment to produce chromate
coatings. When proprietary materials are used for this treat-
ment, the instructions of the supplier should be followed.
6.8.2 The Type II film color shall range from an iridescent
yellow or a thicker, more protective iridescent bronze or brown
to the heavier olive drab. It may also be dyed to a desired color.
When necessary, the color of the film shall be indicated by the
purchaser and specified by the provision of a suitably colored
sample or indicated on the drawing for the part.
6.8.3 The absence of color shall not be considered as
evidence of lack of Type III film or as a basis for rejection.
Presence of clear Type III film shall be determined by a spot
test as specified in 10.4.
6.8.4 Waxes, lacquers, or other organic coatings shall not be
used as a substitute for, nor may they be used in conjunction
with, supplementary treatments when the purpose is to ensure
conformance to the salt spray requirements. Waxes and the
like, may be used to improve lubricity.
7. Coating Requirements
7.1 Thickness:
3
7.1.1 The thickness of the coating everywhere on the
significant surfaces shall conform to the requirements of the
specified class, as defined in 4.1.
7.1.2 Significant surfaces are those normally visible (di-
rectly or by reflection) that are essential to the appearance or
serviceability of the article when assembled in normal position;
or that can be the source of corrosion products that will deface
visible surfaces on the assembled article. When necessary, the
significant surfaces shall be indicated by the purchaser on
applicable drawing of the article, or by the provision of
suitably marked samples.
NOTE 7—As heavier coatings are required for satisfactory corrosion
resistance than Class 5, allowance should be made in the fabrication of
most threaded articles, such as nuts, bolts, and similar fasteners with
complementary threads for dimensional tolerances to obtain necessary
coating build-up. Flat surfaces and certain shielded or recessed areas, such
as root-diameter of threads, have a tendency to exhibit lack of build-up
and to be heavier at exposed edges and sharp projections with electrode-
posited coatings. This trend is also found with vacuum-deposited cad-
mium coatings and is in direct contrast with mechanically deposited
coatings.
NOTE 8—The coating thickness requirements of this specification is a
minimum requirement. Variation in thickness from point to point on an
article is inherent in electroplating. Therefore, the thickness will have to
exceed the specified value at some points on the significant surfaces to
ensure that it equals or exceeds the specified value at all points. Hence, in
most cases, the average coating thickness of an article will be greater than
the specified value; how much greater is largely determined by the shape
of the article (see Practice B 507) and the characteristics of the electro-
plating process. In addition, the average coating thickness on articles will
vary from article to article within a production lot. Therefore, if all of the
articles in a production lot are to meet the thickness requirement, the
average coating thickness for the production lot as a whole will be greater
than the average necessary to assure that a single article meets the
requirement.
7.1.3 For nonsignificant visible surfaces, the minimum
thickness for Classes 25 and 12 shall be Class 8 (8 µm); for
Class 8 it shall be Class 5 (5 µm); and for Class 5 it shall be 4
µm.
7.2 Adhesion—The cadmium coating shall be sufficiently
adherent to the basis metal to pass the tests detailed in 10.2.
7.3 Abrasion Resistant—The supplementary Type II chro-
mate film shall be adherent, nonpowdery, and abrasion resistant
(10.3).
7.4 Corrosion Resistance—Cadmium coatings with supple-
mentary chromate films on iron and steel basis metals shall
show neither white corrosion products of cadmium nor basis
metal corrosion products at the end of 96 h for Type II film or
12 h for Type III film when tested by continuous exposure to
salt spray. The appearance of corrosion products visible to the
unaided eye at normal reading distance shall be cause for
rejection, except white corrosion products at the edges of
specimens shall not constitute failure.
NOTE 9—The hours given are the minimum required to guarantee
satisfactory performance. Longer periods before the appearance of white
corrosion and basis metal corrosion (rust from iron and steel products) are
possible. Salt spray resistance does not vary in exact proportion with
increased plating thicknesses of Types II and III coatings. Although
specified hours to failure (red rust for iron and steel articles) for Type I
coating is not stated, the hours given for Types II and III reflect the added
protection of the chromate treatment without requiring impractical testing.
 B 766 – 86 (2003)
NOTE 10—In many instances, there is no direct relation between the
results of an accelerated corrosion test and the resistance to corrosion in
other media. Factors such as the formation of protective films, basis
materials, and temperature can influence the progress of corrosion greatly,
depending upon the conditions encountered in service. The results
obtained in the test should, therefore, not be regarded as a direct guide to
the corrosion resistance of the tested materials in all environments where
these materials may be used. Also, performance of different materials in
the test cannot always be taken as a direct guide to the relative corrosion
of these materials in service.
7.5 Luster—Either a bright or dull luster shall be accept-
able; however, for steel parts that are heat treated to 40 HRC
(approximately 1300 MPa) and harder, they shall have a dull
luster or finish.
NOTE 11—High-strength steel parts that are cadmium plated from baths
without brighteners are much more permeable to hydrogen than those
bright cadmium plated. Bright cadmium is a very good hydrogen barrier
that “seals in” the hydrogen. As embrittlement is a surface or subsurface
phenomenon, even a 24 h baking is not sufficient to provide embrittlement
relief of high-strength steels plated with a Class 12 deposit from a bright
cyanide plating bath.
7.6 Workmanship and Finish—The coating shall be smooth,
adherent, uniform in appearance, and free from blisters, pits,
nodules, flaking, and other defects that may affect the function
of the coating. The coating shall cover all surfaces as stated in
7.1, including thread roots, thread peaks, corners, holes,
recesses, and edges. There shall be no indication of contami-
nation or improper operation of equipment used to produce the
deposit, such as excessively powdery or darkened coatings.
Superficial staining and variations in color or luster shall not be
cause for rejection. Defects and variations in appearance of the
coating that arise from surface conditions of the substrate
(pores, scratches, roll marks, inclusions, and the like) and that
persist in the finish despite the observance of good application
techniques shall not be cause for rejection.
NOTE 12—Coatings generally perform better in service when the
substrate over which they are applied is smooth and free from torn metal,
inclusions, pores, and other defects. The specifications covering the
unfinished product should provide limits for these defects. A metal finisher
can often remove defects through special treatments such as grinding,
polishing, electropolishing, and chemical treatments. However these are
not normal in the treatment steps preceding the application of the coating.
When desired, they are subject of a special agreement between the
purchaser and supplier.
8. Sampling
8.1 Inspection Lot—An inspection lot shall be a collection
of coated articles that are of the same kind, that have been
produced to the same specifications, that have been coated by
a single supplier at one time or at approximately the same time
under essentially identical conditions, and that are submitted
for acceptance or rejection as a group.
8.2 Selection—A random sample of the size required by
Test Method B 602 shall be selected from the inspection lot.
The articles in the lot shall be inspected for conformance to the
requirements of this specification and the lot shall be classified
as conforming to or nonconforming to each requirement in
accordance with the criteria of the sampling plan in Test
Method B 602.
NOTE 13—Test Method B 602 contains four sampling plans, three of
4
which are to be used with nondestructive test methods, the fourth is to be
used with destructive test methods. The three methods for nondestructive
tests differ in the quality level they require of the product. Test Method
B 602 requires use of the plan with the intermediate quality level unless
the purchaser specifies otherwise. It is recommended that the purchaser
compare the plans with his needs and state which plan is to be used. If the
plans in Test Method B 602 do not serve the needs, additional plans are
given in Guide B 697. Both Method B 602 and Guide B 697 list references
where additional information on sampling inspection and additional plans
are given.
NOTE 14—When both destructive and nondestructive tests exist for the
measurement of a characteristic, the purchaser needs to state which is to
be used so that the proper sampling plan is selected. Whether or not a test
is destructive may not always be clear. A test may destroy the coating, but
in a noncritical area; or, although it may destroy the coating, a tested piece
can be reclaimed by stripping and recoating. The purchaser needs to state
whether the test is to be considered destructive or nondestructive. The
decision is important because the plans for destructive tests are signifi-
cantly less able to discriminate between acceptable and unacceptable lots.
This is because fewer parts are tested using this plan.
8.3 Specimens—If separate test specimens are to be used to
represent the coated articles in a test, the specimens shall be of
the nature, size, and number and shall be processed as required
in 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, Supplementary Requirement S2, or in the
purchase order.
9. Specimen Preparation
9.1 Electroplated Parts or Separate Specimens—When the
electroplated parts are of such form, shape, size, and value as
to prohibit use, or are not readily adaptable to a test, or when
destructive tests of small lot size are required, the test shall be
made by the use of separate specimens electroplated concur-
rently with the articles represented. The permission or the
requirement to use test specimens, their number, the material
from which they shall be made, and their shape and size shall
be stated in the purchase order or other governing document.
The separate specimens shall be of a basis metal equivalent to
that of article represented, of the same metallurgical condition,
and shall have the same surface condition. These separate
specimens shall be introduced into the lot at regular intervals
before the cleaning operation, preliminary to electroplating,
and shall not be separated therefrom until after completion of
the electroplating. Conditions affecting the electroplating of
specimens, including the spacing, plating media, bath agitation,
temperature, etc., in respect to the other objects being electro-
plated, shall correspond as nearly as possible to those affecting
the significant surfaces of the articles represented. Unless a
need can be demonstrated, separately prepared specimens shall
not be used in place of production items for nondestructive and
visual examinations.
9.2 Thickness, Adhesion, Abrasion Resistance and Presence
of Clear (Type III) Coating Specimens—If separate specimens
for thickness, adhesion, abrasion resistance, and the presence
of clear (Type III) coating tests are required, they shall be strips
approximately 100 mm long, 25 mm wide, and 1 mm thick, or
cylindrical pieces with the cross-section area approximately
equal to that of the production item.
9.3 Corrosion Resistance Specimens—If separate speci-
mens for the corrosion resistance test are required, they shall be
panels, approximately 150 mm long, 100 mm wide, and 1 mm
thick.
 B 766 – 86 (2003)
9.4 Hydrogen Embrittlement Relief Specimens—If separate
specimens are required for the hydrogen embrittlement relief
test, the configuration shall be specified by the purchaser.
NOTE 15—When required for testing, the manufacturer of the basis
metal parts should provide the coating facility with the stated test
specimens, loading bolts, loading rings, and the like.
10. Test Methods
10.1 Thickness:
10.1.1 The thickness of electrodeposited cadmium coatings
shall be determined by Test Methods B 487, B 499, B 504,
B 567, or B 568, as applicable. Other methods may be used, if
it can be demonstrated that the uncertainty of measurements
with these methods is less than 10%.
10.1.2 The thickness measurements of Types II and III
deposits shall be made after application of the supplementary
treatments. Whenever Test Method B 504 or B 567 is used,
remove the supplementary treatment from the test area before
measuring the thickness. Remove by using a mild abrasive (a
paste of levigated alumina or magnesium oxide) and rubbing
gently with the finger.
10.2 Adhesion—The electrodeposited cadmium coating
shall be tested for adhesion to the basis metal or substrate layer
in a manner that is consistent with the service requirements of
the coated article. When examined at a magnification of
approximately 43 diameters, the coating shall not show
separation at the interface. The formation of cracks in the
coating caused by rupture of the basis metal that does not result
in flaking, peeling, or blistering of the coating shall not be
considered as nonconformance. Use one of the following
methods for determining adhesion.
10.2.1 The surface of the coated article shall be scrapped or
sheared with a sharp edge, knife, or razor blade through the
coating down to the basis metal and examined at 43 magni-
fication for evidence of nonadhesion.
10.2.2 The part shall be plastically deformed, if possible, by
clamping in a vise and bending the projecting portion back and
forth until rupture occurs.
10.2.3 Any suitable test procedure, such as the burnishing
test, the draw test, the peel test, or the scribe test in accordance
with Test Methods B 571 shall be used.
NOTE 16—There is no single satisfactory test for evaluating the
adhesion of electrodeposited coatings. Those given (10.2.1, 10.2.2, and
10.2.3) are widely used; however, other tests may prove more applicable
in special cases.
10.3 Abrasion Resistance—The abrasion resistance of the
supplementary chromate films (Types II and III) shall be
determined in accordance with Practice B 201.
5
10.4 Clear (Colorless) Type III Coatings—The presence of
a clear Type III coating shall be determined in accordance with
Practice B 201.
10.5 Salt Spray Corrosion Resistance—The 5% neutral salt
spray (fog) test as defined in Test Method B 117 shall be used
when there is a steel or iron substrate. Parts with supplemen-
tary chromate film shall be aged at room temperature for at
least 24 h before subjection to the test.
10.6 Hydrogen Embrittlement—The test to indicate freedom
from hydrogen embrittlement failure of coated parts or speci-
mens need not be conducted unless the method is specified in
the purchase order. The method description shall include
specimen configuration, means of applying a load to the part,
stress or load level, and duration of test. Parts shall not crack
or fail by fracture when tested.
10.7 Visual Examination—The coating shall be examined
for compliance with the requirements of luster, workmanship,
and finish.
11. Rejection and Rehearing
11.1 Coatings that fail to conform to the requirements of this
specification or authorized modifications may be rejected.
They may be reconsidered for acceptance by rectifying inspec-
tion in accordance with Methods B 602 and B 697 when
allowed by the purchaser. Rejection should be reported to the
producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
supplier may make claims for a rehearing. Coatings that show
imperfection during subsequent manufacturing operations may
be rejected.
12. Certification
12.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, the
producer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished to the
purchaser stating that samples representing each lot have been
processed, tested, and inspected in accordance with this speci-
fication and the requirements have been met. When specified in
the purchase order or contract, a report of the test results shall
be furnished.
13. Packaging and Packing
13.1 Preservation, packaging and packing methods for elec-
trodeposited cadmium parts or articles employed by a supplier
shall be such as to preclude damaging during shipment and
handling.
14. Keywords
14.1 cadmium; electrodeposited coatings; electrodeposited
coatings; cadmium
 B 766 – 86 (2003)
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS

The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
contract or order and for all agencies of the United States Government.

S1. Responsibility for Inspection
S1.1 The producer or supplier shall be responsible for the
performance of all inspection requirements as specified herein.
Except as otherwise specified in the contract or order, the
supplier may use his own or any other facilities suitable for the
performance of the inspection requirements specified herein
unless disapproved by the purchaser. The purchaser retains the
right to perform any of the inspections and tests set forth in this
specification where such inspections and tests are deemed
necessary to ensure that the supplies and services conform to
the prescribed requirements.
S2. Specimens for Hydrogen Embrittlement Relief
S2.1 Four specimens shall be used to represent the lot. The
specimens for the test shall be round notched specimens with
the axis of the specimen (load direction) perpendicular to the
short transverse grain flow direction. The configuration shall be
in accordance with the figure pertaining to 12.7 6 0.025 mm
(0.5 6 0.001 in.) round tension test specimens with 50.8 6
0.13 mm (2.0 6 0.05 in.) gage length and examples of
small-size specimens proportional to the standard specimen in
Method E 8. Specimens shall have a 60 6 1° V-notch located
approximately at the center of the gagelength. The cross
section area at the root of the “V” shall be approximately equal
to half the area of the full cross-section area of the specimen’s
reduced section. The “V” shall have a 0.254 6 0.013 mm
radius of curvature at the base of the notch.
S3. Embrittlement Relief Test
S3.1 The notched specimens shall be subjected to a sus-
tained tensile load equal to 75 6 2 % of the ultimate notch
tensile strength of the material. The articles, parts, or speci-
mens shall be held under load for at least 200 h and then
examined for cracks or fracture.
S3.2 Parts such as spring pins, lock rings, and the like, that
are installed in holes or rods shall be similarly assembledusing
the applicable parts specifications or drawing toler-ances which
impose the maximum sustained tensile load on the plated part.
The selected samples shall be subjected to a sustained tensile
load equal to 115 % of the maximum design yield load for
which the part was designed. Fastener hardware, where the
maximum yield load is not known or given, shall be tested in
accordance with MIL-STD 1312, Test 5. Parts that require
special fixtures, extreme loads to comply with the above
requirements, or where the maximum design yield load is not
known, may be represented by separate notched specimens.
NOTE S00017—The manufacturer of the basis metal parts should
provide the coating facility with notched tensile specimens when required
for testing.

APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. Electrodeposited Cadmium Coating

X1.1 Use—Electrodeposited cadmium coatings, mainly on
iron and steel products, are widely used in many industries.
Electrodeposition of the cadmium on other metal products
being used to a greater extent in both the aerospace and
communication industries. The corrosion rate of cadmium
plated parts is much lower than that of unplated parts in most
atmospheres as well as in water. In addition, the electrochemi-
cal relationship between cadmium and a basis metal, for
example, steel, is such that the corrosion or rusting is sup-
pressed by galvanic action even where the cadmium coating
may be damaged or worn through. The Type I, as-deposited
coating, may be used to improve solderability, to lower
electrical contact resistance, to provide surface conductivity on
electronic equipment, and to prevent seizing of moving parts,
bolts, nuts, and latches.
X1.2 Limitations—The Type I electrodeposited coatings
should not be used on production items that in service will
reach a temperature of 225°C or higher or will come in contact
with other parts that reach these temperatures. Cadmium
coated parts that may be subjected to heat from soldering,
brazing, or welding operations should be so labeled and tagged
to indicate being so coated because of the danger from
poisonous cadmium oxide vapors during these operations.

6
 B 766 – 86 (2003)

X2. Supplementary Treatments

X2.1 Purpose—The clear chromate film (Type III) is
generally used to prevent fingermarkings and corrosion of parts
that may occur at room temperature during assembly and
storage or will be exposed to a mild environmental condition.
The purpose of the colored chromate supplementary finish
(Type II) on cadmium coatings is to retard the weathering to
form white corrosion products on the surfaces exposed to
stagnant water, sea water, marine atmospheres, high humidity,
or cyclic condensation and drying. Most of the iridescent
yellow to live drab Type II chromate films will be satisfactory
as an undercoat if production items are to receive an organic
paint system application, as generally required by the aero-
space industry.
X2.2 Limitations—Supplementary chromate treatments
should not be applied to production items that will not be
painted and will be continuously exposed to temperatures in
excess of 65°C or intermittently exposed for short periods to a
temperature of about 150°C. The protective value of the
supplementary coating decreases under these conditions. Tem-
peratures above 65°C will accelerate the deterioration of the
chromate film especially in drier environments, such that the
chromate coating can become so powdery that no protection is
provided.
X2.3 Handling Precautions—Chromate treated articles that
involve only dipping in chemical solutions normally require 24
h at 20 to 30°C to render them suitable for handling without
damage to the finish coating while the latter is in the gelatinous
form. It is important with such coatings that the supplement
film is not damaged while wet in order to comply with the
workmanship requirements.

X3. Service Conditions

X3.1 The service life of a cadmium coating, based upon
atmospheric exposure tests, has supported the generalization
that the protective value of the deposit is proportional to its
thickness and to the environment to which it is exposed.
Conditions of exposure and basis metals are so varied that it is
not possible to predict the exact service life of a coating of a
given thickness, with or without a supplementary finish. Table
X3.1 provides recommended thicknesses with a supplementary
finish on typical applications (mainly iron and steel articles)
that are suitable under certain service conditions.

TABLE X3.1 Service Life and Conditions

Service Typical
Class Treatment Exposure
Condition Applications
Severe 25A or 12 Type II To condensation, perspiration, infrequent wetting by rain, cleaners Military hardware, electronic parts for
tropical service, washing machinery
Moderate 8 Type II Mostly to dry indoor atmospheres but subjected to occasional Threaded parts, screws, bolts, radio
condensation, wear, or abrasion parts instruments, TV, and radio
chassis
Mild 5 Type II or Type III Indoor atmospheres and with rare condensation and subject to Springs, locks, washers, tools,
minimum wear or abrasion fasteners, electronic and electrical
parts
A
Cadmium coatings thicker than 12 µm are normally not economical.

7
 B 766 – 86 (2003)

X4. Toxicity

X4.1 Cadmium, because of its toxicity, should not be used cooking utensils, or for other objects likely to come in contact
on articles intended for use as food containers, with food.

X5. Packaging Limitations

X5.1 Electrodeposited cadmium coated articles without
supplementary protective films should not be packaged or
packed in nonventilated containers either together or in contact
with electrical and electronic equipment, because of the danger
of deleterious effects on the cadmium coating from unstable
electrical insulation. In addition to organic electrical insulation,
phenolic resinous substances and other containing unsaturated
carbon-to-carbon linkages, such as oil paints and impregnated
papers, cause an abnormal attack on the cadmium by setting
free in the presence of moisture, formic acid, butyric acid, and
the like. Corrosion of cadmium coated articles have been noted
when they have been packaged in direct contact with container
materials such as wood or cardboard. Corrosion has been
especially severe if the container materials have become wet or
have been stored under conditions of high humidity.

X6. Cross Reference

X6.1 The correlation between the classes and types used in QQ-P-416, and International Standard ISO 2082 are indicated
this specification, Specification A 165, Federal Specification in Table X6.1

TABLE X6.1 Correlation of Specifications

Specification B 766 Specification A 165
Thickness, Thickness,
Class Type
µm µm
25 25A NS 12
12 12 OS 8
8 8 TS 5
5 5
Supplementary Finish: Supplementary Finish:
Type: Not Specified
I None, as deposited
II With a colored chromate
treatment
III With a colorless chromate
treatment
Specification QQ-P-416 Specification ISO 2082
Class Thickness, in. (µm): Service Class Thickness,
Condition µm:
1 0.0005(13) 3 Fe/Cd25c 25
2 0.0003 (8) 2 Fe/Cd12c 12A
3 0.0002 (5) 1 Fe/Cd5c 5
Supplementary Finish: Supplementary Finish:
Type: Not as a requirement, but stated a colored
I None, as deposited or colorless coating shall be applied unless
II With chromate treatment otherwise specified. Phosphating may be
(colored) used as alternate treatment for articles to
III With phosphate treatment be painted.
A
Cadmium coatings thicker than 12 µm are normally not economical.

8
 B 766 – 86 (2003)
.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

9
 Designation: B 765 – 03

Standard Guide for

Selection of Porosity and Gross Defect Tests for
Electrodeposits and Related Metallic Coatings1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 765; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope Hard-Drawn Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes2

1.1 This guide describes some of the available standard
methods for the detection, identification, and measurement of
porosity and gross defects in electrodeposited and related
metallic coatings and provides some laboratory-type evalua-
tions and acceptances. Some applications of the test methods
are tabulated in Table 1 and Table 2.
1.2 This guide does not apply to coatings that are produced
by thermal spraying, ion bombardment, sputtering, and other
similar techniques where the coatings are applied in the form of
discrete particles impacting on the substrate.
1.3 This guide does not apply to beneficial or controlled
porosity, such as that present in microdiscontinuous chromium
coatings.
1.4 Porosity test results (including those for gross defects)
occur as chemical reaction end products. Some occur in situ,
others on paper, or in a gel coating. Observations are made that
are consistent with the test method, the items being tested, and
the requirements of the purchaser. These may be visual
inspection (unaided eye) or by 103 magnification (micro-
scope). Other methods may involve enlarged photographs or
photomicrographs.
1.5 The test methods are only summarized. The individual
standards must be referred to for the instructions on how to
perform the tests.
1.6 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
1.7 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
3. Terminology
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 246 Specification for Tinned Hard-Drawn and Medium-
in Terminology B 374 or B 542.
1
This guide is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on Metallic and
Inorganic Coatings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B08.10 on Test
Methods.
Current edition approved Sept. 10, 2003. Published Oct. 2003. Originally
approved in 1986. Last previous edition approved in 2001 as B 765 – 93 (2001).
B 276 Test Method for Apparent Porosity in Cemented
Carbides3
B 374 Terminology Relating to Electroplating3
B 537 Practice for Rating of Electroplated Panels Subjected
to Atmospheric Exposure3
B 542 Terminology Relating to Electrical Contacts and
Their Use4
B 545 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Tin3
B 605 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Tin-
Nickel Alloy3
B 650 Specification for Electrodeposited Engineering Chro-
mium Coatings on Ferrous Substrates3
B 689 Specification for Electroplated Engineering Nickel
Coatings3
B 733 Specification for Autocatalytic (Electroless) Nickel-
Phosphorous Coatings on Metal3
B 734 Specification for Electrodeposited Copper for Engi-
neering Uses3
B 735 Test Method for Porosity in Gold Coatings on Metal
Substrates by Nitric Acid Vapor4
B 741 Test Method for Porosity in Gold Coatings on Metal
Substrates by Paper Electrography4
B 798 Test Method for Porosity in Gold or Palladium
Coatings on Metal Substrates by Gel-Bulk Electrography4
B 799 Test Method for Porosity in Gold and Palladium
Coatings by Sulfurous Acid/Sulfur-Dioxide Vapor4
B 809 Test Method for Porosity in Metallic Coatings by
Humid Sulfur Vapor (Flowers-of-Sulfur)3
B 866 Test Method for Gross Defects and Mechanical
Damage in Metallic Coatings by Polysulfide Immersion3
B 877 Test Method for Gross Defects and Mechanical
Damage in Metallic Coatings by the Phosphomolybdic
Acid (PMA) Method3
3.1 Definitions—Many terms used in this guide are defined
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 765 – 03
TABLE 1 Applications of Standard Porosity Tests to Metallic Coatings (Section 6)
Substrate MetalA Gold Silver Nickel Tin-Nickel Tin Tin-Lead Copper Palladium Chromium
Copper and Copper 6.1B, 6.2, 6.3A 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4 ... 6.2, 6.3A, 6.4, ...
Alloys 6.4, 6.5 6.5
Nickel 6.1B, 6.2, 6.5 6.3A ... ... ... ... ... 6.2, 6.3A, 6.5 ...
Iron or Steel 6.6 ... 6.6 6.3B, 6.6 6.3B, 6.6 6.3B, 6.6 6.6 ... 6.6
Silver 6.4 ... 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4 ... 6.4 ...
A
The substrate may be the basis metal, an underplate, or both (see Note 1).
B
Thickness restrictions may apply.

TABLE 2 Applications of Tests for Gross Defects and Mechanical Damage (Section 7)
Substrate MetalA Gold Nickel Tin-Nickel Tin Tin-Lead Palladium Silver
Copper and Copper 7.3, 7.5 7.3, 7.4 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3, 7.5 7.5
Alloys
Nickel 7.5 ... ... ... ... 7.5 7.5
Iron or Steel 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.1 ...
Aluminum ... 7.2 ... ... ... ... ...
A
The substrate may be the basis metal, an underplate, or both (see Note 1).

3.2.1 porosity—for the purpose of this guide, porosity in a
coating is defined as any hole, crack, or other defect that
exposes the underlying metal to the environment. Differences
between the major types of porosity are described in Section 5.
3.2.2 underplate—a metallic coating layer between the
basis metal and the topmost metallic coating. The thickness of
an underplating is usually greater than 1 µm, in contrast to a
strike or flash, which are usually thinner.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 Porosity tests indicate the completeness of protection or
coverage offered by the coating. When a given coating is
known to be protective when properly deposited, the porosity
serves as a measure of the control of the process. The effects of
substrate finish and preparation, plating bath, coating process,
and handling, may all affect the degree of imperfection that is
measured.
NOTE 1—The substrate exposed by the pores may be the basis metal, an
underplate, or both.
4.2 The tests in this guide involve corrosion reactions in
which the products delineate pores in coatings. Since the
chemistry and properties of these products may not resemble
those found in service environments, these tests are not
recommended for prediction of product performance unless
correlation is first established with service experience.
5. Applications
5.1 From the viewpoint of both porosity testing and func-
tional significance, it is useful to divide porosity into two broad
categories, namely intrinsic porosity and gross defects.5,6
5.1.1 Intrinsic or normal porosity is due primarily to small
deviations from ideal plating and surface preparation condi-
tions. As such, it will be present to some degree in all
commercial thin platings and will generally follow an inverse
relationship with thickness. In addition, scanning electron
5
Baker, R. G., Holden, C. A., and Mendizza, A., Proceedings of the American
Electroplaters Society, Vol 50, 1963, p. 61.
6 ciently to cause reaction products to fill the pore to the surface
Krumbein, S. J., “The ASTM Approach to Porosity Testing,” Proc. 1991
International Technical Conf. of the American Electroplaters and Surface Finishers
Soc., (SUR/FIN ’91), Toronto, 1991, pp. 527–536.
microscope (SEM) studies have shown that the diameter of
such pores at the plating surface is of the order of micrometers,
so that only small areas of underlying metal are exposed to the
environment.
5.1.2 Gross defects, on the other hand, would result in
comparatively large areas of exposed basis metal or underplat-
ing. Examples of such defects are mechanical damage to the
coating through mishandling or wear. Gross defects can also be
found in undamaged coatings in the form of networks of
microcracks and as large as-plated pores—with diameters an
order of magnitude (or more) greater than intrinsic porosity.
Such gross defects indicate such serious deviations from
acceptable coating practice as dirty substrates and contami-
nated or out-of-balance baths.
5.2 Intrinsic porosity and most types of gross defects are too
small to be seen except at magnifications so high that a realistic
assessment of the overall coating surface in the functional areas
of the part cannot be made. Instead, the presence and severity
of the porosity is normally determined by some type of
pore-corrosion test that will magnify the pore sites by produc-
ing visible reaction products in and around the pores or cracks.
Tests for gross defects (Section 7), and especially for mechani-
cal damage and wear, are designed to be less severe. Such tests,
however, may not detect a sizeable portion of the smaller
(intrinsic) pores in a coating. On the other hand, standard tests
for intrinsic porosity (Section 6) will easily reveal the presence
of gross defects as well.
5.3 Porosity tests are generally destructive in nature and are
designed to assess the quality of the coating process in
conjunction with the substrate. Therefore, separate test speci-
mens are not ordinarily allowed.
5.4 In the tests summarized in this guide, chemicals react
with the exposed substrate through the pore or channel to form
a product that is either directly observable or that is made
observable by subsequent chemical development.
5.5 Porosity tests differ from corrosion and aging tests. A
good porosity test process must clean, depolarize, and activate
the substrate metal exposed by the pore, and attack it suffi-
of the coating. The corrosive reagent ideally does not react with
the coating. Reaction time is limited, particularly with thin

2
 B 765 – 03
coatings, since the corrosive will attack the substrate in all
directions and, in so doing, undermine the coatings so that false
observations may be made. When the corrosion product is
soluble in the reagent, a precipitating indicator is used to form
the reaction product.
5.6 The substrate exposed by the pores may be the basis
metal, an underplate, or both.
6. Outlines of Standard Porosity Tests for Intrinsic
Porosity (5.1.1)
NOTE 2—The test methods outlined in this section are only summaries.
The specified test standard must be referred to for the instructions on how
to perform the tests, as well as for important applications and limitations.
6.1 Nitric Acid Vapor Test (Test Method B 735):
6.1.1 Scope—Gold coatings on nickel, copper, and their
alloys, where the gold is at least 0.6 µm (24 µin.) thick.
6.1.2 Summary of Test Method—Test specimens are sus-
pended over concentrated nitric acid in a closed nonreactive
vessel for a specified time, usually 0.5 to 2.0 h. After exposure,
the specimens are dried in an oven to fix the reaction products.
Each reaction product spot indicates a pore in the coating.
6.2 Paper Electrography (Test Method B 741):
6.2.1 Scope—Gold and palladium coatings on nickel, cop-
per, or copper alloys that have flat or nearly flat surfaces, or,
with appropriate fixtures, gently curved surfaces.
6.2.2 Summary of Test Method—Electrolyte-soaked paper is
pressed against the specimen at controlled pressure. Current, at
a constant controlled dc voltage, is passed from an inert
cathode, through the paper, to the specimen (which is made the
anode) for a specified time. Base-metal ions at the pore sites
migrate to the paper where an indicator reagent converts them
to colored products (the pore indications).
6.3 Sulfur Dioxide Tests:
6.3.1 Scope:
6.3.1.1 Variation A (Test Method B 799, Sulfurous Acid/
Sulfur-Dioxide Vapor) applies to gold, palladium, and silver
over nickel, copper, and their alloys.
6.3.1.2 Variation B applies to tin and its alloys over iron or
steel (Appendixes of Specification B 545 and Specification
B 605).
6.3.2 Summary of Test Method—The test specimens are
suspended over sulfur-oxide acidic solutions in a sealed cham-
ber. For Variation A (Test Method B 799), the solution is
concentrated sulfurous acid. For Variation B it is a 1:4 mixture
of 0.1N sulfuric acid and 0.12N sodium thiosulfate solutions.
Each reaction product spot on the surface indicates a pore in
the coating.
6.4 Humid Sulfur Vapor (“Flowers-of-Sulfur”) (Test
Method B 809):
6.4.1 Scope—Primarily for coatings over silver, copper, or
copper alloys. Coatings may include nickel, gold, palladium,
tin, and any other coating that does not significantly tarnish in
reduced sulfur atmospheres.
6.4.2 Summary of Test Method—Test specimens are sus-
pended in a vented closed container over powdered sulfur at
controlled humidity and temperature. Black or brown spots
indicate porosity.
6.5 Gel Electrography (Test Method B 798):
3
6.5.1 Scope—Gold and palladium coatings over nickel,
copper, or copper alloys.
6.5.2 The test sample is made the anode in a cell of a
specific geometry, which contains a solid electrolyte consisting
of gelatin, conducting salts and an indicator. Application of a
constant dc current causes migration of base-metal ions
through the pores to the metallic coating surface where reaction
with the indicator produces colored reaction products.
6.6 Ferroxyl Test (Annexes of Specification B 689, Specifi-
cation B 650, and Specification B 734):
6.6.1 Scope—Metallic coatings included are those that are
resistant to ferricyanide and chloride, but are cathodic to iron,
steel, or iron-based alloy substrates. Examples of such coatings
are gold, tin, nickel, copper, chromium, and their alloys.
6.6.2 Summary of Test Method—Electrolyte-wetted, gel-
chloride treated paper strips are placed firmly in contact with
test specimen surfaces for a specified time, not to exceed 10
min. After the allotted time, the paper strips are wetted with a
ferricyanide indicator solution. Blue spots indicate pores.
6.6.3 Alternate methods involve formation of the blue spots
directly on the specimen (Specification B 733, Test Methods,
Ferroxyl Test for Iron Base Substrates).
7. Outlines of Porosity Tests for Gross Defects and
Mechanical Damage (5.1.2)
NOTE 3—Some of the test methods outlined in this section have been
taken from ASTM specifications for specific metallic coatings. As such
they are only summaries. ASTM Subcommittee B08.10 is developing
complete test method documents for some of those procedures.
7.1 Hot Water Test (Annex of Specification B 689):
7.1.1 Scope—Metallic coatings cathodic to a ferrous sub-
strate; for example, nickel, tin, or gold on steel or iron-based
alloy substrates.
7.1.2 Summary of Test Method—The test specimens are
immersed for a specified time in neutral, distilled heated
(85°C) water that is agitated with clean air. After exposure and
drying, black spots and red rust indicate porosity.
7.1.3 Alternative methods involve aerated water at room
temperature with longer exposure times.
7.2 Alizarin Test (Specification B 733, Test Methods, “Po-
rosity”):
7.2.1 Scope—Primarily for nickel on aluminum substrate.
7.2.2 Summary of Test Method—The surface of the speci-
men is swabbed with a sodium hydroxide solution. After
rinsing, an alizarin sulfonate solution is applied in two steps
followed by glacial acetic acid to remove the background violet
color. Any red spots remaining indicate pores.
7.3 Sodium Polysulfide Immersion (Test Method B 866) is
an example):
7.3.1 Scope—For detecting gross discontinuities, including
wear and mechanical damage, in coatings over copper or its
alloys. Applicable coatings include tin, nickel, gold, palladium,
or any other coating that does not tarnish in the polysulfide
solution.
7.3.2 Summary of Test Method—The test samples are im-
mersed in an alkaline polysulfide solution for 60 s. After
rinsing and drying, samples are examined for dark or discol-
ored areas.
 B 765 – 03
7.4 Ferrocyanide Test (Specification B 733, Test Methods,
“Porosity”):
7.4.1 Scope—For gross defects in nickel coatings over
copper substrates.
7.4.2 Summary of Test Method—Wipe the coated specimen
with glacial acetic acid. After 3 min, apply a solution of
potassium ferrocyanide and methyl cellulose in boiling dis-
tilled water. The appearance of brown spots after 2 min
indicates pores.
7.5 Phosphomolybdic Acid (PMA) (Test Method B 877):
7.5.1 Scope—Individual specimens of gold, silver, or palla-
dium, over nickel, copper, or their alloys.
7.5.2 Summary of Test Method—The part is exposed briefly
to hydrochloric acid fumes. Then a small drop of aqueous PMA
solution is applied to the test area. The presence of any exposed
substrate metal is revealed by the formation of an intensely
colored molybdenum blue complex.
8. Report
8.1 The results of a porosity test are usually given in terms
of one of the following:
8.1.1 Option 1—The number and size of the pore indica-
tions in the measurement area. This is converted to a pore
density in terms of number of pores per square centimetre. The
pore indications are often classified according to size (see the
individual test standard).
8.1.2 Option 2—The percentage of the significant surface
covered by the pore indications.
8.1.3 Option 3—The area, in square millimetres, of the
largest spot on the significant surface.
9. Evaluation
9.1 Procedure—In Option 1, count individual pores at 103
magnification in the significant area of the coating, as defined
by the specification or drawing of the product. In Option 2,
compare results with panels shown in Test Method B 276 and
Practice B 537, or those supplied as criteria by the purchaser.
In Option 3, scan for the largest defect(s).
9.2 Criteria (Pass-Fail)—Pass-fail criteria, such as pore
count greater than 50/cm2 (Option 1), or an area greater than
1 % (Option 2), or a spot or crack with a total area greater than
2.5 mm2 (Option 3), should be chosen in conformance to the
intended function of the coating and the intended use of the
object coated. Such criteria should be agreed upon between
supplier and purchaser.
10. Keywords
10.1 electrodeposits; gross defect; mechanical damage; me-
tallic coatings; porosity; porosity testing; wear-through

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 767 – 88 (Reapproved 2001)

Standard Guide for

Determining Mass Per Unit Area of Electrodeposited and
Related Coatings by Gravimetric and Other Chemical
Analysis Procedures1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 767; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope B 137 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Mass Per

1.1 This guide outlines a general method for determining Unit Area on Anodically Coated Aluminum3
the mass per unit area of electrodeposited, electroless, B 449 Specification for Chromates on Aluminum3
mechanically-deposited, vacuum-deposited, anodicoxide, and 2.2 British Standards Institution Documents:
chemical conversion coatings by gravimetric and other chemi- BS 729 Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel
cal analysis procedures. Articles, Specification for:4
1.2 This guide determines the average mass per unit area BS 1706 Electroplated Coatings of Cadmium and Zinc on
over a measured area. Iron and Steel, Specification for:4
1.3 The stripping methods cited are described in specifica- BS 1872 Electroplated Coatings of Tin, Specification for:4
tions or in the open literature or have been used routinely by at BS 3189 Phosphate Treatment of Iron and Steel, Specifica-
least one laboratory. tion for:4
1.4 The procedures outlined can be used for many coating- BS 3382 Electroplated Coatings on Threaded Components,
substrate combinations. They cannot be used where the coating Specification for:4
cannot be separated from the substrate by chemical or physical BS 3597 Electroplated Coatings of 65/35 Tin-Nickel Alloy,
means as would be the case if white brass were plated with Specification for:4
yellow brass. 2.3 Government Standards:
1.5 In principle, these procedures can be used to measure 2.3.1 DOD Standard:
very thin coatings or to measure coatings over small areas, but DOD-P-16232F Phosphate Coatings, Heavy, Manganese or
not thin coatings over small areas. The limits depend on the Zinc Base (for Ferrous Metals)5
required accuracy. For example, 2.5 mg/cm2 of coating might 2.3.2 Federal Standards:
require 2.5 mg of coating covering 1 cm2, but 0.1 mg/cm2 of FED-STD 151b Metals; Test Methods: Test 513.1 for
coating would require 25 cm2 to obtain 2.5 mg of coating. Weight of Coating on Hot Dip Tin Plate and Electrolytic
1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the Tin Plate6
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the RR-T-51D Tableware and Flatware—Silverplated6
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- 2.3.3 Military Standard:
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- MIL-M-45202C Magnesium Alloys, Anodic Treatment of5
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. 2.4 ISO Standards:
ISO 2081 Metallic Coatings—Electroplated Coatings of
2. Referenced Documents Zinc on Iron or Steel7
2.1 ASTM Standards: ISO 2082 Metallic Coatings—Electroplated Coatings on
A 90/A 90 M Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Cadmium on Iron or Steel7
Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings2 ISO 2093 Metallic Coatings—Electrodeposited Coatings of
A 309 Test Method for Weight and Composition of Coating Tin, Annex B7
on Terne Sheet by the Triple-Spot Test2 ISO 2106 Anodizing of Aluminum and its Alloys—
A 428 Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Determination of Mass Per Unit Area (Surface Density) of
Aluminum-Coated Iron or Steel Articles2
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
4
Available from British Standards Institution, Linford Wood, Milton Keynes
1
This guide is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on Metallic and MK14 6L3, England.
5
Inorganic Coatings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B08.10 on Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
General Test Methods. Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
6
Current edition approved Aug. 26, 1988. Published April 1989. Originally Available from U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.
7
published as B 767 – 87. Last previous edition B 767 – 87. Available from American National Standards Institute, 11 W. 42nd St., 13th
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.06. Floor, New York, NY 10036.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 767
Anodic Oxide Coatings—Gravimetric Method7
ISO 3892 Conversion Coatings on Metallic Materials—
Determination of Coating Mass Per Unit Area—
Gravimetric Methods7
ISO 4522/1 Metallic Coatings—Test Methods for Elec-
trodeposited Silver and Silver Alloy Coatings—Part 1:
Determination of Coating Thickness7
ISO 4524/1 Metallic Coatings—Test Methods for Elec-
trodeposited Gold and Gold Alloy Coatings—Part 1:
Determination of Coating Thickness7
3. Summary of Guide
3.1 The mass of a coating over a measured area is deter-
mined by the following:
3.1.1 Weighing the test specimen before and after dissolving
the coating in a reagent that does not attack the substrate.
3.1.2 Weighing the coating after dissolving the substrate in
a reagent that does not attack the coating, or
3.1.3 Dissolving both the coating and the substrate and
quantitatively analyzing the resulting solution.
3.2 The mass per unit area is calculated from the mass and
area measurements, the thickness from the mass, area, and
density of the coating materials.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 The thickness of a coating is critical to its performance
and is specified in many specifications calling for coatings.
4.2 These procedures are used for acceptance testing and
appear in a few specifications.
4.3 Coating thickness instruments are often calibrated with
thickness standards that are based on mass and area measure-
ments.
4.4 The average thickness of a coating on the measured area
can be calculated from its mass per unit area only if the density
of the coating material is known.
5. Apparatus
5.1 In addition to normal chemical laboratory equipment for
handling small amounts of corrosive and toxic chemicals, an
accurate ruler or vernier caliper and a good balance are
required. See sections 7 and 8.
6. Specimen Preparation
6.1 Size—The specimen must be large enough to permit
area and mass measurement of adequate accuracy. (Section 7
and 8.2.)
6.2 Shape—The shape of the test specimen must be such
that the surface area can be easily measured. A rectangular or
circular test specimen is usually suitable.
6.3 Edge Condition—If the area to be measured is small and
needs to be known accurately, the edges must be dressed to
remove smeared coating, to remove loose burrs, and to provide
well-defined and (for rectangles) straight edges. This should be
considered for areas less than 100 mm2. One method of
dressing the edges of a rectangular specimen is to clamp the
specimen between two plastic or metal blocks with the edge of
the specimen flush with the edges of the blocks and then to
grind and polish the edges metallographically.
6.4 Heat Treatment—If the substrate is to be dissolved
leaving the coating intact, it is desirable to first heat-treat the
2
test specimen so that the coating will not curl up tightly or fall
apart. Some gold deposits of 1.5 mg/cm2 will fall apart when
their substrates are dissolved, but after heat treatment at 120°C
for 3 h will support themselves. If the thickness of a coating
(instead of its mass per unit area) is being determined, one
should not use a heat treatment that might change the density
of the coating material.
7. Measurement of Coated Area:
7.1 Measurement Method—The accuracy of the area mea-
surement must be better than the desired accuracy of the mass
per unit area measurement. Hence the method of measuring the
area will depend on the desired accuracy and the specimen
size.
7.2 Equipment—The area can be measured with a planime-
ter, but it is usually determined by linear measurements. Often
a micrometer or vernier caliper is used. For large areas,
however, a ruler may do. For maximum accuracy, a measuring
microscope is used.
7.3 Number of Measurements—Because circular or rectan-
gular specimens will not be perfectly circular or rectangular, it
is desirable to measure each dimension in three places. For a
rectangle, one would measure the length of each edge and the
length and width through the center and obtain an average for
each dimension.
NOTE 1—In the case of a cylinder one would normally measure the
diameter and length. In one specification for galvanized wire (fencing), the
length of the wire specimen is not measured, but in effect is calculated
from the mass (which is measured anyway), the radius, and the density of
the steel substrate. (l = m/pr2D)
8. Gravimetric Determination of Mass of Coating:
8.1 Specimen Size—The accuracy of the mass measurement
must be better than the desired accuracy of the mass per unit
area measurement. Hence, the test specimen must be large
enough that the coating can be weighed with the desired
accuracy.
8.2 Equipment—A balance is required, but the required
sensitivity of the balance depends on the size of the test
specimen, the coating thickness (coating mass), and the re-
quired accuracy of the measurement. A balance that weighs to
0.01 g is sometimes satisfactory, though a good analytical
balance weighing to 0.0001 g is more versatile. A microbalance
is required for small specimens of thin coatings, but it is
limited to small samples.
9. Procedure
9.1 The mass of coating may be determined (1) by weighing
the test specimen before and after dissolving the coating (see
Annex A1) and taking the difference or (2) by dissolving the
substrate (see Annex A1) and weighing the coating directly.
9.1.1 By Difference—The test specimen is first cleaned of
any foreign material and finally rinsed with alcohol, blown dry
with clean air, and weighed. The specimen is immersed in the
appropriate reagent (see Annex A1) to dissolve the coating,
rinsed with water, rinsed with alcohol, blown dry with clean
air, and weighed again. The loss of mass is the mass of the
coating. To determine if there was any dissolution of the
substrate, repeat the process with the stripped substrate making
 B 767
sure that it is in the reagent just as long as before. Any loss of 10. Calculation
mass enables one to make a judgment of a possible error due 10.1 Calculate the mass per unit area as follows:
to any dissolution of the substrate with the coating during the
stripping process. Mass per unit area 5 m/A ~mg/cm 2! (1)
9.1.2 By Direct Weighing—The substrate is dissolved in the
appropriate reagent (see Annex A1. The coating is rinsed with where:
water, rinsed with alcohol, blown dry with clean air, and m = mass of coating (mg), and
weighed. To determine if there was any dissolution of the A = area covered by coating (cm2)
coating, submit the isolated coating to the same stripping 10.2 Calculate the thickness as follows:
process making sure that the coating is in the stripping reagent Thickness 5 10 3 M/D ~µm! (2)
for the same length of time as it was during the stripping
process. Any loss of mass enables one to make a judgment of
a possible error due to any dissolution of the coating with the where:
substrate during the stripping process. M = mass per unit area (mg/cm2), and
D = density (g/cm3).
NOTE 2—The test procedure given at the end of 9.1.1 and 9.1.2 should
be conducted to evaluate a gravimetric method the first time it is used. NOTE 3—The density of a coating metal is usually not the same as the
handbook value or the theoretical value. For example, the density of
9.2 Determination of Mass of Coating by Chemical electrodeposited gold is generally less than 19.3 g/cm3 and sometimes as
Analysis—This method is by nature very general. Both the low or lower than 17 g/cm3. The densities of some electrodeposited metals
coating and substrate are dissolved in a suitable reagent and are given by W. H. Safranek.8
then the resulting solution is analyzed for the coating material.
For each coating-substrate-reagent combination, there are sev-
eral analytical methods. For possible analytical methods see 8
Printed in The Properties of Electrodeposited Metals and Alloys, Second
vols 03.05 and 03.06 of the Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Edition, American Electroplaters’ and Surface Finishers Society, 1986.

ANNEX

(Mandatory Information)

A1. REAGENTS FOR SELECTIVE DISSOLUTION OF METAL LAYERS

NOTE A1.1—The specific issues of standards are cited in this table and possibility should be tested for as suggested in 9.1.1, and 9.1.2.
included in the literature as references because they contain the informa-
tion from which this table is based.
A1.2 Dissolution is carried out at room temperature unless
A1.1 With many of the reagents given in Table A1.1, there otherwise indicated. All test pieces are rinsed and dried (see
may be some dissolution of the layer other than the one being 9.1.1 and 9.1.2) before weighing.
stripped. Often the dissolution is not significant, but the

TABLE A1.1 Reagents

Coating Substrate Reagents Remarks—Sources
aluminum steel (1) 20 parts by mass Immerse a few min (avoid longer time) at about 90°C. While rinsing, scrub
NaOH, 80 parts with a sponge to remove loose material. Drain off water, immerse 3 s in
water concentrated HCl at room temperature, scrub again in running water, and
(2) concentrated HCl (sp gr 1.19) repeat entire process until there is no visible reaction in the HCl. Two or
three cycles are required normally. A more detailed description is given in
the 1981 issue of Test Method A 428.
aluminum steel (1) 200 g SbCl3 in 1L concentrated HCl Mix equal volume of (1) and (2), immerse until evolution of hydrogen stops,
about 1–4 min.
(2) 100 g SnCl2.2H2O in 1L concentrated Keep below 38°C, rinse and scrub with soft cloth.
HCl plus a few granules of tin This test procedure appears in Ref (1) and in the 1981 issue of Test
Method A 428.A
anodized aluminum aluminum 35 mL 85 % phosphoric acid plus 20 g/L Immerse 5 min at 100°C, rinse, dry, weigh. Repeat cycle until weight is
CrO3 constant.
This procedure appears in the 1945 issue of Method B 137 and the 1982
issue of ISO Standard 2106.
anodized magnesium magnesium 300 g/L CrO3 Immerse at room temperature, rinse, dry, weigh, and repeat until weight
(HAE) loss is less than 3.9 mg/dm2. Keep piece of commercially pure aluminum in
solution but not in contact with magnesium.
This procedure appears in Military Standard MIL-M-45202C.
brass steel 500 g/L CrO3 Immerse at room temperature with mild agitation.
50 g/L H2SO4
cadmium steel 300 g/L NH4NO3 Immerse.

3
 B 767

Coating Substrate Reagents Remarks—Sources

This procedure appears in the 1961 issue of British Standard 3382 and the
1986 issue of ISO Standard 2082.
cadmium steel 20g Sb2O3 in 1L concentrated HCl or 20g Immerse until evolution of gas practically stops. (2)
Sb2O3 in 800 mL concentrated HCl + 200 This procedure appears in the 1960 issue of British Standard 1706,
mL water Appendix B.
cadmium steel 5 % (NH4)S2O8 plus 10 % by volume of Immersion. (2) This procedure appears in the 1986 issue of ISO
concentrated NH4OH solution Standard 2082.
chromate aluminum (1) NaNO2 Immerse in molten NaNO at 326 to 354°C for 2 min, rinse in cold water,
(2) 1 part by volume water and 1 part immerse in (2) for 30 s at room temperature.
concentrated HNO3 This procedure appears in the 1967 issue of Practice B 449.
chromate (aged) aluminum and its (1) 98 % NaNO3 Immerse in (1) for 2 to 5 min at 370 to 500°C (Some coatings may require
alloys 2 % NaOH the higher temp.) Rinse in water, immerse in (2) for 15 to 30 s at room
temperature.
(2) 1 part by volume 65 to 70 % (m/m) HNO3 This procedure appears in the 1980 issue of ISO Standard 3892.
1 part water Conversion Coatings on Metallic Materials—Determination of Coating Mass
per Unit Area—Gravimetric Methods
chromate (fresh) aluminum and 1 part by volume water and 1 part 65 to 70 % Immerse 1 min at room temperature within 3 hr of application of coating.
its alloys (m/m) HNO3 This procedure appears in the 1980 issue of ISO standard 3892,
Conversion Coatings on Metallic Materials—Determination of Coating Mass
per Unit Area—Gravimetric Methods
chromate cadmium or zinc 50 g/L NaCN or KCN Dissolve cathodically at 15 A/dm2 at room temperature.
5 g/L NaOH This procedure appears in the 1980 issue of ISO standard 3892,
Conversion Coatings on Metallic Materials—Determination of Coating Mass
per Unit Area—Gravimetric Methods
chromium nickel or steel 12 g/L NaOH Chromium dissolves anodically at about 20 mA/cm2. (3)
copper nickel (1) dissolve 200 g Na2S in 3/4 L water, heat Immerse in (1).
to boiling with 20 g S, dilute to 1 L. When copper becomes black copper sulfide and begins to peel off, rinse
and immerse in 20 % NaCN to dissolve copper sulfide. (4)
(2) 20 % NaCN
copper nickel or steel 500 g/L CrO3 Dissolves about 1.2 µm/min. (3, 5)
50 g/L H2SO4
copper zinc alloys 1 part concentrated HCl + 4 parts water Dissolves zinc alloy substrate. Cool initial reaction to prevent dissolution of
copper. (4)
gold steel, copper, 1 part by volume water, 1 part concentrated Substrate is dissolved by immersion. Heat as required. Keep free of
nickel, or Fe- HNO3 halides. Nickel may passivate: make contact with nickel wire to increase
Ni-Co area of the nickel. This procedure appears in the 1985 issue of ISO
Standard 4524/1.
lead-tin alloys steel See terne plate.
nickel brass 90 % H3PO4 Immerse at 180 to 190°C, do not add water. 2.5 µm nickel dissolves in
about 10 min.
This procedure appears in the 1965 issue of British Standard 3382, Parts 3
and 4: Appendix F.
nickel brass 500 g/L CrO3 Dissolves brass substrate by immersion at room temperature with mild
50 g/L H2SO4 agitation.
nickel steel (1) fuming HNO3 with mild agitation or Attack of steel is insignificant. Transfer quickly to CrO3 to remove HNO3,
(2) 1 part fuming 1 part concentrated HNO3 then rinse with water. Ni dissolves more rapidly in (2). (3, 6)
(3) 10 % CrO3
nickel steel (1) sodium meta-nitrobenzene sulphonate Immerse in (1) or (2) at 75 to 85°C 7 µm nickel dissolves in about 30 min
65 g and dissolves copper undercoat.
NaOH 10 g See British Standard 3382, Parts 3 and 4: 1965: Appendix F.
NaCN 100 g
water to 1 L
(2) sodium nitrobenzoic acid 65 g
NaOH 20 g
NaCN 100 g
water to 1 L
nickel or nickel zinc alloys 1 part concentrated HCL + 4 parts water Dissolves zinc alloy substrate. Cool initial reaction to prevent dissolution of
over copper copper. Check for dissolution of nickel. To remove copper from nickel, see
copper on nickel. (4)

phosphate (amor- Immerse 1 min at room temperature. This procedure appears in the 1980
aluminum and its 1 part by volume water and 1 part 65 to 70%
phous) alloys (m/m) HNO3 issue of ISO standard 3892, Conversion Coatings on Metallic Materials—
Determination of Coating Mass per Unit Area—Gravimetric Methods
phosphate (crystal- aluminum and its 65 to 70% (m/m) HNO3 Immerse 5 min at 75 6 5°C or 15 min at room temperature.
line) alloys This procedure appears in the 1980 issue of ISO standard 3892,
Conversion Coatings on Metallic Materials—Determination of Coating Mass
per Unit Area—Gravimetric Methods
phosphate cadmium or zinc 20g (NH4)2Cr2O7 in 25 to 30 % (m/m) NH4OH Immerse 3 to 5 min at room temperature. This procedure appears in the
1980 issue of ISO standard 3892, Conversion Coatings on Metallic
Materials—Determination of Coating Mass per Unit Area—Gravimetric
Methods.
phosphate steel 20 g/L Sb2O3 in concentrated HCl Immerse at room temperature. Rub off any loose material.
This procedure appears in the 1973 issue of British Standard 3189,
Appendix E.
phosphate (man- steel 50 g/L CrO3 Immerse at least 15 min at 75 6 5°C, rinse, dry, weigh, and repeat until
ganese, zinc, weight is constant.

4
 B 767

Coating Substrate Reagents Remarks—Sources

or iron base) See standard DOD-P-16232F. This procedure appears in the 1980 issue of
ISO standard 3892, Conversion Coatings on Metallic Materials—
Determination of Coating Mass per Unit Area—Gravimetric Methods.
phosphate (zinc base) steel 100 g/L NaOH Immerse 5 min at 70 6 5°C.
90 g/L EDTA tetra sodium salt This procedure appears in the 1980 issue of ISO standard 3892,
4 g/L triethanolamine Conversion Coatings on Metallic Materials—Determination of Coating Mass
per Unit Area—Gravimetric Methods.
phosphate (zinc base) steel 180 g/L NaOH Immerse at least 10 min, rinse, dry, weight, and repeat until weight is
constant.
90 g/L NaCN This procedure appears in Department of Defense Standard DOD-P-
16232F.
silver nickel brass 19 parts by volume concentrated H2SO4 Immerse at 80°C.
1 part by volume concentrated HNO3 This procedure appears in Federal Specification RR-T-51D.
silver copper alloys (1) 19 parts by volume concentrated H2SO4 Immerse at 60 to 70°C until silver dissolves, dip in concentrated H2SO4,
rinse.
This procedure appears in British Standard 3382, Parts 5 and 6: 1967:
1 part by volume concentrated HNO3 Appendixes H and K. See the 1985 issue of ISO standard 4522/1.
(2) concentrated H2SO4
silver nickel and steel 90 g/L NaCN Dissolve anodically at 2–6 V.
15 g/l NaOH This procedure appears in the 1985 issue of ISO Standard 4522/1.
silver corrosion-re- 30 g/L NaCN Dissolve anodically at 3 to 4 V.
sisting steel See Federal Specification RR-T-51D and the 1985 issue of ISO
and tin alloys Standard 4522/1.
terne plate long terne sheet (1) 100 g/L NaOH Strip anodically in NaOH solution, 77 to 88°C, 12 A/dm2, reverse current 5
(2) 1 volume concentrated HCl + 3 to 15 s, rinse, dip in HCl solution for 1 to 2 s, rinse.
volume water See Test Method A 309.
terne plate long terne sheet 200 g/L AgNO3 Immerse, silver replaces terne metal, remove by scrubbing in water and
examine for residual terne metal.
This procedure appears in the 1981 issue of Test Method A 309.
tin copper alloys concentrated HCl Immerse and simmer until tin is dissolved.
This procedure appears in British Standard 3382, Parts 5 and 6: 1967:
Appendixes H and K.
tin copper or brass 20 g/L Sb2O3 in concentrated HCl Immerse.
This procedure appears in the 1964 issue of British Standard 1872,
Appendix A and the 1973 issue of ISO Standard 2093, Annex B.
tin steel 40 % NaOH Immerse and heat until gas evolution stops.
tin steel 120 g SbCl3 in 1 L concentrated HCl Immerse until evolution of gas stops and then wait 15 to 30 s.
This procedure appears in Federal Test Method Standard No. 151b.
tin steel 20 g Sb2O3 in 1 L concentrated HCl Immerse until 1 min after evolution of gas stops. (7) This procedure
appears in the 1973 issue of ISO Standard 2093, Annex B.
tin-lead alloy copper 10 mL concentrated HNO3 Alloy dissolves at about 0.1 µm/min. Copper dissolves at about 0.5 mg/
15 g urea dm2/min. (8)
10 mL H2O2(10 volume)
80 mL water
tin-nickel alloy copper and cop- concentrated H3PO4 Immerse at 180 to 200°C.
per alloys See British Standard 3597: 1963: Appendix B.
tin-nickel alloy steel 20 g/L NaOH Dissolve anodically at near-boiling temperature. If current density is too
30 g/L NaCN high, coating passivates and gas is evolved. To reactivate, make cathodic
for a few seconds.
This procedure appears in the 1963 issue of British Standard 3597,
Appendix B.
zinc steel (1) 20 g Sb2O3 or 32 g SbCl3 in 1 L con- Immerse in solution (2), keep below 38°C until violent evolution of hydro-
centrated HCl gen has stopped and only a few bubbles are being evolved.
(2) 5 mL of (1) in 100 mL concentrated HCl This procedure appears in the 1981 issue of Test Method A 90.
zinc steel 20 g Sb2O3 Immerse until effervescence ceases.
800 mL concentrated HCl See British Standard 1706: 1960: Appendix B and the 1986 issue of ISO
200 mL water Standard 2081.
zinc steel 3.2 g SbCl3 or 2 g Sb2O3 in 500 mL Immerse until vigorous reaction virtually ceases. Brush off loose deposits.
concentrated HCl This procedure appears in the 1971 issue of British Standard 729,
water to 1 L Appendix.
zinc steel 1-to-1 HCl Immerse in 1-to-1 HCl until violent evolution of hydrogen has stopped and
only a few bubbles are being evolved. Keep below 38°C.
This procedure appears in the 1981 issue of Test Method A 90.
zinc steel ammonium persulfate 5 g Immerse.
ammonium hydroxide (sp. gr. 0.880) This procedure appears in the 1961 issue of British Standard 3382.
10 mL
water 90 mL
zinc steel 10 mL formaldehyde 30 % (m/m) Immerse.
500 mL conc HCl This procedure appears in the 1986 issue of ISO Standard 2081.
500 mL water
zinc steel 300 g/l NH4NO3 Immerse.
This procedure appears in the 1986 issue of ISO Standard 2081.
zinc steel 500 mL conc HCl Immerse.
1 g propin-2-ol-1 (C3H4O) This procedure appears in the 1986 issue of ISO Standard 2081.
500 mL water
A
The boldface numbers in parentheses refer to the list of references at the end of this guide.

5
 B 767

REFERENCES

(1) Standards for Anodically Coated Aluminum Alloys for Architectural
Applications, The Aluminum Association, Second Edition, June, 1965.
(2) Clarke, S. G., “Tests of Thickness of Protective Cadmium Coatings on
Steel,” Journal of Electrodepositor’s Technical Society, Vol VIII,
1932–33, p. 11.
(3) Brenner, A., Monthly Review (AES), Vol XX, November 1933, p. 7.
(4) Brown, H. E., Plating, Vol 38, 1951, p. 556.
(5) Read, H. J., Lorenz, F. R., Plating, Vol 38, 1951, p. 946.
(6) Read, H. J. and Lorenz, F. R. Plating, Vol 38, 1951, p. 255.
(7) Clarke, S. G., “A Rapid Test of Thickness of Tin Coatings on Steel
Analyst,” Vol 59, 1934, p. 525.
(8) Price, J. W., “Determination of Thickness of Tin-Lead Alloy Coatings
on Copper Wire,” Journal of Society of Chemical Industry, Vol 63, No.
10, 1944. (Also reprinted as Leaflet No. 13, Tin Research Institute.)

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 768 – 99 (Reapproved 2004)

Standard Specification for

Copper-Cobalt-Beryllium Alloy and Copper-Nickel-Beryllium
Alloy Strip and Sheet1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 768; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope* B 601 Classification for Temper Designations for Copper

1.1 This specification establishes the requirements for and Copper Alloys—Wrought and Cast
copper-cobalt-beryllium and copper-nickel-beryllium strip and B 846 Terminology for Copper and Copper Alloys
sheet. The following alloys are covered: E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
Nominal Composition, %
E 255 Practice for Sampling Copper and Copper Alloys for
Copper Alloy UNS No.2 Beryllium Cobalt Nickel Determination of Chemical Composition
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)
C17410 0.3 0.5 ...
C17450 0.3 ... 0.8
C17460 0.3 ... 1.2
3. Terminology
3.1 For terms related to copper and copper alloys, refer to
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
Terminology B 846.
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only. 4. General Requirements
1.3 The following safety hazard caveat pertains only to the
4.1 The following sections of Specification B 248 consti-
test methods described in this specification:
tutes a part of this specification
1.3.1 This standard does not purport to address all of the
4.1.1 Terminology.
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
4.1.2 Materials and Manufacture.
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
4.1.3 Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance.
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
4.1.4 Sampling.
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
4.1.5 Number of Tests and Retests.
2. Referenced Documents 4.1.6 Specimen Preparation.
4.1.7 Test Methods.
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
4.1.8 Significance of Numerical Limits.
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
4.1.9 Inspection.
extent referenced herein:
4.1.10 Rejection and Rehearing.
2.2 ASTM Standards: 3
4.1.11 Certification.
B 194 Specification for Copper-Beryllium Alloy Plate,
4.1.12 Test Report.
Sheet, Strip and Rolled Bar
4.1.13 Packaging and Marking.
B 248 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought
4.1.14 Supplementary Requirements.
Copper and Copper-Alloy Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled
4.2 In addition, when a section with a title identical to that
Bar
referenced in 5.1 appears in this specification, it contains
additional requirements which supplement those appearing in
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper Specification B 248.
and Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.01 on Plate,
Sheet, and Strip. 5. Ordering Information
Current edition approved May 1, 2004. Published May 2004. Originally
approved in 1987. Last previous edition approved in 1999 as B 768 – 99. 5.1 Orders for material under this specification should
2
The UNS system for copper and copper alloys (see Practice E 527) is a simple include the following information:
expansion of the former standard designation system accomplished by the addition 5.1.1 Quantity,
of a prefix “C” and a suffix “00.” The suffix can be used to accommodate
composition variations of the base alloy.
5.1.2 Copper alloy UNS numbers (1.1),
3
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or 5.1.3 Form of material: strip or sheet,
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM 5.1.4 Temper (Section 8),
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on 5.1.5 Tension test, if required (Section 9),
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 768 – 99 (2004)
5.1.6 Dimensions: thickness and width, and length as appli- 8. Temper
cable (Section 11), 8.1 The product is offered in the following tempers in
5.1.7 How furnished: rolls, stock lengths with or without accordance with Classification B 601.
ends, specific lengths with or without ends (Section 11), 8.1.1 Copper Alloy UNS No. C17410 Strip and Sheet is
5.1.8 Type of edge, if required: slit, sheared, sawed, square offered in the TH02 (1⁄2 HT) and TH04 (HT) tempers.
corners, rounded corners, rounded edges, or full rounded edges 8.1.2 Copper Alloy UNS No. C17450 Strip and Sheet is
(see 11.6), offered in TH02 (1⁄2 HT) Temper.
5.1.9 Special thickness tolerances, if required (Section 11), 8.1.3 Copper Alloy UNS No. C17460 Strip and Sheet is
5.1.10 Specification number and year of issue, offered in the TH03 (3⁄4 HT) and TH04 (HT) tempers.
5.1.11 Hardness test, if required,
5.1.12 Special marking or packaging, if required, 9. Physical Properties
5.1.13 Mill test report, if required,
9.1 Electrical Conductivity—The electrical conductivity of
5.1.14 Special tests or exceptions, if any, and
the product shall conform to the applicable requirement given
5.1.15 Certification, if required.
in Table 2.
5.2 When material is purchased for agencies of the U.S.
Government, this shall be specified in the contract or purchase
order, and the material shall conform to the Supplementary 10. Mechanical Properties
Requirements as defined in the current issue of Specification 10.1 Tensile Requirements:
B 248. 10.1.1 Tension tests are required for material under 0.075 in.
(1.905 mm) in thickness and shall conform to the mechanical
6. Materials and Manufacture properties in Table 3.
6.1 Materials—The material of manufacture shall be cast 10.1.2 Tension test specimens shall be taken so that their
billets or slabs of one of the alloys cited in Section 1 of this longitudinal axis is parallel to the direction of rolling.
specification. The cast material shall be of such soundness and 10.2 Rockwell Hardness—Rockwell hardness measure-
purity as to be suitable to product the product as described in ments are required for material 0.075 in. (1.905 mm) and over
6.2. and shall conform to the Rockwell Hardness number in Table
6.2 Manufacture: 3.
6.2.1 The product shall be manufactured by such hot work-
ing, cold working, and annealing processes as to produce a 11. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
uniform wrought structure in the finished product. 11.1 The dimensions and tolerances for material covered by
6.2.2 The product shall be rolled to finish size and heat this specification shall be in accordance with the current edition
treated when required to meet the temper properties. of Specification B 248, with particular reference to Section 5
and the following tables of that specification:
7. Chemical Composition 11.2 Thickness—See 5.2.2, Table 2, and for special toler-
7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements specified ances, Table 3.
in Table 1. 11.3 Width:
7.2 These composition limits do not preclude the presence 11.3.1 Slit Metal and Slit Metal With Rolled Edges—See
of other elements. Limits may be established and analysis 5.3.1 and Table 4.
required for unnamed elements may be established by agree- 11.4 Length:
ment between the manufacturer or supplier and the purchaser. 11.4.1 Specific and Stock Lengths With and Without Ends—
7.3 For copper alloys in which copper is given as remainder, See 5.4.1.
copper may be taken as the difference between the sum of all 11.4.2 Schedule of Lengths (Specific and Stock) With
the elements analyzed and 100 %. When all the elements in the Ends—See 5.4.2 and Table 8.
table are analyzed, their sum shall be 99.5 % minimum. 11.5 Straightness:
11.5.1 Slit Metal or Edge-Rolled Metal—See 5.5.1 and
Table 11.
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
11.6 Edges—See 5.6.
Composition, % 11.6.1 Square Edges—See 5.6.1 and Table 15.
Element Copper Alloy UNS Number 11.6.2 Rounded Corners—See 5.6.2 and Table 16.
C17410 C17450 C17460 11.6.3 Rounded Edges—See 5.6.3 and Table 17.
Beryllium 0.15–0.50 0.15–0.50 0.15–0.50 11.6.4 Full-Rounded Edges—See 5.6.4 and Table 18.
Cobalt 0.35–0.6
Nickel 0.50–1.0 1.0–1.4
Iron, max 0.20 0.20 0.20
Zirconium, max 0.50 0.50 TABLE 2 Electrical Conductivity
Tin, max 0.25 0.25
Copper Alloy UNS No. Temper Percent IACS, min
Silicon, max 0.20 0.20 0.20
Aluminum, max 0.20 0.20 0.20 C17410 TH02, TH04 45
Copper + sum of 99.5 % min 99.5 % min 99.5 % min C17450 TH02 50
named elements C17460 TH03, TH04 50

2
 B 768 – 99 (2004)
TABLE 3 Mechanical Property Requirements for Strip and Sheet Precipitation Heat Treated
Copper Alloy Temper Designation Tensile Strength, ksi Yield Strength, ksi (MPA), Elongation, 2 in. (50 Rockwell Hardness
UNS No. (MPA) 0.2 % offset mm), %
Standard Former B 30T
C17410 TH02 ⁄ HT
12 95-115 80-100 10-20 89-98 76-81
(655-790) (550-690)
TH04 HT 110-130 100-120 7-17 95-100 79-86
(760-895) (690-830)
C17450 TH02 ⁄ HT
12 95-115 80-100 12 min 88-99 75-82
(655-790) (550-690)
C17460 TH03 ⁄ HT
34 115-135 95-115 11 min 98-105 81-88
(790-930) (655-790)
TH04 HT 120-140 105-125 10 min 99-106 82-89
(825-965) (720-860)

12. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
12.1 The product shall be free of defects, but blemishes of
a nature that do not interfere with the intended application are
acceptable.
13. Sampling
13.1 Sampling—The heat, lot, portion size, and selection of
samples should be as follows:
13.1.1 Heat—A heat shall be the result of castings poured
simultaneously from the same source of molten metal.
13.1.2 Lot Size—The lot size shall be a heat or fraction
thereof.
13.1.3 Portion Size—Sample pieces for physical and me-
chanical testing shall be taken from each lot. Sample pieces for
chemistry shall be in accordance with A7.1.2.1 of Specification
B 248.
14. Number of Tests and Retests
14.1 The number of tests and retests shall be in accordance
with Section 8 of Specification B 248.
15. Specimen Preparation
15.1 Chemical Analysis—Sample preparation shall be in
accordance with Practice E 255.
15.2 Tension Tests—Sample preparation shall be in accor-
dance with Test Methods E 8.
15.3 Rockwell Hardness—The test specimens shall be of a
size and shape to permit testing by the available test equipment
and shall be taken to permit testing in a plane parallel to the
direction of deformation given to the product.
15.3.1 The surface of the test specimens shall be sufficiently
smooth and even to permit the accurate determination of
hardness.
15.3.2 The specimen shall be free of scale and foreign
matter and care shall be taken to avoid any change in condition,
that is, heating or cold working.
16. Test Methods
16.1 The test methods for determining the mechanical and
physical properties are detailed in Specification B 248.
16.2 The test method for determining chemical analysis for
compliance and preparation to certifications and test reports
shall be at the discretion of the reporting laboratory.
16.2.1 In case of dispute, the test method in the Annex of
Specification B 194 shall be used for determining chemical
requirements in Table 1.
16.3 When analysis for unnamed or residual elements is
required in the purchase order, the method of analysis shall be
mutually agreed upon between the manufacturer or supplier
and the purchaser.
17. Keywords
17.1 beryllium copper strip; copper UNS number C17410;
copper UNS number C17450; copper UNS number C17460

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B05 has identified the location of selected changes to this specification since the last issue
(B 768 – 94).

(1) This specification received an editorial five-year update. (2) Alloys C17450 and C17460 were added.
Rewording and additions were made in accordance with the (3) Title was changed to incorporate C17450 and C17460.
new “Outline of Form.”

3
 B 768 – 99 (2004)
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 769 – 94 (Reapproved 2000)
Standard Test Method for
Shear Testing of Aluminum Alloys1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 769; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope *
1.1 This test method covers double-shear testing of wrought
and cast aluminum products to determine shear ultimate
strengths.
NOTE 1—The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded as the
standard. The values given in parentheses are provided for information
only.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on the
date of material purchase, unless otherwise noted form a part of
this specification to the extent referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 565 Test Method for Shear Testing of Aluminum and
Aluminum-Alloy Rivets and Cold-Heading Wire and
Rods2
E 4 Practices for Force Verification of Testing Machines3
E 6 Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical Test-
ing3
3. Terminology
3.1 The definitions of terms relating to shear testing in
Terminology E 6 are applicable to the terms used in this test
method.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 This test method consists of subjecting a machined
cylindrical test specimen to double-shear loading in a test jig
using a tension (or compression) testing machine to determine
the shear stress required to fracture the specimen, that is, the
shear strength.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.05 on
Testing.
Current edition approved Feb. 15, 1994. Published April 1994. Originally
published as B 769–87. Last previous edition B 769–87.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
3 demonstrated that die lengths of 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) for 3⁄8-in.
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The intent of this method is to provide a means of
measuring the ultimate shear strength of aluminum-alloy
wrought and cast products. Data obtained by this method are
used to calculate minimum properties that can be utilized in the
design of structural members such as found in aircraft. It is
recognized that loading conditions developed by this method,
and by most others, are not ideal in that they do not strictly
satisfy the definition of pure shear. However, rarely do pure
shear conditions exist in structures.
NOTE 2—This method is not interchangeable with that described in Test
Method B 565. Shear strengths obtained by Test Method B 565 are about
10 % lower than those developed by this test method.
5.2 The presence of a lubricant on the surface of the
specimen and jig may result in shear strengths up to 3 % lower
than those determined in the absence of lubrication (see 8.1 and
Test Method B 565).
6. Apparatus
6.1 Testing Machines—The testing machines shall conform
to the requirements of Practices E 4. The loads used to
determine the shear strength shall be within the loading range
of the testing machine as defined in Practices E 4.
6.2 Loading Device:
6.2.1 The loading device shall be a double-shear test jig of
the type shown in Fig. 1. The jig shall be made of hardened
steel having a hardness from 60 to 62 Rockwell hardness, C
scale (HRC). A suitable alternative is to use a lower-strength
steel for the main frame of the jig and have only the steel
inserts hardened from 60 to 62 HRC.
6.2.2 The shearing edges of the holes shall have a radius of
no more than 0.0005 in. (0.013 mm). The mating surfaces of
the center and outside dies shall have a finish of 16 µin. AA or
better. There shall be sufficient clearances between the die
interfaces to ensure that no binding occurs; clearance should
not exceed 0.002 in. (0.051 mm). Consequently, the rigidity of
the test jig must be such that this clearance is maintained
throughout the test; in instances where the device is loaded in
compression as in Fig. 1, care must be taken to ensure there is
no binding between the dies at the interfaces during the test.
6.2.3 The nominal length of the center and outside dies of
the tool shown in Fig. 1 is 1 in. (25.4 mm). It has been
 B 769
FIG. 1 Three Views of an Amsler Shear Tool
(9.52 mm) diameter specimens give test results comparable to
dies 1 in. in length.4 The initial minimum length of any one die
shall be 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) for specimens up through 0.375 in.
(9.52 mm) in diameter. The minimum die lengths for speci-
mens greater than 0.375 in. in diameter should be kept in about
the same proportion as that of the 0.375-in. diameter specimen;
that is, die length/specimen diameter equal to 4⁄3. As a result of
sharpening, dies shall be replaced when lengths are less than
95 % of the original lengths.
NOTE 3—The specimen should not be restrained by clamping circum-
ferentially or end loading during the test.
7. Test Specimens
7.1 The minimum length of the cylindrical specimens shall
be equal to the combined lengths of the three dies in accor-
dance with 6.2.3.
7.2 The minimum specimen size shall be 3⁄16 in. (4.76 mm)
in diameter. The 0.375-in. (9.52-mm) diameter specimen is a
commonly used size, but up to 0.500-in. (12.7-mm) diameter
specimens have been used.
7.3 Measurements of the specimen diameter shall be made
to the nearest 0.0005 in. (0.013 mm). Measurements are to be
made at the two shear planes; the average of the two diameters
will be used to calculate the specimen cross-sectional area.
7.4 The maximum clearance between the specimen diam-
eter and the test-hole diameter shall not exceed 0.0015 in.
(0.038 mm).
4
Davies, R. E., and Kaufman, J. G., “Effects of Test Method and Specimen
Orientation on Shear Strengths of Aluminum Alloys,” Proceedings, ASTM, Vol 64,
1964.
2
7.5 The finish shall be 32 µin. AA or better.
8. Specimen Orientation and Direction
8.1 The shear strength of an aluminum material usually
depends on the specimen orientation and the direction in which
the load is applied relative to the grain flow in the specimen.4
The specimen orientation and the loading direction should be
identified by the following systems:
8.1.1 The reference directions for rectangular shapes are
indicated in Fig. 2; these are suitable for plate, extrusions,
forgings and other shapes of nonsymmetrical grain flow.
8.1.2 The reference directions for certain cylindrical shapes
where the longitudinal axis is the predominate grain flow are
indicated in Fig. 3. The terminology in Fig. 3 is applicable to
rolled, drawn, extruded or forged round rod.
8.2 The two-letter code is used in Fig. 2 and Fig. 3 to
describe the specimen orientations and loading directions. The
first letter designates the grain orientation normal to the shear
plane. The second letter designates the direction of loading.
The most commonly used specimen orientations and loading
directions are L-S, T-S and S-L for shapes in 8.1.1 and L-R, C-R
and R-L for cylindrical shapes in 8.1.2.
8.3 Some type of mark, such as a scribed line shown in Fig.
2 and Fig. 3, is necessary to indicate the orientation of the
specimen relative to a reference surface of the material.
9. Procedure
9.1 Clean the specimen and dies with a suitable solvent such
as acetone for removal of lubrication.
9.2 Place the specimen in a test jig of the type shown in Fig.
1.
9.3 The cross-head speed of the testing machine shall not
 B 769

FIG. 2 Grain Orientations and Loading Directions for Shear Specimens from Rectangular Shapes

FIG. 3 Grain Orientations and Loading Directions for Shear Specimens from Cylindrical Shapes

exceed 0.75 in. (19.1 mm)/min and the loading rate shall not D = measured diameter of the specimen, in. (mm).
exceed 100 ksi (689 MPa)/min on the double-shear cross
section. Loading rate to failure should be uniform. 11. Report
9.4 Determine the maximum load to fracture the specimen. 11.1 The report shall include the following:
9.5 The mating surfaces of the shear dies should be visually 11.1.1 ASTM method of shear test,
inspected before use for aluminum buildup around the test
holes. Removal of the aluminum can be accomplished with NOTE 4—Since the test method significantly influences the test results,
crocus cloth or soaking the dies in a caustic soda solution it is essential that the ASTM method be referenced.
followed by a water rinse and drying. 11.1.2 Material and sample identification,
11.1.3 Specimen diameter, in in. (mm),
10. Calculation 11.1.4 Specimen orientation and loading direction,
10.1 Calculate the shear strength from the maximum load as 11.1.5 Maximum load, in lbf (N),
follows: 11.1.6 Shear strength, ksi (MPa), and
S 5 ½ Pmax/A 5 ½ Pmax/~pD 2/4! 5 2Pmax/pD 2 11.1.7 Test temperature, °F (°C).

where: 12. Keywords

S = shear strength, psi (MPa), 12.1 aluminum alloys; cast aluminum products; double-
Pmax = maximum load, lbf (N), and shear testing; shear strength; wrought aluminum products

3
 B 769

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

This section identifies the principle changes to this standard (3) 10.1—Changed Ksi to psi to match equation.
that have been incorporated since the last issue (4) 11.1.3, 11.1.5, 11.1.7—Abbreviated units.
(1) 6.2.3, 7.2—Changed fractional values to decimal values. (5) 11.1.6—Corrected shear strength units and abbreviated
(2) 9.5—Added to provide a method for cleaning test dies. units.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 770 – 02

Standard Specification for

Copper-Beryllium Alloy Sand Castings for General
Applications1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 770; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope * E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)4

1.1 This specification establishes requirements for copper- 3. General Requirements
beryllium alloy sand castings for general applications and
nominal compositions alloys defined by this specification are 3.1 The following sections of Specification B 824 constitute
shown in Table 1.2 a part of this specification:
1.2 Units—The values stated in inch-pound units are to be 3.1.1 Terminology,
regarded as standard. The values given in parentheses are 3.1.2 Material and Manufacture,
mathematical conversions to SI units, which are provided for 3.1.3 Chemical Composition,
information only. 3.1.4 Dimensions and Permissible Variations,
1.3 The following safety hazard caveat pertains only to the 3.1.5 Workmanship, Finish and Appearance,
test methods described in this specification. 3.1.6 Sampling,
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the 3.1.7 Number of Tests and Retests,
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the 3.1.8 Specimen Preparation,
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- 3.1.9 Test Methods,
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- 3.1.10 Significance of of Numerical Limits,
bility of regulatory requirements prior to use. 3.1.11 Inspection,
3.1.12 Rejection and Rehearing,
2. Referenced Documents 3.1.13 Certification,
2.1 The following documents in the current issue of the 3.1.14 Mill Test Report, and
Book of Standards form a part of this specification to the extent 3.1.15 Packaging and Package Marking.
referenced herein: 3.2 In addition, when a section with a title identical to that
2.2 ASTM Standards: referenced in 3.1 appears in this specification, it contains
B 30 Specification for Copper-Base Alloys in Ingot Form3 additional requirements which supplement those appearing in
B 208 Practice for Preparing Tension Test Specimens for Specification B 824.
Copper-Base Alloys for Sand, Permanent Mold, Centrifu-
4. Terminology
gal and Continuous Castings3
B 601 Practice for Temper Designations for Copper and 4.1 For definitions of terms relating to copper and copper
Copper Alloys—Wrought and Cast3 alloys, refer to Terminology B 846.
B 824 Specification for General Requirements for Copper 5. Ordering Information
Alloy Castings3
B 846 Terminology for Copper and Copper Alloys3 5.1 Include the following information for orders for prod-
uct:
5.1.1 ASTM designation number, title, and year of issue,
1
5.1.2 Copper Alloy UNS Number designation,
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper and
Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.05 on Castings
5.1.3 Temper,
and Ingots for Remelting. 5.1.4 Quantity of castings required,
Current edition approved April 10, 2002. Published June 2002. Originally 5.1.5 Pattern or drawing number, and condition (cast, ma-
published as B 770 – 87. Last previous edition B 770 – 96. chined, and so forth),
2
The UNS system for copper and copper alloys (see Practice E 527) is a simple
expansion of the former standard designation system accomplished by the addition 5.1.6 When material is purchased for agencies of the U.S.
of a prefix “C” and a suffix “00”. The suffix can be used to accommodate government, the Supplementary Requirements of Specification
composition variations of the base alloy.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 770
TABLE 1 Nominal Compositions
Copper Alloy Previous
Copper Nickel Silicon Beryllium Cobalt Chromium Iron Zirconium Tin Manganese
UNS No. Designation
C81400 70C 99.1 ... ... 0.06 ... 0.8 ... ... ... ...
C82000 10C 97 ... ... 0.5 2.5 ... ... ... ... ...
C82200 3C, 14C 98 1.5 ... 0.5 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C82400A 165C, 165CTA 97.8 ... ... 1.7 0.5 ... ... ... ... ...
C82500A 20C, 20CTA 97.2 ... 0.3 2.0 0.5 ... ... ... ... ...
C82510 21C 96.6 ... 0.3 2.0 1.1 ... ... ... ... ...
C82600A 245C, 245CTA 96.8 ... 0.3 2.4 0.5 ... ... ... ... ...
C82800A 275C, 275CTA 96.6 ... 0.3 2.6 0.5 ... ... ... ... ...
C96700 72C 67.2 31.0 ... 1.2 ... ... 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.6
A
When fine-grained castings are specified, 0.02 to 0.12 Ti is added for grain refinement, usually in the remelt ingot. See Specification B 30.

B 824 may be specified. 8. Temper

5.2 The following options are available and should be
specified in the contract or purchase order when required.
5.2.1 Chemical analysis of residual elements, if specified in
the purchase order (Specification B 824),
5.2.2 Mechanical requirements, if specified in the purchase
order (Section 10),
5.2.3 Pressure test requirements, if specified in the purchase
order (Specification B 824),
5.2.4 Soundness requirements, if specified in the purchase
order (Specification B 824),
5.2.5 Repair of castings (Section 12),
5.2.6 Certification, if specified in the purchase order (Speci-
fication B 824),
5.2.7 Foundry test report, if specified in the purchase order
(Specification B 824),
5.2.8 Witness inspection, if specified in the purchase order
(Specification B 824), and
5.2.9 Product marking, if specified in the purchase order
(Specification B 824).
6. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 Material:
6.1.1 The material of manufacture shall be castings of the
copper alloys listed in Table 1, as specified in the purchase
order or contract, and of such purity and soundness as to be
suitable for the products prescribed herein.
6.2 Manufacture:
6.2.1 The product shall be manufactured by casting and
thermal treatment to meet the properties specified.
7. Chemical Composition
7.1 The castings shall conform to the chemical composition
requirements prescribed in Table 2 for the Copper Alloy UNS
Number designations specified in the ordering information.
7.2 These composition limits do not preclude the presence
of other elements. Limits may be established for unnamed
elements by agreement between manufacturer or supplier and
purchaser.
7.3 Copper is customarily given as remainder but may be
taken as the difference between the sum of all elements
analyzed and 100 %.
7.4 When all elements in Table 2 are analyzed, their sum
shall be 99.5 % minimum.
7.5 It is recognized that residual elements may be present in
cast copper-base alloys. Analysis shall be made for residual
elements only when specified in the purchase order (Specifi-
cation B 824).
8.1 The standard tempers are listed as follows:
8.1.1 TF00—Cast, solution heat treated and precipitation
heat treated.
8.1.2 M01—As sand cast.
8.1.3 Special or non-standard tempers are subject to nego-
tiation between the supplier and purchaser. Standard temper
designations are in accordance with Practice B 601.
9. Precipitation Heat Treatment
9.1 For the purpose of determining conformance to the
appropriate requirement in Table 3, the castings and test
specimens shall be precipitation heat-treated at a uniform
temperature from the solution heat-treated condition. Solution
heat-treatment and precipitation heat-treatments are listed in
Table 4. Other treatment times and temperatures may be
preferable for end products made from this material.
9.2 Special combinations of properties such as increased
ductility, electrical conductivity, dimensional accuracy, and
endurance life may be obtained by special precipitation heat-
treatments. The mechanical requirements of Table 3 do not
apply to such special heat-treatments. Specific test require-
ments as needed shall be agreed upon between the manufac-
turer or supplier and purchaser of the end product.
10. Mechanical Property Requirements
10.1 When tension tests are required, separately cast test-bar
specimens shall be used to determine mechanical properties
and shall meet the requirements shown in Table 3 in the as cast
or solution heat-treated and precipitation heat-treated condi-
tion.
11. Purchases for U. S. Government
11.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
product purchased for an agency of the U. S. government shall
conform to the special government regulations specified in the
Special Requirements.
12. Casting Repair
12.1 The castings shall not be weld repaired without ap-
proval of the purchaser.
12.2 The castings shall not be impregnated without approval
of the purchaser.
13. Sampling
13.1 Lot Size:
13.1.1 A lot shall consist of all castings produced from one
furnace melt or crucible melt.

2
 TABLE 2 Chemical RequirementsA
Composition,% max, except as indicated
Major Elements Residual Elements
Copper Alu-
Copper,B Zirco- Chro- Manga- Chro-
Alloy Beryllium Cobalt Nickel Iron Silicon Titanium Lead Iron Silicon Zinc Lead mi- Tin
min nium mium nese mium
UNS No. num
C81400 remainder 0.02–0.10 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.6–1.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C82000 remainder 0.45–0.80 2.40–2.70C 0.20 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.10 0.15 0.10 0.10 0.02 0.10 0.10
C82200 remainder 0.35–0.80 0.30 1.0–2.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C82400D remainder 1.60–1.85 0.20–0.65 0.20 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.20 ... 0.10 0.10 0.02 0.15 0.10
C82500D remainder 1.90–2.25 0.35–0.70C 0.20 ... 0.20–0.35 ... ... ... ... ... 0.25 ... 0.10 0.10 0.02 0.15 0.10
C82510 remainder 1.90–2.15 1.0–1.2 0.20 ... 0.20–0.35 ... ... ... ... ... 0.25 ... 0.10 0.10 0.02 0.15 0.10
C82600D remainder 2.25–2.55 0.35–0.65 0.20 ... 0.20–0.35 ... ... ... ... ... 0.25 ... 0.10 0.10 0.02 0.15 0.10
C82800D remainder 2.50–2.85 0.35–0.70C 0.20 ... 0.20–0.35 ... ... ... ... ... 0.25 ... 0.10 0.10 0.02 0.15 0.10
C96700 remainder 1.10–1.20 ... 29.0–33.0 0.40–1.0 0.15 0.15–0.35 0.15–0.35 ... 0.01 0.40–1.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
Analysis shall regularly be made only for the major elements. All others are considered residual elements, and if above the noted maximums, may influence performance of the casting, particularly in conductivity,
magnetic permeability, and machinability.
B
In reporting chemical analyses obtained by use of instruments such as spectrograph, X ray, and atomic absorption, copper may be indicated as “remainder”, and taken by difference.
C
Ni+Co.
D
When fine grained castings are specified, 0.02–0.12 Ti is added for grain refinement, usually in the remelt ingot. See Specification B 30.

3
B 770
 B 770
TABLE 3 Mechanical Requirements

NOTE 1—“TF00” property values denote product in the standard solution heat-treated and precipitation heat-treated condition.
NOTE 2—“M01” property values denote product in the as sand cast condition.
Copper Alloy Temper Tensile Strength, min Yield Strength 0.2 % Offset Elongation in 2 in.,
UNS No. Designation ksiA MPaB ksiA MPaB or 50 mm, min,%

C81400 TF00 53 366 36 248 11

C81400 M01 45 311 15 104 15
C82000 TF00 90 621 70 483 3
C82000 M01 45 311 15 104 15
C82200 TF00 90 621 70 483 5
C82200 M01 55 380 25 173 15
C82400 TF00 145 1001 135 932 1
C82400 M01 70 483 35 242 15
C82500 TF00 150 1035 120 828 1
C82500 M01 75 518 40 276 15
C82510 TF00 160 1104 150 1035 1
C82510 M01 80 552 45 311 10
C82600 TF00 165 1139 155 1070 1
C82600 M01 80 552 45 311 10
C82800 TF00 165 1139 155 1070 1/2
C96700 TF00 125 863 80 552 10
A
ksi = 1000 psi.
B
See Appendix.

TABLE 4 Thermal Treatments

NOTE 1—The values given for solution heat treatment, precipitation temperature, and heat treatment time are the same for UNS Nos. C82400, C82500,
C82510, C82600, and C82800.
Copper Alloy Solution Heat Treatment Heat Treatment
Precipitation Temperature
UNS No. Temperature Time, h/in. Time, h

C81400 1800–1850°F 900–950°F 2

{
C96700 (982–1010°C) 1 h/in. of cross section and water quench (482–510°C)

C82000 1675-1700°F 850–900°F 3

{
C82200 (913–927°C) 1 h/in. of cross section and water quench (454–482°C)

C82400
C82500
{C82510
C82600 1400–1475°F 625–650°F
C82800 (760–802°C) 1 h/in. of cross section and water quench (330–343°C) 3

13.1.2 When two or more furnace melts or crucible melts, or
both, are used to charge a ladle for pouring, the castings
produced therefrom shall constitute a lot.
13.1.3 A lot may consist of such groups of melts as agreed
upon by the manufacturer and purchaser and in such case a lot
shall consist of not more than 1000 lb (455 kg) of castings
(gates and risers removed).
13.1.4 Test bar specimens for the Copper Alloy UNS
Numbers in this specification shall be cast to the form and
dimensions shown in Figs. 1, Figs. 2, Figs. 3, or Figs. 4 in
Practice B 208.
14. Keywords
14.1 copper alloy castings; copper-base alloy castings; cop-
per beryllium castings

4
 B 770
APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. METRIC EQUIVALENTS

X1.1 The SI unit for strength properties now shown is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI). The
derived SI unit for force is the newton (N), which is defined as
that force which when applied to a body having a mass of one
kilogram gives it an acceleration of one metre per second
squared (N = kg·m/s2). The derived SI unit for pressure or
stress is the newton per square metre (N/m2), which has been
named the pascal (Pa) by the General Conference on Weights
and Measures. Since 1 ksi = 6 894 757 Pa the metric equiva-
lents are expressed as megapascal (MPa), which is the same as
MN/m2 and N/mm2.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B05 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (B 770 - 96)
that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) A comprehensive 5-year review was conducted. No techin-
cal changes were made as far as alloy temper and property
requirements. Some sections were rearranged, renumbered,
and, in some cases, reworded to conform to the new Outline of
Form and Style and the Form and Style for ASTM Standards
(Blue Book).
(2) The safety caveat was added.
(3) The Terminology section was added.
(4) The General Requirements section was expanded as di-
rected in the Outline of Form and Style.
(5) The composition of alloy C96700 was adjusted to match
the CDA UNS registered composition. A Ni+Co footnote was
added to Cobalt entry for alloys C82000, C82500, and C82800
for the same reason.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 772 – 97 (Reapproved 2003)
Standard Guide for
Specifying the Chemical Compositions for Electrical
Contact Materials (Arcing and Nonarcing)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 772; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This guide provides suggested methods for users and
producers of electrical contact materials to specify the chemi-
cal compositions of these materials.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2
E 1282 Guide for Specifying the Chemical Compositions
and Selecting Sampling Practices and Quantitative Analy-
sis Methods for Metals, Ores, and Related Material
3. Significance and Use
3.1 This guide should be used by committees or individuals
in specifying the chemical composition of electrical contact
materials.
4. Procedure
4.1 For Basic Alloy Element(s) and Component(s):
4.1.1 Specify the numerical limits of the elements as fol-
lows:
4.1.1.1 Major fractions of the alloy,
4.1.1.2 Tighter tolerances, or
4.1.1.3 Higher unit cost(s) or combination thereof.
1
This guide is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on Nonferrous
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B2.05 on
Precious Metals and Electrical Contact Materials.
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2003. Published November 2003. Originally
approved in 1987. Last previous edition approved in 1997 as B 772 – 97.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
4.1.2 One of these elements may be chosen to be specified
by “report by difference.” List the minimum value of this
element in a pair of parentheses before the clause “report by
difference.” Select this element or component according to one
or more of the following considerations:
4.1.2.1 Least precious,
4.1.2.2 Widest tolerance, and
4.1.2.3 Requiring the least precise or most costly method to
analyze.
4.2 For Impurities:
4.2.1 Specify only the tolerance limits of the elements
commonly occurring with the major elements (for example,
copper in silver); and the tolerance limits of the detrimental
elements (as recognized by the industry) which may be a
residue after fabrication (for example, sodium in Ag-CdO
material by the coprecipitation method).
4.2.2 Specify the tolerance limits for total impurities of all
the impurity elements.
4.3 Place the following note under the Table of Chemical
Compositions (see Table 1 for example) in the text of each
specification:
NOTE 1—Analysis is regularly made for the elements for which specific
limits are listed. If, however, the presence of “other” elements is suspected
or indicated in the course of routine analysis, further analysis shall be
made to determine that the total of these “other” elements and the listed
impurities is not in excess of the total impurities limit.
4.4 State under the section of Chemical Composition in the
text of each specification a clause as follows:
4.4.1 These specification limits do not preclude the possible
presence of other unnamed elements, impurities, or additives.
Analysis shall be regularly made only for the minor elements
listed in the table. However if a user knows of elements that
might be detrimental to their application or has other reasons
for requiring analysis for specific elements, then agreement
between manufacturer and purchaser for both limits and
methods of analysis should be required for elements not
specified.
4.5 Additional guidelines for specifying the chemical com-
positions and selecting sampling practices are covered in Guide
E 1282.
 B 772 – 97 (2003)
TABLE 1 Table of Chemical Compositions 4.6 Example (For a hypothetical alloy):
NOTE 1—Analysis is regularly made for the elements for which specific 75A-24.5B-0.5C
limits are listed. If, however, the presence of “other” elements is suspected
or indicated in the course of routine analysis, further analysis shall be where:
made to determine that the total of these “other” elements and the listed A = precious metal,
impurities is not in excess of the total impurities limit. B = base metal,
C = base metal, and
Chemical Composition
Impurities
d, e, f, g, = typical or detrimental impurities.
Limits
A = 74–76 d = 0.06 max 5. Keywords
B = (23.5 Min.) Report by difference e = 0.05 max
f = 0.05 max 5.1 analysis; chemical composition; contacts; electrical con-
C = 0.35–0.65 g = 0.01 max
Total: 0.15 max tact materials; impurities; tolerance limits

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 771 – 87 (Reapproved 2001)
Standard Test Method for
Short Rod Fracture Toughness of Cemented Carbides1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 771; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers the determination of the fracture
toughness of cemented carbides (KIcSR) by testing slotted short
rod or short bar specimens.
1.2 Values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. Inch-pound units are provided for information only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
E 399 Test Method for Plane-Strain Fracture Toughness of
Metallic Materials2
E 616 Terminology Relating to Fracture Testing2
3. Terminology Definitions
3.1 stress intensity factor, Kl, (dimensional units FL−3/2)—
the magnitude of the ideal-crack-tip stress field for mode 1 in
a linear-elastic body.
NOTE 1—Values of K for mode l are given by:
Kl 5 limit @sy =2pr#
r→0
where:
r = distance directly forward from the crack tip to a
location where the significant stress sy is calculated,
and
sy = principal stress normal to the crack plane.
3.2 Abbreviations:fracture toughness of cemented carbide,
KIcSR, (dimensional units FL−3/2)—the material-toughness
property measured in terms of the stress-intensity factor Kl by
the operational procedure specified in this test method.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 This test method involves the application of an opening
load to the mouth of the short rod or short bar specimen which
contains a chevron-shaped slot. Load versus displacement
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B09 on Metal
Powders and Metal Powder Products and is the direct responsibility of Subcom-
mittee B09.06 on Cemented Carbides.
Current edition approved Aug. 28, 1987. Published October 1987.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
across the slot at the specimen mouth is recorded autographi-
cally. As the load is increased, a crack initiates at the point of
the chevron slot and slowly advances longitudinally, tending to
split the specimen in half. The load goes through a smooth
maximum when the width of the crack front is about one third
of the specimen diameter (short rod) or breadth (short bar).
Thereafter, the load decreases with further crack growth. Two
unloading-reloading cycles are performed during the test to
measure the effects of any macroscopic residual stresses in the
specimen. The fracture toughness is calculated from the
maximum load in the test and a residual stress parameter which
is evaluated from the unloading-reloading cycles on the test
record.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The property KIcSR determined by this test method is
believed to characterize the resistance of a cemented carbide to
fracture in a neutral environment in the presence of a sharp
crack under severe tensile constraint, such that the state of
stress near the crack front approaches tri-tensile plane strain,
and the crack-tip plastic region is small compared with the
crack size and specimen dimensions in the constraint direction.
A KIcSR value is believed to represent a lower limiting value of
fracture toughness. This value may be used to estimate the
relation between failure stress and defect size when the
(1) conditions of high constraint described above would be ex-
pected. Background information concerning the basis for
development of this test method in terms of linear elastic
fracture mechanics may be found in Refs (1-4).3
5.2 This test method can serve the following purposes:
5.2.1 To establish, in quantitative terms significant to ser-
vice performance, the effects of fabrication variables on the
fracture toughness of new or existing materials, and
5.2.2 To establish the suitability of a material for a specific
application for which the stress conditions are prescribed and
for which maximum flaw sizes can be established with
confidence.
6. Specimen Configuration, Dimensions, and Preparation
6.1 Both the round short rod specimen and the rectangular
shaped short bar specimen are equally acceptable and have
been found to have the same calibration (5). The short rod
dimensions are given in Fig. 1; the short bar in Fig. 2.
3
The boldface numbers in parentheses refer to the list of references at the end of
this standard.
1
 B 771

Standard Dimensions Standard Dimensions

Short Rod Short Bar
(mm) (in.) (mm) (in.)
B = 12.700 6 0.025 0.500 6 0.001 B = 12.700 6 0.025 0.500 6 0.001
W = 19.050 6 0.075 0.750 6 0.003 H = 11.050 6 0.025 0.435 6 0.001
t = 0.381 6 0.025 0.015 6 0.001 W = 19.050 6 0.075 0.750 6 0.003
For Curved Slot Option t = 0.3816 0.025 0.015 6 0.001
ao = 6.3506 0.075 0.250 6 0.003 For Curved Slot Option
u = 58.0° 6 0.5° ao = 6.3506 0.075 0.250 6 0.003
R = 62.23 6 1.27 02.45 6 0.05 u = 58.0° 6 0.5°
For Straight Slot Option R = 62.23 6 1.27 2.45 6 0.05
ao = 6.7446 0.075 0.266 6 0.003 For Straight Slot Option
u = 55.2° 6 0.5° ao = 6.744 6 0.075 0.266 6 0.003
R =` ` u = 55.2° 6 0.5°
FIG. 1 Short Rod Specimen R =` `
FIG. 2 Short Bar Specimen
6.2 Grip Slot—Depending on the apparatus used to test the
specimen, a grip slot may be required in the specimen front
face, as shown in Fig. 3. The surfaces in the grip slot shall have
a smooth ground finish so that the contact with each grip will
be along an essentially continuous line along the entire grip
slot, rather than at a few isolated points or along a short
segment within the grip slot.
6.3 Crack-Guiding Slots—These may be ground using a
diamond abrasive wheel of approximately 124 6 3 mm (4.9 6
0.1 in.) diameter, with a thickness of 0.36 6 0.01 mm (0.0140
6 0.0005 in.). The resulting slots in the specimen are slightly
thicker than the diamond wheel (0.38 6 0.02 mm, or 0.015 6
0.001 in.). A diamond concentration number of 50, and a grit
size of 150 are suggested. Dimensions are given in Fig. 1 and
Fig. 2 for two slotting options: (1) Specimens with curved slot
bottoms made by plunge feeding the specimen onto a diamond
cutting wheel of a given radius, and (2) Specimens with
straight slot bottoms made by moving the specimen by a
cutting wheel. The values of ao and u for the two slot
NOTE 1—The dashed lines show the front face profile of Figs. 1 and 2
configurations are chosen to cause the specimen calibration to
without grip slot.
remain constant. FIG. 3 Short Rod and Short Bar Grip Slot in Specimen Front Face
7. Apparatus
7.1 The procedure involves testing of chevron-slotted speci- method, as shown in Fig. 3. Fig. 4 shows the grip design. Grips
mens and recording the load versus specimen mouth opening shall have a hardness of 45 HRC or greater, and shall be
displacement during the test. capable of providing loads to at least 1560 N (350 lbf). The
7.2 Grips and Fixtures for Tensile Test Machine Loading— grips are attached to the arms of tensile test machine by the pin
Grip slots are required in the specimen face for this test and clevis arrangement shown in Fig. 5. The grip lips are

2
 B 771
FIG. 4 Grip Design
FIG. 5 Tensile Test Machine Test Configuration
inserted into the grip slot in the specimen, and the specimen is
loaded as the test machine arms apply a tensile load to the
grips. A transducer for measuring the specimen mouth opening
displacement during the test, and means for automatically
recording the load-displacement test record, such as an X-Y
recorder, are also required when using the tensile test machine
apparatus. A suggested design for the specimen mouth opening
displacement gage appears in Fig. 6. The gage shall have a
displacement resolution of 0.25 µm (10 3 10−6 in.) or better.
However, it is not necessary to calibrate the displacement axis
3
of the test record since only displacement ratios are used in the
data analysis.
7.3 Distributed Load Test Machine4—An alternative special
purpose machine that has been found suitable for the test
requires no grip slot in the front face of the specimen. A thin
stainless steel inflatable bladder is inserted into the chevron slot
in the mouth of the specimen. Subsequent inflation of the
bladder causes it to press against the inner surfaces of the slot,
thus producing the desired loading. The machine provides load
and displacement outputs, which must be recorded externally
on a device such as an X-Y recorder.
7.4 Testing Machine Characteristics—It has been observed
that some grades of carbides show a “pop-in” type of behavior
in which the load required to initiate the crack at the point of
the chevron slot is larger than the load required to advance the
crack just after initiation, such that the crack suddenly and
audibly jumps ahead at the time of its initiation. Occasionally,
the load at crack initiation can exceed the load maximum
which occurs as the crack passes through the critical location in
the specimen. When this occurs, a very stiff machine with
controlled displacement loading is necessary in order to allow
the crack to arrest well before passing beyond the critical
location. The large pop-in load is then ignored, and the
subsequent load maximum as the crack passes through the
critical location is used to determine KIcSR. Stiff machine
loading is also required in order to maintain crack growth
stability to well beyond the peak load in the test, where the
second unloading-reloading cycle is initiated.
8. Procedure
8.1 Number of Tests—A minimum of 3 replicate tests shall
be made.
8.2 Specimen Measurement:
8.2.1 Measure and record all specimen dimensions. If the
dimensions are within the tolerances shown in Fig. 1 and Fig.
2, no correction to the data need be made for out-of-tolerance
dimensions. If one or more of the parameters ao, W, u or t are
out of tolerance by up to 3 times the tolerances shown in Fig.
1 and Fig. 2, valid tests may still be made by the application of
the appropriate factors to account for the deviation from
standard dimensions (see 9.3). If the slot centering is outside
the indicated tolerance, the crack is less likely to follow the
chevron slots. However, the test may still be considered
successful if the crack follows the slots sufficiently well, as
discussed in 9.2.
8.2.2 The slot thickness measurement is critical on speci-
mens to be tested on a Fractometer. It should be measured to
within 0.013 mm (0.0005 in.) at the outside corners of the slot
using a feeler gage. If a feeler gage blade enters the slot to a
depth of 1 mm or more, the slot is said to be at least as thick
as the blade. Because the saw cuts forming the chevron slot
overlap somewhat in the mouth of the specimen, and because
the cuts may not meet perfectly, the slot width near the center
of the mouth may be larger than the width at the outside
corners. If the slot width near the center exceeds the slot width
4
Fractometer, a trademark of Terra Tek Systems, 360 Wakara Way, Salt Lake
City, UT 84108, has been found satisfactory for this purpose.
 B 771
FIG. 6 Suggested Design for a Specimen Mouth Opening Gage
at the corners by more than 0.10 mm (0.004 in.), a test of that
specimen by a Fractometer is invalid.
8.3 Specimen Testing Procedure:
8.3.1 Load Transducer Calibration:
8.3.1.1 Calibrate the output of the load cell in the test
machine to assure that the load cell output, as recorded on the
load versus displacement recorder, is accurately translatable
into the actual force applied to the specimen. In those cases in
which a distributed load test machine is used (see 7.3), the
calibration shall be performed according to the instructions in
Annex A1.
8.3.1.2 Install the specimen on the test machine. If using the
tensile test machine (see 7.2), operate the test machine in the
“displacement control” mode. Bring the grips sufficiently close
together such that they simultaneously fit into the grip slot in
the specimen face. Then increase the spacing between the grips
very carefully until an opening load of 10 to 30 N (2 to 7 lb)
is applied to the specimen. Check the alignment of the
specimen with respect to the grips, and the alignment of the
grips with respect to each other. The grips shall be centered in
the specimen grip slot to within 0.25 mm (0.010 in.). The
vertical offset between the grips shall not exceed 0.13 mm
(0.005 in.). Using a magnifying glass, observe the grips in the
grip slot from each side of the specimen to assure that the
specimen is properly installed. The grips should extend as far
as possible into the grip slot, resulting in contact lines (load
lines) at 0.63 mm (0.025 in.) from the specimen front face.
Correct any deviations from the desired specimen alignment.
8.3.1.3 Install the specimen mouth opening displacement
gage on the specimen. The gage must sense the mouth opening
no farther than 1 mm (0.040 in.) from the front face of the
specimen. If the gage design of Fig. 6 is used, the contact force
4
between the gage arms and the specimen can be adjusted with
a rubber elastic band so the gage will support itself, as
indicated in Fig. 5. However, the contact force must not be
more than 2 N (0.5 lb), as it increases the measured load to
fracture the specimen.
8.3.1.4 Adjust the displacement (x-axis) sensitivity of the
load-displacement recorder to produce a convenient-size data
trace. A 70° angle between the x-axis and the initial elastic
loading trace of the test is suggested. A quantitative calibration
of the displacement axis is not necessary.
8.3.1.5 With the load-displacement recorder operating, test
the specimen by causing the specimen mouth to open at a rate
of 0.0025 to 0.0125 mm/s (0.0001 to 0.0005 in./s). The
specimen is unloaded by reversing the motion of the grips
twice during the test. The first unloading is begun when the
slope of the unloading line on the load-displacement record
will be approximately 70 % of the initial elastic loading slope.
(For estimating the point at which the unloadings should be
initiated, it can be assumed that the unloading paths will be
linear and will point toward the origin of the load-displacement
record.) The second unloading is begun when the unloading
slope will be approximately 35 % of the initial elastic loading
slope. Each unloading shall be continued until the load on the
specimen has decreased to less than 10 % of the load at the
initiation of the unloading. The specimen shall be immediately
reloaded and the test continued after each unloading. The test
record generated by the above procedure should be similar to
that of Fig. 7.
8.3.2 Crack-Pop-In—If a sudden load drop occurs simulta-
neously with an audible “pop” or “tick” sound from the
specimen during the initial part of the test when the load is
rising most rapidly, a crack pop-in has occurred at the point of
 B 771

FIG. 7 Sample Load-Displacement Test Record with Data Analysis Constructions and Definitions

the chevron slot. If the pop-in is large, such that the first
unloading slope that can be drawn is less than half of the initial
elastic loading slope, the test is invalid.

9. Calculation and Interpretation of Results

9.1 Remove the specimen from the apparatus. If the two
halves are still joined, break them apart with a wedge. Examine
the fracture surfaces for any imperfections that may have
influenced the measured peak load. Any imperfections (such as
a void, a surface irregularity, or a piece of foreign matter) that
is visible to the naked eye may influence the measurement if
the imperfection is located between 7.6 mm (0.30 in.) and 14.2
mm (0.56 in.) from the mouth of the specimen. Imperfections
outside this region do not affect the peak load unless they are
very large. Discard the data whenever the peak load may have
been affected by an imperfection in the fracture plane.
9.2 Examine the fracture surface to determine how well the
crack followed the chevron slots in splitting the specimen
apart. If the“ crack follow” was imperfect, the crack will have
cut substantially farther into one half of the specimen than the
other, and the crack surface will not intersect the bottom of the
chevron slots, as shown in Fig. 8. The size of the lip
overhanging the slot bottom determines whether the crack
follow was sufficiently good for a valid test. Measure the
“overhang” of the fracture surface over the slot bottom on each
side of the chevron at a distance of 10.8 mm (0.425 in.) from
the mouth of the specimen (Fig. 8). If the sum, Db, of the
overhangs on each side of the chevron exceeds 0.25 mm (0.010
in.), the test is invalid.
NOTE 2—Imperfect crack follow often results from poor centering of
the chevron slot in the specimen. However, it can also result from strong
residual stresses in the test specimen.
9.3 Out-of-Tolerance Dimension Corrections—If the speci-
men dimensions are all within the tolerances specified in Fig.
1 and Fig. 2, assign Cc = 1, where Cc is the specimen
configuration correction factor. If ao, W, u, or t differ from their
specified tolerance by more than 3 times the tolerance specified
in Fig. 1 or Fig. 2, the sample is invalid. If ao, W, u, or t differ
NOTE 1—For a valid test, the overhang sum Db, measured at a distance
of 10.8 mm from the specimen mouth, must not exceed 0.25 mm (0.010
in.).
FIG. 8 Short Rod or Short Bar Tested Specimen Half with
Imperfect Crack Guidance by the Slots
from their specified tolerance by less than or equal to three
times the tolerance specified in Fig. 1 or Fig. 2, compensation
can be made using the correction factors defined in 9.3.1
through 9.3.5 (7). The subscript nom refers to the nominal
dimension specified in Fig. 1 or Fig. 2.
9.3.1 If ao is within tolerance, assign Ca = 1. However, if ao
is out of tolerance, calculate:
Ca 5 1 1 1.8~ao 2 aonom!/B. (2)
9.3.2 If W is within tolerance, assign CW = 1. However, if W
is out of tolerance, calculate:
CW 5 1 2 0.7~W 2 Wnom!/B. (3)
9.3.3 If u is within tolerance, assign Cu = 1. However, if u is
out of tolerance, calculate:
Cu 5 1 2 0.015~u 2 unom! (4)
where u is in degrees.
9.3.4 If t is within tolerance, or if t is out of tolerance and
grip loading was used, assign Ct = 1. However, if t is out of
tolerance and distributed loading (Fractometer) was used,
calculate:

5
 B 771
Ct 5 1 2 12.5~t 2 tnom!/B (5)
9.3.5 Calculate Cc from:
Cc 5 CaCwCuCt (6)
9.4 Analyze the test record to obtain p, the residual stress
parameter. The basis for the use of p to compensate for the
effects of any macroscopic longitudinal residual stresses in the
specimen is given in Ref (3).
9.4.1 Locate the “high” and “low” points on each
unloading-reloading cycle. A high point is the point at which
the mouth opening displacement started decreasing to unload
the specimen, and the corresponding low point is on the
reloading part of the unloading-reloading cycle at half the load
of the high point. The high and low points are labeled H and L,
respectively, in Fig. 7.
9.4.2 Draw the ideal elastic release path approximations
through the high and low points of each unloading-reloading
cycle (slanted dashed lines of Fig. 7).
9.4.3 Draw the horizontal “average load” line between the
two ideal elastic release lines (Fig. 7). The average load line is
drawn at the level of the average load on the data trace between
the two unloading-reloading cycles. It must be drawn horizon-
tal, but the choice of the average load can vary by 65 % from
the correct value without materially affecting the results.
9.4.4 Measure DX (the distance between the ideal elastic
release lines at the average load line) and DXo (the distance
between the ideal elastic release lines at the zero load line).
Calculate p = DXo/DX. If the release lines cross before reaching
the zero load axis, DXo, and therefore p, are considered to be
negative. The analysis is nevertheless valid. However, the test
is considered invalid unless − 0.15 < p < + 0.15, inasmuch as
the theory assumes relatively small values of p.
9.5 From the test record, measure the maximum load in the
experiment, Fc.
9.6 Calculate KIcSR.
9.6.1 If grips and fixtures for tensile test machine loading
are used, calculate:
KQSR 5 AFcCc ~1 1 p!/B3/2 (7)
in which A = 22.0 and B is the specimen diameter (short rod)
or breadth (short bar) in the system of units in which Fc and
KQSR are expressed. A is the dimensionless specimen configu-
ration calibration constant defined in Ref (1) and evaluated in
Ref (6). It is not a function of machine stiffness, material
properties, nor absolute specimen size, so long as the scaled
specimen configuration, including the location of the applied
load on the specimen, remains constant. The calibrated value of
A is uncertain by about 5 %.
9.6.2 If the distributed load test machine is used, calculate:
KQSR 5 Cc ~l 1 p!KDL (8)
where:
6
KDL = the fracture toughness output of the machine (see
Annex A1).
9.6.3 If all of the validity requirements of the test are
satisfied, then:
KIcSR 5 KQSR (9)
Validity requirements are specified in 6.4, 6.5, 8.2, 8.3.6, 9.1,
9.2, and 9.4.4.
10. Report
10.1 The report shall include the following for each speci-
men tested:
10.1.1 Specimen identification,
10.1.2 Environment of test, if other than normal atmosphere
and room temperature,
10.1.3 Diameter, B (short rod) or Breadth, B (short bar),
10.1.4 Length, W,
10.1.5 Height, H (short bar only),
10.1.6 Chord angle, u,
10.1.7 Slot thickness, t,
10.1.8 Crack overhang sum, Db, in accordance with 9.2,
10.1.9 Comments on any unusual appearance of the fracture
surface, and
10.1.10 KIcSR, or KQSR with a summary of the invalidities.
11. Precision and Bias
11.1 Precision is the closeness of agreement between indi-
vidual test results. The precision of a KIcSR determination is a
function of the precision and bias of the various measurements
of the specimen and testing fixtures, the precision and bias of
the load and displacement measuring and recording devices
used to produce the test record, and the precision of the
constructions made on the record.
11.2 The precision of KIcSR measurements is estimated
based on a round robin test series reported in a research report.5
Six laboratories participated in the round robin, in which five
different grades of cemented carbides were tested. Each labo-
ratory tested approximately five short rod specimens of each
grade of material. The average within-laboratory percent stan-
dard deviation (the repeatability) was 2.9 %. This pertains to
tests done on the same material by the same operator using the
same equipment within a short time. The average between-
laboratory percent standard deviation (the reproducibility) was
5.0 %.
11.3 Bias is a systematic error that contributes to the
difference between a population mean of the measurements and
an accepted reference or true value. Since there is no accepted
method for determining the true fracture toughness of ce-
mented carbides, no statement on bias can be made.
5
Supporting data are available from ASTM Headquarters. Request RR: B09-
1005.
 B 771
ANNEX

(Mandatory Information)

A1. CALIBRATION OF THE DISTRIBUTED LOAD TEST MACHINE

A1.1 The equation for the fracture toughness (critical stress
intensity factor) for the specimen geometries of this test
method and for the loading configuration used by the distrib-
uted load (DL) test machine is:
KDL 5 8.26 Pc=B,
where:
Pc = the peak pressure in the inflatable bladder during the
test.
The factor 8.26 is a dimensionless constant for the specimen
configuration and the loading configuration of the distributed
load test machine. It is entirely comparable to the dimension-
less constant A = 22.0 which applies for the grip loading
configuration of this test method (see 9.6.1).
A1.2 The machine is normally calibrated to display the
signal from the pressure transducer in units of pressure (MPa or
ksi) times 8.26 2 2 . =B , where B = 0.0127 m for the SI
read-out, or B = 0.500 in. for the inch-pound read-out. Thus,
the peak reading displayed in a test is the KDL for the specimen.
A1.3 The machine shall be calibrated in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions before testing each specimen.
This involves switching a shunt resistor into the bridge circuit
of the pressure transducer to provide the same bridge balance
offset as a known pressure. The amplifier gain is then adjusted
to cause the display to read the correct value.
(A1.1) A1.4 The equivalent pressure signal obtained by switching
the shunt resistor into the bridge circuit should be checked
yearly, or more often by the manufacturer, or as follows:
A1.4.1 Disconnect the pressure tube from the intensifier,
zero the display, and connect a pressure tube from a pressure
standard to the intensifier.
A1.4.2 Apply an accurately known pressure of about 14
MPa (2 ksi). Adjust the amplifier gain to obtain an output
display of 0.931 MPa =m per MPa of applied pressure (SI),
or 5.84 ksi =in. per ksi of applied pressure (inch-pound).
Check that the display returns to zero for zero applied pressure.
A1.4.3 With zero applied pressure and the display reading
zero, switch the calibrating resistor into the bridge circuit and
note the display. This displayed reading should be used in
subsequent test-to-test calibrations.
NOTE A1.1—In performing the above calibration, considerable care
must be exercised to prevent air from entering the machine’s pressure
system, as air destroys the stiffness of the system.

REFERENCES

(1) Barker, L. M., “A Simplified Method for Measuring Plane Strain
Fracture Toughness”, Engineering Fracture Mechanics, Vol 9, 1977,
pp. 361–369.
(2) Barker, L. M., “Short Rod KIc Measurements of A12O3,” Fracture
Mechanics of Ceramics, Vol 3, 1978, pp. 483–494.
(3) Barker, L. M., “Residual Stress Effects on Fracture Toughness Mea-
surements,” Advances in Fracture Research (ICF5), (D. Francois,
Ed.), Vol 5, 1981, p. 2563.
(4) “Fracture Toughness Testing and Its Applications,” ASTM STP 381,
Am. Soc. Testing Mats., April 1965.
(5) Barker, L. M., “Short Bar Specimens for KIc Measurements,” ASTM
STP 678, Am. Soc. Testing Mats., 1979, pp. 73–82.
(6) Barker, L. M., and Baratta, F. I., “Comparisons of Fracture Toughness
Measurements by the Short Rod and ASTM Standard Method of Test
for Plane-Strain Fracture Toughness of Metallic Materials (E 399–
78),” Journal of Testing and Evaluation, Vol 8, 1980, pp. 97–102.
(7) Barker, L. M., “Compliance Calibration of a Family of Short Rod and
Short Bar Fracture Toughness Specimens,” Engineering Fracture
Mechanics, 17, 1983, pp. 289–312.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

7
 Designation: B 773 – 96 (Reapproved 2002)e1

Standard Guide for

Ultrasonic C-Scan Bond Evaluation of Brazed or Welded
Electrical Contact Assemblies1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 773; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

e1 NOTE—Paragraph 1.3 was corrected editorially in June 2002.

INTRODUCTION

This guidance document is the result of an investigation by the ASTM Committee B04.04 Task
Force on Ultrasonic Bond Testing of Electrical Contacts. Although ultrasonic interrogation is widely
employed as a non-destructive evaluation method, its application to the testing of electrical contact
bonds requires specific techniques.2,3 The desire to study the variation of technique and its effect upon
test results was responsible for a round-robin test program. The program was conducted in two phases
in an attempt to standardize practices which would improve testing agreement. This study provided
analysis and suggestions for reducing the variability of test results. The decision of the committee was
to publish a summary of this information to serve as guidelines for writing specifications that will
incorporate practices.

1. Scope Reflection Method Using Pulsed Longitudinal Waves4

1.1 This guide describes ultrasonic testing procedures that
can be used for evaluating the bond quality of electrical contact
assemblies manufactured by brazing or welding.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
E 214 Practice for Immersed Ultrasonic Examination by the
1
This guide is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on Nonferrous
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B02.11 on
Electrical Contact Test Methods.
Current edition approved May 10, 1996. Published July 1996. Originally
published as B 773 – 87. Last previous edition B 773 – 87 (1991) e1.
2
Buckley, R. I., Commey, R. R., Jr., and Popat, P. V.,“Nondestructive Ultrasonic
Inspection of Braze Bonds in High Current Electrical Contact Assemblies,”
Proceedings of the Holm Conference on Electrical Contacts, 1971, pp. 63–71.
3 5
Jost, E., and Fontaine, G., “Ultrasonic In-line Inspection Technique for Contact
Materials,” Proceedings of the Holm Conference on Electrical Contacts, 1979, pp.
209–213.
E 500 Terminology Relating to Ultrasonic Examination5
E 1001 Practice for Detection and Evaluation of Disconti-
nuities by the Immersed Pulse-Echo Ultrasonic Method
using Longitudinal Waves4
2.2 American Society for Nondestructive Testing Standard
(ASNT):
SNT-TC-1A Recommended Practice for Personnel Qualifi-
cation and Certification in Nondestructive Testing6
3. Summary of Guide
3.1 Pulse-echo Technique—The pulse-echo technique is
employed as an ultrasonic testing method which displays
reflected energy pulses. A Piezoelectric transducer (typically
15–25 M Hz frequency with 0.5- to 1.5-in. (12.7- to 38.1-mm)
focal length in water) converts the original electrical pulse into
a mechanical sound wave and then also acts as a receiver of the
reflected mechanical energy, converting it back into useful
electrical energy. The electrical instrumentation used with the
transducer generates, receives, amplifies, and displays the
controlled electrical pulses. (See Practices E 214 and E 1001.)
3.2 C-Scan—The amplified electrical signals as received
from the transducer are gated for time/distance and establish
the depth of analysis. When the transducer (coupled through a
water medium) is made to traverse in the X-Y directions, the
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
Discontinued; see 1991 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03
6
Available from ASNT, 1711 Arlingate Lane, P.O. Box 28518, Columbus, OH
43228-0518.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 773
gated electrical signals are then used to describe a two-
dimensional plan view of defects in the interior of the tested
object(s). This plan view of defect information at a given depth
of analysis (that is, the brazed or welded layer within the
contact assembly) is called a C-scan. (See Terminology E 500.)
3.3 Data Presentation:
3.3.1 The gated C-scan signals are used to drive an X-Y
plotter/printer that provides a permanent record of the defect
plane being examined.
3.3.2 The sensitivity of the instrument (alarm levels) is
adjusted with the printer circuit by a technician to provide an
accurate resolution level for the true characterization of de-
fects.
3.3.3 The calibrated C-scan printed display can then be used
to evaluate the bonded area (or unbonded area shapes) of an
array of contacts under examination.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 This guide is recommended to be used in preparing
specifications for the non-destructive evaluation of brazed or
welded electrical contact bonded area.7 The recommended
procedures are meant to improve the reproducibility of test data
among various laboratories. Specific differences among equip-
ment models and technician skills do exist which will limit
absolute correlation. This guide provides an indication of the
degree of variability which has been observed as realistic
among industry participants.
4.2 Ultrasonic testing alone does not insure an understand-
ing of bonded integrity. Other attributes (that is, strength) may
require correlation with destructive test methods.
5. Procedure
5.1 Fabricated Standards—Standards must be produced
from good previously C-scanned parts from the same process
and dimensions as the parts to be examined. Each standard
should contain three flat-bottomed holes: 0.015-, 0.031-, 0.062-
in. (0.381-, 0.787-, 1.575-mm) diameter. The centerline spac-
ing of adjacent holes should equal the diameter of the next
larger hole. Require a flat end mill for finish cut and control
7
Janitzki, A. S., and Schaefer, B., “The Influence of the Quality of Brazing on
the Erosion of Contacts,” Proceedings of the 9th International Conference on
Electrical Contact, 1978, pp. 389–394.
depth from 0.000 to 0.005 in. (0.000 to 0.127 mm) into the
actual brazed or welded layer.
5.2 System Calibration—The ultrasonic transducer, electri-
cal instrumentation and display printer should be capable of
accurate reproduction of the standard. Include this standard in
every array of tested parts as an indication of system perfor-
mance.
5.3 Standard Parts—Often it is necessary to obtain
matched, focused transducers to achieve interlaboratory corre-
lation of system resolution on fabricated standard sets. Never-
theless, display sensitivity differences can exist which are best
resolved by the use of actual parts as standards. The vendor and
user select an array of parts with various degrees of bond
interface defects and these parts are shared to demonstrate
reproducibility during each set-up.
5.4 Scan Traverse Parallelism—The tank bottom or support
plane for the parts under investigation must be parallel (0.005
in. (0.127 mm) maximum deviation) with the plane of the X-Y
rails of the scanner. The transducer and CRT display may be
used to measure this variation directly and then accomplish
verification by varying the location of standards over the full
traverse of the C-scan area.
5.5 Print Quality—In addition to electrical system calibra-
tions, it has been observed that printer performance can
significantly affect the accuracy of a C-scan display. Direct
particular care towards stylus parameters and thermal paper
characteristics.
5.6 Metallographic Examination—Verification of the ultra-
sonic C-scan evaluation must be conducted by destructive
metallographic examination of selected contact assemblies.
Scanning at various instrument sensitivities and then cutting
and peeling or mounting of contacts can provide good under-
standing and correlation of results for the technician.
5.7 Operator Training—Qualify the skill level of ultrasonic
technicians according to the guidelines of the American Soci-
ety for Nondestructive Testing. (See SNT-TC-1A.) Compe-
tence in metallographic examination and the use of area
estimating templates is also required.
6. Precision and Bias
6.1 Precision—The expected closeness of agreement is
based on tests performed during 1980–1982 by a number of
experienced industry laboratories (see Table 1 and Table 2).

TABLE 1 First Round Robin Test Results for Brazed and Welded Electrical Contact Assemblies
Total Unbonded Area (in. 2) A by Laboratory Number
Lot/Sample
Contact Mean Range
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6
Area (in. 2)
Brazed
1/9 0.345 0.036 0.036 0.024 0.024 0.036 0.030 0.031 0.012
2/24 0.097 0.008 0.016 0.016 0.012 0.008 0.024 0.014 0.016
3/19 0.091 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.000 0.010 0.020 0.010 0.020
4/4 0.309 0.039 0.026 0.104 0.052 0.104 0.156 0.080 0.130
5/34 0.309 0.039 0.013 0.091 0.078 0.078 0.039 0.056 0.078
6/20 0.309 0.156 0.208 0.182 0.182 0.260 0.260 0.208 0.104
Percussion welded
7/6 0.309 0.156 0.234 0.234 0.290 0.286 0.286 0.248 0.134
Resolution of Fabricated Standards with Flat Bottomed Hole 0.015 In. Diameter
2/STD. 0.016 0.022 0.070 0.070 0.010 0.025 0.036 0.060
5/STD. 0.016 0.000 0.070 0.070 0.020 ... 0.035 0.070
A
1 in. 2 = 645 mm 2.

2
 B 773
TABLE 2 Second Round-Robin Test Results for Brazed Electrical Contact Assemblies
Total Unbonded Area (in. 2) A by Laboratory Number
Lot/Sample
Contact Mean Range
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6
Area (in. 2)
Brazed
2/25 0.097 0.006 ... 0.006 0.012 0.004 0.016 0.009 0.010
5/34 0.309 0.020 ... 0.039 0.078 0.020 0.026 0.037 0.058
Resolution of Fabricated Standards with Flat Bottomed Hole 0.015 In. Diameter
2/STD. 0.020 ... 0.070 0.070 0.020 0.030 0.042 0.052
5/STD. 0.024 ... 0.070 0.070 ... 0.070 0.059 0.046

These laboratories were all given the same parts, standards, and 6.2 Bias—Since there is no accepted standard or reference
guidelines and involved various equipment that can be consid- material suitable for determining the systematic error for this
ered standard in the industry. test method of measuring bonded area, no statement on bias
6.1.1 Table 1 provides reproducibility data from six differ- can be made.
ent laboratories which examined the same seven brazed con-
tacts taken from seven different lots and two of the standards 7. Keywords
used during this study.
6.1.2 Table 2 provides repeatability data from the same six 7.1 bond evaluation; braze evaluation; C-scan; contact as-
laboratories which subsequently examined the same two con- semblies; electrical contacts; ultrasonic C-scan; unltrasonic
tact assemblies taken from two of the original seven lots and testing
the same two original standards.
6.1.3 This data shows much better relative correlation
among laboratories in regard to grading the specimens in terms
of unbonded area than in correlation of absolute values for
unbonded area.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 774 – 00
Standard Specification for
Low Melting Point Alloys1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 774; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers low-melting point metal alloys
and soldiers, including bismuth–tin, bismuth–lead, bismuth-
–tin–lead, bismuth–tin–lead–cadmium, bismuth–tin–lead–indi-
um–cadmium, bismuth–tin–lead–indium, indium–lead, and in-
dium–lead–silver, and indium–tin joining together two or more
metals at temperatures below their melting points; blocking for
support and removable borders; radiation shielding; fusible
plugs; fuses; tube bending; and punch setting.
1.1.1 This specification shall include those alloys having a
liquidus temperature not exceeding 361°F (183°C), the melting
point of the tin lead eutectic.
1.1.2 This specification includes low-melting point alloys in
the form of solid bars, ingots, powder and special forms, and in
the form of solid ribbon and wire.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
E 55 Practice for Sampling Wrought Nonferrous Metals and
Alloys for Determination of Chemical Composition2
E 88 Practice for Sampling Nonferrous Metals and Alloys
in Cast Form for Determination of Chemical Composition2
2.2 Military Standard:
MIL-STD 129 Marking for Shipment and Storage3
2.3 Federal Standard:
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)3
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.02 on Refined Lead, Tin, Antimony, and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2000. Published November 2000. Originally
published as B 774-87. Last previous edition B 774-95).
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
3
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
3. Terminology
3.1 Definition:
3.1.1 producer— the primary manufacturer of the material.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 liquidus—the lowest temperature at which an alloy is
fully transformed from a solid to a liquid.
3.2.2 lot—the term “lot” as used in this specification shall
be defined as follows: for solid alloy metal, a lot shall consist
of all the metal of the same time designation, produced from
the same batch of raw materials under essentially the same
conditions, and offered for inspection at one time.
3.2.3 lot number— the term “lot number” as used in this
specification refers to a numerical designation for a lot that is
traceable to a date of manufacture.
3.2.4 solidus—The highest temperature at which an alloy is
fully transformed from a liquid to a solid.
4. Classification
4.1 Type Designation— The type designation shall use the
following symbols to properly identify the material:
4.1.1 Alloy Composition—The composition is identified by
three numbers that relate to the melting point in degrees
Farenheit where it is eutectic or six numbers where it is a range
alloy.
4.1.2 Form—The form is indicated by a single letter in
accordance with Table 1.
4.1.3 Powder Mesh Size— The powder mesh size is iden-
tified by a size symbol number (Table 2).
5. Ordering Information
5.1 Orders for material under this specification shall indi-
cate the following information, as required, to adequately
describe the desired material:
5.1.1 Type designation (see 4.1),
5.1.2 Detailed requirements for special forms,
5.1.3 Dimensions of ribbon and wire solder (see 9.2),
5.1.4 Unit weight,
5.1.5 Packaging (see Section 18),
5.1.6 Marking (see Section 17),
5.1.7 ASTM specification designation and year of issue,
marked on the purchase order and on the package or spool, and
 B 774
TABLE 1 Form 9. Dimensions and Unit Weight
Symbol Form
9.1 Bar and Ingot— The dimensions and unit weight of bar
B bar and ingot shall be agreed between the supplier and purchaser.
I ingot
P powder 9.2 Wire (Solid)— The dimensions and unit weight of wire
R ribbon alloys shall be as specified in 5.1.3 and 5.1.4. The tolerance on
S special (includes pellets, preforms, shot, etc.
W wire the specified outside diameter shall be 65 % or 60.002 in.
(0.05 mm), whichever is greater.
9.3 Other Forms:
TABLE 2 Powder Mesh Size 9.3.1 Dimensions for ribbon and special forms shall be as
Size Symbol Powder Mesh Size agreed between the supplier and purchaser.
3 325 9.3.2 The unit weight of alloy powder shall be as specified
2 200
1 100
in 5.1.4.

10. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance

5.1.8 Special requirements, as agreed upon between sup-
plier and purchaser.
6. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 The producer shall use care to have each lot of alloy as
uniform in quality as practicable and of satisfactory appearance
in accordance with the best industrial practices. Each bar,
ingot, or other form in which the alloy is sold shall be uniform
in composition within the entire lot.
7. Chemical Composition
7.1 The composition of the alloys covered by this specifi-
cation shall be as shown in Table 3.
NOTE 1—By mutual agreement between the supplier and the purchaser,
analysis may be required and limits established for elements or com-
pounds not specified in Table 3.
8. Physical and Performance Requirements
8.1 Alloy must freeze within 2°F of its solidus.
8.2 Powder Mesh Size— The powder mesh size shall be as
specified in 5.1.1 and 4.1.3.
10.1 All forms of the alloys shall be processed in such a
manner as to be uniform in quality and free of defects that will
affect life, serviceability, or appearance.
11. Sampling for Chemical Analysis
11.1 Care must be taken to ensure that the sample selected
for testing is representative of the material. The method of
sampling shall consist of one of the following methods:
11.1.1 Samples may be taken from the final solidified cast or
fabricated product.
11.1.2 Representative samples may be obtained from the lot
of molten metal during casting. The molten sample shall be
poured into a cool mold, forming a bar approximately 0.25 in.
(6.4 mm) thick.
11.2 Frequency of Sampling—Frequency of sampling for
determination of chemical composition shall be in accordance
with Table 4. For spools and coils, the sample shall be obtained
by cutting back 6 ft (1.8 m) of wire from the free end and then
taking the next 6 ft for test. In other forms, an equivalent
sample shall be selected at random from the container.

TABLE 3 Chemical Requirements Composition, wt. %

(range or maximum rules)
Alloy Constituents — wt % Melting Points
Designation
Solidus Liquidus
Bi Pb Sn Cd In Ag Cu Sb Zn °F °C °F °C
117 44.2–45.2 22.1–23.1 7.8–8.8 4.8–5.8 18.6–19.6 0.001 0.08 0.1 0.08 117 47 117 47
129–133 48.14–50.14 16.92–18.92 10.55–12.55 129 54 133 56
136 48.5–49.5 17.5–18.5 11.5–12.5 0.005 20.5–21.5 0.001 0.08 0.1 0.08 136 58 136 58
158 49.5–50.5 26.2–27.2 12.8–13.8 9.5–10.5 0.008 0.001 0.08 0.1 0.08 158 70 158 70
158–165 49.5–50.5 24.45–25.45 12.0–13.0 12.0–13.0 0.10 158 70 165 74
158–190 42.0–43.0 37.2–38.2 10.8–11.8 8.0–9.0 0.008 0.001 0.08 0.1 0.08 158 70 190 88
174 56.5–57.5 0.05 16.5–17.5 0.005 25.5–26.5 0.001 0.08 0.1 0.08 174 79 174 79
203 52.0–53.0 31.5–32.5 15.0–16.0 0.005 0.008 0.001 0.08 0.1 0.08 203 95 203 95
203–239 49.5–50.5 24.5–25.5 24.5–25.5 203 95 239 115
216–217 53.5–54.5 25.5–26.5 19.5–20.5 216 102 217 103
255 55.0–56.0 44.0–45.0 0.01 0.005 0.008 0.001 0.08 0.1 0.08 255 124 255 124
281 57.5–58.5 0.05 41.5–42.5 0.005 0.008 0.01 0.08 0.1 0.08 281 138 281 138
281–338 39.5–40.5 0.05 59.5–60.5 0.005 0.008 0.01 0.08 0.1 0.08 281 138 338 170
291–325 13.5–14.5 42.5–43.5 42.5–43.5 0.005 0.008 0.01 0..08 0.1 0.08 291 144 325 163
244 0.01 0.05 47.5–48.5 0.005 51.5–52.5 0.01 0.08 0.1 0.08 244 118 244 118
296 0.01 0.05 0.01 0.005 96.5–97.5 2.8–3.2 0.08 0.1 0.08 296 147 296 147
293 0.01 29.9–31.1 50.7–51.7 17.7–18.7 0.008 0.01 0.08 0.1 0.08 293 145 293 145
300–302 0.01 14.5–15.5 0.01 0.005 79.5–80.5 4.5–5.5 0.08 0.1 0.08 300 149 302 150
307–323 0.01 17.5–18.5 69.5–70.5 0.005 11.5–12.5 0.01 0.08 0.1 0.08 307 153 323 162
320–345 0.01 29.5–30.5 0.01 0.005 69.5–70.5 0.01 0.08 0.1 0.08 320 160 345 174

2
 B 774
TABLE 4 Frequency of Sampling
Number of Samples
Size of Lot, lb (kg) (spools, coils,
containers or pieces)
Up to 1000 (450), incl 3
Over 1000 to 10 000 (450 to 4500), incl 5 wise specified in the contract or order, the supplier may use his
Over 10 000 (4500) 10
11.3 Other Aspects of Sampling—Other aspects of sampling
shall conform, in the case of bar and ingots, to Practice E 88.
For fabricated alloys the appropriate reference is Practice E 55.
12. Sample Preparation
12.1 Bar and Ingot— Each sample piece shall be cut in half,
and one half marked with sampling date and composition, and
shall be held in reserve. The remaining half shall be melted in
a clean container, mixed thoroughly and poured into a cool
mold, forming a bar approximately 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) thick.
Sampling may be performed by one of the following methods:
12.1.1 Sawing—If it is impractical to melt the bar or ingot
as specified in 12.1, saw cuts shall be made across each piece
at equal intervals of not more than 1 in. (25 mm) throughout its
length. No lubricants shall be used during sawing. The sample
shall consist of not less than 5 oz (143 g) of mixed sawings.
12.1.2 Drilling—The bar shall be drilled at least halfway
through from two opposite sides. A drill of about 0.50 in. (12.7
mm) in diameter is preferred. In drilling, the holes shall be
placed along a diagonal line from one corner of the pig to the
other. The drillings shall be clipped into pieces not over 0.50 in.
(12.7 mm) in length and mixed thoroughly. The sample shall
consist of not less than 5 oz (143 g).
13. Test Methods
13.1 Visual and Dimensional Examination:
13.1.1 Ribbon and Wire— Ribbon and wire shall be exam-
ined to verify that the dimensions, unit weight, and workman-
ship are in accordance with the applicable requirements.
13.1.2 Bar and Ingot— Bar and ingot shall be examined to
verify that the unit weight, marking, and workmanship are in
accordance with the applicable requirements.
13.2 Alloy Composition—In case of dispute, the chemical
analysis shall be as agreed by buyer and seller.
13.3 Alloy Freezing Point—This shall be determined by
plotting on a time temperature graph the results of a room
temperature cooldown to 72°F (22°C) on a 2-lb (1000-g)
sample of alloy, non-stirred using an ASTM approved ther-
mometer. An example of commercial equipment available for
this is a Leeds and Northrop Speedomax W.4 Use of a
differential scanning calorimeter is also permissible under this
section (Dupont Model 9125 or equivalent).
13.4 Powder Mesh Size— A minimum of 98 % of the
powder shall pass through the appropriate size sieve (see 4.1.3)
in order to be classified for that mesh size.
4
Leeds and Northrop Speedomax W, available from Leeds and Northrop, MD
363-TR North Wales, PA 19454 has been found suitable for this purpose.
5
Differential Scanning Calorimeter Dupont Model 912, available from DuPont
Instrument Systems Division, Wilmington, DE 19898 has been found suitable for
this purpose.
3
14. Inspection
14.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
order, the supplier is responsible for the performance of all
inspection requirements as specified herein. Except as other-
own or any other facilities suitable for the performance of the
inspection requirements specified unless disapproved by the
purchaser. The purchaser reserves the right to perform any of
the inspections set forth in the specification where such
inspections are deemed necessary to ensure that supplies and
services conform to prescribed requirements.
14.1.1 Test Equipment and Inspection Facilities—Test and
measuring equipment and inspection facilities of sufficient
accuracy, quality, and quantity to permit performance of the
required inspection shall be established and maintained by the
supplier.
15. Rejection and Rehearing
15.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
this specification may be rejected. Rejection shall be reported
to the producer or supplier promply and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
supplier may make a claim for a rehearing.
16. Certification
16.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
producer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished to the
purchaser that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested,
and inspected in accordance with this specification and has
been found to meet the requirements. When specified in the
purchase order or contract, a report of the test results shall be
furnished.
17. Product Marking
17.1 The producer’s name or trademark shall be stamped or
cast on each bar or ingot. The alloy grade designation or
nominal composition, or both, shall be stamped on each bar or
ingot for identification along with the specification number.
17.2 Each spool or container shall be marked to show the
specification number, type designation, dimensions, and unit
weight of wire or other form and lot number. The producer’s
name or trademark shall be marked on the spool or container.
18. Packaging and Package Marking
18.1 The material shall be packaged to provide adequate
protection during normal handling and transportation. The type
of packaging and gross weight of containers shall, unless
otherwise agreed upon, be at the producer’s or supplier’s
discretion, provided that they are such as to ensure acceptance
by common or other carriers for safe transportation to the
delivery point.
18.1.1 For bar and ingot a lot number shall be marked on
each shipping container or inside package.
18.1.2 When special preservation, packaging and packing
requirements are agreed upon between purchaser and supplier,
marking for shipment of such material shall be in accordance
with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129 for
military agencies.
 B 774
18.2 Each shipping container shall be marked with the alloys; powder; silver; solder; solidus; tin; wire
purchase order number, unit weight, and producer’s name or
trademark.
19. Keywords
19.1 bismuth; cadmium; freezing point; fuses; fusible al-
loys; indium; ingot; joining; lead; liquidus; low melting point

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 776 – 01a

Standard Specification for

Hafnium and Hafnium Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 776; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 3.1.4 sponge—a lot shall consist of a single blend produced

1.1 This specification covers two grades of hafnium strip, at one time.
sheet, and plate, one specifically for nuclear applications 3.1.5 weld fittings—definition is to be mutually agreed upon
(Grade R1) and one for commercial applications for alloying between manufacturer and the purchaser.
(Grade R3). 4. Classification
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for 4.1 The strip, sheet, or plate is to be furnished in one of the
information only. two grades shown in Table 1.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the 5. Ordering Information
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- 5.1 Purchase orders for material under this specification
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- shall include the following information as required to ad-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. equately describe the desired material:
5.1.1 Quantity (weight or number of pieces),
2. Referenced Documents 5.1.2 Number of material,
2.1 ASTM Standards: 5.1.3 Form (strip, sheet, plate),
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials2 5.1.4 Metallurgical condition (6.2),
E 21 Test Methods for Elevated Temperature Tension Tests 5.1.5 Finish (Section 11),
of Metallic Materials2 5.1.6 Applicable dimensions (thickness, width, and length),
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to 5.1.7 Grade (Table 1), and
Determine Conformance with Specifications3 5.1.8 ASTM designation and year of issue.
NOTE 1—A typical ordering description is as follows: twenty-eight
3. Terminology pieces hafnium plate, annealed; mechanically descaled and pickled; 0.158
3.1 Lot Definitions: in. by 6.000 in. thick by 18-in. long lengths; Grade R1; ASTM
3.1.1 castings—a lot shall consist of all castings produced B 776 – ___.
from the same pour. 5.2 In addition to the data specified in 5.1, the following
3.1.2 ingot—no definition required. options and points of agreement between the manufacturer and
3.1.3 rounds, flats, tubes, and wrought powder metallurgical the purchaser shall be specified on the purchase order if
products (single definition, common to nuclear and non- required:
nuclear standards)—a lot shall consist of a material of the 5.2.1 Mechanical test temperature (see 8.1),
same size, shape, condition, and finish produced from the ingot 5.2.2 Tolerances (Section 10),
or powder blend by the same reduction schedule and the same 5.2.3 Workmanship standards (Section 11),
heat treatment parameters. Unless otherwise agreed between 5.2.4 Special or alternate tests (Sections 8 and 14),
manufacturer and purchaser, a lot shall be limited to the 5.2.5 Inspection (Section 16),
product of an 8 h period for final continuous anneal, or to a 5.2.6 Corrosion testing (Section 9),
single furnace load for final batch anneal. 5.2.7 Zirconium analysis requirements (Table 1), and
5.2.8 The isotopic hafnium composition and its analysis, if
required, shall be mutually agreed upon by the purchaser and
producer.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B10 on
Reactive and Refractory Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of 6. Materials and Manufacture
Subcommittee B10.02 on Zirconium and Hafnium.
Current edition approved Nov. 10, 2001. Published January 2002. Originally 6.1 The sheet, strip, or plate covered by this specification
published as B 776 – 87. Last previous edition B 776 – 01.
2
shall be formed with conventional forging and rolling equip-
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01. ment found in primary ferrous and nonferrous metal plants, and
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 776
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements TABLE 3 Mechanical Properties
Composition, weight Tensile Yield Elongation,
Elements Strength, Strength, (min %)
Grade R1 Grade R3 Test
Grade Condition min ksi min ksi in
Temperature
Aluminum 0.010 0.050 (MPa) (MPa) 2 in.
Carbon 0.015 0.025 (50 mm)
Chromium 0.010 0.050
Longitudinal:
Copper 0.010 ...
R1 annealed RT 58 (400) 22 (151) 20
Hydrogen 0.0025 0.0050
annealed 600°F (316°C) 25 (172) 11 (83) 25
Iron 0.050 0.0750
Molybdenum 0.0020 ...
Transverse:
Nickel 0.0050 ...
R1 annealed RT 45 (310) 25 (172) 20
Niobium 0.010 ...
annealed 600°F (316°C) 23 (158) 14 (96) 30
Nitrogen 0.010 0.015
Oxygen 0.040 0.130
Silicon 0.010 0.050
Tantalum 0.020 ...
Tin 0.0050 ...
9. Corrosion Properties
Titanium 0.010 0.050 9.1 When required by the purchaser and stated in the
Tungsten 0.0150 0.0150
Uranium 0.0010 ...
purchase order, the following corrosion testing shall be per-
Vanadium 0.0050 ... formed:
A A
Zirconium 9.1.1 Two samples chosen at random from each lot shall be
Hafnium balance balance
corrosion tested in water at 680°F (360°C), 2690 psi for
A
Zirconium shall be reported. Acceptable levels shall be established by mutual 672 + 8 − 0 h using the manufacturer’s standard procedure.
agreement between purchaser and producer.
9.1.2 Grade R1—Coupons shall exhibit a weight gain of not
more than 10 mg/dm2.
made from ingots produced by vacuum melting in electron 9.1.3 Grade R3 will be tested for information only, if
beam or consumable arc furnaces, or both, of a type conven- required by purchase order.
tionally used for reactive metals.
6.2 The sheet, strip, and plate shall be supplied in the 10. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
recrystallized annealed condition unless otherwise specified. 10.1 Thickness—The variation in thickness of strip, sheet,
and plate are given in the following tables:
7. Chemical Compositions 10.1.1 Cold-rolled sheet, Table 4.
7.1 The material shall conform to the chemical composition 10.1.2 Hot-rolled strip, Table 5,
requirements prescribed in Table 1. 10.1.3 Cold-rolled strip, Table 6.
7.2 The manufacturer’s ingot analysis shall be considered 10.2 Width and Length—The variation in width and length
the chemical analysis for sheet, strip, and plate, except for are given in the following tables:
hydrogen and nitrogen, which shall be determined on the 10.2.1 Hot- and cold-rolled sheet, Table 7 and Table 8.
finished product. 10.2.2 Hot-rolled strip, Table 9.
7.3 When requested by the purchaser and stated in the 10.2.3 Cold-rolled strip, Table 10.
purchase order, a product analysis for any elements listed in 10.3 Crown Tolerances—The variations in crown tolerances
Table 1 shall be made on the finished product. are given in the following tables:
7.3.1 The manufacturer’s analysis shall be considered as 10.3.1 Hot-rolled strip, Table 11.
verified if the check analysis confirms the manufacturer’s 10.3.2 Cold-rolled strip, Table 12.
reported values within the tolerances prescribed in Table 2. 10.4 Camber Tolerances—The variations in camber toler-
ances are given in the following tables:
8. Mechanical Properties 10.4.1 Hot- and cold-rolled sheet, Table 13.
8.1 Grade R1 shall conform to the requirements prescribed
in Table 3 for room temperature mechanical properties. El- TABLE 4 Permissible Variation in Thickness of Cold-Rolled
evated temperature properties shall be used to determine Hafnium SheetA
compliance only when specified in the purchase order. Permissible Variations In
Specified Thickness, in.
Thickness, 6 in.

TABLE 2 Permissible Variation in Check Analysis Between 0.146 – 0.1875, excl 0.007
0.131 – 0.145 0.006
Different Laboratories
0.115 – 0.130 0.005
Element Permissible Variation in Product 0.099 – 0.114 0.0045
Analysis, % 0.084 – 0.098 0.004
0.073 – 0.083 0.0035
Hydrogen 0.002
0.059 – 0.072 0.003
Nitrogen 0.01
0.041 – 0.058 0.0025
Carbon 0.01
0.027 – 0.040 0.002
Zirconium 0.02
0.017 – 0.026 0.0015
Iron and Chromium 0.025
0.008 – 0.016 0.001
Tin 0.05
0.006 – 0.007 0.0008
Niobium 0.05
0.005 0.0005
Oxygen 0.02
A
Thickness measurements are taken at least 3⁄8 in. from edge.

2
 B 776
TABLE 5 Permissible Variations in Thickness of Hot-Rolled Property Rounded Unit for Observed or Calculated
Hafnium Strip Value
Variations from specified thickness
Specified width, in. for widths, given, over and under, Chemical composition, and tolerances nearest unit in the last righthand place of fig-
in.A (when expressed as decimals) ures of the specified limit
3 – 18, incl + 0.01, − 0 Tensile strength and yield strength nearest 1000 psi (10 MPa)
Elongation nearest 1 %
A
Thickness measurements shall be taken 3⁄8 in. from edge. Tolerances do not
include crown.
14. Special Tests
14.1 Additional tests may be specified in the purchase order.
10.4.2 Hot- and cold-rolled strip, Table 14. The test method and standards shall be agreed upon in advance
between manufacturer and purchaser.
10.4.3 Plate, Table 15.
10.5 Flatness tolerances permissible for plate are given in 15. Test Methods
Table 16.
15.1 Tension Tests—Conduct the room temperature tensile
test in accordance with Test Methods E 8 and elevated tem-
11. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
perature tensile test in accordance with Test Methods E 21.
11.1 Cracks, seams, slivers, blisters, burrs, and other inju- Determine the yield strength by the offset (0.2 %) method.
rious imperfections shall not exceed standards of acceptability Determine the tensile properties using a strain rate of 0.003 to
agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser. 0.007 in./in./min (mm/mm/min) through the yield strength.
11.2 Flat-rolled product in the hot-rolled condition shall be After the yield strength has been exceeded, increase the
furnished with one of the following finishes as designated on crosshead speed to approximately 0.05 in./in./min (mm/mm/
the order. min) to failure.
11.2.1 Not descaled, 15.2 Chemical Tests—Conduct the chemical analysis by the
11.2.2 Mechanically descaled, and standard techniques normally used by the manufacturer.
11.2.3 Mechanically descaled and pickled.
16. Inspection
11.3 Material in the cold-rolled condition shall be furnished
with a bright cold-rolled finish, or finished by mechanical or 16.1 The manufacturer shall inspect the material covered by
chemical methods. this specification prior to shipment and, on request, shall
furnish the purchaser with certificates of test. If so specified in
11.4 The following types of edges are available:
the purchase order, the purchaser or his representative may
11.4.1 Mill edge, witness the testing and inspection of the material at the place of
11.4.2 Slit edge, manufacture. In such cases the purchaser shall state in his
11.4.3 Sheared edge, and purchase order which tests he desires to witness. The manu-
11.4.4 Machined edge. facturer shall give ample notice to the purchaser as to the time
and place of designated test. If the purchaser’s representative
12. Number of Tests and Retests does not present himself at the time agreed upon for the testing,
12.1 Two tension tests shall be made from each lot, one in the manufacturer shall consider the requirement for purchaser’s
the longitudinal and one in the transverse direction at each of inspection at the place of manufacture to be waived.
the required temperatures. 16.2 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent-
ing the purchaser, without charge, all reasonable facilities to
12.2 Two chemistry tests for hydrogen and nitrogen content
satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
shall be made from each lot of finished product.
with this specification. This inspection shall be so conducted as
12.3 Retests : not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
12.3.1 If any sample or specimen exhibits obvious surface
contamination or improper preparation disqualifying it as a 17. Rejection
truly representative sample, it shall be discarded and a new 17.1 Rejection for failure of the material to meet the
sample or specimen substituted. requirements of this specification shall be reported to the
12.3.2 If the results of any tests of any lot do not conform to manufacturer within 60 calendar days from the receipt of the
the requirements specified, retests shall be made on additional material by the purchaser. Unless otherwise specified, rejected
sheet, strip, or plate of double the original number from the material may be returned to the manufacturer at the manufac-
same lot, each of which shall conform to the requirements turer’s expense, unless the purchaser receives, within three
specified. weeks of the notice of rejection, other instructions for dispo-
sition.
13. Significance of Numerical Limits
13.1 For the purpose of determining compliance with the 18. Certification
specified limits for requirements of the properties listed in the 18.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
following table, an observed value or a calculated value shall producer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished to the
be rounded as indicated in accordance with the rounding purchaser that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested,
methods of Practice E 29. and inspected in accordance with this specification and has

3
 B 776
TABLE 6 Permissible Variations in Thickness of Cold-Rolled Hafnium Strip

NOTE 1—For thickness under 0.010 in. in width to 18 in., a tolerance of 6 10 % of the thickness shall apply.
NOTE 2—Thickness measurements shall be taken 3⁄8 in. in from edge of the strip, except on widths less than 1 in., where the tolerances are applicable
for measurements at all locations.
Permissible variations in thickness, for widths given, 6 in.

Specified Thickness, in. Over 12 to 18

⁄
3 16 incl to 1, 1 to 3 in., 3 to 6 in., Over 6 to 9 in., Over 9 to 12 in.,
in.,
excl excl excl incl incl
incl
Under 3⁄16 – 0.161, incl 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.004 0.005
0.160–0.100, incl 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.004
0.099–0.069, incl 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.004
0.068–0.050, incl 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003
0.049–0.040, incl 0.002 0.002 0.0025 0.003 0.003 0.003
0.039–0.035, incl 0.002 0.002 0.0025 0.003 0.003 0.003
0.034–0.029 incl 0.0015 0.015 0.002 0.0025 0.0025 0.0025
0.028–0.026, incl 0.001 0.015 0.0015 0.002 0.002 0.002
0.025–0.020, incl 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.002 0.002 0.002
0.019–0.017, incl 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.0015 0.002
0.016–0.013, incl 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.0015 0.0015
0.012 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.0015
0.011 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.0015
0.010 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

TABLE 7 Permissible Variations in Width and Length of Hot- and TABLE 10 Permissible Variations in Width of Cold-Rolled
Cold-Rolled Hafnium Sheet Hafnium Strip (Slit Edge)
Specified width, in., for thickness Permissible variations in Permissible variations in width,
under 3⁄16 in. width, in. for widths given, 6, in.
3 – 10, excl + 1⁄8, − 0 Specified Thickness, Under 1⁄2
10 – 18 + ⁄8, − ⁄8
1 1
in. over over over 12
to 1⁄2 to 6
Permissible variations in 6 to 9 9 to 12 to 18 in.,
Specified length, ft 3⁄16 in., in., incl
length, in. in., incl in., incl incl
incl
up – 10, incl + 1⁄2, − 0
over 10 – 20, incl + 1, − 0 Under 3⁄16 – 0.161, ... 0.016 0.020 0.020 0.031
incl
0.160 – 0.100, incl ... 0.010 0.016 0.016 0.020
0.099 – 0.069, incl 0.008 0.008 0.010 0.010 0.016
TABLE 8 Permissible Variations in Length of Hot- and Cold- 0.068 and under 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.010 0.016
Rolled Hafnium Sheet
Permissible variations in
Specified length, ft
length, in. TABLE 11 Crown Tolerances for Hot-Rolled Hafnium Strip
to 5, incl + 3⁄8, − 0 Permissible variation in thickness
over 5– 10, incl + 1⁄2, − 0 Specified width, in. from edge to center of strip,
over 10 – 15, incl + 3⁄8, − 0 for width given, in.
to 31⁄2, incl 0.003
over 31⁄2 – 12, incl 0.004
TABLE 9 Permissible Variations in Width of Hot-Rolled Hafnium over 12 – 18, incl 0.006
Strip
Permissible variations in width, in.
Mill edge Slit edge Sheared edge TABLE 12 Crown Tolerances for Cold-Rolled Hafnium Strip
+ − + − + −
to 3 ⁄ , incl
12 1⁄8 0 1⁄32 1⁄32 1⁄16 1⁄16 Tolerances by which the thickness at middle of
over 31⁄2 – 12, incl 1⁄2 1⁄8 1⁄32 1⁄32 0 strip may be greater than at edges, for
over 12 – 18, incl 3⁄8 1⁄8 3⁄64 3⁄64 1⁄8 0 Specified Thickness, in. widths given, in.
over 5 to over 12 to
to 5, incl
12, incl 18, incl
been found to meet the requirements. When specified in the 0.005 – 0.101, incl 0.00075 0.001 ...
purchase order or contract, a report of the test results shall be Over 0.010 – 0.025, incl 0.001 0.0015 0.002
Over 0.025 – 0.065, incl 0.0015 0.002 0.0025
furnished. Over 0.065 – 3⁄16, excl 0.002 0.0025 0.003

19. Referee
19.1 In the event of disagreement between the manufacturer
and the purchaser on the conformance of the material to the 20. Marking and Packaging
requirements of this specification or any special test specified 20.1 Each shipment shall be legibly and conspicuously
by the purchaser, a mutually acceptable referee shall perform marked or tagged with the following information:
the tests in question. The results of the referee’s testing shall be 20.1.1 Purchase order or contract number,
used in determining conformance of the material to this 20.1.2 Name of material,
specification. 20.1.3 Grade,

4
 B 776
TABLE 13 Camber Tolerance for Hot- and Cold-Rolled Hafnium TABLE 16 Permissible Variations from A Flat Surface for
SheetA Annealed Hafnium Plate
Specified width, in. Tolerance per unit length of any 8 ft, in. NOTE 1—Variations in flatness apply to plates up to 15 ft in length, or
3 – 18, incl 1⁄8
to any 15 ft of longer plates.
A
Camber is the greatest deviation of a side edge from a straight line, the NOTE 2—If the longer dimension is under 36 in., the variation is not
measurement being taken on the concave side with a straightedge. greater than 1⁄4 in.
NOTE 3—The shorter dimension specified is considered the width and
TABLE 14 Camber Tolerances for Hot- and Cold-Rolled Hafnium the variation in flatness across the width does not exceed the tabular
StripA amount for that dimension.
Tolerance, per unit length NOTE 4—The maximum deviation from a flat surface does not custom-
Specified width, in. arily exceed the tabular tolerance for the longer dimension specified.
of any 8 ft, in.
to 11⁄2, incl 1⁄8
Specified thickness, in. 18 or under
over 11⁄2 – 18 1⁄8

A ⁄ – 1⁄4, excl
3 16 ⁄
14
Camber is the deviation of a side edge from a straight line. The measurement 1⁄4 – 3⁄4, excl ⁄
14
is taken by placing an 8-ft, straightedge on the concave side and measuring the 3⁄8 – 1⁄2, excl 1⁄4
greatest distance between the strip edge and the straightedge. 1⁄2 – 3⁄4, excl 1⁄4

3⁄4 –1, excl 1⁄4

TABLE 15 Camber Tolerance for Hafnium PlateA

Tolerance: ⁄ in. 3 (number of feet of length/5)

18

A
Camber is the greatest deviation of a side edge from a straight line. The
measurement is taken by placing a straightedge on the concave side and
measuring the greatest distance between the plate edge and the straightedge.

20.1.4 Size,
20.1.5 Lot, heat or ingot number,
20.1.6 Condition,
20.1.7 Gross, net, and tare weights, and
20.1.8 ASTM specification designation.
20.2 All material shall be packaged in such a manner as to
ensure safe delivery to its destination when properly trans-
ported by any common carrier.

21. Keywords
21.1 hafnium; hafnium alloy; strip; sheet; plate

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 775 – 02

Standard Specification for

General Requirements for Nickel and Nickel Alloy Welded
Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 775; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification contains various requirements that,
with the exception of Section 5 and Section 10, are mandatory
requirements to the following ASTM nickel and nickel alloy,
longitudinally welded piping specifications:2
Title of Specification
Welded UNS N08020, N08024, and N08026 Alloy Pipe
Welded Nickel-Iron-Chromium Alloy Pipe
Welded Nickel-Chromium-Iron-Alloy (UNS N06600,
UNS N06603, UNS N06025 and UNS N06045) Pipe
Welded Nickel and Nickel-Cobalt Alloy Pipe
UNS N08904, UNS N08925, and UNS N08926 Welded Pipe
UNS N08367 Welded Pipe
Nickel-Alloy (UNS N06625, N06219, and N08825) Welded
Pipe
Ni-Cr-Mo-Co-W-Fe-Si Alloy (UNS N06333) Welded Pipe
Welded Nickel (UNS N02200/UNS N02201) and Nickel
Copper Alloy (UNS N04400) Pipe
1.2 One or more of the test requirements of Section 5 apply
only if specifically stated in the product specification or in the
purchase order.
1.3 In case of conflict between a requirement of the product
specification and a requirement of this general specification,
only the requirement of the product specification needs to be
satisfied.
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
1 6
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2002. Published December 2002. Originally
published as B 775 – 87. Last previous edition B 775 – 01.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 880 Specification for General Requirements for Chemical
Check Analysis Limits for Nickel, Nickel Alloys and
Cobalt Alloys2
ASTM E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3
Designation2 E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
B 464
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials3
B 514 E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
B 517 Determine Conformance with Specifications4
B 619 E 39 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel5
B 673 E 76 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel-Copper
B 675 Alloys6
B 705
E 112 Test Methods for Determining the Average Grain
B 723 Size3
B 725 E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
and Tubing7
E 426 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Exami-
nation of Seamless and Welded Tubular Products, Austen-
itic Stainless Steel and Similar Alloys7
E 571 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Exami-
nation of Nickel and Nickel Alloy Tubular Products7
E 1473 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel,
Cobalt, and High-Temperature Alloys6
2.2 ANSI Standards:8
B 1.20.1 Pipe Threads
B 36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
B 36.19 Stainless Steel Pipe
2.3 Other Documents:9
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX -
Welding and Brazing Qualifications
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
5
Discontinued; see 1996 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
7
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
8
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036.
9
Available from American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), ASME
International Headquarters, Three Park Ave., New York, NY 10016-5990.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 775 – 02
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 average diameter—the average of the maximum and
minimum outside diameters, as determined at any one cross
section of the pipe.
3.1.2 nominal wall—a specified wall thickness with a plus
or minus tolerance from the specified thickness.
3.1.3 welded pipe—a round hollow produced by forming
flat stock and joining the single longitudinal seam by welding,
and produced to the particular dimensions commercially
known as pipe sizes (NPS).
4. Chemical Composition
4.1 In case of disagreement, the chemical composition shall
be determined in accordance with the following methods:
UNS No. Prefixes ASTM Method
N02 E 39
N04 E 76
N06, N08 E 1473
4.2 The ladle analysis of the material shall conform to the
chemical requirements prescribed by the individual product
specification.
4.3 The product (check) analysis of the material shall meet
the requirements for the ladle analysis within the tolerance
limits prescribed in Specification B 880.
5. Test Requirements
5.1 Flattening Test:
5.1.1 A length of pipe not less than 4 in. (102 mm), shall be
flattened under a load applied gradually at room temperature
until the distance between the platens is five times the wall
thickness. The weld shall be positioned 90° from the direction
of the applied flattening force.
5.1.2 The flattened specimen shall not exhibit cracks.
5.1.3 Superficial ruptures resulting from surface imperfec-
tions shall not be a cause for rejection.
5.2 Transverse Guided-Bend Weld Test:
5.2.1 For welded pipe made with weld filler and at the
option of the manufacturer, the transverse guided bend weld
test may be substituted in lieu of the flattening test. Two bend
test specimens shall be taken transversely from pipe or the test
specimens may be taken from a test plate of the same material
and heat as the pipe, which is attached to the end of the
cylinder and welded as a prolongation of the pipe longitudinal
seam. Except as provided in 5.2.2, one shall be subject to a face
guided bend test and a second to a root guided bend test. One
specimen shall be bent with the inside surface of the pipe
against the plunger and the other with the outside surface of the
pipe against the plunger. Guided bend test specimens shall be
prepared and tested in accordance with Section IX, Part QW,
Paragraph QW 160 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code and shall be one of the types shown in QW 463.1 of that
code.
5.2.2 For wall thicknesses over 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm) but less than
3⁄4 in. (19 mm) side bend tests may be made instead of the face
and root bend tests. For specified wall thicknesses 3⁄4 in. and
over, both specimens shall be subjected to the side bend tests.
Side bend specimens shall be bent so that one of the side
surfaces becomes the convex surface of the bend specimen.
2
5.2.3 The bend test shall be acceptable if no cracks or other
defects exceeding 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) in any direction be present in
the weld metal or between the weld and the pipe or plate metal
after bending. Cracks which originate along the edges of the
specimen during testing, and that are less than 1⁄4 in. (6.5 mm)
measured in any direction shall not be considered.
5.3 Pressure (Leak Test):
5.3.1 Hydrostatic— Each pipe shall be tested by the manu-
facturer to an internal hydrostatic pressure of 1000 psi (6.9
MPa) provided that the fiber stress, calculated from the
following equation, does not exceed the allowable fiber stress
for the material:
P 5 2St/D (1)
where:
P = hydrostatic test pressure, psi (MPa),
S = allowable fiber stress, for material in the condition
(temper) furnished as specified in the product specifi-
cation (S is calculated as the lower of 2⁄3 of the
specified minimum 0.2 % offset yield strength or 1⁄4 of
the specified minimum ultimate strength for the mate-
rial),
t = minimum wall thickness permitted, in. (mm), includ-
ing minus tolerance, if any, and
D = nominal outside diameter of the pipe, in. (mm).
5.3.1.1 The test pressure must be held for a minimum of
5 s.
NOTE 1—Testing at a pressure greater than 1000 psi may be performed
upon agreement between the purchaser and manufacturer provided that the
allowable fiber stress is not exceeded.
5.3.2 Pneumatic (Air Underwater Test)—Each pipe shall be
tested at a pressure of 150 psi (1.05 MPa). The test pressure
shall be held for a minimum of 5 s. Visual examination is to be
made when the material is submerged and under pressure. The
full length of pipe must be examined for leaks.
5.3.3 If any pipe shows leaks during hydrostatic or pneu-
matic testing, it shall be rejected.
5.4 Nondestructive Electric Test:
5.4.1 Eddy Current Testing—Testing shall be conducted in
accordance with Practices E 426 or E 571. The eddy current
examination reference in this specification has the capability of
detecting significant discontinuities, especially of the short,
abrupt type.
5.4.1.1 Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the
calibration standard shall contain, at the option of the manu-
facturer, any one of the following discontinuities to establish a
minimum sensitivity level for rejection. The discontinuity shall
be placed in the weld if visible.
5.4.1.2 Drill Hole—A hole not larger than 0.031 in. (0.79
mm) diameter shall be drilled radially and completely through
the wall, care being taken to avoid distortion of the material
while drilling.
5.4.1.3 Transverse Tangential Notch—Using a round file or
tool with a 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) diameter, a notch shall be filed or
milled on the pipe outside diameter tangential to the surface
and transverse to the longitudinal axis of the material. Said
 B 775 – 02
notch shall have a depth not exceeding 12.5 % of the specified
wall thickness of the material, or 0.004 in. (0.10 mm),
whichever is greater.
5.4.2 Ultrasonic Testing—Testing shall be conducted in
accordance with Practice E 213. The ultrasonic examination
referred to in this specification is intended to detect longitudi-
nal discontinuities having a reflective area similar to or larger
than the calibration reference notches specified in 5.4.2.1. The
examination may not detect circumferentially oriented imper-
fections or short, deep defects.
5.4.2.1 For ultrasonic testing, longitudinal calibration
notches shall be machined on the outside and inside diameter
surfaces. The depth of the notches shall not exceed 12.5 % of
the specified wall thickness or 0.004 in. (0.10 mm), whichever
is greater. The notch shall be placed in the weld, if visible.
5.4.3 Calibration Frequency—The frequency of calibration
checks shall be as follows:
5.4.3.1 At the beginning of each production run.
5.4.3.2 At least every four hours during testing.
5.4.3.3 At the end of each production run.
5.4.3.4 After any suspected equipment malfunction or work
stoppage.
5.4.3.5 If, during any check, the equipment fails to detect
the calibration defects, the instrument must be recalibrated and
all material tested since the last satisfactory check shall be
retested.
5.4.4 Acceptance and Rejection—Material producing a sig-
nal equal to or greater than the calibration defect shall be
subject to rejection.
5.4.4.1 Test signals that are produced by imperfections that
cannot be identified or that are produced by cracks or crack-
like imperfections shall result in rejection of the pipe, subject
to rework and retest.
5.4.4.2 If the imperfection is judged as not fit for use, the
tube shall be rejected, but may be reconditioned and retested
providing the wall thickness requirements are met. To be
accepted, retested material shall meet the original electric test
requirements.
5.4.4.3 If the imperfection is explored to the extent that it
can be identified, and the pipe is determined to be fit for use,
the material may be accepted without further testing providing
the imperfection does not encroach on minimum wall thickness
requirements.
5.5 Tension Test— Tension testing shall be conducted in
accordance with Test Methods E 8.
5.5.1 The material shall conform to the tensile properties
prescribed in the individual product specification.
5.6 Hardness Test— Hardness testing shall be conducted in
accordance with Test Methods E 18.
5.7 Grain Size—The measurement of average grain size
may be carried out by the planimetric method, the comparison
method, or the intercept method described in Test Methods
E 112. In case of dispute, the “referee” method for determining
average grain size shall be the intercept method.
5.8 For purposes of determining compliance with the speci-
fied limits for requirements of the properties listed in the
3
following table, an observed value or a calculated value shall
be rounded in accordance with the rounding method of Practice
E 29:
Rounded Unit for Observed
Requirements or Calculated Value
Chemical composition and tolerances nearest unit in the last right-hand
place of figures of the specified limit
Tensile strength and yield strength nearest 1000 psi (7 MPa)
Elongation nearest 1 %
6. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
6.1 Dimensions of pipe are shown in Table 1.
6.1.1 Permissible variations in outside diameter and wall
thickness are shown in Table 2.
6.2 Length—When material is ordered as cut-to-length, the
length shall conform to the permissible variations prescribed in
Table 3. When material is ordered to random lengths, the
lengths and variations shall be agreed upon between the
manufacturer and purchaser.
6.3 Straightness— Material shall be reasonably straight and
free of bends and kinks.
6.4 Ends—Ends shall be reasonably square and free from
burrs.
7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
7.1 The material shall be uniform in quality and temper,
smooth, and free from imperfections that would render it unfit
for use.
8. Sampling
8.1 Lot Definition:
8.1.1 A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one heat.
8.1.2 A lot for all other testing shall consist of all material
from the same heat, nominal size (excepting length), and
condition (temper). When final heat treatment is in a batch-type
furnace, a lot shall include only those pipes of the same size
and the same heat that are heat-treated in the same furnace
charge. When heat treatment is in a continuous furnace, a lot
shall include all pipe of the same size and heat, heat-treated in
the same furnace at the same temperature, time at temperature,
and furnace speed during one production run. At no time shall
a lot consist of more than 20 000 lb (9070 kg).
8.1.2.1 Where material cannot be identified by heat, a lot
shall consist of not more than 500 lb (227 kg) of material of the
same alloy in the same condition (temper) and nominal size
(excepting length).
NOTE 2—For tension, hardness and flattening test requirements, the
term lot applies to all lengths prior to cutting.
8.2 Test Material Selection:
8.2.1 Chemical Analysis—Representative samples from
each lot shall be taken during pouring or subsequent process-
ing.
8.2.2 Mechanical and Other Properties—Samples of the
material to provide test specimens for mechanical and other
properties shall be taken from such locations in each lot as to
be representative of that lot. Test specimens shall be taken from
material in the final condition (temper).
 B 775 – 02
TABLE 1 Dimensions of Pipe

NOTE 1—The following table is a reprint of Table 1 of ANSI B36.19.

NOTE 2—The decimal thicknesses listed for the respective pipe sizes represent their nominal wall dimensions.
Outside Diameter Nominal Wall Thickness
NPS
Schedule 5SA Schedule 10SA Schedule 40S Schedule 80S
Designator in. mm
in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
⁄
18 0.405 10.29 ... ... 0.049 1.24 0.068 1.73 0.095 2.41
1⁄4 0.540 13.72 ... ... 0.065 1.65 0.088 2.24 0.119 3.02
3⁄8 0.675 17.15 ... ... 0.065 1.65 0.091 2.31 0.126 3.20
1⁄2 0.840 21.34 0.065 1.65 0.083 2.11 0.109 2.77 0.147 3.73
3⁄4 1.050 26.67 0.065 1.65 0.083 2.11 0.113 2.87 0.154 3.91
1.0 1.315 33.40 0.065 1.65 0.109 2.77 0.133 3.38 0.179 4.55
11⁄4 1.660 42.16 0.065 1.65 0.109 2.77 0.140 3.56 0.191 4.85
11⁄2 1.900 48.26 0.065 1.65 0.109 2.77 0.145 3.68 0.200 5.08
2 2.375 60.33 0.065 1.65 0.109 2.77 0.154 3.91 0.218 5.54
21⁄2 2.875 73.03 0.083 2.11 0.120 3.05 0.203 5.16 0.276 7.01
3 3.500 88.90 0.083 2.11 0.120 3.05 0.216 5.49 0.300 7.62
31⁄2 4.000 101.60 0.083 2.11 0.120 3.05 0.226 5.74 0.318 8.08
4 4.500 114.30 0.083 2.11 0.120 3.05 0.237 6.02 0.337 8.56
5 5.563 141.30 0.109 2.77 0.134 3.40 0.258 6.55 0.375 9.52
6 6.625 168.28 0.109 2.77 0.134 3.40 0.280 7.11 0.432 10.97
8 8.625 219.08 0.109 2.77 0.148 3.76 0.322 8.18 0.500 12.70
10 10.750 273.05 0.134 3.40 0.165 4.19 0.365 9.27 0.500B 12.70B
12 12.750 323.85 0.156 3.96 0.180 4.57 0.375B 9.52B 0.500B 12.70B
14 14.000 355.60 0.156 3.96 0.188B 4.78B ... ... ... ...
16 16.000 406.40 0.165 4.19 0.188B 4.78B ... ... ... ...
18 18.000 457.20 0.165 4.19 0.188B 4.78B ... ... ... ...
20 20.000 508.00 0.188 4.78 0.218B 5.54B ... ... ... ...
22 22.000 558.80 0.188 4.78 0.218B 5.54B ... ... ... ...
24 24.000 609.60 0.218 5.54 0.250 6.35 ... ... ... ...
30 30.000 762.00 0.250 6.35 0.312 7.92 ... ... ... ...
A
Schedules 5S and 10S wall thicknesses do not permit threading in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1.
B
These do not conform to ANSI B36.10.

TABLE 2 Permissible Variations in Outside DiameterA ,B

and Wall TABLE 3 Permissible Variations in Cut LengthA
ThicknessC For Welded Pipe Length Tolerance, in. (mm)
Outside Diameter,
Permissible Variations in Outside Diameter in. (mm) Over Under
NPS Designator Over Under
Cold finished:
in. mm in. mm all sizes ⁄ (6.4)
14 0
Hot finished:
⁄ to 1 ⁄ , incl
18 12 ⁄ (0.015)
1 64 0.4 ⁄
1 32 (0.031) 0.8 all sizes ⁄ (6.4)
14 0
Over 11⁄2 to 4, incl ⁄ (0.031)
1 32 0.8 ⁄
1 32 (0.031) 0.8
A
Over 4 to 8, incl 1⁄16 (0.062) 1.6 1⁄32 (0.031) 0.8 These permissible variations in length apply to pipe in straight lengths. They
Over 8 to 18, incl 3⁄32 (0.093) 2.4 1⁄32 (0.031) 0.8 apply to cut lengths up to and including 24 ft (7.3 m). For lengths over 24 ft, an
Over 18 to 26, incl 1⁄8 (0.125) 3.2 1⁄32 (0.031) 0.8 additional over-tolerance of 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) for each 10 ft (3.0 m) or fraction thereof
Over 26 to 34, incl 5⁄32 (0.156) 4.0 1⁄32 (0.031) 0.8 shall be permitted up to a maximum additional over-tolerance of 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm).
Over 34 to 48, incl 3⁄16 (0.187) 4.8 1⁄32 (0.031) 0.8
A
These permissible variations in outside diameter apply only to material as
finished at the mill before subsequent swaging, expanding, bending, polishing, or
requirements, the individual pipes or the group or lot repre-
other fabricating operations. sented may be reheat treated and resubmitted for test. Not more
B
Ovality is the difference between the maximum and the minimum outside than two reheat treatments shall be permitted.
diameter measured at any one cross section. There is no additional tolerance for
ovality on material having a nominal wall thickness for more than 3 % of the
outside diameter. On this material, the average of the maximum and the minimum 10. Specimen Preparation
outside diameter measurements will fall within the outside diameter tolerance 10.1 Room Temperature Tensile Specimen:
shown in Table 2. An additional ovality allowance of twice the outside diameter
tolerance spreads shown in Table 2, applied 61⁄2, is allowed for material having a 10.1.1 Material shall be tested in the direction of fabrica-
nominal wall thickness of 3 % or less of the nominal outside diameter. tion. Whenever possible, the pipe shall be tested in full cross
C
The wall thickness variation shall not exceed 612.5 % of the nominal wall
thickness.
section. When testing in full section is not possible, longitudi-
nal strip specimens or the largest possible round section shall
be used. In the event of disagreement when full section testing
9. Retests and Retreatment is not possible, a longitudinal strip specimen with reduced gage
9.1 Retests—If the results of the mechanical tests of any length as contained in Test Methods E 8 shall be used.
group or lot do not conform to the requirements specified in the 10.2 Hardness Specimen:
individual specification, retests may be made on additional 10.2.1 The hardness specimen shall be prepared in accor-
pipes of double the original number from the same group or lot, dance with Test Methods E 18. The test shall be made on the
each of which shall conform to the requirements specified. inside diameter surface of a specimen cut from the end, or on
9.2 Retreatment— If the individual pipes or the pipes the inside of the pipe near the end, at the option of the
selected to represent any group or lot fail to conform to the test manufacturer.

4
 B 775 – 02
10.3 Grain Size:
10.3.1 If required, the grain size specimen shall be a
transverse sample representing full wall thickness.
11. Inspection
11.1 Witnessing of testing or inspection by the purchaser’s
representative shall be agreed upon by the purchaser and the
manufacturer as part of the purchase contract.
12. Rejection and Rehearing
12.1 Material tested by the purchaser that fails to conform to
the requirements of this specification may be rejected. Rejec-
tion should be reported to the supplier promptly and in writing.
In case of dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the
producer or supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
13. Certification
13.1 When specified in the purchase contract, a manufac-
turer’s certification shall be furnished to the purchaser stating
that the material has been manufactured, tested and inspected
in accordance with this specification, and that the test results on
representative samples meet specification requirements. When
specified in the purchase contract, a report of the test results
shall be furnished.
14. Product Marking
14.1 Material Marking:
14.1.1 The name or brand of the manufacturer, the name of
the material or UNS number, the letters ASTM, the product
specification number, heat number, class (if applicable) and
nominal pipe size shall be legibly marked on each piece 1⁄2
NPS and larger and lengths greater than 3 ft (914 mm). The
material marking shall be by any method that will not result in
harmful contamination.
14.1.2 For material smaller than 1⁄2 NPS, or lengths under 3
ft (914 mm), the information specified in 14.1.1 shall be legibly
marked on each piece or marked on a tag securely attached to
the bundle or box in which the material is shipped, at the option
of the manufacturer.
15. Packaging and Package Marking
15.1 The following information shall be marked on the
material or included on the package, or on a label or tag
attached thereto: name of the material or UNS number, heat
number, condition (temper), the letters ASTM, the product
specification number, the nominal pipe size, gross, tare, and net
weight, consignor and consignee addresses, contract or order
number, and such other information as may be defined by the
purchase contract.
16. Keywords
16.1 welded pipe

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 777 – 99

Standard Specification for

Tungsten Base, High-Density Metal1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 777; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope Metallurgy (P/M) Materials Containing Less than Two

1.1 This specification covers the requirements for four Percent Porosity4
classes of machinable, high-density tungsten base metal pro- D 3951 Practice for Commercial Packaging5
duced by consolidation of metal powder mixtures of which the E 3 Test Methods for Preparation of Metallographic Speci-
composition is mainly tungsten. This material specification mens6
may be used for bare parts or be used for parts that may be E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials6
coated with other materials for protection against corrosion and E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
abrasion. Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials6
1.2 Intended Use— Parts made from this material are E 407 Practice for Microetching Metals and Alloys6
intended for uses such as weights or counter-balances in static 2.2 Federal Standard:
or dynamic balancing, high-speed rotating inertia members, Fed. Std. No. 151 Metals, Test Methods7
radiation shielding, hypervelocity impact, and vibration- 3. Classification
damping applications.
1.3 Special Applications—For particular applications, prop- 3.1 The tungsten base metal shall be of the following classes
erties or requirements other than those specified in Sections 5, (see Table 1 and Table 2), as specified (see 4.1):
6, and 7 of this specification may be important. These alloys Class Tungsten, Nominal %
may contain elements which make them magnetic. Where 1 90
freedom from magnetic response is required, this should be 2 92.5
specified in the purchase order. Class 4 is not available in a 3 95
4 97
non-magnetic grade. For purposes of this specification, non-
magnetic characteristics are defined as material having a 4. Ordering Information
maximum magnetic permeability of 1.05 (see Test Method 4.1 Orders for tungsten base, high-density metal should
B 193). Also for special applications involving large sections, specify the following:
methods for determining internal quality, such as mechanical 4.1.1 Title, designation, and year of issue of this specifica-
tests on specimens from these larger sections or suitable tion,
nondestructive tests may be applied. If required, these addi- 4.1.2 Class, (see 3.1),
tional tests shall be specified in the purchase order. 4.1.3 Machinability requirements, if any (see section7.3),
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded 4.1.4 Quantity,
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for 4.1.5 Levels of preservation and packing (see 9.1),
information only. 4.1.6 Special markings, if required (see 9.2),
2. Referenced Documents 4.1.7 Method of hardness testing, if different from Rock-
well“ C” (see Table 1),
2.1 ASTM Standards: 4.1.8 Freedom of parts from magnetic response, if required
A 600 Specification for Tool Steel Highspeed2 (see 1.3), and
B 193 Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor 4.1.9 Dimensions and tolerances.
Materials3
B 311 Test Method for Density Determination for Powder 5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 Materials—The raw materials shall be a mixture of
loose metal powders consisting mainly of tungsten and a
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-10 on
metallic powder binder such as copper, nickel or iron, that, by
Reactive and Refractory Metals and Alloysand is the direct responsibility of
Subcommittee B10.04on Molybdenum and Tungsten. 4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
Current edition approved Dec. 10, 1999. Published January 2000. Originally 5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 15.09.
published as B 777-87. Last previous edition B 777-87 (Reapproved 1993)e1. 6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.05. 7
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03. Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 777
TABLE 1 Composition, Density and Hardness Properties 8.3 Quality Conformance Inspection:
Nominal
Density,
HardnessA,B 8.3.1 Inspection Lot— An inspection lot shall consist of a
Class Tungsten, Rockwell“ C”, uniform blend from one batch of powder, and submitted for
g/cc
weight % max
inspection at one time. If a shipment is made from more than
1 90 16.85–17.25 32
2 92.5 17.15–17.85 33
one lot, the purchaser may choose to consider that shipment as
3 95 17.75–18.35 34 a single inspection lot or may choose to separate the shipment
4 97 18.25–18.85 35 into several inspection lots for acceptance purposes.
A
When specified by the purchaser, other hardness testing methods may be 8.3.2 Sampling—Unless otherwise specified, a minimum of
employed. two sintered test bars and one chemical analysis sample shall
B
For mechanically worked or aged material, the hardness can be as high as R
c46. be made from each powder lot.
8.3.3 Hardness Tests— Each test bar shall be tested for
TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties, Minimum Values conformance with the hardness requirements of Table 1 (see
Yield Strength
8.4.1).
Ultimate Tensile 8.3.4 Density—Each test bar shall be tested for conform-
at 0.2 % Off- Elongation,A
Class Strength
set % ance with the density requirements of Table 1 (see 8.4.2).
ksi MPa ksi MPa 8.3.5 Tension Tests—Each test bar shall be tested for con-
1 110B
758 75 517 5B formance with Table 2 (see 8.4.3).
2 110B 758 75 517 5B 8.3.6 Chemical Composition—If specified in the purchase
3 105B 724 75 517 3B
4 100 689 75 517 2
order, a chemical analysis sample from each lot shall be tested
A
Determine with an extensometer accurate to 0.5 % elongation or less.
for the tungsten content in conformance with Table 1 (see
B
Nonmagnetic composition to Classes 1, 2 and 3 shall be 94 ksi (648 MPa) 8.4.4).
minimum ultimate tensile strength. Minimum elongation shall be 2 % on Classes 1 8.3.7 Examination of Microstructure—This test shall be
and 2 and 1 % on Class 3.
accomplished on one of the test bars (see 8.4.5).
8.4 Methods for Test and Examinations:
sintering, will produce materials meeting the requirements of 8.4.1 Hardness—Samples shall be tested in accordance with
this specification. Test Methods E 18.
8.4.2 Density—The equal water displacement method per-
6. Chemical Composition formed in accordance with Test Method B 311 shall be used.
6.1 The specified class shall have the nominal tungsten 8.4.3 Mechanical Properties—Samples shall be tested in
content in Table 1. accordance with Test Methods E 8.
8.4.4 Chemical Analysis—Analysis of the lot or lots in
7. Physical and Mechanical Properties question shall be made by Method 111 or 112 of Fed. Std. No.
7.1 Composition, Physical and Mechanical Properties— 151 for conformance with 8.3.6. In case of dispute, chemical
The sintered material shall have properties conforming to Table analysis by Method 111 shall be the basis for acceptance.
1 and Table 2 as determined on standard sintered test bars (see 8.4.5 Microstructure— A test bar shall be sectioned and a
Test Method E 8). specimen shall be prepared for examination in accordance with
7.2 Microstructure— The microstructure of each sample Methods E 3. The specimen may be etched (see Methods
shall be a uniform distribution of tungsten particles in a binder E 407), and shall be examined at a magnification of 200 times
metal matrix when viewed at a magnification of 200 times. The for conformance with 7.2.
location may be specified (see 8.4.5). 8.4.6 Machinability— If specified by the procuring docu-
7.3 Machinability— When specified (see 4.1), the machin- ment, this test shall be made on a representative sample. Holes,
ability of the basic parts or of a suitable test specimen shall be 0.1695 in. in diameter and a minimum of 0.343 in. deep shall
such that it shall pass the test specified in 8.4.6. be drilled and tapped with a No. 10-32 high-speed steel tap to
7.4 Identification— Each lot and associated test bars shall a minimum full thread of 0.312 in. deep. The tap shall be of
be clearly marked with a lot serial number (see 8.3.1). high speed steel, conforming to Specification A 600, Type M1,
heat treated to a hardness of 62-63 HRC. Machinability will be
8. Quality Assurance Provisions considered acceptable in each class if each of the number of
8.1 Responsibility for Inspection—Unless otherwise speci- holes indicated in Table 3 is satisfactorily threaded to a
fied in the contract or purchase order, the manufacturer is minimum 60 % without destruction to the tap.
responsible for the performance of all inspection requirements 8.5 Rejection—Unless otherwise stated in the purchase
as specified herein. Except as otherwise specified in the order, failure to conform with any of the requirements of this
contract or purchase order, the manufacturer may use his own specification shall be cause for rejection of the lot.
facilities for the performance of the inspection or any other
facility that is acceptable to the purchaser. TABLE 3 Machinability Requirements
8.2 Responsibility for Compliance—All parts must meet all Class Number of Holes
the requirements agreed upon by purchaser and manufacturer 1 8
from Sections 4, 6 and 7. The inspections set forth in this 2 6
3 4
specification shall become a part of the manufacturer’s overall 4 2
inspection system or quality program.

2
 B 777
9. Packaging and Package Marking vidual item and test bar shall be clearly identified with a lot
9.1 Preservation, Packaging, and Packing—The material serial number. Where parts are too small to be individually
shall be prepared for delivery in accordance with the produc- identified, they may grouped for this purpose.
er’s commercial practice or Practice D 3951 as specified in
such a manner as to ensure acceptance for safe delivery by 10. Keywords
common or other carriers to the point of delivery. 10.1 high-density metal; tungsten
9.2 Marking—If specified in the purchase order, each indi-

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 778 – 02
Standard Specification for
Shaped Wire Compact Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum
Conductors (AAC/TW)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 778; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers shaped wire compact
concentric-lay-stranded aluminum conductor (AAC/TW) and
its component wires for use as overhead electrical conductors
(Explanatory Note 1 and Note 2).
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard with the exception of temperature and resistiv-
ity. The SI equivalents of inch-pound units may be approxi-
mate.
NOTE 1—AAC/TW is designed to increase the aluminum area for a
given diameter of conductor by the use of trapezoidally shaped wires
(TW). The conductors consist of a central core of one round aluminum
wire or a seven-strand compact round core surrounded by two or more
layers of trapezoidal aluminum 1350-H19 wires. For the purposes of this
specification, the sizes listed are tabulated on the basis of the finished
conductor having an area equal to that of specific sizes of standard AAC
(Table 1) or in fixed diameter increments (Table 2) so as to facilitate
conductor selection.
NOTE 2—The aluminum and temper designations conform to ANSI
Standard H 35.1. Aluminum 1350 corresponds to Unified Numbering
System (UNS) A91350 in accordance with Practice E 527.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein.
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 230 Specification for Aluminum 1350-H19 Wire for Elec-
trical Purposes2
B 263 Test Method for Determination of Cross-Sectional
Area of Stranded Conductors2
B 354 Terminology Relating to Uninsulated Metallic Elec-
trical Conductors2
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications3
1 4
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B01 on
Electrical Conductors and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B 01.07 on
Conductors of Light Metals.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2002. Published December 2002. Originally
approved in 1987. Last previous edition approved in 1997 as B 778 – 97.
2 7
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)4
2.3 Other Documents:
ANSI H35.1 American National Standard Alloy and Tem-
per Designation Systems for Aluminum5
NBS Handbook 100—Copper Wire Tables 6
Aluminum Association Publication 50 Code Words for
Overhead Aluminum Electrical Conductors7
3. Ordering Information
3.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information:
3.1.1 Quantity of each size,
3.1.2 Conductor size: kcmil area and diameter (Table 1 and
Table 2),
3.1.3 Special tension test, if required (see 8.2),
3.1.4 Place of inspection (Section 15),
3.1.5 Package size and type (see 15.1),
3.1.6 Special package markings, if required (Section 15),
and
3.1.7 Heavy wood lagging, if required (see 15.3).
4. Requirement for Wires
4.1 Before stranding, the trapezoidal aluminum wires shall
conform to the requirements of Specification B 230 except for
shape and diameter tolerance. The tensile strength and elonga-
tion requirements of trapezoidal wires shall be the same as for
round wires of equal area. The area tolerances shall be such
that the finished conductor conforms to Section 11.
5. Joints
5.1 Electric-butt welds, electric-butt cold-upset welds, or
cold-pressure welds may be made in the individual aluminum
wires during the stranding process. No weld shall occur within
50 ft (15 m) of any other weld in the completed conductor
(Explanatory Note 3).
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
5
Available from American National Standards Institute, 25 W. 43rd Street, 4th
Floor, New York, NY 10036.
6
Available from National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), 100
Bureau Dr., Stop 3460, Gaithersburg, MD 20899-3460.
Available from the Aluminum Association, Inc., 900 19th Street, NW, Suite
300, Washington, D.C. 2006.
 B 778 – 02
TABLE 1 Construction Requirements for Shaped Wire Compact Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum Conductors Sized to Have Areas
Equal to AAC Size
AAC/TW Nominal Outside Number of
Number Nominal Mass Rated Strength
Code WordA Conductor size Diameter Aluminum
of Layers
kcmil mm in. mm Wires lb/1000ft kg/km 1000 lbf kN
Tulip/TW 336.4 170 0.612 15.5 17 2 315.3 469.4 6.02 26.8
Canna/TW 397.5 201 0.661 16.8 17 2 372.6 554.7 6.96 31
Cosmos/TW 477.0 242 0.720 18.3 17 2 447.1 665.6 8.36 37.2
Zinnia/TW 500.0 253 0.736 18.7 17 2 468.7 697.7 8.76 39
Mistletoe/TW 556.5 282 0.775 19.7 17 2 521.6 776.5 9.75 43.4
Meadowsweet/TW 600.0 304 0.803 20.4 17 2 562.4 837.2 10.52 46.8
Orchid/TW 636.0 322 0.825 21.0 17 2 596.1 887.4 11.1 49.4
Verbena/TW 700.0 355 0.864 21.9 17 2 656.1 976.7 12.3 54.7
Nasturtium/TW 750.0 380 0.893 22.7 17 2 702.1 1045 13.1 58.3
Arbutus/TW 795.0 403 0.919 23.3 17 2 745.1 1109 13.6 60.5
Cockscomb/TW 900.0 456 0.990 25.1 31 3 843.6 1256 15.4 68.5
Magnolia/TW 954.0 483 1.018 25.9 31 3 894.2 1331 16.4 72.9
Hawkweed/TW 1000.0 507 1.041 26.4 31 3 937.3 1395 17.1 76.1
Bluebell/TW 1033.5 524 1.057 26.8 31 3 968.7 1442 17.7 78.7
Marigold/TW 1113.0 564 1.095 27.8 31 3 1043.2 1553 19.1 85.0
Hawthorn/TW 1192.5 604 1.132 28.8 31 3 1117.7 1664 20.4 90.7
Narcissus/TW 1272.0 644 1.168 29.7 31 3 1192.2 1775 21.8 97.0
Columbine/TW 1351.5 685 1.202 30.5 31 3 1266.3 1885 23.2 103
Carnation/TW 1431.0 725 1.236 31.4 31 3 1341.3 1997 24.0 107
Coreopsis/TW 1590.0 805 1.315 33.4 49 4 1490.3 2219 27.0 120
Jessamine/TW 1750.0 887 1.377 35.0 49 4 1640.3 2442 29.7 132
Cowslip/TW 2000.0 1013 1.468 37.3 49 4 1893.0 2818 33.9 151
Lupine/TW 2500.0 1266 1.648 41.9 71 5 2366.2 3522 41.9 186
Trillium/TW 3000.0 1520 1.799 45.7 71 5 2839.5 4227 50.3 224
A
Code words shown in this column are obtained from “Publication 50, Code Words for Overhead Aluminum Electrical Conductors,” by the Aluminum Association. They
are provided for information only.

TABLE 2 Construction Requirements for Shaped Wire Compact Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum Conductors, in
Fixed-Diameter Increments
AAC/TW Nominal Outside Number of
Number Nominal Mass Rated Strength
Code WordA Conductor Size Diameter Aluminum
of Layers
kcmil mm in. mm Wires lb/1000 ft kg/km 1000 lbf kN
Logan/TW 322.5 163 0.60 15.2 17 2 302.3 450 5.88 26.2
384.5 195 0.65 16.5 17 2 360.4 536.5 6.74 30
Wheeler/TW 449.4 228 0.70 17.8 17 2 421.2 627 7.88 35.1
521.7 264 0.75 19.1 17 2 489.0 728 9.14 40.7
Robson/TW 595.8 302 0.80 20.3 17 2 558.4 831.3 10.44 46.4
678.2 344 0.85 21.6 17 2 635.7 946.3 11.88 52.8
McKinley/TW 761.5 386 0.90 22.9 17 2 713.7 1062.5 13.07 58.1
854.2 433 0.95 24.1 17 2 800.6 1191.8 14.86 66.1
Rainer/TW 918.8 465 1.00 25.4 31 3 861.2 1282 15.76 70.1
1020.0 517 1.05 26.7 31 3 956.0 1423.2 17.50 77.8
Helens/TW 1123.1 569 1.10 27.9 31 3 1052.7 1567.1 19.26 85.7
1234.2 625 1.15 29.2 31 3 1156.8 1722.1 21.17 94.2
Mazama/TW 1346.8 682 1.20 30.5 31 3 1262.3 1879.1 23.10 102.7
1467.9 744 1.25 31.8 31 3 1375.9 2048.2 24.65 109.6
Hood/TW 1583.2 802 1.30 33 34 3 1483.9 2209 26.59 118.3
1682.7 852 1.35 34.3 49 4 1577.5 2348.4 28.55 127
Whitney/TW 1812.7 918 1.40 35.6 49 4 1699.0 2529.2 30.74 136.7
1954.3 990 1.45 36.8 49 4 1832.1 2727.4 33.16 147.5
Powell/TW 2093.6 1061 1.50 38.1 49 4 1981.6 2949.9 35.51 157.9
2245.4 1137 1.55 39.4 49 4 2125.7 3164.4 37.30 165.9
Jefferson/TW 2388.1 1210 1.60 40.6 52 4 2260.3 3364.8 39.67 176.5
2514.8 1274 1.65 41.9 71 5 2379.5 3542.3 42.17 187.6
Shasta/TW 2667.2 1351 1.70 43.2 71 5 2524.5 3758.1 44.74 199
2844.5 1441 1.75 44.5 71 5 2692.2 4007.8 47.70 212.2
Adams/TW 3006.2 1523 1.80 45.7 71 5 2873.0 4276.9 50.43 224.3
A
Code words shown in this column are obtained from “Publication 50, Code Words for Overhead Aluminum Electrical Conductors,” by the Aluminum Association. They
are provided for information only.

6. Lay conductor but the lay shall not be less than 10 nor more than 14
6.1 The preferred lay of the outside layer of aluminum wires times that diameter (Explanatory Note 1).
of shaped wire aluminum conductors, having multiple layers of
aluminum wires is 11 times the outside diameter of the

2
 B 778 – 02
6.2 The preferred lay of the layer immediately beneath the
outside layer of aluminum wires is 13 times the outside
diameter of such layer but the lay shall be not less than 10 nor
more than 16 times that diameter.
6.3 The lay of the inner layers of aluminum wires shall be
not less than 10 nor more than 17 times the outside diameter of
such layer.
6.4 The direction of lay of the outside layer of aluminum
wires shall be right-hand.
6.5 The direction of lay of the aluminum wires shall be
reversed in successive layers.
6.6 For the purpose of this specification the lay factor is the
length of lay of a given layer divided by its outside diameter.
7. Construction
7.1 The nominal aluminum cross-sectional area, the outside
diameter, the nominal number of aluminum wires, the number
of layers, the linear density, and the rated strength, of the
shaped wire compact concentric-lay-stranded aluminum con-
ductors, shall be as shown in Table 1 and Table 2.
NOTE 3—Exception to 7.1. Because the final design of a shaped wire
compact conductor is contingent on several factors such as layer diameter,
wire width and thickness, and the like, the actual configuration of a given
size may vary between manufacturers. This might result in a slight
variation in the number of wires and number of layers, from that shown in
Table 1 and Table 2, and also in the dimensions of the individual wires.
8. Rated Strength of Conductor
8.1 The rated strength of a conductor, as shown in Table 1
and Table 2, shall be taken as the percentage, indicated in Table
3, in accordance with the number of aluminum layers, of the
sum of the wire strengths calculated from the specified
diameter of the round wires having the same area as the
trapezoidal wires used in the manufacture of the conductor, and
the appropriate minimum average tensile strength given in
Specification B 230.
8.1.1 The rated strengths of conductors calculated in accor-
dance with 8.1 and 8.3 are listed in Table 1 and Table 2.
8.2 Tests to confirm that the rated strength of the conductor
is met are not required by this specification, but shall be made
if agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser at
the time of placing an order. When tested, the breaking strength
of the conductor shall be not less than the rated strength if
failure occurs in the free length at least 1 in. (25 mm) beyond
the end of either gripping device, or shall be not less than 95 %
of the rated strength if failure occurs inside or within 1 in. of
the end of either gripping device (Explanatory Note 2).
8.3 Rated strength and breaking strength values shall be
rounded to three significant figures in the final value only, in
accordance with Practice E 29.
TABLE 3 Rating Factors
Number of Layers Rating Factor, %
2 0.93
3 0.91
4 0.90
5 and above 0.89
3
9. Density
9.1 For the purpose of calculating mass per unit length,
cross-sections, and the like, the density of aluminum 1350 shall
be taken as 0.0975 lb/in.3(2705 kg/m3) at 20°C.
10. Mass and Electrical Resistance
10.1 The mass per unit length and electrical resistance of a
unit length of stranded conductor are a function of the length of
lay. The approximate linear density and electrical resistance of
a stranded conductor may be determined using the standard
increments shown in Table 4. When greater accuracy is desired,
the increment based on the actual lay of the conductor may be
calculated (Explanatory Note 3).
11. Variations in Area
11.1 The area of cross-section of the aluminum wires of the
conductor shall be not less than 98 % nor more than 102 % of
the area specified in column 1 of Table 1 and Table 2. The area
of each wire shall be determined by Test Method B 263. In
applying this method, the increment in linear density resulting
from stranding may be the applicable value specified in Table
4, or it may be calculated from the measured dimensions of the
sample under test. In case of questions regarding area compli-
ance, the actual linear density increment due to stranding shall
be calculated.
11.2 The diameter of the finished conductor shall be not less
than 99 % nor more than 101 % of that shown in Table 1 and
Table 2 when measured with a diameter tape between the
closing dies and the capstan of the strander.
12. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
12.1 The conductor shall be clean and free from imperfec-
tions not consistent with good commercial practice.
13. Mechanical and Electrical Tests
13.1 Tests for mechanical and electrical properties of alu-
minum wires shall be made before stranding (Explanatory Note
4).
14. Inspection
14.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
order, the manufacturer shall be responsible for the perfor-
mance of all inspection and test requirements specified.
14.2 All inspections and tests shall be made at the place of
manufacture unless otherwise especially agreed upon between
the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of the purchase.
14.3 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent-
ing the purchaser all reasonable manufacturer’s facilities to
satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
with this specification.
TABLE 4 Standard Increments Due to Stranding
Increment (Increase) of Mass per
Size of Conductor, kcmil Unit Length and Electrical
Resistance, %
Over 3 000 to 4 000 4
Over 2 000 to 3 000 3
2 000 and under 2
 B 778 – 02
15. Packaging and Package Marking
15.1 Package sizes and kind of package, reels, etc. shall be
agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
15.2 There shall be only one length of conductor on a reel.
15.3 The conductors shall be protected against damage in
ordinary handling and shipping. If heavy wood lagging is
required, it shall be specified by the purchaser at the time of
placing the order.
15.4 The net mass, length, size, kind of conductor, strand-
ing, and any other necessary identification shall be marked on
a tag attached to the conductor inside the package. This same
information, together with the purchase order number, the
EXPLANATORY NOTES
NOTE 1—In this specification only shaped wire compact concentric-lay-
stranded aluminum conductors are specifically designated. Conductor
constructions not included in this specification should be agreed upon
between the manufacturer and the purchaser when placing the order.
NOTE 2—For definitions of terms relating to conductors, refer to
Terminology B 354.
NOTE 3—The behavior of properly spaced joints in aluminum wires in
stranded conductors is related to both their tensile strength and elongation.
Because of its higher elongation properties, the lower-strength electric-
butt weld gives equivalent overall performance to that of a cold-pressure
weld or an electric-butt, cold-upset weld in stranded conductors.
NOTE 4—The lay factor with respect to the outside diameter of a layer
of wires varies for different layers and for different diameters of
conductor, being larger for the inside layers than for the outside layer.
NOTE 5—To obtain the actual breaking strength of AAC/TW tested as
a unit requires special devices for gripping the ends of the aluminum wires
without causing damage thereto and resultant failure below the actual
strength of the conductor. Various special dead-end devices are available
for this purpose, such as compression sleeves. Ordinary jaws or clamping
devices usually are not suitable.
NOTE 6—The increment of mass or electrical resistance of a completed
concentric-lay-stranded conductor, k, in percent is given by the following
equation:
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
Committee B01.07 has indentified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(B 778 – 97) that may impact the use of this standard.
(1) Added Code Word names for various conductor construc-
tions as found in Tables 1 and 2.
(2) Added new Keywords.
4
manufacturer’s serial number (if any), and all shipping marks
and other information required by the purchaser shall appear on
the outside of the package.
16. Keywords
16.1 AAC/TW; aluminum conductor; compact conductor;
compact conductor, aluminum; concentric-lay-stranded alumi-
num conductor; electrical conductor; electrical conductor, alu-
minum; shaped wire compact conductor; shaped wire compact
conductor, aluminum; shaped wire conductor; shaped wire
conductor, aluminum; trapezoidal conductor; trapezoidal con-
ductor, aluminum
k 5 100~m 2 1!
where m is the stranding factor, and is also the ratio of the mass or
electrical resistance of a unit length of stranded conductor to that of a solid
conductor of the same cross-sectional area or of a stranded conductor with
infinite length of stranding, that is, all wires parallel to the conductor axis.
The stranding factor (m) for the completed stranded conductor is the
numerical average of the stranding factors for each of the individual wires
in the conductor, including the straight core wire, if any (for which the
stranding factor is unity). The stranding factor (mind) for any given wire in
a concentric-lay-stranded conductor is:
mind 5 =1 1 ~9.8696/n2!
where n = length of lay/diameter of helical path of the wire. This is
assumed to be ID + t for a given layer where t equals the thickness of the
layer. To be more precise, for trapezoidal wire, this diameter should be that
of the centroid (the center of mass of the wire) which is on a diameter
slightly larger than the average layer diameter used in the above formula.
Using the average layer diameter for the helical path of the wire introduces
a small error which is considered to be negligible and may be ignored. The
derivation of the above is given in the NBS Handbook 100.6
NOTE 7—Wires unlaid from conductors may have different physical
properties from those of the wire before stranding because of the
deformation brought about by laying and again straightening for test.
(3) Eliminated references to U.S. Government “Supplementary
Requirements” at the end of the specification.
(4) Added Summary of Changes.
 B 778 – 02

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 779 – 03
Standard Specification for
Shaped Wire Compact Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum
Conductors, Steel-Reinforced (ACSR/TW)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 779; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers shaped wire compact
concentric-lay-stranded aluminum conductor, steel-reinforced
(ACSR/TW) and its component wires for use as overhead
electrical conductors (Explanatory Note 1 and Note 2).
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard with the exception of temperature, density, and
resistivity. The SI equivalents of inch-pound units may be
approximate.
NOTE 1—ACSR/TW is designed to increase the aluminum area for a
given diameter of conductor by the use of trapezoidally shaped wires
(TW). The conductors consist of a central core of round steel wire(s)
surrounded by two or more layers of trapezoidal aluminum 1350-H19
wires. Different strandings of the same size of conductor are identified by
type, which is the approximate ratio of steel area to aluminum area
expressed in percent (Table 1, Table 2 and Table 3). For the purpose of this
specification, the sizes listed in Table 1 and Table 2 are tabulated on the
basis of the finished conductor having an area or outside diameter equal to
that of specific sizes of standard ACSR so as to facilitate conductor
selection.
NOTE 2—The aluminum and temper designations conform to ANSI
Standard H 35.1. Aluminum 1350 corresponds to Unified Numbering
System (UNS) A91350 in accordance with Practice E 527.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 230 Specification for Aluminum 1350-H19 Wire for Elec-
trical Purposes2
B 232 Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Alumi-
num Conductors, Coated Steel-Reinforced (ACSR)2
B 263 Test Method for Determination of Cross-Sectional
Area of Stranded Conductors2
B 341 Specification for Aluminum-Coated (Aluminized)
Steel Core Wire for Aluminum Conductors, Steel Rein-
forced (ACSR/AZ)2
B 354 Terminology Relating to Uninsulated Metallic Elec-
trical Conductors2
B 498 Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel
1 3
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B01 on
Electrical Conductors and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B01.07 on
Conductors of Light Metals.
Current edition approved April 10, 2003. Published June 2003. Originally
approved in 1987. Last previous edition approved in 1996 as B 779 – 96.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
Core Wire for Aluminum Conductors, Steel Reinforced
(ACSR)2
B 500 Specification for Metallic Coated Stranded Steel
Core for Aluminum Conductors, Steel Reinforced
(ACSR)2
B 502 Specification for Aluminum-Clad Steel Core Wire for
Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-Clad Steel Reinforced2
B 549 Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Alumi-
num Conductors, Aluminum-Clad Steel Reinforced
(ACSR/AW)2
B 606 Specification for High-Strength Zinc-Coated (Galva-
nized) Steel Core Wire for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy
Conductors, Steel Reinforced2
B 802 Specification for Zinc-5 % Aluminum-Mischmetal
Alloy-Coated Steel Core Wire for Aluminum Conductors,
Steel Reinforced (ACSR)2
B 803 Specification for High-Strength Zinc-5 %
Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy-Coated Steel Core Wire for
Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Conductors, Steel Rein-
forced2
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications3
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)4
2.2 Other Documents:
ANSI H35.1 American National Standard Alloy and Tem-
per Designation Systems for Aluminum5
NBS Handbook 100—Copper Wire Tables of the National
Bureau of Standards6
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 ACSR/TW covered by this specification has five types
of coated core wire and one type of aluminum-clad core wire
which are designated by abbreviations as follows (Explanatory
Note 2):
3.1.1.1 ACSR/TW/AW—ACSR/TW using aluminum-clad
steel wire (Specification B 502).
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
5
Available from American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street,
New York, NY 10036.
6
Available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Port Royal Road,
Springfield, VA 22161.
 B 779 – 03
TABLE 1 Construction Requirements for Shaped Wire Compact Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum Conductors, Coated Steel
Reinforced Size to Have Area Equal to ACSR, Class AA
ACSR/TW Conductor Size and Stranding of ACSR Mass per
Number of Steel Core Stranding Rated Nominal
Size with Equal Area Number of Unit
Aluminum Strength, Outside
Layers Number of Diameter, Length,A
kcmil Type kcmil Stranding Wires 1000 lbB Diameter, in.
Wires in. lb/1000 ft

336.4 6 336.4 18/1 14 2 1 0.1367 365 8.6 0.63

477.0 13 477.0 24/7 18 2 7 0.0940 613 17.2 0.78
477.0 16 477.0 26/7 18 2 7 0.1053 655 19.4 0.79
556.5 13 556.5 24/7 18 2 7 0.1015 715 20.0 0.84
556.5 16 556.5 26/7 20 2 7 0.1138 765 22.6 0.85
636.0 3 636.0 36/1 27 3 1 0.1329 646 13.5 0.85
636.0 13 636.0 24/7 18 2 7 0.1085 816 22.9 0.89
636.0 16 636.0 26/7 20 2 7 0.1216 874 25.4 0.91
795.0 7 795.0 45/7 17 2 7 0.0886 892 21.0 0.96
795.0 10 795.0 22/7 18 2 7 0.1108 975 25.9 0.98
795.0 13 795.0 54/7 20 2 7 0.1213 1021 28.2 0.99
795.0 16 795.0 26/7 20 2 7 0.1360 1092 31.8 1.01
954.0 5 954.0 42/7 30 3 7 0.0837 1029 23.7 1.05
954.0 7 954.0 45/7 32 3 7 0.0971 1075 25.9 1.06
954.0 13 954.0 54/7 20 2 7 0.1329 1226 33.5 1.08
1033.5 5 1033.5 42/7 30 3 7 0.0871 1115 25.7 1.09
1033.5 7 1033.5 45/7 32 3 7 0.1010 1165 28.1 1.10
1033.5 13 1033.5 54/7 21 2 7 0.1363 1327 36.3 1.13
1113.0 5 1113.0 42/7 30 3 7 0.0904 1201 27.5 1.13
1113.0 7 1113.0 45/7 33 3 7 0.1049 1254 30.3 1.14
1113.0 13 1113.0 54/19 38 3 19 0.0862 1429 39.1 1.19
1192.5 5 1192.5 42/7 30 3 7 0.0936 1286 29.5 1.17
1192.5 7 1192.5 45/7 33 3 7 0.1085 1343 32.4 1.18
1192.5 13 1192.5 54/19 38 3 19 0.0892 1530 41.9 1.22
1272.0 5 1272.0 42/7 30 3 7 0.0967 1372 31.4 1.20
1272.0 7 1272.0 45/7 35 3 7 0.1121 1433 34.6 1.22
1272.0 13 1272.0 54/19 39 3 19 0.0921 1632 44.1 1.26
1351.5 7 1351.5 45/7 35 3 7 0.1155 1522 36.7 1.26
1351.5 13 1351.5 54/19 39 3 19 0.0949 1734 46.8 1.30
1431.0 7 1431.0 45/7 36 3 7 0.1189 1613 38.9 1.29
1431.0 13 1431.0 54/19 39 3 19 0.0977 1836 49.6 1.34
1590.0 7 1590.0 45/7 36 3 7 0.1253 1792 42.2 1.36
1590.0 13 1590.0 54/19 42 3 19 0.1030 2040 55.1 1.41
1780.0 8 1780.0 84/19 37 3 19 0.0874 2063 50.7 1.45
2156.0 8 2156.0 84/19 64 4 19 0.0961 2515 61.1 1.61
A
Mass per unit length is based on Class A zinc-coated steel.
B
Rated strengths were calculated in accordance with 9.1 using steel stresses at 1 % for Class A coating in accordance with Specification B 498 (1 kip = 1000 lbf = 4.448
kN).

3.1.1.2 ACSR/TW/AZ—ACSR/TW using aluminum-coated 4. Ordering Information

(aluminized) steel wire (Specification B 341).
3.1.1.3 ACSR/TW/GA—ACSR/TW using Class A zinc-
coated steel wire (Specification B 498).
3.1.1.4 ACSR/TW/GB—ACSR/TW using Class B zinc-
coated steel wire (Specification B 498).
3.1.1.5 ACSR/TW/GC—ACSR / TW using Class C zinc-
coated steel wire (Specification B 498).
3.1.1.6 ACSR/TW/HS—ACSR/TW using extra high-
strength steel wire (Specification B 606).
3.1.1.7 ACSR/TW/MA—ACSR/TW using Class A zinc-5 %
aluminum-mischmetal alloy-coated steel core wire (Specifica-
tion B 802).
3.1.1.8 ACSR/TW/MB—ACSR/TW using Class B zinc-5 %
aluminum-mischmetal alloy-coated steel core wire (Specifica-
tion B 802).
3.1.1.9 ACSR/TW/MC—ACSR/TW using Class C zinc-5 %
aluminum-mischmetal alloy-coated steel core wire (Specifica-
tion B 802).
3.1.1.10 ACSR/TW/MS—ACSR/TW using high-strength
zinc-5 % mischmetal alloy-coated steel core wire (Specifica-
tion B 803).
4.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information:
4.1.1 Quantity of each size,
4.1.2 Conductor size: kcmil area and diameter,
4.1.3 Conductor type and number of wires, aluminum and
steel (Tables 1-3),
4.1.4 Type of steel core wire and if zinc or Zn-5 % -MM
alloy coated, Class (A, B, and C) of coating (see 5.2),
4.1.5 Special tension test, if required (see 9.2),
4.1.6 Place of inspection (Section 15),
4.1.7 Package size and type (see 16.1),
4.1.8 Special package markings, if required (Section 16),
and
4.1.9 Heavy wood lagging, if required (see 16.3).
5. Requirement for Wires
5.1 Before stranding, the trapezoidal aluminum wires (see
Terminology B 354) shall conform to the requirements of
Specification B 230 except for shape and diameter tolerance.
The tensile strength and elongation requirements of trapezoidal
wires shall be the same as for round wires of equal area. The

2
 TABLE 2 Construction Requirements for Shaped Wire Compact Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum Conductors, Coated Steel Reinforced Sized to Have Diameter Equal to
ACSR, Class AA
ACSR/TW Conductor Size and Stranding of ACSR Mass
Code WordA Number of Steel Core Stranding Rated Nominal
Size with Equal Diameter Number of per Unit
Aluminum Strength, Outside
Layers Number of Diameter, Length,B
kcmilE Type kcmilE Stranding Wires 1000 lbC Diameter, in.D
Wires in.D lb/1000 ft

Monongahela/TW 405.1 6 336.4 18/1 14 2 1 0.1520 441 10.2 0.68

Mohawk/TW 571.7 13 477.0 24/7 18 2 7 0.1030 735 20.6 0.85
Calumet/TW 565.3 16 477.0 26/7 20 2 7 0.1146 776 22.9 0.86
Mystic/TW 666.6 13 556.5 24/7 20 2 7 0.1111 856 24.0 0.91
Oswego/TW 664.8 16 556.5 26/7 20 2 7 0.1244 913 26.6 0.93
Maumee/TW 768.2 13 636.0 24/7 20 2 7 0.1195 988 27.7 0.98
Wabash/TW 762.8 16 636.0 26/7 20 2 7 0.1331 1047 30.5 0.99
Nechako/TW 768.9 3 636.0 36/1 27 3 1 0.1520 785 16.4 0.93
Kettle/TW 957.2 7 795.0 45/7 32 3 7 0.0973 1079 26.0 1.06
Fraser/TW 946.7 10 795.0 22/7 35 3 7 0.1154 1142 29.6 1.08
Columbia/TW 966.2 13 795.0 54/7 21 2 7 0.1338 1241 34.0 1.09
Suwannee/TW 959.6 16 795.0 26/7 22 2 7 0.1493 1318 37.0 1.11
Cheyenne/TW 1168.1 5 954.0 42/7 30 3 7 0.0926 1260 28.9 1.16
Genesee/TW 1158.0 7 954.0 45/7 33 3 7 0.1078 1308 31.6 1.17
Hudson/TW 1158.4 13 954.0 54/7 25 2 7 0.1467 1489 39.6 1.20
Catawba/TW 1272.0 5 1033.5 42/7 30 3 7 0.0967 1372 31.4 1.20
Nelson/TW 1257.1 7 1033.5 45/7 35 3 7 0.1115 1417 34.2 1.21
Yukon/TW 1233.6 13 1033.5 54/7 38 3 19 0.0910 1586 42.9 1.25
Truckee/TW 1372.5 5 1113.0 42/7 30 3 7 0.1004 1481 33.4 1.25
Mackenzie/TW 1359.7 7 1113.0 45/7 36 3 7 0.1159 1530 36.9 1.26
Thames/TW 1334.6 13 1113.0 54/19 39 3 19 0.0944 1713 46.3 1.29
St. Croix/TW 1467.8 5 1192.5 42/7 33 3 7 0.1041 1585 35.8 1.29
Miramichi/TW 1455.3 7 1192.5 45/7 36 3 7 0.1200 1640 39.2 1.30

3
Merrimack/TW 1433.6 13 1192.5 54/19 39 3 19 0.0978 1840 49.7 1.34
Platte/TW 1569.0 5 1272.0 42/7 33 3 7 0.1074 1693 38.2 1.33
Potomac/TW 1557.4 7 1272.0 45/7 36 3 7 0.1241 1755 41.9 1.35
Rio Grande/TW 1533.3 13 1272.0 54/19 39 3 19 0.1012 1968 53.2 1.38
B 779 – 03

Schuylkill/TW 1657.4 7 1351.5 45/7 36 3 7 0.1280 1868 44.0 1.39

Pecos/TW 1622.0 13 1351.5 54/19 39 3 19 0.1064 2107 57.5 1.42
Pee Dee/TW 1758.6 7 1431.0 45/7 37 3 7 0.1319 1982 46.7 1.43
James/TW 1730.6 13 1431.0 54/19 39 3 19 0.1075 2221 59.4 1.47
Athabaska/TW 1949.6 7 1590.0 45/7 42 3 7 0.1392 2199 51.9 1.50
Cumberland/TW 1926.9 13 1590.0 54/19 42 3 19 0.1133 2471 65.3 1.55
Powder/TW 2153.8 8 1780.0 84/19 64 4 19 0.0961 2498 61.1 1.60
Santee/TW 2627.3 8 2156.0 84/19 64 4 19 0.1062 3048 74.5 1.76
A
Code words shown in this column are obtained from “Publication 50, Code Words for Overhead Aluminum Electrical Conductors,” by the Aluminum Association. They are provided for information only.
B
Mass per unit length is based on Class A zinc-coated steel. To convert to kg/km, multiply the lb/1000 ft value x 1.4887.
C
Rated strength was calculated in accordance with 9.1 using steel stresses at 1 % for Class A coating in accordance with Specification B 498 (1 kip = 1000 lbf = 4.445 kN).
D
To convert the diameter (inches) to mm, multiply the inch value x 25.4.
E
To convert from kcmil to mm2 area, multiply the kcmil value x 5.067 x 10-4.
 B 779 – 03
TABLE 3 Construction Requirements for Shaped Wire Compact Concentric-Lay Stranded Aluminum Conductors Coated, Steel
Reinforced
ACSR/TW Conductor
Number of Number Steel Core Stranding Mass per Unit Rated Strength, Nominal Outside
Size
Aluminum Wires of Layers Length, lb/1000 ft 1000 lb Diameter, in.
kcmil Number of Wires Diameter, in.
795.5 17 2 7 0.0866 886.0 21.2 0.95
1109.7 17 2 7 0.0700 1132.0 23.6 1.10
1524.1 33 3 7 0.0966 1617.0 35.8 1.30
1935.4 31 3 7 0.0866 1958.0 41.0 1.45

area tolerances shall be such that the finished conductor
conforms to Section 12.
5.2 Before stranding, the steel core wire shall meet the
requirements of Specifications B 341, B 498, B 502, B 606,
B 802, or B 803, whichever is applicable.
5.3 Following stranding, the steel core shall meet the
requirements of Specification B 500.
6. Joints
6.1 Electric-butt welds, electric-butt cold-upset welds, or
cold-pressure welds may be made in the individual aluminum
wires during the stranding process. No weld shall occur within
50 ft (15 m) of any other weld in the completed conductor
(Explanatory Note 3).
6.2 There shall be no joints made in the finished steel wires.
7. Lay
7.1 The preferred lay of the outside layer of aluminum wires
of shaped wire compact aluminum conductors, steel-
reinforced, having a steel core of 7 or 19 wires and having
multiple layers of aluminum wires, is 11 times the outside
diameter of the conductor but the lay shall not be less than 10
nor more than 13 times that diameter (Explanatory Note 4).
7.2 The preferred lay of the layer immediately beneath the
outside layer of aluminum wires is 13 times the outside
diameter of such layer but the lay shall be not less than 10 nor
more than 16 times that diameter.
7.3 The lay of the inner layers of aluminum wires shall be
not less than 10 nor more than 17 times the outside diameter of
such layer.
7.4 The preferred lay of the 6-wire layer of 7- and 19-wire
steel cores is 25 times the outside diameter of the 6-wire layer
but the lay shall be not less than 18 nor more than 30 times that
diameter.
7.5 The preferred lay of the 12-wire layer of 19-wire steel
core is 20 times the outside diameter of the core but the lay
shall be not less than 16 nor more than 24 times that diameter.
7.6 The direction of lay of the outside layer of aluminum
wires shall be right-hand.
7.7 The direction of lay of the aluminum and steel wires
shall be reversed in successive layers.
7.8 For the purpose of this specification the lay factor is the
length of lay of a given layer divided by its outside diameter.
8. Construction
8.1 The nominal aluminum cross-sectional area, conductor
type, the nominal number of aluminum wires, the number of
layers, the number and diameter of the steel core wire, the mass
per unit length, the rated strength and the outside diameter of
the shaped wire compact concentric-lay-stranded aluminum
conductors, steel-reinforced, shall be as shown in Tables 1-3.
NOTE 3—Exception to 8.1. Because the final design of a shaped wire
compact conductor is contingent on several factors such as layer diameter,
wire width and thickness, etc., the actual configuration of a given size may
vary between manufacturers. This might result in a slight variation in the
number of wires from that shown in Tables 1-3, and also in the dimensions
of the individual wires (See Table 4).
9. Rated Strength of Conductor
9.1 The rated strength of a conductor, as shown in Tables
1-3, shall be taken as the aggregate strength of the aluminum
and steel components calculated as follows: The strength
contribution of the aluminum 1350-H19 wires shall be taken as
the percentage, indicated in Table 5 in accordance with the
number of aluminum layers, of the sum of the wire strengths
calculated from the specified diameter of the round wires
having the same area as the trapezoidal wires used in the
manufacture of the conductor, and the appropriate minimum
average tensile strength given in Specification B 230. The
strength contribution of the steel core wires shall be taken as
the percentage, indicated in Table 5, of the sum of the strengths
of the steel wires calculated from their specified nominal wire
diameter and the appropriate specified minimum stress at 1 %
extension given in Specifications B 341, B 498, B 502, B 606,
B 802, or B 803, whichever is applicable.
9.1.1 The rated strengths of conductors calculated in accor-
dance with 9.1 and 9.3, using Class A zinc-coated steel wires in
accordance with Specification B 498, are listed in Table 1 and
Table 2.
9.2 Tests to confirm that the rated strength of the conductor
is met are not required by this specification, but shall be made
TABLE 4 Comparison of ACSR/TW with Equivalent Stranding of
ACSRA
ACSR/TW Type NumberB Conventional ACSR StrandingC
3 36/1
5 42/7
6 18/1
7 45/7
8 84/19
10 22/7
13 54/7
13 54/19
13 24/7
16 26/7
A
The equivalent stranding is that stranding of conventional ACSR that has the
same area of aluminum and steel as a given ACSR/TW type.
B
ACSR/TW type number is the approximate ratio of the steel area to the
aluminum area in percent.
C
See Specifications B 232 and B 549.

4
 B 779 – 03
TABLE 5 Rating Factors TABLE 6 Standard Increments Due to Stranding
Number of Layers Rating Factor, % Increment (Increase),%
No. of Steel Stranding of ACSR/TW
Aluminum Steel Mass per Unit Length
Wires Aluminum Steel and Electrical Resistance
Trapezoidal Round
No. of Steel
2 0 1 95 96 Type No. Aluminum Steel
Wires
2 1 7 95 96
2 2 19 95 93 Two Layer Designs
3 0 1 93 96
5 7 2.0 0.4
3 1 7 93 96
6 1 2.0 0
3 2 19 93 93
7 7 2.0 0.4
4 2 19 92 93
10 7 2.1 0.4
13 7 2.15 0.4
13 19 2.15 0.6
if agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser at 16 7 2.25 0.4
the time of placing an order. When tested, the breaking strength Three Layer Designs
of the conductor shall be not less than the rated strength if 3 1 2.4 0
failure occurs in the free length at least 1 in. (25 mm) beyond 5 7 2.4 0.4
the end of either gripping device, or shall be not less than 95 % 7 7 2.5 0.4
8 19 2.35 0.6
of the rated strength if failure occurs inside or within 1 in. of 10 7 2.6 0.4
the end of either gripping device (Explanatory Note 5). 13 19 2.75 0.6
9.3 Rated strength and breaking strength values shall be Four Layer Designs
rounded to three significant figures in the final value only, in 8 19 3.2 0.6
accordance with Practice E 29.
10. Density
10.1 For the purpose of calculating mass per unit length, 12.2 The diameter of the finished conductor shall be not less
cross-sections, etc., the density of aluminum 1350 shall be than 99 % nor more than 101 % of that shown in Table 1 and
taken as 0.0975 lb/in.33(2705 kg/m3) at 20°C. Table 2 when measured with a diameter tape between the
10.2 For the purpose of calculating mass per unit length, closing dies and the capstan of the strander.
cross-sections, etc., the density of galvanized or aluminized 13. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
steel wire shall be taken as 0.2810 lb/in.3(7780 kg/m3) at 20°C.
10.3 For the purpose of calculating mass per unit length, 13.1 The conductor shall be clean and free from imperfec-
cross-sections, and the like, the density of aluminum-clad steel tions not consistent with good commercial practice.
wire shall be taken as 0.2381 lb/in.3(6590 kg/m3) at 20°C. 14. Mechanical and Electrical Tests
11. Mass per Unit Length and Electrical Resistance 14.1 Tests for mechanical and electrical properties of alu-
11.1 The mass per unit length and electrical resistance of a minum wires shall be made before stranding (Explanatory Note
unit length of stranded conductor are a function of the length of 7).
lay. The approximate mass per unit length and electrical 14.2 Tests for the properties of the steel core wires shall be
resistance of a stranded conductor may be determined using the made before stranding (Explanatory Note 7).
standard increments shown in Table 6. When greater accuracy
15. Inspection
is desired, the increment based on the actual lay of the
conductor may be calculated (Explanatory Note 6). 15.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
11.2 In the calculation of the electrical resistance of a order, the manufacturer shall be responsible for the perfor-
completed conductor, the resistivity of zinc-coated or mance of all inspection and test requirements specified.
aluminum-coated steel core wires shall be taken as 0.19157 15.2 All inspections and tests shall be made at the place of
V·mm2/m at 20°C and the resistivity of aluminum-clad steel manufacture unless otherwise especially agreed to between the
core wires shall be taken as 0.0848 V·mm2/m at 20°C. These manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of the purchase.
are typical values and are not guaranteed. 15.3 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent-
ing the purchaser all reasonable manufacturer’s facilities to
12. Variations in Area and Diameter satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
12.1 The area of cross-section of the aluminum wires of the with this specification.
conductor shall be not less than 98 % nor more than 102 % of
the area specified in Column 1 of Tables 1-3. The area of each 16. Packaging and Package Marking
wire shall be determined by Test Method B 263. In applying 16.1 Package sizes and kind of package, reels, etc. shall be
this method, the increment in linear density resulting from agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
stranding may be the applicable value specified in Table 6, or 16.2 There shall be only one length of conductor on a reel.
it may be calculated from the measured dimensions of the 16.3 The conductors shall be protected against damage in
sample under test. In case of questions regarding area compli- ordinary handling and shipping. If heavy wood lagging is
ance, the actual mass per unit length increment due to stranding required, it shall be specified by the purchaser at the time of
shall be calculated. placing the order.

5
 B 779 – 03
16.4 The net mass, length, size, kind of conductor, conduc- with the purchase order number, the manufacturer’s serial
tor type, stranding, type of steel coating or cladding, class of number (if any), and all shipping marks and other information
zinc or Zn-5 % -MM alloy coating (if used) and any other required by the purchaser shall appear on the outside of the
necessary identification shall be marked on a tag attached to the package.
conductor inside the package. This same information, together

EXPLANATORY NOTES

NOTE 1—In this specification only shaped wire compact concentric-lay-
stranded aluminum conductors, steel-reinforced, are specifically desig-
nated. Conductor constructions not included in this specification should be
agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser when placing the
order.
NOTE 2—For definitions of terms relating to conductors, refer to
Terminology B 354.
NOTE 3—The behavior of properly spaced joints in aluminum wires in
stranded conductors is related to both their tensile strength and elongation.
Because of its higher elongation properties, the lower-strength electric-
butt weld gives equivalent overall performance to that of a cold-pressure
weld or an electric-butt, cold-upset weld in stranded conductors.
NOTE 4—The lay factor with respect to the outside diameter of a layer
of wires varies for different layers and for different diameters of
conductor, being larger for the inside layers than for the outside layer.
NOTE 5—To obtain the actual breaking strength of ACSR/TW tested as
a unit requires special devices for gripping the ends of the aluminum and
steel wires without causing damage thereto and resultant failure below the
actual strength of the conductor. Various special dead-end devices are
available for this purpose, such as compression sleeves. Ordinary jaws or
clamping devices usually are not suitable.
NOTE 6—The increment of mass or electrical resistance of a completed
concentric-lay-stranded conductor, k, in percent is given by the following
equation:
k = 100( m − 1)
where m is the stranding factor, and is also the ratio of the mass or
electrical resistance of a unit length of stranded conductor to that of a solid
conductor of the same cross-sectional area or of a stranded conductor with
infinite length of stranding, that is, all wires parallel to the conductor axis.
The stranding factor (m) for the completed stranded conductor is the
numerical average of the stranding factors for each of the individual wires
in the conductor, including the straight core wire, if any (for which the
stranding factor is unity). The stranding factor (mind) for any given wire in
a concentric-lay-stranded conductor is:
mind 5 =1 1 ~9.8696/n 2
where
n = length of lay⁄diameter of helical path of the wire.
This is taken to be ID + t for a given layer where t equals the thickness
of the layer. To be more precise, for trapezoidal wire, this diameter should
be that of the centroid (the center of mass of the wire) which is on a
diameter slightly larger than the average layer diameter used in the above
formula. Using the average layer diameter for the helical path of the wire
introduces a small error which is considered to be negligible and may be
ignored. The derivation of the above is given in NBS Handbook 100.6 The
factors (k) and (m) for composite conductors are to be determined
separately for each different material involved (Section7).
NOTE 7—Wires unlaid from conductors may have different physical
properties from those of the wire before stranding because of the
deformation brought about by laying and again straightening for test.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 780 – 98 (Reapproved 2004)

Standard Specification for

75 % Silver, 24.5 % Copper, 0.5 % Nickel Electrical Contact
Alloy1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 780; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Chemical Composition

1.1 This specification covers an electrical contact material NOTE 1—Analysis is regularly made for the elements for which specific
with the nominal composition of 75 % silver, 24.5 % copper, limits are listed. If however, the presence of “other” elements is suspected
and 0.5 % nickel in the form of rod, wire, strip, and sheet. or indicated in the course of routine analysis, further analysis shall be
made to determine that the total of these “other” elements and the listed
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all the safety
impurities is not in excess of the total impurities limit.
concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility NOTE 2—Refer to 5.2.
of the user of this standard to become familiar with all hazards
including those identified in the appropriate Material Safety
Element Weight,%
Data Sheet for this product/material as provided by the
Silver 74.0–76.0
manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and health prac- Copper (23.5 min) report by difference
tices, and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations Nickel 0.35–0.65
prior to use.
Impurities
Zinc 0.06 max
2. Referenced Documents Iron 0.05 max
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2 Cadmium 0.05 max
Lead 0.03 max
B 476 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought Total of all impurities 0.15 max
Precious Metal Electrical Contact Materials
3. Ordering Information
3.1 Refer to Specification B 476. 5.2 These specification limits do not preclude the possible
4. Materials and Manufacture presence of other unnamed elements, impurities, or additives.
Analysis shall be regularly made only for the minor elements
4.1 Raw materials shall be of such quality and purity that listed in the table. However, if a user knows of elements that
the finished product will have the properties and characteristics might be detrimental to their application or has other reasons
prescribed in this specification. for requiring analysis for specific elements, then agreement
4.2 The material shall be finished by such operations (cold between manufacturer and purchaser for both limits and
working, heat-treating, annealing, turning, grinding, or pick- methods of analysis should be required for elements not
ling) as are required to produce the prescribed properties. specified.
5. Chemical Composition 6. Mechanical Properties
5.1 Material produced under this specification shall conform 6.1 The material shall conform to the applicable mechanical
to the chemical composition limits prescribed in Table 1. properties prescribed in Table 2 or Table 3.
6.2 All test specimens shall be the full thickness or diameter
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
as the size supplied when practical. The test procedures shall
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee follow the ASTM specifications referred to in Specification
B02.05 on Precious Metals and Electrical Contact Materials. B 476.
Current edition approved May 1, 2004. Published May 2004. Originally 6.3 All tests are to be conducted at room temperature, about
approved in 1987. Last previous edition approved in 1998 as B 780 – 98.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or 68°F (20°C).
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 780 – 98 (2004)
TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties of Wire and Rod TABLE 3 Mechanical Properties of Sheet and Strip

Area Re- Temper B and Tensile Strength % Elonga- Thickness Temper B and S Tensile Strength Elonga- Hardness
duction, Designation S No. tion in Reduction, Desig- No. tion% Rockwell
% ksi MPa 2 in. (51 % nation in 2 in. 30T
mm), min ksi MPa (51 mm),
min
0 annealed 0 40–55 280–380 10
11 1⁄8 hard 50–62 350–430 5 annealed annealed 0 45–57 310–390 8 46–58
21 1⁄4 hard 1 58–68 400–470 4 11 1⁄4 hard 1 50–62 340–430 4 56–62
37 1⁄2 hard 2 64–74 440–510 4 21 1⁄2 hard 2 55–67 370–450 3 60–66
60 hard 4 70–80 480–550 2 37 hard 4 63–75 430–520 2 64–70
84 spring 8 80–92 550–630 1

7. Inspection, Rejection and Rehearing, Certification,

Product Marking, and Supplementary Requirements 8. Keywords
7.1 Material furnished to this specification shall meet the 8.1 arcing contacts; contacts; conductivity; electrical con-
requirements listed in Specification B 476. tacts; precious metals; silver alloy; silver-copper alloy; wire

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. Typical Property Values

X1.1 Electrical Conductivity: 9.90 3 10 −6 in./in.-°F

17.82 3 10 −6 m/m°C
Temper An- 1⁄4 1⁄2 Hard Extra Spring Extra
nealed Hard Hard Hard Spring X1.4 Modulus of Elasticity:
B and S No. 0 1 2 4 6 8 10 12.3 3 10 6 psi (84.8 GPa)
Electrical Conduc- 76 74 74 73 72 70 70
tivity IACS,
percent X1.5 Typical Mechanical Properties (Spring Temper—.010
MS/m 44.1 42.9 42.9 42.3 41.8 40.6 40.6 inch diameter wire)
X1.2 Density: (a.) Fatigue strength (Rotating Bending) at 10 8cycles
Nominal 10.04 Mg/m 3(5.29 troy oz/in. 3) 40,000 psi (280 MPa)
(b.) Proportional limit 65,000 psi (455 MPa)
X1.3 Linear Coeffıcient of Expansion: (c.) Microhardness 160 HK 100g

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 782 – 00

Standard Specification for

Iron Graphite Sintered Bearings (Oil-Impregnated)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 782; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements

1.1 This specification covers iron-base sintered metal pow- Composition, %

Element
der, oil-impregnated bearings. There are two grades, depending Grade 1 Grade 2
on the level of combined carbon (see Table 1): Iron, min 94.5 94.5
1.1.1 Grade 1, Iron Graphite—low combined carbon and Graphite 2.0 to 3.0 1.5 to 2.5
Total other elements by difference, 2.0 2.0
1.1.2 Grade 2, Iron Graphite—high combined carbon. max
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are the standard. Combined carbon 0 to 0.5 0.5 to 1.0
The metric equivalents of inch-pound units may be approxi-
mate.
4. Materials and Manufacture
NOTE 1—Definitions of powder metallurgy terms can be found in
Definitions B 243. Additional useful information is available in the 4.1 Bearings shall be made by cold compacting and sinter-
Related Material section of Vol 02.05 of the Annual Book of ASTM ing metal powders, with or without sizing, to produce finished
Standards. parts conforming to the requirements of this specification.
NOTE 2—Information on design, permissible loads, dimensional toler-
ances, and recommended press fits and running clearances are provided in 5. Chemical Composition
Appendix X1.
5.1 The material shall conform to the requirements pre-
2. Referenced Documents scribed in Table 1.
2.1 ASTM Standards: 6. Physical Properties
B 243 Terminology of Powder Metallurgy2
6.1 Density—The density of bearings supplied fully impreg-
B 328 Test Method for Density, Oil Content, and Intercon-
nated with lubricant shall be within the limits prescribed in
nected Porosity of Sintered Powder Metal Structural Parts
Table 2. Density determinations shall be made in accordance
and Oil-Impregnated Bearings2
with Test Method B 328.
E 9 Test Methods of Compression Testing of Metallic Ma-
6.2 Oil Content—Oil content of bearings shall not be less
terials at Room Temperature3
than 18 % for each grade when determined in accordance with
E 1019 Test Methods for Determination of Carbon, Sulfur,
Test Method B 328.
Nitrogen, and Oxygen in Steel and in Iron, Nickel, and
Cobalt Alloys4 7. Mechanical Properties
3. Ordering Information 7.1 Radial Crushing Force:
7.1.1 Radial crushing force shall be determined by com-
3.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
pressing the test specimen between two flat steel surfaces at a
the following information:
“no load’’ speed no greater than 0.2 in./min (5 mm/min), the
3.1.1 Grade (Table 1),
direction of the load being normal to the longitudinal axis of
3.1.2 Dimensions, and
the specimen. The point at which the load drops as a result of
3.1.3 Certification (see Section 13).
the first crack shall be considered the crushing strength. This
test shall be applied to plain cylindrical bearings. Flanged
bearings shall be tested by cutting off the flange and compress-
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-9 on Metal ing the two sections separately. Each section shall meet the
Powders and Metal Powder Products and is the direct responsibility of Subcommit-
tee B09.04 on Bearings.
minimum strength requirements prescribed in Table 3.
Current edition approved October 10, 2000. Published December 2000. Origi- 7.1.2 Radial crushing force shall not be less than the value
nally published as B 782 – 88. Last previous edition B 782 – 94 (1999). calculated as follows:
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01. P 5 KLT2/~D 2 T!
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06. (1)

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1

TABLE 2 Density and Oil Content Requirements
Grade
Density, g/cm3 Oil Content, Vol
min max min, %
1 5.6 6.0
2 5.6 6.0
TABLE 3 Strength Constants
Grade K Strength Constant
min max
1 10 000 psi (69 MPa (N/mm2)) 25 000 psi (172 MPa (N/mm2))
2 16 000 psi (110 MPa (N/mm2)) 45 000 psi (310 MPa (N/mm2))
where:
P = radial crushing force, lbf (N);
D = outside diameter of bearing, in. (mm);
T = wall thickness of bearing, in. (mm);
K = strength constant as shown in Table 3 for the grade
specified, psi (MPa (N/mm2)); and
L = length of bearings, in. (mm).
7.1.3 Concerning spherical bearings, sample parts from a lot
will be machined to a straight wall and radially crushed to
calculate the K value. Sample parts from the same lot will be
radially crushed as is (whole part). By correlation, the mini-
mum radial crush value will be established on the whole
bearing and so specified as the minimum radial crush value for
the part.
8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
8.1 Bearings shall be uniform in composition. When cut or
fractured, the exposed surface shall be of uniform appearance.
9. Sampling
9.1 Lot—Unless otherwise specified, a lot shall consist of
parts of the same form and dimensions made from powders of
the same composition, formed and sintered under the same
conditions, and submitted for inspection at one time.
9.2 Sample for Chemical Analysis—If required, at least one
sample for chemical analysis shall be taken from each lot. A
representative sample of chips may be obtained by milling,
drilling, or crushing at least two pieces with clean dry tools
without lubrication. If the parts are not completely dry, the
parts selected for test shall have the oil extracted in accordance
with Test Method B 328.
9.3 Mechanical Tests—The manufacturer and purchaser
shall agree on a representative number of specimens for
mechanical tests.
10. Analytical Methods
10.1 Carbon Analysis—Carbon analysis is a procedure for
determining the total, the graphitic, and the combined carbon in
iron-graphite sintered bearings.
B 782
10.1.1 Oil Extraction—Parts must be dry and free of oil
before running tests. The preferred method of oil extraction is
by the Soxhlet apparatus method specified in Test Method
18
18 B 328. Upon agreement between purchaser and supplier, a
low-temperature furnace (approximately 1000°F) with a nitro-
gen or inert atmosphere may be used.
10.1.2 Total Carbon—Obtain total carbon in accordance
with Test Method E 1019 with the exception of a 1⁄4-g sample
may be used upon agreement between customer and supplier.
10.1.3 Graphitic Carbon—The amount of graphitic carbon
is found using the following procedure: Weigh and transfer a
1⁄4-g sample to a 400-mL beaker. Add 25 mL of distilled water.
Carefully add 25 mL of concentrated nitric acid and gently boil
until all the iron is in solution. At this point, add five to ten
drops of 48 % hydrofluoric acid to ensure complete solubility
of all carbides, silicates, and so forth. Filter the solution
through a porous combustion crucible, wash with hot water
until free of acid, then once with ethyl alcohol. Dry at 100°C
for 1 h. After drying, add approximately 1 g of carbon-free iron
chips and 1 g of copper chips (or another approved accelerator)
and follow the procedure for determining the total carbon.
10.1.4 Combined Carbon—To obtain the amount of com-
bined carbon, subtract the amount of graphitic carbon from the
total carbon.
10.1.5 Alternative Method of Determining Combined
Carbon—The combined carbon may be a metallographic
estimate of the carbon in the material.
11. Inspection
11.1 Unless otherwise specified, inspection of parts supplied
on contract shall be made by the purchaser at the destination.
12. Rejection
12.1 Rejection based on tests made in accordance with this
specification shall be reported in writing to the manufacturer
within 30 days of receipt of shipment; however, the rejected
parts should not be returned without authorization from the
producer.
13. Certification
13.1 A certification based on the manufacturer’s quality
control that the material conforms to the requirements of this
specification shall be the basis of shipment of the material. A
certificate covering the conformance of the material to these
specifications shall be furnished by the manufacturer upon
request of the purchaser.
14. Keywords
14.1 density; iron graphite bearings; K strength constant; oil
content; oil-impregnated; porosity
2
 B 782
APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. EXPLANATORY INFORMATION

X1.1 Design Information TABLE X1.2 Dimensional Tolerances

X1.1.1 In calculating permissible loads, the operating con- NOTE 1—This table is intended for bearings with a 3 to 1 maximum
ditions, housing conditions, and construction should be con- length to inside diameter ratio and a 20 to 1 maximum length to wall
sidered. In general, this material has less resistance to seizure thickness ratio. Bearings having greater ratios than these are not covered
by the table.
and corrosion than copper-base material. The maximum static
bearing load should not exceed 11 000-psi (76-MPa (N/mm2)) Inside Diameter and Outside
Total Diameter ToleranceA
Diameter
Grade 1 or 15 000-psi (104-MPa (N/mm2)) Grade 2 of pro-
Inside Diameter Outside Diameter
jected bearing area (length times inside diameter of bearing) in. mm
for this material. This figure is 75 % of the value for the in. mm in. mm

compression deformation limit (yield strength permanent set of Up to 0.760 up to 19.31 0.001 0.025 0.001 0.025
0.761 to 1.510 19.32 to 38.36 0.0015 0.025 0.0015 0.04
0.001 in. (0.025 mm) for specimens 11⁄8in. (28.6 mm) in 1.511 to 2.510 38.37 to 63.76 0.002 0.05 0.002 0.05
diameter and 1 in. (25.4 mm) in length) as determined in 2.511 to 3.010 63.77 to 76.46 0.003 0.08 0.002 0.08
accordance with Test Methods E 9. 3.011 to 4.010 76.47 to 101.86 0.004 0.10 0.004 0.10
4.011 to 5.010 101.87 to 127.26 0.005 0.13 0.005 0.13
5.011 to 6.010 127.27 to 152.65 0.006 0.15 0.006 0.15
X1.2 Permissible Loads
Length Total Length ToleranceB
X1.2.1 Permissible loads for various operating conditions
in. mm in. mm
are given in Table X1.1.
Up to 1.495 up to 37.97 0.010 0.25
X1.3 Dimensional Tolerances 1.496 to 1.990 37.98 to 50.54 0.015 0.38
1.991 to 2.990 50.55 to 75.96 0.020 0.51
X1.3.1 Commercial dimensional tolerances are given in 2.991 to 4.985 75.97 to 126.61 0.030 0.76
Table X1.2. Concentricity
Outside Diameter Wall Thickness, max
ToleranceC
X1.4 Press Fits in. mm in. mm in. mm
X1.4.1 Plain cylindrical journal bearings are commonly Up to 1.510 up to 38.36 up to 0.355 9.02 0.003 0.08
installed by press fitting the bearing into a housing with an 1.511 to 2.010 38.37 to 51.06 up to 0.505 12.83 0.004 0.10
2.011 to 4.010 51.07 to 101.86 up to 1.010 25.65 0.005 0.13
insertion arbor. For housings rigid enough to withstand the 4.011 to 5.010 101.87 to 127.26 up to 1.510 38.35 0.006 0.15
press fit without appreciable distortion and for bearings with 5.011 to 6.010 127.27 to 152.65 up to 2.010 51.05 0.007 0.18
wall thickness approximately one eighth of the bearing outside A
Total tolerance on the inside diameter and outside diameter is a minus
diameter, the press fits shown in Table X1.3 are recommended. tolerance only.
B
Total tolerance is split into plus and minus.
C
X1.5 Running Clearance Total indicator reading.

X1.5.1 Proper running clearance for sintered bearings de-

TABLE X1.3 Recommended Press Fits
pends to a great extent on the particular application. Therefore,
Outside Diameter of Bearing Press Fit
only minimum recommended clearances are listed in Table
X1.4. It is assumed that ground steel shafting will be used and Min Max
in. mm
that all bearings will be oil impregnated. in. mm in. mm
Up to 0.760 up to 19.31 0.001 0.025 0.003 0.08
0.761 to 1.510 19.32 to 38.36 0.0015 0.04 0.004 0.10
TABLE X1.1 Permissible Loads 1.511 to 2.510 38.37 to 63.76 0.002 0.05 0.005 0.13
Permissible Loads, psi (MPa 2.511 to 3.010 63.77 to 76.45 0.002 0.05 0.006 0.15
Shaft Velocity, ft/min (m/min) (N/mm2)) Over 3.010 over 76.45 0.002 0.05 0.007 0.18
Grade 1, 2
Slow and intermittent 3600 (25)
25 (7.6) 1800 (12)
50 to 100 (15.2 to 30.4), incl 450 (3.1) X1.6 Flange and Thrust Bearing Specifications
Over 100 to 150 (30.4 to 45.7), incl 300 (2.1)
Over 150 to 200 (45.7 to 61), incl 225 (1.6) X1.6.1 Diameter and thickness specifications for flange and
A
Over 200 (61) thrust washers are shown in Table X1.5.
A
For shaft velocities over 200 ft/min, the permissible loads may be calculated as
follows: X1.7 Lubrication
P 5 50 000/V
X1.7.1 It was found that a circulating-type oil containing
where:
P = safe load, psi of projected area and
rust and oxidation inhibitors is the most desirable type of oil to
V = shaft velocity, ft/min (m/min). be used. The viscosity should be specified by the user in
accordance with the application.

3
 B 782
TABLE X1.4 Running Clearances
Shaft Size Clearance, min
in. mm in. mm
Up to 0.760 up to 19.31 0.0005 0.01
0.761 to 1.510 19.32 to 38.36 0.001 0.025
1.511 to 2.510 38.37 to 63.76 0.0015 0.04
Over 2.510 over 63.76 0.002 0.05

TABLE X1.5 Flange and Thrust Bearings Diameter and

Thickness TolerancesA
Flange Bearings, Flange Diameter Tolerances
Diameter Range Standard Special
in. mm in. mm in. mm
0 to 11⁄2 0 to 38 60.005 60.13 60.0025 60.06
Over 11⁄2 to 3 39 to 76 60.010 60.25 60.005 60.13
Over 3 to 6 77 to 152 60.025 60.64 60.010 60.25
Flange Bearings, Flange Thickness Tolerances
Diameter Range Standard Special
in. mm in. mm in. mm
0 to 11⁄2 0 to 38 60.005 60.13 60.0025 60.06
Over 11⁄2 to 3 39 to 76 60.010 60.25 60.007 60.18
Over 3 to 6 77 to 152 60.015 60.38 60.010 60.25
Thrust Bearings (1⁄4 in. (6.35 mm) Thickness Tolerances, All DiametersB
Standard Special
in. mm in. mm
60.005 60.13 60.0025 60.06
Parallelism on Faces, max
Diameter Range Standard Special
in. mm in. mm in. mm
0 to 11⁄2 0 to 38 0.005 0.13 0.003 0.08
Over 11⁄2 to 3 39 to 76 0.007 0.18 0.005 0.13
Over 3 to 6 77 to 152 0.010 0.25 0.007 0.18
A
Standard and special tolerances are specified for diameters, thickness, and
parallelism. Special tolerances should not be specified unless required since they
require additional or secondary operations and, therefore, are costlier.
B
Outside diameter tolerances same as for flange bearings.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 781 – 93a (Reapproved 1999)
Standard Guide for
Silver-Cadmium Oxide Contact Material1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 781; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This guide provides guidelines for users and manufac-
turers of silver-cadmium oxide material produced in strip, rod,
wire, and part form for electrical contact applications.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety problems, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.3 It is the responsibility of the user to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/materials as pro-
vided by the manufacturer.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 311 Test Method for Density of Cemented Carbides2
B 476 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought
Precious Metal Electrical Contact Materials3
C 914 Test Method for Bulk Density and Volume of Solid
Refractories by Wax Immersion4
NOTE 1—Test Method B 311 is applicable to fully dense forms.
Specification B 476 is applicable to strip, rod, or wire only. Test Method
C 914 is applicable to forms less than 99 % dense.
3. Terminology
3.1 lot—(usage involving discrete manufactured parts)—all
parts of the same form, and dimensions, from the same alloy
melt or batch of particulate (if manufactured by consolidation),
processed under the same conditions, and submitted for inspec-
tion at the same time.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 Silver-cadmium oxide is a popular contact material that
has been used in a wide range of applications in switches,
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-2 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B2.05 on Precious Metals.
Current edition approved Aug. 15, 1993. Published October 1993. Originally
published as B 781 – 87. Last previous edition B 781 – 93.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 15.01.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
relays and contactors for switching lamps, motors and resistive
loads. Silver-cadmium oxide is a composite material consisting
of a metal matrix, silver, with a metal oxide, cadmium oxide,
dispersed throughout the matrix. Compositions of up to 30 %
cadmium are made, but most applications use silver-cadmium
oxide in the range of 10 to 15 % cadmium oxide by weight.
Several different processes are used for manufacturing silver-
cadmium oxide material and it should be understood that the
manufacturing method has an influence on the properties of the
material such as arc erosion resistance, welding resistance, arc
mobility and contact resistance. Since the performance of
contacts in a device is dependent on numerous factors outside
the contact itself (opening speed, closing speed, contact pres-
sure, contact bounce and many more device parameters), the
guide cannot ensure performance in specific applications.
4.2 Arc erosion resistance and welding resistance are im-
proved by the addition of cadmium oxide to the silver matrix.
The contact resistance is raised by this addition but still is low.
Cadmium oxide and silver do not alloy so the silver matrix
retains its high conductivity. Silver-cadmium oxide contacts
are used in current ranges of a few amperes to several hundred
amperes.
4.3 Silver-cadmium oxide contact material is available as
wire, silver-clad wire, sheet, strip, toplay, inlay and overlay
sheet or strip, discrete contact parts, brazed contact assemblies,
solid and composite rivet contacts and clad contact tapes.
4.4 Materials with higher cadmium oxide contents have
lower material costs but may have higher processing costs due
to lower formability.
5. Manufacture
5.1 Since the manufacturing method has a significant influ-
ence on the properties and microstructure of silver-cadmium
oxide materials, it is important to understand some basic
information on the types of manufacturing. Silver-cadmium
oxide manufacturing can be first divided in two categories:
Internal Oxidation and Power Metallurgy.
5.1.1 Internal oxidation means that the cadmium oxide
particles are formed by diffusion of oxygen into the silver alloy
to combine with cadmium atoms to form cadmium oxide
particles. This process can be further divided into the catego-
ries of post and pre-oxidized materials. The post-oxidized
process consists of performing the diffusion process after the
finished parts have been formed. The pre-oxidized process
 B 781 – 93a (1999)
consists of oxidation of slugs and the forming of wire or strip TABLE 1 Suggested Chemistries and Theoretical Densities
from the oxidized slugs and then forming the final parts. The
86.5 Silver/
cadmium oxide particle size distribution is dependent upon the 90 Silver/10
13.5
85 Silver/15 80 Silver/20
grain structure of the silver cadmium alloy, any additive Cadmium- Cadmium- Cadmium-
Cadmium-
Oxide Oxide Oxide
concentration, and oxidation conditions (for example, tempera- Oxide
ture, oxygen partial pressure). Chemistry
Cadmium-Oxide 10.0 6 1.0 13.5 6 1.0 15.0 6 1.0 20.0 6 1.0
5.1.2 For powder metallurgy silver-cadmium oxide, the weight %
material is made from a blend of silver and cadmium oxide Silver weight % , 89.0 85.5 84.0 79.0
powder or other cadmium compounds such as cadmium min
Other elements (see 6.2)
carbonate, which can be thermally decomposed to cadmium Theoretical Densities at Nominal Composition:
oxide in a subsequent step. There are two basic types of this Mg/m3 10.2 10.1 10.1 9.92
process, one in which the contacts are pressed and sintered and troy oz./in.3 5.37 5.32 5.30 5.23
repressed into the final shape, and the other where a billet is
made from blended powder which is then formed into strip and
wire and made into the final contact shapes. 6.2.1 A wide variety of chemical additives have been made
5.1.3 All of these processes have many variations. There are to silver-cadmium oxide materials for processing and perfor-
also hybrid processes such as internally oxidized powders mance purposes. The merits of these additions remain a point
which are then processed by powder metallurgy. The user of contention. Additionally, various impurities may remain in
should obtain the basic information as to the type of material these materials from raw materials or processing which have
being purchased. been found to be either detrimental or helpful depending on the
5.1.4 For purposes of attachment to bare metal supports, residual level and the individual application. Chemical require-
silver-cadmium oxide contact material is often produced with a ments for such elements and analytical methods to be em-
conductive or brazable layer of material or backing. Incorpo- ployed shall be mutually agreed to by the producer and user.
ration of such a layer is often an integral part of the silver- 6.3 No substantive change shall be made to additives or
cadmium oxide manufacturing process. impurities without notification to and approval by the user.
5.1.5 Silver-cadmium oxide materials vary from full theo-
retical density to about 95 % of theoretical density depending 7. Other Properties
on the specific manufacturing method. 7.1 Mechanical properties of silver-cadmium oxide contact
5.1.6 The flexibility of the silver-cadmium oxide materials materials are very dependent on the manufacturing method.
system allows many additional manufacturing methods to be For this reason, only guideline properties are given.
introduced, and those mentioned here are not a comprehensive 7.1.1 Table 2 indicates guideline properties for some dis-
listing. The cadmium-oxide particle size, distribution, and crete part contacts of popular silver-cadmium oxide composi-
uniformity in combination with the contact density and chemi- tions in the annealed state.
cal composition (see 6.2 Additives and Impurities) determine 7.1.2 Properties in coined, repressed, headed, or other states
the performance characteristics of the electrical contacts in will vary due to the effects of coldworking. Additives and
service. It may be of importance to specify the type of oxidation method also alter these properties.
microstructure, in which case, it is recommended that photo- 7.1.3 Guideline properties are given in Table 3 for popular
graphs of acceptable microstructures be agreed upon between silver-cadmium oxide compositions in wire and strip form.
the producer and the user, as well as photographs illustrating 7.2 Specific properties and tolerances shall be established
unacceptable types of microstructures. It is highly recom- and agreed to between the producer and user for any particular
mended that these attributes be considered in making selection commercial designation of silver-cadmium oxide material and
or replacement decisions and that full qualification tests be temper required.
performed by the user or purchaser including functional
electrical tests for new or altered selections and manufacturing 8. Sampling and Inspection
sources. 8.1 Material or parts furnished under this guide shall be
5.2 No substantive change shall be made in the manufac- inspected by the producer listed as follows. Results of such
turing processes or materials, or both, of the silver-cadmium inspection shall conform to values agreed to between the
oxide contact material without notification to and approval by producer and user.
the user. 8.1.1 Strip and Wire Procured to Temper shall be sampled
and tested in accordance with Specification B 476 (when
6. Chemical Composition specified and applicable).
6.1 Material produced under this guide shall meet the 8.1.1.1 Such other properties as are required to verify the
composition of silver and cadmium oxide agreed upon by the quality of the material produced under this guide.
vendor and user. Popular compositions and suggested toler- 8.1.2 Discrete Contact Parts produced under this guide
ances are given in Table 1. In the case of material supplied with shall be sampled and tested on a lot basis. For the purpose of
a distinct brazable or conductive backing, such backing shall this guideline, a lot is defined in 3.1.
not be considered to be included in the silver-cadmium oxide 8.1.2.1 For Dimensional Conformance.
material composition. 8.1.2.2 Other Properties as are required to verify the
6.2 Additives and Impurities: quality of the material produced under this guide.

2
 B 781 – 93a (1999)
TABLE 2 Typical Part Properties Made by Powder Metallurgy 9. Rejection and Rehearing
(AnnealedA State)
9.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of this
NOTE 1—Due to lack of commercially available information, some
guide may be rejected. Rejection should be reported to the
values are not listed.
producer or supplier promptly within 30 days of the receipt of
90 Silver/10 86.5 Silver/13.5 85 Silver/15 80 Silver/20 the shipment and in writing. When results of the test are not
Cadmium- Cadmium- Ox- Cadmium- Ox- Cadmium- Ox- satisfactory, the producer or supplier may make claim for a
Oxide ide ide ide
rehearing.
Type A: Parts processed so as to be “full dense.”

Density: 10. Keywords

Mg/m3, min 9.96 9.89 9.82 9.73
troy oz/in.3 5.25 5.21 5.17 5.13 10.1 cadmium oxide; cadmium; contacts; internal oxida-
Electrical
resistivity:
tion; powder metallurgy; silver-cadmium oxide; silver;
nVm, min 19.2 20.3 21.0 22.4 wrought
nVm, max 23.9 23.9 26.9 27.4
Electrical
conductivity:
% IACS, min 72 72 64 63
% IACS, max 90 85 82 77
Hardness:B
HR30T, min 17 20 20 25
HR30T, max 51 51 52 53

Type B: Parts processed to conventional repressed densities and annealed.

Density:
Mg/m3, min 9.46 — 9.33 —
troy oz/in.3 4.98 — 4.92 —
Electrical
resistivity:
nVm, min 20.3 — 24.6 —
nVm, max 24.6 — 34.5 —
Electrical
conductivity:
% IACS, min 70 — 50 —
% IACS, max 85 — 70 —
HardnessB
HR30T, min 43 — 28 —
HR30T, max 57 — 45 —
A
Annealed state achieved by heating 600°C min, for 20 min minimum.
B
Ranges indicate values reported by many different manufacturing methods
and are much broader than would be expected for any specific product.

3
 B 781 – 93a (1999)
TABLE 3 Properties (Strip and Wire)

NOTE 1—Due to a lack of commercially available information, some values are not listed. %IACS is volume basis and “red,” equals reduction.

90 Silver/10 86.5 Silver/13.5 85 Silver/15 80 Silver/20

Cadmium-Oxide Cadmium-Oxide Cadmium-Oxide Cadmium-Oxide
Density:
Mg/m3, min 9.99 9.89 9.86 9.73
troy oz/in. 3 5.26 5.21 5.19 5.13
Typical Ranges Typical Ranges Typical Ranges Typical Ranges
min max min max min max min max
Wire:
Ultimate tensile:
Annealed, MPa 207 310 221 331 241 345 276 350
(0% red), ksi 30 45 32 48 35 50 40 54
1 / 4 hard, MPa 290 380 303 414 317 427 331 440
(21 % red), ksi 42 55 44 60 46 62 48 65
hard, MPa 345 448 355 464 380 496 390 496
(60 % red), ksi 50 65 50 68 55 72 55 72
Elongation:
Annealed % (2 in.) (0 % red) 25 — 14 — 14 — 13 —
1 / 4 hard % (2 in.) 3 — 3 — 2 — 1 —
(21 % red)
hard % (2 in.) 1 — — — — — — —
(60 % red)
Electrical resistivity:
Annealed nVm — 19.2 — 20.8 — — — —
(0 % red)
1 / 4 hard nVm — 19.2 — 21.6 — — — —
(21 % red)
hard nVm — 19.2 — — — — — —
(60 % red)
Electrical conductivity:
Annealed MS/m 43.5 — 39.4 — — — — —
(0 % red)% IACS 75 — 68 — — — — —
1 / 4 hard MS/m 41.8 — 37.7 — — — —
(21 % red)% IACS 72 — 65 — — — — —
hard MS/m 40.0 — — — — — — —
(60 % red)% IACS 69 — — — — — — —
Strip:
Hardness:
Annealed HR30T 20 51 23 52 25 52 28 55
(0 % red)
1 / 4 hard HR30T 45 65 45 65 46 66 48 70
(11 % red)
hard HR30T 50 72 52 72 53 73 55 75
(37 % red)
Electrical resistivity:
Annealed nVm — 19.2 — — — 21.6 — —
(0 % red)
1 / 4 hard nVm — 20.3 — — — 21.6 — —
(11 % red)
hard nVm — 20.8 — — — 21.8 — —
(37 % red)
Electrical conductivity:
Annealed MS/m 41.8 — — — 37.7 — — —
(0 % red)% IACS 72 — — — 65 — — —
1 / 4 hard MS/m 40.6 — — — 37.1 — — —
(11 % red)% IACS 70 — — — 64 — — —
hard MS/m 40 — — — 36.5 — — —
(37 % red)% IACS 69 — — — 63 — —

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

4
 B 781 – 93a (1999)

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 783 – 04
Standard Specification for
Materials for Ferrous Powder Metallurgy (P/M) Structural
Parts1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 783; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers a variety of ferrous P/M
structural materials and includes a classification system or
material designation code. The classification system used in
this specification includes chemical composition, minimum
tensile; 0.2 % offset yield strength for as-sintered materials and
minimum ultimate tensile strength for heat-treated materials
(sinter hardened or quenched and tempered). It also contains
minimum density and maximum coercive field strength re-
quirements for iron-phosphorus materials. Material classifica-
tion is governed by the designation code which is explained in
Appendix X1. The data provided display typical mechanical
properties achieved under commercial manufacturing proce-
dures. Physical and mechanical property performance charac-
teristics can change as a result of subsequent processing steps
beyond those designated in this standard. These changes could
improve or degrade the properties.
1.2 Property values stated in inch-pound units are the
standard. Conversion factors to SI units may be approximate.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2
A 839 Specification for Iron-Phosphorus Powder Metal-
lurgy (P/M) Parts for Soft Magnetic Applications
B 243 Terminology of Powder Metallurgy
B 328 Test Method for Density, Oil Content, and Intercon-
nected Porosity of Sintered Powder Metal Structural Parts
and Oil-Impregnated Bearings
B 528 Test Method for Transverse Rupture Strength of
Metal Powder Specimens
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
E 1019 Test Methods for Determination of Carbon, Nitro-
gen and Oxygen in Iron, Nickel, and Cobalt Alloys
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B09 on Metal
Powders and Metal Powder Products and is the direct responsibility of Subcom-
mittee B09.05 on Structural Parts.
Current edition approved May 1, 2004. Published June 2004. Originally
approved in 1988. Last previous edition approved in 1999 as B 783 – 99e1.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
2.2 Other Standard:
MPIF Standard 35 Materials Standard for P/M Structural
Parts3
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Definitions of powder metallurgy terms
can be found in Terminology B 243. Additional descriptive
information is available in the Related Materials section of Vol
02.05 of the Annual Book of ASTM Standards.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Materials for parts conforming to this specification shall
be ordered by material designation code.
4.2 Orders for parts under this specification may include the
following information:
4.2.1 Certification, if required (see Section 11),
4.2.2 Test methods and mechanical properties other than
strength (see 8.2 and 8.3),
4.2.3 Density (see 7.1),
4.2.4 Porosity or oil content (see 7.2), and
4.2.5 Special packaging if required.
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 Structural parts shall be made by pressing and sintering
metal powders with or without subsequent heat treating. Parts
may also be made by repressing or repressing and resintering
sintered parts, if necessary, with or without subsequent heat
treatment to produce finished parts conforming to the require-
ments of this specification.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 The material shall conform to the requirements of Table
1.
6.2 Chemical analysis, if required, shall be made by meth-
ods agreed upon by the producer and the user.
6.3 Various analytical test methods are used to determine
the chemical composition (see ASTM standards for the appro-
priate test methods) of P/M materials. Combustion-infra-red
3
Available from MPIF, 105 College Road East, Princeton, NJ 08540.
 B 783 – 04
TABLE 1 Chemical Composition Requirements

Chemical Composition, Weight %

Material Molyb- Chro- Man- Phos- Nitro- Colum-
Iron Copper Carbon Nickel Silicon Sulfur Oxygen Other
Designation denum mium ganese phorus gen bium
F-0000 Min Bal. ... 0.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
F-0000 Max Bal. ... 0.3 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

F-0005 Min Bal. ... 0.3 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
F-0005 Max Bal. ... 0.6 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

F-0008 Min Bal. ... 0.6 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
F-0008 Max Bal. ... 0.9 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FY-4500 Min Bal. ... 0.00 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.40 0.00 ... 0.00 ...
FY-4500 Max Bal. ... 0.03 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.50 0.01 ... 0.10 0.5

FY-8000 Min Bal. ... 0.00 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.75 0.00 ... 0.00 …
FY-8000 Max Bal. ... 0.03 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.85 0.01 ... 0.10 0.5

FX-1000 Min Bal. 8.0 0.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FX-1000 Max Bal. 14.9 0.3A ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FX-1005 Min Bal. 8.0 0.3A ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FX-1005 Max Bal. 14.9 0.6A ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FX-1008 Min Bal. 8.0 0.6A ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FX-1008 Max Bal. 14.9 0.9A ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FX-2000 Min Bal. 15.0 0.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FX-2000 Max Bal. 25.0 0.3A ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FX-2005 Min Bal. 15.0 0.3A ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FX-2005 Max Bal. 25.0 0.6A ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FX-2008 Min Bal. 15.0 0.6A ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FX-2008 Max Bal. 25.0 0.9A ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FC-0200 Min Bal. 1.5 0.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FC-0200 Max Bal. 3.9 0.3 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FC-0205 Min Bal. 1.5 0.3 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FC-0205 Max Bal. 3.9 0.6 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FC-0208 Min Bal. 1.5 0.6 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FC-0208 Max Bal. 3.9 0.9 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FC-0505 Min Bal. 4.0 0.3 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FC-0505 Max Bal. 6.0 0.6 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FC-0508 Min Bal. 4.0 0.6 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FC-0508 Max Bal. 6.0 0.9 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FC-0808 Min Bal. 7.0 0.6 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FC-0808 Max Bal. 9.0 0.9 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FC-1000 Min Bal. 9.0 0.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FC-1000 Max Bal. 11.0 0.3 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FN-0200 Min Bal. 0.0 0.0 1.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FN-0200 Max Bal. 2.5 0.3 3.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FN-0205 Min Bal. 0.0 0.3 1.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FN-0205 Max Bal. 2.5 0.6 3.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FN-0208 Min Bal. 0.0 0.6 1.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FN-0208 Max Bal. 2.5 0.9 3.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FN-0405 Min Bal. 0.0 0.3 3.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FN-0405 Max Bal. 2.0 0.6 5.5 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FN-0408 Min Bal. 0.0 0.6 3.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FN-0408 Max Bal. 2.0 0.9 5.5 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FL-4205 Min Bal. ... 0.4 0.35 0.50 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FL-4205 Max Bal. ... 0.7 0.55 0.85 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

2
 B 783 – 04

TABLE 1 Continued
Chemical Composition, Weight %
Material Molyb- Chro- Man- Phos- Nitro- Colum-
Iron Copper Carbon Nickel Silicon Sulfur Oxygen Other
Designation denum mium ganese phorus gen bium
FL-4605 Min Bal. ... 0.4 1.70 0.40 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FL-4605 Max Bal. ... 0.7 2.00 1.10 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FL-4405 Min Bal. ... 0.4 ... 0.75 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FL-4405 Max Bal. ... 0.7 ... 0.95 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FLN-4205 Min Bal. ... 0.4 1.35B 0.49 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FLN-4205 Max Bal. ... 0.7 2.50B 0.85 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FLN2-4405 Min Bal. ... 0.4 1.00 0.65 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FLN2-4405 Max Bal. ... 0.7 3.00 0.95 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FLN4-4405 Min Bal. ... 0.4 3.00 0.65 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FLN4-4405 Max Bal. ... 0.7 5.00 0.95 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FLN6-4405 Min Bal. ... 0.4 5.00 0.65 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FLN6-4405 Max Bal. ... 0.7 7.00 0.95 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FLNC-4405 Min Bal. 1.0 0.4 1.00 0.65 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FLNC-4405 Max Bal. 3.0 0.7 3.00 0.95 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FLN2-4408 Min Bal. ... 0.6 1.0 0.65 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FLN2-4408 Max Bal. ... 0.9 3.0 0.95 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FLN4-4408 Min Bal. ... 0.6 3.0 0.65 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FLN4-4408 Max Bal. ... 0.9 5.0 0.95 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FLN6-4408 Min Bal. ... 0.6 5.0 0.65 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FLN6-4408 Max Bal. ... 0.9 7.0 0.95 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FLN-4608 Min Bal. ... 0.6 3.6C 0.39 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FLN-4608 Max Bal. ... 0.9 5.0C 1.10 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FLC-4608 Min Bal. 1.0 0.6 1.6 0.39 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FLC-4608 Max Bal. 3.0 0.9 2.0 1.10 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FLC-4908 Min Bal. 1.0 0.6 ... 1.30 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FLC-4908 Max Bal. 3.0 0.9 ... 1.70 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FLNC-4408 Min Bal. 1.0 0.6 1.0 0.65 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FLNC-4408 Max Bal. 3.0 0.9 3.0 0.95 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FD-0200 Min Bal. 1.3 0.0 1.55 0.4 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FD-0200 Max Bal. 1.7 0.3 1.95 0.6 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FD-0205 Min Bal. 1.3 0.3 1.55 0.4 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FD-0205 Max Bal. 1.7 0.6 1.95 0.6 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FD-0208 Min Bal. 1.3 0.6 1.55 0.4 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FD-0208 Max Bal. 1.7 0.9 1.95 0.6 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FD-0405 Min Bal. 1.3 0.3 3.60 0.4 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FD-0405 Max Bal. 1.7 0.6 4.40 0.6 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

FD-0408 Min Bal. 1.3 0.6 3.60 0.4 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
FD-0408 Max Bal. 1.7 0.9 4.40 0.6 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0

SS-303N1,N2 Min Bal. ... 0.00 8.0 ... 17.0 0.0 0.0 0.15 0.00 0.20 ... ... ...
SS-303N1,N2 Max Bal. ... 0.15 13.0 ... 19.0 2.0 1.0 0.30 0.20 0.60 ... ... 2.0

SS-303L Min Bal. ... 0.00 8.0 ... 17.0 0.0 0.0 0.15 0.00 0.00 ... ... ...
SS-303L Max Bal. ... 0.03 13.0 ... 19.0 2.0 1.0 0.30 0.20 0.03 ... ... 2.0

SS-304N1,N2 Min Bal. ... 0.00 8.0 ... 18.0 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.20 ... ... ...
SS-304N1,N2 Max Bal. ... 0.08 12.0 ... 20.0 2.0 1.0 0.03 0.04 0.60 ... ... 2.0

SS-304H,L Min Bal. ... 0.00 8.0 ... 18.0 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 ... ... ...
SS-304H,L Max Bal. ... 0.03 12.0 ... 20.0 2.0 1.0 0.03 0.04 0.03 ... ... 2.0

SS-316N1,N2 Min Bal. ... 0.00 10.0 2.0 16.0 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.20 ... ... ...
SS-316N1,N2 Max Bal. ... 0.08 14.0 3.0 18.0 2.0 1.0 0.03 0.04 0.60 ... ... 2.0

3
 B 783 – 04

TABLE 1 Continued
Chemical Composition, Weight %
Material Molyb- Chro- Man- Phos- Nitro- Colum-
Iron Copper Carbon Nickel Silicon Sulfur Oxygen Other
Designation denum mium ganese phorus gen bium
SS-316H,L Min Bal. ... 0.00 10.0 2.0 16.0 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 ... ... ...
SS-316H,L Max Bal. ... 0.03 14.0 3.0 18.0 2.0 1.0 0.03 0.04 0.03 ... ... 2.0

SS-409L Min Bal. … 0.00 ... ... 10.50 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 83 ... ...
%C
SS-409L Max Bal. ... 0.03 ... ... 11.75 1.0 1.0 0.03 0.04 0.03 0.80 ... 2.0

SS-409LED Min Bal. ... 0.00 0.0 ... 11.50 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 83 ... ...
%C
SS-409LED Max Bal. ... 0.03 0.5 ... 13.50 1.0 1.0 0.03 0.04 0.03 0.80 ... 2.0

SS-410 Min Bal. ... 0.00 ... ... 11.50 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.20 ... ... ...
SS-410 Max Bal. ... 0.25 ... ... 13.50 1.0 1.0 0.03 0.04 0.60 ... ... 2.0

SS-410L Min Bal. ... 0.00 ... ... 11.50 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 ... ... ...
SS-410L Max Bal. ... 0.03 ... ... 13.50 1.0 1.0 0.03 0.04 0.03 ... ... 2.0

SS-430N2 Min Bal. ... 0.00 ... ... 16.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.20 ... ... ...
SS-430N2 Max Bal. ... 0.08 ... ... 18.00 1.0 1.0 0.03 0.04 0.60 ... ... 2.0

SS-430L Min Bal. ... 0.00 ... ... 16.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 ... ... ...
SS- 430L Max Bal. ... 0.03 ... ... 18.00 1.0 1.0 0.03 0.04 0.03 ... ... 2.0

SS-434N2 Min Bal. ... 0.00 ... 0.75 16.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.20 ... ... ...
SS-434N2 Max Bal. ... 0.08 ... 1.25 18.00 1.0 1.0 0.03 0.04 0.60 ... ... 2.0

SS-434L Min Bal. ... 0.00 ... 0.75 16.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 ... ... ...
SS-434L Max Bal. ... 0.03 ... 1.25 18.00 1.0 1.0 0.03 0.04 0.03 ... ... 2.0
A
Carbon, on basis of iron only, may be a metallographic estimate.
B
At least 1 % of the nickel is admixed as elemental powder.
C
At least 2 % of the nickel is admixed as elemental powder.
D
LE = L grade with extended chemical composition.

NOTE—For the Stainless Steels: N1—Nitrogen alloyed. Good strength, low elongation. N2—Nitrogen alloyed. High strength, medium elongation.
L—Low carbon. Lower strength, highest elongation. HT—Martensitic grade, heat treated. Highest strength.

absorption and inert gas fusion methods (Test Methods E 1019)
are used for the specific elements of carbon, nitrogen, oxygen
and sulfur.
6.4 The Chemical Composition Requirements Table (Table
1) designates the limits of metallurgically combined carbon for
each alloy. The combined carbon level can be estimated
metallographically for sintered P/M steels. When a clear
pearlite to ferrite ratio cannot be estimated metallographically,
total carbon can be determined using analytical methods (Test
Methods E 1019). This would include very low carbon levels
(<0.08 %), heat treated steels and materials made from preal-
loyed base powders or diffusion alloyed powders. When
reporting carbon levels, the report should identify whether the
carbon is metallurgically combined carbon or total carbon and
the test method should be identified. While total carbon will
approximate the combined carbon in many materials, free
graphite and other carbonaceous material will raise the total
carbon level above the level of combined carbon, possibly
causing the total carbon content to exceed the combined carbon
level specified for the material.
7. Physical Properties
7.1 Density:
7.1.1 The user and producer may agree upon a minimum
average density for the part or minimum densities for specific
regions of the part, or both, except soft magnetic materials,
which require a minimum average density as part of the
material specification.
7.1.2 Density shall be determined in accordance with Test
Method B 328.
7.2 Porosity:
7.2.1 The producer and the user may also agree upon a
minimum volume oil content for parts that are to be self-
lubricating.
7.2.2 Porosity or oil content, or both, shall be determined in
accordance with Test Method B 328.
7.2.3 The producer and the user may agree upon a func-
tional test for porosity in parts that are to be self-lubricating, or
for permeability where fluid flow must be restricted.
8. Mechanical Properties
8.1 The guaranteed properties shown in Tables 2-11 are
included in the suffix of the material designation code. The
code is adopted from MPIF Standard 35. All tensile strengths
are read as 103 psi, and are defined as the 0.2 % offset yield
strength for as-sintered materials and the ultimate tensile
strength for heat-treated materials (sinter hardened or quenched
and tempered). Iron-phosphorus materials (Table 3) contain an
alphanumeric suffix and are an exception to this rule. The
iron-phosphorus suffix is related to the minimum density and

4
 B 783 – 04
TABLE 2 Minimum Tensile Strength for Iron and Carbon Steel TABLE 4 Minimum Tensile Strength for Copper Infiltrated Iron
Minimum Strength and Steel
Minimum Strength
Material Designation Code Yield Ultimate
3 A Material Designation Code Yield Ultimate
10 psi
103 psiA
F-0000-10 10 ...
-15 15 ... FX-1000-25 25 ...
-20 20 ... FX-1005-40 40 ...
F-0005-15 15 ... FX-1005-110HT ... 110
-20 20 ... FX-1008-50 50 ...
-25 25 ... FX-1008-110HT ... 110
F-0005-50HT ... 50 FX-2000-25 25 ...
-60HT ... 60 FX-2005-45 45 ...
-70HT ... 70 FX-2005-90HT ... 90
F-0008-20 20 ... FX-2008-60 60 ...
-25 25 ... FX-2008-90HT ... 90
-30 30 ... A
-35 35 ... 103 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm2)
F-0008-55HT ... 55
-65HT ... 65 TABLE 5 Minimum Tensile Strength for Iron-Copper and
-75HT ... 75
Copper Steel
-85HT ... 85
A Minimum Strength
103 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm2)
Material Designation Code Yield Ultimate

TABLE 3 Minimum Density and Maximum Coercive Field 103 psiA

Strength for Iron-Phosphorus FC-0200-15 15 ...
Maximum -18 18 ...
Minimum -21 21 ...
Coercive
Material Designation Code Density -24 24 ...
Field Strength
FC-0205-30 30 ...
g/cm3 Oe -35 35 ...
A
FY-4500 -20V 6.7 2.0 -40 40 ...
-20W 6.9 2.0 -45 45 ...
-17W 6.9 1.7 FC-0205-60HT ... 60
-20X 7.1 2.0 -70HT ... 70
-17X 7.1 1.7 -80HT ... 80
-20Y 7.3 2.0 -90HT ... 90
-17Y 7.3 1.7 FC-0208-30 30 ...
-40 40 ...
FY-8000-17V 6.7 1.7 -50 50 ...
-17W 6.9 1.7 -60 60 ...
-15W 6.9 1.5 FC-0208-50HT ... 50
-17X 7.1 1.7 -65HT ... 65
-15X 7.1 1.5 -80HT ... 80
-15Y 7.3 1.5 -95HT ... 95
A
These materials are frequently used in magnetic applications and are specified FC-0505-30 30 ...
with minimum density and maximum coercive field strength. One oersted is equal -40 40 ...
to 79.6 A/m in SI units. Typical magnetic properties can be found in Specification -50 50 ...
A 839. FC-0508-40 40 ...
-50 50 ...
-60 60 ...
maximum coercive field strength and not the tensile yield FC-0808-45 45 ...
FC-1000-20 20 ...
strength (see X1.3 and X1.4 for details).
A
103 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm2)
8.1.1 Materials that are heat treated (sinter-hardened or
quenched and tempered) have the numeric value followed by
HT in the suffix. representative of the part. The following procedures are listed
8.2 The producer and the user should agree upon the method with the preferred method first.
to be used to verify the minimum strength characteristics of the 8.3.1 Transverse rupture strength (see Test Method B 528)
finished parts. Since it is usually impossible to machine tensile can be related to the minimum tensile strength by the ratio of
test specimens from these parts, alternative strength tests are typical transverse rupture strength to typical tensile strength at
advisable. An example would be measuring the force needed to the same density as the part, as shown in, or interpolated from
break teeth off a gear with the gear properly fixtured. the tables contained in Appendix X1.
8.3 If the tensile properties of the materials are required, 8.3.2 For as-sintered material, flat unmachined tension test
standard test bars shall be molded from the same mixed powder specimens (see Test Methods E 8) should be used for determi-
lot, at the density of a critical region in the part, and processed nation of 0.2 % offset yield strength.
along with the parts. When a P/M part has a larger ruling 8.3.3 For determining the tensile strength of heat-treated
section than the test bar being used, the test bar may not be (sinter-hardened or quenched and tempered) material, round

5
 B 783 – 04
TABLE 6 Minimum Tensile Strength for Iron-Nickel and TABLE 7 Minimum Tensile Strength for Low Alloy Steel
Nickel Steel Minimum Strength
Minimum Strength
Material Designation Code Yield Ultimate
Material Designation Code Yield Ultimate
103 psiA
103 psiA
FL-4205-35 35 ...
FN-0200-15 15 ... -40 40 ...
-20 20 ... -45 45 ...
-25 25 ... -50 50 ...
FN-0205-20 20 ... FL-4205-80HT ... 80
-25 25 ... -100HT ... 100
-30 30 ... -120HT ... 120
-35 35 ... -140HT ... 140
FN-0205-80HT ... 80 FL-4405-35 35 ...
-105HT ... 105 -40 40 ...
-130HT ... 130 -45 45 ...
-155HT ... 155 -50 50 ...
-180HT ... 180 FL-4405-100HT ... 100
FN-0208-30 30 ... -125HT ... 125
-35 35 ... -150HT ... 150
-40 40 ... -175HT ... 175
-45 45 ... FL-4605-35 35 ...
-50 50 ... -40 40 ...
FN-0208-80HT ... 80 -45 45 ...
-105HT ... 105 -50 50 ...
-130HT ... 130 FL-4605-80HT ... 80
-155HT ... 155 -100HT ... 100
-180HT ... 180 -120HT ... 120
FN-0405-25 25 ... -140HT ... 140
-35 35 ... FLN-4205-40 40 ...
-45 45 ... -45 45 ...
FN-0405-80HT ... 80 -50 50 ...
-105HT ... 105 -55 55 ...
-130HT ... 130 FLN-4205-80HT ... 80
-155HT ... 155 -105HT ... 105
-180HT ... 180 -140HT ... 140
FN-0408-35 35 ... -175HT ... 175
-45 45 ... FLN2-4405-45 45 ...
-55 55 ... -50 50 ...
A
-55 55 ...
103 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm2)
-60 60 ...
FLN2-4405-90HT ... 90
test bars should be machined from specially molded, as- -120HT ... 120
-160HT ... 160
sintered bars because heat treated, unmachined specimens -190HT ... 190
yield lower values. The machined tension test specimens (see A
103 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm2)
Test Methods E 8) shall be heat-treated with the production
parts.
TABLE 8 Minimum Tensile Strength for Sinter Hardened Steel
9. Sampling Minimum Strength

9.1 Lot—Unless otherwise specified, a lot shall consist of Material Designation Code Yield Ultimate
parts of the same form and dimensions made from powders of 3
10 psi A

the same composition, molded, and processed under the same FLC-4608-50HT ... 50
conditions, and submitted for inspection at one time. -70HT ... 70
-90HT ... 90
9.2 Chemical Analysis—When requested on the purchase -110HT ... 110
order, at least one sample for chemical analysis shall be taken FLNC-4408-60HT ... 60
from each lot. The analysis shall be performed by a mutually -85HT ... 85
-105HT ... 105
agreed upon method. -130HT ... 130
9.3 Mechanical Tests—The producer and the user shall A
103 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm2)
agree on a representative number of specimens for mechanical
tests.
10. Rejection and Rehearing parts were manufactured, sampled, tested, and inspected in
10.1 Parts that fail to conform to the requirements of this accordance with this specification and have been found to meet
specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported to the requirements. When specified in the purchase order or
the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. contract, a report of the test results shall be furnished.

11. Certification 12. Keywords

11.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a 12.1 ferrous powder metallurgy; ferrous structural parts;
producer’s certification shall be furnished to the user that the powder metallurgy (P/M); structural parts

6
 B 783 – 04
TABLE 9 Minimum Tensile Strength for Diffusion Alloyed Steel
Minimum Strength
Material Designation Code Yield Ultimate
103 psiA
FD-0205-45 45 ...
-50 50 ...
-55 55 ...
-60 60 ...
FD-0205-95HT ... 95
-120HT ... 120
-140HT ... 140
-160HT ... 160
FD-0208-50 50 ...
-55 55 ...
-60 60 ...
-65 65 ...
FD-0405-55 55 ...
-60 60 ...
-65 65 ...
FD-0405-100HT ... 100
-130HT ... 130
-155HT ... 155
FD-0408-50 50 ...
-55 55 ...
-60 60 ...
-65 65 ...
A
103 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm2)

TABLE 10 Minimum Tensile Strength for Austenitic

Stainless Steel
Minimum
Minimum Strength
Elongation
Material
Designation Code Yield Ultimate (in 1 in.)
3 A
10 psi %
SS-303N1-25 25 ... 0.0
SS-303N2-35 35 ... 3.0
SS-303N2-38 38 ... 6.0
SS-303L-12 12 ... 12.0
SS-303L-15 15 ... 15.0
SS-304N1-30 30 ... 0.0
SS-304N2-33 33 ... 5.0
SS-304N2-38 38 ... 8.0
SS-304L-13 13 ... 15.0
SS-304L-18 18 ... 18.0
SS-304H-20 20 ... 7.0
SS-316N1-25 25 ... 0.0
SS-316N2-33 33 ... 5.0
SS-316N2-38 38 ... 8.0
SS-316L-15 15 ... 12.0
SS-316L-22 22 ... 15.0
SS-316H-20 20 ... 5.0
A
103 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm2)

NOTE—For the Stainless Steels: N1—Nitrogen alloyed. Good strength,

low elongation. N2—Nitrogen alloyed. High strength, medium elonga-
tion. L—Low carbon. Lower strength, highest elongation.

7
 B 783 – 04
TABLE 11 Minimum Tensile Strength for Ferritic and Martensitic
Stainless Steel
Minimum
Minimum Strength
Elongation
Material
Designation Code Yield Ultimate (in 1 in.)
3 A
10 psi %
SS-410-90HT ... 90 0.0
SS-410L-20 20 ... 10.0
SS-430N2-28 28 ... 3.0
SS-430L-24 24 ... 14.0
SS-434N2-28 28 ... 4.0
SS-434L-24 24 ... 10.0
A
103 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm2)

NOTE—For the Stainless Steels: N1—Nitrogen alloyed. Good strength,

low elongation. N2—Nitrogen alloyed. High strength, medium elonga-
tion. L—Low carbon. Lower strength, highest elongation. HT—
Martensitic grade, heat treated. Highest strength.

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. USE OF THIS SPECIFICATION

X1.1 PM/Material Code Designation:
X1.1.1 The P/M material code designation or identifying
code for structural P/M parts defines a specific material as to
chemical composition and minimum strength expressed in
103 psi (6.895 MPa). For example, FC-0208-60 is a P/M
copper steel material containing nominally 2 % copper and
0.8 % combined carbon possessing a minimum yield strength
of 60 3 103 psi (60 000 psi) in the as-sintered condition.
X1.1.2 The system offers a convenient means for designat-
ing both the chemical composition and minimum strength
value of any standard P/M material. The density is given for
each standard material as one of the typical values and is no

TABLE X1.1 Iron and Carbon Steel

3 2
NOTE 1—10 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm ).
NOTE 2—1 in. = 25.4 mm.
NOTE 3—1 ft-lbf = 1.356 J.
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Tensile Properties Un- Compres- Hardness
StrengthA,C Trans- Fatigue
notched sive
Material verse Microin- Limit
Yield Charpy Yield Density
Designation Ultimate Elongation Young’s Poisson’s Rupture Macro dentation 90 %
Yield Ultimate Strength Impact Strength
Code Strength (in 1 in.) Modulus Ratio Strength (apparent) (con- Survival
(0.2 %) Energy (0.1 %)
verted)
103 psi 103 psi 103 psi % 106 psi ft-lbf 103 psi 103 psi Rockwell 103 psi g/cm3
F-0000-10 10 ... 18 13 1.5 15.0 0.25 3.0 36 16 40 HRF 7 6.1
-15 15 ... 25 18 2.5 17.5 0.25 6.0 50 18 60 N/D 10 6.7
-20 20 ... 38 25 7.0 23.5 0.28 35.0 95 19 80 14 7.3
F-0005-15 15 ... 24 18 <1.0 15.0 0.25 3.0 48 18 25 HRB 9 6.1
-20 20 ... 32 23 1.0 16.5 0.25 4.0 64 23 40 N/D 12 6.6
-25 25 ... 38 28 1.5 19.5 0.27 5.0 76 28 55 15 6.9
F-0005-50HT ... 50 60 <0.5 16.5 0.25 3.0 105 43 20 HRC 58 HRC 23 6.6
D
-60HT ... 60 70 <0.5 18.5 0.27 3.5 120 52 22 58 27 6.8
-70HT ... 70 80 <0.5 20.5 0.27 4.0 140 61 25 58 32 7.0
F-0008-20 20 ... 29 25 <0.5 12.5 0.25 2.5 51 28 35 HRB 11 5.8
-25 25 ... 35 30 <0.5 16.0 0.25 3.0 61 31 50 N/D 14 6.2
-30 30 ... 42 35 <1.0 16.5 0.25 4.0 74 31 60 17 6.6
-35 35 ... 57 40 1.0 20.5 0.27 5.0 100 36 70 25 7.0
F-0008-55HT ... 55 65 <0.5 16.5 0.25 3.0 100 70 22 HRC 60 HRC 26 6.3
D
-65HT ... 65 75 <0.5 16.5 0.25 4.0 115 80 28 60 30 6.6
-75HT ... 75 85 <0.5 19.5 0.27 4.5 130 90 32 60 34 6.9
-85HT ... 85 95 <0.5 21.5 0.27 5.0 145 100 35 60 38 7.1
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Tempering temperature for heat-treated (HT) materials: 350°F (177°C).
D
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat-treated materials.
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

8
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.2 Iron and Carbon Steel (SI)
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Tensile Properties Elastic Constants Hardness
StrengthA,C Fatigue
Com-
Material Unnotched pressive Microin- Limit
Density
Designation Ultimate Yield Elongation Young’s Poisson’s Charpy Transverse Yield Macro dentation 90 %
Yield Ultimate Survival
Code Strength Strength (in 25.4 Modulus Ratio Impact Rupture Strength (ap- (con-
(0.2 %) mm) Energy Strength (0.1 %) parent) verted)
MPa MPa MPa % GPa J MPa MPa Rockwell MPa g/cm3
F-0000-10 70 ... 120 90 1.5 105 0.25 4 250 110 40 HRF 46 6.1
-15 100 ... 170 120 2.5 120 0.25 8 340 120 60 N/D 65 6.7
-20 140 ... 260 170 7.0 160 0.28 47 660 130 80 99 7.3
F-0005-15 100 ... 170 120 <1.0 105 0.25 4 330 125 25 HRB 60 6.1
-20 140 ... 220 160 1.0 115 0.25 5 440 160 40 N/D 80 6.6
-25 170 ... 260 190 1.5 135 0.27 7 520 190 55 100 6.9
F-0005-50HT ... 340 410 <0.5 115 0.25 4 720 300 20 HRC 58 HRC 160 6.6
D
-60HT ... 410 480 <0.5 130 0.27 5 830 360 22 58 190 6.8
-70HT ... 480 550 <0.5 140 0.27 5 970 420 25 58 220 7.0
F-0008-20 140 ... 200 170 <0.5 85 0.25 3 350 190 35 HRB 80 5.8
-25 170 240 210 <0.5 110 0.25 4 420 210 50 N/D 100 6.2
-30 210 290 240 <1.0 115 0.25 5 510 210 60 120 6.6
-35 240 390 260 1.0 140 0.27 7 690 250 70 170 7.0
F-0008-55HT . . . 380 450 <0.5 115 0.25 4 690 480 22 HRC 60 HRC 180 6.3
D
-65HT . . . 450 520 <0.5 115 0.25 5 790 550 28 60 210 6.6
-75HT . . . 520 590 <0.5 135 0.27 6 900 620 32 60 240 6.9
-85HT . . . 590 660 <0.5 150 0.27 7 1000 690 35 60 280 7.1
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Tempering temperature for heat-treated (HT) materials: 350°F (177°C).
D
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat-treated materials.
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

longer a requirement of the specification, with the exception of X1.1.3 Code designations in this specification and revisions
the iron-phosphorus materials as detailed in Tables X1.3 and thereof apply only to P/M materials for which specifications
X1.4. have been adopted. In order to avoid confusion, the P/M

TABLE X1.3 Iron-Phosphorus

3 2
NOTE 1—10 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm ).
NOTE 2—1 in. = 25.4 mm.
NOTE 3—1 ft-lbf = 1.356 J.
P/M Material Properties
Mandatory ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Tensile Properties Elastic Constants Unnotched Hardness Fatigue
Maximum
Material Minimum Yield Charpy Limit
Coercive Ultimate Elongation Young’s Poisson’s Macro Density
Designation Density Strength Impact 90 %
Field Strength (in 1 in.) Modulus Ratio (apparent)
CodeA (0.2 %) Energy Survival

g/cm3 Oe 103 psi 103 psi % 106 psi ft-lbf Rockwell 103 psi g/cm3
C C
FY-4500 -20V 6.7 2.0 40.0 30.0 5 18.5 0.27 40 HRB 6.8
C C
-20W 6.9 2.0 45.0 32.0 7 20.5 0.27 45 HRB 7.0
C C
-17W 6.9 1.7 45.0 32.0 10 20.5 0.27 45 HRB 7.0
C C
-20X 7.1 2.0 50.0 35.0 7 22.5 0.28 55 HRB 7.2
C C
-17X 7.1 1.7 55.0 39.0 12 22.5 0.28 55 HRB 7.2
C C
-20Y 7.3 2.0 55.0 38.0 9 24.5 0.28 65 HRB 7.4
C C
-17Y 7.3 1.7 60.0 41.0 15 24.5 0.28 65 HRB 7.4
C C
FY-8000 -17V 6.7 1.7 48.0 40.0 2 18.5 0.27 55 HRB 6.8
C C
-17W 6.9 1.7 50.0 45.0 3 20.5 0.27 65 HRB 7.0
C C
-15W 6.9 1.5 53.0 45.0 4 20.5 0.27 65 HRB 7.0
C C
-17X 7.1 1.7 55.0 50.0 3 22.5 0.28 70 HRB 7.2
C C
-15X 7.1 1.5 57.0 48.0 4 22.5 0.28 70 HRB 7.2
C C
-15Y 7.3 1.5 62.0 53.0 4 24.5 0.28 75 HRB 7.4
A
Suffix numbers represent maximum coercive field strength values (oersteds 3 10); the letter suffix indicates the minimum density in g/cm . 3
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Additional data in preparation will appear in subsequent editions of this standard.
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

9
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.4 Iron-Phosphorus (SI)
P/M Material Properties
Mandatory ValuesA TypicalValuesB
Tensile Properties Elastic Constants Unnotched Hardness Fatigue
Maximum
Material Minimum Yield Charpy Limit
Coercive Ultimate Elongation Young’s Poisson’s Macro Density
Designation Density Strength Impact 90 %
Field Strength (in 25.4 mm) Modulus Ratio (apparent)
CodeA (0.2 %) Energy Survival

g/cm3 A/m MPa MPa % GPa J Rockwell MPa g/cm3

C C
FY-4500 -20V 6.7 160 275 205 5 130 0.27 40 HRB 6.8
C C
-20W 6.9 160 310 220 7 140 0.27 45 HRB 7.0
C C
-17W 6.9 135 310 220 10 140 0.27 45 HRB 7.0
C C
-20X 7.1 160 345 240 7 155 0.28 55 HRB 7.2
C C
-17X 7.1 135 380 270 12 155 0.28 55 HRB 7.2
C C
-20Y 7.3 160 380 260 9 170 0.28 65 HRB 7.4
C C
-17Y 7.3 135 415 280 15 170 0.28 65 HRB 7.4
C C
FY-8000 -17V 6.7 135 330 275 2 130 0.27 55 HRB 6.8
C C
-17W 6.9 135 345 310 3 140 0.27 65 HRB 7.0
C C
-15W 6.9 120 365 310 4 140 0.27 65 HRB 7.0
C C
-17X 7.1 135 380 345 3 155 0.28 70 HRB 7.2
C C
-15X 7.1 120 390 330 4 155 0.28 70 HRB 7.2
C C
-15Y 7.3 120 430 365 4 170 0.28 75 HRB 7.4
A
Suffix numbers represent maximum coercive field strength values (oersteds 3 10); the letter suffix indicates the minimum density in g/cm . 3
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Additional data in preparation will appear in subsequent editions of this standard.
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

material designation coding system is intended for use only
with such materials and should not be used to create non-
standard materials. However, the use of designations such as
FC-0208 or FN-0205 to denote materials of a specified
composition is permitted. The explanatory notes, property
values, and other contents of this standard have no application
to any other materials.
X1.1.4 In the coding system, the prefix letters denote the
general type of material. For example, the prefix FC represents
iron (F) and copper (C), which is known as iron-copper and
copper steel. The prefix letter codes are as follows:
X1.1.4.1 C—Copper.
X1.1.4.2 F—Iron.
X1.1.4.3 FY—Iron-phosphorus.
X1.1.4.4 FC—Iron-copper and Copper Steel.
X1.1.4.5 FN—Iron-nickel and Nickel Steel.
X1.1.4.6 FX—Infiltrated Iron or Steel.
X1.1.4.7 FL—Prealloyed Ferrous material except Stainless
Steel.
X1.1.4.8 FLN, FLNC, or FLC Prealloyed Low Alloy Steel
Powder, with Elemental Additions.
X1.1.4.9 FD—Diffusion Alloyed Steel.
X1.1.4.10 N—Nickel.
X1.1.4.11 SS—Stainless Steel.
X1.1.5 For an illustration of P/M ferrous material designa-
tion coding, see Fig. X1.1.
FIG. X1.1 Illustration of P/M Ferrous Material Designation Coding
X1.2 Prefix and Four-Digit Code:
X1.2.1 In ferrous materials, the major alloying elements
(except combined carbon) are included in the prefix letter code.
Other elements are excluded from the code but are represented
in the chemical composition that appears with each standard
material. The first two digits of the four-digit code indicate the
percentage of the major alloying constituent present. In the
iron-phosphorus material, the first two digits represent the
percentage of phosphorus multiplied by 100 to more accurately
indicate the nominal amount of phosphorus.
X1.2.2 Combined carbon content in ferrous materials is
designated by the last two numbers in the four-digit series.
There are three carbon ranges designated as follows:
Carbon Ranges Code Designation
from 0.0 % to 0.3 %A 00
from 0.3 % to 0.6 %B 05
from 0.6 % to 0.9 % 08
A
Iron-phosphorus material carbon range is 0.00 % to 0.03 % when designated
as “00.”
B
Carbon range for the low alloy series is 0.4 % to 0.7 % when designated as
“05.”
X1.3 Suffıx Digit Code—The two- or three-digit suffix
represents the minimum strength value, expressed in 103 psi
(6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm2)) that the user can expect from the
P/M material possessing that chemical composition. In the
as-sintered condition the strength is tensile yield; in the
heat-treated condition, it is ultimate tensile (see Minimum
Value, Tables X1.1-X1.20). An exception to this is found in the
soft magnetic “FY” material in which the suffix represents the
minimum density and maximum coercive field strength. The
suffix number represents the maximum coercive field strength
(ten times the value in oersteds) instead of the yield or tensile
strength. For example FY-4500-20W would represent an iron-
0.45 % phosphorus alloy.

10
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.5 Copper Infiltrated Iron and Steel
3 2
NOTE 1—10 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm ).
NOTE 2—1 in. = 25.4 mm.
NOTE 3—1 ft-lbf = 1.356 J.
NOTE 4—All data based on single-pass infiltration.
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Tensile Properties Compres- Hardness
StrengthA,C Unnotched Trans- Fatigue
sive
Material Charpy verse Microin- Limit
Yield Yield Macro Density
Designation Ultimate Elongation Young’s Poisson’s Impact Rupture dentation 90 %
Yield Ultimate Strength Strength (appar-
Code Strength (in 1 in.) Modulus Ratio Energy Strength (con- Survival
(0.2 %) (0.1 %) ent)
verted)
103 psi 103 psi 103 psi % 106 psi ft-lbf 103 psi 3
10 psi Rockwell 103 psi g/cm3
FX-1000-25 25 ... 51 32 7.0 23.5 0.28 25.0 132 33 65 HRB N/D 19 7.3
FX-1005-40 40 ... 77 50 4.0 23.5 0.28 13.0 158 53 82 HRB N/D 29 7.3
D
FX-1005-110HT ... 110 120 <0.5 23.5 0.28 7.0 210 110 38 HRC 55 HRC 33 7.3
FX-1008-50 50 ... 87 60 3.0 23.5 0.28 10.0 166 71 89 HRB N/D 33 7.3
D
FX-1008-110HT ... 110 120 <0.5 23.5 0.28 6.5 189 115 43 HRC 58 HRC 41 7.3
FX-2000-25 25 ... 46 37 3.0 21.0 0.24 15.0 144 41 66 HRB N/D 17 7.3
FX-2005-45 45 ... 75 60 1.5 21.0 0.24 8.0 148 60 85 HRB N/D 20 7.3
D
FX-2005-90HT ... 90 100 <0.5 21.0 0.24 7.0 171 71 36 HRC 55 HRC 23 7.3
FX-2008-60 60 ... 80 70 1.0 21.0 0.24 7.0 156 70 90 HRB N/D 23 7.3
D
FX-2008-90HT ... 90 100 <0.5 21.0 0.24 5.0 159 74 36 HRC 58 HRC 27 7.3
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Tempering temperature for heat-treated (HT) materials: 350°F (177°C).
D
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat-treated materials.
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

TABLE X1.6 Copper Infiltrated Iron and Steel (SI)

NOTE—All data based on single-pass infiltration.

P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum Elastic
Tensile Properties Hardness
StrengthA,C constants Fatigue
Material Unnotched Trans- Compres- Microin- Limit
Density
Designation Ultimate Yield Elongation Young’s Poisson’s Charpy verse sive Yield Marco dentation 90 %
Yield Ultimate
Code Strength Strength (in 25.4 Modulus Ratio Impact Rupture Strength (appar- (con- Survival
(0.2 %) mm) Energy Strength (0.1 %) ent) verted)
MPa MPa MPa % GPa J MPa MPa Rockwell MPa g/cm3
FX-1000-25 170 … 350 220 7.0 160 0.28 34 910 230 65 HRB N/D 133 7.3
FX-1005-40 280 … 530 340 4.0 160 0.28 18 1090 370 82 HRB N/D 200 7.3
D
FX-1005-110HT … 760 830 <0.5 160 0.28 9 1450 760 38 HRC 55 HRC 230 7.3
FX-1008-50 340 … 600 410 3.0 160 0.28 14 1140 490 89 HRB N/D 230 7.3
D
FX-1008-110HT … 760 830 <0.5 160 0.28 9 1300 790 43 HRC 58 HRC 280 7.3
FX-2000-25 170 … 320 260 3.0 145 0.24 20 990 280 66 HRB N/D 122 7.3
FX-2005-45 310 … 520 410 1.5 145 0.24 11 1020 410 85 HRB N/D 140 7.3
D
FX-2005-90HT … 620 690 <0.5 145 0.24 9 1180 490 36 HRC 55 HRC 160 7.3
FX-2008-60 410 … 550 480 1.0 145 0.24 9 1080 480 90 HRB N/D 160 7.3
D
FX-2008-90HT … 620 690 <0.5 145 0.24 7 1100 510 36 HRC 58 HRC 190 7.3
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi (see page 2); yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Tempering temperature for heat treated (HT) materials: 177°C (350°F).
D
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat-treated materials (see page 3).
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

X1.4 Suffıx Letter Code—When the code designation HT Suffix Letter Minimum Density (g/cm3)
appears after the suffix digits it is understood that the P/M U 6.5
V 6.7
material specified has been heat-treated (sinter hardened or W 6.9
quenched and tempered) and that the strength represented is X 7.1
ultimate tensile in 103 psi (6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm2)). The Y 7.3
Z 7.4
letter suffix in the iron-phosphorus materials represents the
density. The density is represented alphabetically by the NOTE X1.1—The example used in X1.3 (FY-4500-20W) now becomes
following letters: an iron-0.45 % phosphorus alloy with a minimum density of 6.9 g/cm3.

11
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.7 Iron-Copper and Copper Steel
3 2
NOTE 1—10 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm ).
NOTE 2—1 in. = 25.4 mm.
NOTE 3—1 ft-lbf = 1.356 J.
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Tensile Properties Elastic Constants Hardness
StrengthA,C
Com- Fatigue
Material Unnotched Trans- pressive Microin- Limit 90 % Density
Macro
Designation Ultimate Yield Elongation Young’s Poisson’s Charpy verse Yield dentation Survival
Yield Ultimate (appar-
Code Strength Strength (in 1 in.) Modulus Ratio Impact En- Rupture Strength (con-
ent)
(0.2 %) ergy Strength (0.1 %) verted)
103 psi 103 psi 103 psi % 106 psi ft-lbf 103 psi 103 psi Rockwell 103 psi g/cm3
FC-0200-15 15 ... 25 20 1.0 14.0 0.25 4.5 45 18 11 HRB 10 6.0
-18 18 ... 28 23 1.5 16.5 0.25 5.0 51 21 18 N/D 11 6.3
-21 21 ... 31 26 1.5 16.5 0.25 5.5 56 23 26 12 6.6
-24 24 ... 34 29 2.0 19.5 0.27 6.0 63 26 36 13 6.9
FC-0205-30 30 ... 35 35 <1.0 14.0 0.25 <2.0 60 35 37 HRB 13 6.0
-35 35 ... 40 40 <1.0 16.5 0.25 3.0 75 40 48 N/D 15 6.3
-40 40 ... 50 45 <1.0 17.5 0.25 5.0 95 45 60 21 6.7
-45 45 ... 60 50 <1.0 21.5 0.27 8.0 115 50 72 31 7.1
FC-0205-60HT ... 60 70 <0.5 16.0 0.25 2.5 95 57 19 HRC 58 HRC 27 6.2
D
-70HT ... 70 80 <0.5 15.5 0.25 3.5 110 71 25 58 30 6.5
-80HT ... 80 90 <0.5 18.5 0.27 4.5 120 86 31 58 34 6.8
-90HT ... 90 100 <0.5 20.5 0.27 5.5 135 95 36 58 38 7.0
FC-0208-30 30 ... 35 35 <1.0 12.5 0.25 <2.0 60 40 50 HRB 13 5.8
-40 40 ... 50 45 <1.0 16.5 0.25 2.0 90 45 61 N/D 17 6.3
-50 50 ... 60 55 <1.0 17.5 0.25 5.0 125 50 73 23 6.7
-60 60 ... 75 65 <1.0 22.5 0.28 7.0 155 55 84 33 7.2
FC-0208-50HT ... 50 65 <0.5 15.0 0.25 2.5 95 58 20 HRC 60 HRC 25 6.1
D
-65HT ... 65 75 <0.5 17.5 0.27 3.5 110 72 27 60 30 6.4
-80HT ... 80 90 <0.5 18.5 0.27 4.5 130 91 35 60 35 6.8
-95HT ... 95 105 <0.5 21.5 0.27 5.5 150 105 43 60 40 7.1
FC-0505-30 30 ... 44 36 <0.5 12.5 0.25 3.0 77 50 51 HRB 17 5.8
-40 40 ... 58 47 <0.5 16.5 0.25 4.5 102 54 62 N/D 22 6.3
-50 50 ... 71 56 <1.0 17.5 0.25 5.0 124 58 72 27 6.7
FC-0508-40 40 ... 58 50 <0.5 13.0 0.25 3.0 100 58 60 HRB 22 5.9
-50 50 ... 68 60 <0.5 16.5 0.25 3.5 120 63 68 N/D 26 6.3
-60 60 ... 82 70 <1.0 18.5 0.27 4.5 145 68 80 31 6.8
FC-0808-45 45 ... 55 50 <0.5 14.0 0.27 3.0 85 62 65 HRB N/D 21 6.0
FC-1000-20 20 ... 30 26 <1.0 14.0 0.27 3.5 53 33 15 HRB N/D 11 6.0
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Tempering temperature for heat-treated (HT) materials: 350°F (177°C).
D
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat-treated materials.
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

X1.5 Data Source—Information used in compiling this on file at MPIF Headquarters, Princeton, NJ, and are repro-
specification was contributed by the membership of ASTM duced in this specification with the permission of the Metal
Committee B09 on Metal Powders and Metal Powder Products Powder Industries Federation.
and the MPIF Standards Committee. These technical data are

12
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.8 Iron-Copper and Copper Steel (SI)
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Tensile Properties Elastic Constants Compres- Hardness
StrengthA,C Unnotched Trans- Fatigue
sive
Material Charpy verse Microin- Limit
Yield Elongation Yield Density
Designation Ultimate Young’s Poisson’s Impact Rupture
Strength Macro dentation 90 %
Yield Ultimate Strength (in 25.4 Energy Strength Survival
Code Strength Modulus Ratio (0.1 %) (apparent) (con-
(0.2 %) mm)
verted)
MPa MPa MPa % GPa J MPa MPa Rockwell MPa g/cm3
FC-0200-15 100 … 170 140 1.0 95 0.25 6 310 120 11 HRB 70 6.0
-18 120 … 190 160 1.5 115 0.25 7 350 140 18 N/D 72 6.3
-21 140 … 210 180 1.5 115 0.25 7 390 160 26 80 6.6
-24 170 230 200 2.0 135 0.27 8 430 180 36 87 6.9
FC-0205-30 210 … 240 240 <1.0 95 0.25 <3 410 240 37 HRB 90 6.0
-35 240 … 280 280 <1.0 115 0.25 4 520 280 48 N/D 100 6.3
-40 280 … 340 310 <1.0 120 0.25 7 660 310 60 140 6.7
-45 310 … 410 340 <1.0 150 0.27 10 790 340 72 210 7.1
FC-0205-60HT … 410 480 <0.5 110 0.25 3 660 390 19 HRC 58 HRC 190 6.2
D
-70HT … 480 550 <0.5 105 0.25 5 760 490 25 58 210 6.5
-80HT … 550 620 <0.5 130 0.27 6 830 590 31 58 230 6.8
-90HT … 620 690 <0.5 140 0.27 7 930 660 36 58 260 7.0
FC-0208-30 210 … 240 240 <1.0 85 0.25 <3 410 280 50 HRB 90 5.8
-40 280 … 340 310 <1.0 115 0.25 3 620 310 61 N/D 120 6.3
-50 340 … 410 380 <1.0 120 0.25 7 860 340 73 160 6.7
-60 410 … 520 450 <1.0 155 0.28 9 1070 380 84 230 7.2
FC-0208-50HT … 340 450 <0.5 105 0.25 3 660 400 20 HRC 60 HRC 170 6.1
D
-65HT … 450 520 <0.5 120 0.27 5 760 500 27 60 210 6.4
-80HT … 550 620 <0.5 130 0.27 6 900 630 35 60 240 6.8
-95HT … 660 720 <0.5 150 0.27 7 1030 720 43 60 280 7.1
FC-0505-30 210 … 300 250 <0.5 85 0.25 4 530 340 51 HRB 114 5.8
-40 280 … 400 320 <0.5 115 0.25 6 700 370 62 N/D 152 6.3
-50 340 … 490 390 <1.0 120 0.25 7 850 400 72 186 6.7
FC-0508-40 280 … 400 340 <0.5 90 0.25 4 690 400 60 HRB 152 5.9
-50 340 … 470 410 <0.5 115 0.25 5 830 430 68 N/D 179 6.3
-60 410 … 570 480 <1.0 130 0.27 6 1000 470 80 217 6.8
FC-0808-45 310 … 380 340 <0.5 95 0.27 4 590 430 65 HRB N/D 144 6.0
FC-1000-20 140 … 210 180 <1.0 95 0.27 5 370 230 15 HRB N/D 80 6.0
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Tempering temperature for heat-treated (HT) materials: 350°F (177°C).
D
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat-treated materials.
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

13
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.9 Iron-Nickel and Nickel Steel
3 2
NOTE 1—10 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm ).
NOTE 2—1 in. = 25.4 mm.
NOTE 3—1 ft-lbf = 1.356 J.
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Tensile Properties Compres- Hardness
StrengthA,C Unnotched Trans- Fatigue
sive
Material Charpy verse Microin- Limit
Yield Yield Density
Designation Ultimate Elongation Young’s Poisson’s Impact Rupture
Strength Macro dentation 90 %
Yield Ultimate Strength Energy Strength Survival
Code Strength (in 1 in.) Modulus Ratio (0.1 %) (apparent) (con-
(0.2 %)
verted)
103 psi 103 psi 103 psi % 106 psi ft-lbf 103 psi 103 psi Rockwell 103 psi g/cm3
FN-0200-15 15 ... 25 17 3.0 16.5 0.25 10.0 50 16 55 HRF 10 6.6
-20 20 ... 35 25 5.0 20.5 0.27 20.0 80 18 75 N/D 13 7.0
-25 25 ... 40 30 10.0 23.5 0.28 50.0 105 20 80 15 7.3
FN-0205-20 20 ... 40 25 1.5 16.5 0.25 6.0 65 25 44 HRB 14 6.6
-25 25 ... 50 30 2.5 19.5 0.27 12.0 100 30 59 18 6.9
-30 30 ... 60 35 4.0 22.5 0.28 21.0 125 35 69 N/D 22 7.2
-35 35 ... 70 40 5.5 24.5 0.28 34.0 150 40 78 26 7.4
FN-0205-80HT ... 80 90 <0.5 16.5 0.25 3.5 120 60 23 HRC 55 HRC 26 6.6
-105HT ... 105 120 <0.5 19.5 0.27 4.5 160 80 29 55 35 6.9
D
-130HT ... 130 145 <0.5 21.5 0.27 6.0 190 100 33 55 42 7.1
-155HT ... 155 160 <0.5 22.5 0.28 7.0 215 120 36 55 47 7.2
-180HT ... 180 185 <0.5 24.5 0.28 9.5 250 140 40 55 54 7.4
FN-0208-30 30 ... 45 35 1.5 17.5 0.25 5.5 85 35 63 HRB 16 6.7
-35 35 ... 55 40 1.5 19.5 0.27 8.0 105 40 71 20 6.9
-40 40 ... 70 45 2.0 21.5 0.27 11.0 130 45 77 N/D 25 7.1
-45 45 ... 80 50 2.5 23.5 0.28 16.0 155 50 83 28 7.3
-50 50 ... 90 55 3.0 24.5 0.28 21.0 170 55 88 32 7.4
FN-0208-80HT ... 80 90 <0.5 17.5 0.25 4.0 120 99 26 HRC 57 HRC 29 6.7
-105HT ... 105 120 <0.5 19.5 0.27 4.5 150 124 31 57 38 6.9
D
-130HT ... 130 145 <0.5 20.5 0.27 5.5 185 136 35 57 46 7.0
-155HT ... 155 170 <0.5 22.5 0.28 7.0 220 162 39 57 54 7.2
-180HT ... 180 195 <0.5 24.5 0.28 8.0 250 188 42 57 62 7.4
FN-0405-25 25 ... 40 30 <1.0 15.5 0.25 4.5 65 33 49 HRB 14 6.5
-35 35 ... 60 40 3.0 20.5 0.27 14.5 120 40 71 N/D 22 7.0
-45 45 ... 90 50 4.5 24.5 0.28 33.5 175 45 84 32 7.4
FN-0405-80HT ... 80 85 <0.5 15.5 0.25 4.0 115 67 19 HRC 55 HRC 26 6.5
-105HT ... 105 110 <0.5 18.5 0.27 5.0 145 89 25 55 34 6.8
D
-130HT ... 130 135 <0.5 20.5 0.27 6.5 200 103 31 55 42 7.0
-155HT ... 155 160 <0.5 23.5 0.28 9.5 245 124 37 55 49 7.3
-180HT ... 180 185 <0.5 24.5 0.28 13.0 280 132 40 55 57 7.4
FN-0408-35 35 ... 45 40 1.0 15.5 0.25 4.0 75 37 67 HRB 16 6.5
-45 45 ... 65 50 1.0 19.5 0.27 7.5 115 50 78 N/D 23 6.9
-55 55 ... 80 60 1.0 22.5 0.28 11.0 150 59 87 28 7.2
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Tempering temperature for heat-treated (HT) materials: 500°F (260°C).
D
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat-treated materials.
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

14
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.10 Iron-Nickel and Nickel Steel (SI)
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Tensile Properties Elastic Constants Hardness
StrengthA,C Fatigue
Com-
Material Unnotched pressive Microin- Limit
Density
Designation Ultimate Yield Elongation Young’s Poisson’s Charpy Transverse Yield Macro dentation 90 %
Yield Ultimate Survival
Code Strength Strength (in 25.4 Modulus Ratio Impact Rupture Strength (appar- (con-
(0.2 %) mm) Energy Strength (0.1 %) ent) verted)
MPa MPa MPa % GPa J MPa MPa Rockwell MPa g/cm3
FN-0200-15 100 … 170 120 3.0 115 0.25 14 340 110 55 HRF 70 6.6
-20 140 … 240 170 5.0 140 0.27 27 550 120 75 N/D 91 7.0
-25 170 … 280 210 10.0 160 0.28 68 720 140 80 103 7.3
FN-0205-20 140 … 280 170 1.5 115 0.25 8 450 170 44 HRB 100 6.6
-25 170 … 340 210 2.5 135 0.27 16 690 210 59 120 6.9
-30 210 … 410 240 4.0 155 0.28 28 860 240 69 N/D 150 7.2
-35 240 … 480 280 5.5 170 0.28 46 1030 280 78 180 7.4
FN-0205-80HT … 550 620 <0.5 115 0.25 5 830 410 23 HRC 55 HRC 180 6.6
-105HT … 720 830 <0.5 135 0.27 6 1110 550 29 55 240 6.9
D
-130HT … 900 1000 <0.5 150 0.27 8 1310 690 33 55 290 7.1
-155HT … 1070 1100 <0.5 155 0.28 9 1480 830 36 55 320 7.2
-180HT … 1240 1280 <0.5 170 0.28 13 1720 970 40 55 370 7.4
FN-0208-30 210 … 310 240 1.5 120 0.25 7 590 240 63 HRB 110 6.7
-35 240 … 380 280 1.5 135 0.27 11 720 280 71 140 6.9
-40 280 … 480 310 2.0 150 0.27 15 900 310 77 N/D 170 7.1
-45 310 … 550 340 2.5 160 0.28 22 1070 340 83 190 7.3
-50 340 … 620 380 3.0 170 0.28 28 1170 380 88 220 7.4
FN-0208-80HT … 550 620 <0.5 120 0.25 5 830 680 26 HRC 57 HRC 200 6.7
-105HT … 720 830 <0.5 135 0.27 6 1030 850 31 57 260 6.9
D
-130HT … 900 1000 <0.5 140 0.27 7 1280 940 35 57 320 7.0
-155HT … 1070 1170 <0.5 155 0.28 9 1520 1120 39 57 370 7.2
-180HT … 1240 1340 <0.5 170 0.28 11 1720 1300 42 57 430 7.4
FN-0405-25 170 … 280 210 <1.0 105 0.25 6 450 230 49 HRB 100 6.5
-35 240 … 410 280 3.0 140 0.27 20 830 280 71 N/D 150 7.0
-45 310 … 620 340 4.5 170 0.28 45 1210 310 84 220 7.4
FN-0405-80HT … 550 590 <0.5 105 0.25 5 790 460 19 HRC 55 HRC 180 6.5
-105HT … 720 760 <0.5 130 0.27 7 1000 610 25 55 230 6.8
D
-130HT … 900 930 <0.5 140 0.27 9 1380 710 31 55 290 7.0
-155HT … 1070 1100 <0.5 160 0.28 13 1690 850 37 55 340 7.3
-180HT … 1240 1280 <0.5 170 0.28 18 1930 910 40 55 390 7.4
FN-0408-35 240 … 310 280 1.0 105 0.25 5 520 260 67 HRB 110 6.5
-45 310 … 450 340 1.0 135 0.27 10 790 340 78 N/D 160 6.9
-55 380 … 550 410 1.0 155 0.28 15 1030 410 87 190 7.2
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Tempering temperature for heat-treated (HT) materials: 500°F (260°C).
D
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat-treated materials.
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

15
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.11 Low Alloy Steel
3 2
NOTE 1—10 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm ).
NOTE 2—1 in. = 25.4 mm.
NOTE 3—1 ft-lbf = 1.356 J.
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Tensile Properties Compres- Hardness
StrengthA,C Unnotched Trans- Fatigue
sive
Material Charpy verse Microin- Limit
Yield Yield Density
Designation Ultimate Elongation Young’s Poisson’s Impact Rupture
Strength Macro dentation 90 %
Yield Ultimate Strength Energy Strength Survival
Code Strength (in 1 in.) Modulus Ratio (0.1 %) (apparent) (con-
(0.2 %)
verted)
103 psi 103 psi 103 psi % 106 psi ft-lbf 103 psi 103 psi Rockwell 103 psi g/cm3
FL-4205-35 35 … 52 42 1.0 18.5 0.27 6.0 100 42 60 HRB N/D 20 6.8
-40 40 … 58 47 1.0 20.0 0.27 9.0 115 47 66 27 6.95
-45 45 … 66 52 1.5 21.5 0.27 12.0 125 52 70 32 7.10
-50 50 … 73 58 2.0 23.5 0.28 17.0 150 56 75 40 7.30
FL-4205-80HT … 80 90 <0.5 16.5 0.25 5.0 135 80 28 HRC 60 HRC 30 6.60
D
-100HT … 100 110 <0.5 18.5 0.27 7.0 160 110 32 60 37 6.80
-120HT … 120 130 <0.5 20.5 0.27 8.0 185 140 36 60 44 7.00
-140HT … 140 150 <0.5 22.5 0.28 12.0 215 170 39 60 50 7.20
FL 4405-35 35 … 52 42 1.0 17.5 0.25 6.0 100 39 60 HRB N/D 20 6.70
-40 40 … 58 47 1.0 19.5 0.27 11.0 125 45 67 27 6.90
-45 45 … 66 52 1.5 21.5 0.27 16.0 140 52 73 32 7.10
-50 50 … 73 58 2.0 23.5 0.28 22.0 165 56 80 40 7.30
FL-4405-100HT … 100 110 <1.0 17.5 0.25 5.5 160 135 24 HRC 60 HRC 34 6.70
D
-125HT … 125 135 <1.0 19.5 0.27 7.0 200 155 29 60 42 6.90
-150HT … 150 160 <1.0 21.5 0.27 9.0 230 175 34 60 48 7.10
-175HT … 175 185 <1.0 23.5 0.28 14.0 280 195 38 60 58 7.30
FL-4605-35 35 … 52 42 1.0 18.0 0.27 6.0 100 42 60 HRB N/D 20 6.75
-40 40 … 58 47 1.0 20.0 0.27 11.0 120 45 65 27 6.95
-45 45 … 66 52 1.5 22.0 0.28 16.0 140 52 71 32 7.15
-50 50 … 73 58 2.0 24.0 0.28 22.0 165 57 77 40 7.35
FL-4605-80HT … 80 85 <0.5 16.0 0.25 4.5 130 91 24 HRC 60 HRC 29 6.55
D
-100HT … 100 110 <0.5 18.0 0.27 6.0 165 114 29 60 37 6.75
-120HT … 120 130 <0.5 20.0 0.27 8.0 195 139 34 60 46 6.95
-140HT … 140 155 <0.5 22.5 0.28 12.0 230 170 39 60 53 7.20
FLN-4205-40 40 … 58 47 1.0 16.5 0.25 6.0 105 45 64 HRB N/D 20 6.60
-45 45 … 66 52 1.0 18.5 0.27 8.0 125 50 70 27 6.80
-50 50 … 73 58 1.5 21.0 0.27 13.0 150 56 77 32 7.05
-55 55 … 87 63 2.0 23.5 0.28 22.0 175 60 83 40 7.30
FLN-4205-80HT … 80 90 <1.0 16.5 0.25 5.0 130 125 24 HRC 60 HRC 28 6.60
D
-105HT … 105 115 <1.0 18.5 0.27 7.0 170 145 30 60 36 6.80
-140HT … 140 150 <1.0 21.0 0.27 9.0 230 170 36 60 47 7.05
-175HT … 175 185 1.0 23.5 0.28 14.0 290 200 42 60 58 7.30
FLN2-4405-45 45 … 59 53 0.5 16.5 0.25 5.0 125 50 75 HRB N/D 19 6.60
-50 50 … 66 58 1.0 18.5 0.27 7.0 155 55 80 N/D 25 6.80
-55 55 … 80 64 1.5 21.0 0.27 12.0 190 62 85 N/D 32 7.05
-60 60 … 100 70 2.0 23.5 0.28 22.0 220 70 90 N/D 41 7.30
FLN2-4405-90HT … 90 100 … <0.5 16.5 0.25 4.0 155 100 28 HRC 60 HRC 32 6.60
-120HT … 120 130 … <0.5 18.5 0.27 6.0 210 125 32 60 HRC 41 6.80
-160HT … 160 170 … <0.5 21.0 0.27 10.0 260 160 38 60 HRC 50 7.05
-190HT … 190 210 180 0.5 23.5 0.28 13.0 320 190 44 60 HRC 59 7.30
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Tempering temperature for heat-treated (HT) materials: 350°F (177°C).
D
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat-treated materials.
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

16
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.12 Low Alloy Steel (SI)
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Tensile Properties Elastic Constants Hardness
StrengthA,C Fatigue
Com-
Unnotched Trans- pressive Microin- Limit
Material Density
Ultimate Yield Elongation Young’s Poisson’s Charpy verse Yield Macro dentation 90 %
Designation Code Yield Ultimate Survival
Strength Strength (in 25.4 Modulus Ratio Impact Rupture Strength (ap- (con-
(0.2 %) mm) Energy Strength (0.1 %) parent) verted)
MPa MPa MPa % GPa J MPa MPa Rockwell MPa g/cm3
FL-4205-35 240 … 360 290 1.0 130 0.27 8 690 290 60 HRB 140 6.80
-40 280 … 400 320 1.0 140 0.27 12 790 320 66 N/D 190 6.95
-45 310 … 460 360 1.5 150 0.27 16 860 360 70 220 7.10
-50 340 … 500 400 2.0 160 0.28 23 1030 390 75 280 7.30
FL-4205-80HT … 550 620 <0.5 115 0.25 7 930 550 28 HRC 60 HRC 210 6.60
D
-100HT … 690 760 <0.5 130 0.27 9 1100 760 32 60 260 6.80
-120HT … 830 900 <0.5 140 0.27 11 1280 970 36 60 300 7.00
-140HT … 970 1030 <0.5 155 0.28 16 1480 1170 39 60 340 7.20
FL-4405-35 240 … 360 290 1.0 120 0.25 8 690 270 60 HRB 140 6.70
-40 280 … 400 320 1.0 135 0.27 15 860 310 67 N/D 190 6.90
-45 310 … 460 360 1.5 150 0.27 22 970 360 73 220 7.10
-50 340 … 500 400 2.0 160 0.28 30 1140 390 80 280 7.30
FL-4405-100HT … 690 760 <1.0 120 0.25 7 1100 930 24 HRC 60 HRC 230 6.70
D
-125HT … 860 930 <1.0 135 0.27 9 1380 1070 29 60 290 6.90
-150HT … 1030 1100 <1.0 150 0.27 12 1590 1210 34 60 330 7.10
-175HT … 1210 1280 <1.0 160 0.28 19 1930 1340 38 60 400 7.30
FL-4605-35 240 … 360 290 1.0 125 0.27 8 690 290 60 HRB 140 6.75
-40 280 … 400 320 1.0 140 0.27 15 830 310 65 N/D 190 6.95
-45 310 … 460 360 1.5 150 0.28 22 970 360 71 220 7.15
-50 340 … 500 400 2.0 165 0.28 30 1140 390 77 280 7.35
FL-4605-80HT … 550 590 <0.5 110 0.25 6 900 630 24 HRC 60 HRC 200 6.55
D
-100HT … 690 760 <0.5 125 0.27 8 1140 790 29 60 260 6.75
-120HT … 830 900 <0.5 140 0.27 11 1340 960 34 60 320 6.95
-140HT … 970 1070 <0.5 155 0.28 16 1590 1170 39 60 370 7.20
FLN-4205-40 280 … 400 320 1.0 115 0.25 8 720 310 64 HRB 140 6.60
-45 310 … 460 360 1.0 130 0.27 11 860 340 70 N/D 190 6.80
-50 340 … 500 400 1.5 145 0.27 18 1030 390 77 220 7.05
-55 380 … 600 430 2.0 160 0.28 30 1210 410 83 280 7.30
FLN-4205-80HT … 550 620 <1.0 115 0.25 7 900 860 24 HRC 60 HRC 190 6.60
D
-105HT … 720 790 <1.0 130 0.27 9 1170 1000 30 60 250 6.80
-140HT … 970 1030 <1.0 145 0.27 12 1590 1170 36 60 320 7.05
-175HT … 1210 1280 1.0 160 0.28 19 2000 1380 42 60 400 7.30
FLN2-4405-45 310 … 410 360 0.5 115 0.25 7 860 340 75 HRB 130 6.60
-50 340 … 450 400 1.0 130 0.27 9 1070 380 80 N/D 170 6.80
-55 380 … 550 440 1.5 145 0.27 16 1310 430 85 220 7.05
-60 410 … 690 480 2.0 160 0.28 30 1520 480 90 280 7.30
FLN2-4405-90HT … 620 690 … <0.5 115 0.25 5 1070 690 28 HRC 60 HRC 220 6.60
-120HT … 830 900 … <0.5 130 0.27 8 1450 860 32 60 HRC 280 6.80
-160HT … 1100 1170 … <0.5 145 0.27 14 1800 1100 38 60 HRC 340 7.05
-190HT … 1310 1450 1240 0.5 160 0.28 18 2210 1310 44 60 HRC 410 7.30
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Tempering temperature for heat-treated (HT) materials: 177°C (350°F).
D
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat-treated materials.
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

17
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.13 Sinter Hardened Steel
3 2
NOTE 1—10 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm ).
NOTE 2—1 in. = 25.4 mm.
NOTE 3—1 ft-lbf = 1.356 J.
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Tensile Properties Elastic Constants Hardness
Strength Fatigue
Com-
Trans- pressive Microin- Limit
Material Density
Ultimate Yield Elongation Young’s Poisson’s Unnotched verse Yield Macro dentation 90 %
Designation Code Yield UltimateC Survival
Strength Strength (in 25.4 Modulus Ratio Charpy Im- Rupture Strength (ap- (con-
(0.2 %) mm) pact Energy Strength (0.1 %) parent) verted)
103 psi 103 psi 103 psi % 106 psi ft-lbf 103 psi 103 psi Rockwell 103 psi g/cm3
FLC-4608-50HT … 50 60 <1.0 16.5 0.25 5.0 120 20 HRC 55 HRC 16 6.60
D E
-70HT … 70 80 <1.0 18.5 0.27 7.0 150 26 55 24 6.80
-90HT … 90 100 <1.0 20.5 0.27 9.0 190 31 55 33 7.00
-110HT … 110 120 <1.0 22.5 0.28 14.0 230 37 55 42 7.20
FLNC-4408-60HT … 60 70 <1.0 16.5 0.25 4.0 160 75 18 HRC 55 HRC 18 6.60
D
-85HT … 85 95 <1.0 18.5 0.27 7.0 190 85 21 55 26 6.80
-105HT … 105 115 <1.0 20.5 0.27 12.0 220 95 25 55 34 7.00
-130HT … 130 140 1.0 22.5 0.28 16.0 250 105 30 55 42 7.20
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Tempering temperature for heat-treated (HT) materials: 177°C (350°F).
D
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat-treated materials.
E
Additional data in preparation will appear in subsequent editions of this standard.

TABLE X1.14 Sinter Hardened Steel (SI)

P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Tensile Properties Elastic Constants Hardness
Strength Fatigue
Com-
Unnotched Trans- pressive Microin- Limit
Material Density
Ultimate Yield Elongation Young’s Poisson’s Charpy verse Yield Macro dentation 90 %
Designation Code Yield UltimateC Survival
Strength Strength (in 25.4 Modulus Ratio Impact Rupture Strength (ap- (con-
(0.2 %) mm) Energy Strength (0.1 %) parent) verted)
MPa MPa MPa % GPa J MPa MPa Rockwell MPa g/cm3
FLC-4608-50HT … 340 410 <1.0 115 0.25 7 830 20 HRC 55 HRC 110 6.60
D E
-70HT … 480 550 <1.0 130 0.27 9 1030 26 55 160 6.80
-90HT … 620 690 <1.0 140 0.27 12 1310 31 55 230 7.00
-110HT … 760 830 <1.0 155 0.28 19 1590 37 55 290 7.20
FLNC-4408-60HT … 410 480 <1.0 115 0.25 5 1100 520 18 HRC 55 HRC 120 6.60
D
-85HT … 590 660 <1.0 130 0.27 9 1310 590 21 55 180 6.80
-105HT … 720 790 <1.0 140 0.27 16 1520 660 25 55 230 7.00
-130HT … 900 970 1.0 155 0.28 22 1720 720 30 55 290 7.20
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Tempering temperature for heat-treated (HT) materials: 177°C (350°F).
D
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat-treated materials.
E
Additional data in preparation will appear in subsequent editions of this standard.

18
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.15 Diffusion Alloyed Steel
3 2
NOTE 1—10 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm ).
NOTE 2—1 in. = 25.4 mm.
NOTE 3—1 ft-lbf = 1.356 J.
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Tensile Properties Elastic Constants Hardness
StrengthA Fatigue
Com-
Material Unnotched Trans- pressive Microin- Limit
Density
Designation Ultimate Yield Elongation Young’s Poisson’s Charpy Im- verse Yield Macro dentation 90 %
Yield UltimateD SurvivalC
Code Strength Strength (in 25.4 Modulus Ratio pact Ener- Rupture Strength (ap- (con-
C
(0.2 %) mm) gy Strength (0.1 %) parent) verted)
103 psi 103 psi 103 psi % 106 psi ft-lbf 103 psi 103 psi Rockwell 103 psi g/cm3
FD-0205-45 45 ... 68 52 1.0 18.0 0.27 8.0 130 47 72 HRB 24 6.75
-50 50 ... 78 57 1.5 20.0 0.27 12.0 155 52 76 N/D 29 6.95
-55 55 ... 88 61 2.0 22.0 0.28 18.0 180 57 80 32 7.15
-60 60 ... 100 67 2.0 24.5 0.28 28.0 210 62 86 37 7.40
FD-0205-95HT ... 95 105 <1.0 18.0 0.27 5.0 160 130 28 HRC 55 HRC 42 6.75
E
-120HT ... 120 130 <1.0 20.0 0.27 7.0 190 155 33 55 52 6.95
-140HT ... 140 150 <1.0 22.0 0.28 9.0 210 175 38 55 65 7.15
-160HT ... 160 170 <1.0 24.5 0.28 11.0 240 200 45 55 75 7.40
FD-0208-50 50 ... 69 58 <1.0 18.0 0.27 7.0 135 58 80 HRB 24 6.75
-55 55 ... 79 63 <1.0 19.5 0.27 9.0 155 62 83 N/D 33 6.90
-60 60 ... 92 68 1.0 21.5 0.27 12.0 180 67 87 38 7.10
-65 65 ... 103 73 1.0 23.0 0.28 17.0 195 72 90 46 7.25
FD-0405-55 55 ... 86 62 1.0 18.0 0.27 11.0 160 56 80 HRB 25 6.75
-60 60 ... 103 66 1.0 21.0 0.27 20.0 195 63 85 N/D 28 7.05
-65 65 ... 123 70 2.5 24.0 0.28 27.0 230 73 91 40 7.35
FD-0405-100HT ... 100 110 <1.0 18.0 0.27 5.0 160 125 30 HRC 55 HRC 26 6.75
E
-130HT ... 130 140 <1.0 21.0 0.27 7.0 200 150 35 55 50 7.05
-155HT ... 155 165 <1.0 24.0 0.28 10.0 235 175 42 55 58 7.35
FD-0408-50 50 ... 71 57 <1.0 17.5 0.25 9.0 130 62 85 HRB 22 6.70
-55 55 ... 90 62 1.0 20.0 0.27 13.0 165 68 89 N/D 27 6.95
-60 60 ... 110 67 1.5 22.5 0.28 18.0 200 73 93 38 7.20
-65 65 ... 125 71 2.0 24.5 0.28 22.0 230 80 95 48 7.40
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Alloys containing copper additions may have lower impact and fatigue limit as compared to the values in the data tables.
D
Tempering temperature for heat-treated (HT) materials: 177 °C (350 °F).
E
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat-treated materials.
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

19
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.16 Diffusion Alloyed Steel (SI)
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Tensile Properties Elastic Constants Hardness
StrengthA,C Fatigue
Com-
Material Unnotched Trans- pressive Microin- Limit
Density
Designation Ultimate Yield Elongation Young’s Poisson’s Charpy verse Yield Macro dentation 90 %
Yield UltimateC SurvivalC
Code Strength Strength (in 25.4 Modulus Ratio Impact Rupture Strength (ap- (con-
C
(0.2 %) mm) Energy Strength (0.1 %) parent) verted)
MPa MPa MPa % GPa J MPa MPa Rockwell MPa g/cm3
FD-0205-45 310 ... 470 360 1.0 125 0.27 11 900 320 72 HRB 170 6.75
-50 340 ... 540 390 1.5 140 0.27 16 1070 360 76 N/D 200 6.95
-55 380 ... 610 420 2.0 150 0.28 24 1240 390 80 220 7.15
-60 410 ... 690 460 2.0 170 0.28 38 1450 430 86 260 7.40
FD-0205-95HT ... 660 720 <1.0 125 0.27 7 1100 900 28 HRC 55 HRC 290 6.75
D
-120HT ... 830 900 <1.0 140 0.27 9 1310 1070 33 55 360 6.95
-140HT ... 970 1030 <1.0 150 0.28 12 1450 1210 38 55 450 7.15
-160HT ... 1100 1170 <1.0 170 0.28 15 1650 1380 45 55 520 7.40
FD-0208-50 340 ... 480 400 <1.0 125 0.27 9 930 400 80 HRB 170 6.75
-55 380 ... 540 430 <1.0 135 0.27 12 1070 430 83 N/D 230 6.90
-60 410 ... 630 470 1.0 150 0.27 16 1240 460 87 260 7.10
-65 450 ... 710 500 1.0 160 0.28 23 1340 500 90 320 7.25
FD-0405-55 380 ... 590 430 1.0 125 0.27 15 1100 390 80 HRB 170 6.75
-60 410 ... 710 460 1.0 145 0.27 27 1340 430 85 N/D 200 7.05
-65 450 ... 850 480 2.5 165 0.28 37 1590 500 91 280 7.35
FD-0405-100HT ... 690 760 <1.0 125 0.27 7 1100 860 30 HRC 55 HRC 180 6.75
D
-130HT ... 900 970 <1.0 145 0.27 9 1380 1030 35 55 340 7.05
-155HT ... 1070 1140 <1.0 165 0.28 14 1620 1210 42 55 400 7.35
FD-0408-50 340 ... 490 390 <1.0 120 0.25 12 900 430 85 HRB 150 6.70
-55 380 ... 620 430 1.0 140 0.27 18 1140 470 89 N/D 190 6.95
-60 410 ... 760 460 1.5 155 0.28 24 1380 500 93 260 7.20
-65 450 ... 860 490 2.0 170 0.28 30 1590 550 95 330 7.40
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Tempering temperature for heat-treated (HT) materials: 177 °C (350 °F).
D
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat-treated materials.
Alloys containing copper additions may have lower impact and fatigue limit as compared to the values in the data tables.
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

20
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.17 Austenitic Stainless Steel
3 2
NOTE 1—10 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm )
NOTE 2—1 in. = 25.4 mm
NOTE 3—1 ft-lbf = 1.356 J.
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Tensile Properties Elastic Constants Un- Compres- Hardness 107 Cycle
StrengthA Minimum Trans-
notched sive Fatigue
Material Elonga- verse Microin-
Yield Elonga- Charpy Yield Macro Strength Density
Designation tion Ultimate Young’s Poisson’s Rupture dentation
Yield Ultimate Strength tion (in Impact Strength (app- 90 %
Code (in 1 in.) Strength Modulus Ratio Strength (con-
(0.2 %) 1 in.) Energy (0.1 %) arent) Survival
verted)
103 psi % 103 psi 103 psi % 106 psi ft-lbf 103 psi 103 psi Rockwell 103 psi g/cm3
SS-303N1-25 25 … 0.0 39 32 0.5 15.5 0.25 3.5 86 38 62 HRB N/D 13 6.4
SS-303N2-35 35 … 3.0 55 42 5.0 16.5 0.25 19.0 98 46 63 HRB N/D 16 6.5
SS-303N2-38 38 … 6.0 68 45 10.0 20.0 0.27 35.0 N/D 46 70 HRB N/D 21 6.9
SS-303L-12 12 … 12.0 39 17 17.5 17.0 0.25 40.0 82 21 21 HRB N/D 15 6.6
SS-303L-15 15 … 15.0 48 24 20.0 20.0 0.27 55.0 N/D 29 35 HRB N/D 19 6.9
SS-304N1-30 30 … 0.0 43 38 0.5 15.5 0.25 4.0 112 38 61 HRB N/D 15 6.4
SS-304N2-33 33 … 5.0 57 40 10.0 16.5 0.25 25.0 127 47 62 HRB N/D 18 6.5
SS-304N2-38 38 … 8.0 70 45 13.0 20.0 0.27 55.0 N/D 47 68 HRB N/D 23 6.9
C
SS-304H-20 20 7.0 40 25 10 17.0 0.25 20.0 85 25 35 HRB N/D 6.6
SS-304L-13 13 … 15.0 43 18 23.0 17.0 0.25 45.0 N/D 22 30 HRB N/D 17 6.6
SS-304L-18 18 … 18.0 57 26 26.0 20.0 0.27 80.0 N/D 28 45 HRB N/D 21 6.9
SS-316N1-25 25 … 0.0 41 34 0.5 15.5 0.25 5.0 108 36 59 HRB N/D 11 6.4
SS-316N2-33 33 … 5.0 60 39 10.0 16.5 0.25 28.0 125 44 62 HRB N/D 14 6.5
SS-316N2-38 38 … 8.0 70 45 13.0 20.0 0.27 48.0 N/D 46 65 HRB N/D 19 6.9
C
SS-316H-20 20 5.0 35 25 7.0 17.0 0.25 20.0 85 25 33 HRB N/D 6.6
SS-316L-15 15 … 12.0 41 20 18.5 17.0 0.25 35.0 80 22 20 HRB N/D 13 6.6
SS-316L-22 22 … 15.0 57 30 21.0 20.0 0.27 65.0 N/D 29 45 HRB N/D 17 6.9
N1—Nitrogen alloyed. Good strength, low elongation.
*Sintered at 2100°F (1149°C) in dissociated ammonia.
N2—Nitrogen alloyed. High strength, medium elongation.
*Sintered at 2350°F (1288°C) in dissociated ammonia
H—Low carbon. Lower strength, high elongation.
*Sintered at 2100°F (1149°C) in 100 % hydrogen.
L—Low carbon. Lower strength, highest elongation.
Sintered at 2350°F (1288°C) in partial vacuum.
Cooled to avoid nitrogen absorption.
*Processing parameters used to generate these data, other conditions could be used.
SS-303 Austenitic Machining Grades-SS-303 is preferred for parts requiring extensive secondary machining. Strength and hardness are high and corrosion
resistance is good. SS-303 is non-magnetic.
SS-304 General Purpose Austenitic Grades-SS-304 has good strength properties and corrosion resistance. A general purpose grade used in many applica-
tions. SS-304 is non-magnetic.
SS-316 General Purpose Austenitic Grades-SS-316 has the best combination of properties in a P/M stainless steel alloy. Corrosion resistance is better than
SS-303. First choice for general purpose applications. Non-magnetic.
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Additional data in preparation will appear in subsequent editions of this standard.
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

21
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.18 Austenitic Stainless Steel (SI)
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Minimum Tensile Properties Elastic Constants Un- Compres- Hardness 107 Cycle
StrengthA Trans-
Elonga- notched sive Fatigue
Material verse Microin-
tion (in Yield Elonga- Charpy Yield Macro Strength Density
Designation Ultimate Young’s Poisson’s Rupture dentation
Yield Ultimate 25.4 Strength tion (in Impact Strength (app- 90 %
Code Strength Modulus Ratio Strength (con-
mm) (0.2 %) 25.4 mm) Energy (0.1 %) arent) Survival
verted)
MPa % MPa MPa % GPa J MPa MPa Rockwell MPa g/cm3
SS-303N1-25 170 … 0.0 270 220 0.5 105 0.25 5 590 260 62 HRB N/D 90 6.4
SS-303N2-35 240 … 3.0 380 290 5.0 115 0.25 26 680 320 63 HRB N/D 110 6.5
SS-303N2-38 260 … 6.0 470 310 10.0 140 0.27 47 N/D 320 70 HRB N/D 145 6.9
SS-303L-12 80 … 12.0 270 120 17.5 120 0.25 54 570 140 21 HRB N/D 105 6.6
SS-303L-15 100 … 15.0 330 170 20.0 140 0.27 75 N/D 200 35 HRB N/D 130 6.9
SS-304N1-30 210 … 0.0 300 260 0.5 105 0.25 5 770 260 61 HRB N/D 105 6.4
SS-304N2-33 230 … 5.0 390 280 10.0 115 0.25 34 880 320 62 HRB N/D 125 6.5
SS-304N2-38 260 … 8.0 480 310 13.0 140 0.27 75 N/D 320 68 HRB N/D 160 6.9
C
SS-304H-20 140 7.0 280 170 10.0 120 0.25 27 590 170 35 HRB N/D 6.6
SS-304L-13 90 … 15.0 300 120 23.0 120 0.25 61 N/D 150 30 HRB N/D 115 6.6
SS-304L-18 120 … 18.0 390 180 26.0 140 0.27 108 N/D 190 45 HRB N/D 145 6.9
SS-316N1-25 170 … 0.0 280 230 0.5 105 0.25 7 740 250 59 HRB N/D 75 6.4
SS-316N2-33 230 … 5.0 410 270 10.0 115 0.25 38 860 300 62 HRB N/D 95 6.5
SS-316N2-38 260 … 8.0 480 310 13.0 140 0.27 65 N/D 320 65 HRB N/D 130 6.9
C
SS-316H-20 140 5.0 240 170 7.0 120 0.25 27 590 170 33 HRB N/D 6.6
SS-316L-15 100 … 12.0 280 140 18.5 120 0.25 47 550 150 20 HRB N/D 90 6.6
SS-316L-22 150 … 15.0 390 210 21.0 140 0.27 88 N/D 200 45 HRB N/D 115 6.9
N1—Nitrogen alloyed. Good strength, low elongation.
*Sintered at 1149°C (2100°F) in dissociated ammonia
N2—Nitrogen alloyed. High strength, medium elongation.
*Sintered at 1288°C (2350°F) in dissociated ammonia
H—Low carbon. Lower strength, high elongation.
*Sintered at 1149°C (2100°F) in 100 % hydrogen.
L—Low carbon. Lower strength, highest elongation.
Sintered at 1288°C (2350°F) in partial vacuum.
Cooled to avoid nitrogen absorption.
*Processing parameters used to generate these data, other conditions could be used.
SS-303 Austenitic Machining Grades-SS-303 is preferred for parts requiring extensive secondary machining. Strength and hardness are high and corrosion
resistance is good. SS-303 is non-magnetic.
SS-304 General Purpose Austenitic Grades-SS-304 has good strength properties and corrosion resistance. A general purpose grade used in many applications.
SS-304 is non-magnetic.
SS-316 General Purpose Austenitic Grades-SS-316 has the best combination of properties in a P/M stainless steel alloy. Corrosion resistance is better than
SS-303. First choice for general purpose applications. Non-magnetic.
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi (see page 2); yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Additional data in preparation will appear in subsequent editions of this standard.
N/D Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

22
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.19 Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steel

NOTE 1—10 psi = 6.895 MPa (6.895 N/mm2)

3

NOTE 2—1 in. = 25.4 mm

NOTE 3—1 ft-lbf = 1.356 J.
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Tensile Properties Elastic Constants Un- Compres- Hardness 107 Cycle
StrengthA Minimum Trans-
notched sive Fatigue
Material Elonga- verse Microin-
Yield Elonga- Charpy Yield Macro Strength Density
Designation tion Ultimate Young’s Poisson’s Rupture dentation
Yield UltimateC Strength tion (in Impact Strength (app- 90 %
Code (in 1 in.) Strength Modulus Ratio Strength (con-
(0.2 %)D 1 in.) Energy (0.1 %) arent) Survival
verted)
103 psi % 103 psi 103 psi % 106 psi ft-lbf 103 psi 103 psi Rockwell 103 psi g/cm3
D
SS-410-90HT … 90 0.0 105 <0.5 18.0 0.25 2.5 113 93 23 HRC 55 HRC 35 6.5
SS-410L-20 20 … 10.0 48 26 16.0 24.0 0.27 50 N/D 28 45 HRB N/D 18 6.9
SS-430N2-28 28 … 3.0 60 35 5.0 25.0 0.27 25 N/D 33 70 HRB N/D 25 7.1
SS-430L-24 24 … 14.0 50 30 20.0 25.0 0.27 80 N/D 33 45 HRB N/D 25 7.1
SS-434N2-28 28 … 4.0 60 35 8.0 24.0 0.27 15 N/D 33 65 HRB N/D 22 7.0
SS-434L-24 24 … 10.0 50 30 15.0 24.0 0.27 65 N/D 33 50 HRB N/D 22 7.0
N2—Nitrogen alloyed. High strength, medium elongation.
*Sintered at 2350°F (1288°C) in dissociated ammonia
L—Low carbon. Lower strength, highest elongation.
Sintered at 2350°F (1288°C) in partial vacuum.
Cooled to avoid nitrogen absorption.
HT—Martensitic grade, heat treated. Highest strength.
*Sintered at 2100°F (1149°C) in dissociated ammonia.
*Processing parameters used to generate these data, other conditions could be used.
SS-409L Standard Ferritic Grade-SS-409 is used in applications requiring welding.
SS410-90HT Standard Martensitic Grade-SS-410 is used in applications requiring hardness and wear resistance. Carbon is added for increased heat treatment re-
sponse. As-sintered, it is in a hardened state due to the effect of furnace cooling. A secondary quench and temper heat treatment will give increased
hardness. It has fair corrosion resistance and poor machinability in comparison to the 300 series SS grades. SS-410 is ferromagnetic.
SS-410L Standard Ferritic Grade-SS-410 is used for soft magnetic properties and environments requiring the least corrosion resistance in a ferritic grade.
SS-430 Standard Ferritic Grade-SS-430 is used for soft magnetic properties and environments requiring somewhat better corrosion resistance than SS-410.
Magnetic response lower than seen with SS-410
SS-434 Standard Ferritic Grade-SS-434 is used for soft magnetic properties and environments requiring slightly better corrosion resistance than SS-430. Mag-
netic response is similar to SS-430
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Tempering temperature for heat treated (HT) material; 350°F (177°C).
D
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat treated materials.
N/D—Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

23
 B 783 – 04
TABLE X1.20 Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steel (SI)
P/M Material Properties
Minimum ValuesA Typical ValuesB
Minimum
Minimum Tensile Properties Elastic ConstantsUn- Compres- Hardness 107 Cycle
StrengthA,C Trans-
Elonga- notched sive Fatigue
Material verse Microin-
tion (in Yield Elonga- Charpy Yield Macro Strength Density
Designation Ultimate Young’s Poisson’s Rupture dentation
Yield Ultimate 25.4 Strength tion (in Impact Strength (app- 90 %
Code Strength Modulus Ratio Strength (con-
mm) (0.2 %)D 25.4 mm) Energy (0.1 %) arent) Survival
verted)
MPa % MPa MPa % GPa J MPa MPa Rockwell MPa g/cm3
SS-410-90HT … 620 0.0 720 (D) <0.5 125 0.25 3 780 640 23 HRC 55 HRC 240 6.5
SS-410L-20 140 … 10.0 330 180 16.0 165 0.27 68 N/D 190 45 HRB N/D 125 6.9
SS-430N2-28 190 … 3.0 410 240 5.0 170 0.27 34 N/D 230 70 HRB N/D 170 7.1
SS-430L-24 170 … 14.0 340 210 20.0 170 0.27 108 N/D 230 45 HRB N/D 170 7.1
SS-434N2-28 190 … 4.0 410 240 8.0 165 0.27 20 N/D 230 68 HRB N/D 150 7.0
SS-434L-24 170 … 10.0 340 210 15.0 165 0.27 88 N/D 230 50 HRB N/D 150 7.0
N2—Nitrogen alloyed. High strength, medium elongation.
*Sintered at 1288°C (2350°F) in dissociated ammonia
L—Low carbon. Lower strength, highest elongation.
Sintered at 1288°C (2350°F) in partial vacuum.
Cooled to avoid nitrogen absorption.
HT—Martensitic grade, heat treated. Highest strength.
*Sintered at 1149°C (2100°F) in dissociated ammonia
*Processing parameters used to generate these data, other conditions could be used.
SS-409L Standard Ferritic Grade-SS-409 is used in applications requiring welding.
SS410-90HT Standard Martensitic Grade-SS-410 is used in applications requiring hardness and wear resistance. Carbon is added for increased heat treatment
response. As-sintered, it is in a hardened state due to the effect of furnace cooling. A secondary quench and temper heat treatment will give increased
hardness. It has poor corrosion resistance and poor machinability in comparison to the 300 series SS grades. SS-410 is ferromagnetic.
SS-410L Standard Ferritic Grade-SS-410L is used for soft magnetic properties and environments requiring the least corrosion resistance in a ferritic grade.
SS-430L Ferritic Grade-SS-430L is used for soft magnetic properties and environments requiring somewhat better corrosion resistance than SS-410L. Magnetic
response is lower than seen with SS-410L.
SS-434L Ferritic Grade-SS-434L is used for soft magnetic properties and environments requiring slightly better corrosion resistance than SS-430L. Magnetic
response is similar to SS-430L.
A
Suffix numbers represent minimum strength values in 103 psi; yield in the as-sintered condition and ultimate in the heat-treated condition.
B
Mechanical property data derived from laboratory prepared test specimens sintered under commercial manufacturing conditions.
C
Tempering temperature for heat treated (HT) material; 177°C (350°F).
D
Yield and ultimate tensile strength are approximately the same for heat treated materials.
N/D Not Determined for the purposes of this standard.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

24
 Designation: B 784 – 01

Standard Specification for

Modified Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors for
Use in Insulated Electrical Cables1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 784; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 2.2 ASTM Standards:

1.1 This specification covers bare modified concentric-lay- B 3 Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire2
stranded conductors made from round copper wires, either B 8 Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper
uncoated or coated with tin, lead, or lead alloy for general use Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft2
in insulated electrical cables. These conductors shall be con- B 33 Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper
structed with a central core consisting of not more than seven Wire for Electrical Purposes2
wires, surrounded by one or more layers of helically laid wires. B 189 Specification for Lead-Coated and Lead-Alloy
1.2 For the purposes of this specification, conductors are Coated Soft Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes2
classified as follows (Explanatory Note 1 and Note 2): B 263 Test Method for Determination of Cross-Sectional
1.2.1 Class B Modified—Conductors to be insulated with Area of Stranded Conductors2
various materials such as rubber, paper, and crosslink polyeth- B 354 Terminology Relating to Uninsulated Metallic Elec-
ylene. trical Conductors2
1.2.2 Class C Modified and Class D Modified—Conductors 2.3 Other Standard:
where greater flexibility is required than is provided by Class NBS Handbook 1003
B Modified conductors. 3. Ordering Information
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound or SI units are to be
regarded separately as standard. Each system shall be used 3.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
independently of the other. Combining the values from the two the following information:
systems may result in non- conformance with the specification. 3.1.1 Quantity of each size and class,
For conductor sizes designated by AWG or kcmil sizes, the 3.1.2 Conductor size: circular-mil area or American Wire
requirements in SI units are numerically converted from the Gage (AWG) (Section 6),
corresponding requirements in inch-pound units. For conductor 3.1.3 Class (see 1.2 and Table 1),
sizes designated by AWG or kcmil, the requirements in SI units 3.1.4 Temper (see 10.2),
have been numerically converted from corresponding values 3.1.5 Whether coated or uncoated; if coated, designate type
stated or derived in inch-pound units. for conductor sizes of coating (see 10.1 and 10.2),
designated by SI units only, the requirements are stated or 3.1.6 Details of special-purpose lays, if required (see 5.2),
derived in SI units. 3.1.7 Lagging, if required (see 14.2),
1.3.1 For density, resitivity and temperature, the values 3.1.8 Special package marking, if required (Section 13),
stated in SI units are to be regarded as standard. 3.1.9 Place of inspection (Section 12), and
NOTE 1—The significant differences in this specification from Specifi- 4. Joints
cation B 8 are as follows: (1) The central core is permitted to contain up 4.1 Welds and brazes may be made in rods or in wires prior
to seven wires drawn into the assembly with an infinite length of lay while
Specification B 8 permits only one, and (2) The construction is applicable
to final drawing. Welds and brazes may be made in the finished
only to stranded assemblies of 19 or more wires. individual wires composing the conductor, but shall not be
closer together than prescribed in Table 2.
2. Referenced Documents
5. Lay
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect at the
date of material purchase form a part of this specification to the 5.1 The lay of a layer of wires shall be not less than eight
extent referenced herein. nor more than sixteen times the outside diameter of that layer,
except that for conductors composed of 37 wires or more, this
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B01 on
Electrical Conductors and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B01.04 on
2
Conductors of Copper and Copper Alloys. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03.
3
Current edition approved Mar. 10, 2001. Published May 2001. Originally Available from the National Technical Information Service, 5285 Port Royal
published as B 784 – 88. Last previous edition B 784 – 94. Rd., Springfield, VA 22161.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 784
TABLE 1 Construction Requirements of Modified Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors

NOTE 1—See Explanatory Note 5.

Class B Modified Class C Modified Class D Modified
Size
Circular Mils American Number of Diameter Number of Diameter Number of Diameter
Wire Gage Wires Wires Wires
(mils) (mm) (mils) (mm) (mils) (mm)
5 000 000A 217 151.8 3.86 271 135.8 3.45 271 135.8 3.45
4 000 000 217 144.0 3.66 271 128.9 3.27 271 128.9 3.27
4 000 000 217 135.8 3.45 271 121.5 3.09 271 121.5 3.09
3 500 000 169 143.9 3.66 217 127.0 3.23 271 113.6 2.89
3 000 000A 169 133.2 3.38 217 117.6 2.99 271 105.2 2.67
2 500 000A 127 140.3 3.56 169 121.6 3.09 217 107.3 2.73
2 000 000A 127 125.5 3.19 169 108.8 2.76 217 96.0 2.44
1 900 000 127 122.3 3.11 169 106.0 2.69 217 93.6 2.38
1 800 000 127 119.1 3.03 169 103.2 2.62 217 91.1 2.31
1 750 000A 127 117.4 2.98 169 101.8 2.59 217 89.8 2.28
1 700 000 127 115.7 2.94 169 100.3 2.55 217 88.5 2.25
1 600 000 127 112.2 2.85 169 97.3 2.47 217 85.9 2.18
1 500 000A 91 128.4 3.26 127 108.7 2.76 169 94.2 2.39
1 400 000 91 124.0 3.15 127 105.0 2.67 169 91.0 2.31
1 300 000 91 119.5 3.04 127 101.2 2.57 169 87.7 2.23
1 250 000 91 117.2 2.98 127 99.2 2.52 169 86.0 2.18
1 200 000 91 114.8 2.92 127 97.2 2.47 169 84.3 2.14
1 100 000 91 109.9 2.79 127 93.1 2.36 169 80.7 2.05
1 000 000A 61 128.0 3.25 91 104.8 2.66 127 88.7 2.25
900 000 61 121.5 3.09 91 99.4 2.52 127 84.2 2.14
800 000A 61 114.5 2.91 91 93.8 2.38 127 79.4 2.02
750 000A 61 110.9 2.82 91 90.8 2.31 127 76.8 1.95
700 000A 61 107.1 2.72 91 87.7 2.23 127 74.2 1.88
650 000 61 103.2 2.62 91 84.5 2.15 127 71.5 1.82
600 000A 61 99.2 2.52 91 81.2 2.06 127 66.7 1.69
550 000 61 95.0 2.41 91 77.7 1.97 127 65.8 1.67
500 000A 37 116.2 2.95 61 90.5 2.30 91 74.1 1.88
450 000 37 110.3 2.80 61 85.9 2.18 91 70.3 1.79
400 000A 37 104.0 2.64 61 81.0 2.06 91 66.3 1.68
350 000A 37 97.3 2.47 61 75.7 1.92 91 62.0 1.57
300 000A 37 90.0 2.29 61 70.1 1.78 91 57.4 1.46
250 000A 37 82.2 2.09 61 64.0 1.63 91 52.4 1.33
211 000A 0000 19 105.5 2.68 37 75.6 1.92 61 58.9 1.50
167 000A 000 19 94.0 2.39 37 67.3 1.71 61 52.4 1.33
133 000A 00 19 83.7 2.13 37 60.0 1.52 61 46.7 1.19
105 000A 0 19 74.5 1.89 37 53.4 1.36 61 41.6 1.06
83 000A 1 19 66.4 1.69 37 47.6 1.21 61 37.0 0.94
A
These sizes of conductors provide for one or more schedules of preferred series and commonly are used in the industry. The sizes not marked are given simply as
a matter of reference and it is suggested that their use be discouraged.

TABLE 2 Minimum Distance Between Joints in the Completed
Conductor
Number of Wires in Conductor Soft All Classes
19 1 ft
20 and over 1 ft in a layerA
A
Except as indicated, the limitations apply to closeness of joints throughout the
completed conductor.
requirement shall apply only to the two outer layers. The lay of
the layers other than the two outer layers shall be at the option
of the manufacturer, unless otherwise agreed upon.
5.2 Other lays for special purposes shall be furnished by
special agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser
(Explanatory Note 3).
5.3 The direction of lay of the outer layer shall be left-hand
unless the direction of lay is specified otherwise by the
purchaser.
5.4 The direction of lay shall be reversed in successive
layers, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser.
6. Construction
6.1 The areas of cross section, numbers, and diameters of
wires in the various classes of concentric-lay-stranded conduc-
tors shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 1.
6.2 The diameters of the wires listed in Table 1 are nominal.
Where “combination strand’’ is required in order to insulate the
conductor properly (strands in the outer layer having a larger
diameter than those in the inner layers) the diameters shall be
subject to a tolerance of 6 5 %, provided that the area of cross
section after stranding is in accordance with Section 11.
6.3 Where compressed stranding is required in order to
insulate the conductor properly, one or more layers of any
stranded conductor consisting of 19 wires or more may be
slightly compressed, thereby reducing the outside diameter of
the conductor by not more than 3 %, provided that the area of
cross section after stranding is in accordance with Section 11.
7. Physical and Electrical Tests of Stranded Conductors
of Soft Wires
7.1 Tests for the electrical properties of wires composing
conductors made from soft or annealed copper wire, bare or
coated, shall be made before stranding.
7.2 Tests for the physical properties of soft or annealed
copper wire, bare or coated, may be made upon the wires
before stranding or upon wires removed from the complete

2
 B 784
stranded conductor, but need not be made upon both. Care shall
be taken to avoid mechanical injury to wire removed from the
conductor for the purpose of testing.
7.3 The physical properties of wires when tested before
stranding shall conform to the applicable requirements of 10.2.
7.4 The physical properties of wires removed from the
completed stranded conductor shall be permitted to vary from
the applicable requirements of 10.2 by the following amounts
(Explanatory Note 4):
7.4.1 Average of Results Obtained on All Wires Tested—The
minimum elongation required shall be reduced in numerical
value 5 (for example, from 30 to 25 %) from the numerical
requirements for the wire before stranding.
7.4.2 Results Obtained on Individual Wires—The elonga-
tion of individual wires shall be reduced in numerical value 15
from the minimum requirements before stranding (that is, 10 in
addition to the 5 allowed in 7.4.1), but in no case shall the
elongation of any individual wire be less than 5 %.
7.5 In the event that the requirements prescribed in 7.4.2 are
met but those prescribed in 7.4.1 are not met, a retest shall be
permitted wherein all wires of the conductor shall be tested for
the purpose of final determination of conformance to 7.4.
7.6 Elongation tests to determine compliance shall not be
made on the conductor as a unit (Explanatory Note 6).
7.7 If a tinning, lead-coating, or lead-alloy-coating test is
required, it shall be made on the wires prior to stranding.
8. Density
8.1 For the purpose of calculating mass per unit length,
cross sections, etc., the density of the copper shall be taken as
0.32117 lb/in.3 or 8.89 g/cm3 at 20°C (Note 2 and Explanatory
Note 7).
NOTE 2—The term “mass” is being used in this specification as being
more technically correct. It replaces the term “weight.”
9. Mass and Resistance
9.1 The mass and electrical resistance of a unit length of
stranded conductor are a function of the length of lay. The
approximate mass and electrical resistance may be determined
using the standard increments shown in Table 3. When greater
accuracy is desired, the increment based on the specific lay of
the conductor may be calculated (Explanatory Note 8).
10. Requirements for Wires
10.1 The purchaser shall designate the type of wire and the
kind of coating, if any, to be used in the conductor.
10.2 Before stranding, the copper wire used shall meet all of
the requirements of ASTM Specifications B 3, B 33, and B 189
that are applicable to its type.
TABLE 3 Standard Increments Due to Stranding
Increment of Resistance
Type of Conductor
and Mass, %
Classes B Modified, C Modified, and D 2
Modified, 2 000 000 cmil and under
Over 2 000 000 to 3 000 000 cmil 3 15. Keywords
Over 3 000 000 to 4 000 000 cmil 4
Over 4 000 000 to 5 000 000 cmil 5 15.1 copper conductors for insulated wires; copper modified
3
10.3 The central core shall be made of wire of the same type
and temper as the concentric layers, unless otherwise specified.
11. Variation in Area
11.1 The area of cross section of the completed conductor
shall be not less than 98 % of the area indicated in Column 1
of Table 1. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the
manufacturer may have the option of determining the cross-
sectional area by either of the following methods; except that
in case of a question regarding area compliance, the method of
11.1.2 shall be used.
11.1.1 The area of cross section of a conductor may be
determined by calculations from diameter measurements, ex-
pressed to four decimal places, of its component wires at any
point when measured perpendicularly to their axes.
11.1.2 The area of cross section of a conductor may be
determined by Test Method B 263. In applying that method, the
increment in mass resulting from stranding may be the appli-
cable value specified in 9.1 or may be calculated from the
measured component dimensions of the sample under test. In
case of a question regarding area compliance, the actual mass
increment due to stranding shall be calculated.
12. Inspection
12.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
order, the manufacturer shall be responsible for the perfor-
mance of all inspection and test requirements specified.
12.2 All inspections and tests shall be made at the place of
manufacture unless otherwise agreed upon by the manufacturer
and the purchaser at the time of purchase.
12.3 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent-
ing the purchaser all reasonable manufacturer’s facilities to
satisfy that the material is being furnished in accordance with
this specification.
13. Product Marking
13.1 The net mass, length (or lengths and number of
lengths, if more than one length is included in the package),
size, kind of conductor, purchase order number, and any other
marks required by the purchase order shall be marked on a tag
attached to the end of the conductor inside of the package. The
same information, together with the manufacturer’s serial
number (if any) and all shipping marks required by the
purchaser, shall appear on the outside of each package.
14. Packaging and Package Marking
14.1 Package sizes for conductors shall be agreed upon by
the manufacturer and the purchaser in the placing of individual
orders (Explanatory Note 9).
14.2 The conductors shall be protected against damage in
ordinary handling and shipping. If heavy wood lagging is
required, it shall be specified by the purchaser at the time of
purchase.
concentric-lay-stranded; electrical copper conductors
 B 784
TABLE 4 Diameter, Area, and Mass of Modified Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors
Size of Nominal Conductor
Conductor Diameter
cmil or AWG Class B ModifiedA Area Mass, lb DC Resistance At 20°C
Number (in.) (mm) (in.)2 (mm)2 per 1000 ft per Mile (kg/m) V/1000 ft. V/km
5 000 000 cmilB 2.581 65.56 3.927 2533.54 15890 83899 23.68 .00218 .00715
4 000 000 cmil 2.448 62.18 3.534 2280.00 14300 75504 21.31 .00242 .00794
4 000 000 cmil 2.309 58.65 3.142 2027.09 12590 66475 18.76 .00270 .00886
3 500 000 cmil 2.159 54.84 2.749 1773.54 11020 58186 16.42 .00308 .0101
3 000 000 cmilB 1.998 50.75 2.356 1520.00 9353 49384 13.94 .00356 .0117
2 500 000 cmilB 1.824 46.33 1.963 1266.45 7794 41152 11.61 .00428 .0140
2 000 000 cmilB 1.632 41.45 1.571 1013.55 6175 32604 9.20 .00529 .0174
1 900 000 cmil 1.590 40.39 1.492 962.58 5866 30972 8.74 .00557 .0183
1 800 000 cmil 1.548 39.32 1.414 912.26 5558 29346 8.28 .00588 .0193
1 750 000 cmilB 1.526 38.76 1.374 886.45 5403 28528 8.05 .00604 .0198
1 700 000 cmil 1.504 38.20 1.335 861.29 5249 27715 7.82 .00622 .0204
1 600 000 cmil 1.459 37.06 1.257 810.97 4940 26083 7.36 .00661 .0217
1 500 000 cmilB 1.412 35.86 1.178 760.00 4631 24452 6.90 .00705 .0231
1 400 000 cmil 1.364 34.65 1.100 709.68 4323 22825 6.44 .00756 .0248
1 300 000 cmil 1.315 33.40 1.021 658.71 4014 21194 5.98 .00814 .0267
1 250 000 cmilB 1.289 32.74 0.9817 633.35 3859 20376 5.75 .00847 .0278
1 200 000 cmil 1.263 32.08 0.9425 608.06 3705 19562 5.52 .00882 .0289
1 100 000 cmil 1.209 30.71 0.8639 557.35 3396 17931 5.06 .00962 .0316
1 000 000 cmilB 1.152 29.26 0.7854 506.71 3088 16305 4.60 .0106 .0348
900 000 cmil 1.094 27.79 0.7069 456.06 2779 14673 4.14 .0118 .0387
800 000 cmilB 1.031 26.19 0.6283 405.35 2470 13042 3.68 .0132 .0433
750 000 cmilB 0.998 25.35 0.5890 380.00 2316 12228 3.45 .0141 .0462
700 000 cmilB 0.964 24.49 0.5498 354.71 2161 11410 3.22 .0151 .0495
650 000 cmil 0.929 23.60 0.5105 329.35 2007 10597 2.99 .0163 .0535
600 000 cmilB 0.893 22.68 0.4712 304.00 1853 9784 2.76 .0177 .0581
550 000 cmil 0.855 21.72 0.4320 278.71 1698 8965 2.53 .0192 .0630
500 000 cmilB 0.813 20.65 0.3927 253.35 1544 8152 2.30 .0212 .0695
450 000 cmil 0.772 19.61 0.3534 228.00 1389 7334 2.07 .0235 .0771
400 000 cmilB 0.728 18.49 0.3142 202.71 1235 6521 1.84 .0264 .0866
350 000 cmilB 0.681 17.30 0.2749 177.35 1081 5708 1.61 .0302 .0991
300 000 cmilB 0.630 16.00 0.2356 152.00 926.3 4891 1.38 .0353 .116
250 000 cmilB 0.575 14.61 0.1963 126.64 771.9 4076 1.15 .0423 .139
No. 0000B 0.528 13.41 0.1662 107.23 653.3 3449 0.97 .0500 .164
No. 000B 0.470 11.94 0.1318 85.03 518.1 2736 0.77 .0630 .207
No. 00B 0.419 10.64 0.1045 67.42 410.9 2170 0.61 .0795 .261
No. 0B 0.373 9.47 0.08289 53.48 325.8 1720 0.49 .100 .328
No 0.332 8.43 0.06573 42.41 258.4 1364 0.39 .159 .522
A
To calculate the nominal diameters of Class C or Class D modified conductors or of any concentric-lay-stranded conductors made from round wires of uniform
diameters, multiply the diameter of an individual wire (as given in Table 2) by that one of the following factors which applies:
Number of Wires in Conductor Factor to Calculate Conductor Diameter
19 5
37 7
61 9
91 11
127 13
169 15
217 17
271 19
B
These sizes of conductors provide for one or more schedules of preferred series, and commonly are used in the industry. The sizes not marked are given simply as
a matter of reference, and it is suggested that their use be discouraged.

EXPLANATORY NOTES

NOTE 1—In this specification only modified concentric-lay-stranded
conductor constructions are specifically designated. Conductor construc-
tions not included in this specification should be specifically agreed upon
by the manufacturer and the purchaser when placing the order.
NOTE 2—For definitions of terms relating to conductors, refer to
Terminology B 354.
NOTE 3—Certain types of insulated conductors may require a shorter
lay than other conductors. It is expected that special requirements
regarding length of lay will be specified by the purchaser in such
instances.
NOTE 4—Wires unlaid from conductors manifestly will have different
physical and electrical properties from those of the wire when prepared for
cabling, on account of the deformation brought about by laying and again
straightening for test.
NOTE 5—For the convenience of the users of this specification, Table 4
has been prepared giving the approximate diameters, areas, and mass per
1000 ft, per mile, and kg/m of the various constructions referred to in
Table 1.
NOTE 6—To test stranded conductors for tensile strength successfully
as a unit requires an adequate means of gripping the ends of the test
specimen. Various means are available, such as a long tube or socket into
which the conductor may be soldered, or in which, after insertion, the
conductor may be swaged or pressed without serious distortion. Ordinary
jaws or clamping devices usually are not suitable. The conductor testing
facilities of many commercial laboratories are limited to a breaking

4
 B 784
strength of 30 000 lb (13 600 kg) or less. Consequently, it may be
feasible to test very large-size conductors as a unit. Where such is
imperative, special arrangements for the testing shall be agreed upon
between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
NOTE 7—The value of density of copper is in accordance with the
International Annealed Copper Standard. The corresponding value at 0°C
is 0.32150 lb/in.2 or 8.90 g/cm3. As pointed out in the discussion of this
subject in NBS Handbook 100, there is no appreciable difference in values
of density of hard-drawn and annealed copper wire. In calculations
involving density note that the apparent density of coated wire is not
constant but a variable function of wire diameter. The smaller the
diameter, the greater the percentage of coating present, therefore the
greater departure from the density of copper.
NOTE 8—The increment of mass or electrical resistance of a complete
concentric- lay-stranded conductor, k, in percent is as follows:
k 5 100 ~m 2 1!
where m is the stranding factor, and is also the ratio of the mass or
electrical resistance of a unit length of stranded conductor to that of a solid
conductor of the same cross- sectional area or of a stranded conductor with
infinite length of lay, that is, all wires parallel to the conductor axis. The
stranding factor m for the completed stranded conductor is the numerical
average of the stranding factors for each of the individual wires in the
conductor, including the straight core wire or wires, if any (for which the
stranding factor is unity). The stranding factor, mind, for any given wire in
a concentric-lay-stranded conductor is as follows:
mind 5 =1 1 ~9.8696/n 2
where:
n = length of lay/diameter of helical path of the wire.
The derivation of the equation is given in NBS Handbook 100.
NOTE 9—To cooperate with the manufacturer in avoiding the accumu-
lation of excessive amounts of scrap wire, it is suggested that package
sizes permit ordinary variations of 6 10 % in package lengths, and that
occasional short lengths be permitted, such packages to be distinctly
marked.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 786 – 02a

Standard Specification for

19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Aluminum
Conductors for Subsequent Insulation1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 786; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification covers bare combination unilay- 2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
stranded conductors made from round wires of aluminum 1350 of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
and 8000 series of aluminum alloys, for insulated conductors extent referenced herein.
for electrical purposes. Aluminum 1350 wires in tempers -H19 2.2 ASTM Standards:
(extra hard), -H16 or -H26 (3⁄4 hard), -H14 or -H24 (1⁄2 hard), B 193 Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor
and -H142 or -H242 (1⁄2 hard) and 8000 series aluminum alloys Materials2
wires in tempers “0” and H1X or H2X are permitted. These B 230 Specification for Aluminum 1350-H19 Wire for Elec-
conductors shall be constructed with a central core wire trical Purposes2
surrounded by two layers of helically laid wires, resulting in an B 263 Test Method for Determination of Cross-Sectional
outer diameter equal to the compressed-stranded equivalent Area of Stranded Conductors2
conductors. B 609 Specification for Aluminum 1350 Round Wire, An-
NOTE 1—For the purpose of this specification, combination unilay
nealed and Intermediate Tempers, for Electrical Purposes2
conductor is defined as follows: a central core wire surrounded by a layer B 800 Specification for 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy Wire
of six helically laid wires of the same diameter as the core wire with a for Electrical Purposes—Annealed and Intermediate Tem-
helically laid outer layer containing six smaller wires alternated between pers2
six wires of the same diameter as the wires in the layer underneath. Both B 801 Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Conduc-
layers have a common length and direction of lay (see Fig. 1). tors of 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy for Subsequent
1.1.1 For the purpose of this specification, normal conductor Covering or Insulation2
classification (Class AA, A, B, C) is not applicable, as these E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
conductors are intended for subsequent insulation. The descrip- Determine Conformance with Specifications3
tive term combination unilay-stranded shall be used in place of E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)4
conductor classification (Note 2 and Note 3). 2.3 ANSI Standard:
ANSI H35.1 Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for
NOTE 2—Prior to 1975, aluminum 1350 was designated as EC alumi-
num.
Aluminum5
NOTE 3—The aluminum and temper designations conform to ANSI 2.4 NIST Standard:
Standard H35.1. Aluminum 1350 corresponds to Unified Numbering NBS Handbook 1006
System A91350 in accordance with Practice E 527. Unified Numbering
System alloy designations for 8000 Series aluminum alloys in accordance 3. Ordering Information
with Practice E 527 are listed in Table number 1 of Specification B 800. 3.1 Orders for materials under this specification shall in-
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound or SI units are to be clude the following information:
regarded separately as standard. The values in each system are 3.1.1 Conductor alloy,
not exact equivalents; therefore, each system shall be used 3.1.2 Quantity of each size,
independently of the other. Combining values from the two 3.1.3 Conductor size: Circular-mil area or American Wire
systems may result in nonconformance with the specification. Gage, AWG (Section 6 and Table 1),
1.2.1 For density, resistivity and temperature, the values 3.1.4 Stranding (see Explanatory Note 1),
stated in SI units are to be regarded as standard.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
1 4
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B01 on Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
5
Electrical Conductors and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B01.07 on Available from American National Standards Institute, 25 W. 43rd St., 4th
Conductors of Light Metals. Floor, New York, NY 10036.
6
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2002. Published Decemeber 2002. Originally Available from the National Institute of Standards and Technology, (NIST), 100
approved in 1988. Last previous edition approved in 2002 as B 786 – 02. Bureau Drive, Stop 3460, Gaithersburg, MD 20899-3460.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 786 – 02a
5.2 Other lays for special purposes shall be furnished by
special agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
NOTE 4—Certain types of insulation conductors may require shorter lay
than other conductors. It is expected that special requirements regarding
length of lay will be specified by the purchaser in such instances.
5.3 The direction of lay shall be left-hand unless the
direction of lay is specified otherwise by the purchaser.
FIG. 1 Cross Section of Conductor 6. Construction (Explanatory Note 1)
6.1 The areas of cross section, numbers, and diameters of
TABLE 1 Construction Requirements for 19-Wire Combination
Unilay Stranded Aluminum Conductors
wires in the various conductors shall conform to the require-
ments prescribed in Table 1 (Note 3) (see Fig. 1).
Area of Size, American (or Wire D1A Wire D2B
Diameter Diameter 6.2 The diameters of the wires listed in Table 2 are nominal.
Cross-Section, Brown and Sharpe)
cmil Wire Gage mils mm mils mm
In order to produce an essentially round 19-wire construction,
the outer 12-wire layer in the combination unilay product is
556 500 185.3 4.71 135.6 3.44
500 000 175.6 4.46 128.5 3.26 comprised of 6 wires of the same diameter as the wires in the
477 000 171.5 4.36 125.5 3.19 7-wire core, and 6 wires approximately 25 % smaller. The
450 000 166.6 4.23 121.9 3.10 2-wire sizes are alternated around the 7-wire core.
397 500 156.6 3.99 114.6 2.91
350 000 146.9 3.98 107.5 2.73 7. Mechanical and Electrical Tests of Conductors not
336 400 144.0 3.73 105.4 2.68
300 000 136.0 3.66 99.6 2.53
Annealed after Stranding
266 800 128.3 3.45 93.9 2.38 7.1 Wires composing the conductors shall be tested prior to
250 000 124.2 3.26 90.9 2.31
211 600 0000 114.2 3.15 83.6 2.12 stranding in accordance with the applicable specification (see
167 800 000 101.7 2.90 74.5 1.89 11.1.2), and tests on the completed conductor are not required.
133 100 00 90.6 2.58 66.3 1.68 However, when requested by the purchaser and agreed to by
105 600 0 80.7 2.30 59.1 1.50
83 690 1 71.8 2.05 52.6 1.34 the manufacturer at time of ordering, the tension tests of wires
66 360 2 64.0 1.82 46.8 1.19 before stranding may be waived and the completed conductor
52 620 3 57.0 1.62 41.7 1.06 tested in accordance with 7.2, or wires removed from the
41 740 4 50.7 1.45 37.1 0.94
33 090 5 45.2 1.29 33.1 0.84 completed conductor tested in accordance with 7.5.
26 240 6 40.2 1.15 29.4 0.75 7.2 When the completed conductor is tested as a unit, the
20 820 7 35.8 1.02 26.2 0.67 breaking strength shall be not less than the rated strength of
16 510 8 31.9 0.81 23.4 0.59
13 090 9 28.4 0.72 20.8 0.53 1350-H19 conductors or the minimum rated strength of 1350-
10 380 10 25.3 0.64 18.5 0.47 H16, -H26, -H14, -H24, -H142, and -H242 conductors if
6 530 12 20.1 0.51 14.7 0.37 failure occurs in the free length at least 1 in. (25 mm) beyond
A
Equation to calculate D1: the end of either gripping device. The strength shall be not less

B
D1 5 ΠCross2Sectional Area
16.2149
than 95 % of the rated or minimum rated strength if failure
occurs inside, or within 1 in. of the end of either gripping
Equation to calculate D2:
D2 5 D1 3 0.732. device. The breaking strength of 1350-H16, -H26, -H14, -H24,
-H142, and -H242 conductors shall be not greater than their
3.1.5 Temper (see Section 11), maximum rated strengths. The free length between grips of the
3.1.6 Details of special-purpose lays, if required (see 5.2), test specimen shall be not less than 24 in. (600 mm) and care
3.1.7 When physical tests shall be made (see Sections 7 and shall be taken to ensure that the wires in the conductor are
8), evenly gripped during the test (Explanatory Note 3).
3.1.8 Package size (see 16.1), 7.3 The rated strength of 1350-H19 conductors and the
3.1.9 Heavy wood lagging, if required (see 17.2), minimum rated strength of 1350-H16, -H26, -H14, -H24,
3.1.10 Special package marking, if required (Section 17), -H142, and -H242 conductors shall be taken as 93 % of the
and sum of the specified minimum average tensile strengths of the
3.1.11 Place of inspection (Section 15). component wires for 1350-H19 conductors, as prescribed in
Table 1, Tensile Requirements, of Specification B 230, and of
4. Joints the sum of the specified minimum tensile strengths of the
4.1 Electric-butt welds, cold pressure welds, or electric-butt component wires for 1350-H16, -H26, -H14, -H24, -H142, and
cold-upset welds may be made in the finished individual wires -H242 conductors, as prescribed in Specification B 609, as
composing the conductor but shall not be closer together than applicable. The maximum rated strength of the 1350-H16,
1 ft (Explanatory Note 2). -H26, -H14, -H24, -H142 and -H242 conductors shall be taken
as the sum of the specified maximum strengths of the compo-
5. Lay nent wires, as prescribed in Specification B 609, as applicable.
5.1 For combination unilay conductors the lay of a layer of The rated strengths shall be calculated using specified nominal
wires shall be not less than 8 nor more than 16 times the wire diameters.
outside diameter of the outer layer. 7.4 Rated strength and breaking strength values shall be

2
 B 786 – 02a
TABLE 2 Diameters, Areas and Mass of 19-Wire Combination Unilay Stranded Aluminum ConductorA
Size of Nominal Conductor Direct Current Resistance
Nominal Area Mass
Conductor, DiameterB at 20°C
cmil or
AWG in. mm in.2 mm2 lb/1000 ft kg/km V/1000 ft V/km

556 500 0.827 21.0 0.4371 282 521 775 0.0312 0.1024
500 000 0.784 19.9 0.3927 253 468 697 0.0347 0.1139
477 000 0.766 19.5 0.3746 242 447 665 0.0364 0.1194
450 000 0.744 18.9 0.3534 228 421 627 0.0385 0.1263
397 500 0.699 17.8 0.3122 201 372 554 0.0436 0.1431
350 000 0.656 16.7 0.2749 177 328 488 0.0495 0.1624
336 400 0.643 16.3 0.2642 170 315 469 0.0516 0.1693
300 000 0.607 15.4 0.2356 152 281 418 0.0578 0.1896
266 800 0.573 14.6 0.2095 135 250 372 0.0650 0.2133
250 000 0.554 14.1 0.1963 127 234 348 0.0694 0.2277
0000 0.510 13.0 0.1662 107 198 295 0.0820 0.2690
000 0.454 11.5 0.1318 85.0 157 234 0.103 0.3389
00 0.404 10.3 0.1045 67.4 125 185 0.130 0.4275
0 0.360 9.14 0.08291 53.5 98.9 147 0.164 0.5387
1 0.321 8.15 0.06573 42.4 78.4 117 0.207 0.6798
2 0.286 7.26 0.05212 33.6 62.1 92.4 0.261 0.8573
3 0.254 6.45 0.04133 26.7 49.3 73.4 0.330 1.0814
4 0.226 5.74 0.03278 21.1 39.1 58.2 0.416 1.3633
5 0.202 5.13 0.02599 16.8 31.0 46.1 0.523 1.72
6 0.179 4.55 0.02061 13.3 24.6 36.6 0.661 2.1684
7 0.160 4.06 0.01635 10.5 19.5 29.0 0.834 2.7362
8 0.143 3.63 0.01297 8.37 15.5 23.1 1.05 3.4464
9 0.127 3.23 0.01028 6.63 12.3 18.3 1.32 4.3307
10 0.113 2.87 0.00816 5.26 9.73 14.5 1.67 5.4790
12 0.090 2.29 0.00513 3.31 6.12 9.11 2.67 8.7598
A
Mass and electrical resistance are based on aluminum 1350.
B
To calculate the diameter, multiply the large wire diameter in Table 1 times 3 and add two times the small wire diameter.
Example: AWG 4/0 diameter = [3(114.2) + 2(83.6)] = 509.8

rounded to three significant figures, in the final value only, in
accordance with the rounding method in Practice E 29.
7.5 When wires are removed from the completed conductor
and tested, 1350-H19 wires shall have minimum tensile
strengths not less than 95 % of the tensile strengths prescribed
for individual tests in Table 1, Tensile Requirements, of
Specification B 230. 1350-H16, -H26, -H14, -H24, -H142, and
-H242 wires shall have tensile strengths not less than 95 % of
the minimum tensile strength nor more than 105 % of the
maximum tensile strength prescribed in Specification B 609, as
applicable (Explanatory Note 4).
7.6 All wires composing the conductors shall be capable of
meeting the bending properties stated in Specification B 230
after stranding. Routine production testing after stranding is
not required.
7.7 Mechanical and electrical tests of conductors in 8000
series aluminum alloys in “0” temper, H1X or H2X wire and
not annealed after stranding shall be in accordance with
Section 9 of Specification B 801.
8. Mechanical and Electrical Tests of Conductors
Annealed after Stranding
8.1 Tensile properties and electrical resistivity shall be
determined on samples taken from 10 % of the reels or coils of
conductor, but from not less than five (or all if the lot is less
than five) reels or coils. Resistivity shall be determined as
prescribed in the Resistivity section of Specification B 230 on
one wire from each conductor sample except this test is not
required if performed previously on the 1350-H19 wire. At the
manufacturer’s option, tension tests shall be made either on
one of the inner seven wires and one wire from each additional
layer of each conductor sample to determine conformance with
8.2 or on the conductor as a unit to determine conformation
with 8.3.
8.2 When wires removed from the completed conductor are
tested, 1350-H26, -H24, and -H242 wires shall have tensile
strengths not less than 95 % of the minimum tensile strength
nor more than 105 % of the maximum tensile strength pre-
scribed in Specification B 609, as applicable (Explanatory Note
4).
8.3 When the completed conductor is tested as a unit, the
breaking strengths of 1350-H26, -H24, and -H242 conductors
shall conform with 7.2, 7.3, and 7.4.
8.4 All wires composing the conductors shall be capable of
meeting the bending properties stated in Specification B 230
after stranding. Routine production testing after stranding is
not required.
8.5 Mechanical and electrical tests of conductors of 8000
series aluminum alloys fabricated from wires other than H2X
and annealed after stranding to meet “0” temper or H2X
requirements shall be in accordance with Section 10 of
Specification B 801.
9. Mass and Resistance
9.1 The mass and electrical resistance of a unit length of
stranded conductor are a function of the length of lay. The
approximate mass and electrical resistance may be determined
using the standard increment of 2 %. When greater accuracy is
desired, the increment based on the specific lay of the conduc-
tor may be calculated (Explanatory Note 1).
9.2 The maximum electrical resistance of a unit length of
stranded conductor shall not exceed 2 % over the nominal d-c
resistance shown in Table 2 (Explanatory Note 6). When the
d-c resistance is measured at other than 20°C, it is to be

3
 B 786 – 02a
corrected by using the multiplying factor given in Table 3. 12. Retest
9.3 For conductors to be used in covered or insulated wires 12.1 If upon testing a sample from any reel or coil of
or cables, d-c resistance measurement may be used instead of conductor the results do not conform to the requirements of
the method outlined in Section 14, to determine compliance Sections 7 and 8, two additional samples shall be tested, and
with this specification; however, the referee method shall be the average of the three tests shall determine the acceptance of
that outlined in Section 12. the reel or coil.
10. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance 13. Density
10.1 The conductor shall be free of all imperfections not 13.1 For the purpose of calculating mass, cross sections,
consistent with good commercial practice. etc., the density of aluminum 1350 shall be taken as 0.0975
lb/in.3 (2705 kg/m3) and 8000 Series aluminum alloys shall be
11. Requirements for Wires taken as 0.098 lb/in.3 (2710 kg/m3) at 20°C.
11.1 The purchaser shall designate the temper of wires to be 14. Variance in Area
used in the conductor.
14.1 The area of cross section of the completed conductor
11.1.1 For conductors of aluminum 1350 with tempers other
shall be not less than 98 % of the area indicated in Column 1
than 1350-H19, the manufacturer shall have the following
of Table 1. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the
options on manufacturing method:
manufacturer shall determine the cross-sectional area by the
11.1.1.1 Strand the conductor from wires drawn to final
following method:
temper,
14.1.1 The area of cross section of a conductor may be
11.1.1.2 Strand the conductor from wires drawn to H19
determined by Test Method B 263. In applying that method, the
temper and annealed to final temper prior to stranding, and
increment in mass resulting from stranding may be the appli-
11.1.1.3 Strand the conductor from 1350-H19 wires and
cable value specified in 9.1 or may be calculated from the
anneal the stranded conductor to final temper.
measured component dimensions of the sample under test. In
11.1.2 Before stranding, the aluminum wire used shall meet
case of question regarding area compliance, the actual mass
all of the requirements of Specification B 230 or B 609,
increment due to stranding shall be calculated.
whichever is applicable.
11.1.3 For tempers of 8000 series aluminum alloys conduc- 15. Inspection
tors, the manufacturer shall have the following options on 15.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
manufacturing method: order, the manufacturer shall be responsible for the perfor-
11.1.3.1 Strand the conductor from wires annealed to final mance of all inspection and test requirements specified.
temper prior to stranding, and 15.2 All inspections and tests shall be made at the place of
11.1.3.2 Strand the conductor from as drawn wires and manufacture unless otherwise especially agreed upon between
anneal the stranded conductor to final temper. the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of purchase.
11.1.4 Before stranding, the aluminum wire used shall meet 15.3 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent-
all of the requirements of Specification B 800. ing the purchaser all reasonable manufacturer’s facilities to
11.2 All wires in the conductor shall be of the same temper. satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
with this specification.
TABLE 3 Temperature Correction Factors for Conductor 16. Product Marking
Resistance
16.1 The net mass, length (or lengths and number of
Temperature, °C Multiplying Factor for Conversion to 20°C
lengths, if more than one length is included in the package),
0 1.088
5 1.064
size, kind of conductor, purchase order number, and any other
10 1.042 marks required by the purchase order shall be marked on a tag
15 1.020 attached to the end of the conductor inside of the package. The
20 1.000
25 0.980
same information, together with the manufacturer’s serial
30 0.961 number (if any) and all shipping marks required by the
35 0.943 purchaser, shall appear on the outside of each package.
40 0.925
45 0.908 17. Packaging and Package Marking
50 0.892
55 0.876 17.1 Package sizes for conductors shall be agreed upon
60 0.861 between the manufacturer and the purchaser in the placing of
65 0.846
70 0.832 individual order (Explanatory Note 7).
75 0.818 17.2 The conductors shall be protected against damage in
80 0.805 ordinary handling and shipping. If heavy wood lagging is
85 0.792
90 0.780 required, it shall be specified by the purchaser at the time of
purchase.

4
 B 786 – 02a
18. Keywords electrical conductor-aluminum; insulated electrical conductor;
18.1 aluminum alloy conductors; aluminum electrical con- stranded conductor; unilay stranded conductor; 8000-series
ductor; combination stranded conductor; electrical conductor; aluminum alloy conductors

EXPLANATORY NOTES

NOTE 1—The construction details in paragraphs 6.1 and 6.2 are
considered typical and are not intended to restrict other constructions that
otherwise meet physical, electrical and mechanical requirements of this
specification.
NOTE 2—The behavior of properly spaced wire joints in stranded
conductors is related to both their tensile strength and elongation. Because
of its higher elongation properties, the lower strength electric-butt weld
gives equivalent overall performance to that of a cold-pressure weld or an
electric-butt, cold-upset weld in conductors with more than seven wires.
NOTE 3—To test stranded conductors for breaking strength successfully
as a unit requires an adequate means of gripping the ends of the test
specimen without causing damage that may result in failure below the
actual strength of the conductor. Various means are available, such as
compression sleeves, split sleeves, and preformed grips, but ordinary jaws
or clamping devices usually are not suitable.
NOTE 4—Wires unlaid from conductors may have different physical
properties from those of the wire when prepared for cabling, on account
of the deformation caused by laying and again straightening for test.
NOTE 5—The increment of mass or electrical resistance of a completed
concentric-lay-stranded conductor (k) in percent is as follows:
k 5 100 ~m 2 1! (1)
where m is the stranding factor, and also the ratio of the weight or
electrical resistance of a unit length of stranded conductor to that of a solid
conductor of the same cross-sectional area or of a stranded conductor with
infinite length of lay, that is, all wires parallel to the conductor axis. For
combination unilay conductors the stranding factor m for the completed
stranded conductor is the ratio of the sum of the individual weights of the
twisted strand components to the sum of the equivalent weights of the
strand components if they were untwisted.The derivation of the above is
given in the NBS Handbook 100.

W
p
F
@1m1 1 6m2 1 6m3 1 ~6 3 0.7322!m4#3 d 3 12 3 4 3 D12 G
@1m1 1 6m2 1 6m3 1 ~3.215!m4#

F G
m5W85 p
5 (2)
@16.215#
@1 1 6 1 6 1 ~6 3 0.7322!#3 d 3 12 3 4 3 D12

d = density of metal (lb/in.3)

W = the weight of all the strand components in the twisted 12 = number of inches in 1 foot
conductor (lb/ft) LOL = length of lay (in.)
W8 = the equivalent weight of all the strand components if they
were untwisted (lb/ft)
D1 = diameter of larger strand component (refer to Fig. 1) (in.)
D2 = diameter of smaller strand component (refer to Fig. 1) (in.)
= 0.732 3 D1

m15 ratio increase for the center wire 5 1 (3)

m2 5 ratio increase for the wires in the inner layer 5 Π11

p2 3 ~2 3 D1!2
LOL2
(4)

m3 5 ratio increase for the wires of diameter D1 the outer layer 5 Π11

2
p 3 ~3.464 3 D1!
LOL2
2
(5)

m4 5 ratio increase for the wires of diameter D2 the outer layer 5 Π11

p2 3 ~3.732 3 D1!2
LOL2
(6)

For the above equations m2, m3 and m4 may be simplified using the p2 3 ~3.464 3 D1!2 59.2141 3 D12
following approximation: m3 51 1 2 511 (9)
2 3 ~LOL ! LOL2
2
x
y 5 =1 1 x2 > 1 1 2 where x # 0.125 (7)
p2 3 ~3.732 3 D1!2 68.7310 3 D12
The simplified ratio increase equations then become: m4 51 1 2 511 (10)
2 3 ~LOL ! LOL2
p2 3 ~2 3 D1!2 19.7392 3 D12
m2 >1 1 5 1 1 (8)
2 3 ~LOL2! LOL2

5
 B 786 – 02a
Combining the terms, the combined m value for the conductor becomes:

@1m1 1 6m2 1 6m3 1 ~3.215!m4#

m5 (11)
@16.215#

5
F 1163 S 1 1 19.7392 3 S DD
D12
LOL2 S
1 6 3 1 1 59.2141 3 S DD
D12
LOL2 S
1 ~6 3 0.7322! 3 1 1 68.7310 3 S DDG
D12
LOL2
@16.215#
D12
16.215 1 694.686
LOL2
5
16.215
D12
5 1 1 42.8422
LOL2

NOTE 6—The d-c resistance on a given construction shall be calculated R = conductor resistance in V/1000 ft (V/km),
using the following formula: k = increment due to stranding from Table 2 and Explanatory Note 5,
Inch-Pound Units: r = volume resistivity in ohms-cmil/ft (V-mm2/m), determined in
k
S r
R 5 100 1 1 A D (12)
accordance with Test Method B 193, and
A = cross-sectional area of conductor in kcmil (mm2) determined in
accordance with Section 6 of this specification.
or Metric Units: NOTE 7—To cooperate with the manufacturer in avoiding the accumu-

FS DG
K r lation of excessive amount of scrap wire, it is suggested that package sizes
R 100 1 1 A 1000 (13) permit ordinary variations of plus and minus 10 % in package lengths, and
that occasional short lengths be permitted, such packages to be distinctly
where: marked.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 787/B 787M – 01

Standard Specification for

19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors
for Subsequent Insulation1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 787/B 787M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers bare combination unilay-
stranded conductors made from round copper wires, either
uncoated or coated with tin or lead alloy for insulated conduc-
tors for electrical purposes. These conductors shall be con-
structed with a central core wire surrounded by two layers of
helically laid wires, resulting in an outer diameter equal to the
compressed-stranded equivalent conductor. (See Explanatory FIG. 1 Cross Section of Conductor
Note 1 and Note 2).
NOTE 1—For the purpose of this specification, combination unilay
B 1 Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire2
conductor is defined as follows: a central core wire surrounded by a layer
of six helically laid wires of the same diameter as the core wire with a B 2 Specification for Medium-Hard-Drawn Copper Wire2
helically laid outer layer containing six smaller wires alternated between B 3 Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire2
six wires of the same diameter as the wires in the layer underneath. Both B 33 Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper
layers have a common length and direction of lay (see Fig. 1). Wire for Electrical Purposes2
1.2 For the purpose of this specification, normal conductor B 189 Specification for Lead-Coated and Lead-Alloy-
classification (Class AA, A, B, C) is not applicable as these Coated Soft Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes2
conductors are intended for subsequent insulation. The descrip- B 246 Specification for Tinned Hard-Drawn and Medium-
tive term combination unilay-stranded shall be used in place of Hard-Drawn Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes2
conductor classification. B 263 Test Method for Determination of Cross-Sectional
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound or SI units are to be Area of Stranded Conductors2
regarded separately as standard. Each system shall be used B 354 Terminology Relating to Uninsulated Metallic Elec-
independently of the other. Combining values from the two trical Conductors2
systems may result in nonconformance with the specification. 2.3 Other Standard:
For conductor sizes designated by AWG or kcmil, the require- NBS Handbook 100—Copper Wire Tables of the National
ments in SI units have been numerically converted from Bureau of Standards3
corresponding values, stated or derived, in inch-pound units. 3. Ordering Information
For conductor sizes designated by SI units only, the require-
ments are stated or derived in SI units. 3.1 Orders for materials under this specification shall in-
1.3.1 For density, resistivity, and temperature, the values clude the following information:
stated in SI units are to be regarded as standard. 3.1.1 Quantity of each size,
3.1.2 Conductor Size: Circular-mil area or American Wire
2. Referenced Documents Gage, AWG (Section 7 and Table 1),
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date 3.1.3 Stranding (see Explanatory Note 3),
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the 3.1.4 Temper (see 4.2),
extent referenced herein. 3.1.5 Whether coated or uncoated; if coated, designate type
2.2 ASTM Standards: of coating (see 4.1 and 4.2),
3.1.6 Details of special-purpose lays, if required (see 6.2),
3.1.7 When physical tests shall be made (see 9.2 and 9.3),
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B01 on
Electrical Conductors and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B01.04 on
2
Conductors of Copper and Copper Alloys. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vols 02.03.
3
Current edition approved Nov. 10, 2001. Published January 2002. Originally Available from National Institute of Standards and Technology, (NIST),
published as B 787 – 88. Last previous edition B 787/B 787M – 00. Gaithersburg, MD 20899.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 787/B 787M
TABLE 1 Construction Requirements for 19-Wire Combination 6. Lay
Unilay Stranded Copper Conductors
6.1 For combination unilay conductors the lay of a layer of
Size, American (or
Brown and Wire D1A Wire D2B
wires shall be not less than 8 nor more than 16 times the
Cross-Sectional Area Sharpe) Diameter, Diameter, outside diameter of the outer layer.
cmil sq mm Wire Gage mils mm mils mm 6.2 Other lays for special purposes shall be furnished by
500 000 253.4 175.6 4.5 128.5 3.3 special agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser
450 000 228.0 166.6 4.2 121.9 3.1
400 000 202.7 157.1 4.0 115.0 2.9
(Explanatory Note 4).
350 000 177.3 146.9 3.7 107.5 2.7 6.3 The direction of lay shall be left-hand unless the
300 000 152.0 136.0 3.5 99.6 2.5 direction of lay is specified otherwise by the purchaser.
250 000 126.7 124.2 3.2 90.9 2.3
211 600 107.2 0000 114.2 2.4 83.6 2.1 7. Construction (Explanatory Note 3)
167 800 85.0 000 101.7 2.6 74.5 1.9
133 100 67.4 00 90.6 2.3 66.3 1.7 7.1 The cross-sectional areas, numbers, and diameters of
105 600 53.5 0 80.7 2.0 59.1 1.5 wires in the various conductors shall conform to the require-
83 690 42.4 1 71.8 1.8 52.6 1.3
66 360 33.6 2 64.0 1.6 46.8 1.2 ments prescribed in Table 1.
52 620 26.7 3 57.0 1.4 41.7 1.1 7.2 The diameters of the wires listed in Table 2 are nominal.
41 740 21.1 4 50.7 1.3 37.1 0.9 In order to produce an essentially round 19-wire construction,
33 090 16.8 5 45.2 1.1 33.1 0.8
26 240 13.3 6 40.2 1.0 29.4 0.7 the outer 12-wire layer in the combination unilay product is
20 820 10.5 7 35.8 0.9 26.2 0.7 comprised of 6 wires of the same diameter as the wires in the
16 510 8.4 8 31.9 0.8 23.4 0.6 7-wire core, and 6 wires approximately 25 % smaller. The
13 090 6.6 9 28.4 0.7 20.8 0.5
10 380 5.3 10 25.3 0.6 18.5 0.5 2-wire sizes are alternated around the 7-wire core (Fig. 1).
6 530 3.3 12 20.1 0.5 14.7 0.4
4 110 2.1 14 15.9 0.4 11.7 0.3 8. Physical and Electrical Tests of Conductors Stranded
2 580 1.3 16 12.6 0.3 9.2 0.2 of Soft Wires
1 620 0.8 18 10.0 0.3 7.3 0.2
1 020 0.5 20 7.9 0.2 5.8 0.1 8.1 Tests for the electrical properties of wires composing
640 0.3 22 6.3 0.2 4.6 0.1 conductors made from soft or annealed copper wire, bare or
404 0.2 24 5.0 0.1 3.7 0.1
coated, shall be made before stranding.
A
Equation to calculate D 1: 8.2 Tests for the physical properties of soft or annealed
ΠCross2Sectional Area
16.2149
copper wire, bare or coated, may be made upon the wires
B
Equation to calculate D2: = D 1 3 0.732. before stranding or upon wires removed from the complete
stranded conductor, but need not be made upon both. Care shall
be taken to avoid mechanical injury to wire removed from the
3.1.8 Package size (see 15.1), conductor for the purpose of testing.
3.1.9 Lagging, if required (see 15.2), 8.3 The physical properties of wire when tested before
3.1.10 Special package marking, if required (Section 15), stranding shall conform to the applicable requirements of 4.2.
and 8.4 The physical properties of wires removed from the
3.1.11 Place of inspection (Section 13). completed stranded conductor shall be permitted to vary from
the applicable requirements of 4.2 by the amounts as follows
4. Requirements for Wires
(Explanatory Note 5):
4.1 The purchaser shall designate the type of wire and the 8.4.1 Average of Results Obtained on All Wires Tested—The
kind of coating, if any, to be used in the conductor. minimum elongation required shall be reduced in numerical
4.2 Before stranding, the copper wire used shall meet all of value 5 (for example, from 30 to 25 %) from the numerical
the requirements of the following ASTM specifications that are requirements for the wire before stranding.
applicable to its type: 8.4.2 Results Obtained on Individual Wires—The elonga-
4.2.1 Specification B 3 tion of individual wires shall be reduced in numerical value 15
4.2.2 Specification B 33 from the minimum requirements before stranding (that is, 10 in
4.2.3 Specification B 2 addition to the 5 allowed in 8.4.1), but in no case shall the
4.2.4 Specification B 1 elongation of any individual wire be less than 5 %.
4.2.5 Specification B 189 8.5 In the event that the requirements prescribed in 8.4.2 are
4.2.6 Specification B 246. met but those prescribed in 8.4.1 are not met, a retest shall be
4.3 In combination unilay stranded conductors the central permitted wherein all wires of the conductor shall be tested for
core wire shall be made of the same type and temper as the the purpose of final determination of conformance to 8.4.
layers, unless otherwise specified. 8.6 Elongation tests to determine compliance shall not be
made on the conductor as a unit.
5. Joints 8.7 If a tinning or lead-alloy-coating test is required, it shall
5.1 Welds and brazes may be made in rods or in wires prior be made on the wires prior to stranding.
to final drawing. Welds and brazes may be made in the finished
individual wires composing the conductor, but shall not be 9. Physical and Electrical Tests of Conductors Stranded
closer together than 50 ft (15.24 m) for hard and medium-hard of Hard-Drawn or Medium-Hard Drawn Wires
conductors, and 1 ft in a layer for soft conductors. 9.1 Tests for the physical and electrical properties of wires

2
 B 787/B 787M
TABLE 2 Diameters, Areas, and Masses of 19-Wire Combination Unilay Stranded Copper Conductors
Nominal Area Mass
Size of Conductor
cmil or AWG sq mm Nominal Diameter, in.A Conductor, mm in.2 mm2 lbs/1000 ft lbs/mile g/m
500 000 253.4 0.784 19.9 0.392700 253.4 1544 8151 2297
450 000 228.0 0.744 18.9 0.353400 228.0 1389 7336 2067
400 000 202.7 0.701 17.8 0.314000 202.6 1235 6521 1838
350 000 177.3 0.656 16.7 0.274900 177.4 1081 5706 1609
300 000 152.0 0.607 15.4 0.235600 152.0 926.3 4891 1378
250 000 126.7 0.554 14.1 0.196300 126.7 771.9 4076 1149
0000 107.2 0.510 13.0 0.166200 107.2 653.3 3450 972.1
000 85.0 0.454 11.5 0.131800 85.0 518.1 2736 770.9
00 67.4 0.404 10.3 0.104500 67.4 410.9 2169 611.4
0 53.5 0.360 9.1 0.082910 53.5 325.8 1720 684.8
1 42.4 0.321 8.2 0.065730 42.4 258.4 1364 384.5
2 33.6 0.286 7.3 0.052120 33.6 204.9 1082 304.9
3 26.7 0.254 6.5 0.041330 26.7 162.5 858.1 241.8
4 21.1 0.226 5.7 0.032780 21.1 128.9 680.5 191.8
5 16.8 0.202 5.1 0.025990 16.8 102.2 539.6 152.1
6 13.3 0.179 4.5 0.020610 13.3 81.05 428.0 120.6
7 15.6 0.160 4.1 0.016350 10.5 64.28 339.4 95.65
8 8.4 0.143 3.6 0.012970 8.4 50.97 269.1 75.84
9 6.6 0.127 3.2 0.010280 6.6 40.42 213.4 60.14
10 5.3 0.113 2.9 0.008155 5.3 32.06 169.3 47.71
12 3.3 0.090 2.3 0.005130 3.3 20.16 106.5 30.00
14 2.1 0.071 1.8 0.003230 2.1 12.68 66.95 18.87
16 1.3 0.056 1.4 0.002030 1.3 7.974 42.10 11.87
18 0.8 0.045 1.1 0.001280 0.8 5.015 26.48 7.462
20 0.5 0.035 0.9 0.000804 0.5 3.154 16.65 4.693
22 0.3 0.028 0.7 0.000503 0.3 1.992 10.52 2.964
24 0.2 0.022 0.6 0.000317 0.2 1.249 6.59 1.859
A
To calculate the diameter, multiply the large wire diameter in Table 1 times 3 and add two times the small wire diameter.
Example: AWG 4/0 diameter = [(3(114.2) + 2 (83.6)] = 509.8

composing conductors made from hard-drawn or medium- 10. Density

hard-drawn wires, uncoated or coated, shall be made before but
not after stranding.
9.2 At the option of the purchaser, tension and elongation
tests on hard-drawn and medium-hard-drawn wires, uncoated
or coated, before stranding may be waived, and the completed
hard-drawn and medium-hard-drawn conductors may be tested
as a unit. The breaking strength of the bare conductors so tested
shall be at least 90 % of the total of the specified minimum
breaking strengths of the component wires. The maximum
breaking strength of conductors made from medium-hard-
drawn wires, uncoated or coated, shall be not greater than the
sum of the specified maximum breaking strengths of the
component wires. The minimum breaking strengths of wires
shall be calculated using specified nominal diameters and
specified minimum tensile strengths. The maximum breaking
strengths of wires shall be calculated using nominal diameters
and specified maximum tensile strengths. The free length
between grips of the test specimen shall be not less than 24 in.
(610 mm), and care shall be taken to ensure that the wires in
the conductor are evenly gripped during the test (Explanatory
Note 6).
9.3 When requested by the purchaser at the time of placing
the order, tension tests on hard-drawn and medium-hard-drawn
wires, uncoated or coated, before stranding or as a unit may be
waived and tests made on wires removed from the completed
conductor. The test limits, based on a 10-in. (254-mm) gage
length, for such tests shall be specified by the purchaser in the
placing of individual orders (Explanatory Note 5).
9.4 If a tinning test is required, it shall be made on the wires
prior to stranding.
10.1 For the purpose of calculating masses, cross sections,
etc., the density of the copper shall be taken as 8.89
g/cm3(0.32117 lb/in.3) at 20°C (Explanatory Note 7).
11. Mass and Resistance
11.1 The mass and electrical resistance of a unit length of
stranded conductor are a function of the length of lay. The
approximate mass and electrical resistance may be determined
using the standard increment of 2 %. When greater accuracy is
desired, the increment based on the specific lay of the conduc-
tor may be calculated (Explanatory Note 8).
12. Variance in Area
12.1 The cross-sectional area of the completed conductor
shall be not less than 98 % of the area indicated in Column 1
of Table 1. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the
manufacturer shall determine the cross-sectional area by the
following method:
12.1.1 The cross-sectional area of a conductor may be
determined by Test Method B 263. In applying this method, the
increment in mass resulting from stranding may be the appli-
cable value specified in 11.1 or may be calculated from the
measured component dimensions of the sample under test. In
case of question regarding area compliance, the actual mass
increment due to stranding shall be calculated.
13. Inspection
13.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
order, the manufacturer shall be responsible for the perfor-
mance of all inspection and test requirements specified.

3
 B 787/B 787M
13.2 All inspections and tests shall be made at the place of
manufacture unless otherwise especially agreed upon between
the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of purchase.
13.3 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent-
ing the purchaser all reasonable manufacturer’s facilities to
satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
with this specification.
14. Product Marking
14.1 The net weight, length (or lengths and number of
lengths, if more than one length is included in the package),
size, kind of conductor, purchase order number, and any other
marks required by the purchase order shall be marked on a tag
EXPLANATORY NOTES
NOTE 1—In this specification only combination unilay stranded con-
ductor constructions are specifically designated. Conductor constructions
not included in any of these specifications should be specifically agreed
upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser when placing the order.
NOTE 2—For definitions of terms relating to conductors, refer to
Terminology B 354.
NOTE 3—The construction details in 7.1, and 7.2 are considered typical
and are not intended to restrict other constructions that otherwise meet
physical, electrical and mechanical requirements of this specification.
NOTE 4—Certain types of insulated conductors may require shorter lay
than other conductors. It is expected that special requirements regarding
length of lay will be specified by the purchaser in such instances.
NOTE 5—Wires unlaid from conductors manifestly will have different
physical and electrical properties from those of the wire when prepared for
cabling, on account of the deformation brought about by laying and again
straightening for test.
NOTE 6—To test stranded conductors for tensile strength successfully
as a unit requires an adequate means of gripping the ends of the test
specimen. Various means are available, such as a long tube or socket into
which the conductor may be soldered, or in which, after insertion, the
conductor may be swaged or pressed without serious distortion. Ordinary
jaws or clamping devices usually are not suitable. The conductor testing
facilities of many commercial laboratories are limited to a breaking
strength of 30 000 lb (13 600 kg) or less. Consequently, it may not be
feasible to test the very large-sized conductors as a unit. Where such is
W F
@1m1 1 6m21 6m3 1 ~6 3 0.7322!m4#3 d 3 12 3 4 3 D12
F G
m 5 W8 5
2 2
@1 1 6 1 6 ~6 3 0.732 !#3 d 3 12 3 4 3 D1
where:
W = weight of all the strand components in the twisted conductor
(lb/ft)
W8 = equivalent weight of all the strand components if they were
untwisted (lb/ft)
D1 = diameter of larger strand component (refer to Fig. 1) (inches)
D2 = diameter of smaller strand component (refer to Fig. 1)
(inches) = 0.732 3 D1
d = density of metal (lb/in3)
12 = number of inches in 1 foot
m1 = ratio increase for the center wire = 1
attached to the end of the conductor inside of the package. The
same information, together with the manufacturer’s serial
number (if any) and all shipping marks required by the
purchaser, shall appear on the outside of each package.
15. Packaging and Package Marking
15.1 Package sizes for conductors shall be agreed upon
between the manufacturer and the purchaser in the placing of
individual orders (Explanatory Note 9).
15.2 The conductors shall be protected against damage in
ordinary handling and shipping. If heavy wood lagging is
required, it shall be specified by the purchaser at the time of
purchase.
imperative, special arrangements for the testing shall be agreed upon
between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
NOTE 7—The density of copper is in accordance with the International
Annealed Copper Standard. The corresponding value at 0°C is 8.90 g/cm
3
3 (0.32150 lb/in. ). As pointed out in the discussion of this subject in NBS
Handbook 100, there is no appreciable difference in values of density of
hard-drawn and annealed copper wire. In calculations involving density it
must be borne in mind that the apparent density of coated wire is not
constant but a variable function of wire diameter. The smaller the
diameter, the greater the percentage of coating present and hence the
greater departure from the density of copper.
NOTE 8—The increment of mass or electrical resistance of a completed
concentric-lay-stranded conductor (k) in percent is as follows:
k 5 100~m 2 1! (1)
where m is the stranding factor, and is also the ratio of the weight or
electrical resistance of a unit length of stranded conductor to that of a solid
conductor of the same cross-sectional area or of a stranded conductor with
infinite length of lay, that is, all wires parallel to the conductor axis. For
combination unilay conductors, the stranding factor m for the completed
stranded conductor is the numerical average of the stranding factors for
each of the individual wires in the conductor, including the straight core
wire, if any (for which the stranding factor is unity).
p
G
@1m1 1 6m2 1 6m3 1 ~3.215!m4#
p
5 (2)
@16.215#
Œ
m2 = ratio increase for the wires in the inner layer =
p2 3 ~2 3 D1!2
11
LOL2
Œ
m3 = ratio increase for the wires of diameter D1 the outer layer =
p2 3 ~3.464 3 D1!2
11
LOL2
Œ
m4 = ratio increase for the wires of diameter D2 the outer layer =
p2 3 ~3.732 3 D1!2
11
LOL2
LOL = length of lay (inches)
4
 B 787/B 787M
The above equations for m2, m3 and m4 may be simplified using the p23 ~3.464 3 D1!2 59.2141 3 D12
following approximation: m3 > 1 1 2 511 (5)
2 3 ~LOL ! LOL2

y5 Πx2
1 1 x2 > 1 1 2 (3)
p23 ~3.732 3 D1!2 68.7310 3 D12
where: m4 > 1 1 2 511 (6)
x # 0.125 2 3 ~LOL ! LOL2
The simplified ratio increase equations then become: Combining the terms, the combined m value for the conductor becomes:

p2 3 ~2 3 D1!2 19.7392 3 D12

m2 > 1 1 2 511 (4)
2 3 ~LOL ! LOL2

@1m1 1 6m2 1 6m3 1 ~3.215!m4

m5 (7)
@16.215#

5
F 1163 S 1 1 19.7392 3 S DD
D2
LOL2 S
1 6 3 1 1 59.2141 3
D2
S DD
LOL2
1 ~6 3 0.7322! 3 S 1 1 68.7310 3 S DDG
D2
LOL2
@16.215#
D2
16.215 1 694.686
LOL2
5
16.215
D2
5 1 1 42.8422
LOL2

The stranding factor (mind) for any given wire in a concentric-lay- Length of lay
stranded conductor is as follows: Second layer strand diameter D2: n 5 3.732 D1
mind = =1 1 ~9.8696/n2! The derivation is given in NBS Handbook 100.
when combination unilay conductors are made up of two wire sizes in the NOTE 9—To cooperate with the manufacturer in avoiding the accumu-
outer layer, the value of n is calculated as follows: (Refer to Fig. 1.)
lation of excessive amount of scrap wire, it is suggested that package sizes
Core wire: n 5 ` (8) permit ordinary variations of plus and minus 10 % in package lengths, and
that occasional short lengths be permitted, and such packages to be
Length of lay distinctly marked.
First layer: n 5 2 D, (9)

Length of lay
Second layer strand diameter D1: n 5 3.464D1 (10)

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 788/B 788M – 00

Standard Practice for

Installing Factory-Made Corrugated Aluminum Culverts and
Storm Sewer Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 788/B 788M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope *
1.1 This practice describes procedures, soils, and soil place-
ment for the proper installation of corrugated aluminum
culverts and storm sewers in either trench or projection
installations. A typical trench installation is shown in Fig. 1,
and a typical embankment (projection) installation is shown in
Fig. 2. The pipes described in this practice are manufactured in
a factory and furnished to the job in lengths ordinarily from 10
to 30 ft [3 to 9 m], with 20 ft [6 m] being common, for field
joining.
1.2 This practice is applicable to either inch-pound units as
B 788 or to SI units as B 788M. Inch-pound units are not
necessary equivalent to SI units. SI units are shown in the text
in brackets, and they are the applicable values for metric
installation.
FIG. 1 Typical Trench Installation
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 790/B 790M Practice for Structural Design of Corrugated
Aluminum Pipe, Pipe Arches, and Arches for Culverts,
Storm Sewers, and Other Buried Conduits2
D 698 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Character-
istics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 [600
kN-m/m3]) FIG. 2 Typical Embankment (Projection) Installation
D 1556 Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by the Sand-Cone Method3 Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)3
D 2167 Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in D 2937 Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the
Place by the Rubber-Balloon Method3 Drive-Cylinder Method3
D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
(Unified Soil Classification System)3 3. Terminology
D 2922 Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil- 3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 bedding, n—the earth or other material on which a
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light pipe is supported.
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.08 on 3.1.2 haunch, n—the portion of the pipe cross section
Aluminum Culvert. between the maximum horizontal dimension and the top of the
Current edition approved May 10, 2000. Published August 2000. Originally
bedding.
published as B 788–88. Last previous edition B 788/B 788M–99.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02. 3.1.3 invert, n—the lowest point on the pipe cross section;
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.08. also, the bottom portion of a pipe.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 788/B 788M
3.1.4 pipe, n—a conduit having full circular shape; also, in
a general context, all structure shapes covered by this practice.
3.1.5 pipe–arch, n—a pipe with an approximate semicircu-
lar crown, small-radius corners, and large-radius invert.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 Corrugated aluminum pipe functions structurally as a
flexible ring which is supported by and interacts with the
compacted surrounding soil. The soil constructed around the
pipe is thus an integral part of the structural system. It is
therefore important to ensure that the soil structure or backfill
is made up of acceptable material and is well-constructed.
Field verification of soil structure acceptability using Test
Methods D 1556, D 2167, D 2922, or D 2937, as applicable,
and comparing the results with Test Method D 698 in accor-
dance with the specifications for each project, is the most
reliable basis for installation of an acceptable structure. The
required density and method of measurement are not specified
by this practice, but they must be established in the specifica-
tions for each project. d = 1⁄2 in./ft [40 mm/m] of fill over pipe, with a 24-in. [600-mm] maximum.

5. Trench Excavation NOTE 1—Section B-B is applicable to all continuous rock foundations.
5.1 To obtain anticipated structural performance of corru- FIG. 3 Foundation Transition Zones and Rock Foundations
gated aluminum pipe it is not necessary to control trench width
beyond the minimum required for proper installation of pipe
and backfill. However, the soil on each side beyond the
excavated trench must be able to support anticipated loads.
When a construction situation calls for a relatively wide trench,
it may be made as wide as required, for its full depth if so
desired. However, trench excavation must be in compliance
with any local, state, and federal codes and safety regulations.
6. Foundation
6.1 The supporting soil beneath the pipe must provide a
reasonably uniform resistance to the imposed load, both
longitudinally and laterally. Sharp variations in the foundation
must be avoided. When rock is encountered, it must be
excavated and replaced with soil. If the pipe runs along a
continuous rock foundation, it is necessary to provide a
suitable soil bedding under the pipe. See Fig. 3.
6.2 Lateral changes in foundation should never be such that FIG. 4 Soft Foundation Treatment
the pipe is firmly supported while the backfill alongside is not.
When soft material is encountered during construction and and the structural backfill. See Fig. 4 and Fig. 5. They do not
must be removed in order to provide an adequate foundation, require the same degree of support under their large-radius
remove the soft material for a distance of three pipe widths, inverts.
unless the engineer has set another limit. See Fig. 4. 6.5 The engineer is encouraged to develop details specific to
6.3 Performance of buried pipe is enhanced by allowing the the site based on the general principles for foundation condi-
pipe to settle slightly under load compared to the columns of tions given in 6.1 through 6.4.
soil alongside. Thus, for larger pipes it can be beneficial to
purposely create a foundation under the pipe itself which will 7. Bedding
yield under load more than will the foundation under the 7.1 Corrugated aluminum pipe may be placed directly on
columns of soil to each side. It can usually be obtained by the fine-graded foundation for the pipe line. Material in contact
placing a layer of compressible soil of a suitable thickness, less with the pipe shall not contain rock retained on a 3-in. [75-mm]
densely compacted than the soil alongside, beneath the struc- ring, frozen lumps, chunks of highly plastic clay, organic
ture. This creates favorable relative movement between pipe matter, corrosive material, or other deleterious material. It is
and the soil on each side. It is of particular importance on not required to shape the bedding to the pipe geometry.
pipe-arches. However, for pipe-arches, it is recommended to either shape
6.4 Pipe-Arches—All pipe-arch structures must have excel- the bedding to the relatively flat bottom arc or fine-grade the
lent soil support at their corners by both the in-situ foundation foundation to a slight v-shape. This avoids the problem of

2
 B 788/B 788M
FIG. 5 Bedding and Corner Zone Treatment for Pipe-Arch
Structures
trying to backfill the difficult area beneath the invert of
pipe-arches. See Fig. 5.
8. Pipe Installation
8.1 All pipe shall be unloaded and handled with reasonable
care. Pipe shall not be rolled or dragged over gravel or rock and
shall be prevented from striking rock or other hard objects
during placement on bedding. Pipe with protective coatings
shall be handled with special care to avoid damage. Paved
inverts shall be placed and centered in the invert.
8.2 Field Joints:
8.2.1 Transverse field joints shall be of such design that the
successive connection of pipe sections will form a continuous
line free of appreciable irregularities in the flow line. Each
successive length of pipe in a field joint should be adjusted
longitudinally or circumferentially when necessary so that
coupling bands with projections, helical corrugations, or annu-
lar corrugations will properly engage the corrugations in both
lengths of pipe. In addition, the joints shall meet the general
performance requirements described herein. Suitable trans-
verse field joints, which satisfy the requirements for one or
more of the subsequently defined joint performance categories,
can be obtained with the following types of connecting bands
furnished with the suitable band-end fastening devices:
8.2.1.1 Corrugated bands.
8.2.1.2 Bands with projections.
8.2.1.3 Flat bands.
8.2.1.4 Bands of special design that engage factory re-
formed ends of corrugated pipe.
8.2.1.5 Other equally effective types of field joints may be
used with the approval of the engineer.
8.2.2 Joint Types—Applications may require either standard
or special joints. Standard joints are for pipe not subject to
large soil movements or disjointing forces. These joints are
satisfactory for ordinary installations, where simple slip-type
joints are typically used. Special joints are for more adverse
requirements such as the need to withstand soil movements or
3
resist disjointing forces. Stab joints are for pipes subject to
minimal settlement or disjointing forces. Special designs must
be considered for unusual conditions such as in poor founda-
tion conditions.
NOTE 1—Examples of stab joints are bell and spigot, and tongue and
groove.
8.2.3 Soil Conditions:
8.2.3.1 The requirements of the joints are dependent upon
the soil conditions at the construction site. Pipe backfill that is
not subject to piping action is classified as nonerodible. Such
backfill typically includes granular soil (with grain sizes
equivalent to coarse sand, small gravel, or larger) and cohesive
clays.
8.2.3.2 Structural backfill that is subject to piping action,
and would tend either to infiltrate the pipe or to be easily
washed by exfiltration of water from the pipe, is classified as
erodible. Such backfill typically includes fine sands and silts.
8.2.4 Joint Properties—The requirements for joint proper-
ties are divided into six categories. The properties are defined
in 8.2.4.1-8.2.4.6, and requirements (except for watertightness)
are shown in Table 1. The values for various types of pipe can
be determined by a rational analysis or a suitable test.
8.2.4.1 Shear Strength—The shear strength required of the
joint is expressed as a percent of the calculated shear strength
of the pipe on a transverse cross section remote from the joint.
8.2.4.2 Moment Strength—The moment strength required of
the joint is expressed as a percent of the calculated moment
capacity of the pipe on a transverse cross section remote from
the joint.
8.2.4.3 Tensile Strength—Tensile strength is required in a
joint when the possibility exists that a longitudinal load could
develop that would tend to separate adjacent pipe sections.
8.2.4.4 Joint Overlap—Standard joints that do not meet the
moment strength alternatively shall have a minimum sleeve
width overlapping the abutting pipes. The minimum total
sleeve width shall be as shown in Table 1. Any joint meeting
the requirements for a special joint may be used instead of a
standard joint.
8.2.4.5 Soiltightness—Soiltightness refers to openings in
the joint through which soil may infiltrate. Soiltightness is
influenced by the size of the opening (maximum dimension
normal to the direction that the soil may infiltrate) and the
length of the channel (length of the path along which the soil
may infiltrate). No opening may exceed 1 in. [25 mm]. In
addition, for all categories, if the size of the opening exceeds 1⁄8
in. [3 mm], the length of the channel must be at least four times
the size of the opening. Furthermore, for nonerodible or
erodible soils, the ratio of D85 soil size to size of opening must
be greater than 0.3 for medium to fine sand or 0.2 for uniform
sand; these ratios need not be met for cohesive backfills where
the plasticity index exceeds 12. (D85 is the soil diameter at
which 85 % if the soil weight is finer.) As a general guideline,
a backfill material containing a high percentage of fine grained
soils requires investigation for the specific type of joint to be
used to guard against soil infiltration. Alternatively, if a joint
demonstrates its ability to pass a 2 psi [14 kPa] hydrostatic test
without leakage, it will be considered soiltight.
8.2.4.6 Watertightness—Watertightness may be specified

TABLE 1 Categories of Pipe Joints
Joint Properties
StabA
Shear strength, % 2 2
Moment strength,%B 0 5
Tensile strength, min, lbf [kN]:
0 to 42-in. [0 to 1050-mm] diameter or span 0 0
>42 -in. [1050-mm] diameter or span
Joint overlap, min, in. [mm]C 3 [75]
SoiltightnessD NA
A
Stab joint for maximum 42 in. [1050 mm] diameter.
B
See 8.2.4.2.
C
Alternative requirement. See 8.2.4.4.
D
Minimum ratio of D85 soil size to size of opening 0.3 for medium to fine sand and 0.2 for uniform sand.
for joints of any category where needed to satisfy other criteria.
The leakage rate shall be measured with the pipe in place or at
an approved test facility.
9. Structural Backfill Material
9.1 Structural backfill is that material that surrounds the
pipe, extending laterally to the walls of the trench, or to the fill
material for embankment construction, and extending verti-
cally from the invert to an elevation of 1 ft [300 mm] or 1⁄8 the
diameter or span, whichever is greater, over the pipe. The
necessary width of structural backfill depends on the quality of
the trench wall or embankment material, the type of material
and compaction equipment used for the structural backfill, and
in embankment construction, the type of construction equip-
ment used to compact the embankment fill. The width of
structural backfill shall meet the requirements given in Table 2.
9.2 Structural backfill material shall be fine, readily com-
pacted soil or granular fill material. Structural backfill material
may be excavated native material, when suitable, or select
material. Select materials such as bank-run gravels or other
processed granular materials less than 3 in. [75 mm] maximum
with excellent structural characteristics are preferred. Desired
end results can be obtained with this type of material with a
minimum of compaction effort over a wide range of moisture
content, lift depth, and compaction equipment characteristics.
Excavated native soils used as structural backfill shall not
contain stones retained on a 3-in. [75 mm] ring, frozen lumps,
highly plastic clay, organic material, corrosive material, or
other deleterious foreign materials. Soil classifications are
defined in Classification D 2487. Soils meeting the require-
ments of groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, and SP are generally
acceptable, when compacted to the specified percent of maxi-
mum density as determined by Test Method D 698. Test
Methods D 1556, D 2167, D 2922, and D 2937 may be used to
determine the in-place density of the soil. Soil types SM and
SC are acceptable, but they may require closer control to obtain
the specified density. Soil Groups ML and CL are not preferred
materials, while soil Groups OL, MH, CH, OH, and PT are not
acceptable.
9.3 Special materials other than soil may be used as de-
scribed in 10.1.
10. Structural Backfill Placement
10.1 Structural backfill shall be placed in layers from 6 to 12
in. [150 to 300 mm] in depth depending on the type of material
B 788/B 788M
Soil Condition
Nonerodible Joint Type Erodible Joint Type
Standard Special StabA Standard Special
5 2 2 5
15 0 5 15
5000 [22] 0 0 5000 [22]
10 000 [45] 10 000 [45]
10 ⁄ [265]
12 NA 3 [75] 10 ⁄ [265]
12 NA
NA NA 0.3 or 0.2 0.3 or 0.2 0.3 or 0.2
TABLE 2 Structural Backfill Width RequirementsA,B
Adjacent Material Required Structural Backfill Width
Normal highway embankment As needed to establish pipe bedding and
compacted to minimum of to fill and compact the backfill in the
90 % Test Method D 698 haunch area and beside the pipe. Where
density, or equivalent trench backfill materials that do not require
wall. compaction are used, such as cement
slurry or controlled low strength material
(CLSM), a minimum of 3 in. [75 mm] on
each side of the pipe is required.
Embankment or trench wall of Increase backfill width as necessary to
lesser quality. reduce horizontal pressure from pipe to
a level compatible with bearing capacity
of adjacent materials.
A
For pipe arches and other multiple radius structures, as well as for all
structures carrying off-road construction equipment, the structural backfill width,
including any necessary foundation improvement materials, must be sufficient to
reduce the horizontal pressure from the structure so that it does not exceed the
bearing capacity of the adjacent material.
B
In embankment construction, the structural backfill width must be adequate to
resist forces caused by the embankment construction equipment. Generally, the
width on each side of the pipe should be no less than 1 diameter, or span, or 2 ft
[600 mm], whichever is less.
and compaction equipment or method. Each layer or lift shall
be compacted before adding the next lift. On flat bedding, care
must be taken to place material under the pipe haunches and
compact it firmly. Structural backfill on each side of the pipe
shall be kept in balance. Generally, no more than one lift
difference should be permitted. Construction equipment shall
not be used over or alongside the pipe without sufficient
compacted soil between it and the pipe to prevent distortion,
damage, or overstressing. Mechanical soil compaction of
layers is preferred. However, when acceptable end results can
be achieved with water consolidation, it may be used. When
water methods are used, care must be taken to prevent flotation.
Water methods shall be used only on free-draining structural
backfill material. If cohesive soils are used as structural
backfill, good compaction can only be obtained at proper
moisture content. Shallower lifts are generally required for
acceptable end results with cohesive soils than with granular or
mixed soils. In general, much closer inspection and testing
must be exercised to ensure good results with cohesive
structural backfill material. Water compaction is not acceptable
with cohesive material. Unusual field conditions may make
relatively costly special backfill material practical. Materials
that set up without compaction, such as cement slurry, con-
trolled low strength material (CLSM), and various foamed
mixtures, provide excellent structural backfill provided they
4
 B 788/B 788M
are designed to yield the compressive strength required. As
with water compaction, care must be taken to avoid flotation.
10.2 The compaction of structural backfill shall provide a
soil structure around the pipe to uniformly apply overburden
pressures on the crown of the pipe and provide uniform bearing
for the pipe side walls and lower haunches. The required
degree of compaction will vary with the job and structural
backfill material. The structural backfill is an integral part of
the design process. Therefore, required end results regarding
in-place density of structural backfill shall be in accordance
with job specifications. Most structural design tables for
corrugated aluminum pipe establish maximum overfill depths
based on a specified field density of 90 % in accordance with
Test Method D 698 with good structural backfill material.
However, the majority of sewer pipe installations do not
require deep overfills. For relatively shallow buried pipes not
subject to live load, an acceptable structural backfill material
and its degree of compaction may be determined by the
character of the adjacent ground. A balanced design making the
conduit homogeneous with the ground on either side is often
desirable. For this reason, it is not practical to establish
arbitrary minimums for soil characteristics of structural backfill
for all installations.
10.3 Pipe-Arches—Special attention must be given to the
material used and compaction obtained around the corners of
pipe-arches. Vertical load over the pipe is transmitted into the
soil principally at the corners. Therefore, the quality of
structural backfill is particularly important adjacent to pipe-
arch corners. In the case of higher fills or deep trenches, special
designs may be required for corner backfill zones.
10.4 Generally, construction experience and a site appraisal
will establish the most economical combination of material,
method, and equipment to yield acceptable end results. Test
Method D 698 is the preferred means of determining maximum
(standard) density and optimum moisture content. A construc-
tion procedure must then be established that will result in the
specified percent of maximum density. Once that is established,
the primary inspection effort should be directed at ensuring that
the established procedure is followed. Such a procedure may
involve material, depth of lift, moisture content, and compac-
tive effort. Only occasional checks may then be required, as
long as the material and procedures are unchanged. In situ
density may be determined by Test Methods D 1556, D 2167,
D 2922, and D 2937, as applicable, for field verification.
5
Testing should be conducted on both sides of the structure.
Construction methods and equipment that achieve required end
results without damage to or distortion of the pipe shall be
acceptable.
10.5 Shape Control—Excessive compaction, unbalanced
loadings, loads from construction equipment, as well as inad-
equate compaction or poor backfill materials, can cause exces-
sive pipe distortion. For larger pipe, the construction contractor
may set up a shape monitoring system, prior to placement of
structural backfill, to aid in establishing and maintaining proper
installation procedures. Direct measurement of span and rise,
offset measurements from plumb bobs hanging over reference
points, and similar types of measurements are effective means
for monitoring shape change during backfill placement and
compaction. In general, it is desirable for the crown of the pipe
to rise slightly, in a balanced concentric manner, during
placement and compaction of soil beside the pipe. Under the
load of the completed fill and the service load, vertical
deflections will be a small percentage of the pipe rise dimen-
sion if backfill compaction is adequate.
11. Regular Backfill
11.1 Regular backfill in trench installation is that material
replaced in the trench above the structural backfill. In projec-
tion conditions, it is also the embankment fill adjacent to the
structural backfill.
11.2 Regular backfill shall consist of native materials and
shall be placed and compacted as required by job specifica-
tions. Large rocks or boulders shall not be placed within 4 ft
[1.2 m] of the pipe. Large boulders should not be permitted in
regular backfill in trenches that are under surface structures,
including pavements. Construction equipment shall not be used
over or alongside the pipe without sufficient compacted soil
between it and the pipe to prevent distortion, damage, or
overstressing.
12. Multiple Structures
12.1 When two or more structures are installed in adjacent
lines, the minimum spacing requirements given in Practice
B 790/B 790M must be provided.
13. Keywords
13.1 aluminum pipe; corrugated aluminum pipe; culvert;
installation—underground; sewers
 B 788/B 788M
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B07 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(B 788/B 788M–99) that may impact the use of this standard.
(1) Included joints for pipes larger than 84 in. in diameter.
(2) Included stab joints for pipes through 42 in. in diameter.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 789/B 789M – 99

Standard Practice for

Installing Corrugated Aluminum Structural Plate Pipe for
Culverts and Sewers1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 789/B 789M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope *
1.1 This practice describes procedures, soils, and soil place-
ment for the proper installation of corrugated aluminum
structural plate culverts and sewers in either trench or embank-
ment installations. A typical trench installation is shown in Fig.
1, and a typical embankment (projection) installation is shown
in Fig. 2. Structural plate structures as described herein are
those structures factory fabricated in plate form and bolted
together on site to provide the required shape, size, and length
of structure. This practice applies to structures designed in
accordance with Practice B 790/B 790M.
1.2 This practice is applicable to either inch-pound units as
B 789 or to SI units as B 789M. Inch-pound units are not
necessarily equivalent to SI units. SI units are shown in the text
in brackets, and they are the applicable values for metric
installation. FIG. 1 Typical Trench Installation
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- istics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3[2,700
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- kN-m/m3])3
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. D 2167 Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by the Rubber-Balloon Method3
2. Referenced Documents D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
2.1 ASTM Standards: (Unified Soil Classification System)3
B 746/B 746M Specification for Corrugated Aluminum Al- D 2922 Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-
loy Structural Plate for Field-Bolted Pipe, Pipe-Arches, Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)3
and Arches2 D 2937 Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the
B 790/B 790M Practice for Structural Design of Corrugated Drive-Cylinder Method3
Aluminum Pipe, Pipe–Arches, and Arches for Culverts,
3. Terminology
Storm Sewers, and Other Buried Conduits2
D 698 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Character- 3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
istics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft
[600kN-m/m])3
D 1556 Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by the Sand-Cone Method3
D 1557 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Character-

1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-7 on Light Metals
and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.08on Aluminum
Culvert.
Current edition approved May 10, 1999. Published August 1999. Originally
published as B 789 – 88. Last previous edition B 789/B 789M–97.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.08. FIG. 2 Typical Embankment (Projection) Installation

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 789/B 789M
3.1.1 arch, n—segment of a circular shape spanning an open
invert between the footings on which it rests.
3.1.2 bedding, n—earth or other material on which a pipe is
supported.
3.1.3 haunch, n—portion of the pipe cross section between
the maximum horizontal dimension and the top of the bedding.
3.1.4 invert, n—lowest point on the pipe cross section; also,
the bottom portion of a pipe.
3.1.5 pipe, n—conduit having a full circular shape; also, in
a general context, all structure shapes covered by this specifi-
cation.
3.1.6 pipe-arch, n—pipe with an approximate semicircular
crown, small-radius corners, and large-radius invert.
3.1.7 underpass, n—pipe with an approximate semicircular
crown, large-radius sides, small-radius corners between sides
and invert, and large-radius invert.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 Corrugated aluminum structural plate pipe functions
structurally as a flexible ring that is supported by and interacts d 5 1⁄2 in./ft. [40 mm/m] of fill over pipe, with a 24-in. [600 mm] maximum.
with the compacted surrounding soil. The soil placed around
the structure is thus an integral part of the structural system. It NOTE 1—Section B-B is applicable to all continuous rock foundations
is therefore important to ensure that the soil structure is made FIG. 3 Foundation Transition Zones and Rock Foundations
up of the acceptable material and well-constructed. Field
verification of soil structure acceptability using Test Methods structure widths. See Fig. 4. A smaller width of removal can
D 1556, D 2167, D 2922, or D 2937, as applicable, and sometimes be used if established by the engineer.
comparing the results with Test Methods D 698 or D 1557, in 6.3 Performance of buried structures is enhanced by allow-
accordance with the specifications for each project, is the most ing the structure to settle slightly relative to the columns of
reliable basis for installation of an acceptable structure. The earth alongside. Therefore, when significant settlement of the
required density and method of measurement are not specified overall foundation is expected, it is beneficial to provide a
by this practice but must be established in the specifications for yielding foundation under structural plate structures. A yielding
each project. foundation is one that allows the structure to settle vertically by
a greater amount than the vertical settlement of the columns of
5. Trench Excavation earth alongside. It can usually be obtained by placing beneath
5.1 To obtain the anticipated structural performance of the structure a layer of suitable thickness of compressible soil,
structural plate structures, it is not necessary to control trench less densely compacted than the soil alongside. This is particu-
width beyond the minimum necessary for proper assembly of larly important on structures with relatively large-radius invert
the structure and placement of the structural backfill. However, plates.
the soil on each side beyond the excavated trench must be able 6.4 For all structures with relatively small-radius corner
to support anticipated loads. When a construction situation plates adjacent to large-radius invert plates (such as pipe-
calls for a relatively wide trench, it may be made as wide as arches or underpass structures), excellent soil support must be
required for its full depth, if so desired. However, trench provided adjacent to the small-radius corner plates by both the
excavation must be in compliance with any local, state, and
federal codes and safety regulations.
6. Foundation
6.1 The supporting soil beneath the structure must provide a
reasonably uniform resistance to the imposed load, both
longitudinally and laterally. Sharp variations in the foundation
must be avoided. When rock is encountered, it must be
excavated and replaced with soil. If the structure is to be placed
on a continuous rock foundation, it will be necessary to provide
a bedding of soil between the rock and the structure. See Fig.
3.
6.2 Lateral changes in foundation should never be such that
the structure is firmly supported while the backfill on either
side is not. When soft material is encountered in the foundation
and must be removed to maintain the grade on the structure,
then it must be removed, usually for a minimum of three FIG. 4 Soft Foundation Treatment

2
 B 789/B 789M
in-situ foundation and the structural backfill. See Fig. 4 and
Fig. 5. A yielding foundation must be provided beneath the
invert plates for such structures when soft foundation condi-
tions are encountered.
7. Bedding
7.1 In most cases, structural plate structures may be as-
sembled directly on in–situ material fine-graded to proper
alignment and grade. Take care to compact the material
beneath the haunches prior to placing structural backfill. For
structures with relatively small-radius corner plates adjacent to
large-radius invert plates, it is recommended to either shape the
bedding to the invert plate radius or fine-grade the foundation
to a slight v-shape. The soil adjacent to the corners must be of
an excellent quality and highly compacted to accommodate the
high reaction pressures that can develop at that location. See
Fig. 5.
7.2 Structures having a span greater than 15 ft [4.5 m] or a
depth of cover greater than 20 ft [6 m] should be provided with
a shaped bedding on a yielding foundation. The bedding should
be shaped to facilitate the required compaction of the structural
backfill under the haunches. A shaped bedding on a yielding
foundation is always required under structures with small-
radius corner plates adjacent to large-radius invert plates.
7.3 Material in contact with the pipe must not contain rock
retained on a 3-in. [75-mm] diameter ring, frozen lumps,
chunks of highly plastic clay, organic matter, corrosive mate-
rial, or other deleterious material.
8. Assembly
8.1 Structural plate structures are furnished in components
of plates and fasteners for field assembly. These components
are furnished in accordance with Specification B 746/B 746M.
Plates are furnished in a 4 ft, 6 in. [1372 mm] width and
multiple lengths, preformed and punched for assembling into
FIG. 5 Bedding and Corner Zone Treatment for Large-Radius
Invert Plate Structures
3
the required structure shape, size, and length. The plate lengths
form the periphery of the structure. Arrange the single width
and the multiple lengths to allow for staggered, transverse
seams to avoid four-plate laps. The fabricator of the structural
plate shall furnish an assembly drawing showing the location
of each plate by width, length, thickness, and curvature. The
plates must be assembled in accordance with the fabricator’s
drawing.
8.2 For structures with inverts, assembly shall begin with
the invert plates at the downstream end. As the assembly
proceeds upstream, plates that fall fully or partly below the
maximum width of the structure are lapped over the preceding
plates to construct the transverse seams.
8.3 Arches on Footings:
8.3.1 Footings—Arches have no integral invert and usually
rest in key ways cast into footings. Key ways must be
accurately set to span, line, and grade, as shown in the plans
and specifications. When the arch is not a half circle, the key
way must be angled (rotated) or sized to allow proper entrance
of the plate. All pertinent dimensions must be shown on the
drawings.
8.3.2 Assembly—For arch structures, assembly typically
begins at the upstream end and proceeds downstream, with
each succeeding plate lapping on the outside of the previous
plate. There may be cases where it is more advantageous to
start assembly at some other point along the length of the
structure, such as is in the case where an elbow is involved.
During the erection of the ring, plates are not self-supporting
and must be temporarily supported. If the size of the key ways
is such that the plates may move during backfilling, the plates
must be temporarily blocked in the key ways to maintain span.
Assemble as few plates as practical. Start with a row of several
plates along both of the footings. Before finishing the bottom
row of plates, start at the end of the structure with the next row
of plates. Before reaching the end of the first row of plates, start
again at the end of the structure with the next row of plates.
Continue this process until the first ring is closed at its top, and
then continue assembling all rows in this same manner. The
structure will have a “stair step” appearance as a result of this
procedure. This practice helps to hold the structure’s shape.
8.4 Generally, structural plate should be assembled with as
few bolts as practical. These bolts should be placed loose and
remain loose until the periphery has been completed for several
plate lengths. However, on large structures, it is practical to
align bolt holes during assembly and tighten the bolts to
maintain structure shape. After the periphery of the structure is
completed for several plate lengths, all bolts may be placed and
tightened. Correct any significant deviation in the structure
shape before tightening bolts (see Section 10). It is advisable
not to tighten bolts on the loosely assembled structure within a
distance of 30 ft [9 m] of where plate assembly is ongoing. All
bolts shall be tightened using an applied torque of between 100
and 150 ft·lbf [135 and 205 N·m]. It is important not to
over-torque the bolts.
8.5 Standard structural plate structures, because of the
bolted construction, are not intended to be watertight. On
occasions where a degree of watertightness is required, it is
practical to introduce a seam sealant tape within the bolted
 B 789/B 789M
seams. The tape shall be wide enough to effectively cover all
rows of holes in plate laps, and of the proper thickness and
consistency to effectively fill all voids in plate laps. General
procedures for installing sealant tape are as follows: On
longitudinal seams, prior to placing the lapping plate, roll the
tape over the seam and work into the corrugations. Do not
stretch the tape. Remove any paper backing prior to making up
the joint. Seal transverse seams in a like manner with tape. At
all points where three plates intersect, place an additional
thickness of tape for a short distance to fill the void caused by
the transverse seam overlap. It is most practical to punch the
tape for bolts with a hot spud wrench or sharp tool. At least two
tightenings of the bolts will usually be necessary to accomplish
the required torque.
9. Structural Backfill Material
9.1 Structural backfill is that material that surrounds the
pipe, extending laterally to the walls of the trench or to the fill
material for embankment construction, and extending verti-
cally from the invert to an elevation of 1 ft [300 mm] or 1⁄8the
span, whichever is greater, over the pipe. The necessary width
of structural backfill depends on the quality of the trench wall
or embankment material, the type of material and compaction
equipment used for the structural backfill, and in embankment
construction, the type of construction equipment used to
compact the embankment fill. The width of structural backfill
shall meet the requirements given in Table 1.
9.2 Structural backfill material shall be readily compacted
soil or granular fill material. Structural backfill may be exca-
vated native material, when suitable, or select material. Select
material such as bank-run gravel, or other processed granular
materials (not retained on a 3-in. [75-mm] diameter ring) with
excellent structural characteristics, is preferred. Desired end
results can be obtained with such material with a minimum of
compactive effort over a wide range of moisture content, lift
depths, and compaction equipment. Soil used as structural
backfill must not contain rock retained on a 3-in. [75-mm]
diameter ring, frozen lumps, highly plastic clays, organic
matter, corrosive material, or other deleterious foreign matter.
Soil classifications are defined in Classification D 2487. Ac-
TABLE 1 Structural Backfill Width RequirementsA,B
Adjacent Material Required Structural Backfill Width
Normal highway embankment As needed to establish pipe bedding and
compacted to minimum of to place and compact the backfill in the
90 % Test Methods D 698 haunch area and beside the pipe. Where
density, or equivalent trench backfill materials that do not require
wall. compaction are used, such as cement
slurry or controlled low strength material
(CLSM), a minimum of 3 in. [75 mm] on
each side of the pipe is required.
Embankment or trench wall of Increase backfill width as necessary to
lesser quality. reduce horizontal pressure from pipe to a
level compatible with bearing capacity of
adjacent materials.
A
For pipe arches and other multiple radius structures, as well as for all structures
carrying off-road construction equipment, the structural backfill width, including any
necessary foundation improvement materials, must be sufficient to reduce the
horizontal pressure from the structure so that it does not exceed the bearing
capacity of the adjacent material.
B
In embankment construction, the structural backfill width must be adequate to
resist forces caused by the embankment construction equipment. Generally, the
width on each side of the pipe should be no less than 2 ft [600 mm] for spans that
do not exceed 12 ft [3.6 m], or 3 ft [900 mm] for greater spans.
4
ceptable soils include Groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, and SP,
when compacted to the specified percent of maximum density,
as determined by Test Methods D 698 or D 1557, using Test
Methods D 1556, D 2167, D 2922, or D 2937. Soil types SM
and SC are acceptable but may require closer control to obtain
the specified density. Soil groups ML and CL are not preferred
materials, while soil groups OL, MH, CH, OH, and PT are not
acceptable.
10. Shape Control
10.1 Excessive compaction, unbalanced loadings, loads
from construction equipment, as well as inadequate compac-
tion or poor structural backfill materials, can cause excessive
pipe distortion. For larger pipe, the construction contractor may
set up a shape monitoring system, prior to placement of
structural backfill, to aid in establishing and maintaining proper
installation procedures. Such a system is particularly desirable
for structures having a span greater than 20 ft [6 m]. Direct
measurement of span and rise, offset measurements from
plumb bobs hanging over reference points, and use of survey-
ing instruments are effective means for monitoring shape
change during structural backfill placement and compaction.
The final installed shape must be within the design criteria,
exhibit smooth uniform radii, and provide acceptable clear-
ances for its intended use. In general, it is desirable for the
crown of the pipe to rise slightly, in a balanced concentric
manner, during placement and compaction of structural backfill
beside the pipe. Under the load of the completed fill and the
service load, vertical deflections will be a small percentage of
the pipe rise dimension if structural backfill compaction is
adequate. Structures having a span greater than 20 ft [6 m]
should be within 2 % of the calculated dimensions as given in
Specification B 746/B 746M prior to structural backfill place-
ment.
11. General Placement of Structural Backfill
11.1 Structural backfill should be placed by moving equip-
ment longitudinally, parallel to the structure centerline, rather
than at right angles to the structure. Material must not be
dumped directly on or against the structure. In embankment
installations, heavy compaction equipment should stay at least
4 ft [1.2 m] away from the structure. In trench installations, the
width of the trench will dictate the type of compaction
equipment. Heavy construction equipment must not be oper-
ated over the structure without adequate protective cover.
Adequate cover depends on the structure size and structural
backfill placement, and must be determined by the engineer.
Depending on the type of material and compaction equipment
or method used, place the structural backfill in 6 to 12-in. [150
to 300-mm] lifts or layers before compaction. Each lift must be
compacted before the next lift is placed. The difference in the
depth of structural backfill on opposite sides of the structure
should not be greater than 2 ft [600 mm]. The compacted
structural backfill should usually be placed to 0.75 the height of
the structure before covering the crown. However, structural
backfill may be placed on the crown whenever required to
control the structure shape. A layer of structural backfill (to a
depth of 1 ft [300 mm] or one-eighth the span, whichever is
 B 789/B 789M
greater) should be placed over the crown before introduction of
regular backfill.
11.2 The compaction of structural backfill shall provide a
soil structure around the pipe to uniformly apply overburden on
the crown of the structure and provide adequate uniform
bearing for the structure side walls and haunches. For relatively
shallow buried structures, under no live loads, acceptable
structural backfill and the degree of compaction may be
determined by the character of the total installation. The
structural backfill is, however, an integral part of the structural
system. Therefore, required end results regarding material type
and in-place density of the structural backfill must be in
accordance with project specifications.
11.3 When cohesive soils are used for structural backfill,
good compaction can be obtained only at proper moisture
content. Shallower lifts are usually necessary with cohesive
soils than with granular materials to arrive at acceptable
in-place density. Mechanical compaction effort should be used
with all cohesive soils. Mechanical soil compaction in layers is
generally preferred. However, when acceptable end results can
be achieved with water consolidation, it may be used. When
water methods are used, care must be taken to prevent flotation.
Water methods can be used only on free-draining structural
backfill material. The structural backfill and adjacent soil must
be sufficiently permeable to dispose of the excess water. Water
consolidation is not acceptable with cohesive soils.
11.4 Pipe-Arches—Special attention must be given to ma-
terials used and compaction obtained around the corners of
pipe-arches. At the corners of all structures with small-radius
haunch plates, the structural backfill must be well-compacted,
particularly for those structures under significant loads. For
structures with large spans or heavy loads, special design of the
structural backfill may be required for the corner plate zone.
See Fig. 4 and Fig. 5.
11.5 Arches—Placement procedures for structural backfill
for arches deviates from that for other structures. The desired
procedure is to place fill material in lifts evenly on both sides
of the structure to construct a narrow envelope over the crown.
Compact each lift as the envelope is constructed. Take care not
to distort the arch. Continue to build structural backfill away
from the original envelope maintaining sufficient load on the
crown to limit peaking as the side fill is compacted.
11.6 Generally, construction experience and a site appraisal
will establish the most economical combination of material,
method, and equipment to yield acceptable end results. Mea-
surement of soil density in accordance with Test Methods
D 698 or D 1557 are usually the preferred means of determin-
ing maximum (standard) density and optimum moisture con-
tent. A construction procedure must then be established that
will result in the specified percent of maximum density. Once
a procedure is established, the primary inspection effort should
be directed at ensuring that the established procedure is
followed. Such procedure may involve material, depth of lift,
moisture content, and compactive effort. Only occasional
checks of soil density may then be required, as long as the
material and procedures are unchanged. In-situ density may be
determined by Test Method D 1556, D 2167, D 2922, or D
2937, as applicable, for field verification. Testing should be
conducted on both sides of the structure. Any construction
methods and materials that achieve the required end results in
the completed structural backfill, without damage to or distor-
tion of the structure, are acceptable. Unless project specifica-
tions provide other limits, the soil should be compacted to a
minimum of 90 % density in accordance with Test Method D
698.
12. Regular Backfill
12.1 Regular backfill in trench installations is that material
placed in the trench above the structural backfill. In embank-
ment installations, regular backfill is that material, outside the
limits of the structural backfill. Regular backfill usually con-
sists of native materials placed in accordance with project
specifications. Large boulders must not be permitted in regular
backfill in trenches that are under surface loads and never
within 4 ft [1.2 m] of the structure (see Fig. 1).
13. Multiple Structures
13.1 When two or more structures are installed in adjacent
lines, the minimum spacing requirements given in Practice
B 790/B 790M must be provided.
14. Keywords
14.1 aluminum pipe; culvert; installation—underground;
sewers; structural plate pipe

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B-7 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (B 789/B
789M–97) that may impact the use of this standard.
(1) In general, changes were made to bring this practice into line with its coated steel counterpart Practice A
807/A 807M on Installing Corrugated Steel Structural Plate Pipe for Sewers and Other Applications.
(2) Changes were made to the figures to make their wording consistent with that in the text of the practice.
(3) General revisions were made to grammar and terminology.
(4) The location of references to the figures have been corrected.
(5) Parentheses around SI units have been replaced with brackets.
(6) References to this document being a specification have been replaced with “practice.”
(7) Additional soils testing specifications have been referenced.

5
 B 789/B 789M
The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States. Individual
reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at 610-832-9585
(phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (http://www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 790/B 790M – 00
Standard Practice for
Structural Design of Corrugated Aluminum Pipe, Pipe-
Arches, and Arches for Culverts, Storm Sewers, and Other
Buried Conduits1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 790/B 790M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope *
1.1 This practice is intended for the structural design of
corrugated aluminum pipe and pipe-arches, and aluminum
structural plate pipe, pipe-arches, and arches for use as culverts
and storm sewers and other buried conduits. This practice is for
pipe installed in a trench or embankment and subjected to
highway, railroad, and aircraft loadings. It must be recognized
that a buried corrugated aluminum pipe is a composite struc-
ture made up of the aluminum ring and the soil envelope, and
both elements play a vital part in the structural design of this
type of structure.
1.2 Corrugated aluminum pipe and pipe-arches shall be of
annular fabrication using riveted seams, or of helical fabrica-
tion having a continuous lockseam.
1.3 Structural plate pipe, pipe-arches, and arches are fabri-
cated in separate plates that when assembled at the job site by
bolting form the required shape.
1.4 This specification is applicable to design in inch-pound
units as Specification B 790 or in SI units as Specification
B 790M. Inch-pound units and SI units are not necessarily
equivalent. SI units are shown in brackets in the text for clarity,
but they are the applicable values when the design is done in
accordance with Specification B 790M.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 745/B 745M Specification for Corrugated Aluminum
Pipe for Sewers and Drains2
B 746/B 746M Specification for Corrugated Aluminum
Alloy Structural Plate for Field-Bolted Pipe, Pipe-Arches,
and Arches2
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.08 on
Aluminum Culvert.
Current edition approved July 10, 2000. Published September 2000. Originally
published as B 790–90. Last previous edition B 790–99.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
B 788/B 788M Practice for Installing Factory-Made Cor-
rugated Aluminum Culverts and Storm Sewer Pipe2
B 789/B 789M Practice for Installing Corrugated Alumi-
num Structural Plate Pipe for Culverts and Sewers2
D 698 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Character-
istics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft [600
kN-m/m3])3
D 1556 Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil In
Place by the Sand-Cone Method3
D 2167 Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil In
Place by the Rubber Balloon Method3
D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
(Unified Soil Classification Systems)3
D 2922 Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-
Aggregate In Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)3
D 2937 Test Methods for Density of Soil In Place by the
Drive-Cylinder Method3
2.2 FAA Standards:4
AC No. 150/5320-5B, Advisory Circular, “Airport Drain-
age,” Department of Transportation, Federal Aviation
Administration, Publication No. SN-050-007-00149-5,
1970
2.3 AASHTO Standards:5
Specifications for Highway Bridges
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 arch, n—a pipe shape that is supported on footings
and does not have a full metal invert.
3.1.2 bedding, n—the earth or other material on which the
pipe is laid consist of a thin layer of important material on top
of the in-situ foundation.
3.1.3 haunch, n—the portion of the pipe cross section
between the maximum horizontal dimension and the top of the
bedding.
3.1.4 invert, n—the lowest portion of the pipe cross section;
also, the bottom portion of the pipe.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 04.08.
4
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
5
Available from American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials, 444 N. Capitol Street NW, Suite 225, Washington, DC 20001.
 B 790/B 790M
3.1.5 pipe, n—a conduit having a full circular shape or, in a
general contex, all structure shapes covered by this practice.
3.1.6 pipe-arch, n—a pipe shape consisting of an approxi-
mate semicircular top portion, small radius corners, and large
radius invert.
4. Symbols
4.1 The symbols used in this practice have the following
significance:
SF = safety factor,
SS = required seam strength, lbf/ft [kN/m],
T = thrust in pipe wall, lbf/ft [kN/m], and
Tf = Factored thrust in pipe wall, lbf/ft [kN/m],
W = the unit force derived from 1 ft3 [m3] of fill
material above the pipe, lbf/ft3 [kN/m3]. When the
actual fill material is not known, use 120 lbf/ft3
[19 kN/m3],
f = Resistance factor.

NOTE 1—For pipes meeting B 745/B 745M, both minimum yield and
A = required wall area, in. 2/ft [mm2/mm], minimum tensile strengths are based on the H-32 temper material.
AL = maximum highway design axle load, lbf [N],
d = depth of corrugation, in. [mm], 3
5. Basis of Design
E = modulus of elasticity, 10 3 106 lbf/in. 2 [69 3 10 5.1 The recommendations presented herein, represent gen-
MPa], erally accepted design practice. The design engineer shall,
EL = earth load, lbf/ft2 [kPa],
however, determine that these recommendations meet particu-
fc = critical buckling stress, lbf/in.2 [MPa],
FF = flexibility factor, in./lbf [mm/N], lar project needs.
fu = specified minimum tensile strength,
6. Loads
= 31 000 lbf/in.2 [215 MPa] for corrugated alu-
minum pipe per B 745/B 745M using Alclad Alloy 6.1 The design load or pressure on a pipe is comprised of
3004–H34, earth load (EL), live load (LL), and impact load (IL). These
= 27 000 lbf/in.2 [185 MPa] for corrugated alu- loads are applied as a fluid pressure acting on the pipe
minum pipe per B 745/B 745M using Alclad Alloy periphery.
3004–H32, 6.2 For aluminum pipe buried in a trench or in an embank-
= 35 000 lbf/in.2 [245 MPa] for 0.100 through ment on a yielding foundation, loads are defined as follows:
0.150 inch [2.52 through 3.81 mm] thick alumi- 6.2.1 Earth Load—The earth load EL is the weight of the
num structural plate per B 746/B 746M, column of soil directly above the pipe calculated as:
= 34 000 lbf/in.2 [235 MPa] for 0.175 through EL 5 HW (1)
0.250 inch [4.44 through 6.35 mm] thick alumi-
num structural plate per B 746/B 746M, 6.2.2 Live Loads—The live load LL is that portion of the
fy = specified minimum yield strength, weight of the vehicle, train, or aircraft moving over the pipe
= 20 000 lbf/in.2 [140 MPa] for corrugated alu- that is distributed through the soil to the pipe.
minum pipe per B 745/B 745M using Alclad Alloy 6.2.2.1 Live Loads Under Highways—Live load pressures
3004–H32, for H20 highway loadings, including impact effects, are as
= 24 000 lbf/in.2 [165 MPa] for all other corru- follows:
gated aluminum pipe and structural plate per B
745/B 745M and B 746/B 746M,
H = depth of fill above top of pipe, ft [m], TABLE 1 Sectional Properties of Corrugated Aluminum Sheets
Hmax = maximum depth of fill, ft [m], for Corrugation: 11⁄2 by 1⁄4 in. [38 by 6.5 mm] (Helical)
H min = minimum depth of fill, ft [m],
I = moment of inertia of corrugation, in.4/in. [mm4/
mm], see Tables 1-7),
IL = impact load, lbf/ft2 [kPa],
k = soil stiffness factor—0.22 for good sidefill mate-
rial compacted to 90 % of standard density based
on Test Method D 698,
LL = live load, lbf/ft 2 [kPa],
P = total design load or pressure, lbf/ft2 [kPa],
Pf = Factored crown pressure, lbf/ft2 [kPa],
r = radius of gyration of corrugation, in. [mm], see
Tables 1-7,
NOTE—Inch-pound dimensions shown in this figure are exact values
rc = corner radius of pipe-arch, ft [mm],
used in calculating the section properties. Nominal values for some of
Rf = Factored resistance for each limit state, lbf/ft these dimensions are used in other places in this practice.
[kN/m],
Moment of Inertia, Radius of
Rn = Nominal resistance for each limit state, lbf/ft Specified Thick- Area of Section A,
I 3 10−3 in.4/in. Gyration,
ness, in. [mm] in.2/ft [mm2/mm]
[kN/m], [mm4/mm] r, in. [mm]
s = pipe diameter or span, in. [mm], 0.048 [1.22] 0.608 [1.287] 0.344 [5.64] 0.0824 [2.093]
0.060 [1.52] 0.761 [1.611] 0.439 [7.19] 0.0832 [2.113]
S = pipe diameter or span, ft [m],

2
 B 790/B 790M
TABLE 2 Sectional Properties of Corrugated Aluminum Sheets
for Corrugation: 2 by 1⁄2 in. [51 by 13 mm] (Helical)
allowable stress design (ASD) method presented in Section 8,
or the load and resistance factor design (LRFD) method
presented in Section 9. Additionally, the design considerations
in other paragraphs shall be followed for either design method.
8. Design by ASD Method
8.1 The thrust in the pipe wall shall be checked by three
criteria. Each considers the joint function of the aluminum pipe
and the surrounding soil envelope.
8.1.1 Required Wall Area:
8.1.1.1 Determine the design pressure and ring compression
thrust in the aluminum pipe wall as follows:
P 5 EL 1 LL 1 IL (2)

NOTE—Inch-pound dimensions shown in this figure are exact values T 5 PS/2 (3)
used in calculating the section properties. Nominal values for some of
these dimensions are used in other places in this practice.
8.1.1.2 Determine the required wall cross-sectional area.
The safety factor SF on the wall area is 2.
Moment of Inertia, Radius of
Specified Thick- Area of Section A,
I 3 10−3 in.4/in. Gyration, T~SF!
ness, in. [mm] in.2/ft [mm2/mm] A5 (4)
[mm4/mm] r, in. [mm] fy
0.048 [1.22] 0.652 [1.380] 1.533 [25.12] 0.1682 [4.272]
0.060 [1.52] 0.815 [1.725] 1.942 [31.82] 0.1690 [4.293]
0.075 [1.91] 1.019 [2.157] 2.458 [40.28] 0.1700 [4.318] Select from Tables 1-7 a wall thickness equal to or greater
0.105 [2.67] 1.428 [3.023] 3.542 [58.04] 0.1725 [4.382] than the required wall area A.
8.1.2 Critical Buckling Stress—Check corrugations with the
required wall area for possible wall buckling. If the critical
Height of Cover, ft [mm] Live Load, lbf/ft2 [kPa] buckling stress fc is less than the minimum yield stress fy,
recalculate the required wall area using fc instead of fy.
1 [300] 1800 [86.2]
2
3
4
[600]
[900]
[1200]
800 [38.3]
600 [28.7]
400 [19.2]
r
If s , k Œ24E
fu then fc 5 fu 2 48E r SD
fu2 ks 2
(5)

5 [1500] 250 [12.0]

6
7
8
[1800]
[2100]
[2400]
200 [9.6]
175 [8.4]
100 [4.8]
r
If s . k Π24E 12E

SD
fu then fc 5 ks 2 (6)
over 8 [over 2400] neglect [neglect] r
6.2.2.2 Live Loads Under Railways—Live load pressures 8.1.3 Required Seam Strength:
for E80 railway loadings, including impact effects, are as 8.1.3.1 Since a helical lockseam pipe has no longitudinal
follows: seams, this criterion is not valid for this type of pipe.
Height of Cover, ft [mm] Live Load, lbf/ft2 [kPa] 8.1.3.2 For pipe fabricated with longitudinal seams (riv-
eted or bolted) the seam strength shall be sufficient to develop
2 [600] 3800 [181.9] the thrust in the pipe wall. The safety factor SF on seam
5 [1500] 2400 [114.9]
8 [2400] 1600 [76.6] strength SS is 3. Determine the required seam strength as
10 [3000] 1100 [52.7] follows:
12 [3600] 800 [38.3]
15 [4500] 600 [28.7] SS 5 T~SF! (7)
20 [6000] 300 [14.4]
30 [9000] 100 [4.8]
over 30 [over 9000] neglect [neglect] 8.1.3.3 Check the ultimate seam strengths shown in Tables
3 and 4, or Table 5. If the required seam strength exceeds that
Values for intermediate covers may be interpolated. shown for the aluminum thickness already chosen, use a
6.2.2.3 Live Loads Under Aircraft Runways— Because of heavier pipe whose seam strength exceeds the required seam
the many different wheel configurations and weights, live load strength.
pressures for aircraft vary. Such pressures must be determined
for the specific aircraft for which the installation is designed; 9. Design by LRFD Method
see the FAA publication “Airport Drainage.” 9.1 Factored Loads—The pipe shall be designed to resist
6.2.3 Impact Loads—Loads caused by the impact of mov- the following combination of factored earth load (EL) and live
ing traffic are important only at low heights of cover. Their load plus impact (LL + IL):
effects have been included in live load pressures in 6.2.2.
Pf 5 1.95EL 1 1.75~LL 1 IL! (8)
7. Design Method 9.2 Factored Thrust—The factored thrust, Tf, per unit length
7.1 Strength requirements for wall strength, buckling of wall shall be determined from the factored crown pressure Pf
strength, and seam strength may be determined by either the as follows:

3
 B 790/B 790M
TABLE 3 Sectional Properties of Corrugated Aluminum Sheets for Corrugation: 22⁄3 by 1⁄2 in. [68 by 13 mm] (Helical or Annular)

NOTE—Inch-pound dimensions shown in this figure are exact values used in calculating the section properties. Nominal values for some of these
dimensions are used in other places in this practice.
Ultimate Longitudinal Seam
Area of Moment Strength of Riveted
Specified Radius of
Sec- of Inertia, Corrugated Aluminum Pipe,
Thick- Gyration,
tion A, l 3 10−3 Pounds [kN] per Foot [metre] of Seam
ness, in. r, in.
in.2/ft in.4/in.
[mm] [mm] ⁄ -in. [7.94 mm] Rivets
5 16 ⁄ -in. [9.53 mm] Rivets
38
[mm2/mm] [mm4/mm]
A B
Single Double SingleA DoubleB
0.060 [1.52] 0.775 [1.640] 1.892 [31.00] 0.1712 [4.348] 9000 [131] 14 000 [204] ... ...
0.075 [1.91] 0.968 [2.049] 2.392 [39.20] 0.1721 [4.371] 9000 [131] 18 000 [263] ... ...
0.105 [2.67] 1.356 [2.870] 3.425 [56.13] 0.1741 [4.422] ... ... 15 600 [228] 31 500 [460]
0.135 [3.43] 1.745 [3.694] 4.533 [74.28] 0.1766 [4.486] ... ... 16 200 [237] 33 000 [482]
0.164 [4.17] 2.130 [4.509] 5.725 [93.82] 0.1795 [4.559] ... ... 16 800 [245] 34 000 [496]
A
Single means one row of rivets, one rivet per corrugation.
B
Double means two rows of rivets, one rivet per corrugation per row.

TABLE 4 Sectional Properties of Corrugated Aluminum Sheets for Corrugation: 3 by 1 in. [75 by 25 mm] (Helical or Annular)

NOTE—Inch-pound dimensions shown in this figure are exact values used in calculating the section properties. Nominal values for some of these
dimensions are used for other places in this practice.
Ultimate Longitudinal Seam
Strength of Riveted
Corrugated Aluminum Pipe,
Specified Area of Moment of Radius of
Pounds [kN] per Foot [metre] of Seam
Thickness, Section A, Inertia, l 3 10−3, Gyration, r,
in. [mm] in. /ft [mm2/mm]
2
in. /in. [mm4/mm]
4
in. [mm] ⁄ -in. [9.53 mm]
38 ⁄ -in. [12.70 mm]
12

Rivets Rivets
DoubleA DoubleA
0.060 [1.52] 0.890 [1.884] 8.659 [141.90] 0.3417 [8.679] 16 500 [241] ...
0.075 [1.91] 1.118 [2.366] 10.883 [178.34] 0.3427 [8.705] 20 500 [299] ...
0.105 [2.67] 1.560 [3.302] 15.459 [253.33] 0.3448 [8.758] ... 28 000 [409]
0.135 [3.43] 2.008 [4.250] 20.183 [331.74] 0.3472 [8.819] ... 42 000 [613]
0.164 [4.17] 2.458 [5.203] 25.091 [411.17] 0.3499 [8.887] ... 54 500 [795]
A
Double means two rows of rivets, one rivet per corrugation per row.

4
 B 790/B 790M
TABLE 5 Sectional Properties of Corrugated Aluminum Plates for Corrugation: 9 by 21⁄2 in. [230 by 64 mm]

NOTE—Inch-pound dimensions shown in this figure are exact values used in calculating the section properties. Nominal values for some of these
dimensions are used in other places in this practice.
Ultimate Strength of
Bolted Structural Plate
Specified Area of Moment of Radius of Longitudinal Seams,
Thickness, Section A, Inertia, l 3 10−3 Gyration, r, Pounds [kN] per Foot [metre] of Seam
in. [mm] in.2/ft [mm2/mm] in.4/in. [mm4/mm] in. [mm] (3⁄4-in. [19 mm] Bolts)
Steel Bolts, Aluminum Bolts, 4 Bolts
4 Bolts Per Corrugation Per Corrugation
0.100 [2.54] 1.404 [2.972] 83.065 [1361.19] 0.844 [21.438] 28 000 [409] 26 400 [385]
0.125 [3.18] 1.750 [3.704] 103.901 [1702.63] 0.844 [21.438] 41 000 [598] 34 800 [508]
0.150 [3.81] 2.100 [4.445] 124.883 [2046.47] 0.845 [21.463] 51 100 [746] 44 400 [648]
0.175 [4.44] 2.449 [5.184] 145.845 [2389.97] 0.845 [21.463] 63 700 [930] 52 800 [771]
0.200 [5.08] 2.799 [5.925] 166.959 [2735.97] 0.846 [21.488] 73 400 [1071] 52 800 [771]
0.225 [5.72] 3.149 [6.665] 188.179 [3083.70] 0.847 [21.514] 83 200 [1214] 52 800 [771]
0.250 [6.35] 3.501 [7.410] 209.434 [3432.01] 0.847 [21.514] 93 100 [1359] 52 800 [771]

TABLE 6 Sectional Properties of Aluminum Spiral Rib Pipe for Rib 3⁄4 in. [19 mm] Wide by 3⁄4 in. [19 mm] Deep With a Spacing of 71⁄2 in.
[190 mm] Center to Center (Helical)

NOTE 1—Inch-pound dimensions shown in this figure are exact values used in calculating the section properties. Nominal values for some of these
dimensions are used in other places in this practice.
NOTE 2—Net effective properties at full yield stress.
Effective Properties
Specified Thickness, Area of Section A, Moment of Inertia, I 3 10-3 in.4/in. Radius of Gyration,
in. [mm] in.2/ft. [mm2/mm] [mm4/mm] r, in. [mm]
0.060 [1.52] 0.415 [0.878] 2.558 [41.92] 0.272 [6.91]
0.075 [1.91] 0.569 [1.204] 3.372 [55.26] 0.267 [6.78]
0.105 [2.67] 0.914 [1.935] 5.073 [83.13] 0.258 [6.55]
0.135 [3.43] 1.290 [2.730] 6.826 [111.86] 0.252 [6.40]

Tf 5 P f S/2 (9) Rf 5 f R n (10)

9.3 Factored Resistance—The factored resistance (Rf) shall
equal or exceed the factored thrust. Rf shall be calculated for The resistance factor (f) shall be as specified in Table 8. The
the limit states of (1) wall resistance, (2) resistance to buckling, nominal resistance (Rn) shall be calculated as specified in 9.4,
and (3) seam resistance (where applicable) as follows: 9.5, and 9.6.

5
 B 790/B 790M
TABLE 7 Sectional Properties of Aluminum Spiral Rib Pipe for Rib 3⁄4 in. [19 mm] Wide by 1 in. [25 mm] Deep With a Spacing of
111⁄2 in. [292 mm] Center to Center (Helical)

NOTE 1—Inch-pound dimensions shown in this figure are exact values used in calculating the section properties. Nominal values for some of these
dimensions are used in other places in this practice.
NOTE 2—Net effective properties at full yield stress.
Effective Properties
Specified Thickness, Area of Section A, in.2/ft. Moment of Inertia, I 3 10-3 in.4/in. Radius of Gyration, r,
in. [mm] [mm2/mm] [mm4/mm] in. [mm]
0.060 [1.52] 0.312 [0.660] 4.080 [66.86] 0.396 [10.058]
0.075 [1.91] 0.427 [0.904] 5.450 [84.31] 0.391 [9.931]
0.105 [2.67] 0.697 [1.475] 8.390 [137.49] 0.380 [9.652]
0.135 [3.43] 1.009 [2.136] 11.480 [188.12] 0.369 [9.874]

TABLE 8 Resistance Factors for LRFD Design 10.2 For curve and tangent corrugated pipe, the flexibility
Type of Pipe Limit State
Resistance factor shall not exceed the following:
Factor, f
Flexibility Factor, FF, in./lbf [mm/N]
Helical pipe with lock seam or fully Minimum wall area and 1.00
Depth of Corrugation, in. Material Thickness,
welded seam buckling FF
[mm] in. [mm]
Annular pipe with spot-welded, Minimum wall area and 1.00
riveted, or bolted seam buckling
⁄ [6.5] and 1⁄2 [13]
14 0.060 [1.52] 0.031 [0.18]
Minimum seam strength 0.67
0.075 [1.91] 0.061 [0.35]
Structural plate pipe Minimum wall area and 1.00
all others 0.092 [0.53]
buckling
1 [25] all 0.060 [0.34]
Minimum seam strength 0.67
21⁄2 [64] round pipe all 0.025 [0.14]
21⁄2 [64] arch and pipe arch all 0.036 [0.21]

9.4 Wall Resistance—The nominal axial resistance per unit 10.3 For ribbed pipes installed in a trench cut in undisturbed
length of wall without consideration of buckling, shall be taken soil and provided with a soil envelope meeting the require-
as follows: ments of 17.2.3 to minimize compactive effort, the flexibility
factor shall not exceed the following:
Rn 5 f y A (11)
Depth of Rib, in. [mm] Flexibility Factor, FF, in./lbf [mm/N]
9.5 Resistance to Buckling—The nominal resistance calcu-
lated using Eq 11 shall be investigated for buckling. If fc < fy, ⁄ [19]
34 0.600 I1/3 [0.135 I1/3]
1 [25] 0.310 I1/3 [0.070 I1/3]
Rn shall be recalculated using fc in lieu of fy. The value of fc
shall be determined from Eq 5 or Eq 6 as applicable. 10.4 For ribbed pipes installed in a trench cut in undisturbed
9.6 Seam Resistance—For pipe fabricated with longitudinal soil where the soil envelope does not meet the requirements of
seams, the nominal resistance of the seam per unit length of 17.2.3, the flexibility factor shall not exceed the following:
wall, shall be taken as the ultimate seam strength shown in Depth of Rib, in. [mm] Flexibility Factor, FF, in./lbf [mm/N]
Tables 3 and 4, or Table 5.
⁄ [19]
34 0.420 I1/3 [0.0944 I1/3]
1 [25] 0.215 I1/3 [0.048 I1/3]
10. Handling and Installation
10.1 The pipe shall have enough rigidity to withstand the 10.5 For ribbed pipes installed in an embankment or fill
forces that are normally applied during shipment and placing. section, the flexibility factor shall not exceed the following:
Both shop- and field-assembled pipe shall have strength Depth of Rib, in. [mm] Flexibility Factor, FF, in./lbf [mm/N]
adequate to withstand compaction of the sidefill without ⁄ [19]
34 0.340 I1/3 [0.0764 I1/3]
interior bracing to maintain pipe shape. Handling and installa- 1 [25] 0.175 I1/3 [0.039 I1/3]
tion rigidity is measured by the following flexibility require-
ment: 11. Minimum Cover Requirements
s 2 11.1 Minimum Cover Design—Where pipes are to be placed
FF 5 EI (12) under roads, streets, or freeways, the minimum cover require-
ment shall be determined. Minimum cover Hmin is defined as

6
 B 790/B 790M
the distance from the top of the pipe to the top of the rigid deflection. Some designers, however, continue to apply a
pavement or to the top of the subgrade for flexible pavement. deflection limit.
Maximum axle loads in accordance with AASHTO Specifica-
tions for Highway Bridges are as follows: 13. Smooth-Line Pipe
Maximum Axle Load 13.1 Corrugated aluminum pipe composed of a smooth
Class of Loading lbf [N] interior aluminum liner and a corrugated exterior shell that are
H25 40 000 [177 900]
attached integrally at the continuous helical lockseam, shall be
HS25 40 000 [177 900] designed in accordance with this practice on the same basis as
H20 32 000 [142 300] a standard corrugated aluminum pipe having the same corru-
HS20 32 000 [142 300]
H15 24 000 [106 700]
gation as the shell and a weight per foot [metre] equal to the
HS15 24 000 [106 700] sum of the weights of the liner and the shell. The corrugated
shell shall be limited to corrugations having a maximum pitch
11.1.1 When:
of 3 in. [75 mm], and a thickness of not less than 60 % of the
Π~AL!d
EI . 0.23 or , 0.45, (13)
total thickness of the equivalent standard pipe. The distance
between parallel helical seams, when measured along the
longitudinal axis of the pipe, shall be no greater than 30 in.
the minimum cover requirement is: [750 mm].

Hmin 5 0.55S Π~AL!d

EI (14)
14. Spiral-Rib Pipe
14.1 Pipe composed of a single thickness of smooth sheet
with helical ribs projecting outwardly shall be designed on the
11.1.2 When: same basis as a standard corrugated aluminum pipe.

Π~AL!d
EI , 0.23 then
S
H min 5 8 (15) 15. Pipe-Arch Design
15.1 Pipe-arch design shall be similar to round pipe using
twice the top radius as the span S.
11.1.3 When:

Π~AL!d
EI . 0.45 then
S
Hmin 5 4
In all cases, Hmin is never less than 1 ft [300 mm].
11.2 Minimum Cover Under Railways—Where pipes are to
be placed under railways, the minimum cover (measured from
the top of the pipe to the bottom of the crossties) shall not be
less than one fourth of the span for factory-made pipe, or one
fifth of the span for field-bolted pipe. In all cases, the minimum
cover is never less than 1 ft [300 mm] for roundpipe, or 2 ft
[600 mm] for arches and pipe-arches.
11.3 Minimum Cover Under Aircraft Runways—Where
pipes are to be placed under rigid-pavement runways, the
minimum cover is 1.5 ft [450 mm] from the top of the pipe to
the bottom of the slab, regardless of the type of pipe or the
loading. For pipes under flexible-pavement runways, the mini-
mum cover must be determined for the specific pipe and
loadings that are to be considered; see the FAA, “Airport
Drainage.”
11.4 Construction Loads—It is important to protect drain-
age structures during construction. Heavy construction equip-
ment shall not be allowed close to or on buried pipe unless
provisions are made to accommodate the loads imposed by
such equipment. A minimum cover of 4 ft [1200 mm] is
suggested; however, this may be modified depending on field
conditions and by experience.
12. Deflection
12.1 The application of a deflection design criteria is op-
tional. Long-term field experience and test results have dem-
onstrated that corrugated aluminum pipe, properly installed
using suitable fill material, will experience no significant
(16)
16. Materials
16.1 Acceptable pipe materials, methods of manufacture,
and quality of finished pipe are described in Specifications
B 745/B 745M and B 746/B 746M.
17. Soil Design
17.1 The performance of a flexible corrugated aluminum
pipe is dependent on soil-structure interaction and soil stiff-
ness.
17.2 Soil Parameters to be Considered:
17.2.1 The type and anticipated behavior of the foundation
soil under the design load must be considered.
17.2.2 The type, compacted density, and strength properties
of the soil envelope immediately adjacent to the pipe shall be
established. Good sidefill material is considered to be a
granular material with little or no plasticity and free of organic
material. Soils meeting the requirements of Groups GM and
GC as described in Classification D 2487 are generally accept-
able, when compacted to 90 % of maximum density as
determined by Test Method D 698. Soils meeting the require-
ments of Groups GW, GP, SW, and SP as described in
Classification D 2487 are generally acceptable, when com-
pacted to 95 % of maximum density as determined by Test
Method D 698. Test Methods D 1556, D 2167, D 2922, and
D 2937 may be used to determine the in-place density of the
soil. Soil Groups SM and SC are acceptable but may require
closer control to obtain the specified density.
17.2.3 Ribbed pipe covered by 10.3 shall have soil envelope
of clean, nonplastic materials meeting the requirements of
Groups GP and SP in accordance with the classification of
Classification D 2487, or well-graded granular materials meet-
ing the requirements of Groups GW, SW, GM, SM, GC, or SC,

7

in accordance with the classification of Classification D 2487,
with a maximum plasticity index (PI) of 10. All envelope
materials shall be compacted to a minimum 90 % of standard
density in accordance with Test Method D 698. Maximum
loose lift thickness shall be 8 in. [200 mm].
NOTE 2—Soil cement or cement slurries may be used instead of the
select granular materials.
17.2.4 The size of the structural soil envelope shall be 2 ft
[600 mm] minimum each side for trench installations and one
diameter minimum each side for embankment installations.
This structural soil envelope shall extend at least 1 ft [300 mm]
above the top of the pipe.
17.3 Pipe-Arch Soil-Bearing Design—The pipe-arch shape
causes the soil pressure at the corner to be very high compared
to the soil pressure across the top of the pipe-arch. The bearing
capacity of the soil at the pipe-arch corner usually limits the
maximum depth of fill over a pipe-arch. Determine the
maximum height of fill as follows:
66.7rc
2
Hmax 5 S ~ for 2 tons/ft of soil bearing pressure!
20.3rc
Hmax 5 ~for 190 kPa of soil bearing pressure!
S 22.2.1 The load transmitted to the footing is considered to
Bedding and backfill material at the corner of pipe-arches
placed on a stable foundation shall have an allowable bearing
pressure of 2 tons/ft2 [190 kPa]. Corner pressures in excess of
2 tons/ft 2[190 kPa] require a special design.
18. Minimum Spacing
18.1 When multiple lines of pipes or pipe-arches greater
than 48 in. [1200 mm] in diameter or span are used, they shall
be spaced so that the sides of the pipe shall be no closer than
one half of a diameter or 3 ft [900 mm], whichever is less, so
that sufficient space for adequate compaction of the fill material
is available. For diameters up to 48 in. [1200 mm], the
minimum distance between the sides of the pipes shall be no
less than 2 ft [600 mm].
18.2 Materials such as various foamed or cementitious
materials that set up without mechanical compaction, may be
placed between structures with as little as 6 in. [150 mm] of
clearance.
19. End Treatment
19.1 Protection of end slopes shall require special consid-
B 790/B 790M
eration where backwater conditions may occur or where
erosion and uplift could be a problem.
19.2 End walls designed on a skewed alignment require
special design.
20. Abrasive or Corrosive Conditions
20.1 Extra aluminum thickness or coatings may be required
for resistance to corrosion or abrasion, or both. For highly
abrasive conditions, special designs may be required.
21. Construction and Installation
21.1 The construction and installation of corrugated alumi-
num pipe and pipe-arches and aluminum structural plate pipe,
pipe-arches, and arches shall conform to Practices B 788/
B 788M and B789/B 789M.
22. Structural Plate Arches
22.1 The design of structural plate arches shall be based on
(17) a minimum ratio of rise to span of 0.3; otherwise, the structural
design is the same as for structural plate pipe.
22.2 Footing Design:
(18)
act tangential to the aluminum plate at its point of connection
to the footing. The load is equal to the thrust in the aluminum
arch plate.
22.2.2 The footing shall be designed to provide for settle-
ment of an acceptable magnitude uniformly along the longitu-
dinal axis. Providing for the arch to settle will protect it from
possible overload forces induced by the settling of adjacent
embankment fill.
22.2.3 Where poor materials are encountered that might
settle excessively, some of this poor material shall be removed
and replaced with acceptable material.
22.2.4 It is undesirable to make the aluminum arch rela-
tively unyielding or fixed compared to the adjacent sidefill. The
use of massive footings or piles to prevent settlement of the
arch is generally not required, or is it desired.
22.2.5 Invert slabs or other appropriate methods should be
provided when scour is anticipated.
23. Keywords
23.1 aluminum culvert; aluminum storm drains; structural
design; culvert pipe; structural design; storm drains
8
 B 790/B 790M
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B07 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since B 790/B 790M–99 that
may impact the use of this standard.

(1) This revision is to bring the material design strength levels
into compliance with the current values given in B 746/
B 746M, B 209, and B 209M.
(2) In general, changes have been made to bring this specifi-
cation into line with its coated steel counterpart A 796/A 796M
“Standard Practice for Structural Design of Corrugated Steel
Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and Arches for Storm and Sanitary Sewers
and Other Buried Applications”.
(3) General revisions have been made to grammar and termi-
nology.
(4) Some symbol subscripts have been revised to reflect their
meaning. The list of symbols is now presented alphabetically.
Symbols have been revised throughout the practice to reflect
the changes in subscripts and corrections to symbols so that
they appear as they are listed in the list of symbols.
(5) Eq 10 has been corrected.
(6) Paragraph 9.5 has been revised so that nominal axial
resistance is investigated, rather than the wall area of the
chosen corrugation. The correct equation is now referenced.
(7) The figures that accompany section property Tables 1-7,
showing corrugation dimensions, have been cleaned up.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

9
 Designation: B 792 – 01e1

Standard Specification for

Zinc Alloys in Ingot Form for Slush Casting1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 792; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

e1 NOTE—Paragraph 9.3 was corrected editorially and a Summary of Changes section was added in July 2001.

1. Scope * TABLE 1 Chemical and North American Color Code

RequirementsA,B
1.1 This specification covers commercial zinc alloys in
Composition, %
ingot form for remelting for the manufacture of castings from
the alloys as specified and designated as shown in Table 1. UNS Z34510 UNS Z30500
Slush Casting Alloy A Slush Casting Alloy B
1.2 Slush casting alloys are used primarily for the manufac-
Color CodeC Black/Red Black/Orange
ture of lighting fixtures, lamp bases, and small statues.
1.3 This specification covers two zinc alloys which are Element

specified and designated as follows: Copper 0.2–0.3 0.1 max

Aluminum 4.50–5.00 5.25–5.75
UNS ASTM Lead 0.007 max 0.007 max
Z34510 Slush Casting Alloy A Cadmium 0.005 max 0.005 max
Z30500 Slush Casting Alloy B Tin 0.005 max 0.005 max
Iron 0.100 max 0.100 max
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the Magnesium 0.010 max 0.010 max
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the Zinc Remainder Remainder
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar A
The following applies to all specified limits in this table. For purposes of
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate determining conformance with this specification, the observed or calculated value
obtained from analysis shall be rounded off “to the nearest unit’’ in the last
Material Data Sheet for this product/material as provided by right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit, in accordance
the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and health with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
B
practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory limi- UNS designations were established in accordance with Practice E 527.
C
Refer to Practice B 908. (Note: Colors indicated are for North American
tations prior to use. applications.)

2. Referenced Documents
in Cast Form for Determination of Chemical Composition5
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)6
of order acceptance form a part of this specification to the
E 536 Test Method for Chemical Analysis of Zinc and Zinc
extent referenced herein:
Alloys7
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 899 Terminology Relating to Nonferrous Metals and 3. Terminology
Alloys2
3.1 Terms shall be defined in accordance with Terminology
B 908 Practice for the Use of Color Codes for Zinc Casting
B 899.
Alloy Ingot2
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to 4. Ordering Information
Determine Conformance With Specifications3 4.1 Orders for ingots under this specification shall include
E 47 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Zinc Die- the following information:
Casting Alloys4 4.1.1 Quantity in pounds,
E 88 Practice for Sampling Nonferrous Metals and Alloys 4.1.2 Alloy (Table 1),
4.1.3 Size, if not manufacturer’s standard,
4.1.4 Specification number and date,
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on 4.1.5 Source inspection (Section 7), and
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.04 on Zinc and Cadmium.
4.1.6 Marking (Section 9).
Current edition approved May 10, 2001. Published July 2001. Originally
published as B 792 – 88. Last previous edition B 792 – 98e1.
2 5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
3 6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
4 7
Discontinued; see 1995 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 792
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 The alloys may be made by any approved process.
5.2 The material covered by this specification shall be of
uniform quality and shall be free from dross, slag, or other
harmful contamination. The ingot shall also be reasonably free
of surface corrosion and adhering foreign matter.
6. Chemical Requirements
6.1 Limits—This alloy shall conform to the requirements as
to chemical composition prescribed in Table 1. Conformance
shall be determined by the producer by analyzing samples
taken at the time the ingots are made. If the producer has
determined the chemical composition of the metal during the
course of manufacture, he shall not be required to sample and
analyze the finished product.
6.2 In case of dispute, the following requirements shall
apply:
6.2.1 Number of Samples—Samples for verification of
chemical composition shall be taken as follows:
6.2.1.1 If the ingots are shipped in carload lots of the same
alloy, not less than five ingots shall be taken at random from
the carload for sampling. If the shipment is less than a carload
lot, one sample ingot shall be taken for each 10 000 lb (4 500
kg) or fraction thereof. When it is deemed necessary, a sample
may be taken from each melt of 1 000 lb (450 kg) or more.
6.3 Methods of Sampling—Samples from ingots for deter-
mination of chemical composition shall be taken in accordance
with one of the following methods:
6.3.1 Samples for chemical analysis shall be taken from the
material by drilling, sawing, milling, turning, or clipping a
representative piece or pieces to obtain weight of prepared
sample not less than 100 g. Sampling shall be in accordance
with Practice E 88.
6.3.2 By agreement, an optional method of sampling for
analysis may be by melting together representative portions of
each ingot selected, and then sampling the liquid composite by
casting suitable specimens for either spectrographic or chemi-
cal analysis.
6.3.3 Sample may also be in the form of a separately cast
spectrographic specimen taken from the same pour used to cast
the ingot.
6.4 Method of Analysis—The determination of chemical
composition shall be made in accordance with suitable chemi-
cal (Test Method E 536 or Test Method E 47 for tin) or other
2
methods. In case of dispute, the results secured by Test Method
E 536 and Test Method E 47 for tin only shall be the basis of
acceptance.
7. Source Inspection
7.1 If the purchaser desires that his representative inspect or
witness the inspection and testing of the product prior to
shipment, such agreement shall be made by the purchaser and
producer or supplier as part of the contract or purchase order.
7.2 When such inspection or witness of inspection and
testing is agreed upon, the producer or supplier shall afford the
purchaser’s representative all reasonable facilities to satisfy
him that the product meets the requirements of this specifica-
tion. Inspection and tests shall be conducted so there is no
unnecessary interference with the producer’s operations.
8. Rejection and Rehearing
8.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of this
specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported to
the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
supplier may make claim for a rehearing. If the rehearing
establishes that the material does not conform to the require-
ments of this specification, as much of the rejected original
material as possible shall be returned to the producer or
supplier.
9. Identification Marking
9.1 All ingots shall be properly marked for identification
with the producer’s name or brand.
9.2 Each bundle or skid shall be identified with the produc-
er’s heat, lot, or other identification mark.
9.3 Each ingot, bundle or skid shall be marked with the
appropriate Color Code for the alloy as per North American
Requirements in Practice B 908.
10. Preparation for Delivery
10.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified, the ingot shall
be packaged to provide adequate protection during normal
handling and transportation. Each package shall contain only
one alloy unless otherwise agreed upon.
11. Keywords
11.1 casting; casting alloys; gravity casting; permanent
mold casting; slush casting; zinc; zinc alloys
 B 792
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

This section contains the principal changes to the standard that have been incorporated since the last issue.

(1) Practice B 908 was added to Referenced Documents. (3) Color Code requirement added to Identification Marking.
(2) North American Color Code Requirements added to
Table 1.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 793 – 03

Standard Specification for

Zinc Casting Alloy Ingot for Sheet Metal Forming Dies and
Plastic Injection Molds1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 793; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* TABLE 1 Chemical and North American Color Code

RequirementsA,B
1.1 This specification covers commercial zinc alloys in
Composition, %
ingot form for remelting for the manufacture of dies and molds
from the alloys as shown in Table 1. UNS Z35543 UNS Z35542
Alloy A Alloy B
1.2 This specification presents requirements for zinc alloys Kirksite A Kirksite B
suitable for the production of sand cast or plaster cast forming Color CodeC Green/Red Green/Black
dies for sheet metal stamping operations and plastic injection
Element
molding. Alloy A is intended for use in the fabrication of dies
Aluminum 3.5–4.5 3.9–4.3
for sheet metal stamping under drop hammer and hydraulic Cadmium 0.005 max 0.003 max
pressure. Alloy B is a special purpose alloy of closely con- Copper 2.5–3.5 2.5–2.9
trolled composition and is primarily used in the manufacture of Iron 0.100 max 0.075 max
Lead 0.007 max 0.003 max
plastic injection molds. Magnesium 0.02–0.10 0.02–0.05
1.3 This specification covers two zinc alloys which are Tin 0.005 max 0.001 max
specified and designated as follows: Zinc Remainder Remainder
A
UNS ASTM Traditional The following applies to all specified limits in this table: For purposes of
determining conformance with this specification, the observed value or calculated
Z35543 Alloy A Kirksite A value obtained from analysis shall be rounded off “to the nearest unit” in the last
Z35542 Alloy B Kirksite B right hand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit, in accordance
with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
B
UNS designations were established in accordance with Practice E 527.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the C
Refer to Practice B 908. (Note: Colors indicated are for North American
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the applications.)
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Material Data Sheet for this product/material as provided by Determine Conformance with Specifications3
the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and health E 47 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Zinc Die-
practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory limi- Casting Alloys4
tations prior to use. E 88 Practice for Sampling Nonferrous Metals and Alloys
2. Referenced Documents in Cast Form for Determination of Chemical Composition5
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)6
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date E 536 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Zinc and Zinc
of order acceptance form a part of this specification to the Alloys5
extent referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards: 3. Terminology
B 899 Terminology Relating to Non-ferrous Metals and 3.1 Terms shall be defined in accordance with Terminology
Alloys2 B 899.
B 908 Practice for the Use of Color Codes for Zinc Casting
Alloy Ingot2 4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for ingots under this specification shall include
the following information:
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
3
B02.04 on Zinc and Cadmium. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
4
Current edition approved June 10, 2003. Published August 2003. Originally Discontinued; see 1998 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
approved in 1988. Last previous edition approved in 2001 as B 793 – 01e1. 5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
2 6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 793 – 03
4.1.1 Quantity in pounds,
4.1.2 Alloy (Table 1),
4.1.3 Size, if not manufacturer’s standard,
4.1.4 Specification number and date,
4.1.5 Source inspection (Section 7), and
4.1.6 Marking (Section 9).
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 The alloys may be made by any approved process.
5.2 The material covered by this specification shall be of
uniform quality and shall be free from dross, slag, or other
harmful contamination.
6. Chemical Requirements
6.1 Limits—The alloy shall conform to the requirements as
to chemical composition prescribed in Table 1. Conformance
shall be determined by the producer by analyzing samples
taken at the time the ingots are made. If the producer has
determined the chemical composition of the metal during the
course of manufacture, he shall not be required to sample and
analyze the finished product.
6.2 In case of dispute, the following requirements shall
apply:
6.2.1 Number of Samples—Samples for verification of
chemical composition shall be taken as follows:
6.2.2 If the ingots are shipped in carload lots of the same
alloy, not less than five ingots shall be taken at random from
the carload for sampling. If the shipment is less than a carload
lot, one sample ingot shall be taken for each 10 000 lb (4 500
kg) or fraction thereof. When it is deemed necessary, a sample
may be taken from each melt of 1 000 lb (450 kg) or more.
6.3 Methods of Sampling—Samples from ingots for deter-
mination of chemical composition shall be taken in accordance
with one of the following methods:
6.3.1 Samples for chemical analysis shall be taken from the
material by drilling, sawing, milling, turning, or clipping a
representative piece or pieces to obtain weight of prepared
sample not less than 100 g. Sampling shall be in accordance
with Practice E 88.
6.3.2 By agreement, an optional method of sampling for
analysis may be by melting together representative portions of
each ingot selected, and then sampling the liquid composite by
casting suitable specimens for either spectrographic or chemi-
cal analysis.
6.4 Method of Analysis—The determination of chemical
composition shall be made in accordance with suitable chemi-
2
cal (Test Methods E 536 or E 47 for tin), or other methods. In
case of dispute, the results secured by Test Method E 536 and
Test Method E 47 for tin only shall be the basis of acceptance.
7. Source Inspection
7.1 If the purchaser desires that his representative inspect or
witness the inspection and testing of the product prior to
shipment, such agreement shall be made by the purchaser and
producer or supplier as part of the contract or purchase order.
7.2 When such inspection or witness of inspection and
testing is agreed upon, the producer or supplier shall afford the
purchaser’s representative all reasonable facilities to satisfy
him that the product meets the requirements of this specifica-
tion. Inspection and tests shall be conducted so there is no
unnecessary interference with the producer’s operations.
8. Rejection and Rehearing
8.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of this
specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported to
the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
supplier may make claim for a rehearing. If the rehearing
establishes that the material does not conform to the require-
ments of this specification, as much of the rejected original
material as possible shall be returned to the producer or
supplier.
9. Identification Marking
9.1 All ingots shall be properly marked for identification
with the producer’s name or brand.
9.2 Each bundle or skid shall be identified with the produc-
er’s heat, lot, or other identification mark.
9.3 Each ingot, bundle or skid shall be marked with the
appropriate Color Code for the alloy as per North American
requirements in Practice B 908.
10. Preparation for Delivery
10.1 Packaging—Unless otherwise specified, the ingot shall
be packaged to provide adequate protection during normal
handling and transportation. Each package shall contain only
one alloy unless otherwise agreed upon.
11. Keywords
11.1 blanking dies; casting; casting alloys; forming dies;
gravity casting; Kirksite; Kirksite A; Kirksite B; sheet metal
dies; zinc
 B 793 – 03
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B02 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(B 793 - 01e1) that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) The traditional names Kirksite, Kirksite A, and Kirksite B

were added.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 794 – 97 (Reapproved 2003)
Standard Test Method for
Durability Wear Testing of Separable Electrical Connector
Systems Using Electrical Resistance Measurements1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 794; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers the effects of repeated insertion
and withdrawal of separable electrical connectors which are
harmful to the electrical performance of the connector.
1.2 This test method is limited to electrical connectors
designed for use in applications where the current through any
one connection in the connector does not exceed 5 A, and
where the connector may be separated a number of times
during the life of the connector.
1.3 This test method is limited to electrical connectors
intended for use in air ambients where the operating tempera-
ture is less than 65°C.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 539 Test Methods for Measuring Resistance of Electrical
Connections (Static Contacts) 2
2.2 Military Standard: 3
MIL-STD-1344A Test Methods for Electrical Connectors
3. Summary of Test Method
3.1 Sample connectors are wired for precision resistance
measurements of each test contact. The samples are divided
into two groups; then resistance measurements are made of
each test contact. The connectors in one group undergo a
number of insertion/withdrawal cycles appropriate for the
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.11 on Electrical Contact Test Methods.
Current edition approved June 10, 2003. Published July 2003. Originally
approved in 1988. Last previous edition approved in 1997 as B 794 – 97.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.04.
3
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
particular connector under test, and the resistances of these
connectors are measured again. The connectors in the other
group are not disturbed. All samples are subjected to an
accelerated aging test; then the resistances are measured again.
All samples are separated (withdrawn), exposed to an acceler-
ated aging test in the uninserted condition, removed from the
test, reinserted, and resistances measured again. The various
resistance measurements are compared to detect effects of the
wear and aging on electrical performance.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 Materials for electrical connector contacts must satisfy a
number of requirements in the areas of electrical, mechanical,
and economic characteristics. The stability of electrical prop-
erties is one of the most important of these characteristics.
Wear of contact surfaces may adversely affect these electrical
properties, especially in designs where the contact surfaces are
relatively thin coatings. This test method provides a means to
compare various material systems on a basis relevant to their
application in electrical connector contacts.
4.2 Repeated insertion and withdrawal of a connector may
cause wear or other mechanical damage to the electrical
contact surfaces, rendering those surfaces more susceptible to
environmental degradation. This test method is intended to
detect degradation of the electrical properties of the connector
by such processes.
4.3 This test method describes procedures for conducting
wear and durability testing of electrical connectors; the proce-
dures produce quantitative results. These results may be used
to compare the performance of different connector designs so
that meaningful design choices can be made. Such results may
also be used to compare the performance of a connector to a
previously established standard to evaluate the quality of the
samples under test.
4.4 The test results obtained from this test method are
limited in their applicability to connector combinations that are
equivalent in design and manufacture to those actually tested.
4.5 The user is cautioned that the conditions in this test
should be compared to the conditions that the connector will
experience in the intended application in order to determine the
relevance of this test method to the particular needs of the user.
For example, the environmental stress in this test method is
 B 794 – 97 (2003)
less severe than certain industrial and marine environments and
therefore test results are not directly applicable to predict the
performance of product intended for use in such areas.
4.6 It is recommended that this test method be used in one
of two ways. First, it may be used to evaluate and report the
performance of a particular connector system. In such a case,
it is appropriate to report the results in a table in the format
shown in Fig. 1 and to state “The results shown in the table
were obtained for (insert connector designation or description)
when tested in accordance with ASTM Standard B 794,
Method __ , Procedure __ .” Second, it may be used to impose
requirements for acceptance of product. In this case, limits for
the values shown in Fig. 1 must be established prior to product
acceptance testing. Such limits may be established by various
methods such as by evaluation of product which is known to be
acceptable or by application of appropriate experience. These
limits must be documented in a manner that the entity
performing the product test can refer to the limits to determine
if the test product conforms to such limits. A purchaser may
wish to supply a table of limits and include on the purchase
order a statement similar to: “The product, when tested in
accordance with ASTM Standard B 794, Method __ , Proce-
dure __ , shall meet the limits in the supplied table.” This table
supplied by the purchaser may set limits on all of the values in
Fig. 1, or only on a subset of those values that the purchaser
deems adequate to ensure the performance of the product.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Environmental Test Chamber, capable of controlling the
test ambient in accordance with the sequence shown in Table 1.
The test chamber shall be sufficiently large that each test
FIG. 1 Sample Format for Reporting Results
2
TABLE 1 Environmental Test Sequence
NOTE 1—Tolerance on temperature control is 62°.
Step Elapsed Time, Temperature, Relative Humidity,
h °C %
1 0–2.5 ascending, 25–65 92 6 3
2 2.5–5.5 65 92 6 3
3 5.5–8 descending, 65–25 87 6 8
4 8–10.5 ascending, 25–65 92 6 3
5 10.5–13.5 65 92 6 3
6 13.5–16 descending, 65–25 87 6 8
7 16–24 25 92 6 3
sample shall be positioned with at least 100 mm separating it
from the nearest wall of the test chamber. The test chamber
design and operation procedure shall conform to the require-
ments contained in MIL-STD-1344A, Method 1002.2.
5.2 An instrument is required for measuring resistance by
the four-wire method. This instrument shall operate within the
limits on current and open-circuit voltage set forth in Test
Methods B 539, Test Method C. The instrument shall be
capable of measuring a resistance less than 0.100 V with a
resolution of 0.0001 V. For a resistance 0.100 V or larger, the
instrument shall be capable of measuring it with a resolution of
0.1 % of the resistance value.
6. Sampling and Test Specimens
6.1 Selection of Sample Connectors—Obtain sufficient
sample connectors so that the electrical resistance of at least
200 contacts contained in at least 20 separate connectors will
be measured in the test. Obtain sample connectors that are
representative of those that will be used in the intended
application. Recognize that a connector consists of two halves
and both halves must be representative of the product to be
used. In some cases one half will be a conductive area or pad
on a printed wiring-board surface, therefore printed wiring
boards must be obtained that have representative conductive
pads. Specifically, the conductive pads shall be manufactured
to the same requirements as those that will be required of parts
to be used in the system application. These requirements will
normally cover the manufacturing process, thickness, compo-
sition, hardness, and roughness of both the finish coating and of
any underplating or undercoating. Protective treatments, if
used, shall also be specified. For the purpose of connector
testing, such printed wiring boards are generally fabricated
with appropriate circuitry to permit four-wire resistance mea-
surements.
6.2 Selection of Sample Contacts—In the case where the
samples are multicontact connectors and electrical measure-
ments are performed only on a fraction of the total number of
contacts, the contacts measured shall be distributed throughout
the field of contacts. Measure the corresponding contacts in
each sample connector.
7. Conditioning
7.1 An electrical measurement laboratory is required in
which the ambient temperature is controlled to 23 6 5°C and
the relative humidity is held below 60 %. This laboratory need
not be dedicated to this test program to the exclusion of other
 B 794 – 97 (2003)
uses so long as those other uses do not degrade the quality of
data obtained on the connector test samples.

8. Procedure
8.1 Selection of Test Method—Select a test method from the
following table which is appropriate for connector design and
application.
Method Number of Insertions
A 5
B 10
C 25
D 50
E 100
F 200
G 400
H (number selected per agreement
between producer and user)

8.2 Sample Preparation:

8.2.1 Assemble the connectors into mounting plates, guides,
fixtures, racks, or similar apparatus if such apparatus is
generally used in the actual application of the connector.
Perform such assembly at the time in the sample wiring process
that best simulates the typical manner in which the connectors
are assembled into a system.
8.2.2 Wire samples for evaluation by this test method for
electrical resistance measurements before the two connector
halves are plugged together. The wiring and resistance mea-
suring circuitry shall be of the four-wire type as described in
Test Methods B 539. Do the wiring in a manner that is typical
of the way the connector would be wired in service, and
especially in a manner that does not introduce unrealistic
contaminants or mechanical stresses on the connector. Do not
perform cleaning, lubrication, or other treatments of the
connector unless such treatments are specified by the connector
manufacturer or user as the required procedure for the appli-
cation of the particular connector under test.
8.2.3 Wire at least one reference resistor for resistance
measurements in such a manner that its resistance may be
measured using the same instrumentation and procedures as are
used for the test contacts. It is suggested that this reference
resistor be a length of wire or a path on a printed wiring board
with a resistance of the same order of magnitude as that of
typical test contacts. Measure and record the resistance of this
reference resistor each time that the test contacts are measured.
Expose this reference resistor to the same test environments as
the test contacts and generally treat the resistor in the same
manner as the test contacts.
8.2.4 Label the connectors and individual contacts therein in
such a manner that each test contact is uniquely identified.
Randomly select one half of the connectors (10 connectors if
20 connectors is the total sample size) to undergo wear testing,
and refer to these as the “wear test samples.” Insert the other
half of the connectors only once at the beginning of the test and
refer to these as the “control samples.”
8.3 Methods and Procedures for Resistance Measurements:
8.3.1 Prepare data sheets such that all information shown in
the sample data sheet illustrated in Fig. 2 may be recorded for
each test contact.
8.3.2 Perform all electrical measurements and wear tests in
the electrical measurements laboratory discussed in Section 7.
FIG. 2 Sample Data Sheet
Test samples must be allowed to come to equilibrium in this
ambient for a minimum of 1 h before electrical measurements
or connector insertion/withdrawal operations begin. All con-
nector insertion/withdrawal operations are done with the con-
nector disconnected from any power source.
8.3.3 Perform all resistance measurements under dry-circuit
conditions as specified in Test Methods B 539, Test Method C.
In addition, use a suitable method to cancel small potentials
that may be present in the measurement circuit. Suitable
methods are (1) measuring the resistance with the current
flowing one direction through the test contact, reversing the
current flow and remeasuring resistance, and averaging the two
resistance measurements; (2) measuring voltage drop across
the test contact with a constant d-c current flowing, measuring
voltage across the contact with no impressed current, and
subtracting the second voltage from the first and using the
result to calculate resistance; or (3) measuring resistance using
an a-c method. The user shall select one method and use it
throughout the experiment.
8.3.4 Make all resistance measurements in such a manner
that the value is recorded with the resolution meeting the
following requirements: For contacts with a measured resis-
tance less than 0.100 V, record the resistance with a resolution
of 0.0001 V or better. For contacts with resistance of 0.100 V
or greater, record the resistance measurement with a resolution
of 0.1 % or better. If the resistance changes during the

3
 B 794 – 97 (2003)
measurement such that after about 5 s a stable value of the
required resolution cannot be determined, record an estimate
and note that the resistance is unstable.
8.3.5 After each measurement of the reference resistor,
compare the new measured value to the initial value. If the
values differ by more than 2 %, check the calibration of the
resistance measurement instrumentation. If repair or recalibra-
tion, or both, of the instrumentation is required, discard any
measurements of test contacts made since the preceding
measurement of the reference resistor and repeat the measure-
ments. If new measurements are not feasible, mark the suspect
measurements on the data sheets.
8.3.6 If the measured resistance of a contact appears unrea-
sonable, appropriate investigation of possible causes is recom-
mended so long as the investigation does not affect the
experiment. If the resistance in question can be traced to a
cause unrelated to the contact under test, the data for that
contact may be deleted from the data set. If the cause is
repairable without affecting the experiment, repair and remea-
surement is permitted. Typical causes of this nature are wiring
errors and failed connections in the measurement leads. Such
investigations, repairs, and data-set adjustments are permitted
at any time that the samples are accessible. Do not include
contacts deleted from the data set in the sample size recorded
in column “N” of Fig. 1. Deletion of more than 5 % of the
contacts wired for measurement is not permitted.
8.4 Initial Measurements and Wear Testing:
8.4.1 Insert one connector half in its mating member such
that the electrical circuit is completed in the manner that the
connector is intended to function.
8.4.2 Measure and record (as R1) the resistance of each
contact. After all test contacts on a connector have been
measured, repeat the measurements recording the second value
(as R2) measured for each contact. Compare the two measure-
ments for each contact. If the absolute value of the difference
between R1 and R2 exceeds 5 % of the sum of R1 and R2, then
make and record a third measurement for that contact. Record
the new value as R3.
8.4.3 Disconnect the test contacts from any power source
during the connector withdrawal/insertion operations.
8.4.4 Using any guides, handles, levers, or other mechanical
aides provided by the connector and its housing, repeatedly
withdraw and reinsert each of the wear-test connectors such
that the total number of insertions on each connector equals the
number of insertions indicated for the test method chosen.
Withdrawal and insertion may be performed manually or with
an appropriate actuating machine; however, the time for each
complete withdrawal/insertion cycle shall not be less than 12 s.
Provide a minimum dwell time of 5 s in both the connected and
the unconnected position. Insertion and withdrawal velocity
shall be reasonably typical of that seen by the particular
connector in actual usage.
8.4.5 Remeasure the resistance of each contact in the
wear-test group and record the result as R4. After a value of R4
has been recorded for all contacts on a connector, remeasure
each contact on that connector and record the resistance of each
as R5.
8.5 Accelerated Aging Test:
4
8.5.1 Selection of Test Procedure—Two alternative proce-
dures are provided: the user must select one based on the test
objectives and available facilities. The procedures differ only in
their treatment of vibration during the test. Procedure A places
no requirements on the measurement or control of vibration
level experienced by the samples during the test. Procedure B
requires that vibration exceed a minimum value and that the
vibration level be measured and recorded at least once during
the test.
8.5.1.1 Procedure A—Samples will be exposed to an accel-
erated aging test in accordance with the conditions shown in
Table 1. This test is similar to that specified in MIL-STD-
1344A, Method 1002.2, Type II. The test includes temperature
and humidity cycling where the temperature is 65°C and the
relative humidity is 92 6 3 % at the high end of the cycle. The
test duration is 10 days. The procedure is basically as described
in MIL-STD-1344A except that the samples are not subjected
to the low-temperature excursion (Step 7a). No bias or polar-
ization voltage is to be applied to the samples during the test
program.
NOTE 1—A convenient type of test chamber for this type of environ-
mental exposure is a programmable temperature-humidity chamber. Such
chambers normally show perceptible vibration which may be conducted to
specimens exposed in the test volume. One survey of vibration levels
showed that test samples in such chambers might experience vibration
with a peak-to-peak amplitude in the range from 0.01 to 0.1 mm at a
frequency of 350 cpm as measured on the fixture which holds the sample
connectors. The significance of this variable is not known; therefore,
information on the identity of the test chamber and any available
information on the vibration levels is to be recorded in the test report
described in Section 10.
8.5.1.2 Procedure B—The test conditions for this procedure
are identical to those for Procedure A, except that the following
additional requirement is imposed. During the exposure of
samples to the accelerated aging test, also subject the samples
to a vibration such that the peak-to-peak amplitude is greater
than 0.01 mm at a frequency of 350 cpm as measured on the
fixture that holds the sample connectors. This amplitude and
frequency of vibration generally can be achieved by placing
samples in a typical chamber of the type described in Note 1 if
that test chamber has fans and motors for controlling the
environment and no extra measures are taken to isolate the test
samples from chamber vibration. Measure the amplitude of
vibration once during the test period and report in the test
report.
8.5.2 Subject the connector to the accelerated aging envi-
ronment for 10 days with the two connector halves remaining
connected together. Remove the test samples from the aging
test and allow at least 1 h for them to come to equilibrium in
the electrical measurement laboratory. Remeasure the resis-
tance of each contact and record the result as R6. After a value
of R6 has been recorded for all contacts on a connector,
remeasure each contact on that connector and record the
resistance of each as R7.
8.5.3 Separate all connector halves and subject all connec-
tors to the accelerated aging ambient for an additional 10 days
in the unconnected condition. Remove the test samples from
the aging test and allow at least 1 h for them to come to
equilibrium in the electrical measurement laboratory. Plug each
 B 794 – 97 (2003)
pair of connector halves together again. Remeasure the resis- maximum, and standard deviation of the average resistance
tance of each contact and record the result as R8. After a value change values. Enter the values on the second line of Section
of R8 has been recorded for all contacts on a connector, 1 in the table shown in Fig. 1.
remeasure each contact on that connector and record the 9.5 Using the values calculated for the average resistance
resistance of each as R9. change after exposure for 10 days in the connected condition
(C2), determine for both sample groups the number of test
9. Calculation contacts and the minimum, mean, median, maximum, and
9.1 Prepare a Summary of Results table in the format shown standard deviation of the average resistance-change values for
in Fig. 1 to report the results. For the wear-test samples, enter each sample group. Enter the values on the appropriate lines in
at the indicated location in the table the total number of the table shown in Fig. 1.
insertions that each sample received. 9.6 Using the values calculated for the average resistance
9.2 For each contact, calculate the values shown in Table 2. change after exposure for 10 days in the unconnected condition
Specifically, calculate the average initial value of resistance for (C3), determine for both sample groups the number of test
each contact, M1, using the two or three initial values recorded. contacts and the minimum, mean, median, maximum, and
Calculate the average resistance for each contact at each step in standard deviation of the average resistance change values for
the test program by averaging the two measurements made at each sample group. Enter the values on the appropriate lines in
that step, that is, R4 and R5, R6 and R7, R8 and R9. Subtract the table shown in Fig. 1.
the average measured resistance of each contact after wear (but
before the environmental test) from the average initial resis- 10. Report
tance for that contact to obtain the change in resistance, C1. 10.1 Report the following information:
(This data will be available only for the contacts which 10.1.1 Date the test was started and completed,
underwent wear testing.) Subtract the average measured resis- 10.1.2 Test method used (Method A to H). If Method H is
tance of each contact (after 10 days in the inserted condition in used, list the number of insertions used,
the environmental test) from the average initial resistance for 10.1.3 Test procedure used (Procedure A or B),
that contact to obtain the change in resistance, C2. Subtract the 10.1.4 Identify the test chamber(s) used to achieve the
average measured resistance of each contact (after the final 10 temperature-humidity cycle for the environmental exposure.
days in the unconnected condition in the environmental test) Include a statement on what is known about the vibration level
from the average initial resistance for that contact to obtain the that samples experienced in the chamber. If Procedure B is
change in resistance, C3. used, state the measured vibration level in the chamber,
9.3 Combine the values of average initial resistance (M1) 10.1.5 Provide a description of the connector samples used
for the wear-test samples into a single data set; determine the in this test method. This description will normally include the
minimum, mean, median, maximum, standard deviation, and manufacturer and the designation (catalog number, code num-
number of contacts for this data set. Enter these values on the ber, etc.) for the connector tested. Both halves of the connector
first line of Section 1 of the Summary of Results table shown must be described. If one half is a printed wiring board, provide
in Fig. 1. Similarly, combine the M1 values for the control a description of the contact area (coating thickness, composi-
samples into a data set, determine the values requested, and tion, other requirements, etc.),
enter on the first line of Section 2 of Fig. 1. 10.1.6 Include the Summary of Results table prepared in
9.4 Using the values calculated for the average resistance Section 9,
change after wear for the wear sample group (C1), determine 10.1.7 Note any deviations from the procedure outlined in
the number of test contacts and the minimum, mean, median, this test method, and
10.1.8 Include notes on any observations of unusual or
unexpected events, or any analysis that may help to explain the
TABLE 2 Values to be Calculated for Each Contact
results.
Value to be Calculated, avg Calculation Designation
11. Precision and Bias 4
Initial resistance, (R1 + R2)/2 or M1
(R1 + R2 + R3)/3 11.1 Precision—An interlaboratory round robin conducted
Resistance after added wear cycles, (R4 + R5)/2 M2 with 4 separate laboratories using a single manufacturing lot of
(available only for contacts designated
for wear testing) connectors produced the following results:
Resistance after 10 days environmental (R6 + R7)/2 M3 11.1.1 The ratio of the median of the C3 values for the 200
test in the connected condition wear cycle group to the 2 wear cycle group ranged from 2 to
Resistance after 10 days environmental (R8 + R9)/2 M4
test in the unconnected condition 23.
Resistance change after added wear M2-M1 C1 11.1.2 Comparing the median of the C3 values for the 4
cycles, (available only for contacts laboratories for the 2 wear cycle group, the ratio of the
designated for wear testing)
Resistance change, after 10 days M3-M1 C2 maximum to the minimum is 4.0. Comparing the median of the
environmental test in the connected
condition
Resistance change, after 10 days M4-M1 C3
4
environmental test in the unconnected Supporting data and results of the interlaboratory round robin that provides the
condition basis for the precision statements are available from ASTM International Headquar-
ters. Request RR: B04–1004.

5
 B 794 – 97 (2003)
C3 values for the 4 laboratories for the 200 wear cycle group,
the ratio of the maximum to the minimum is less than 5.
11.1.3 The same round robin disclosed that mean of the C3
values is strongly influenced by outliers, and a precision
statement based on the sample mean is not meaningful.
NOTE 2—Based on the round robin results, it is recommended that
experimental controls be run with each experiment. Such controls may be
examples of connectors known to be acceptable, or connectors of a known
quality. It is also recommended that if the mean is used in the data
analysis, that careful attention is given to the influence of outliers in the
population.
11.2 Bias—Since there is no accepted reference material
suitable for determining the bias for the procedure in Test
Method B 794 for measuring wear in electrical connectors
using electrical resistance measurements, no statement on bias
is being made.
12. Keywords
12.1 contact resistance; electrical connectors; electrical con-
tacts; temperature and humidity cycling test; wear; wear tracks

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 796 – 02
Standard Test Method for
Nonmetallic Inclusion Content of Powders Intended for
Powder Forging (P/F) Applications1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 796; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers a metallographic method for
determining the nonmetallic inclusion level of powders in-
tended for powder forging (P/F) applications.
1.2 The test method covers repress powder forged test
specimens in which there has been minimal lateral material
flow (< 1%). The core region of the powder forged test
specimen shall contain no porosity detectable at 1003.
1.3 This test method is not suitable for determining the
nonmetallic inclusion level of powder forged test specimens
that have been forged such that the core region contains
porosity. At the magnification used for this test method residual
porosity is hard to distinguish from oxide inclusions. Too much
residual porosity makes a meaningful assessment of the inclu-
sion population impossible.
1.4 The test method may be applied to materials that contain
manganese sulfide (admixed or prealloyed) provided the near
neighbor separation distance is changed from 30 µm to 15 µm.
NOTE 1—The test method may be applied to powder forged parts where
there has been a greater amount of material flow provided:
The near neighbor separation distance is changed, or
The inclusion sizes agreed between the parties are adjusted for the
amount of material flow.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
E 3 Practice for Preparation of Metallographic Specimens2
E 768 Guide for Preparing and Evaluating Specimens for
Automatic Inclusion Assessment of Steel2
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B09 on Metal
Powders and Metal Powder Products and is the direct responsibility of Subcom-
mittee B09.11 on Near Full Density Powder Metallurgy Parts.
Current edition approved April 10, 2002. Published May 2002. Originally
published as B – 88. Last previous edition B – 00.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
3. Summary of Test Method
3.1 A section representing the core region is cut from the
powder forged test specimen and mounted for metallographic
grinding and polishing.
3.2 The polished sample is examined microscopically at a
magnification of 1003 and a note made of inclusions larger
than a predetermined size.
3.3 The maximum Feret’s diameter is used to determine
inclusion size. A Feret’s diameter is a caliper diameter as
illustrated in Fig. 1.
3.4 The fragmented nature of some inclusions means that
their size determination is somewhat complicated. The concept
of near neighbor separation is used in determining inclusion
size. If an inclusion is within a certain distance of its neigh-
boring particles, it is considered a member of an inclusion
cluster or agglomerate. Detected features within 30 µm of one
another are considered part of the same inclusion. The concept
is illustrated schematically in Fig. 2.
3.5 The nonmetallic inclusion level of the test specimen is
reported as the number of inclusions per 100 mm2 greater than
or equal to the predetermined size.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 The extensive porosity present in pressed and sintered
ferrous materials masks the effect of inclusions on mechanical
properties. In contrast, the properties of material powder forged
to near full density are strongly influenced by the composition,
size, size distribution, and location of nonmetallic inclusions.
4.2 The test for nonmetallic inclusions in powder forged
steels is useful as the following:
4.2.1 Characteristic to classify or differentiate one grade of
powder from another.
4.2.2 Means of quality comparison of powders intended for
powder forging, lot to lot.
4.3 Significant variations in nonmetallic inclusion content
will occur if:
4.3.1 The powder used to form the test specimen does not
meet powder forging quality standards for nonmetallic inclu-
sion content.
 B 796
FIG. 1 Schematic illustration of Feret’s diameter.
FIG. 2 Schematic illustration of the “near neighbor” concept and
maximum Feret’s diameter.
4.3.2 Processing of the powder forged test specimen has
been carried out under conditions that do not permit oxide
reduction or allow oxidation of the test specimen, or both.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Equipment for the metallographic preparation of test
specimens.
5.2 A metallographic microscope permitting observation
and measurement up to a magnification of 1003 using light
with a wavelength of 544 nm (green filter), an objective lens
with a magnification of from 83 to 12.53, and a numerical
aperture between 0.16 and 0.20.
NOTE 2—Defining the light optics used is important because this
determines the features that will be resolved, and all detected features are
included in the assessment of inclusion size.
6. Sampling
6.1 A metallographic sample shall be removed from the
powder forged test specimen, austenitized, and quenched.
6.2 The polished surface of the sample to be examined shall
be not less than 350 mm2 (0.54 in.2) in area. Multiple sections
are permitted in order to obtain the necessary area for mea-
surement.
6.3 The polished surface shall be parallel to the direction of
forging, that is, parallel to the direction of travel of the forging
punch, and shall represent the core region of the test specimen.
7. Procedure
7.1 Preparation of Specimens—In polishing the specimens,
2
it is highly important that a clean polish be obtained and that
the inclusions not be pitted, dragged, or obscured. It is
recommended that the procedures described in Practice E 3 and
Guide E 768 be followed. Automated grinding and polishing
procedures are recommended. Examine specimens in the
as-polished condition, free of the effects of any prior etching,
if used.
7.2 Measurement of Nonmetallic Inclusion Content:
7.2.1 Survey at least 350 mm2 (0.54 in2) of the surface of the
polished specimen at a magnification of 1003 using light with
a wavelength of 544 nm (green filter), an objective lens with a
magnification of from 83 to 12.53, and a numerical aperture
between 0.16 and 0.20.
7.2.2 Size detected inclusions on the basis of near neighbor
separation. Features within 30 µm of one another are consid-
ered to be part of the same inclusion.
7.2.3 For individual features less than 30 µm in size, three
such features within 30 µm of one another are required to
constitute an inclusion aggregate.
7.2.4 Add an individual feature less than 30 µm in size to an
inclusion larger than 30 µm, provided both features are within
30 µm of one another. Examples are given in Figs. 3 and 4.
7.2.5 Measure and record the number of inclusion particles
according to the principle of near neighbor separation and sized
using the maximum Feret’s diameter that are as follows:
7.2.5.1 Greater than or equal to 30 µm but less than 100 µm
in length,
7.2.5.2 Greater than or equal to 100 µm but less than 150 µm
in length, and
7.2.5.3 Greater than or equal to 150 µm in length.
8. Report
8.1 Report the number of nonmetallic inclusions per
100 mm2 that are as follows:
8.1.1 Greater than or equal to 30 µm but less than 100 µm in
length.
8.1.2 Greater than or equal to 100 µm but less than 150 µm
in length.
8.1.3 Greater than or equal to 150 µm in length.
8.2 The total area examined.
FIG. 3 Example of a spotty oxide inclusion. The maximum Feret’s
diameter is indicated.
 B 796
10. Keywords
10.1 nonmetallic inclusions; powder forged (P/F) steel parts

FIG. 4 Example of a discontinuous sulphide inclusion. The

maximum Feret’s diameter is indicated.

9. Precision and Bias

9.1 The precision and bias that can be expected through the
use of this test method is currently under review by Subcom-
mittee B09.11.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 795 – 93 (Reapproved 2002)e1
Standard Test Method for
Determining the Percentage of Alloyed or Unalloyed Iron
Contamination Present in Powder Forged (P/F) Steel Parts1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 795; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
e1 NOTE—Titles of referenced documents were updated and paragraphs 4.3, 6.2, 7.1, and 8.1.2 were revised editorially in June
2002.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers a metallographic procedure for
determining the percentage of alloyed or unalloyed iron
contamination present in powder forged low-alloy steel parts
and the percentage of alloyed iron contamination in powder-
forged iron and carbon steel parts.
1.2 Property values stated in SI units are the standard.
Conversion factors to inch-pound units may be approximate.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 243 Terminology of Powder Metallurgy2
E 3 Practice for Preparation of Metallographic Specimens3
E 562 Test Method for Determining Volume Fraction by
Systematic Manual Point Count3
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Definitions of powder metallurgy terms
can be found in Terminology B 243. Additional descriptive
information is available in the Related Material Section of Vol
02.05 of the Annual Book of ASTM Standards.
3.2 Description of Term Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 cross product contamination—the unintentional mix-
ing of powders with distinct differences in chemical composi-
tion.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 A section representing the core region of the part is
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B09 on Metal
Powders and Metal Powder Products and is the direct responsibility of Subcom-
mittee B09.11 on Near-Full Density Powder Metallurgy Materials.
Current edition approved July 15, 1993. Published December 1993. Originally
published as B 795 – 88. Last previous edition B 795 – 88.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
taken from the powder forged part and prepared for metallo-
graphic examination.
4.2 The polished and etched sample is examined micro-
scopically at a magnification of 1003 and a systematic point
count made of features with etching characteristics different
from that of the matrix.
4.3 The amount of contaminant is reported as a percentage
to the nearest 0.1 %.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Cross product contamination occurs whenever alloy
steel powders are processed in the same equipment as iron
powders.
5.2 Unalloyed iron particles, because they may not harden
upon heat treatment, are a potential source of soft spots in
low-alloy steel parts.
5.3 Alloyed iron particles, having higher hardenability than
an iron or carbon steel matrix, are a potential source of hard
spots.
5.4 Hard or soft spots may cause problems in service or
machining.
5.5 The results of the tests may be used to qualify parts for
shipment in accordance with guidelines agreed between pur-
chaser and manufacturer.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Equipment for the metallographic preparation of test
specimens.
6.2 A metallographic microscope permitting observation
and measurement at a magnification of 1003.
7. Sampling
7.1 Take a metallographic specimen from the powder-
forged part. The polished surface of the specimen should be not
less than that required to superimpose 2500 grid points at a
magnification of 1003. Multiple sections are permitted in
order to obtain the necessary area for measurement on small
parts.
7.2 The polished surface shall be parallel to the direction of
forging, that is, parallel to the direction of travel of the forging
 B 795
punch, or as specified in the contract or purchase order, and
shall represent an area away from the surface of the part.
8. Procedure
8.1 Preparation of Specimens:
8.1.1 Polishing—In polishing the specimens, it is highly
important that the polished surface be free from artifacts and
debris. It is recommended that the procedures described in
Practice E 3 be followed. Automated grinding and polishing
procedures are recommended.
8.1.2 Etching—Lightly etch the freshly polished specimen
with 2 % nital (2 mL nitric acid, 98 mL ethyl alcohol). Next,
etch the polished and lightly etched specimen by immersion in
a freshly prepared aqueous solution containing 3 g potassium
metabisulfite and 10 g sodium thiosulfate per 100 mL. Rinse
the specimen in running water, then rinse with low residue
alcohol and dry with a blast of dry air.
8.1.2.1 The etching time will depend on alloy type, carbon
content, and microstructure. The greater the alloy content, the
slower the etching rate; the greater the carbon content, the
faster the etching rate.
8.1.2.2 A good contrast is developed between the matrix and
the contaminant because of a combination of etching and
staining. The areas containing the highest alloy content are the
least affected. Unalloyed iron will become darkened in a
low-alloy matrix and low-alloy particles will remain light in an
iron or carbon steel matrix. In a low-alloy matrix, contaminant
particles of another low-alloy powder can be distinguished
from unalloyed iron contamination because the particles etch
differently (see Fig. 1 and Fig. 2).
FIG. 1 Illustration of Iron and Low-Alloy Contaminants in P/F-4650
2
8.2 Examination—Superimpose a grid of between 100 and
250 systematically placed points upon a 1003 magnified
image (that is, a field of view) of the polished and etched
specimen. Count and record the number of grid points falling
upon contaminant particles; if necessary, a separate count may
be kept to distinguish between alloy contamination and unal-
loyed iron contamination in low-alloy steel parts, or, types of
alloy contaminant in iron or carbon steel parts. (See Note 1.)
Counting of randomly selected discrete fields should be con-
tinued until at least 2500 grid points have been superimposed
on the specimen. The total number of points falling on
contaminant particles for all fields counted shall be divided by
the total number of grid points superimposed and multiplied by
100 to determine the area percentage of contamination.
NOTE 1—Any grid point that falls on a contaminant particle boundary
should be counted as one half. To avoid bias, questionable points should
be counted as one half.
9. Report
9.1 Report the area percentage of contaminant to the nearest
0.1 %.
10. Precision and Bias
10.1 The precision and bias that can be expected through the
use of this test method is currently under review by Subcom-
mittee B09.11 on Near Full Density Powder Metallurgy Ma-
terials.
11. Keywords
11.1 cross product contamination; powder forging (P/F);
powder forged (P/F) parts; powder forged (P/F) steels
 B 795

FIG. 2 Illustration of Low-Alloy Contaminant in P/F-1060

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 797 – 93 (Reapproved 2002)e1
Standard Test Method for
Surface Finger Oxide Penetration Depth and Presence of
Interparticle Oxide Networks in Powder Forged (P/F) Steel
Parts1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 797; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
e1 NOTE—Sections 1.1, 3.2, 5.1, 6.2, and 8.3 were editorially updated in January 2003.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers a metallographic method for
determining the maximum depth of surface finger oxide
penetration and the concentration of subsurface interparticle
oxide networks in critical areas of powder forged steel parts.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Document
2.1 ASTM Standards:
E 3 Guide for Preparation of Metallographic Specimens2
3. Terminology
3.1 surface finger oxides—surface finger oxides are surface
oxides that follow prior particle boundaries into a powder
forged part from the surface and cannot be removed by
physical means such as rotary tumbling. Examples of surface
finger oxides are shown in Fig. 1.
3.2 interparticle oxide networks—interparticle oxide net-
works are continuous or discontinuous oxides that follow prior
particle boundaries in powder forged parts. Examples of
interparticle oxide networks are shown in Fig. 2.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 A section representing both surface and subsurface
regions of a critical area is cut from the powder forged part and
mounted for metallographic grinding and polishing.
4.2 For surface finger oxide penetration, the polished and
unetched sample is examined microscopically at a magnifica-
tion of 4003. The maximum depth of penetration of surface
finger oxides is measured.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B09 on Metal
Powders and Metal Powder Products and is the direct responsibility of Subcom-
mittee B09.11on Near Full Density Powder Metallurgy Materials.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2002. Published January 2003. Originally
approved in 1988. Last previous edition approved in 1998 as B 797 – 93 (1998).
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
4.3 For interparticle oxide network concentration, the pol-
ished and unetched sample is examined microscopically at a
magnification of 200 to 4003 to determine the presence of
interparticle oxide networks.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The presence of surface finger oxide penetration and
interparticle oxide networks are two of the properties used to
evaluate powder forged steel parts for proper processing.
Maximum acceptable depths of penetration of surface finger
oxide penetration and acceptable concentrations of subsurface
interparticle oxide networks depend on the component and its
service environment.
5.2 Results of tests may be used to qualify parts for
shipment.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Equipment for the metallographic preparation of test
specimens.
6.2 A metallographic microscope permitting observation
and measurement up to a magnification of 4003.
7. Sampling
7.1 A metallographic specimen shall be removed from the
powder forged part to cover each designated critical area.
Critical areas shall be defined by the applicable part drawing or
the purchaser order. Specimens shall be taken from the powder
forged part in the condition in which it is to be supplied. The
polished surface of the specimens shall be parallel to the
forging direction, that is, parallel to the direction of travel of
the forging punch.
8. Procedure
8.1 Preparation of Specimens—In mounting the specimen
for grinding and polishing, protection from rounding the edge
of the part is essential. In polishing the specimen it is important
that a clean polish be obtained and that edge detail of the part
not be destroyed. Specimens shall be examined in the as-
polished condition, free of the effects of any prior etching (if
used). It is recommended that the procedures described in
 B 797 – 93 (2002)e1

FIG. 1 Example of Surface Finger Oxide Penetration Extending Inward from the Powder Forged Part Surface (Shown more clearly at
high magnification.)

2
 B 797 – 93 (2002)e1

FIG. 2 Example of Interparticle Oxide Networks Within a Powder Forged Part (Shown more clearly at high magnification.)

3
 B 797 – 93 (2002)e1
Methods E 3 be followed. Automated grinding and polishing
procedures are recommended.
8.2 Measurement of Surface Finger Oxide Penetration
Depth—Scan the perimeter of the metallographic specimen,
initially at a magnification of 1003, and carefully examine
each designated critical area at a higher magnification, for
example, 4003. Measure the maximum depth of penetration of
surface finger oxides from the finished part surface in mi-
crometers for each designated critical area.
8.3 Measurement of Interparticle Oxide Network
Concentration—Scan the perimeter of the metallographic
specimen at a magnification of 1003. Carefully examine each
designated critical area at a higher magnification, for example,
200 to 4003. Record the presence of any interparticle oxide
networks in the designated critical areas.
9. Report
9.1 The test report shall include the following information:
9.1.1 Identification of the part and location of the test
specimen,
9.1.2 The maximum depth of penetration of surface finger
oxides from the finished part surface in micrometers for each
designated critical area, and
9.1.3 The presence or lack of interparticle oxide networks in
each designated critical area. If interparticle oxide networks are
present, if possible, prepare a photomicrograph for record
purposes.
10. Precision and Bias
10.1 The precision and bias that can be expected through
use of the test method for determining the maximum depth of
surface finger oxide penetration is currently under review by
Subcommittee B09.11 on Near Full Density Powder Metal-
lurgy Parts.
10.2 The test method for interparticle oxide network con-
centration is a “go-no go” test designed to give a qualitative
estimate. This method will be subject to sample preparation
care and to interpretation.
11. Keywords
11.1 interparticle oxide networks; powder-forged (P/F) steel
parts; surface finger oxides

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 798 – 95 (Reapproved 2000)
Standard Test Method for
Porosity in Gold or Palladium Coatings on Metal Substrates
by Gel-Bulk Electrography1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 798; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers equipment and techniques for
determining porosity in noble metal coatings, particularly
electrodeposits and clad metals used on electrical contacts.
1.2 The test method is designed to show whether the
porosity level is less or greater than some value which by
experience is considered by the user to be acceptable for the
intended application.
1.3 Other porosity testing methods are outlined in Guide
B 765. Detailed critical reviews of porosity testing are also
available.2 Other porosity test methods are B 735, B 741,
B 799, and B 809.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. For specific hazard
statements, see Sections 7 and 8.
1.5 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard. The values in parentheses are for information only.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 374 Terminology Relating to Electroplating3
B 542 Terminology Relating to Electrical Contacts and
Their Use4
B 735 Test Method for Porosity in Gold Coatings on Metal
Substrates by Nitric Acid Vapor4
B 741 Test Methods for Porosity In Gold Coatings On
Metal Substrates By Paper Electrography4
B 765 Guide for Selection of Porosity Tests for Electrode-
posits and Related Metallic Coatings3
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.11 on Electrical Contact Test Methods.
Current edition approved April 15, 1995. Published June 1995. Originally
published as B 798 – 88. Last previous edition B 798 – 90.
2
Nobel, F. J., Ostrow, B. D., and Thompson, D. W., “Porosity Testing of Gold
Deposity,” Plating, Vol 52, 1965, p. 1001, and Krumbein S. J., “Porosity Testing of
Contact Platings,” Proceedings, Connectors and Interconnection Technology Sym-
posium, October 1987, p. 47.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
B 799 Test Method for Porosity in Gold or Palladium
Coatings by Sulfurous Acid/Sulfur-Dioxide Vapor4
B 809 Test Method for Porosity in Metallic Coatings By
Humid Sulfur Vapor (“Flowers-of-Sulfur”)3
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Many terms used in this test method are
defined in Terminology B 542 and terms relating to metallic
coatings are defined in Terminology B 374.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 decorations—those reaction products emanating from
the pores that provide visual contrast with the gel medium.
3.2.2 measurement area (or “significant surface”)—the
surface that is examined for the presence of porosity. The
significant surfaces or measurement areas of the part to be
tested shall be indicated on the drawing of the part or by
provision of suitably marked samples.
3.2.3 Discussion—For specification purposes, the signifi-
cant surfaces or measurement areas are often defined as those
portions of the surface that are essential to the serviceability or
function of the part, such as its contact properties, or which can
be the source of corrosion products or tarnish films that
interfere with the function of the part.
3.2.4 metallic coatings—include platings, claddings, or
other metallic layers applied to the substrate. The coatings can
comprise a single metallic layer or a combination of metallic
layers.
3.2.5 porosity—the presence of any discontinuity, crack, or
hole in the coating that exposes a different underlying metal.
3.2.6 underplate—a metallic coating layer between the
substrate and the topmost layer or layers. The thickness of an
underplate is usually greater that 0.8 µm (30 µin.).
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 This test method is an electrographic technique, “gel-
bulk electrography.” The specimen is made the anode in a cell
containing a solid or semisolid electrolyte of gelatin, conduct-
ing salts, and an indicator. Application of current to this cell
results in the migration of base medal ions through continuous
pores. Reaction of cations with an indicator gives rise to
colored reaction products at pore sites which may be counted
 B 798 – 95 (2000)
through the clear gel. Individual spots are counted with the aid
of a loupe or low power stereomicroscope.
4.2 This test method is suitable for coatings containing
75 % or more of gold on substrates of silver, nickel, copper,
and its alloys, which are commonly used in electrical contacts.
This test method is also suitable for coatings of 95 % or more
of palladium on nickel, copper and its alloys.
4.3 These porosity tests involve corrosion reactions in
which the products delineate defect sites in coatings. Since the
chemistry and properties of these products do not resemble
those found in natural or service environments, these tests are
not recommended for prediction of the electrical performance
of contacts unless correlation is first established with service
experience.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Noble metal coatings, particularly gold or palladium, are
often specified for the contacts of separable electrical connec-
tors and other devices. Electrodeposits are the form of gold or
palladium which is most used on contacts, although gold and
palladium are also employed as clad metal and as weldments
on the contact surface. The intrinsic nobility of gold and to a
certain extent palladium enables them to resist the formation of
insulating films that could interfere with reliable contact
operation.
5.2 In order that the nobility of gold be assured, porosity,
cracks, and other defects in the coating that expose base metal
substrates and underplates must be minimal or absent, except
in those cases where it is feasible to use the contacts in
structures that shield the surface from the environment or
where corrosion inhibiting surface treatments for the deposit
are employed. The level of porosity in the coating that may be
tolerable depends on the severity of the environment to the
underplate or substrate, design factors for the contact device
like the force with which it is mated, circuit parameters, and the
reliability of contact operation that it is necessary to maintain.
Also, when present, the location of pores on the surface is
important. If the pores are few in number or are outside of the
zone of contact of the mating surfaces, their presence can often
be tolerated.
5.3 Methods for determining pores on a contact surface are
most suitable if they enable their precise location and numbers
to be determined. Contact surfaces are often curved or irregular
in shape, and testing methods should be suitable for them. In
addition, the severity of porosity-determining tests may vary
from procedures capable of detecting all porosity to procedures
that detect only gross defects. The test method in this document
is generally regarded as severe.
5.4 The relationship of porosity levels revealed by particular
tests to contact behavior must be made by the user of these tests
through practical experience or judgment. Thus, absence of
porosity in the coating may be a requirement for some
applications, while a few pores in the contact zone may be
acceptable for others.
5.5 This test method is capable of detecting porosity or
other defects in gold or palladium coatings that could partici-
pate in substrate corrosion reactions. In addition, it can be used
2
on contacts having complex geometry such as pin-socket
contacts (although difficulty may be experienced in inspecting
deep recesses).
6. Limitations
6.1 This test is considered destructive in that it reveals the
presence of porosity by contaminating the surface with corro-
sion products and by under-cutting the corrodible metal at pore
sites and at unplated areas. In addition, the surface is coated
with a corrosive gel mixture which is difficult to remove
completely. Any parts exposed to the gel test shall not be
placed in service.
6.2 The gel-bulk procedure is not as sensitive to small pores
and is more complex than porosity tests involving gaseous
corrodants5 (see Test Methods B 735 and B 799). It also
involves more chemicals, preparation, and auxiliary equip-
ment.
6.3 This test is intended to be used for quantitative descrip-
tions of porosity (such as number of pores per unit area or per
contact) only on measurement areas where coatings have pore
densities that are sufficiently low so that the corrosion sites are
well separated and can be readily resolved. As a general
guideline this can be achieved for pore densities up to about
25/cm2.
6.4 For this purpose, the measurement area, or “significant
surface,’’ shall be defined as those portions of the surface that
are essential to the serviceability or function of the part, such
as its contact properties, or which can be the source of
corrosion products or tarnish films that interfere with the
function of the part. When necessary, the significant surfaces
shall be indicated on the drawings of the parts, or by the
provision of suitably marked samples.
6.5 The test applicability to platings of varying thickness is
a function of the quality of the plating.
6.6 The applicability of this test method to localized plat-
ings or claddings with adjacent exposed substrate is limited by
the efficacy of coatings applied to mask the non-noble areas to
prevent gross decoration of the surfaces under test. Users of
this method are required to develop their own techniques for
masking such exposed substrate areas.
7. Apparatus
7.1 Test Vessel may be made of glass, acrylic resin, or other
inert uncolored transparent material. It shall have thin-walled
flat sides, and be of a size appropriate to the sample to be
tested.
7.2 Power Supply, 0 to 1 A and 0 to 10 V dc, an
electronically-regulated, constant-current (65 %) apparatus is
preferred.
7.3 dc Milliammeter and Separate dc Voltmeter.
7.4 Cathode Material in the form of foil or wire made of
platinum or gold is required. The cathode and specimen
(anode) areas shall be approximately the same. Additionally,
gold or platinum wire for cathode and anode are needed for that
5
For example, Clarke, M., “Porosity and Porosity Tests,” ’ in “Properties of
Electrodeposits,” edited by Sard, Leidheiser, and Ogburn, The Electrochemical
Society, 1975, p. 122.
 B 798 – 95 (2000)
portion of the hook-up that is in the reagent solution. It may be
convenient to use small alligator clips to secure the lead wires
to the cathode and anode. These clips must be heavily gold
plated so as to be entirely free of porosity. A variation of this
procedure, suitable for samples having relatively few pores, is
to use a second identical test sample as the cathode. The test
can be run with current first in the forward, then in the reverse
direction so that the porosity in both samples may be deter-
mined. Fig. 1 is a schematic of the test cell setup.
FIG. 1 Schematic of Typical Test-Cell Setup with Anode (Sample)
and Cathode Facing Each Other (Preferred Orientation)
NOTE 1—A commonly-used alternate cell design incorporates the
cathode as part of the cell structure (as shown in Fig. 2). In addition, the
samples may be attached to a common carrier strip or holder, so that only
the sample surfaces need be in the gel.
7.5 Timer capable of indicating seconds. It is convenient to
use a timer switch to control the test current.
7.6 Stereomicroscope having 103 magnification and an
illuminator are required for sample inspection after test. An
eyepiece reticle is recommended for convenience in locating
the contact area or other significant measurement areas.
8. Reagent
8.1 Note that some of the indicating reagents are sensitive to
heat and light, particularly the rubeanic acid (dithio-oxamide).
The indicator solutions should be stored in the dark in
stoppered bottles. For rubeanic acid, do not store for more than
a month, and filter prior to use.
8.2 Food-Grade Gelatine,6—This type is preferred to USP
grade gelatine, because the latter may not give transparent
solutions. A10 % solution is prepared by mixing 9 g of the
6
Knox brand packed by Knox Gelatine, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ 07632 has
been found satisfactory or its equivalent may also be used.
3
FIG. 2 Exploded View of Alternate Cell Design Incorporating
Cathode as Part of Cell Structure
gelatin in 91 mL of distilled or deionized water, and slowly
heating to 60 to 65°C with stirring, until all the gelatine
dissolves.
NOTE 2—If the storage bottle is tightly capped, the plain gelatine
solution may be stored for up to 2 days in a refrigerator and kept at 5 to
10°C, discard it if mold appears on its surface.
9. Safety Hazards
9.1 Reagents identified in Table 1 have the potential to cause
injury or skin discoloring if improperly handled. Good labora-
tory practice including the use of a fume hood and skin and eye
protection should be observed, especially during solution
preparative and the cleaning of the test samples. Proper
precautions in the use of electrical power supplies and electri-
cal connections should also be scrupulously observed.
10. Procedure
10.1 This test is suitable for gold coated on silver, nickel, or
copper and its alloys, and palladium coated on nickel, copper
and its alloys either as underlayers or substrates, in accordance
with the reagents chosen in Table 1.
10.2 Sequence of Operations:
10.2.1 Solution Preparation:
10.2.1.1 Electrolyte.
10.2.1.2 Indicator.
10.2.2 Calculate the current to be used.
10.2.3 Prepare the samples prior to cleaning.
10.2.4 Clean the samples.
10.2.5 Prepare the gel while the samples are cleaning.
Remove from heat when dissolved.
10.2.6 Dry the samples.
10.2.7 Suspend the samples in the test cells.
10.2.8 Prepare the composite gel solution and add to the
cells.
10.2.9 Solidify the gel thoroughly.
 B 798 – 95 (2000)
TABLE 1 Guide to Gel Porosity Testing Solutions
Test for Electrolyte (Aqueous) Indicator Indicating Color Comments
Copper A 4 % sodium carbonate + 1 % so- saturated solution of rubeanic dark olive green also detects nickel, cobalt
dium nitrate acid in ethanol
Copper 4 % sodium carbonate + 1 % so- 7.5 % potassium ferrocyanide in brown -------
dium nitrate water
Nickel A 4 % sodium carbonate + 1 % so- saturated solution of rubeanic blue-blue violet also detects copper, cobalt
dium nitrate acid in ethanol
Nickel 5 % ammonium hydroxide saturated solution of dimethyl- pink -------
glyoxime in ethanol
Silver A, B 0.2 molar nitric acid 1 % glacial acetic + 5 % sodium red solution must be free of halogens
dichromate
B
Silver 0.2 molar nitric acid saturated solution of rhodanine in red-red violet solution must be free of halogens
ethanol
A
Preferred test.
B
Not suitable for palladium overplates.

10.2.10 Set up the equipment and make electrical attach-
ments.
10.2.11 Apply the calculated current.
10.2.11.1 Examine immediately for gross defects.
10.2.11.2 Take readings after the prescribed time period.
10.2.12 Record the results.
10.3 Cleaning—Handle specimens as little as possible, and
only with tweezers, microscope-lens tissue, or clean, soft
cotton gloves. Prior to the test, inspect the samples under 103
magnification for evidence of particulate matter. If present,
such particles shall be removed by blowing them off with
clean, oil-free air. If this is not successful discard the sample.
Then, clean the samples with solvents or solutions that do not
contain chlorinated hydrocarbons, CFS’s or other known
ozone-destroying compounds. The procedure outlined in Note
3 has been found to give satisfactory results for platings with
mild to moderate surface contamination.
NOTE 3—Suggested cleaning procedure:
(1) Keep individual contacts separated if there is a possibility of
damage to the measurement areas during the various cleaning steps.
(2) Clean samples for 5 min in an ultrasonic cleaner which contains a
hot (65–85°C) 2 % aqueous solution of a mildly alkaline (pH 7.5–10)
detergent (such as Micro or Sparkleen).
(3) After ultrasonic cleaning, rinse samples under warm running tap
water for at least 5 s.
(4) Rinse samples ultrasonically for 2 min in fresh deionized water to
remove the last detergent residues.
(5) Immerse in fresh methanol or isopropanol, and ultrasonically
“agitate” for at least 30 s in order to remove the water from the samples.
(6) Remove and dry samples until the alcohol has completely evapo-
rated. If an air blast is used as an aid to drying, the air shall be oil free,
clean, and dry.
(7) Do not touch measurement area of the samples with bare fingers
after cleaning.
(8) Re-inspect samples (under 103 magnification) for particulate
matter on the surfce. If particulates are found, repeat the cleaning steps.
Surface cleanliness is extremely important; contaminants, such as plating
salts, organic films, and metal flakes, may give erroneous indications of
defects, and are unacceptable.
10.4 Secure the specimens to be tested to gold or platinum
lead wires, and suspend in the cell so that their measurement
areas (see 5.4) can be easily seen through the wall of the test
vessel. Place the specimens 13 6 2 mm (0.5 in.) from the
cathode.
NOTE 4—For longitudinal-shaped contacts, such as pins or posts, where
the alternate cell design (Fig. 2) is used the bottom ends or tips of the
contacts should be at a distance from the cathode that is at least 1.5 times
their maximum length in the gel solution. The area of the cathode along
the bottom of the cell shall be no less than the total specimen area in the
solution, and can be up to twice as large. If the cathode area is too small,
there is a risk of excessive hydrogen bubble formation.
10.5 The composite test solution is prepared from the gel
solution, and an indicator and electrolyte chosen from Table 1.
The composite contains by volume, 94.6 % gel solution, 3.4 %
electrolyte solution, and 2 % indicating solution. It is prepared
by melting with gentle stirring, the gelatine solution at 59°C 6
1°C, removing from the heat, and adding while stirring the
premixed electrolyte solution and then the indicating solution.
Stirring should be continued for 2 to 3 min to thoroughly mix
all the components. For consistency, consider the lifespan of
the composite gel solution to be 2 h. Testing of the samples
shall be accomplished within this time period.
10.6 Pour the composite test gel solution into the test vessel,
taking care not to introduce bubbles of air into the solution.
Allow the gel to solidify.
NOTE 5—It is good practice to include with the sample a control
specimen that is known to be porous (such as would be produced by
scratching the coating to expose base metal.) If the control specimen fails
to produce a dense opaque pore indication the test results must be
discounted and the test repeated using freshly prepared reagents.
10.7 Attach the specimen lead to the positive terminal of the
power supply, and the cathode lead to its negative terminal, as
shown in Fig. 1 or Fig. 2.
10.8 Pass the current for 20 s (use a timer) at a current
density of 0.78 ma/cm2 (5 ma/in.2). Current density tolerance is
625 %. The test shall be conducted at 23 6 3°C. During
passage of the current, base metal ions are produced at pores in
the test sample. These ions react with the indicator to produce
colored products in the pore sites.
NOTE 6—If bubbling of the gel should occur (highly unlikely at the low
current density specified), repeat the test with new samples at 20 to 25 %
lower current density.
NOTE 7—In calculating the current, the sample area shall be the total
area of metal that is immersed in the gel, not just the significant surfaces.
10.9 Monitor and record the maximum voltage with the
voltmeter during the application of current. The voltage should
be between 2.0 and 2.5 V. If the voltage exceeds 3 V, the test
should be considered invalid.

4
 B 798 – 95 (2000)
11. Examination
11.1 Do not remove samples from the test vessel. Examine
the measurement areas of the samples through the vessel walls
(at 103 magnification with suitable illumination) immediately
after cessation of current. Note the gross defects during the first
3 min to determine the general location of the largest pore sites.
11.2 Begin actual pore count after 3 min, and complete it
within 20 min of cessation of the current.
11.3 Pore sites show up as colored dots or blooms. The size
of these decorations depends on the total amount of current
passed as well as the size of the defect. Bleeding or diffusion
of the color should be slight during the first 20 min, and
discrete pore sites will be observed if not very close to each
other. Cracks show up as continuous lines.
NOTE 8—Appendix X1 gives a number of guidelines that have been
found useful in examining pore indications from tests that use the rubeanic
acid indicator and the sodium carbonate/sodium nitrate electrolyte (Table
1).
11.4 An alternative enumeration method is to record the
number of contacts with pores (in a sample strip with 10 or
more contacts), as defined in 11.3
12. Precision and Bias
12.1 Precision—The precision of this procedure for five test
runs in one laboratory, for palladium platings 2.2-2.4 µm thick,
was 46 % (as a coefficient of variation where the total number
of pores per run had a mean value of 2.8) and was even higher
in subsequent determinations in other laboratories.
12.2 Bias—The porosity of commercially produced platings
for electrical contacts is a property with potentially large
sample-to-sample variability. 7 Since there is no acceptable
reference material suitable for determining the bias for porosity
testing, bias has not been determined.
13. Keywords
13.1 electrography; gel; gel electrography; gold coatings;
gold platings; palladium coatings; palladium platings; plating;
porosity; porosity testing
7
Krumbein, S. J., and Holden, C. A., Jr., “Porosity Testing of Metallic Coatings,”
in “Testing of Metallic and Inorganic Coatings,” ASTM, STP 947, Harding, W. B.,
and DiBari, G. A., Eds., American Society for Testing and Materials, PA, 1987, p.
193.

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. USEFUL GUIDELINES FOR EXAMINING EXAMPLES

X1.1 The following guidelines are useful in examining
samples (for pore indications) with tests that use the rubeanic
acid indicator and sodium carbonate/sodium nitrate electrolyte
(of Table 1).
X1.1.1 The reaction products give colored blooms whose
major growth takes place during the first 3 min after cessation
of current. Blooms from the edges of narrow samples (for
example, posts) may obscure the measurement area, so the
immediate cursory examination is important to determine pore
sites. A typical site usually shows a dark spot at the center of
a colored cloud.
X1.1.2 The indicator will react with nickel and copper ions,
producing colored blooms. Copper will often show an olive or
gray-green reaction product while nickel will often produce a
blue or blue-violet coloration.
X1.1.3 When a nickel underplate is used over a copper alloy
substrate, two colors may be present. Nickel ions diffuse
farther (away from the pore) and may form a blue to violet haze
around the central olive-green or black central copper pore
indication.
X1.1.4 Under certain conditions, palladium platings may
produce bright red/orange reaction products. These blooms
shall not be counted as pores, unless evidence of nickel or
copper pore indications are also present.
X1.1.5 Very small pores and embedded debris show up as
small colored points or dots at 103 and, shall be recorded
separately as such.
X1.1.6 Cracks show up as continuous lines and shall be
recorded separately as such.
X1.1.7 A hazy black cloud covering the surface without
evidence of dark spots (pore sites) indicates gross defects or
microcracking, and shall be counted as a multiple pore site.
X1.1.8 When plated electrical contacts are tested together as
strips or combs of contacts, the size of a pore indication is most
conveniently noted as a fraction of the width of the contact
surface.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

5
 B 798 – 95 (2000)

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 799 – 95 (Reapproved 2000)
Standard Test Method for
Porosity in Gold and Palladium Coatings by Sulfurous Acid/
Sulfur-Dioxide Vapor 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 799; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers equipment and methods for
determining the porosity of gold and palladium coatings,
particularly electrodeposits and clad metals used on electrical
contacts.
1.2 This test method is designed to show whether the
porosity level is less or greater than some value which by
experience is considered by the user to be acceptable for the
intended application.
1.3 A variety of other porosity testing methods are described
in the literature. 2 , 3 Other porosity test methods are B 735,
B 741, B 798, and B 809. An ASTM Guide to the selection of
porosity tests for electrodeposits and related metallic coatings
is available as Guide B 765.
1.4 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. For specific
hazards, see Section 6.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 374 Terminology Relating to Electroplating 4
B 735 Test Method for Porosity in Gold Coatings on Metal
Substrates by Nitric Acid Vapor 5
B 741 Test Method for Porosity In Gold Coatings on Metal
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.11 on Electrical Contact Test Methods.
Current edition approved April 15, 1995. Published June 1995. Originally
published as B 799 – 88. Last previous edition B 799 – 93.
2
For example see: Nobel, F. J., Ostrow, B. D., and Thompson, D. W.,“ Porosity
Testing of Gold Deposits,” Plating, Vol 52, 1965, p. 1001.
3
S. J. Krumbien, Porosity Testing of Contact Platings, Proceedings, Connectors
and Interconnection Technology Symposium, Oct. 1987, p 47.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
Substrates by Paper Electrography 5
B 765 Guide for Selection of Porosity Tests for Electrode-
posits and Related Metallic Coatings 4
B 798 Test Method for Porosity in Gold or Palladium
Coatings on Metal Substrates by Gel-Bulk Electrography 5
B 809 Test Method for Porosity in Metallic Coatings By
Humid Sulfur Vapor (“Flowers-of-Sulfur”) 4
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Many terms used in this test method are
defined in Terminology B 542 and terms relating to metallic
coatings are defined in Terminology B 374.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 corrosion products—those reaction products emanat-
ing from the pores that protrude from, or are otherwise attached
to, the coating surface after a vapor test exposure.
3.2.2 measurement area (or 88significant surface’’)—the
surface that is examined for the presence of porosity. The
significant surfaces or measurement areas of the part to be
tested shall be indicated on the drawing of the part or by
provision of suitably marked samples.
3.2.3 Discussion—For specification purposes, the signifi-
cant surfaces or measurement areas are often defined as those
portions of the surface that are essential to the serviceability or
function of the part, such as its contact properties, or which can
be the source of corrosion products or tarnish films that
interfere with the function of the part.
3.2.4 metallic coatings—include platings, claddings, or
other metallic layers applied to the substrate. The coatings can
comprise a single metallic layer or a combination of metallic
layers.
3.2.5 Porosity—the presence of any discontinuity, crack, or
hole in the coating that exposes a different underlying metal.
3.2.6 Underplate—a metallic coating layer between the
substrate and the topmost layer or layers. The thickness of an
underplate is usually greater that 0.8 µm (30 µin.).
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 The test method employs concentrated sulfurous acid
(H2SO3), which emits sulfur dioxide (SO2) gas according to the
equilibrium reaction:

H2SO3 5 SO2 1 H 2O
The procedure is similar to one first proposed by Lee and
Ternowski. 6
4.2 Exposure periods may vary, depending upon the degree
of porosity to be revealed. Reaction of the gas with a
corrodable base metal at pore sites produces reaction products
that appear as discrete spots on the gold or palladium surface.
Individual spots are counted with the aid of a loupe or
low-power stereo microscope.
4.3 This test method is suitable for coatings containing
95 % or more of gold or palladium on substrates of copper,
nickel, and their alloys which are commonly used in electrical
contacts.
4.4 This porosity test involves corrosion reactions in which
the products delineate defect sites in coatings. Since the
chemistry and properties of these products may not resemble
those found in natural or service environments this test is not
recommended for prediction of the electrical performance of
contacts unless correlation is first established with service
experience.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Gold coatings are often specified for the contacts of
separable electrical connectors and other devices. Electrode-
posits are the form of gold that is most used on contacts,
although it is also employed as inlay or clad metal and as
weldments on the contact surface. The intrinsic nobility of gold
enables it to resist the formation of insulating oxide films that
could interfere with reliable contact operation.
5.2 Palladium coatings are sometimes specified as alterna-
tives to gold on electrical contacts and similar electrical
component surfaces, both as electrodeposits and as inlay or
clad metal. This test method is particularly suitable for deter-
mining porosity in palladium coatings, since the reactive
atmosphere that is used does not attack the palladium if the
specified test conditions are followed. In contrast, palladium
coatings are attacked by nitric acid (HNO3) and other strong
oxidizing agents, so that Test Method B 735 cannot be used for
determining the porosity in such coatings.
5.3 In order for these coatings to function as intended,
porosity, cracks, and other defects in the coating that expose
base-metal substrates and underplates must be minimal or
absent, except in those cases where it is feasible to use the
contacts in structures that shield the surface from the environ-
ment or where corrosion inhibiting surface treatments for the
deposit are employed. The level of porosity in the coating that
may be tolerable depends on the severity of the environment to
the underplate or substrate, design factors for the contact
device like the force with which it is mated, circuit parameters,
and the reliability of contact operation that it is necessary to
maintain. Also, when present, the location of pores on the
surface is important. If the pores are few in number and are
outside of the zone of contact of the mating surfaces, their
presence can often be tolerated.
6
Lee, F., and Ternowski, M., Proceedings Ninth International Conference on
Electrical Contact Phenomena, Chicago, 1978, p. 215.
B 799
(1) 5.4 Methods for determining pores on a contact surface are
most suitable if they enable their precise location and numbers
to be determined. Contact surfaces are often curved or irregular
in shape, and testing methods should be suitable for them. In
addition, the severity of porosity-determining tests may vary
from procedures capable of detecting all porosity to procedures
that detect only highly porous conditions.
5.5 The present test method is capable of detecting virtually
all porosity or other defects that could participate in corrosion
reactions with the substrate or underplate. The test is rapid,
simple, and inexpensive. In addition, it can be used on contacts
having complex geometry such as pin-socket contacts (al-
though with deep recesses it is preferred that the contact
structures be opened to permit reaction of the sulfur dioxide
with the interior significant surfaces).
5.6 The relationship of porosity levels revealed by particular
tests to contact behavior must be made by the user of these tests
through practical experience or by judgment. Thus, absence of
porosity in the coating may be a requirement for some
applications, while a few pores in the contact zone may be
acceptable for others.
5.7 This test is considered destructive in that it reveals the
presence of porosity by contaminating the surface with corro-
sion products and by undercutting the coating at pore sites or
at the boundaries of the unplated areas. Any parts exposed to
this test shall not be placed in service.
5.8 This test is intended to be used for quantitative descrip-
tions of porosity (such as number of pores per unit area or per
contact) only on coatings that have a pore density sufficiently
low that the corrosion sites are well separated and can be
readily resolved. As a general guideline this can be achieved
for pore densities up to about 100/cm2. Above this value the
tests are useful for the qualitative detection and comparisons of
porosity.
5.9 For these purposes, the measurement area, or significant
surface, shall be defined as those portions of the surface that
are essential to the serviceability or function of the part, such
as its contact properties, or which can be the source of
corrosion products or tarnish films that interfere with the
function of the part. The significant surfaces shall be indicated
on the drawings of the parts, or by the provision of suitably
marked samples.
6. Safety Hazards
6.1 Carry out these test procedures in a clean, working fume
hood. The SO2 gas that is emitted is toxic, corrosive, and
irritating.
6.2 Use caution, however, in actually performing the tests
that the drafts often found in hoods do not cause significant
cooling of the chamber walls which may lead to condensation
of water and acceleration of the test. It is often convenient to
enclose the reaction vessel in a box with a loose-fitting cover,
and to keep the box in a hood during the test.
6.3 Observe normal precautions in handling corrosive acids.
In particular, wear eye protection completely enclosing the
eyes, and make eye wash facilities readily available.
2
 B 799
7. Apparatus
7.1 Test Chamber—May be any convenient size, glass or
acrylic resin vessel having a gastight lid, such as a glass
desiccator of 9 to 10-L capacity. The ratio of chamber volume
in cubic centimeters to the generating solution (sulfurous acid)
surface area in square centimeters shall not exceed 25 6 1.
7.2 Specimen Holders or Supports—May be made of glass,
polytetrafluoroethylene, or other inert materials. It is essential
that the specimens be arranged so as not to impede circulation
of the gas. Specimens shall not be closer than 25 mm (1 in.)
from the wall and 75 mm (3 in.) from the solution surface.
Also, the measurement areas of the specimens shall be at least
12 mm (0.5 in.) from each other.
7.2.1 Do not use a porcelain plate or any other structure that
would cover more than 30 % of the liquid surface cross-
sectional area. This is to insure that movement of air and vapor
within the vessel will not be restricted during the test.
7.3 Stereomicroscope having a 103 magnification shall be
used for pore counting. In addition a movable source of
illumination capable of giving oblique lighting on the specimen
surface is required. It is preferred that a graduated reticle be
fitted into one of the eyepieces of the microscope.
8. Reagents
8.1 Sulfurous Acid (H2SO3),“ analyzed reagent grade”, or
better, preferably in individual sealed 500-mL bottles.
9. Procedure
9.1 Handle specimens as little as possible, and only with
tweezers, microscope-lens tissue, or clean, soft cotton gloves.
Prior to the test, inspect the samples under 103 magnification
for evidence of particulate matter. If present, such particles
shall be removed by blowing them with clean, oil-free air. If
this is not successful discard the sample. Then, clean the
samples with solvents or solutions that do not contain chlori-
nated hydrocarbons, CFC’s or other known ozone-destroying
compounds. The procedure outlined in Note 1 has been found
to give satisfactory results for platings with mild to moderate
surface contamination.
NOTE 1—Suggested cleaning procedure:
(1) Keep individual contacts separated if there is a possibility of
damage to the measurement areas during the various cleaning steps.
(2) Clean samples for 5 min in an ultrasonic cleaner which contains a
hot (65–85°C) 2 % aqueous solution of a mildly alkaline (pH 7.5–10)
detergent (such as Micro or Sparkleen).
(3) After ultrasonic cleaning, rinse samples under warm running tap
water for at least 5 s.
(4) Rinse samples ultrasonically for 2 min in fresh deionized water to
remove the last detergent residues.
(5) Immerse in fresh methanol or isopropanol, and ultrasonically“
agitate” for at least 30 s in order to remove the water from the samples.
(6) Remove and dry samples until the alcohol has completely evapo-
rated. If an air blast is used as an aid to drying, the air shall be oil free,
clean, and dry.
(7) Do not touch measurement area of the samples with bare fingers
after cleaning.
(8) Re-inspect samples (under 103 magnification) for particulate matter
on the surface. If particulates are found, repeat the cleaning steps. Surface
cleanliness is extremely important; contaminants, such as plating salts,
organic films, and metal flakes may give erroneous indications of defects,
and are unacceptable.
3
NOTE 2—Omit the cleaning steps for samples having corrosion-
inhibiting, or lubricant coatings, or both, if it is desired to determine the
efficacy of these coatings in the SO2 atmosphere.
9.2 The test temperature shall be 23 6 3°C, unless other-
wise specified, and the relative humidity in the immediate
vicinity of the test chamber shall be no greater than 60 %. If the
relative humidity is greater than 60 %, do not run the test.
9.3 Carefully add the sulfurous acid (H2SO 3) to the bottom
of the clean and dry test chamber in a fume hood, load the
samples, using suitable fixtures, and replace the lid. The
ambient relative humidity shall be no greater than 60 % during
both the addition of the H2SO3 and the insertion of the samples.
9.4 Expose the samples to the test environment for 2 h for
gold coating thicknesses of 1.25 µm (50 µin.) or greater, 90 min
for gold thicknesses less than 1.25 µm, and 60 min for
palladium coatings.
9.5 Remove the samples at the end of the test period, and
allow them to stabilize at low-humidity under the fume hood
for 10 6 5 min.
9.6 Place samples (preferably with their holding fixture, if
possible) into an air circulating oven, maintained at 125 6 5°C,
for 15 6 5 min, for the purpose of “developing” the pore-
corrosion products for easier examination.
9.7 Discard the sulfurous acid in a safe manner at the end of
each day. It may be re-used during any one day for several
consecutive tests provided the chamber is kept closed between
test runs, and no discoloration or contamination, visible to the
naked eye, is present.
10. Examination
10.1 Count individual pore-corrosion products at 103 mag-
nification, using collimated incandescent illumination at an
oblique angle below 15°. They are delineated by the corrosion
products protruding from the pore sites. The solids may be
transparent, especially in the case of gold or palladium-plated
nickel; exercise great care in counting, particularly for rough or
curved surfaces.
NOTE 3—The following hints may be useful as an aid to counting.
(1) Count only corrosion products that protrude above the surface.
Stains are not considered porosity within the scope of this specification.
(2) Loose contamination that can easily be removed by a gentle air
dusting should not be considered corrosion products.
(3) Move sample around under the light to vary the angle when unsure
of a pore. Burnished gold can give the appearance of black spots.
(4) A corrosion product should be measured and counted when at least
one half of the corrosion product falls within the measurement area.
Unless otherwise specified, corrosion products which initiate outside the
measurement area but fall within it, and which are irregular in shape
should not be counted, see Fig. 1. However, for small measurement areas,
or where the migrating pore-corrosion product covers a significant portion
of this area, the presence of such products should be recorded.
10.2 Pore size shall be defined by the longest diameter of
the corrosion product. Unless otherwise specified, corrosion
products less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) in diameter shall not be
counted. A graduated reticle in the microscope eyepiece is
useful as an aid to counting and sizing.
NOTE 4—A useful sizing technique is to tabulate the pore-corrosion
products in accordance with three size ranges. These are (approximately):
( a) 0.12 mm diameter (0.005 in.) or less, (b) between 0.12 and 0.40 mm
 B 799
FIG. 1 Corrosion Products at Boundaries of Measurement Area
nickel underplate. Round-robin results from a series of four
runs in each laboratory with an SO2 test of greater severity
gave coefficients of variation of less than 20 % in each of three
participating laboratories. However, poorer precision was ob-
tained when the results of the different laboratories were
compared.
11.2 Bias—The porosity of commercially produced contact
platings is a property with potentially large sample-to-sample
variability. 7 Since there is no acceptable reference material
suitable for determining the bias for porosity testing, no
statement on bias is being made.

diameter (0.005 and 0.015 in.), and ( c) greater than 0.40 mm diameter
(0.015 in.).
10.3 The acceptable number, sizes and locations of the pore
corrosion products shall be as specified on the appropriate
drawing or specification, or as agreed upon by the producer and
user.
11. Precision and Bias
11.1 Precision—The precision of this test method is being
investigated with gold-plated electrical contacts having a
12. Keywords
12.1 gold coatings; gold platings; palladium coatings; pal-
ladium platings; plating porosity; porosity testing; pore corro-
sion test; sulfur dioxide test; sulfurous acid/SO2 test
7
Krumbein, S. J., and Holden, C. A., Jr., “Porosity Testing of Metallic Coatings,”
in “Testing of Metallic and Inorganic Coatings,” ASTM STP No. 947, Harding, W.
B., and DiBari, G. A., Eds., ASTM, PA, 1987, p. 193.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 700 – 97 (Reapproved 2002)

Standard Specification for

Electrodeposited Coatings of Silver for Engineering Use1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 700; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope B 343 Practice for Preparation of Nickel for Electroplating

1.1 This specification covers requirements for electrodepos- with Nickel2
ited coatings of silver used for engineering purposes that may B 374 Terminology Relating to Electroplating2
be mat, bright, or semibright and are not less than 98 % silver B 481 Practice for Preparation of Titanium and Titanium
purity. Alloys for Electroplating2
1.2 Coatings of silver covered by this specification are B 482 Practice for Preparation of Tungsten and Tungsten
usually employed for solderable surfaces, electrical contact Alloys for Electroplating2
characteristics, high electrical and thermal conductivity, ther- B 487 Test Method for Measurement of Metal and Oxide
mocompression bonding, wear resistance of load-bearing sur- Coating Thicknesses by Microscopical Examination of a
faces, and spectral reflectivity. Cross Section2
1.3 In the Appendixes important characteristics of elec- B 499 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thick-
trodeposited silver coatings are briefly described which must nesses by the Magnetic Method: Nonmagnetic Coatings on
be considered when used in engineering applications, namely Magnetic Basis Metals2
electrical conductivity (see Appendix X1), silver migration B 504 Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Me-
(see Appendix X2), thickness (see Appendix X3), hardness (see tallic Coatings by the Coulometric Method2
Appendix X4), and atmospheric tarnish (see Appendix X5). B 507 Practice for Design of Articles to be Electroplated on
1.4 The following hazards caveat pertains only to the test Racks2
methods section of this specification: This standard does not B 542 Terminology Relating to Electrical Contacts and
purport to address the safety concerns, if any, associated with Their Use3
its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard to B 567 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thickness
establish appropriate safety and health practices and deter- by the Beta Backscatter Method2
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. B 568 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thickness
by X-Ray Spectrometry2
2. Referenced Documents B 571 Test Methods for Adhesion of Metallic Coatings2
2.1 ASTM Standards: B 578 Test Method for Microhardness of Electroplated
B 183 Practice for Preparation of Low-Carbon Steel for Coatings2
Electroplating2 B 579 Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Tin-
B 242 Practice for Preparation of High-Carbon Steel for Lead Alloy (Solder Plate)2
Electroplating2 B 602 Test Method for Attribute Sampling of Metallic and
B 252 Guide for Preparation of Zinc Alloy Die Castings for Inorganic Coatings2
Electroplating Conversion Coatings2 B 678 Test Method for Solderability of Metallic-Coated
B 253 Guide for Preparation of Aluminum Alloys for Elec- Products2
troplating2 B 697 Guide for Selection of Sampling Plans for Inspection
B 254 Practice for Preparation of and Electroplating on of Electrodeposited Metallic and Inorganic Coatings2
Stainless Steel2 B 762 Method of Variables Sampling of Metallic and Inor-
B 281 Practice for Preparation of Copper and Copper-Base ganic Coatings2
Alloys for Electroplating and Conversion Coatings2 B 849 Specification for Pre-treatments of Iron or Steel for
B 322 Practice for Cleaning Metals Prior to Electroplating2 Reducing the Risk of Hydrogen Embrittlement2
B 850 Guide for Post-Coating Treatments of Steel for Re-
ducing the Risk of Hydrogen Embrittlement2
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on D 3951 Practice for Commercial Packaging4
Metallic and Inorganic Coatings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B08.08.02 on Precious Metal Coatings.
Current edition approved May 10, 1997. Published February 1998. Originally
3
published as B 700 – 81. Last previous edition B 700 – 90. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
2 4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 15.09.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 700 – 97 (2002)
E 1004 Practice for Determining Electrical Conductivity
Using the Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Method 5
F 519 Test Method for Mechanical Hydrogen Embrittle-
ment Evaluation of Plating Processes and Service Environ-
ments 6
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Many of the terms used in this specifica-
tion are defined in Terminologies B 374 or B 542.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 rack-plating—an electrodeposition process in which
articles to be coated are mounted on racks or other fixtures
during the process.
3.2.2 significant surfaces—surfaces that are normally vis-
ible, directly or by reflection, or that are essential to the
serviceability or function of the article or which can be the
source of corrosion products or tarnish films that interfere with
the function or desirable appearances of the article. When
necessary, the significant surfaces shall be indicated on the
drawings of the parts, or by the provisions of suitably marked
samples.
3.2.2.1 Discussion—Variation in the coating thickness from
point-to-point on a coated article is an inherent characteristic of
electroplating processes. Therefore, the coating thickness will
have to exceed the specified value at some points on the
significant surfaces to ensure that the thickness equals or
exceeds the specified value at all points. The average coating
thickness on the article usually will be greater than that
specified; how much greater is largely determined by the shape
of the article (see Practice B 507) and the characteristics of the
electroplating process. Additionally, the average coating thick-
ness on an article will vary from article to article within a
production lot. If all the articles in a production lot are to meet
the thickness requirement, the average coating thickness of a
production lot as a whole will be greater than the average
necessary to ensure that a single article meets requirements.
3.2.3 strike or flash—a thin, typically less than 0.25-µm (10
µ-in.) metallic coating layer between metallic coatings to
improve adhesion.
3.2.4 underplating—an application of a metallic coating
layer between the basis metal or substrate and the topmost
metallic coating or coatings (see 6.3.4).
4. Classification
4.1 Electrodeposited coatings of silver shall be classified for
Type based on minimum purity, Grade whether bright,
semibright, or mat, Class if supplementary surface treatment is
applied, and thickness in micrometers.
4.2 Purity—Specify by Type as follows:
Type 1—99.9 % min
Type 2—99.0 % min
Type 3—98.0 % min
NOTE 1—Metallic or organic brighteners used for grain refinement may
be present in the electrodeposit so long as they do not interfere with the
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 15.03.
2
stated function of the coating and are acceptable to the purchaser (see
Appendix X1).
4.3 Surface Appearance—Specify by Grade in letter code
as follows:
Grade A, Mat—Electrodeposits without luster, obtained
from electroplating solutions operated without the use of
brighteners.
Grade B, Bright—Electrodeposits obtained by the use of
brighteners in the electroplating bath.
Grade C, Bright—Electrodeposits obtained by mechanical
or chemical polishing of Grade A silver coatings.
Grade D, Semibright—Electrodeposits obtained by the use
of addition agents in the electroplating bath.
4.4 Supplementary Surface Treatment— Specify by Class in
letter code as follows:
Class N—A finish that has had no supplementary tarnish
resistant (that is, chromate) treatment (see Appendix X5).
Class S—A finish that has had a supplementary tarnish
resistant (that is, chromate) treatment.
NOTE 2—Class S is not suitable for food service applications.
5. Ordering Information
5.1 To make application of this standard complete, the
purchaser needs to supply the following information to the
seller in the purchase order or other governing document:
5.1.1 Name, designation, and year of issue of this standard.
5.1.2 Type (see 4.2), Grade (see 4.3), Class (see 4.4) and
Thickness (see 6.6 and Appendix X3).
5.1.3 Nature of Substrate—If, for example, it is high
strength steel, the need for stress relief (see 6.3.2.1) and
embrittlement relief (see 6.3.5.1). If it is copper, an undercoat
is needed (see S1.3) for some applications.
5.1.4 Significant Surfaces (see section 3.2.2).
5.1.5 Appearance (see 6.7).
5.1.6 Underplates (see 6.3.4 and S1.3).
5.1.7 Requirements and methods of testing for one or more
of the following: need for and type of test specimens (see 8.1),
thickness (see 6.6, 8.2, and Appendix X3), adhesion (see 6.8
and 8.3), hardness (see 6.10.1 and 8.7), absence of embrittle-
ment (see 8.4), solderability (see 6.9 and 8.5), spectral reflec-
tance (see 6.10.2 and 8.8), or electrical conductivity (see 6.10.3
and 8.9).
5.1.8 Sampling Plans and Quality Assurance (see Section 7
and S1.2).
6. Coating Requirements
6.1 Nature of Coating—The coating essentially shall be
silver, considering the type specified, produced by electrodepo-
sition from aqueous electrolytes.
6.2 Purity of Coating—The coating shall meet the chemical
composition requirements of the specified type as defined in
4.2 and measured as described in 8.6.
6.3 Process:
6.3.1 The basis metal shall be subjected to such cleaning
procedures as are necessary to ensure a surface satisfactory for
subsequent electroplating. Materials used for cleaning shall
 B 700 – 97 (2002)
have no damaging effects on the basis metal resulting in pits,
intergranular attack, stress corrosion cracking, or hydrogen
embrittlement.
NOTE 3—For basis metal preparations, the following appropriate
ASTM standards are recommended: Practices B 183, B 242, B 252,
B 254, B 281, B 322, B 343, B 481, and B 482, and Guide B 253.
6.3.2 Preplating Operations—Electroplating shall be ap-
plied after all basis metal heat treatments and mechanical
operations such as forming, machining, and joining of the
article have been completed.
NOTE 4—Silver deposits may be used to facilitate mechanical opera-
tions such as forming and drawing. In these applications, silver is applied
before such process steps.
6.3.2.1 Stress Relief Treatment—Parts that are made of
steels with ultimate tensile strength of 1000 MPa or over
(hardness of 31 HRC or greater) that have been machined,
ground, cold-formed or cold-straightened subsequent to heat
treatment, may require stress relief heat treatment when speci-
fied by the purchaser, the tensile strength to be supplied by the
purchaser. Specification B 849 may be consulted for a list of
pretreatments that are used widely.
6.3.3 Strike—The final silver coating shall be preceded by a
silver or gold strike for optimum adhesion.
6.3.4 Underplating—A nickel or nickel-alloy intermediate
layer, at least 1 µm thick, shall be applied before the silver
electroplate when the product being plated is made from
copper or copper alloy. Nickel underplatings are also applied
for other reasons.
6.3.5 Post-Plating Procedures:
6.3.5.1 Embrittlement Relief—Parts that are made of steels
with ultimate tensile strength of 100 MPa or over (hardness of
31 HRC or greater), as well as surface-hardened parts, may
require post-coating hydrogen embrittlement relief baking
when specified by the purchaser, the tensile strength to be
supplied by the purchaser. Specification B 850 may be con-
sulted for a list of post-treatments that are used widely.
6.4 Surface Appearance—The coating’s surface finish shall
meet the requirements of the specified grade defined in 4.3.
6.5 Supplementary Post Treatment—The coating shall meet
the requirements of the specified class defined in 4.4.
6.6 Thickness—The silver coating thickness on significant
surfaces shall be at least that specified (see Appendix X3) when
measured as described in 8.2.
6.7 Appearance—Silver electroplated coated articles shall
be covered completely on all surfaces as specified in the
manufacturing document and shall have a uniform appearance
with no visible defects to the extent that the nature of the basis
metal and good commercial practice permit. The requirement
for uniform color or appearance need not apply for subsequent
passivation or other treatments of the silver.
6.7.1 Defects—Defects in the surface of the basis metal
such as scratches, pits, non-conducting inclusions, and roll and
die marks may adversely affect the appearance and perfor-
mance of applied coatings. Such defects that persists in the
finish despite the observance of good metal finishing practices
shall not be cause for rejection.
3
NOTE 5—Coated finishes generally perform better in service when the
substrate over which they are applied is smooth and free from torn metal,
inclusions, pores, and other defects. It is recommended that the specifi-
cations covering the unfinished product provides limits for those defects.
A metal finisher often can remove defects by means of special treatments
such as grinding, polishing, abrasive blasting, chemical treatments, and
electropolishing. However, these are not normal for the treatment steps
preceding application of the finish. When they are desired, they are the
subject of special agreement between the purchaser and the supplier.
6.8 Adhesion—The silver coatings shall be free of blisters
and peeled areas indicating poor adhesion when tested in
accordance with 8.3.
NOTE 6—Some applications may require no separation by any me-
chanical means such as machining or milling through the interface.
6.9 Solderability—The silver plated surfaces shall produce
solder coatings which shall be bright, smooth, and uniform. At
least 95 % of the sample surface shall show good wetting when
tested as described in 8.5.
6.10 Supplementary Requirements:
6.10.1 Hardness—If a hardness requirement is specified, the
hardness of the silver coatings shall conform to that specified
as measured as described in 8.7.
6.10.2 Spectral Reflectance—The spectral reflectance of the
silver coatings, if required, shall conform to that specified
when measured as described in 8.8.
6.10.3 Electrical Conductivity—The electrical conductivity
of the silver coatings, if required, shall conform to that
specified when measured as described in 8.9.
7. Sampling
7.1 A random sample of the size required by Test Method
B 602 or Method B 762 shall be selected from the inspection
lot (see 7.2). The articles in the lot shall be classified as
conforming or nonconforming to each requirement according
to the criteria of the sampling plans in the chosen method.
NOTE 7—Test Method B 602 contains four sampling plans, three for
use with nondestructive test methods; the fourth is for use with destructive
test methods. The three methods for nondestructive tests differ in the
quality level they require of the product. Test Method B 602 requires use
of the plan with the intermediate quality level unless the purchaser
specifies otherwise. It is recommended that the purchaser compare the
plans with his needs and state which plan is to be used. If the plans in Test
Method B 602 do not serve the needs, additional ones are given in Guide
B 697 which provides a large number of plans and also gives guidance in
the choice of a plan. When Guide B 697 is specified, the buyer and seller
need to agree on the plan to be used.
NOTE 8—Method B 762 is a variables sampling plan. Such plans can
only be used when a test yields a measured quantity, such as thickness, and
when the requirements are stated as a numerical unit also such as
thickness. Method B 762 contains several plans for special needs. Buyer
and seller may agree on the plan or plans to be used; if not, Method B 762
identifies the plan to be used.
NOTE 9—When both destructive and nondestructive tests exist for the
measurement of a characteristic, the purchaser needs to state which is to
be used so the proper sampling plan is selected. Whether or not a test is
destructive may not always be clear. A test may destroy the coating but in
a noncritical area. The purchaser needs to state whether the test is to be
considered destructive or nondestructive. The decision is important
because the plans for destructive tests are significantly less able to
discriminate between acceptable and unacceptable lots. This is because
fewer parts are tested.
 B 700 – 97 (2002)
7.2 An inspection lot shall be defined as a collection of
coated articles that are of the same kind, that have been
produced to the same specifications, that have been coated by
a single supplier at one time or approximately the same time
under essentially identical conditions, and that are submitted
for acceptance or rejection as a group.
7.3 If special test specimens are used to represent the coated
articles in a test, the specimens shall be of the nature, size, and
number and shall be processed as required in 8.1.
8. Test Methods
8.1 Special Test Specimens:
8.1.1 Special test specimens are used to represent the coated
articles in a test if the articles are of a shape, size or material
that is not suitable for the test, or if it is preferred not to submit
samples to a destructive test because, for example, they are
expensive or few in number. The permission or requirement to
use special test specimens, their number, the material they are
to be made of, and their size and shape shall be stated by the
purchaser.
8.1.2 The special test specimen shall duplicate those char-
acteristics of the article that influence the property being tested;
and it shall be processed with the article through those process
steps that influence the property.
8.1.3 The special test specimens used to represent an article
in an adhesion, solderability, or appearance test shall be made
of the same material, shall be in the same metallurgical
condition, and shall have the same surface condition as the
articles they represent. They shall be placed in the production
lot of and be processed along with the articles they represent.
8.1.4 Special test specimens used to represent an article in a
coating thickness test shall be introduced into the process at the
point where the coatings are applied and shall be carried
through all the steps that have a bearing on the coating
thickness.
NOTE 10—When special test specimens are used to represent a coated
article in a thickness test, the specimens will not necessarily have the same
thickness and thickness distribution as the article unless the specimens and
the articles are of the same general size and shape. Therefore, before
coated articles may be accepted on the basis of a thickness test performed
on test specimens, the relationship between the thickness on special test
specimens and the thickness on the part needs to be established. The
criterion of acceptance is that the thickness on the specimen corresponds
to the required thickness on the articles.
8.2 Thickness—The coating thickness shall be measured at
locations on significant surfaces where it would be expected to
be a minimum either nondestructively or destructively:
8.2.1 Nondestructive—Measure thickness of silver coatings
by beta backscatter (Test Method B 567), by X-ray spectrom-
etry (Test Method B 568), or by the magnetic method (Test
Method B 499).
8.2.2 Destructive—Measure thickness of silver coatings by
the coulometric technique (Test Method B 504) or by micro-
scopical cross-sectioning procedures (Test Method B 487).
8.3 Adhesion—Determine adhesion qualitatively with one
of the procedures given in Test Methods B 571. Other proce-
4
dures, such as machining milling, or shot peening may prove
more appropriate in special cases.
8.4 Hydrogen Embrittlement Relief— Steel products that are
required as described in 6.3.5.1 to be heat treated to remove
hydrogen embrittlement shall be evaluated as directed by
Method F 519 as a means of evaluating the process, using
special test specimens (see 8.1).
8.5 Solderability—Determine solderability qualitatively by
Test Method B 678.
NOTE 11—Other useful tests may be found in Specification B 579.
8.6 Purity of Coating—Obtain the composition of the silver
coating by determining the impurities (that is silver by differ-
ence) by emission spectroscopy, x-ray fluorescence, atomic
absorption, or other methods capable of determining quantities
of 0.01 mass % or less.
8.7 Hardness—Measure low load microhardness in accor-
dance with Test Method B 578 (see Appendix X4).
8.8 Specular Reflectance—Measure reflectance in the spec-
tral region of 0.60 6 0.05 µm on a coated surface using a
device suitable for determinations at an angle of 45° employing
a narrow acceptance angle (suited for mirror finishes).
8.9 Electrical Conductivity—Measure electrical conductiv-
ity by Test Method E 1004 using separate test specimens.
9. Packaging
9.1 Some packaging materials may emit fumes that can be
deleterious to the appearance or performance, or both, of
electroplated silver surfaces. Useful guidelines for commercial
packaging can be found in Specification D 3951.
10. Special Government Requirements
10.1 The following special requirements shall apply when
the ultimate purchaser is the U.S. Government or an agent of
the U.S. Government.
10.1.1 Sampling—For government acceptance the sampling
plan is to be in accordance with ANSI/ASQC Z1.4.
10.1.2 Quality Assurance:
10.1.2.1 Inspection Responsibility—The producer or sup-
plier shall be responsible for the performance of all inspection
and test requirements specified herein. Except as otherwise
specified in the contract or order, the producer or supplier may
use his own or any other suitable facilities for the performance
of the inspection and test requirements specified herein, unless
disapproved by the purchaser. The purchaser shall have the
right to perform any of the inspections and tests set forth in this
specification where such inspections are deemed necessary to
assure the material conforms to the prescribed requirements.
10.1.3 Undercoats—The silver electroplating shall be ap-
plied over an intermediate coating of nickel or nickel over
copper on steel, zinc, and zinc base alloys. Copper and copper
base alloys require intermediate coatings. Copper alloy basis
metal articles on which a nickel undercoat is not used and other
basis metal whereon a copper undercoat is employed shall not
be used for continuous service in excess of 149°C.
10.1.4 Packaging—Parts plated for the U.S. Government
and Military, including as subcontracts, shall be packaged in
accordance with Practice D 3951.
 B 700 – 97 (2002)
APPENDIXES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. ELECTRICAL RESISTIVITY
X1.1 The electrical resistivity of silver deposits will vary
with the type of silver electrolyte used. The resistivity will be
generally in the range from 0.017 to 0.020 µV·m. Resistivity of
pure silver is 0.0162 µV·m. Sulfur- and selenium-containing
electrolytes yield deposits having resistivity values 10 to 15 %
higher than that of pure silver; those of antimony-brightened
deposits can be substantially higher than that of pure silver.
Periodic reverse current has been reported to yield deposits
X2. SILVER MIGRATION
X2.1 When silver coatings are used as electrical conductors
they may be susceptible to electromigration effects. Silver
migration refers to the electrochemical transport of the metal
from one conductor to another under the influence of an
applied d-c electrical field. It can occur whenever the insulator
separating the polarized (or biased) conductors (as on PC
boards, flexible circuitry, chip carriers, or IC ceramics) has
acquired sufficient moisture to allow electrolytic (ionic) con-
duction to occur.
X2.1.1 In the simplest case, metallic silver on the conductor
with the more positive potential (anode) is oxidized to a more
soluble form. The resulting positively-charged ions then move
under the influence of the field through moisture paths on or in
the insulator toward the more negative conductor (cathode),
where they are reduced back to silver metal (Fig. X2.1).
X2.1.2 In practice, electromigration can produce two sepa-
rate, but not always distinct, phenomena, both of which can
lead to impairment of a circuit’s electrical integrity. These are
silver stainingand filamental or dendritic bridging. Colloidal
silver deposits appear as brownish stains on insulator areas
where migrating silver ions have been chemically or photolyti-
FIG. X2.1 Schematic Diagram of Early Stage of Dendrite Growth
5
with about 1 % higher resistivity than the International An-
nealed Copper Standard versus about 6 % higher than IACS for
deposits produced by direct current alone.7
7
Luce, B. M., and Foulke, D. G., Modern Electroplating, F. A. Lowenheim, ed.,
John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, NY, 1974, pp. 371–372.
cally reduced to metallic silver before they are able to reach the
cathode. Silver dendrites, on the other hand, result from the
fact that the ions tend to deposit at localized sites on the
cathode in the form of needles or spikes. Once these nuclei
have formed, the higher current density at their tips will greatly
increase the probability of further deposition. This shows up as
an accelerated growth outward from the tips in the form of thin
black filaments of silver, extending from the cathode back
toward the positive conductor. In the course of this growth,
branching usually occurs at definite crystallographic angles,
resulting in a characteristic dendritic structure.
X2.1.3 When a filament finally bridges the gap between
polarized conductors, a sudden drop in electrical resistance will
occur. Although the magnitude of the initial resistance drop
will be small (because of the small cross-sectional area of a
single filament), a rapid increase in additional bridges will soon
lower the resistance sufficiently to produce circuit failures.
Bridging also can be produced by colloidal silver deposits,
especially at temperatures above 70°C and on contaminated
surfaces.
X2.1.4 The primary operating parameters that promote
electromigration problems are:
X2.1.4.1 Moisture (that is, high relative humidity),
X2.1.4.2 Contamination on the insulator surface,
X2.1.4.3 Voltage difference between conductors,
X2.1.4.4 Narrow spacing widths between conductors, and
X2.1.4.5 Elevated temperatures coupled with high relative
humidity. The tendency towards electromigration also depends
upon the nature of the insulator material and its surface
condition as well as on the type of silver plating used. All of
these factors are discussed in a 1988 publication.8
8
Krumbein, S. J., IEEE TRANS Components, Hybrids and Manufacturing
Technology, 11, No. 1, Mar. 1988, pp. 5–15.
 B 700 – 97 (2002)

X3. SILVER COATING APPLICATIONS

TABLE X3.1 Thickness

Thickness,
Application
µm
Minimum for short-term shelf life solderability 1
Minimum for contact connectors having limited wear 2.5
Nominal thickness for thermocompression bonding and 5
nominal thickness for domestic hollowware
Medium-quality hollowware, short-life domestic cutlery and 10
flatware, and suggested thickness for thermocompression
bonding and die attachment for semiconductors
Normal hotel flatware and high-quality domestic flatware and 20
hollowware
Applications where very severe wear resistance is required, $40
such as machine bearings and for high-quality flatware

X4. HARDNESS

X4.1 The hardness of unalloyed silver deposits is much
higher than that for annealed wrought silver, probably due to a
fine grain size. Electrolyte composition, operating parameters,
and deposition conditions affect hardness, as well as the
presence of small amounts of organic and inorganic brighteners
and alloying elements.9
9
Safranek, W. H., The Properties of Electrodeposited Metals and Alloys, 2nd.
ed., American Electroplaters and Surface Finishers Society, Orlando, FL, 1986.

X5. SILVER TARNISH

X5.1 Silver readily forms creeping sulfide tarnish films in
sulfur-containing environments. Free sulfur present from cer-
tain rubber compounds and cardboard materials cause growth
of silver sulfide films at rapid rates. Such films create high
electrical contact resistance and decrease solderability of silver
surfaces. Anti-tarnish treatments are helpful though not com-
pletely effective.
X5.2 Anti-tarnish treatments commercially available in-
clude electrolytic processes based on chromates, immersion
processes based on various film-forming organic compounds;
and immersion tinplates. Process parameters and degree of
protection afforded by these various treatments vary widely.
There also are available various packaging materials that
incorporate volatile organic compounds, which provide so-
called vapor barrier protection when in contact or close
proximity to silver surfaces.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 702 – 93 (Reapproved 2004)
Standard Specification for
Copper-Tungsten Electrical Contact Material1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 702; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers electrical contact components
made from copper tungsten by powder metallurgical proce-
dures.
1.2 This specification covers compositions within the cop-
per tungsten system normally specified by users of contacts.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Data Safety Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2
B 328 Test Method for Density, Oil Content, and Intercon-
nected Porosity of Sintered Metal Structural Parts and
Oil-Impregnated Bearings
3. Significance and Use
3.1 Proprietary methods for manufacture of these materials
vary significantly among suppliers and these methods influence
such properties as arc erosion, contact resistance, and tendency
to weld in service. Since the performance of contacts in a
device depends on numerous factors outside the contact itself
(opening speed, closing speed, contact pressure, contact
bounce, environmental variations, assembly technique and
variations, etc.) this specification cannot ensure performance
control in the application. As part of the qualification on initial
samples it is recommended that the user functionally electri-
cally test the materials for all devices applicable to the
material’s use. This specification will provide a means for the
contact manufacturer and contact user to reach agreement on
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.05 on Precious Metals and Electrical Contact Materials.
Current edition approved May 1, 2004. Published May 2004. Originally
approved in 1982. Last previous edition approved in 1993 as B 702 – 93 (1998).
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
the details of material to be supplied for a specified use and
reasonable assurance that future lots will be similar in proper-
ties and microstructure to the initial test or sample contacts
supplied.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for this material under this specification shall
include the following information:
4.1.1 Dimensions (see Section 8),
4.1.2 Chemical composition (see reference tables in Related
Material as possible guideline),
4.1.3 Physical properties (see Section 6 and reference tables
as guideline),
4.1.4 Certification (see Section 11), and
4.1.5 Other features as agreed upon between the vendor and
the user.
5. Chemical Requirements
5.1 The material shall conform to composition limits as
agreed upon between the manufacturer and the user.
5.2 The chemical analysis shall be made in accordance with
the methods prescribed in the newest edition of Annual Book of
ASTM Standards, or by any other approved method agreed
upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
6. Other Properties
6.1 The manufacturer and the purchaser shall agree on
qualification tests for determination of physical properties.
6.2 The tests shall be performed on production parts,
wherever practical or applicable. (Small size contacts do not
lend themselves to accurate conductivity measurement.)
6.3 The tests shall be determined after consideration of the
function of the part.
6.4 The typical properties of five most common types of
copper-tungsten contacts are given in Appendix X1.
7. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
7.1 Permissible variations in dimensions shall be within the
limits specified on drawings describing the contacts and
accompanying the order, or shall be within the limits specified
in the purchase order.
 B 702 – 93 (2004)
8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
8.1 The parts shall be free of defects in material or process-
ing, which would seriously affect their performance.
9. Sampling and Inspection
9.1 Lot—Unless otherwise specified, a lot shall consist of
parts of the same form, and dimensions, made of powders of
the same particle size range and composition, processed under
the same conditions, and submitted for inspection at one time.
9.2 Chemical Analysis—At least one sample for chemical
analysis shall be taken from each lot. A representative sample
of chips may be obtained by milling, drilling, or crushing at
least two pieces with dry tools, without lubrication. In order to
obtain oil-free chips, the parts selected for test shall have the
oil extracted in accordance with Method B 328, if necessary.
9.2.1 These specification limits do not preclude the possible
presence of other unnamed elements, impurities or additives.
Analysis shall be regularly made only for the minor elements
listed in the table. However, if a user knows of elements that
might be detrimental to their application or has other reasons
for requiring analysis for specific elements, then agreement
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. TYPICAL PROPERTY VALUES
X1.1 Scope
X1.1.1 The following information provides guidelines for
users and manufacturers of copper-tungsten contact material.
Typical ranges of chemistry and properties are given for the
range of compositions available. Some manufacturers offer
specific compositions other than those listed. Properties are
influenced by the particle size, shape, and distribution of the
tungsten as well as by the presence of additives or other
manufacturing process variables. The best choice for a given
2
between manufacturer and purchaser for both limits and
methods of analysis should be required for elements not
specified.
9.3 Physical Tests—The manufacturer and the purchaser
shall agree on a representative number of specimens for
physical tests including microstructure.
10. Rejection and Rehearing
10.1 Unless otherwise specified, rejections based on tests
made in accordance with the specification shall be reported to
the manufacturer within 30 days of the receipt of shipment.
11. Certification
11.1 A certification, when requested by the user, based on
the manufacturer’s quality control, that the material conforms
to the requirements of this specification shall be furnished upon
request of the purchaser, provided the request is made at the
time of cost quotation and at the time of order placement.
12. Keywords
12.1 contacts; copper; copper–tungsten; powder metallurgy;
tungsten; tungsten–copper
application should be mutually decided between the purchaser
and the supplier using their mutual experience and application
engineering knowledge.
X1.1.2 With the knowledge that several types of material
are available, care should be taken to ensure that production
lots are the same in all respects as samples and that if a vendor
change is made, noticeable property or performance variables
are possible. See Table X1.1 X1.1.
 B 702 – 93 (2004)
TABLE X1.1 Chemical RequirementsA

Class A Class B Class C Class D Class E

Copper, % 48–52 38–42 28–32 23–27 18–22
Tungsten, % balance balance balance balance balance
Additives (Individual or total), max,% 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Physical Properties B
Class A Class B Class C Class D Class E
Hardness, Rockwell B 69–83 77–90 85–98 89–102 94–106
Density, Mg/m 3 at 96 % theoretical 11.7 12.7 13.7 14.3 15.0
Electrical conductivity, C % IACS 56–64 49–57 44–52 41–48 38–45
Electrical conductivity, D % IACS 38–56 34–49 29–43 27–41 25–37
Note—Hardness and density values cover both types.
Physical Properties E
Class A Class B Class C Class D Class E
Tensile Strength, ksi MPa 50–60 55–65 75–85 85–95 90–100
344–413 379–448 516–585 585–654 620–689
Modulus of Rupture, ksi MPa 75–85 110–120 130–140 140–150 150–160
517–586 758–827 896–965 965–1034 1034–1103
Coefficient of Expansion, in./in.· 7.2 3 10 − 6 6.6 3 10 − 6 5.7 3 10 − 6 5.3 3 10 − 6 4.9 3 10 − 6
°F m/m·K 13 3 10 − 6 11.9 3 10 − 6 10.3 3 10 − 6 9.5 3 10 − 6 8.8 3 10 − 6
A
Analysis is regularly made for the elements for which specific limits are listed. If, however, the presence of“ other” elements is suspected or indicated in the course of
routine analysis, further analysis shall be made to determine that the total of these “other” elements and the listed impurities are not in excess of the total impurities limit.
B
These data do not constitute a part of the specifications. They indicate to the purchaser the properties that may be expected from a given particle size of powder. The
values will vary to some degree with the size of part, configuration of part, composition, and microstructure. Certain specific applications may require modification of these
basic materials. In such case, the properties required are determined by agreement between the purchaser and the supplier.
C
Typical values for infiltrated type.
D
Typical values for liquid phase sintered type.
E
Items that are normally useful for engineering calculations in contact design but are not specified.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 701/B 701M – 00

Standard Specification for

Concentric-Lay-Stranded Self-Damping Aluminum
Conductors, Steel Reinforced (ACSR/SD)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 701/B 701M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers concentric-lay-stranded self-
damping aluminum conductor, steel-reinforced (ACSR/SD)
and its component wires for use as overhead electrical conduc-
tors (Explanatory Note 1 and Note 2).
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound or SI units are to be
regarded separately as standard. Each system shall be used
independently of the other. Combining values from the two
systems may result in non-conformance with the specification.
For conductor sizes designated by AWG or kcmil, the require-
ments in SI units have been numerically converted from
corresponding values stated or derived in inch-pound units. For FIG. 1 Illustrations of Typical ACSR/SD Strandings
conductor sizes designated by SI units only, the requirements
are stated or derived in SI units.
Aluminum Conductors, Coated Steel-Reinforced (ACSR)2
1.2.1 For density, resistivity, and temperature, the values
B 263 Test Method for Determination of Cross-Sectional
stated in SI units are to be regarded as standard.
Area of Stranded Conductors2
NOTE 1—ACSR/SD is designed to control aeolian vibration by integral B 341/B 341M Specification for Aluminum-Coated (Alu-
damping. The conductors consist of a central core of a round steel wire or minized) Steel Core Wire for Aluminum Conductors, Steel
wires surrounded by two layers of trapezoidal aluminum 1350-H19 wires
Reinforced (ACSR/AZ)2
or two layers of trapezoidal aluminum 1350-H19 wires and one layer of
round aluminum 1350-H19 wires (Fig. 1). The trapezoidal-wire layers are B 354 Terminology Relating to Uninsulated Metallic Elec-
separated from each other and from the steel core by two small annular trical Conductors2
gaps that provide the conductors self-damping characteristics. The round B 498/B 498M Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
aluminum wires are in tight layer contact between themselves and the Steel Core Wire for Aluminum Conductors, Steel Rein-
underlying trapezoidal wire layer. Different strandings of the same size of forced (ACSR)2
conductor are identified by type, which is the approximate ratio of steel B 502 Specification for Aluminum-Clad Steel Core Wire for
area to aluminum area, expressed in percent (Table 1 and Table 2).
Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-Clad Steel Reinforced2
NOTE 2—The aluminum and temper designations conform to ANSI
Standard H 35.1. Aluminum 1350 corresponds to UNS A91350 in B 549 Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Alumi-
accordance with Practice E 527. num Conductors, Aluminum-Clad Steel Reinforced
(ACSR/AW)2
2. Referenced Documents B 606 Specification for High-Strength Zinc-Coated (Galva-
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date nized) Steel Core Wire for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the Conductors, Steel Reinforced2
extent referenced herein. B 802/B 802M Specification for Zinc-5 % Aluminum-
2.2 ASTM Standards: Mischmetal Alloy-Coated Steel Core Wire for Aluminum
B 230/B 230M Specification for Aluminum 1350-H19 Wire Conductors, Steel Reinforced (ACSR)2
for Electrical Purposes2 B 803 Specification for High-Strength Zinc-5 %
B 232/B 232M Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy-Coated Steel Core Wire for
Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Conductors, Steel Rein-
forced2
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B01 on E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Electrical Conductors and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B01.07 on
Conductors of Light Metals.
Determine Conformance with Specifications3
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2000. Published December 2000. Originally
published as B 701 – 81. Last previous edition B 701 – 96.
2 3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 701/B 701M
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)4
2.3 ANSI Documents:
ANSI H35.1 American National Standard Alloy and Tem-
per Designation Systems for Aluminum5
2.4 NIST Documents:
NBS Handbook 100 —Copper Wire Tables of the National
Bureau of Standards6
2.5 Aluminum Association Documents:
Publication 50, Code Words for Overhead Aluminum Elec-
trical Conductors7
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 ACSR/SD covered by this specification has five types
of coated core wire and one type of aluminum-clad core wire
which are designated by abbreviations as follows (Explanatory
Note 2):
3.1.1.1 ACSR/SD/AW—ACSR/SD using aluminum-clad
steel wire (Specification B 502).
3.1.1.2 ACSR/SD/AZ—ACSR/SD using aluminum-coated
(aluminized) steel wire (Specification B 341/B 341M).
3.1.1.3 ACSR/SD/GA—ACSR/SD using Class A zinc-
coated steel wire (Specification B 498/B 498M).
3.1.1.4 ACSR/SD/GB—ACSR/SD using Class B zinc-
coated steel wire (Specification B 498/B 498M).
3.1.1.5 ACSR/SD/GC—ACSR/SD using Class C zinc-
coated steel wire (Specification B 498/B 498M).
3.1.1.6 ACSR/SD/HS—ACSR/SD using extra highstrength
steel wire (Specification B 606).
3.1.1.7 ACSR/SD/MA—ACSR/SD using Class A zinc-5 %
aluminum-mischmetal alloy-coated steel core wire (Specifica-
tion B 802/B 802M).
3.1.1.8 ACSR/SD/MB—ACSR/SD using Class B zinc-5 %
aluminum-mischmetal alloy-coated steel core wire (Specifica-
tion B 802/B 802M).
3.1.1.9 ACSR/SD/MC—ACSR/SD using Class V zinc-5 %
aluminum-mischmetal alloy-coated steel core wire (Specifica-
tion B 802/B 802M).
3.1.1.10 ACSR/SD/MS—ACSR/SD using high-strength
zinc-5 % Aluminum-mischmetal alloy-coated steel core wire
(Specification B 803).
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information:
4.1.1 Quantity of each size and type (Note 1),
4.1.2 Conductor size: kcmil area,
4.1.3 Conductor type and number of wires, aluminum and
steel (Table 1),
4.1.4 Type of steel core wire and if zinc or Zn-5 % Al-MM
alloy coated, area density (Classes A, B, and C) of coating (see
5.2),
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
5
Available from American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd St., 13th
Floor, New York, NY 10036.
6
Available from National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST),
Gaithersburg, MD 20899.
7
Available from Aluminum Association Inc., 900 19th Street, NW, Suite 300,
Washington, DC 20006.
2
4.1.5 Special tension test, if required (see 9.2),
4.1.6 Place of inspection (Section 15),
4.1.7 Package size (see 16.1),
4.1.8 Special package marking, if required (Section 17), and
4.1.9 Heavy wood lagging, if required (see 16.3).
5. Requirement For Wires
5.1 Before stranding, the round and trapezoidal aluminum
wires shall conform to the requirements of Specification B 230
except for shape and diameter tolerance of the trapezoidal
wires. The tensile strength and elongation requirements of
trapezoidal wires shall be the same as for round wires of equal
area. The area tolerances shall be such that the finished
conductor conforms to Section 12.
5.2 Before stranding, the steel core wire shall meet the
requirements of Specifications B 341/B 341M, B 498/B 498M,
B 502, B 606, B 802/B 802M, or B 803, whichever is appli-
cable.
6. Joints
6.1 Electric-butt welds, electric-butt, cold-upset welds, or
cold-pressure welds may be made in the individual aluminum
wires during the stranding process. No weld shall occur within
50 ft. (15 m) of any other weld in the completed conductor
(Explanatory Note 2).
6.2 There shall be no joints made in the finished steel wires.
7. Lay
7.1 The nominal lay factors for the trapezoidal aluminum
wires are shown in Table 1 (Explanatory Note 1).
7.2 The lay factor for the round aluminum wires shall be not
less than 10 nor more than 13.
7.3 The lay factor for the 6-wire layer of 7 and 19-wire steel
cores shall be not less than 18 nor more than 30.
7.4 The lay factor for the 12-wire layer of 19-wire steel
cores shall be no less than 16 nor more than 24.
7.5 The direction of lay of the outside layer of aluminum
wires shall be right-hand.
7.6 The direction of lay of the aluminum and steel wires
shall be reversed in successive layers.
7.7 For the purpose of this specification the lay factor is the
length of lay of a given layer divided by its outside diameter.
8. Construction
8.1 The nominal aluminum cross-sectional area, type,
stranding, and equivalent wire diameters shall be as shown in
Table 1 (Explanatory Note 1).
8.2 The smaller sizes of ACSR/SD consist of a steel core, an
inner gap surrounded by a layer of trapezoidal aluminum wires
(called the inner layer), and an outer gap surrounded by a
second layer of trapezoidal aluminum wire (called the outer
layer). The larger sizes of ACSR/SD consist of a steel core, an
inner gap surrounded by a layer of trapezoidal aluminum wires
(called the inner layer), an outer gap surrounded by a layer of
trapezoidal aluminum wires (called the middle layer), and one
of round aluminum wires (called the outer layer) fitting tightly
over the middle layer. The diameter and number of steel core
wires, the number and equivalent round wire diameters of the
trapezoidal aluminum wires, and the number and diameter of
the round aluminum wires shall be as shown in Table 1.
 B 701/B 701M
8.3 All conductor gaps shall be measured radially. The tolerance of both the inner and outer gaps shall be plus 0.000
nominal thickness of the gap is 0.030 in. (0.75 mm). The in. (0.00 mm) and minus 0.010 in. (0.25 mm).

TABLE 1 Construction Requirements of Aluminum Conductors, Self Damping, Concentric-Lay-Stranded, Steel-Reinforced

Stranding Number of Wires and Diameter, in.A Nominal

Nominal
Alumi- Rated
Conductor Size Aluminum Steel C Mass per Outside
num Strength,
1000 ft, lb Diameter,
Lay kipA,B
kcmil TypeD Code WordE Round TrapezoidalF Round in.
Factor
2156 8 Bluebird 10 3 0.2179 19 3 0.0961 14.5 2504 60.7 1.716
15 3 0.2184 12.1
21 3 0.2145 11.0
1780 8 Chukar 9 3 0.2041 19 3 0.0874 14.5 2068 51.1 1.565
13 3 0.2150 12.0
21 3 0.1957 11.0
1780 5 Smew 8 3 0.2171 7 3 0.1144 16.0 1921 43.6 1.531
14 3 0.2128 12.5
21 3 0.1914 11.5
1590 13 Falcon 10 3 0.1891 19 3 0.1030 13.5 2039 55.1 1.521
14 3 0.1977 11.7
24 3 0.1690 11.5
1590 7 Lapwing 8 3 0.2059 7 3 0.1253 15.9 1791 42.6 1.468
12 3 0.2130 12.8
21 3 0.1835 11.5
1590 5 Ratite 8 3 0.2095 7 3 0.1083 15.4 1715 39.1 1.447
13 3 0.2143 12.5
23 3 0.1669 11.5
1431 13 Plover 10 3 0.1792 19 3 0.0977 13.5 1835 49.6 1.448
14 3 0.1868 11.7
24 3 0.1609 11.5
1431 7 Bobolink 8 3 0.1946 7 3 0.1189 15.1 1612 38.9 1.398
12 3 0.2015 12.2
21 3 0.1747 11.5
1431 5 Popinjay 8 3 0.1936 7 3 0.1025 16.0 1544 35.3 1.381
13 3 0.1972 12.5
21 3 0.1726 11.5
1351.5 13 Martin 11 3 0.1604 19 3 0.0949 14.7 1733 46.8 1.417
15 3 0.1652 12.8
21 3 0.1772 11.5
1351.5 10 Frigate 9 3 0.1786 7 3 0.1377 14.5 1629 41.7 1.389
14 3 0.1757 12.2
21 3 0.1735 11.0
1351.5 7 Dipper 8 3 0.1890 7 3 0.1155 15.2 1522 36.7 1.361
12 3 0.1954 12.2
21 3 0.1701 11.0
1351.5 5 Ringdove 8 3 0.1946 7 3 0.0997 16.0 1458 33.4 1.344
12 3 0.1949 12.8
21 3 0.1680 11.5
1272 13 Pheasant 11 3 0.1552 19 3 0.0921 14.7 1631 44.1 1.378
15 3 0.1599 12.8
21 3 0.1723 11.5
1272 7 Bittern 8 3 0.1829 7 3 0.1121 14.5 1433 34.6 1.323
12 3 0.1894 12.3
21 3 0.1653 11.5
1272 5 Scissortail 7 3 0.1929 7 3 0.0967 15.7 1372 31.4 1.305
11 3 0.2029 12.3
21 3 0.1631 11.5
1192.5 13 Grackle 10 3 0.2147 19 3 0.0892 14.2 1526 41.9 1.274
16 3 0.2138 11.5
1192.5 7 Bunting 8 3 0.1768 7 3 0.1085 15.1 1343 32.4 1.284
12 3 0.1831 12.2
21 3 0.1604 11.5
1192.5 5 Oxbird 7 3 0.1868 7 3 0.0936 15.7 1286 29.5 1.266
11 3 0.1960 12.3
21 3 0.1582 11.5
1113 13 Finch 9 3 0.2188 19 3 0.0862 14.2 1424 39.1 1.233
15 3 0.2133 11.5
1113 7 Bluejay 8 3 0.1705 7 3 0.1049 15.9 1254 30.3 1.242
12 3 0.1765 12.8
21 3 0.1553 11.5

1113 5 Avocet 7 3 0.1818 7 3 0.0904 16.0 1200 27.5 1.226

12 3 0.1798 12.4
21 3 0.1533 11.5

3
 B 701/B 701M

TABLE 1 Continued
Stranding Number of Wires and Diameter, in.A Nominal
Nominal
Alumi- Rated
Conductor Size Aluminum SteelC Mass per Outside
num Strength,
1000 ft, lb Diameter,
Lay kipA,B
kcmil TypeD Code WordE Round TrapezoidalF Round in.
Factor
1033.5 13 Curlew 9 3 0.2106 7 3 0.1383 14.2 1329 36.3 1.191
14 3 0.2129 11.5
1033.5 7 Ortolan 8 3 0.2168 7 3 0.1010 15.2 1161 28.1 1.145
14 3 0.2167 11.5
1033.5 5 Snowbird 7 3 0.1746 7 3 0.871 16.0 1115 25.9 1.185
12 3 0.1731 12.4
21 3 0.1481 11.5
954 13 Cardinal 8 3 0.2147 7 3 0.1329 14.2 1227 33.5 1.147
13 3 0.2122 11.5
954 7 Rail 8 3 0.2080 7 3 0.0971 15.2 1073 26.1 1.103
13 3 0.2163 11.5
954 5 Phoenix 7 3 0.2196 7 3 0.0836 15.6 1027 23.7 1.088
13 3 0.2178 11.5
795 16 Drake 9 3 0.1865 7 3 0.1360 13.9 1093 31.8 1.077
13 3 0.1926 11.5
795 13 Condor 8 3 0.1957 7 3 0.1213 14.2 1023 28.2 1.055
12 3 0.2018 11.5
795 10 Puffin 7 3 0.2067 7 3 0.1056 14.7 956 25.1 1.034
12 3 0.2033 11.5
795 7 Tern 7 3 0.2034 7 3 0.0886 15.2 893 21.9 1.013
11 3 0.2144 11.5
795 5 Macaw 6 3 0.2167 7 3 0.0764 15.6 856 19.8 0.999
11 3 0.2160 11.5
636 16 Grosbeak 9 3 0.1666 7 3 0.1216 13.9 874 25.4 0.975
13 3 0.1723 11.5
636 13 Rook 8 3 0.1749 7 3 0.1085 14.3 818 22.9 0.955
12 3 0.1806 11.5
636 10 Goldfinch 7 3 0.1848 7 3 0.0945 14.7 765 20.1 0.935
12 3 0.1819 11.5
636 7 Killdeer 7 3 0.1815 7 3 0.0793 15.2 715 17.7 0.917
12 3 0.1838 11.5
636 5 Pipit 6 3 0.1938 7 3 0.0684 15.8 684 16.1 0.903
11 3 0.1932 11.5
556.5 16 Dove 9 3 0.1557 7 3 0.1138 14.0 765 22.6 0.919
13 3 0.1613 11.5
556.5 13 Parakeet 8 3 0.1637 7 3 0.1015 14.3 716 20.0 0.901
13 3 0.1662 11.5
556.5 10 Sapsucker 7 3 0.1728 7 3 0.0884 14.7 669 17.8 0.882
12 3 0.1702 11.5
556.5 7 Sunbird 7 3 0.1707 7 3 0.0741 15.2 625 15.5 0.863
11 3 0.1790 11.5
556.5 5 Blackbird 6 3 0.1820 1 3 0.1692 15.8 599 13.6 0.843
10 3 0.1892 11.5
477 16 Hawk 9 3 0.1438 7 3 0.1053 14.0 655.8 19.5 0.860
13 3 0.1496 11.5
477 13 Flicker 8 3 0.1515 7 3 0.0940 14.4 613.5 17.2 0.843
13 3 0.1502 11.5
477 10 Toucan 7 3 0.1599 7 3 0.0818 14.8 573.4 15.3 0.824
12 3 0.1576 11.5
477 7 Jackdaw 7 3 0.1577 7 3 0.0686 15.2 535.8 13.3 0.808
12 3 0.1589 11.5
477 5 Kestrel 6 3 0.1656 1 3 0.1566 16.0 513.3 11.7 0.787
10 3 0.1768 11.5
397.5 16 Ibis 9 3 0.1278 7 3 0.0961 14.2 546.5 16.4 0.771
14 3 0.1338 11.5
397.5 10 Stork 7 3 0.1424 7 3 0.0747 15.0 477.9 12.9 0.750
12 3 0.1459 11.5
397.5 7 Longspur 6 3 0.1501 1 3 0.1657 15.8 446.1 10.6 0.725
11 3 0.1544 11.5
397.5 5 Erne 6 3 0.1558 1 3 0.1430 15.6 427.7 9.74 0.717
10 3 0.1587 11.5
336.4 16 Linnet 10 3 0.1041 7 3 0.0884 14.7 462.4 14.3 0.716
16 3 0.1194 11.5
336.4 10 Woodcock 8 3 0.1215 7 3 0.0687 15.1 404.5 11.0 0.688
14 3 0.1249 11.5
336.4 7 Hummingbird 6 3 0.1406 1 3 0.1525 15.6 377.7 9.13 0.664
11 3 0.1407 11.5
336.4 5 Cowbird 6 3 0.1416 1 3 0.1315 15.9 361.9 8.5 0.667
10 3 0.1470 11.5
266.8 16 Partridge 10 3 0.0881 7 3 0.0788 15.0 367.0 11.35 0.645
12 3 0.1256 11.5

4
 B 701/B 701M

TABLE 1 Continued
Stranding Number of Wires and Diameter, in.A Nominal
Nominal
Alumi- Rated
Conductor Size Aluminum SteelC Mass per Outside
num Strength,
1000 ft, lb Diameter,
Lay kipA,B
kcmil TypeD Code WordE Round TrapezoidalF Round in.
Factor
266.8 10 Spoonbill 8 3 0.0978 1 3 0.1619 16.0 320.0 8.45 0.610
11 3 0.1315 11.3
266.8 7 Eider 7 3 0.1080 1 3 0.1358 16.0 299.4 7.61 0.601
13 3 0.1193 11.2
266.8 5 Titmouse 6 3 0.1183 1 3 0.1171 16.0 286.9 6.92 0.593
12 3 0.1234 11.1
A
Conversion Factors:
1 kcmil = 0.5067 mm21 in. = 25.4 mm1 kip = 1000 lbf = 4.448 kN.
B
Rated strengths of complete conductors are calculated in accordance with 9.1 and with Class A zinc-coated steel core wire in accordance with Specification
B 498/B 498M.
C
Lay factors for steel core are the same as for equivalent stranding of conventional ACSR.
D
The type number is the approximate ratio of the steel to aluminum area in percent.
E
Code words shown in this column are obtained from, “Publication 50, Code Words for Overhead Aluminum Electrical Conductors”, by the Aluminum Association. They
are provided here for information only.
F
Wire size indicates equal area round wire diameter.

8.4 Tests to determine the actual diameter of the conductor TABLE 3 Rating Factors
are not required by this specification but shall be made if Number of Layers
Rating Factor,
agreed upon between the manufacturer and purchaser at the %
No. of
time of placing the order. When measurements of the diameter Aluminum Steel Steel
Wires
are made, these shall be made in the manufacturer’s premises Round
Trape-
Round
Alumi-
Steel
during fabrication and at the central point between the final zoidal num
A
closing die of the strander and the capstan when the conductor ... 2 1 95 96
... 2 1 7 95 96
is under tension. When so measured the maximum difference in ... 2 2 19 95 93
mean diameter from the nominal diameter shall be 1 % 1 2 1 7 93 96
(measured in the transverse plane), and the maximum differ- 1 2 2 19 93 93
ence in diameter at any transverse section shall be not greater A
Central steel wire only; the 96 % rating factor is applied to the single steel wire
than 3 %. core as a factor of safety in the event the steel wire contains a weld (made prior to
drawing).

TABLE 2 Comparison of ACSR/SD with Equivalent Stranding of 3, of the sum of the strengths of the steel wires calculated from
ACSRA their specified nominal wire diameter and the appropriate
ACSR/SD Type Conventional ACSR specified minimum stress at 1 % extension given in Specifica-
NumberB StrandingC tions B 341/B 341M, B 498/B 498M, B 502, B 606, B 802/
5 42/7 B 802M, or B 803, whichever is applicable (Explanatory Note
7 45/7
8 84/19
2).
10 22/7 9.1.1 The rated strengths of conductors calculated in accor-
13 54/7 dance with 9.1 and 9.3, using Class A zinc-coated steel wires in
13 54/19
13 24/7
accordance with Specification B 498/B 498M, are listed in
16 26/7 Table 1.
A
The equivalent stranding is that stranding of conventional ACSR that has the 9.2 Routine production testing after stranding is not re-
same area of aluminum and steel as a given ACSR/SD type. quired. However, when such tests are requested by the pur-
B
ACSR/SD type number is the approximate ratio of the steel area to the
aluminum area in %. chaser and agreed to by the manufacturer at the time of
C
See Specifications B 232/B 232M and B 549. ordering (or made for other reasons) aluminum wires removed
9. Strength of Conductor from the completed conductor shall have tensile strengths of
not less than 95 % of the minimum tensile strength specified
9.1 The rated strength of a complete conductor, as shown in for the wire before stranding. The electrical resistivity shall
Table 1, shall be taken as the aggregate strength of the meet the minimum resistivity specified for wire before strand-
aluminum and steel components calculated as follows. The ing. Elongation tests may be made for information purposes
strength contribution of the aluminum 1350-H19 wires shall be only and no minimum values are assigned (Explanatory Note
taken as the percentage indicated in Table 3, in accordance with 3). The frequency of these tests shall be decided upon between
the number of aluminum layers, of the sum of the wire the purchaser and the manufacturer.
strengths calculated from the specified diameter of the round 9.3 Rated strength and breaking strength values shall be
wires and from the diameters of round wires having the same rounded to three significant figures in the final value only, in
area as the trapezoidal wires shown in Table 1, and the accordance with Practice E 29.
appropriate minimum average tensile strength given in Speci-
fication B 230/B 230M. The strength contribution of the steel 10. Density
core wires shall be taken as the percentage, indicated in Table 10.1 For the purpose of calculating mass per unit length,

5
 B 701/B 701M
cross-sections, etc., the density of aluminum shall be taken as 13. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
2705 kg/m 3 (0.0975 lb/in.3) at 20°C (Explanatory Note 4). 13.1 The conductor shall be clean and free of imperfections
10.2 For the purpose of calculating mass per unit length, not consistent with good commercial practice.
cross-sections, etc., the density of galvanized or aluminized
steel wire shall be taken as 7780 kg/m3 (0.2810 lb/in.3) at 14. Mechanical and Electrical Tests
20°C. 14.1 Tests for mechanical and electrical properties of alu-
10.3 For the purpose of calculating mass per unit length, minum wires shall be made before stranding (Explanatory Note
cross-sections, etc., the density of aluminum-clad steel wire 5).
shall be taken as 6590 kg/m3 (0.2381 lb/in.3) at 20°C. 14.2 Tests for the properties of the steel core wires shall be
made before stranding (Explanatory Note 6).
11. Mass per Unit Length and Electrical Resistance 14.3 Measurement of gap dimensions specified in 8.3 shall
11.1 The mass per unit length and electrical resistance of a be made during fabrication of the conductor. These measure-
unit length of stranded conductor are a function of the length of ments, as a minimum, shall be made after each new production
lay. The approximate mass per unit length and electrical setup and at least once for each 500 000 ft (150 000 m) of
resistance of a stranded conductor may be determined using the production unless otherwise agreed upon between the manu-
standard increments shown in Table 4. When greater accuracy facturer and the purchaser at the time of placing the order
is desired, the increment based on the actual lay of the (Explanatory Note 7).
conductor may be calculated (Explanatory Note 5). 15. Inspection
11.2 In the calculation of the electrical resistance of a
completed conductor, the resistivity of zinc-coated or 15.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contact or purchase
aluminum-coated steel core wires shall be taken as 0.19157 V order, the manufacturer shall be responsible for the perfor-
mm2/m at 20°C (68°F) and the resistivity of aluminum-clad mance of all inspection and test requirements specified.
steel core wires shall be taken as 0.0848 V mm2/m at 20°C. 15.2 All inspections and tests shall be made at the place of
These are typical values and are not guaranteed. manufacture unless otherwise especially agreed upon between
the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of the purchase.
12. Variations in Area 15.3 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent-
ing the purchaser all reasonable manufacturer’s facilities to
12.1 The area of cross-section of the aluminum wires of the satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
conductor shall be not less than 98 % of the area specified. The with this specification.
area of each wire shall be determined by Test Method B 263. In
applying this method, the increment in area density resulting 16. Packaging and Package Marking
from stranding may be the applicable value specified in Table 16.1 Package sizes and kind of package, reels, etc. shall be
4, or it may be calculated from the measured dimensions of the agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
sample under test. In case of questions regarding area compli- 16.2 There shall be only one length of conductor on a reel.
ance, the actual area density increment due to stranding shall 16.3 The conductors shall be protected against damage in
be calculated. ordinary handling and shipping. If heavy wood lagging is
required, it shall be specified by the purchaser at the time of
placing the order.
TABLE 4 Standard Increments Due to Stranding
16.4 The net linear density, length, size, kind of conductor,
Increment (Increase),%
conductor type, stranding, type of steel coating or cladding,
Stranding of ACSR/SD Mass per Unit Length class of zinc or Zn-5 % Al-MM alloy coating (if used) and any
and Electrical
Resistance other necessary identification shall be marked on a tag attached
Type No. Steel Aluminum Steel
to the conductor inside the package. This same information,
together with the purchase order number, the manufacturer’s
Two layer designs
5 1 2.1 0 serial number (if any), and all shipping marks and other
5 7 2.1 0.4 information required by the purchaser shall appear on the
7 1 2.1 0 outside of the package.
7 7 2.1 0.4
10 1 2.0 0 17. Keywords
10 7 2.25 0.4
13 7 2.3 0.4 17.1 aluminum electrical conductors; concentric-lay
13 19 2.3 0.6 stranded aluminum conductors; concentric-lay stranded alumi-
16 7 2.35 0.4
Three layer designs num conductors, steel-reinforced; concentric-lay stranded self-
5 7 2.35 0.4 damping aluminum conductors, steel reinforced; electrical
7 7 2.4 0.4 conductors; electrical conductors—aluminum; self-damping
8 19 2.6 0.6
13 19 2.65 0.6 conductors; steel reinforced stranded aluminum conductors;
stranded aluminum conductors

6
 B 701/B 701M
EXPLANATORY NOTES

NOTE 1—In this specification only concentric-lay-stranded self- mind 5 =1 1 ~9.8696/n2!

damping aluminum conductors, steel-reinforced, are specifically desig-
nated. Conductor constructions not included in this specification should be
agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser when placing the
order.
NOTE 2—For definitions of terms relating to conductors, refer to
Terminology B 354.
NOTE 3—The behavior of properly spaced joints in aluminum wires in
stranded conductors is related to both their tensile strength and elongation.
Because of its higher elongation properties, the lower-strength electric-
butt weld gives equivalent overall performance to that of a cold-pressure
weld or an electric-butt, cold-upset weld in stranded conductors.
NOTE 4—The lay factor with respect to the outside diameter of a layer
of wires varies for different layers and for different diameters of
conductor, being larger for the inside layers than for the outside layer.
NOTE 5—To obtain the actual breaking strength of ACSR/SD tested as
a unit requires special devices for gripping the ends of the aluminum and
steel wires without causing damage thereto and resultant failure below the
actual strength of the conductor. Various special dead-end devices are
available for this purpose, such as compression sleeves. Ordinary grips or
clamping devices are usually not suitable.
NOTE 6—Wire unlaid from conductors may have different physical
properties from those of the wire prior to stranding because of the
deformation brought about by stranding and straightening for test.
NOTE 7—This density is based upon 1350 aluminum.
NOTE 8—This increment of mass per unit length or electrical resistance
of a complete concentric-lay-stranded conductor (k) in percent is:
k 5 100~m 2 1!
where m is the stranding factor, and is also the ratio of the mass per unit
length or electrical resistance of a unit length of stranded conductor to that
of a solid conductor of the same cross-sectional area or of a stranded
conductor with infinite length of lay, that is, all wires parallel to the
conductor axis. The stranding factor for the completed stranded conduc-
tors is the numerical average of the stranding factors for each of the
individual wires in the conductor, including the straight core wire, if any
(for which the stranding factor is unity). The stranding factor (mind) for
any given wire in a concentric-lay-stranded conductor is:
where:
n = length of lay
diameter of helical path of wire
The derivation of the above is given in NBS Handbook 100.6
The factors k and m are to be determined separately for the steel core
(Section 7).
NOTE 9—Wires unlaid from conductors may have different physical
properties from those of the wire before stranding because of the
deformation brought about by laying and again straightening for test.
NOTE 10—Tests for measuring the size of the gaps can be carried out by
either of the following methods: Note 7(a)—Method A consists of drilling,
radially, two small holes approximately 8 in. (200 mm) apart through the
aluminum layers to the outside of the steel core while the conductor is
under tension in the strander. The gaps in the conductor, including voids,
are then filled through these holes with a permanent quick-setting
compound. After the compound has set, the sample is removed from the
conductor. From this sample a short section is further encapsulated; one
cross-section of which is polished. Gap measurements are then taken (with
a microscope of known magnification) to determine the average gap
dimension. The average gap is the arithmetic mean of the individual gap
measurements taken between the inner layer of trapezoidal aluminum
wires and the nearest point on the outer aluminum trapezoidal layer or the
steel core as the case may be, allowing for any misalignment that may
exist in the individual trapezoidal wires.
NOTE 11—Method B consists of encapsulating a short section of each
trapezoidal wire layer of the conductor as it is fabricated in the strander in
a quick-setting soft compound. This encapsulation is cut and removed in
one piece from the trapezoidal wire layer under test. Measurements are
then made of this encapsulation (with a comparator of known magnifica-
tion) to determine the maximum amount of misalignment of the wires in
each trapezoidal wire layer. The amount of this misalignment is then
subtracted from the average gap which has been calculated from mea-
surements taken of the core wire size, layer diameters, and trapezoidal
wire thickness in order to determine the net gap of the sample.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

7
 Designation: B 703 – 94 (Reapproved 1999)e1
Standard Test Method for
Apparent Density of Powders Using Arnold Meter1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 703; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
e1 NOTE—An editorial change was made in 9.4 in September 1999.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers a procedure for determining the
apparent density of both free- and non-free-flowing powders,
premixes, and blended mixes.
1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 212 Test Method for Apparent Density of Free-Flowing
Metal Powders2
B 215 Practices for Sampling Finished Lots of Metal Pow-
ders2
B 243 Terminology of Powder Metallurgy2
B 329 Test Method for Apparent Density Powders of Re-
fractory Metals and Compounds by Scott Volumeter2
B 417 Test Method for Apparent Density of Non-Free-
Flowing Metal Powders2
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Useful definitions of terms for metal pow-
ders and powder metallurgy are found in Terminology B 243.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 Arnold Density Meter—This instrument enables the
user to determine the density of any powder or mix, whether or
not the powder has flow characteristics. It duplicates the action
of the fill shoe of the press, consequently the values obtained
on metal powders are approximately 0.2 g/cm3 higher than
those obtained with the Hall, Test Method B 212; Carney, Test
Method B 417; or Scott, Test Method B 329, instruments.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-9 on Metal
Powders and Metal Powder Productsand is the direct responsibility of Subcommit-
tee B09.02 on Base Metal Powders.
Current edition approved August 15, 1994. Published October 1994. Originally
published as B 703 – 83. Last previous edition B 703 – 88.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 This test method consists of slowly sliding a bushing
partially filled with powder over a hole in a hardened steel
block, collecting and weighing the powder, and calculating its
apparent density.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The apparent density is an important measure of a
material characteristic inherent in the powder, which is useful
to the powder producers as well as end users in determining lot
to lot consistency. Knowledge of the apparent density of the
final mix as obtained with this test method is very beneficial to
the powder metallurgy (P/M) parts fabricator for setting
compression ratios for fixed fill die cavities.
5.2 This test method may be part of a purchase agreement
between the powder manufacturer and P/M parts producer, or
it may be an internal quality control test for either party.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Test Block3—A hardened, tempered, and demagnetized
steel block (60 HRC Min.) having a center hole 31.6640 6
0.0025 mm (1.2466 6 0.0001 in.) and a height of 25.4000 6
0.0025 mm (1.0000 6 0.0001 in.) that corresponds to a volume
of 20 cm3 (1.22 in.3) (Fig. 1).
6.2 Bushing3, either brass or bronze, approximately 38 mm
(1.50 in.) inside diameter (ID) by 45 mm (1.75 in.) outside
diameter (OD) by 38 mm long (Fig. 1).
6.3 Weighing Paper—A sheet of cellophane or glazed or
waxed paper measuring approximately 150 by 150 mm square
(6.0 by 6.0 in.).
6.4 Balance—A balance having a capacity of at least 200 g
suitable for weighing to 0.01 g.
7. Sampling
7.1 Obtain a test sample in accordance with Practices B 215.
7.2 The powder sample shall be of sufficient volume to fill
the bushing to about three quarters of its height.
8. Preparation of Apparatus
8.1 Clean test block and bushing thoroughly to eliminate
3
The Arnold Density Meter complete with bushing is available from Arnold P/M
Consulting Services, 648 Cedar Road, St. Marys, PA 15857. Also available from
Alcan Powders & Pigments, 901 Lehigh Avenue, Union NJ 07083-7632.
 B 703
FIG. 1 Arnold Apparent Density Meter
any loose powder particles.
9. Procedure
9.1 Place the steel block on a sheet of preweighed or tared
paper.
9.2 Place the bushing on the block, on either side of the
hole.
9.3 Fill the bushing slowly and carefully to three-quarters of
its height with powder. (A ring on the ID of the bushing
indicates the proper fill height.)
9.4 With downward pressure on the bushing, slowly slide
the bushing toward the hole while twisting it. This gives a
snowplow action to the powder as it falls slowly into the hole.
Continue this motion until the bushing passes the hole. Stop,
and again with downward pressure on the bushing, slide it
straight back over the hole to its starting position. The sliding
action must be slow enough to allow for complete filling of the
steel block cavity.
9.5 Remove the steel block from the preweighed paper
being careful not to tip the block and spill additional powder on
to the paper.
9.6 Transfer the preweighed or tared paper to a balance and
weigh. Calculate the density from the following equation:
Mass in grams
Apparent Density, g/cm3 5 (1)
20 cm 3
10. Report
10.1 Report the apparent density to the nearest 0.01 g/cm 3.
2
To minimize confusion with other test methods, report as
Arnold Density, g/cm3.
11. Precision and Bias
11.1 Precision—Precision has been determined from an
interlaboratory study performed by Subcommittee B09.02.
11.1.1 Apparent Density Using the Arnold Meter:
Repeatability r 5 0.08 g/cm 3 (2)
11.1.2 In 95 % of such tests, on the basis of test error alone,
duplicate tests in the same laboratory by the same operator, on
one homogeneous lot of powder, will differ by no more than
the stated amount.
Reproducibility R 5 0.15 g/m 3 (3)
11.1.3 For 95 % of comparative trials done in two different
laboratories and on the basis of test error alone, a single test on
the same homogeneous lot of powder will differ by no more
than the stated amount.
11.2 Bias—No bias statement can be made because there is
no accepted standard or reference powder for apparent density.
12. Keywords
12.1 apparent density, Arnold Density, density of non-free-
flowing powders, metal powders
 B 703
The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 704 – 03
Standard Specification for
Welded UNS N06625, UNS N06219 and UNS N08825 Alloy
Tubes1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 704; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope*
1.1 This specification covers welded UNS N06625, UNS
N06219 and UNS N08825 alloy boiler, heat exchanger, and
condenser tubes for general corrosion resisting and low or
high-temperature service.
1.2 This specification covers tubes 1⁄8 to 5 in. (3.18 to 127
mm), inclusive, in outside diameter and 0.015 to 0.500 in. (0.38
to 12.70 mm), inclusive, in wall thickness. Specification B 751
lists the dimensional requirements of these sizes. Tubes having
other dimensions may be furnished provided such tubing
complies with all other requirements of this specification.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2
B 751 Specification for General Requirements for Nickel
and Nickel Alloy Welded Tube
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
3. Ordering Information
3.1 Orders for material to this specification should include
the following information:
3.1.1 Quantity (feet or number of lengths),
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2003. Published December 2003. Originally
approved in 1982. Last previous edition approved in 2000 as B 704 - 00.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
3.1.2 UNS number,
3.1.3 Size (outsize diameter, minimum or average wall
thickness),
3.1.4 Length (random or specific),
3.1.5 Class, and
3.1.6 Grade if UNS N06625 is specified. If neither grade of
N06625 is specified, grade 1 will be supplied.
3.1.7 ASTM designation.
3.1.8 Product Analysis—State if required.
3.1.9 Certification—State if a certification or a report of test
results is required.
3.1.10 Purchaser Inspection—State which tests or inspec-
tions are to be witnessed, if any.
4. Materials and Manufacture
4.1 Tube shall be made from flat-rolled alloy by an auto-
matic welding process with no addition or filler metal. Subse-
quent to welding and prior to final annealing, the material shall
be cold-worked in either the weld metal only or both weld and
base metal.
4.2 Tube shall be furnished with oxide removed. When
bright annealing is used, descaling is not necessary.
5. Chemical Composition
5.1 The material shall conform to the composition limits
specified in Table 1. One test is required for each lot as defined
in Specification B 751.
5.2 If a product analysis is performed, it shall meet the
chemistry limits prescribed in Table 1, subject to the analysis
tolerances of Specification B 751.
6. Mechanical and Other Properties
6.1 Mechanical Properties—The material shall conform to
the mechanical property requirements specified in Table 2. One
test is required for each lot as defined in Specification B 751.
6.2 Flattening Test—A flattening test shall be made on each
end of one tube per lot. Superficial ruptures resulting from
surface imperfections shall not be cause for rejection.
6.3 Flange Test—A flange test shall be made on each end of
one tube per lot.
6.4 Nondestructive Test Requirements:
 B 704 – 03
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements TABLE 2 Mechanical Property Requirements
Composition Limits, % Elonga-
Yield StrengthA tion in 2
UNS UNS UNS Tensile Strength
Alloy Grade 0.2 % Offset, in. or 50
N06625 N06219 N08825 min, psi (MPa)
min, psi (MPa) mm, min,
Ni 58.0 minA Bal 38.0–46.0 %
Cr 20.0–23.0 18.0-22.0 19.5–23.5
UNS N06625 1 (annealed) 120 000 (827) 60 000 (414) 30
Fe 5.0 max 2.0-4.0 22.0 minA
UNS N06625 2 (solution 100 000 (690) 40 000 (276) 30
Mo 8.0–10.0 7.0-9.0 2.5 3.5
annealed)B
Cb + Ta 3.15–4.15 ... ...
UNS N06219 ... 96 000 (660) 39 000 (270) 30
C 0.10 max 0.05 max 0.05 max
UNS N08825 ... 85 000 (586) 35 000 (240) 30
Mn 0.50 max 0.50 max 1.0 max
A
Si 0.5 max 0.70-1.10 0.5 max Yield strength shall be determined by the offset method at 0.2 % limiting
P 0.015 max 0.020 max ... permanent set in accordance with Test Methods E 8.
B
S 0.015 max 0.010 max 0.03 max Solution annealed at 2000°F (1093°C) minimum, with or without subsequent
Al 0.4 max 0.50 max 0.2 max stabilization anneal at 1800°F (982°C) minimum to increase resistance to sensi-
Ti 0.40 max 0.50 max 0.6–1.2 tization.
Co (if determined) 1.0 max 1.0 max ...
Cu ... 0.50 max 1.5–3.0
A
Element may be determined arithmetically by difference. 7. General Requirements
7.1 Material furnished under this specification shall con-
6.4.1 Class 1—Each piece in each lot shall be subject to one
form to the applicable requirements of the current edition of
of the following four tests: hydrostatic, pneumatic (air under-
Specification B 751 unless otherwise provided herein.
water), eddy current, or ultrasonic.
6.4.2 Class 2—Each piece in each lot shall be subjected to
8. Product Marking
a leak test and an electric test as follows:
6.4.2.1 Leak Test—Hydrostatic or pneumatic (air underwa- 8.1 In addition to the requirements of Specification B 751,
ter). UNS N06625 tubes shall be marked with grade information.
6.4.2.2 Electric Test—Eddy current or ultrasonic.
6.5 The manufacturer shall have the option to test to Class 9. Keywords
1 or 2 and select the nondestructive test methods, if not 9.1 UNS N06219; UNS N06625; UNS N08825; welded
specified by the purchaser. tube

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B02 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (B 704 - 00)
that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) Added grade to ordering information and renumbered (3) Added grade mechanical requirements to Table 2 and
Section 3. footnote B.
(2) Added new Section 8, Product Marking.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 706 – 00
Standard Specification for
Seamless Copper Alloy (UNS No. C69100) Pipe and Tube1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 706; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope *
1.1 This specification establishes the requirements for cop-
per alloy UNS No. C69100 seamless pipe in standard pipe
sizes, both regular and extra strong, and seamless tube in
straight lengths for general engineering purposes.
1.2 Values stated in inch-pound units are the standard. SI
values given in parenthesis are provided for information only.
1.3 The following safety hazard caveat pertains only to the
test method portion, Section described in this specification:
This standard does not purport to address all of the safety
concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility
of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and
health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 193 Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor
Materials2
B 846 Terminology for Copper and Copper Alloys2
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3
E 20 Practice for Particle Size Analysis of Particulate Sub-
stances in the Range of 0.2 to 75 Micrometres by Optical
Microscopy4
E 54 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Special
Brasses and Bronzes5
E 243 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Exami-
nation of Copper and Copper-Alloy Tubes6
E 255 Practice for Sampling Copper and Copper-Alloys for
Determination of Chemical Composition5
E 478 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper
Alloys7
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper
and Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.04 on Pipe
and Tube.
Current edition approved March 10, 2000. Published May 2000. Originally
published as B 706 – 82. Withdrawn Dec. 15, 1993. Reinstated March 10, 2000.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
4
Discontinued. See 1993 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
7
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06.
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 For definitions of terms related to copper and copper
alloys, refer to Terminology B 846, unless otherwise stated.
3.1.2 stock, n—straight lengths that are mill cut and stored
in advance of orders. They usually are 10, 12, or 20 ft (3.05,
3.66, or 6.10 m) in length and subject to established length
tolerances.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for products shall include the following informa-
tion:
4.1.1 ASTM designation and year of issue, that is,
B 706–XX.
4.1.2 UNS designation, that is, C69100.
4.1.3 Temper (see Section 7).
4.1.4 Dimensions, diameter, and wall thickness.
4.1.5 How furnished: straight lengths or coils.
4.1.6 Finish.
4.1.7 Total length, or number of pieces, of each size.
4.1.8 Total weight, each size.
4.1.9 When product is purchased for agencies of the U.S.
Government.
4.2 The following options are available and shall be in-
cluded in the contract or purchase order when required.
4.2.1 Heat identification or traceability details.
4.2.2 Electromagnetic (eddy-current) examination.
4.2.3 Expansion test.
4.2.4 Flattening test.
4.2.5 Certification.
4.2.6 Mill test report.
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 Material:
5.1.1 The material of manufacture shall be cast or extruded
shells of Copper Alloy UNS No. C69100 of such purity and
soundness as to be suitable for processing into the products
prescribed herein.
5.1.2 In the event heat identification or traceability is
required, the purchaser shall specify the details desired.
NOTE 1—Because of the discontinuous nature of the processing of
castings into wrought products, it is not always practical to identify a
specific casting analysis with a specific quantity of finished material.
 B 706
5.2 Manufacture:
5.2.1 The product shall be manufactured by such hot-
working, cold-working, and annealing processes as to produce
a uniform wrought structure in the finished product.
5.2.2 The product shall be hot or cold worked to the finished
size, and subsequently, annealed, when required, to meet the
temper properties specified.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 The material shall conform to the chemical composition
requirements specified in Table 1.
6.2 These composition limits do not preclude the presence
of other elements. Limits may be established and analysis
required for unnamed elements by agreement between the
manufacturer and purchaser.
6.3 For Alloy UNS C69100 where zinc is listed as “remain-
der,” zinc is the difference between the sum of results of all
elements determined and 100 %. When all elements in Table 1
are determined, the sum of results shall be 99.5 % minimum.
7. Temper
7.1 The tempers for products described in this specification
shall be in accordance with Table 2.
7.1.1 TB00 (soft-annealed),
7.1.2 TF00 (precipitation-hardened), and
7.1.3 HR50 (drawn stress relieved).
8. Physical Property Requirements
8.1 Electrical Resistivity Requirement—When specified in
the contract or purchase order, the product furnished shall be
capable of conforming to a specific resistant of 1.13 µV/mm (+
< 5 %) at 20°C when tested in accordance with Test Method
B 193.
8.2 Coeffıcient of Thermal Expansion—When specified in
the contract or purchase order, the product furnished shall be
capable of conforming to a coefficient of linear expansion of
0.000 019 (or 19 3 10−6) per °C, in the range 20 to 200°C
when tested in accordance with an appropriate test method.
9. Mechanical Property Requirements
9.1 Tensile Strength Requirements:
9.1.1 Product furnished under this specification shall con-
form to the tensile requirements prescribed in Table 2 when
tested in accordance with Test Methods E 8.
9.1.2 Acceptance or rejection based upon mechanical prop-
erties shall depend only on tensile strength.
9.2 Rockwell Hardness—The approximate hardness value
for alloy UNS C69100 lies within the range 69 to 76 Rockwell
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
Composition, % Max (Unless Shown as
Element
a Range or Minimum)
Copper (incl. Ag) 81.0–84.0
Lead 0.05
Iron 0.25
Zinc remainder
Aluminum 0.7–1.2
Manganese 0.10 min
Silicon 0.8–1.3
Tin 0.10
Nickel (incl. Co) 0.8–1.4
2
TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
TB00 TF00 HR50
Temper Designation (Soft (Precipitation- (Drawn-Stress
Annealed) Hardened) Relieved)
Tensile strength, min, ksiA 55 (380) 60 (420) 79 (550)
(MPaB)
Yield strength at 0.5 % 16.5 (115) 31 (214) 48 (335)
extension under load, ksi
(MPa)A
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, 50 40 10
min, %
A
ksi 5 100 psi.
B
See Appendix X1.
B, being for general information and assistance in testing, and
shall not be used as a basis for product rejection.
NOTE 2—The Rockwell hardness test offers a quick and convenient
method of checking for general conformity to the specification require-
ments for temper, tensile strength and grain size.
10. Other Requirements
10.1 Nondestructive Testing:
10.1.1 Pipe or tube must be tested in the final heat-treated
condition as supplied to the purchaser unless otherwise agreed
upon between the manufacturer and purchaser. Unless other-
wise specified, the manufacturer shall have the option of
testing the pipe or tube by one of the following tests:
10.1.1.1 Eddy-Current Test—Each tube or pipe in standard
sizes 1⁄8 in. (3.18 mm) up to and including 21⁄2 in. (63.5 mm)
regular and extra strong, shall be subject to an eddy-current test
following the procedures of Practice E 243 and using an end
effect suppression device. The pipe or tube shall be passed
through the eddy-current testing unit to provide information on
the suitability of each piece for the intended application.
10.1.1.2 Notch-depth standards, rounded to the nearest
0.001 in. (0.025 mm), shall be 10 % of the nominal wall
thickness. Notch-depth tolerances shall be 60.0005 in. (0.013
mm). Alternatively, when a manufacturer uses speed-
insensitive equipment that can select a maximum unbalance
signal, such a signal of 0.3 % may be used.
10.1.1.3 Pipes or tubes that do not activate the signaling
device of the eddy-current tester shall be considered as
conforming to the requirements of this test. Lengths with
discontinuities indicated by the tester may, at the option of the
manufacturer, be reexamined or retested to determine whether
the discontinuity is cause for rejection. Signals that are found
to have been caused by minor mechanical damage, soil, or
moisture shall not be cause for rejection provided the pipe or
tube dimensions are still within the prescribed limits and the
pipe or tube is suitable for its intended application.
10.1.2 Hydrostatic Test—Each length shall stand, without
showing evidence of leakage, an internal hydrostatic pressure
sufficient to subject the material to a fiber stress of 7000 psi (48
MPa) determined by the following equation for thin hollow
cylinders under internal pressure. The pipe or tube need not be
tested at a hydrostatic pressure of over 1000 psi (6.9 MPa)
unless so specified.
P 5 2St/~D 2 0.8t! (1)
where:
 B 706

P 5 hydrostatic pressure, psi (or MPa); 11.5.1 Length tolerances shall be in accordance with Table
t 5 thickness of pipe or tube wall, in. (or mm); 7.
D 5 nominal outside diameter of the pipe or tube, in. (or 11.5.2 Schedule of Tube Lengths—Specific and stock
mm); and lengths with ends shall be in accordance with Table 8.
S 5 allowable stress of the material, psi (or MPa). 11.6 Squareness of Cut—For pipe and tube in straight
lengths, the departure from squareness of the end of any pipe
11. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations
or tube shall not exceed the following:
11.1 General: 11.6.1 Pipe:
11.1.1 The standard method of specifying wall thicknesses
Nominal Outside Diameter,
shall be in decimal fractions of an inch. Tolerance
in. (mm)
11.1.2 For the purpose of determining conformance with the
dimensional requirements prescribed in this specification, any Up to 5⁄8 in. (15.9 mm) incl 0.010 in. (0.25 mm)
Over 5⁄8 in. (15.9 mm) 0.016 in./in. (0.016 mm/mm) of dia
measure value outside the specified limiting values for any
dimension may be cause for rejection. 11.6.2 Tube:
11.1.3 Tolerances on any given tube shall be specified with Specified Outside Diameter,
Tolerance
respect to any two, but not all three, of the following: outside in. (mm)

diameter, inside diameter, and wall thickness. Up to 5⁄8 in. (15.9 mm) incl. 0.010 in. (0.25 mm)
11.2 Dimensions—Nominal dimensions and nominal Over 5⁄8 in. (15.9 mm) 0.016 in./in. (0.016 mm/mm) of
weights of standard pipe sizes shall be in accordance with dia

Table 3.
11.3 Wall Thickness Tolerances—Wall thickness tolerances
shall be in accordance with Table 4. Wall thickness tolerances
for tube shall be in accordance with Table 5.
11.4 Diameter Tolerances—Diameter tolerances for pipe
shall be as follows:
11.4.1 Nominal Pipe Size 11⁄2 in. (38 mm) and Under—
+0.016, −0.031 in. (+0.40, −0.79 mm).
11.4.2 Nominal Pipe Size Over 11⁄2 in. (38 mm)—61 % of
specified diameter.
11.4.3 The dimensional limits of standard pipe sizes are
shown in Table 4.
11.4.4 Diameter tolerances of tube shall be in accordance
with Table 6.
11.5 Length Tolerances:
11.7 The density of Copper Alloy UNS No. C69100 shall be
taken to be 0.308 lb/in.3 (8.53 g/cm3).
12. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
12.1 The product shall be free of defects, but blemishes of
a nature that do not interfere with the intended application are
acceptable.
13. Sampling
13.1 Sampling—The lot size, portion size, and selection of
sampling pieces shall be as follows:
13.1.1 Lot Size—For tube, the lot size shall be 10 000 lbs
(4550 Kg), or fraction thereof. For pipe, the lot size shall be as
follows:

TABLE 3 Dimensions and Weights of Copper Alloy Pipe, Standard Pipe SizesA
Standard Pipe Size, Nominal Dimension, in. (mm) Cross-Sectional Area Nominal Weight, lb/ft
in. Outside Diameter Inside Diameter Wall Thickness of Bore, in.2 (cm2) (kg/m)

Regular
⁄
18 0.405 (10.3) 0.269 (6.83) 0.068 (1.73) 0.057 (0.367) 0.266 (0.395)
1⁄4 0.540 (13.7) 0.364 (9.25) 0.088 (2.24) 0.104 (0.670) 0.462 (0.686)
3⁄8 0.675 (17.1) 0.493 (12.5) 0.091 (2.31) 0.191 (1.23) 0.617 (0.917)
1⁄2 0.840 (21.3) 0.622 (15.8) 0.109 (2.77) 0.304 (1.96) 0.925 (1.37)
3⁄4 1.050 (26.7) 0.824 (20.9) 0.113 (2.87) 0.533 (3.44) 1.23 (1.83)
1 1.315 (33.4) 1.049 (26.6) 0.133 (3.38) 0.864 (3.57) 1.83 (2.72)
11⁄4 1.660 (42.2) 1.380 (35.1) 0.140 (3.56) 1.496 (9.66) 2.47 (3.68)
11⁄2 1.900 (48.3) 1.610 (40.9) 0.145 (3.68) 2.036 (13.1) 2.95 (4.40)
2 2.375 (60.3) 2.067 (52.5) 0.154 (3.91) 3.356 (21.7) 3.97 (5.91)
21⁄2 2.875 (73.0) 2.469 (62.7) 0.203 (5.16) 4.788 (30.9) 6.30 (9.37)
3 3.500 (88.9) 3.068 (77.9) 0.216 (5.49) 7.393 (47.7) 8.24 (12.3)
Extra Strong
⁄
18 0.405 (10.3) 0.215 (5.46) 0.095 (2.41) 0.036 (0.232) 0.342 (0.508)
1⁄4 0.540 (13.7) 0.302 (7.67) 0.119 (3.02) 0.072 (0.464) 0.582 (0.865)
3⁄8 0.675 (17.1) 0.423 (10.7) 0.126 (3.20) 0.141 (0.909) 0.803 (1.19)
1⁄2 0.840 (21.3) 0.546 (13.9) 0.147 (3.73) 0.234 (1.51) 1.183 (1.76)
3⁄4 1.050 (26.7) 0.742 (18.8) 0.154 (3.91) 0.432 (2.79) 1.60 (2.39)
1 1.315 (33.4) 0.957 (24.3) 0.179 (4.55) 0.719 (4.64) 2.36 (3.52)
11⁄4 1.660 (42.2) 1.278 (32.5) 0.191 (4.85) 1.283 (8.28) 3.26 (4.85)
11⁄2 1.900 (48.3) 1.500 (38.1) 0.200 (5.08) 1.767 (11.4) 3.95 (5.88)
2 2.375 (60.3) 1.939 (49.3) 0.218 (5.54) 2.953 (19.1) 5.46 (8.12)
21⁄2 2.875 (73.0) 2.323 (59.0) 0.276 (7.01) 4.238 (27.3) 8.33 (12.4)
3 3.500 (88.9) 2.900 (73.7) 0.300 (7.62) 6.605 (42.6) 11.1 (16.6)
A
Copper Alloy UNS No. C69100 is presently available only in standard pipe sizes up to 3 in.

3
 B 706
TABLE 4 Dimensional Limits for Standard Pipe Sizes
Outside Diameter, in. (mm) Wall Thickness, in. (mm)
Standard Pipe Size Regular Extra Strong
Nominal Min Max
Nominal Min Max Nominal Min Max
⁄
18 0.405 (10.3) 0.374 (9.50) 0.421 (10.7) 0.068 (1.73) 0.061 (1.55) 0.075 (1.91) 0.095 (2.41) 0.086 (2.18) 0.105 (2.67)
1⁄4 0.540 (13.7) 0.509 (12.9) 0.556 (14.1) 0.088 (2.24) 0.079 (2.01) 0.097 (2.46) 0.119 (3.02) 0.107 (2.72) 0.131 (3.33)
3⁄8 0.675 (17.1) 0.644 (16.4) 0.691 (17.6) 0.091 (2.31) 0.082 (2.08) 0.100 (2.54) 0.126 (3.20) 0.113 (2.87) 0.139 (3.53)
1⁄2 0.840 (21.3) 0.809 (20.5) 0.856 (21.7) 0.109 (2.77) 0.098 (2.49) 0.120 (3.05) 0.147 (3.73) 0.132 (3.35) 0.162 (4.11)
3⁄4 1.050 (26.7) 1.019 (25.9) 1.066 (27.1) 0.113 (2.87) 0.102 (2.59) 0.124 (3.15) 0.154 (3.91) 0.139 (3.53) 0.169 (4.29)
1 1.315 (33.4) 1.284 (32.6) 1.331 (33.8) 0.133 (3.38) 0.120 (3.05) 0.146 (3.71) 0.179 (4.55) 0.161 (4.09) 0.197 (5.00)
11⁄4 1.660 (42.2) 1.629 (41.4) 1.676 (42.6) 0.140 (3.56) 0.126 (3.20) 0.154 (3.91) 0.191 (4.85) 0.172 (4.37) 0.210 (5.33)
11⁄2 1.900 (48.3) 1.869 (47.5) 1.916 (48.7) 0.145 (3.68) 0.131 (3.33) 0.160 (4.06) 0.200 (5.08) 0.180 (4.57) 0.220 (5.59)
2 2.375 (60.3) 2.351 (59.7) 2.399 (60.9) 0.154 (3.91) 0.139 (3.53) 0.169 (4.29) 0.218 (5.54) 0.196 (4.98) 0.240 (6.10)
21⁄2 2.875 (73.0) 2.846 (72.3) 2.904 (73.8) 0.203 (5.16) 0.183 (4.65) 0.223 (5.66) 0.276 (7.01) 0.248 (6.30) 0.304 (7.72)
3 3.500 (88.9) 3.465 (88.0) 3.535 (89.8) 0.216 (5.49) 0.194 (4.93) 0.238 (6.05) 0.300 (7.62) 0.270 (6.86) 0.330 (8.38)

TABLE 5 Wall Thickness Tolerances for Copper Alloy UNS No. TABLE 7 Length Tolerances
C69100A Tube (Not Applicable to Pipe)
NOTE 1—Tolerances are all plus—If all minus tolerances are desired,
NOTE 1—Maximum deviation at any point—The following tolerances use the same value. If tolerances plus and minus are desired, halve the
are plus and minus; if tolerances all plus or all minus are desired, double values given.
the values given. Tolerances, in. Applicable Only to Full-
Outside Diameter, in. (mm) (mm) Length Pieces

Over 5⁄8 to 1 Over 1 to 2 Over 2 to 3 Length Outside Diameters Outside Diameters

Wall Thickness, in. (mm)
(15.9 to 25.4) (25.4 to 50.8) (50.8 to 76.2) Up to 1 in. (25.4 Over 1 in. (25.4 mm) to
Incl Incl Incl mm) Incl 3 in. (76.2 mm) Incl

Over 0.024 (0.610) to 0.034 0.003 (0.076) 0.004 (0.10) 0.004 (0.10) Specific lengths:
(0.864) incl Up to 6 in. (152 mm) incl ⁄
1 32 (0.79) ⁄
1 15 (1.6)
Over 0.034 (0.864) to 0.057 0.0045 (0.11) 0.005 (0.13) 0.006 (0.15) Over 6 in. (152 mm) to 2 ft (610 1 16 ⁄ (1.6) ⁄
3 32 (2.4)
(1.45 ) incl mm) incl
Over 0.057 (1.45) to 0.082 0.005 (0.13) 0.006 (0.15) 0.008 (0.20) Over 2 ft (610 mm) to 6 ft (1.83 m) 3 32 ⁄ (2.4) 18 ⁄ (3.2)
(2.08) incl incl
Over 0.082 (2.08) to 0.119 0.007 (0.18) 0.008 (0.20) 0.009 (0.23) Over 6 ft (1.83 m) to 14 ft (4.27 m) 14 ⁄ (6.4) 14 ⁄ (6.4)
(3.02) incl incl
Over 0.119 (3.02) to 0.164 0.009 (0.23) 0.010 (0.25) 0.012 (0.30) Over 14 ft (4.27 m) ⁄ (13)
12 ⁄ (13)
12

(4.17) incl Specific lengths with ends 1 (25) 1 (25)

A Stock lengths with or without ends 1A (25) 1A (25)
Copper Alloy UNS No. C69100 in tube sizes less than 1⁄8 in. shall be furnished
A
in diameter and wall thickness tolerances agreed to between purchaser and As stock lengths are cut and placed in stock in advance of orders, departure
supplier. from this tolerance is not practicable.

TABLE 6 Average Diameter Tolerances for Tube (Not Applicable TABLE 8 Schedule of Tube Lengths (Specific and Stock) with
to Pipe) Ends
Specified Diameter, in. (mm) Tolerance 6in. (mm)A Shortest Maximum
Outside Dimensions, Nominal Length, Permissible Permissible
Over ⁄ (3.18) to 5⁄8 (15.9) incl
18 0.004 (0.10) in. (mm) ft (m) A
Length, % of Weight of Ends,
Over 5⁄8 (15.9) to 1 (25.4) incl 0.005 (0.13) Nominal Length % of Lot Weight
Over 1 (25.4) to 2 (50.8) incl 0.006 (0.15)
Over 2 (50.8) to 3 (76.2) incl 0.007 (0.18) Up to 1 (25.4) incl 6 (1.83) to 20 (6.10) 70 20
A
incl
Tolerance applies to inside or outside diameters. Over 1 (25.4) to 2 6 (1.83) to 20 (6.10) 60 25
(50.8) incl incl
Over 2 (50.8) to 3 6 (1.83) to 20 (6.10) 55 30
Standard Pipe Size, in. (mm) Lot Weight, lb (kg) (76.2) incl incl
A
Up to 4 in. (102 mm) incl. 10 000 lbs (4550 kg) or fraction Expressed to nearest 1⁄3 ft.
thereof
Over 4 in. (102 mm) 40 000 lbs (18 000 kg) or fraction
thereof
from the pieces selected in 13.1.2 and combined into one
composite sample. The minimum weight of this composite
13.1.2 Portion Size—Sample pieces shall be taken for test sample shall be 150 g.
purposes from each lot according to the following schedule: 13.2.2 Instead of sampling in accordance with Practice
Number of Pieces in Lot Number of Sample Pieces to Be Taken E 255, the manufacturer shall have the option of determining
1 to 50 1
conformance to chemical composition as follows: Conform-
51 to 200 2 ance shall be determined by the manufacturer by analyzing
201 to 1500 3 samples taken at the time the castings are poured or samples
Over 1500 0.2 % of total number of pieces in lot
taken from the semifinished product. When the manufacturer
13.2 Chemical Analysis: determines chemical composition of the material during the
13.2.1 The sample for chemical analysis shall be taken in course of manufacture, sampling of the finished product is not
accordance with Practice E 255 for product in its final form required. The number of samples taken for determination of

4
 B 706
chemical composition shall be as follows:
13.2.2.1 When samples are taken at the time the castings are
poured, at least one sample shall be taken for each group of
castings poured from the same source of molten metal.
13.2.2.2 When samples are taken from semifinished prod-
uct, a sample shall be taken to represent each 10 000 lbs (4550
Kg), or fraction thereof, except that not more than one sample
shall be required.
13.2.2.3 Only one sample need be taken from the semifin-
ished product of one cast bar of a single melt charge continu-
ously processed.
13.3 Samples of All Other Tests—Samples of all other tests
shall be taken from the sample portions selected in 13.1.2 and
be of a convenient size to accommodate the test and comply
with the requirements of the appropriate product specification
and test method.
14. Number of Tests and Retests
14.1 Tests:
14.1.1 Chemical Analysis—Chemical composition shall be
determined as the per element mean of results from at least two
replicate analyses of the sample(s).
14.1.2 Other Tests—Tensile and electrical resistivity results
shall be reported as the average of the results obtained from at
least two test specimens, each taken from a separate test piece
where possible.
14.2 Retests:
14.2.1 When requested by the manufacturer or supplier, a
retest shall be permitted when results of the test obtained by the
purchaser fail to conform with test requirements of the product
specification.
14.2.2 The retest shall be as directed in the product speci-
fication for the initial test except the number of test specimens
shall be twice that normally required for the specified test.
14.2.3 Test results for all specimens shall conform to the
product specification requirement(s) in retest and failure to
comply shall be cause for lot rejection.
15. Specimen Preparation
15.1 Analytical specimen preparation shall be the responsi-
bility of the reporting laboratory.
15.2 Tensile Test—The test specimen shall be of the full
section of the tube and shall conform to the requirements of
specimens for pipe and tube of Test Methods E 8, unless the
limitations of the testing machine preclude the use of such a
specimen. Test specimens conforming to Type No. 1 of Fig. 13
of Test Methods E 8 may be used when a full-section specimen
cannot be tested.
15.3 Rockwell Hardness—The test specimen shall be of a
size and shape to permit testing by the available test equipment
and shall be taken to permit testing in a plane parallel or
perpendicular to the direction of deformation given to the
product.
15.3.1 The surface of the test specimen shall be sufficiently
smooth and even to permit the accurate determination of
hardness.
15.3.2 The specimen shall be free of scale and foreign
matter and care shall be taken to avoid any change in condition,
that is, heating or cold working.
5
15.4 Electrical Resistivity—Test specimens are to be full
size where practical and shall be the full cross section of the
material it represents.
15.4.1 When the test specimen is cut from material in bulk,
care shall be taken that the properties are not appreciably
altered in the preparation. Plastic deformation may work
harden a material and tend to raise the resistivity, while heating
tends to anneal the material with a consequent reduction in
resistivity.
15.4.2 When necessary, products are to be rolled or cold
drawn to a wire 0.080 in. (1.2 mm) in diameter and at least 160
in. (4064 mm) in length. Since Copper Alloy UNS C69100 is
heat treatable, such postdrawing or rolling heat treatment shall
be agreed between the manufacturer and purchaser.
15.5 Should any test specimen show defective machining or
develop flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
16. Test Methods
16.1 Chemical Analysis:
16.1.1 The chemical composition of Copper Alloy UNS
C69100 shall be determined, in the case of disagreement, by
the methods defined in Specifications E 54 and E 478.
16.1.2 The test method(s) to be followed for the determina-
tion of element(s) resulting from contractual or purchase order
agreement shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer or
supplier and the purchaser.
16.2 Other Tests:
16.2.1 The product furnished shall conform to all other
requirements when subjected to test in accordance with the
appropriate test method in the following table:
Test Method
Tensile strength E8
Eddy current E 243
16.2.1.1 Yield strength shall be determined by the
extension-under-load method of Test Methods E 8.
16.2.1.2 Whenever tension and yield strength test results are
obtained from both full-size and machined test specimens and
they differ, the results from the full-size specimens shall
prevail.
16.2.1.3 Tension test results on Copper Alloy UNS C69100
are not seriously affected by variations in speed of testing. A
considerable range of testing speed is permissible; however,
the rate of stressing to the yield strength should not exceed 100
ksi (690 MPa)/min. Above the yield strength the movement per
minute of the testing machine head under load should not
exceed 0.5 in./in. (0.5 mm/mm) of gage length (or distance
between grips for full-section specimens).
17. Significance of Numerical Limits
17.1 For the purpose of determining compliance with the
specified limits of requirements of the properties listed in the
following table, an observed value of a calculated value shall
be rounded as indicated in accordance with the rounding
method of Practice E 20:
 B 706
Rounded Unit for Observed or
Property
Calculated Value
Chemical composition Nearest unit in the last
Hardness right-hand significant digit
Linear dimensions used in expressing the
Tolerances limiting value
Tensile strength Nearest ksi
Yield strength
Elongation Nearest 1 %
18. Inspection
18.1 The manufacturer, or supplier, shall inspect and make
tests necessary to verify the product furnished conforms to
specification requirements.
18.2 Source inspection of the product by the purchaser may
be agreed upon by the manufacturer or supplier, and the
purchaser as part of the purchase order. In such case, the nature
of the facilities needed to satisfy the inspector representing the
purchaser that the product is being furnished in accordance
with the specification shall be included in the agreement. All
tests and the inspection shall be conducted so as not to interfere
unnecessarily with the operations of the works.
18.3 The manufacturer or supplier and the purchaser may
conduct the final inspection simultaneously by mutual agree-
ment.
19. Rejection and Rehearing
19.1 Rejection:
19.1.1 Product that fails to conform to the specification
requirements when inspected or tested by the purchaser, or
purchaser’s agent, may be rejected.
19.1.2 Rejection shall be reported to the manufacturer, or
supplier, promptly and in writing.
19.1.3 In case of dissatisfaction with the results of the test
upon which rejection is based, the manufacturer, or supplier,
may make claim for a rehearing.
19.2 Rehearing—As a result of product rejection, the manu-
facturer, or supplier, may make claim for a retest to be
conducted by the manufacturer, or supplier, and the purchaser.
Samples of the rejected product shall be taken in accordance
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. METRIC EQUIVALENTS
X1.1 The SI unit for strength properties now shown is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI). The
derived SI unit for force is the newton (N), which is defined as
that force which when applied to a body having a mass of 1 kg
gives it an acceleration of one metre per second squared (N 5
kg · m/s2). The derived SI unit for pressure or stress is the
6
with the product specification and subjected to test by both
parties using the test method(s) specified in the product
specification or, alternatively, upon agreement by both parties,
an independent laboratory may be selected for the test(s) using
the test method(s) specified in the product specification.
20. Certification
20.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order, the
purchaser shall be furnished certification that samples repre-
senting each lot have been either tested or inspected as directed
in this specification and the requirements have been met.
21. Test Report
21.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order, a
report of test results shall be furnished.
22. Product Marking
22.1 Product conforming to this specification shall be
marked, using indelible ink, along its length at repetitive
intervals not exceeding 18 in. (460 mm). The repeating legend
shall contain the manufacturer’s name or trademark, the tube’s
outside diameter and wall thickness, this specification number,
the cast number and country of origin. Other information, such
as purchaser’s order number and so forth, shall be added as
required, but a maximum length of 36 in. (910 mm) shall not
be exceeded.
23. Packaging and Package Marking
23.1 Packaging—The product shall be separated by size
and composition, and prepared for shipment in such a manner
as to ensure acceptance by common carrier for transportation
and to afford protection from normal hazards of transportation.
23.2 Package Marking—Each shipment unit shall be
marked legibly with the purchase order number, metal or alloy
designation, temper, size, shape, gross and net weight, and
name of supplier. The specification number shall be shown,
when specified.
24. Keywords
24.1 extra-strong; pipe; regular; seamless; standard pipe
series; tube; UNS No. C69100
newton per square metre (N/m2), which has been named the
pascal (Pa) by the General Conference on Weights and Mea-
sures. Since 1 ksi 5 6 894 757 Pa, the metric equivalents are
expressed as megapascal (MPa), which is the same as MN/m2
and N/mm2.
 B 706
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

The following is a summary of changes incorporated since B 706 – 88 was discontinued in 1993.

(1) A complete revision in line with the ASTM “Outline of

Form for Specification,” revised April 1994.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

7
 Designation: B 705 – 03

Standard Specification for

Nickel-Alloy (UNS N06625, N06219 and N08825) Welded
Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 705; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 3. General Requirement

1.1 This specification covers welded UNS N06625,* UNS 3.1 Material furnished in accordance with this specification
N06219* and UNS N08825* pipe in the annealed condition shall conform to the applicable requirements of the current
(temper) for general corrosion applications. edition of Specification B 775 unless otherwise provided
1.2 This specification covers pipe sizes in schedules shown herein.
in Table 2 of Specification B 775.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded 4. Definition of Terms
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for 4.1 Class 1—Welded, cold-worked, annealed, and nonde-
information only. structively tested in accordance with 9.1.
1.4 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the 4.2 Class 2—Welded, cold-worked, annealed, and nonde-
test methods portion, Section 8, of this specification: This structively tested in accordance with 9.2.
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, 4.3 Grade 1—Annealed condition, relevant for UNS
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user N06625.
of this standard to become familiar with all hazards including 4.4 Grade 2—Solution annealed condition, relevant for
those identified in the appropriate Material Safety Data Sheet UNS N06625.
for this product/material as provided by the manufacturer, to
establish appropriate safety and health practices, and deter- 5. Ordering Information
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. 5.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
requirements that are necessary for the safe and satisfactory
2. Referenced Documents performance of material ordered under this specification.
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2 Examples of such requirements include, but are not limited to,
B 751 Specification for General Requirements for Nickel the following:
and Nickel Alloy Welded Tube 5.1.1 Alloy name or UNS number,
B 775 Specification for General Requirements for Nickel 5.1.2 ASTM designation,
and Nickel Alloy Welded Pipe 5.1.3 Dimensions:
B 880 Specification for General Requirements for Chemical 5.1.3.1 Pipe size,
Check Analysis Limits for Nickel, Nickel Alloys, and 5.1.3.2 Length (specific or random),
Cobalt Alloys 5.1.4 Class (see 3),
5.1.5 Grade if UNS N06625 is specified. If neither grade of
N06625 is specified, grade 1 will be supplied.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on 5.1.6 Quantity (feet or number of pieces),
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys. 5.1.7 Certification— State if certification is required,
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2003. Published December 2003. Originally 5.1.8 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
approved in 1982. Last previous edition approved in 2000 as B 705 – 00. samples for product (check) analysis should be furnished (7.2),
* New designation established in accordance with Practice E 527 and SAE
J 1086, Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
and
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 705 – 03
5.1.9 Purchaser Inspection—If purchaser wishes to witness TABLE 2 Mechanical Property Requirements
tests or inspection of material at place of manufacture, the Elonga-
purchase order must so state indicating which tests or inspec- Yield Strength tion in 2
Tensile Strength
Alloy Grade 0.2 % Offset, in. or 50
tions are to be witnesses. min, psi (MPa)
min, psi (MPa) mm, min,
%
6. Material and Manufacture
UNS N06625 1 (annealed) 120 000 (827) 60 000 (414) 30
6.1 Pipe shall be made from flat-rolled alloy by an auto- UNS N06625 2 (solution 100 00 (690) 40 000 (276) 30
matic welding process with no addition of filler metal. Subse- annealed)A
UNS N06219 96 000 (660) 39 000 (270) 30
quent to welding and prior to final annealing, the material shall UNS N08825 85 000 (586) 35 000 (240) 30
be cold-worked in either the weld metal only or both weld and A
Solution annealed at 2000°F (1093°C) minimum, with or without subsequent
base metal. stablization anneal at 1800°F (982°C) minimum to increase resistance to sensiti-
6.2 Pipe shall be furnished with oxide removed. When zation.
bright annealing is used, descaling is not necessary.
7. Chemical Composition 8.2 Flattening Test— A section of pipe not less than 4 in.
(102 mm) in length shall be capable of withstanding, without
7.1 The material shall conform to the composition limits cracking, flattening under a load applied gradually at room
specified in Table 1. One test per lot shall be performed. temperature until the distance between the platens is five times
7.2 If a product (check) analysis is performed by the the wall thickness. The weld shall be positioned 90° from the
purchaser, the material shall conform to the product (check) direction of the applied flattening force. One pipe per lot shall
analysis variations per Specification B 880. be examined.
8. Mechanical Properties and Other Requirements 8.2.1 Superficial ruptures resulting from surface imperfec-
8.1 Mechanical Properties—The material shall conform to tions shall not be a cause for rejection.
the mechanical properties specified in Table 2. One pipe per lot 9. Nondestructive Testing
shall be examined.
9.1 Class 1—Each piece in each lot shall be subjected to
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements one of the following four tests: hydrostatic, pneumatic (air
Composition Limits, % underwater), eddy current, or ultrasonic.
UNS UNS UNS 9.2 Class 2—Each piece in each lot shall be subjected to a
N06625 N06219 N08825 leak test and an electric test as follows:
Ni 58.0 minA Bal 38.0–46.0 9.2.1 Leak Test—Hydrostatic or pneumatic (air underwater).
Cr 20.0–23.0 18.0-22.0 19.5–23.5 9.2.2 Electric Test— Eddy current or ultrasonic.
Fe 5.0 max 2.0-4.0 22.0 minA
Mo 8.0–10.0 7.0-9.0 2.5 3.5
9.3 The manufacturer shall have the option to test to Class
Cb + Ta 3.15–4.15 ... ... 1 or 2 and select the nondestructive test methods, if not
C 0.10 max 0.05 max 0.05 max specified by the purchaser.
Mn 0.50 max 0.50 max 1.0 max
Si 0.5 max 0.70-1.10 0.5 max
P 0.015 max 0.020 max ...
10. Product Marking
S 0.015 max 0.010 max 0.03 max 10.1 In addition to the requirements of Specification B 751,
Al 0.4 max 0.50 max 0.2 max
Ti 0.40 max 0.50 max 0.6–1.2
UNS N06625 tubes shall be marked with grade information.
Co (if determined) 1.0 max 1.0 max ...
Cu ... 0.50 max 1.5–3.0 11. Keywords
A
Element may be determined arithmetically by difference. 11.1 N06219; N06625; N08825; welded pipe

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B02 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (B 705 – 00)
that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) Section 4 – Added grades to definition of terms. (4) Table 2 – Added mechanical property requirements for
(2) Section 5 – Added grade to ordering information. grades 1 and 2 with note.
(3) Section 10 – Added product marking of grade.

2
 B 705 – 03
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 708 – 01
Standard Specification for
Tantalum and Tantalum Alloy Plate, Sheet, and Strip1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 708; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers unalloyed and alloyed tanta-
lum plate, sheet, and strip.
1.2 The materials covered by this specification are:
1.2.1 R05200, unalloyed tantalum, electron-beam furnace
or vacuum-arc melt, or both,
1.2.2 R05400, unalloyed tantalum, powder-metallurgy con-
solidation,
1.2.3 R05255, tantalum alloy, 90 % tantalum, 10 % tung-
sten, electron-beam furnace of vacuum-arc melt, or both,
1.2.4 R05252, tantalum alloy, 97.5 % tantalum, 2.5 % tung-
sten, electron-beam furnace or vacuum-arc melt, or both.
1.2.5 R05240, tantalum alloy, 60 % tantalum, 40 % nobium,
electron-beam furnace or vacuum-arc melt.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.4 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test methods portion, Section 13, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety problems,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
tions prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials2
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications3
E 112 Test Methods for Determining the Average Grain
Size2
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 plate—a flat product more than 0.1853 in. (4.7 mm) in
thickness.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B10 on
Reactive and Refractory Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of
Subcommittee B10.03 on Niobium and Tantalum.
Current edition approved Nov. 10, 2001. Published January 2002. Originally
published as B 708 – 82. Last previous edition B 708 – 98.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
3.1.2 sheet—a flat product 6 in. (152.4 mm) or more in
width and from 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) to 0.1875 in. (4.76 mm) in
thickness.
3.1.3 strip—a flat product, may be supplied in coil, less than
6 in. (152.4 mm) in width and from 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) to
0.1875 in. (4.76 mm) in thickness.
3.1.4 lot—all material produced from the same ingot or a
single powder blend at one time with the same cross section,
and with the same nominal metallurgical parameters.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information as applicable:
4.1.1 Quantity (weight or number of pieces),
4.1.2 Name of material (tantalum plate, sheet, or strip),
4.1.3 Type (see 1.2),
4.1.4 Method of manufacture (Section 5),
4.1.5 ASTM designation,
4.1.6 Quality and finish (Section 10), and
4.1.7 Additions to the specification and supplementary re-
quirements if required.
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 Material covered by this specification shall be made
from vacuum-arc melted or electron-beam melted ingots or
powder metallurgy consolidated unalloyed tantalum.
5.2 The various tantalum mill products covered by this
specification are formed with the conventional extrusion,
forging, and rolling equipment normally available in metal
working plants.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 The tantalum and tantalum alloy ingots and the tantalum
powder metallurgy consolidated ingots for conversion to fin-
ished products covered by this specification shall conform to
the requirements for chemical composition as prescribed in
Table 1 and Table 2.
6.1.1 Analysis for elements not listed in Table 1 and not
normally expected in tantalum shall not be required unless
specified at time of purchase.
6.2 The manufacturer’s ingot analysis shall be considered
the chemical analysis for products supplied under this specifi-
cation.
 B 708
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
Content, max, weight %
Electron-Beam Electron-Beam
Electron Beam Cast
Electron-Beam Cast Sintered Cast (R05255) Cast (R05252)
(R05240) Vacuum-Arc
(R05200) Vacuum-Arc (R05400) Vacuum-Arc Vacuum-Arc Cast
Element Cast (R05240) 60 %
Cast (R05200) Unalloyed Cast (R05255) (R05252) 97.5 %
Tantalum 40 %
Unalloyed Tantalum Tantalum 90 % Tantalum Tantalum 2.5 %
Columbium
10 % Tungsten Tungsten
C 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
O 0.015 0.03 0.015 0.015 0.020
N 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
H 0.0015 0.0015 0.0015 0.0015 0.0015
Fe 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
Mo 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020
Nb 0.100 0.100 0.100 0.50 35.0–42.0
Ni 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
Si 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005
Ti 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
W 0.05 0.05 9.0–11.0 2.0–3.5 0.050
Ta remainder remainder remainder remainder remainder

TABLE 2 Additional Chemical Requirements for each lot of material supplied. The performance of this
Chemistry-max contentA special provision shall be negotiated.
3N5 Purity 4N Purity
99.95 % Minimum 99.99 % Minimum 7. Mechanical Properties
Electron Beam Cast Electron Beam Cast
(R0XXXX) or Vacuum (R0XXXX) or Vacuum 7.1 Materials supplied under this specification shall con-
Element
Arc Cast (R0XXXX) or Arc Cast (R0YYYY) or form to the requirements for mechanical properties as specified
Sintered (R0ZZZZ) Sintered R0ZZZZ)
Unalloyed Tantalum Unalloyed Tantalum
in Table 4.
(Max. ppm) (Max. ppm) 7.2 The performance of mechanical tests to this requirement
C 40 40 will be negotiated at time of purchase.
O 100 100
N 40 40
H 10 10
8. Metallurgical Properties
S 1 1 8.1 Materials supplied under this specification for sputtering
Al 5 1
Ca 5 1
target applications (R0XXXX, R0YYYY, or R0ZZZZ) shall
Cd 5 1 conform to the requirements for metallurgical properties de-
Cl 5 1 scribed in Table 5.
Co 5 1
Cr 5 1
Cu 5 1 9. Weight and Permissible Variations
Fe 5 1
Hf 5 1
9.1 Tolerances for thickness, width, and length for flat-
K 1 1 rolled products covered by this specification shall be as shown
Li 1 1 in Table 6.
Mg 5 1
Mn 5 1 9.2 Flatness tolerance for sheet and plate products supplied
Mo 50 30 under this specification shall be a maximum of 6 % as
Na 1 1 determined by the following equation (see Fig. 1):
Nb 400 80
Ni 5 1 Flatness, % 5 ~H / L!3 100 (1)
Pb 5 1
Si 5 1 where:
Sn 5 1
Ti 5 1
H = maximum vertical distance between a flat reference
Th 0.005 0.005 surface and the lower surface of the sheet, and
V 5 1 L = minimum horizontal distance between the highest
W 150 80
Zn 5 1
point on the sheet and the point of contact with a flat
Zr 5 1 reference surface. (Figure 1 is included to illustrate
Y 5 1 the method for taking measurements for calculation of
U 0.005 0.005
Others (each) 5 1
sheet flatness; however, a value of H less than 1⁄32in.
Total Metallic (0.794 mm) shall not be caused for rejection.)
500 100
Elements 9.3 Quantity or Weight—For orders requiring up to 100 lb
A
Metallic elements analyzed by GDMS, Gases (CONH) by Leco Methods. (45.4 kg), the manufacturer may overship by 10 %. When the
order is for guarantees up to 500 lb (226.8 kg), the manufac-
6.3 When requested by the purchaser at the time of pur- turer may overship an order by 5 %. The permissible overship-
chase, the seller shall furnish a report certifying the values of ment for quantities larger than this shall be negotiated between
carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, and hydrogen as specified in Table 3 the purchaser and the manufacturer.

2
 B 708
TABLE 3 Additional Chemical Requirements for Finished Product (When Specified by the Purchaser)
Content, max, weight %
Electron-Beam Electron Beam
Electron-Beam Cast
Electron-Beam Cast Cast (R05252) Cast (R05240)
(R05255) Vacuum-
(R05200) Vacuum- Sintered (R05400) Vacuum-Arc Cast Vacuum-Arc Cast
Element Arc Cast (R05255)
Arc Cast (R05200) Unalloyed Tantalum (R05252) (R05240) 60 %
90 % Tantalum 10 %
Unalloyed Tantalum 97.5 % Tantalum Tantalum 40 %
Tungsten
2.5 % Tungsten Columbium
O 0.025 0.035 0.025 0.025 0.025
N 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
H 0.0015 0.0015 0.0015 0.0015 0.0015
C 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020

TABLE 4 Mechanical Properties for Plate, Sheet, and Strip

NOTE 1—Tantalum for sputtering target applications (R0XXXX, R0YYYY, or R0ZZZZ) is not tested and does have to meet the requirements of Table
4).
Annealed Condition
Grade and Form Ultimate Tensile Strength, Yield Strength, min, psi Elongation, min, %
min, psi (MPa) (MPa) (2 % Offset) (1-in. Gage Length)
Unalloyed tantalum
(R05200)
(R05400)
Plate, sheet and strip
<0.060 in. thick 30 000 (207) 20 000 (138) 20
$0.060 in. thick 25 000 (172) 15 000 (103) 30
90 % tantalum 10 % tungsten
(R05255)
Sheet and strip 70 000 (482) 60 000 (414) 15
Plate 70 000 (482) 55 000 (379) 20
97.5 % tantalum 2.5 % tungsten
(R05252)
<0.125 in. thick 40 000 (276) 30 000 (207) 20
$0.125 in. thick 40 000 (276) 22 000 (152) 25
60 % tantalum 40 % columbium
(R05240)
<0.060 in. thick 35 000 (241) 20 000 (138) 25
$0.060 in. thick 35 000 (241) 15 000 (103) 25

TABLE 5 Metallurgical Properties for Tantalum plate for acceptability shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer
Sputtering Target Application (R0XXXX, R0YYYY, or R0ZZZZ)) and the purchaser.
Grain Size and Structure Requirements - Sputtering Applications Only
Nominal Gauge Average Through Thickness RecrystallizationB 11. Number of Tests
Grain SizeA
.1259-.2999 ASTM 4 (90µ) or finer 98 % min.
11.1 If mechanical testing is required (see 7.2), perform a
.3009-.5009 ASTM 3 (125µ) or finer 98 % min. longitudinal or transverse tension test on each lot of material.
.5019-.6509 ASTM 2 (180µ) or finer 98 % min. 11.2 If end-product chemical tests are required (see 6.3),
.6519-1.259 Not Specified 90 % min.
make the one chemical test from each lot of finished product.
A
The structure of all material shall be uniform throughout the thickness of the
plate. The grain size in individual areas shall not vary more than 2 ASTM grain size 12. Test Methods
numbers from the average through thickness grain size. Grain Size shall be tested
according to Test Methods E 112
12.1 Tension Tests—Prepare and test test specimens in
B
Percent Recrystallization shall be measured through the thickness of the plate. accordance with Test Methods E 8. Determine tensile proper-
The total thickness of unrecrystallized areas (bands) divided by the thickness of ties using a strain rate of 0.003 to 0.007 in./(in.·min) to the
the plate and multiplied by 100 shall be less that the stated requirement.
yield point and 0.02 to 0.05 in./(in.·min) to failure.
12.2 Chemical Tests—Conduct the chemical analysis in
10. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance accordance with established methods.
12.3 Retests—If any sample or specimen exhibits obvious
10.1 Tantalum and tantalum alloy plate, sheet, and strip surface contamination or improper preparation disqualifying it
shall be free of injurious internal and external imperfections of as a truly representative sample, discard it and substitute a new
a nature that will interfere with the purpose for which it is sample or specimen.
intended. Material may be finished as-rolled, as-cleaned, or
as-ground. The manufacturer shall be permitted to remove 13. Significance of Numerical Limits
minor surface imperfections if such removal does not reduce 13.1 For the purpose of determining compliance with the
the dimensions below the minimum permitted by the tolerances specified limits for requirements on the properties listed in this
specified in Table 3. specification, observed and calculated values shall be rounded
10.2 Methods of testing for these defects and standards of as indicated by the rounding method of Practice E 29.

3
 B 708
TABLE 6 Dimensional Tolerances for Tantalum Sheet and Plate
Tolerance on Thickness,A plus or Tolerance on Width (Slit),B Tolerance on Sheared Lengths,
minus, in. (mm) plus or minus, in. (mm) in. (mm)
Thickness of
Tantalum in. Width under 6 in Width 6 to 24 in. Width under 6 in. Width 6 to 24 in. Length 12 in. (304.8 Length over 12 in.
(mm) (152.4 mm) (152.4 to 609.6 mm) (152.4 mm) (152.4 to 609.6 mm) mm) and Under (304.8 mm)
Plus Minus Plus Minus
0.0051 to 0.010 0.0005 (0.0127) 0.012 (0.305) ⁄
1 16 0 ⁄
14 0
(0.129 to 0.254) (1.59) (6.35)
0.011 to 0.015 0.0007 (0.0178) 0.001 (0.0254) 0.015 (0.381) 0.015 (0.381) 1⁄16 0 1⁄4 0
(0.279 to 0.381) (1.59) (6.35)
0.016 to 0.020 0.0008 (0.0203) 0.0015 (0.0381) 0.015 (0.381) 0.015 (0.381) 1⁄16 0 1⁄4 0
(0.406 to 0.508) (1.59) (6.35)
0.021 to 0.030 0.0015 (0.0381) 0.0025 (0.0635) 0.020 (0.508) 0.025 (0.635) 1⁄16 0 1⁄4 0
(0.533 to 0.762) (1.59) (6.35)
0.031 to 0.060 0.0025 (0.0635) 0.0035 (0.0889) 0.025 (0.635) 0.030 (0.762) 1⁄16 0 1⁄4 0
(0.787 to 1.524) (1.59) (6.35)
0.061 to 0.090 0.004 (0.1016) 0.005 (0.1270) 0.025 (0.635) 0.035 (0.889) 1⁄16 0 1⁄4 0
(1.549 to 2.286) (1.59) (6.35)
0.091 to 0.125 0.006 (0.1524) 0.007 (0.1778) ... ... 1⁄16 0 1⁄4 0
(2.311 to 3.175) (1.59) (6.35)
0.126 to 0.187 0.010 (0.2540) 0.010 (0.2540) ... ... 1⁄16 0 1⁄4 0
(3.200 to 4.750) (1.59) (6.35)
A
Tolerance on thickness of sheet over 24 in. (609.6 mm) wide shall be 6 10 % of the thickness.
B
Tolerance on width of sheared sheet shall be + 1⁄4 in. (6.35 mm), − 0 in. (0 mm).
H = maximum distance between flat surface and lower surface of sheet.
L = minimum distance between highest point on sheet and point of contact with flat surface.

H = maximum distance between flat surface and lower surface of sheet.

L = minimum distance between highest point on sheet and point of contact with flat surface.
Flatness, percent = (H/L) 3 100
FIG. 1 Plate and Sheet Flatness Tolerances

14. Sampling the results of tests of representative finished product to

14.1 Samples shall be taken from the material to determine
conformity to this specification. The samples shall be taken so
as to be representative of the finished products.
14.2 Care shall be taken to ensure that the sample selected
for testing is representative of the material, and that it is not
contaminated by the sampling procedure. If there is any
question relating to the sampling technique, or to the testing
thereof, the methods of sampling and testing shall be as agreed
upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
15. Report
15.1 If requested, the manufacturer shall supply at least
three copies of a report of the chemical analysis and reports of
determine properties required in Sections 6 and 7. The reports
shall include the purchase order number, this specification
number, and the quantity and number of items covered in the
shipment and a statement that the material was manufactured,
sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with the specifi-
cation and has been found to meet the requirements.
16. Rejection and Rehearing
16.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
supplier may make claim for a rehearing.

4
 B 708
17. Referee
17.1 In the event of disagreement between the manufacturer
and the purchaser of the conformance of the material to the
requirements of this specification or any special test specified
by the purchaser, a mutually accepted referee shall perform the
tests in question. The results of the referee’s testing shall be
used in determining conformance of the material to this
specification.
18. Packaging and Package Marking
18.1 When specified, each plate, sheet, and strip shall be
marked with the number of this specification, type, temper, lot
number, manufacturer’s identification, nominal thickness in
inches, and gross, net, and tare weights. Characters shall be not
less than 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm) in height, applied with a suitable
marking fluid and capable of being removed without rubbing.
The markings or their removal shall have no deleterious effect
the material or its performance. The characters shall be
sufficiently stable to withstand ordinary handling.
18.2 When specified, plate and flat sheet shall be marked in
lengthwise rows of characters recurring at intervals not greater
than 2 ft (0.6 m), the rows spaced not more than 3 in. (76 mm)
apart and alternately staggered.
18.3 When specified, coiled strip and sheet shall be marked
near the outside of the coil.
18.4 Unless otherwise specified, material purchased under
this specification must be packed by box or suitable protective
containers, and shall be so marked as to indicate the nature of
the best method of handling.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 709 – 04
Standard Specification for
Iron-Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum Alloy (UNS N08028)*
Plate, Sheet, and Strip1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 709; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers iron-nickel-chromium-
molybdenum alloy (UNS N08028)* plate, sheet, and strip in
the solution-annealed condition.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2
B 880 Specification for General Requirements for Chemical
Check Analysis Limits for Nickel, Nickel Alloys and
Cobalt Alloys
B 906 Specification for General Requirements for Flat-
Rolled Nickel and Nickel Alloy Plate, Sheet, and Strip
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
3. Ordering Information
3.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
requirements that are necessary for material ordered under this
specification. Examples of such requirements include, but are
not limited to those specified in Ordering Information Section
in Specification B 906.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Feb. 1, 2004. Published February 2004. Originally
approved in 1982. Last previous edition approved in 1998 as B 709 – 98.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
4. General Requirements
4.1 Material furnished under this specification shall con-
form to the applicable requirements of the current edition of
Specification B 906, unless otherwise specified herein.
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 Heat Treatment—The final heat treatment shall be a
solution-anneal. Minor cold working such as flattening or
temper rolling may be performed after the final solution
annealing treatment.
NOTE 1—This recommended solution-anneal consists of heating to a
minimum temperature of 1975°F (1080°C) and cooling rapidly to room
temperature.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 The material sampled in accordance with 10.2 shall
conform to the composition limits prescribed in Table 1.
6.2 If a product analysis is subsequently made, the material
shall conform to the composition limits with the product
analysis variation prescribed Specification B 880.
7. Mechanical Properties
7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to the
mechanical property prescribed in Table 2.
8. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
8.1 Sheet—Material furnished under this specification shall
conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition of
Specification B 906, except as specified in Tables 3 and 4.
8.2 Cold-Rolled Strip—Material furnished under this speci-
fication shall conform to the applicable requirements of the
current edition of Specification B 906, except as specified in
Tables 5-7.
8.3 Plate—Material furnished under this specification shall
conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition of
Specification B 906.
 B 709 – 04
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
Element Composition, %
Ni 29.5 to 32.5
Fe remainderA
Cr 26.0 to 28.0
Mo 3.0 to 4.0
C, max 0.030
Si, max 1.00
Mn, max 2.50
P, max 0.030
S, max 0.030
Cu 0.6 to 1.4
A
Determined arithmetically by difference.

TABLE 2 Mechanical Property Requirements

Elonga-
Yield
Tensile tion in 2
Strength Rockwell
Strength, in. or 50
Form (0.2 % off- Hardness (or
min, ksi mm, or
set), min, equivalent)A
(MPa) 4D, min,
ksi (MPa)
%
Sheet 73 (500) 31 (214) 40 70–90 HRB
Strip 73 (500) 31 (214) 40 70–90 HRB
Plate 73 (500) 31 (214) 40 70–90 HRB
A
Hardness values are shown for information only and shall not constitute a basis for acceptance or rejection as long as the other mechanical properties are met.

TABLE 3 Flatness Tolerances for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled Sheets

Sheets not Specified to Stretcher Leveled Standard of Flatness
Flatness Tolerance (max
Specified Thickness, in. (mm) Width, in. (mm) Deviation from a Horizon-
tal Flat Surface), in. (mm)
0.062 (1.57) and over to 60 (1524), incl ⁄ (12.7)
12

over 60 to 72 (1524 to 1829), incl ⁄ (19.1)

34

over 72 (1829) 1 (25.4)

Under 0.062 (1.57) to 36 (914), incl ⁄ (12.7)

12

over 36 to 60 (914 to 1524), incl ⁄ (19.1)

34

over 60 (1524) 1 (25.4)

TABLE 4 Weight Tolerances for Hot-Rolled and Cold-

Rolled Sheets
It is not practicable to produce hot-rolled and cold-rolled sheets to exact theoretical weight. Sheets of any one item of a specified thickness
and size in any finish may be overweight to the following extent:
(1) An item of five sheets or less, or an item estimated to weigh 200 lb (90.7 kg) or less, may actually weigh as much as 10 % over the
theoretical weight.
(2) An item of more than five sheets and estimated to weigh more than 200 lb (90.7 kg) may actually weigh as much as 71⁄2 % over the
theoretical weight.
(3) The underweight variations for sheets are limited by the under thickness tolerances shown in Table 3 of Specification B 906.
For determining theoretical weight, the factor 42 lb/ft2·in. (0.0008 kg/cm2·mm) thickness may be used.

9. Sampling thickness, solution-annealed by the same practice but in no

9.1 Sampling for Chemical Analysis, Mechanical Testing,
and Corrosion Testing shall be performed in accordance with
Specification B 906, except as specified herein:
9.1.1 Plate—A lot of plate for testing and inspection pur-
poses shall consist of the products resulting from the rolling of
one heat of material in the same condition and specified
thickness, solution annealed by the same practice, but in no
case more than 25 000 lb (11 340 kg).
9.1.2 Sheet and Strip— A lot of sheet or strip for testing and
inspection purposes shall consist of material from one heat in
the same form (sheet or strip), condition, finish, and specified
case more than 25 000 lb (11 340 kg).
9.2 Sampling for Mechanical Tests:
9.2.1 When samples are to be taken after delivery, the
purchaser of material ordered to cut lengths may request on the
purchase order additional material of adequate size to provide
sample coupons for inspection purposes.
10. Number of Tests and Retests
10.1 In the case of sheet or strip supplied in coil form, two
or more tension tests (one from each end of each coil), and one
or more hardness tests shall be made on specimens taken from

2
 B 709 – 04
TABLE 5 Thickness ToleranceA,B,C for Cold-Rolled Strip for the Thicknesses and Widths Given, Over and Under
Width, in.
0.187 to 1, Over 1 to Over 3 to Over 6 to Over 9 to Over 12 to Over 16 to Over 20 to
Specified Thickness
incl 3, incl 6, incl 9, incl 12, incl 16, incl 20, incl 24, incl
Thickness Tolerance, in.

Over 0.160 to less than 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.006
0.187
Over 0.099 to 0.160, incl 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.005 0.005
Over 0.068 to 0.099, incl 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.004
Over 0.049 to 0.068, incl 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.004 0.004
Over 0.039 to 0.049, incl 0.002 0.002 0.0025 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.004 0.004
Over 0.034 to 0.039, incl 0.002 0.002 0.0025 0.0025 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003
Over 0.028 to 0.034, incl 0.0015 0.0015 0.002 0.002 0.0025 0.0025 0.003 0.003
Over 0.025 to 0.028, incl 0.001 0.0015 0.0015 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.0025 0.003
Over 0.019 to 0.025, incl 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.0015 0.002 0.002 0.0025 0.0025
Over 0.016 to 0.019, incl 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.0015 0.002 0.002 0.002
Over 0.012 to 0.016, incl 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.0015 0.002 0.002
Over 0.011 to 0.012, incl 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.0015 0.0015 0.0015
Over 0.010 to 0.011, incl 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.0015 0.0015
0.010 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.0015

Width, mm
Over Over Over
Over 76.2 Over Over Over 508
4.76 to 25.4 152.4 to 304.8 to
Specified Thickness, mm to 152.4, 228.6 to 406.4 to to 609.6,
25.4, incl to 76.2, 228.6, 406.4,
incl 304.8, incl 508, incl incl
incl incl incl
Thickness Tolerance, mm
Over 4.06 to less than 0.05 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.15
4.76
Over 2.51 to 4.06, incl 0.05 0.05 0.08 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.13 0.13
Over 1.73 to 2.51, incl 0.05 0.05 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.10
Over 1.25 to 1.73, incl 0.05 0.05 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.10 0.10
Over 0.99 to 1.24, incl 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.10 0.10
Over 0.86 to 0.99, incl 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
Over 0.71 to 0.86, incl 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.08
Over 0.64 to 0.71, incl 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.08
Over 0.48 to 0.64, incl 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.06
Over 0.41 to 0.48, incl 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.05
Over 0.38 to 0.41, incl 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05
Over 0.28 to 0.30, incl 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Over 0.25 to 0.28, incl 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.04
0.25 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.04
A
For thickness under 0.010 to 0.005 in. (0.254 to 0.127 mm), inclusive, in widths up to and including 16 in. (406 mm), a tolerance of 610 % of the thickness applies.
For thicknesses under 0.010 to 0.005 in. (0.254 to 0.127 mm), inclusive, in widths over 16 to 24 in. (406 to 610 mm), exclusive, a tolerance of 615 % of the thickness
applies. For thickness tolerances on thicknesses under 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) in widths up to 24 in. (610 mm), exclusive, the producer should be consulted.
B
Thickness measurements are taken 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm) in from the edge of the strip, except that on widths less than 1 in. (25.4 mm) the tolerances are applicable for
measurements at all locations.
C
The tolerances in this table do not include crown tolerances.

TABLE 6 Crown Tolerances for Cold-Rolled Strip

Additional Thickness, at Middle of Strip over That Shown in Table 5 for
Edge Measurement, for Widths and Thicknesses Given, in. (mm)
Specified Thickness, in. (mm) Width, in. (mm)
Over 5 to 12 (127 to Over 12 to 24 (305 to
To 5 (127), incl
305), incl 610), excl
0.005 to 0.010 (0.127 to 0.254), incl 0.0075 (0.19) 0.001 (0.02) 0.0015 (0.04)
Over 0.010 to 0.025 (0.254 to 0.635), incl 0.001 (0.02) 0.0015 (0.04) 0.002 (0.05)
Over 0.025 to 0.065 (0.635 to 1.65), incl 0.0015 (0.04) 0.002 (0.05) 0.0025 (0.06)
Over 0.065 to 0.187 (1.65 to 4.76), excl 0.002 (0.05) 0.0025 (0.06) 0.003 (0.08)

each end of the coil. When material is supplied in flatsheet, flat
strip, or plate, one tension and one or more hardness tests shall
be made on each 100 or less sheets, strips, or plates of the same
lot. When specified, one corrosion test shall be conducted for
each lot.
10.2 If any specimens selected to represent any lot fail to
meet any of the test requirements, the material represented by
such specimens may be retested. If there is valid reason to
believe the result is not representative, the material may be
re-reannealed and retested.
11. Specimen Preparation
11.1 Tension test specimens from material under 1⁄2 in. (12.7
mm) in thickness shall be of the full thickness of the material

3
 B 709 – 04
TABLE 7 Length and Camber Tolerances for Cold-
Rolled Strip
Length Tolerances
Tolerance Over Speci-
Specified Length, ft (mm) fied Length (No Under
Tolerance), in. (mm)
To 5 (1524), incl 3⁄8 (9.5)

Over 5 to 10 (1520 to 3050), incl 1⁄2 (12.7)

Over 10 to 20 (3050 to 6100), incl 5⁄8 (15.9)

and machined to the form and dimensions shown for the final heat treatment and shall be selected in the transverse
sheet-type specimen in Test Methods E 8. Tension test speci- direction unless prohibited by width.
mens from material 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) and over shall be of the
full thickness of the material, machined to the form and 12. Keywords
dimensions shown for the plate-type specimen in Test Methods
E 8. Tension test specimens shall be taken from material after 12.1 N08028; plate; sheet; strip

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 710 – 04

Standard Specification for

Nickel-Iron-Chromium-Silicon Alloy Welded Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 710; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements

1.1 This specification2 covers alloys UNS N08330 and UNS Element Composition Limits, %

N08332 in the form of welded pipe intended for heat-resisting C ...A

Mn 2.00 max
applications and general-corrosive service. P 0.03 max
1.2 The pipe covered is nominal pipe sizes up to and S 0.03 max
including size 12, with the nominal wall thicknesses given as Si 0.75–1.50
Cr 17.0–20.0
Schedules 5S, 10S, 40S, and 80S. Table 2 of Specification Ni 34.0–37.0
B 775 is based on Table A1 of ANSI B36.19 and gives the Cu 1.00 max
nominal dimension of these sizes. Table 3 of Specification Pb 0.005 max
Sn 0.025 max
B 775 lists the dimensional requirements of these sizes. Pipe Fe remainderB
having other dimensions may be furnished provided such pipe A
Alloy UNS N08330: 0.08 max. Alloy UNS N08332: 0.05–0.10.
complies with all other requirements of this specification. B
lement shall be determined arithmetically by difference.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only. 2.2 ANSI Standard:4
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the ANSI B36.19 Stainless Steel Pipe
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the 3. Terminology
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate 3.1 Definitions:
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro- 3.1.1 Definitions for terms defined in Terminology B 899
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and shall apply unless otherwise defined by the requirements of this
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory document.
limitations prior to use. 4. General Requirement
2. Referenced Documents 4.1 Material furnished in accordance with this specification
2.1 ASTM Standards: 3 shall conform to the applicable requirements of the current
B 536 Specification for Nickel-Iron-Chromium-Silicon Al- edition of Specification B 775 unless otherwise provided
loy (UNS N08330 and N08332) Plate, Sheet, and Strip herein.
B 775 Specification for General Requirements for Nickel 5. Ordering Information
and Nickel Alloy Welded Pipe
B 899 Terminology Relating to Non-ferrous Metals and 5.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
Alloys requirements that are necessary for material ordered under this
specification. Examples of such requirements include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on 5.1.1 Quantity (feet or number of lengths),
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee 5.1.2 UNS number,
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Feb. 1, 2004. Published February 2004. Originally
5.1.3 Size (nominal pipe size and schedule),
approved in 1982. Last previous edition approved in 1999 as B 710 – 99. 5.1.4 Length (random or specific),
2
For ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code applications, see related Specifi- 5.1.5 ASTM designation,
cation SB710 in Section 11 of that code.
3
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
4
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on Available from American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd St., 13th
the ASTM website. Floor, New York, NY 10036.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 710 – 04
TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties
Tensile Strength, min, Yield Strength, 0.2 % Elongation in 2 in. or
Alloy Condition HardnessA
psi (MPa) offset, min, psi (MPa) 50 mm, or 4D, min,%
UNS N08330 annealed 70 000 (483) 30 000 (207) 30 70 to 90 HRB
UNS N08332 annealed 67 000 (462) 27 000 (186) 30 65 to 88 HRB
A
Hardness values are informative only and not to be construed as the basis for acceptance.

5.1.6 Product Analysis— State if required.
5.1.7 Certification— State if a certification or report of test
results is required,
5.1.8 Purchaser Inspection—State which tests or inspec-
tions are to be witnessed, if any, and
5.1.9 Supplementary requirements, if any.
6. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 The pipe shall be made from flat-rolled alloy conform-
ing to Specification B 536, by an automatic welding process
with no addition of filler metal. Subsequent to welding and
prior to final heat treatment, the material shall be cold worked
either in both weld and base metal or in weld metal only.
6.2 Heat Treatment— Pipe of UNS N08330 alloy shall be
annealed at 1900°F (1040°C), minimum. Pipe of UNS N08332
alloy shall be annealed at 2100°F (1150°C), minimum.
7. Chemical Composition
7.1 The material shall conform to the composition limits
specified in Table 1. One test is required for each lot as defined
in Specification B 775.
7.2 If a product analysis is performed, it shall meet the
chemistry limits prescribed in Table 1, subject to the analysis
tolerances specified in Table 1 of Specification B 775.
8. Mechanical Properties and Other Requirements
8.1 Mechanical Properties—The material shall conform to
the mechanical property requirements specified in Table 2. One
test is required for each lot as defined in Specification B 775.
8.2 Flattening Test— A flattening test shall be made on each
end of one pipe per lot. Superficial ruptures resulting from
surface imperfections shall not be cause for rejection.
8.3 Nondestructive Test Requirements—Each pipe shall be
subjected to either a pressure test or a nondestructive electric
test at the manufacturer’s option. The purchaser may specify
which test is to be used.
8.4 Grain Size—Annealed alloy UNS N08332 shall con-
form to an average grain size of ASTM No. 5 or coarser.
9. Lengths
9.1 Lengths may be ordered as either random lengths
(normally 15 to 24 ft (4.6 to 8.3 m), with some agreed upon
allowance for shorts) or specific cut lengths.
10. Keywords
10.1 high-temperature alloy; welded pipe

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 712 – 93 (Reapproved 1999)
Standard Guide for
Determination of Sodium and Potassium Content For Silver-
Cadmium Oxide Contact Materials1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 712; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This guide describes procedures for use in conducting
analysis of silver-cadmium oxide materials for sodium and
potassium content. The exact methods for the performance of
this testing are not stated since many different procedures are
equally applicable. This guide points out specific procedures
for decreasing the chance of recognized potential errors and
specifies methods for increasing the sensitivity of the testing.
1.2 This standard may involve hazardous materials, opera-
tions, and equipment. This standard does not purport to
address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is
the responsibility of whoever uses this standard to consult and
establish appropriate safety and health practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
For specific precautions see Sections 4 and 6.
1.3 Whoever uses this standard should consult the Material
Safety Data Sheet concerning the products involved.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
E 50 Practices for Apparatus, Reagents, and Safety Precau-
tions for Chemical Analysis of Metals2
E 663 Practice for Flame Atomic Absorption Analysis3
2.2 Other Document:
Operation Guide for Chemical Analysis of Metals and
Metal Bearing Ores by Atomic Absorption Spectropho-
tometry4
3. Significance and Use
3.1 This guide is recommended for use in analyzing the
sodium and potassium content of silver-cadmium oxide mate-
rials and is meant to be used in conjunction with standard
methods of atomic absorption spectroscopy. The recommended
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-2 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B2.05 on Precious Metals.
Current edition approved Aug. 15, 1993. Published October 1993. Originally
published as B 712 – 82. Last previous edition B 712 – 82 (1988).
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06.
4
1982 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 12 (see Related Materials
Section).
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
procedures cite methods for minimizing extraneous sodium
and potassium contamination through use of specific handling
procedures and shorter sample preparation methods. This guide
also recommends procedures that prevent the formation of
nonstable and potentially hazardous silver-acetylene com-
pounds.
4. Precautions
4.1 Since silver nitrate reacts with acetylene to form silver
acetylide, the guide recommends either alternative flames to
air–acetylene or the removal of silver from solution. Silver
acetylide is unstable and may explode violently upon being
disturbed.
5. Sampling
5.1 Handle the sample so as to avoid contamination by
sodium and potassium; avoid contact with hands.
6. Procedures
6.1 First clean the sample in nitric acid and distilled or
deionized water to remove extraneous surface contamination.
Test powder samples as received. Then store the samples in
such a manner as to minimize contamination.
6.2 Use a sample size of approximately 2 g or more for each
test.
6.3 Handle the samples with gloves and utensils, never with
bare hands.
6.4 The use of TFE-fluorocarbon or other suitable substi-
tutes for glassware is recommended. If glass is used, aged glass
rather than new glass is recommended. Clean the glassware
with ammonia and rinse with deionized water. Avoid the use of
detergents.
6.5 Calibrate the instrument and determine the optimum
calibration-solution concentration in accordance with Practice
E 663 and other standards as cited in Section 2.
6.6 Fully dissolve the sample in a nitric acid solution in
accordance with standard procedures and concentrations rec-
ommended for the atomic absorption procedures and instru-
ments used. Also prepare a reagent blank.
 B 712
6.7 An air-propane or air-hydrogen flame is recommended 7.1.1 Sample size,
rather than air-acetylene in order to prevent the formation of 7.1.2 Type of solution containers used,
silver acetylide. (Warning—Silver acetylide may explode 7.1.3 Whether silver was precipitated, and
violently if disturbed.) The silver then may be left in solution. 7.1.4 Specific type of gas flame used.
6.8 If an air-acetylene flame is used, a precipitation and 7.2 Supplier and user shall reach agreement concerning all
settling procedure is recommended over filtrations for removal variables in technique and procedure before attempting to
of silver. A settling time of 24 h is recommended in laboratory compare results of specific samples.
ware that will not contribute to contamination followed by
careful aspiration of the supernatant solution into the air-
acetylene flame. If the choice is made to remove the silver from TABLE 2 Potassium Analysis
solution, the possibility of some of the sodium and potassium s
Mean, ppm
being removed with the precipitate should be recognized. ppm %
6 11 180
TABLE 1 Sodium Analysis 12 4 33
s
Mean, ppm
ppm %
7 4 57
35 8 23 8. Precision
190 26 14
500 94 19 8.1 The precision is based on the tests performed by
competent operators of a number of different laboratories; see
Table 1 and Table 2. All the laboratories were given the basic
7. Report guidelines as described in this guide.
7.1 Since slight variations in technique can easily cause
discrepancies between laboratory results, the exact method 9. Keywords
used shall be listed. The report statement shall include such 9.1 analysis; cadmium oxide; contacts; potassium; silver;
items as follows: silver–cadmium oxide; sodium

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 711 – 99
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS
100 Barr Harbor Dr., West Conshohocken, PA 19428
Reprinted from the Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Copyright ASTM

Standard Specification for

Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum-Alloy Conductors, Steel
Reinforced (AACSR) (6201)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 711; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope nized) Steel Core Wire for Aluminum and Aluminum-

1.1 This specification covers concentric-lay-stranded con-
ductors made from round aluminum-alloy 6201-T81 hard:
solution heat treated, cold worked, and then artificially aged
wire and round zinc-coated, Zn-5Al-MM coated, aluminum-
coated, or aluminum-clad steel core wire for use as overhead
electric conductors (Explanatory Note 1 and Note 2).
NOTE 1—All values are stated in SI units. No inch-pound equivalents
are presented, nor is an inch-pound companion specification proposed.
NOTE 2—The alloy and temper designations conform to ANSI H35.1.
Aluminum alloy 6201 corresponds to Unified Numbering System alloy
A96201 in accordance with Practice E 527.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein.
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 263 Test Method for Determination of Cross-Sectional
Area of Stranded Conductors2
B 341 Specification for Aluminum-Coated (Aluminized)
Steel Core Wire for Aluminum Conductors, Steel Rein-
forced (ACSR/AZ)2
B 354 Terminology Relating to Uninsulated Metallic Elec-
trical Conductors2
B 398 Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6201-T81 Wire
for Electrical Purposes2
B 398M Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6201-T81 Wire
for Electrical Purposes [Metric]2
B 498M Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel
Core Wire for Aluminum Conductors, Steel Reinforced
(ACSR) [Metric]2
B 500 Specification for Metallic Coated Stranded Steel
Core for Aluminum Conductors, Steel Reinforced
(ACSR)2
B 502 Specification for Aluminum-Clad Steel Core Wire for
Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-Clad Steel Reinforced2
B 606 Specification for High-Strength Zinc-Coated (Galva-
Alloy Conductors, Steel Reinforced2
B 802M Specification for Zinc-5% Aluminum-Mischmetal
Alloy-Coated Steel Core Wire for Aluminum Conductors,
Steel Reinforced (ACSR) [Metric]2
B 803 Specification for High-Strength Zinc-5% Aluminum-
Mischmetal Alloy-Coated Steel Core Wire for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Conductors, Steel Reinforced2
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications3
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)4
2.3 American National Standards Institute Standard:
H35.1M Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Alu-
minum5
2.4 Other Standard:
NBS Handbook 100—Copper Wire Tables6
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 AACSR—covered by this specification has five types
of coated steel and one type of aluminum-clad steel core wire
which are designated by abbreviations as follows (Explanatory
Note 2):
3.1.1.1 AACSR/GA-AACSR—using Class A zinc-coated
steel wire (B 498).
3.1.1.2 AACSR/GB-AACSR—using Class B zinc-coated
steel wire (B 498).
3.1.1.3 AACSR/GC-AACSR—using Class C zinc-coated
steel wire (B 498).
3.1.1.4 AACSR/AZ-AACSR—using aluminum-coated (alu-
minized) steel wire (B 341).
3.1.1.5 AACSR/HS-AACSR—using extra high-strength steel
wire (B 606).
3.1.1.6 AACSR/AW-AACSR—using aluminum-clad steel
wire (B 502).
3.1.1.7 AACSR/MA—using Zn-5Al-MM coated steel core
wire, coating Class A in accordance with Specification
B B802M.

1 3
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-1 on Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
4
Electrical Conductors and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B01.07 on Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
5
Conductors of Light Metals. Available from American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street,
Current edition approved April 10, 1999. Published June 1999. Originally 13th Floor, New York, NY 10036.
6
published as B 711 – 82. Last previous edition B 711 – 93. Available from National Institute of Standards and Technology, (NIST),
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03. Gaithersburg, MD 20899.

1
 B 711
3.1.1.8 AACSR/MB—using Zn-5Al-MM coated steel core
wire, coating Class B in accordance with Specification
B 802M.
3.1.1.9 AACSR/MC—using Zn-5Al-MM coated steel core
wire, coating Class C in accordance with Specification
B 802M.
3.1.1.10 AACSR/MC—using high-strength Zn-5Al-MM
coated steel core wire, coating Class A in accordance with
Specification B 803.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information:
4.1.1 Quantity of each size and stranding,
4.1.2 Conductor size, square millimetres (Section 8 and
Table 1),
4.1.3 Number of wires, aluminum and steel,
4.1.4 Type of steel core wire and, if galvanized or Zn-
5Al-MM coated, class (A, B, or C) of coating (see 5.2),
4.1.5 Direction of lay of outer layer of aluminum wires if
other than right-hand (see 7.2),
4.1.6 Special tension test, if required (see 9.2),
4.1.7 Place of inspection (Section 15),
4.1.8 Special package marking, if required (Section 16),
4.1.9 Package size (see 17.1), and
4.1.10 Heavy wood lagging, if required (see 17.3).
5. Requirement for Wires
5.1 Before stranding, the aluminum-alloy wire shall meet
the requirements of Specification B 398M.
5.2 Before stranding, the steel core wire shall meet the
requirements of Specification B 341, B 498M, B 502, B 606,
B 802M, or B 803, whichever is applicable.
5.3 Steel core supplied in a stranded construction shall meet
the requirements of Specification B 500, if applicable.

TABLE 1 Construction Requirements of Aluminum-Alloy Conductors, Steel Reinforced, Concentric-Lay-Stranded

Conductor Area, mm2 StrandingA and Wire Diameter Diameter, mm
Rated StrengthB MassC
Alloy Alloy Steel
Steel Total Conductor Steel Core
Nominal Number mm Number mm kN kg/km
1250 102 1352 84 4.35 19 2.61 47.8 13.0 490 4255
1120 91 1211 84 4.12 19 2.47 45.3 12.4 439 3816

1000 81 1081 84 3.89 19 2.33 42.8 11.6 391 3400

900 73 973 84 3.69 19 2.21 40.6 11.0 355 3060

800 101 901 54 4.34 19 2.60 39.0 13.0 363 3003

710 90 800 54 4.09 19 2.45 36.8 12.2 322 2664

630 80 710 54 3.85 19 2.31 34.6 11.6 286 2365

560 71 631 54 3.63 19 2.18 32.7 10.9 257 2104

500 63 563 54 3.43 19 2.06 30.9 10.3 229 1878

450 59 509 54 3.26 19 1.98 29.5 9.90 215 1706

400 91 491 30 4.12 19 2.47 28.8 12.4 237 1818

400 65 465 26 4.43 7 3.45 28.1 10.4 207 1616

355 81 436 30 3.88 19 2.33 27.2 11.6 211 1614

355 58 413 26 4.17 7 3.24 26.4 9.72 183 1430

315 72 387 30 3.66 19 2.20 25.6 11.0 190 1438

315 52 367 26 3.93 7 3.06 24.9 9.18 163 1272

280 65 345 30 3.45 7 3.45 24.2 10.4 171 1286

280 46 326 26 3.70 7 2.88 23.4 8.64 144 1127

250 58 308 30 3.26 7 3.26 22.8 9.78 156 1149

250 41 291 26 3.50 7 2.72 22.2 8.16 129 1008

224 52 276 30 3.08 7 3.08 21.6 9.24 139 1025

224 36 260 26 3.31 7 2.57 21.0 7.71 118 901

200 47 247 30 2.91 7 2.91 20.4 8.73 124 915

200 32 232 26 3.13 7 2.43 19.8 7.29 106 805

180 42 222 30 2.76 7 2.76 19.3 8.28 112 823

180 29 209 26 2.97 7 2.31 18.8 6.93 95.1 731

160 38 198 30 2.61 7 2.61 18.3 7.83 106 736

160 26 186 26 2.80 7 2.18 17.7 6.54 85.6 646

140 33 173 30 2.44 7 2.44 17.1 7.32 87.4 643

140 23 163 26 2.62 7 2.04 16.6 6.12 75.0 565
A
Only those strandings with a relatively high steel content are listed. Other strandings are available by agreement between the purchaser and the producer.
B
Rated strengths are for AACSR/GA and AACSR/MA conductors. Strengths were calculated in accordance with 9.1.
C
Mass applies to AACSR/GA, AACSR/MA, and AACSR/AZ conductors.

2
 B 711
6. Joints TABLE 3 Rating Factors

6.1 Cold-pressure welds, electric-butt welds, and electric- Stranding

butt, cold-upset welds in the finished individual aluminum Number of Wires Number of Layers Rating Factor, %
alloy wires composing the conductor may be made during the Aluminum Alloy Steel Aluminum Alloy Steel Aluminum Alloy Steel
stranding process. Following welding, electric-butt welds shall 12 7 1 1 96 96
be annealed for a distance of at least 150 mm on each side of 24 7 2 1 93 96
26 7 2 1 93 96
the weld. No weld shall occur within 15 m of a weld in the 30 7 2 1 93 96
same wire or in any other wire of the completed conductor
(Explanatory Note 3). 42 7 3 1 91 96
45 7 3 1 91 96
6.2 There shall be no joints made in the finished steel wires. 48 7 3 1 91 96
54 7 3 1 91 96
7. Lay Factors
72 7 4 1 90 96
7.1 The length of lay in the various layers of wire in a
conductor shall conform to Table 2 (Explanatory Note 4). 16 19 1 2 96 93
7.2 The direction of lay of the outside layer of aluminum- 30 19 2 2 93 93
54 19 3 2 91 93
alloy wires shall be right-hand unless otherwise specified in the 76 19 4 2 90 93
purchase order. The direction of lay of the aluminum alloy and 84 19 4 2 90 93
steel wires shall be reversed in successive layers.
8. Construction upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of
8.1 The number and diameter of aluminum alloy and steel placing an order. If tested, the breaking strength of the
wires and the areas of cross section of aluminum alloy wires conductor shall be not less than the rated strength if failure
shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 1. occurs in the free length at least 25 mm beyond the end of
either gripping device, or shall be not less than 95 % of the
9. Rated Strength of Conductor rated strength if failure occurs inside, or within 25 mm of the
9.1 The rated strength of a conductor shall be taken as the end of, either gripping device (Explanatory Note 5).
aggregate strength of the aluminum alloy and steel compo- 9.3 Rated strength and breaking strength values shall be
nents, calculated as follows: The strength contribution of the rounded to three significant figures, in the final value only, in
aluminum-alloy wires shall be taken as the percentage, accord- accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
ing to the number of layers of aluminum-alloy wires indicated
in Table 3, of the sum of the strengths of the 6201 wires, 10. Density
calculated from their specified nominal wire diameter and the 10.1 For the purpose of calculating mass, cross sections,
appropriate specified minimum average tensile strength given etc., the density of aluminum-alloy 6201 shall be taken as 2690
in Specification B 398M. The strength contribution of the steel kg/m3 at 20°C.
core wires shall be taken as the percentage, according to the 10.2 For the purpose of calculating mass, cross sections,
number of layers of steel wires, indicated in Table 3, of the sum etc., 3the density of coated steel wire shall be taken as 7780
of the strengths of the steel wires, calculated from their kg/m at 20°C.
specified nominal wire diameter and the appropriate specified 10.3 For the purpose of calculating mass, cross sections,
ultimate tensile strength given in Specification B 498M, B 341, etc., the density of aluminum-clad steel wire shall be taken as
B 502, B 606, B 802M, or B 803, whichever is applicable. 6590 kg/m3 at 20°C.
9.1.1 The rated strengths of conductors calculated in accor-
dance with 9.1 and 9.3 and using steel wires in accordance with 11. Mass and Electrical Resistance
Specification B 498M or B 802M, Class A coating are shown 11.1 The mass and electrical resistance of a unit length of
in Table 1. stranded conductor are a function of the length of lay. The
9.2 Tests for demonstration of rated strength of a conductor approximate mass and electrical resistance may be determined
are not required by this specification but may be made if agreed using the standard increments shown in Table 4. When greater

TABLE 2 Lay Factors of Aluminum-Alloy Conductors Steel Reinforced

Ratio of Length of Lay of a Layer to Nominal Outside Diameter of That Layer
Aluminum-Alloy Wire Layers Steel Wire Layers
Stranding
First (Outside) Second Third Fourth 12-Wire 6-Wire
Min PrefA Max Min Pref Max Min Max Min Max Min Pref Max Min Pref Max
84/19 10 11 13 10 13 16 10 17 10 17 16 20 24 18 25 30
76/19 10 11 13 10 13 16 10 17 10 17 16 20 24 18 25 30
54/19 10 11 13 10 13 16 10 17 ... ... 16 20 24 18 25 30
54/7 10 11 13 10 13 16 10 17 ... ... ... ... ... 18 25 30
30/7 10 11 13 10 13 16 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 18 25 30
26/7 10 11 13 10 13 16 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 18 25 30
A
Preferred (Pref).

3
 B 711
TABLE 4 Standard Increments Due to Stranding Specification B 398 after stranding. Routine production testing
Stranding of after stranding is not required.
AACSR Increment (Increase), % 14.3 Routine production testing after stranding is not re-
Number of Wires
quired. However, when such tests are requested by the pur-
Mass
Aluminum Electrical chaser and agreed upon by the manufacturer at the time of
Steel Aluminum
Alloy Steel Resistance ordering (or made for other reasons), aluminum wires removed
Alloy
from the completed conductor shall have tensile strengths of
12 7 2.5 0.4 2.5
24 7 2.5 0.4 2.5
not less than 95 % of the minimum tensile strength specified
26 7 2.5 0.4 2.5 for the wire before stranding. The electrical resistivity shall
30 7 2.75 0.4 2.75 meet the minimum resistivity specified for wire before strand-
42 7 2.5 0.4 2.5
ing. Elongation tests may be made for information purposes
45 7 2.5 0.4 2.5 only and no minimum values are assigned (Explanatory Note
48 7 2.5 0.4 2.5 7). The frequency of these tests shall be decided upon between
54 7 2.5 0.4 2.5
72 7 3.0 0.4 3.0
the purchaser and the manufacturer.
14.4 Tests for all properties of steel wire shall be made
16 19 2.5 0.6 2.5 before stranding (Explanatory Note 7).
30 19 2.75 0.6 2.75
54 19 3.0 0.6 3.0 15. Inspection
76 19 3.0 0.6 3.0
84 19 3.0 0.6 3.0 15.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
order, the manufacturer shall be responsible for the perfor-
mance of all inspection and test requirements specified.
accuracy is desired, the increment based on the specific lay of 15.2 All inspections and tests shall be made at the place of
the conductor may be calculated (Explanatory Note 6). manufacture unless otherwise especially agreed to between the
11.2 In the calculation of the electrical resistance of a manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of the purchase.
completed conductor, the resistivity of coated steel core wires 15.3 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent-
shall be taken as 0.19157 V-mm2/m at 20°C, and the resistivity ing the purchaser all reasonable manufacturer’s facilities to
of aluminum-clad steel core wires shall be taken as 0.0848 satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
V-mm2/m at 20°C. with this specification.
12. Variation in Area 16. Product Marking
12.1 The area of cross section of the aluminum-alloy wires 16.1 The net mass, length, size, kind of conductor, strand-
of a conductor shall be not less than 98 % of the area specified. ing, type of coating, class of coating (if used), and any other
Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the manufacturer necessary identification shall be marked on a tag attached to the
may have the option of determining the cross-sectional area by end of the conductor inside the package. This same informa-
either of the following methods, except that in case of question tion, together with the purchase order number, the manufac-
regarding area compliance, the method of 12.1.2 shall be used: turer’s serial number (if any), and all shipping marks and other
12.1.1 The area of cross section may be determined by information required by the purchaser shall appear on the
calculations from diameter measurements, expressed to three outside of the package.
decimal places, of the component aluminum wires at any point
17. Packaging and Package Marking
when measured perpendicularly to their axes.
12.1.2 The area of cross section of the aluminum-alloy 17.1 Package sizes and kind of package, reels or coils, shall
wires of a conductor may be determined by Test Method be agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser
B 263. In applying that method the increment in linear density (Explanatory Note 8).
resulting from stranding may be the applicable value specified 17.2 There shall be only one length of conductor on a reel.
in 11.1 or may be calculated from the measured component 17.3 The conductors shall be protected against damage in
dimensions of the sample under test. In case of question ordinary handling and shipping. If heavy wood lagging is
regarding area compliance, the actual linear density increment required, it shall be specified by the purchaser at the time of
due to stranding shall be calculated. placing the purchaser order.
18. Keywords
13. Finish
18.1 aluminum conductor; aluminum-alloy conductor;
13.1 The conductor shall be free of imperfections not
aluminum-allow conductor—steel reinforced; electrical con-
consistent with good commercial practice.
ductor; electrical conductor—aluminum; stranded aluminum
14. Mechanical and Electrical Tests conductor; stranded electrical conductor
14.1 Tests for mechanical and electrical properties of EXPLANATORY NOTES
aluminum-alloy wires shall be made before stranding (Ex- NOTE 1—In this specification only concentric-lay-stranded aluminum-
planatory Note 7). alloy conductor, steel-reinforced, are specifically designated.
14.2 All aluminum-alloy wires composing the conductors NOTE 2—For definitions of terms relating to conductors, refer to
shall be capable of meeting the bending properties stated in Terminology B 354.

4
 B 711
NOTE 3—The behavior of properly spaced wire joints in stranded
conductors is related to both their tensile strength and elongation. Because
of its higher elongation properties, the lower-strength electric-butt weld
gives equivalent over-all performance to that of a cold-pressure weld or an
electric-butt, cold-upset weld in stranded conductors.
NOTE 4—The preferred ratio of the lay with respect to the outside
diameter of a layer of wires varies for different layers and for different
diameters of the conductor, being larger for the inside layers than for the
outside layer, and larger for conductors of small diameter than for those of
larger diameter.
NOTE 5—To test AACSR for breaking strength successfully as a unit
requires special devices for gripping the ends of the aluminum-alloy and
steel wires without causing damage that may result in failure below the
actual strength of the conductor. Various special dead-end devices are
available such as compression sleeves and split sleeves, but ordinary jaws
or clamping devices usually are not suitable.
NOTE 6—The increment of mass or electrical resistance of a completed
concentric-lay-stranded conductor, k, in percent is:
k 5 100~m 2 1!
where m is the stranding factor, and is also the ratio of the mass or
electrical resistance of a unit length of stranded conductor to that of a solid
conductor of the same cross-sectional area or of a stranded conductor with
infinite length of stranding, that is, all wires parallel to the conductor axis.
The stranding factor m for the completed stranded conductor is the
numerical average of the stranding factors for each of the individual wires
in the conductor, including the straight core wire, if any (for which the
stranding factor is unity). The stranding factor (mind) for any given wire in
a concentric-lay-stranded conductor is:
mind 5 =1 1 ~9.8696/n2!
where n 5 length of lay/diameter of helical path of the wire. The
derivation of the above is given in NBS Handbook 100.
The factors k and m for composite conductors are to be determined
separately for each different material involved.
NOTE 7—Wires unlaid from conductor may have different mechanical
properties from those of the wire when prepared for stranding because of
the deformation brought about by stranding and by straightening for test.
If tests on steel wires are to be made after stranding, the purchaser and the
manufacturer at the time of placing the order should agree on the
properties to be met.
NOTE 8—Owing to the variation in coil masses, etc., it is common
practice to allow a permissible variation in length of 65 % for sizes larger
than 40 mm2 and a tolerance of 610 % on sizes 40 mm2 and smaller. It
is also common practice to allow an amount not exceeding 10 % of the
total weight of any one order to be shipped in random lengths but no piece
shorter than 50 % of the standard length ordered.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428.

5
 Designation: B 715 – 96 (Reapproved 2001)

Standard Specification for

Sintered Copper Structural Parts for Electrical Conductivity
Applications1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 715; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements

1.1 This specification covers sintered Powder Metal (P/M) Element Composition, %
Copper, min 99.80
structural parts of substantially pure copper of two types Other, max 0.20
depending on density. It is anticipated that the parts will be
used in applications where high electrical conductivity is
required. 5. Materials and Manufacture
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are the standard. 5.1 Structural parts shall be made by molding and sintering
The SI values in parentheses are for information only and may metal powders followed by repressing and resintering, if
be approximate. necessary, to produce finished parts conforming to the require-
2. Referenced Documents ments of this specification.
2.1 ASTM Standards: 6. Chemical Composition
B 243 Terminology of Powder Metallurgy2 6.1 The material shall conform to the requirements in Table
B 328 Test Method for Density, Oil Content, and Intercon- 1.
nected Porosity of Sintered Powder Metal Structural Parts 6.2 The chemical analysis shall be made in accordance
and Oil-Impregnated Bearings2 with the methods prescribed in Vol 03.05 of the Annual Book
E 8 Test Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3 of ASTM Standards, or by any other approved method agreed
3. Terminology upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
3.1 Definitions—Definitions of powder metallurgy terms NOTE 1—Iron contamination should be avoided. Iron in solid solution
can be found in Terminology B 243. Additional descriptive in copper has a deleterious effect on both electrical and thermal conduc-
tivity. Iron not in solid solution (admixed) has a much lesser effect on
information is available in the Related Materials section of Vol
conductivity. An example of the effect of iron on conductivity is shown in
02.05 of the Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Fig. X1.1 appended.
4. Ordering Information 7. Physical Properties
4.1 Orders for parts under this specification shall include the 7.1 Density:
following information: 7.1.1 The density shall be determined by Test Method
4.1.1 Dimensions (see Section 9), B 328. If the density does not vary more than 0.3 g/cm3 from
4.1.2 Chemical composition (see 6.1 and Table 1), one section of the structural part to any other section, the
4.1.3 Density (see 7.1 and Table 2), overall density shall fall within the limits prescribed in Table 2.
4.1.4 Mechanical properties (see Section 8), If the density varies more than 0.3 g/cm3 from one section of
4.1.5 Electrical properties (see 7.2), the part to another, the manufacturer and the purchaser shall
4.1.6 Certification (see Section 13), and agree upon a critical section of the part where the stresses are
4.1.7 Metallography (see Section 14). highest. The density of this critical section, rather than the
average density, shall fall within the limits prescribed in Table
2.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B09 on Metal
Powders and Metal Powder Products and is the direct responsibility of Subcom-
mittee B09.05 on Structural Parts. TABLE 2 Density Requirements
Current edition approved March 10, 1996. Published May 1996. Originally Type Dry Density, g/cm3
published as B 715 – 83. Last previous edition B 715 – 83 (89). I 7.8 to 8.3
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05. II 8.3 min
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 715 – 96 (2001)
7.2 Electrical Conductivity:
7.2.1 The manufacturer and the purchaser shall agree on
qualification tests to determine the electrical conductivity.4 The
test shall be made on sample parts or specimens molded to a
given density using an apparatus based on the eddy-current
principle.
7.2.1.1 Conductivity is determined with an instrument that
indicates the resistance of a material to the flow of eddy
currents. Prior to making the tests, the instrument is allowed to
warm up for a period of time recommended by the manufac-
turer. The instrument is adjusted using three standards of
known conductivity supplied by the manufacturer. Test speci-
mens must be at the same temperature as the reference
materials used in adjusting the instrument. Several readings at
different locations are taken on each test specimen to obtain a
representative average value.
7.2.1.2 No specimen preparation is required providing the
surface is flat in the probe area.
7.2.1.3 Electrical conductivity values shall be reported in
percent IACS (International Annealed Copper Standards).
NOTE 2—Typical electrical conductivity values which may be expected
from special specimens molded to size are given in Table X1.1.
8. Mechanical Properties
8.1 The manufacturer and the purchaser shall agree on both
qualification tests and limits for the determination of mechani-
cal properties. These tests shall be made on sample parts or
specimens and should be determined after consideration of the
function a part is to perform. Subsequent to the approval of the
first sample parts on which the qualification tests have been set
up, all parts in the shipment shall conform to the limits agreed
upon.
NOTE 3—Typical properties in tension which may be expected from
special specimens molded to size are given in Table X1.1.
9. Permissible Variations in Dimension
9.1 Permissible variations in dimensions shall be within the
limits specified on the drawings which describe the structural
parts that accompany the order, or variations shall be within the
limits specified in the order.
10. Sampling
10.1 Lot—Unless otherwise specified, a lot shall consist of
parts of the same form and dimensions, made from powder of
the same composition, molded and sintered under the same
conditions, and submitted for inspection at one time.
10.2 Chemical Analysis—If required by purchase agree-
ment, at least one sample for chemical analysis shall be taken
from each lot. A representative sample of chips may be
4
Taubenblat, P. W., “Techniques for Measuring and Attaining High Electrical
Conductivity with Copper Powder Compacts,” International Journal of Powder
Metallurgy, Vol 5, No. 2, April 1969, pp. 89–95.
2
obtained by dry-milling, drilling, or crushing at least two
pieces with clean dry tools without lubrication. In order to
obtain oil-free chips, the parts selected for test shall have the
oil extracted in accordance with Test Method B 328, if neces-
sary.
10.3 Mechanical Tests—The manufacturer and purchaser
shall agree upon a representative number of specimens for
mechanical tests.
10.4 At least two samples shall be taken for conductivity
measurement from each lot.
11. Inspection
11.1 Unless otherwise specified, inspection of parts supplied
on contract shall be made by the purchaser.
12. Rejection and Rehearing
12.1 Parts that fail to conform to the requirements of this
specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported to
the producer or supplier promptly, and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with test results, the producer or supplier may
make claim for a rehearing.
13. Certification
13.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
producer’s certification shall be furnished to the purchaser that
the parts were manufactured, sampled, tested, and inspected in
accordance with this specification and have been found to meet
the requirements. When specified in the purchase order or
contract, a report of the test results shall be furnished.
13.2 The purchase order must specify whether or not the
certification includes chemistry.
13.3 Upon request of the purchaser in the contract or order,
the certification of an independent third party indicating
conformance to the requirements of this specification may be
considered.
14. Supplementary Requirements
14.1 Metallographic Examination—When specified in the
purchase order or contract, either or both of the following
supplementary requirements may be applied. Details of these
supplementary requirements shall be agreed upon in writing
between the producer or supplier and purchaser. Supplemen-
tary requirements shall in no way negate any requirement of
the specification itself.
14.1.1 Sintering—Requirements for uniformity and quality
of sintering may be agreed upon.
14.1.2 Porosity—Requirements excluding excessively large
pores may be included when specified and agreed upon in
writing.
15. Keywords
15.1 conductive powder metallurgy; copper powder metal-
lurgy; electrical parts; powder metallurgy; structural copper
parts; thermally conductive parts
 B 715 – 96 (2001)
APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. TENSILE AND ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY PROPERTIES

X1.1 Typical tensile and electrical conductivity properties TABLE X1.1 Typical Tensile Properties and Electrical
of molded and sintered copper specimens are shown in Table Conductivity of Copper P/M Parts
X1.1. These data do not constitute a part of this specification. NOTE 1—Properties depend on whether specimens are: (a) in the
sintered condition only; (b) in the sintered and repressed condition; and (c)
in the sintered, repressed, and resintered condition.
Type I Type II
3
Density, g/cm 8.0 8.3 min
Ultimate tensile strength, psi 23 000 28 000 min
Ultimate tensile strength, Mpa 159 193 min
Elongation, % 20 30 min
Electrical conductivity (grade 1), % IACS 85 90 min
Electrical conductivity (grade 1), S/m 0.493 3 108 0.522 3 108

They merely indicate to the purchaser the properties that may

NOTE 1—325 mesh iron powder admixed with copper powder, com-
pacted at 20 tons per square inch (tsi) and sintered at 1000°C for 30 min
in hydrogen.
FIG. X1.1 Electrical Conductivity Loss Resulting from Iron
Contamination
be expected from special tension specimens conforming to the
specified density and chemical composition requirements. It
should be thoroughly understood that the values represent
specimens molded to size and not specimens cut from com-
mercial parts or specimens machined from sample blanks. The
tension tests are run on flat specimens approximately 1⁄4 by 1⁄4
in. in cross section with a gage length of 1 in. For specimen
size and test details, refer to Test Methods E 8. The electrical
conductivity may be measured on the finished part if it is at
least 1⁄2 in. in diameter. See also Fig. X1.1.5
5
Taubenblat, P. W., “Importance of Copper in Powder Metallurgy,” International
Journal of Powder Metallurgy and Powder Technology, Vol 10, No. 3, July 1974,
pp. 169 - 184.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 717 – 96 (Reapproved 2000)

Standard Specification for

Refined Ruthenium1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 717; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements

1.1 This specification covers refined ruthenium as sponge Composition, %

ElementA
and powder in one grade as follows: Grade 99.80 Grade 99.90
1.1.1 Grade 99.80— Ruthenium having a purity of Ruthenium, min (by 99.80 99.90
99.80 %. difference)
Platinum, max 0.02 0.01
1.1.2 Grade 99.90— Ruthenium having a purity of Palladium, max 0.05 0.005
99.90 %. Iridium, max 0.05 0.005
Rhodium, max 0.05 0.01
NOTE 1—For the purposes of determining conformance with this Osmium, max 0.06 0.005
specification, an observed value obtained from analysis shall be rounded Iron, max 0.05 0.02
to the nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures used in expressing Silicon, max 0.02 0.005
Copper, max 0.01 0.005
the limiting value in accordance with the rounding method of Practice
Calcium, max 0.01 0.005
E 29. Tin, max 0.01 0.005
Silver, max 0.01 0.005
2. Referenced Documents Sodium, max 0.01 0.005
Gold, max 0.005 0.005
2.1 ASTM Standards:
A
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Upon agreement between manufacturer and purchaser, analyses may be
required and limits established for elements or compounds not specified in this
Determine Conformance with Specifications2 table.

3. Manufacture
3.1 The material may be produced by any refining process
5.2 Lot Size—Sampling lots shall consist of the following:
that yields a product capable of meeting the chemical require-
5.2.1 Sponge—A single refining lot.
ments of this specification. The purchaser, upon request, shall
5.2.2 Powder—A single refining lot.
be informed of the refining process used.
6. Rejection and Rehearing
4. Chemical Composition
6.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of this
4.1 The material should conform to the requirements for
specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported to
chemical composition as prescribed in Table 1.
the manufacturer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case
4.2 Analysis shall be made using the manufacturer’s stan-
of dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
dard methods. In the event of disagreement as to the chemical
supplier may make claim for rehearing.
composition of the metal, methods of chemical analysis for
6.2 Investigation of Claims—In a question of chemical
reference purposes shall be determined by a mutually accept-
composition, a new sample shall be drawn by representatives
able laboratory.
of both parties in accordance with Section 5. The properly
5. Sampling mixed and quartered sample shall be divided into three parts,
each of which shall be placed in a sealed package, one for the
5.1 The value of this material is such that special attention
manufacturer, one for the purchaser, and one for an umpire, if
must be paid to the sampling procedures. The purchaser and
necessary.
manufacturer shall agree upon the sampling procedures used.
6.3 In the event of disagreement between the manufacturer
and the purchaser on the conformance of the metal to the
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on requirements of this specification by the purchaser, the umpire
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee sample is to be submitted to a mutually acceptable laboratory
B02.05 on Pressure Metals. for analysis. The results of the referee’s analysis shall be used
Current edition approved May 10, 1996. Published June 1996. Originally
published as B 717 – 83. Last previous edition B 717 – 84 (1991).
in determining conformance of the metal to this specification.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 717
7. Product Marking 8. Keywords
7.1 The material shall be legibly identified by mark, label, 8.1 ruthenium; refined ruthenium; sponge
or tag with the following information: Ruthenium (Ru) Grade
__, lot or melt number, and weight to the nearest 0.001 troy oz
(0.03g).

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 718 – 00

Standard Specification for

Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Cobalt-Tungsten-Iron-Silicon
Alloy (UNS N06333) Plate, Sheet, and Strip1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 718; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 4. Ordering Information

1.1 This specification covers wrought alloy UNS N06333 4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
plate, sheet, and strip intended for heat resisting applications requirements that are necessary for the safe and satisfactory
and general corrosive service. performance of material ordered under this specification.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded Examples of such requirements include but are not limited to
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for the following:
information only. 4.1.1 Alloy name or UNS number.
4.1.2 Quantity.
2. Referenced Documents 4.1.3 ASTM Designation and year of issue.
2.1 ASTM Standards: 4.1.4 Form (plate, sheet, or strip).
B 880 Specification for General Requirements for Chemical 4.1.5 Dimensions—Thickness, Width, and Length.
Check Analysis Limits for Nickel, Nickel Alloys and 4.1.6 Finish (Section 9).
Cobalt Alloys2 4.1.7 Certification—State if certification is required (Sec-
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3 tion 16).
E 10 Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materi- 4.1.8 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
als3 samples shall be furnished.
E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell 4.1.9 Purchaser Inspection—If a purchaser wishes to wit-
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials3 ness tests or inspections of material at the place of manufac-
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to ture, the purchase order must so state indicating which tests or
Determine Conformance with Specifications4 inspections are to be witnessed.
E 140 Hardness Conversion Tables for Metals3
E 1473 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel, 5. Material and Manufacture
Cobalt, and High-Temperature Alloys5 5.1 All material shall be furnished in the annealed condi-
tion.
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: 6. Chemical Requirements
3.1.1 plate, n—material 3⁄16 in. (4.76 mm) and over in 6.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
thickness and over 10 in. (254) mm in width. chemical composition specified in Table 1.
3.1.2 sheet, n—material under 3⁄16 in. (4.76 mm) in thick- 6.2 If a product (check) analysis is performed by the
ness and 24 in. (610 mm) and over in width. purchaser, the material shall conform to the product (check)
3.1.3 strip, n—material under 3⁄16 in. (4.76 mm) in thickness analysis variations in B 880.
and under 24 in. (610 mm) in width.
7. Mechanical and Other Requirements
7.1 The mechanical properties of the material at room
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on temperature shall conform to those shown in Table 2.
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Nov. 10, 2000. Published November 2000. Originally
8. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
published as B 718 – 83. Last previous edition B 718 – 95.
2
8.1 Sheet, shall conform to the variations in dimensions
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04. specified in Tables 3-5, inclusive.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02. 8.2 Cold-Rolled Strip, shall conform to the permissible
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06. variations in dimensions as specified in Tables 6-10 inclusive.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 718 – 00
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
Element Composition Limits, %
Carbon 0.10 max
Manganese 2.0 max
Phosphorus 0.03
Sulfur 0.03
Silicon 1.5 max
Chromium 24.0–27.0
Nickel 44.0–48.0
Molybdenum 2.5–4.0
Cobalt 2.5–4.0
Tungsten 2.5–4.0
IronA Remainder
A
Element may be determined arithmetically by difference.

TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties

Yield Strength, 0.2 % Offset, Min Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, or
Condition Tensile Strength, Min psi (MPa) HardnessA
psi (MPa) 4D, Min %
Annealed 80 000 (551) 35 000 (241) 30 75 to 95 HRB
A
Hardness values are informative only and not to be construed as the basis for acceptance.

TABLE 3 Thickness Tolerances for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled TABLE 4 Width, Length, and Camber Tolerances for Hot-Rolled
Sheets and Cold-Rolled Sheets Not Resquared Nor Stretcher Leveled
Tolerance Over and
Width Tolerances
Specified Thickness, in. (mm)
Under, in. (mm) Tolerance for Specified Width,
in. (mm)
Over 0.145 to less than 3⁄16 (3.68 to less 0.014 (0.36) Specified Thickness, in. (mm)
24 to 48 (610 48 in. (1220) and
than 4.76)
to 1220), excl over
Over 0.130 to 0.145 (3.30 to 3.68), incl 0.012 (0.30)
Less than 3⁄16 in. (4.76) 1⁄16 (1.6) 1⁄8 in. (3.2)
Over 0.114 to 0.130 (2.90 to 3.30), incl 0.010 (0.25)
over, over,
Over 0.098 to 0.114 (2.49 to 2.90), incl 0.009 (0.23)
0 under 0 under
Over 0.083 to 0.098 (2.11 to 2.49), incl 0.008 (0.20)
Over 0.072 to 0.083 (1.83 to 2.11), incl 0.007 (0.18) Length Tolerances
Over 0.058 to 0.072 (1.47 to 1.83), incl 0.006 (0.15) Tolerance, in. (mm)
Specified Length, ft (cm)
Over 0.040 to 0.058 (1.02 to 1.47), incl 0.005 (0.13) Over Under
Over 0.026 to 0.040 (0.66 to 1.02), incl 0.004 (0.10) Up to 10 (305), incl 1⁄4 (6.4) 0 (0)
Over 0.016 to 0.026 (0.41 to 0.66), incl 0.003 (0.08) Over 10 to 20 (305 to 610), 1⁄2 (12.7) 0 (0)
Over 0.007 to 0.016 (0.18 to 0.41), incl 0.002 (0.05) incl
Over 0.005 to 0.007 (0.13 to 0.18), incl 0.0015 (0.04) Camber TolerancesA
0.005 (0.13) 0.001 (0.03) Specified Width, in. (mm) Tolerance per Unit Length of
any 8 ft (244 cm), in. (mm)
24 to 36 in. (610 to 914), 1⁄8 (3.2)

incl
8.3 Plate, shall conform to the permissible variations in Over 36 in. (914) 3⁄32 (2.4)

dimensions specified in Tables 11-16, inclusive. A

8.4 Sheet, Strip, and Plate—Material with No. 1 finish may
be ground to remove surface defects, provided such grinding
does not reduce the thickness, width, or length at any point
beyond the permissible variations in dimensions.
9. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
9.1 The material shall be uniform in quality and temper,
smooth, commercially straight, and free from injurious imper-
fections.
9.2 Available finishes are:
9.2.1 Sheet—No. 1 finish; hot rolled, annealed, and des-
caled, and No. 2 D finish; cold rolled, dull finish.
9.2.2 Strip—No. 1 finish; cold rolled, annealed, and des-
caled.
9.2.1 Plate—Hot rolled, annealed, and descaled.
10. Sampling
10.1 Lot Definitions:
10.1.1 A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one heat.
10.1.2 A lot for mechanical properties shall consist of
material from one heat of the same condition and nominal
thickness.
Camber is the greatest deviation of a side edge from a straight line, and
measurement is taken by placing an 8-ft (2440-mm) straightedge on the concave
side and measuring the greatest distance between the sheet edge and the
straightedge.
10.2 Test-Material Selection:
10.2.1 Chemical Analysis—Representative samples from
each lot shall be taken during pouring or subsequent process-
ing.
10.2.1.1 Product (check) analysis shall be wholly the re-
sponsibility of the purchaser.
10.2.2 Mechanical Properties—Samples of the material to
provide test specimens for mechanical properties shall be taken
from such locations in each lot as to be representative of that
lot.
11. Number of Tests
11.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per lot.
11.2 Mechanical Properties—One test per lot.
12. Specimen Preparation
12.1 Tension test specimens shall be taken from material in
the final condition (temper). Tests shall be performed trans-
verse to the direction of rolling, where width will permit.

2
 B 718 – 00
TABLE 5 Flatness Tolerances for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled Sheets
Sheets not Specified to Stretcher Leveled Standard of Flatness
Flatness Tolerance (max Deviation from a
Specified Thickness, in. (mm) Width, in. (mm)
Horizontal Flat Surface), in. (mm)
0.062 (1.57) and over To 60 in. (1524), incl ⁄ (12.7)
12

Over 60 to 72 (1524 to 1829), incl ⁄ (19.1)

34

Over 72 (1829) 1 (25.4)

Under 0.062 (1.57) To 36 (914), incl 1⁄2 (12.7)

Over 36 to 60 (914 to 1524), incl 3⁄4 (19.1)

Over 60 (1524) 1 (25.4)

TABLE 6 Thickness Tolerances for Cold-Rolled Strip in Coils and Cut Lengths

NOTE 1—Thickness measurements are taken at least 3⁄8 inch (9.5 mm) in from edge of the strip, except that on widths less than 1 in. (25.4 mm) the
tolerances are applicable for measurements at all locations.
NOTE 2—Above tolerances include crown.
Thickness Tolerances, in. (mm), for the Thicknesses and Widths Given, Over and
Under
Specified thickness, in. (mm) Width, in. (mm)
⁄
3 16 (4.8) to 6 (152), incl Over 6 (152) to 12 (305), incl Over 12 (305) to 24 (610),
excl
0.005 (0.13) to 0.010 (0.25), incl 10 % 10 % 10 %
Over 0.010 (0.25) to 0.011 (0.28), incl 0.0015 (0.04) 0.0015 (0.04) 0.0015 (0.04)
Over 0.011 (0.28) to 0.013 (0.33), incl 0.0015 (0.04) 0.0015 (0.04) 0.002 (0.05)
Over 0.013 (0.33) to 0.017 (0.43), incl 0.0015 (0.04) 0.002 (0.05) 0.002 (0.05)
Over 0.017 (0.43) to 0.020 (0.51), incl 0.0015 (0.04) 0.002 (0.05) 0.0025 (0.06)
Over 0.020 (0.51) to 0.029 (0.74), incl 0.002 (0.05) 0.0025 (0.06) 0.0025 (0.06)
Over 0.029 (0.74) to 0.035 (0.89), incl 0.002 (0.05) 0.003 (0.08) 0.003 (0.08)
Over 0.035 (0.89) to 0.050 (1.27), incl 0.0025 (0.06) 0.0035 (0.09) 0.0035 (0.09)
Over 0.050 (1.27) to 0.069 (1.75), incl 0.003 (0.08) 0.0035 (0.09) 0.0035 (0.09)
Over 0.069 (1.75) to 0.100 (2.54), incl 0.003 (0.08) 0.004 (0.10) 0.005 (0.13)
Over 0.100 (2.54) to 0.125 (3.18), incl 0.004 (0.10) 0.0045 (0.11) 0.005 (0.13)
Over 0.125 (3.18) to 0.161 (4.09), incl 0.0045 (0.11) 0.0045 (0.11) 0.005 (0.13)
Over 0.161 (4.09) to 3⁄16 (4.76), excl 0.005 (0.13) 0.005 (0.13) 0.006 (0.15)

TABLE 7 Width Tolerances Cold-Rolled Strip in Coils and Cut Lengths Edge Nos. 1 and 5
Width Tolerance, in. (mm) for
Specified Edge No. Width in., (mm) Thickness, in. (mm) Thickness and Width Given Over and
Under
1 and 5 9⁄32 (7.1) and under ⁄ (1.6) and under
1 16 0.005 (0.13)
1 and 5 Over 9⁄32 (7.1) to 3⁄4 (19.1), incl ⁄ (2.4) and under
3 32 0.005 (0.13)
1 and 5 Over 3⁄4 (19.1) to 5 (127), incl ⁄ (3.2) and under
18 0.005 (0.13)
5 Over 5 (127) to 9 (229), incl 1⁄8 (3.2) to .008 (.20), incl 0.010 (0.25)
5 Over 9 (229) to 20 (508), incl 0.105 (2.67) to 0.015 (0.38), incl 0.010 (0.25)
5 Over 20 (508) to 24 (610), excl 0.080 (2.03) to 0.023 (0.58), incl 0.015 (0.38)

TABLE 8 Width Tolerances Cold-Rolled Strip in Coils and Cut Lengths Edge No. 3
Width Tolerances, in. (mm) Over and Under, for Thickness and Width Given
Specific Thickness, in. (mm) Under ⁄ (12.7) to
12 Over 6 (152) to 9 Over 9 (229) to 12 Over 12 (305) to 20 Over 20 (508) to 24
3⁄16 (4.8)
⁄ (12.7) to 6 (152)
12
(229) (305) (508) (610)
0.068 (1.73) and under 0.005 (0.13) 0.005 (0.13) 0.005 (0.13) 0.010 (0.25) 0.016 (0.41) 0.020 (0.51)
Over 0.068 (1.73) to 0.099 (2.51), incl 0.008 (0.20) 0.008 (0.20) 0.010 (0.25) 0.010 (0.25) 0.016 (0.41) 0.020 (0.51)
Over 0.099 (2.51) to 0.160 (4.06), incl 0.010 (0.25) 0.010 (0.25) 0.016 (0.41) 0.016 (0.41) 0.020 (0.51) 0.020 (0.51)
Over 0.160 (4.06) to under ... 0.016 (0.41) 0.020 (0.51) 0.020 (0.51) 0.031 (0.79) 0.031 (0.79)
3⁄16 in. (4.76), excl

12.1.1 All material shall be tested in full cross-section size TABLE 9 Length Tolerances Cold-Rolled Strip in Cut Lengths
when possible. Specified Length, in. (mm)
Tolerance, in. (mm) Over Specified
Length, No Tolerance Under
12.2 Tension-test specimens shall be as follows:
12.2.1 Full thickness of the material, machine to the form Up to 60 (1524), incl ⁄ (9.5)
38

Over 60 (1524) to 120 (3048), incl ⁄ (12.7)

12
and dimensions shown for the sheet-type specimen in Test Over 120 (3048) to 240 (6096), incl 5⁄8 (15.9)

Methods E 8 for material up through 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) in

thickness.

3
 B 718 – 00
TABLE 10 CamberA Tolerances Cold-Rolled Strip in Coils and 14. Inspection
Cut Lengths
14.1 Inspection of the material by the purchaser shall be as
Specified Width, in. (mm) Tolerance in. (mm) Per Unit Length
of any 8 ft (2440 mm)
agreed upon by the purchaser and the supplier as part of the
Up to 1 1⁄2 (38.1), incl 1⁄2 (12.7) purchase contract.
Over 1 1⁄2 (38.1) to 24 (609.6), excl 1⁄4 (6.4)

A
Camber is the deviation of a side edge from a straight line, and measurement 15. Rejection and Rehearing
is taken by placing an 8-ft (2440-mm) straightedge on the concave side and
measuring the greatest distance between the strip edge and the straight edge.
15.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
12.2.2 The largest possible round specimen shown in Test dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
Methods E 8 for material over 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm). supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
13. Test Methods 16. Certification
13.1 Chemical Composition—Test Methods E 1473. 16.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
13.2 Tension Test—Test Methods E 8. producer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished to the
13.3 Rockwell Hardness—Test Methods E 18. purchaser that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested,
13.4 Brinell Hardness—Test Method E 10. and inspected in accordance with this specification and has
13.5 Hardness Conversion—Hardness Conversion Tables been found to meet the requirements. When specified in the
E140. purchase order or contract, a report of the test results shall be
13.6 Rounding Method—For purposes of determining com- furnished.
pliance with the limits in this specification, an observed value
or a calculated value shall be rounded off as indicated below, in 17. Packaging and Marking
accordance with the rounding-off method of Practice E 29. 17.1 Material shall be bundled or boxed in such a manner as
Requirement
Rounded-Off Unit for Observed or Calcu- to assure undamaged delivery to its destination when properly
lated Value transported by a common carrier.
Chemical composition nearest unit in the last right-hand place of
hardness and tolerances (when figures of the specified limit. If two choices 17.2 Each piece (or bundle, where applicable) shall be
expressed in decimals) are possible, as when the digits dropped marked with the grade of the material or UNS number and heat
are exactly a 5 or a 5 followed only by ze- number.
ros, choose the one ending in an even digit
with zero defined as an even digit.
Tensile and yield strengths nearest 1000 psi (6.9 MPa) 18. Keywords
Elongation nearest 1 % 18.1 plate; sheet; strip; UNS N06333

4
 B 718 – 00
TABLE 11 Permissible Variations in Thickness for PlatesA
Width, in. (mm)
Over 84 (2134) to 120 Over 120 (3048) to 144
Specified Thickness, in. (mm) To 84 (2134), incl Over 144 (3658)
(3048), incl (3658), incl
Tolerance Over specified Thickness,A,B in. (mm)
⁄ (4.76) to 3⁄8 (9.52). excl
3 16 0.045 (1.14) 0.050 (1.27) ... ...
3⁄8 (9.52) to 3⁄4 (19.05), excl 0.055 (1.40) 0.060 (1.52) 0.075 (1.90) 0.090 (2.29)
3⁄4 (19.05) to 1 (25.40), excl 0.060 (1.52) 0.065 (1.65) 0.085 (2.16) 0.100 (2.54)
1 (25.40) to 2 (50.80), excl 0.070 (1.78) 0.075 (1.90) 0.095 (2.41) 0.115 (2.92)
2 (50.80) to 3 (76.20), excl 0.125 (3.18) 0.150 (3.81) 0.175 (4.44) 0.200 (5.08)
3 (76.20) to 4 (101.6), excl 0.175 (4.44) 0.210 (5.33) 0.245 (6.22) 0.280 (7.11)
A
Thickness is measured along the longitudinal edges of the plate at least 3⁄8 in. (9.52 mm), but not more than 3 in. (76.20 mm), from the edge.
B
For circles, the over thickness tolerances in this table apply to the diameter of the circle corresponding to the width ranges shown. For plates of irregular shape, the
over thickness tolerances apply to the greatest width corresponding to the width ranges shown. For plates up to 10 in. (254.0 mm), incl, in thickness, the tolerance under
the specified thickness is 0.010 in. (0.25 mm).

5
 B 718 – 00
TABLE 12 Width and Length Tolerances for PlatesA,B
Tolerance Over Specified Width and Length for Given Width, Length, and Thickness, in.
Width, in. Length, in. Under 3⁄8 in. ⁄ to 1⁄2 in., incl, in Thickness
38 Over 1⁄2 in. in Thickness
Width Length Width Length Width Length
48 and under 144 and under 18 ⁄ ⁄
3 16 3 16⁄ 14 ⁄ ⁄
5 16 38 ⁄
Over 48 to 60, incl ⁄
3 16 14 ⁄ 14 ⁄ ⁄
5 16 38 ⁄ ⁄
7 16

Over 60 to 84, incl 14 ⁄ ⁄

5 16 ⁄
5 16 † 38 ⁄ ⁄
7 16 12 ⁄
Over 84 to 108, incl ⁄
5 16 38 ⁄ 38⁄ † ⁄
7 16 ⁄
12 ⁄
9 16

Over 108 38 ⁄ ⁄
7 16 7⁄16 † 12 ⁄ 5⁄8 11 16 ⁄

48 and under over 144 to 240 ⁄

3 16 38 ⁄ ⁄14 ⁄
12 ⁄
5 16 ⁄
58

Over 48 to 60, incl 14⁄ ⁄

7 16 ⁄
5 16 ⁄
58 ⁄
38 ⁄
34

Over 60 to 84, incl 3⁄8 12 ⁄ 7⁄16 11⁄16 1⁄2 3⁄4

Over 84 to 108, incl 7⁄16 ⁄

9 16 1⁄2 3⁄4 5⁄8 7⁄8

Over 108 1⁄2 58 ⁄ 5⁄8 7⁄8 11⁄16 1

48 and under over 240 to 360 14 ⁄ ⁄

12 5 16⁄ ⁄
58 ⁄
38 ⁄
34

Over 48 to 60, incl ⁄

5 16 ⁄
58 ⁄ 38 ⁄
34 ⁄
12 ⁄
34

Over 60 to 84, incl 7⁄16 11⁄16 1⁄2 3⁄4 5⁄8 7⁄8

Over 84 to 108, incl 9⁄16 3⁄4 5⁄8 7⁄8 3⁄4 1

Over 108 5⁄8 7⁄8 11⁄16 1 7⁄8 1

60 and under over 360 to 480 ⁄

7 16 11⁄8 ⁄
12 11⁄4 ⁄
58 13⁄8
Over 60 to 84, incl 12 ⁄ 11⁄4 ⁄
58 13⁄8 ⁄
34 11⁄2
Over 84 to 108, incl ⁄
9 16 11⁄4 3⁄4 13⁄8 7⁄8 11⁄2
Over 108 34 ⁄ 13⁄8 7⁄8 11⁄2 1 15⁄8

60 and under over 480 to 600 ⁄

7 16 11⁄4 ⁄
12 11⁄2 ⁄
58 15⁄8
Over 60 to 84, incl ⁄
12 13⁄8 ⁄
58 11⁄2 ⁄
34 15⁄8
Over 84 to 108, incl 5⁄8 13⁄8 3⁄4 11⁄2 7⁄8 15⁄8
Over 108 3⁄4 11⁄2 7⁄8 15⁄8 1 13⁄4

60 and under over 600 ⁄

12 13⁄4 ⁄
58 17⁄8 ⁄
34 17⁄8
Over 60 to 84, incl ⁄
58 13⁄4 ⁄
34 17⁄8 ⁄
78 17⁄8
Over 84 to 108, incl 5⁄8 13⁄4 3⁄4 17⁄8 7⁄8 17⁄8
Over 108 7⁄8 13⁄4 1 2 11⁄8 21⁄4
Tolerance Over Specified Width and Length for Given Width, Length, and
Thickness, mm
Width, mm Length, mm Under 9.5 mm 9.5 to 12.7 mm, incl in Over 12.7 mm in
Thickness Thickness
Width Length Width Length Width Length
1219 mm and under 3.2 4.8 4.8 6.4 7.9 9.5
Over 1219 to 1524, incl 3658 and under 4.8 6.4 6.4 7.9 9.5 11.1
Over 1524 to 2134, incl 6.4 7.9 7.9 9.5 11.1 12.7
Over 2134 to 2743, incl 7.9 9.5 9.5 11.1 12.7 14.3
Over 2743 9.5 11.1 11.1 12.7 15.9 17.5

1219 mm and under 4.8 9.5 6.4 12.7 7.9 15.9

Over 1219 to 1524, incl over 3658 to 6096 6.4 11.1 7.9 15.9 9.5 19.1
Over 1524 to 2134, incl 9.5 12.7 11.1 17.5 12.7 19.1
Over 2134 to 2743, incl 11.1 14.3 12.7 19.1 15.9 22.2
Over 2743 12.7 15.9 15.9 22.2 17.5 25.4

1219 mm and under 6.4 12.7 7.9 15.9 9.5 19.1

Over 1219 to 1524, incl over 6096 to 9144 7.9 15.9 9.5 19.1 12.7 19.1
Over 1524 to 2134, incl 11.1 17.5 12.7 19.1 15.9 22.2
Over 2134 to 2743, incl 14.3 19.1 15.9 22.2 19.1 25.4
Over 2743 15.9 22.2 17.5 25.4 22.2 25.4

1524 mm and under 11.1 28.6 12.7 31.8 15.9 34.9

Over 1524 to 2134, incl over 9144 to 12 192 12.7 31.8 15.9 34.9 19.1 38.1
Over 2134 to 2743, incl 14.3 31.8 19.1 34.9 22.2 38.1
Over 2743 19.1 34.9 22.2 38.1 25.4 41.3

1524 mm and under 11.1 31.8 12.7 38.1 15.9 41.3

Over 1524 to 2134, incl over 12 192 to 15 240 12.7 34.9 15.9 38.1 19.1 41.3
Over 2134 to 2743, incl 15.9 34.9 19.1 38.1 22.2 41.3
Over 2743 19.1 38.1 22.2 41.3 25.4 44.3

1524 mm and under 12.7 44.5 15.9 47.6 19.1 47.6

Over 1524 to 2134, incl over 15 240 15.9 44.5 19.1 47.6 22.2 47.6
Over 2134 to 2743, incl 15.9 44.5 19.1 47.6 22.2 47.6
Over 2743 22.2 44.5 25.4 50.8 28.6 57.2
A
The tolerance under specified width and length is 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm).
B
Rectangular plates over 1 in. (25.4 mm) in thickness are not commonly sheared and are machined or otherwise cut to length and width or produced in the size as rolled,
uncropped.
† Editorially corrected. 6
 B 718 – 00
TABLE 13 Camber Tolerance for Plates
Tolerance = ⁄ in. (3.2 mm) 3 [ft(cm) of length/5 ft (152 cm)]
18

TABLE 14 Flatness Tolerances for Plates, in.

Flatness Tolerance (Deviation from A Flat Horizontal Surface) for Thickness and Width Given, in.
Width, in.
Specified Thickness, in.
Over 48 to 60, 96 to 108, 108 to 120, 120 to 144, 144 and
48 and Under 60 to 72, excl 72 to 84, excl 84 to 96, excl
excl excl excl excl Over
⁄ to 1⁄4 , excl
3 16 34⁄ 1 1⁄16 11⁄4 13⁄8 15⁄8 15⁄8 17⁄8 2
⁄ to 3⁄8 , excl
14 ⁄
11 16 3⁄4 ⁄
15 16 11⁄8 13⁄8 1 7⁄16 1 9⁄16 17⁄8
3⁄8 to 1⁄2 , excl 1⁄2 9⁄16 11⁄16 3⁄4 15⁄16 11⁄8 11⁄4 17⁄16
1⁄2 to 3⁄4 , excl 1⁄2 9⁄16 5⁄8 5⁄8 13⁄16 11⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄8 13⁄4
3⁄4 to 1, excl 1⁄2 9⁄16 5⁄8 5⁄8 3⁄4 13⁄16 15⁄16 1 13⁄8
1 to 11⁄2 , excl 1⁄2 9⁄16 9⁄16 9⁄16 11⁄16 11⁄16 11⁄16 3⁄4 1 1⁄8
1 1⁄2 to 4, excl 3⁄16 5⁄16 3⁄8 7⁄16 1⁄2 9⁄16 5⁄8 3⁄4 1
4 to 6, excl 1⁄4 3⁄8 1⁄2 9⁄16 5⁄8 3⁄4 7⁄8 1 1 1⁄8
Flatness Tolerance (Deviation from A Flat Horizontal Surface) for Thickness and Width Given, mm
Specified Thickness, mm Width, mm
1219 and Over 1524 to 1829 to 2134 to 2438 to 2743 to 3048 to 3658
Under 1219 to 1829, 2134, 2438, 2743, 3048, 3658, and
1524, excl excl excl excl excl excl Over
excl
4.76 to 6.35, excl 19.1 27.0 31.8 34.9 41.3 41.6 47.6 50.8
6.35 to 9.53, excl 17.5 19.1 23.8 28.6 34.9 36.5 39.7 47.6
9.53 to 12.7, excl 12.7 14.3 17.5 19.1 23.8 28.6 31.8 36.5 44.5
12.7 to 19.05, excl 12.7 14.3 15.9 15.9 20.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 34.9
19.05 to 25.4, excl 12.7 14.3 15.9 15.9 19.1 20.6 23.8 25.4 28.6
25.4 to 38.1, excl 12.7 14.3 14.3 14.3 17.5 17.5 17.5 19.1 25.4
38.1 to 102, excl 4.8 7.9 9.5 11.1 12.7 14.3 15.9 19.1 22.2
102 to 152, excl 6.4 9.5 12.7 14.3 15.9 19.1 22.2 25.4 28.6

7
 B 718 – 00
TABLE 15 Recommended Plate Flame-Cutting Tolerances to
Clean up in Machining
Machining Allowance per Edge,
Specified Thickness, in. (mm)
in. (mm)
Under 2 (51) 14⁄ (6.4)
Over 2 to 3 (51 to 76), incl 38⁄ (9.5)
Over 3 to 6 (76 to 152), incl 1⁄2 (12.7)

TABLE 16 Abrasive-Cutting Width and Length Tolerances

Tolerance OverA Specified
Specified Thickness, in. (mm) Width and Length, in. (mm)
Width Length
Up to 11⁄4 (32) 1⁄8 (3.2) 1⁄8 (3.2)

Over 11⁄4 to 21⁄4 (32 to 70) 3⁄16 (4.8) 3⁄16 (4.8)

A
The tolerance under specified width and length is 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm).

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

8
 Designation: B 719 – 00

Standard Specification for

Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Cobalt-Tungsten-
Iron-Silicon Alloy (UNS N06333) Bar1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 719; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 4. Ordering Information

1.1 This specification covers wrought alloy UNS N06333 in
the form of hot-finished and cold-finished bars and flats
intended for heat resisting applications and general corrosive
service.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 880 Specification for General Requirements for Chemical
Check Analysis Limits for Nickel, Nickel Alloys and
Cobalt Alloys2
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3
E 10 Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materi-
als3
E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials3
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications4
E 140 Hardness Conversion Tables for Metals3
E 1473 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel,
Cobalt and High-Temperature Alloys5
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 bars—material of round, hexagonal, octagonal, or
square solid section, furnished in straight lengths, 1⁄4 in. [6.35
mm] and over in diameter or size.
3.1.2 flats—material 1⁄4 to 10 in. [6.35 to 254 mm], inclu-
sive, in width and 120 in. [3.05 mm] and over in thickness.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved May 10, 2000. Published June 2000. Originally
published as B 719-83. Last previous edition B 719-83 (1994)
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06.
4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
requirements that are necessary for the safe and satisfactory
performance of material ordered under this specification.
Examples of such requirements include, but are not limited to,
the following:
4.1.1 Alloy name or UNS number.
4.1.2 Quantity.
4.1.3 ASTM Designation and year of issue.
4.1.4 Section (round, square, hexagonal, and so forth).
4.1.5 Dimensions, including length.
4.1.6 Finish, hot or cold.
4.1.7 Certification—state if certification is required (Section
16).
4.1.8 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
samples shall be furnished.
4.1.9 Purchaser Inspection—If a purchaser wishes to wit-
ness tests or inspections of material at the place of manufac-
ture, the purchase order must so state indicating which tests or
inspections are to be witnessed.
5. Material and Manufacture
5.1 All material shall be furnished in the annealed condi-
tion, except that cold-drawn hexagons may be given a cold
draw sizing pass subsequent to the final anneal.
NOTE 1—Hot-finished rectangular bar in widths 10 in. [254 mm] and
under may be furnished as hot-finished plate with sheared or cut edges.
6. Chemical Requirements
6.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
chemical composition specified in Table 1.
6.2 If a product (check) analysis is performed by the
purchaser, the material shall conform to the product (check)
analysis variations per B 880.
7. Mechanical and Other Requirements
7.1 The mechanical properties of the material at room
temperature shall conform to those shown in Table 2.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 719 – 00
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements 10.1.2 A lot for mechanical properties shall consist of
Element Composition Limits, % material from one heat of the same condition and cross section,
Carbon 0.10 max and no more than 40 000 lb [18 100 kg] in mass.
Manganese 2.0 max 10.2 Test Material Selection:
Phosphorus 0.03
Sulfur 0.03 10.2.1 Chemical Analysis—Representative samples from
Silicon 1.5 max each lot shall be taken during pouring or subsequent process-
Chromium 24.0–27.0
Nickel 44.0–48.0
ing.
Molybdenum 2.5–4.0 10.2.1.1 Product (check) analysis shall be wholly the re-
Cobalt 2.5–4.0 sponsibility of the purchaser.
Tungsten 2.5–4.0
IronA remainder 10.2.2 Mechanical Properties—Samples of the material to
A
Element may be determined arithmetically by difference. provide test specimens for mechanical properties shall be taken
from such locations in each lot as to be representative of that
TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties lot.
Elongation
Tensile Yield Strength, 11. Number of Tests
in 2 in. or 50
Strength, min 0.2 % offset, HardnessA
mm, or 4D,
psi [MPa] min. psi [MPa] 11.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per lot.
min%
80 000 [551] 35 000 [241] 30 75 to 95 11.2 Mechanical Properties—One test per lot.
HRB
A
Hardness values are informative only and not to be construed as the basis for
acceptance.
12. Specimen Preparation
12.1 Tension-test specimens shall be taken from material in
8. Permissible Variations in Dimensions the final condition and tested in the direction of fabrication.
8.1 All bars shall conform to the permissible variations in 12.1.1 All material shall be tested in full cross-section size
dimensions specified in Tables 3-8, inclusive. when possible. When a full cross-section size test cannot be
9. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance performed, the largest possible round specimen in ASTM Test
Methods E 8 shall be used.
9.1 The material shall be uniform in quality and condition,
smooth, commercially straight, and free from injurious imper- 13. Test Methods
fections.
13.1 Determine the chemical composition, mechanical, and
10. Sampling other properties of the material as enumerated in this specifi-
10.1 Lot Definitions: cation, in case of disagreement, in accordance with the
10.1.1 A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one heat. following methods:
TABLE 3 Permissible Variations in Size of Hot-Rolled Round and Square Bars

NOTE 1—Out of round is the difference between the maximum and minimum diameters of the bar, measured at the same cross section.
NOTE 2—Out of square section is the difference in the two dimensions at the same cross section of a square bar, each dimension being the distance
between opposite faces.
NOTE 3—Size tolerances for rounds in the size range from 1⁄4 in. [6.4 mm] to approximately 5⁄8 in. [15.9 mm], which are produced on rod mills in coils,
are not shown herein.
NOTE 4—Variations in size of coiled product made on rod mills are greater than size tolerances for product made on bar mills.
Out of Round (Note 1 )
Specified Size Size Tolerance or Out of Square Section
(Note 2)
Over Under
in. mm in. mm
in. mm in. mm
1⁄4 to 5⁄16 6.4 to 7.9 0.005 0.13† 0.005 0.13 0.008 0.20
Over 5⁄16 to 7⁄16 7.9 to 11.1 0.006 0.15 0.006 0.15 0.009 0.23
Over 7⁄16 to 5⁄8 11.1 to 15.9 0.007 0.18 0.007 0.18 0.010 0.25
Over 5⁄8 to 7⁄8 15.9 to 22.2 0.008 0.20 0.008 0.20 0.012 0.30†
Over 7⁄8 to 1 22.2 to 25.4 0.009 0.23 0.009 0.23 0.013 0.33†
Over 1 to 11⁄8 25.4 to 28.6 0.010 0.25 0.010 0.25 0.015 0.38
Over 11⁄8 to 11⁄4 28.6 to 31.8 0.011 0.28 0.011 0.28 0.016 0.41
Over 11⁄4 to 13⁄8 31.8 to 34.9 0.012 0.30† 0.012 0.30† 0.018 0.46
Over 13⁄8 to 11⁄2 34.9 to 38.1 0.014 0.36 0.014 0.36 0.021 0.53
Over 11⁄2 to 2 38.1 to 50.8 1⁄64 0.4 1⁄64 0.4 0.023 0.58
Over 2 to 21⁄2 50.8 to 63.5 1⁄32 0.8 0 0.023 0.58
Over 21⁄2 to 31⁄2 63.5 to 88.9 3⁄64 1.2 0 0.035 0.89
Over 31⁄2 to 41⁄2 88.9 to 114.3 1⁄16 1.6 0 0.046 1.17
Over 41⁄2 to 51⁄2 114.3 to 139.7 5⁄64 2.0 0 0.058 1.46
Over 51⁄2 to 61⁄2 139.7 to 165.1 1⁄8 3.2 0 0.070 1.78
Over 61⁄2 to 8 165.1 to 203.2 5⁄32 4.0 0 0.085 2.16

† Editorially corrected.

2
 B 719 – 00
TABLE 4 Permissible Variations in Thickness and Width for Hot-Rolled Flat Bars
Thickness Tolerances, in., for Given Thickness
Specified ⁄ to 1⁄2 ,
18 Over 1⁄2 to Over 1 to
Over 2 to 4, incl Over 4 to 6, incl Over 6 to 8, incl Width Tolerance
Widths, in. incl 1, incl 2, incl
Over and Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under
To 1, incl 0.008 0.010 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.015 0.015
Over 1 to 2, incl 0.012 0.015 0.031 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.031 0.031
Over 2 to 4, incl 0.015 0.020 0.031 0.062 0.031 ... ... ... ... 0.062 0.031
Over 4 to 6, incl 0.015 0.020 0.031 0.062 0.031 0.093 0.062 ... ... 0.093 0.062
Over 6 to 8, incl 0.016 0.025 0.031 0.062 0.031 0.093 0.062 0.125 0.156 0.125 0.156
Over 8 to 10, incl 0.021 0.031 0.031 0.062 0.031 0.093 0.062 0.125 0.156 0.156 0.187
Thickness Tolerances, mm, for Given Thickness
3.2 to 12.7, Over 12.7 to Over 25.4 to Over 50.8 to Over 101.6 to Over 152.4 to
Width Tolerance
incl 25.4, incl 50.8, incl 101.6, incl 152.4, incl 203.2, incl
Over and Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under
To 25.4, incl 0.20 0.25 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.38 0.38
25.4 to 50.8, incl 0.31 0.38 0.80 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.80 0.80
50.8 to 101.6, incl 0.38 0.51 0.80 1.58 0.80 ... ... ... ... 1.58 0.80
101.6 to 152.4, incl 0.38 0.51 0.80 1.58 0.80 2.36 1.58 ... ... 2.36 1.58
152.4 to 203.2, incl 0.41 0.64 0.80 1.58 0.80 2.36 1.58 3.18 3.96 3.18 3.96
203.2 to 254.0, incl 0.53 0.80 0.80 1.58 0.80 2.36 1.58 3.18 3.96 3.96 4.75

TABLE 5 Permissible Variations in Size of Cold-Finished Round Bars

NOTE 1—Size tolerances are over and under as shown in the table. Also, rounds can be produced to tolerances all over and nothing under, or all under
and nothing over, or any combination of over and under, if the total spread in size tolerance for a specified size is not less than the total spread shown
in the table.
NOTE 2—When it is necessary to heat treat or heat treat and pickle after cold finishing, size tolerances are double those shown in the table.
Specified Size Size Tolerance (Note 1)
Over Under
in. mm
in. mm in. mm
Over 1⁄2 to 1, incl 12.7 to 25.4 0.002 0.05 0.002 0.05
1 to 11⁄2 , incl 25.4 to 38.1 0.0025 0.06 0.0025 0.06
11⁄2 to 4, incl 38.1 to 101.6 0.003 0.08 0.003 0.08

TABLE 6 Permissible Variations in Length of Hot-Finished or Cold-Finished Bars

NOTE 1— Tolerances in this table apply when specific lengths are ordered. When random lengths are ordered, the length range is not less than 24 in.
[610 mm].
Permissible Variations in Length, in. [mm]
Specified Sizes of Rounds, Squares, Hexagons,
To 12 ft [3.66 m], incl Over 12 to 25 ft [3.66 to 7.62 m], incl
Octagons, and Widths of Flats,A in. [mm]
Over Under Over Under
To 2, incl 51 ⁄ [13]
12 0 ⁄ [19]
34 0
Over 2 to 4, incl 51 to 102 3⁄4 [19] 0 1 [25] 0
Over 4 to 6, incl 102 to 152 1 [25] 0 11⁄4 [32] 0
Over 6 to 9, incl 152 to 229 11⁄4 [32] 0 11⁄2 [38] 0
Over 9 to 10, incl 229 to 254 11⁄2 [38] 0 2 [51] 0
A
The maximum width of bar flats is 10 in. [254 mm].

Test ASTM Designation

Chemical analysis E 1473

Tension E8
Brinell Hardness E 10
Rockwell Hardness E 18
Hardness Conversion E 140
Rounding procedure E 29

3
 B 719 – 00
TABLE 7 Permissible Variations in Length of Hot-Finished or Cold-Finished Bars Machine-Cut after Machine Straightening

NOTE 1—Tolerances in this table apply when specific lengths are ordered. When random lengths are ordered, the length range is not less than 24 in.
[610 mm].
Permissible Variations in Length, in. [mm]
Specified Sizes of Rounds, Squares, Hexagons, Octagons, and
To 12 ft [3.66 m], incl Over 12 ft to 25 ft [3.66 to 7.62 m], incl
Widths of Flats,A in. [mm]
Over Under Over Under
To 3, incl 76 1⁄8 [3.2] 0 3⁄16 [4.8] 0
Over 3 to 6, incl 76 to 152 3⁄16 [4.8] 0 1⁄4 [6.4] 0
Over 6 to 9, incl 152 to 229 1⁄4 [6.4] 0 5⁄16 [7.9] 0
Over 9 to 12, incl 229 to 305 1⁄2 [12.7] 0 1⁄2 [12.7] 0
A
The maximum width of bar flats is 10 in. [254 mm].

TABLE 8 Permissible Variations in Straightness (Camber) 15. Rejection and Rehearing

of Hot-Finished Bars and Cold-Finished Bars
15.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
NOTE 1—Measurement is taken on the concave side of the bar with a
this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
straightedge, and it represents the greatest deviation of the side from a
straight line. to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
Hot-Finished Bars:
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
1⁄8 in. in any 5 ft, but may not exceed (1⁄8 3 number of feet in length)/5 supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
[3.2 mm in any 1.5 m, but may not exceed (2.1 mm 3 number of metres in
length)/5]
Cold-Finished Bars: 16. Certification
1⁄16 in. in any 5 ft, but may not exceed (1⁄16 3 number of feet in length)/5

[1.6 mm in any 1.5 m, but may not exceed (1.05 mm 3 number of metres in 16.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
length)/5] producer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished to the
purchaser that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested,
and inspected in accordance with this specification and has
Requirement Rounded-Off Unit for Observed
or Calculated Value been found to meet the requirements. When specified in the
purchase order or contract, a report of the test results shall be
Chemical composition Nearest unit in the last right-
and tolerances hand place of figures of the
furnished.
(when expressed in specified limit. If two choices
decimals) are possible, as when the 17. Packaging and Package Marking
digits dropped are exactly a 5
or a 5 followed only by zeros, 17.1 Material shall be bundled or boxed in such a manner as
choose the one ending in an
even digit with zero defined as to assure undamaged delivery to its destination when properly
an even digit. transported by a common carrier.
Tensile and yield Nearest 1000 psi [6.9 MPa]
strengths 17.2 Each bundle or shipping container shall be marked
Elongation Nearest 1 % with the grade of the material or UNS number and heat
14. Inspection number.
14.1 Inspection of the material by the purchaser shall be as
18. Keywords
agreed upon by the purchaser and the supplier as part of the
purchase contract. 18.1 N06333; bar

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 722 – 02

Standard Specification for

Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Cobalt-Tungsten-Iron-Silicon
Alloy (UNS N06333) Seamless Pipe and Tube1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 722; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 4.1.3 Quantity (feet or number of pieces).

1.1 This specification covers alloy N06333 in the form of
hot-finished and cold-finished seamless pipe and tube intended
for heat-resisting applications and general corrosive service.
The general requirements for pipe and tube are covered in
Specification B 829.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
4.1.4 Dimensions:
4.1.4.1 Pipe size.
4.1.4.2 Tube dimensions (outside or inside diameter and
nominal wall thickness).
4.1.4.3 Length (specific or random).
4.1.5 Certification— State if certification is required.
4.1.6 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
samples for product (check) analysis should be furnished.
4.1.7 Purchaser Inspection—If purchaser wishes to witness
tests or inspection of material at place of manufacture, the
purchase order must so state indicating which tests or inspec-
tions are to be witnessed.
5. Mechanical and Other Requirements
5.1 The mechanical properties of the material at room
temperature shall conform to those shown in Table 1. The

2. Referenced Documents TABLE 1 Mechanical Properties

2.1 ASTM Standards: Elonga-

Tensile Yield Strength, tion in 2
B 829 Specification for General Requirements for Nickel Strength, min 0.2 % offset, in. or 50 HardnessA
and Nickel Alloy Seamless Pipe and Tube2 psi (MPa) min psi (MPa) mm, or
4D, min. %
3. General Requirement 80 000 (551) 35 000 (241) 30 75 to 95
HRB
3.1 Material furnished under this specification shall con- A
Hardness values are informative only and not to be construed as the basis for
form to the applicable requirements of Specification B 829 acceptance.
unless otherwise provided herein.
sampling and specimen preparation are covered in Specifica-
4. Ordering Information tion B 829.
4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all 5.2 Any pipe or tube that shows leaks during hydrostatic
requirements that are necessary for material ordered under this testing in accordance with 9.1 shall be rejected, but any leaking
specification. Examples of such requirements include but are areas may be cut out and the pipe retested as above.
not limited to the following:
4.1.1 Alloy name or UNS number. 6. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
4.1.2 ASTM designation and year of issue. 6.1 The requirements of Specification B 829 will apply
except for hot-finished pipe and tube dimensional requirements
shown in Table 2.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee 7. Chemical Requirements
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2002. Published December 2002. Originally
7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
published as B 722 – 83. Last previous edition B 722 - 95 (2000). chemical composition specified in Table 3. One test is required
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04. for each lot as defined in Specification B 829.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 722 – 02
TABLE 2 Permissible Variations for Outside Diameter and Wall Thickness of Hot-Finished Pipe and Tube

NOTE 1—Ovality—For tube 5 in. (127 mm) and under in outside diameter the tolerance on the outside diameter applies for individual measurements
and includes ovality. For tube over 5 in. (127 mm) in outside diameter, the mean outside diameter shall conform to the permissible variations of this table,
and individual measurements shall not exceed twice the permissible variations of this table.
Permissible Variations
Outside Diameter or Inside Diame- % of Thickness of % of Thickness of
Nominal Outside Diameter, in. (mm)
ter, in. (mm) Specified Average Wall Specified Minimum Wall
Plus Minus Plus Minus Plus Minus
1⁄8 (3.2) to 11⁄2 (38), incl 0.015 (0.4) 0.031 (0.8) 12.5 12.5 28.5 0
Over 1 1⁄2 (38.1) to 4 (102), incl 0.031 (0.8) 0.031 (0.8) 12.5 12.5 28.5 0
Over 4 (102) to 8 (203), incl 0.062 (1.6) 0.031 (0.8) 12.5 12.5 28.5 0

TABLE 3 Chemical Requirements 8. Number of Tests

Composition
Element
Limits, % 8.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per lot.
Carbon 0.10 max 8.2 Tension Test— One longitudinal tension test shall be
Manganese 2.0 max made on a specimen from a pipe or tube representing 1 % of
Phosphorus 0.03
Sulfur 0.03
the pipe or tube for each lot.
Silicon 1.5 max 8.3 Pressure (Leak) Test—Each length of pipe or tube shall
Chromium 24.0–27.0
Nickel 44.0–48.0
be subjected to the hydrostatic test.
Molybdenum 2.5–4.0
Cobalt 2.5–4.0 9. Test Methods
Tungsten 2.5–4.0
IronA remainder 9.1 Pressure (Leak) Test—The allowable fiber stress for
A
Element may be determined arithmetically by difference. hydrostatic testing purposes shall be 17 500 psi.

7.2 If a product (check) analysis is performed by the 10. Keywords

purchaser, the material shall conform to the product (check)
analysis variations in Table 3 of Specification B 829. 10.1 seamless pipe; seamless tube; UNS N06333

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 721 – 91 (Reapproved 1999)
Standard Test Method for
Microhardness and Case Depth of Powder Metallurgy (P/M)
Parts1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 721; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers determination of the microhard-
ness of powder metallurgy (P/M) parts and applications of
microhardness test results to methods for determination of the
case depth. Technique for measurement of case depth of P/M
parts by observation is also outlined.
1.2 Part A: Microhardness Measurement—This procedure
covers test methods to determine the microhardness of P/M
parts with the Knoop (HK) or the Vickers (HV) indenters.
Procedures for surface preparation of the P/M material prior to
microhardness measurement are included.
1.3 Part B: Case Depth Measurement—Procedures and
methods for determination of both effective case depth and
observed case depth for P/M parts are included. The principles
of Part A on Microhardness Measurement are utilized to
measure case depth.
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values in parentheses are for information
only.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address the safety
concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility
of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and
health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 243 Terminology of Powder Metallurgy2
E 384 Test Method for Microhardness of Materials3
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of powder metallurgy (P/M) terms can be
found in Terminology B 243. Additional descriptive informa-
tion is available in the Related Material section of Vol. 02.05 of
the Annual Book of ASTM Standards.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 Part A: Microhardness is measured by using a calibrated
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-9 on Metal
Powders and Metal Powder Productsand is the direct responsibility of Subcommit-
tee B09.05on Structural Parts.
Current edition approved Feb. 22, 1991. Published May 1991.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
machine to force a diamond indenter of specific geometry,
under a known test load, into the surface of the test material.
4.1.1 Ordinarily, the impression of the indenter is measured
optically and correlated with available tables to obtain a value
in the desired hardness scale; or, the optical measurement can
be used to calculate a hardness number.
NOTE 1—This test method is designed specifically for use on P/M parts.
It is intended to be a companion to Test Method E 384. There are specific
differences that are intentional; otherwise the details on equipment and
procedures in Test Method E 384 shall be adhered to.
4.1.2 A new technique, on direct HRC equivalent, is rec-
ommended as part of the test method. It involves constructing
a plot of microhardness equivalent (HRC) versus the measured
diagonal length of the impression made in the material by the
indenter. This master plot can then be used to obtain an HRC
equivalent directly from the optical measurement.
4.2 Part B: Case Depth is defined as the distance from the
surface of a part to a point below the surface where:
4.2.1 There is a drop in hardness below some prescribed
level,
4.2.2 There is a divergence from a linear decrease in
hardness as a function of the distance from the surface, or
4.2.3 There is an easily seen transition in metallurgical
structure.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Especially for P/M materials, microhardness is useful
for determination of the actual hardness of the metal matrix.
Also, in most metallic materials, microhardness can be used to
differentiate between metallurgical phases and non-metallic
inclusions. Of particular interest, microhardness tests can be
used to determine the actual hardness of the case in surface
hardened materials and to help define the useful thickness of
such cases.
5.2 Cases, hardened layers, are used on P/M parts and metal
parts produced by other methods to provide required properties
economically. Proper engineering function of the case requires
proper hardness and a specified thickness.
6. Test Specimens
6.1 Specimen Mounting:
6.1.1 Mounting is recommended for convenience in surface
preparation, edge retention, and testing. The specimen should
be adequately supported in the mounting medium.
 B 721
6.1.2 Edge retention is important to proper depth measure-
ment of the case. The mounting material must be selected to
provide good edge retention and sufficient rigidity so that no
movement of the specimen can occur during the application of
load.
6.1.3 At sample densities below 6.6 g/cm3 it is advisable to
vacuum impregnate the specimen with a suitable resin or epoxy
to support the structure.
7. Surface Preparation
7.1 Surface preparation is critical to obtaining sound micro-
hardness measurements. With the inherent porosity of most
P/M materials it is essential in surface preparation to remove
all smeared metal and clearly identify the pores so that they can
be avoided during placement of the hardness drops and
enhance optical determination that the indent is completely
contained within solid structure. Recommended procedures for
NOTE 1—Actual curve must be developed by the user laboratory.
surface preparation are presented in Appendix X1.
FIG. 1 Example of HRC Equivalent Microhardness versus
Diagonal Length of the Microhardness Indent
8. Procedure
8.1 Part A—Microhardness Measurement:
8.1.1 A microindentation hardness test is made using a 8.2.3 Effective Case Depth Procedure:
calibrated machine to force a diamond indenter of specific 8.2.3.1 At a determined distance from the part surface, make
geometry, under a test load of 100 gf (0.9807 N) into the a minimum of three acceptable measurements. Repeat this
surface of the test material and to measure the diagonal or procedure at incremental distances from the part surface
diagonals optically. Optional loads are acceptable only upon maintaining a distance between impressions of at least 2.5
agreement between customer and producer. times the width of the smallest diagonal. Measurements obvi-
8.1.1.1 Test Method E 384 presents requirements of the ously deformed due to underlying void should be discarded.
testing machine and optical system for hardness indent mea- Indentations should not be placed in soft phases such as copper
surement. or the centers of nickel-rich austenite regions. Randomly
8.1.2 A direct HRC equivalent hardness value is obtained by encountered fine pearlite in the martensite should not be
measurement of the 100 gf (0.9807 N) Knoop or Vickers excluded as a measurement location. A lightly etched surface is
diagonal length and selecting the corresponding HRC value helpful in defining these regions, such as etching for about 6 to
from an appropriate plot of HRC versus filar unit diagonal 7 s in 2 % Nital.
length. It is assumed that the indentation is an imprint of the 8.2.3.2 Effective case depth will be determined by the
undeformed indenter. distance from the surface, beyond which, the hardness is below
8.1.3 The HRC microhardness versus Knoop or Vickers filar 50 HRC or an agreed upon value. When the hardness versus
unit diagonal length graph must be individually constructed. depth relationship is graphed, effective case depth will be at the
Four HRC standard blocks selected over the range 20 to 65 divergence point in the linear microhardness to surface depth
HRC are metallographically mounted, measured with the relationship indicated in Fig. 2.
selected microhardness indenter at 100 gf (0.9807 N) and the
appropriate diagonal measurement graphed in terms of HRC
value. A straight line is drawn between these points and future
measurements read directly in HRC value from intersection of
the indent diagonal value with the constructed line. (Fig. 1 is an
example of this graph.)
8.2 Part B—Case Depth Measurement:
8.2.1 The test procedure covers determination of case depth
in powder metal parts utilizing the prescribed principles
presented in Part A when the measurements are taken on a
properly prepared section of the part where that section’s
geometric relationship is 90 6 5° to the surface of the part.
8.2.2 Case depth will be defined as either effective or
observed case depth. Effective case depth is determined by
measurement of microhardness at a series of known distances
from the part surface to a designated hardness level. Observed
case depth is determined by measurement of the distance from
the surface of the metallographically observed case to core FIG. 2 Linear Relationship of Edge Distance versus Case
transition zone structure. Microhardness

2
 B 721
8.2.3.3 Effective case depth determined by variance from a
customer-producer agreed upon value, which is often 50 HRC,
will be the distance from the part surface to the point where the
microhardness falls below that specified value on a graph of
hardness versus depth relationship. The microhardness will be
the average value of three acceptable impressions and the case
depth the average distance those impressions lie from the part
surface.
8.2.3.4 Effective case depth determined by divergence in the
linear microhardness to surface distance relationship will be
resolved by plotting the average value of three acceptable
impressions taken at incremental distance from the part surface
versus the average distance of the three averaged impressions
from the surface. The effective case depth determined by this
technique will be the second point at which the microhardness
diverges from the linear relationship with surface depth as
illustrated in Fig. 2. A vertical line from that point of
divergence to the x axis of the plot will determine the case
depth and a horizontal line from the point of divergence to the
y axis will determine the microhardness of the case hardened
structure.
8.2.4 Observed Case Depth Procedure:
8.2.4.1 In those materials where a metallurgically deter-
mined transition zone between case and core structure can be
resolved at magnifications of 50 to 1003 the case depth will be
determined by measurement of the distance of the part surface
to the beginning edge of that zone. The beginning of the
transition from case to core is characterized by the appearance
of fine pearlite colonies mixed in with the martensite. Using a
visual estimate, the distance in from the surface where approxi-
mately 5 % of the area is fine pearlite shall be defined as the
case depth.
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. SAMPLE PREPARATION
X1.1 The methods described in this Appendix are proven
practices for metallographic preparation of a microhardness
sample. It is recognized that other procedures or materials used
in preparation of a sample may be equally as good and can be
used on the basis of availability and preference of individual
laboratories.
X1.2 Method 1:
X1.2.1 The porous samples should be free of oil or cut-off
fluid, using Soxhlet extraction if needed. The samples are then
vacuum impregnated with, and mounted in, epoxy resin, to fill
porosity and to prevent pick-up of etchants. Using a sample
cup or holder to form the mount, a 3⁄4-in. (19 mm) deep layer
of epoxy resin is poured over the sample in the cup. The cup is
evacuated to − 26 in. Hg (100 Torr) and held at that pressure
for 10 min. Ambient air pressure is restored, forcing the resin
into most of the sample. Curing can be done at room tempera-
ture or accelerated at 50°C.
3
9. Report
9.1 The report shall include:
9.1.1 The method of microhardness measurement: HK, HV,
HRC/HK, or HRC/HV. In each case, the load used in testing
shall be expressed as a subscript, for example, HK100.
9.1.2 The method of case depth measurement.
9.1.3 The case depth values.
9.1.3.1 The effective case depth is the distance from the part
surface at which the measured value falls below the specified
microhardness value or the microhardness value and distance
from the part surface that divergence from the linear micro-
hardness to surface distance relationship occurs.
9.1.3.2 For observed case depth the distance from the part
surface up to, but not including the case to core transition zone,
the microhardness of the case measured at the case edge of that
transition zone, and the magnification at which the measure-
ment was taken.
10. Precision and Bias
10.1 Precision—Using individual regression lines based
upon six-reading averages for each of five HRC test blocks
ranging from 25.4 HRC to 63.2 HRC seven laboratories found
values of a circulated unknown to average 56.5 HRC. With this
method 95 % of any future readings would be expected to
repeat in a laboratory within 4.0 HRC points at this level; for
six-reading averages, within 1.6 HRC points. For a laboratory
to duplicate any of the other laboratories, 95 % of the readings
should be within 5.3 HRC; for six-reading averages, within 2.2
HRC.
10.2 Bias—No bias can be defined since there is no way to
define true hardness, and therefore any innate deviation from
true hardness.
X1.2.2 The cured mounts are ground on 240, 400, and 600
mesh wet SiC paper, on a rotating wheel, with the polishing
direction changed 90° after each paper. Samples are etched for
1 min. in their normal etchant, for example, 2 % Nital, to begin
to open the porosity. Rough polishing opens smeared pores: 8
to 12 min total on 1 µm alumina (Al2O 3), long napped cloth
(for example, Struers felt cloth), 250 r/min, 300 g load,
automatic polisher. This polishing opens and exaggerates the
pores. The pores are then returned to their true area fraction of
porosity by polishing for 4 min at 125 r/min on shorter nap
cloth (for example, Struers MOL cloth), with 1 µm diamond
paste. Final polishing is done for 20 to 30 s on 0.05 µm
deagglomerated alumina, long napped cloth (for example,
Buehler Microcloth), 125 r/min, 75 g load, automatic polisher.
Polishing may also be done by hand, for the times indicated.
The first two polishings require moderate pressure and the final
polish requires light pressure.
X1.2.3 The metallographic structure should be free of
 B 721
smeared porosity. Generally, at 800 to 10003, the edge of a
smeared over pore will appear as a thin grey line outlining one
side of the pore, and occasionally outlining most of the pore.
X1.3 Method 2:
X1.3.1 The specimen should be carefully selected so that it
is representative of the region of interest. After selection, the
specimen may require sectioning to provide a workable speci-
men. Sectioning may be made employing a hacksaw, band saw,
abrasive, or diamond wheel. For soft materials a hacksaw is
sufficient; however, if harder materials are of interest, then an
abrasive or diamond wheel may be required.
X1.3.2 Heat should be avoided to prevent occurrence of
possible changes in microstructure. If slow feeds are employed,
a coolant may not be necessary to avoid temperature build-ups.
If abrasive wheels are used, then often a coolant is necessary to
prevent heating of the specimen.
X1.3.3 If a coolant is employed, it may be retained within
pores. The lubricant must be removed prior to preparation of
the specimen for microexamination. This may be accomplished
by using a Soxhlet extractor or an ultrasonic cleaner. The
extraction condenser is most efficient and least expensive.
X1.3.4 Generally, specimens to be evaluated for microhard-
ness are mounted to provide edge retention.4 There are many
kinds of mounting compounds available. Most common mate-
rials include epoxide or bakelite. Of the two, bakelite is
preferred because it is harder and therefore provides improved
edge retention. Bakelite requires equipment to apply heat and
pressure, whereas the epoxides do not.
X1.3.5 After mounting, the specimen is ground to provide a
flat, stress-free surface. A belt grinder is generally used first
with care to prevent heating of the specimen. Grit size is
dependent upon the preference of the metallographer, although
finer grits are preferred.
X1.3.6 The specimen is then hand ground on four emery
papers, generally of 240, 320, 400, and 600 grit.4
X1.3.7 Hand grinding is followed by wet polishing. Several
polishing media are employed including diamond paste, mag-
nesia alumina, etc. Grit size varies between 1 and 0.3 µm and
is applied to nap-free cloths, such as nylon. To remove
remaining scratches and stress, a soft cloth with finer polishing
compound is employed. Generally a short napped cloth is
preferred. A fine, 0.5 µm alumina is recommended. For best
results and to ensure complete freedom of pores from worked
metal, repeat the polishing and etching procedure. Final
polishing generally requires 3 to 5 min.
X1.3.8 Automated polishing equipment is also available.
Automated polishing is accomplished by moving the specimen
across a polishing cloth in an abrasive solution undergoing
vibrating action. Cloths and abrasives available are numerous
and are generally selected by experience of the metallographer.

4
For more specific details concerning specimen mounting and grinding proce-
dures, consult Kehl, “The Principles of Metallurgical Laboratory Practice,” ASM
Handbook, American Society of Metals, or other texts containing instructions on
prescribed metallographic practice.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 723 – 00
Standard Specification for
Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Cobalt-Tungsten-Iron-Silicon
Alloy (UNS N06333) Welded Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 723; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers wrought alloy UNS N06333 in
the form of welded pipe intended for heat-resisting applications
and general corrosive service.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 775 Specification for General Requirements for Nickel
and Nickel Alloy Seamless and Welded Pipe2
B 718 Specification for Nickel-Chromium–Molybdenum-
Cobalt-Tungsten-Iron-Silicon Alloy (UNS N06333) Plate,
Sheet, and Strip2
3. General Requirement
3.1 Material furnished in accordance with this specification
shall conform to the applicable requirements of the current
edition of Specification B 775 unless otherwise provided
herein.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
requirements that are necessary for the safe and satisfactory
performance of material ordered under this specification.
Examples of such requirements include, but are not limited to,
the following:
4.1.1 Alloy name or UNS number.
4.1.2 ASTM designation and year of issue.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2000. Published November 2000. Originally
published as B 723 – 83. Last previous edition B 723 – 95.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
4.1.3 Condition (temper) (Table 1).
4.1.4 Dimensions:
4.1.4.1 Nominal pipe size or outside diameter and schedule
number or nominal wall thickness.
4.1.4.2 Length (specific or random).
4.1.5 Quantity (feet or metres, or number of pieces).
4.1.6 Certification— State if certification or a report of test
results is required.
4.1.7 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
samples for product (check) analysis should be furnished.
4.1.8 Purchaser Inspection—If purchaser wishes to witness
tests or inspection of material at place of manufacture, the
purchase order must so state indicating which tests or inspec-
tions are to be witnessed.
5. Material and Manufacture
5.1 The pipe shall be made from flat-rolled alloy conform-
ing to Specification B 718, by an automatic welding process
with no addition of filler metal.
5.2 Pipe shall be furnished annealed after welding, with
oxide removed. When final heat treatment is performed in a
protective atmosphere, descaling is not necessary.
6. Chemical Requirements
6.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
chemical composition specified in Table 1.
6.2 If a product (check) analysis is performed by the
purchaser, the material shall conform to the product (check)
analysis variations in Table 1 of Specification B 775.
7. Mechanical and Other Requirements
7.1 The mechanical properties of the material at room
temperature shall conform to those shown in Table 2.
7.2 Flattening Test— One flattening test shall be made on
one end of one pipe from each lot.
7.3 Nondestructive Test Requirements:
7.3.1 Pipe shall be subjected to a pressure test or nonde-
structive electric test at the manufacturer’s option.
8. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
8.1 Lengths—Pipe lengths shall be in accordance with the
following regular practice.
 B 723 – 00
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties
Composition Elonga-
Element
Limits, % tion in 2
Tensile Yield Strength,
in. or 50
Carbon 0.10 max Strength, Min 0.2 % offset, HardnessA
mm, or
Manganese 2.0 max psi (MPa) min psi (MPa)
4D, min
Phosphorus 0.03
%
Sulfur 0.03
80 000 (551) 35 000 (241) 30 75 to 95
Silicon 1.5 max
HRB
Chromium 24.0–27.0
A
Nickel 44.0–48.0 Hardness values are informative only and not to be construed as the basis for
Molybdenum 2.5–4.0 acceptance.
Cobalt 2.5–4.0
Tungsten 2.5–4.0
IronA remainder length, the length shall conform to the permissible variations
A
Element may be determined arithmetically by difference. prescribed in Specification B 775.
8.1.3 No jointers are permitted unless otherwise specified.
8.1.1 Unless otherwise agreed upon, all sizes from 1⁄8 in.
(3.17 mm) to 8 in. (203 mm) nominal pipe size are available in 9. Number of Tests
a length up to 24 ft (7.32 m). The aim range will be 20 to 24 9.1 Chemical Analysis—One per lot.
ft (6.10 to 7.32 m) with the permissible range of 15 to 24 ft 9.2 Mechanical Properties—One test per lot.
(4.57 to 7.32 m). Short lengths are acceptable and the number 9.3 Flattening—One test per lot.
and minimum length shall be agreed upon between the 9.4 Nondestructive— Each piece in each lot.
manufacturer and purchaser.
8.1.2 If definite cut lengths are desired the lengths acquired 10. Keywords
shall be specified in the order. When material is ordered cut to 10.1 UNS N06333; welded pipe;

2
 B 723 – 00
TABLE 3 Dimensions of Pipe
Nominal Pipe Outside Diameter, in. Nominal Wall Thickness, in. (mm)
Size, in. (mm) Schedule No. 5 Schedule No. 10 Schedule No. 40 Schedule No. 80
⁄
18 0.405 (10.29) ... 0.049 (1.24) 0.068 (1.73) 0.095 (2.41)
1⁄4 0.504 (13.72) ... 0.065 (1.65) 0.088 (2.24) 0.119 (3.02)
3⁄8 0.675 (17.15) ... 0.065 (1.65) 0.091 (2.31) 0.126 (3.20)
1⁄2 0.840 (21.34) 0.065 (1.65) 0.083 (2.11) 0.109 (2.77) 0.147 (3.73)
3⁄4 1.050 (26.67) 0.065 (1.65) 0.083 (2.11) 0.113 (2.87) 0.154 (3.91)
1 1.314 (33.38) 0.065 (1.65) 0.109 (2.77) 0.133 (3.38) 0.179 (4.55)
11⁄4 1.660 (42.16) 0.065 (1.65) 0.109 (2.77) 0.140 (3.56) 0.191 (4.85)
11⁄2 1.900 (48.26) 0.065 (1.65) 0.109 (2.77) 0.145 (3.68) 0.200 (5.08)
2 2.375 (60.33) 0.065 (1.65) 0.109 (2.77) 0.154 (3.91) 0.218 (5.54)
21⁄2 2.875 (73.03) 0.083 (2.11) 0.120 (3.05) 0.203 (5.16) 0.276 (7.01)
3 3.500 (88.90) 0.083 (2.11) 0.120 (3.05) 0.216 (5.49) 0.300 (7.62)
31⁄2 4.000 (101.60) 0.083 (2.11) 0.120 (3.05) 0.226 (5.74) 0.318 (8.08)
4 4.500 (114.30) 0.083 (2.11) 0.120 (3.05) 0.237 (6.02) 0.337 (8.56)
5 5.563 (141.30) 0.109 (2.77) 0.134 (3.40) 0.258 (6.55) 0.375 (9.53)
6 6.625 (168.28) 0.109 (2.77) 0.134 (3.40) 0.280 (7.11) 0.432 (10.97)
8 8.625 (219.08) 0.109 (2.77) 0.148 (3.76) 0.322 (8.18) 0.500 (12.70)
10 10.750 (273.05) 0.134 (3.40) 0.165 (4.19) 0.365 (9.27) 0.500 (12.70)
12 12.750 (323.85) 0.156 (3.96) 0.180 (4.57) 0.375 (9.53) 0.500 (12.70)

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 724 – 00
Standard Test Method for
Indentation Hardness of Aluminum Alloys by Means of a
Newage, Portable, Non-Caliper-Type Instrument1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 724; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers indentation hardness testing of
aluminum alloys using a Newage, portable, non-caliper-type,
hardness instrument which provides readout values numeri-
cally equivalent to Rockwell B-scale as determined by Test
Methods E 18.
NOTE 1—This is a comparative Rockwell B test and does not provide
an actual Rockwell B test value. HRBN, the values obtained from the
Newage instrument, are numerically equivalent to Rockwell B values, but
do not represent an actual Rockwell B test in accordance with Test
Methods E 18.
1.2 This test method measures indentation hardness of
heat-treatable aluminum alloys having a hardness from 30 to
100 HRBN, a thickness greater than 1.50 mm (0.060 in.), and
pieces too large to be tested by a caliper type instrument.
NOTE 2—This test method covers two instruments (one analog and one
digital) which operate differently. Refer to the manufacturer’s instruction
for proper operation.
1.3 The flat surface size of the area being tested must be
compatible with the instrument support area and the material
must not deflect during the test.
1.4 The values stated in SI units are the standard. The values
given in parentheses are for information only.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 648 Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Aluminum
Alloys by Means of Barcol Impressor2
E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials3
E 177 Practice for Use of the Terms Precision and Bias in
ASTM Standards4
E 691 Practice for Conducting an Inter-laboratory Test Pro-
gram to Determine the Precision of Test Methods4
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.05 on
Testing.
Current edition approved June 10, 2000. Published September 2000. Originally
published as B 724–83. Last previous edition B 724–83 (1991)e1.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 Definitions of terms relating to hardness testing ap-
pearing in Test Methods E 18 shall apply to terms used in this
test method.
3.1.2 HRBN—The suffix “N,” added to the HRB scale
designation, indicates hardness numbers derived using this test
method which can be related to, but are not necessarily
identical to, Rockwell-B (HRB) values obtained in accordance
with Test Methods E 18. When reporting results derived using
this test method, this designation should follow the numeric
value.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 A portable hand-held and hand-operated instrument
rests firmly upon an aluminum alloy surface. The manual
downward movement of the tester in a steady, even and
synchronous manner toward the surface moves a penetrator
into the surface. Depth of penetration between preload and full
load as reflected on the display of the unit, (dial or digital) is an
indication of the hardness value.
4.1.1 The indicator of dial read-out units is read while the
tester is in the fully depressed position, while the digital
display of digital read-out units is read when the tester is in the
fully released position, since the reading is automatically
locked in at the preload position as the unit is being released.
NOTE 3—Another portable non-caliper-type instrument is employed in
Test Method B 648. One hand is used to operate the instrument. Hardness
numbers are given as Barcol Impressor readings.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The instrument may be used on a variety of geometries
of aluminum alloy test pieces, providing the surface being
tested has proper support for the instrument.
5.2 This test method is intended for quality assurance and
production control purposes. This test method is not intended
to be an independent material-acceptance test.
5.3 The thickness of the test piece shall be such that a mark
or bulge is not produced on the reverse side of the test piece
and the test piece does not deflect during the test.
5.4 Calibration of the instrument through the use of refer-
ence blocks is required for true comparative hardness values.
 B 724
6. Apparatus
6.1 Newage, Portable, Non–Caliper–Type Instrument, con-
taining means of applying the desired loads, an indenter and an
indicating device. This instrument interacts through hand
power and spring load to indent.
6.1.1 The indenter of dial read-out units shall consist of a
carbide tip bonded to a threaded shaft. The tip is conical, and
it shall have an included angle of 110.0 6 1.0°. The top of the
cone shall possess a flat surface of 160.0 6 10.0 µm in
diameter. The indenter of digital read-out units shall consist of
a diamond bonded to a threaded shaft. The tip is conical, and
shall have an included angle of 100° 6 1° and a flat area of 62
6 2 µm in diameter.
NOTE 4—A single indenter and load combination are used in each
instrument. The combination of load and indenter produces a result
numerically equivalent to Rockwell B.
6.1.2 A dial scale having graduations of at least every two
hardness points, HRBN shall indicate hardness on dial read-out
units. Digital read-out units shall have a digital display
resolution of 0.1 hardness points HRBN. The range of either
unit shall encompass at least from 30 to 100 HRBN.
6.1.3 For each hardness point, HRBN, the penetration of the
indenter of a dial read-out or digital read-out unit can be
estimated from Fig. 1. This relationship may vary with the
alloy and temper being used.
6.1.4 The dial read-out test instrument shall apply a preload
of 4 N and a full load of 49 N, while the digital unit shall apply
a preload of 12 N and a full load of 49 N. The hardness number
is the distance traveled by the penetrator between the pre-load
and full load, as indicated on the dial of the instrument.
7. Hazards
7.1 This instrument is delicate. Extended use in a substan-
tially dusty or corrosive environment may lead to erroneous
results.
7.2 During operation, the indenter is impressed slowly and
smoothly into the surface of the material being tested. Lateral
movement or rocking may damage the indenter.
7.3 When temperature of test piece exceeds 23°C (73°F),
lower hardness values may result.
FIG. 1 Depth of Penetration in Rockwell B Tests of Some Brass
2
8. Test Piece
8.1 The test piece shall be a portion of the material whose
area is suitable for testing (see 8.2 and 8.3).
8.2 The surface area of the material in contact with the base
area of the testing device must be free of debris and extreme
irregularity.
8.3 The contact area of the indenter shall be smooth, clean,
and free of mechanical damage. The surface may be lightly
polished to eliminate die lines, scratches, laps, seams and
surface cracks prior to hardness testing, provided the surface
hardness is not affected. A surface finish of 3.2 µm or finer is
recommended.
9. Calibration
9.1 Calibration of Aluminum-Alloy Reference Hardness
Blocks—Using a Rockwell bench-type machine, calibrated in
accordance with Test Methods E 18, an aluminum-alloy refer-
ence block should be tested and calibrated in accordance with
that method. Using the “B” scale, uniformly distribute five
impressions within a 50 mm by 50 mm (2 by 2 in.) area of the
reference block. Read the dial of the Rockwell-type bench
machine to the nearest 0.1 HRB value. The difference between
the largest and smallest of the five readings (repeatability) shall
not exceed 1.5 HRB units.
NOTE 5—The Rockwell bench-type machine should also be calibrated
using NIST traceable Rockwell B test blocks, when these become
available.
9.1.1 The 50 mm by 50 mm area of the reference block
which contains the five calibration hardness impressions shall
be suitably delineated at its boundaries and designated as the
Newage, portable instrument, calibration area. Mark the refer-
ence blocks with the average of the five hardness readings
made in accordance with 9.1.
NOTE 6—Reference Hardness Blocks used to calibrate the Newage
instrument must have a hardness value within 6 10 Rockwell B points of
the actual material to be tested.
9.2 Calibration of the Newage, Portable Hardness
Instrument—Whenever possible, calibrate the portable hard-
ness instrument using its bench-type adapter. Use of the
 B 724
instrument in this mode should minimize a possible effect of
the surface irregularities produced by the calibration hardness
indentations described in 9.1, and should provide suitable
support for both the instrument and the test block. If a
bench-type adapter is not available, the calibrated reference
block should be large enough to support its tester on the full
base cross section.
9.2.1 Make at least five hardness impressions on the refer-
ence block, separated from each other and from the impression
made by the Rockwell bench-type machine by at least 3 mm.
When making these impressions using either the dial read-out
or digital unit, press the tester against the surface of the metal
to be tested using a continuous, slow, smooth motion. Refer to
the operating manual of your unit for specific operating
instructions.
The instrument may be used in any position: horizontal,
slanted, vertical, or inverted. However, when applying the load
on a dial read-out unit, the pressure axis indicator (red dot) on
top of the instrument must remain within its concentric circle.
This tells the operator that the load is being correctly applied.
9.2.2 The average of the hardness impression shall not differ
from the calibrated hardness of the reference block by more
than 6 1.5 HRBN points nor shall the difference between the
lowest and highest hardness readings be more than two HRBN
points.
9.2.3 If the portable instrument fails calibration, adjust the
display, either dial read-out or digital in accordance with the
instructions provided by the manufacturer. Adjust the amount
necessary to bring the instrument into calibration and repeat the
calibration procedure described in 9.2.1 and 9.2.2.
9.2.4 If the results of the calibration continue to show the
accuracy of the instrument is unsatisfactory, the instrument
shall not be used to make measurements in accordance with
this test method.
9.3 Calibration Prior to Testing—An instrument in calibra-
tion for one particular aluminum alloy and temper may not be
in calibration for another alloy and temper. Therefore, it is
necessary to calibrate the instrument prior to testing, using a
hardness reference block as close as possible to the estimated
hardness of the test piece.
10. Test Procedure
10.1 Prepare the test surface in accordance with Section 8
and support the test piece so that there will be no deflection in
the test piece during the test. Uniformly support the base of the
instrument over its entire area so that sliding or rocking will not
occur during the hardness impression. Care shall be taken to
ensure that the indenter is perpendicular to the test area and that
the instrument is operated in accordance with the procedures
given in 9.2.1.
10.2 Make five hardness impressions in the test area and
report the average of these as the hardness. A distance of at
least 3.0 mm (0.120 in.) shall separate hardness impressions.
10.3 For curved surfaces, use an accessory base which
provides a V-shaped anvil support.
10.4 For recessed areas use an accessory prolongater which
extends the penetrator by a suitable amount, usually 50 mm (2
in.).
10.5 When possible use a bench adapter.
3
11. Interpretation and Recording of Results
11.1 Hardness readings shall be discarded only when a
calibration change is discovered after the readings have been
made or when improper operator techniques can be cited.
11.2 Single readings of hardness shall have a value not less
than one half the least scale graduation.
11.3 Recording of results shall include the following:
11.3.1 Identification of material,
11.3.2 Identification of test piece and location of impres-
sions,
11.3.3 Instrument model and manufacturer,
11.3.4 Accessories used to adapt the instrument to test piece
geometry,
11.3.5 Number of impressions,
11.3.6 HRB hardness of reference block,
11.3.7 Average of HRBN values, and
11.3.8 Date of test.
12. Precision and Bias
12.1 The within-laboratory, single-operator, single-
instrument, same-day relative precision of this method in the
determination of hardness (HRBN) of aluminum alloys having
a HRB of 55 (averaged over six participating laboratories) was
6 1.4; on material with HRB of 75 it was 6 1.1; on material
with HRB of 84 it was 6 0.8. In all of the foregoing, the range
corresponds to two standard deviations as defined in Practice
E 177.
NOTE 7—This section is based on results from the dial read-out
instrument and while the results from the digital readout instrument are
expected to be comparable, there is no data to support this assumption.
12.2 Repeatability Interval:
12.2.1 On the basis of test error alone, the difference, in
absolute value, of two test results obtained in the same
laboratory on the same material with HRB of about 55 will be
expected to exceed 6 1.9 HRBN only about 5 % of the time.
On material with HRB of about 75 the repeatability interval
will be expected to exceed 6 1.6 HRBN only about 5 % of the
time; on material with HRB of about 84 the repeatability
interval will be expected to exceed 6 1.1 HRBN only about
5 % of the time. Thus, if such a difference is found to be larger
than the repeatability interval, there is reason to question one or
both of the test results.
NOTE 8—For the preceding, see 16.8.3.1 of Practice E 691.
12.3 Reproducibility Interval:
12.3.1 On the basis of test error alone (including both the
within- and between-laboratory components), the difference, in
absolute value, between two test results obtained in different
laboratories on the same material with HRB of about 55 will be
expected to exceed 6 3.9 HRBN only about 5 % of the time;
on material with HRB of about 75 the reproducibility interval
will be expected to exceed 6 2.3 HRBN only about 5 % of the
time; on material with HRB of about 84 the reproducibility
interval will be expected to exceed 6 1.6 HRBN only about
5 % of the time. Thus, if such a difference is found to be larger
than the reproducibility interval, there is reason to question one
or both of the test results.
NOTE 9—For the preceding, see 16.8.4.3 of Practice E 691.
 B 724
12.4 Accuracy:
12.4.1 The accuracy of the hardness tester must be deter-
mined with reference to a standardized and calibrated bench-
type hardness tester.
12.4.1.1 Linear statistical correlation in the range from
33–90 HRB and contrasting between a bench type and portable
instrument can give product moment correlation coefficient of
0.99 + based upon six observations at nine levels.
12.4.1.2 Any future average of six tests at the same level
with 95 % confidence is expected to be 6 1.2 HRB. At the
same confidence level the future average of many observations
will be expected as 6 0.4 HRB at or near the hardness level of
70 HRB. At 40 and 100 HRB, data from a corresponding test
is expected to show the accuracy limit decreases to 6 0.7 HRB
for the future average of many observations.
NOTE 10—See “Engineering Statistics” Bowker and Lieberman
Prentice-Hall. Also, NBS Handbook 91, “Experimental Statistics,”
Natrella or other standard test for fitting straight lines.
NOTE 11—These components of variability have been estimated from
interlaboratory test results, a copy of which is on file at ASTM Headquar-
ters.5
13. Keywords
13.1 newage portable instrument
5
Supporting data have been filed at ASTM Headquarters and may be obtained by
requesting Research Report RRB07–1000.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 726 – 02

Standard Specification for

Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Cobalt-Tungsten-Iron-Silicon
Alloy (UNS N06333) Welded Tube1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 726; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 4.1.1 Alloy or UNS number,

1.1 This specification covers alloy UNS N06333 in the form 4.1.2 ASTM designation and date of issue,
of welded tube intended for heat-resisting applications and 4.1.3 Dimensions (outside or inside diameter and nominal-
general corrosive service. wall thickness),
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded 4.1.4 Length (specific or random),
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for 4.1.5 Quantity (feet or number of pieces),
information only. 4.1.6 Certification—State if certification is required,
1.3 The following precautionary statement pertains only to 4.1.7 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
the test methods portion, Section 13, of this specification: This samples should be furnished, and
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, 4.1.8 Purchaser Inspection—If purchaser wishes to witness
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user tests or inspection of material at place of manufacture, the
of this standard to become familiar with all hazards including purchase order must so state indicating which tests or inspec-
those identified in the appropriate Material Safety Data Sheet tions are to be witnessed.
for this product/material as provided by the manufacturer, to 5. Materials and Manufacture
establish appropriate safety and health practices, and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. 5.1 The tube shall be made from flat-rolled alloy conform-
ing to Specification B 718, by an automatic welding process
2. Referenced Documents with no addition of filler metal.
2.1 ASTM Standards: 5.2 Tube shall be furnished annealed after welding, with
B 718 Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum- oxide removed. When the final heat treatment is performed in
Cobalt-Tungsten-Iron-Silicon Alloy (UNS N06333) Plate, a protective atmosphere, descaling is not necessary.
Sheet, and Strip2 6. Chemical Composition
B 751 Specification for General Requirements for Nickel
and Nickel Alloy Welded Tube2 6.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
chemical composition specified in Table 1.
3. General Requirement
3.1 Material furnished under this specification shall con- TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
form to the applicable requirements of Specification B 751 Element Composition Limits, %
unless otherwise provided herein. Carbon 0.10 max
Manganese 2.0 max
4. Ordering Information Phosphorus 0.03
Sulfur 0.03
4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all Silicon 1.5 max
requirements that are necessary for material ordered to this Chromium 24.0 to 27.0
Nickel 44.0 to 48.0
specification. Examples of such requirements include, but are Molybdenum 2.5 to 4.0
not limited to, the following: Cobalt 2.5 to 4.0
Tungsten 2.5 to 4.0
IronA remainder
A
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on Element may be determined arithmetically by difference.
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved May 10, 2002. Published July 2002. Originally
6.2 If a product (check) analysis is performed by the
published as B 726 – 83. Last previous edition B 726 – 01. purchaser, the material shall conform to the product (check)
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04. analysis variations in Specification B 751.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 726 – 02
7. Mechanical and Other Requirements TABLE 3 Permissible Variations in Outside Diameter,
Ovality, and Wall Thickness of Welded Tube
7.1 The mechanical properties of the material at room
temperature shall conform to those shown in Tables 2-4. NOTE 1—(1) These permissible variations in outside diameter apply
7.2 One test is required for each lot as defined in Specifi- only to tubes as finished at the mill before subsequent swaging, expanding,
bending, polishing, or other fabricating operations. (2) Wall thickness
cation B 751. variation shall not exceed 615 % of the nominal wall thickness for tube
7.3 Flattening Test—A flattening test shall be made on each under 1⁄2-in. (12.7-mm) outside diameter, and 610 % of nominal wall
end of one tube per lot. Superficial ruptures resulting from thickness for tube of outside diameter 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) and over. (3) For
surface imperfections shall not be cause for rejection. ovality values, the tolerance for average outside diameter at any one cross
7.4 Flange Test—A flange test shall be made on each end of section does not exceed the outside diameter tolerance for the applicable
one tube per lot. outside diameter.
7.5 Nondestructive Test Requirements: Permissible Variations in Outside
Outside Diameter, in. Diameter, in. (mm)
7.5.1 Tubes shall be subjected to a pressure test or nonde- (mm)
structive electric test at the manufacturer’s option. Plus Minus
7.5.1.1 Leak Test—Hydrostatic or pneumatic (air underwa- Under 1 (25.4) 0.004 (0.10) 0.004 (0.10)
1 (25.4) to 11⁄2 (38.1), incl 0.006 (0.15) 0.006 (0.15)
ter). Over 11⁄2 (38.1) to 2 0.008 (0.20) 0.008 (0.20)
7.5.1.2 Electric Test—Eddy current or ultrasonic. (50.8), excl
2 (50.8) to 21⁄2 (63.5), excl 0.010 (0.25) 0.010 (0.25)
8. Keywords 21⁄2 (63.5) to 3 (76.2), excl 0.012 (0.30) 0.012 (0.30)
3 (76.2) to 4 (102), incl 0.015 (0.38) 0.015 (0.38)
8.1 UNS N06333; welded tube Over 4 (102) to 5 (127), incl 0.015 (0.38) 0.025 (0.63)

TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties

Tensile Elongation
Yield Strength,
Strength, in 2 in. or
0.2 % offset, HardnessA
min, psi 50 mm, or
min, psi (MPa)
(MPa) 4D, min, %
80 000 35 000 30 75 to 95
(551) (241) HRB
A
Hardness values are informative only and not to be construed as the basis for
acceptance.

2
 B 726 – 02
TABLE 4 Permissible Variations in LengthA
Outside Diameter, Cut Length, in. (mm)
in. (mm) Over Under
Under 2 (50.8) ⁄ (3.2)
18 0
2 (50.8) and over 3⁄16 (4.8) 0
A
These permissible variations in length apply to tube before bending. They
apply to cut lengths up to and including 24 ft (7.3 m). For lengths over 24 ft (7.3 m),
and additional overtolerance of 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) for each 10 ft (3.0 m) or fraction
thereof shall be permissible up to a maximum additional overtolerance of 1⁄2 in.
(12.7 mm).

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 725 – 93 (Reapproved 2003)e1
Standard Specification for
Welded Nickel (UNS N02200/UNS N02201) and Nickel
Copper Alloy (UNS N04400) Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 725; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
e1 NOTE—Keywords were added editorially in November 2003.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers nickel (UNS N02200) and low
carbon nickel (UNS N02201 and UNS N04400) in the form of
welded and annealed or welded and stress relieved pipe
intended for general corrosive service and for mechanical
applications.
1.2 This specification covers outside diameter and nominal
wall pipe in Schedules 5S, 10S, and 40S through 30-in.
nominal pipe size shown in ANSI B36.19 (see Table 1). Pipe
having other dimensions may be furnished provided such pipe
complies with all other requirements of this specification.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard.
1.4 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test methods portion, Section 12, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety problems,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to become familiar with all hazards including
those identified in the appropriate Material Safety Data Sheet
for this product/material as provided by the manufacturer, to
establish appropriate safety and health practices, and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications
E 39 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel
E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
and Tubing
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2003. Published November 2003. Originally
approved in 1983. Last previous edition approved in 1993 as B 725 – 93.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
E 571 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy–Current) Exami-
nation of Nickel and Nickel Alloy Tubular Products
2.2 ANSI Standards:3
B 1.20.1 Pipe Threads
B 36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
B 36.19 Stainless Steel Pipe
3. Ordering Information
3.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information:
3.1.1 Alloy name or UNS number,
3.1.2 ASTM designation and date of issue,
3.1.3 Condition (temper) (Table 2),
3.1.4 Dimensions:
3.1.4.1 Nominal pipe size or outside diameter and schedule
number or nominal wall thickness (Table 1),
3.1.4.2 Length (specific or random),
3.1.5 Quantity—feet or metres, or number of pieces,
3.1.6 Certification—State if certification is required (Sec-
tion 15),
3.1.7 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
samples for product (check) analysis should be furnished (9.2),
3.1.8 Purchaser Inspection—If the purchaser wishes to
witness tests or inspection of material at the place of manu-
facture, the purchase order must so state indicating which tests
or inspections are to be witnessed (Section 13),
3.1.9 Nondestructive Tests (see 6.3)—Specify either Test
Category 1 or 2. If Test Category 1 is required, specify if either
a hydrostatic, eddy-current or ultrasonic test is to apply. If Test
Category 2 is required, specify if either an eddy-current or
ultrasonic test is to apply. See Section S1.
3.1.10 Supplementary Requirements.
4. Materials and Manufacture
4.1 Pipe shall be made from flat-rolled alloy by an auto-
matic welding process with no addition of filler metal. Subse-
quent to welding and prior to final heat treatment, the pipe shall
3
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036.
 B 725 – 93 (2003)e1
TABLE 1 Dimensions of Welded Pipe

NOTE 1—The following table is a partial reprint of Table 1 of ANSI B36.19.

NOTE 2—The decimal thicknesses listed for the respective pipe size represent their nominal wall dimensions.
Nominal Wall Thickness
Outside
Nominal Diameter Schedule Schedule Schedule Schedule
Pipe Size, in. 5SA 10SA 40S 80S
in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
⁄
18 0.405 10.29 ... ... 0.049 1.245 0.068 1.727 0.095 2.41
1⁄4 0.540 13.72 ... ... 0.065 1.651 0.088 2.235 0.119 3.02
3⁄8 0.675 17.15 ... 0.065 1.651 0.091 2.311 0.126 3.20
1⁄2 0.840 21.34 0.065 1.651 0.083 2.108 0.109 2.768 0.147 3.73
3⁄4 1.050 26.67 0.065 1.651 0.083 2.108 0.113 2.870 0.154 3.91
1 1.315 33.40 0.065 1.651 0.109 2.768 0.133 3.378 0.179 4.55
11⁄4 1.660 42.16 0.065 1.651 0.109 2.768 0.140 3.556 0.191 4.85
11⁄2 1.900 48.26 0.065 1.651 0.109 2.768 0.145 3.683 0.200 5.08
2 2.375 60.33 0.065 1.651 0.109 2.768 0.154 3.912 0.218 5.54
21⁄2 2.875 73.03 0.083 2.108 0.120 3.048 0.203 5.156 0.276 7.01
3 3.500 88.90 0.083 2.108 0.120 3.048 0.216 5.486 0.300 7.62
31⁄2 4.000 101.6 0.083 2.108 0.120 3.048 0.226 5.740 0.318 8.08
4 4.500 114.3 0.083 2.108 0.120 3.048 0.237 6.020 0.337 8.56
5 5.563 141.30 0.109 2.77 0.134 3.40 0.258 6.55 0.375 9.52
6 6.625 168.28 0.109 2.77 0.134 3.40 0.280 7.11 0.432 10.97
8 8.625 219.08 0.109 2.77 0.148 3.76 0.322 8.18 0.500 12.70
10 10.750 273.05 0.134 3.40 0.165 4.19 0.365 9.27 0.500B 12.70B
12 12.750 323.85 0.156 3.96 0.180 4.57 0.375B 9.52B 0.500B 12.70B
14 14.000 355.60 0.156 3.96 0.188B 4.78B ... ... ... .. .
16 16.000 406.40 0.165 4.19 0.188B 4.78B ... ... ... ...
18 18.000 457.20 0.165 4.19 0.188B 4.78B ... ... ... ...
20 20.000 508.00 0.188 4.78 0.218B 5.54B ... ... ... ...
22 22.000 558.80 0.188 4.78 0.218B 5.54B ... ... ... ...
24 24.000 609.60 0.218 5.54 0.250 6.35 ... ... ... ...
30 30.000 762.00 0.250 6.35 0.312 7.92 ... ... ... ...
A
Schedules 5S and 10S wall thicknesses do not permit threading in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1.
B
These do not conform to ANSI B36.10.

TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties of Pipe and Tube

Elongation in 2 in.
Tensile Strength, Yield Strength (0.2 % offset),
or 50 mm (or 4D),
min, psi (MPa) min, psi (MPa)
Condition and min, %
Size Low- Low- Low-
UNS UNS UNS
Nickel Carbon Nickel Carbon Nickel Carbon
N04400 N04400 N04400
Nickel Nickel Nickel
Annealed
5 in. (127 55 000 (380) 50 000 (345) 70 000 (480) 15 000 (105) 12 000 (80) 28 000 (195) 35 35 35
mm)
and under
outside di-
ameter
Over 5 in. 55 000 (380) 50 000 (345) 70 000 (480) 12 000 (80) 10 000 (70) 25 000 (170) 40 40 35
(127 mm)
in outside
diameter
Stress-relieved
All sizes 65 000 (450) 60 000 (415) 85 000 (585) 40 000 (275) 30 000 (205) 55 000 (380) 15 15 15

be cold worked to assure that optimum corrosion resistance in
the weld area and base metal will be developed during heat
treatment.
4.2 Pipe shall be furnished with a scale free finish. When
bright annealing is used, descaling is not necessary.
5. Chemical Composition
5.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
chemical composition prescribed in Table 3.
5.2 If a product (check) analysis is performed by the
purchaser, the material shall conform to the product (check)
analysis variations in Table 3.
6. Mechanical Properties and Other Requirements
6.1 Mechanical Properties—The material shall conform to
the requirements for mechanical properties prescribed in Table
2.

2
 B 725 – 93 (2003)e1
TABLE 3 Chemical Requirements
Composition, % Product (Check) Analysis
Variations, under min or
Element Low-Carbon Nickel Nickel-Copper
Nickel (UNS N02200) over max, of the Specified
(UNS N02201) (UNS N04400) Limit of Element
Nickel, min 99.0 99.0 63.0 0.60
Copper, max 0.25 0.25 28.0–34.0 0.03
Iron, max 0.40 0.40 2.5 0.03
Manganese, max 0.35 0.35 2.0 0.03
Carbon, max 0.15 ... 0.3 0.01
Carbon, max ... 0.02 ... 0.005
Silicon, max 0.35 0.35 0.5 0.03
Sulfur, max 0.01 0.01 0.024 0.003

TABLE 4 Permissible Variations in Outside Diameter

6.2 Flattening Test Requirements—Flattening test speci-
mens made in accordance with 12.3 shall show no cracks or Permissible Variations in Outside Diameter

breaks on the inside, outside, or end surfaces. NPS Designator Over Under
6.3 Nondestructive Tests: in. mm in. mm
6.3.1 Pipe shall be subjected to the nondestructive tests ⁄ to 11⁄2 , incl
18 ⁄ (0.015)
1 64 0.4 ⁄
1 32 (0.031) 0.8
outlined in the following test categories. Over 11⁄2 to 4, incl 1⁄32 (0.031) 0.8 1⁄32 (0.031) 0.8
Over 4 to 8, incl 1⁄16 (0.062) 1.6 1⁄32 (0.031) 0.8
6.3.1.1 Category 1—Hydrostatic, eddy-current, or ultra- Over 8 to 12, incl 3⁄32 (0.093) 2.4 1⁄32 (0.031) 0.8
sonic test at the manufacturer’s option unless the purchaser Over 18 to 26, incl 1⁄8 (0.125) 3.2 1⁄32 (0.031) 0.8
specifies in accordance with 3.1.9. Over 26 to 34, incl 5⁄32 (0.156) 4.0 1⁄32 (0.031) 0.8
Over 34 to 48, incl 3⁄16 (0.187) 4.8 1⁄32 (0.031) 0.8
6.3.1.2 Category 2—Hydrostatic plus eddy-current or ultra-
sonic test at the manufacturer’s option unless the purchaser
specifies in accordance with 3.1.9.
6.3.1.3 The manufacturer shall have the option to use Test 7.3 Straightness—Material shall be reasonably straight and
Category 1 or 2 if the purchaser does not specify the test free of bends or kinks.
category options in accordance with 3.1.9. 7.4 Length—Variations from the specified length shall not
6.3.2 Hydrostatic Test—When tested in accordance with the exceed the amounts prescribed in Table 5.
requirements of 12.4, any pipe that leaks shall be rejected. Any 8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
leaking area may be cut out and the pipe retested.
8.1 The material shall be uniform in quality and temper,
6.3.3 Acceptance and Rejection—Pipe producing a signal
smooth, commercially straight, and free of injurious imperfec-
equal to or greater than the calibration imperfection shall be
tions.
subject to rejection.
6.3.3.1 Test signals produced by imperfections that cannot 9. Sampling
be identified or produced by cracks or crack-like imperfections
9.1 Lots of Chemical Analysis and Mechanical Testing.
shall result in rejection of the pipe subject to rework and retest.
9.1.1 A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one heat.
To be accepted, the pipe must pass the same electric test to
9.1.2 A lot for mechanical properties and flattening testing
which it was originally subjected provided that the dimensional
shall consist of all material from the same heat, nominal size
requirements are met.
(excepting length), and condition (temper).
6.3.3.2 If the imperfection is judged as injurious, the pipe
9.2 Test Material Selection.
shall be rejected but may be reconditioned and retested
9.2.1 Chemical Analysis—Representative samples shall be
providing the dimensional requirements are met. To be ac-
taken during pouring or subsequent processing.
cepted, retested pipe shall meet the original electric test
9.2.1.1 Product (check) analysis shall be wholly the respon-
requirements.
sibility of the purchaser.
6.3.3.3 If the imperfection is explored to the extent that it
9.2.2 Mechanical Properties and Flattening Testing—
can be identified as noninjurious, the pipe may be accepted
Samples of the material to provide test specimens shall be
without further test, providing the imperfection does not
taken from such locations in each lot as to be representative of
encroach on the minimum wall thickness.
that lot.
7. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
TABLE 5 Permissible Variations in LengthA
7.1 The outside diameter shall not exceed the permissible
variations prescribed in Table 4. Outside Diameter, in. Cut Length, in. (mm)
(mm) Over Under
7.1.1 Pipe having a specified wall thickness that is 3 % or Under 2 (50.8) 18 ⁄ (3.18) 0
less of the outside diameter cannot be straightened properly 2 (50.8) and over 3⁄16 (4.75) 0
without a certain amount of ovality resulting in the diameter. A
These permissible variations in length apply to pipe before bending. They
The limits to this ovality are stated in Footnote B of Table 4. apply to cut lengths up to and including 24 ft (7.3 m). For lengths over 24 ft, an
additional over-tolerance of 1⁄8 in. (3.18 mm) for each 10 ft (3.0 m) or fraction
7.2 The wall thickness shall not vary from nominal by more thereof shall be permissible up to a maximum additional over-tolerance of 1⁄2 in.
than 6 121⁄2 %. (12.7 mm).

3
 B 725 – 93 (2003)e1
10. Number of Tests P 5 2St/D (1)
10.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per lot. where:
10.2 Mechanical Properties—One test per lot. P = hydrostatic test pressure, psi (or MPa),
10.3 Flattening—One test per lot. t = specified wall thickness, in. (or mm),
10.4 Nondestructive—Each piece in each lot. D = specified outside diameter, in. (or mm), and
S = allowable fiber stress for material in the condition
TABLE 6 Fiber Stress Requirements for Hydrostatic Testing furnished, as follows:
Nickel-Copper
Low Carbon
Condition Nickel, Low Carbon (Allowable
Nickel,
and Size psi (MPa) Nickel Nickel Fiber Stress)
psi (MPa)
Annealed
Annealed: 5 in. (127 mm) outside 10 000 psi 8000 psi 17 500 psi
5 in. (127 mm) 10 000 (70) 8 000 (55) diameter and under (70 MPa) (55 MPa) (120 MPa)
outside diameter Over 5 in. outside 8000 psi 6700 psi 16 700 psi
and under diameter (55 MPa) (45 MPa) (115 MPa)
Over 5 in. outside 8 000 (55) 6 700 (45)
diameter Nickel-Copper
Low Carbon (Allowable
Stress relieved: Nickel Nickel Fiber Stress)
All sizes 16 200 (110) 15 000 (105) Stress Relieved: 16 200 psi 15 000 psi 21 200 psi
All sizes (110 MPa) (105 MPa) (145 MPa)

12.4.1 The test pressure shall be held for a minimum of 5s.

11. Specimen Preparation 12.4.2 Visual examination shall be made when the pipe is
under pressure. The full length of the pipe must be examined
11.1 Tension test specimens shall be taken from material in
for leaks. If any pipe shows leaks during the hydrostatic test, it
the final condition (temper) and tested in the direction of
shall be rejected.
fabrication.
12.5 Electric Test—Each pipe shall be tested with an
11.1.1 Whenever possible, all pipe shall be tested in full-
electric test in accordance with either Practice E 213 or E 571.
tubular size. When testing in full-tubular size is not possible,
12.5.1 For eddy-current testing, the calibration pipe shall
longitudinal strip specimens shall be used. In the event of
contain, at the option of the manufacturer, any one of the
disagreement when full-tubular testing is not possible, a
following discontinuities to establish a minimum sensitivity
longitudinal strip specimen with reduced gage length in accor-
level for rejection. The discontinuity shall be placed in the weld
dance with Test Methods E 8 shall be used.
if visible.
12. Test Methods (a) Drilled Hole—A hole not larger than 0.031 in. (0.79
mm) in diameter shall be drilled radially and completely
12.1 The chemical composition, mechanical, and other
through the wall, care being taken to avoid distortion of the
properties of the material as enumerated in this specification
pipe while drilling.
shall be determined, in case of disagreement, in accordance
(b) Transverse Tangential Notch—Using a round file or
with the following methods.
tool with a 1⁄4-in. (6.4-mm) diameter, a notch shall be filed or
Test ASTM Designation
milled tangential to the surface and transverse to the longitu-
Chemical Analysis E 39 dinal axis of the pipe. This notch shall have a depth not
Tension E8 exceeding 121⁄2 % of the specified wall thickness of the pipe or
Rounding procedure E 29
0.004 in. (0.102 mm), whichever is greater.
12.2 For purposes of determining compliance with the (c) Longitudinal Notch—A notch 0.031 in. (0.79 mm) or
limits in this specification, an observed value or a calculated less in width shall be machined in a radial plan parallel to the
value shall be rounded in accordance with the rounding method pipe axis on the outside surface of the pipe, to have a depth not
of Practice E 29: exceeding 121⁄2 % of the specified wall thickness of the pipe or
Test
Rounded Unit for Observed 0.004 in. (0.102 mm), whichever is greater. The length of the
or Calculated Value notch shall be compatible with the testing method.
Chemical composition and nearest unit in the last right- 12.5.2 For ultrasonic testing, the longitudinal calibration
tolerances (when expressed hand place of figures of the reference notches shall be at the option of the manufacturer,
in decimals). specified limit. any one of the three common notch shapes in accordance with
Tensile strength and yield nearest 1000 psi (6.9 MPa)
strength. Practice E 213. The depth of the notch shall not exceed 121⁄2 %
Elongation nearest 1 % of the specified wall thickness of the pipe or 0.004 in. (0.102
12.3 Flattening Test—Pipe shall be capable of withstanding, mm), whichever is greater. The notch shall be placed in the
without cracking, flattening under a load applied gradually at weld if visible.
room temperature until the distance between the platens is five
times the wall thickness. The weld shall be positioned 90 % 13. Inspection
from the direction of the applied flattening force. 13.1 Inspection of the material shall be agreed upon be-
12.4 Hydrostatic Test—Each pipe shall be tested at a pres- tween the purchaser and the supplier as part of the purchase
sure calculated by the following equation: contract.

4
 B 725 – 93 (2003)e1
14. Rejection and Rehearing letters ASTM, the specification number, condition (temper),
14.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of heat number, test category for pipe outside diameters 1.5 in.
this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported (38.1 mm) and under, and the nominal size shall be stenciled
to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of legibly on each pipe 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) and over in outside
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or diameter, provided the length is not under 3 ft (914 mm). The
supplier may make claim for a rehearing. material marking shall be by any method that will not result in
harmful contamination.
15. Certification
16.2 For pipe less than 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) in diameter and
15.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a pipe under 3 ft (914 mm) in length, the information in
producer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished to the
accordance with 16.1 shall be either stenciled or marked on a
purchaser that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested,
tag securely attached to the bundle or box in which the pipe is
and inspected in accordance with this specification and has
shipped.
been found to meet the requirements. When specified in the
purchase order or contract, a report of the test results shall be
furnished. 17. Keywords
17.1 welded pipe; N02200; N02201; N04400
16. Product Marking
16.1 The name or brand of the manufacturer, the name of
the material or UNS number from which the pipe is made, the

SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS

One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified in the
purchase order.

S1. Supplementary Requirements for Pipe Requiring S1.3 Pipe over 0.125 in. (3.175 mm) wall thickness may be
Special Consideration welded with the addition of matching filler metal.
S1.1 The pipe may be furnished without cold working.
S1.2 The pipe may be furnished without a final heat
treatment.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 727 – 04
Standard Practice for
Preparation of Plastics Materials for Electroplating1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 727; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This practice is a guide to the surface preparation of
plastic materials for decorative and functional electroplating,
where the sequence of chemical treatments may include:
cleaning, conditioning, etching, neutralizing, catalyzing, accel-
erating, and autocatalytic metal deposition. Surface preparation
also includes electrodeposition of metallic strike coatings
immediately after autocatalytic metal deposition. These treat-
ments result in the deposition of thin conductive metal films on
the surface of molded-plastic materials, and are described in
this practice.
1.2 Once molded-plastics materials have been made con-
ductive, they may be electroplated with a metal or combination
of metals in conventional electroplating solutions. The electro-
plating solutions and their use are beyond the scope of this
practice.
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. (See Section 4.)
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2
B 532 Specification for Appearance of Electroplated Plastic
Surfaces
B 533 Test Method for Peel Strength of Metal Electroplated
Plastics
B 553 Test Method for Thermal Cycling of Electroplated
Plastics3
B 604 Specification for Decorative Electroplated Coatings
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on Metallic
and Inorganic Coatings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B08.02 on
Pre Treatment.
Current edition approved April 1, 2004. Published April 2004. Originally
approved in 1983. Discontinued January 2004 and reinstated in 2004 as B 727–04.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3 4
Withdrawn.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium on Plastics
3. Significance and Use
3.1 A variety of metals can be electrodeposited on plastics
for decorative or engineering purposes. The most widely used
coating consists of three layers—copper plus nickel plus
chromium—for decorative applications. However, brass, sil-
ver, tin, lead, cadmium, zinc, gold, other metals, and combi-
nations of these are used for special purposes. The key to
producing electroplated plastics of high quality lies in the care
taken in preparing plastics for electroplating. The information
contained in this practice is useful in controlling processes for
the preparation of plastics for electroplating.
4. Hazards
4.1 Some chemical solutions are exothermic upon mixing or
in use, thereby requiring cooling and proper containment to
prevent injury to personnel.
4.2 For details on the proper operation and safety precau-
tions to be followed by vapor degreasing, see ASTM STP 310.4
5. General Considerations
5.1 Nature of Plastics Suitable for Electroplating:
5.1.1 Plastics suitable for electroplating may be a combina-
tion of one or more polymers so formulated as to allow
selective etching of one or more constituents. The most
commonly electroplated material, acrylonitrile-butadiene-
styrene (ABS), is a terpolymer. During etching, soft butadiene
rubber particles dispersed in the acrylonitrile-styrene matrix
are selectively attacked. The microscopic pockets formed by
the etching process provide sites for the physical interlocking
of the plastic substrate and subsequently applied metallic
coatings. The resultant mechanical bonding is instrumental in
achieving metal to plastic adhesion.
5.2 Plastics Suitable for Electroplating:
5.2.1 The plastics materials commonly used for injection
molded articles to be electroplated are:
5.2.1.1 Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS),
5.2.1.2 Polypropylene,
5.2.1.3 Polysulfone,
5.2.1.4 Modified Polyphenylene Oxide,
5.2.1.5 Polycarbonate,
Handbook of Vapor Degreasing, ASTM STP 310A, ASTM, 1976.
 B 727 – 04
5.2.1.6 Polyester, and
5.2.1.7 Nylon.
5.2.2 The preparation of these materials for electroplating
generally involves the basic steps described in this practice, but
substantial variations may be necessary to achieve optimum
results with plastics other than ABS.
5.3 Molding Considerations:
5.3.1 The chemical nature of plastics combined with the
nature of the injection molding process produces plastic parts
that are somewhat heterogeneous in composition and structure.
During the molding of ABS, for example, the shape, size, and
distribution of butadiene rubber particles may vary consider-
ably within a part and may affect the uniformity of subsequent
surface etching treatments. As a result, under- and over-etching
of the surface may occur, either of which can interfere with the
adhesion of metal coatings. The use of a properly formulated
etchant combined with an organic conditioner may overcome
problems of nonuniform etching.
5.3.2 Although it may be possible to overcome problems of
nonuniform etching by suitable chemical treatments, control of
the injection molding process is critical if plastic parts are to be
electroplated successfully. It is essential that the resin be
thoroughly dried before molding. The temperature of the mold
and all heating zones, the pressure, the total cycle time, and the
fill time must be controlled and monitored. Devices exist for
controlling all molding parameters precisely.
5.3.3 The visible defects that may arise in the molding
process are described in Specification B 532. Molded parts that
are obviously defective should not be processed without the
approval of the purchaser.
5.3.4 Mold release agents interfere with the adhesion of
metallic coatings on plastic substrates and should not be used.
5.4 Process Selection:
5.4.1 Due to the complexity and proprietary nature of
commercially available processes for preparing plastics for
electroplating, a complete process should be selected for a
specific type of plastic, and operated according to the specific
instructions of the supplier of the process.
5.5 Handling of Molded Plastic Parts:
5.5.1 Molded-plastic parts must be kept clean and carefully
handled. It is a common practice to use cotton gloves in
removing parts from the mold and for all subsequent handling.
5.5.2 The trimming of plastic parts and the removal of flash
and runners should be done with care to avoid introducing
surface defects. These and other mechanical finishing opera-
tions should be completed before beginning the chemical
treatment of parts for electroplating. Runners are sometimes
left intact to facilitate racking for electroplating at a later stage.
5.6 Racking:5
5.6.1 Molded-plastic parts can be prepared for electroplat-
ing in barrels, trays, or baskets and then transferred to racks
designed specifically for electroplating, or they can be pro-
cessed on racks that are used in both the preparation and
electroplating cycles. Which method of racking to use may be
dictated by the size of the parts, by efficiency, and other
5 6
Standards and Guidelines—Electroplated Plastics, American Society of Elec-
troplated Plastics, Washington, DC, Second Edition, 1979.
2
considerations. The first is the bulk method; the second is
called “through-racking.”
5.6.2 Bulk Method—Small parts are often processed in
polypropylene baskets or plastic-coated steel baskets. Some-
what larger parts can be processed in layered baskets made of
stainless steel (UNS Types S30400 or S31600), titanium, or
plastic-coated mild steel. Parts are placed as closely as possible
compatible with the need to provide for complete solution
wetting and drainage.
5.6.3 Through-Racking:
5.6.3.1 The design of racks to be used in both preparation
and electroplating processes is dictated by the requirements of
electroplating and the corrosive nature of the solutions.
5.6.3.2 Rack splines and hooks are generally made of
copper or copper alloys. Rack cross bars are made of copper or
copper alloys if they are to conduct current from the splines to
the contacts, but may be made of steel if their function is solely
to strengthen and make the rack rigid. Rack contacts are
usually stainless steel, although titanium has also been used. If
spring action is necessary, phosphor bronze may be used as the
contact member with a short stainless steel piece for the tip.
5.6.3.3 The entire rack is sandblasted, primed, and coated
with plastisol before use, except for the stainless steel contacts.
During the preparation process, the rack coating may become
coated with metal, but this does not usually occur because
hexavalent chromium is absorbed in the plastisol and prevents
autocatalytic metal deposition from occurring.
5.6.3.4 Control of immersion times in neutralizing, cata-
lyzing, and accelerating steps is critical to prevent metal
deposition on the rack coating.
5.6.3.5 Parts are positioned on racks to optimize the thick-
ness and appearance of electrodeposited coatings, and to
minimize solution dragout.
5.6.3.6 It may be necessary to use current thieves, shields,
or auxiliary anodes to obtain uniform metal distribution. The
number of contacts is greater for plastic parts than for
comparable metal parts. For example, if the total area being
electroplated in less than 0.02 m2, one contact point is usually
sufficient; if the area is 0.25 to 0.60 m2, 16 contact points are
recommended.
5.6.3.7 Metal deposited autocatalytically or electrolytically
must be chemically removed from contacts after each cycle.
This is usually accomplished by using nitric acid-containing
solutions, or proprietary rack strippers.
6. Preparation of Plastic Substrates6
6.1 Alkaline Cleaning:
6.1.1 Cleaning in alkaline solutions is optional. If the parts
are carefully handled and kept clean after molding, alkaline
cleaning can usually be avoided.
6.1.2 Fingerprints, grease, and other shop soil should be
removed by soaking plastic-molded parts in mild alkaline
solutions that are commercially available. A suitable solution
may contain 25 g/L of sodium carbonate and 25 g/L of
Adcock, J. L., “Electroplating Plastics—an AES Illustrated Lecture,” American
Electroplaters’ Society, Inc., Winter Park, FL, 1978.
 B 727 – 04
trisodium phosphate operated at 55 to 65°C. Parts are im-
mersed in the solution for 2 to 5 min (see Note 1).
NOTE 1—Thorough rinsing after alkaline cleaning and after each of the
following processing steps is essential. Multiple water rinses are recom-
mended.
6.2 Conditioning:
6.2.1 Conditioning is an optional step that precedes the
etching step. Conditioning can eliminate adhesion problems
associated with inadequate etching. The conditioner may be a
solution of chromic and sulfuric acids, or it may contain an
organic solvent. Proprietary solutions are available and should
be operated according to supplier’s directions.
6.2.2 Chromic/Sulfuric Acid Type—This type of conditioner
may contain 30 g/L of chromic acid and 300 mL/L of sulfuric
acid (93 mass %; density 1.83 g/mL) dissolved in water and is
maintained at a temperature of 60°C 6 3°C. Parts are im-
mersed in the solution for 1 to 2 min. Because of the relatively
large amount of sulfuric acid in the solution, the acrylonitrile-
styrene matrix, as well as the butadiene phase, are attacked.
6.2.3 Organic Solvent Type—This type of conditioner is a
solution of an organic solvent in deionized water. The organic
solvent may be acetone or other ketone; for example, 2,4-
pentadione is sometimes used.7 The solution may contain 100
to 125 mL/L of the appropriate organic solvent and is main-
tained at a temperature of 40 to 45°C. Treatment is by
immersion of the plastic parts for 2.0 to 2.5 min (see Note 2
and Note 3).
NOTE 2—Solutions containing volatile organic solvents require ad-
equate ventilation and must not contact metals. These materials chelate
ionic metal contaminants. Annealed polypropylene tanks are therefore
used to hold this type of solution.
NOTE 3—Multiple hot water rinses are required after using the organic
solvent-type conditioner. Because organic solvents soften and swell the
plastic surface, time of immersion and of transfer to rinse tanks may affect
the appearance of the final product, and should be controlled.
6.3 Etching:
6.3.1 Etchants are strong oxidizing solutions that micror-
oughen and chemically alter the surface of molded plastic
parts. The etching step is the most important step in achieving
serviceable adhesion of metals to plastics. Commercially used
etchants are either chromic acid types, chromic/sulfuric acid
types, or chromic-sulfuric-phosphoric acid types.
6.3.2 Chromic Acid Type—Concentrated etchants usually
contain greater than 850 g/L of chromic acid and as much as
1200 g/L.8,9 The temperature of the solution is maintained at 50
6 3°C and treatment is by immersion for 8 to 10 min.
Concentrated solutions of chromic acid tend to oxidize buta-
diene rubber particles in the case of ABS, selectively.
6.3.3 Chromic/Sulfuric Acid Type—This type of etchant
may contain 250 to 350 g/L of chromic acid and 200 to 250
mL/L of sulfuric acid (93 mass %, density 1.83 mL/L) dis-
solved in water. Immersion times of 5 to 10 min at a solution
7
The use of 2,4-pentadione is patented.
8
The use of concentrations greater than 900 g/L has been patented. See U.S.
Patent Numbers: 3,668,130; 3,708,430.
9
See U.S. Patent Numbers: 3,142,582; 3,370,974; 3,515,649.
3
temperature of 65 6 5°C are commonly used. Several propri-
etary baths are available.
6.3.4 Chromic-Sulfuric-Phosphoric Acid Type10—This type
of etchant solution normally consists of 3 % by mass chromic
acid, 56 % by mass sulfuric acid (density 1.83 g/mL), 10.5 %
by mass phosphoric acid (density 1.87 g/mL), and the balance
water. An immersion time of about 3 min at 74 to 77°C is
commonly used.
6.4 Neutralizing (Sensitizing):
6.4.1 After thorough rinsing, all residual chromic acid must
be chemically removed from the surface of the molded-plastic
parts. Neutralizers are used and are typically mild acid or
alkaline solutions containing complexing or reducing agents.
In the case of ABS, it is common to use a solution containing
a mixture of an acidsalt and a reducing agent, such as sodium
bisulfite, to eliminate all traces of chromic acid. Typical
processing conditions are 1 to 2 min immersion at 40°C.
6.4.2 Neutralizers may also contain ionic surfactants to
increase the adsorption of catalyst. The use of surfactants,
however, can lead to activation of the rack coating and
subsequent metal deposition on the rack. Surfactants should
therefore be used with caution. Ionic surfactants are not
normally used in processing ABS (see Note 4).
NOTE 4—Some plastics, for example, polyphenylene oxide, may re-
quire treatment in dilute solutions of ethylenediamine after neutralization
to insure adequate adsorption of the catalyst.
6.5 Catalyzing (Activating):
6.5.1 Small amounts of palladium are chemically deposited
on the surface at this stage of processing. Palladium functions
as a catalyst for autocatalytic deposition of copper or nickel to
follow. Palladium is deposited either by the older, two-step
procedure or by the more reliable one-step procedure.
6.5.2 Two-Step Procedure—The molded-plastic parts are
first immersed in a solution of stannous chloride, 6 to 10 g/L,
operated at pH 1.8 to 2.4 (pH adjusted with hydrochloric acid),
and at 20 to 25°C for 1 to 3 min. The parts are then rinsed
thoroughly to remove excess hydrochloric acid and transferred
to a solution containing 0.1 to 1.0 g/L of palladium chloride
dissolved in water at a pH of 1.6 to 2.0 adjusted with sulfuric
acid. The palladious ions adsorbed on the surface react with
stannous ions to form palladium metal and stannic chloride in
the interstices of the etched plastic components. After thorough
rinsing, the parts can be coated with nickel or copper by
autocatalytic deposition.
6.5.3 One-Step Procedure—The molded-plastic parts are
immersed in a solution of colloidal stannous chloride and
palladium chloride containing excess hydrochloric acid. The
stannous chloride concentration is 120 to 140 g/L, the palla-
dium metal concentration is 0.05 to 0.15 g/L, and the hydro-
chloric acid concentration is approximately 3.0 N (see Note 5).
The solution is maintained at 20 to 30°C and the parts are
immersed in the solution for 1 to 3 min. Rinsing in water leads
to the formation of metallic palladium nuclei on the surface
10
This is commercially used for polysulfone printed circuit boards, but may be
used with ABS and polypropylene plastics.
 B 727 – 04
surrounded by stannic hydroxide. The stannic hydroxide is TABLE 1 Typical Strike Solution Compositions
removed in the acceleration step prior to autocatalytic deposi- Strike Solution Composition
tion. Copper Strike:
Pyrophosphate Type:
NOTE 5—These solutions are proprietary and considerably more diffi- Copper (Cu) 24–37 g/L
cult to prepare than implied in this section.11 Pyrophosphate (P2O7−4) 185—250 g/L
Nitrate (NO3−1) 5–10 g/L
6.6 Acceleration: Ammonia (NH3) 1–4 g/L
6.6.1 Stannous hydroxide is removed by treatment in a pH 8.4–8.8 g/L
dilute solution of hydrochloric acid, or a solution of an acid Temperature 50–55°C
Voltage, d-c 2–3 V
salt. Fluoride or fluorinated compounds are often added to Current density 250–400 A/m2
increase the effectiveness of the acceleration process. In most Acid Copper Sulfate Type:
cases, a solution containing 1.0 N hydrochloric acid maintained Copper sulfate (CuSO4·5H2O) 210–225 g/L
Sulfuric acid (H2SO4) 45–60 g/L
at a temperature of 50°C, agitated with air, in which parts are Temperature (room) 18–22°C
immersed for 30 to 60 s adequately removes excess stannous Voltage, d-c 2.5–3.0 V
chloride and stannic/stannous hydroxide remaining on the Current density 250–400 A/m2
Nickel Strike:
surface after the one-step palladium activation procedure. Watts Type:
6.7 Autocatalytic Deposition: Nickel sulfate (NiSO4·6H2O) 300–340 g/L
6.7.1 Solutions for the autocatalytic deposition of either Nickel chloride (NiCl2·6H2O) 30–60 g/L
Boric acid (H3BO3) 30–40 g/L
copper or nickel are used to render plastic parts conductive. pH 3–4 g/L
The solutions contain a metal salt, a reducing agent, a Temperature 60–65°C
Voltage, d-c 2.5–3.0 V
complexant, a stabilizer, and buffers to control pH. The Current density 250–600 A/m2
palladium on the surface of the plastic parts acts as a catalyst Sulfamate Type: 300–350 g/L
to initiate deposition after which the autocatalytic reduction of Nickel sulfamateA 30–45 g/L
Boric acid (H3BO3) 3.0–4.5 g/L
the metal occurs. A uniform metal film about 0.25 to 0.5-µm pH 45°–55°C
thick is deposited (see Note 6). Temperature 250–600 A/m2
6.7.2 Autocatalytic Nickel—The commercially available Current density
processes for autocatalytic nickel deposition on plastics com- A
Usually available as a liquid concentrate.
monly use sodium hypophosphite as the reducing agent. The
solutions are operated at 30 to 35°C, at pH 10 to 11, and
6.8.1 Additional thicknesses of either copper or nickel are
produce a nickel deposit with 2 to 6 % phosphorous. Parts are
applied by low-current density electrodeposition from suitable
kept immersed in the solution for 5 to 10 min to achieve the
strike baths. Metal thickness is increased to 2.5 to 4.0 µm to
desired thickness of metal. Although there may be considerable
facilitate electrodeposition of decorative or functional coatings
variation in bath formulations, autocatalytic nickel solutions
by conventional means.
may contain nickel sulfate, sodium citrate, ammonium chlo-
6.8.2 Typical copper and nickel strike solutions are given in
ride, ammonium hydroxide, sodium hypophosphite, and so-
Table 1.
dium hydroxide. Stabilizers are used to prevent spontaneous
6.8.3 The most commonly applied decorative coating con-
decomposition of the solution and to control the deposition
sists of layers of copper, nickel, and chromium, but other
rate.
metals may be combined to achieve decorative effects.
6.7.3 Autocatalytic Copper—The commercially available
processes for autocatalytic deposition of copper on plastics use 7. Process Control
formaldehyde as the reducing agent. Room temperature pro-
7.1 General:
cesses are used, as well as high temperature ones. Each
7.1.1 The pH, temperature, and composition of the solutions
produce deposits of pure copper. Parts are immersed in the
used in preparing plastics for electroplating must be carefully
solution for 5 to 10 min.
controlled to achieve satisfactory results. Conventional analyti-
NOTE 6—Autocatalytic nickel or copper is used commercially in the cal and other measuring techniques may be used. Suppliers can
preparation of plastics, and either may give acceptable results. The use of provide instructions for control of proprietary processes.
autocatalytic copper, however, may improve the performance of electro- 7.2 Etchants:
plated plastics in wet corrosive environments. Parts that are inadequately
etched or that are made from grades of plastics that are difficult to etch are
7.2.1 The concentration of trivalent chromium increases
less likely to fail in severe corrosive environments when autocatalytic with continuous use of chromic acid-containing etchants.
copper is used.12,13,14 Trivalent chromium reduces the ability of the etchant to
oxidize the surface of the plastic. The maximum tolerable
6.8 Electrodeposited Strikes:
concentration of trivalent chromium is 20 g/L in etchants
containing about 350 g/L of chromic acid, and 90 g/L in
11
See U.S. Patent Numbers: 3,011,920; 3,874,882; 3,904,792; 3,672,923; etchants containing 1200 g/L of chromic acid. The trivalent
3,672,938; 3,682,671; 3,960,573; 3,961,109. chromium concentration can be adjusted by removing a portion
12
Di Bari, G. A., “Performance of Decorative Copper-Nickel-Chromium Coat-
ings on Plastics—Final Report of Corrosion Programs Conducted by ASEP and
ASTM,” copies of the report may be requested by writing to ASTM Headquarters.
13 14
Wedel, R. G., “Characteristics of Corrosion-Associated Blisters on Plated Wedel, R. G., “A Mechanism for Corrosion-Associated Blisters on Plated
Plastics,” Plating and Surface Finishing, January 1975. Plastics,” Plating and Surface Finishing, March 1975.

4
 B 727 – 04
of the solution and adding proper amounts of chromic acid and TABLE 2 Range of Peel Strength Values for Electrodeposited
water to compensate for quantities removed. Trivalent chro- Copper and Nickel on Various Plastics
mium can also be converted to hexavalent chromium by Peel Strength,A N
Type of Plastic
electrolytic oxidation. Copper Nickel
7.3 Catalysts: ABS 40–110 40–110
7.3.1 The stability of the solution used in the one-step Modified polyphenylene oxide 10–50 10–50
Polypropylene 20–110 70–125
procedure for chemically depositing palladium on plastics is Impact styrene 9–20 9–50
dependent on the chloride concentration. The chloride concen- Polysulfone 20–100 20–100
tration is controlled by additions of hydrochloric acid or Polycarbonate 10–50 10–50
sodium chloride. A
Measured on 25-mm wide strips. The thickness of the electrodeposited metal
was 35 6 5 µm, as recommended in Test Method B 533.
7.3.2 Hexavalent chromium ions carried over from etchants
and from other sources interfere with the functioning of the
catalyst.
7.4 Accelerators: 7.6 Adhesion Tests:
7.4.1 Accelerators are especially sensitive to contamination 7.6.1 A qualitative adhesion test may be used on production
by hexavalent chromium that may be carried over from the parts to judge the effectiveness of the preparation process.
etchant solutions. The mineral acid types can tolerate a After autocatalytic deposition, rinsing, and drying, apply a strip
maximum of 10 ppm. Acid salt types can tolerate a maximum of pressure-sensitive tape15 smoothly on the surface pressing
of 300 ppm. Reducing agents, such as stannous chloride and the tape firmly to eliminate all air bubbles. Quickly pull the
sodium bisulfite, are sometimes used to convert hexavalent tape off at a 90° angle. Appearance of metal particles on the
chromium to trivalent chromium and prolong the life of the tape indicates poor surface preparation.
accelerator. 7.6.2 Test Method B 533 provides methods for the measure-
7.5 Appearance: ment of the peel strength of electroplated plastics using
7.5.1 The appearance of plastic parts changes during pro- standard plaques. The methods can be used to monitor the
cessing and these changes can be used to control the process to effectiveness of the preparation process and changes that occur
some extent: during use. Standard plaques available from various sources
7.5.1.1 After alkaline cleaning and rinsing, plastic parts are processed and then electroplated with 35 6 5 µm of copper
should be uniformly covered with a film of water. or nickel. The peel strength can be measured in various ways
7.5.1.2 After conditioning, plastic parts should appear as discussed in Test Method B 533. Typical values of peel
slightly dull. strength are given in Table 2.
7.5.1.3 After etching, plastic parts should have lost their 7.6.3 The thermal cycle tests described in Test Method
original glossy appearance, and should be uniformly wetted B 553 and in Specification B 604 can be used to evaluate the
with water after rinsing. Variations in surface finish at this stage adhesion of metals electrodeposited on plastics and thus, the
are usually attributed to variations in stress within the part. effectiveness of the entire process, including the chemical
7.5.1.4 Adsorption of the catalyst causes the parts to appear preparation treatments covered in this practice.
light tan in color. The absence of surface coloring is evidence
8. Keywords
of improper processing that may lead to incomplete coverage
and poor adhesion at later stages. 8.1 activation; cleaning; deoxidizing; plastics; preparation;
7.5.1.5 Accelerators cause the parts to be only slightly striking
lighter in color than in the previous step.
7.5.1.6 After autocatalytic deposition, the plastic parts
should be uniformly and completely covered by the metallic 15
Pressure-sensitive tape, No. 710 available from the 3M Company, 3M Center,
deposit. St. Paul, MN 53216 has been found suitable.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 729 – 00
Standard Specification for
Seamless UNS N08020, UNS N08026, and UNS N08024
Nickel-Alloy Pipe and Tube1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 729; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers UNS N08020, UNS N08026,
and UNS N08024 seamless, cold-worked or hot finished pipe
and tube intended for general corrosive service.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.3 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
test methods portion, Section 10, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
tions prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 829 Specification for General Requirements for Nickel
and Nickel Alloys Seamless Pipe and Tube2
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3
3. General Requirement
3.1 Material furnished under this specification shall con-
form to the applicable requirements of Specification B 829
unless otherwise provided herein.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
requirements that are necessary for the safe and satisfactory
performance of material ordered under this specification.
Examples of such requirements include, but are not limited to,
the following:
4.1.1 Alloy name or UNS number.
4.1.2 ASTM designation and year of issue.
4.1.3 Finish.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2000. Published November 2000. Originally
published as B 729 – 84. Last previous edition B 729 – 99.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
4.1.4 Dimensions:
4.1.4.1 Tube—Specify outside diameter and the average or
minimum wall thickness.
4.1.4.2 Pipe—Specify standard pipe size and schedule.
4.1.4.3 Length, (cut to length or random).
4.1.5 Quantity (feet or number of pieces).
4.1.6 Nondestructive Testing (see 7.2):
4.1.6.1 Pressure Requirements—Test pressure if other than
required by 10.1.
4.1.6.2 Specify if an electric test is to be performed (see
7.2).
4.1.7 Ends—Plain ends cut and deburred will be furnished.
If threaded ends or ends beveled for welding are desired, give
details.
4.1.8 Certification—State if certification is required.
4.1.9 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
samples for product (check) analysis should be furnished (see
6.2).
4.1.10 Purchaser Inspection—If the purchaser wishes to
witness tests or inspection of material at the place of manu-
facture, the purchase order must so state, indicating which tests
or inspections are to be witnessed.
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 The product of UNS N08020 alloy shall be furnished in
the stabilized-annealed condition. The product of UNS N08026
alloy shall be furnished in the solution-annealed condition. The
product of UNS N08024 alloy shall be furnished in the
annealed condition.
NOTE 1—The recommended annealing temperatures all followed by
quenching in water or rapidly cooling by other means are as follows: 1800
to 1850°F (982 to 1010°C) for UNS N08020, 2050 to 2200°F (1121 to
1204°C) for UNS N08026, and 1925 to 1975°F (1052 to 1079°C) for UNS
N08024.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 The material shall conform to the composition limits
specified in Table 1. One test is required for each lot as defined
in Specification B 829.
 B 729
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
Composition, %
Element
UNS N08026 UNS N08020 UNS N08024
Carbon, max 0.03 0.07 0.03
Manganese, max 1.00 2.00 1.00
Phosphorus, max 0.03 0.045 0.035
Sulfur, max 0.03 0.035 0.035
Silicon, max 0.50 1.00 0.50
Nickel 33.00–37.20 32.00–38.00 35.00–40.00
Chromium 22.00–26.00 19.00–21.00 22.50–25.00
Molybdenum 5.00–6.70 2.00–3.00 3.50–5.00
Copper 2.00–4.00 3.00–4.00 0.50–1.50
Columbium (Nb) + tantalum ... 8 3 carbon-1.00 0.15–0.35
Nitrogen 0.10–0.16 ... ...
Iron remainderA remainderA remainderA
A
By difference.

6.2 If a product analysis is performed by the purchaser, the 7.2.2.5 Stop marks.
material shall conform to the composition limits specified in
Table 1 subject to the product analysis tolerances specified in 8. Sampling
Table 1 of Specification B 829. 8.1 Product (Check) Analysis shall be wholly the responsi-
bility of the purchaser.
7. Mechanical and Other Properties
7.1 Mechanical Properties—The material shall conform to 9. Number of Tests
the mechanical property requirements specified in Table 2. 9.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per lot.
7.2 Pressure and Nondestructive Electric Test—Each pipe 9.2 Mechanical Properties—One test per lot.
and tube shall be subjected to either a pressure test or the 9.3 Nondestructive Test—Each piece in each lot.
nondestructive electric test at the manufacturer’s option. The
purchaser may specify which test is to be used. 10. Test Methods
7.2.1 Any leaking areas may be cut out and the pipe retested 10.1 Hydrostatic Test:
as above. 10.1.1 Each pipe or tube shall be hydrostatically tested, at a
7.2.2 Test signals produced by imperfections such as the pressure not to exceed 2500 psi (17 MPa) for nominal sizes 3
following, may be judged as injurious or noninjurious, depend- in. (76 mm) and under, nor 2800 psi (19 MPa) for all nominal
ing on visual observation of their severity or the type of signal sizes over 3 in. (76 mm). The allowable fiber stress for material
they produce on the testing equipment used, or both. in the condition (temper) furnished is 20 000 psi (138 MPa),
7.2.2.1 Dinges, 10.1.2 Visual examination is to be made when the material
7.2.2.2 Straightener marks, is under pressure. The full length of material must be examined
7.2.2.3 Scratches, for leaks.
7.2.2.4 Steel die stamps, and 10.1.3 When so agreed upon between the manufacturer and
the purchaser, pipe or tube may be tested to one and one-half
TABLE 2 Mechanical Property Requirements times the allowable fiber stress given in 10.1.1.
Tensile Strength, Yield Strength,A
Elongation in 2 in.
min min
(50.8 mm) or 4D min, % 11. Keywords
ksi MPa ksi MPa
80 550 35 240 30.0 11.1 nickel-iron-chromium-molybdenum-copper-
A
Yield strength shall be determined by the offset method at 0.2 % limiting columbium; seamless pipe; seamless tube; UNS N08020; UNS
permanent set in accordance with Test Methods E 8. N08024; UNS N08026

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 731 – 96 (Reapproved 2001)

Standard Specification for

60 % Palladium-40 % Silver Electrical Contact Material 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 731; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Chemical Composition

1.1 This specification covers 60 % palladium-40 % silver

Element Weight
rod, wire, strip, and sheet material for electrical contacts.
Pd (by difference) 59.5 % min.
2. Referenced Documents Ag 39.1 to 40.5 %
Cu 0.1 max
2.1 ASTM Standards: Total other noble metals A 0.2 max
B 476 Specification for General Requirements forWrought Other Impurities:
Precious Metal Electrical Contact Materials 2 Individual elements B 0.01 max
Collective total 0.10 max
A
3. Manufacture B
Other noble metals are Au, Pt, Rh, Ir, Ru, and Os.
Typical metals are as indicated: Pb, Sn, Zn, Fe, Si, Mg, Ca, Al, Ni, Cr, Mn, Sb,
3.1 Raw materials shall be of such quality and purity that B, Co, Mo, and Te, Cd, and In.
the finished product will have the properties and characteristics
prescribed in this specification.
3.2 The material shall be finished by such operations (cold combination of these mechanical properties (as listed in Table
working, heat treating, annealing, turning, grinding, or pick- 2 or Table 3) as temper criterion. If the contract or order does
ling) as are required to produce the prescribed properties. not specify a temper criterion, then the criterion for temper
4. Chemical Requirements designation will be ultimate tensile strength.
5.2 All test specimens shall be full thickness or diameter
4.1 Material produced under this specification shall meet the when practical.
requirements for chemical composition prescribed in Table 1, 5.3 All tests are to be conducted at room temperature, about
in accordance with the practices prescribed in Specification 68°F (20°C).
B 476.
4.2 Uniformity of composition shall be assured by the use of 6. Inspection and Testing
good commercial preparation practices. 6.1 Material furnished under this specification shall be
5. Mechanical Requirements inspected by the manufacturer in accordance with Specification
B 476.
5.1 The contract or order may specify ultimate tensile
strength, elongation, microhardness (Knoop or Vickers), or a 7. Keywords
7.1 clad materials; contact material; palladium alloy; pre-
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
cious metal; silver alloy
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B2.05 on Precious Metals and Electrical Contact Materials.
Current edition approved May 10, 1996. Published July 1996. Originally
published as B 731 – 84. Last previous edition B 731 – 91.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 731
TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties of Sheet and Strip

Temper Reduction in B&S Percent Reduction Ultimate Tensile Strength, psi (MPa) Minimum Elonga- Typical
Numbers (Reference) tion in 2 in., % Microhardness
(Reference) min max HK 100g

A 0 0 50 000 (344) 80 000 (551) 30 120

1/2 H 2 21 70 000 (482) 90 000 (620) 2 170
Hard 4 37 80 000 (551) 100 000 (180) 1 180
Spring 8 60 90 000 (620) 120 000 (827) ... 200

TABLE 3 Mechanical Properties of Wire, Rod, and Tubing

Temper Reduction in B&S Percent Reduction Ultimate Tensile Strength, psi (MPa) Minimum Elonga- Knoop Hardness
Numbers (Reference) tion in 2 in., % (25 g, load)
(Reference) min max

A 0 0 40 000 (275) 60 000 (414) 25 A 90–120

1/8 H 1/2 11 60 000 (414) 70 000 (482) 2 120–140
1/4 H 1 21 70 000 (482) 80 000 (551) 1 140–160
1/2 H 2 37 80 000 (551) 90 000 (620) 1 160–200
Hard 4 60 90 000 (620) 100 000 (689) 1 200–240
A
Wire in sizes less than 0.020 in. (0.5 mm) diameter and tubing of less than 0.010 in. (0.25 mm) wall thickness may be down to 15 %.

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. TYPICAL PROPERTY VALUES

X1.1 The following is a list of typical property values that Solidus temperature, °C 1290
are useful for engineering calculations in electrical contact Liquidus temperature, °C 1340
Density:
design and application. g/cm 3 11.35
Electrical conductivity, % IACS 4 tr oz/in. 3 5.98
Resistivity,V· cmil/ft 258
Microhm·cm 43

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 733 – 97
Standard Specification for
Autocatalytic (Electroless) Nickel-Phosphorus Coatings on
Metal 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 733; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers requirements for autocatalytic
(electroless) nickel-phosphorus coatings applied from aqueous
solutions to metallic products for engineering (functional) uses.
1.2 The coatings are alloys of nickel and phosphorus pro-
duced by autocatalytic chemical reduction with hypophosphite.
Because the deposited nickel alloy is a catalyst for the reaction,
the process is self-sustaining. The chemical and physical
properties of the deposit vary primarily with its phosphorus
content and subsequent heat treatment. The chemical makeup
of the plating solution and the use of the solution can affect the
porosity and corrosion resistance of the deposit. For more
details, see ASTM STP 265 (1)2 and Refs (2) (3) (4) and (5)
also refer to Figs. X1.1, Figs. X1.2, and Figs. X1.3 in the
Appendix of Guide B 656.
1.3 The coatings are generally deposited from acidic solu-
tions operating at elevated temperatures.
1.4 The process produces coatings of uniform thickness on
irregularly shaped parts, provided the plating solution circu-
lates freely over their surfaces.
1.5 The coatings have multifunctional properties, such as
hardness, heat hardenability, abrasion, wear and corrosion
resistance, magnetics, electrical conductivity provide diffusion
barrier, and solderability. They are also used for the salvage of
worn or mismachined parts.
1.6 The low phosphorus (2 to 4 % P) coatings are microc-
rystalline and possess high as-plated hardness (620 to 750 HK
100). These coatings are used in applications requiring abra-
sion and wear resistance.
1.7 Lower phosphorus deposits in the range between 1 and
3 % phosphorus are also microcrystalline. These coatings are
used in electronic applications providing solderability, bond-
ability, increased electrical conductivity, and resistance to
strong alkali solutions.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-08 on Metal
Powders and Metal Powder Products and is the direct responsibility of Subcom-
mittee B08.08.01 on Engineering Coatings.
Current edition approved July 10, 1997. Published October 1997. Originally
published as B 733 – 84. Last previous edition B 733 – 90 (1994).
2
The boldface numbers given in parentheses refer to a list of references at the
end of the text.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
1.8 The medium phosphorous coatings (5 to 9 % P) are most
widely used to meet the general purpose requirements of wear
and corrosion resistance.
1.9 The high phosphorous (more than 10 % P) coatings
have superior salt-spray and acid resistance in a wide range of
applications. They are used on beryllium and titanium parts for
low stress properties. Coatings with phosphorus contents
greater than 11.2 % P are not considered to be ferromagnetic.
1.10 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard.
1.11 The following precautionary statement pertains only to
the test method portion, Section 9, of this specification. This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
tions prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 368 Test Method for Copper-Accelerated Acetic Acid-
Salt Spray (Fog) Testing (CASS Testing)3
B 374 Terminology Relating to Electroplating3
B 380 Test Method of Corrosion by the Corrodkote Proce-
dure3
B 487 Test Method for Measurement of Metal and Oxide
Coating Thicknesses by Microscopical Examination of a
Cross Section3
B 499 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thick-
nesses by the Magnetic Method: Nonmagnetic Coatings on
Magnetic Basis Metals3
B 504 Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Me-
tallic Coatings by the Coulometric Method3
B 537 Practice for Rating of Electroplated Panels Subjected
to Atmospheric Exposure3
B 567 Method for Measurement of Coating Thickness by
the Beta Backscatter Method3
B 568 Method for Measurement of Coating Thickness by
X-Ray Spectrometry3
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
 B 733 – 97
B 571 Test Methods for Adhesion of Metallic Coatings3 TABLE 1 Deposit Alloy Types
B 578 Test Method for Microhardness of Electroplated Type Phosphorus % wt
Coatings3 I No Requirement for Phosphorus
B 602 Test Method for Attribute Sampling of Metallic and II 1 to 3
III 2 to 4
Inorganic Coating3 IV 5 to 9
B 656 Guide for Autocatalytic Nickel-Phosphorus Deposi- V 10 and above
tion on Metals for Engineering Use3
B 667 Practice for Construction and Use of a Probe for
Measuring Electrical Contact Resistance4 TABLE 2 Service Conditions
B 678 Test Method for Solderability of Metallic-Coated Coating Thickness Requirements
Products3 Minimum Coating
Service Condition Thickness µm in. (mm)
B 697 Guide for Selection of Sampling Plans for Inspection Specification
of Electrodeposited Metallic and Inorganic Coatings3
SC0 Minimun Thickness 0.1 0.000004 ( )
B 762 Method for Variable Sampling of Metallic and Inor- SC1 Light Service 5 0.0002 ( )
ganic Coatings3 SC2 Mild Service 13 0.0005 ( )
B 849 Specification for Pre-Treatment of Iron or Steel for SC3 Moderate Service 25 0.001 ( )
SC4 Severe Service 75 0.003 ( )
Reducing the Risk of Hydrogen Embrittlement3
B 850 Specification for Post-Coating Treatments of Iron or
Steel for Reducing the Risk of Hydrogen Embrittlement3 MIL-S-13165 Shot Peening of Metal Parts13
B 851 Specification for Automated Controlled Shot Peening MIL-STD-105 Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspec-
of Metallic Articles Prior to Nickel, Autocatalytic Nickel, tion by Attribute13
Chromium, or As A Final Finish3 2.3 ISO Standards:
D 1193 Specification for Reagent Water5 ISO 4527 Autocatalytic Nickel-Phosphorus Coatings—
D 2670 Method for Measuring Wear Properties of Fluid Specification and Test Methods14
Lubricants (Falex Method)6
D 2714 Method for Calibration and Operation of an Alpha 3. Terminology
LFW-1 Friction and Wear Testing Machine6 3.1 Definition:
D 3951 Practice for Commercial Packaging7 3.1.1 significant surfaces—those substrate surfaces which
D 4060 Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic the coating must protect from corrosion or wear, or both, and
Coatings by the Taber Abraser8 that are essential to the performance.
E 60 Practice for Photometric Methods for Chemical Analy- 3.2 Other Definitions—Terminology B 374 defines most of
sis of Metals9 the technical terms used in this specification.
E 156 Test Method for Determination of Phosphorus in
High-Phosphorus Brazing Alloys (Photometric Method)10 4. Coating Classification
E 352 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Tool Steels 4.1 The coating classification system provides for a scheme
and Other Similar Medium-and High-Alloy Steel9 to select an electroless nickel coating to meet specific perfor-
F 519 Test Method for Mechanical Hydrogen Embrittle- mance requirements based on alloy composition, thickness and
ment11 hardness.
G 5 Practice for Standard Reference Method for Making 4.1.1 TYPE describes the general composition of the de-
Potentiostatic and Potentiodynamic Anodic Polarization posit with respect to the phosphorus content and is divided into
Measurements12 five categories which establish deposit properties (see Table 1).
G 31 Practice for Laboratory Immersion Corrosion Testing
of Metals12 NOTE 1—Due to the precision of some phosphorus analysis methods a
deviation of 0.5 % has been designed into this classification scheme.
G 59 Practice for Conducting Potentiodynamic Polarization
Rounding of the test results due to the precision of the limits provides for
Resistance Measurements12 an effective limit of 4.5 and 9.5 % respectively. For example, coating with
G 85 Practice for Modified Salt Spray (Fog) Testing12 a test result for phosphorus of 9.7 % would have a classification of TYPE
2.2 Military Standards: V, see Appendix X4, Alloy TYPEs.
MIL-R-81841 Rotary Flap Peening of Metal Parts13 4.2 Service Condition Based on Thickness:
4.2.1 Service condition numbers are based on the severity of
4
the exposure in which the coating is intended to perform and
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.04.
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 11.01.
minimum coating thickness to provide satisfactory perfor-
6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 05.02. mance (see Table 2).
7
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 09.02. 4.2.2 SC0 Minimum Service, 0.1 µm—This is defined by a
8
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 06.01. minimum coating thickness to provide specific material prop-
9
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
10
Discontinued; see 1992 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
erties and extend the life of a part or its function. Applications
11
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 15.03.
12
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.02.
13 14
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, Available from American National Standards Institute, 11 W. 42nd St., 13th
700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS. Floor, New York, NY 10036.

2

include requirements for diffusion barrier, undercoat, electrical
conductivity and wear and corrosion protection in specialized
environments.
4.2.3 SC1 Light Service, 5 µm—This is defined by a
minimum coating thickness of 5 µm for extending the life of
the part. Typical environments include light-load lubricated
wear, indoor corrosion protection to prevent rusting, and for
soldering and mild abrasive wear.
4.2.4 SC2 Mild Service, 13 µm—This is defined by mild
corrosion and wear environments. It is characterized by indus-
trial atmosphere exposure on steel substrates in dry or oiled
environments.
4.2.5 SC3 Moderate Service, 25 µm—This is defined by
moderate environments such as non marine outdoor exposure,
alkali salts at elevated temperature, and moderate wear.
4.2.6 SC4 Severe Service, 75 µm—This is defined by a very
aggressive environment. Typical environments would include
acid solutions, elevated temperature and pressure, hydrogen
sulfide and carbon dioxide oil service, high-temperature chlo-
ride systems, very severe wear, and marine immersion.
NOTE 2—The performance of the autocatalytic nickel coating depends
to a large extent on the surface finish of the article to be plated and how
it was pretreated. Rough, non uniform surfaces require thicker coatings
than smooth surfaces to achieve maximum corrosion resistance and
minimum porosity.
4.3 Post Heat Treatment Class—The nickel-phosphorus
coatings shall be classified by heat treatment after plating to
increase coating adhesion and or hardness (see Table 3).
4.3.1 Class 1—As-deposited, no heat treatment.
4.3.2 Class 2—Heat treatment at 260 to 400°C to produce a
minimum hardness of 850 HK100.
4.3.3 Class 3—Heat treatment at 180 to 200°C for 2 to 4 h
to improve coating adhesion on steel and to provide for
hydrogen embrittlement relief (see section 6.6).
4.3.4 Class 4—Heat treatment at 120 to 130°C for at least 1
h to increase adhesion of heat-treatable (age-hardened) alumi-
num alloys and carburized steel (see Note 3).
4.3.5 Class 5—Heat treatment at 140 to 150°C for at least 1
h to improve coating adhesion for aluminum, non age-
hardened aluminum alloys, copper, copper alloys and beryl-
lium.
TABLE 3 Classification of Post Heat Treatment
Temperature
CLASS Description
(°C)
Time (h)
1 No Heat Treatment, As Plated
2 Heat Treatment for Maximum Hardness
TYPE I 260
285
320
400
TYPE II 350 to 380
TYPE III 360 to 390
TYPE IV 365 to 400
TYPE V 375 to 400
3 Hydrogen Embrittlement and 180 to 200
Adhesion on Steel
4 Adhesion, Carburized Steel and 120 to 130
Age Hardened Aluminum
5 Adhesion on Beryllium and 140 to 150
Aluminum
6 Adhesion on Titanium 300–320
B 733 – 97
4.3.6 Class 6—Heat treatment at 300 to 320°C for at least 1
h to improve coating adhesion for titanium alloys.
NOTE 3—Heat-treatable aluminum alloys such as Type 7075 can
undergo microstructural changes and lose strength when heated to over
130°C.
5. Ordering Information
5.1 The following information shall be supplied by the
purchaser in either the purchase order or on the engineering
drawing of the part to be plated:
5.1.1 Title, ASTM designation number, and year of issue of
this specification.
5.1.2 Classification of the deposit by type, service condi-
tion, class, (see 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3).
5.1.3 Specify maximum dimension and tolerance require-
ments, if any.
5.1.4 Peening, if required (see 6.5).
5.1.5 Stress relief heat treatment before plating, (see 6.3).
5.1.6 Hydrogen Embrittlement Relief after plating, (see
6.6).
5.1.7 Significant surfaces and surfaces not to be plated must
be indicated on drawings or sample.
5.1.8 Supplemental or Special Government Requirements
such as, specific phosphorus content, abrasion wear or corro-
sion resistance of the coating, solderability, contact resistance
and packaging selected from Supplemental Requirements.
5.1.9 Requirement for a vacuum, inert or reducing atmo-
sphere for heat treatment above 260°C to prevent surface
oxidation of the coating (see S3).
5.1.10 Test methods for coating adhesion, composition,
thickness, porosity, wear and corrosion resistance, if required,
selected from those found in Section 9 and Supplemental
Requirements.
5.1.11 Requirements for sampling (see Section 8).
NOTE 4—The purchaser should furnish separate test specimens or
coupons of the basis metal for test purposes to be plated concurrently with
the articles to be plated (see 8.4).
6. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 Substrate—Defects in the surface of the basis metal
such as scratches, porosity, pits, inclusions, roll and die marks,
laps, cracks, burrs, cold shuts, and roughness may adversely
affect the appearance and performance of the deposit, despite
the observance of the best plating practice. Any such defects on
significant surfaces shall be brought to the attention of the
purchaser before plating. The producer shall not be responsible
20 for coatings defects resulting from surface conditions of the
16
8
metal, if these conditions have been brought to the attention of
1 the purchaser.
1 6.2 Pretreatment—Parts to be autocatalytic nickel plated
1
1
may be pretreated in accordance with Guide B 656. A suitable
1 method shall activate the surface and remove oxide and foreign
2 to 4 materials, which may cause poor adhesion and coating poros-
1 to 6
ity.
NOTE 5—Heat treatment of the base material may effect its metallur-
1 to 2
gical properties. An example is leaded steel which may exhibit liquid or
1–4 solid embrittlement after heat treatment. Careful selection of the pre and
post heat treatments are recommended.
3
 B 733 – 97
6.3 Stress Relief:
6.3.1 Pretreatment of Iron and Steel for Reducing the Risk of
Hydrogen Embrittlement—Parts that are made of steel with
ultimate tensile strength of greater than 1000 Mpa (hardness of
31 HRC or greater), that have been machined, ground, cold
formed, or cold straightened subsequent to heat treatment, shall
require stress relief heat treatment when specified by the
purchaser, the tensile strength to be supplied by the purchaser,
Specification B 849 may be consulted for a list of pre-
treatments that are widely used.
6.3.2 Peening—Peening prior to plating may be required on
high-strength steel parts to induce residual compressive
stresses in the surface, which can reduce loss of fatigue
strength and improve stress corrosion resistance after plating.
(See Supplementary Requirements).
6.3.3 Steel parts which are designed for unlimited life under
dynamic loads shall be shot peened or rotary flap peened.
NOTE 6—Controlled shot peening is the preferred method because there
are geometry’s where rotary flap peening is not effective. See S11.2.
6.3.3.1 Unless otherwise specified, the shot peening shall be
accomplished on all surfaces for which the coating is required
and all immediate adjacent surfaces when they contain notches,
fillets, or other abrupt changes of section size where stresses
will be concentrated.
6.4 Racking—Parts should be positioned so as to minimize
trapping of hydrogen gas in cavities and holes, allowing free
circulation of solution over all surfaces to obtain uniform
coating thickness. The location of rack or wire marks in the
coating shall be agreed upon between the producer and
purchaser.
6.5 Plating Process:
6.5.1 To obtain consistent coating properties, the bath must
be monitored periodically for pH, temperature, nickel and
hypophosphite. Replenishments to the plating solution should
be as frequent as required to maintain the concentration of the
nickel and hypophosphite between 90 and 100 % of set point.
The use of a statistical regimen to establish the control limits
and frequency of analysis may be employed to ensure quality
deposits are produced.
6.5.2 Mechanical movement of parts and agitation of the
bath is recommended to increase coating smoothness and
uniformity and prevent pitting or streaking due to hydrogen
bubbles.
6.6 Post Coating Treatment for Iron and Steel for Reducing
the Risk of Hydrogen Embrittlement—Parts that are made of
steel with ultimate tensile strengths of 1000 Mpa (hardness of
31 HRC or greater), as well as surface hardened parts, shall
require post coating hydrogen embrittlement relief baking
when specified by the purchaser, the tensile strength to be
supplied by the purchaser. Specification B 850 may be con-
sulted for a list of post treatments that are widely used.
6.6.1 Heat treatment shall be performed preferably within 1
h but not more than 3 h of plating on plated after plating of
steel parts to reduce the risk of hydrogen embrittlement. In all
cases, the duration of the heat treatment shall commence from
the time at which the whole of each part attains the specified
temperature.
4
6.6.2 High-strength steel parts with actual tensile strengths
greater than 1000 MPa (corresponding hardness values 300
HV10, 303 HB or 31 HRC) and surface hardened parts shall be
processed after coating in accordance with Specification B 850.
6.7 Heat Treatment After Plating to Improve Adhesion—To
improve the adhesion of the coating to various substrates, the
heat treatments in Table 3 should be performed as soon as
practical after plating (see 4.3).
6.8 Heat Treatment After Plating to Increase Hardness:
6.8.1 To increase the hardness of the coating a heat treat-
ment of over 260°C is required. Table 3 describes the heat
treatment for maximum hardness.
6.8.2 See Appendixes 3 and 4 and Guide B 656; Figs. X1.2
and Figs. X1.3.
6.8.3 A heat treatment at 260°C for greater than 20 h should
be used to reduce the loss of surface hardness and strength of
some ferrous basis metals. Avoid rapid heating and cooling of
plated parts. Sufficient time must be allowed for large parts to
reach oven temperature.
NOTE 7—The length of time to reach maximum hardness varies with
the phosphorus content of the deposit. High phosphorus deposits may
require longer time or a higher temperature, or both. Individual alloys
should be tested for maximum hardness attainable, especially for condi-
tions of lower temperatures and longer times.
NOTE 8—Inert or reducing atmosphere or vacuum sufficient to prevent
oxidation is recommended for heat treatment above 260°C. Do not use gas
containing hydrogen with high-strength steel parts.
7. Requirements
7.1 Process—The coating shall be produced from an aque-
ous solution through chemical reduction reaction.
7.2 Acceptance Requirements—These requirements are
placed on each lot or batch and can be evaluated by testing the
plated part.
7.2.1 Appearance:
7.2.1.1 The coating surface shall have a uniform, metallic
appearance without visible defects such as blisters, pits,
pimples, and cracks (see 9.2).
7.2.1.2 Imperfections that arise from surface conditions of
the substrate which the producer is unable to remove using
conventional pretreatment techniques and that persist in the
coating shall not be cause for rejection (see 6.1). Also,
discoloration due to heat treatment shall not be cause for
rejection unless special heat treatment atmosphere is specified
(see section 5.1.9).
7.2.2 Thickness—The thickness of the coating shall exceed
the minimum requirements in Table 2 as specified by the
service condition agreed to prior to plating (see 9.3). After
coating and if specified, the part shall not exceed maximum
dimension on significant surface (see section 5.1.3).
NOTE 9—The thickness of the coating cannot be controlled in blind or
small diameter deep holes or where solution circulation is restricted.
7.2.3 Adhesion—The coating shall have sufficient adhesion
to the basis metal to pass the specified adhesion test (see 9.4
and Test Methods B 571).
7.2.4 Porosity—The coatings shall be essentially pore free
when tested according to one of the methods of 9.6. The test
method, the duration of the test, and number of allowable spots
per unit area shall be specified (see section 5.1.10 and 9.6).
 B 733 – 97
7.3 Qualification Requirements—These requirements are
placed on the deposit and process and are performed on
specimens to qualify the deposit and plating process. The tests
for these qualification requirements shall be performed
monthly or more frequently.
7.3.1 Composition—Type II, III, IV, V deposits shall be
analyzed for alloy composition by testing for phosphorus (see
9.1). The weight percent of phosphorus shall be in the range
designated by type classification (see 4.1).
7.3.2 Microhardness—The microhardness of Class 2 depos-
its shall be determined by Test Method B 578 (Knoop). For
Class 2 coatings, the microhardness shall equal or exceed a
minimum of 850 (HK100 (or equivalent Vickers) (see 4.3 and
9.5). The conversion of Vickers to Knoop using Tables E 140
is not recommended.
7.3.3 Hydrogen Embrittlement—The process used to de-
posit a coating onto high strength steels shall be evaluated for
hydrogen embrittlement by Test Method F 519.
8. Sampling
8.1 The purchaser and producer are urged to employ statis-
tical process control in the coating process. Properly performed
this will ensure coated products of satisfactory quality and will
reduce the amount of acceptance inspection.
8.1.1 Sampling plans can only screen out unsatisfactory
products without assurance that none of them will be accepted.
(7)
8.2 The sampling plan used for the inspection of a quantity
of coated parts (lot) shall be Test Method B 602 unless
otherwise specified by purchaser in the purchase order or
contract (see section 5.1.11 and S.11.1).
NOTE 10—Usually, when a collection of coated parts (the inspection lot
8.2) is examined for compliance with the requirements placed on the parts
a relatively small number of parts, the sample, is selected at random and
inspected. The inspection lot is then classified as complying or not
complying with the requirements based on the results of the inspection
sample. The size of the sample and the criteria of compliance are
determined by the application of statistics. The procedure is known as
sampling inspection. Three standards Test Method B 602, Guide B 697,
and Test Method B 762 contain sampling plans that are designed for the
sampling inspection of coatings.
Test Method B 602 contains four sampling plans, three for use with tests
that are nondestructive and one for use with tests that are destructive. The
purchaser and producer may agree on the plan(s) to be used. If they do not,
Test Method B 602 identifies the plan to be used.
Guide B 697 provides a large number of plans and also gives guidance
on the selection of a plan. When Guide B 697 is specified, the purchaser
and producer need to agree on the plan to be used.
Test Method B 762 can be used only for coating requirements that have
a numerical limit, such as coating thickness. The last must yield a
numerical value and certain statistical requirements must be met. Test
Method B 762 contains several plans and also gives instructions for
calculating plans to meet special needs. The purchaser and producer may
agree on the plan(s) to be used. If they do not, Test Method B 762
identifies the plan to be used.
An inspection lot shall be defined as a collection of coated parts which
are of the same kind, that have been produced to the same specification,
that have been coated by a single producer at one time or approximately
the same time under essentially identical conditions, and that are submit-
ted for acceptance or rejection as a group.
5
8.3 All specimens used in the sampling plan for acceptance
tests shall be made of the same basis material and in the same
metallurgical condition as articles being plated to this specifi-
cation.
8.4 All specimens shall be provided by the purchaser unless
otherwise agreed to by the producer.
NOTE 11—The autocatalytic nickel process is dynamic and a daily
sampling is recommended. For Coatings requiring alloy analysis and
corrosion testing weekly sampling should be considered as an option.
9. Test Methods
9.1 Deposit Analysis for Phosphorus:
9.1.1 Phosphorus Determination—Determine mass %
phosphorus content according to Practice E 60, Test Methods
E 352, or Test Method E 156 on known weight of deposit
dissolved in warm concentrated nitric acid.
9.1.2 Composition can be determined by atomic absorption,
emission or X-ray fluorescence spectrometry.
NOTE 12—Inductively coupled plasma techniques can determine the
alloy to within 0.5 %. The following analysis wavelength lines have been
used with minimum interference to determine the alloy.
Ni 216.10 nm Cd 214.44 nm Fe 238.20 nm
P 215.40 nm Co 238.34 nm Pb 283.30 nm
P 213.62 nm Cr 284.32 nm Sn 198.94 nm
Al 202.55 nm Cu 324.75 nm Zn 206.20 nm
9.2 Appearance—Examine the coating visually for compli-
ance with the requirements of 7.2.1.
9.3 Thickness:
NOTE 13—Eddy-current type instruments give erratic measurements
due to variations in conductivity of the coatings with changes in
phosphorus content.
9.3.1 Microscopical Method—Measure the coating thick-
ness of a cross section according to Test Method B 487.
NOTE 14—To protect the edges, electroplate the specimens with a
minimum of 5 µm of nickel or copper prior to cross sectioning.
9.3.2 Magnetic Induction Instrument Method—Test Method
B 499 is applicable to magnetic substrates plated with auto-
catalytic nickel deposits, that contain more than 11 mass %
phosphorus (not ferromagnetic) and that have not been heat-
treated. The instrument shall be calibrated with deposits plated
in the same solution under the same conditions on magnetic
steel.
9.3.3 Beta Backscatter Method—Test Method B 567 is only
applicable to coatings on aluminum, beryllium, magnesium,
and titanium. The instrument must be calibrated with standards
having the same composition as the coating.
NOTE 15—The density of the coating varies with its mass % phospho-
rus content (See Appendix X2).
9.3.4 Micrometer Method—Measure the part, test coupon,
or pin in a specific spot before and after plating using a suitable
micrometer. Make sure that the surfaces measured are smooth,
clean, and dry.
9.3.5 Weigh, Plate, Weigh Method—Using a similar sub-
strate material of known surface area, weigh to the nearest
milligram before and after plating making sure that the part or
coupon is dry and at room temperature for each measurement.
 B 733 – 97
Calculate the thickness from the increase in weight, specific
gravity, and area as follows:
coating thickness, µm 5 10 W/~A 3 D! (1)
where:
W = weight gain in milligrams,
A = total surface area in square centimetres, and
D = grams per cubic centimetres (see Appendix X2).
9.3.6 Coulometric Method—Measure the coating thickness
in accordance with Test Method B 504. The solution to be used
shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
The surface of the coating shall be cleaned prior to testing (see
Note 14).
9.3.6.1 Calibrate standard thickness specimens with depos-
its plated in the same solution under the same conditions.
9.3.7 X-Ray Spectrometry—Measure the coating thickness
in accordance with Test Method B 568. The instrument must be
calibrated with standards having the same composition as the
coating.
NOTE 16—This method is only recommended for deposits in the
as-plated condition. The phosphorus content of the coating must be known
to calculate the thickness of the deposit. Matrix effect due to the
distribution of phosphorus in layers of the coating also effect the
measurement accuracy and require that calibration standards be made
under the same conditions as the production process.
9.4 Adhesion:
9.4.1 Bend Test (Test Methods B 571)—A sample specimen
is bent 180° over a mandrel diameter 43 the thickness (10 mm
minimum) of the specimen and examined at 43 power
magnification for flaking or separation at the interface. Fine
cracks in the coating on the tension side of the bend are not an
indication of poor adhesion. Insertion of a sharp probe at the
interface of the coating and basis metal to determine the
adhesion is suggested.
NOTE 17—Appropriate test specimens are strips approximately 25 to 50
mm wide, 200 to 300 mm long and 3 to 6 mm thick.
9.4.2 Impact Test—A spring-loaded center punch with a
point having 2 to 3 mm radius is used to test adhesion of the
coating on nonsignificant surfaces of the plated part. Make
three closely spaced indentations and examine under 103
magnification for flaking or blistering of the coating, which is
cause for rejection.
9.4.3 Thermal Shock—The coated part is heated to 200°C in
an oven and then quenched in room temperature water. The
coating is examined for blistering or other evidence of poor
adhesion at 43 magnification.
9.5 Microhardness—The microhardness of the coating can
be measured by Test Method B 578 using Knoop indenter and
is reported in Knoop Hardness Number (HK). It will vary
depending on loads, type of indenter, and operator. A100 g load
is recommended. The rhombic Knoop indenter gives higher
hardness readings than the square-base pyramidal Vickers
diamond indenter for 100 to 300 g loads, see Ref (6). For
maximum accuracy, a minimum coating thickness of 75 µm is
recommended. Conversions of Vickers or Knoop hardness
number to Rockwell C is not recommended.
NOTE 18—On thick (75 µm+) coatings on steel a surface microhardness
6
determination is permissible.
9.6 Porosity—There is no universally accepted test for
porosity. When required, one of the following tests can be used
on the plated part or specimen.
9.6.1 Ferroxyl Test for Iron Base Substrates—Prepare the
test solution by dissolving 25 g of potassium ferricyanide and
15 g of sodium chloride in 1 L of distilled water. After
cleaning, immerse the part for 30 s in the test solution at 25°C.
After rinsing and air drying, examine the part for blue spots,
which form at pore sites.
9.6.2 Boiling Water Test for Iron-Base Substrates—
Completely immerse the part to be treated in a vessel filled
with aerated water at room temperature. Apply heat to the
beaker at such a rate that the water begins to boil in not less
than 15 min, nor more than 20 min after the initial application
of heat. Continue to boil the water for 30 min. Then remove the
part, air dry, and examine for rust spots, which indicate pores.
NOTE 19—Aerated water is prepared by bubbling clean compressed air
through distilled water by means of a glass diffusion disk at room
temperature for 12 h. The pH of the aerated water should be 6.7 + 0.5.
9.6.3 Aerated Water Test for Iron-Base Substrates—
Immerse the part for 4 h in vigorously aerated Type IV or better
water (see Specification D 1193) at 25 6 2°C temperature and
then examine the part for rust spots.
9.6.4 Alizarin Test for Aluminum Alloys— Wipe the plated
part or specimen with 10 mass % sodium hydroxide solution.
After 3 min contact, rinse, and apply a solution of alizarin
sulfonate prepared by dissolving 1.5 g of methyl cellulose in 90
mL of boiling water to which, after cooling, 0.1 g sodium
alizarin sulfonate, dissolved in 5 mL of ethanol is added. After
4 min contact, apply glacial acetic acid until the violet color
disappears. Any red spots remaining indicate pores.
9.6.5 Porosity Test for Copper Substrates—Wipe the plated
part or specimen with glacial acetic acid. After 3 min, apply a
solution of potassium ferrocyanide prepared by dissolving 1 g
of potassium ferrocyanide and 1.5 g methyl cellulose in 90 mL
of boiling distilled water. The appearance of brown spots after
2 min indicate pores.
9.7 Other Test Methods—Test methods which have been
developed that are equal to or better than these may be
substituted. The precision and bias requirements will vary for
each type of test. If an alternate test is specified it shall be
agreed upon between the producer and the purchaser.
10. Rejection and Rehearing
10.1 Part(s) that fail to conform to the requirements of this
standard may be rejected. Rejection shall be reported to the
producer promptly in writing. In the case of dissatisfaction
occurs with the results of a test, the producer may make a claim
for a hearing. Coatings that show imperfections may be
rejected.
11. Certification
11.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, the
purchaser shall be furnished certification that the samples
representing each lot have been processed, tested and inspected
as directed in this specification and the requirements have been
 B 733 – 97
met. When specified in the purchase order or contract, a report
of the test results shall be furnished.
12. Keywords
12.1 autocatalytic; chemical nickel; coatings; conductive;
corrosion resistance; electroless; functional; nickel; nickel
phosphorus; wear resistance
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
contract or order.
S1.1 Shot Peening—When specified by the purchaser in the
ordering information, the part(s) shall be shot peened prior to
plating in accordance with Specification B 851 or MIL-S-
13165.
S1.2 Composition—When specified by the purchaser in the
ordering information the phosphorus content shall be main-
tained in the deposit to within 1 %. Use the test methods
described in 9.1.
S1.3 Inert Atmosphere—When specified by the purchaser in
the ordering information, the coating shall be heat treated in a
vacuum, inert, or reducing atmosphere to prevent surface
oxidation of the coating.
S1.4 Hydrogen Embrittlement—When specified by the pur-
chaser in the ordering information the plating process shall be
evaluated at the time of processing parts for hydrogen em-
brittlement using Test Method F 519.
S1.5 Abrasive Wear—When specified by the purchaser in
the ordering information, the coating shall be tested for
abrasion wear resistance using the method in Appendix X1 of
this specification. The coating shall meet a maximum wear rate
which is specified by the purchaser and agreed to by the
producer.
S1.6 Adhesive Wear—When specified by the purchaser in
the ordering information, the coating shall be tested for
adhesive wear resistance using Test Method D 2714 or Test
Method D 2670. The wear rate shall be specified by the
purchaser and agreed to by the producer.
APPENDIXES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. TABER ABRASER WEAR TEST METHOD
X1.1 Scope
X1.1.1 This test method will evaluate the resistance of the
coating to abrasive wear. The test is performed by rotating a
plated panel under rotating rubber wheels and weighing the
panel after each 1000 cycles for weight loss. Duration of the
test is 6000 cycles and it can be extended to 25 000 cycles for
more complete results.
NOTE X1.1—Variation in results have been attributed to the humidity in
7
S1.7 Contact Resistance—When specified by the purchaser
in the ordering information, the coating shall be tested for
contact resistance using Test Method B 667.
S1.8 Solderability—When specified by the purchaser in the
ordering information, the unaged coating shall pass Test
Method B 678 on solderability.
S1.9 Corrosion Resistance—When specified by the pur-
chaser in the ordering information the coating shall pass any
special corrosion tests agreed to by the producer. The corrosion
resistance of the coating to a specific liquid medium can be
determined by means of immersion tests (see Practice G 31) or
electrochemical test (see Practices G 5 and G 59).
S1.10 Pitting Corrosion Resistance—Use Method G 85
(acetic acid-salt spray test), Method B 368 (copper-accelerated
acetic acid-salt spray, CASS), or Method B 380 (Corrodkote)
to evaluate the corrosion resistance of the coating to pitting.
S1.11 Special Government Requirements:
S1.11.1 Sampling—Part(s) plated for the US Government
and Military use shall use MIL-STD-105 as the sampling plan.
S1.11.2 Shot Peening—High strength steel part(s) pro-
cessed for US Government and Military use shall be shot
peened in accordance with MIL-S-13165 or rotary flap peened
in accordance with MIL-R-81841. (see Note 6).
S1.11.3 Packaging—Parts shall be packaged in accordance
with Practice D 3951.
the laboratory and the storage conditions of the CS-10 wheels. Care
should be taken to control the humidity between tests.
X1.1.2 The results are variable between tests and therefore
three plated test specimens should be tested to 6000 cycles
each. The results should be averaged without the first 1000
cycles and the abrasion wear resistance is reported as the
weight loss in mg/1000 cycles (Taber Wear Index).
 B 733 – 97
X1.2 Apparatus
X1.2.1 Taber Abraser Wear Testing Unit—The unit must be
capable of loading with 1000 g load and operating with a
vacuum.
X1.2.2 Abrasion Wheels— Use CS-10 (resilient rubber)
Taber wheels. To reface the wheels use CS-11 discs from Taber.
The hardness of CS-10 wheels can change with time and can
effect the reproducibility of results (see Test Method D 4060).
X1.2.3 Test Specimens— Test specimens shall be made
from 20 gage CR steel 4 by 4 in. (100 by 100 by 1.3 mm) with
a 0.250 (6.35 mm) hole in the center. Test specimens are
available from Taber.
X1.2.4 Analytical Balance—Scale which is capable of mea-
suring to 150 g 6 0.1 mg.
X1.3 Procedure
X1.3.1 Plate three specimens with 0.001 in. (25 µm) of
nickel phosphorus coating.
8
X1.3.2 Wear test the specimens. For each of the three
specimens complete the following steps:
X1.3.2.1 Run the CS-10 wheels on the coating for 1000
cycles to remove any surface roughness. The wheels shall be
loaded with 1000 g with a vacuum on high for the entire test.
X1.3.2.2 Cool and weigh the specimen to the nearest 0.1
mg.
X1.3.2.3 Dress the CS-10 wheels with a CS-11 disc for 50
cycles.
X1.3.2.4 Abrasion test the coating with 1000 g load for
1000 cycles.
X1.3.2.5 Repeat X1.3.2.2, X1.3.2.3 and X1.3.2.4 until a
total of 6000 cycles have been accomplished for each speci-
men.
X1.4 Reporting
X1.4.1 Determine the average weight loss in milligrams for
each specimen per 1000 cycles Taber Wear Index and the mean
weight loss per 1000 cycles for all specimens. Report the mean
and standard deviation for the coating.
 B 733 – 97

X2. DENSITY OF AUTOCATALYTIC NICKEL DEPOSITS

FIG. X2.1 Density of Autocatalytic Nickel Phosphorus Alloy Summary of Reported Values

9
 B 733 – 97

X3. HARDNESS VERSUS HEAT TREATMENT

FIG. X3.1 Hardness of Autocatalytic Nickel Phosphorus Versus Heat Treatment Versus Phosphorus

X4. ALLOY TYPES

NOTE X4.1—These different alloy TYPEs are produced from processes
which are specifically formulated and controlled. Additional requirements
for internal stress, purity, and elongation may be necessary for some
applications.
X4.1 The physical differences of these TYPEs provide for
a wide variation in performance in wire bonding, contact
resistance, machineability, lubricity, reactivation and melting
point. These differences are produced by micro structural
differences between Ni + Ni3P and Ni3P. These differences
also effect non-destructive thickness testing by X-Ray and
magnetic means. Careful attention to the selection of TYPE
will insure optimum performance of the deposit in the intended
application.

10
 B 733 – 97

FIG. X4.1 Selected Properties of As Plated Autocatalytic Nickel Phosphorus Coatings by Phosphorus Content

X5. SUMMARY PROGRAM 14

X5.1 Results of 110 Month Exposure of Autocatalytic
Nickel Deposits at Kure Beach, North Carolina:
X5.1.1 Program 14 is part of an ongoing marine exposure
testing process at the 75 m site at LaQue Center for Corrosion
Technology, Wrightsville, NC (Kure Beach). The program
called for the plating of both Type IV and Type V deposits on
standard smooth and ground steel Q Panels.
X5.1.2 There were nine different sources of deposits, each
providing five lots of five panels. The program involved plating
12.5, 25, and 75µ m thicknesses on smooth and ground surface
and one smooth lot heat treated for hardness at 550°C for 2 h.
The heat treatment temperature was considerably higher than
typical processing and was chosento evaluate the formation of
diffusion products of iron, nickel and phosphorus.
X5.1.3 The following matrix of test panels were prepared
and exposed with subsequent analysis for alloy and thickness.
Panels were rated at Kure Beach each year by a team from
ASTM Committee B8 using Practice B 537.
X5.1.4 The interpretation of the results of these exposure
test should be made on the basis of general performance of the
coating on panels. Base metal condition, undercoats, surface
preparation, and post processing all have a significant effect on
the performance and should be given careful consideration
when designing the part and pretreatment processing sequence.

11
 B 733 – 97
TABLE X5.1 Results of 110 Month Exposure of Autocatalytic (Electroless) Nickel Deposits at Kure Beach, North CarolinaA
Phosphorus Alloy %wt Practice
Heat Thickness, Thickness, B 537
Deposit Type Source Lot Surface
Treatment µm Target µm Actual Ratings 110
ICP EDAX Months
1 Smooth No 12.5 3.6 6 3.0
2 Smooth No 25 9.2 6 0.3
V G 3 Smooth No 75 80.5 10.5 10.9 10 6 0
4 Smooth Yes 25 9.2 6 0.3
5 Ground No 25 7.8 6 0.4
1 Smooth No 12.5 0.0 6 0
2 Smooth No 25 8.0 6 0
V E 3 Smooth No 75 77 10.0 10.2 9.8 6 0.4
4 Smooth Yes 25 8.2 6 0.8
5 Ground No 25 4.2 6 0.4
1 Smooth No 12.5 6.8 6 1.3
2 Smooth No 25 6.2 6 0.4
V C 3 Smooth No 75 46 9.9 10.4 8.8 6 1.1
4 Smooth Yes 25 6.8 6 1.3
5 Ground No 25 0.0 6 0
1 Smooth No 12.5 0.0 6 0
2 Smooth No 25 5.8 6 0.4
IV J 3 Smooth No 75 9.0 9.6 6 1.1
4 Smooth Yes 25 7.0 6 0
5 Ground No 25 1.0 6 2
1 Smooth No 12.5 0.6 6 0.5
2 Smooth No 25 7.4 6 0.9
IV H 3 Smooth No 75 8.9 10.0 6 0
4 Smooth Yes 25 4.8 6 1.1
5 Ground No 25 0.0 6 0
1 Smooth No 12.5 0.0 6 0
2 Smooth No 25 1.8 6 1.6
IV B 3 Smooth No 75 79 8.3 7.3 6.0 6 1.0
4 Smooth Yes 25 5.0 6 0
5 Ground No 25 0.0 6 0
1 Smooth No 12.5 0.0 6 0
2 Smooth No 25 0.0 6 0
IV D 3 Smooth No 75 77 8.2 9.5 5.0 6 1.4
4 Smooth Yes 25 5.4 6 0.5
5 Ground No 25 0.0 6 0
1 Smooth No 12.5 0.0 6 0
2 Smooth No 25 0.0 6 0
IV K 3 Smooth No 75 7.5 0.6 6 0.8
4 Smooth Yes 25 5.6 6 2.8
5 Ground No 25 0.0 6 0
1 Smooth No 12.5 0.0 6 0
2 Smooth No 25 0.2 6 0.4
IV I 3 Smooth No 75 80 7.1 0.4 6 0.5
4 Smooth Yes 25 4.6 6 0.8
5 Ground No 25 0.0 6 0
A
The conclusions from this marine exposure program have been summarized by Dr. George DiBari of INCO in his paper Marine Corrosion Performance of EN Coating
on Steel, Final Report on ASTM Program 14 which was presented at EN91 Conference, Product Finishing.

REFERENCES

(1) Symposium on Electroless Nickel Plating, ASTM STP 265, ASTM,
1959.
(2) Engineering Properties of Electroless Nickel, The International Nickel
Co., Inc., New York, NY.
(3) Gawrilov, C. G., Chemical (Electroless) Nickel Plating, Portcullis
Press, London, 1974.
(4) Safranek, W. H., The Properties of Electrodeposited Metals and
Alloys, The American Electroplaters and Surface Finishers Society,
12644 Research Parkway, Orlando, FL 32826, 1986 Chapter 23.
(5) Mallory G., and Hajdu J. “Electroless Plating,” AESF 12644 Research
Parkway, Orlando, FL 32826, 1990.
(6) Parker, K.,“ Hardness and Wear Resistance Tests of Electroless Nickel
Deposits,” Plating, Vol 61, September 1974.
(7) Parker, K., “Effects of Heat Treatment on the Properties of Electroless
Nickel Deposits,” Plating and Surface Finishing, Vol 68, December
1981.

12
 B 733 – 97

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

13
 Designation: B 734 – 97 (Reapproved 2003)e1

Standard Specification for

Electrodeposited Copper for Engineering Uses1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 734; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

e1 NOTE—Section 6.8.1 was editorially updated in May 2003.

1. Scope Coating Thicknesses by the Dropping Test2

1.1 This specification covers requirements for electrodepos- B 567 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thickness
ited coatings of copper used for engineering purposes. Ex- by the Beta Backscatter Method2
amples include surface hardening, heat treatment stop-off, as B 568 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thickness
an underplate for other engineering coatings, for electromag- by X-Ray Spectrometry2
netic interferences (EMI) shielding in electronic circuitry, and B 571 Practice for Qualitative Adhesion Testing of Metallic
in certain joining operations. Coatings2
1.2 This specification is not intended for electrodeposited B 588 Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Trans-
copper when used as a decorative finish, or as an undercoat for parent or Opaque Coatings by Double-Beam Interference
other decorative finishes. Microscope Technique2
1.3 This specification is not intended for electrodeposited B 602 Test Method for Attribute Sampling of Metallic and
copper when used for electroforming. Inorganic Coatings2
B 659 Guide for Measuring Thickness of Metallic and
2. Referenced Documents Inorganic Coatings2
2.1 ASTM Standards: B 678 Test Method for Solderability of Metallic-Coated
B 183 Practice for Preparation of Low-Carbon Steel for Products2
Electroplating2 B 697 Guide for Selection of Sampling Plans for Inspection
B 242 Practice for Preparation of High-Carbon Steel for of Electrodeposited Metallic and Inorganic Coatings2
Electroplating2 B 762 Method of Variables Sampling of Metallic and Inor-
B 254 Practice for Preparation of and Electroplating on ganic Coatings2
Stainless Steel2 B 765 Guide for Selection of Porosity Tests for Electrode-
B 320 Practice for Preparation of Iron Castings for Electro- posits and Related Metallic Coatings2
plating2 B 832 Guide for Electroforming with Nickel and Copper2
B 322 Practice for Cleaning Metals Prior to Electroplating2 B 849 Specification for Pre-Treatments of Iron or Steel for
B 374 Terminology Relating to Electroplating2 Reducing Risk of Hydrogen Embrittlement2
B 487 Test Method for Measurement of Metal and Oxide B 850 Guide for Post-Coating Treatments of Steel for Re-
Coating Thickness by Microscopical Examination of a ducing the Risk of Hydrogen Embrittlement2
Cross Section2 B 851 Specification for Automated Controlled Shot Peening
B 499 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thick- of Metallic Articles Prior to Nickel, Auto Catalytic Nickel,
nesses by the Magnetic Method: Nonmagnetic Coatings on or Chromium Plating, or as Final Finish2
Magnetic Basis Metals2 D 3951 Practice for Commercial Packaging3
B 504 Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Me- F 519 Test Method for Mechanical Hydrogen Embrittle-
tallic Coatings by the Coulometric Method2 ment Evaluation of Plating Processes and Service Environ-
B 507 Practice for Design of Articles to Be Electroplated on ments 4
Racks2 2.2 Military Standard:
B 555 Guide for Measurement of Electrodeposited Metallic MIL-R-81841 Rotary Flap Peening of Metal Parts5
MIL-S-13165 Shot Peening of Metal Parts5
MIL-W-81840 Rotary Flap Peening Wheels5
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on
Metallic and Inorganic Coatings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
3
B08.08.01 on Engineering Coatings. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 15.09.
4
Current edition approved Feb. 10, 2003. Published May 2003. Originally Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 15.03.
5
approved in 1984. Last previous edition approved in 1997 as B 734 – 97. Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05. Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094. Attn: NPODS.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 734 – 97 (2003)e1
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 significant surfaces—those surfaces normally visible
(directly or by reflection) that are essential to the appearance or
serviceability of the article when assembled in a normal
position; or which can be the source of corrosion products that
deface visible surfaces on the assembled article. When neces-
sary, the significant surface shall be indicated on the drawing of
the article, or by the provision of suitably marked samples.
NOTE 1—When significant surfaces are involved on which the specified
thickness of coating cannot readily be controlled, such as threads, holes,
deep recesses, and bases of angles, it will be necessary to apply thicker
coatings on the more accessible surfaces, or to use special racking or both.
3.1.2 inspection lot—a collection of coated articles that; are
of the same type; have been produced to the same specifica-
tions; have been coated by a single supplier at one time, or at
approximately the same time, under essentially identical con-
ditions; and are submitted for acceptance or rejection as a
group.
3.2 Definitions—For definitions of the technical terms used
in this specification see Terminology B 374.
4. Classification
4.1 The electrodeposited copper is classified according to
thickness of the electrodeposit in the following table:
Class Minimum Thickness, µm
25 25
20 20
12 12
5 5
x Thickness specified
NOTE 2—For electroforming applications, that require much thicker
applications, see Guide B 832.
5. Ordering Information
5.1 The buyer shall supply to the producer in the purchase
order or engineering drawings; marked samples or other
governing documents the following information:
5.1.1 Title, ASTM designation number (Specification
B 734), and date of issue.
5.1.2 Classification or thickness of electrodeposited copper
(see 4.1),
5.1.3 Significant surfaces if other than defined in 3.1.1,
5.1.4 Sampling plan (Section 7),
5.1.5 Number of test specimens for destructive testing
(Section 8), and
5.1.6 Thickness, adhesion, solderability, porosity and num-
ber of pores acceptable, or hydrogen embrittlement tests and
methods required (Section 8).
5.2 Where required, dimensional tolerances allowed for the
specified electroplated copper thickness shall be specified.
5.3 In addition to the requirements of 5.1 and when the parts
to be electroplated are supplied to the electroplater by the
buyer, the buyer shall also supply the following information as
required.
5.3.1 Identity of the base material by alloy identification
such as ASTM, AISI, or SAE numbers, or equivalent compo-
sition information,
5.3.2 Hardness of the parts, and
2
5.3.3 Heat treatment for stress relief, whether it has been
performed or is required.
5.4 If required by either party, the manufacturer of the parts
to be electroplated shall provide the electroplating facility with
separate test specimens (see section 8.1).
6. Coating Requirements
6.1 Appearance—The coating on the significant surfaces of
the product shall be smooth and free of visual defects such as
blisters, pits, roughness, cracks, flaking, burned deposits, and
uncoated areas. The boundaries of electroplating that cover
only a portion of the surface shall, after finishing as indicated
in the drawing, be free of beads, nodules, jagged edges and
other detrimental irregularities. Imperfections and variations in
appearance in the coating that arise from surface conditions of
the basis metal (scratches, pores, roll marks, inclusions, etc.)
and that persist in the finish despite the observance of good
metal finishing practices shall not be cause for rejection.
NOTE 3—Electroplated finishes generally perform better when the
substrate over which they are applied is smooth and free of deep scratches,
torn metal, pores, inclusions, and other defects. It is recommended that the
specifications covering the unfinished product provide limits for these
defects. A metal finisher can often remove defects through special
treatments such as grinding, polishing, abrasive blasting, and special
chemical treatments. However, these are not normal treatment steps.
When they are desired, they must be agreed upon between the buyer and
the producer.
6.2 Thickness—The thickness of the copper coating on the
significant surfaces shall conform to the requirements of the
specified class as defined in Section 4.
NOTE 4—Variation in the coating thickness from point-to-point on a
coated article is an inherent characteristic of electroplating processes.
Therefore, the coating thickness will have to exceed the specified value at
some points on the significant surfaces to ensure that the thickness equals
or exceeds the specified value at all points. As a result, the average coating
thickness on an article will usually be greater than the specified value; how
much greater is largely determined by the shape of the article (see Practice
B 507) and the characteristics of the electroplating process. Additionally,
the average coating thickness on an article will vary from article to article
within a production lot. Therefore, if all of the articles in a production lot
are to meet the thickness requirement, the average coating thickness of the
production lot as a whole will be greater than the average necessary to
ensure that a single article meets the requirements.
NOTE 5—When electroplating threaded parts such as machine screws,
care is required to avoid too much plate buildup on the crest of the thread.
In such applications a maximum plate thickness allowable on the crests
may require that thicknesses in other areas be thinner.
6.3 Porosity—When specified, the coating shall be suffi-
ciently free of pores to pass the porosity test specified in 8.4.
6.4 Solderability—When specified, the coating shall meet
the requirements of Test Method B 678.
6.5 Pretreatment of Iron and Steel for Reducing the Risk of
Hydrogen Embrittlement—Parts for critical applications that
are made of steels with ultimate tensile strengths of 1000 MPa,
hardness of 31 HRC or greater, that have been machined,
ground, cold formed, or cold straightened subsequent to heat
treatment, shall require stress relief heat treatment when
specified by the purchaser, the tensile strength to be supplied
by the purchaser. Specification B 849 may be consulted for a
list of pretreatments that are used widely.
 B 734 – 97 (2003)e1
6.6 Post Coating Treatment of Iron and Steel for Reducing
the Risk of Hydrogen Embrittlement—Parts for critical appli-
cations that are made of steels with ultimate tensile strengths of
1000 MPa, hardness of 31 HRC or greater, as well as surface
hardened parts, shall require post coating hydrogen embrittle-
ment relief baking when specified by the purchaser, the tensile
strength to be supplied by the purchaser. Specification B 850
may be consulted for a list of post treatments that are used
widely.
6.7 Peening of Metal Parts—If peening is required before
electroplating to induce residual compressive stress to increase
fatique strength and resistance to stress corrosion cracking of
the metal parts, refer to MIL-S-13165, MIL-R-81841, MIL-W-
81840, and Specification B 851.
6.8 Supplementary Requirements:
6.8.1 Packaging—If packaging requirements are to be met
under this specification, they shall be in accordance with
Practice D 3951, or as specified in the contract or order.
(Warning—Some contemporary packaging materials may
emit fumes that are deleterious to the surface of the coating.)
7. Sampling
7.1 The sampling plan used for the inspection of a quantity
of the coated articles shall be as agreed upon between the
purchaser and the seller.
NOTE 6—Usually, when a collection of coated articles, the inspection
lot (7.2), is examined for compliance with the requirements placed on the
articles, a relatively small number of the articles, the sample, is selected at
random and is inspected. The inspection lot then is classified as complying
or not complying with the requirements based on the results of the
inspection of the sample. The size of the sample and the criteria of
compliance are determined by the application of statistics. The procedure
is known as sampling inspection. Three standards, Test Method B 602,
Guide B 697, and Method B 762 contain sampling plans that are designed
for the sampling inspection of coatings. Test Method B 602 contains four
sampling plans, three for use with tests that are non-destructive and one
when they are destructive. The buyer and seller may agree on the plan or
plans to be used. If they do not, Test Method B 602 identifies the plan to
be used. Guide B 697 provides a large number of plans and also gives
guidance in the selection of a plan. When Guide B 697 is specified, the
buyer and seller need to agree on the plan to be used. Methods B 762 can
be used only for coating requirements that have numerical limit, such as
coating thickness. The test must yield a numerical value and certain
statistical requirements must be met. Methods B 762 contains several
plans and also gives instructions for calculating plans to meet special
needs. The buyer and the seller may agree on the plan or plans to be used.
If they do not, Methods B 762 identifies the plan to be used.
NOTE 7—When both destructive and non-destructive tests exist for the
measurement of a characteristic, the purchaser needs to state which is to
be used so that the proper sampling plan is selected. A test may destroy the
coating but in a non-critical area; or, although it may destroy the coating,
a tested part can be reclaimed by stripping and recoating. The purchaser
needs to state whether the test is to be considered destructive or
non-destructive.
7.2 An inspection lot shall be defined as a collection of
coated articles that are of the same kind, that have been
produced to the same specifications, that have been coated by
a single supplier at one time, or at approximately the same time
under essentially identical conditions, and that are submitted
for acceptance or rejection as a group.
7.3 If special test specimens are used to represent the coated
articles in a test, the number used shall be that required in 8.1.1.
3
8. Test Methods
8.1 The permission or the requirement to use special test
specimens, the number to be used, the material from which
they are to be made, and their shape and size shall be stated by
the purchaser.
NOTE 8—Test specimens often are used to represent the coated articles
in a test if the articles are of a size, shape, or material that is not suitable
for the test, or if it is preferred not to submit articles to a destructive test
because, for example, the articles are expensive or few in number. The
specimen should duplicate the characteristics of the article that influence
the property being tested.
8.1.1 Special test specimens used to represent articles in an
adhesion, porosity, corrosion resistance, or appearance test
shall be made of the same material, in the same metallurgical
condition, and have the same surface condition as the articles
they represent, and be placed in the production lot of and be
processed along with the articles they represent.
8.1.2 Special test specimens used to represent articles in a
coating thickness test may be made of a material that is suitable
for the test method even if the represented article is not of the
same material. For example, a low-carbon steel specimen may
represent a brass article when the magnetic thickness test is
used (Test Method B 499). The thickness specimen need not be
carried through the complete process with the represented
article. If not, introduce it into the process at the point where
the coating is applied and carry it through all steps that have a
bearing on the coating thickness. In rack plating, rack the
specimen in the same way with the same distance from and
orientation with the anodes and other items in the process as
the article it represents.
NOTE 9—When special test specimens are used to represent coated
articles in a thickness test, the specimens will not necessarily have the
same thickness and thickness distribution as the articles unless the
specimens and the articles are of the same general size and shape.
Therefore, before finished articles can be accepted on the basis of a
thickness test performed on special test specimens, the relationship
between the thickness on the specimen and the thickness on the part needs
to be established. The criterion of acceptance is that thickness on the
specimen that corresponds to the required thickness on the article.
8.2 Thickness—Measure the coating thickness at locations
on the significant surface designated by the purchaser, and
make the measurement with an accuracy of 10 % or better by
use of one of the following test methods: Test Methods B 487,
B 499, B 504, B 568, and B 588.
NOTE 10—Other thickness measurement methods may be used where it
can be demonstrated that the uncertainty is less than 10 %.
8.3 Adhesion—Use one or more of the methods described in
Test Methods B 571 as agreed and as specified in the purchase
order or other specifying document.
8.4 Porosity—Conduct the ferroxyl test as described in
Appendix X1. Observe the results after 5 min. The part fails if
more than the number of pores per unit area specified by the
purchaser is found.
8.5 Solderability—Conduct the test in accordance with Test
Method B 678. The coating shall be deemed solderable if the
solder coating is adherent, bright, smooth, and uniform over at
least 95 % of the test surface.
NOTE 11—Electroplated copper surfaces become more difficult to
 B 734 – 97 (2003)e1
solder as they age. It may be necessary to clean the copper surface just
prior to the soldering test or soldering operation.
8.6 Embrittlement Relief—Parts shall be examined visually
for cracks indicating embrittlement failure, or the effectiveness
of the relief treatment shall be determined by a procedure
specified by the purchaser.
NOTE 12—Test Method F 519 describes hydrogen embrittlement testing
that utilizes specially machined test specimens.
9. Rejection and Rehearing
9.1 Materials that fail to conform to the requirements of this
specification shall be rejected. Rejection shall be reported to
the producer or the supplier promptly, and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of a test, the producer or
supplier may make a claim for a rehearing. Finishes that show
imperfections during subsequent manufacturing operations
may be rejected.
10. Certification
10.1 The purchaser may require in the purchase order or
contract that the producer or supplier give to the purchaser
certification that the finish was produced and tested in accor-
dance with this specification and found to meet the require-
ments. The purchaser may similarly require that a report of the
test results be furnished.

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. MODIFIED FERROXYL TEST (ALSO SEE GUIDE B 765)

X1.1 General X1.3 Procedure

X1.1.1 This method reveals discontinuities, such as pores,
in electroplated copper on iron or steel.
NOTE X1.1—This test is slightly corrosive to copper, particularly if the
test period is extended appreciably (3 min or more) beyond the 5-min
period. The test is very sensitive to the superficial presence of iron, that is,
blue spots can occur on an electrodeposited copper surface that has been
in sufficient contact with a piece of iron to leave a trace of the iron on the
copper surface.
X1.2 Materials
X1.2.1 Three solutions and strips of “wet strength” filter
paper are required.
X1.2.1.1 Solution A, is prepared by dissolving 50 g of white
gelatine and 50 g of sodium chloride in 1 L of warm (45°C)
distilled water.
X1.2.1.2 Solution B, is prepared by dissolving 50 g of
sodium chloride and 0.1 g of a non-ionic wetting agent in 1 L
of distilled water.
X1.2.1.3 Solution C, is prepared by dissolving 10 g of
potassium ferricyanide in 1 L of distilled water.
X1.3.1 Immerse filter paper strips in Solution A (which is
kept sufficiently warm to keep the gelatine dissolved), then
remove and allow to dry. Just before use, immerse the dry filter
paper strips in Solution B just long enough to thoroughly wet
all of the filter paper. Firmly press the filter paper against the
thoroughly cleaned and degreased electroplated copper surface
to be tested. Allow 5-min contact time for the test period (see
Note X1.1). If the filter paper should become dry during the
test, moisten again with Solution B. Remove the papers at the
end of the contact period and place at once into Solution C.
Sharply defined blue markings will appear on the papers
indicating basis metal corrosion or porosity.
X1.4 Report
X1.4.1 The report shall include the following information:
X1.4.1.1 The area of surface tested.
X1.4.1.2 The total number and diameter of all spots on the
filter paper oriented to surface area tested.
X1.4.1.3 The highest number of spots visible within a
square area as defined and specified by the purchaser.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 736 – 00

Standard Specification for

Aluminum, Aluminum Alloy and Aluminum-Clad Steel Cable
Shielding Stock1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 736; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope test method portion, Section 12, of this specification. This

1.1 This specification covers selected aluminum, aluminum- standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
alloy and aluminum clad steel cable shielding stock, both if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
uncoated and coated, for applications such as electrostatic or of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
electromagnetic shielding for insulated power, control, instru- practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
mentation and communication cables (including coaxial cable). tions prior to use.
NOTE 1—See B 694, Specification for Copper, Copper Alloy, and 2. Referenced Documents
Copper-Clad Stainless Steel Sheet and Strip for Electrical Cable Shield-
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
ing2 for related standards for copper-based shielding materials.
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
1.2 The materials covered are the following: extent referenced herein:
Type of MaterialA Coating 2.2 ASTM Standards:
Aluminum 1060 none
A 568/A 568M Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and
Aluminum 1100 none High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled,
Aluminum 1145 none General Requirements for3
Aluminum 1235 none
Alloy 3003 none
B 193 Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor
Materials4
Aluminum 1060 polyolefin B 557 Test Methods of Tension Testing Wrought and Cast
Aluminum 1100 polyolefin
Aluminum 1145 polyolefin
Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products5
Aluminum 1235 polyolefin D 903 Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhe-
Alloy 3003 polyolefin sive Bonds6
Aluminum 1060 vinyl resin
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Aluminum 1100 vinyl resin Determine Conformance with Specifications7
Aluminum 1145 vinyl resin E 34 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Aluminum and
Aluminum 1235 vinyl resin
Alloy 3003 vinyl resin Aluminum Base Alloys8
E 55 Practice for Sampling Wrought Nonferrous Metals and
Aluminum Clad SteelB none Alloys for Determination of Chemical Composition8
Aluminum Clad SteelB polyolefin E 227 Test Method for Optical Emission Spectrometric
____________________ Analysis of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys by the
A
Aluminum designations are in accordance with ANSI H35.1. The equivalent Point-to-Plane Technique8
Unified Numbering System alloy designations are those shown preceded by A9, E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)9
for example, A91100 for aluminum 1100 in accordance with Practice E 527.
B
Cladding ratio must be specified (see 5.4). E 607 Test Method for Optical Emission Spectrometric
1.3 For acceptance criteria for inclusion of new aluminum Analysis of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys by the
and aluminum alloys in this specification, see Annex A2. Point-to-Plane Technique, Nitrogen Atmosphere10
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded E 716 Practices for Sampling Aluminum and Aluminum
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for Alloys For Spectrochemical Analysis10
information only.
1.5 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.03.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03.
1 5
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
6
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.03 on Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 15.06.
7
Aluminum Alloy Wrought Products. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
8
Current edition approved May 10, 2000. Published August 2000. Originally Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
9
published as B 736–84. Last previous edition B 736–95. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
2 10
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 736
E 1251 Test Method for Optical Emission Spectrometric
Analysis of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys by the Argon
Atmosphere, Point-to Plane, Unipolar Self-Initiating Ca-
pacitor Discharge10
2.3 American National Standards:
H35.1 Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Wrought
Aluminum5
H35.2 Dimensional Tolerances for Aluminum Mill Prod-
ucts5
B46.1 Surface Texture11
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 cable shielding stock—a rolled product, rectangular in
cross section and form, of nominal thickness 0.004 in. (0.10
mm) through 0.019 in. (0.48 mm) in coils (rolls) or traverse
wound on reels or spools, with sheared or slit edges for
electrical cable shielding applications.
3.1.2 cladding ratio—ratio by percent thickness of the
aluminum/steel/aluminum component layers; for example, 20/
60/20.
3.1.3 producer—the primary manufacturer of the material.
3.1.4 supplier—includes only the category of jobbers and
distributors as distinct from producers.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material to this specification shall include the
following information:
4.1.1 This specification designation (which includes the
number, the year, and the revision letter, if applicable),
4.1.2 Quantity for each item, in pounds (kilograms),
4.1.3 Name of material (cable shielding),
4.1.4 Type of material (bare aluminum, coated aluminum,
aluminum clad steel, or coated aluminum clad steel) (see 1.2),
4.1.5 Aluminum designation, when appropriate (see 1.2 and
5.3),
4.1.6 Cladding ratio, when appropriate (see 5.4),
4.1.7 Type of coating, class of coating and number of sides
to be coated (see 1.2, 11.1 and Table 1),
4.1.8 Color of coated aluminum (see 11.3),
4.1.9 Temper when non-standard is required (see Section 9),
4.1.10 Dimensions (thickness and width),
4.1.11 How furnished: coils (rolls), traverse wound on reels
or spools, etc.,
4.2 Additionally, orders for material to this specification
shall include the following information when required by the
purchaser:
4.2.1 Whether the resistivity test is required for any item
(Section 13),
4.2.2 Core requirements (core material, inner core diameter,
if required; see 17.2),
4.2.3 Coil dimension (outer coil diameter limitation, if
required; see 17.2),
4.2.4 Weight of coils and packages (coil weights and pack-
age size limitations, if required; see 17.3),
11
Available from American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street,
13th Floor, New York, NY 10036.
2
4.2.5 Certification, if required (see Section 18),
4.2.6 Special tests or exceptions, if any.
5. General Requirements, Materials and Manufacture
5.1 The material and manufacturing methods used shall be
such that the resulting products will conform to the properties
and characteristics prescribed in this specification.
5.2 Cladding may be bonded to the base metal by any
method that will produce a clad material that will conform to
this specification.
5.3 For bare or coated aluminum, Aluminum 1100, 1145
and 1235 shall be understood to be interchangeable, unless
otherwise agreed upon between the producer and purchaser.
5.4 Unless otherwise stated (4.1.6), the cladding ratio shall
be the standard ratio listed in Table 2 and shall be expressed as
xx/xx/xx, aluminum/steel/aluminum.
6. Responsibility for Quality Assurance
6.1 Responsibility for Inspection and Tests—Unless other-
wise specified in the contract or purchase order, the producer is
responsible for the performance of all inspection and test
requirements specified herein. The producer may use his own
or any other suitable facilities for the performance of the
inspection and test requirements specified herein, unless dis-
approved by the purchaser in the order or at the time of contract
signing. The purchaser shall have the right to perform any of
the inspections and tests set forth in this specification where
such inspections are deemed necessary to assure that material
conforms to prescribed requirements.
6.2 Lot Definition—An inspection lot shall consist of an
identifiable quantity of the same material, temper, and nominal
dimensions subjected to inspection at one time.
7. General Quality
7.1 All cable shielding stock shall be commercially flat and
free of buckles; they shall be free of injurious surface defects
and shall have an 80 µin. (2.0 µm) maximum roughness
measurement (AA) per ANSI B46.1, unless otherwise agreed
upon by the producer and purchaser. Unless otherwise speci-
fied, discoloration due to proper annealing shall not be a cause
for rejection.
7.2 Each ordered item shall be examined to determine
conformance to this specification with respect to general
quality and package marking. On approval of the purchaser,
however, the producer may use a system of statistical quality
control for such examinations.
8. Chemical Composition
8.1 Limits—The aluminum for cable shielding shall con-
form to the chemical composition limits specified in Table 3.
Conformance shall be determined by the producer by analyzing
samples taken at the time the aluminum ingots are poured, or
samples taken from the finished or semifinished product. If the
producer has determined the chemical composition of the
material during the course of manufacture, the producer shall
not be required to sample and analyze the finished product.
NOTE 2—It is standard practice in the United States aluminum industry
to determine conformance to the chemical composition limits prior to
further processing of ingots into wrought products. Due to the continuous
 B 736
TABLE 1 Property Requirements for Coated Metals
Coating Performance Requirements, lbf/in. (N/m), min
Type Sides Bonding to Heat Sealability Moisture Resist-
Description Class Lap-Shear (12.4)
No. Coated Metal (12.2) (12.3) ance (12.5)
1 1.5 (260)
1 1.5 (260) 5.0 (875) The coated metal tape
2
I Polyolefin fails in tension
1 3.5 (610) 10.0 (1750) 3.5 (610)
2 before the bond
2
between coatings
1
II Vinyl Resin 1 N/A 5.0 (875) fails in shear. N/A
2

TABLE 2 Mechanical Property LimitsA,B

Tensile Strength, Yield Strength
ksi (MPa) (0.2 % offset)
Elongation in 2
Aluminum Specified Thick-
Temper ksi (MPa) in. (51 mm)
Designation ness in. (mm)
min max min, %
min
max
1060 0 0.004–0.019 8.0 14.0 2.5 ... 15
(0.10–0.50) (55) (95) (15)
1100 0 0.004–0.019 11.0 15.5 3.5 ... 15
(0.10–0.50) (75) (105) (25)
1145 0 0.004–0.019 8.0 14.0 3.0 ... 15
(0.10–0.50) (55) (95) (20)
1235 0 0.004–0.019 8.0 14.0 3.0 ... 15
(0.10–0.50) (55) (95) (20)
3003 0 0.004–0.019 14.0 19.0 5.0 ... 14
(0.10–0.50) (95) (130) (35)
Aluminum Clad Steel
C
Cladding
Total Thickness in. (mm)
Ratio
D
33/33/33 Annealed 0.009 20.0 34.0 18 ... 15
(0.225) (140) (235) (125)
A
To determine conformance to this specification, each value for tensile strength shall be rounded to the nearest 0.1 ksi and each value for elongation to the nearest
0.5 %, both in accordance with the round method of Practice E 29.
B
For aluminum and aluminum alloys, the basis for establishment of mechnical property limits is shown in Annex A1. The listed mechanical property limits are statistically
valid only for material thicknesses of 0.006 in. and over (over 15 mm).
C
Other cladding ratios may be supplied when agreed upon between the producer and purchaser.
D
Specification A 568.

TABLE 3 Chemical RequirementsA,B,C

Aluminum Other ElementsD
Silicon Iron Copper Manganese Magnesium Zinc Vanadium Titanium AluminumE
Designation Each TotalF
1060 0.25 0.35 0.05 0.03 0.03 0.05 ... 0.03 0.03 ... 99.60 min
1100 0.95 Si + Fe 0.05–0.20 0.05 ... 0.10 ... ... 0.05 0.15 99.00 min
1145 0.55 Si + Fe 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.03 0.03 ... 99.45 min
1235 0.65 Si + Fe 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.10 0.05 0.06 0.03 ... 99.35 min
3003 0.6 0.7 0.05–0.20 1.0–1.5 ... 0.10 ... ... 0.05 0.15 remainder
A
Limits are in weight (mass) percent maximum unless stated otherwise.
B
Analysis shall be made for the elements for which limits are shown in this table.
C
For purposes of determining conformance to these limits, an observed value or a calculated value attained from analysis shall be rounded-off to the nearest unit in
the last righthand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit, in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
D
Others includes listed elements for which no specific limit is shown as well as unlisted metallic elements. The producer may analyze samples for trace elements not
specified in the specification. However, such analysis is not required and may not cover all metallic Others elements. Should any analysis by the producer or the purchaser
establish that an Others element exceeds the limit of Each or that the aggregate of several Others elements exceeds the limit of Total the material shall be considered
nonconforming.
E
By difference.
F
Other Elements—Total shall be the sum of unspecified metallic elements 0.010 % or more, rounded to the second decimal before determining the sum.

nature of the process, it is not practical to keep a specific ingot analysis
identified with a specific quantity of finished material.
8.2 Aluminum cladding shall be, unless otherwise specified,
an aluminum conforming in chemical composition to Alumi-
num 1100, 1145 or 1235 (Table 3). These aluminums shall be
understood to be interchangeable for cladding purposes, unless
otherwise agreed upon between the producer and purchaser.
8.3 Number of Samples—The number of samples taken for
determination of chemical composition shall be as follows:
8.3.1 When samples are taken at the time the aluminum
ingots are poured, at least one sample shall be taken for each
group of ingots poured simultaneously from the same source of
molten metal.

3
 B 736
8.3.2 When samples are taken from the finished or semifin-
ished product, a sample shall be taken to represent each 4000
lb (1816 kg), or fraction thereof, of material in the lot, except
that not more than one sample shall be required per piece.
8.4 Methods of Sampling—Samples for determination of
chemical composition shall be taken in accordance with one of
the following methods:
8.4.1 Samples for chemical analysis shall be taken from
bare sheet by drilling, sawing, milling, turning, or clipping a
representative piece or pieces to obtain a prepared sample of
not less than 75 g. Sampling shall be in accordance with
Practice E 55.
8.4.2 Samples for spectrochemical analysis shall be in
accordance with Practice E 716. Samples for other methods of
analysis shall be taken by methods suitable for the form of
material being analyzed and the type of analytical method
used.
8.5 Methods of Analysis—The determination of chemical
composition shall be made in accordance with suitable chemi-
cal (Test Methods E 34), or spectrochemical (Test Methods
E 227, E 607, and E 1251), methods. Other methods may be
used only when no published ASTM method is available. In
case of dispute, the methods of analysis shall be agreed upon
between the producer and the purchaser.
8.6 Steel cores of aluminum clad steel shall be a steel
conforming in chemical composition to UNS designation
G10060, per Specification A 568, grade 1006.
9. Tempers
9.1 Both coated and uncoated aluminum materials furnished
to this specification shall be Temper 0. Both coated and
uncoated aluminum clad steel materials furnished to this
specification shall be annealed temper. Special or nonstandard
tempers are subject to negotiation between the producer and
purchaser.
10. Tensile Properties of Material as Supplied
10.1 Limits—The cable shielding stock shall conform to the
requirements for tensile properties as specified in Table 2. The
yield strength need not be determined unless specifically
indicated in the contract or order.
10.2 Number of Specimens—One sample shall be taken
from either end of each coil or strip, but no more than one
sample per 4000 lb (1816 kg) or portion thereof in a lot shall
be required. Other procedures for selecting samples may be
employed if agreed upon by the producer and the purchaser.
10.3 Test Specimens—Geometry of test specimens and the
location in the product from which they are taken shall be as
specified in Test Methods B 557.
10.4 Test Methods—The tension test shall be made in
accordance with Test Methods B 557.
11. Coated Metals
11.1 When ordered, the cable shielding stock may be coated
on one or both sides with a protective plastic coating of the
specified type and class, as agreed upon by the producer and
the purchaser.
11.1.1 Type I: Polyolefin Coating—The cable shielding
stock shall be coated with material meeting the requirements of
4
this specification for the specified class of coating. The
coatings are classified based upon requirements of the wire and
cable industry as specified in Table 1, when tested in accor-
dance with Section 12 of this specification.
11.1.1.1 The thickness of the coating on each coated side
shall be 0.0015 in. (0.038 mm) min.
11.1.2 Type II: Vinyl Resin Coating—The cable shielding
stock shall be coated with material meeting the requirements of
Table 1 of this specification, when tested in accordance with
Section 12 of this specification.
11.1.2.1 The thickness of the coating on each coated side
shall be 0.0003 in. (0.008 mm) min.
11.2 The surface coating shall be such that the completed
product shall have a smooth uniform appearance without
inclusions, irregularities, skips, or agglomerates.
11.3 The color of the coated product shall be as agreed upon
between the purchaser and supplier.
12. Test Methods for Coated Metal
12.1 Test Specimens—Unless otherwise specified, prepare
all test specimens in accordance with the following instruc-
tions:
12.1.1 All test specimens shall be lengths of coated metal
measuring 6 in. (150 mm) in length by 1 in. (25 mm) in width.
It is recommended that specimens be prepared using a sample
cutter.12
12.1.2 For wide material, prepare a minimum of two speci-
mens for each 6 in. (150 mm) of parent material width.
12.1.3 For metal coated on two sides, twice as many
specimens will normally be used as for one-side-coated metal.
12.1.4 If necessary, flatten any burr caused by cutting the
coated metal by firmly smoothing the surfaces near the cut
edges.
12.1.5 In all sample preparation, avoid touching any surface
intended to be heat-sealed (12.3 or 12.4).
12.1.6 When necessary or appropriate, label one side of the
test specimens near the specimen end.
12.2 Bonding to Metal—Test the finished coated metal for
bonding between the metal and its coating in accordance with
the requirements of Test Method D 903, with the following
exceptions and additional provisions.
12.2.1 Prepare specimens in accordance with 12.1. Repeat
the additional procedure for preparing specimens as described
in 12.2.2-12.2.4 until sufficient specimens are available for test.
Test results shall be an average based on a minimum of three
tests per coated side.
12.2.2 Score each specimen on one side approximately 1 in.
(25 mm) from one end. The score should extend across the
width of the material as close as practical to each edge, but
should not extend through to either edge. The score should be
deep enough to extend through the coating and make a visible
notch in the surface of the metal.
12.2.3 Flex the end of the sample along the scored line until
the aluminum has completely separated along this line. Elon-
gate the sample with a smooth, steady pull until there is a slight
12
JDC-SO Precision Sample Cutter, 1 in. (25 mm) wide, has been found suitable
for this purpose. Available from Thwing-Albert Instrument Co., 10960 Dutton Rd.,
Phila., PA 19154.
 B 736
gap between the two pieces of metal.
12.2.4 Beginning at the gap in the metal, peel back the
coating from the longer section until sufficient metal has been
bared to fasten in the upper clamp of a tensile tester. Various
techniques may be used to satisfactorily accomplish this, for
example:
12.2.4.1 Mount a length of adhesive tape, adhesive side up,
on a flat fixed surface. The adhesive tape should be mechani-
cally strong with a strong pressure-sensitive adhesive. Mount
the long end of the specimen, scored side down, on this tape.
Peel back by pulling the coating with a smooth steady pull
through a 180° bend from the longer section; or
12.2.4.2 Continue to elongate the sample (from step 12.2.3)
with a smooth, steady pull until the coating has been removed
from the longer section far enough to grasp the edge of the bare
aluminum along the break with pliers. Continue to peel back by
pulling the coating with a smooth, steady pull through a 180°
bend from the longer section.
12.2.5 Place the still-coated, 1-in. (25-mm) section in the
lower test clamp of a tensile tester. Bend the coating 180° as
the specimen is tested and peel the coating from the aluminum.
12.2.6 The speed of tensile tester jaw separation shall be 12
in./min (305 mm/min).
12.2.7 For metals coated on both sides, repeat the foregoing
procedure to determine the bonding strength of the coating on
the other side of the metal, using an adjacent length of coated
metal.
12.3 Heat Sealability Test—Heat sealing may be defined as
the process of welding plastic films or laminates by the
application of heat.
12.3.1 Set up a heat sealer13 in accordance with the manu-
facturer’s instructions, with top and bottom seal bars having
contact surfaces 1 in. (25 mm) wide. Set sealer temperature
(both bars) at 392°F (200°C), air pressure at 40 psi (276 kPa)
and dwell time at 5 s.
12.3.2 Prepare specimens in accordance with 12.1. A mini-
mum of two specimens are needed for single-side coated tape,
while a minimum of four specimens are required for double-
coated metal. Avoid touching surfaces to be heat sealed. Label
each specimen.
12.3.3 Fold each specimen in half, continuing to avoid
contact with surfaces to be sealed.
12.3.4 Insert the folded specimen in the heat sealer and seal
each specimen along a line parallel to the end and approxi-
mately centered. The unsealed tab ends should be sufficiently
long to permit fastening in the jaws of a tensile tester.
12.3.5 After removal from the sealer, allow specimens to
cool for 3 to 5 min.
12.3.6 Fold back the unsealed ends of the specimen in
opposite direction and at right angles to the plane of sealing.
13
Sentinental Model 12ASL has been found suitable for this purpose. Available
from Packaging Industries, P.O. Box S, Hyannis, MA 02601.
5
Insert these ends into the jaws of a tensile tester (set initial jaw
separation at approximately 21⁄2 in. (64 mm)).
12.3.7 Activate the tensile tester and record the maximum
force necessary to separate the seal. The speed of jaw separa-
tion shall be 12 in./min (305 mm/min).
12.3.8 Repeat the foregoing procedure for all specimens to
be tested.
12.4 Lap Shear Test:
12.4.1 Prepare a minimum of one specimen in accordance
with 12.1. Label one side of each test specimen near each end.
Cut the specimen strip into two sections, each 3 in. (76 mm)
long.
12.4.2 Lay one section on top of the other to provide an
overlapped area of 0.25 in.2 (161 mm2, with the coating of side
1 in contact with the coating of side 2 in the overlapped area.
Match the edges so that the sample is flat and free of wrinkles.
12.4.3 Place a strip of adhesive tape 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) in width
and 1 in. (25 mm) in length over the top half of the sample in
a nearly closed molding press that has been preheated to 392°F
(200°C). Leave one end of the sample extending out of the
platens approximately 1 in. (25 mm).
12.4.4 Close the press until the pressure gage indicator
shows activation. Immediately open the press and remove the
sample. To prevent the coating on the outside of the sample
from adhering to the molding press, the sample should be
placed between polyester film or some other suitable material
to which the coating will not adhere.
12.4.5 After the sample has cooled at room temperature,
remove the adhesive tape and determine the lap shear strength
of the seal in a tensile tester.
12.4.6 The speed of jaw separation shall be 12 in./min (305
mm/min).
12.5 Moisture Resistance Test—The ability of plastic coat-
ings to resist moisture shall be determined by the following
method:
12.5.1 Prepare a minimum of two specimens in accordance
with 12.1.
12.5.2 Immerse the specimens in distilled or deionized
water in separate containers (test tubes or similar).
12.5.3 Place the containers of water-immersed specimens in
a conditioning bath maintained at a temperature of 154°F
(68°C); condition specimens for a period of 7 days.
12.5.4 At the end of the conditioning period, remove the
specimens from the water and allow them to equilibrate at
normal laboratory ambient conditions for a period of 24 h.
12.5.5 At the end of the ambient conditioning period, test
the specimens in accordance with 12.2.
13. Electrical Conductivity
13.1 When specified in the order, the electrical conductivity
determined on annealed samples shall have the following value
when tested at or corrected to a temperature of 68°F (20°C):
 B 736
Electrical
Conductivity
Material % IACS Min.
Aluminum 1060 61.5
Aluminum 1100 58.5
Aluminum 1145 58.5
Aluminum 1235 58.5
Alloy 3003 50.0
Aluminum-Clad Steel, 0.009 in. 30.0A
(0.225 mm) 33/33/33
_______________
A
Conductivity for other thicknesses or for other cladding ratios shall be as
agreed upon between the purchaser and supplier.
13.2 The electrical resistivity of the material shall be deter-
mined in accordance with Test Method B 193; the conductivity
shall be calculated in accordance with explanatory notes 3 and
4 of Test Method B 193.
14. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
14.1 General—For the purpose of determining conform-
ance with the dimensional requirements prescribed in this
specification, any measured value outside the specified limiting
values for any dimension may be cause for rejection.
14.2 Thickness— The thickness of cable shielding stock
0.006 in. (0.15 mm) and greater in thickness shall not vary
from that specified by more than the respective permissible
variations prescribed in Tables 3.1 and 3.2 of ANSI H35.2. The
thickness of material less than 0.006 in. (0.15 mm) nominal
thickness shall not vary by more than 610 %.
14.3 Width and Lateral Bow—Cable shielding stock shall
not vary in width or in lateral bow from that specified by more
than permissible variations prescribed in Tables 3.6 and 3.7
respectively, of ANSI H35.2.
14.4 Cladding Ratio—Cladding ratios shall be within6
10 % of nominal; method of test shall be metallurgical micro-
section of at least three samples per lot.
15. Splices
15.1 Welded splices are permissible under the following
conditions:
15.1.1 The ends shall be cut, overlapped 1⁄4 in. (6 mm),
welded and then recoated (if the product is coated).
15.1.2 There shall be no more than three welds per coil.
15.1.3 There shall be a minimum of 1000 ft (305 m)
between welds.
15.1.4 A maximum of 10 % of the quantity shipped may
contain splices.
15.1.5 The minimum tensile strength of a length containing
a splice shall be no less than 85 % of an adjacent length not
containing a splice.
6
15.1.6 The maximum resistance of any 3-ft (1-m) section of
cable shielding stock containing a factory splice shall exhibit
not more than 110 % of the resistance of an equal length
section of cable shielding stock that does not contain a splice.
16. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
16.1 All material shall be uniform in quality and condition,
sound and free from internal and external defects. It shall be
well cleaned and free from dirt. A superficial film of residual
light lubricant is permissible for uncoated metal, unless other-
wise specified.
16.2 Aluminum clad material shall be free of defects includ-
ing delamination.
17. Packaging and Package Marking
17.1 The slit material shall be wound tightly in a coil with
ends secured to prevent unwinding. Tightness shall be suffi-
cient to prevent the coils from “telescoping.” The material shall
be wound with the edges in a straight line across the coil
diameter.
17.2 The slit coils shall be wound on a core of suitable
construction (aluminum, steel, fiber, etc., at the discretion of
the producer unless otherwise agreed upon by the purchaser or
producer), with a core length equal to the slit material width.
The inside diameter of the core and the outside diameter of the
slit coil package shall be agreed upon by purchaser and
producer.
17.3 The material shall be packaged to provide adequate
protection during normal handling and transportation, and each
package shall contain only one type, size, alloy, and temper of
material unless otherwise agreed. The type of packaging and
gross weight of containers shall, unless otherwise agreed, be at
the producer’s or supplier’s discretion, provided that they are
such as to ensure acceptance by common or other carriers for
safe transportation at the lowest rate to the delivery point.
17.4 Each shipping container shall be marked with the
purchase order number, material size, specification number,
alloy and temper, gross and net weights, and the producer’s
name or trademark.
18. Certification
18.1 The producer or supplier shall, upon request, furnish to
the purchaser a certificate stating that each lot has been
sampled, tested and inspected in accordance with this specifi-
cation, and has met the requirements.
 B 736
ANNEXES
(Mandatory Information)
A1. BASIS FOR INCLUSION OF PROPERTY LIMITS
A1.1 Limits are established at a level at which a statistical
evaluation of the data indicates that 99 % of the population
obtained from all standard material meets the limit with 95 %
confidence. For the products described, mechanical property
limits for the respective size ranges are based on the analyses
of at least 100 data from standard production material with no
A2. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR INCLUSION OF NEW ALUMINUM AND ALUMINUM
ALLOYS IN THIS SPECIFICATION
A2.1 Prior to acceptance for inclusion in this specification,
the composition of wrought or cast aluminum or aluminum
alloy shall be registered in accordance with ANSI H35.1 or
H35.1(M). The Aluminuum Association14 holds the Secretariat
of ANSI H35 Committee and administers the criteria and
procedures for registration.
A2.2 If it is documented that the Aluminum Association
could not or would not register a given composition, an
alternative procedure and the criteria for acceptance shall be as
follows:
A2.2.1 The designation submitted for inclusion does not
utilize the same designation system as described in ANSI
H35.1 or H35.1(M). A designation not in conflict with other
designation systems or a trade name is acceptable.
A2.2.2 The aluminum or aluminum alloy has been offered
for sale in commercial quantities within the prior twelve
months to at least three identifiable users.
A2.2.3 The complete chemical composition limits are sub-
mitted.
A2.2.4 The composition is, in the judgment of the respon-
sible subcommittee, significantly different from that of any
other aluminum or aluminum alloy already in the specification.
14
The Aluminum Association, 900 19th Street, NW, Washington, DC 20006.
7
more than ten data from a given lot. All tests are performed in
accordance with the appropriate ASTM test methods. For
informational purposes, refer to “Statistical Aspects of Mech-
nical Property Assurance” in the Related Material section of
the Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
A2.2.5 For codification purposes, an alloying element is any
element intentionally added for any purpose other than grain
refinement and for which minimum and maximum limits are
specified. Unalloyed aluminum contains a minimum of
99.00 % aluminum.
A2.2.6 Standard limits for alloying elements and impurities
are expressed to the following decimal places:
Less than 0.001 % 0.000X
0.001 to but less than 0.01 % 0.00X
0.01 to but less than 0.10 %
Unalloyed aluminum made by a refining process 0.0XX
Alloys and unalloyed aluminum not made by a 0.0X
refining process
0.10 through 0.55 % 0.XX
(It is customary to express limits of 0.30 through 0.55 % as
0.X0 or 0.X5.)
Over 0.55 % 0.X, X.X., etc.
(except that combined Si + Fe limits for 99.00 % minimum
aluminum must be expressed as 0.XX or 1.XX)
A2.2.7 Standard limits for alloying elements and impurities
are expressed in the following sequence: Silicon; Iron; Copper;
Manganese; Magnesium; Chromium; Nickel; Zinc (Note Note
A2.1); Titanium; Other Elements, Each; Other Elements, Total;
Aluminum (Note Note A2.2).
NOTE A2.1—Additional specified elements having limits are inserted in
alphabetical order of their chemical symbols between zinc and titanium, or
are specified in footnotes.
NOTE A2.2—Aluminum is specified as minimum for unalloyed alumi-
num and as a remainder for aluminum alloys.
 B 736
APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. EXPLANATORY NOTE—CABLE SHIELDING

X1.1 Cable shielding or “cable wrap” is normally used by
manufacturers of electrical insulated wire and cable in strips of
various widths. The material is wrapped around an insulated
wire or group of wires, and may be applied over an intervening
layer of wrapping material or over a jacket. The material may
be applied in various configurations depending upon the
requirements of the finished cable:
X1.1.1 Helical Wrap— overlapped, butted, or gapped.
X1.1.2 Longitudinal Application—corrugated or smooth,
overlapped, butted, gapped, or welded/soldered.
X1.2 The selection of a particular material, the thickness of
the material and the coating, if any, to be used is dependent
largely upon the specification requirements for the finished
wire or cable. Military and Federal specifications, Rural
Electrification Administration (REA) specifications, ICEA (In-
sulated Cable Engineers Association) specifications, among
others, typically apply.
X1.3 Electrical conductivity of the material is an important
characteristic considered in the selection process, and is
affected by the material, its thickness and the method of
application. Corrosion resistance is important for various
environments. Physical strength requirements may include
such features as resistance to tensile stress, resistance to
bending stress (including repeated bending), resistance to
gopher attack, etc.

X2. PREFERRED THICKNESS

X2.1 It is recommended that wherever possible, material

purchased to this specification be ordered in a thickness as
listed in Table X2.1.

TABLE X2.1 Preferred Thickness, Nominal

Metal Thickness
Type of Material Coating
in. (mm)
Aluminum 1060
Aluminum 1100 0.004 (0.10)
Aluminum 1145 none
Aluminum 1235 0.008 (0.20)
Alloy 3003
Aluminum 1060
Aluminum 1100 0.004 (0.10)
Aluminum 1145 polyolefin
Aluminum 1235 0.008 (0.20)
Alloy 3003
Aluminum 1060
Aluminum 1100 0.004 (0.10)
Aluminum 1145 vinyl resin
Aluminum 1235 0.008 (0.20)
Alloy 3003
Aluminum Clad Steel none 0.009A (0.225)A
Aluminum Clad Steel polyolefin 0.009A (0.225)A
A
Total thickness of strip. See Table X3.1 for preferred cladding ratio.

X3. PREFERRED CLADDING RATIOS FOR ALUMINUM-CLAD STEEL

X3.1 It is recommended that wherever possible, material

purchased to this specification be ordered in thicknesses and
cladding ratios as listed in Table X3.1.

8
 B 736
TABLE X3.1 Preferred Cladding Ratios—Aluminum-Clad SteelA
Nominal Total Thickness of Strip Cladding Ratio Nominal Thickness, in. (mm)
in. mm Al/Steel/Al Aluminum Steel Aluminum
0.009 0.225 33/33/33 0.003 (0.075) 0.003 (0.075) 0.003 (0.075)
A
Other cladding ratios may be supplied when agreed to by the producer and purchaser.

X4. METRIC EQUIVALENTS

X4.1 The SI unit for strength properties now shown is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI). The
derived SI unit for force is the newton (N), which is defined as
that force which, when applied to a body having a mass of one
kilogram gives it an acceleration of one metre per second
squared (N = kg·m/s 2). The derived SI unit for pressure or
stress is the newton per square metre (N/m2), which has been
named the pascal (Pa) by the General Conference on Weights
and Measures. Since 1 ksi = 6,894,757 Pa the metric equiva-
lents are expressed as megapascal (MPa), which is the same as
MN/m2 and N/mm2.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

9
 Designation: B 735 – 95 (Reapproved 2000)
Standard Test Method for
Porosity in Gold Coatings on Metal Substrates by Nitric
Acid Vapor1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 735; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers equipment and procedures for
using nitric acid vapor for determining porosity in gold
coatings, particularly electrodeposits and clad metals used on
electrical contacts.
1.2 This test method is designed to show whether the
porosity level is less or greater than some value that, by
experience, is considered by the user to be acceptable for the
intended application.
1.3 A variety of other porosity testing methods are described
in Guide B 765 and in the literature. 2 , 3 Other porosity test
methods are B 741, B 798, B 799, and B 809.
1.4 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. Specific precau-
tions are given in Section 8 and Note 3.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 374 Terminology Relating to Electroplating4
B 542 Terminology Relating to Electrical Contacts and
Their Use5
B 741 Test Method for Porosity In Gold Coatings on Metal
Substrates By Paper Electrography5
B 765 Guide to the Selection of Porosity Tests for Elec-
trodeposits and Related Metallic Coatings4
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.11 on Electrical Contact Test Methods.
Current edition approved April 15, 1995. Published June 1995. Originally
published as B 735 – 84. Last previous edition B 735 – 92.
2
For example see: Nobel, F. J., Ostrow, B. D., and Thompson, D. W., “Porosity
Testing of Gold Deposits,” Plating, Vol 52, 1965, p. 1001.
3
S. J. Krumbein, Porosity Testing of Contact Platings, Proceedings, Connectors
and Interconnection Technology Symposium, Oct. 1987, p. 47.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
B 798 Test Method for Porosity in Gold or Palladium
Coatings on Metal Substrates by Gel-Bulk Electrography5
B 799 Test Method for Porosity in Gold and Palladium
Coatings by Sulfurous Acid/Sulfur-Dioxide Vapor5
B 809 Test Method for Porosity in Metallic Coatings by
Humid Sulfur Vapor (“Flowers-of-Sulfur”)4
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions: Many terms used in this test method are
defined in Terminology B 542 and terms relating to metallic
coatings are defined in Terminology B 374.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 corrosion products—those reaction products emanat-
ing from the pores that protrude from, or are otherwise attached
to, the coating surface after a vapor test exposure.
3.2.2 measurement area (or “significant surface”)—the
surface that is examined for the presence of porosity. The
significant surfaces or measurement areas of the part to be
tested shall be indicated on the drawing of the part or by
provision of suitably marked samples.
3.2.3 Discussion—For specification purposes, the signifi-
cant surfaces or measurement areas are often defined as those
portions of the surface that are essential to the serviceability or
function of the part, such as its contact properties, or which can
be the source of corrosion products or tarnish films that
interfere with the function of the part.
3.2.4 metallic coatings—include platings, claddings, or
other metallic layers applied to the substrate. The coating can
comprise a single metallic layer or a combination of metallic
layers.
3.2.5 Porosity—the presence of any discontinuity, crack, or
hole in the coating that exposes a different underlying metal.
3.2.6 Underplate—a metallic coating layer between the
substrate and the topmost layer or layers. The thickness of an
underplate is usually greater than 0.8 µm (30 µin.).
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 This test method employs nitric acid (HNO3) vapor at
low relative humidity. Reaction of the gas mixture with a
corrodible base metal at pore sites produces reaction products
 B 735 – 95 (2000)
that appear as discrete spots on the gold surface. Individual
spots are counted with the aid of a loupe or low-power stereo
microscope.
4.2 This test method is suitable for inlays or claddings
containing 75 % or more of gold or for electroplatings con-
taining 95 % or more of gold on substrates of copper, nickel,
and their alloys, that are commonly used in electrical contacts.
4.3 The nitric acid vapor test is too severe to be used for
gold coatings less than 0.6 µm (25 µin.) in thickness. It is also
not suitable for coatings that are less noble than gold or
platinum, such as palladium and its alloys, or gold-flashed
palladium and its alloys.
4.4 This porosity test involves corrosion reactions in which
the products delineate defect sites in coatings. Since the
chemistry and properties of these products may not resemble
those found in natural or service environments, these tests are
not recommended for prediction of the electrical performance
of contacts unless correlation is first established with service
experience.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Gold coatings are often specified for the contacts of
separable electrical connectors and other devices. Electrode-
posits are the form of gold that is most used on contacts,
although it is also employed as clad metal and as weldments on
the contact surface. The intrinsic nobility of gold enables it to
resist the formation of insulating oxide films that could
interfere with reliable contact operation.
5.2 In order that the nobility of gold be assured, porosity,
cracks, and other defects in the coating that expose base-metal
substrates and underplates must be minimal or absent, except
in those cases where it is feasible to use the contacts in
structures that shield the surface from the environment or
where corrosion inhibiting surface treatments for the deposit
are employed. The level of porosity in the coating that may be
tolerable depends on the severity of the environment to the
underplate or substrate, design factors for the contact device
like the force with which it is mated, circuit parameters, and the
reliability of contact operation that it is necessary to maintain.
Also, when present, the location of pores on the surface is
important. If the pores are few in number and are outside of the
zone of contact of the mating surfaces, their presence can often
be tolerated.
5.3 Methods for determining pores on a contact surface are
most suitable if they enable their precise location and numbers
to be determined. Contact surfaces are often curved or irregular
in shape, and testing methods should be suitable for them. In
addition, the severity of porosity-determining tests may vary.
This test method is regarded as severe.
5.4 The relationship of porosity levels revealed by particular
tests to contact behavior must be made by the user of these tests
through practical experience or by judgement. Thus, absence of
porosity in the coating may be a requirement for some
applications, while a few pores on the critical surfaces may be
acceptable for another. Such acceptance (or pass-fail) criteria
should be part of the product specification for the particular
product or part requiring the porosity test.
5.5 This test method is highly sensitive and is capable of
detecting virtually all porosity or other defects in gold coatings
2
that could participate in substrate corrosion reactions. The test
is rapid, simple, and inexpensive. In addition, it can be used on
contacts having complex geometry such as pin-socket contacts.
However, it is preferred that deeply recessed sockets be opened
to expose their critical surfaces prior to testing.
5.6 This test method is considered destructive in that it
reveals the presence of porosity by contaminating the surface
with corrosion products and by undercutting the coating at pore
sites or at the boundaries of unplated areas. Any parts exposed
to these tests shall not be placed in service.
5.7 This test method is intended to be used for quantitative
descriptions of porosity (such as number of pores per unit area
or per contact) only on coatings that have a pore density
sufficiently low that the corrosion sites are well separated and
can be readily resolved. As a general guideline this can be
achieved for pore densities up to about 100/cm2 or per 100
contacts. Above this value the tests are useful for the qualita-
tive detection and comparisons of porosity.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Test Chamber, may be any convenient size glass vessel
capable of being sealed with a glass lid, such as a glass
desiccator of 9 to 12 L capacity. The ratio of the air space in the
chamber (in cubic centimetres) to the nitric acid surface area
(in square centimetres) shall not be greater than 25:1.
6.2 Specimen Holders or Supports—Supports or hangers
shall be made from glass, polytetrafluoroethylene or other inert
materials. It is essential that the holders be so designed, and the
specimens so arranged, that the circulation of the vapor is not
impeded. Specimens shall be at least 75 mm (3 in.) from the
liquid surface and at least 25 mm (1 in.) from the vessel walls.
Also, the measurement areas of the specimens shall be at least
12 mm (0.5 in.) from each other.
6.2.1 Do not use a porcelain plate or any other structure that
would cover more than 30 % of the liquid surface cross-
sectional area. This is to ensure that movement of air and vapor
within the vessel will not be restricted during the test.
6.3 Stereomicroscope, having a 103 magnification, shall be
used for pore counting. In addition a movable source of
illumination capable of giving oblique lighting on the specimen
surface is also useful.
7. Reagent
7.1 Nitric Acid, Reagent Grade Concentrated 70 6 1 %
HNO3, sp gr 1.415 to 1.420.
8. Safety Hazards
8.1 Carry out this test method in a chemical fume hood,
since the gases that are released, mainly when the reaction
vessel is opened at the end of each test, are very corrosive.
8.2 Use caution, however, to ensure that drafts that are often
found in fume hoods do not cause significant cooling of the
chamber walls, that could lead to a rise in the relative humidity
and acceleration of the test (see 9.3). It is often convenient to
enclose the reaction vessel in a box with a loose-fitting cover.
8.3 Observe normal precautions in handling corrosive acids.
In particular, wear goggles completely enclosing the eyes when
handling nitric acid, and make eye wash facilities readily
available.
 B 735 – 95 (2000)
9. Procedure
9.1 Handle specimens as little as possible, and only with
tweezers, microscope-lens tissue, or clean, soft cotton gloves.
Prior to the test, inspect the samples under 103 magnification
for evidence of particulate matter. If present, such particles
shall be removed by blowing them off with clean, oil-free air.
If this is not successful discard the sample. Then, clean the
samples with solvents or solutions that do not contain chlori-
nated hydrocarbons, CFC’s, or other known ozone-destroying
compounds. The procedure outlined in Note 1 has been found
to give satisfactory results for platings with mild to moderate
surface contamination.
NOTE 1—Suggested cleaning procedure:
(1) Keep individual contacts separated if there is a possibility of
damage to the measurement areas during the various cleaning steps.
(2) Clean samples for 5 min in an ultrasonic cleaner which contains a
hot (65–85°C) 2 % aqueous solution of a mildly alkaline (pH 7.5–10)
detergent (such as Micro or Sparkleen).
(3) After ultrasonic cleaning, rinse samples under warm running tap
water for at least 5 s.
(4) Rinse samples ultrasonically for 2 min in fresh deionized water to
remove the last detergent residues.
(5) Immerse in fresh methanol or isopropanol, and ultrasonically“
agitate” for at least 30 s in order to remove the water from the samples.
(6) Remove and dry samples until the alcohol has completely evapo-
rated. If an air blast is used as an aid to drying, the air shall be oil free,
clean, and dry.
(7) Do not touch measurement area of the samples with bare fingers
after cleaning.
(8) Reinspect samples (under 103 magnification) for particulate matter
on the surface. If particulates are found, repeat the cleaning steps. Surface
cleanliness is extremely important; contaminants, such as plating salts,
organic films, and metal flakes may give erroneous indications of defects,
and are unacceptable.
NOTE 2—If large areas of exposed non-noble metal are present,
masking these areas may be necessary. However, when masking is done
with plater’s tape, take care not to inhibit the flow of acid vapor to the
measurement area.
9.2 The ambient temperature and the temperature of the
specimens and solution are 23 6 3°C at the beginning of the
test and maintained throughout the test period.
9.3 The relative humidity in the immediate vicinity of the
test chamber shall be no greater than 60 %, 6 although 55 % or
below is preferred. If the relative humidity is greater than
60 %, do not run this test.
9.4 Add fresh HNO3 to the bottom of the clean and dry test
chamber, and immediately close the cover. After 30 6 5 min,
load the samples, using suitable fixtures, and replace the cover.
The ambient relative humidity shall be no greater than 60 %
during both the addition of the HNO3 and the insertion of the
samples. 6
NOTE 3—Caution: Do not grease the rim of the desiccator nor its
cover. If desired, press a minimum of three strips of pressure sensitive
polytetrafluoroethylene tape (adhesive side down) at equal intervals
around the desiccator rim.
6
For example see: Holden, C. A., and Luik, R., “Critical Nitric Acid Vapor Test
Parameters Affecting the Apparent Porosity of Thin and Selectively Plated Gold,”
Plating, Vol 69, May, 1982, p. 110.
3
9.5 Unless otherwise specified, the exposure time to nitric
acid vapor shall be 60 6 5 min. An exposure time of 75 6 5
min is also commonly used for gold thicknesses in the 2 to 2.5
µm (75 to 100µ in.) range. A table of convenient exposure times
is given in the appendix.
NOTE 4—Variations in exposure time with thickness are often recom-
mended because pores in thicker coatings are deeper and their average
sizes are smaller than those in thinner coatings. The nitric acid medium
would therefore take longer to penetrate an average pore in thicker
coatings compared to thinner ones. On the other hand, when exposure
times are too long, the corrosion products will overlap and impair pore
delineation. A detailed discussion of these effects is given in Footnote 3.
9.6 Remove the samples at the end of the test and dry in an
oven at 125 6 5°C for 30 6 5 min. Then remove from the
oven, and place directly into a desiccator containing active
desiccant, and allow to cool to room temperature.
NOTE 5—Discard the HNO3 in a safe, legally-acceptable manner.
9.7 Leave samples in dessicator until actually ready to start
the examination. Then open desiccator slowly, since cooling
specimens may create a partial vacuum.
9.8 The examination shall take place within 1.5 h of
removal from the oven.
9.9 Count individual pores at 103 magnification using
collimated incandescent illumination at an oblique angle below
15°. The pore sites will be delineated by the corrosion products
protruding from these sites. These solids may be transparent in
the case of gold-plated nickel or nickel underplate, and
exercise great care in counting, particularly with rough or
curved surfaces.
9.10 Measure and count a corrosion product when at least 3⁄4
of the corrosion product falls within the measurement area. Do
not count corrosion products that initiate outside the measure-
ment area but fall within it, and that are irregular in shape, (see
Fig. 1).
9.11 Occasionally blisters may form with gold plated on
nickel or a nickel underplate. This may occur at pore sites and
may be due to entrapment of corrosion products beneath the
plating. Count the blisters as pores.
9.12 It is also good practice to make duplicate readings of
each area, and then average the two readings.
9.13 Define pore size by the longest diameter of the corro-
sion product. Corrosion products smaller than 0.05 mm (0.002
in.) are generally not resolvable at 103. Do not count them as
pores, even if they are observed (at higher magnification).
NOTE 6—If the corrosion products are being tabulated according to
FIG. 1 Corrosion Product Counting
 B 735 – 95 (2000)
size, a useful sizing technique is to tabulate the pores in accordance with 10.2 Bias—The porosity of commercially produced contact
three size ranges. These are (approximately): 0.12 mm (0.005-in.) diam- platings is a property with potentially large sample-to-sample
eter or less, between 0.12 and 0.40 mm (0.005 and 0.015-in.) diameter,
variability. 7 Since there is no acceptable reference material
and greater than 0.40 mm (0.015-in.) diameter. A graduated reticle in the
microscope eyepiece is useful as an aid to counting and sizing. suitable for determining the bias for porosity testing, no
statement on bias is being made.
10. Precision and Bias
10.1 Precision—The precision of this test method is being 11. Keywords
investigated with gold-plated electrical contacts having a
11.1 gold coatings; gold platings; nitric acid vapor (poros-
nickel underplate. Round-robin results from a series of four
ity) test; plating porosity; pore corrosion test; porosity testing;
runs in each laboratory with a test of similar severity gave
coefficients of variation of less than 20 % in each of three porosity testing; nitric acid vapor
participating laboratories.7 However, poorer precision was
obtained when the results of the different laboratories were
compared.

7
Krumbein, S. J. and Holden, C. A. Jr., “Porosity Testing of Metallic Coatings,”
in Testing of Metallic and Inorganic Coatings, ASTM STP No. 947, W. B. Harding
and G. A. DiBari, eds., ASTM, 1987, p. 193.

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. TIME OF EXPOSURE TO NITRIC ACID VAPOR

X1.1 The exposure times recommended in this test method TABLE X1.1 Exposure Time for Gold Coatings
are those that are sufficiently long to produce corrosion
Gold Thickness, µm (µin.) Exposure Time to Nitric
products greater than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) in diameter, but short Acid Vapor, min
enough to prevent significant overlap of these products. If the <0.6, (<25) ...
exposure time is too short, the corrosion products at many pore 0.6 to 2.0 (25 to 80) 60 6 5
sites may be too small to be easily seen at 103 magnification. 1.8 to 2.5 (75 to 100) 75 6 5
On the other hand, if the exposure time is too long, the
corrosion products may overlap or coalesce, thereby impairing
the ability to delineate the individual pore sites.3
times for those gold coatings that are normally applied to
X1.2 Table X1.1 may be helpful in specifying exposure electrical contacts.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 737 – 01

Standard Specification for

Hot-Rolled and/or Cold-Finished Hafnium Rod and Wire1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 737; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope same heat treatment parameters. Unless otherwise agreed

1.1 This specification covers hot- or cold-worked hafnium between manufacturer and purchaser, a lot shall be limited to
rod and wire, or both. the product of an 8 h period for final continuous anneal, or to
1.2 This specification contains two material grades, one a single furnace load for final batch anneal.
specifically for nuclear applications (Grade R1) and one for 3.1.4 sponge—a lot shall consist of a single blend produced
commercial applications for alloying (Grade R3). at one time.
1.3 The products covered include the following: 3.1.5 weld fittings—definition is to be mutually agreed upon
1.3.1 Rod 3⁄8 to 1.0 in. (9.5 to 25.4 mm) in diameter. between manufacturer and the purchaser.
1.3.2 Wire less than 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm) in diameter. 4. Ordering Information
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The SI units given in parentheses are for 4.1 Purchase orders for material under this specification
information only. shall include the following information as required to ad-
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the equately describe the desired material:
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the 4.1.1 Quantity (weight or number of pieces),
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- 4.1.2 Name of material,
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- 4.1.3 Form (rod, wire),
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. 4.1.4 Metallurgical condition (Section 6),
4.1.5 Finish (Section 12),
2. Referenced Documents 4.1.6 Applicable dimensions (diameter and length),
2.1 ASTM Standards: 4.1.7 Grade (Table 1), and
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials2 4.1.8 ASTM designation and year of issue.
E 21 Test Methods for Elevated Temperature Tension Tests NOTE 1—A typical ordering description is as follows: 500 lb hafnium
of Metallic Materials2 rod, annealed; mechanically descaled and pickled; 0.375 in. diameter by 6
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to in. minimum random lengths; Grade R1; ASTM Specification B 737.
Determine Conformance with Specifications3 4.2 In addition to the data specified in 4.1, the following
options and points of agreement between the manufacturer and
3. Terminology
the purchaser shall be specified on the purchase order if
3.1 Lot Definitions: required:
3.1.1 castings—a lot shall consist of all castings produced 4.2.1 Mechanical test temperature (see 8.1),
from the same pour. 4.2.2 Tolerances (Section 10),
3.1.2 ingot—no definition required. 4.2.3 Workmanship standards (Section 13),
3.1.3 rounds, flats, tubes, and wrought powder metallurgical 4.2.4 Special tests (Section 11),
products (single definition, common to nuclear and non- 4.2.5 Inspection (Section 16),
nuclear standards)—a lot shall consist of a material of the 4.2.6 Zirconium analysis requirements (Table 1), and
same size, shape, condition, and finish produced from the same 4.2.7 The isotopic hafnium composition and its analysis, if
ingot or powder blend by the same reduction schedule and the required, shall be mutually agreed upon by the purchaser and
producer.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B10 on
Reactive and Refractory Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of
Subcommittee B10.02 on Zirconium and Hafnium.
Current edition approved Nov. 10, 2001. Published January 2002. Originally
published as B 737 – 84. Last previous edition B 737 – 90 (2000).
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 737 – 01
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements 8. Mechanical Properties
Composition, Weight % 8.1 Grade R1 in rod form shall conform to the requirements
Nuclear Grade
Alloying prescribed in Table 2 for room temperature mechanical prop-
Element Grade
erties. Elevated temperature properties shall be used to deter-
Grade R1 Grade R3 mine compliance only when specified in the purchase order
Aluminum 0.010 0.050 (see Test Methods E 21).
Carbon 0.015 0.025
Chromium 0.010 0.050
8.2 The yield strength shall be determined by the offset
Copper 0.010 ... (0.2 %) method as prescribed in Test Methods E 8.
Hydrogen 0.0025 0.0050 8.3 The tensile properties shall be determined using a strain
Iron 0.050 0.0750
Molybdenum 0.0020 ...
rate of 0.003 to 0.007 in./in.·min through the yield strength.
Nickel 0.0050 ... After the yield strength has been exceeded, the cross-head
Niobium 0.010 ... speed shall be increased to approximately 0.05 in./in.·min to
Nitrogen 0.010 0.0150
Oxygen 0.040 0.130
failure.
Silicon 0.010 0.050 8.4 Requirements for mechanical properties do not apply to
Tantalum 0.020 ... wire.
Tin 0.0050 ...
Titanium 0.010 0.050 9. Corrosion Properties
Tungsten 0.0150 0.0150
Uranium 0.0010 ... 9.1 Two samples chosen at random from each lot shall be
Vanadium 0.0050 ... corrosion tested in water at 680°F (360°C), 2690 psi (18.5
A A
Zirconium
Hafnium balance balance MPa) for 672 + 8 − 0 h using the manufacturer’s standard
A
Zirconium shall be reported. Acceptable levels shall be established by mutual
procedure.
agreement between purchaser and producer. 9.2 Grade R1—Coupons shall exhibit a weight gain of not
more than 10 mg/dm2.
9.3 Grade R3—Test for information only, if required by
5. Materials and Manufacture purchase order.
5.1 Material covered by this specification shall be made by
conventional hot and cold working procedures, from ingots 10. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
produced by vacuum melting in electron beam or consumable 10.1 Rod and wire shall conform to the dimensional require-
arc furnaces, or both, of a type conventionally used for reactive ments for the specified product as prescribed in Tables 3-5.
metals.
11. Special Tests
6. Metallurgical Condition 11.1 Additional tests may be specified in the purchase order.
6.1 All grades furnished under this specification shall be in The test method and standards shall be agreed upon in advance
the recrystallization annealed condition unless otherwise speci- between manufacturer and purchaser.
fied. 12. Finish
7. Chemical Composition 12.1 Rods shall be furnished with one of the following
surface finishes as designated in the purchase order:
7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements for 12.1.1 Mechanically descaled and pickled,
chemical composition as prescribed in Table 1. 12.1.2 Centerless ground and pickled, or
7.2 The manufacturer’s ingot analysis shall be considered 12.1.3 Centerless ground, pickled, and oxidized.
the chemical analysis for material produced to this specifica- 12.2 Wire shall be furnished with one of the following
tion except for hydrogen and nitrogen content which shall be surface finishes as designated in the purchase order:
determined on the finished product. 12.2.1 Conditioned and pickled, or
7.3 Analysis shall be made using the manufacturer’s stan- 12.2.2 Conditioned, pickled, and oxidized.
dard methods. In the event of disagreement as to the chemical
composition of the metal, methods of chemical analysis for 13. Workmanship
reference purposes shall be determined by a mutually accept- 13.1 Cracks, seams, slivers, blisters, burrs, and other inju-
able laboratory. rious imperfections shall not exceed standards of acceptability
7.4 Sampling for chemical composition shall consist of agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser.
samples taken at top, middle, and bottom of the ingot. Samples
for hydrogen and nitrogen shall be taken as two random 14. Number of Test and Retests
samples from each lot at final size. 14.1 Two random samples shall be taken from each lot.

TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties

Tensile Strength, min Yield Strength, min Elongation in 2 in.
Grade Condition Test Temperature
ksi (MPa) ksi (MPa) or 50 mm, min, %
R1 annealed RT 58 (400) 22 (151) 22
annealed 600°F (316°C) 25 (172) 11 (83) 32

2
 B 737 – 01
TABLE 3 Permissible Variations in Diameter for Hot- or Cold- 16.2 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent-
Finished Rod and Wire ing the purchaser, without charge, all reasonable facilities to
Permissible Variations, in. (mm)A satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
Diameters, in. (mm)
Over Under with this specification. This inspection shall be so conducted as
Up to 3⁄16 (4.8), incl 0.002 (0.05) 0.002 (0.05) not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
Over 3⁄16 to 5⁄8 (4.8 to16.0), incl 0.003 (0.08) 0.003 (0.08)
Over 5⁄8 to 3⁄4 (16.0 to 19.0), incl 0.004 (0.10) 0.004 (0.10) 17. Rejection
Over 3⁄4 to 1.0 (19.0 to 25.4), incl 0.005 (0.13) 0.005 (0.13)
A
17.1 Rejection for failure of the material to meet the
When it is necessary to heat treat or heat treat and pickle after cold finishing,
because of special hardness, surface or mechanical property requirements,
requirements of this specification shall be reported to the
tolerances are double those shown in the table. manufacturer within 60 calendar days from the receipt of the
material by the purchaser. Unless otherwise specified, rejected
material may be returned to the manufacturer at the manufac-
14.2 If any sample or specimen exhibits obvious contami- turer’s expense, unless the purchaser receives, within 3 weeks
nation, improper preparation, or flaws disqualifying it as a of the notice of rejection, other instructions for disposition.
representative sample, it shall be discarded and a new sample
or specimen substituted. 18. Referee
14.3 If the results of any test lot are not in conformance with 18.1 In the event of disagreement between the manufacturer
the requirements of this specification, the lot may be retested at and the purchaser on the conformance of the material to the
the option of the manufacturer. The frequency of the retest will requirements of this specification or any special test specified
be double the initial number of tests and if the results of the by the purchaser, a mutually acceptable referee shall perform
retest conform to the specification, then the retest values will the tests in question. The results of the referee’s testing shall be
become the test values for certification. All test values, original used in determining conformance of the material to this
and retest, shall be reported to the purchaser. specification.

15. Significance of Numerical Limits 19. Certification

15.1 For the purpose of determining compliance with the 19.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
specified limits for requirements of the properties listed in the producer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished to the
following table, an observed value or a calculated value shall purchaser that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested,
be rounded as indicated in accordance with the rounding and inspected in accordance with this specification and has
methods of Practice E 29. been found to meet the requirements. When specified in the
Rounded Unit for Observed
purchase order or contract, a report of the test results shall be
Property furnished.
or Calculated Value
Chemical composition, and nearest unit in the last right-hand place of fig-
tolerances (when expressed as ures of the specified limit 20. Packaging and Package Marking
decimals)
Tensile strength and yield nearest 1000 psi (10 MPa)
20.1 Each shipment shall be legibly and conspicuously
strength marked or tagged with the following information:
Elongation nearest 1 % 20.1.1 Purchase order or contract number,
20.1.2 Name of material,
16. Inspection
20.1.3 Grade,
16.1 The manufacturer shall inspect the material covered by 20.1.4 Size,
this specification prior to shipment. If so specified in the 20.1.5 Lot, heat or ingot number,
purchase order, the purchaser or his representative may witness 20.1.6 Condition,
the testing and inspection of the material at the place of 20.1.7 Gross, net, and tare weights, and
manufacture. In such cases, the purchaser shall state in his 20.1.8 ASTM specification designation number.
purchase order which test he desires to witness. The manufac- 20.2 All material shall be packaged in such a manner as to
turer shall give notice to the purchaser as to the time and place ensure safe delivery to its destination when properly trans-
of the designated tests. If the purchaser’s representative does ported by any common carrier.
not present himself at the time agreed upon for the testing, the
manufacturer shall consider the requirement for purchaser’s 21. Keywords
inspection at place of manufacture to be waived. 21.1 hafnium; hafnium alloy; rod; wire

3
 B 737 – 01
TABLE 4 Permissible Variations in Length for Hot- or Cold-Finished Rod and Wire
Permissible Variations, in. (mm)
Diameter, in. (mm)
Under 3 ft (1m) 3–12 ft (1–4m) Over 12 ft (4m)
Up to ⁄ (9.5), incl
38 + 1⁄4 , − 0 ( + 6.4, − 0) + 1⁄2 , − 0 ( + 13.0, − 0) + 3⁄4 , − 0 ( + 19.0, − 0)
Over 3⁄8 to 1.0 (9.5 to 25.4) + 1⁄4 , − 0 ( + 6.4, − 0) + 3⁄8 , − 0 ( + 9.5, − 0) + 1⁄2 , − 0 ( + 13.0, − 0)

4
 B 737 – 01
TABLE 5 Permissible Variations in Straightness for Straight
Lengths Hot- or Cold-Finished Rod and WireA
Diameter, in. (mm) Permissible Variations
Up to 3⁄8 (9.5), incl ⁄ in. (2.4 mm) in any 5 ft (1.5 m) but may not
3 32

exceed 3⁄32 in. (2.4 mm) 3 (number of feet in

length/5)
Over 3⁄8 to 1.0 (9.5 to 25.4) 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) in any 5 ft (1.5 m) but may not
exceed 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) 3 (number of feet in
length/5)
A
The measurement is taken on the concave side of the bar with a straight- edge.
Unless otherwise specified, hot- or cold-finished bars for machining purposes are
furnished machine straightened to the tolerances specified in the table.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 738 – 03
Standard Specification for
Fine-Wire Bunch-Stranded and Rope-Lay Bunch-Stranded
Copper Conductors for Use as Electrical Conductors1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 738; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers bare bunch-stranded and rope-
lay bunch-stranded conductors made from round copper wires
finer than No. 40 AWG with diameters less than 0.0031 in.
(.078 mm), either coated or uncoated with tin or silver, for use
as electrical conductors. (Explanatory Note 1).
1.2 The values (SI units) for density and temperature are
regarded as the standard. For all other properties the inch-
pound values are to be regarded as standard, and the SI units
may be approximate.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 33 Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper
Wire for Electrical Purposes2
B 49 Specification for Copper Rod Drawing Stock for
Electrical Purposes3
B 172 Specification for Rope-Lay Stranded Copper Con-
ductors Having Bunch-Stranded Members, for Electrical
Conductors2
B 174 Specification for Bunch-Stranded Copper Conduc-
tors for Electrical Conductors2
B 193 Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor
Materials2
B 258 Specification for Standard Nominal Diameters and
Cross-Sectional Areas of AWG Sizes of Solid Round Wires
Used as Electrical Conductors2
B 298 Specification for Silver-Coated Soft or Annealed
Copper Wire2
B 354 Terminology Relating to Uninsulated Metallic Elec-
trical Conductors2
3. Classification
3.1 For the purposes of this specification, the following
classifications have been assigned (Explanatory Note 2):
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B01 on
Electrical Conductors and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B01.04 on
Conductors of Copper and Copper Alloys.
Current edition approved October 1, 2003. Published October 2003. Originally
approved in 1984. Last previous edition approved in 1998 as B 738 – 98.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
3.1.1 Type:
3.1.1.1 Type B—Bunch-stranded conductors.
3.1.1.2 Type R—Rope-lay bunch-stranded conductors.
3.1.2 Class:
3.1.2.1 Class R—Stranded conductors using wire 42 AWG
(0.0025).
3.1.2.2 Class S—Stranded conductors using wire 44 AWG
(0.0020).
3.1.2.3 Class T—Stranded conductors using wire 46 AWG
(0.00157).
3.1.2.4 Class U—Stranded conductors using wire 48 AWG
(0.00124).
3.1.2.5 Class V—Stranded conductors using wire 50 AWG
(0.00099).
3.2 Detailed information on Type B Conductors is found in
Table 1 and Table 2. Detailed information on Type R Conduc-
tors is found in Table 3 and Table 2.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for materials under this specification shall in-
clude the following information:
4.1.1 Quantity of each size, class, and type,
4.1.2 Conductor size—circular-mil area, dc resistance (7.1)
or AWG (5.2.1),
4.1.3 Class and type (Section 3),
4.1.4 Whether coated or uncoated; if coated, designate type
of coating (6.1); if silver coated, the minimum thickness of
silver (6.1.2), and whether tarnish protection is desired (11.3),
4.1.5 Maximum length of lay (5.2.4), if required,
4.1.6 Temper (6.2),
4.1.7 Separators, if required (5.2.2),
4.1.8 Package size (11.1),
4.1.9 Special package marking, if required (Section 10), and
4.1.10 Place of inspection (Section 9).
4.2 In addition, Supplementary Requirements shall apply
only when specified by the purchaser in the inquiry, contract, or
purchase order for direct procurement by agencies of the U.S.
Government.
 B 738 – 03
TABLE 1 Classification of Type B Bunch-Stranded Conductors
Class Wire Diameter, in.A Conductor Sizes, AWG
R 0.0025 (No. 42 AWG) 24,26,28,30,32,34
S 0.0020 (No. 44 AWG) 26,28,30,32,34,36
T 0.00157 (No. 46 AWG) 28,30,32,34,36,38
U 0.00124 (No. 48 AWG) 30,32,34,36,38,40
V 0.00099 (No. 50 AWG) 32,34,36,38,40
A
Sufficient quantities of wires of these diameters shall be used to form
conductors having cross-sectional areas approximately equal to the AWG conduc-
tor sizes listed.
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 The material shall be copper of such quality and purity
that the finished product shall have the properties and charac-
teristics described in this specification. Material meeting the
requirements of Specification B 49 is such a material.
5.2 Construction:
5.2.1 Cross-Sectional Area—The cross-sectional area, num-
ber, and diameter of wires for a variety of strand constructions
in general use are shown in Table 2.
5.2.2 Separators—If a separator is required to be furnished
with the conductor, it shall be specified by the purchaser at the
time of the order as to the requirements for the kind and
thickness of material and its application details.
5.2.3 Joints:
5.2.3.1 Necessary joints in wires shall be made in accor-
dance with accepted commercial practice.
5.2.3.2 Joints shall be so constructed and so disposed
throughout the conductor that the diameter or configuration of
the completed conductor is not substantially affected, and that
the flexibility of the completed conductor is not adversely
affected.
5.2.4 Lay:
5.2.4.1 Conductors of the same size and description fur-
nished on one order shall have the same lay.
5.2.4.2 The direction of the lay of bunch-stranded conduc-
tors shall be at the option of the manufacturer unless otherwise
specified by the purchaser.
5.2.4.3 Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the
length of the lay of bare or coated bunch-stranded conductors
shall conform to the requirements of Table 4.
5.2.4.4 The direction of the lay of the outer layer of rope-lay
stranded conductors shall be lefthand, unless otherwise speci-
fied by the purchaser.
5.2.4.5 The length of the lay of the outer layer of rope-lay
stranded conductors shall be not less than 8 or more than 16
times the outside diameter of the completed conductor. The
length of the lay of the wires composing the bunch-stranded
members shall be not more than 30 times the diameter of the
member.
6. Physical Properties
6.1 Wire Coating—When coated, the coating of the wires of
the stranded conductor, before stranding, shall conform to the
requirements of 6.1.1 or 6.1.2.
6.1.1 Tin coating shall conform to the coating requirements
of Specification B 33.
6.1.2 Silver coating shall conform to the minimum thick-
ness requirements of the purchase document. Minimum thick-
2
ness shall be determined using the method for determining
plating thickness described in Specification B 298.
6.1.3 The finished diameter and mass of the coated wires
used shall be substantially equal to those of the uncoated wires
of the same class.
6.2 Temper—Unless otherwise specified, all coated conduc-
tors shall be furnished in the annealed temper. Uncoated
conductors may be furnished either annealed or unannealed as
ordered (see 4.1.6).
NOTE 1—The term unannealed as used in this specification means
cold-worked conductor as produced on commercial wire-drawing ma-
chines.
6.3 Tensile Strength and Elongation—The stranded conduc-
tor, in its finished form, shall conform to the following:
Tensile Strength, min. Elongation, min,
Finished State psi MPa 10 in. %
Unannealed 40 000 275 ...
Annealed ... ... 10
7. Electrical Properties
7.1 DC Resistance—The dc resistance in V/1000 ft of the
bunch-stranded conductor shall not exceed the appropriate
values specified in Table 5. The dc resistance in V/1000 ft of
the rope-lay bunch-stranded conductor shall not exceed the
appropriate values specified in Table 6 (Explanatory Note 3
and Note 4).
8. Test Methods
8.1 Coating—Tests to determine conformance of the coat-
ing to the requirements of Specification B 33 or Specification
B 298 shall be performed on the individual wires before
stranding (see 6.1.1 to 6.1.3).
8.2 Tensile Strength and Elongation:
8.2.1 Tests to determine conformance to the tensile strength
and elongation requirements of 6.3 shall be made on the
finished stranded conductor.
8.2.2 Determine tensile strength, Ts, expressed in pounds
per square inch as follows:
L
Ts 5 A
where:
L = maximum load on the stranded conductor during the
tension test (see Explanatory Note 5), lbs, and
A = original cross-sectional area of the stranded conductor,
in.2/in. (see 8.2).
8.2.3 The original cross-sectional area of the stranded con-
ductor shall be considered to be the cross-sectional area of the
individual wire calculated from the nominal wire diameter (see
Table 5) multiplied by the number of wires in the stranded
conductor (Explanatory Note 6).
8.2.4 Determine the elongation of the specimen as the
permanent increase in length, expressed in percent of the
original length, due to the breaking of the specimen in tension,
by measurements made between the jaws of testing machine.
The zero length shall be the distance between the jaws at the
start of the tension test, and shall be as near 10 in. (250 mm)
as practicable. The final length shall be the distance between
 B 738 – 03
TABLE 2 Construction Requirements of Bunch-Stranded and Rope-Lay Bunch-Stranded ConductorsA
CLASS R CLASS S CLASS T CLASS U CLASS V
Minimum Number Minimum Number Minimum Number Minimum Number Minimum Number
Nominal
Size, of Wires 0.0025 in. of Wires 0.0020 in. of Wires 0.00157 in. of Wires 0.00124 in. of Wires 0.00099 in.
Area,
AWG in Diameter in Diameter in Diameter in Diameter in Diameter
cmil
(No. 42 AWG) (No. 44 AWG) (No. 46 AWG) (No. 48 AWG) (No. 50 AWG)
TypeB B TypeC R Type B Type R Type B Type R Type B Type R Type B Type R
2580 16 ... ... ... 665 ... ... ... ... ... ...
1620 18 ... ... ... 413 ... ... ... ... ... ...
1020 20 ... 168 ... 259 ... ... ... ... ... ...
640 22 ... 105 ... 168 ... ... ... ... ... ...
404 24 65 ... ... 105 ... 168 ... ... ... ...
253 26 41 ... 65 ... ... 105 ... 168 ... ...
159 28 26 ... 40 ... 65 ... ... 105 ... 168
100 30 16 ... 25 ... 40 ... 65 ... ... 105
64 32 10 ... 16 ... 25 ... 40 ... 65 ...
40 34 7 ... 10 ... 16 ... 25 ... 40 ...
25 36 ... ... 7 ... 10 ... 16 ... 25 ...
16 38 ... ... ... ... 7 ... 10 ... 16 ...
10 40 ... ... ... ... ... ... 7 ... 10 ...
A
This table shows a variety of strand constructions useful and generally adequate to meet the needs encountered. It is not intended that the constructions listed in this
table be exclusive of other constructions that may appear durable in certain applications employing the same number of wires. The constructions shown in this table provide
for a finished, noncovered, stranded conductor approximately of the area indicated. When specified by the purchaser, usually to provide additional area to compensate
for draw-down during subsequent processing, the number or size of wires composing the uncovered conductor may be increased as required.
B
Type B Bunch-Stranded Conductors.
C
Type R Rope-Lay Bunch-Stranded Conductors.

TABLE 3 Classification of Type R Rope-Lay Bunch-Stranded
ConductorsA
Class Wire Diameter, in.B Conductor Sizes, AWG
R 0.0025 (No. 42 AWG) 20,22
S 0.0020 (No. 44 AWG) 16,18,20,22,24
T 0.00157 (No. 46 AWG) 24,26
U 0.00124 (No. 48 AWG) 26,28
V 0.00099 (No. 50 AWG) 28,30
A
Rope-lay bunch-stranded conductors 7 by bunch-stranded members.
B
Sufficient quantities of wires of these diameters shall be used to form
conductors having cross-sectional areas approximately equal to the AWG conduc-
tor sizes listed.
the jaws at the time of rupture. The fracture shall be between
the jaws of the testing machine and not closer than 1 in. (25
mm) to either jaw.
8.3 Electrical—Tests to determine conformance to the elec-
trical resistance requirements of 7.1 shall be made on the
finished stranded conductor in accordance with Test Method
B 193 (Explanatory Note 3).
8.4 Other Requirements—For the purpose of calculating
mass, cross-sectional area, and so forth, the density of the
coated copper shall be taken as 8.89 g/cm3(0.32117 lb/in.3) at
20°C (Explanatory Note 5).
8.5 Examination for Workmanship of Finished Uninsulated
Stranded Conductor—A visual inspection with the unaided eye
shall be performed on the outer layer of the conductor on the
supplied package. Use a white card (as a background) to
ascertain if any base metal is exposed through a break in the
coating. Detection of any base metal constitutes rejection.
8.6 Examination for Workmanship of Finished Uninsulated
Stranded Conductor—A visual inspection with 103 magnifi-
cation and a white background shall be performed on a
conductor sample taken from the top of the supplied spool. The
sample shall be a minimum of 12 in. (30 cm) in length. The
outer surface of all stranded constructions shall be examined.
Detection of excessive exposed base metal due to the
stranding process, such as indications along one side of the
sample due to excessive localized abrasion during stranding,
constitutes rejection. Continuous lines or patterns of exposed
base metals constitute rejection. Small, random point failures
shall not be cause for rejection.
9. Inspection
9.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
order, the manufacturer shall be responsible for the perfor-
mance of all inspection and test requirements specified.
9.2 All inspection and tests shall be made at the place of
manufacture unless otherwise especially agreed upon between
the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of purchase.
9.3 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing
the purchaser all reasonable manufacturer’s facilities to satisfy
him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this
specification.
10. Product Marking
10.1 The net mass, length (or lengths, and number of
lengths, if more than one length is included in the package),
size designation, type of conductor, purchase order number,
and any other marks required by the purchase order shall be
marked on a tag attached to the reel and, optionally, to the end
of the conductor inside of the package. The same information,
together with the manufacturer’s serial number, if any, and all
shipping marks required by the purchaser, shall appear on the
outside of each package.
11. Packaging
11.1 Package sizes for conductors shall be agreed upon by
the manufacturer and the purchaser in the placing of individual
orders.
11.2 The conductors shall be protected against damage in
ordinary handling and shipping.
11.3 When specified, silver-plated wire shall be protected
from tarnish.

3
 B 738 – 03
TABLE 4 Maximum Length of Lay for Bunch-Stranded Conductors
Nominal Diameter Nominal Area Maximum Length of Lay
Size, AWG
in. (mm) cmil (mm2) in. (mm)
24 0.024 (0.61) 404 (0.20) 0.70 (18)
26 0.019 (0.48) 253 (0.13) 0.60 (15)
28 0.015 (0.38) 159 (0.081) 0.50 (13)
30 0.012 (0.30) 100 (0.051) 0.40 (10)
32 0.009 (0.23) 64 (0.032) 0.30 (7.6)
34 0.007 (0.18) 40 (0.020) 0.25 (6.4)
36 0.006 (0.15) 25 (0.013) 0.20 (5.1)
38 0.005 (0.13) 16 (0.0081) 0.15 (3.8)
40 0.004 (0.10) 10 (0.0051) 0.13 (3.3)

TABLE 5 DC Ohmic Resistance Per 1000 Ft. of Type B Bunch-Stranded Conductors

Conductor ConstructionA Calculated Total DC Resistance at 20°C, V/1000 ft, max.B
Size Designations Number of Nominal Diameter Cross-Sectional Annealed Bare or Annealed Tin Unannealed
WiresC of Each Wire, in. Area cmil Silver CoatedD CoatedE Bare
24-65 65 0.0025 406 28.3 30.4 29.4
26-41 41 0.0025 256 44.9 48.2 46.7
26-65 65 0.0020 260 45.2 48.5 47.0
28-26 26 0.0025 163 70.8 76.0 73.6
28-40 40 0.0020 160 73.5 78.9 76.4
28-65 65 0.00157 160 71.8 ... 74.6
30-16 16 0.0025 100 115.0 123.4 119.6
30-25 25 0.0020 100 117.5 126.2 122.2
30-40 40 0.00157 98.6 116.6 ... 121.3
30-65 65 0.00124 99.9 115.0 ... 119.6
32-10C 10 0.0025 62.5C 184.0 197.5 191.3
32-16 16 0.0020 64 183.7 197.2 191.0
32-25C 25 0.00157 61.6C 186.6 ... 194.0
32-40C 40 0.00124 61.5C 187.0 ... 194.4
32-65 65 0.00099 63.7 180.5 ... 187.7
34-7 7 0.0025 43.8 262.8 281.8 273.3
34-10 10 0.0020 40 293.8 315.5 305.6
34-16 16 0.00157 39.4 291.6 ... 303.2
34-25C 25 0.00124 38.4C 299.1 ... 311.1
34-40 40 0.00099 39.2 293.3 ... 305.0
36-7 7 0.0020 28 419.8 450.6 436.5
36-10 10 0.00157 24.6 466.5 ... 485.1
36-16 16 0.00124 24.6 467.4 ... 486.0
36-25 25 0.00099 24.5 469.3 ... 488.0
38-7 7 0.00157 17.3 666.4 ... 693.0
38-10C 10 0.00124 15.4C 747.8 ... 777.7
38-16 16 0.00099 15.7 733.2 ... 762.5
40-7 7 0.00124 10.8 1068.3 ... 1111.0
40-10 10 0.00099 9.8 1173.2 ... 1220.0
A
See Table 2 for construction requirements or bunch-stranded conductors.
B
See Explanatory Note 4.
C
Bunch.
D
The cross-sectional areas of these conductor-size designations deviate by more than 2 % from the nominal areas of the standard AWG sizes as defined in Specification
B 258.
E
Tin-coated wire is not available at this time on wire diameters smaller than .0020 (44 AWG).

12. Keywords
12.1 copper electrical conductor; electrical conductor; elec-
trical conductor—copper; fine-wire bunch-stranded conductor;
rope-lay bunch-stranded conductor; stranded conductor

4
 B 738 – 03
TABLE 6 D-C Ohmic Resistance Per 1000 Ft. of Type R Rope-Lay Bunch-Stranded Conductor
Conductor ConstructionA Calculated Total D-C Resistance of 20°C, Ohms/1000 ft. max.B
Size Designation Number of Nominal Diameter Cross-Sectional Annealed Bare or Annealed Tin Unannealed
WiresC of Each Wire, in. Area cmil Silver CoatedB CoatedD Bare
16-665 665 0.0020 2660 4.51 4.84 4.69
18-413 413 0.0020 1652 7.25 7.79 7.54
20-168 168 0.0025 1050 11.2 12.0 11.6
20-259 259 0.0020 1036 11.6 12.4 12.0
22-105 105 0.0025 656 17.9 19.2 18.6
22-168 168 0.0020 672 17.8 19.1 18.5
24-105 105 0.0020 420 28.5 30.6 29.7
24-168 168 0.00157 414 28.3 ... 29.4
26-105 105 0.00157 259 45.3 ... 47.1
26-168 168 0.00124 258 45.4 ... 47.2
28-105 105 0.00124 161 72.6 ... 75.5
28-168 168 0.00099 165 71.2 ... 74.0
30-105 105 0.00099 103 113.9 ... 118.5
A
See Table 2 Construction Requirements of Rope-Lay Bunch-Stranded Conductors.
B
See Explanatory Note 3.
C
Seven Member Ropes.
D
Tin coated wire is not available at this time on wire diameters smaller than .0020 (44 AWG).

EXPLANATORY NOTES

NOTE 1—In this specification, only bunch-stranded and rope-lay bunch- K = stranding factor: for Type B, bunch-stranded conductors, the
stranded conductors made from coated or uncoated round copper wires factor is 1.02; and for Type R, Rope-lay bunch-stranded
finer than No. 40 AWG are defined. Requirements for rope-lay stranded conductors, the factor is 1.04,
copper conductors having bunch-stranded members made from round N = the number of wires in the stranded conductor,
copper wires either coated or uncoated, No. 34 AWG or heavier will be C = minimum wire conductivity divided by 100 as shown in the
found in Specification B 172. Requirements for bunch-stranded copper following:
conductors made from round copper wires either coated or uncoated, No. Range of Wire
40 AWG or heavier will be found in Specification B 174. Type of Wire Sizes C
NOTE 2—For definitions of terms relating to conductors, reference Annealed silver coated all 1.00
Annealed bare all 1.00
should be made to Terminology B 354.
Annealed tin coated all 0.9315
NOTE 3—Because of the difficulties encountered in determining cor- Unannealed bare all 0.9616
rectly the cross-sectional area of stranded conductors, this requirement has
been superseded by the dc ohmic resistance/1000 ft length of conductors.
Since this specification describes uninsulated conductors usually intended d = single wire nominal diameter, in., and
for ultimate use as insulated conductors in various electrical and electronic f = diameter factor (minimum wire diameter) for all sizes except No
applications, maximum resistance values are shown for the conductors 44 AWG is 0.92 and for No 44 AWG (0.0020) it is 0.90.
before insulating to serve as the minimum acceptance requirement for the NOTE 5—The value of the density of copper is in accordance with the
conductor. Since some increase of resistance may occur during the International Annealed Copper Standard.
insulating process due to stretching, an allowance in the maximum In calculations involving density, it must be borne in mind that the
resistance is recommended. The values appearing in Table 5 and Table 6 apparent density of coated wire is not constant but a variable function of
under the heading “Annealed Silver Coated” are applicable to silver- wire diameter. The smaller the diameter, the greater the percentage of
coated conductors whether annealed or unannealed prior to insulating. coating present and hence the greater departure from the density of copper.
NOTE 6—It is known that the rate of loading during tension testing of
NOTE 4—The method used to calculate the dc resistance values copper affects the performance of the sample to a greater or lesser extent,
appearing in the tables is as follows: depending upon many factors. In general, tested values of tensile strength
DC resistance at 20°C for the conductors (Table 5 and Table 6) are increased and tested values of elongation are reduced with increase of
expressed in maximum V/1000 ft = speed of the moving head of the testing machine. These effects are
10.371 3 K pronounced when the speed of the moving head is excessive in the testing
of hard-drawn wires. It is suggested that tests be made at speeds of moving
~1000 NC 3 d 2f! heads that, under no-load conditions, are not greater than 3 in./min (75
mm/min) but in no case at a speed greater than that at which correct
where:
readings can be made.

5
 B 738 – 03

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 739 – 03
Standard Specification for
Nickel-Iron-Chromium-Silicon Alloy Welded Tube1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 739; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers alloys UNS N08330 and UNS
N08332 in the form of welded tube intended for heat resisting
applications and general corrosive service.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 536 Specification for Nickel-Iron-Chromium-Silicon Al-
loys (UNS N08330 and N08332) Plate, Sheet, and Strip2
B 751 Specification for General Requirements for Nickel
and Nickel Alloy Welded Tube2
3. General Requirement
3.1 Material furnished under this specification shall con-
form to the applicable requirements of Specification B 751
unless otherwise provided herein.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
requirements that are necessary for material ordered under this
specification. Examples of such requirements include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved June 10, 2003. Published July 2003. Originally
approved in 1985. Last previous edition approved in 1998 as B 739 - 98.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
4.1.1 Alloy (Table 1),
4.1.2 ASTM designation and year of issue,
4.1.3 Dimensions (outside or inside diameter and nominal
wall thickness),
4.1.4 Length (specific or random),
4.1.5 Quantity (feet or number of pieces),
4.1.6 Certification—State if certification is required,
4.1.7 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
samples for product (check) analysis should be furnished, and
4.1.8 Purchaser Inspection—If purchaser wishes to witness
tests or inspection of material at place of manufacture, the
purchase order must so state indicating which tests or inspec-
tions are to be witnessed.
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 The tube shall be made from flat-rolled alloy conform-
ing to Specification B 536, by an automatic welding process
with no addition of filler metal. Subsequent to welding and
prior to final heat treatment, the tube shall be cold-worked
either in both weld and base metal or in weld metal only.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 The material shall conform to the requirements, as to
chemical composition specified in Table 2.
6.2 If a product (check) analysis is performed by the
purchaser, the material shall conform to the product (check)
analysis variations per Specification B 751.
7. Mechanical Properties and Other Requirements
7.1 The tensile properties of the material at room tempera-
ture shall conform to those shown in Table 1.
7.2 Grain Size—Annealed Alloy UNS N08332 shall con-
form to an average grain size of ASTM No. 5 or coarser.
7.3 Annealing Temperature—Alloy UNS N08330 shall be
annealed at 1900°F (1040°C) minimum. Alloy UNS N08332
shall be annealed at 2050°F (1120°C) minimum.
8. Keywords
8.1 welded tube; N08330; N08332
 B 739 – 03
TABLE 1 Mechanical Properties
Yield Strength, 0.2 %
Tensile Strength, Elongation in 2 in. or
Alloy Condition offset, min, psi HardnessA
min, psi (MPa) 50 mm, or 4D, min,%
(MPa)
UNS N08330 Annealed 70 000 (483) 30 000 (207) 30 70–90 HRB
UNS N08332 Annealed 67 000 (462) 27 000 (186) 30 65–88 HRB
A
Hardness values are informative only and not to be construed as the basis for acceptance.

TABLE 2 Chemical Requirements

Element Composition Limits, %
A
Carbon ...
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorus 0.03 max
Sulfur 0.03 max
Silicon 0.75–1.50
Chromium 17.0–20.0
Nickel 34.0–37.0
Copper 1.00 max
Lead 0.005 max
Tin 0.025 max
Iron remainderB
A
Alloy UNS N08330: 0.08 max.
Alloy UNS N08332: 0.05–0.10.
B
Element shall be determined arithmetically by difference.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 800 – 00

Standard Specification for

8000 Series Aluminum Alloy Wire for Electrical Purposes—
Annealed and Intermediate Tempers1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 800; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Aluminum Alloys

1.1 This specification covers 8000 series aluminum alloys Alloy Designation U.S. Patent Number

fabricated into round wires in annealed or intermediate tempers ANSI-H35.1 UNS

8017 A98017 ...
suitable for stranding into conductors or for solid single 8030 A98030 3711339
conductors, usually to be insulated. 8076 A98076 3697260
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound or SI units are to be 8130 A98130 ...
8176 A98176 RE 28419
regarded separately as the standard. The values in each system RE 30465
are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system shall be used 8177 A98177 ...
independently of the other. Combining values from the two
systems may result in nonconformance with the specification.
1.2.1 For density, resistivity and temperature, the values Designation Systems for Aluminum6
stated in SI units are to be regarded as the standard. 2.4 NIST Document:
NBS Handbook 100—Copper Wire Tables of the National
NOTE 1—Aluminum alloys capable of meeting the requirements of this
specification are listed in Table 1.
Bureau of Standards7
NOTE 2—The alloy and temper designations conform to ANSI H35.1. NBS Handbook 109—Aluminum Wire Tables of the Na-
Unified Numbering System alloy designations are listed in Table 1 in tional Bureau of Standards7
accordance with Practice E 527. 2.5 Aluminum Association Document:
NOTE 3—Certain aluminum alloys may be subject to patent rights. U.S. Registration Record of Aluminum Association Designations
patents numbers are shown in Table 1. and Chemical Composition Limits for Wrought Alumi-
2. Referenced Documents num and Wrought Aluminum Alloys. (The foreward in the
document describes the procedure for registering chemical
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on the compositions of alloys with the Aluminum Association)8
date of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein. 3. Ordering Information
2.2 ASTM Standards: 3.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
B 193 Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor the following information:
Materials2 3.1.1 Quantity of each size,
B 557 Test Methods of Tension Testing Wrought and Cast 3.1.2 Wire size, diameter in inches (See 9.1),
Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products3 3.1.3 Alloy Designation (See Table 1),
B 830 Specification for Uniform Test Methods and Fre- 3.1.4 Temper (See 4.2),
quency2 3.1.5 Special tension test, if required (See 6.2),
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to 3.1.6 Special jointing procedures, if permitted (See 10.2),
Determine Conformance with Specifications4 3.1.7 Place of inspection (See 13.2),
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)5 3.1.8 Package size and type (See 14.1), and
2.3 ANSI Standard: 3.1.9 Special package marking, if required (See 15.1 ).
ANSI H35.1, American National for Alloy and Temper
4. Materials and Manufacture
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of Committee B01 on Electrical 4.1 The wire shall be made from drawing stock meeting the
Conductors and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B01.07 on Conductors
of Light Metals.
6
Current edition approved May 10, 2000. Published July 2000. Originally Available from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd St.,
published as B 800 – 88. Last previous edition B 800 – 94. 13th Floor, New York, NY 10036.
2 7
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03. National Technical Information Service, 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02. 22161.
4 8
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02. Registration Record available from the Aluminum Association, Inc., 900 19th
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01. St., N.W., Washington, DC 20006.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 800
chemical composition limits for alloys shown in Table 2 that
are presently registered with Registration Record or for such
other alloys which may become available and will meet the
requirements of this specification.
4.1.1 This specification applies to alloys that are recognized
by Underwriters Laboratories, as “aluminum conductor mate-
rial.”
4.2 Unless otherwise specified, the manufacturer shall have
the option of producing the intermediate temper by either
strain-hardening only (H1X) or by strain-hardening and partial
annealing (H2X) before or after stranding. (Explanatory Note 1
and ANSI H35.1.)
5. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
5.1 The wire shall be free of imperfections not consistent
with good commercial practice.
6. Tensile Properties
6.1 Tensile Strength and Elongation—The wire shall con-
form to tensile strength and elongation requirements prescribed
in Table 3. (Explanatory Note 2.)
6.2 When requested by the purchaser, tension tests of joints
so permitted in 10.2 shall be made and the joints shall comply
with the minimum tensile requirements shown in Table 3.
Sampling shall be as agreed upon between the purchaser and
the manufacturer.
7. Resistivity
7.1 The electrical resistivity shall not exceed the values
shown in Table 4. (Explanatory Note 3.)
8. Density
8.1 For the purpose of calculating linear density, cross
sections, etc., the density of aluminum alloys listed in Table 1
shall be taken as 0.098 lb/in.3(2710 kg/m3) at 20°C.
NOTE 4—The metric density for Alloy 8177 is 2700 kg/m3 even though
the customary value is 0.098 lb/in.3.
9. Diameter
9.1 The diameter of the wire shall be expressed in decimal
fractions of an inch to the nearest 0.1 mil (0.0001 in.) (0.003
mm). The wire shall not vary from the specified diameter by
more than the amounts shown in Table 5.
9.2 Standard nominal diameters of wire used for solid
conductors are shown in Table 6. Diameters of wires used for
stranded conductor shall be as agreed upon between the
purchaser and the manufacturer.
10. Joints
10.1 Joints may be made in drawing stock and in the wire
prior to final drawing in accordance with good commercial
practice.
10.2 If agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
purchaser, joints may be made during final drawing or in the
finished wire by electrical-butt welding, by cold-pressure
welding, or by electric-butt, cold-upset welding with the
following provisions:
10.2.1 For sizes 0.0500 to 0.0105 in. (1.270 to 0.267 mm) in
diameter, not more than three such joints shall be present in any
reel, spool, or coil of the specified nominal mass.
10.2.2 For sizes larger than 0.0500 in. (1.270 mm) in
diameter not more than 10 % of the reels, spools, or coils shall
contain such joints and no such joints shall be closer than 50 ft.
(15 m) to another or to either end of the wire and not more than
two such joints shall be present in any reel, spool, or coil of the
specified nominal mass.
11. Sampling
11.1 Determine the conformance of the material to the
requirements of Sections 6, 7, 9, 10, and 5, by statistical
sampling and inspection of each lot of wire presented for
inspection in accordance with Specification
B 830.(Explanatory Note 4.)
11.2 Conformance Criteria:
11.2.1 Failure of a specimen to conform to the applicable
requirements of Sections 6, 7, 9, 10, and 5 shall constitute
failure of the production unit from which the specimen was
taken.
11.2.2 Any lot of wire that has been sampled in accordance
with 11.1 and from which the number of specimens failing to
comply with the requirements of Sections 6, 7, 9, 10, and 5
does not equal or exceed the appropriate reject number of the

TABLE 2 Chemical Composition Requirements

NOTE 1—When single units are shown, these indicate the maximum amounts permitted.
NOTE 2—Analysis shall regularly be made only for the elements specifically mentioned in this table. If however, the presence of other elements is
suspected or indicated in the course of routine analysis, further analysis shall be made to determine that the total of these other elements is not present
in excess of the limits specified in the last column of the table.
NOTE 3—The following applies to all specified limits in this table. For purposes of acceptance and rejection, an observed value or a calculated value
obtained from analysis should be rounded off to the nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit (Practice E 29).
Alloys Composition,% by Mass Others
ANSI UNS Aluminum Silicon Iron Copper Magnesium Zinc Boron Each Other
8017 A98017 Remainder 0.10 0.55 to 0.8 0.10 to 0.20 0.01–0.05 0.05 0.04 0.03A 0.10
8030 A98030 Remainder 0.10 0.30 to 0.8 0.15 to 0.30 0.05 0.05 0.001 to 0.04 0.03 0.10
8076 A98076 Remainder 0.10 0.6 to 0.9 0.04 0.08–0.22 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.10
8130 A98130 Remainder 0.15B 0.40 to 1.0B 0.05 to 0.15 ... 0.10 ... 0.03 0.10
8176 A98176 Remainder 0.03–0.15 0.40 to 1.0 ... ... 0.10 ... 0.05C 0.15
8177 A98177 Remainder 0.10 0.25 to 0.45 0.04 0.04 to 0.12 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.10
A
0.003 max lithium.
B
1.0 max silicon and iron.
C
0.03 max gallium.

2

TABLE 3 Tensile Property Limits
NOTE 1—For purposes of determining conformance with this specification, each calculated value of tensile strength shall be rounded to the nearest 0.1
ksi, (1 MPa) and each value for elongation to the nearest 0.5 % in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
NOTE 2—The elongation shall be not less than 10 % in 10 in. (250 mm).
Tensile Strength of Wire
Temper
ksi
−0 8.5 to 16.0
−H1X or 15.0 to 22.0
−H2X
TABLE 4 Electrical Resistivity Requirements at 20°C
Electrical Resistivity, max,V mm2/m Volume Conductivity, min % IACS
Average for Individual Average for Individual
A Lot Tests A Lot Tests
0.028264 0.028450 61.0 60.6
sampling table used in accordance with Specification B 830,
shall be considered as complying with the requirements of
Sections 6, 7, 9, 10, and 5.
11.2.3 Rejected lots may be screened to remove noncon-
forming production units by testing one specimen from each
production unit in the lot for the failing characteristic.
11.3 Sample Size—The sample size shall be the number of
production units selected.
12. Test Methods
12.1 Tensile Strength—Obtain the tensile strength in accor-
dance with Test Methods B 557. (Explanatory Note 2.)
12.1.1 If any part of the fracture takes place in the jaws of
the tension testing machine, or if an examination of the
specimen indicates that there was external damage, the value
obtained may not be representative of the material. In such
cases discard the test and make a new test.
12.2 Resistivity—Determine the electrical resistivity of the
material in accordance with Test Method B 193. (Explanatory
Note 3.)
12.3 Diameter Measurements—Measure the diameter with
a micrometer caliper graduated in 0.0001 in. (0.003 mm).
Make measurements on each specimen selected for this test.
Measure the diameter of the wire at two points, spaced
approximately 90° apart, around the circumference of the
specimen. Take the average of the two readings as the mean
diameter of the specimen.
12.4 Finish—Make a surface-finish inspection with the
unaided eye (normal corrective lenses excepted).
13. Inspection
13.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
order, the manufacturer shall be responsible for the perfor-
mance of all inspection and test requirements specified.
B 800
Tensile Strength of Joints, min
MPa ksi MPa
59 to 111 8.5 59
103 to 152 11.0 76
13.2 All inspections and tests shall be made at the place of
manufacture unless otherwise especially agreed to between the
manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of the purchase.
13.3 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent-
ing the purchaser all reasonable manufacturer’s facilities to
satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
with this specification.
13.4 Description of Inspection Terms:
13.4.1 Lot—An inspection lot shall consist of an idendifi-
able quantity of wire subjected to inspection at one time. Each
lot shall consist of units of wire of the same size and temper,
manufactured under essentially the same conditions at essen-
tially the same time. The amount in any case is not to exceed
30 000 lbs. (14 000 kg). (See Explanatory Note 5.)
13.4.2 Sample—A sample is a quantity of production units
(reels, coils, spools) selected at random from the lot for the
purpose of determining that the lot meets the requirements of
this specification.
13.4.3 Specimen—A specimen is a length of wire removed
for test purposes from any individual production unit of the
sample.
14. Packaging and Package Marking
14.1 Package sizes and types shall be agreed upon between
the manufacturer and the purchaser in the placing of individual
orders.
14.2 Unless otherwise specified, the wire shall be supplied
in one continuous length on each reel, coil, or spool.
14.3 The wire shall be protected against damage in ordinary
handling and shipping.
14.4 Each package shall bear a tag showing the manufac-
turer’s name or trademark, alloy, temper, size, and mass of
material. If additional information is to be required on the tags,
it shall be arranged with the manufacturer at the time of placing
the order.
15. Keywords
15.1 aluminum alloy conductors; aluminum conductors;
electrical conductors; solid aluminum conductors; 8000-series
aluminum alloy conductors
3
 B 800
TABLE 5 Permissible Variations in Diameter
Permissible Variation of
Specified Diameter, in. (mm) Mean Diameter from
Specified Diameter, 6
0.0100 to under 0.0360 (0.254 to under 0.914) 0.0005 in. (0.013 mm)
0.0360 to under 0.1000 (0.914 to under 2.540) 0.0010 in. (0.025 mm)
0.1000 to 0.7071 incl (2.540 to 17.960 incl) 1%

TABLE 6 Standard Nominal Diameters,A Cross-Sectional Areas, and Linear Densities of Round Aluminum Alloy Wire for Solid
Conductors at 20°C
Diameter Cross-Sectional Area Linear Density
Size AWG
mils mm cmil in.2 mm2 lb./ 1000 ft kg/km
0000 460.0 11.684 211 600 0.1662 107.0 195.4 290.9
000 409.6 10.404 167 800 0.1318 85.0 155.0 230.6
00 364.8 9.266 133 100 0.1045 67.4 122.9 182.9
0 324.9 8.252 105 600 0.08291 53.5 97.50 145.1
1 289.3 7.348 83 690 0.06573 42.4 77.30 115.0
2 257.6 6.543 66 360 0.05213 33.6 61.29 91.21
3 229.4 5.827 52 620 0.04133 26.7 48.61 72.33
4 204.3 5.189 41 740 0.03278 21.2 38.55 57.37
5 181.9 4.620 33 090 0.02599 16.8 30.56 45.48
6 162.0 4.115 26 240 0.02061 13.3 24.24 36.07
7 144.3 3.665 20 820 0.01635 10.5 19.23 28.62
8 128.5 3.264 16 510 0.01297 8.37 15.25 22.69
9 114.4 2.906 13 090 0.01028 6.63 12.09 17.99
10 101.9 2.588 10 380 0.008155 5.26 9.501 14.27
11 90.7 2.304 8 230 0.00646 4.17 7.598 11.31
12 80.8 2.052 6 530 0.00513 3.31 6.030 8.974
13 72.0 1.829 5 180 0.00407 2.63 4.788 7.126
14 64.1 1.628 4 110 0.00323 2.08 3.795 5.648
A
See NBS Handbook 109.

EXPLANATORY NOTES

NOTE 1—The H1X tempers (strain-hardened only) and the H2X tem-
pers (strain-hardened followed by partial annealing) are considered
equally suitable for most electrical purposes.
NOTE 2—In tension tests, the values obtained may be affected by testing
speed. It is recommended that for conformance criteria the testing speed
should not exceed 0.5 mm/mm of gage length or distance between grips
per minute.
NOTE 3—Relationships thad may be useful in connection with the
values of electrical resistivity prescribed in this specification are shown in
Table X1.1. Resistivity units are based on the International Annealed
Copper Standard (IACS) adopted by IEC in 1983, which is 1/58 V mm2/m
at 20°C for 100 % conductivity. The value of 0.017241 V mm2/m at 20°C
is the international equivalent of volume resistivity of annealed copper for
100 % conductivity. A complete discussion of this subject is contained in
NBS Handbook 100. The use of five significant figures in expressing
resistivity does not imply the need for greater accuracy of measurement
than that specified in Test Method B 193. The use of five significant
figures is required for reasonably accurate reversible conversion from one
set of resistivity units to another. The equivalent resistivity values in the
tables were derived from the fundamental IEC value (1/58 V mm2/m)
computed to seven significant figures and then rounded to five significant
figures.
NOTE 4—Cumulative results secured on the product of a single manu-
facturer, indicating continued adherence to the sampling requirements, are
necessary to ensure an overall product meeting the requirements of this
specification. The sample sizes and requirements used in accordance with
Specification B 830 for the various characteristics are applicable only to
lots produced under these conditions.
NOTE 5—A lot should comprise material taken from a product regularly
meeting the requirements of this specification. Inspection of individual
lots of less than 5000 lb (2300 kg) of wire cannot be justified economi-
cally. For small lots of 5000 lb or less the purchaser may agree to the
manufacturer’s regular inspection of the product as a whole as evidence of
acceptability of such small lots.

4
 B 800
APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. EQUIVALENT RESISTIVITY VALUES AT 20°C (See Explanatory Note 3 and Table X1.1 )

TABLE X1.1 Equivalent Resistivity Values at 20°CA

Resistivity Constants
Volume Conductivity,
Material Volume
% IACS
V cmil/ft V mm /m2
µ V in. µ V cm
Copper 100 10.371 0.017241 0.67879 1.7241
Aluminum 61.0 17.002 0.028264 1.1128 2.8264
A
The equivalent resistivity values for 100 % IACS (soft copper) were each computed from the fundamental IEC value 1/58 ohms mm2/m using conversion factors each
accurate to at least seven significant figures. Corresponding values for other conductivities (aluminum) were derived from these by multiplying by the reciprocal of the
conductivity ratios and when applicable also by the density ratios, both accurate to at least seven significant figures.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 802/B 802M – 02

Standard Specification for

Zinc–5 % Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy-Coated Steel Core
Wire for Aluminum Conductors, Steel Reinforced (ACSR)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 802/B 802M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 2.3 Other Standard:

1.1 This specification covers round, zinc–5 % aluminum-
mischmetal (Zn–5A1–MM) alloy-coated, steel core wire with
three classes of Zn–5A1–MM coating used for mechanical
reinforcement in the manufacture of aluminum conductors,
steel reinforced (ACSR).
1.2 This specification covers wire of diameter from 0.0500
to 0.1900 in. or 1.60 to 4.80 mm, inclusive.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units or SI units are to
be regarded separately as standard. The values in each system
are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system shall be used
independently of the other. Combining values from the two
systems may result in nonconformance with this specification.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein.
2.2 ASTM Standards:
A 90/A 90M Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on
Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings2
A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
of Steel Products3
A 751 Test Methods, Practices and Terminology for Chemi-
cal Analysis of Steel Products3
B 193 Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor
Materials4
B 750 Specification for Zinc–5 % Aluminum-Mischmetal
Alloy in Ingot Form for Hot-Dip Coatings5
E 47 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Zinc Die-
Casting Alloys6
E 1277 Practice for Chemical Analysis of Zinc-5
Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy by ICP Emission Spectrom-
etry6
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B01 on
Electrical Conductors and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B01.05 on
Conductors of Ferrous Metals.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2002. Published November 2002. Originally
published as B 802 – 89. Last previous edition B 802 – 98.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.06.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.03.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03.
5 7
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
GF-1 Standard Practice for Determination of Cerium and
Lanthanum Compositions in Galfan Alloy (5 % Al-0.04 %
La-0.04 % Ce-Bal SHG Zn)7
3. Terminology
3.1 Abbreviations: Abbreviations:
3.1.1 MM—mischmetal.
3.1.2 Zn–5A1–MM—zinc–5 % aluminum mischmetal.
3.2 Definition:
3.2.1 lot—unless otherwise specified in the contract or
order, a lot shall consist of all coils of wire of the same
diameter and unit lengths submitted for inspection at the same
time.
4. Classification
4.1 The wire is furnished in three classes of coating, Class
A, Class B, or Class C, as specified, in conformance with the
requirements of Section 10 and Table 1 or Table 2.
5. Ordering Information
5.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information:
5.1.1 Quantity of each size,
5.1.2 Wire diameter in inches or millimetres (Section 14),
5.1.3 Class of coating (see 4.1),
5.1.4 Certification, if required (Section 19),
5.1.5 Test report, if required (Section 19), and
5.1.6 Package Size (Section 20).
6. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 The base metal shall be steel produced by the open-
hearth, electric furnace, or basic oxygen process.
6.2 The wire shall be cold drawn and coated with
Zn–5A1–MM alloy to produce the desired properties.
7. Chemical Composition
7.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements prescribed
in Table 3.
7.2 Chemical analysis of the steel shall be conducted in
Available from International Lead Zinc Research Organization, 2525 Meridian
Parkway, P.O. Box 12036, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709-2036.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 802/B 802M – 02
TABLE 1 Zn-5A1-MM Alloy Coating case of dispute, the results secured by Practice E 1277 shall be
Area Density of Coating, min, oz/ft2 of the basis of acceptance.
Specified Diameter of Coated Wire, Uncoated Wire Surface
in.
Class A Class B Class C 8. Tensile Test
0.0500 to 0.0599, incl 0.60 1.20 1.80 8.1 The Zn–5A1–MM-coated steel core wire shall conform
0.0600 to 0.0749, incl 0.65 1.30 1.95
0.0750 to 0.0899, incl 0.70 1.40 2.10
to the tensile and elongation requirements prescribed in Table
0.0900 to 0.1039, incl 0.75 1.50 2.25 4 or Table 5.
0.1040 to 0.1199, incl 0.80 1.60 2.40 8.2 Tensile tests shall be conducted in accordance with Test
0.1200 to 0.1399, incl 0.85 1.70 2.55
0.1400 to 0.1799, incl 0.90 1.80 2.70
Methods and Definitions A 370, using the initial settings for
0.1800 to 0.1900, incl 1.00 2.00 3.00 determining stress at 1 % extension given in Table 6 or Table
7 of this specification.
8.3 Test Specimens—The test specimens shall be free of
TABLE 2 Zn-5A1-MM Alloy Coating bends or kinks other than the curvature resulting from the usual
Area Density of Coating, min, g/m2 of coiling operations. Any hand straightening necessary to permit
Specified Diameter of Coated Wire, Uncoated Wire Surface
mm
insertion of the specimen in the jaws of the testing machine
Class A Class B Class C shall be performed by drawing between wood blocks or by
1.60 to 1.90, incl 210 420 630 some other equally satisfactory means.
Over 1.90 to 2.30, incl 220 440 660
Over 2.30 to 2.70, incl 230 460 690 9. Wrap Test
Over 2.70 to 3.10, incl 240 480 720
Over 3.10 to 3.50, incl 260 520 780 9.1 The material, as represented by the test specimens, shall
Over 3.50 to 3.90, incl 270 540 810
Over 3.90 to 4.50, incl 275 550 825
not fracture when the Zn–5A1–MM alloy-coated wire is
Over 4.50 to 4.80, incl 300 600 900 wrapped at a rate not exceeding 15 turns/min in a close helix
of at least eight turns around a cylindrical mandrel with a
diameter equal to two times the specified diameter of the wire
TABLE 3 Chemical Requirements under test, 65 %.
Element Composition, %
Carbon 0.50 to 0.85
10. Coating Test
Manganese 0.50 to 1.10 10.1 The material, as represented by the test specimens,
Phosphorus, max 0.035
Sulfur, max 0.045
shall conform to the coating requirements of Table 1 or Table
Silicon 0.10 to 0.35 2, for the diameter and class of coating specified.
10.2 The coating test shall be conducted in accordance with
Test Method A 90/A 90M.
accordance with Test Methods, Practices and Terminology
A 751. 11. Adherence of Coating Test
7.3 The ingot form of zinc-5% aluminum-mischmetal alloy 11.1 The Zn–5A1–MM alloy-coated wire shall be capable
shall conform to Specification B 750. of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15
7.3.1 For a two-step coating operation where the first turns/min around a cylindrical mandrel having a diameter as
coating is zinc (hot-dip galvanized or electrogalvanized), the prescribed in Table 8 or Table 9, without cracking or flaking the
final bath may have an aluminum content of up to 7.2 %, to coating to such an extent that any Zn–5A1–MM alloy can be
prevent depletion of the aluminum content of the bath. removed by rubbing with the bare fingers.
7.3.2 Method of Analysis—The determination of chemical
NOTE 1—Loosening or detachment during the adhesion test of super-
composition shall be made in accordance with suitable chemi- ficial, small particles of Zn–5A1–MM alloy formed by mechanical
cal (Test Methods E 47 for Tin), ICP argon plasma spectromet- polishing of the surface of the coated wire shall not be considered cause
ric (Practice E 1277), or other methods. In case of dispute, the for rejection.
results secured by Practice E 1277 shall be the basis of
acceptance. 12. Joints
7.3.3 A standard practice of X-ray fluorescence spectrom- 12.1 No joints shall be made in the finished wire.
etry for determination of cerium and lanthanum in a 12.2 Joints may be made at any stage of processing prior to
Zn–5A1–MM alloy has been established by the International final cold drawing by the electric butt-weld or flash or
Lead Zinc Research Organization (Standard Practice GF-1). In flash-welding process.

TABLE 4 Tensile Requirements

Stress at 1 % Extension, min, Ksi Ultimate Tensile Strength, min, Ksi Elongation in 10 in., min, %
Specified Diameter, in.
Class A Class B Class C Class A Class B Class C Class A Class B Class C
0.0500 to 0.0899, incl 190 180 170 210 200 190 3.0 3.0 3.0
0.0900 to 0.1199, incl 185 175 165 205 195 185 3.5 3.0 3.0
0.1200 to 0.1399, incl 180 170 160 205 195 185 4.0 3.0 3.0
0.1400 to 0.1900, incl 170 160 155 200 185 180 4.0 4.0 4.0

2
 B 802/B 802M – 02
TABLE 5 Tensile Requirements
Stress at 1 % Extension, min, MPa Ultimate Tensile Strength, min, MPa Elongation in 250 mm, min, %
Specified Diameter, in.
Class A Class B Class C Class A Class B Class C Class A Class B Class C
1.60 to 2.30, incl 1310 1240 1170 1450 1380 1310 3.0 3.0 3.0
Over 2.30 to 3.05, incl 1280 1210 1140 1410 1340 1280 3.5 3.0 3.0
Over 3.05 to 3.60, incl 1240 1170 1100 1410 1340 1280 4.0 3.0 3.0
Over 3.60 to 4.80, incl 1170 1100 1070 1380 1280 1240 4.0 4.0 4.0

TABLE 6 Initial Settings for Determining Stress at 1 % Extension 14.2 For diameter measurements and diameter tolerances,
Specified Diameter, in.
Initial Stress, Initial Setting of Extensometer, specified diameters shall be rounded to the closest 0.0005 in. or
Ksi in./in. 0.01 mm.
0.0500 to 0.0899,incl 14 0.0005 (0.05 % extension) 14.3 Determine the greatest and least diameter each to the
0.0900 to 0.1199, incl 28 0.0010 (0.10 % extension)
0.1200 to 0.1900, incl 42 0.0015 (0.15 % extension)
nearest 0.001 in. or 0.01 mm, at the same cross section. The
average of these two diameters shall not differ from the
specified diameter by more than the tolerances shown in Table
TABLE 7 Initial Settings for Determining Stress at 1 % Extension 10 or Table 11.
Initial Stress, Initial Setting of Extensometer, 15. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
Specified Diameter, mm
MPa mm/mm
15.1 The Zn–5A1–MM alloy coating shall be reasonably
1.60 to 2.30, incl 100 0.0005 (0.05 % extension)
Over 2.30 to 3.05, incl 190 0.0010 (0.10 % extension) smooth, continuous, of reasonably uniform thickness, and free
Over 3.05 to 4.80, incl 290 0.0015 (0.15 % extension) of imperfections not consistent with good commercial practice.
16. Number of Tests and Retests
TABLE 8 Mandrel Size for Adherence Test 16.1 One test specimen shall be taken from each 5000 lb or
Ratio of Mandrel Diameter 2500 kg or fraction thereof in the inspection lot.
Specified Wire Diameter, in.
to Wire Diameter 16.2 Each specimen shall be tested for compliance with
0.0500 to 0.0899, incl 3 Sections 8, 9, 11, and 14. At least half of the specimens shall
0.0900 to 0.1399, incl 4 be tested for compliance with Section 10.
0.1400 to 0.1900, incl 5
16.3 Should one or more of the test specimens fail any of
the tests specified, the nonconforming coil or coils may be
TABLE 9 Mandrel Size for Adherence Test removed and the balance of the lot subjected to retests. For
Ratio of Mandrel Diameter
retest purposes, two additional coils for each 5000 lb or 2500
Specified Wire Diameter, mm kg in the lot shall be sampled and tested for the property in
to Wire Diameter
1.60 to 2.30, incl 3 which the original sample failed to comply.
Over 2.30 to 3.05, incl 4 16.4 Should any of the retest specimens fail to meet the
Over 3.05 to 4.80, incl 5 properties specified, the lot represented by the test specimens
shall be rejected.
12.3 Welding equipment and procedure shall be such that it 16.5 Instead of rejecting the entire lot as provided in 16.4,
can be demonstrated that the ultimate tensile strength of a the producer may test specimens from every coil in the lot for
finished wire specimen containing the welded section shall be the property in which failure occurred and reject only the
not less than 96 % of the specified minimum stress at 1 % nonconforming coils.
extension. 17. Inspection
12.4 A welded section shall not be required to meet the 17.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
stress at 1 % extension, elongation, and wrap tests.
TABLE 10 Permissible Variations in Diameter of Zn-5A1-MM
13. Density and Resistivity Alloy-Coated Steel Wire
13.1 For the purpose of calculating mass per unit length, NOTE 1—It is recognized that the surface of Zn-5A1-MM alloy
cross sections, etc, the density of Zn–5A1–MM alloy-coated coatings, particularly those produced by hot-dip coating, are not perfectly
steel wire at 20°C shall be taken as 0.281 lb/in.3(7780 kg/m 3). smooth and devoid of irregularities. If the tolerances shown in the table
13.2 A maximum resistivity of Zn–5A1–MM alloy-coated are rigidly applied to such irregularities that are inherent to the product,
steel wire is not guaranteed but a typical value of 0.19157 unjustified rejections of wire that would actually be satisfactory for use
2 could occur. Therefore, it is intended that these tolerances be used in
Vmm /m may be used for purpose of calculation. For conver- gaging the uniform areas of the coated wire.
sion to other units of conductivity or resistivity, refer to Test
Permissible Variation, in.
Method B 193. Specified Diameter, in.
Plus Minus
14. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations 0.0500 to 0.0749, incl 0.0015 0.001
14.1 The specified diameter shall be expressed in decimal 0.0750 to 0.1199, incl 0.002 0.002
0.1200 to 0.1399, incl 0.003 0.002
fractions of an inch to four decimal places or in millimetres and 0.1400 to 0.1900, incl 0.004 0.003
decimal fractions of a millimetre to two decimal places.

3
 B 802/B 802M – 02
TABLE 11 Permissible Variations in Diameter of Zn-5A1-MM In case of dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the
Alloy-Coated Steel Wire producer or the supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
NOTE 1—It is recognized that the surface of Zn-5A1-MM alloy
coatings, particularly those produced by hot-dip coating, are not perfectly 19. Certification
smooth and devoid of irregularities. If the tolerances shown in the table 19.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
are rigidly applied to such irregularities that are inherent to the product, producer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished to the
unjustified rejections of wire that would actually be satisfactory for use purchaser showing that the material was manufactured,
could occur. Therefore, it is intended that these tolerances be used in
gaging the uniform areas of the coated wire.
sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with this speci-
fication, and has been found to meet the requirements. When
Permissible Variation, mm
Specified Diameter, mm specified in the purchase order or contract, a report of the test
Plus Minus
results shall be furnished.
1.60 to 2.30, incl 0.04 0.03
Over 2.30 to 3.05, incl 0.05 0.05 20. Packaging and Package Marking
Over 3.05 to 3.60, incl 0.08 0.05
Over 3.60 to 4.80, incl 0.10 0.08 20.1 The unit lengths shall be as specified in the contract or
order. Length tolerances shall be 62 % unless otherwise
specified by the purchaser.
order, the manufacturer shall be responsible for the perfor- 20.2 Package dimensions, kind of package (coils, reels, or
mance of all inspection and test requirement specified. reelless coils), and quantity of wire in each package shall be
17.2 All inspections and tests shall be made at the place of agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser.
manufacture unless otherwise especially agreed upon by the 20.3 A durable tag shall be securely attached to each
manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of the purchase. package showing the nominal diameter of wire, class of
17.3 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent- coating, length, approximate weight, purchaser’s order num-
ing the purchaser all reasonable manufacturer’s facilities to ber, and manufacturer’s name.
satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance 20.4 The starting end shall be identified.
with this specification. 20.5 In case there is more than one piece in a package, the
length and position of each piece shall be shown on the tag.
18. Rejection and Rehearing
18.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of 21. Keywords
this specification shall be rejected. Rejection should be re- 21.1 coated steel wire; mischmetal alloy-coated steel wire;
ported to the producer or the supplier promptly and in writing. steel core-wire; steel wire; zinc-5% aluminum

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 801 – 99
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS
100 Barr Harbor Dr., West Conshohocken, PA 19428
Reprinted from the Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Copyright ASTM

Standard Specification for

Concentric-Lay-Stranded Conductors of 8000 Series
Aluminum Alloy for Subsequent Covering or Insulation1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 801; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 2.4 National Bureau of Standards:

1.1 This specification covers aluminum alloys in the 8000
series cited in B 800 in tempers “0” and H1X or H2X bare
compact-round, compressed and conventional concentric-lay-
stranded conductors made from round or shaped wires used as
covered or insulated electrical conductors. These conductors
shall be composed of a central core surrounded by one or more
compacted, compressed or conventional layers of helically
applied wires (Explanatory Note 1 and Note 2).
1.2 The SI values for resistivity are regarded as standard.
For all other properties, the inch-pound units are regarded as
standard and the SI units may be approximate.
NOTE 1—Sealed conductors that are intended to prevent longitudinal
water propagation are also permitted within the guidelines of this
specification.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein.
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 193 Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor
Materials2
B 263 Test Method for Determination of Cross-Sectional
Area of Stranded Conductors2
B 354 Terminology Relating to Uninsulated Metallic Elec-
trical Conductors2
B 800 Specification for 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy Wire
for Electric Purposes—Annealed and Intermediate Tem-
pers2
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications3
2.3 ANSI Standard:
ANSI H35.1 Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for
Aluminum4
1 5.2 Joints in the individual wires in a finished conductor
This specification is under the jurisdiction of Committee B-1 on Electrical
Conductors and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B01.07 on Conductors
of Light Metals.
Current edition approved April 10, 1999. Published June 1999. Originally
published as B 801 – 88. Last previous edition B 801 – 95.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
4 5
Available from American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street,
13th Floor, New York, NY 10036.
NBS Handbook 100—Copper Wire Tables5
3. Classification
3.1 For the purpose of this specification, conductors are
classified as follows:
3.1.1 Class A—For conductors to be covered with weather/
resistant materials.
3.1.2 Class B—For conductors to be insulated with various
materials such as rubber, paper, varnished cloth, etc., and for
the conductors indicated under Class A where greater flexibility
is required.
3.1.3 Class C and D—For conductors where greater flex-
ibility is required than is provided by Class B conductors.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information:
4.1.1 Quantity of each size and class (Table 1).
4.1.2 Conductor size; circular-mil area or Awg (Section 7),
4.1.3 Class (See 3.1),
4.1.4 Temper (Section 12),
4.1.5 Lay direction if nonstandard (See 6.3 and 6.4), re-
versed or unidirectional (See 6.3) or special (See 6.4),
4.1.6 Special tension test, if required (See 8.2),
4.1.7 Packaging (Section 19),
4.1.8 Special package marking (Section 19), and
4.1.9 Place of inspection (Section 18).
4.2 In addition, Supplementary Requirements shall apply
only when specified by the purchaser in the inquiry, contract or
purchase order for direct procurement by agencies of the U.S.
Government (S1, S2, and S3).
5. Joints
5.1 Joints may be made in any of the wires of any stranding
by electric-butt welding, cold-pressure welding, or electric-
butt, cold-upset welding.
shall be not closer together than 1 ft (0.3 m) for conductors of
19 wires or less, or closer than 1 ft in a layer for conductors of
more than 19 wires.
Available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Port Royal Rd.,
Springfield, VA 22161.

1
 B 801
5.3 No joint or splice shall be made in a stranded conductor wires or cables, the lay length of the wires shall be not less than
as a whole. 8 nor more than 16 times the outer diameter of the finished
conductor. For conductors of 37 wires or more, this require-
6. Lay ment shall apply to the wires in the outer two layers. The lay
6.1 The length of lay for all classes shall be not less than 8 of the layers other than the two outer layers shall be at the
nor more than 16 times the outside diameter of that layer, option of the manufacturer, unless otherwise agreed upon.
except that for conductors composed of 37 wires or more, this
6.2 The direction of lay for Class A conductors shall be
requirement shall apply only to the two outer layers. The lay of
right-hand.
the layers other than the two outer layers shall be at the option
of the manufacturer, unless otherwise agreed upon.
6.1.1 For conductors to be used in covered or insulated

TABLE 1 Construction Requirements for Aluminum Conductors in the 8000 Series Alloys

Nominal Conductor Diameter

NumberA Reverse Nominal d-c
Conductor Size Unilay Compact Nominal Mass
of Wires Conventional Concentric resistanceB at 20°C
Class Compressed
Compressed
lbs/1000
Cmil AWG mm2 in. mm in. mm in. mm. in mm kg/km V/1000 ft V/km
ft
1000000 507 D 127 1.153 29.3 1.119 28.4 1.060 26.9 941 1400 0.0173 0.0568
1000000 507 C 91 1.153 29.3 1.118 28.4 1.084 27.5 1.060 26.9 941 1400 0.0173 0.0568
1000000 507 B, A 61 1.152 29.3 1.117 28.4 1.060 26.9 941 1400 0.0173 0.0568
900000 456 D 127 1.095 27.8 1.062 27.0 0.999 25.4 847 1260 0.0193 0.0633
900000 456 C 91 1.093 27.8 1.060 26.9 1.028 26.1 0.999 25.4 847 1260 0.0193 0.0633
900000 456 B, A 61 1.093 27.8 1.060 26.9 0.999 25.4 847 1260 0.0193 0.0633
800000 405 D 127 1.032 26.2 1.001 25.4 0.938 23.8 753 1120 0.0217 0.0712
800000 405 C 91 1.032 26.2 1.001 25.4 0.969 24.6 0.938 23.8 753 1120 0.0217 0.0712
800000 405 B, A 61 1.031 26.2 1.000 25.4 0.938 23.8 753 1120 0.0217 0.0712
750000 380 D 127 0.998 25.3 0.968 24.6 0.908 23.1 706 1050 0.0231 0.0758
750000 380 C 91 0.999 25.4 0.969 24.6 0.939 23.9 0.908 23.1 706 1050 0.0231 0.0758
750000 380 B, A 61 0.998 25.3 0.968 24.6 0.908 23.1 706 1050 0.0231 0.0758
700000 355 D 127 0.965 24.5 0.936 23.8 0.877 22.3 659 981 0.0248 0.0814
700000 355 C 91 0.965 24.5 0.936 23.8 0.907 23.0 0.877 22.3 659 981 0.0248 0.0814
700000 355 B, A 61 0.964 24.5 0.935 23.7 0.877 22.3 659 981 0.0248 0.0814
650000 329 D 127 0.930 23.6 0.902 22.9 0.845 21.5 612 911 0.0267 0.0876
650000 329 C 91 0.930 23.6 0.902 22.9 0.874 22.2 0.845 21.5 612 911 0.0267 0.0876
650000 329 B 61 0.929 23.6 0.901 22.9 0.845 21.5 612 911 0.0267 0.0876
650000 329 A 37 0.928 23.6 0.900 22.9 0.845 21.5 612 911 0.0267 0.0876
600000 304 D 127 0.893 22.7 0.866 22.0 0.813 20.7 565 841 0.0289 0.0948
600000 304 C 91 0.893 22.7 0.866 22.0 0.840 21.3 0.813 20.7 565 841 0.0289 0.0948
600000 304 B 61 0.893 22.7 0.866 22.0 0.813 20.7 565 841 0.0289 0.0948
600000 304 A 37 0.891 22.6 0.864 21.9 0.813 20.7 565 841 0.0289 0.0948
556500 282 D 127 0.861 21.9 0.835 21.2 0.780 19.8 524 780 0.0312 0.1024
556500 282 C 91 0.860 21.8 0.834 21.2 0.780 19.8 524 780 0.0312 0.1024
556500 282 B 61 0.860 21.8 0.834 21.2 0.780 19.8 524 780 0.0312 0.1024
556500 282 A 37 0.858 21.8 0.832 21.1 0.780 19.8 524 780 0.0312 0.1024
550000 279 D 127 0.855 21.7 0.829 21.1 0.775 19.7 518 771 0.0315 0.1034
550000 279 C 91 0.855 21.7 0.829 21.1 0.775 19.7 518 771 0.0315 0.1034
550000 279 B 61 0.855 21.7 0.829 21.1 0.804 20.4 0.775 19.7 518 771 0.0315 0.1034
550000 279 A 37 0.853 21.7 0.827 21.0 0.775 19.7 518 771 0.0315 0.1034
500000 253 D 91 0.815 20.7 0.791 20.1 0.736 18.7 471 701 0.0347 0.1139
500000 253 C 61 0.815 20.7 0.791 20.1 0.766 19.5 0.736 18.7 471 701 0.0347 0.1139
500000 253 B, A 37 0.813 20.7 0.789 20.0 0.736 18.7 471 701 0.0347 0.1139
477000 242 D 91 0.796 20.2 0.772 19.6 0.722 18.3 449 668 0.0364 0.1194
477000 242 C 61 0.796 20.2 0.772 19.6 0.722 18.3 449 668 0.0364 0.1194
477000 242 B, A 37 0.795 20.2 0.771 19.6 0.722 18.3 449 668 0.0364 0.1194
450000 228 D 91 0.773 19.6 0.750 19.0 0.700 17.8 424 631 0.0385 0.1263
450000 228 C 61 0.773 19.6 0.750 19.0 0.727 18.5 0.700 17.8 424 631 0.0385 0.1263
450000 228 B, A 37 0.772 19.6 0.749 19.0 0.700 17.8 424 631 0.0385 0.1263
400000 203 D 91 0.729 18.5 0.707 18.0 0.659 16.7 376 559 0.0434 0.1424
400000 203 C 61 0.729 18.5 0.707 18.0 0.685 17.4 0.659 16.7 376 559 0.0434 0.1424
400000 203 B, A 37 0.728 18.5 0.706 17.9 0.659 16.7 376 559 0.0434 0.1424
397500 201 D 91 0.727 18.5 0.705 17.9 0.659 16.7 374 557 0.0436 0.1431
397500 201 C 61 0.726 18.4 0.704 17.9 0.659 16.7 374 557 0.0436 0.1431
397500 201 B 37 0.725 18.4 0.703 17.9 0.659 16.7 374 557 0.0436 0.1431
397500 201 A 19 0.724 18.4 0.702 17.8 0.659 16.7 374 557 0.0436 0.1431
350000 177 D 91 0.682 17.3 0.661 16.8 0.616 15.6 329 490 0.0495 0.1624
350000 177 C 61 0.681 17.3 0.661 16.8 0.641 16.3 0.616 15.6 329 490 0.0495 0.1624
350000 177 B 37 0.681 17.3 0.661 16.8 0.616 15.6 329 490 0.0495 0.1624
350000 177 A 19 0.679 17.2 0.659 16.7 0.616 15.6 329 490 0.0495 0.1624
336400 170 C 61 0.669 17.0 0.649 16.5 0.603 15.3 317 472 0.0516 0.1693

2
 B 801

TABLE 1 Continued
Nominal Conductor Diameter
NumberA Reverse Nominal d-c
Conductor Size Unilay Compact Nominal Mass
of Wires Conventional Concentric resistanceB at 20°C
Class Compressed
Compressed
lbs/1000
Cmil AWG mm2 in. mm in. mm in. mm. in mm kg/km V/1000 ft V/km
ft
336400 170 B 37 0.668 17.0 0.648 16.5 0.603 15.3 317 472 0.0516 0.1693
336400 170 A 19 0.666 16.9 0.646 16.4 0.603 15.3 317 472 0.0516 0.1693
300000 152 C 61 0.631 16.0 0.612 15.5 0.570 14.5 282 420 0.0578 0.1896
300000 152 B 37 0.630 16.0 0.611 15.5 0.594 15.1 0.570 14.5 282 420 0.0578 0.1896
300000 152 A 19 0.629 16.0 0.610 15.5 0.576 14.5 282 420 0.0578 0.1896
266800 135 C 61 0.595 15.1 0.577 14.7 0.537 13.6 251 373 0.0650 0.2133
266800 135 B 37 0.594 15.1 0.576 14.6 0.537 13.6 251 373 0.0650 0.2133
266800 135 A 19 0.593 15.0 0.575 14.6 0.537 13.6 251 373 0.0650 0.2133
250000 127 C 61 0.576 14.6 0.559 14.2 0.520 13.2 235 350 0.0694 0.2277
250000 127 B 37 0.575 14.6 0.558 14.2 0.542 13.8 0.520 13.2 235 350 0.0694 0.2277
250000 127 A 19 0.574 14.6 0.557 14.1 0.520 13.2 235 350 0.0694 0.2277
211600 0000 107 C 37 0.529 13.4 0.513 13.0 0.475 12.1 199 296 0.0820 0.2690
211600 0000 107 B 19 0.528 13.4 0.512 13.0 0.498 12.6 0.475 12.1 199 296 0.0820 0.2690
211600 0000 107 A 7 0.522 13.3 0.506 13.0 0.475 12.1 199 296 0.0820 0.2690
167800 000 85.0 C 37 0.471 12.0 0.457 11.6 0.423 10.7 158 235 0.1033 0.3389
167800 000 85.0 B 19 0.470 11.9 0.456 11.6 0.443 11.3 0.423 10.7 158 235 0.1033 0.3389
167800 000 85.0 A 7 0.464 11.8 0.450 11.4 0.423 10.7 158 235 0.1033 0.3389
133100 00 67.4 B 19 0.419 10.6 0.406 10.3 0.395 10.0 0.376 9.55 125 186 0.1303 0.4275
133100 00 67.4 A 7 0.414 10.5 0.402 10.2 0.376 9.55 125 186 0.1303 0.4275
105600 0 53.5 B 19 0.373 9.46 0.362 9.19 0.336 8.53 99.4 148 0.1642 0.5387
105600 0 53.5 A 7 0.368 9.36 0.357 9.07 0.352 8.94 0.336 8.53 99.4 148 0.1642 0.5387
83690 1 42.4 B 19 0.332 8.43 0.322 8.18 0.313 7.95 0.299 7.59 78.8 117 0.2072 0.6798
66360 2 33.6 B, A 7 0.292 7.42 0.283 7.19 0.268 6.81 62.5 93.0 0.2613 0.8573
52620 3 26.7 B, A 7 0.260 6.61 0.252 6.41 0.238 6.05 49.5 73.7 0.3296 1.0814
41740 4 21.2 B, A 7 0.232 5.88 0.225 5.72 0.213 5.41 39.3 58.5 0.4155 1.3633
26240 6 13.3 B, A 7 0.184 4.66 0.178 4.53 0.169 4.29 24.7 36.8 0.6609 2.1684
16510 8 8.37 B, A 7 0.146 3.70 0.142 3.60 0.134 3.40 15.5 23.1 1.0504 3.4464
A
For compact-stranded constructions, the number of wires may be reduced as follows:

19-Wire Constructions—18 Wires Minimum

37-Wire Constructions—35 Wires Minimum
61-Wire Constructions—58 Wires Minimum
91-Wire Constructions—87 Wires Minimum
127-Wire Constructions—122 Wires Minimum
B
Nominal d-c resistance is based on 61.0 % IACS conductivity (17.002 V/cmil/ft).
See Explanatory Note 3.

6.3 The direction of lay of the outer layer shall be left-hand
for all other classes, unless the direction is specified otherwise
by the purchaser.
6.4 The direction of lay shall be reversed in successive
layers in conventional and compressed constructions. In com-
pact constructions, the lay of the successive layers may be
either reversed or unidirectional.
6.4.1 For conductors to be used in covered or insulated
wires or cables, the direction of lay of the outer layer shall be
left-hand and may be reversed or unidirectional/unilay in
successive layers, unless otherwise agreed upon with the
purchaser.
6.5 The maximum length of lay for compact conductors
AWG 2 and smaller shall be 17.5 times the outside diameter of
that layer.
6.6 Other lay requirements may be furnished by special
agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
7. Construction
7.1 The construction of the conductors shall be as shown in
Table 1 as to number of wires and cross-sectional area of the
completed conductor, and the lay shall be in accordance with
Section 6.
7.2 Wire used in the fabrication of conductor shall be of
such dimensions as to produce a finished conductor having a
nominal cross-sectional area and diameter as prescribed in
Table 1.
7.3 Where compressed stranding is required in order to
insulate the conductor properly, one or more layers of any
stranded conductor consisting of seven wires or more may be
slightly compressed, thereby reducing the outside diameter of
the conductor by not more than 3 %, provided that the area of
cross-section after compressing is in accordance with Section
15.
NOTE 2—The user’s attention is called to the claim that certain
compressed strand constructions may be subject to patent rights, for
example U.S. Patents 3,383,704 and 3,444,684.
8. Mechanical and Electrical Tests of Conductors in 8000
Series Alloys in “0” Temper, H1X or H2X Wire and
Not Annealed After Stranding
8.1 Tests for the mechanical and electrical properties of wire
composing the conductor shall be made before, but not after
stranding, unless otherwise agreed upon between the manufac-
turer and the purchaser as provided in 8.2 (Explanatory Note
4).

3
 B 801
8.2 At the option of the purchaser, at the time of placing the stranded conductor shall not exceed the nominal d-c resistance
order, tension and elongation tests of wire before stranding (Table 1) + 2 %. (See Explanatory Note 6).
may be waived, and the completed conductor may be tested as 10.2.1 When the d-c resistance is measured at other than
a unit. The minimum breaking strength of conductors so tested 20°C, it is to be corrected by using the multiplying factor given
shall be not less than the minimum rated strength of 8000 in Table 2.
Series Aluminum Alloys “0” Temper or H1X and H2X 10.3 For conductors to be used in covered or insulated wires
conductors, whichever is applicable. If failure occurs in the or cables, direct current (D-C) resistance measurement may be
free length at least 1 in. (25 mm) beyond the end of either used instead of the method outlined in Section 15 to determine
gripping device, the minimum breaking strength shall be not compliance with this specification.
less than 95 % of the rated or minimum rated strength if failure
occurs inside, or within 1 in. of the end of either gripping 11. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
device. The maximum breaking strength of 8000 Series Alu- 11.1 The conductor shall be clean and free from imperfec-
minum Alloys “0” Temper or H1X and H2X conductors, tions not consistent with good commercial practice.
whichever is applicable, shall be not greater than their maxi-
mum rated strengths. The free length between grips of the test 12. Requirements of Wires
specimen shall be not less than 24 in. (600 mm) and care shall 12.1 Wires annealed before stranding shall meet the require-
be taken to ensure that the wires in the conductor are evenly ments of Specification B 800.
gripped during the test (Section 13 and Explanatory Note 5). 12.2 Wires shaped before stranding are not required to meet
9. Mechanical and Electrical Tests of Conductors a specific dimension or area tolerance. The area tolerances for
Fabricated from Wires Other Than 8000-H2X and shaped wire of all tempers shall be such that the finished
Annealed After Stranding to Meet 8000 “0” Temper or conductor conforms to Section 15. The tensile requirements
H2X Requirements shall be the same as those for round wires of equal nominal
area.
9.1 At the option of the manufacturer, mechanical and
electrical tests may be performed in accordance with either 13. Rated Strength of Conductor
paragraph 9.1.1 or 9.1.2.
9.1.1 The completed conductor shall be tested as a unit. The 13.1 Calculations for rated strengths of 8000 “0” Temper,
minimum breaking strength of bare conductors shall be not less H1X, and H2X conductors shall be made on the basis of the
than minimum rated strength if failure occurs in the free length strengths of the component wires using the nominal wire
at least 1 in. (25 mm) beyond the end of either gripping device, diameter for the noncompacted construction and the specified
or shall be not less than 95 % of the minimum rated strength if maximum and minimum tensile strengths for the appropriate
failure occurs inside, or within 1 in. of the end of either temper of the respective component wires given in Specifica-
gripping device. The maximum breaking strength of 8000 “0” tion B 800. The minimum rated strengths of the conductors
Temper, or H2X conductors shall be not greater than their shall be taken as the sum of the calculated minimum strengths
maximum rated strengths. The free length between grips of the of the component wires multiplied by the rating factor given in
test specimen shall be not less than 24 in. (600 mm), and care Table 3. The maximum rated strength of the conductors shall
shall be taken to ensure that the wires in the conductor are be taken as the sum of the calculated maximum strengths of the
evenly gripped during the test (Section 13 and Explanatory component wires.
Note 5).
9.1.1.1 The d-c resistance of the completed conductor in
V/1000 ft shall conform to Table 1. The maximum d-c TABLE 2 Temperature Correction Factors for Conductor
resistance for any conductor shall be taken as nominal + 2 %. Resistance
9.1.2 When wires removed from the stranded conductor are Multiplying Factor for
Temperature,° C
tested, intermediate temper (−H2X) wire shall have tensile Conversion to 20°C
strengths not less than 95 % of the minimum tensile strength 0 1.088
nor more than 105 % of the maximum tensile strength pre- 5 1.064
10 1.042
scribed in Specification B 800. 15 1.020
9.1.3 When electrical testing is conducted on wires removed 20 1.000
from the stranded conductor, the resistivity shall conform to 25 0.980
30 0.961
Specification B 800. 35 0.943
40 0.925
10. Mass and Electrical Resistance 45 0.908
50 0.892
10.1 The mass and electrical resistance of a unit length of 55 0.876
stranded conductor are a function of the length of lay. The 60 0.861
approximate mass and electrical resistance may be determined 65 0.846
70 0.832
using an increment of 2 %. When greater accuracy is desired, 75 0.818
the increment based on the specific lay of the conductor may be 80 0.805
calculated (Explanatory Note 6). 85 0.792
90 0.780
10.2 The maximum electrical resistance of a unit length of

4
 B 801
TABLE 3 Rating Factors

NOTE 1— For compact-stranded construction minimum see Footnotes

A through E.
Stranding
Number of Wires in Con- Rating Factor,%
Number of Layers
ductor
7 1 96
19A 2 93
37B 3 91
61C 4 90
91D 5 90
127E 6 90
A
18 wires minimum.
B
35 wires minimum.
C
58 wires minimum.
D
87 wires minimum.
E
122 wires minimum.

TABLE 4 Conductor Rated Strengths

Conductor Size 8000 Series Alloys − “0” Temper 8000 Series Alloys H12X, H22X
NumberA of
min max min max
Wires
Cmil AWG mm2 lbf N lbf N lbf N lbf N
1000000 507 127 6010 26700 12600 56000 10600 47100 17300 77000
1000000 507 91 6010 26700 12600 56000 10600 47100 17300 77000
1000000 507 61 6010 26700 12600 56000 10600 47100 17300 77000
900000 456 127 5400 24000 11300 50300 9540 42400 15500 68900
900000 456 91 5400 24000 11300 50300 9540 42400 15500 68900
900000 456 61 5400 24000 11300 50300 9540 42400 15500 68900
800000 405 127 4800 21400 10000 44500 8480 37700 13800 61400
800000 405 91 4800 21400 10000 44500 8480 37700 13800 61400
800000 405 61 4800 21400 10000 44500 8480 37700 13800 61400
750000 380 127 4500 20000 9420 41900 7950 35400 13000 57800
750000 380 91 4500 20000 9420 41900 7950 35400 13000 57800
750000 380 61 4500 20000 9420 41900 7950 35400 13000 57800
700000 355 127 4200 18700 8790 39100 7420 33000 12100 53800
700000 355 91 4200 18700 8790 39100 7420 33000 12100 53800
700000 355 61 4200 18700 8790 39100 7420 33000 12100 53800
650000 329 127 3900 17300 8160 36300 6890 30600 11200 49800
650000 329 91 3900 17300 8160 36300 6890 30600 11200 49800
650000 329 61 3900 17300 8160 36300 6890 30600 11200 49800
650000 329 37 3950 17600 8160 36300 6960 31000 11200 49800
600000 304 127 3600 16000 7540 33500 6360 28300 10400 46300
600000 304 91 3600 16000 7540 33500 6360 28300 10400 46300
600000 304 61 3600 16000 7540 33500 6360 28300 10400 46300
600000 304 37 3640 16200 7540 33500 6430 28600 10400 46300
556500 282 127 3340 14900 6990 31100 5900 26200 9610 42700
556500 282 91 3340 14900 6990 31100 5900 26200 9610 42700
556500 282 61 3340 14900 6990 31100 5900 26200 9610 42700
556500 282 37 3380 15000 6990 31100 5960 26500 9610 42700
550000 279 127 3300 14700 6910 30700 5830 25900 9500 42300
550000 279 91 3300 14700 6910 30700 5830 25900 9500 42300
550000 279 61 3300 14700 6910 30700 5830 25900 9500 42300
550000 279 37 3340 14900 6910 30700 5890 26200 9500 42300
500000 253 91 3000 13300 6280 27900 5300 23600 8640 38400
500000 253 61 3000 13300 6280 27900 5300 23600 8640 38400
500000 253 37 3040 13500 6280 27900 5360 23800 8640 38400
477000 242 91 2860 12700 5990 26600 5060 22500 8240 36700
477000 242 61 2860 12700 5990 26600 5060 22500 8240 36700
477000 242 37 2900 12900 5990 26600 5110 22700 8240 36700
450000 228 91 2700 12000 5650 25100 4770 21200 7770 34600
450000 228 61 2700 12000 5650 25100 4770 21200 7770 34600
450000 228 37 2730 12100 5650 25100 4820 21400 7770 34600
400000 203 91 2400 10700 5020 22300 4240 18900 6910 30700
400000 203 61 2400 10700 5020 22300 4240 18900 6910 30700
400000 203 37 2430 10800 5020 22300 4290 19100 6910 30700
397500 201 91 2390 10600 4990 22200 4210 18700 6860 30500
397500 201 61 2390 10600 4990 22200 4210 18700 6860 30500
397500 201 37 2410 10700 4990 22200 4260 18900 6860 30500
397500 201 19 2470 11000 4990 22200 4350 19300 6860 30500
350000 177 91 2100 9340 4400 19600 3710 16500 6040 26900
350000 177 61 2100 9340 4400 19600 3710 16500 6040 26900

5
 B 801

TABLE 4 Continued
Conductor Size 8000 Series Alloys − “0” Temper 8000 Series Alloys H12X, H22X
NumberA of
min max min max
Wires
Cmil AWG mm2 lbf N lbf N lbf N lbf N
350000 177 37 2130 9470 4400 19600 3750 16700 6040 26900
350000 177 19 2170 9650 4400 19600 3830 17000 6040 26900
336400 170 61 2020 8980 4230 18800 3560 15800 5810 25800
336400 170 37 2040 9070 4230 18800 3600 16000 5810 25800
336400 170 19 2090 9300 4230 18800 3680 16400 5810 25800
300000 152 61 1800 8010 3770 16800 3180 14100 5180 23000
300000 152 37 1820 8100 3770 16800 3210 14300 5180 23000
300000 152 19 1860 8270 3770 16800 3290 14600 5180 23000
266800 135 61 1600 7120 3350 14900 2830 12600 4610 20500
266800 135 37 1620 7210 3350 14900 2860 12700 4610 20500
266800 135 19 1660 7380 3350 14900 2920 13000 4610 20500
250000 127 61 1500 6670 3140 14000 2650 11800 4320 19200
250000 127 37 1520 6760 3140 14000 2680 11900 4320 19200
250000 127 19 1550 6890 3140 14000 2740 12200 4320 19200
211600 0000 107 37 1280 5690 2660 11800 2270 10100 3650 16200
211600 0000 107 19 1310 5830 2660 11800 2320 10300 3650 16200
211600 0000 107 7 1360 6050 2660 11800 2390 10600 3650 16200
167800 000 85.0 37 1020 4540 2110 9390 1800 8010 2900 12900
167800 000 85.0 19 1040 4630 2110 9390 1840 8180 2900 12900
167800 000 85.0 7 1070 4760 2110 9390 1900 8450 2900 12900
133100 00 67.4 19 826 3670 1670 7430 1460 6490 2300 10200
133100 00 67.4 7 853 3790 1670 7430 1500 6670 2300 10200
105600 0 53.5 19 655 2910 1330 5920 1160 5160 1820 8100
105600 0 53.5 7 676 3010 1330 5920 1190 5290 1820 8100
83690 1 42.4 19 519 2310 1050 4670 916 4070 1450 6450
66360 2 33.6 7 425 1890 833 3710 750 3340 1150 5120
52620 3 26.7 7 337 1500 661 2940 595 2650 909 4040
41740 4 21.2 7 267 1190 524 2330 472 2100 721 3210
26240 6 13.3 7 168 747 330 1470 297 1320 453 2010
16510 8 8.37 7 106 471 207 921 187 832 285 1270
A
For Compact-stranded Constructions, the number of wires may be reduced as follows:

19-Wire Constructions— 18 Wires Minimum

37-Wire Constructions— 35 Wires Minimum
61-Wire Constructions— 58 Wires Minimum
91-Wire Constructions— 87 Wires Minimum
127-Wire Constructions—122 Wires Minimum

13.2 Rated-strength and breaking-strength values shall be
rounded to three significant figures, in the final value only in
accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
13.3 Rated strengths of “0” Temper, H12X and H22X
conductors are given in Table 4.
14. Density
14.1 For the purpose of calculating mass, (2.1.1) cross
sections, etc., the density of 8000 series Aluminum Alloys shall
be taken as 0.098 lb/in.3(2.710 g/cm3) at 20°C.
15. Variation in Area
15.1 The cross-sectional area of the conductor shall be not
less than 98 % of the cross-sectional area as specified in
Column 1 of Table 1.
15.2 The manufacturer shall determine the cross-sectional
area by Test Method B 263. In applying this method, the
increment in mass resulting from stranding may be the appli-
cable value specified in 10.1 or it may be calculated from the
measured dimensions of the sample under test. In case of
question regarding area compliance, the actual weight incre-
ment due to stranding shall be calculated.
16. Variation in Diameter
16.1 The average diameter of compact conductors shall vary
by not more than + 1 or − 2 % from the diameter specified in
Table 1 except that compact construction sizes No. 1/0 (53.5
mm2) through No. 4/0 (107 mm2) composed of 18 or 19 wires
shall vary by not more than + 11⁄2 or − 21⁄2 % from the average
diameter specified in Table 1. The diameters for conventional
and compressed constructions are given for information pur-
poses only.
17. Sampling
17.1 The aluminum cross-sectional area (Section 15) and
the diameter (Section 16) shall be measured on a sample of the
completed conductor. At least one sample shall be tested on
each size of conductor on each order of quantities from 5000 to
100 000 ft (1500 to 30 000 m), and one additional sample
tested from each 100 000 ft thereafter.
18. Inspection
18.1 All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of
manufacture unless otherwise especially agreed upon betweeen
the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of purchase. The
manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the pur-
chaser all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material
is being furnished in accordance with this specification.

6
 B 801
19. Packaging and Package Marking
19.1 Package sizes for conductors shall be agreed upon
between the manufacturer and the purchaser in the placing of
individual orders.
19.2 There shall be only one length of conductor on a reel
unless otherwise agreed upon between the manufacturer and
purchaser at time of placing order.
19.3 The net weight, length (and number of lengths, if more
than one length is included in the package), size, kind of
conductor, purchase order number, and any other marks re-
quired by the purchase order shall be marked on a tag attached
to the end of the conductor inside of the package. The same
information, together with the manufacturer’s serial number (if
any) and all shipping marks required by the purchaser, shall
appear on the outside of each package.
EXPLANATORY NOTES
NOTE 1—In this specification compact, compressed and conventional
round concentric-lay-stranded conductor constructions are specifically
designated. Constructions not included in this specification should be
specifically agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser
when placing the order.
NOTE 2—For definitions of terms relating to conductors, reference
should be made to Terminology B 354.
NOTE 3—The d-c resistance on a given construction shall be calculated
using the following formula:
R 5 ~k/100 1 1!r/ A
where:
R 5 conductor resistance in V/1000 ft,
k 5 increment due to stranding of 2 % and Explanatory Note 6,
r 5 volume resistivity in ohms-cmil/ft, determined in accordance
with Test Method B 193, and
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
inquiry, contract, or order, for agencies of the U.S. Government.
S1. Referenced Documents
S1.1 The following documents form a part of this specifi-
cation to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise speci-
fied, the issues of these documents shall be those listed in the
issue of the Department of Defense Index of Specifications and
Standards (DODISS) and supplement thereto, cited in the
solicitation.
7
A 5 cross-sectional area of conductor in kcmil determined in accor-
dance with Section 15 of this specification.
NOTE 4—When wires are annealed before stranding, individual wires
should not be unlaid from compact round or compressed conductors for
testing purposes. Some physical properties of the individual compacted or
compressed wires may be altered by the deformation brought about by
compacting, compressing, unlaying, and straightening for test.
NOTE 5—To test stranded conductors for breaking strength successfully
as a unit requires adequate means of gripping the ends of the test specimen
without causing damage that may result in a failure below the actual
strength of the conductor. Various means are available, such as compres-
sion sleeves, split sleeves, and preformed grips, but ordinary jaws or
clamping devices usually are not suitable.
NOTE 6—The increment of mass or electrical resistance of a completed
concentric-lay-stranded conductor (k) in percent is as follows:
k 5 100 ~m 21!
where m is the stranding factor, and is also the ratio of the linear density
or electrical resistance of a unit length of stranded conductor to that of a
solid conductor of the same cross-sectional area or of a stranded conductor
with infinite length of lay, that is, all wires parallel to the conductor axis.
The stranding factor m for the completed stranded conductor is the
numerical average of the stranding factors for each of the individual wires
in the conductor, including the straight core wire, if any (for which the lay
factor is unity). The stranding factor ( Mind) for any given wire in a
concentric-lay-stranded conductor is:
M ind 5 =1 1 ~9.8696/n 2!
where:
length of lay
n 5 diameter of helical path of the wire
The derivation of the above as given in NBS Handbook 100 is based on
round wire constructions which are applicable to compacted and com-
pressed wire constructions.
S1.2 Military Specifications:6
MIL-C-12000 Cable, Cord, and Wire, Electric; Packaging of
S2. Inspection
S2.1 The government shall have the right to perform any of
the inspections and tests set forth in this specification when
such tests are deemed necessary to ensure that the material
conforms to the prescribed requirements.
S3. Packaging
S3.1 Packaging shall be in accordance with MIL-C-12000.
6
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
 B 801
The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428.

8
 Designation: B 540 – 97 (Reapproved 2002)

Standard Specification for

Palladium Electrical Contact Alloy1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 540; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope 4. Chemical Composition

1.1 This specification covers an alloy containing palladium, 4.1 Material produced under the specification shall meet the
silver, copper, gold, platinum, and zinc in the form of wire, rod, requirements of chemical composition shown in Table 1.
and strip for electrical contacts.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
as the standard. The SI units may be approximate.
1.3 The following safety hazard caveat pertains only to the Composition,
Element
weight %
test methods portion, Section 6 of this specification. This
Palladium 34.0–36.0
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, Silver 29.0–31.0
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user Copper 13.5–14.5
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health Gold 9.5–10.5
Platinum 9.5–10.5
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita- Zinc 0.8–1.2
tions prior to use. Total platinum group metal impurities (iridium, osmium, 0.1 max
1.4 It is the responsibility of the user to become familiar rhodium, ruthenium)
Total base metal impurities 0.2 max
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet For this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer.
5. Mechanical Properties
2. Referenced Documents
5.1 The contract or order may specify ultimate tensile
2.1 ASTM Standards: strength, elongation, mirohardness (Knoop or Vickers), or a
B 476 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought combination of these mechanical properties (as listed in Table
Precious Metal Electrical Contact Materials 2 2, Table 3, and Table 4) as temper criterion. If the contract or
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materi- order does not specify a temper criterion, then the criterion for
als 3 temper designation will be ultimate tensile strength and elon-
E 384 Test Method for Microindentation Hardness of Ma- gation.
terials 3
6. Test Methods
3. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 Test methods shall be in accordance with Specification
3.1 Raw materials shall be of such quality and purity that B 476.
the finished product will have the properties and characteristics 6.1.1 Knoop hardness tests shall be in accordance with Test
prescribed in this specification. Method E 384. Material 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) in thickness
3.2 The material shall be finished by such operations (cold (diameter) and larger shall be tested using a 100-g indenter
working, heat treating, annealing, turning, grinding, pickling) load. Material less than 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) in thickness
as are required to produce the prescribed properties. (diameter) shall be tested using a 50-g indenter load. A
minimum of five hardness indentations shall be made on each
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on specimen. All indentations shall be made so that the long axis
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee of the indenter is parallel to the rolling or drawing direction of
B2.05 on Precious Metals and Electrical Contact Materials. the material. The hardness value reported shall be the average
Current edition approved Dec. 10, 1997. Published October 1998. Originally
of the five indentations.
published as B 540 – 70. Last previous edition B 540 – 91.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04. 6.1.2 All tension test specimens shall be full cross-section
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01. size when practical (see Test Methods E 8).

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 540 – 97 (2002)
TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties of Wire A
(0.004 to 0.020 in. (0.1 to 0.5 mm) diameter)
Temper

Property Ductile
Solution- Stress- Heat Treated
Heat-Treated
Annealed Relieved Age-Hardened
Age-Hardened
Tensile strength, ksi 110–130 140–170 160–190 160–200
Tensile strength, MPa 760–900 970–1170 1100–1310 1100–1380
Elongation, % in 2 in. (51 mm) 20 min 10–20 8–18 1–10
Hardness, Knoop B 200–260 280–340 320–370 350–410
Hardness, Vickers, 100-g load (50-g 190–250 265–340 320–380 330–400
under 0.005-diameter)
A
The limits to all properties apply only to the sizes specified.
B
See 7.1.1.

TABLE 3 Mechanical Properties of Wire A

(Over 0.020 to 0.040 in. (0.5 to 1.0 mm) diameter)
Temper
Property
Solution-Annealed Stress-Relieved Ductile-Hardened Age-Hardened
Tensile strength, ksi 105–130 130–170 155–180 160–200
Tensile strength, MPa 720–860 900–1170 1070–1240 1100–1380
Elongation, % in 2 in. (51 mm) 15 min 8–25 8–25 1–10
Hardness, Knoop B 200–260 280–340 310–360 340–400
Hardness, Vickers: 190–250 265–340 320–380 330–400
100-g load
A
The limits to all properties apply only to the sizes specified.
B
See 7.1.1.

TABLE 4 Mechanical Properties of Strip A

(0.003 to 0.020 in. (0.075 to 0.5 mm) thick)
Temper
Property
Solution-Annealed Stress-Relieved Ductile-Hardened Age-Hardened
Tensile strength, ksi 110–135 135–160 150–185 160–200
Tensile strength, MPa 760–930 930–1100 1030–1280 1100–1380
Elongation, % in 2 in. (51 mm) 12 min 8–25 8–25 1–10
Hardness, Knoop B 200–260 280–340 300–360 340–400
Hardness, Vickers 100-g load (50-g load under 185–255 265–340 320–380 330–400
0.005 thick)
A
The limits to all properties apply only to the sizes specified.
B
See 7.1.1.

6.1.3 All tests shall be conducted in room temperature, 65 to 7.1.2 Tension or hardness tests, or both, for temper verifi-
85°F (18.3 to 29.4°C). cation,
6.2 Chemical analysis shall be performed by spectrochemi- 7.1.3 Dimensional inspection, and
cal or wet analysis methods. 7.1.4 Chemical analysis when indicated by the purchase
order.
7. Inspection and Testing
7.1 Material furnished under this specification shall be 8. Keywords
inspected and tested by the manufacturer as listed below: 8.1 contact; electrical contact material; palladium alloy;
7.1.1 Visual inspection at 103 magnification, precious metal

2
 B 540 – 97 (2002)
APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. REFERENCE PROPERTIES OF PALLADIUM ALLOY ELECTRICAL CONTACT MATERIAL

X1.1 Table X1.1 provides a list of typical property values contact design and application.

TABLE X1.1 Typical Physical Properties

Solution- Stress- Ductile- Age-
Annealed Relieved Hardened Hardened
Resistivity, µV· cm 34.9 33.2 31.6 31.6
Density, Mg/m 3 11.8 11.8 11.8 11.8
Solidus temperature, °C 1015 1015 1015 1015
Linear coefficient of thermal expansion/°C (23-100°C) 13.5 3 10 −6 13.5 3 10 −6 13.5 3 10 −6 13.5 3 10 −6
Thermal emf versus platinum (0-100°C), µ V/°C −10 −9 −8 −8
Softening voltage, mV 220 220 220 220
Melting voltage, mV 385 ... 400 400
Fatigue strength (rotating-bending)
at 10 8 cycles:
ksi 50 50 50 50
MPa 345 345 345 345
Modulus of elasticity in tension:
ksi 17 3 10 3 17 3 10 3 17 3 10 3 17 3 10 3
MPa 117 3 10 3 117 3 10 3 117 3 10 3 117 3 10 3
Proportional limit:
ksi 90 135 135 145
MPa 620 930 930 1000

which are useful for engineering calculations in electrical

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 542 – 04

Standard Terminology Relating to

Electrical Contacts and Their Use1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 542; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope
1.1 The terms included in this list are those that are peculiar
to electric contacts or general terms that have a specific
meaning when related to electric contacts. The definitions were
prepared assuming that the reader has a general knowledge in
a physical science but is unfamiliar with the terminology of the
literature of electric contacts.
2. Significance and Use
2.1 The terms in this standard are used in standards and
literature related to electric contacts, materials for electric
contacts and test methods for evaluating electric contacts.
These terms may be difficult to locate in a general purpose
dictionary or the definition in such a dictionary may not cover
the meaning applied in the field of electric contacts.
3. Terminology
a-spot—the areas of two mating contacts through which
current flows from one contact to the other.
activation—a process in which contamination of the surface of
contacts causes arcing at lower than usual voltage or arcing
persists at lower than usual current, or both. For example,
palladium contacts operated in an organic vapor produce
arcs at voltage and current less than the minimum arcing
voltage and current because of the presence of carbon on the
contact surfaces.
anode fall—the potential difference between the anode and the
electrical discharge plasma.
anodic (anode) material transfer—see material transfer.
arc discharge—a self-sustaining, high current density, high
temperature discharge, uniquely characterized by a cathode
fall nearly equal to the ionization potential of the gas or
vapor in which it exists.
arc, anode—the arc that occurs at less than a critical electrode
spacing (see arc, cathode), and results in anode material loss.
arc, cathode—the arc that occurs at greater than a critical
electrode spacing (see arc, anode), and results in cathode
material loss.
1
This terminology is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.91 on Terminology.
Current edition approved May 1, 2004. Published May 2004. Originally
approved in 1932. Last previous edition approved in 2000 as B 542 – 00.
arc, shortest—a limiting state of an arc in which the total arc
voltage approaches the sum of the cathode and anode falls.
blowout—the displacement and lengthening of an arc to
facilitate its extinction. The blowout effect can be achieved
by a magnetic field, air blast, etc.
brush—a sliding contact member consisting of one or more
sliders (see sliders).
cathode fall—the potential difference between the cathode and
the electric discharge plasma.
cathodic (cathode) material transfer—see material transfer.
constriction resistance—the increase in resistance arising
from a change in current density distribution. In electric
contacts it is that portion of contact resistance resulting from
the convergence of current into the a-spots.
contact, n—a) a generic term that applies to a device or part of
a device and that has the capability of completing or
interrupting the flow of an electrical signal in a circuit. b)
may also be used with modifiers such as: electrical contact,
arcing contact, noble metal contact, separable contact, etc.
contact, adj—contact area, the part of an electrical device that
is actually touching and where the electrical signal is
expected to pass. Contact member, one of the electrical path
parts that can make or break an electrical path.
contact, arcing—an electrical contact whose primary mode of
wearout occurs on the contacting surfaces as a result of an
arc formed between separating or closing contact pairs.
contact bounce—the unwanted operation of contacts immedi-
ately following intentional operation.
contact(s), butting—a type of contacts in which the direction
of the motion of the moving contact is perpendicular to the
contact faces. The contacts close and open with no appre-
ciable sliding or rolling action.
contact chatter—the unwanted operation of contacts resulting
from external forces operating on them. For example,
vibration may cause contacts to open and close or “chatter.”
contact-closing force—the transient force between contacts
during closure. At the first instant of closure this force is
zero. It then builds up to a maximum value dependent on the
forces and inertia of the contact system and finally stabilizes
at the static contact force.
contact, composite—a contact made of two or more distinct
materials or alloys bonded to each other. For example, a
contact with a facing of a precious metal bonded to a
base-metal backing.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 542 – 04
contact force—the force to close, maintain, or open contacts.
See also insertion force, withdrawal force, and normal
force.
contact noise—a varying voltage across a pair of electric
contacts due to conditions at their interface.
contact, non-arcing—mating electrical contact surfaces that
do not experience wearout due to arc erosion that is opposite
of arcing contacts.
contact, pitted—a contact that has numerous discrete hollows
in its surface.
contact pressure—the force per unit area of physical contact
between two contacts. This term is frequently but improperly
used when contact force is meant. The area of physical
contact is usually difficult to determine and quite different
from the apparent area of contact.
contact resistance—the resistance to current flow offered by
the contact interface, comprising the sum of the constriction
resistance plus the film resistance.
NOTE 1—In a practical measurement, correction must be made for bulk
resistance consisting of contact material, lead wires, etc.
contact, screw—a contact fabricated with an external thread
for attachment to a support member or for adjustment.
contact, sliding—an electric contact which is expected to do
its primary function during sliding.
contact, solid—a monolithic contact member.
contact, spring—a contact system in which one piece of
material is used for both the driving spring and electric
contact.
contact, static—an electric junction designed for infrequent
separation and connection.
contacts, wiping—contacts that have some sliding motion
during opening or closing.
contact wipe—relative tangential motion between contacting
surfaces that occurs during the normal course of contact
closure.
corona (discharge)—a self-sustaining discharge characterized
by highly asymmetrical electric fields with the result that
ionization predominantly occurs near the electrode with the
higher potential gradient.
dark (or Townsend) discharge—a discharge which may or
may not be self-sustaining. It is characterized by a uniform
field, current in the microampere range, and a nonluminous
inter-electrode space.
electromigration—(1) Current-induced atomic diffusion in a
solid metal due to electron momentum and the potential
gradient, (2) electrochemical process of growth of metallic
path across an insulating surface under imposed electric
field.
DISCUSSION—The solid state process may cause significant material
transport in regions of high current density such as a-spots in contacts.
In devices with electrical contacts, the electrochemical process may
form shorts between conductors under certain environmental condi-
tions.
film resistance—that portion of the contact resistance that is
due to the presence of contaminants on one or both of the
contact members.
fine transfer—see material transfer, bridge.
2
fretting, n—small amplitude oscillatory motion, usually tan-
gential, between two solid surfaces in contact.
DISCUSSION—Here the term fretting refers only to the nature of the
motion without reference to the wear, corrosion, or other damage that
may ensue. The term fretting is often used to denote fretting corrosion
and other forms of fretting wear. Usage in this sense is discouraged
because of the ambiguity that may arise.
fretting corrosion—a form of fretting wear in which corrosion
plays a significant role.
DISCUSSION—In electrical contact interfaces involving non-noble
metals, fretting corrosion can cause rapid and substantial increases in
contact resistance as a result of localized appearance of insulating
oxides and oter corrosion products at the interface.
fretting wear—wear arising as a result of fretting. See
fretting.
friction polymerization—the process by which organic com-
pounds (such as adsorbed air pollutants) on mating surfaces
that move relative to each other polymerize to yield com-
pounds of high molecular weight.
NOTE 2—When this occurs on electrical contacts and the materials
formed remain on the surface, contact resistance may increase substan-
tially. The solid materials that are produced by the polymerization process
are called “friction polymers” or “frictional polymers.”
fritting (A-fritting)—an electric breakdown between mating
metallic contacts, separated by an insulating film, which
occurs when the field strength exceeds approximately
1 000 000 V/cm. Metallic bridges are produced through the
film if the fritting voltage is above the contact melting
voltage.
fritting voltage—the voltage at which fritting occurs.
glow discharge—a self-sustaining discharge characterized by
essentially symmetrical electrodes, low current density, and
a high cathode fall of about 200 V.
high resistance—contact resistance exceeding an arbitrary,
specified limit.
inrush current—a transient current that exists at the instant of
contact closure and persists for a relatively short time.
insertion force—the force required to mate two connector
halves.
material transfer—a general term to describe the carry-over
of material from one electrical contact to another.
NOTE 3—When the discussion becomes specific, the term “gain” or
“loss” is used with respect to a particular contact (for d-c application,
anode or cathode; for a-c application, stationary contact or movable
contact). For example, anode gain, anode loss, stationary contact gain.
material transfer, negative—see material transfer.
material transfer, positive—see material transfer.
material transfer, bridge—material transfer that occurs with-
out the presence of a gaseous electric discharge. The filament
of molten contact material that connects the two separating
contacts does not rupture in the middle; thus there is a gain
of material on one contact and a loss of material from the
other.
material transfer, cathode—movement of contact metal from
the cathode by means of a cathode arc.
material transfer, needle—material transfer that results in a
buildup with a smaller diameter and a relatively great length.
 B 542 – 04
noise—See contact noise. 4. Terminology Defined In Individual Standards For
normal force—that component of the force between contact- Electric Contact Test Methods And Electric Contact
ing bodies perpendicular to their interface. Materials
opening force—the force available to open the contacts. The following terms are defined in the terminology sections
plasma—a partially or totally ionized gas or vapor. of indicated standards.
Aluminum B 812
porosity—in metallic coatings, the presence of any disontinu- Bulk Resistance B 539, B 812
ity, crack, or hole in the coating that exposes a different Conductor B 868
Connectability B 896
underlying metal. Connection Resistance B 539
positive column—that region of an electric discharge between Contact Noise B 615
Contact Performance B 868
the cathode and anode falls. Contact Resistance B 667
screw contact—see contact, screw. Contact Resistance Probe B 667
Corrosion Products B 735, B 799, B 920
self-sustaining discharge—a discharge in which all carriers Crimp B 913
necessary for the transport of current in the discharge are Crimp Barrel B 913
Crimped Connection B 913
produced by this discharge itself. Crimp Tab B 913
showering—a particular form of corona discharge character- Crimp Terminal B 913
Decorations B 741, B 798
ized by strongly ionized streamers or streams of luminous Dry Circuit B 539
plasma. It generally occurs at a field value just below that Edge Noise B 615
which is required for a complete breakdown. Edgecard Connector B 885
Event B 878
slider—that member of a sliding contact pair, normally the Fretting B 896
smaller, which may be moved through a range of locations Intermittence B 854
Lot B 476
on the opposing member. Measurement Area B 735, B 741, B 798, B 799
sliding electrical contacts—contacting members that perform Metallic Coatings B 735, B 741, B 798, B 799, B 920
Mixed Flowing Gas Test B 845
their function while undergoing relative tangential motion. Open-Circuit Voltage B 539
slip ring—a continuous metal ring by means of which electri- Porosity B 735, B 741, B 798, B 799, B 920
Pressure Connection System B 812
cal current can be conducted to or from brush contacts. One Printed Wiring Board (Pwb) B 885
electrical contact member is designed to rotate with respect Contacts
Printed Wiring Board (Pwb) B 885
to the other. Fingers
slip ring assembly—two or more slip rings with connecting Rated Current B 539
Reference Conductor B 812
leads or terminals that have been mounted to a common Residential Applications B 812
structure. Significant Surface B 735, B 741, B 798, B 799
Standard Test Current B 539
slip ring capsule—an assembly that includes a slip ring Static Contacts B 539
assembly, brushes, and bearings for conducting current on Switching Noise B 615
multiple circuits from a stationary body to one that may Underplate B 735, B 741, B 798, B 799, B 920
rotate.
5. Index Of Keywords Used In Individual Standards For
spark, discharge—a non-self-sustaining discharge character- Electric Contact Test Methods
ized by high luminosity and a ratio of lateral dimension to Accelerated Testing B 810, B 845
length that is substantially smaller than unity. Air Velocity B 827, B 845
Aluminum B 812
sulfide creep—in electrical contacts, spontaneous migration of Aluminum Connections B 812
a sulfide based corrosion product that occurs at elevated Arc Erosion B 576
humidity across a gold rich surface. Arcing Contacts B 576
Atmospheric Corrosion B 810, B 825, B 845
Atmospheric Corrosion Monitor B 826
DISCUSSION—This process often involves copper sulfide produced by Atmospheric Corrosion Testing B 826
corrosion on a copper alloy spring that, under severe conditions, can Atmospheric Test Evaluation B 825
completely cover a gold contact mounted on the spring. Bit Rate Error B 854
Cathodic Reduction B 825
tarnish—the chemical compound on the surface of a contact Chlorine B 827, B 845
Circuit B 615
resulting from the reaction of the contact material and the Classification B 868
inorganic constituents of the surrounding atmosphere. Cleaning Technique B 810
Clorox B 920
tweak—to make a mechanical adjustment of a spring arm of an Closed Arcing Contacts B 497
electrical contact assembly to adjust the force or position of Conductor B 868
the contact. Connectability B 896
Connection Resistance B 539
wiper—see slider. The term “wiper” is sometimes used inter- Connector B 845, B 868, B 539
changeably with the more preferred term “slider.” Contact Resistance B 539, B 667, B 885, B 896
Contact Resistance Probe B 667
withdrawal force—the force required to separate two mated Contacts B 539, B 576, B 615, B 810, B 812, B 868
connector halves. Contamination B 885

3
 B 542 – 04
Control Coupon Evaluation B 825 Sulfur B 827, B 845
Copper B 810 Sulfur Dioxide B 827, B 845
Corrosion B 827, B 845 Sulfur Dioxide Test B 799
Corrosion Film Analysis B 825 Sulfurous Acid/So2 Test B 799
Corrosion Monitor B 808 Tarnish B 827, B 845
Corrosive Gas Testing B 827, B 845 Temperature B 845
Corrosivity B 827 Temperature Testing B 827
Corrosivity Monitor B 826, B 827 Test Calibration B 810
Coulometry B 827 Testing B 845
Creep B 896 Thermal Cycling B 812
Edgecard Connector B 885 Thinfilm Monitor B 808
Electrical B 615 Twist-On Connector B 812
Electrical Conductor B 896 Voltage B 615
Electrical Connection Systems B 868 Voltage Drop B 497
Electrical Contacts B 576, B 615, B 810, B 845, B 868, B 920 Weight Gain B 810
Electrical Erosion B 576
Electrical Noise B 854 6. Index Of Keywords Used In Individual Standards For
Electrical Resistance B 539
Electrical Resistance Probe B 826
Electric Contact Materials
Electrography B 741, B 798 analysis B 712, B 772
Environmental B 827, B 845 arcing contacts B 617, B 662, B 663, B 780
Environmental Testing B 812, B 825, B 826 brushes B 613
Event Detection B 878 cadmium B 781
Fretting Sensitivity B 896 cadmium oxide B 712, B 781
Gel B 798 chemical composition B 772
Gel Electrography B 798 clad materials B 731
Gold Coatings B 735, B 741, B 798, B 799, B 920 coin silver alloy B 617
Gold Platings B 735, B 741, B 799, B 920 composite materials B 613
Humidity B 827, B 845 compositions B 617, B 628
Humidity Testing B 812 conductivity B 780
Hydrogen Sulfide B 827, B 845 contact alloy B 522, B 683, B 685
Hypochlorite B 920 contact B 742
Junction Resistance B 539 contact material B 731
Low Level Contact Resistance B 539 contacts B 277, B 476, B 477, B 540, B 541, B 563, B 596,
Mass Change B 810 B 631, B 662, B 663, B 693, B 702, B 712, B 772,
Metallic B 868 B 780, B 844
Metallic Coatings B 741 copper B 702
Mixed Environmental Testing B 812 copper-tungsten B 702
Mixed Flowing Gas B 845, B 827 electrical contact B 742
Mixed Flowing Gas Testing B 810, B 826 electrical contact alloy B 477, B 522, B 683, B 685
Mixed Stress Testing B 812 electrical contact materials B 277, B 476, B 540, B 596, B 684, B 693
Monitoring Environmental B 825 electrical contacts B 541, B 563, B 613, B 617, B 628, B 662,
Tests B 663, B 664, B 692, B 693, B 772, B 780
Nanosecond Events B 878 fine silver B 742
Nanosecond Intermittences B 878 gold B 562
Neutral Bar B 812 gold alloy B 477, B 541, B 596
Nitric Acid Vapor (Porosity) B 735 gold coin B 596
Test gold-silver-platinum B 522, B 541, B 563
Nitrogen Dioxide B 845 graphite B 664, B 692
Nitrogen Oxide B 827 hardness B 277
Noise B 615 impurities B 617, B 628, B 693
Palladium Coatings B 798, B 799, B 920 internal oxidation B 781, B 844
Palladium Platings B 798, B 799, B 920 iridium B 671
Paper B 741 iridium alloy B 684
Paper Electrography B 741 low contact resistance B 541, B 563, B 596
Piezoelectric Crystals B 808 low energy contact B 541, B 563, B 596
Plated Contacts B 920 medical material B 684
Plating B 798 microhardness B 277
Plating Porosity B 735, B 741, B 799, B 920 molybdenum B 662
Pollutant B 827, B 845 molybdenum silver B 662
Pore Corrosion B 827 non arcing contact B 541, B 563, B 596
Pore Corrosion Test B 735, B 799, B 920 palladium B 589, B 683, B 685
Pore Counting B 920 palladium alloy B 731, B 540, B 563
Porosity B 798 palladium copper B 685
Porosity Screen Testing B 920 platinum B 561
Porosity Testing B 735, B 741, B 798, B 799, B 920 platinum alloy B 684
Pressure Connections B 812 platinum iridium alloy B 684
Printed Wiring Board Fingers B 885 potassium B 712
Quartz Crystal Microbalance B 827 powder metallurgy B 631, B 662, B 663, B 702, B 781, B 844
Reliability B 845, B 854 precious metal B 540, B 617, B 628, B 731, B 780
Resistance B 615, B 854, B 868 refined gold B 562
Resistance Monitor B 827 refined iridium B 671
Resistance Monitor Probe B 826 refined palladium B 589
Sensors B 808 refined platinum B 561
Separable Connections B 539 refined rhodium B 616
Sliding B 615 refined ruthenium B 717
Stress Relaxation B 896 rhodium B 616
Stress Testing B 812 ruthenium B 717

4
 B 542 – 04
silver B 631, B 662, B 663, B 664, B 692, B 712, B 781, tin oxide B 844
B 844, B 742 tungsten B 631, B 702
silver alloy B 617, B 731, B 780 tungsten carbide B 663
silver copper alloy B 617, B 628 tungsten carbide silver B 663
silver tungsten carbide B 663 tungsten-copper B 702
silver-cadmium oxide B 781 tungsten-silver B 631
silver-copper alloy B 780 wire B 780
silver-nickel B 693 wrought B 742, B 781, B 844
silver-tin oxide B 844 wrought precious metal B 476
silver-tungsten B 631
silver-cadmium oxide B 712
sliding contacts B 613, B 664, B 692 7. Keywords
sodium B 712
sponge B 561, B 589, B 616, B 671, B 717
Definitions; electric contacts; terminology

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 541 – 01

Standard Specification for

Gold Electrical Contact Alloy1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 541; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements

1.1 This specification covers a gold-rich, age-hardenable

Element Composition, Weight %
alloy in rod, wire, and strip form applicable to electrical
Nominal Range
contacts.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded Gold 71.5 70.5–72.5
Platinum 8.5 8.0–9.0
as the standard. The SI units may be approximate. Silver 4.5 4.0–5.0
1.3 The following precautionary statement pertains to the Copper 14.5 13.5–15.5
Zinc 1.0 0.7–1.3
test method portion only, Section 7, of this specification. This Total base metal impurities ... 0.2 max
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, Total platinum group metal impurities ... 0.2 max
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita- TABLE 2 Conditions and Forms
tions prior to use.
Process Form
2. Referenced Documents Symbol
Wire Strip Rod
2.1 ASTM Standards: Annealed A X X X
B 476 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought Stress relieved S-R X X
Age hardened from solution HT-A X X X
Precious Metal Electrical Contact Materials 2 annealed condition
E 8 Test Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials 3 Age hardened from solution annealed HT-CW X X X
E 384 Test Method for Microhardness of Materials 3 and cold-worked condition

3. Materials and Manufacture

3.1 Raw materials shall be of such quality and purity that
the finished product will have the properties and characteristics
prescribed in this specification.
3.2 The material shall be finished by such operations (cold
working, annealing, turning, grinding, age hardening, etc.) as
are required to produce the prescribed properties.
4. Chemical Composition
4.1 Material produced under this specification shall meet the
requirements of Table 1 for chemical composition.
5. Condition
5.1 This specification covers the conditions and forms listed
in Table 2.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.05 on Precious Metals and Electrical Contact Materials.
Current edition approved June 10, 2001. Published August 2001. Originally
published as B 541 – 70. Last previous edition B 541 – 95.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
6. Mechanical Properties
6.1 Mechanical properties shall conform to Table 3 and
Table 4 as appropriate.
6.2 The contract or order may specify ultimate tensile
strength, elongation, microhardness (Knoop or Vickers), hard-
ness (Rockwell or Rockwell Superficial), or a combination of
these mechanical properties as temper criterion. If the contract
or order does not specify a temper criterion, then the criterion
for temper designation will be ultimate tensile strength and
elongation.
6.3 Mechanical properties of flattened wire, less than 0.012
in. (0.30 mm) thick shall conform to 6.1 (Table 5).
7. Test Methods
7.1 Test methods are in accordance with Specification
B 476.
7.2 All tension tests are in accordance with Methods E 8 and
tensile specimens are full cross-section size when practical.
7.3 Hardness is in accordance with Test Method E 384. Test
material 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) in thickness (diameter) and larger
using a 100-gf indenter load. Test material less than 0.005 in.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 541
TABLE 3 Mechanical Properties of Wire (0.004 to 0.020-in. (0.12 to 0.5-mm) diameter) A

Property Condition
A S-R HT-A HT-CW
Tensile strength, ksi 85–110 130–170 130–165 150–200
Tensile strength, MPa 590–760 900–1170 900–1140 1030–1380
Elongation, % in 5 in. or 125 mm 20 min 5–15 7–14 2–10
Hardness, Knoop, HK100 B 180–240 270–340 280–350 310–380
Hardness, Vickers HV100 B 180–250 270–340 285–360 290–370
A
See 6.2.
B
See 7.3.

TABLE 4 Mechanical Properties of Wire (0.021 to 0.080-in. (0.51 to 0.200-mm) diameter) A

Property Condition
A S-R HT-A HT-CW
Tensile strength, ksi 80–110 130–170 130–160 145–195
Tensile strength, MPa 550–760 900–1170 900–1100 1000–1340
Elongation, % in 2 in. or 50 mm 16 min 4–14 5–14 2–10
Hardness, Knoop HK100 B 180–240 270–340 270–340 290–370
Hardness, Vickers HV100 B 180–250 270–340 285–360 290–370
A
See 6.2.
B
See 7.3.

TABLE 5 Mechanical Properties of Strip (0.003 to 0.020-in. (0.12 to 0.5-mm) thick) A

Property Condition
A S-R HT-A HT-CW
Tensile strength, ksi 85–115 125–165 125–155 140–180
Tensile strength, MPa 590–790 860–1140 860–1070 970–1240
Elongation, % in 2 in. or 50 mm 12 min 3–16 3–12 2–10
Hardness, Knoop, HK100 B 200–250 270–340 270–340 290–370
Hardness, Vickers HV100 B 180–250 270–340 275–350 285–365
A
See 6.2.
B
See 7.3.

in thickness (diameter) using a 50-gf indenter load. Make a 9.1.1 Visual inspection at 103 magnification,
minimum of five hardness indentions on each specimen. Make 9.1.2 Tension or hardness tests, or both, temper verification,
all indentions so that the long axis of the Knoop indenter is 9.1.3 Dimensional inspection, and
parallel to the rolling or drawing direction of the material.
7.4 Perform chemical analysis by spectrochemical or wet 9.1.4 Chemical analysis when indicated by the purchase
analysis methods. order.
7.5 Conduct all tests at room temperature (65 to 85°F) (18
to 29°C). 10. Keywords

8. General Requirements 10.1 contacts; electrical contacts; gold alloy; gold-platinum-

silver; low contact resistance; low energy contact; non arcing
8.1 Specification B 476 shall apply to all materials produced
contact
to this specification.
9. Inspection and Testing
9.1 Material furnished under this specification shall be
inspected and tested by the manufacturer as follows:

2
 B 541
APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. REFERENCE PROPERTIES OF GOLD ELECTRICAL CONTACT ALLOY

X1.1 Table X1.1 lists typical property values that are useful
for engineering calculations.

TABLE X1.1 Typical Physical Properties

Property Units Condition

A S-R HT-A HT-CW
Resistivity V·cmil/ft 135 125 87 87
µV·cm 22.4 20.8 14.5 14.5
Conductivity percent IACS 7.7 8.3 12.2 12.2
Density g/cm 3 15.9 15.9 15.9 15.9
Troy oz/in. 3 8.37 8.37 8.37 8.37
Thermal expansion, °F −1 3 10 −6 7 7 7 7
70–212°F (21–100°C) °C −1 3 10 −6 12.6 12.6 12.6 12.6
Young’s modulus million psi 16 16 16 16
GPa 110 110 110 110
Shear modulus A million psi ... ... 5.5 5.5
GPa ... ... 38 38
Proportional limit ksi 70 120 115 130
MPa 480 830 790 900
Fatigue strength ksi 35 ... ... 30
Rotate/bend 10 8 cycles MPa 250 ... ... 210
Solidus temperature °C 925 925 925 925
Softening voltage mV 230 ... ... 150
Melting voltage mV 350 ... ... 360
Thermal emf versus Pt mV/°F + 1.7 + 2.2 + 2.2 + 2.2
mV/°C +3 +4 +4 +4
A
Also known as modulus of rigidity or torsional modulus, G.
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 543 – 96 (Reapproved 2003)

Standard Specification for

Welded Copper and Copper-Alloy Heat Exchanger Tube1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 543; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification covers welded tube of copper and 2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
various copper alloys up to 31⁄8 in., inclusive, in diameter, for of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
use in surface condensers, evaporators, heat exchangers, and extent referenced herein:
general engineering applications. Tubes for this application are 2.2 ASTM Standards: 3
normally made of the following coppers or copper alloys:2 B 153 Test Method for Expansion (Pin Test) of Copper and
Copper or Copper-Alloy Pipe and Tubing
Previously Used
Copper Alloy UNS Type of Metal B 154 Test Method for Mercurous Nitrate Test for Copper
Designation
No.2
C10800 ... oxygen-free, low phosphorus
and Copper Alloys
C12200 DHPA phosphorized, high residual phos pho- B 224 Classification of Coppers
rus E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
C19400 ... copper-iron alloy
C23000 ... red brass E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
C44300 ... arsenical admiralty Determine Conformance with Specifications
C44400 ... antimonial admiralty E 53 Test Methods Determination of Copper in Unalloyed
C44500 ... phosphorized admiralty
C68700 ... arsenical aluminum brass Copper by Gravimetry
C70400 ... 95-5 copper-nickel E 54 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Special
C70600 ... 90-10 copper-nickel Brasses and Bronzes4
C71000 ... 80-20 copper-nickel
C71500 ... 70-30 copper-nickel E 62 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper and
C71640 ... copper-nickel-iron-manganese Copper Alloys (Photometric Methods)
C72200 ... ... E 75 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper-Nickel
____________
A
and Copper-Nickel-Zinc Alloys
Designation listed in Classification B 224.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the E 112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the E 243 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Exami-
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- nation of Copper and Copper-Alloy Tubes
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- E 478 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. (Warning— Alloys
Mercury is a definite health hazard in use and disposal. (See E 255 Practice for Sampling Copper and Copper Alloys for
14.1.)) Determination of Chemical Composition
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)
NOTE 1—A complete metric companion to Specification B 543 has
been developed—B 543M; therefore, no metric equivalents are presented 3. Terminology
in this specification. 3.1 Description of Term Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 capable of—as used in this specification, the test need
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper
not be performed by the producer of the material. However,
and Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.04 on Pipe
and Tube.
3
Current edition approved Oct. 1, 2003. Published November 2003. Originally For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
approved in 1970. Last previous edition approved in 1996 as B 543 – 96e1. contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
2
New designation established in accordance with Practice E 527. In the new Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
UNS system, the designations for copper alloys are simply expansions of the present the ASTM website.
4
standard designations by a prefix “C” and a suffix “00.” Withdrawn.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 543 – 96 (2003)
should subsequent testing by the purchaser establish that the
material does not meet these requirements, the material shall be
subject to rejection.
4. Types of Welded Tube
4.1 Forge-Welded Tube manufactured as described in 6.2.1,
6.2.1.1, and 6.2.1.2.
4.1.1 As-Welded Tube—Forge-welded tube with internal
and external flash removed and no further refinement of grain
structure.
4.1.2 Welded and Annealed Tube—Forge-welded tube with
internal and external flash removed, that has been annealed to
produce a uniform grain size appropriate to the specified
annealed temper.
4.1.3 Welded and Cold-Reduced Tube—Forge-welded tube
with internal and external flash removed and subsequently cold
reduced to conform to the specified size and temper.
4.1.4 Welded and Cold-Drawn Tube—Forge-welded tube
with internal and external flash removed and subsequently cold
drawn over a plug or mandrel to the specified size and temper.
4.2 Fusion-Welded Tube manufactured as described in
6.2.2.
4.2.1 As-Welded Tube—Fusion-welded tube with no further
refinement of grain structure.
4.2.2 Welded and Annealed Tube—Fusion-welded tube that
has been annealed to produce a uniform grain size appropriate
to the specified annealed temper. The structure of the weld zone
shall be that which is typical of a fusion weld.
4.2.3 Welded and Cold-Reduced Tube—Fusion-welded tube
subsequently cold-reduced to conform to the specified size and
temper.
4.2.4 Welded and Cold-Drawn Tube—Fusion-welded tube
subsequently cold-drawn over a plug or mandrel to the
specified size and temper.
4.3 Fully Finished Tube—Welded tube with internal and
external flash removed, if present, and subsequently cold-
drawn over a plug or mandrel and annealed, and redrawn when
necessary to conform to the specified temper.
5. Ordering Information
5.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information:
5.1.1 Quantity of each size (number of pieces and number of
feet),
5.1.2 Material (Sections 1, 6, and 7),
5.1.3 Temper (Section 8),
5.1.3.1 If tension tests are required (Section 9),
5.1.4 Whether a pressure test is to be used instead of the
eddy-current test (see 15.1),
5.1.5 Dimensions, the diameter, wall thickness, whether
minimum or nominal wall, and length, (Section 16),
5.1.6 Type of welded tube (Section 4),
5.1.7 Whether cut ends of the tube are to be deburred,
chamfered, or otherwise treated (see 17.1),
5.1.8 If the product is to be subsequently welded (see Table
1 and Footnote C),
5.1.9 Specification number and year of issue,
5.1.10 Certification, if required (Section 24), and
5.1.11 Mill test report, if required (Section 26).
5.2 In addition, when material is purchased for agencies of
the U.S. Government, it shall conform to the Supplementary
Requirements as defined herein when specified in the contract
or purchase order.
6. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 The material shall be of such quality and purity that the
finished product shall have the properties and characteristics
prescribed in this specification.
6.2 Welded tube shall be made of clean strip in either
cold-rolled or annealed tempers. The strip shall be formed into
a tubular shape on a suitable forming mill.
6.2.1 For forge-welded tube, the edges of the strip shall be
heated to the required welding temperature, usually by high-
frequency electric current, and be pressed firmly together
causing a forge-type joint to be formed with internal and
external flash or bead.

TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements

Composition, %
Copper or
Copper Al- Other
Nickel incl Lead, Man-
loy UNS No. CopperA Iron Zinc Aluminum Phosphorus Tin Antimony Arsenic Ele-
Cobalt max ganese
ments
C10800 99.95B min ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.005–0.012 ... ... ... ...
C12200 99.9 min ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.015–0.040 ... ... ... ...
C19400 97.0–97.8 ... 0.03 2.1–2.6 0.05–0.20 ... ... 0.015–0.15 ... ... ... ...
C23000 84.0–86.0 ... 0.05 0.05 max remainder ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C44300 70.0–73.0 ... 0.07 0.06 max remainder ... ... ... 0.8–1.2 ... 0.02–0.06 ...
C44400 70.0–73.0 ... 0.07 0.06 max remainder ... ... ... 0.8–1.2 0.02–0.10 ... ...
C44500 70.0–73.0 ... 0.07 0.06 max remainder ... ... 0.02–0.10 0.8–1.2 ... ... ...
C68700 76.0–79.0 ... 0.07 0.06 max remainder ... 1.8–2.5 ... ... ... 0.02–0.06 ...
C70400 remainder 4.8–6.2 0.05 1.3–1.7 1.0 max 0.30–0.8 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C70600 remainder 9.0–11.0 0.05C 1.0–1.8 1.0 maxC 1.0 max ... C
... ... ... C

C71000 remainder 19.0–23.0 0.05C 0.50–1.0 1.0 maxC 1.0 max ... C
... ... ... C

C71500 remainder 29.0–33.0 0.05C 0.40–1.0 1.0 maxC 1.0 max ... C
... ... ... C

C71640 remainder 29.0–32.0 0.05C 1.7–2.3 1.0 maxC 1.5–2.5 ... C

... ... ... C

C72200D remainder 15.0–18.0 0.05C 0.5–1.0 1.0 maxC 1.0 max ... C
... ... ... C,D

A
Silver counting as copper.
B
Copper + silver + phosphorus.
C
When the product is for subsequent welding applications and so specified by the purchaser, zinc shall be 0.50 % max, lead 0.02 % max, phosphorus 0.02 % max,
sulfur 0.02 % max, and carbon 0.05 % max.
D
Chromium 0.30 to 0.70.

2
 B 543 – 96 (2003)
6.2.1.1 The external flash (that portion of the weld which
extends beyond the normal wall) shall always be removed.
6.2.1.2 The internal flash in forge-welded tube shall be
removed to the extent that it shall not exceed 0.006 in. in height
or 10 % of the nominal wall thickness, whichever is greater.
6.2.2 For fusion-welded tube, the edges of the strip shall be
brought together and welded, usually by a GTAW welding
process, without the addition of filler metal, causing a fusion-
type joint to be formed with no internal or external flash or
bead removal necessary.
6.2.3 Tube type, 4.3, fully finished tube, may be welded and
subsequently processed by any method that would produce a
tube suitable for subsequent cold-drawing and annealing.
6.2.4 There shall be no crevice in the weld seam visible to
the unaided eye.
NOTE 2—The term “unaided eye” as used herein permits the use of
corrective spectacles necessary to obtain normal vision.
7. Chemical Composition
7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements specified
in Table 1.
7.2 These specification limits do not preclude the presence
of other elements. Limits for unnamed elements may be
established by agreement between manufacturer or supplier
and purchaser.
7.2.1 For Copper Alloy UNS No. C19400, copper may be
taken as the difference between the sum of all the elements
analyzed and 100 %. When all the elements in Table 1 are
analyzed, their sum shall be 99.8 % minimum.
7.2.2 For copper alloys in which copper is specified as the
remainder, copper may be taken as the difference between the
sum of all the elements analyzed and 100 %.
7.2.2.1 Copper Alloy UNS Nos. C70400, C70600, C71000,
C71500, and C71640—When all the elements in Table 1 are
analyzed, their sum shall be 99.5 % minimum.
7.2.2.2 Copper Alloy UNS No. C72200—When all the
elements in Table 1 are analyzed, their sum shall be 99.8 %
minimum.
7.2.3 For copper alloys in which zinc is specified as the
remainder, either copper or zinc may be taken as the difference
between the sum of all the elements analyzed and 100 %.
7.2.3.1 Copper Alloy UNS No. C23000—When all the
elements in Table 1 are analyzed, their sum shall be 99.8 %
minimum.
7.2.3.2 Copper Alloy UNS Nos. C44300, C44400, and
C44500—When all the elements in Table 1 are analyzed, their
sum shall be 99.6 % minimum.
7.2.3.3 Copper Alloy UNS No. C68700—When all the
elements in Table 1 are analyzed, their sum shall be 99.5 %
minimum.
8. Temper
8.1 Tube tempers shall be designated as follows:
8.1.1 Annealed tempers,
8.1.1.1 Welded and annealed,
8.1.1.2 Fully finished—annealed,
8.1.2 Light cold worked tempers,
8.1.2.1 As-welded from annealed strip,
8.1.2.2 As-welded, light cold worked, and
3
8.1.2.3 Fully finished—light drawn.
8.2 Other tempers shall be produced to the mechanical
properties as agreed upon between the manufacturer or supplier
and the purchaser.
8.3 Tubes of Copper Alloy UNS Nos. C23000, C44300,
C44400, C44500, and C68700 shall be furnished in the
annealed temper or the stress relieved condition as specified in
the purchase order unless otherwise agreed upon between the
purchaser and the manufacturer or supplier.
8.4 Tubes of Copper Alloy UNS Nos. C12200, C19400,
C70400, C70600, C71000, C71500, C71640, and C72200 are
normally supplied in the temper specified in the purchase order
without stress relief treatment.
NOTE 3—Some tubes, when subjected to aggressive environments, may
be subject to stress-corrosion cracking failure because of the residual
tensile stresses developed in straightening. For such applications, it is
suggested that tubes of Copper Alloy UNS Nos. C23000, C44300,
C44400, C44500, and C68700 be subjected to a stress relieving thermal
treatment subsequent to straightening. If required, this must be specified
on the purchase order or contract. Tolerances for roundness and length,
and the condition of straightness, for tube so ordered, shall be to the
requirements agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
NOTE 4—The temper of 8.1.2.2 is to permit the production of a light
cold-worked as-welded tube by means other than the use of annealed strip.
Some of these, for example, are the use of annealed to temper strip, the use
of lightly cold-rolled strip, and the use of cold-rolled strip and wherein the
resulting tube is subsequently relief annealed.
9. Mechanical Properties
9.1 Tube specified to meet strength requirements shall have
tensile properties as prescribed in Table 2.
10. Microscopical Examination
10.1 Samples of welded and annealed tube and of fully
finished annealed tube shall be subjected to microscopical
examination at a magnification of 75 diameters.
10.1.1 Forge-welded and annealed tube shall have a com-
pletely recrystallized grain structure, and the weld zone shall
have a structure typical of hot-forged welds.
10.1.2 Fusion-welded and annealed tube shall have a com-
pletely recrystallized grain structure, and the weld zone shall
have a structure typical of a fusion weld.
10.1.3 Fully finished and annealed tube shall have a com-
pletely recrystallized structure typical of the metal when
cold-worked and annealed, including the weld zone.
10.2 Samples selected for test shall be examined micro-
scopically at a magnification of 75 diameters to establish that
the weld interface is metallurgically sound.
11. Expansion Test
11.1 Tubes supplied in the annealed temper (8.1.1) and the
light cold-worked temper (8.1.2) and tubes supplied in the
stress relieved condition shall pass the expansion test as
specified in 11.2.
11.2 Tube specimens selected for test shall withstand the
expansion shown in Table 3 when expanded in accordance with
Test Method B 153. The expanded tube shall show no cracking
or rupture visible to the unaided eye (see Note 2).
 B 543 – 96 (2003)
TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
TemperA Tensile Strength,
Yield Strength at 0.5 %
Copper or Copper Alloy UNS No. Extension Under Load, min,
min, ksiB
Designation Name ksiB
C10800, C12200 W061 annealed 30 9C
WC55 light cold-worked 32 15
C19400 W061 annealed 45 15
WC55 light cold-worked 45 22
C23000 W061 annealed 40 12
WC55 light cold-worked 42 20
C44300, C44400, C44500 W061 annealed 45 15
WC55 light cold-worked 50 35
C68700 W061 annealed 50 18
D D
WC55 light cold-worked
C70400 W061 annealed 38 12
WC55 light cold-worked 40 30
C70600 W061 annealed 40 15
WC55 light cold-worked 45 35
C71000 W061 annealed 45 16
WC55 light cold-worked 50 35
C71500 W061 annealed 52 18
WC55 light cold-worked 54 35
C71640 W061 annealed 63 25
WC55 light cold-worked 75 40
C72200 W061 annealed 45 16
WC55 light cold-worked 50 30
A
When tempers listed in 8.1.2 are specified in the stress-relieved condition, the same properties as listed above shall apply.
B
ksi = 1000 psi.
C
Light straightening operation is permitted.
D
Where no properties are shown, strength requirements shall be as agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer or supplier.

TABLE 3 Expansion Requirements follows: A micrometer caliper set at three times the wall
Expansion of Tube thickness shall pass over the tube freely throughout the
Copper or Copper Alloy Outside Diameter, flattened part except at the points where the change in element
Temper
UNS No. in Percent of Origi-
nal Outside Diameter of flattening takes place. The flattened elements shall not show
Annealed C10800 30
cracking or rupture visible to the unaided eye (Note 2). The
C12200 30 weld when visible or identifiable shall be placed in the position
C19400 20 of maximum bend on one half of the flattened elements. When
C23000 20
C44300, C44400, 20
tubes are specified in a temper other than annealed (8.1.1), this
C44500 test is required and may be made on annealed specimens.
C68700 20
C70400 30
C70600 30 13. Reverse Bend Test
C71000 30
C71500 30
13.1 A section 4 in. in length shall be split longitudinally
C71640 30 90° on each side of the weld. The sample shall then be opened
C72200 30 and bent around a mandrel with a diameter four times the wall
Light cold-worked C10800 20
thickness, with the mandrel parallel to the weld and on the
C12200 20 outside of the tube. The weld when visible or identifiable shall
C19400 20 be at the point of maximum bend. There shall be no evidence
C70400 20
C70600 20
of cracks, or lack of penetration in the weld, or of overlaps
C71000 20 resulting from flash removal visible to the unaided eye (Note
C71500 20 2). When tubes are specified in a temper other than annealed
C71640 20
C72200 20
(8.1.1), this test is required and may be made on annealed
specimens.
Annealed and light cold- C23000 20
worked, stress relieved C44300, C44400, 20
C44500 14. Mercurous Nitrate Test
C68700 20
14.1 Warning—Mercury is a definite health hazard and
therefore equipment for the detection and removal of mercury
vapor produced in volatilization is recommended. The use of
12. Flattening Test rubber gloves in testing is advisable.
12.1 Test specimens at least 4 ft in length shall be flattened 14.2 The test specimens, cut 6 in. in length, shall withstand,
on different elements throughout the length remaining after without cracking, an immersion in the standard mercurous
specimens for the expansion and metallographic tests have nitrate solution prescribed in Test Method B 154. The test
been taken. Each element shall be slowly flattened by one specimens shall include the finished tube end. The mercurous
stroke of a press. The term “flattened” shall be interpreted as nitrate test is required for Copper Alloy UNS Nos. C23000,

4
 B 543 – 96 (2003)
C44300, C44400, C44500, and C68700 in the stress-relieved TABLE 5 Diameter of Drilled Holes
condition for tempers listed in 8.1.2.1, 8.1.2.2, and 8.1.2.3. Tube Outside Diameter
Diameter of Drilled
Holes Drill No.
15. Nondestructive Testing in. in.
1⁄4 –3⁄4 , incl 0.025 72
15.1 Each tube shall be subjected to an eddy-current test in
Over 3⁄4 –1, incl 0.031 68
15.1.1. Fully finished tube (see 4.3) may be tested in the final Over 1–11⁄4 , incl 0.036 64
drawn, annealed, or heat-treatment temper or in the drawn Over 11⁄4 –11⁄2 , incl 0.042 58
temper prior to the final anneal or heat treatment, unless Over 11⁄2 –13⁄4 , incl 0.046 56
Over 13⁄4 –2, incl 0.052 55
otherwise agreed upon between the manufacturer or supplier
and the purchaser. Tube supplied welded and annealed (see 4.2)
may be tested in the welded condition before anneal or heat
treatment, unless otherwise agreed upon between the manufac-
meeting requirements of either test shall be considered to
turer or supplier and the purchaser. The purchaser may specify
conform if the tube dimensions are within the prescribed limits,
either of the tests in 15.1.2 or 15.1.3 as an alternative to the
unless otherwise agreed to by the manufacturer or supplier and
eddy-current test.
the purchaser.
15.1.1 Eddy Current Test—Each tube shall be passed
15.1.2 Hydrostatic Test—When specified, each tube se-
through an eddy-current testing unit adjusted to provide
lected in accordance with 15.1 shall withstand, without show-
information on the suitability of the tube for the intended
ing evidence of leakage, an internal hydrostatic pressure
application. Testing shall follow the procedures of Practice
sufficient to subject the material to a fiber stress of 7000 psi,
E 243, except as modified in 15.1.1.2.
determined by the following equation for thin hollow cylinders
15.1.1.1 The depth of the round-bottom transverse notches
under tension. The tube need not be tested at a hydrostatic
and the diameters of the drilled holes in the calibrating tube
pressure of over 1000 psig unless so specified.
used to adjust the sensitivity of the test unit are shown in Table
4 and Table 5 respectively. P 5 2St/~D 2 0.8t! (1)
15.1.1.2 The discontinuities used to calibrate the test system
may be placed in the strip from which the tube will be where:
manufactured. These calibration discontinuities will pass P = hydrostatic pressure, psig,
through the continuous operations of forming, welding, and t = thickness of tube wall, in.,
eddy-current testing. The test unit sensitivity required to detect D = outside diameter of the tube, in., and
the resultant discontinuities shall be equivalent to or greater S = allowable stress of the material, psi.
than that required to detect the notches or drilled holes of Table 15.1.3 Pneumatic Test—When specified, each tube shall be
4 and Table 5 respectively, or other calibration discontinuities subjected to an internal air pressure of 60 psig minimum for 5
that may be used by mutual agreement between the manufac- s without showing evidence of leakage. The test method used
turer or supplier and the purchaser. Calibration discontinuities shall permit easy visual detection of any leakage, such as by
may be on the outside tube surface, the internal tube surface, or having the tube under water or by the pressure-differential
through the tube wall and shall be spaced to provide signal method. Any evidence of leakage shall be cause for rejection.
resolution adequate for interpretation. Each calibration discon-
tinuity shall be detected by the eddy-current tester. 16. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
15.1.1.3 Tubes that do not actuate the signaling device of
16.1 Diameter—The outside diameter of the tubes shall not
the eddy-current tester shall be considered as conforming to the
vary from that specified by more than the amounts shown in
requirements of this test. Tubes causing irrelevant signals
Table 6 as measured by “go” and “no-go” ring gages. Where no
because of moisture, soil, and like effects may be reconditioned
values are shown in the table, dimensions shall be as agreed
and retested. Such tubes, when retested to the original test
upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer or supplier.
parameters, shall be considered to conform if they do not cause
16.2 Wall Thickness Tolerances:
output signals beyond the acceptable limits. Tubes causing
16.2.1 Tubes Ordered to Minimum Wall— No tube at its
irrelevant signals because of visible and identifiable handling
thinnest point shall be less than the specified wall thickness or
marks may be retested by the hydrostatic test prescribed in
greater than the specified wall thickness plus twice the toler-
15.1.2, or the pneumatic test prescribed in 15.1.3. Tubes
ance values shown in Table 7.
16.2.2 Tubes Ordered to Nominal Wall— The maximum
TABLE 4 Notch Depth plus and minus deviation from the nominal wall at any point
Tube Outside Diameter, in.
shall not exceed the values shown in Table 7.
Tube Wall
Over 1⁄4 to Over 3⁄4 to Over 11⁄4 to
16.3 Length—The length of the tubes shall not be less than
Thickness, in.
3⁄4 , incl 11⁄4 , incl 31⁄8 , incl that specified when measured at a temperature of 20°C, but
Over 0.017–0.032 0.005 0.006 0.007 may exceed the specified value by the amounts given in Table
Incl. 0.032–0.049 0.006 0.006 0.0075 8.
Incl. 0.049–0.083 0.007 0.0075 0.008 16.4 Squareness of Cut—The departure from squareness of
Incl. 0.083–0.109 0.0075 0.0085 0.0095
Incl. 0.109–0.120 0.009 0.009 0.011 the end of any tube shall not exceed the values shown in Table
9.

5
 B 543 – 96 (2003)
TABLE 6 Diameter Tolerances
Wall Thickness, in.
0.020A
0.022
Outside Diameter, in. 0.032 0.035 0.042 0.049 and Over
0.025
0.028
Diameter Tolerance, Plus and Minus, in.
Up to 0.500, incl 0.003 0.0025 0.0025 0.0025 0.0025
Over 0.500–0.740, incl 0.004 0.004 0.004 0.0035 0.003
Over 0.740–1.000, incl 0.006 0.006 0.005 0.0045 0.004
Over 1.000–1.250, incl ... 0.009 0.008 0.006 0.0045
Over 1.250–1.375, incl ... ... ... 0.008 0.005
Over 1.375–2.000, incl ... ... ... ... 0.006
Over 2.000–3.125, incl ... ... ... ... 0.0065
A
Thin wall thicknesses are supplied only in light cold-worked tubes.

TABLE 7 Wall Thickness Tolerances

Outside Diameter, in.
Over ⁄ to ⁄ ,
18 58 Over ⁄ to 1,
58 Over 1 to 2, Over 2 to 3.125,
Wall Thickness, in.
incl incl incl incl
Wall Thickness Tolerances, Plus and Minus, in.
0.020 incl, to 0.032 0.003 0.003 ... ...
0.032 incl, to 0.035 0.003 0.003 0.004 ...
0.035 incl, to 0.058 0.004 0.0045 0.0045 0.005
0.058 incl, to 0.083 0.0045 0.005 0.005 0.0055
0.083 incl, to 0.120 0.005 0.0065 0.0065 0.0065
0.120 incl, to 0.135 0.007 0.007 0.0075 0.008

TABLE 8 Length Tolerances outside surfaces. All other tubes shall be clean and smooth but
Specified length, ft
Tolerance, all Plus, may have a superficial film of drawing or other lubricant on the
in. surfaces.
Up to 15 ⁄
3 32

Over 15–20, incl ⁄

18

Over 20–30, incl ⁄

5 32 18. Sampling
Over 30–60, incl 3⁄8

Over 60–100, inclA 1⁄2
A
Condenser tubes in lengths over 100 ft are not in present demand. Tolerance
values for these lengths will be developed as experience dictates. Tolerance
values for lengths in wall thicknesses of 0.020, incl to 0.032 shall be agreed upon
between the manufacturer or supplier and the purchaser.
TABLE 9 Squareness of Cut
Tube Outside Diameter, in. Tolerance
Up to 5⁄8 , incl 0.010 in.
Over 5⁄8 0.016 in./in. of diameter
NOTE 5—For the purpose of determining conformance with the dimen-
sional requirements prescribed in this specification, any measured value
outside the specified limiting values for any dimension may be cause for
rejection.
17. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
17.1 Roundness, straightness, uniformity of the wall thick-
ness, and inner and outer surface of the tube shall be such as to
make it suitable for the intended application. Unless otherwise
specified on the purchase order, the cut ends of the tubes shall
be deburred by use of a rotating wire wheel or other suitable
tool.
17.2 Welded and annealed, fully finished annealed, or
stress-relieved tubes shall be clean and smooth but may have a
superficial, dull iridescent film on both the inside and the
18.1 Sampling—The lot size, portion size, and selection of
sample pieces shall be as follows:
18.1.1 Lot Size—600 tubes or 10 000 lb or a fraction of
either, whichever constitutes the greater weight.
18.1.2 Portion Size—Sample pieces from two individual
lengths of finished product.
18.2 Samples taken for the purpose of the tests prescribed in
the specification shall be selected in a manner that will
represent correctly the material furnished and avoid needless
destruction of finished material when samples representative of
the material are available from other sources.
18.3 Chemical Analysis—Samples for chemical analysis
shall be taken in accordance with Practice E 255. Drillings,
millings, and so forth, shall be taken in approximately equal
weight from each of the sample pieces selected in accordance
with 18.1.2 and combined into one composite sample. The
minimum weight of the composite sample that is to be divided
into three equal parts shall be 150 g.
18.3.1 Instead of sampling in accordance with Practice
E 255, the manufacturer shall have the option of determining
conformance to chemical composition as follows: Conform-
ance shall be determined by the manufacturer by analyzing
samples taken at the time the castings are poured or samples
taken from the semi-finished product. If the manufacturer
determines the chemical composition of the material during the
course of manufacture, he shall not be required to sample and

6
 B 543 – 96 (2003)
analyze the finished product. The number of samples taken for
determination of chemical composition shall be as follows:
18.3.1.1 When samples are taken at the time the castings are
poured, at least one sample shall be taken for each group of
castings poured simultaneously from the same source of
molten metal.
18.3.1.2 When samples are taken from the semi-finished
product, a sample shall be taken to represent each 10 000 lb or
fraction thereof, except that not more than one sample shall be
required per piece.
18.3.2 Due to the discontinuous nature of the processing of
castings into wrought products, it is not practical to identify
specific casting analysis with a specific quantity of finished
material.
18.3.3 In the event that heat identification or traceability is
required, the purchaser shall specify the details desired.
19. Number of Tests and Retests
19.1 Tension Tests—When tensile strength is specified, two
tubes shall be selected from each lot and subjected to the
tension test which shall, in case of disagreement, be made in
accordance with Test Methods E 8.
19.2 Other Tests—For tests specified in Sections 10-14
inclusive, specimens shall be taken from each of the pieces
selected in accordance with 18.1.
19.3 If any test specimen representing a lot fails to conform
to the requirements of Sections 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14, two
additional specimens, at the option of the manufacturer, may be
taken as before, and submitted for check analysis or subjected
to any tests in which the original specimen failed, but each of
these specimens shall conform to the requirements specified.
20. Test Methods
20.1 The properties and chemical compositions enumerated
in this specification shall, in case of disagreement, be deter-
mined in accordance with the following test methods:
Test ASTM Designation
Chemical analysis E 53, E 54, E 62, E 75, E 478
Grain size E 112
Expansion (pin test) B 153
Mercurous nitrate B 154
Tension E8
20.2 Tension test specimens shall be of the full section of
the tube and shall conform to the requirements of the Signifi-
cance and Use Section of Test Methods E 8, unless the
limitations of the testing machine preclude the use of such a
specimen. Test specimens conforming to type No. 1 of Fig. 13,
Tension Test Specimens for Large-Diameter Tubular Products,
of Test Methods E 8 may be used when a full section specimen
cannot be tested.
20.3 Whenever tension test results are obtained from both
full size and machined test specimens and they differ, the
results obtained from full-size test specimens shall be used to
determine conformance to the specification requirements.
20.4 Tension test results on material covered by this speci-
fication are not seriously affected by variations in speed of
testing. A considerable range of testing speed is permissible;
however, the range of stressing to the yield strength should not
exceed 100 ksi/min. Above the yield strength the movement
per minute of the testing machine head under load should not
7
exceed 0.5 in./in. of gage length (or distance between grips for
full-section specimens).
20.5 The surface of the test specimen for microscopical
examination of grain size shall approximate a radial longitu-
dinal section of the tube.
20.6 The surface of the test specimen for microscopical
examination of the weld interface shall approximate a trans-
verse section of the tube.
21. Significance of Numerical Limits
21.1 For purposes of determining compliance with the
specified limits for requirements of the properties listed in the
following table, an observed value or a calculated value shall
be rounded as indicated in accordance with the rounding
method of Practice E 29.
Rounded Unit for Observed or
Property Calculated Value
Chemical composition nearest unit in the last righthand place
of figures
Tensile strength and yield strength nearest ksi (up to 10 ksi, incl, over 10
to 100 ksi, incl)
Elongation nearest 1 %
Grain size nearest multiple of 0.005 mm
22. Inspection
22.1 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all reason-
able facilities to satisfy him that the tubes being furnished are
in accordance with this specification. All tests (except check
analysis) and inspection shall be made at the place of manu-
facture, prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall
be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operation of the works.
23. Rejection and Rehearing
23.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
this specification when inspected or tested by the purchaser or
his agent may be rejected. Rejection should be reported to the
manufacturer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the manufacturer or
supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
24. Certification
24.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
manufacturer’s certificate of compliance shall be furnished to
the purchaser stating that each lot has been sampled, tested, and
inspected in accordance with this specification and the require-
ments have been met. When material is specified to meet the
requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, the
certification requirements are mandatory.
25. Packaging and Package Marking
25.1 The material shall be separated by size, composition,
and temper, and prepared for shipment in such a manner as to
ensure acceptance by common carrier for transportation and to
afford protection from the normal hazards of transportation.
25.2 Each shipping unit shall be legibly marked with the
purchase order number, metal or alloy designation, temper,
size, shape, total length or piece count or both, and name of
supplier. The specification number shall be shown, when
specified.
 B 543 – 96 (2003)
26. Test Report
26.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, the
manufacturer or supplier shall furnish to the purchaser a
manufacturer’s test report showing the results of the required
tests.
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
inquiry, contract, or order, for agencies of the U. S. Government.
S1. Referenced Documents
S1.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
S1.1.1 Federal Standards:
Fed. Std. No. 102 Preservation, Packaging and Packing
Levels5
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)5
Fed. Std. No. 185 Identification Marking of Copper and
Copper-Base Alloy Mill Products5
S1.1.2 Military Standard:
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage5
S1.1.3 Military Specification:
MIL-C-3993 Packaging of Copper and Copper-Base Alloy
Mill Products5
S2. Quality Assurance
S2.1 Responsibility for Inspection:
S2.1.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or pur-
chase order, the manufacturer is responsible for the perfor-
mance of all inspection and test requirements specified. Except
as otherwise specified in the contract or purchase order, the
manufacturer may use his own or any other suitable facilities
for the performance of the inspection and test requirements
5
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. DENSITY OF COPPER AND COPPER ALLOYS
X1.1 The densities of the alloys covered by this specifica-
tion are given in Table X1.1.
8
27. Keywords
27.1 condenser; copper; copper alloy; copper nickel; evapo-
rator; heat exchanger; tube; welded
unless disapproved by the purchaser at the time the order is
placed. The purchaser shall have the right to perform any of the
inspections or tests set forth when such inspections and tests
are deemed necessary to assure that the material conforms to
prescribed requirements.
S3. Identification Marking
S3.1 All material shall be properly marked for identification
in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 185 except that the ASTM
specification number and the alloy number shall be used.
S4. Preparation for Delivery
S4.1 Preservation, Packaging, Packing:
S4.1.1 Military Agencies—The material shall be separated
by size, composition, grade or class and shall be preserved and
packaged, Level A or C, packed, Level A, B, or C as specified
in the contract or purchase order, in accordance with the
requirements of MIL-C-3993.
S4.1.2 Civil Agencies—The requirements of Fed. Std. No.
102 shall be referenced for definitions of the various levels of
packaging protection.
S4.2 Marking:
S4.2.1 Military Agencies—In addition to any special mark-
ing required by the contract or purchase order, marking for
shipment shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-129.
S4.2.2 Civil Agencies—In addition to any special marking
required by the contract or purchase order, marking for
shipment shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123.
 B 543 – 96 (2003)
TABLE X1.1 Densities
Copper or Copper Alloy Density
UNS No. lb/in.3
C10800 0.323
C12200 0.323
C19400 0.322
C23000 0.316
C44300, C44400, C44500 0.308
C68700
C70400, C70600, C71000, 0.301
C71500, C71640, C72200 0.323

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

9
 Designation: B 546 – 04
Standard Specification for
Electric Fusion-Welded Ni-Cr-Co-Mo Alloy (UNS N06617),
Ni-Fe-Cr-Si Alloys (UNS N08330 and UNS N08332), Ni-Cr-
Fe-Al Alloy (UNS N06603), Ni-Cr-Fe Alloy (UNS N06025), and
Ni-Cr-Fe-Si Alloy (UNS N06045) Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 546; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers electric fusion-welded nickel-
chromium-cobalt-molybdenum alloy UNS N06617, nickel-
iron-chromium-silicon alloys UNS N08330 and UNS N08332,
Ni-Cr-Fe-Al Alloy (UNS N06603), Ni-Cr-Fe Alloy UNS
N06025, and Ni-Cr-Fe-Si Alloy UNS N06045 pipe intended
for heat resisting applications and general corrosive service.
1.2 This specification covers pipe in sizes 3 in. (76.2 mm)
nominal diameter and larger and possessing a minimum wall
thickness of 0.083 in. (2.11 mm).
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufactureer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2
B 168 Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Iron Alloys
(UNS N06600, N06601, N06603, N06690, N06693,
N06025, and N06045 ) and Nickel-Chromium-Cobalt-
Molybdenum Alloy (UNS N06617) Plate, Sheet, and Strip
B 536 Specification for Nickel-Iron-Chromium-Silicon Al-
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Feb. 1, 2004. Published February 2004. Originally
approved in 1971. Last previous edition approved in 1998 as B 546 – 98.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
loys (UNS N08330 and N08332) Plate, Sheet, and Strip
B 775 Specification for General Requirements for Nickel
and Nickel Alloy Welded Pipe
B 899 Terminology Relating to Non-ferrous Metals and
Alloys
E 10 Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materi-
als
E 140 Hardness Conversion Tables for Metals (Relationship
Between Brinell Hardness, Vickers Hardness, Rockwell
Hardness, Rockwell Superficial Hardness, and Knoop
Hardness)
E 1473 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel,
Cobalt, and High-Temperature Alloys
2.2 ASME Standards:
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Paragraph
UW-513
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX3
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 Definitions for terms defined in Terminology B 899
shall apply unless otherwise defined by the requirements of this
document.
4. General Requirement
4.1 Material furnished in accordance with this specification
shall conform to the applicable requirements of the current
edition of Specification B 775 unless otherwise provided
herein.
5. Classification
5.1 Two classes of pipe are covered as follows:
5.1.1 Class 1—All welded joints to be 100 % inspected by
radiography.
3
Available from American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), ASME
International Headquarters, Three Park Ave., New York, NY 10016-5990.
 B 546 – 04
5.1.2 Class 2—No radiographic examination is required.
6. Ordering Information
6.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
requirements that are necessary for the safe and satisfactory
performance of material ordered under this specification.
Examples of such requirements include, but are not limited to,
the following:
6.1.1 Alloy (Table 1),
6.1.2 ASTM designation and year of issue,
6.1.3 Class (See 5.1),
6.1.4 Dimensions (standard pipe size and schedule),
6.1.5 Length (specific or random),
6.1.6 Quantity (feet or number of pieces),
6.1.7 Certification—State if certification is required,
6.1.8 Whether type of filler metal and deposited composi-
tion is required (see 8.3),
6.1.9 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
samples for product (check) analysis should be furnished, and
6.1.10 Purchaser Inspection—If purchaser wishes to wit-
ness tests or inspection of material at place of manufacture, the
purchase order must so state indicating which tests or inspec-
tions are to be witnessed.
7. Materials and Manufacture
7.1 Materials—The UNS N08330 and UNS N08332 alloy
plate material shall conform to the requirements of Specifica-
tion B 536. The UNS N06617, UNS N06603, UNS N06025,
and UNS N06045 alloy plate material shall conform to the
requirements of Specification B 168.
7.2 Welding:
7.2.1 The joints shall be double-welded, full-penetration
welds made by qualified operators in accordance with proce-
dures in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section
IX.
7.2.2 The weld shall be made either manually or automati-
cally by an electric process involving the deposition of filler
metal.
7.2.3 The joint shall be reinforced at the center of the weld
on each side of the formed plate by a weld bead at least 1⁄16 in.
(1.6 mm) but not more than 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm). This reinforce-
ment (weld bead) may be removed at the manufacturer’s option
or by agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
The contour of the reinforcement (weld bead) shall be smooth,
with no valley or groove along the edge or in the center of the
weld, and the deposited metal shall be fused smoothly and
uniformly into the formed-plate surface. The finish of the
welded joint shall be reasonably smooth and free of irregulari-
ties, grooves, or depressions.
7.2.4 Weld defects shall be repaired by removal to sound
metal and rewelding. Subsequent heat treatment and inspection
shall be as required on the original welds.
7.3 Heat Treatment—All pipe shall be furnished in the
annealed condition.
7.4 Surface Finish—The pipe shall be free from scale.
When bright annealing is used, descaling is not necessary.
8. Chemical Composition
8.1 The material shall conform to the composition limits
specified in Table 1. One test is required for each lot as defined
in Specification B 775.
8.2 If a product analysis is performed, it shall meet the
chemistry limits prescribed in Table 1, subject to the analysis
tolerances specified in Table 1 of Specification B 775.
8.3 The chromium and nickel content of the deposited weld
metal shall conform to the minimum chromium and nickel
contents required for the base metal. Note that the composition
of the deposited weld metal may not be the same as the base
metal. The user should establish suitability for his particular
application. When specified in the purchase order (see section
6.1.8), the manufacturer shall report the type of filler metal
used along with a chemical analysis of the deposited weld
metal.
9. Mechanical and Other Requirements
9.1 Tensile Properties:

TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements

Composition Limits, %
Element
N08330 N08332 N06603 N06617 N06025 N06045
Carbon 0.08 max 0.05–0.10 0.20-0.40 0.05–0.15 0.15–0.25 0.05–0.12
Manganese 2.00 max 2.00 max 0.15 max 1.0 max 0.15 max 1.0 max
Phosphorus 0.03 max 0.03 max 0.20 max ... 0.02 max 0.02 max
Sulfur 0.03 max 0.03 max 0.10 max 0.015 max 0.010 max 0.010 max
Silicon 0.75 to 1.50 0.75 to 1.50 0.50 max 1.0 max 0.5 max 2.5–3.0
Chromium 17.0 to 20.0 17.0 to 20.0 0.24-0.26 20.0–24.0 24.0–26.0 26.0–29.0
Nickel 34.0 to 37.0 34.0 to 37.0 Bal remainder Bal 45.0 min
Copper 1.00 max 1.00 max 0.50 max 0.5 max 0.1 max 0.3 max
Lead 0.005 max 0.005 max ... ... ... ...
Tin 0.025 max 0.025 max ... ... ... ...
Iron remainderA remainder 8.0–11.0 3.0 max 8.0–11.0 21.0–25.0
Aluminum ... ... 2.4-3.0 0.8–1.5 1.8–2.4 ...
Cobalt ... ... ... 10.0–15.0 ... ...
Molybdenum ... ... ... 8.0–10.0 ... ...
Zirconium ... ... 0.01–0.10 ... 0.01–0.10 ...
Yttrium ... ... 0.01–0.15 ... 0.05–0.12 ...
Cerium ... ... ... ... ... 0.3–0.09
Titanium ... ... 0.010-0.025 ... ... ...
A
Element shall be determined arithmetically by difference.

2
 B 546 – 04
9.1.1 Transverse tension tests taken across the weld joints at the option of the producer. If the pipe has already been
shall meet the requirements shown in Table 2. annealed, it shall be annealed again except in the case of small
9.2 Transverse Guided-Bend Weld Tests: voids, that in the estimation of the purchaser’s inspector, do not
9.2.1 Two bend test specimens shall be taken transversely require reannealing. Each length of repaired pipe shall be
from the pipe. One shall be subject to a face guided-bend test subjected to the hydrostatic test.
and the second to a root guided-bend test.
9.2.2 The bend test shall be acceptable if no cracks or other 12. Number of Tests Required
defects exceeding 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) in any direction be present in 12.1 Transverse Tension Test—One test shall be made to
the weld metal or between the weld and the pipe metal after represent each lot of finished pipe.
bending. Cracks which originate along the edges of the 12.2 Transverse Guided-Bend Weld Test—Two tests shall be
specimen during testing and that are less than 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) made to represent each lot of finished pipe.
measured in any direction, shall not be considered. 12.3 Grain Size, Hardness—One test per lot.
9.3 Pressure (Leak) Test—Any pipe that shows leaks during 12.4 Pressure (Leak) Test—Each length of pipe shall be
hydrostatic testing shall be rejected. subjected to the hydrostatic test.
9.4 Grain Size—Annealed alloy UNS N08332 shall con- 12.5 Chemical Analysis—One test per lot.
form to an average grain size of ASTM No. 5 or coarser.
9.5 Annealing Temperature—Alloy UNS N08330 shall be 13. Specimen Preparation
annealed at 1900°F (1040°C) minimum. Alloy UNS N08332
shall be annealed at 2100°F (1150°C) minimum. Alloy UNS 13.1 Transverse-tension and bend-test specimens shall be
N06617 shall be annealed at 2050°F (1121°C) minimum. Alloy taken from the end of the finished pipe; the transverse-tension
UNS N06025 shall be annealed at 2100°F (1150°C) minimum. and bend-test specimens shall be flattened cold before final
Alloy UNS N06603 and UNS N06045 shall be annealed at machining to size.
2120°F (1160°C) minimum. 13.2 As an alternative to the requirements of 13.1, the test
specimens may be taken from a test plate of the same material
10. Permissible Variations in Dimensions as the pipe, which is attached to the end of the cylinder and
10.1 Permissible Variations—The dimensions at any point welded as a prolongation of the pipe longitudinal seam.
in a length of pipe shall not exceed the following: 13.3 Tension specimens shall be the full thickness of the
10.1.1 Straightness, Using a 10-ft. (3.05-m) straightedge material and shall be machined to the form and dimensions
placed so that both ends are in contact with the pipe; 1⁄8 in. (3.2 shown for large diameter products in Specification B 775.
mm). 13.4 The test specimens shall not be cut from the pipe or test
10.1.2 Thickness—The minimum wall thickness at any plate until after final anneal.
point in the pipe shall not be more than 0.01 in. (0.25 mm)
under the nominal thickness. 14. Test Methods
10.2 Lengths: 14.1 Chemical Composition—In case of disagreement, the
10.2.1 Circumferentially welded joints of the same quality chemical composition shall be determined in accordance with
as the longitudinal joints shall be permitted by agreement Test Methods E 1473.
between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 14.2 Brinell Hardness—Test Method E 10.
14.3 Pressure (Leak) Test—Each length of pipe shall be
11. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance tested based on allowable fiber stress, for material as follows:
11.1 Finish—Pipe shall be furnished with oxide removed. UNS N06617—23 300 psi (or 161 MPa)
When final test treatment is performed in a protective atmo- UNS N08330—17 500 psi (or 121 MPa)
UNS N08332—16 600 psi (or 114 MPa)
sphere, descaling is not necessary. UNS N06025—24 500 psi (or 169 MPa)
11.2 Weld Repair of Plate Defects Occurring During Pipe UNS N06045—22 500 psi (or 155 MPa)
Fabrication—Repair of injurious defects, which occur during UNS N06603—24 000 psi (or 165 MPa)
the fabrication of the pipe from plate, shall be permitted only
subject to the approval of the purchaser. Defects shall be 14.3.1 Visual examination is to be made when the material
thoroughly checked out before welding. Inspection of weld is under pressure for hydrostatic testing. The full length of
defects shall be by radiographic or liquid-penetrant technique, material must be examined for leaks.

TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties

Yield Strength, Elongation in 2 in.
Tensile Strength,
Alloy Condition 0.2 %, offset, or 50 mm, HardnessA
min, psi (MPa)
min, psi (MPa) or 4D, min, %
UNS N08330 Annealed 70 000 (483) 30 000 (207) 30 70 to 90 HRB
UNS N08332 Annealed 67 000 (462) 27 000 (186) 30 65 to 88 HRB
UNS N06603 Annealed 94 000 (650) 43 000 (300) 25 ...
UNS N06617 Annealed 95 000 (655) 35 000 (240) 30 ...
UNS N06025 Annealed 98 000 (680) 39 000 (270) 30 ...
UNS N06045 Annealed 90 000 (620) 35 000 (240) 30 ...
A
Hardness values are informative only and not to be construed as the basis for acceptance.

3
 B 546 – 04
14.4 Hardness Conversion—Hardness Conversion Tables 15. Packaging and Package Marking
E 140.
15.1 Pipes which have been weld repaired in accordance
14.5 Radiographic Examination:
with 7.2.4 shall be marked WR.
14.5.1 For Class 1 welded-joint quality, all welded joints
shall be 100 % inspected by radiography.
16. Keywords
14.5.2 Radiographic examination shall be in accordance
with the requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel 16.1 fusion-welded pipe; N08330; N08332; N06603;
Code, Section VIII, latest edition, Paragraph UW-51. N06617; N06025; N06045

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 545 – 97 (Reapproved 2004)e1
Standard Specification for
Electrodeposited Coatings of Tin1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 545; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
e1 NOTE—The warning note in S4.1 was editorially updated in April 2004.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the requirements for electrode-
posited (electroplated) coatings of tin applied to metallic
articles. Tin coatings are used to provide a low contact-
resistance surface, to protect against corrosion (see 1.2), to
facilitate soldering, to provide anti-galling properties, and to be
a stopoff coating in the nitriding of high-strength steels.
1.2 Some corrosion can be expected from tin coatings
exposed outdoors. In normal indoor exposure, tin is protective
on iron, steel, nickel, copper, and their alloys. Corrosion can be
expected at discontinuities in the coating (such as pores) due to
galvanic couples formed between the tin and the underlying
metal through the discontinuities, especially in humid atmo-
spheres. Porosity increases as the coating thickness decreases,
so that minimum thicknesses must be specified for each
application. Parts coated with tin can be assembled safely in
contact with iron and steel, tin-coated aluminum, yellow
chromated zinc, cadmium, and solder coatings. (See X5.2 for
oxidation and corrosion properties.)
1.3 This specification applies to electroplated coatings of
not less than 99 % tin (except where deliberately alloyed for
special purposes, as stated in X6.3) obtained from any of the
available tin electroplating processes (see 4.3).
1.4 This specification does not apply to hot-dipped tin or
other non-electrodeposited coating; it also does not apply to
mill products. For mill products, refer to Specifications A 623
or A 623M.
1.5 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on
Metallic and Inorganic Coatings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B08.08.04 on Soft Metals.
Current edition approved April 1, 2004. Published April 2004. Originally
approved in 1971. Last previous edition approved in 1997 as B 545 – 97e1.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2
A 623 Specification for Tin Mill Products, General Require-
ments
A 623M Specification for Tin Mill Products, General Re-
quirements [Metric]
B 32 Specification for Solder Metal
B 183 Practice for Preparation of Low-Carbon Steel for
Electroplating
B 242 Practice for Preparation of High-Carbon Steel for
Electroplating
B 246 Specification for Tinned Hard-Drawn and Medium-
Hard-Drawn Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes
B 281 Practice for Preparation of Copper and Copper-Base
Alloys for Electroplating and Conversion Coatings
B 320 Practice for Preparation of Iron Castings for Electro-
plating
B 322 Practice for Cleaning Metals Prior to Electroplating
B 374 Terminology Relating to Electroplating
B 487 Test Method for Measurement of Metal and Oxide
Coating Thicknesses by Microscopical Examination of a
Cross Section
B 499 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thick-
nesses by the Magnetic Method: Nonmagnetic Coatings on
Magnetic Basis Metals
B 504 Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Me-
tallic Coatings by the Coulometric Method
B 507 Practice for Design of Articles to be Electroplated on
Racks
B 542 Terminology Relating to Electrical Contacts and
Their Use
B 558 Practice for Preparation of Nickel Alloys for Electro-
plating
B 567 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thickness
by the Beta Backscatter Method
B 568 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thickness
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
 B 545 – 97 (2004)e1
by X-Ray Spectrometry
B 571 Practice for Qualitative Adhesion Testing of Metallic
Coatings
B 602 Test Method for Attribute Sampling of Metallic and
Inorganic Coatings
B 659 Guide for Measuring Thickness of Metallic and
Inorganic Coatings
B 678 Test Method for Solderability of Metallic-Coated
Products
B 697 Guide for Selection of Sampling Plans for Inspection
of Electrodeposited Metallic and Inorganic Coatings
B 762 Test Method of Variables Sampling of Metallic and
Inorganic Coatings
B 765 Guide for Selection of Porosity and Gross Defect
Tests for Electrodeposits and Related Metallic Coatings
B 809 Test Method for Porosity in Metallic Coatings by
Humid Sulfur Vapor (“Flowers-of-Sulfur”)
B 849 Specification for Pre-Treatments of Iron or Steel for
Reducing the Risk of Hydrogen Embrittlement
B 850 Specification for Post-Coating Treatments of Iron or
Steel for Reducing the Risk of Hydrogen Embrittlement
B 851 Specification for Automated Controlled Shot Peening
of Metallic Articles Prior to Nickel, Autocatalytic Nickel,
or Chromium Plating, or as a Final Finish
D 3951 Practice for Commercial Packaging
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Many of the terms used in this specifica-
tion are defined in Terminology B 374 or B 542.
3.1.1 rack-plating—an electrodeposition process in which
articles to be coated are mounted on racks or other fixtures
during the process.
3.1.2 significant surface—that portion of the surface of a
coated article at which the coating is required to meet all of the
requirements of the coating specification for that article;
significant surfaces are usually those that are essential to the
serviceability or function of the article, or that can be a source
of corrosion products or tarnish films that interfere with the
function or desirable appearance of the article; significant
surfaces shall be indicated on the drawings of the parts or by
the provision of suitably marked samples.
3.1.3 undercoating (see 3.1.4)—also called an underplate in
the electronics industry.
3.1.4 underplating—application of a metallic coating layer
between the basis metal or substrate and the topmost metallic
coating or coatings. The thickness of such an undercoating is
usually greater than 0.8 µm (30 µin.). This is in contrast to
strikes or flashes, whose thicknesses are generally much
smaller.
4. Classification
4.1 General—Orders for articles to be plated in accordance
with this specification shall specify the service class (4.2) (and
underplating, if required), indicating the severity of service
required for the coating. Other coatings variations, such as
surface appearance type (4.3) or alloy composition (Appendix
X6), are optional.
4.2 Service Class:
2
Class Minimum Thickness Typical Applications
A 2.5 µm (100 µin.) Mild service conditions, particularly where the
significant surface is shielded from the atmo-
sphere (as in electronic connector housings). To
provide corrosion and tarnish resistance where
greater thicknesses may be detrimental to the
mechanical operation of the product (for ex-
ample, small electrical spring contacts and re-
lays). Class A is often used for tin coatings that
are not to be soldered, but must function as
low-resistance electrical contact surfaces.
B 5 µm (200 µin.) Mild service conditions with less severe require-
ments than Class C (below). Applications are
as follows: precoating on solderable basis met-
als to facilitate the soldering of electrical com-
ponents; as a surface preparation for protective
painting; for antigalling purposes; and as a sto-
poff in nitriding. Also found on baking pans after
reflow.
C 8 µm (320 µin.), Moderate exposure conditions, usually indoors,
(10 µm (400 µin.) but more severe than Class B. Examples are
for steel substrates) electrical hardware (such as cases for relays
and coils, transformer cans, screened cages,
chassis, frames, and fittings) and for retention
of the solderability of solderable articles during
storage.
D 15 µm (600 µin.) Severe service, including exposure to damp-
(20 µm (800 µin.) ness and mild corrosion from moderate indus-
for steel substrates) trial environments. Examples are fittings for gas
meters, automotive accessories (such as air
cleaners and oil filters), and in some electronic
applications.
E 30 µm (0.0012 in.) Very severe service conditions, including el-
evated temperatures, where underlying metal
diffusion and intermetallic formation processes
are accelerated. Thicknesses of 30 to 125 µm
(0.0012 to 0.005 in.) may be required if the
coating is subjected to abrasion or is exposed
to slowly corrosive liquids or corrosive atmo-
spheres or gases. Thicker coatings are used for
water containers, threaded steel couplings of oil
drilling strings, and seacoast atmospheres.
Coatings subject to mild etchants are included.
F 1.5 µm (60 µin.) Similar to Class A, but for shorter-term contact
applications and short shelf-life requirements,
subject to purchaser approval.
4.3 Surface Appearance Type (Electroplating Process):
4.3.1 Matte Tin Electrodeposits—Coatings with a matte
appearance are obtained from tin plating baths (stannate,
sulfate, methylsulfonate, and fluoborate) used without the
addition of any brightening agents. However, all matte baths
(except for stannate baths) do require the addition of grain-
refiners, and often of other additives in order to produce the
desired matte finish.
4.3.2 Bright Tin Electrodeposits—Bright coatings are ob-
tained when proprietary brightening agents are used in specific
bright tin plating baths.
4.3.3 Flow-Brightened Electrodeposits—Flow-brightened
coatings are obtained by heating the matte coating above the
melting point of tin for a few seconds, followed by quenching;
palm oil and hydrogenated oils and fats are used as heat-
transfer medium at a temperature of 260 6 8°C (500 6 14°F),
but other heating methods also are in use, such as hot air. The
maximum thickness for flow-brightening is, in most cases,
approximately 8 µm (300 µin.); thicker coatings tend to dewet.
The shape of the part is also a factor; flat surfaces dewet more
readily than wires or rounded shapes.
 B 545 – 97 (2004)e1
NOTE 1—Terms commonly used in soldering, such as dewet, are
described in soldering textbooks (1)3 or reviews of solderability testing
(2). Some examples are given in Appendix X6.
5. Ordering Information
5.1 In order to make the application of this specification
complete, the purchaser must supply the following information
to the seller in the purchase order and drawings:
5.1.1 Title, ASTM designation number, and year of issue of
this specification;
5.1.2 Deposit by classification (4.1), including thickness or
service class (4.2);
5.1.3 Composition and metallurgical condition of the sub-
strate to be coated (6.1);
5.1.4 Additional underplating, if required (6.8);
5.1.5 Surface-appearance type (for example, matte, flow-
brightened, or bright), if required (4.3 and 6.2);
5.1.6 Location of significant surfaces (3.1.2);
5.1.7 Hydrogen embrittlement relief, if required (Supple-
mentary Requirement S2); and
5.1.8 Any other items needing agreement (for example,
6.5.2 and 8.5).
6. Coating Requirements
6.1 Substrate—The metal substrate shall be subjected to
such surface preparation, cleaning, and electroplating proce-
dures as are necessary to yield deposits with the desired
quality.
NOTE 2—Careful preparation of metal surfaces is necessary in order to
assure good adhesion and quality. For suitable methods, see Practices
B 183, B 242, B 281, B 320, B 322, and B 558. Also see 6.6.
6.2 Electroplating shall be applied after all basis metal heat
treatments and mechanical operations have been completed.
6.3 Appearance—Tin coatings shall have the characteristic
appearance, including surface texture (4.3), for the process
used. The appearance shall be uniform throughout, insofar as
the basis metal will permit. They shall be adherent and visually
free of blisters, pits, peeled areas, cracks, nodules, and unplated
areas. They shall not be stained or discolored. Flow-brightened
coatings shall be free of dewetted areas and beads. All surfaces
shall be substantially free of grease or oil used in the
flow-brightening process.
6.4 All tin-coated articles shall be clean and undamaged.
When necessary, preliminary samples showing the finish shall
be supplied to and approved by the purchaser. Where a contact
mark is inevitable, its location shall be subject to agreement
between the supplier and the purchaser.
6.5 Thickness of Coatings—Tin coatings on articles shall
conform to the thickness requirements specified in 4.2 as to the
minimum thickness on significant surfaces.
6.5.1 Local Thickness—The thickness values specified in
4.2 are the minimum local thicknesses measured by one or
more of the methods given in Practice B 659 at any number of
desired spots on the significant surface.
3
The boldface numbers in parentheses refer to the list of references at the end of
this specification.
3
6.5.2 Mean Thickness—When specified by the purchaser,
instead of being a local minimum requirement, the thickness
requirement can be a minimum (arithmetic) mean thickness.
NOTE 3—Specification of the coating thickness in terms of the mean is
normally made when the coated articles are small and relatively simple,
such as connector pins and terminals.
NOTE 4—Thickness of electrodeposited coatings varies from point to
point on the surfaces of a product (see Practice B 507). The thickness is
less in interior corners and holes. Such surfaces are normally exempt from
the thickness requirement. If the full thickness is required on these
surfaces, the electroplater will have to use special techniques that probably
will increase the cost of the process.
NOTE 5—When articles are plated by mass plating techniques (such as
barrel plating), such measurement methods as “strip and weigh” or “weigh
before and after plating” may be used to determine the mean thickness.
6.6 Adhesion—Adhesion of the coating shall be tested by
one of the methods given in Appendix X2. The coating should
adhere to the basis metal when subjected to the agreed test;
flaking or blistering of the coating is to be taken as evidence of
unsatisfactory adhesion.
6.7 Integrity of the Coating:
6.7.1 Gross Defects/Mechanical Damage—Coatings shall
be free of visible mechanical damage and similar gross defects
when viewed at up to 43 magnification. For some applications,
this requirement may be relaxed to allow for a small number of
such defects (per unit area), especially if they are outside of or
on the periphery of significant surfaces (also see 6.7.2).
6.7.2 Porosity—Almost all as-plated electrodeposits contain
some porosity. The amount of porosity in the coating that may
be tolerable depends on the severity of the environment that the
article is likely to encounter during service or storage. If the
pores are few in number, or away from significant surfaces,
their presence can often be tolerated. Such acceptance (or
pass-fail) criteria, if required, should be part of the product
specification for the particular article or coating requiring the
porosity test. See 8.5 for porosity testing.
6.8 Underplating:
6.8.1 For tin coatings in Class A and Class F (4.2) that will
not be exposed to solder temperatures (especially those that
must function as electrically conductive surfaces), a nickel
underplate or undercoating of at least 1.3 µm (50 µin.) shall be
applied before tin plating.
6.8.2 To prevent zinc migration and impairment of solder-
ability during service or storage, substrates of brass or other
copper alloys containing more than 5 % zinc must have a
copper undercoating of at least 2.5 µm (100 µin.), or a nickel
undercoating of at least 1.3 µm (50 µin.), prior to tin plating. A
thicker coating of nickel may be required in some situations for
additional retardation.
6.9 Hydrogen Embrittlement Relief—High-tensile strength
steels and severely cold-worked steels are susceptible to
embrittlement by hydrogen in both cleaning and electroplating
operations. See Supplementary Requirements S1 and S2 for
details.
7. Sampling
7.1 The sampling plan used for inspection of a quantity of
the coated articles shall be as agreed upon between the
purchaser and the supplier.
 B 545 – 97 (2004)e1
NOTE 6—The procedure for sampling is accomplished by selecting a
relatively small number of the finished articles at random. These articles
(the inspection lots) are inspected and classified as complying or not
complying with the requirements of the specification. The size of the
sample and the criteria of compliance are determined by the application of
statistics. The procedure is known as sampling inspection. Three stan-
dards, Test Method B 602, Guide B 697, and Test Method B 762, contain
sampling plans that are designed for the sampling inspection of coatings.
Test Method B 602 contains four sampling plans, three for use with tests
that are non-destructive and one for use when they are destructive. The
buyer and seller may agree on the plan or plans to be used. If they do not,
Test Method B 602 identifies the plan to be used.
Guide B 697 provides a large number of plans and also provides
guidance in the selection of a plan. When Guide B 697 is specified, the
buyer and seller must agree on the plan to be used.
Test Method B 762 can be used only for coating requirements that have
a numerical limit, such as coating thickness. The test must yield a
numerical value, and certain statistical requirements must be met. Test
Method B 762 contains several plans and also provides instructions for
calculating plans to meet special needs. The buyer and seller may agree on
the plan or plans to be used. If they do not, Test Method B 762 identifies
the plan to be used.
7.2 An inspection lot shall be defined as a collection of
coated articles that meet the following requirements: they are
of the same kind; have been produced to the same specifica-
tions; have been coated by a single supplier at one time, or at
approximately the same time, under essentially identical con-
ditions; and are submitted for acceptance or rejection as a
group.
7.3 Special Test Specimens—It may be preferable to use
special test specimens to represent product in process control
or in acceptance inspection when, for example, destructive
tests are used and it is desirable not to destroy product or if the
test specimen is better adapted to the test. The use of special
test specimens, their number, the material from which they are
made, their size and shape, and the conditions of their coating
shall be as agreed upon by the purchaser and the seller.
8. Test Methods
8.1 Deposit Purity—Atomic absorption or energy disper-
sion spectrophotometry, or any other methods with a demon-
strated uncertainty of less than 10 % of the component mea-
sured, may be used to determine impurities. Initial scanning
should be conducted for all elements in order to detect any
unknown or unexpected impurities. Determine deposit purity
by subtracting the total impurities from 100 %.
NOTE 7—Deposit purity is best determined on samples of the actual
product (see Section 7). If special test specimens are used (7.3), care must
be taken to arrange the specimens so as to electroplate them under the
same conditions as typical production pieces.
8.2 Thickness:
8.2.1 Standard Thickness—The coating thickness shall be
measured at locations on significant surfaces by one of the
following test methods: Test Methods B 487, B 499 (magnetic
4
substrates only), B 504, B 567, and B 568. Practice B 659 may
be consulted to determine the most appropriate test method.
8.2.1.1 When Methods B 504 and B 568 are used with tin
platings that have been alloyed with more than 0.5 % of lead,
bismuth, or antimony to reduce whiskering (see X6.3.2.5), the
standard shall have the same composition as the coating. When
Test Method B 567 is used to measure these types of coatings,
the measuring instrument shall be calibrated with thickness
standards that have the same substrate and same composition
of coating as the product.
8.2.2 Mean Thickness—If the entire surface of the article is
a significant surface, the mean thickness can also be deter-
mined by the method described in Appendix X1. Also see Note
5.
8.3 Adhesion—Adhesion of the coating shall be tested by
one of the recommended methods of Practice B 571 (see
Appendix X2).
8.4 Solderability—For coatings that must be solderable, the
method by which solderability is tested shall be specified.
Three test methods are described in Appendix X3, while a
simple dip test is given in Test Method B 678. The purchaser
shall specify whether the tested articles are to receive an
artificial aging treatment, such as that given in Test Method
B 678, so as to demonstrate whether the articles may be
expected to retain their solderability during long storage
periods.
8.5 Porosity and Gross Defects Testing:
8.5.1 Coatings on articles of steel (or iron) having a local
thickness of 10 µ (0.4 mil) or greater should be subjected to the
test given in Appendix X5.
8.5.2 For coatings on articles made from copper or copper
alloy as the basis metal, the following tests should be used:
8.5.2.1 To determine mechanical damage or gross defects
only, subject samples to the sodium polysulfide immersion test
outlined in Specification B 246. Black spots or lines are
evidence of mechanical damage or gross defects.
8.5.2.2 To determine all porosity that penetrates down to the
copper substrate, especially for coatings in Service Class A, the
humid sulfur vapor test (Test Method B 809) shall be used.
Blackening at pores will be evidence of porosity.
9. Rejection and Rehearing
9.1 Articles that fail to conform to the requirements of this
specification may be rejected. Rejection shall be reported to the
seller promptly and in writing. In cases of rejection, the seller
may make a claim for a rehearing. Product that shows coating
imperfections in subsequent manufacturing operations may be
rejected.
10. Keywords
10.1 electrodeposited tin; electroplated tin; tin; tin coatings
 B 545 – 97 (2004)e1
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
contract or order.
S1. Pretreatment of Iron and Steel for Reducing the Risk
of Hydrogen Embrittlement
S1.1 Parts for critical applications that are made of steels
with ultimate tensile strengths of 1000 MPa, hardness of 31
HRC or greater, that have been machined, ground, cold
formed, or cold straightened subsequent to heat treatment, shall
require stress relief treatment when specified by the purchaser,
the tensile strength to be supplied by the purchaser. Specifica-
tions B 849 (heat treatment) and B851 (shot peening) may be
consulted for a list of pretreatments that are used widely.
S2. Post Coating Treatments of Iron and Steel for
Reducing the Risk of Hydrogen Embrittlement
S2.1 Parts for critical applications that are made of steels
with ultimate tensile strengths of 1000 MPa, hardness of 31
APPENDIXES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. DETERMINATION OF MEAN COATING THICKNESS OF SMALL ARTICLES BY THE WEIGHT LOSS METHOD
X1.1 Select at random from the production lot the number
of coated articles specified by the purchaser. The number of
articles shall be sufficient to have a total weight of coating of
at least 0.2 g. Calculate the coated area in mm2 to an accuracy
of at least 1 part in 100.
X1.2 Clean the articles by, for example, washing in a
solvent or water-detergent followed by a clean water rinse. Dry
and weigh with an accuracy of at least 1 part in 1000.
X1.3 Immerse the articles in a solution of 20 g antimony
X2. ADHESION TESTS
X2.1
2
Burnishing Test—Rub an area of not more than 630
mm (1 in.2) of the electroplated surface, selected at the
discretion of the inspector, rapidly and firmly for 15 s with a
smooth metal implement. A suitable burnishing implement is a
copper or steel disk used edgewise and broadside. Maintain
pressure sufficient to burnish the film at every stroke, but not so
great as to cut the deposit. Poor adhesion will be shown by the
appearance of a loose blister that grows as rubbing is contin-
ued. If the quality of the deposit is also poor, the blister may
crack, and the plating will peel away from the basis metal.
X2.2 Quenching Test—Heat the electroplated article in an
oven for a sufficient time to reach 150 6 10°C (300 6 20°F),
and then quench in water at room temperature. Poor adhesion
will be shown if the coating blisters, cracks, or peels.
5
HRC or greater, as well as surface hardened parts, shall require
post coating hydrogen embrittlement relief baking when speci-
fied by the purchaser, the tensile strength to be supplied by the
purchaser. Specifications B 850 may be consulted for a list of
post treatments that are used widely.
S3. Solderability Requirements
S3.1 If the coating must be solderable, refer to 8.4 for test
methods for determining solderability.
S4. Government Packaging Requirements
S4.1 Parts plated for the U.S. government and military,
including subcontractors, shall be packaged according to Prac-
tice D 3951. (Warning—Some contemporary packaging ma-
terials may emit fumes that are deleterious to the surface of the
coating.)
trioxide in 1 L of concentrated hydrochloric acid (sp gr 1.19)
and allow them to remain for 1 min after gas evolution stops.
Remove the articles, rinse them in clean water, wipe and brush
as necessary to remove smut (antimony residues), and dry.
Reweigh.
X1.4 Calculate the mean thickness in µm by dividing the
loss in weight of the articles by the area and multiplying the
quotient by 1.37 3 105.
X2.3 Reflow Test—Parts may be evaluated by reflowing in
a bath of palm oil at a temperature of 235 to 260°C (455 to
500°F) until the plating melts. A bright coating completely
covering the significant surfaces will indicate acceptable qual-
ity.
X2.4 Bend Test—A sample shall be bent, with the coated
surface away, over a mandrel until its two ends are parallel.
The mandrel shall have a diameter equal to the thickness of the
sample. Examination of 43 magnification should show no
evidence of peeling or cracking. Some tin coatings, especially
of bright tin, may show fine cracks during this test, but if these
do not separate from the surface, it should not be considered an
adhesional failure.
 B 545 – 97 (2004)e1
X3. SOLDERABILITY TESTS
X3.1 General:
X3.1.1 Methods for testing the solderability of tin-coated
articles are based on measurement of the extent of wetting by
molten solder or determination of the minimum time required
to produce full or perfect wetting by the solder (1, 2).
X3.1.2 The extent of wetting can be observed by simple
immersion in solder under controlled conditions, or by per-
forming dip tests with automated equipment. Visual examina-
tion, time of wetting, measurement of area of spread, and
calculation of spread values are used to assess solderability (1,
2).
X3.1.3 The minimum wetting time is determined by carry-
ing a specimen in a fixture through a standing wave of solder
at a controlled speed and measuring the time of immersion
required to achieve complete wetting.
X3.2 Simple Dip Test—The test in Test Method B 678 is
recommended.
X3.3 Wetting Balance (1, 3, 4):
X3.3.1 The wetting balance provides the most objective,
operator-independent, and reproducible measure of the solder-
ability of a surface of currently known methods. Numerous
models are available under different names such as the surface-
tension balance, and various trade names, such as“ menisco-
graph,” but all share certain common features.
X3.3.2 The base structure holds a heated solder bath that
can be raised or lowered at a specific rate. The test piece is held
X4. SOME DEFINITIONS OF WETTING TERMINOLOGY
X4.1 dewetting—a condition that results when molten
metal has coated a surface and then receded, leaving irregularly
shaped mounds of metal separated by areas covered with a thin
metal film; basis metal is not exposed.
X4.2 nonwetting—a condition whereby a surface has con-
X5. SULFUR DIOXIDE POROSITY TEST (STEEL SUBSTRATES)
X5.1 Principle—Exposure to a moist atmosphere contain-
ing a low concentration of sulfur dioxide causes spots of
substrate corrosion product to appear at discontinuities in the
coating. If the sulfur dioxide concentration in the atmosphere is
too high, the corrosion product formed is too fluid to permit
easy observation of pore sites. The method provided, which
depends on the production of sulfur dioxide from the reaction
between sodium thiosulfate and sulfuric acid within the test
chamber, ensures suitable conditions for the development of
immobile corrosion products at discontinuities.
X5.2 Apparatus:
6
in a clamp that extends from an arm directly over the solder
bath. The clamp is attached to a load cell and to a transducer,
which transmits a signal to a converter that adjusts the signal to
a useful mode (analog or digital) for the recording instrument,
computer, or strip-chart recorder.
X3.3.3 The parameters of the test are set on the instrument,
according to the manufacturer’s instructions, to reveal the most
information concerning the solderability of the test piece.
X3.3.4 The bath temperature must be held within precise
limits at a suitable temperature with respect to the solder alloy.
The immersion rate, which may vary from 1 to 25 mm/s, must
be constant from sample to sample.
X3.3.5 The immersed surface area of the standards and
samples should be similar, as well as the depth of immersion
and the type and weight of flux on the test piece.
X3.3.6 The opposing forces of buoyancy and wetting,
versus time, which is transmitted from the transducer to the
strip-chart recorder or the computer during the test, is plotted.
X3.3.7 The most significant information obtained from the
graph are the wetting time, rate of wetting, total wetting force,
and whether the wetting force remains constant over the time
of the test.
X3.3.8 Test samples are to be run against a series of
standards that have been run to establish averages and to define
precision windows. The goal is to define minimum acceptable
solderability in terms of a maximum wetting time, minimum
wetting rate, minimum force, and stable wetting at a set dwell
time.
tacted molten metal, but the metal has not adhered to all of the
surfaces; basis metal remains exposed.
X4.3 wetting—the formation of a relatively uniform,
smooth, unbroken, and adherent film of the metal coating to a
basis metal.
X5.2.1 The test cabinet shall be a chamber fitted with a lid
or door, and should preferably be made of glass or a transparent
plastic material. The size should be sufficient to accommodate
the test specimens with their lowest part at least 75 mm (3 in.)
above the surface of a solution occupying at least 1/30 of the
total capacity.
X5.2.2 The closure of the vessel and other joints should be
gas tight but need not be capable of resisting pressure. A glass
plate makes an adequate joint on the lubricated ground edges of
a glass tank.
 B 545 – 97 (2004)e1
X5.2.3 The cabinet should be of uniform cross section, and
the solution placed in it should cover the base completely.
X5.2.4 The specimens under testing should be supported by
a glass or plastic stand inside the cabinet. The significant
surfaces may be inclined at any angle, but it may be desirable
to choose the same method of support for similar articles.
X5.3 Corrosive Medium—The corrosive medium should be
moist air containing sulfur dioxide prepared by adding 1 part
by volume of 0.1 N sulfuric acid to 4 parts of a solution
containing 10 g of sodium thiosulfate crystals in 1 L of water.
X5.4 Temperature of Test—Conduct the test at 20 6 5°C
(60 6 9°F), taking precautions against rapid temperature
fluctuation in the course of the test.
X5.5 Procedure:
X5.5.1 Before the test, clean the specimens with an organic
solvent (for example, trichloroethane), wipe with a lint-free
cloth, and allow to attain room temperature. Introduce into the
X6. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
X6.1 General—Properties of electrodeposited tin coatings
are affected to various degrees by their service and storage
environments (4.2). These should be taken into account when
designing for special applications.
X6.2 Temperature and Other Environmental Effects:
X6.2.1 Diffusion and Intermetallic Formation—
Interdiffusion between tin coatings and copper or copper alloys
does occur. The diffusion is slow at room temperature and rapid
at elevated temperatures. Evidence of diffusion is the formation
of a layer of copper-tin intermetallic at the interface and
diffusion of zinc to the surface if the substrate is brass.
Diffusion may lead to darkening of a thin coating and impair-
ment of its solderability characteristics, particularly after long
storage. With such thin coatings, a diffusion barrier of nickel
may be advantageous, although users should also consider the
use of thicker coatings when solderability must be maintained
over a period of years (6.8). An underplating of nickel or
copper must be used as a diffusion barrier on brass.
X6.2.2 Tin Phase Transformation—Tin coatings, like pure
metal, may be subject to allotropic transformation at low
temperatures (also called tin pest or disease). Where electro-
plated tin coatings are subject to long-term storage or use at
very low temperatures, it may be advisable, when specified by
the purchaser, to codeposit small amounts (<1 %) of bismuth,
antimony, or lead with the tin. These alloying additions,
particularly the first, have been shown to inhibit the transfor-
mation.
X6.2.3 Tin Oxidation (5, 6)—In clean, dry atmospheres at
room temperature, tin is covered quickly with a very thin, but
continuous, air-formed oxide film. Although the tin surface will
remain bright for long periods in the absence of moisture, this
invisible surface oxide layer is not truly protective. It gradually
thickens, and it may eventually produce a dull gray appearance.
7
test cabinet a volume of aqueous sodium thiosulfate solution
equal to 1/50 of the volume of the cabinet. Suspend the test
specimens above this solution on nonmetallic supports, with
the surfaces of the specimens not less than 25 mm (1 in.) apart,
not less than 25 mm (1 in.) from any wall of the cabinet, and
not less than 75 mm (3 in.) from the surface of the sodium
thiosulfate solution. Add to the sodium thiosulfate solution a
volume of 0.1 N sulfuric acid equal to a quarter of the volume
of the thiosulfate solution and seal the cabinet, keeping it
shielded from draughts or other causes of rapid temperature
fall. Addition of the sulfuric acid may be made before the test
specimens are placed in position, provided that the cabinet is
closed within 5 min of addition of the acid.
X5.5.2 Leave the specimens in the closed vessel for 24 h.
After removing the specimens from the corrosive atmosphere,
allow them to dry without wiping or cleaning in any way, and
then examine them using the options outlined in Guide B 765,
Sections 6 and 7.
X6.2.3.1 In the presence of water vapor (humidity), the
oxidation rate tends to increase greatly. The oxide film has been
found to increase (as determined by weight gain measure-
ments) almost linearly with time, with the formation of a gray
film, or even of a slight yellow discoloration.
X6.2.3.2 Tin coatings begin to oxidize rapidly in air at
150°C and melt at 232°C.
X6.2.3.3 When exposed out of doors, the tin surface may
acquire a very thin accumulation of light gray or white
corrosion product. The original oxide film, in comparatively
short or dry exposures, is primarily in the gray-to-black
stannous oxide form, which is then hydrated by atmospheric
moisture to the white hydroxyl form. Drying can reverse the
reaction. Fortunately, these oxidation products are not hygro-
scopic, so that (according to Britton (5)) “tin is not attacked
below 100 % relative humidity (RH), unless the dust falling on
the surface is hygroscopic.”
X6.2.4 Oxides and Solderability—Tin oxide films are not as
easily reduced as copper oxide. However, the non-hydrated
films are not an impediment to soldering, because as soon as a
break is made in the oxide, the molten solder can interact with
the layer of free tin below the oxide film. The mechanical
forces of the molten solder and tin flowing together break up
the oxide layer. There needs to be sufficient free tin below the
oxide layer in order for this to occur, because the intermetallic
compounds formed from tin and the basis metal will not react
in this way (7).
X6.3 Whisker Growth:
X6.3.1 Sometimes metal filaments, usually called whiskers,
grow spontaneously from the surface of electrodeposited
metals (for example, tin, cadmium, and zinc) within a period
after plating that may vary from weeks or months to years.
These whiskers frequently are approximately 2.5 µm (0.0001
in.) in diameter, but they can grow to 10 mm (3⁄8 in.) or longer
 B 545 – 97 (2004)e1
(25-mm whiskers have been recorded) and can have a current
carrying capacity of as much as 10 mA. In many applications
for tin coatings, whisker growth has not been a problem, but
there are critical applications (X6.3.2) in which it may create a
problem.
X6.3.2 Whiskers are particularly undesirable when associ-
ated with miniaturized low-voltage apparatus where narrow
spacing exists between adjacent components that must remain
electrically isolated to avoid short circuits. In this specialized
application, the occurrence of whisker growth is sufficiently
frequent to be an obstacle to the use of tin. Therefore, in
designing for low-voltage electronic equipment where compo-
nents are closely spaced, tin coatings should either not be used,
or whisker formation should be inhibited or prevented by the
application of prevention methods. Practically all of the fol-
lowing methods take into account the chief cause of tin
whiskering, which is the presence of stresses in the tin coating
(8):
X6.3.2.1 Flow brightening (1) or annealing the tin plating to
reduce the internal stresses.
X6.3.2.2 Plating the tin to sufficient thickness to minimize
stress-producing epitaxial effects.
X6.3.2.3 Use of compatible underplatings, especially
nickel.
X6.3.2.4 Avoiding high compressive loads and stresses
while making joints or connections.
X6.3.2.5 Codepositing lead, bismuth, antimony, copper, or
nickel with the tin reduces the risk of whisker growth (9). A
tin-lead plating that is used extensively for the prevention of
whiskering has a nominal lead composition of 7 % (with
allowed variations of 65 %) by mass, the balance being tin.
However, some of these platings cannot be used in contact with
food.

REFERENCES

(1) For example, Wassink, R. J., Klein, Soldering in Electronics, Electro-
chemical Publications, Ltd., Ayr, Scotland, 1989.
(2) Long, J. B., “A Critical Review of Solderability Testing,” in Properties
of Electrodeposits, Their Measurement and Significance, Sard, R.,
Leidheiser, H., and Ogburn, F., Eds., The Electrochemical Society,
1975, Chapter 7.
(3) Wooldridge, J. R., “Lessons Learned During a Year of Production
Solderability Testing with a Wetting Balance,” in 12th Annual Elec-
tronics Manufacturing Seminar Proceedings, Naval Weapons Center,
China Lake, CA 1988.
(4) Yoshida, H., Warwick, M. E., Hawkins, S. P., “The Assessment of the
Solderability of Surface Mounted Devices Using the Wetting Bal-
ance,” Brazing & Soldering, No. 12, Spring 1987.
(5) Britton, S. C., Corrosion, L. L. Shreir, Ed., John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1963.
(6) Leidheiser, H., The Corrosion of Copper, Tin, and Their Alloys, John
Wiley and Sons, New York, 1971.
(7) Wassink, R. J., Klein, Soldering in Electronics, Electrochemical
Publications Ltd., Ayr, Scotland, 1984, pp. 144 and 149.
(8) Diehl, R. F., and Cifaldi, N. A., “Elimination of Tin Whisker Growth
on Interconnections,” in Proceedings 8th Annual Connector Sympo-
sium, 1975, p. 328; also references cited therein.
(9) Arnold, S. M., “Repressing Growth of Tin Whiskers,” Plating,
PLATA, Vol 53, January 1966, p. 96.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

8
 Designation: B 547/B 547M – 02

Standard Specification for

Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Formed and Arc-Welded
Round Tube1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 547/B 547M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products2

1.1 This specification covers aluminum and aluminum-alloy
(Note 1) formed and arc-welded round tube in diameters 9 to
60 in. [230 to 1520 mm], made from formed sheet or plate, butt
welded by gas-tungsten or gas-metal arc-welding methods with
or without the use of filler metal.
NOTE 1—Throughout this specification use of the term alloy in the
general sense includes aluminum as well as aluminum alloy.
NOTE 2—The requirements for the sheet and plate used are the same as
in Specifications B 209 or B 209M.
1.2 Alloy and temper designations are in accordance with
ANSI H35.1 [H35.1M]. The equivalent Unified Numbering
System alloy designations are those of Table 1 preceded by A9,
for example, A91100 for aluminum 1100 in accordance with
Practice E 527.
1.3 For acceptance criteria for inclusion of new aluminum
and aluminum alloys in this specification, see Annex A2.
1.4 The values stated in either inch-pound or SI units are to
be regarded separately as standards. The SI units are shown
either in brackets or in separate tables. The values stated in
each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system
must be used independently of the other. Combining values
from the two systems will result in nonconformance with the
specification.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on the
date of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate2
B 209M Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate [Metric]2
B 557 Test Methods of Tension Testing Wrought and Cast
B 557M Test Methods of Tension Testing Wrought and Cast
Aluminum- and Magnesium-Alloy Products [Metric]2
B 660 Practices for Packaging/Packing of Aluminum and
Magnesium Products2
B 666/B 666M Practice for Identification Marking of Alu-
minum Products2
B 918 Practice for Heat Treatment of Wrought Aluminum
Alloys2
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications3
E 34 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Aluminum and
Aluminum-Base Alloys4
E 55 Practice for Sampling Wrought Nonferrous Metals and
Alloys for Determination of Chemical Composition4
E 227 Test Method for Optical Emission Spectrometric
Analysis of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys by the
Point-to-Plane Technique4
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)5
E 607 Test Method for Optical Emission Spectrometric
Analysis of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys by the
Point-to-Plane Technique, Nitrogen Atmosphere4
E 716 Practices for Sampling Aluminum and Aluminum
Alloys for Spectrochemical Analysis4
E 1251 Test Method for Optical Emission Spectrometric
Analysis of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys by the Argon
Atmosphere, Point-to-Plane, Unipolar Self-Initiating Ca-
pacitor Discharge4
2.3 ANSI Standards:
H35.1 Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Alumi-
num2
H35.1M Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Alu-
minum [Metric]2
2.4 ASME Code:
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Section IX, Welding
Qualifications6

1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
3
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.03 on Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
4
Aluminum Alloy Wrought Products. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
5
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2002. Published January 2003. Originally Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
6
approved in 1971. Last previous edition approved in 2000 as B 547–00. Available from American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 345 E. 47th St.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02. New York, NY 10017.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 547/B 547M – 02
TABLE 1 Chemical Composition LimitsA,B,C
Other ElementsD
Alloy Silicon Iron Copper Manganese Magnesium Chromium Zinc Titanium Aluminum
Each TotalE
1100 0.95 Si + Fe 0.05–0.20 0.05 ... ... 0.10 ... 0.05 0.15 99.00 minF
3003 0.6 0.7 0.05–0.20 1.0–1.5 ... ... 0.10 ... 0.05 0.15 remainder
Alclad 3003 3003 alloy clad with 7072 alloy
3004 0.30 0.7 0.25 1.0–1.5 0.8–1.3 ... 0.25 ... 0.05 0.15 remainder
Alclad 3004 3004 alloy clad with 7072 alloy
5050 0.40 0.7 0.20 0.10 1.1–1.8 0.10 0.25 ... 0.05 0.15 remainder
5052 0.25 0.40 0.10 0.10 2.2–2.8 0.15–0.35 0.10 ... 0.05 0.15 remainder
5083 0.40 0.40 0.10 0.40–1.0 4.0–4.9 0.05–0.25 0.25 0.15 0.05 0.15 remainder
5086 0.40 0.50 0.10 0.20–0.7 3.5–4.5 0.05–0.25 0.25 0.15 0.05 0.15 remainder
5154 0.25 0.40 0.10 0.10 3.1–3.9 0.15–0.35 0.20 0.20 0.05 0.15 remainder
5454 0.25 0.40 0.10 0.50–1.0 2.4–3.0 0.05–0.20 0.25 0.20 0.05 0.15 remainder
6061 0.40–0.8 0.7 0.15–0.40 0.15 0.8–1.2 0.04–0.35 0.25 0.15 0.05 0.15 remainder
7072G 0.7 Si + Fe 0.10 0.10 0.10 ... 0.8–1.3 ... 0.05 0.15 remainder
A
Limits are in percent maximum unless shown as a range or stated otherwise.
B
Analysis shall be made for the elements for which limits are shown in this table.
C
For purposes of determining conformance to these limits, an observed value or a calculated value obtained from analysis shall be rounded to the nearest unit in the
last right-hand place of figures used in expressing the specified limit, in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
D
Others includes listed elements for which no specific limit is shown as well as unlisted metallic elements. The producer may analyze samples for trace elements not
specified in the specification. However, such analysis is not required and may not cover all metallic Others elements. Should any analysis by the producer or the purchaser
establish that an Others element exceeds the limit of Each or that the aggregate of several Others elements exceeds the limit of Total, the material shall be considered
nonconforming.
E
Other Elements—Total shall be the sum of unspecified metallic elements 0.010 % or more, rounded to the second decimal before determining the sum.
F
The aluminum content shall be calculated by subtracting from 100.00 % the sum of all metallic elements present in amounts of 0.010 % or more each, rounded to the
second decimal before determining the sum.
G
Composition of cladding alloy as applied during the course of manufacture. Samples from finished tube shall not be required to conform to these limits.

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Section VIII, Div. 1 and 2,
Pressure Vessels6
2.5 AWS Standard:
A5.10 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Welding Rods and
Bare Electrodes7
2.6 Federal Standard:
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)8
2.7 Military Standard:
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage8
2.8 AMS Specification:
AMS 2772 Heat Treatment of Aluminum Alloy Raw Mate-
rials9
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 tube—a hollow round product of uniform wall thick-
ness that is long in relation to its cross section:
3.1.2 arc-welded tube—a tube made from sheet or plate
formed by positioning two opposite edges of the metal together
and butt welded by either the gas-tungsten or gas-metal
arc-welding method, with or without the use of filler metal.
Individually fabricated tubes may be welded together to
produce the ordered length.
3.1.3 sheet—a rolled product that is rectangular in cross
section with thickness less than 0.250 in. but not less than
0.006 in. [over 0.15 through 6.30 mm] with slit, sheared, or
sawed edges.
3.1.4 alclad sheet and plate—composite sheet (and plate)
having on both surfaces a metallurgically bonded aluminum or
7
Available from American Welding Society, 2501 NW 7th St., Miami, FL 33125.
8
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094 Attn: NPODS.
9
Available from Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), 400 Commonwealth
Dr., Warrendale, PA 15096-0001.
aluminum alloy coating that is anodic to the core alloy to which
it is bonded, thus electrolytically protecting the core alloy
against corrosion.
3.1.5 coiled sheet—sheet in coils with slit edges.
3.1.6 flat sheet—sheet with sheared, slit, or sawed edges,
which has been flattened or leveled.
3.1.7 plate—a rolled product that is rectangular in cross
section with thickness not less than 0.250 in. [over 6.30 mm]
with sheared or sawed edges.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 capable of—The term “capable of” as used in this
specification means that the test need not be performed by the
producer of the material. However, should subsequent testing
by the purchaser establish that the material does not meet these
requirements, the material shall be subject to rejection.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material to this specification shall include the
following information:
4.1.1 This specification designation (which includes the
number, the year, and the revision letter, if applicable),
NOTE 3—For inch-pound orders specify Specification B 547; for metric
orders specify Specification B 547M. Do not mix units.
4.1.2 Quantity in pieces or pounds [kilograms],
4.1.3 Alloy (Section 7 and Table 1),
4.1.4 Temper (Section 9 and Table 2 [2 M]),
4.1.5 Size (outside or inside diameter, wall thickness, and
length),
4.2 Additionally, orders for material to this specification
shall include the following information when required by the
purchaser:
4.2.1 Whether heat treatment in accordance with Practice
B 918 is required (8.2),

2
 B 547/B 547M – 02
4.2.2 Whether tension tests of the tube are required in
addition to those of the sheet or plate prior to welding (see
10.1),
4.2.3 Whether air-pressure tests are required (Section 11),
4.2.4 Whether hydrostatic tests are required (Section 12),
4.2.5 Whether weld areas of tube required “spot” or “full”
radiographic examination (Section 13),
4.2.6 Whether inspection or witness of inspection and tests
by the purchaser’s representative is required prior to material
shipment (Section 17),
4.2.7 Whether certification is required (Section 19),
4.2.8 Whether marking for identification is required (see
20.1), and whether special marking for hydrostatic and radio-
graphic tests is required (see 20.2),
4.2.9 Whether special packaging is required (Section 21), if
Practices B 660 applies, and the levels required.
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 The tube shall be made by roll forming (or other suitable
forming) sheet or plate into a circular contour with the
longitudinal edges butted together for welding, or
5.2 The sheet or plate shall be roll formed so that the edges
are butted together in a helical pattern around the circumfer-
ence of the tube.
5.3 The edges shall be welded together by a gas-shielded-
arc process, qualified in accordance with Section IX of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
5.4 Filler metal shall be in accordance with AWS Specifi-
cation A 5.10.
5.5 Any butt-joint configuration (square, Vee, J, bevel-
groove, etc.) may be used on either or both sides (single or
double groove) at the option of the producer within the
capability or limitations of his welding equipment. Whether
welded from one side (square-butt or single-groove) or both
sides (square-butt or double-groove) the face reinforcement
and root reinforcement shall not increase the joint thickness by
more than 50 % of the wall thickness or 1⁄8 in. [3 mm],
whichever is smaller. The reinforcements may be dressed to
this dimension or removed entirely at the manufacturer’s
option. The weld shall show complete penetration. Back
welding is permitted only when (or provided that) it is part of
the original welding process; it must not be employed only as
a repair procedure for areas of unsatisfactory penetration. The
weld bead shall show no evidence of under filling on either the
root or reinforcement side. The toe of the weld shall blend
smoothly into the parent material with no undercutting or
overlapping. If tubing is produced by welding individually
fabricated sections together, longitudinal butt welds shall be
positioned so as to be at least 45° apart.
6. Quality Assurance
6.1 Responsibility for Inspection—Unless otherwise speci-
fied in the contract or purchase order, the producer or supplier
is responsible for the performance of all inspection and test
requirements specified herein. Except as otherwise specified in
the contract or order, the producer or supplier may use his own
or any other suitable facilities for the performance of the
inspection and test requirements specified herein, unless dis-
approved by the purchaser. The purchaser shall have the right
to perform any of the inspections and tests set forth in this
specification where such inspections are deemed necessary to
assure that the material conforms to prescribed requirements.
6.2 Lot Definition—An inspection lot shall be defined as
follows:
6.2.1 For heat-treated tempers, an inspection lot shall con-
sist of all material of the same mill form, alloy, temper, and
nominal dimensions traceable to a heat-treat lot or lots, and
subjected to inspection at one time.
6.2.2 For nonheat-treated tempers, an inspection lot shall
consist of all material of the same mill form, alloy, temper, and
nominal dimensions subjected to inspection at one time.

TABLE 2 Mechanical Property Limits (Inch-Pound Units)A,B,C

Specified Thick- Tensile Strength, ksi Yield Strength (0.2 % offset), ksi Elongation in 2 in., or
Temper
ness, in. min max min max 4 3 Diameter,D min, %

Alloy 1100
O 0.125–0.249 11.0 15.5 3.5 ... 30
0.250–0.500 11.0 15.5 3.5 ... 28
H12 0.125–0.499 14.0 19.0 11.0 ... 9
0.500 14.0 19.0 11.0 ... 12
H14 0.125–0.499 16.0 21.0 14.0 ... 6
0.500 16.0 21.0 14.0 ... 10
H16 0.125–0.162 19.0 24.0 17.0 ... 4
Alloy 3003
O 0.125–0.249 14.0 19.0 5.0 ... 25
0.250–0.500 14.0 19.0 5.0 ... 23
H12 0.125–0.161 17.0 23.0 12.0 ... 7
0.162–0.249 17.0 23.0 12.0 ... 8
0.250–0.499 17.0 23.0 12.0 ... 9
0.500 17.0 23.0 12.0 ... 10
H14 0.125–0.161 20.0 26.0 17.0 ... 6
0.162–0.249 20.0 26.0 17.0 ... 7
0.250–0.499 20.0 26.0 17.0 ... 8
0.500 20.0 26.0 17.0 ... 10
H16 0.125–0.162 24.0 30.0 21.0 ... 4
H112 0.250–0.499 17.0 ... 10.0 ... 8

3
 B 547/B 547M – 02

TABLE 2 Continued
Specified Thick- Tensile Strength, ksi Yield Strength (0.2 % offset), ksi Elongation in 2 in., or
Temper
ness, in. min max min max 4 3 Diameter,D min, %

0.500 15.0 ... 6.0 ... 12

Alloy Alclad 3003
O 0.125–0.249 13.0 18.0 4.5 ... 25
0.250–0.499 13.0 18.0 4.5 ... 23
0.500 14.0E 19.0E 5.0E ... 23
H12 0.125–0.161 16.0 22.0 11.0 ... 7
0.162–0.249 16.0 22.0 11.0 ... 8
0.250–0.499 16.0 22.0 11.0 ... 9
0.500 17.0E 23.0E 12.0E ... 10
H14 0.125–0.161 19.0 25.0 16.0 ... 6
0.162–0.249 19.0 25.0 16.0 ... 7
0.250–0.499 19.0 25.0 16.0 ... 8
0.500 20.0E 26.0E 17.0E ... 10
H112 0.250–0.499 16.0 ... 9.0 ... 8
0.500 15.0E ... 6.0E ... 12
Alloy 3004
O 0.125–0.249 22.0 29.0 8.5 ... 18
0.250–0.500 22.0 29.0 8.5 ... 16
H32 0.125–0.500 28.0 35.0 21.0 ... 6
H34 0.125–0.500 32.0 38.0 25.0 ... 5
H36 0.125–0.162 35.0 41.0 28.0 ... 4
Alloy Alclad 3004
O 0.125–0.249 21.0 28.0 8.0 ... 18
0.250–0.499 21.0 28.0 8.0 ... 16
0.500 22.0E 29.0E 8.5E ... 16
H32 0.125–0.249 27.0 34.0 20.0 ... 6
0.250–0.499 27.0 34.0 20.0 ... 6
0.500 28.0E 35.0E 21.0E ... 6
H34 0.125–0.249 31.0 37.0 24.0 ... 5
0.250–0.499 31.0 37.0 24.0 ... 5
0.500 32.0E 38.0E 25.0E ... 5
H36 0.125–0.162 34.0 40.0 27.0 ... 4
Alloy 5050
O 0.125–0.249 18.0 24.0 6.0 ... 22
0.250–0.500 18.0 24.0 6.0 ... 20
H32 0.125–0.249 22.0 28.0 16.0 ... 6
H34 0.125–0.249 25.0 31.0 20.0 ... 5
H36 0.125–0.162 27.0 33.0 22.0 ... 4
Alloy 5052
O 0.125–0.249 25.0 31.0 9.5 ... 20
0.250–0.500 25.0 31.0 9.5 ... 18
H32 0.125–0.249 31.0 38.0 23.0 ... 9
0.250–0.499 31.0 38.0 23.0 ... 11
0.500 31.0 38.0 23.0 ... 12
H34 0.125–0.249 34.0 41.0 26.0 ... 7
0.250–0.500 34.0 41.0 26.0 ... 10
H36 0.125–0.162 37.0 44.0 29.0 ... 4
H112 0.250–0.499 28.0 ... 16.0 ... 7
0.500 25.0 ... 9.5 ... 12
Alloy 5083
O 0.125–0.500 40.0 51.0 18.0 29.0 16
H321 0.188–0.500 44.0 56.0 31.0 43.0 12
Alloy 5086
O 0.125–0.249 35.0 44.0 14.0 ... 18
0.250–0.500 35.0 44.0 14.0 ... 16
H32 0.125–0.249 40.0 47.0 28.0 ... 8
0.250–0.500 40.0 47.0 28.0 ... 12
H34 0.125–0.249 44.0 51.0 34.0 ... 6
0.250–0.500 44.0 51.0 34.0 ... 10
H36 0.125–0.162 47.0 54.0 38.0 ... 6
Alloy 5154
O 0.125–0.500 30.0 41.0 11.0 ... 18
H32 0.125–0.249 36.0 43.0 26.0 ... 8
0.250–0.500 36.0 43.0 26.0 ... 12

4
 B 547/B 547M – 02

TABLE 2 Continued
Specified Thick- Tensile Strength, ksi Yield Strength (0.2 % offset), ksi Elongation in 2 in., or
Temper
ness, in. min max min max 4 3 Diameter,D min, %

H34 0.125–0.161 39.0 46.0 29.0 ... 6

0.162–0.249 39.0 46.0 29.0 ... 7
0.250–0.500 39.0 46.0 29.0 ... 10
H36 0.125–0.162 42.0 49.0 32.0 ... 5
Alloy 5454
O 0.125–0.500 31.0 41.0 12.0 ... 18
H32 0.125–0.249 36.0 44.0 26.0 ... 8
0.250–0.500 36.0 44.0 26.0 ... 12
H34 0.125–0.161 39.0 47.0 29.0 ... 6
0.162–0.249 39.0 47.0 29.0 ... 7
0.250–0.500 39.0 47.0 29.0 ... 10
H112 0.250–0.499 32.0 ... 18.0 ... 8
0.500 31.0 ... 12.0 ... 11
Alloy 6061
T4 0.125–0.249 30.0 ... 16.0 ... 16
T451F 0.250–0.500 30.0 ... 16.0 ... 18
T6 0.125–0.249 42.0 ... 35.0 ... 10
T6, T651F 0.250–0.499 42.0 ... 35.0 ... 10
0.500 42.0 ... 35.0 ... 9
A
To determine conformance to this specification, each value for tensile strength and for yield strength shall be rounded to the nearest 0.1 ksi, and each value for
elongation shall be rounded to the nearest 0.5 % in accordance with the rounding-off method of Practice E 29.
B
See 10.2.2 for minimum mechanical properties across the weld area of the tube.
C
See Annex A1 for basis for establishment of mechanical property limits.
D
Elongation of sheet type specimens is measured in 2 in.; of round specimens, in 43 specimen diameter.
E
The tension test specimen from plate 0.500 in. and thicker is machined from the core and does not include the cladding alloy.
F
For stress-relieved tempers (T451 and T651), characteristics and properties other than those specified may differ somewhat from the corresponding characteristics
and properties of material in the basic temper.

TABLE 3 Mechanical Property Limits, [SI Units]A,B,C

Specified Thickness, mm Tensile Strength, MPa Yield Strength, (0.2 % offset), MPa Elongation in 50
Temper
Over Through max min min max mm, min, %

Aluminum 1100
0 3.15 6.30 75 105 25 ... 30
6.30 12.50 75 105 25 ... 28
H12 3.15 6.30 95 130 75 ... 8
6.30 12.50 95 130 75 ... 10
H14 3.15 6.30 110 145 95 ... 5
6.30 12.50 110 145 95 ... 7
H16 3.15 4.00 130 165 115 ... 4
Alloy 3003
0 3.15 6.30 95 130 35 ... 25
6.30 12.50 95 130 35 ... 23
H12 3.15 6.30 120 160 85 ... 6
6.30 12.50 120 160 85 ... 9
H14 3.15 6.30 140 180 115 ... 5
6.30 12.50 140 180 115 ... 8
H16 3.15 4.00 165 205 145 ... 4
H112 6.30 12.50 115 ... 70 ... 8
Alloy Alclad 3003
0 3.15 6.30 90 125 30 ... 25
6.30 12.50 90 125 30 ... 23
H12 3.15 6.30 115 155 80 ... 6
6.30 12.50 115 155 80 ... 9
H14 3.15 6.30 135 175 110 ... 5
6.30 12.50 135 175 110 ... 8
H112 6.30 12.50 110 ... 65 ... 8
Alloy 3004
0 3.15 6.30 150 200 60 ... 18
6.30 12.50 150 200 60 ... 16
H32 3.15 6.30 190 240 145 ... 5
6.30 12.50 190 240 145 ... 6

5
 B 547/B 547M – 02

TABLE 3 Continued
Specified Thickness, mm Tensile Strength, MPa Yield Strength, (0.2 % offset), MPa Elongation in 50
Temper
Over Through max min min max mm, min, %

H34 3.15 6.30 220 265 170 ... 4

6.30 12.50 220 265 170 ... 5
H36 3.15 4.00 240 285 190 ... 4
Alloy Alclad 3004
0 3.15 6.30 145 195 55 ... 18
6.30 12.50 145 195 55 ... 16
H32 3.15 6.30 185 235 140 ... 5
6.30 12.50 185 235 140 ... 6
H34 3.15 6.30 215 260 165 ... 4
6.30 12.50 215 260 165 ... 5
H36 3.15 4.00 235 280 185 ... 4
Alloy 5050
0 3.15 6.30 125 165 40 ... 20
6.30 12.50 125 165 40 ... 20
H32 3.15 6.30 150 195 110 ... 6
H34 3.15 6.30 170 215 140 ... 5
H36 3.15 4.00 185 230 150 ... 4
Alloy 5052
0 3.15 6.30 170 215 65 ... 19
6.30 12.50 170 215 65 ... 18
H32 3.15 6.30 215 265 160 ... 7
6.30 12.50 215 265 160 ... 11
H34 3.15 6.30 235 285 180 ... 6
6.30 12.50 235 285 180 ... 10
H36 3.15 4.00 255 305 200 ... 4
H112 6.30 12.50 190 ... 110 ... 7
Alloy 5083
0 3.15 6.30 275 350 125 200 16
6.30 12.50 270 345 115 200 16
H321 4.75 12.50 305 385 215 295 12
Alloy 5086
0 3.15 6.30 240 305 95 ... 18
6.30 12.50 240 305 95 ... 16
H32 3.15 6.30 275 325 195 ... 8
6.30 12.50 275 325 195 ... 12
H34 3.15 6.30 300 350 235 ... 6
6.30 12.50 300 350 235 ... 10
H36 3.15 4.00 325 375 260 ... 6
Alloy 5154
0 3.15 6.30 205 285 75 ... 16
6.30 12.50 205 285 75 ... 18
H32 3.15 6.30 250 300 180 ... 8
6.30 12.50 250 300 180 ... 12
H34 3.15 6.30 270 320 200 ... 6
6.30 12.50 270 320 200 ... 10
H36 3.15 4.00 290 340 220 ... 4
Alloy 5454
0 3.15 6.30 215 285 85 ... 16
6.30 12.50 215 285 85 ... 18
H32 3.15 6.30 250 305 180 ... 8
6.30 12.50 250 305 180 ... 12
H34 3.15 6.30 270 325 200 ... 6
6.30 12.50 270 325 200 ... 10
H112 6.30 12.50 220 ... 125 ... 8
Alloy 6061
T4 3.15 6.30 205 ... 110 ... 16
T451D 6.30 12.50 205 ... 110 ... 18
T6 3.15 6.30 290 ... 240 ... 10
T651D 6.30 12.50 290 ... 240 ... 10
A
To determine conformance to this specification, each value for tensile strength and for yield strength shall be rounded to the nearest 1 MPa, and each value for
elongation to the nearest 0.5 % in accordance with the rounding-off method of Practice E 29.
B
See 10.2.2 for minimum mechanical properties across the weld area of the tube.
C
See Annex A1 for basis for establishment of mechanical property limits.

6
 B 547/B 547M – 02
D
For stress-relieved tempers (T451 and T651), characteristics and properties other than those specified may differ somewhat from the corresponding characteristics
and properties of material in the basic temper.
7. Chemical Composition Requirements
7.1 Limits:
7.1.1 The tube shall conform to the chemical composition
limits prescribed in Table 1. Conformance shall be determined
by the manufacturer of the sheet and plate used to produce the
tube by analyzing samples taken at the time the ingots are
poured, or by the tube manufacturer on samples taken from the
finished or semifinished product. If the tube manufacturer uses
sheet or plate whose chemical composition has been deter-
mined by analyzing samples taken at the time the ingots were
poured or has determined the chemical composition of the
material during the course of manufacture, he shall not be
required to sample and analyze the finished product.
NOTE 4—It is standard practice in the United States aluminum industry
to determine conformance to the chemical composition limits prior to
further processing of ingots into wrought products. Due to the continuous
nature of the process, it is not practical to keep a specific ingot analysis
identified with a specific quantity of finished material.
7.1.2 The specific filler metal alloy shall be selected by the
manufacturer from Table number A2 of AWS Specification
A 5.10; however, the filler alloy selected shall ensure conform-
ance with the requirement of 10.2.2.
7.2 Number of Samples—The number of samples taken for
determination of chemical composition shall be as follows:
7.2.1 When samples are taken at the time the ingots are
poured, at least one sample shall be taken for each group of
ingots poured simultaneously from the same source of molten
metal.
7.2.2 When samples are taken from the finished tube or
semifinished sheet or plate stock, a sample shall be taken to
represent each 4000 lb [2000 kg] or fraction thereof of material
in the lot from which the tube is fabricated, except that no more
than one sample shall be required per piece.
7.3 Methods of Sampling—Samples for determination of
chemical composition shall be taken in accordance with one of
the following methods:
7.3.1 Samples for chemical analysis shall be taken from the
sheet or plate stock or the tube by drilling, sawing, milling,
turning, or clipping a representative piece or pieces to obtain a
weight of prepared sample not less than 75 g. Sampling shall
be in accordance with Practice E 55.
NOTE 5—It is difficult to obtain a reliable analysis of each of the
components of clad materials using material in its finished state. A
reasonably accurate determination of the core composition can be made if
the cladding is substantially removed prior to analysis. The cladding
composition is more difficult to determine because of the relatively thin
layer and because of diffusion of core elements to the cladding. The
correctness of cladding alloy used can usually be verified by a combina-
tion of metallographic examination and spectrochemical analysis of the
surface at several widely separated points.
7.3.2 Sampling for spectrochemical analysis shall be in
accordance with Practices E 716. Samples for other methods of
analysis shall be suitable for the form of material being
analyzed and the type of analytical method used.
7.4 Methods of Analysis—The determination of chemical
composition shall be made in accordance with suitable chemi-
7
cal (Test Methods E 34), spectrochemical (Test Methods
E 227, E 607, or E 1251), or other methods. In case of dispute,
the methods of analysis shall be agreed upon between the
producer and the purchaser.
8. Heat Treatment
8.1 Unless otherwise specified, producer or supplier heat
treatment for the applicable tempers in Table 2 [Table 3] shall
be in accordance with AMS 2772.
8.2 When specified, heat treatment of applicable tempers in
Table 2 [Table 3] shall be in accordance with Practice B 918.
9. Tensile Requirements
9.1 Limits—The tube shall be supplied in the alloy, temper,
and size specified in the contract or order. The temper of the
tubes shall be designated as that of the sheet or plate from
which the tubes are formed, and the sheet or plate shall
conform to the tensile property requirements prescribed in
Table 2 [Table 3].
9.2 Number of Specimens—One tension test specimen shall
be taken from a random sheet representing each 2000 lb [1000
kg] of sheet, or from random plate representing each 4000 lb
[2000 kg] of plate of the same alloy, temper, and thickness,
from which the tube is fabricated, or such other quantity as
may be agreed upon by the producer and the purchaser.
9.3 Test Specimens—Tension test specimens taken from the
sheet and plate of Alloys 1100, 3003, Alclad 3003, 3004,
Alclad 3004, 5050, 5052, 5083, 5086, 5154, and 5454 shall be
taken parallel to the direction of rolling; for sheet and plate of
Alloy 6061 the specimens shall be taken perpendicular to the
direction of rolling. Refer to Test Methods B 557 or B 557M
for specimen geometry.
9.4 Test Methods—The tension tests shall be made in
accordance with Test Methods B 557 or B 557M.
10. Supplementary Tensile Requirements
10.1 Tube shall be capable of meeting the requirements of
10.2. When so specified in the contract or purchase order,
additional tension test specimens shall be taken at the same
frequency as specified in 9.2 and tested in accordance with Test
Methods B 557 or B 557M.
10.2 Test Specimens:
10.2.1 Longitudinal specimens in accordance with Test
Methods B 557 or B 557M, shall be taken from tubes at 90°
from the weld and test results shall comply with the require-
ments of Table 2 [Table 3] for applicable alloy and temper.
10.2.2 Specimens conforming to QW-462 of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, shall be taken
transversely across the weld area and test results shall comply
with the requirements of Table 2 [Table 3] for the annealed (O)
temper of the applicable alloy, except that the minimum tensile
strength for alloy and tempers 6061-T4, T451, T6, and T651
shall be 24.0 ksi [165 MPa].
 B 547/B 547M – 02
11. Pressure Tests
11.1 When specified by the purchaser at the time of placing
the order, each tube shall be tested by one of the following
methods at the option of the producer or supplier.
11.1.1 Each tube shall withstand, without evidence of leak-
age, an internal air gage pressure of not less than 60 psi [410
kPa] while immersed in water or other suitable liquid.
11.1.2 Each tube shall be tested pneumatically at not less
than 90 psi [620 kPa] air gage pressure with a gage that will
indicate loss of pressure. There shall not be any loss of pressure
after application of 90 psi [620 kPa] for a period of not less
than 15 s.
11.1.3 Each tube shall withstand, without evidence of leak-
age, hydrostatic gage pressure of not less than 90 psi [620 kPa].
11.1.4 When specified in the order or contract, the tube shall
be subjected to other pressure or hydrostatic tests as agreed
upon by the producer or supplier and the purchaser.
12. Radiographic Examination
12.1 When “full radiography” is specified, Paragraph UW-
11(a) of Section VIII, Division 1, of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, shall be complied with.
12.2 When “spot radiography” is specified, all intersections
of longitudinal and circumferential welds shall be radio-
graphed. Provisions of Paragraph UW-52 of Section VIII shall
be complied with for spot radiographic examination.
NOTE 6—Circumferential welds are present only when individually
fabricated tubes must be welded together to produce the ordered length.
13. Cladding Thickness
13.1 For Alclad 3003 and Alclad 3004, each 7072 plate
which is bonded to the Alloy 3003 or 3004 ingot or slab
preparatory to rolling to the specified thickness of sheet or
plate, shall be of the composition shown in Table 1.
13.2 When the thickness of the cladding is to be determined
on finished tubes, transverse cross sections of at least three
tubes from the lot, approximately 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] in length,
shall be mounted to expose an edge perpendicular to the axis of
the tube and polished for examination with a metallurgical
microscope. The cladding thickness shall be measured under a
magnification of 1003, at four points around the circumfer-
ence 90° apart but excluding the weld area, in each sample. The
cladding thickness shall be taken as the average of the
measurements in five fields approximately 0.1 in. [2.5 mm]
apart in each sample. The average cladding thickness on each
clad surface shall be not less than 4 % of the specified
composite thickness.
14. Dimensional Tolerances
14.1 Variations from the specified dimensions for the tube
ordered shall not exceed the amounts prescribed in Table 4
[Table 5], Table 6 [Table 7], Table 8, and Table 9.
14.2 Sampling for Inspection—Examination for dimen-
sional conformance shall be made to ensure conformance to the
tolerance specified.
15. General Quality
15.1 Unless otherwise specified, the tubes shall be specified
in the mill finish and shall be uniform as defined by the
requirements of this specification and shall be commercially
sound. Any requirement not so covered is subject to negotia-
tion between the producer and purchaser. Grinding to remove
minor surface imperfections shall not be cause for rejection
provided the ground area conforms to the minimum tolerances
of Table 6 [Table 7]. Discoloration that is characteristic of
proper solution heat treatment shall not be cause for rejection.
15.2 Each tube shall be examined to determine conformance
to this specification with respect to general quality and identi-
fication marking. On approval of the purchaser, however, the
producer or supplier may use a system of statistical quality
control for such examinations.
16. Source Inspection
16.1 If the purchaser desires that his representative inspect
or witness the inspection and testing of the material prior to
shipment, such agreement shall be made by the purchaser and
producer as part of the purchase contract.

TABLE 4 Diameter and Circumferential Tolerances

Maximum Permissible Permissible Deviation of
Specified Inside Specified Wall Ovality in Free State— Outside Circumference
Diameter, in. Thickness, in. Difference between Major from theoretical, in.,
and Minor Axes, in. plus and minus
9 to 12 excl 0.125–0.188 ⁄
12 18 ⁄
12 to 16 excl 0.125–0.250 ⁄
12 ⁄
3 16

12 to 16 excl 0.251–0.312 1⁄4 3⁄16

16 to 20 excl 0.125–0.311 1⁄2 3⁄16

16 to 20 excl 0.312–0.375 1⁄4 3⁄16

20 to 24 excl 0.125–0.311 1⁄2 1⁄4

20 to 24 excl 0.312–0.500 1⁄4 1⁄4

24 to 30 excl 0.125–0.311 1⁄2 1⁄4

24 to 30 excl 0.312–0.500 1⁄4 1⁄4

A
30 to 36 excl 0.125–0.187 1⁄4

30 to 36 excl 0.188–0.311 ⁄
12 1⁄4

30 to 36 excl 0.312–0.500 ⁄
38 1⁄4
A
36 to 48 excl 0.125–0.311 1⁄4

36 to 48 excl 0.312–0.500 ⁄
12 1⁄4
A
48 to 60 incl 0.125–0.311 1⁄4

48 to 60 incl 0.312–0.438 ⁄
34 1⁄4

48 to 60 incl 0.439–0.500 ⁄
34 5⁄16

A
Tube is not sufficiently rigid to permit diametrical measurement in free state.

8
 B 547/B 547M – 02
TABLE 5 Diameter and Circumferential Tolerances, [SI Units]

Specified Inside Diameter, mm Specified Wall Thickness, mm Maximum Permissible Permissible Deviation of
Ovality in Free State Outside Circumference
Distance between Major from Theoretical, mm
Over Through Over Through and Minor Axes, mm plus and minus
225 300 3.15 5.00 12.5 3.5
300 400 3.15 6.30 12.5 5
300 400 6.30 8.00 6.5 5
400 500 3.15 8.00 12.5 5
400 500 8.00 10.00 6.5 5
500 600 3.15 8.00 13 6.5
500 600 8.00 12.50 7 6.5
600 750 3.15 8.00 13 6.5
600 750 8.00 12.50 7 6.5
A
750 900 3.15 5.00 6.5
750 900 4.80 8.00 13 6.5
750 900 8.00 12.50 10 6.5
A
900 1200 3.15 8.00 6.5
900 1200 8.00 12.50 13 6.5
A
1200 1500 3.15 8.00 6.5
1200 1500 8.00 11.00 19 6.5
1200 1500 11.00 12.50 19 8
A
Tube is not sufficiently rigid to permit diametrical measurement in free state.

TABLE 6 Wall Thickness Tolerances for Rolled and Welded Round Tube (Exclusive of Weld Bead), (Inch-Pound Units)A,B
Permissible Deviation of Thickness at Any Point from Specified Wall Thickness, plus and minus, in.
Specified Wall Thickness, in.
Specified inside Diameter, in.
Over 12 Over 18 Over 25 Over 31 Over 37 Over 43 Over 50
Over Through Up Through 12
Through 18 Through 25 Through 31 Through 37 Through 43 Through 50 Through 56
0.124 0.126 0.0045 0.0055 0.007 0.009 0.011 0.013 ... ...
0.126 0.158 0.0055 0.007 0.009 0.011 0.013 0.015 ... ...
0.158 0.197 0.007 0.009 0.011 0.013 0.015 0.018 ... ...
0.197 0.248 0.009 0.011 0.013 0.015 0.018 0.022 0.027 ...
0.248 0.315 0.012 0.014 0.015 0.018 0.022 0.027 0.035 0.043
0.315 0.394 0.015 0.017 0.020 0.023 0.027 0.033 0.041 0.051
0.394 0.500 0.023 0.023 0.027 0.032 0.035 0.043 0.053 0.065
A
Not applicable to the weld area of the tube.
B
These tolerances apply to tube butt welded longitudinally.

TABLE 7 Wall Thickness Tolerances for Rolled and Welded Round Tube (Exclusive of Weld Bead), [SI Units]A,B
Permissible Deviation of Thickness at Any Point from Specified Wall Thickness, plus and minus, mm
Specified Wall Thickness, mm
Specified inside Diameter, mm
Over 320 Over 480 Over 640 Over 800 Over 950 Over 1110 Over 1270
Over Through Up Through 320
Through 480 Through 640 Through 800 Through 950 Through 1110 Through 1270 Through 1430
3.15 3.20 0.11 0.14 0.18 0.23 0.28 0.33 ... ...
3.20 4.00 0.14 0.18 0.23 0.28 0.33 0.38 ... ...
4.00 5.00 0.18 0.23 0.28 0.33 0.38 0.46 ... ...
5.00 6.30 0.23 0.28 0.33 0.38 0.46 0.56 0.69 ...
6.30 8.00 0.30 0.36 0.38 0.46 0.56 0.69 0.89 1.10
8.00 10.00 0.38 0.43 0.51 0.58 0.69 0.84 1.05 1.30
10.00 12.50 0.58 0.58 0.69 0.81 0.89 1.10 1.35 1.65
A
Not applicable to the weld area of the tube.
B
These tolerances apply to tube butt welded longitudinally.

16.2 When such inspection or witness of inspection and TABLE 8 Length Tolerances for Rolled and Welded Round Tube
testing is agreed upon, the producer shall afford the purchaser’s Permissible Variation
representative all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the from
Specified Wall
Specified Length,
material meets the requirements of this specification. Inspec- Thickness, over through
in. [mm], for
in. [mm]
tion and test shall be conducted so there is no unnecessary Lengths up Through
interference with the producer’s operations. 10 ft [3 m]
0.125–0.249 [3.15] [6.30] 6 1⁄8 [4]
0.250–0.500 [6.30] [12.50] + 3⁄8 [10]
17. Retest and Rejection
17.1 If any material fails to conform to all of the applicable
requirements of this specification, it shall be cause for rejection
of the inspection lot. plan is provided or approved by the purchaser through the
17.2 When there is evidence that a failed specimen was not contract or purchase order, at least two additional specimens
representative of the inspection lot and when no other sampling shall be selected to replace each test specimen that failed. All

9
 B 547/B 547M – 02
TABLE 9 Straightness Tolerances for Rolled and
Welded Round Tube
Permissible deviation from straight: 1⁄2 in. in any 10 ft [13 mm in any 3 m]
specimens so selected for retest shall meet the requirements of
the specification or the lot shall be subject to rejection.
17.3 Material in which defects are discovered subsequent to
inspection may be rejected.
17.4 If material is rejected by the purchaser, the producer or
supplier is responsible only for replacement of material to the
purchaser. As much as possible of the rejected material shall be
returned to the producer or supplier.
18. Certification
18.1 The producer or supplier shall, on request, furnish to
the purchaser a certificate stating that the material has been
sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with this speci-
fication and has met the requirements.
19. Identification Marking
19.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order, all
material shall be marked in accordance with Practice B 666/
B 666M. In addition, material furnished in the T4, T451, T6,
and T651 tempers shall also be identified by a lot number
marked in at least one location on each piece.
ANNEXES
(Mandatory Information)
A1. BASIS FOR INCLUSION OF PROPERTY LIMITS
A1.1 Limits are established at a level at which a statistical
evaluation of the data indicates that 99 % of the population
obtained from all standard material meets the limit with 95 %
confidence. For the products described, mechanical property
limits for the respective size ranges are based on the analyses
of at least 100 data from standard production material with no
more than ten data from a given lot. All tests are performed in
accordance with the appropriate ASTM test methods. For
A2. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR INCLUSION OF NEW ALUMINUM AND ALUMINUM
ALLOYS IN THIS SPECIFICATION
A2.1 Prior to acceptance for inclusion in this specification,
the composition of wrought or cast aluminum or aluminum
alloy shall be registered in accordance with ANSI H35.1. The
Aluminum Association10 holds the Secretariat of ANSI H35
Committee and administers the criteria and procedures for
registration.
A2.2 If it is documented that the Aluminum Association
10
The Aluminum Association, 900 19th Street, Washington, DC 20006.
10
19.2 Tubes tested radiographically shall also be identified as
“Spot Radiographed” or “Full Radiographed.”
20. Packaging and Package Marking
20.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
order, the material shall be packaged to provide adequate
protection during normal handling and transportation and each
package shall contain only one size and alloy of material unless
otherwise agreed. The type of packaging and gross weight
[mass] of the containers shall, unless otherwise agreed, be at
the producer’s or supplier’s discretion, provided they are such
as to ensure acceptance by common or other carriers for safe
transportation at the lowest rate to the delivery point.
20.2 Each shipping container shall be marked with the
purchase order number, material size, specification number,
alloy and temper, gross and net weights [masses], and the
producer’s or supplier’s name or trademark.
20.3 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
material shall be preserved, packaged, and packed in accor-
dance with the requirements of Practices B 660. The applicable
levels shall be as specified in the contract or order. Marking for
shipment of such material shall be in accordance with Fed. Std.
No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129 for Military
agencies.
21. Keywords
21.1 aluminum alloy; arc-welded tube
informational purposes, refer to “Statistical Aspects of Me-
chanical Property Assurance” in the Related Material section of
the Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02. Metric
mechanical property limits in this issue were derived from the
inch-pound system limits that were developed under the above
principles. As test data on metric dimensioned specimens are
accumulated, some refinement of limits, particularly for elon-
gations measured in 5D, can be anticipated.
could not or would not register a given composition, an
alternative procedure and the criteria for acceptance shall be as
follows:
A2.2.1 The designation submitted for inclusion does not
utilize the same designation system as described in ANSI
H35.1 or H35.1 (M). A designation not in conflict with other
designation systems or a trade name is acceptable.
A2.2.2 The aluminum or aluminum alloy has been offered
for sale in commercial quantities within the prior twelve
months to at least three identifiable users.
 B 547/B 547M – 02
A2.2.3 The complete chemical composition limits are sub- Alloys and unalloyed aluminum not made by a refining
mitted. process 0.0X
0.10 through 0.55 % 0.XX
A2.2.4 The composition is, in the judgment of the respon- (It is customary to express limits of 0.30 through 0.55 % as
sible subcommittee, significantly different from that of any 0.X0 or 0.X5)
other aluminum or aluminum alloy already in this specifica- Over 0.55 % 0.X, X.X, etc.
(Except that combined Si + Fe limits for 99.00 % minimum
tion. aluminum must be expressed as 0.XX or 1.XX)
A2.2.5 For codification purposes, an alloying element is any
element intentionally added for any purpose other than grain A2.2.7 Standard limits for alloying elements and impurities
refinement and for which minimum and maximum limits are are expressed in the following sequence: Silicon; Iron; Copper;
specified. Unalloyed aluminum contains a minimum of Manganese; Magnesium; Chromium; Nickel; Zinc (Note
99.00 % aluminum. A2.1); Titanium; Other Elements, Each; Other Elements, Total;
A2.2.6 Standard limits for alloying elements and impurities Aluminum (Note A2.2).
are expressed to the following decimal places: NOTE A2.1—Additional specified elements having limits are inserted in
Less than 0.001 % 0.000X alphabetical order of their chemical symbols between zinc and titanium, or
0.001 to but less than 0.01 % 0.00X are specified in footnotes.
0.01 to but less than 0.10 % NOTE A2.2—Aluminum is specified as minimum for unalloyed alumi-
Unalloyed aluminum made by a refining process 0.0XX num and as a remainder for aluminum alloys.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

11
 Designation: B 548 – 03
Standard Test Method for
Ultrasonic Inspection of Aluminum-Alloy Plate for Pressure
Vessels1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 548; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers pulse-echo ultrasonic inspection
of aluminum-alloy plate of thickness equal to or greater than
0.500 in. (12.7 mm) for use in the fabrication of pressure
vessels. The ultrasonic test is employed to detect gross internal
discontinuities oriented in a direction parallel to the rolled
surface such as cracks, ruptures, and laminations, and to
provide assurance that only plate that is free from rejectable
discontinuities is accepted for delivery.
1.2 The inspection method and acceptance criteria included
in this standard shall be limited to plate of the following
aluminum alloys: 1060, 1100, 3003, Alclad 3003, 3004, Alclad
3004, 5050, 5052, 5083, 5086, 5154, 5254, 5454, 5456, 5652,
6061, and Alclad 6061.
1.3 This test method applies only to ultrasonic tests using
pulsed longitudinal waves which are transmitted and received
by a search unit containing either a single crystal or a
combination of electrically interconnected multiple crystals.
Ultrasonic tests employing either the through-transmission or
the angle-beam techniques are not included.
1.4 This test method shall be used when ultrasonic inspec-
tion as prescribed herein is required by the contract, purchase
order, or referenced plate specification.
1.5 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys and is under the jurisdiction of Subcommittee B07.03 on
Aluminum Alloy Wrought Products.
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2003. Published November 2003. Originally
approved in 1971. Last previous edition approved in 1997 as B 548 – 90 (1997).
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
2.2 ASTM Standards: 2
E 114 Practice for Ultrasonic Pulse-Echo Straight-Beam
Examination by the Contact Method
E 214 Practice for Immersed Ultrasonic Examination by the
Reflection Method Using Pulsed Longitudinal Waves
E 317 Practice for Evaluating Performance Characteristics
of Ultrasonic Pulse-Echo Testing Systems Without the Use
of Electronic Measurement Instruments
2.3 Other Standards:
ASNT Recommended Practice for Nondestructive Testing
Personnel Qualification and Certification—Ultrasonic
Testing Method—SNT-TC-1A3
3. Summary of Method
3.1 The plate is inspected ultrasonically by scanning one
rolled surface with a beam of pulsed longitudinal waves which
is oriented in a direction perpendicular to the entry surface of
the plate. The ultrasound is transmitted into the plate either by
the direct contact, immersion, or liquid-column coupling
method. During the scan, an indication representing the first
back reflection is observed on the A-scan screen of the test
instrument.
3.2 When the test system sensitivity level is appropriately
adjusted, a discontinuity is detected during the scan by noting
an isolated indication associated with a loss of the first back
reflection indication. The apparent size of the discontinuity is
determined by measuring the total area in the scanned entry
surface of the plate where the isolated indication and the loss
of back reflection persist. The estimated discontinuity size and
location are then compared with suitable acceptance criteria.
NOTE 1—Additional information describing ultrasonic tests by the
direct contact method and by the immersion method is available in
Practices E 114 and E 214.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3
Available from The American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT), P.O.
Box 28518, 1711 Arlingate Ln., Columbus, OH 43228-0518.
 B 548 – 03
4. Significance and Use
4.1 A number of factors such as the condition of the entry
and back surfaces of the plate, the inclination of the ultrasonic
beam with respect to the entry surface, and the performance
characteristics of the test system may cause either a reduction
of isolated indications or a substantial loss of back reflection
and thereby could seriously impair the reliability of the test
procedure outlined in this standard.
4.2 Accurate evaluations of discontinuity size also may be
limited significantly by variations in beam characteristics
which exist in most search units. For this reason, discontinuity
size as determined by the test procedure outlined in this method
is regarded as “apparent” or “estimated” in recognition of the
limited quantitative value of the measurement.
4.3 Because a large number of interacting variables in a test
system can adversely influence the results of an ultrasonic test,
the actual quantitative effects of detected discontinuities upon
the mechanical properties of the inspected plate are difficult to
establish. Consequently, this ultrasonic inspection method is
not applicable as an exclusive indicator of the ultimate quality
and performance of pressure vessels but provides a reliable
control of plate quality to avoid failure during the forming
process for fabrication of vessels.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Test Instrument—Any electronic device that produces
pulsed longitudinal waves and displays ultrasonic reflections
on an A-scan indicator when used with an appropriate search
unit is satisfactory. The instrument shall provide stable, linear
amplification of received pulses at a selected test frequency and
shall be free from significant interface signal interference at the
required sensitivity level.
5.2 Search Unit—The search unit recommended for this
standard is the flat nonfocusing type, and contains a piezoelec-
tric crystal which generates and receives longitudinal waves at
the rated frequency when connected to the test instrument
through a suitable coaxial cable. A dual-crystal search unit
containing both a transmitting and a receiving crystal in one
container may be used provided the test instrument will
accommodate two-crystal operation and the resulting pulse-
echo test is equivalent to that obtained with a search unit
containing a single-crystal.
5.2.1 The total effective area of the crystal or combination
of crystals in the search unit used for initial scanning shall not
be less than 0.4 in.2(2.6 cm2) nor greater than 3.0 in.2(19.4
cm2).
5.2.2 The effective diameter of the round search unit used to
evaluate discontinuity size shall not exceed 0.75 in. (19 mm).
NOTE 2—For control purposes, the performance characteristics of the
test instrument and search unit may be established in accordance with
procedures outlined in Practice E 317.
5.3 Tank—For tests by the immersion method, any con-
tainer is satisfactory that will facilitate the accurate, stable
positioning of both the search unit and the plate to be
inspected.
5.4 Scanning Apparatus—During the inspection procedure,
the search unit is supported by any one of the following
2
devices. The scanning apparatus shall permit measurement of
both the scan distance and the index distance within 60.1 in.
(62 mm).
5.4.1 Manipulator and Bridge—When a manipulator is
used in tests by the immersion method, the manipulator shall
adequately support a search tube containing a search unit and
shall provide fine adjustment of angle within 1° in two vertical
planes that are perpendicular to each other. The bridge shall be
of sufficient strength to provide rigid support for the manipu-
lator and shall allow smooth, accurate positioning of the search
unit. Special search unit supporting fixtures may be used
provided they meet the requirements prescribed for a manipu-
lator and bridge.
5.4.2 Liquid Coupling Nozzle—For tests by the liquid-
column coupling method, the nozzle is usually positioned
manually and shall be capable of containing the couplant while
rigidly supporting the search unit with its active surface
immersed in the couplant. The couplant distance shall be
maintained so that the second couplant reflection is to the right
of the first back reflection on the instrument cathode ray tube
(CRT). The couplant path shall not vary more than 61⁄4 in. (6.4
mm) during calibration, initial scanning, and discontinuity
evaluation. The recommended minimum inside dimension of
the nozzle is 1.0 in. (25 mm) greater than the maximum
dimension of the crystal surface in the search unit. Provisions
also should be included for adjustment of search unit inclina-
tion within 1° in two vertical planes that are perpendicular to
each other.
NOTE 3—Nozzles containing either sealed or unsealed openings may be
used for inspecting plate provided the test results obtained with either
device are equivalent to those obtained by the immersion method.
5.4.3 Contact Scanning Unit—During tests by the contact
method, the search unit usually is supported and positioned
manually on the entry surface of the inspected plate. However,
special fixtures for contact scanning may be employed pro-
vided their use ensures conformance to the requirements in this
specification.
5.5 Couplant—Clean, deaerated water at room temperature
is the recommended couplant for tests either by the immersion
method or by the liquid-column coupling technique. Inhibitors
or wetting agents or both may be used. For tests by the contact
method, the recommended couplant is clean, light-grade oil.
NOTE 4—Other coupling liquids may be employed for inspecting plate
provided their use does not adversely affect test results.
6. Personnel Requirements
6.1 The testing operator performing the ultrasonic examina-
tion prescribed in this standard shall be qualified and certified
to at least a Level I—Ultrasonic Testing in accordance with the
ASNT Recommended Practice SNT-TC-1A.
6.2 The required documentation supporting qualification
and certification of ultrasonic testing operators shall be estab-
lished by the certifying agency and shall be available upon
request by the purchaser.
7. Condition of Plate
7.1 The entry and back surfaces of the inspected plate shall
be sufficiently clean, smooth, and flat to maintain a first back
 B 548 – 03
reflection amplitude greater than 50 % of the initial standard-
ization amplitude while scanning an area in the plate that does
not contain significant isolated ultrasonic discontinuities.
7.2 The inspected plate shall be at room temperature during
the test.
8. Procedure
8.1 Preferred Method—The ultrasonic test may be per-
formed by either the liquid column coupling, the direct contact,
or the immersion methods. However, the immersion method is
preferred.
8.1.1 Maintain the couplant distance so that the second
couplant reflection is to the right of the first back reflection on
the instrument’s A-scan display. The couplant path shall not
vary more than 61⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) during calibration, initial
scanning, and discontinuity evaluation.
8.2 Test Frequency—When using any of the three methods
listed in 8.1, the recommended test frequency is 5.0 MHz.
Other test frequencies between 2.0 MHz and 10.0 MHz may be
employed when necessary to minimize possible adverse effects
of plate thickness, microstructure, and test system characteris-
tics upon test results and thereby maintain a clean, easily
interpreted A-scan screen pattern throughout the inspection.
8.3 Sensitivity Standardization—Standardize the sensitivity
level of the test system operating at the selected frequency by
adjusting the instrument gain control to obtain a first back
reflection amplitude of 75 6 5 % of the vertical limit exhibited
by the A-scan indicator when the search unit is positioned over
an area free from significant discontinuities in the plate to be
inspected. During tests by either the immersion method or the
liquid column coupling method, adjust the angular alignment
of the search unit to obtain a maximum number of back
reflections before the final sensitivity level is established.
8.4 Scanning—With no further adjustments of the instru-
ment gain controls, locate the search unit over one corner of the
plate to be inspected so that the edge of the crystal in the search
unit is about 1 in. (25 mm) from either edge of the plate.
8.4.1 Subsequent to checking the angular alignment of the
search unit with respect to the rolled entry surface to ensure a
maximum first back reflection, proceed to scan the plate
continuously by moving the search unit at a constant scanning
rate (see 8.6) from the initial starting position to the opposite
edge in a direction perpendicular to the predominant rolling
direction of the plate.
8.4.2 During the scan, note the occurrence of isolated
discontinuity indications and monitor the amplitude of the first
back reflection by continuously observing the A-scan indicator
screen.
NOTE 5—Auxiliary monitoring devices may be employed in the test
system to enhance detection reliability during the scan.
8.5 Scan Index—When the initial scan is completed, move
the search unit over a predetermined scan index distance in a
direction parallel to the predominant rolling direction of the
plate and proceed with a second scan along a line parallel to the
initial scanning direction while observing the test pattern on the
A-scan indicator screen. Calculate the scan index distance as
follows:
Scan index distance ~in.!, Si 5 0.8 1 0.7 Ds (1)
3
Scan index distance ~mm!, Si 5 20 1 0.7 Ds (2)
where:
Ds = actual crystal diameter.
8.5.1 Continue the inspection by constantly observing the
test pattern on the A-scan indicator while successively scan-
ning the plate at a constant scanning rate in a direction
perpendicular to the predominant rolling direction of the plate
and indexing the search unit through the index distance
calculated in 8.5.
8.5.2 During the inspection procedure, check the test system
sensitivity standardization periodically by noting the amplitude
of the first back reflection when the search unit is repositioned
over the reference area of the plate and by adjusting the
instrument gain control as required to maintain the sensitivity
standardization specified previously in 8.3.
8.6 Scanning Rate—When the screen pattern on the A-scan
indicator is monitored visually by the test operator during the
inspection, the scanning rate shall not be greater than 12 in./s
(305 mm/s).
NOTE 6—Scanning rates greater than 12 in./s (305 mm/s) may be
employed if auxiliary monitoring apparatus is used to maintain adequate
detection reliability.
8.7 Detection of Discontinuities—When an isolated ultra-
sonic indication of amplitude greater than 30 % of the A-scan
vertical limit is encountered or when the first back reflection
indication decreases to an amplitude less than 5 % of the
vertical limit at any time during the inspection procedure, stop
the scan and angulate the search unit to obtain a maximum
isolated indication and to determine that the loss of back
reflection is not caused by misalignment of the search unit with
respect to the plate.
8.7.1 To ensure that the loss of back reflection is not caused
by surface interference, check the condition of both the entry
and back surfaces of the plate at the location where a
substantial (95 % or greater) loss of back reflection occurs.
8.7.2 Either a maximized isolated ultrasonic indication ex-
hibiting an amplitude greater than 50 % of the amplitude of the
initial first back reflection used for standardization, or a
substantial loss of the first back reflection indication not
attributable to either search unit misalignment or surface
interference, is an indication of an internal discontinuity.
NOTE 7—Isolated indications occurring midway between the entry
surface indication and the first back reflection may cause a second
indication at the location of the first back reflection on the A-scan screen.
When this condition is verified by checking the multiple back reflection
pattern, a complete loss of the first back reflection can be assumed.
8.8 Estimation of Discontinuity Size—Note the location of
the search unit where the scan was stopped when either an
isolated indication or a loss of back reflection was observed.
8.8.1 Using a search unit containing a crystal of effective
diameter no greater than 0.75 in. (19 mm), make an evaluation
scan of an entire 6-in. (152-mm) square area which is centered
around the point on the plate entry surface where the scan was
discontinued. The recommended index distance for this evalu-
ation is as follows: Si(in. or mm) = 0.7 Ds, where Ds is the
actual diameter of the search unit crystal.
 B 548 – 03
8.8.2 To determine the apparent size of the discontinuity,
mark each location corresponding to the center of the search
unit on the plate entry surface where a 95 6 5 % loss of first
back reflection is observed or where the isolated indication
exhibits an amplitude equal to 50 6 5 % of the amplitude of
the initial first back reflection established during the standard-
ization procedure outlined in 8.3.
8.8.3 Continue to mark the location of the search unit at
each point where either or both of the discontinuity conditions
specified in paragraph 8.8.2 are observed. The entire disconti-
nuity shall be outlined even if it extends beyond the original
6-in. (152-mm) square evaluation scan area.
8.8.4 The estimated discontinuity size is the area defined by
the boundary consisting of successive marks as established by
this procedure.
NOTE 8—Automatic recording devices may be used to establish the
estimated size of a discontinuity provided the recorded results are
equivalent to those obtained by the procedure presented in 8.8.
8.9 When the estimated size of a detected discontinuity is
determined, return the search unit to the original stopping
position and continue the initial scan to complete the inspec-
tion.
9. Acceptance Standards
9.1 Upon completing the inspection procedure, measure the
longest dimension of each marked area representing a detected
discontinuity. Also, when an engineering drawing showing the
part to be fabricated from the plate is supplied, compare the
locations of the discontinuities with the dimensions on the
drawing.
9.2 If the longest dimension of the marked area representing
a discontinuity causing a complete loss of back reflection
(95 % or greater) exceeds 1.0 in. (25 mm), the discontinuity is
considered to be significant and the plate shall be subject to
rejection.
9.3 If the length of the marked area representing a discon-
tinuity causing an isolated ultrasonic indication without a
complete loss of back reflection (95 % or greater) exceeds 3.0
in. (76 mm), the discontinuity is considered to be significant
and the plate shall be subject to rejection.
FIG. 1 Stamp for Identifying Acceptable Plate
4
9.4 If each of two marked areas representing two adjacent
discontinuities causing isolated ultrasonic indications without a
complete loss of back reflection (95 % or greater) is longer
than 1.0 in., and if they are located within 3.0 in. of each other,
the proximity between the two discontinuities is considered to
be significant, and the plate shall be subject to rejection.
NOTE 9—A template containing a 1.0-in. diameter hole and a 3.0-in.
diameter hole is a convenient device for rapidly establishing the signifi-
cance of discontinuities. If the discontinuities described in 9.2 and 9.3
cannot be totally enclosed within either the 1.0-in. diameter circle or the
3.0-in. diameter circle, respectively, then the plate containing such
discontinuities shall be subject to rejection. Similarly, if any portions of
two adjacent discontinuities greater than 1.0 in. in length as in accordance
with 9.4 appear within the 3.0-in. diameter circle, the plate shall be subject
to rejection.
9.5 A plate containing significant discontinuities of reject-
able size shall be acceptable if it is established by the purchaser
that the discontinuities will be removed from the plate by
machining during the subsequent fabrication process.
9.6 Upon specific consent of the purchaser, a plate with
significant discontinuities may be accepted if repaired by
welding.
10. Report
10.1 When required by the purchaser, a report shall be
prepared and shall include the date of test and a list of
parameters including the type (model number) of instrument
and search unit, the test method, frequency, and the couplant
employed for the inspection.
10.2 Preparation of a drawing showing the location of all
significant discontinuities in the inspected plate is recom-
mended when the ultimate rejection or acceptance of the plate
is to be determined by negotiation between the manufacturer
and the purchaser.
10.3 The identification of an acceptable plate is desirable
and is recommended. For this purpose, a suitable stamp should
be employed to indicate conformance to this ultrasonic stan-
dard. The recommended stamp for identifying acceptable plate
is shown in Fig. 1.
 B 548 – 03

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 549 – 00
Standard Specification for
Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-
Clad Steel Reinforced (ACSR/AW)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 549; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers concentric-lay-stranded con-
ductors made from round aluminum 1350-H19 (extra hard)
aluminum wires and round aluminum-clad steel core wires for
use as overhead electrical conductors (Explanatory Note 1 and
Note 2).
1.2 The SI values of density and resistivity are to be
regarded as standard. For all other properties the inch-pound
units are regarded as standard and the SI units may be
approximate.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein.
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 230 Specification for Aluminum 1350-H19 Wire for Elec-
trical Purposes2
B 263 Test Method for Determination of Cross-Sectional
Area of Stranded Conductors2
B 354 Terminology Relating to Uninsulated Metallic Elec-
trical Conductors2
B 502 Specification for Aluminum-Clad Steel Core Wire for
Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-Clad Steel Reinforced2
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications3
2.3 ANSI Standards:4
ANSI C 42.100 Dictionary of Electrical and Electronics
Terms
ANSI H 35.1 American National Standard Alloy and Tem-
per Designation Systems for Aluminum
2.4 Other Standard:
NBS Handbook 100—Copper Wire Tables of the National
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-1 on
Electrical Conductors and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B01.07 on
Conductors of Light Metals.
Current edition approved April 10, 2000. Published June 2000. Originally
published as B 549 – 71. Last previous edition B 549 – 93.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
4 5
Available from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd St.,
13th Floor, New York, NY 10036.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
Bureau of Standards5
3. Terminology
3.1 Description of Terms Specific to This Standard
3.1.1 ACSR covered by this specification has one type of
steel core wire which is designated by the following abbrevia-
tion (Explanatory Note 2):
3.1.1.1 ACSR/AW—ACSR using aluminum-clad steel wire
(Explanatory Note 2).
4. Classification
4.1 For the purpose of this specification, conductors are
classified as follows (Explanatory Note 1 and Note 2):
4.1.1 Class AA—For bare conductors usually used in over-
head lines. These conductors are used as follows:
4.1.1.1 Conductors used for regular overhead line construc-
tion and
4.1.1.2 Conductors having a high ratio of mechanical
strength to current-carrying capacity used for overhead ground
wires and for extra-long span construction.
4.1.2 Class A—For conductors to be covered with weather-
resistant (weatherproof) materials.
5. Ordering Information
5.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information:
5.1.1 Quantity of each size, stranding, and class,
5.1.2 Conductor size: circular mil area or AWG of alumi-
num wires (Section 9 and Table 1),
5.1.3 Number of wires, aluminum and aluminum-clad steel
(Table 1),
5.1.4 Direction of lay of outer layer of aluminum wires if
other than right-hand (see 8.2),
5.1.5 Special tests, if required (see 15.3 and 15.5),
5.1.6 Package size (see 17.1 and Explanatory Note 5),
5.1.7 Special package marking, if required (Section 17),
5.1.8 Lagging, if required (see 17.3), and
5.1.9 Place of inspection (Section 16).
6. Requirement for Wires
6.1 Before stranding, the aluminum wires used shall meet
Available from the National Technical Information Service, 5285 Port Royal
Rd., Springfield, VA 22161.
 B 549
all the requirements of Specification B 230. stranding process. No weld shall occur within 50 ft (15 m) of
6.2 Before stranding, the aluminum-clad steel core wires a weld in the same wire or in any other wire of the completed
used shall meet all the requirements of Specification B 502. conductor (Explanatory Note 1).
7. Joints 7.2 There shall be no joints of any kind made in the finished
aluminum-clad steel wires.
7.1 Electric-butt welds, cold-pressure welds, or electric-
butt, cold-upset welds in the finished individual aluminum
wires composing the conductor may be made during the

TABLE 1 Construction Requirements of Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-Clad Steel ReinforcedA

NOTE 1—The size in boldface indicate more commonly used sizes. (+) indicates conductors with high strength to current capacity ratios.

Conductor Size (Aluminum Wire) Stranding Rated Strength Mass per Unit
Length
Aluminum Aluminum-Clad Steel
Nominal Diameter Nominal Diameter kip
Number of Number of
cmil Code Name AWG mm Class (1000
Wires Wires
in. mm in. mm lbf) kN lb/1000 ft kg/km
2312000 Thrasher/AW . . . 1171.49 AA 76 0.1744 4.4298 19 0.0814 2.068 55.3 246.0 2472 3679
2167000 Kiwi/AW . . . 1098.02 AA 72 0.0174 0.4407 7 0.1157 2.939 49.1 218.4 2262 3366
2156000 Bluebird/AW . . . 1092.45 AA 84 0.1602 4.0691 19 0.0961 2.441 59.0 262.4 2437 3627
1780000 Chukar/AW . . . 901.93 AA 84 0.1456 3.6982 19 0.0874 2.220 49.4 219.7 2013 2996

1590000 Falcon/AW . . . 805.65 AA 54 0.1716 4.3586 19 0.1030 2.616 53.0 235.7 1960 2917
1590000 Lapwing/AW . . . 805.65 AA 45 0.1880 4.7752 7 0.1253 3.183 41.8 185.9 1746 2598
1510500 Parrot/AW . . . 765.37 AA 54 0.1672 4.2469 19 0.1003 2.548 50.3 223.7 1860 2768
1510500 Nuthatch/AW . . . 765.37 AA 45 0.1832 4.6533 7 0.1221 3.101 39.7 176.8 1658 2467
1431000 Plover/AW . . . 725.09 AA 54 0.1628 4.1351 19 0.0977 2.482 47.7 212.2 1764 2625
1431000 Bobolink/AW . . . 725.09 AA 45 0.1783 4.5288 7 0.1189 3.020 37.6 167.2 1570 2336

1351500 Martin/AW . . . 684.81 AA 54 0.1582 4.0183 19 0.0949 2.410 45.1 200.6 1665 2478
1351500 Dipper/AW . . . 684.81 AA 45 0.1733 4.4018 7 0.1155 2.934 35.5 157.9 1483 2207
1272000 Pheasant/AW . . . 644.52 AA 54 0.1535 3.8989 19 0.0921 2.339 42.4 188.6 1568 2333
1272000 Bittern/AW . . . 644.52 AA 45 0.1681 4.2697 7 0.1121 2.847 33.4 148.6 1396 2078
1272000 Skylark/AW . . . 644.52 AA 36 0.1880 4.7752 1 0.1880 4.775 25.7 114.3 1272 1893

1192500 Grackle/AW . . . 604.24 AA 54 0.1486 3.7744 19 0.0892 2.266 40.2 178.8 1470 2188
1192500 Bunting/AW . . . 604.24 AA 45 0.1628 4.1351 7 0.1085 2.756 31.3 139.2 1309 1948
1113000 Finch/AW . . . 563.96 AA 54 0.1436 3.6474 19 0.0862 2.189 37.5 166.8 1373 2043
1113000 Bluejay/AW . . . 563.96 AA 45 0.1573 3.9954 7 0.1049 2.664 29.3 130.3 1222 1819
1033500 Curlew/AW . . . 523.67 AA 54 0.1383 3.5128 7 0.1383 3.513 35.6 158.3 1274 1896
1033500 Ortolan/AW . . . 523.67 AA 45 0.1515 3.8481 7 0.1010 2.565 27.1 120.5 1134 1688
1033500 Tanager/AW . . . 523.67 AA 36 0.1694 4.3028 1 0.1694 4.303 21.1 93.9 1033 1537

954000 Cardinal/AW . . . 483.39 AA 54 0.1329 3.3757 7 0.1329 3.376 32.9 146.3 1177 1752
954000 Rail/AW . . . 483.39 AA 45 0.1456 3.6982 7 0.0971 2.466 25.4 113.0 1047 1558
954000 Catbrid/AW . . . 483.39 AA 36 0.1628 4.1351 1 0.1628 4.135 19.5 86.7 954 1420
900000 Canary/AW . . . 456.03 AA 54 0.1291 3.2791 7 0.1291 3.279 31.0 137.9 1111 1653
900000 Ruddy/AW . . . 456.03 AA 45 0.1414 3.5916 7 0.0943 2.395 24.0 106.8 988 1470

795000 Mallary/AW . . . 402.83 AA 30 0.1628 4.1351 19 0.0977 2.482 37.1 165.0 1160 1726
795000 Condor/AW . . . 402.83 AA 54 0.1213 3.0810 7 0.1213 3.081 27.8 123.7 980 1458
795000 Tern/AW . . . 402.83 AA 45 0.1329 3.3757 7 0.0886 2.250 21.5 95.6 872 1298
795000 Drake/AW . . . 402.83 AA 26 0.1749 4.4425 7 0.1360 3.454 30.5 135.7 1041 1549
795000 Cuckoo/AW . . . 402.83 AA 24 0.1820 4.6228 7 0.1213 3.081 27.5 122.3 981 1460
795000 Coot/AW . . . 402.83 AA 36 0.1486 3.7744 1 0.1486 3.774 16.6 73.8 795 1183

715500 Redwing/AW . . . 362.54 AA 30 0.1544 3.9218 19 0.0926 2.352 33.4 148.6 1043 1552
715500 Starling/AW . . . 362.54 AA 26 0.1659 4.2139 7 0.1290 3.277 27.5 122.3 936 1393
715500 Stilt/AW . . . 362.54 AA 24 0.1727 4.3866 7 0.1151 2.924 24.8 110.3 883 1314
666600 Gannet/AW . . . 337.77 AA 26 0.1601 4.0665 7 0.1245 3.162 26.0 115.6 872 1298
666600 Flamingo/AW . . . 337.77 AA 24 0.1667 4.2342 7 0.1111 2.822 23.1 102.7 823 1225

636000 Egret/AW . . . 322.26 AA 30 0.1456 3.6982 19 0.0874 2.220 29.9 133.0 928 1381
636000 Sooter/AW . . . 322.26 AA 30 0.1456 3.6982 7 0.1456 3.698 29.3 130.3 935 1391
636000 Grosbeak/AW . . . 322.26 AA 26 0.1564 3.9726 7 0.1216 3.089 24.8 110.3 832 1238
636000 Rook/AW . . . 322.26 AA 24 0.1628 4.1351 7 0.1085 2.756 22.0 97.9 785 1168
636000 Swift/AW . . . 322.26 AA 36 0.1329 3.3757 1 0.1329 3.376 13.6 60.5 636 946
636000 Kingbird/AW . . . 322.26 AA 18 0.1880 4.7752 1 0.1880 4.775 15.0 66.7 676 1006

605000 Teal/AW ... 306.55 AA 30 0.1420 3.6068 19 0.0852 2.164 28.5 126.8 883 1314
605000 Wood Duck/AW ... 306.55 AA 30 0.1420 3.6068 7 0.1420 3.607 28.4 126.3 889 1323

2
 B 549

TABLE 1 Continued
Conductor Size (Aluminum Wire) Stranding Rated Strength Mass per Unit
Length
Aluminum Aluminum-Clad Steel
Nominal Diameter Nominal Diameter kip
Number of Number of
cmil Code Name AWG mm Class (1000
Wires Wires
in. mm in. mm lbf) kN lb/1000 ft kg/km
605000 Squab/AW ... 306.55 AA 26 0.1525 3.8735 7 0.1186 3.012 23.6 105.0 791 1177
605000 Peacock/AW ... 306.55 AA 24 0.1588 4.0335 7 0.1059 2.690 21.0 93.4 747 1112

556500 Eagle/AW . . . 281.98 AA 30 0.1362 3.4595 7 0.1362 3.459 26.8 119.2 818 1217
556500 Dove/AW . . . 281.98 AA 26 0.1463 3.7160 7 0.1138 2.891 21.9 97.4 728 1083
556500 Parakeet/AW . . . 281.98 AA 24 0.1523 3.8684 7 0.1015 2.578 19.3 85.8 687 1022
556500 Ospray/AW . . . 281.98 AA 18 0.1758 4.4653 1 0.1758 4.465 13.2 58.7 591 880

477000 Hen/AW . . . 241.70 AA 30 0.1261 3.2029 7 0.1261 3.203 23.4 104.1 701 1043
477000 Hawk/AW . . . 241.70 AA 26 0.1354 3.4392 7 0.1053 2.675 18.9 84.1 624 929
477000 Flicker/AW . . . 241.70 AA 24 0.1410 3.5814 7 0.0940 2.388 16.7 74.3 589 877
477000 Pelican/AW . . . 241.70 AA 18 0.1628 4.1351 1 0.1628 4.135 11.5 51.2 507 755

397500 Lark/AW . . . 201.41 AA 30 0.1151 2.9235 7 0.1151 2.924 19.6 87.2 584 869
397500 Ibls/AW . . . 201.41 AA 26 0.1236 3.1394 7 0.0961 2.441 15.8 70.3 520 774
397500 Brant/AW . . . 201.41 AA 24 0.1287 3.2690 7 0.0858 2.179 14.1 62.7 491 731
397500 Chickadee/AW . . . 201.41 AA 18 0.1486 3.7744 1 0.1486 3.774 9.8 43.5 422 628

336400 Oriole/AW . . . 170.45 AA 30 0.1059 2.6899 7 0.1059 2.690 16.7 74.3 495 737
336400 Linnet/AW . . . 170.45 AA 26 0.1137 2.8880 7 0.0884 2.245 13.5 60.0 440 655
336400 Merlin/AW . . . 170.45 AA 18 0.1367 3.4722 1 0.1367 3.472 8.5 38.0 357 531
300000 Ostrich/AW . . . 152.01 AA 26 0.1074 2.7280 7 0.0835 2.121 12.1 53.8 392 583
266800 Partridge/AW . . . 135.19 AA 26 0.1013 2.5730 7 0.0788 2.002 10.8 48.0 349 519
266800 Waxwing/AW . . . 135.19 AA 18 0.1217 3.0912 1 0.1217 3.091 6.8 30.3 283 421

211600 Penguin/AW 0000 107.22 AA,A 6 0.1878 4.7701 1 0.1878 4.770 7.7 34.2 277 412
211300 0000 107.07 AA(+) 12 0.1327 3.3706 7 0.1327 3.371 19.8 88.1 477 710
203200 0000 102.96 AA(+) 16 0.1127 2.8626 19 0.0977 2.482 27.1 120.5 601 894
190800 0000 96.68 AA(+) 12 0.1261 3.2029 7 0.1261 3.203 18.3 81.4 431 641
176900 0000 89.64 AA(+) 12 0.1214 3.0836 7 0.1214 3.084 16.9 75.2 399 594

167800 Pigeon/AW 000 85.02 AA,A 6 0.1672 4.2469 1 0.1672 4.247 6.3 28.0 219 326
159000 000 80.57 AA(+) 12 0.1151 2.9235 7 0.1151 2.924 15.3 68.1 359 534
152500 000 77.27 AA(+) 5 0.1747 4.4374 2 0.1747 4.437 9.7 43.0 281 418
141300 000 71.60 AA(+) 4 0.1880 4.7752 3 0.1880 4.775 14.2 63.2 373 555
134600 000 68.20 AA(+) 12 0.1059 2.6899 7 0.1059 2.690 13.0 57.8 304 452

133100 Quail/AW 00 67.44 AA,A 6 0.1489 3.7821 1 0.1489 3.782 5.1 22.8 174 259
121000 00 61.31 AA(+) 5 0.1556 3.9522 2 0.1556 3.952 8.0 35.7 223 332
112100 00 56.80 AA(+) 4 0.1674 4.2520 3 0.1674 4.252 11.9 52.9 296 441
110800 00 56.14 AA(+) 12 0.0961 2.4409 7 0.0961 2.441 10.8 48.0 250 372

105600 Raven/AW 0 53.51 AA,A 6 0.1327 3.3706 1 0.1327 3.371 4.3 18.9 138 205
101800 0 51.58 AA(+) 12 0.0921 2.3393 7 0.0921 2.339 9.9 44.1 230 342
99830 0 50.58 AA(+) 3 0.1824 4.6330 4 0.1824 4.633 16.4 72.9 395 588
95910 0 48.60 AA(+) 5 0.1385 3.5179 2 0.1385 3.518 6.6 29.3 177 263
88840 0 45.02 AA(+) 4 0.1429 3.6297 3 0.1490 3.785 9.7 43.1 234 348

83690 Robin/AW 1 42.41 AA,A 6 0.1181 2.9997 1 0.1181 3.000 3.5 15.3 109 162
80000 1 40.54 AA(+) 8 0.1000 2.5400 1 0.1670 4.242 4.9 21.8 138 205
79130 1 40.10 AA(+) 3 0.1624 4.1250 4 0.1624 4.125 13.8 61.4 313 466
76080 1 38.55 AA(+) 5 0.1234 3.1344 2 0.1234 3.134 5.5 24.2 140 208
70480 1 35.71 AA(+) 4 0.1327 3.3706 3 0.1327 3.371 8.1 36.0 186 277

66360 Sparate/AW 2 33.62 AA,A 7 00974 2.4740 1 0.1299 3.299 3.5 15.6 100 149
66360 Sparrow/AW 2 33.62 AA,A 6 0.1052 2.6721 1 0.1052 2.672 2.8 12.3 8608 12810
64920 2 32.89 AA(+) 2 0.1802 4.5771 5 0.1802 4.577 19.5 86.7 430 640
62770 2 31.81 AA(+) 3 0.1446 3.6728 4 0.1446 3.673 11.2 49.8 248 369
60340 2 30.57 AA(+) 5 1.1099 28.1915 2 0.1099 2.791 4.4 19.4 111 165
55890 2 28.32 AA(+) 4 0.1182 3.0023 3 0.1182 3.002 6.6 29.4 147 219

52620 Swallow/AW 3 26.66 A 6 0.0937 2.3800 1 0.0937 2.380 2.2 9.9 69 103
51500 3 26.10 AA(+) 2 0.1605 4.0767 5 0.1605 4.077 16.5 73.4 341 507
49780 3 25.22 AA(+) 3 0.1288 3.2715 4 0.1288 3.272 9.7 43.1 197 293
47850 3 24.25 AA(+) 5 0.0978 2.4841 2 0.0978 2.484 3.5 15.6 88 131
44320 3 22.46 AA(+) 4 1.1053 28.0746 3 0.1053 2.675 5.3 23.4 117 174

41740 Swanate/AW 4 21.15 AA,A 7 0.0772 1.9609 1 0.1029 2.614 2.3 10.1 62.7 93

3
 B 549

TABLE 1 Continued
Conductor Size (Aluminum Wire) Stranding Rated Strength Mass per Unit
Length
Aluminum Aluminum-Clad Steel
Nominal Diameter Nominal Diameter kip
Number of Number of
cmil Code Name AWG mm Class (1000
Wires Wires
in. mm in. mm lbf) kN lb/1000 ft kg/km
41740 Swan/AW 4 21.15 AA,A 6 0.0834 2.1184 1 0.0834 2.118 1.8 7.9 54.5 81
40840 4 20.69 AA(+) 2 0.1429 3.6297 5 0.1429 3.630 13.5 60.0 270 402
39470 4 20.00 AA(+) 3 0.1147 2.9134 4 0.1147 2.913 7.7 34.3 156 232
37950 4 19.23 AA(+) 5 0.0871 2.2123 2 0.0871 2.212 2.8 12.4 69.8 104
35150 4 17.81 AA(+) 4 0.0937 2.3800 3 0.0937 2.380 4.2 18.6 92.6 138
32390 4 16.41 AA(+) 2 0.1273 3.2334 5 0.1273 3.233 11.3 50.3 215 320
31300 4 15.86 AA(+) 3 0.1022 2.5959 4 0.1022 2.596 6.1 27.3 124 185
25690 4 13.02 AA(+) 2 0.1133 2.8778 5 0.1133 2.878 9.0 39.9 170 253
A
Conversion factors:
1 cmil 5 5.067 E-04 mm2.
1 in. 5 25.4 mm.
1 lb/1000 ft 5 1.488 kg/km.
1 kip 5 4.448 kN.

8. Lay taken as the aggregate strength of the aluminum and

8.1 The length of lay of the various layers of wires in a aluminum-clad steel components, calculated as follows. The
conductor shall conform to Table 2 (Explanatory Note 5). strength contribution of the aluminum wires shall be taken as
8.2 The direction of lay of the outside layer of wires shall be the percentage, according to the number of layers of aluminum
right hand unless otherwise specified in the purchase order. The wires, indicated in Table 3, of the sum of the strengths of the
direction of lay of the aluminum and aluminum-clad steel wires 1350-H19 wires, calculated from their specified nominal wire
shall be reversed in successive layers. diameter and the appropriate specified minimum average
tensile strength given in Specification B 230. The strength
9. Construction contribution of the aluminum-clad steel core wires shall be
9.1 The number and diameter of aluminum and steel wires taken as the percentage according to the number of layers of
and the areas of cross section of aluminum wires shall conform aluminum-clad steel wires, indicated in Table 3, of the sum of
to the requirements prescribed in Table 1 and Fig. 1. the strengths of the aluminum-clad steel wires, calculated from
9.2 Where compressed stranding is required in order to their specified nominal wire diameter and the appropriate
insulate the conductor properly, one or more aluminum layers specified minimum stress at 1 % extension given in Specifica-
of any stranded conductor consisting of 7 wires or more may be tion B 502.
slightly compressed, thereby reducing the outside diameter of 10.2 Rated strength and breaking strength values shall be
the conductor by not more than 3 %, provided that the area of rounded to three significant figures, in the final value only, in
cross section after compressing is in accordance with Section accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
13.
11. Density
10. Rated Strength of Conductor 11.1 For the purpose of calculating mass, cross sections,
10.1 The rated strength of a completed conductor shall be etc., the density of aluminum 1350 shall be taken as 2705
TABLE 2 Lay Factors for Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-Clad Steel Reinforced, Concentric-Lay-Stranded
Ratio of Length of Lay of a Layer to Nominal Outside Diameter of that Layer
Aluminum Wire Layers Aluminum-Clad Steel Wire Layers
Stranding
Stranding First (outside) Fourth
Class Second Third 12-Strand 6-Strand
(inside)
min prefA max min pref max min max min max min pref max min pref max
A 6/1, 7/1 8 ... 16 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
AA 76/19, 84/19 10 11 13 10 13 16 10 17 10 17 16 20 24 18 25 30
72/7 10 11 13 10 13 16 10 17 10 17 ... ... ... 18 25 30
54/19 10 11 13 10 13 16 10 17 ... ... 16 20 24 18 25 30
54/7, 48/7, 45/7, 42/7 10 11 13 10 13 16 10 17 ... ... ... ... ... 18 25 30
36/1 10 11 13 10 13 16 10 17 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
30/19 10 11 13 10 13 16 ... ... ... ... 16 20 24 18 25 30
30/7, 26/7, 24/7 10 11 13 10 13 16 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 18 25 30
18/1 10 11 13 10 13 16 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
16/19 10 12.5 14.5 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 16 20 24 18 25 30
12/7 10 12.5 14.5 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 18 25 30
6/1, 7/1, 8/1 12 14 16 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
5/2, 4/3, 3/4, 2/5 12B 14B 16B ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 12B 14B 16B
A
Preferred (pref).
B
Mixed aluminum and aluminum-clad steel (Fig. 1).

4
 B 549
stranded conductor are a function of the length of lay. The
approximate mass and electrical resistance may be determined
using the standard increments shown in Table 4. When greater
accuracy is desired, the increment based on the specific lay of
the conductor may be calculated (Explanatory Note 7).
12.2 In the calculation of the electrical resistance of a
completed conductor, the resistivity of the aluminum-clad steel
core wire shall be taken as 0.08480 V·mm2/m (51.01 V·cmil/ft)
at 20°C (68°F).

13. Variation in Area

13.1 The area of cross section of the aluminum wires of a
conductor shall be not less than 98 % of the area specified.
Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the manufacturer
may have the option of determining the cross-sectional area by
either of the following methods, except that in case of question
regarding area compliance, the method in 13.1.2 shall be used:
13.1.1 The area of cross section may be determined by
calculations from diameter measurements, expressed to four
decimal places, of the component aluminum wires at any point
when measured perpendicularly to their axes.
FIG. 1 Suggested Configurations for Conductors with Mixed Wire
13.1.2 The area of cross section of the aluminum wires of a
Layers conductor may be determined by Test Method B 263. In
applying that method the increment in mass resulting from
TABLE 3 Rating Factors stranding may be the applicable value specified in 12.1 or may
Stranding
be calculated from the measured component dimensions of the
Rating Factor, % sample under test. In case of question regarding area compli-
Number of Wires Number of LayersA
ance, the actual mass increment due to stranding shall be
Aluminum- Aluminum- Aluminum-
Aluminum
Clad Steel
Aluminum
Clad Steel
Aluminum
Clad Steel
calculated.
2 5 1 1 96 96
3 4 1 1 96 96 14. Finish
4 3 1 1 96 96
5 2 1 1 96 96
14.1 The conductor shall be free of all imperfections not
6 1 1 B
96 consistent with good commercial practice.
B
7 1 1 96
B
8 1 1 96
B
18 1 2 93
36 1 3 B TABLE 4 Standard Increments Due to Stranding
1 1 96 96 Stranding of ACSR/AW Number of Increment (Increase), % Mass and
7 2 1 93 96 Wires Electrical Resistance
7 2 1 93 96
7 2 1 93 96 Aluminum-Clad Aluminum-Clad
Aluminum Aluminum
7 3 1 91 96 Steel Steel
7 3 1 91 96 2 5 0.75 1.5
7 3 1 91 96 3 4 1.5 1.1
7 3 1 91 96 4 3 1.1 1.5
7 4 1 90 96 5 2 1.2 1.5
16 19 1 2 96 93 6 1 1.5 0
30 19 2 2 93 93 7 1 1.5 0
54 19 3 2 91 93 8 1 2.0 0
76 19 4 2 90 93 18 1 2.0 0
84 19 4 2 90 93 36 1 2.0 0
A
For purposes of determining strength rating factors, mixed layers are consid- 12 7 2.5 0.4
ered to be full layers for each material. 24 7 2.5 0.4
B
Central aluminum-clad steel wire only; the 96 % rating factor is applied to the 26 7 2.5 0.4
single aluminum-clad steelwire core as a factor of safety in the event the 30 7 2.75 0.4
aluminum-clad steel wire contains a weld (made prior to drawing). 42 7 2.5 0.4
45 7 2.5 0.4
kg/m3 (0.0975 lb/in.3) at 20°C (68°F) (Explanatory Note 6). 48 7 2.5 0.4
54 7 2.5 0.4
11.2 For the purpose of calculating mass, cross sections, 72 7 3.0 0.4
etc., the density of aluminum-clad steel wire shall be taken as 16 19 2.5 0.6
6590 kg/m3(0.2381 lb/in.3) at 20°C (68°F). 30
54
19
19
2.75
3.0
0.6
0.6
12. Mass and Electrical Resistance 76 19 3.0 0.6
84 19 3.0 0.6
12.1 The mass and electrical resistance of a unit length of

5
 B 549
15. Mechanical and Electrical Tests
15.1 Tests for mechanical and electrical properties of alu-
minum wires shall be made before stranding (Explanatory Note
8).
15.2 All aluminum wires composing the conductors shall be
capable of meeting the bending properties stated in Specifica-
tion B 230 after stranding. Routine production testing after
stranding is not required.
15.3 Routine production testing after stranding is not re-
quired. However, when such tests are requested by the pur-
chaser and agreed upon by the manufacturer at the time of
ordering (or made for other reasons) aluminum wires removed
from the completed conductor shall have tensile strengths of
not less than 95 % of the minimum tensile strength specified
for the wire before stranding. The electrical resistivity shall
meet the minimum resistivity specified for wire before strand-
ing. Elongation tests may be made for information purposes
only and no minimum values are assigned (Explanatory Note
8). The frequency of these tests shall be decided upon between
the purchaser and the manufacturer.
15.4 Tests for all properties of aluminum-clad steel wires
shall be made before stranding (Explanatory Note 8).
15.5 Tests for demonstration of rated strength of the com-
pleted conductor are not required by this specification but may
be made if agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser
at the time of placing an order. If tested, the breaking strength
of the completed conductor shall be not less than the rated
strength if failure occurs in the free length at least 1 in. (25
mm) beyond the end of either gripping device, or shall be not
less than 95 % of the rated strength if failure occurs inside, or
within 1 in. (25 mm) of the end of either gripping device
(Explanatory Note 9).
16. Inspection
16.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
order, the manufacturer shall be responsible for the perfor-
mance of all inspection and test requirements specified.
EXPLANATORY NOTES
NOTE 1—In this specification only concentrically-stranded aluminum
conductors, aluminum-clad steel reinforced, are specifically designated.
Conductor constructions not included in this specification shall be
specifically agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser
when placing the order.
NOTE 2—For definitions of terms relating to conductors, reference
should be made to ANSI C42.100 and ASTM Terminology B 354.
NOTE 3—Owing to the variation in coil weights, etc., it is common
practice to allow a permissible variation in length of 6 10 %. It is also
common practice to allow an amount not exceeding 10 % of the total
weight of any one order to be shipped in random lengths with no piece
shorter than 50 % of the standard length ordered.
NOTE 4—The behavior of properly spaced wire joints in stranded
conductors is related to both their tensile strength and elongation. Because
of its higher elongation properties, the lower-strength electric-butt weld
gives equivalent overall performance to that of a cold-pressure weld or an
electric-butt, cold-upset weld in stranded conductors.
NOTE 5—The preferred ratio of the lay with respect to the outside
diameter of a layer of wires varies for different layers and for different
6
16.2 All inspections and tests shall be made at the place of
manufacture unless otherwise agreed to between the manufac-
turer and the purchaser at the time of purchase.
16.3 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent-
ing the purchaser all reasonable facilities to satisfy the inspec-
tor that the material is being furnished in accordance with this
specification.
17. Packaging and Package Marking
17.1 Package sizes and kind of package, reels or coils, shall
be agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser
(Explanatory Note 5).
17.2 There shall be only one length of conductor on a reel.
17.3 The conductors shall be protected against damage in
ordinary handling and shipping. If heavy wood lagging is
required, it shall be specified by the purchaser at the time of
placing the purchase order.
17.4 The net mass, length size, kind of conductors, strand-
ing, type of coating, and any other necessary identification
shall be marked on a tag attached to the end of the conductor
inside the package. This same information, together with the
purchase order number, the manufacturer’s serial number (if
any) and all shipping marks and other information required by
the purchaser shall appear on the outside of the package.
NOTE 1—Multiple lengths per package are allowable only when the
bare conductor is intended for re-manufacture, such as adding a covering
or insulation. In such cases the position of each end of a length shall be
clearly marked and the length of each portion shall be shown on the tag
attached to the end of the conductor.
18. Keywords
18.1 aluminum clad steel reinforced; aluminum conductor;
aluminum conductor—steel-reinforced; electrical conductor;
electrical conductor—aluminum; stranded aluminum conduc-
tor; stranded electrical conductor
diameters of the conductor, being larger for the inside layers than for the
outside layer, and larger for conductors of small diameter than for those of
large diameter.
NOTE 6—This density is based upon aluminum of 99.50 % purity.
NOTE 7—The increment of mass or electrical resistance of a completed
concentric-lay-stranded conductor, k, in percent is
k 5 100 ~m 2 1! (1)
where m is the stranding factor, and is also the ratio of the mass or
electrical resistance of a unit length of stranded conductor to that of a solid
conductor of the same cross-sectional area or of a stranded conductor with
infinite length of stranding, that is, all wires parallel to the conductor axis.
The stranding factor m for the completed stranded conductor is the
numerical average of the stranding factors for each of the individual wires
in the conductor, including the straight core wire, if any (for which the
stranding factor is unity). The stranding factor (mind) for any given wire in
a concentric-lay-stranded conductor is
mind 5 =1 1 ~9.8696/n 2! (2)
 B 549
where:
n 5 length of lay/diameter of helical path of the wire.
The derivation of the above is given in NBS Handbook 100.5
The factors k and m for composite conductors are to be determined
separately for each different material involved.
NOTE 8—Wires unlaid from conductors may have different physical
properties from those of the wire when prepared for cabling, on account
of the deformation brought about by stranding and again straightening for
test. If tests of aluminum-clad steel wires are to be made after stranding,
the purchaser and the manufacturer at the time of placing the order should
agree on the properties to be met.
NOTE 9—To test ACSR/AW, for breaking strength successfully as a unit
requires special devices for gripping the ends of the aluminum and
aluminum-clad steel wires without causing damage that may result in
failure below the actual strength of the conductor. Various special
dead-end devices are available such as compression sleeves and split
sleeves, but ordinary jaws or clamping devices usually are not suitable.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

7
 Designation: B 550/B 550M – 02
Standard Specification for
Zirconium and Zirconium Alloy Bar and Wire1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 550/B 550M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification2 covers three grades of zirconium and
zirconium alloy bar and wire.
1.2 Unless a single unit is used, for example corrosion mass
gain in mg/dm2, the values stated in either inch-pound or SI
units are to be regarded separately as standard. The values
stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore each
system must be used independently of the other. SI values
cannot be mixed with inch-pound values.
1.3 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test methods portions of this specification. This standard does
not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any,
associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
standard to establish appropriate safety and health practices
and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior
to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications4
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 annealed—denotes material that exhibits a recrystal-
lized grain structure.
3.2 Lot Definitions:
3.2.1 castings—a lot shall consist of all castings produced
from the same pour.
3.2.2 ingot—no definition required.
3.2.3 rounds, flats, tubes, and wrought powder metallurgical
products (single definition, common to nuclear and non-
nuclear standards)—a lot shall consist of a material of the
same size, shape, condition, and finish produced from the same
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B10 on
Reactive and Refractory Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of
Subcommittee B10.02 on Zirconium and Hafnium.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2002. Published December 2002. Originally
published as B 550 – 71. Last previous edition B 550/B 550M – 01.
2
For ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code applications, see related Specifi-
cation SB-550 in Section II of that Code.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
ingot or powder blend by the same reduction schedule and the
same heat treatment parameters. Unless otherwise agreed
between manufacturer and purchaser, a lot shall be limited to
the product of an 8 h period for final continuous anneal, or to
a single furnace load for final batch anneal.
3.2.4 sponge—a lot shall consist of a single blend produced
at one time.
3.2.5 weld fittings—definition is to be mutually agreed upon
between manufacturer and the purchaser.
4. Classification
4.1 The bar or wire is to be furnished in three grades as
follows:
4.1.1 Grade R60702—Unalloyed zirconium.
4.1.2 Grade R60704—Zirconium-tin.
4.1.3 Grade R60705—Zirconium-niobium.
5. Ordering Information
5.1 Orders for material under this specification should
include the following information:
5.1.1 Quantity (weight or number of pieces),
5.1.2 Name of material (zirconium bar or wire) (Table 1),
5.1.3 Grade number (see 4.1),
5.1.4 ASTM designation and year of issue, and
5.1.5 Additions to the specification and supplementary re-
quirements, if required.
NOTE 1—A typical ordering description is as follows: 1000 lb (500 kg)
zirconium cold drawn bar, 0.35 in. (10 mm) in diameter by 10 ft (3 m) in
length, ASTM B 550 - 01, Grade R60702.
6. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 Bar and wire covered by this specification shall be
formed with conventional fabrication methods and equipment
found in primary ferrous and nonferrous metal plants.
6.2 Bar and wire will be supplied in the conditions pre-
scribed in Table 2.
6.3 The products covered include the sections and sizes
shown in Table 1.
7. Chemical Composition
7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
chemical composition prescribed in Table 3.
7.2 The manufacturer’s ingot analysis shall be considered
the chemical analysis for bar and wire, except for hydrogen and
 B 550/B 550M – 02
TABLE 1 Product Sections and Size
Product Section Size
Bars: Hot-finished round, squares, octagons, and hexagons ⁄ in. (6.4 mm) and over in diameter or size
14

Hot-finished flats 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) to 10 in. (250 mm), incl, in width, and 1⁄8

in. (3.2 mm) and over in thickness

Cold-finished rounds, squares, octagons, hexagons, and Over 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) in diameter or sizeA
shapes
Cold-finished flats ⁄ in. (9.5 mm) and over in width,B and 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm)
38

and over in thicknessC

Wire: Cold-finished rounds, squares, octagons, hexagons, and 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) and under in diameter or size

shapes
Cold-finished flats ⁄
1 16 in. (1.6 mm) to under 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm) in width, and
0.010 in. (.25 mm) to under 3⁄16 in. (4.8 mm) in
thickness
A
Sizes 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) and under are wire when in coils, and cut wire when finished in straight lengths.
B
Widths less than 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm) and thicknesses less than 3⁄16 in. (4.8 mm) are generally described as flat wire.
C
Thickness 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) to under 3⁄16 in. (4.8 mm) can be cold-rolled strip as well as bar.

TABLE 2 Condition 10.2.3 Centerless ground (round bars only), and

Form Condition
Bars hot finished
hot finished and annealed
cold finished
cold finished and annealed
Wire cold finished
cold finished and annealed
nitrogen, which shall be determined on the finished product.
7.3 When requested by the purchaser and stated in the
purchase order, a product analysis for any elements listed in
Table 3 shall be made on the finished product.
7.3.1 The manufacturer’s analysis shall be considered as
verified if the check analysis confirms the manufacturer’s
reported values within the tolerances prescribed in Table 4.
8. Mechanical Properties
8.1 The annealed material shall conform to the requirements
for mechanical properties, at room temperature, as prescribed
in Table 5. Wire supplied for welding applications shall be
furnished with a temper suitable for uniform feeding in
semiautomatic or automatic welding equipment.
9. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
9.1 Unless otherwise specified, all bar or wire shall conform
to the permissible variations in dimensions prescribed in the
applicable Tables 6-14, inclusive.
10. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
10.1 Bars in the hot-finished condition which will conform
to the tolerances prescribed in Tables 6 and 7, shall be
furnished with one of the following finishes as designated on
the purchase order:
10.1.1 Not descaled,
10.1.2 Mechanically descaled,
10.1.3 Mechanically descaled and pickled, and
10.1.4 Turned (round bars only).
10.2 Bars and wire in cold-finished condition, that will
conform to the tolerances prescribed in Tables 8-12, shall be
furnished with one of the following finishes as designated on
the purchase order.
10.2.1 Cold drawn or cold rolled, or swaged,
10.2.2 Turned (round bars only),
10.2.4 Polished (round bars only).
10.3 Bars or wire shall be free of cracks, seams, slivers,
blisters, burrs, and other injurious imperfections in accordance
with standards of acceptability agreed upon between the
manufacturer and the purchaser.
11. Significance of Numerical Limits
11.1 For the purpose of determining compliance with the
specified limits for requirements of the properties listed in the
following table, an observed value or a calculated value shall
be rounded as indicated in accordance with the rounding
methods of Practice E 29.
Rounded Unit for Observed or
Property Calculated Value
Chemical composition and tolerances nearest unit in the last right-hand
(when expressed as decimals) place of figures of the specified limit
Tensile strength and yield strength nearest 1000 psi (10 MPa)
Elongation nearest 1 %
12. Number of Tests and Retests
12.1 One longitudinal tension test shall be made from each
lot of bar and rod, see 13.1.
12.2 One chemistry test for hydrogen and nitrogen content
shall be made from each lot of finished product, see 13.2.
12.3 Retests:
12.3.1 If any sample or specimen exhibits obvious surface
contamination or improper preparation disqualifying it as a
truly representative sample, it shall be discarded and a new
sample or specimen substituted.
12.3.2 If the results of any tests of any lot do not conform to
the requirements specified, retests shall be made on additional
samples from the same lot, each of which shall conform to the
requirements specified.
13. Test Methods
13.1 Tension Tests—Conduct the tension test in accordance
with Test Methods E 8. Determine the yield strength by the
offset (0.2 %) method. Determine the tensile properties using a
strain rate of 0.003 to 0.007 in./in. (mm/mm)/min through the
yield strength. After the yield strength has been exceeded, the
cross-head speed may be increased to approximately 0.05
in./in. (mm/mm)/min to failure.
13.2 Chemical Tests—Conduct the chemical analysis by the
standard techniques normally used by the manufacturer.

2
 B 550/B 550M – 02
TABLE 3 Chemical RequirementsA
Composition, %
Element
Grades R60702 Grades R60704 Grades R60705
Zirconium + hafnium, min 99.2 97.5 95.5
Hafnium, max 4.5 4.5 4.5
Iron + chromium 0.2 max 0.2 to 0.4 0.2 max
Tin ... 1.0 to 2.0 ...
Hydrogen, max 0.005 0.005 0.005
Nitrogen, max 0.025 0.025 0.025
Carbon, max 0.05 0.05 0.05
Niobium ... ... 2.0 to 3.0
Oxygen, max 0.16 0.18 0.18
A
By agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer, analysis may be required and limits established for elements and compounds not specified in the table
of chemical composition.

TABLE 4 Permissible Variation in Check Analysis Between

Different Laboratories TABLE 7 Dimensional Tolerances in Hot-Rolled Flat Bars
Variation in Variation in Width,A
Permissible Variation in Thickness, in. (mm)
Element Thickness, in. (mm) in. (mm)
Product Analysis, %
Up–0.150 (3.8) +0.020 –0 (+0.5) ⁄
18 –0 (3.2)
Hydrogen 0.002
Over 0.150–0.250 (3.8–6.3) +0.030 –0 (+0.75) ⁄
5 32 –0 (4.0)
Nitrogen 0.01
Over 0.250–0.350 (6.3–8.9) +0.040 –0 (+1.0) 3⁄16 –0 (4.8)
Carbon 0.01
Over 0.350–0.450 (8.9–11.4) +0.050 –0 (+1.3) 7⁄32 –0 (5.6)
Hafnium 0.1 B
Over 0.450–0550 (11.4–14) +0.070 –0 (+1.8)
Iron + chromium 0.025 B
Over 0.550–1.500 (14–38) +0.080 –0 (+2.0)
Tin 0.05 B B
Over 1.500 (38)
Niobium 0.05
Oxygen 0.02 A
For bars sheared from plate, width tolerances shall be as follows:
B
Depends on size and quantity ordered.

Specified Thickness, in. Width Tolerances, in. (mm)

(mm) Over Under
TABLE 5 Tensile RequirementsA
Grades Over 0.100–0.150 ⁄
1 16 (1.6) ⁄
1 16 (1.6)
R60702 R60704 R60705 Over 0.150–0.250 5⁄64 (2.0) 5⁄64 (2.0)
Tensile Strength, min, ksi (MPa) 55 (380) 60 (415) 80 (550) Over 0.250–0.350 3⁄32 (2.4) 3⁄32 (2.4)
Yield Strength, min, ksi (MPa) 30 (205) 35 (240) 55 (380) Over 0.350–0.450 7⁄64 (2.8) 7⁄64 (2.8)
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm min, %B 16 14 16 Over 0.450–0.550 1⁄8 (3.2) 1⁄8 (3.2)
Over 0.550–0.650 5⁄32 (4.0) 5⁄32 (4.0)
A
For bar only.
B
When a sub-size specimen is used, the gage length shall be as specified in
Test Methods E 8 for the specimen.
TABLE 8 Permissible Variations in Sectional Dimensions for
Cold-Finished Bars in Rounds, Hexagons, Octagons, and
TABLE 6 Dimensional Tolerances for Hot-Finished Rounds, Squares
Squares, Octagons, and Hexagons
Permissible Variation, in.A (mm)
Variation in Out of Round, Specified Size, in. (mm)
Specified Size, in. (mm) Over Under
Size, in. (mm) Out of Square, in. (mm) Rounds
Up–0.500 (13) +0.030 –0 (+0.75) 0.025 (0.64) Over 1⁄2–1, incl (13–25) 0.002 (0.05) 0.002 (0.05)
Over 0.500–1.000 (13–25) +0.050 –0 (+1.3) 0.040 (1) 1–11⁄2, excl (25–38) 0.0025 (0.06) 0.0025 (0.06)
Over 1.000–2.000 (25–50) +0.070 –0 (+1.8) 0.060 (1.5) 11⁄2–4, inclB (38–100) 0.003 (0.08) 0.003 (0.08)
Over 2.000-4.000 (50–100) +0.150 –0 (+3.8) 0.080 (2) Hexagons, Octagons, and Squares
Over 4.000–6.000 (100–150) +0.250 –0 (+6.4) 0.100 (2.5) Over 1⁄2–1, incl (13–25) 0 0.004 (0.10)
Over 1–2, excl (25–50) 0 0.006 (0.15)
Over 2–3, incl (50–75) 0 0.008 (0.20)
Over 3 (75) 0 0.010 (0.25)
14. Inspection A
When it is necessary to heat treat or heat treat and pickle after cold finishing,
14.1 The manufacturer shall inspect the material covered by because of special hardness or mechanical property requirements, tolerances are
this specification prior to shipment and, on request, shall double those shown in the table.
B
For permissible variations on sizes over 4 in. (100 mm) the manufacturer
furnish the purchaser with certificates of test. If so specified in should be consulted.
the purchase order, the purchaser or his representative may
witness the testing and inspection of the material at the place of
manufacture. In such cases the purchaser shall state in his ing the purchaser, without charge, all reasonable facilities to
purchase order which tests he desires to witness. The manu- satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
facturer shall give ample notice to the purchaser as to the time with this specification. This inspection shall be so conducted as
and place of the designated tests. If the purchaser’s represen- not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
tative does not present himself at the time agreed upon for the
testing, the manufacturer shall consider the requirement for 15. Rejection
purchaser’s inspection at the place of manufacture to be 15.1 Rejection for failure of the material to meet the
waived. requirements of this specification shall be reported to the
14.2 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent- manufacturer within 60 calendar days from the receipt of the

3
 B 550/B 550M – 02
TABLE 9 Permissible Variations in Width and Thickness for TABLE 10 Permissible Variations in Sectional Dimensions for
Cold-Finished Bars in Flats WireA
Permissible Variations in Width for Permissible Variation, in. (mm)
Thicknesses Given, Over and Under, Specified Size, in. (mm)
Width, in. (mm) Over Under
in.A (mm)
1⁄4 (6.4) and under Over 1⁄4 (6.4) Drawn, Centerless Ground, Centerless Ground and Polished
Width Round Wire, and Square WireB
3⁄8–1, incl 0.004 (0.10) 0.002 (0.05) 1⁄2 (13) 0.002 (0.05) 0.002 (0.05)
Over 1–2, incl 0.006 (0.15) 0.003 (0.08)
Under 1⁄2–5⁄16, incl (13–18) 0.0015 (0.04) 0.0015 (0.04)
Over 2–3, incl 0.008 (0.20) 0.004 (0.10)
Under 5⁄16–0.044, incl (8–1.1) 0.001 (0.025) 0.001 (0.025)
Over 3–41⁄2, inclB 0.010 (0.25) 0.005 (0.13)
Under 0.044–0.033, incl (1.1–0.8) 0.0008 (0.020) 0.0008 (0.020)
Thickness
Under 0.033–0.024, incl (0.8–0.6) 0.0005 (0.013) 0.0005 (0.013)
Permissible Variations in Thickness
Thickness, in. (mm) Under 0.024–0.012, incl (0.6–0.3) 0.0004 (0.010) 0.0004 (0.010)
Over and Under, in.A (mm)
1⁄8–1, incl (3.2-25) 0.002 (0.05) Under 0.012–0.008, incl (0.3–0.2) 0.0003 (0.008) 0.0003 (0.008)
Over 1–2, incl (25–50) 0.003 (0.08) Under 0.008–0.007, incl (0.2–1.8) 0.0002 (0.005) 0.0002 (0.005)
Under 0.007–0.00476, incl (0.18–0.12) 0.0002 (0.005) 0.0002 (0.005)
Over 2–3, incl (50–75) 0.004 (0.10)
Under 0.00476–0.003, incl (0.12–0.08) 0.0001 (0.003) 0.0001 (0.003)
Over 3–41⁄2, inclB (75–115) 0.005 (0.13)
A
When it is necessary to heat treat and pickle after cold finishing, because of Drawn Wire in Hexagons and OctagonsC
hardness or mechanical property requirements, tolerances are double those 1⁄2 0 0.004 (0.10)
shown in the table. Under 1⁄2–5⁄16, incl 0 0.003 (0.08)
B
For permissible variations on widths and thicknesses over 41⁄2in. (115 mm) the Under 5⁄16–1⁄8, incl 0 0.002 (0.05)
manufacturer should be consulted.
Wire for Which the Final Operation is a Surface Treatment to Remove Scale or
material by the purchaser. Unless otherwise specified, rejected Drawing Lubricant
material may be returned to the manufacturer at the manufac- 1⁄2 0.004 (0.10) 0.004 (0.10)
turer’s expense, unless the purchaser receives, within three Under ⁄ – ⁄ , incl
1 2 5 16 0.003 (0.08) 0.003 (0.08)
Under 5⁄16–0.044, incl 0.002 (0.05) 0.002 (0.05)
weeks of the notice of rejection, other instructions for dispo- Under 0.044–0.033, incl 0.0013 (0.03) 0.0013 (0.03)
sition. Under 0.033–0.024, incl 0.0008 (0.02) 0.0008 (0.02)
A
16. Certification Manufacturers should be consulted for all tolerances for half-round, oval, and
half-oval wires.
16.1 A producer or supplier shall furnish the purchaser with B
The maximum out-of-round tolerance for round wire is one half of the total size
tolerance shown in the above table.
a certificate that the material was manufactured, sampled, C
Dimensions are across flats.
tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification and
has been found to meet the requirements. The certificate shall
include a report of the test results. legibly and conspicuously with the purchase order or contract
17. Referee number, manufacturer’s private identification mark, the ASTM
designation, the grade, size, ingot number, and gross, net, and
17.1 In the event of disagreement between the manufacturer tare weights.
and the purchaser on the conformance of the material to the
requirements of this specification or any special test specified 19. Packaging and Package Marking
by the purchaser, a mutually acceptable referee shall perform
19.1 All material shall be boxed, crated, banded on skids, or
the tests in question. The results of the referee’s testing shall be
bundled in such a manner as to assure safe delivery to its
used in determining conformance of the material to this
destination when properly transported by common carrier.
specification.
18. Product Marking 20. Keywords
18.1 Each bundle, box, or coil shall be marked or tagged 20.1 bar; wire; zirconium; zirconium alloy

4
 B 550/B 550M – 02
TABLE 11 Permissible Variations in Thickness and Width for Cold-Finished Flat Wire
Permissible Variation in Thickness for Given Permissible Variation in
Specified Width, in. Thickness, Over or Under, in. (mm) Width, in. (mm)
Under 0.029 (0.74) 0.029 (0.75)–0.035 (0.89), excl 0.035 (0.89)–3⁄16 (4.80), incl Over Under
Under 3⁄8 (9.5) to 1⁄16 (1.6), incl 0.001 (0.025) 0.0015 (0.04) 0.002 (0.05) 0.005 (0.125) 0.005 (0.125)

TABLE 12 Permissible Variations in Length for Hot-Finished or Cold-Finished Bars

Permissible Variation in Length, in. (mm)
Specified Sizes of Rounds, Squares, Hexagons,
To 12 ft (3.5 m), incl Over 12 ft (3.5 m) to 25 ft (7.6), incl
Octagons, and Widths of Flats, in.
Over Under Over Under
To 2, incl (50) ⁄
12 (13) 0 ⁄
34 (20) 0
Over 2–4, incl (50–100) ⁄
34 (20) 0 1 (25) 0
Over 4–6, incl (100–150) 1 (25) 0 11⁄4 (32) 0
Over 6–9, incl (150–225) 11⁄4 (32) 0 11⁄2 (38) 0
Over 9–12, incl (225–300) 11⁄2 (38) 0 2 (50) 0
Machine-Cut After Machine Staightening
To 3, incl 18⁄ (3.2) 0 ⁄
3 16 (4.8) 0
Over 3–6, incl ⁄
3 16 (4.8) 0 14⁄ (6.4) 0
Over 6–9, incl 1⁄4 (6.4) 0 5⁄16 (8.0) 0
Over 9–12, incl 1⁄2 (13.0) 0 1⁄2 (13.0) 0

TABLE 13 Permissible Variations in Length for Round and Shape, Straightened and Cut Wire, and Exact Length Resheared Wire
Permissible Variation, in.
Diameter, in. (mm) Length, ft (m)
Over Under
0.125 (3.2) and under Up to 12 (3.5), incl ⁄
1 16 (1.6) 0
0.125 (3.2) and under Over 12 (3.5) 1⁄8 (3.2) 0
Over 0.125 (3.2) to 0.500 (13.0), incl Under 3 (1.0) 1⁄32 (0.8) 0
Over 0.125 (3.2) to 0.500 (13.0), incl 3 to 12, incl (1.0–3.5) 1⁄16 (1.6) 0
Over 0.125 (3.2) to 0.500 (13.0), incl Over 12 (3.5) 1⁄8 (3.2) 0

TABLE 14 Permissible Variations in Straightness for Hot- or Cold-Finished BarsA

Bars Permissible Variation
Hot finished 18⁄ in. (3.2) in any 5 ft (1.5 m); but may not exceed 1⁄8 (0.4) 3 (number of feet (meters) in length/5)
Cold finished 1⁄16 in. (1.6) in any 5 ft (1.5 m); but may not exceed 1⁄16 (0.2) 3 (number of feet (meters) in length/5)

A
The measurement is taken on the concave side of the bar with a straight edge. Unless otherwise specified, hot-finished or cold-finished bars for machining purposes
are furnished machine-straightened to the tolerances specified in the Table.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 552 – 98 (Reapproved 2004)

Standard Specification for

Seamless and Welded Copper–Nickel Tubes for Water
Desalting Plants1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 552; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* E 118 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper-

1.1 This specification establishes requirements for seamless Chromium Alloys
and welded copper-nickel tubes from 0.625 to 1.25 in. (15.9 to E 243 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Exami-
31.8 mm) in diameter for use in heat exchangers in water nation of Copper and Copper-Alloy Tubes
desalting plants. The following alloys are involved: Copper E 255 Practice for Sampling Copper and Copper Alloys for
Alloy UNS Nos. C70600, C71500, C71640, and C72200. Determination of Chemical Composition
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are the standard. E 478 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper
Values given in parentheses are provided for information only. Alloys
1.3 The following safety hazard caveat pertains only to the 3. Terminology
test methods of Section 16 described in this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, 3.1 For definitions of terms related to copper and copper
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user alloys, refer to Terminology B 846.
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health 4. Classification
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
tions prior to its use. 4.1 Tubes furnished to this specification are classified into
two types, as follows:
2. Referenced Documents 4.1.1 Seamless tube and
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2 4.1.2 Welded tube.
B 111 Specification for Copper and Copper-Alloy Seamless 5. Ordering Information
Condenser Tubes and Ferrule Stock
B 153 Test Method for Expansion (Pin Test) of Copper and 5.1 Orders for products under this specification shall include
Copper-Alloy Pipe and Tubing the following information:
B 543 Specification for Welded Copper and Copper-Alloy 5.1.1 ASTM designation and year of issue,
Heat Exchanger Tube 5.1.2 Copper Alloy UNS number designation,
B 601 Classification for Temper Designations for Copper 5.1.3 Whether seamless or welded (Section 4),
and Copper Alloys—Wrought and Cast 5.1.4 Temper (Section 8),
B 846 Terminology for Copper and Copper Alloys 5.1.5 Dimensions: diameter and wall thickness (whether
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials minimum or nominal), and length (Section 12),
E 62 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper and 5.1.6 Total number of pieces of each size, and
Copper Alloys (Photometric Methods) 5.1.7 How furnished, whether in straight lengths or coils.
E 76 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel-Copper 5.2 The following options are available and, when required,
Alloys3 are to be specified at the time of placing of the order:
5.2.1 Whether further finish processing of welded tube is
needed (6.2.2.1),
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper 5.2.2 Hydrostatic test (11.2),
and Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.04 on Pipe 5.2.3 Pneumatic test (11.3),
and Tube.
Current edition approved May 1, 2004. Published May 2004. Originally
5.2.4 Certification (Section 20), and
approved in 1971. Last previous edition approved in 1998 as B 552 – 98e1. 5.2.5 Mill test report (Section 21).
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM 6. Materials and Manufacture
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
6.1 Material:
3
Withdrawn.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 552 – 98 (2004)
6.1.1 The material of manufacture shall be cast billets of 8.1.1 Seamless Tube—The product shall be furnished in
Copper Alloys UNS Nos. C70600, C71500, C71640, and either the O61 (annealed), or the H55 (light drawn, light
C72200 as specified in the ordering information, and shall be cold-worked) temper, as specified in the ordering information.
of such quality and soundness as to be suitable for processing 8.1.2 Welded Tube—The product shall be furnished in either
into finished lengths or coils of tube to meet the properties the WO61 (welded and annealed) or the WC55 (welded and
prescribed herein. light cold worked) temper as specified in the ordering infor-
6.2 Manufacture: mation.
6.2.1 Seamless Tube—The product shall be manufactured 8.2 Tubes shall conform to the tensile requirements shown
by such hot extrusion or piercing, and subsequent cold working in Table 2.
and annealing as to produce a uniform, seamless wrought
structure in the finished product. 9. Mechanical Property Requirements
6.2.2 Welded Tube—The product shall be manufactured 9.1 Tensile Strength:
from cold rolled strip which is subsequently formed and 9.1.1 The product shall conform with the tensile strength
welded by an automatic welding process. requirements prescribed in Table 2 for the temper, alloy and
6.2.2.1 As-welded tubes are permitted to have further pro- type specified in the ordering information when tested in
cessing when agreement is established between the manufac- accordance with Test Methods E 8.
turer or supplier and purchaser.
6.2.3 The product shall be cold worked and annealed as 10. Performance Requirements
necessary to meet properties of the temper specified.
10.1 Expansion Test Requirements:
10.1.1 Tube specimens selected for test shall withstand the
7. Chemical Composition
expansion shown in Table 3 at one end when tested in
7.1 The product shall conform to the chemical composition accordance with Test Method B 153. The expanded tube shall
requirements specified in Table 1 for the Copper Alloy UNS show no cracking or rupture visible to the unaided eye.
number designation specified in the ordering information. 10.2 Flattening Test Requirements:
7.2 These composition limits do not preclude the presence 10.2.1 Tube specimens approximately 4 ft (1.22 m) long
of other elements. When required, limits for unnamed elements shall be tested in the annealed condition by flattening on
shall be established and analysis required by agreement be- different elements throughout the length. Each element shall be
tween the manufacture or supplier and purchaser. flattened by one stroke of a press. The term “flattened” shall be
7.2.1 For copper alloys in which copper is specified as the interpreted as follows: a micrometer set at three times the wall
remainder, copper may be taken as the difference between the thickness shall pass over the tube freely throughout the
sum of all the elements analyzed and 100 %. flattened part except as the points where the change in element
7.2.1.1 When all the elements in Table 1 are analyzed, their of flattening takes place.
sum shall be as shown in the following table: 10.2.1.1 For seamless tube the flattened elements shall not
Copper Alloy UNS No. Copper Plus Named Elements, % min show cracking or rupture visible to the unaided eye. Superficial
C70600 99.5 ruptures resulting from surface imperfections shall not be cause
C71500 99.5 for rejection.
C71640 99.5 10.2.1.2 For seam-welded tube, the weld shall be placed in
C72200 99.8
a position of maximum bend for at least one fourth of the
8. Temper flattened elements. The flattened elements shall not show
cracking or rupture visible to the unaided eye. If the tube has
8.1 Tempers within this specification are as defined in
Classification B 601.
TABLE 2 Tensile Requirements
Copper Alloy Temper Tensile Strength,
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
UNS No. Standard Former min, ksi (MPa)
Composition, %
C70600 O61 annealed 40 (275)
Element Copper Alloy UNS No.
W061 welded and annealed 40 (275)
C70600 C71500 C71640 C72200 H55 light drawn, light cold worked 45 (310)
WC55 welded and light cold worked 45 (310)
Copper (incl silver) remainder remainder remainder remainder
C71500 O61 annealed 52 (360)
Lead, max 0.05A 0.05A 0.05A 0.05A
WO61 welded and annealed 52 (360)
Iron 1.0–1.8 0.40–1.0 1.7–2.3 0.5–1.0
H55 light drawn, light cold worked 54 (370)
Zinc, max 1.0A 1.0A 1.0A 1.0A
WC55 welded and light cold worked 54 (370)
Nickel (incl cobalt) 9.0–11.0 29.0–33.0 29.0–32.0 15.0–18.0
C71640 O61 annealed 63 (435)
Manganese 1.0 max 1.0 max 1.5–2.5 1.0
WO61 welded and annealed 63 (435)
Chromium ... ... ... 0.30–0.70
A A A A H55 light drawn, light cold worked 75 (515)
Other named elements
WC55 welded and light cold worked 75 (515)
Copper + elements with specific ... ... ... 99.5 min
C72200 O61 annealed 45 (310)
limits
WO61 welded and annealed 45 (310)
A
When the product is for subsequent welding applications and so specified by H55 light drawn, light cold worked 50 (345)
the purchaser, zinc shall be 0.50 % max, lead 0.02 % max, phosphorus 0.02 % WC55 welded and light cold worked 50 (345)
max, sulfur 0.02 max, and carbon 0.05 % max.

2
 B 552 – 98 (2004)
TABLE 3 Expansion Test Requirements subjected to a pressure gage reading over 1000 psi (7 MPa)
Temper Expansion of unless specifically stipulated in the contract or purchase order.
Tube Outside
Copper Alloy
Diameter, % of P 5 2St/~D 2 0.8t! (1)
UNS No.
Standard Former Original Outside
Diameter where:
C70600 O61 annealed 30 P = hydrostatic pressure, psi (MPa);
W061 welded and annealed 30 t = wall thickness of the material, in. (mm);
H55 light drawn, light cold worked 15 D = outside diameter of the material, in. (mm); and
WC55 welded and light cold worked 15
C71500 O61 annealed 30
S = allowable stress of the material, psi (MPa).
WO61 welded and annealed 30 11.3 Pneumatic Test:
H55 light drawn, light cold worked 15 11.3.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
WC55 welded and light cold worked 15
C71640 O61 annealed 30
each tube shall be subjected to a minimum internal air pressure
WO61 welded and annealed 30 of 60 psig (415 kPa) for 5 s without showing evidence of
H55 light drawn, light cold worked 15 leakage.
WC55 welded and light cold worked 15
C72200 O61 annealed 30 12. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations
WO61 welded and annealed 30
H55 light drawn, light cold worked 15 12.1 Diameter—Tubes to be furnished shall range in outside
WC55 welded and light cold worked 15 diameter, as specified, from 5⁄8 to 11⁄4 in. (15.9 to 31.8 mm)
inclusive. The diameter of the tubes shall not vary from that
specified by more than the following amount as measured by
been further processed after welding and the weld cannot be “go” and “no go” gages:
located, the test shall be performed in accordance with 10.2.1. Specified Diameter, Tolerance, Plus and Minus
in. (mm) in. (mm)
10.3 Weld Quality Test Requirements:
10.3.1 Seam Welds—Conformance to the quality require- To 1 (25.4) incl 0.004 (0.10)
ments of 13.3 shall be demonstrated at the welding job site by Over 1 to 1.250 (25.4 to 31.8) incl 0.005 (0.13)
a 180° reverse-bend test. Specimens approximately 11⁄2 in. 12.1.1 When tubes are supplied in coils for straightening at
(38.1 mm) long containing the weld shall be sectioned along jobsite the above tolerances apply to the finished straightened
the longitudinal axis of the tube with the seam weld centered in tubes.
one of the test sections. The sections containing the seam weld 12.2 Wall Thickness—Tubes shall be furnished as specified,
shall be flattened in a vise or equivalent tool before bending, with wall thicknesses in the range of 0.035 to 0.065 in. (0.889
and then bent 180° over a radius equal to three times the to 1.65 mm), inclusive.
nominal tube wall thickness. The root of the weld shall be 12.2.1 The wall thickness at any point shall not be less than
located on the outside surface of the knuckle of the bend. There that specified except when tubes are specifically ordered to a
shall be no evidence of cracks or lack of penetration in the “nominal” wall thickness. When tube is ordered to a “nominal”
weld. In cases in which the seam-welded tube is further wall thickness the deviation of the wall thickness from “nomi-
processed, it may be difficult or impossible to locate the weld, nal” shall not exceed 610 % of the nominal wall thickness,
and then this paragraph will not be a requirement. expressed to the nearest 0.0005 in. (0.013 mm).
12.2.2 The residual inner-bead reinforcement after removal
11. Nondestructive Test Requirements at seam-weld areas shall not exceed 0.006 in. (0.15 mm) in
11.1 Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Test: height.
11.1.1 Each tube shall be subjected to an eddy-current test. 12.3 Length—The lengths of the straight tubes shall not be
Testing shall follow the procedures of Practice E 243. less than that specified when measured at a temperature of
11.1.2 The provisions for the determination of “end-effect” 20°C but may exceed the specified value by the amounts given
in Practice E 243 shall not apply. in Table 4. For tube ordered in coils, the length may not be less
11.1.3 When tested in accordance with Practice E 243, tubes than that specified.
that do not actuate the signaling device of the testing unit shall 12.4 Squareness of Cut—The departure from squareness of
be considered as conforming to the requirements of the test. the end of any straight tube shall not exceed 0.016 in./in. (0.016
11.1.4 Either notch depth or drilled hold standards shall be mm/mm) of diameter.
used. 12.5 Tubes furnished in straight lengths shall be reasonably
11.1.4.1 Notch depth standards shall be 10 % of the wall straight when inspected at the mill. The maximum curvature
thickness.
11.1.4.2 Drilled hole standards shall be per Table X1.2 of TABLE 4 Length Tolerance
Practice E 243. Specified Length Tolerance, All Plus
11.2 Hydrostatic Test: ft (m) in. (mm)
11.2.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order, Up to 15 (4.9) incl ⁄
3 32 (2.4)
each tube shall stand, without showing evidence of leakage, an Over 15 to 20, incl (4.9–6.6) incl 18 ⁄ (3.2)
internal hydrostatic pressure sufficient to produce a fiber stress Over 20 to 30, incl (6.6–9.8) incl ⁄
5 32 (4.0)
Over 30 to 60, incl (9.9–19.7) incl 38 ⁄ (9.5)
of 7000 psi (48 MPa) as determined by the following equation Over 60 to 100, incl (19.7–32.8) incl 12 ⁄ (12.7)
for thin hollow cylinders under tension. The tube need not be

3
 B 552 – 98 (2004)
(depth of arc in inches) shall not exceed 1⁄4 in. (6.35 mm) in any
3-ft (0.914-m) length, except for the 3 ft (0.914 m) at the ends
of individual tubes, where departure from straightness shall not
exceed 1⁄2 in. (13 mm).
13. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
13.1 The product shall be clean and free from defects, but
blemishes of a nature that do not interfere with the intended
application are acceptable. Annealed temper tubes may have a
dull iridescent film on both the inside and outside surface, and
drawn temper tubes may have a superficial film of drawing
lubricant on the surfaces.
13.2 Minor dents having a rounded contour that does not
exceed 0.030 in. (0.76 mm) in depth and permit passage of the
tube at the dented point in a “go” gage are acceptable. Ends
shall be smooth and free of burrs.
13.3 Welded Tube—The weld seam shall show complete
fusion and penetration with no undercutting. The bead rein-
forcements that remain on the outside and inside of the tube
after welding shall be removed by cutting. After removal, the
weld shall show no sign of any crevice, crack, or porosity upon
visual inspection.
14. Sampling
14.1 The lot size, portion size, and sample size of the
finished product shall be as follows:
14.1.1 Lot Size—An inspection lot shall be 300 tubes or
30 000 lbs (13 600 kg) or fraction thereof, subject to inspection
at one time, whichever is the greater weight.
14.1.2 Portion Size—Portion size shall be sample pieces
from two individual lengths of each lot.
14.2 Chemical Analysis—Samples for chemical analysis
shall be taken in accordance with Practice E 255. Drillings,
millings, and so forth shall be taken in approximately equal
weight from each of the sample pieces selected in accordance
with 14.1.2 and combined into one composite sample. The
minimum weight of the composite sample that is to be divided
into three equal parts shall be 150 g.
14.2.1 Instead of sampling in accordance with Practice
E 255, the manufacturer shall have the option of determining
conformance to chemical composition as follows: Conform-
ance shall be determined by the manufacturer by analyzing
samples taken at the time the castings are poured or samples
taken from the semifinished product. If the manufacturer
determines the chemical composition of the material during the
course of manufacture, he shall not be required to sample and
analyze the finished product. The number of samples taken for
determination of chemical composition shall be as follows:
14.2.1.1 When samples are taken at the time the castings are
poured, at least one sample shall be taken for each group of
castings poured simultaneously from the same source of
molten metal.
14.2.1.2 When samples are taken from the semifinished
product, a sample shall be taken to represent each 10 000 lbs
(4550 kg) or fraction thereof, except that not more than one
sample shall be required per piece.
4
14.2.1.3 Because of the discontinuous nature of the process-
ing of castings into wrought products, it is not practical to
identify specific casting analysis with a specific quantity of
finished material.
14.2.1.4 In the event that heat identification or traceability is
required, the purchaser shall specify the details desired.
14.3 Spectrographic Analysis—Samples for spectrographic
analysis shall be taken from a 3-in. (76.2-mm) long section of
tube selected in accordance with 14.1.2.
15. Specimen Preparation
15.1 Chemical Analysis:
15.1.1 Sample preparation shall be in accordance with
Practice E 255.
15.1.2 Analytical specimen preparation shall be the respon-
sibility of the reporting laboratory.
16. Test Methods
16.1 Chemical Analysis:
16.1.1 Composition shall be determined, in case of dis-
agreement, as follows:
Element Test Method
Carbon E 76
Chromium E 118
Copper E 478
Iron E 478
Lead E 478; atomic absorption
Manganese E 62
Nickel E 478; photometric
Phosphorus E 62
Sulfur E 76
Zinc E 478; titrimetric
16.1.2 Test methods for the determination of element(s)
required by contractual or purchase order agreement shall be as
agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser.
16.2 Other Tests:
16.2.1 Tensile Strength shall be determined in accordance
with Test Methods E 8.
16.2.1.1 Whenever test results are obtained from both full-
size and machined specimens and they differ, the test results
from the full-size specimens shall prevail.
16.2.2 Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Test—Testing shall
follow the procedures in Practice E 243 except for the deter-
mination of “end-effect.”
16.2.2.1 Notch-depth standards shall be rounded to the
nearest 0.001 in. (0.025 mm). The notch depth tolerance shall
be 60.0005 in. (0.013 mm).
16.2.2.2 Drilled hole standards shall be rounded to the
nearest 0.001 in. (0.025 mm). The drilled hole tolerance shall
be 60.0005 in. (0.013 mm).
16.2.2.3 Alternatively, at the option of the manufacturer,
using speed-insensitive eddy current units that are equipped so
that a fraction of the maximum imbalance signal can be
selected, a maximum imbalance signal of 0.3 % shall be used.
16.2.2.4 Tubes that do not activate the signaling device of
the eddy current tester shall be considered as conforming to the
requirements of this test. Tubes with discontinuities indicated
by the testing unit are permitted, at the option of the manufac-
turer, to be reexamined or retested to determine whether the
discontinuity is cause for rejection. Signals that are found to
 B 552 – 98 (2004)
have been caused by minor mechanical damage, soil, or
moisture, shall not be cause for rejection of the tubes provided
the tube dimensions are still within prescribed limits, and the
tube is suitable for its intended application.
16.2.3 Hydrostatic Test—The test method used shall permit
easy visual detection of any leakage or by pressure differential.
Any evidence of leakage shall be cause for rejection.
16.2.4 Pneumatic Test—The test method used shall permit
easy visual detection of any leakage or by pressure differential.
Any evidence of leakage shall be cause for rejection.
17. Number of Tests and Retests
17.1 Tests:
17.1.1 Chemical Analysis—Chemical composition shall be
determined as the per element mean of results from at least two
replicate analyses of the sample(s) and the results of each
replication must meet the requirements of this specification.
17.1.2 Other Tests—The results of each specimen tested
must meet the requirements of this specification.
17.2 Retests:
17.2.1 When requested by the manufacturer or supplier, a
retest shall be permitted when test results obtained by the
purchaser fail to conform to product specification require-
ment(s).
17.2.2 Retesting shall be conducted using twice the number
of tests specimens normally required for test. Test results for
specimens shall conform to the product specification require-
ment(s) in retest and failure to conform to the requirements
shall be cause for rejection of the entire lot.
18. Inspection
18.1 The manufacturer, or supplier, shall inspect and make
tests necessary to verify the product furnished conforms to
specification requirements.
18.2 Source inspection of the product by the purchaser may
be agreed upon between the manufacturer, or supplier, and the
purchaser as part of the purchase order. In such case, the nature
of the facilities needed to satisfy the inspector representing the
purchaser that the product is being furnished in accordance
with the specification shall be included in the agreement. All
tests and the inspection shall be conducted so as not to interfere
unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
18.3 The manufacturer, or supplier, and the purchaser may
conduct the final inspection simultaneously by mutual agree-
ment.
5
19. Rejection and Rehearing
19.1 Rejection:
19.1.1 Product that fails to conform to the requirements of
this specification when tested by the purchaser or purchaser’s
agent, shall be subject to rejection.
19.1.2 Rejection shall be reported to the manufacturer, or
supplier, promptly, and in writing.
19.1.3 In case of dissatisfaction with results of the test upon
which rejection is based, the manufacturer, or supplier, may
make claim for a rehearing.
19.2 Rehearing:
19.2.1 As a result of product rejection, the manufacturer, or
supplier, is permitted to make claim for a retest to be conducted
by the manufacturer, or supplier, and the purchaser. Samples of
the rejected product shall be taken in accordance with the
product specification and subjected to test by both parties using
the test method(s) specified in the product specification, or,
alternately, upon agreement of both parties, an independent
laboratory may be selected for the test(s) using the test
method(s) specified in the product specification.
20. Certification
20.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order, the
purchaser shall be furnished certification that samples repre-
senting each lot have been either tested or inspected as directed
in this specification and requirements have been met.
21. Test Report
21.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order, a
report of test results shall be furnished.
22. Packaging and Package Marking
22.1 The material shall be separated by size, composition,
and temper, and prepared for shipment in such a manner as to
ensure acceptance by common carrier for transportation and to
afford protection from the normal hazards of transportation.
22.2 Each shipping unit shall be legibly marked with the
purchase order number, alloy designation, temper, size, shape,
total length or piece count or both, and name of supplier. The
specification number shall be shown, when specified.
23. Keywords
23.1 copper-nickel; desalting; heat exchangers; seamless
tube; tube; water desalting; welded tube
 B 552 – 98 (2004)
APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. METRIC EQUIVALENTS

X1.1 The SI unit for strength properties now shown is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI). The
derived SI unit for force is the newton (N), which is defined as
that force which when applied to a body having a mass of 1 kg
gives it an acceleration of 1 m/s2 (N = kg·m/s 2). The derived
SI unit for pressure or stress is the newton per square metre
(N/m2), which has been named the pascal (Pa) by the General
Conference Weights and Measures. Since 1 ksi = 6 894 757 Pa,
metric equivalents are expressed as megapascal (MPa), which
is the same as MN/m2 and N/mm2.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

This section identifies the changes that have been incorporated since the printing of B 552–92 as follows:

(1) A five-year review was conducted. Editorial revisions to
most sections were made to incorporate current form and style
practice.
(2) A greatly expanded and updated section on nondestructive
testing was added.
(3) Tensile strength requirements for Copper Alloys UNS Nos.
C70600 and C71500 were changed to match those of analo-
gous tempers in Specifications B 111 and B 543.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 551/B 551M – 04

Standard Specification for

Zirconium and Zirconium Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 551/B 551M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope nuclear standards)—a lot shall consist of a material of the

1.1 This specification2 covers five grades of zirconium strip, same size, shape, condition, and finish produced from the same
sheet, and plate. ingot or powder blend by the same reduction schedule and the
1.2 Unless a single unit is used, for example corrosion mass same heat treatment parameters. Unless otherwise agreed
gain in mg/dm2, the values stated in either inch-pound or SI between manufacturer and purchaser, a lot shall be limited to
units are to be regarded separately as standard. The values the product of an 8 h period for final continuous anneal, or to
stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore each a single furnace load for final batch anneal.
system must be used independently of the other. SI values 3.2.4 sponge, n—a lot shall consist of a single blend
cannot be mixed with inch-pound values. produced at one time.
1.3 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the 3.2.5 weld fittings, n—definition is to be mutually agreed
test method portions of this specification: This standard does upon between manufacturer and the purchaser.
not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any, 4. Classification
associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
standard to establish appropriate safety and health practices 4.1 The strip, sheet, or plate is to be furnished in five grades
and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior as follows:
to use. 4.1.1 Grade R60700—Low oxygen zirconium.
4.1.2 Grade R60702—Unalloyed zirconium.
2. Referenced Documents 4.1.3 Grade R60704—Zirconium-tin.
2.1 ASTM Standards: 3 4.1.4 Grade R60705—Zirconium-niobium.
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials 4.1.5 Grade R60706—Zirconium-niobium.
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to 5. Ordering Information
Determine Conformance with Specifications
5.1 Orders for material under this specification should
3. Terminology include the following information:
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: 5.1.1 Quantity (weight or number of pieces),
3.1.1 annealed—denotes material that exhibits a recrystal- 5.1.2 Name of material (zirconium strip, sheet, or plate),
lized grain structure. 5.1.3 Grade number (see Section 4),
3.2 Lot Definitions: 5.1.4 ASTM designation and year of issue,
3.2.1 castings, n—a lot shall consist of all castings produced 5.1.5 Finish and appearance (Section 10), and
from the same pour. 5.1.6 Additions to the specification and supplementary re-
3.2.2 ingot, n—no definition required. quirements, if required.
3.2.3 rounds, flats, tubes, and wrought powder metallurgical NOTE 1—A typical ordering description is as follows: 9000-lb [5000
products (single definition, common to nuclear and non- kg] zirconium sheet, 0.098 in. [2.5 mm] by 12 in. [300 mm] by 144 in. [3.5
m], ASTM B 551 - 01, Grade R60705.

1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B10 on 6. Materials and Manufacture
Reactive and Refractory Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of
Subcommittee B10.02 on Zirconium and Hafnium.
6.1 The strip, sheet, and plate covered by this specification
Current edition approved May 1, 2004. Published May 2004. Originally shall be formed with conventional forging and rolling equip-
approved in 1971. Last previous edition approved in 2002 as B 551/B 551M – 02. ment found in primary ferrous and nonferrous metal plants.
2
For ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code applications, see related Specifi- 6.2 The strip, sheet, and plate shall be supplied in the
cation SB-551 in Section II of that Code.
3
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
recrystallized annealed condition.
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 551/B 551M – 04
7. Chemical Composition TABLE 2 Permissible Variation in Check Analysis Between
Different Laboratories
7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
Permissible Variation in
chemical composition prescribed in Table 1. Element
Product Analysis, %
7.2 The manufacturer’s ingot analysis shall be considered
Hydrogen 0.002
the chemical analysis for strip, sheet, and plate, except for Nitrogen 0.01
hydrogen and nitrogen, which shall be determined on the Carbon 0.01
Hafnium 0.1
finished product. Iron + chromium 0.025
7.3 When requested by the purchaser and stated in the Tin 0.05
purchase order, a product analysis for any elements listed in Niobium 0.05
Oxygen 0.02
Table 1 shall be made on the finished product.
7.3.1 The manufacturer’s analysis shall be considered as
verified if the check analysis confirms the manufacturer’s
reported values within the tolerances prescribed in Table 2. 9.4 Camber Tolerances—The variations in camber toler-
ances are given in the following tables.
8. Mechanical Properties 9.4.1 Hot- and cold-rolled sheet, Table 15.
8.1 The material, as represented by the test specimens, shall 9.4.2 Hot- and cold-rolled strip, Table 16.
conform to the tensile properties prescribed in Table 3. 9.4.3 Plate, Table 17.
8.2 For strip and sheet, the bend test specimen shall stand 9.5 Diameter—The variation in diameter tolerance for cir-
being bent at ambient temperature through an angle of 105° cular plates is given in Table 18.
without fracture in the outside of the bent portion. The bend 9.6 Weight—The permissible variation in weight for zirco-
shall be made on a radius equal to that shown in Table 3 for the nium sheet is given in Table 19.
applicable grade. 9.7 Flatness—The permissible variation from a flat surface
for zirconium plate is given in Table 20.
9. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
9.1 Thickness—The variation in thickness of strip, sheet, 10. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
and plate are given in the following tables: 10.1 Flat-rolled product in the hot-rolled condition shall be
9.1.1 Hot- and cold-rolled sheet, Table 4. furnished with one of the following finishes as designated on
9.1.2 Hot-rolled strip, Table 5. the order.
9.1.3 Cold-rolled strip, Table 6. 10.1.1 Not descaled,
9.1.4 Plate, Table 7. 10.1.2 Mechanically descaled,
9.2 Width and Length—The variation in width and length 10.1.3 Mechanically descaled and pickled, or
are given in the following tables: 10.1.4 As-ground.
9.2.1 Hot- and cold-rolled sheet, Table 8. 10.2 Material in the cold-rolled condition shall be furnished
9.2.2 Hot-rolled strip, Tables 9 and 10. with a bright cold-rolled finish, or finished by mechanical or
9.2.3 Cold-rolled strip, Tables 11 and 10. chemical methods.
9.2.4 Plate, Table 12. 10.3 The following types of edges are available:
9.3 Crown Tolerances—The variations in crown tolerances 10.3.1 Mill edge,
are given in the following tables: 10.3.2 Slit edge,
9.3.1 Hot-rolled strip, Table 13. 10.3.3 Sheared edge, and
9.3.2 Cold-rolled strip, Table 14. 10.3.4 Machined edge.

TABLE 1 Chemical RequirementsA

Composition, %
Element Grades
R60700 R60702 R60704 R60705 R60706
Zirconium + hafnium, min 99.2 99.2 97.5 95.5 95.5
Hafnium, max 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
Iron + chromium 0.2 max 0.2 max 0.2 to 0.4 0.2 max 0.2 max
Tin ... ... 1.0 to 2.0 ... ...
Hydrogen, max 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005
Nitrogen, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
Carbon, max 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
Niobium ... ... ... 2.0 to 3.0 2.0 to 3.0
Oxygen, max 0.10 0.16 0.18 0.18 0.16
A
By agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer, analysis may be required and limits established for elements and compounds not specified in the table
of chemical composition.

2
 B 551/B 551M – 04
TABLE 3 Tensile Requirements
Grades
R60700 R60702 R60704 R60705 R60706
Tensile strength, min, ksi [MPa] ... 55 [380] 60 [415] 80 [550] 74 [510]
Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa] ... 30 [205] 35 [240] 55 [380] 50 [345]
Tensile strength, max, ksi [MPa] 55 [380] ... ... ... ...
Yield strength, max, ksi [MPa] 44 [305] ... ... ... ...
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, %A 20 16 14 16 14
Bend test radiusB 5T 5T 5T 3T 2.5T
A
When a sub-size specimen is used, the gage length shall be as specified in Test Methods E 8 for that specimen.
B
T equals the thickness of the bend test specimen. Bend tests are not applicable to material over 0.187 in. [4.8 mm] in thickness.

TABLE 4 Permissible Variations in Thickness of Hot- and Rounded Unit for Observed or
Cold-Rolled Zirconium SheetA Property Calculated Value
Permissible Variations in
Specified Thickness, in. [mm] Thickness, plus and minus, in. Chemical composition and tolerances nearest unit in the last right-hand place
[mm] (when expressed as decimals) of figures of the specified limit
Tensile strength and yield strength nearest 1000 psi (10 MPa]
0.146–0.1875, excl [3.7–4.8] 0.014 [0.35] Elongation nearest 1 %
0.131–0.145 [3.31–3.69] 0.012 [0.30]
0.115–0.130 [2.91–3.30] 0.010 [0.25] 12. Number of Tests and Retests
0.099–0.114 [2.51–2.90] 0.009 [0.23]
0.084–0.098 [2.12–2.50] 0.008 [0.20]
12.1 One longitudinal tension shall be made from each lot
0.073–0.083 [1.84–2.11] 0.007 [0.18] (see 13.1).
0.059–0.072 [1.49–1.83] 0.006 [0.15] 12.2 One chemistry test for hydrogen and nitrogen content
0.041–0.058 [1.04–1.48] 0.005 [0.13]
0.027–0.040 [0.67–1.03] 0.004 [0.10] shall be made from each lot of finished product (see 13.2).
0.017–0.026 [0.42-0.66] 0.003 [0.08] 12.3 Two bend tests, one in the longitudinal and one in the
0.008–0.016 [0.19–0.41] 0.002 [0.05] transverse direction, shall be made from each lot (see 8.2).
0.006–0.007 [0.15–0.18] 0.0015 [0.04]
0.005 [0.13] 0.001 [0.025] 12.4 Retests:
A
Thickness measurements are taken at least 3⁄8 in. [9.5 mm] in from edge.
12.4.1 If any sample or specimen exhibits obvious surface
contamination or improper preparation disqualifying it as a
TABLE 5 Permissible Variations in Thickness of Hot-Rolled
truly representative sample, it shall be discarded and a new
Zirconium Strip sample or specimen substituted.
Variation from Specified Thickness
12.4.2 If the results of any tests of any lot do not conform to
for Widths Given, Over and the requirements specified, retests shall be made on additional
Specified Width, in. [mm] Under, inA [mm] sheet, strip, or plate of double the original number from the
0.187–0.118, incl 0.119–0.083, incl same lot, each of which shall conform to the requirements
To 31⁄2 incl 0.006 [0.15] 0.005 [0.13] specified.
Over 31⁄2 –12, incl 0.007 [0.18] 0.006 [0.15] 12.4.3 Retesting after failure of initial retests may be done
Over 12–18, incl 0.008 [0.20] 0.008 [0.20]
Over 18–24, incl 0.010 [0.25] 0.010 [0.25]
only with the approval of the purchaser.
A
Thickness measurements shall be taken 3⁄8 in. [9.5 mm] from edge. Tolerances 13. Test Methods
do not include crown.
13.1 Tension Tests—Conduct the tension test in accordance
with Test Methods E 8. Determine the yield strength by the
offset (0.2 %) method. Determine the tensile properties using a
11. Significance of Numerical Limits strain rate of 0.003 to 0.007 in./in. [mm/mm]/min through the
11.1 For the purpose of determining compliance with the yield strength. After the yield strength has been exceeded, the
specified limits for requirements of the properties listed in the cross-head speed may be increased to approximately 0.05
following table, an observed value or a calculated value shall in./in. [mm/mm]/min to failure.
be rounded as indicated in accordance with the rounding 13.2 Chemical Tests—Conduct the chemical analysis by the
methods of Practice E 29. standard techniques normally used by the manufacturer.

3
 B 551/B 551M – 04
TABLE 6 Permissible Variations in Thickness of Cold-Rolled Zirconium Strip

NOTE 1—For thickness under 0.010 in. [0.25 mm] in widths to 16 in. [400 mm] a tolerance of 610 % of the thickness shall apply; in widths over 16
[400 mm] to 24 in. [600 mm] incl, a tolerance of 615 % of the thickness shall apply.
NOTE 2—Thickness measurements shall be taken 3⁄8 in. [9.5 mm] in from edge of the strip, except on widths less than 1 in. [2.5 mm] where the
tolerances are applicable for measurements at all locations.
NOTE 3—The tolerances given in this table do not include crown tolerances.
Permissible Variations in Thickness, for Widths Given, Plus and Minus, in. [mm]
⁄ [4.8 mm]
3 16 1 [25 mm]–3 3 [75 mm]–6 Over 6 Over 9 Over 12 Over 16 Over 20
Specified Thickness, in. (mm] incl, –1 [25 mm], [75 mm] in., [150 mm] in., [150 mm]–9 [230 mm]–12 [300 mm]–16 [400 mm]–20 [500 mm]–24
in. excl excl incl [230 mm] in., [300 mm] in., [400 mm] in., [500 mm] in., [600 mm] in.,
incl incl incl incl incl
Under 3⁄16 –0.161, incl [4.8–4.1] 0.002 [0.05] 0.003 [.08] 0.004 [.10] 0.004 [.10] 0.004 [.10] 0.005 [.13] 0.006 [.16] 0.006 [.16]
0.160-0.100, incl [4.0-2.52] 0.002 [0.05] 0.002 [.05] 0.003 [.08] 0.004 [.10] 0.004 [.10] 0.004 [.10] 0.005 [.13] 0.005 [.13]
0.099–0.069, incl [2.51–1.75] 0.002 [0.05] 0.002 [.05] 0.003 [.08] 0.003 [.08] 0.003 [.08] 0.004 [.10] 0.004 [.10] 0.004 [.10]
0.068–0.050, incl [1.74–1.3] 0.002 [0.05] 0.002 [.05] 0.003 [.08] 0.003 [.08] 0.003 [.08] 0.003 [.08] 0.004 [.10] 0.004 [.10]
0.049–0.040, incl [1.29–1.00] 0.002 [0.05] 0.002 [.05] 0.0025 [.06] 0.003 [.08] 0.003 [0.8] 0.003 [.08] 0.004 [.10] 0.004 [.10]
0.039–0.035, incl [0.99–0.90] 0.002 [0.05] 0.002 [.05] 0.0025 [.06] 0.003 [.08] 0.003 [.08] 0.003 [.08] 0.003 [.08] 0.003 [.08]
0.034–0.029, incl [0.89–0.73] 0.0015 [.04] 0.0015 [.04] 0.002 [.05] 0.0025 [.06] 0.0025 [.06] 0.0025 [.06] 0.003 [.08] 0.003 [.08]
0.028–0.026, incl [0.72–0.66] 0.001 [.025] 0.0015 [.04] 0.0015 [.04] 0.002 [.05] 0.002 [.05] 0.002 [.05] 0.0025 [.06] 0.003 [.08]
0.025–0.020, incl [0.65–0.51] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.0015 [.04] 0.002 [.05] 0.002 [.05] 0.002 [.05] 0.0025 [.06] 0.0025 [.06]
0.019–0.017, incl [0.50–0.43] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.0015 [.04] 0.0015 [.04] 0.002 [.05] 0.002 [.05] 0.002 [.05]
0.016–0.013, incl [0.42–0.32] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.0015 [.04] 0.0015 [.04] 0.0015 [.04] 0.002 [.05] 0.002 [.05]
0.012 [.30] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.0015 [.04] 0.0015 [.04] 0.0015 [.04] 0.0015 [.04]
0.011 [.28] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.0015 [.04] 0.0015 [.04] 0.0015 [.04]
0.010 [.25] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.001 [.025] 0.0015 [.04] 0.0015 [.04]

TABLE 7 Permissible Variations in Thickness of Zirconium TABLE 8 Permissible Variations in Width and Length of Hot- and
PlateA Cold-Rolled Zirconium Sheet
Permissible Variations in Thickness for Specified Width, in. [m] for Permissible Variations
Widths Given, in. [mm] Thickness Under 3⁄16 in. [4.8 mm] in Width, in. [mm]
Specified Thickness,
To 84 in. [2.1 m], incl Over 84–120 in. 24–48, excl [7–14] +1⁄8 , −0 [+3.2, −0]
in. [mm]
[2.1–3.05 m], incl 48 and over [14] +3⁄16 , −0 [+4.8, −0]
Plus Minus Plus Minus Specified Length, ft [m] Permissible Variations
⁄ [3.2]–3⁄8 [9.5], excl
18 0.046 [1.17] 0.01 [.25] 0.050 [1.3] 0.01 [.25] in Length, in. [mm]
⁄ [9.5]–3⁄4 [20], excl
38 0.054 [1.37] 0.01 [.25] 0.058 [1.47] 0.01 [.25] Up–10, incl [3] +1⁄2 , −0 [+13, −0]
3⁄4 [20]–1 [25], excl 0.060 [1.52] 0.01 [.25] 0.064 [1.62] 0.01 [.25] Over 10–20, incl [3-6] +1, −0 [+25, −0]
1 [25]–2 [50]B, incl 0.070 [1.78] 0.01 [.25] 0.074 [1.88] 0.01 [.25]
A
For circles, the plus tolerances for the specified thicknesses apply to the
diameter of the circle corresponding to the width ranges shown. For plates of
irregular shape, the plus thickness tolerances apply to the greatest width corre-
purchase order which tests he desires to witness. The manu-
sponding to the width ranges shown. facturer shall give ample notice to the purchaser as to the time
B
For permissible variations on plates over 2 in. [50 mm] thick, the producer and place of the designated tests. If the purchaser’s represen-
should be consulted.
tative does not present himself at the time agreed upon for the
testing, the manufacturer shall consider the requirement for
14. Inspection purchaser’s inspection at the place of manufacture to be
14.1 The manufacturer shall inspect the material covered by waived.
this specification prior to shipment and, on request, shall 14.2 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent-
furnish the purchaser with certificates of test. If so specified in ing the purchaser, without charge, all reasonable facilities to
the purchase order, the purchaser or his representative may satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
witness the testing and inspection of the material at the place of with this specification. This inspection shall be so conducted as
manufacturer. In such cases the purchaser shall state in his to not interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.

4
 B 551/B 551M – 04
TABLE 9 Permissible Variations in Width of Hot-Rolled Zirconium Strip
Permissible Variation in Width, in. [mm]
Specified Width, in. [mm] Mill Edge Slit Edge Sheared Edge
Plus Minus Plus Minus Plus Minus
To 31⁄2 incl [90] 1⁄8 [3.2] 0 1⁄32 [0.8] 1⁄32 [0.8] 1⁄16 [0.6] 1⁄16 [0.6]

Over 31⁄2 –12, incl [90-300] 1⁄4 [6.4] 1⁄8 [3.2] 1⁄32 [0.8] 1⁄32 [0.8] 1⁄8 [3.2] 0
Over 12–18, incl [300-460] 3⁄8 [9.5] 1⁄8 [3.2] 3⁄64 [1.2] 3⁄64 [1.2] 1⁄8 [3.2] 0
Over 18–24, excl [460-600] 1⁄2 [13] 1⁄4 [6.4] 3⁄64 [1.2] 3⁄64 [1.2] 3⁄16 [4.8] 0

TABLE 10 Permissible Variations in Length of Hot- and 18. Product Marking

Cold-Rolled Zirconium Strip
Permissible Variations
Specified Length, ft [m]
in Length, in. [mm]
To 5, incl [1.5] +3⁄8 , –0 [+9.5,– 0]
Over 5–10, incl [1.5–3] +1⁄2 , –0 [+13, –0]
Over 10–20, incl [3–6.1] +⁄8 , –0 [+16, –0]
15. Rejection
15.1 Rejection for failure of the material to meet the
requirements of this specification shall be reported to the
manufacturer within 60 calendar days from the receipt of the
material by the purchaser. Unless otherwise specified, rejected
material may be returned to the manufacturer at the manufac-
turer’s expense, unless the purchaser receives, within three
weeks of the notice of rejection, other instructions for dispo-
sition.
16. Certification
16.1 A producer or supplier shall furnish the purchaser with
a certificate that the material was manufactured, sampled,
tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification and
has been found to meet the requirements. The certificate shall
include a report of the test results.
17. Referee
17.1 In the event of disagreement between the manufacturer
and the purchaser on the conformance of the material to the
requirements of this specification or any special test specified
by the purchaser, a mutually acceptable referee shall perform
the tests in question. The results of the referee’s testing shall be
used in determining conformance of the material to this
specification.
18.1 Identification—Unless otherwise specified, each plate,
sheet, and strip shall be marked in the respective location
indicated below, with the number of this specification, heat
number, manufacturer’s identification, and the nominal thick-
ness. The characters shall be not less than 3⁄8 in. [9.52 mm] in
height, shall be applied using a suitable marking fluid, and shall
be capable of being removed with a hot alkaline cleaning
solution without rubbing. The marking shall have no deleteri-
ous effect on the material or its performance. The characters
shall be sufficiently stable to withstand ordinary handling
18.1.1 Plate, flat sheet, and flat strip over 6 in. [150 mm] in
width shall be marked in lengthwise rows of characters
recurring at intervals not greater than 3 in. [75 mm], the rows
being spaced not more than 1 in. [40 mm] apart and alterna-
tively staggered. Heat numbers shall occur at least three times
across the width of the material and at intervals not greater than
2 ft [0.6 m] along the length. As an option, when permitted by
the purchaser, each plate, sheet, or cut length strip may be
marked in at least one corner with the number of this
specification, heat number, manufacturer’s identification, and
the nominal thickness in inches or millimetres as required.
18.1.2 Flat strip 6 in. [150 mm] and under in width shall be
marked near one end.
18.1.3 Coiled sheet and strip shall be marked near the
outside end of the coil.
19. Packaging and Package Marking
19.1 Unless otherwise specified, material purchased under
this specification may be packaged for shipment either by
boxing, crating, single boarding, burlapping, or with no pro-
tection in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard prac-
tice.
20. Keywords
20.1 plate; sheet; strip; zirconium; zirconium alloy

5
 B 551/B 551M – 04
TABLE 11 Permissible Variations in Width of Cold-Rolled Zirconium Strip (Slit Edge)
Permissible Variations in Width, for Widths Given, Plus and Minus, in. [mm]
Specified Thickness, in. [mm] Under 1⁄2 [13]–3⁄16 12 ⁄ [13 mm]–6 [150 Over 6 [150]–9 Over 9 [230 mm]–12 Over 12 [300]–20 Over 20 [500]–24
[4.8 mm], in. incl mm], in. incl [230 mm] in., incl [300 mm] in., incl [500 mm] in. incl [600 mm] in., excl
Under 3⁄16 –0.161, incl [4.8–4.1] ... 0.016 [.41] 0.020 [.5] 0.020 [.5] 0.031 [.8] 0.031 [.8]
0.160–0.100, incl [4.0–2.52] 0.010 [.25] 0.010 [.25] 0.016 [.41] 0.016 [.41] 0.020 [.5] 0.020 [.5]
0.099–0.069, incl [2.51–1.75] 0.008 [.2] 0.008 [.2] 0.010 [.25] 0.010 [.25] 0.016 [.41] 0.020 [.5]
0.068 and under [1.74] 0.005 [.13] 0.005 [.13] 0.005 [.25] 0.010 [.25] 0.016 [.41] 0.020 [.5]

TABLE 12 Permissible Variations in Width and Length of Rectangular, Sheared Zirconium Plate
NOTE 1—The permissible variation under the specified width and length is 1⁄4 in. [6.4 mm]
NOTE 2—Rectangular plates over 1 in. [25 mm] in thickness are not commonly sheared, and are machined or otherwise cut to length and width or
produced in the size as-rolled, uncropped.
Permissible Variations Over Specified Dimension, for Thickness Given, in. [mm]
Specified Length, in. [m] Specified Width, in. [m] Under 3⁄8 in. [9.5 mm] ⁄ –5⁄8 in. [9.5–16 mm], excl
38 58 ⁄ in. [16 mm] and Over
Width Length Width Length Width Length
Under 120 [3.05] Under 60 [1.52] ⁄
38 [9.5] ⁄
12 [13] ⁄
7 16 [11] ⁄ [16]
58 ⁄
12 [13] ⁄ [20]
34

60-84 [1.52–2.1], excl ⁄

7 16 [11] ⁄
58 [16] ⁄
12 [13] ⁄ [17.5]
11 16 ⁄
58 [16] ⁄ [22]
78

84-108 [2.1–2.74], excl 1⁄2 [13] 3⁄4 [20] 5⁄8 [16] 7⁄8 [22] 3⁄8 [9.5] 1 [25]
108 [2.74] or over 5⁄8 [16] 7⁄8 [22] 3⁄4 [20] 1 [25] 7⁄8 [22] 11⁄8 [28.6]

120–240 [3.05–6.1], excl Under 60 [1.52] ⁄ [9.5]

38 ⁄ [16]
38 ⁄ [13]
12 7⁄8 [22] ⁄ [16]
58 1 [25]
60–84 [1.52–2.1], excl ⁄ [13]
12 ⁄ [20]
34 ⁄ [16]
58 7⁄8 [22] ⁄ [20]
34 1 [25]
84–108 [2.1–2.74], excl 9⁄16 [14] 7⁄8 [22] 11⁄16 [17.5] 15⁄16 [24] 13⁄16 [20.6] 11⁄8 [28.6]
108 [2.74] or over 5⁄8 [16] 1 [25] 3⁄4 [20] 11⁄8 [28.6] 7⁄8 [22] 11⁄4 [32]

240–360 [6.1–9.15], excl Under 60 [1.52] ⁄ [9.5]

38 1 [25] ⁄ [13]
12 11⁄8 [28.6] ⁄ [16]
58 11⁄4 [32]
60–84 [1.52–2.1] excl ⁄ [13]
12 1 [25] ⁄ [16]
58 11⁄8 [28.6] ⁄ [20]
34 13⁄4 [32]
84–108 [2.1–2.74], excl 9⁄16 [14] 1 [25] 11⁄16 [17.5] 11⁄8 [28.6] 7⁄8 [22] 13⁄8 [3]
108 [2.74] or over 11⁄16 [17.5] 11⁄8 [28.6] 7⁄8 [22] 11⁄4 [32] 1 [25] 13⁄8 [35]

360–480 [9.5–12.2], excl Under 60 [1.52] ⁄ [11]

7 16 11⁄8 [28.6] ⁄
12 [13] 11⁄4 [32] ⁄ [16]
58 11⁄2 [38]
60–84 [1.52–2.1], excl ⁄ [13]
12 11⁄4 [32] ⁄
58 [16] 13⁄8 [35] ⁄ [20]
34 11⁄2 [38]
84–108 [2.1–2.74], excl 9⁄16 [14] 11⁄4 [32] 3⁄4 [20] 13⁄8 [35] 7⁄8 [22] 11⁄2 [38]
108 [2.74] or over 3⁄4 [20] 13⁄8 [35] 7⁄8 [22] 11⁄2 [38 1 [25] 15⁄8 [41]

480–600 [12.2–15.24], excl Under 60 [1.52] ⁄

7 16 [11] 11⁄4 [32] ⁄
12 [13] 11⁄2 [38] ⁄ [16]
58 15⁄6 [41]
60–84 [1.52–2.1], excl ⁄
12 [13] 13⁄8 [35] ⁄
58 [16] 11⁄2 [38] ⁄ [20]
34 15⁄6 [41]
84–108 [2.1–2.74], excl 5⁄8 [16] 13⁄8 [35] 3⁄4 [20] 11⁄2 [38] 7⁄8 [22] 15⁄6 [41]
108 [2.74] or over 3⁄4 [20] 11⁄2 [38] 7⁄8 [22] 15⁄8 [41] 1 [25] 13⁄4 [45]

600 [15.24] or over Under 60 [1.52] ⁄

12 [13] 13⁄4 [45] ⁄ [16]
58 17⁄8 [48] ⁄ [16]
58 17⁄8 [48]
60–84 [1.52–2.1], excl ⁄
58 [16] 13⁄4 [45] ⁄ [20]
34 17⁄8 [48] ⁄ [22]
78 17⁄8 [48]
84–108 [2.1–2.74], excl 5⁄8 [16] 13⁄4 [45] 3⁄4 [20] 17⁄8 [48] 7⁄8 [22] 17⁄8 [48]
108 [2.74] or over 7⁄8 [22] 13⁄4 [45] 1 [25] 2 [50] 11⁄8 [28.6] 21⁄4 [57]

TABLE 13 Crown Tolerances for Hot-Rolled Zirconium Strip TABLE 14 Crown Tolerances for Cold-Rolled Zirconium Strip
Permissible Variation in Tolerance by which the Thickness at Middle of
Thickness from Edge to Strip may be Greater than at the Edges, for
Specified Width, in. [mm]
Center of Strip, for Widths Widths Given, in. [mm]
Given, in. [mm] Specified Thickness, in. [mm]
Over 5 Over 12
To 5 [125],
To 31⁄2 , incl [90] 0.003 [0.08] [125]–12 [300], [300]–24 [600],
incl
Over 31⁄2 –12, incl [90–300] 0.004 [0.10] incl inc.
Over 12–18, incl [300–460] 0.006 [0.15]
0.005 [.13]–0.010 [.25], incl 0.00075[.02] 0.001[.025] 0.0015[.04]
Over 18–24, excl [460–500] 0.008 [0.20]
Over 0.010 [.25]–0.025 [.64], 0.001[0.25] 0.0015[.04] 0.002[.05]
incl
Over 0.025 [.64]–0.065 [1.65], 0.0015[.04] 0.002[.05] 0.0025[.06]
incl
Over 0.065 [1.65]–3⁄16 [4.8], 0.002[.05] 0.0025[.06] 0.003[.08]
excl

6
 B 551/B 551M – 04
TABLE 15 Camber Tolerances for Hot- and Cold-Rolled
Zirconium SheetA
Specified Width, in. [mm] Tolerance per Unit
Length of any 8 ft [24 m], in. [mm]
24–36, incl [600–900] 1⁄8 [3.2]

Over 36 [900] 3⁄32 [2.4]

A
Camber is the greatest deviation of a side edge from a straight line, the
measurement being taken on the concave side with a straightedge.

TABLE 16 Camber Tolerance for Hot- and Cold-Rolled Zirconium

StripA
Tolerance, per Unit Length
Specified Width, in. [mm] of any 8 ft [2.44 m],
in. [mm]
To 11⁄2 , incl [38] 1⁄2 [13]

Over 11⁄2 –24, incl [38–600] 1⁄4 [6.4]

A
Camber is the deviation of a side edge from a straight line. The measurement
is taken by placing an 8-ft [2.44 m] straight-edge on the concave side and
measuring the greatest distance between the strip edge and the straight edge.

TABLE 17 Camber Tolerance for Zirconium PlateA

Tolerance: ⁄ in. [3.2 mm]3 (number of meters/1.5)
18

(number of feet of length/5)

A
Camber is the greatest deviation of a side edge from a straight line. The
measurement is taken by placing a straightedge on the concave side and
measuring the greatest distance between the plate edge and the straightedge.

TABLE 18 Diameter Tolerances for Circular Plates

Tolerance Over Specified Diameter for Given
Diameter and Thickness
(No Tolerance Under), in. [mm]
Specified Diameter, in. [m]
3⁄8 to 5⁄8 ⁄ [16] and
58
To 3⁄8 [9.5], incl,
[9.5–16] excl, Over in
in Thickness
in Thickness ThicknessA
To 60 [1.5], excl ⁄ [6.4]
14 ⁄ [9.5]
38 ⁄ [13]
12

60–84 [1.5–2.1], incl ⁄

5 16 [8.0] ⁄ [11]
7 16 ⁄
2 16 [14]
84–108 [2.1–2.8], excl 3⁄8 [9.5] 1⁄2 [13] ⁄ [16]
58

108–130 [2.8–3.3], incl 7⁄16 [11] 9⁄16 [14] 11⁄16 [17.5]

A
Circular and sketch plates over 5⁄8 in. [16 mm] in thickness are not commonly
sheared and are machined or otherwise cut.

TABLE 19 Permissible Variations in Weight of Hot- and

Cold-Rolled Zirconium Sheet
The actual weight of any one item on an ordered thickness and size in any
finish is limited in overweight by the following tolerance:
Any item of 5 sheets or less or any item estimated to weigh 200 lb [100 kg]
or less, may actually weigh as much as 10 % over the estimated weight.
Any item of more than 5 sheets and estimated to weigh more than 200 lb
[100 kg] may actually weigh as much as 71⁄2 % over the estimated weight.
There is no under tolerance in weight for zirconium sheets, under tolerance
being restricted by the permissible thickness variations. Only random (or mill
size) sheets may be ordered on a square foot [meter] basis, and the number
of square feet [meter] shipped may exceed the number ordered by as much
as 5 %

7
 B 551/B 551M – 04
TABLE 20 Permissible Variations From a Flat Surface for Annealed Zirconium Plate-inch [mm]

NOTE 1—Variations in flatness apply to plates up to 15 ft [4.6 m] in length, or to any 15 ft [4.6 m] of longer plates.
NOTE 2—If the longer dimension is under 36 in. [1 m], the variation is not greater than 3⁄4 in. [6.4 mm].
NOTE 3—The shorter dimension specified is considered the width and the variation in flatness across the width does not exceed the tabular amount for
that dimension.
NOTE 4—The maximum deviation from a flat surface does not customarily exceed the tabular tolerance for the longer dimension specified.
Permissible Variations in Flatness, for Widths Given, Plus and Minus, in. [mm]

Specified Thickness, in. 48 in. [1.2 m] 48 [1.2 m]−60 60 [1.5 m]−72 72 [1.8 m]−84 84 [2.1 m]−96 96 [2.4 m]−108 108 120 144 [3.7 m]
[mm] or Under [1.5 m], [1.8 m], [2.1 m], [2.4 m], [2.74 m], [2.74 m]−120 [3.05 m]−144 and Over
excl excl excl excl excl [3.05 m], [3.7 m],
excl excl
⁄ [3.2]–1⁄4 [6.4], excl
18 ⁄ [20]
34 11⁄16 [27] 11⁄4 [32] 13⁄8 [35] 15⁄8 [41] 15⁄8 [41] ... ... ...
⁄ [6.4]–3⁄8 [9.5], excl
14 ⁄ [17.5]
11 16 3⁄4 [20] 15⁄16 [24] 11⁄8 [28.6] 13⁄8 [35] 17⁄16 [36.5] 19⁄16 [40] 17⁄8 [48] ...
3⁄8 [9.5]–1⁄2 [13], excl 1⁄2 [13] 9⁄16 [14] 11⁄16 [17.5] 3⁄4 [20] 15⁄16 [24] 11⁄8 [28.6] 11⁄4 [32] 17⁄16 [36.5] 13⁄4 [45]
1⁄2 [13]–3⁄4 [20], excl 1⁄2 [13] 9⁄16 [14] 5⁄8 [16] 5⁄8 [16] 13⁄16 [20.6] 11⁄8 [28.6] 11⁄8 [28.6] 11⁄8 [28.6] 13⁄8 [35]
3⁄4 [20]–1 [25], excl 1⁄2 [13] 9⁄16 [14] 5⁄8 [16] 5⁄8 [16] 3⁄4 [20] 13⁄16 [30] 15⁄16 [24] 1 [25] 11⁄8 [28.6]
1 [25]–11⁄2 [38], excl 1⁄2 [13] 9⁄16 [14] 9⁄16 [14] 9⁄16 [14] 11⁄16 [17.5] 11⁄16 [17.5] 11⁄16 [17.5] 3⁄4 [20] 1 [25]
11⁄2 [39]–4 [100], excl 3⁄16 [4.8] 5⁄16 [8] 3⁄8 [9.5] 7⁄16 [11] 1⁄2 [13] 9⁄16 [14] 5⁄8 [16] 3⁄4 [20] 7⁄8 [22]

4 [100]–6 [150], excl 1⁄4 [6.4] 3⁄8 [9.5] 1⁄2 [13] 9⁄16 [14] 5⁄8 [16] 3⁄4 [20] 7⁄8 [22] 1 [25] 11⁄8 [28.6]

SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS

S.1 Additional Requirements for Material to be Used for
Explosion Cladding
S1.1 These requirements apply exclusively for sheet and
plate to be used for explosion cladding.
S1.2 These requirements apply only to Grades R60700 and
R60702 and only in thicknesses ranging from 0.078 in. [2 mm]
to 0.78 in. [20 mm] inclusive.
S1.3 Additional flatness requirements:
S1.3.1 The permissible variation in flatness for zirconium
material grades R60700 and R60702 for explosion cladding
applications shall be 1⁄2 that of the limits in Table 20. Localized
flatness variations shall not exceed 0.12 in. [3 mm] in 39 in. [1
m], as measured using a straight edge placed (balanced) at any
location on the plate surface.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

8
 Designation: B 557M – 02a

METRIC

Standard Test Methods of

Tension Testing Wrought and Cast Aluminum- and
Magnesium-Alloy Products [Metric]1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 557M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope * E 83 Practice for Verification and Classification of Exten-

1.1 These test methods cover the tension testing of wrought
and cast aluminum- and magnesium-alloy products, excepting
aluminum foil2, and are derived from Test Methods E 8M,
which cover the tension testing of all metallic materials.
NOTE 1—These metric test methods are the equivalents of those in Test
Methods B 557, and are compatible in technical content except for the
requirement of longer gage lengths for round specimens.
NOTE 2—Exceptions to the provisions of these test methods may need
to be made in individual specifications or test methods for a particular
material.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect at the
time of reference form a part of these test methods to the extent
referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards:
E 4 Practices for Force Verification of Testing Machines3
E 6 Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical Test-
ing3
E 8M Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Mate-
rials [Metric]3
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications4
1
These test methods are under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on
Light Metals and Alloys and are the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.05
on Testing.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2002. Published January 2003. Originally
published as B 557M – 76. Last previous edition B 557M – 02.
2
For test methods of tension testing of aluminum foil, see Test Methods E 345.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
someter3
E 345 Test Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Foil3
E 1012 Practice for Verification of Specimen Alignment
Under Tensile Loading3
3. Terminology
3.1 The definitions of terms relating to tension testing
appearing in Terminology E 6 shall be considered as applying
to the terms used in these test methods.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 Tension tests provide information on the strength and
ductility of materials under uniaxial tensile stresses. This
information may be useful in comparisons of materials, alloy
development, quality control, and design under certain circum-
stances.
4.2 The results of tension tests of specimens machined to
standardized dimensions from selected portions of a part or
material may not totally represent the strength and ductility
properties of the entire end product or its in-service behavior in
different environments.
4.3 These test methods are considered satisfactory for ac-
ceptance testing of commercial shipments and have been used
extensively in the trade for this purpose.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Testing Machines—Machines used for tension testing
shall conform to the requirements of Practices E 4. The forces
used in determining tensile strength and yield strength shall be
within the verified force application range of the testing
machine as defined in Practices E 4.
5.2 Gripping Devices:
5.2.1 General—Various types of gripping devices may be
used to transmit the measured load applied by the testing
machine to the test specimens. To ensure axial tensile stress
within the gage length, the axis of the test specimen must
coincide with the centerline of the heads of the testing

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 557M – 02a
machine. Any departure from this requirement may introduce
bending stresses that are not included in the usual stress
computation (load divided by cross-sectional area).
NOTE 3—The effect of this eccentric loading may be illustrated by
calculating the bending moment and stress thus added. For a standard
12.50-mm diameter specimen, the stress increase is 1.5 percentage points
for each 0.025 mm of eccentricity. This error increases to about 2.3
percentage points/0.025 mm for a 9-mm diameter specimen and to 3.25
percentage points /0.025-mm for a 6-mm diameter specimen.
NOTE 4—Alignment methods are given in Practice E 1012.
5.2.2 Wedge Grips—Testing machines usually are equipped
with wedge grips. These wedge grips generally furnish a
satisfactory means of gripping long bars of ductile metal. If,
however, for any reason, one grip of a pair advances farther
than the other as the grips tighten, an undesirable bending
stress may be introduced. When liners are used behind the
wedges, they must be of the same thickness and their faces
must be flat and parallel. For best results, the wedges should be
supported over their entire length by the heads of the testing
machine. This requires that liners of several thicknesses be
available to cover the range of specimen thickness. For proper
gripping, it is desirable that the entire length of the serrated
face of each wedge be in contact with the specimen. Proper
alignment of wedge grips and liners is illustrated in Fig. 1. For
short specimens it is generally necessary to use machined test
specimens and to use a special means of gripping to ensure that
the specimens, when under load, shall be as nearly as possible
in uniformly distributed pure axial tension (see 5.2.3, 5.2.4, and
5.2.5).
5.2.3 Grips for Threaded and Shouldered Specimens—A
schematic diagram of a gripping device for threaded-end
specimens is shown in Fig. 2, while Fig. 3 shows a device for FIG. 2 Gripping Device for Threaded-End Specimens
gripping specimens with shouldered ends. Both of these
gripping devices should be attached to the heads of the testing 5.4 Extensometers—Extensometers used in tensile testing
machine through properly lubricated spherical-seated bearings. shall conform to the requirements of Practice E 83 for the
The distance between spherical bearings should be as large as classifications specified by the procedure section of these test
feasible. methods. Extensometers shall be used and verified to include
5.2.4 Grips for Sheet Materials—The self-adjusting grips the strains corresponding to the yield strength and elongation at
shown in Fig. 4 have proved satisfactory for testing sheet fracture (if determined).
materials that cannot be tested satisfactorily in the usual type of 5.4.1 Extensometers with gage lengths equal to or shorter
wedge grips. than the nominal gage length of the specimen (dimension
5.2.5 Grips for Wire—Grips of either the wedge or snubbing shown as “G-Gage Length” in the accompanying figures) may
types as shown in Fig. 4 and Fig. 5 or flat wedge grips may be be used to determine the yield behavior. For measuring
used. elongation at fracture with an appropriate extensometer, the
5.3 Dimension-Measuring Devices—Micrometers and other gage length of the extensometer shall be equal to the nominal
devices used for measuring linear dimensions shall be accurate gage length required for the specimen being tested.
and precise to at least one half the smallest unit to which the
individual dimension is required to be measured. 6. Test Specimen
6.1 General:
6.1.1 Test specimens shall be of the full section of the
material whenever practical. Otherwise, machined specimens
of rectangular or round cross section shall be used.
6.1.2 Improperly prepared test specimens often are the
reason for unsatisfactory and incorrect test results. It is
important, therefore, that care be exercised in the preparation
of specimens, particularly in the machining, to ensure the
desired precision and bias in test results.
6.1.3 The cross-sectional area of the specimen should be
FIG. 1 Wedge Grips with Liners for Flat Specimens smallest at the center of the reduced section to ensure fracture

2
 B 557M – 02a
FIG. 3 Gripping Device for Shouldered-End Specimens
FIG. 4 Gripping Devices for Sheet and Wire Specimens
within the gage length. For this reason, a small taper is
permitted in the reduced section of each of the specimens
described in the following sections.
3
FIG. 5 Snubbing Device for Testing Wire
6.1.4 Rectangular specimens shall be 12.50 mm wide in
accordance with Fig. 6 or Fig. 7 (for tubular products), and
shall be of the full thickness of the material when practical.
When necessary, 6.00-mm wide subsize specimens as shown in
Fig. 6 may be used, but elongation values from such specimens
are not applicable to specification requirements.
6.1.4.1 Pin ends as shown in Fig. 8 may be used. In order to
avoid buckling in tests of thin and high-strength materials, it
may be necessary to use stiffening plates at the grip ends.
6.1.5 Round specimens shall be the standard 12.50-mm
diameter specimen in Fig. 9, except when the dimensions of the
product make this impossible. In such cases, small-size speci-
mens proportional to the standard specimen shown in Fig. 9
may be used. Unless otherwise specified in the product
specification, the selection of round tensile specimens shall be
as specified in Table 1. Unless permitted by the product
specification, the diameter of the reduced section of the
smallest specimen used shall not be less than 4 mm for wrought
products and 6 mm for cast products.
6.1.5.1 The shape of the ends of the specimen outside of the
gage length shall be suitable to the material and of a shape to
fit the holders or grips of the testing machine so that the loads
are applied axially. Fig. 10 shows specimens with various types
of ends that have given satisfactory results.
6.1.6 Special care is required in the manufacture and testing
of smaller specimens because the effects of machining (for
example, the amount of end load applied and the amount of
heat generated) and testing (for example, eccentricity and gage
marking) variables are greater upon them than upon larger
specimens. Therefore, the largest practical specimen shall
always be used. With some types of materials, notably castings,
the result of tests of small specimens may be more variable due
to the increasing significance of variations in metallic structure
or the character of the surfaces. Low values derived from small
specimens should be carefully evaluated in accordance with
8.1 to be certain that the results are valid.
6.1.7 While tensile strengths and yield strengths can prop-
erly be compared with results derived from test specimens of
various dimensions, elongation values may vary with specimen
size and type. Therefore, elongation values should be obtained
with specimens of the type from which the published tensile
properties were established.
 B 557M – 02a

Dimensions, mm
Standard Specimen Sheet-Type
Subsize Specimen 6 mm Wide
12.5 mm Wide
G—Gage length 50.006 0.10 25.00 6 0.10
W—Width (Note 1 and Note 2) 12.506 0.05 6.016 0.05
T—Thickness (Note 3) thickness of material thickness of material
R—Radius of fillet, min 12.5 6
L—Overall length, min (Note 4) 200 100
A—Length of reduced section, min 57 32
B—Length of grip section, min (Note 5) 50 30
C—Width of grip section, approximate (Note 2 and Note 6) 20 10

NOTE 1—The ends of the reduced section shall not differ in width by more than 0.06 mm for the 50.00-mm gage length specimen or 0.025 mm for
the 25.00-mm gage length specimen. There may be a gradual taper in width from the ends of the reduced section to the center, but the width at each end
shall not be more than 1 % greater than the width at the center.
NOTE 2—For each of the specimens, narrower widths (W and C) may be used when necessary. In such cases the width of the reduced section should
be as large as the width of the material being tested permits: however, unless stated specifically, the requirements for elongation in a product specification
shall not apply when these narrower specimens are used. If the width of the material is less than W, the sides may be parallel throughout the length of
the specimen.
NOTE 3—The dimension T is the thickness of the test specimen as stated in the applicable material specifications. Maximum nominal thicknesses of
12.5-mm and 6-mm wide specimens shall be 12.5 mm and 6 mm, respectively.
NOTE 4—To aid in obtaining axial loading during testing of 6-mm wide specimens, the overall length should be as large as the material will permit,
up to 200 mm.
NOTE 5—It is desirable, if possible, to make the length of the grip section large enough to allow the specimen to extend into the grips a distance equal
to two thirds or more of the length of the grips. If the thickness of 12.5-mm wide specimens is over 9 mm longer, grips and correspondingly longer grip
sections of the specimens may be necessary to prevent failure in the grip section.
NOTE 6—The grip-end centerline of the 12.5-mm wide and 6-mm wide specimens shall coincide with the centerline of the reduced section within 0.2
mm and 0.1 mm, respectively.
FIG. 6 Rectangular Tension Test Specimens

6.2 Type, Direction, and Location in Wrought Products—
This paragraph and subparagraphs provide the standard re-
quirements for the testing of wrought products for the purpose
of quality control and lot release testing. Additions or excep-
tions to these requirements may need to be made in individual
specifications for a particular material or product.
NOTE 5—These requirements also do not preclude the use of these test
methods for purposes other than quality control as desired for research,
material evaluation, or other purpose utilizing other test locations, test
directions, and test specimen sizes. In these cases, the general require-
ments in 6.1 should be followed for specimen type and the requirements
in Sections 5 and 7 shall be followed for test apparatus, testing, and
analysis.
6.2.1 Sheet and Plate:
6.2.1.1 Rectangular specimens shall be used for thicknesses
of 12.50 mm and less, and round specimens for all others.
6.2.1.2 For thicknesses over 12.50 mm through 40 mm,
in-plane specimens shall be taken from the center of the
thickness; for larger thicknesses, they shall be taken midway
from the center to the surface. Short transverse specimens shall
be taken so that the midpoint of their axis lies on the plate
mid-thickness.
6.2.1.3 For non-heat-treatable aluminum alloys, specimens
shall be taken parallel to the direction of rolling.
6.2.1.4 For heat-treatable aluminum alloys, specimens shall
be taken perpendicular to the direction of rolling (long-
transverse) unless otherwise specified in the material specifi-
cation. For widths too narrow for long-transverse standard
rectangular or 12.50-mm diameter specimens, specimens shall
be taken parallel to the direction of rolling.
6.2.1.5 For magnesium alloys, specimens shall be taken
parallel to the direction of rolling.
6.2.2 Wire, Rod, and Bar:
6.2.2.1 Full-section specimens shall be used when practical.
It is permissible to reduce the section slightly throughout the
test section in order to ensure fracture within the gage length.
Otherwise, round specimens shall be used, except that for
rectangles of 12.50 mm and less in thickness, rectangular
specimens of the full thickness may be used.
6.2.2.2 Specimens shall be taken in the longitudinal direc-
tion from the locations specified in Table 2.
6.2.3 Extrusion Profiles:
6.2.3.1 Round specimens shall be used whenever it is not
practical to use full-section specimens, except that for extru-
sion profiles 12.50 mm and less in thickness, rectangular
specimens may be used.

4
 B 557M – 02a

Dimensions, mm
G—Gage length 50.00 6 0.10
W—Width (Note 1) 12.50 6 0.25
T—Measured thickness of specimen Note 2
R—Radius of fillet, min 12.5
A—Length of reduced section, min 57
B—Length of grip section, min (Note 3) 75
C—Width of grip section, approximate (Note 4) 20

NOTE 1—The ends of the reduced section shall not differ in width by more than 0.06 mm. There may be a gradual taper in width from the ends of
the reduced section to the center, but the width at each end shall not be more than 1 % greater than the width at the center.
NOTE 2—The dimension T is the thickness of the tubular section as provided for in the applicable material specifications.
NOTE 3—It is desirable, if possible, to make the length of the grip section great enough to allow the specimen to extend into the grips a distance equal
to two thirds or more of the length of the grips.
NOTE 4—The grip-end centerline of the specimen shall coincide with the centerline of the reduced section within 1.00 mm.
NOTE 5—For circular segments, the cross-sectional area shall be calculated using the formula shown in 7.2.3.
NOTE 6—The radii of all fillets shall be equal to each other within a tolerance of 1.00 mm, and the centers of curvature of the two fillets at a particular
end shall be located across from each other (on a line perpendicular to the centerline) within a tolerance of 2.00 mm.
FIG. 7 Longitudinal Tension Specimens for Large-Diameter Tubular Products

Dimensions, mm
G—Gage length 50.00 6 0.10
W—Width (Note 1) 12.506 0.25
T—Thickness, max (Note 2) 12.5
R—Radius of fillet, min (Note 3) 13
L—Overall length, min 200
A—Length of reduced section, min 57
B—Length of grip section, min 50
C—Width of grip section, approximate 50
D—Diameter of hole for pin, min (Note 4) 13
E—Edge distance from pin, approximate 40
F—Distance from hole to fillet, min 15

NOTE 1—The ends of the reduced section shall not differ in width by more than 0.06 mm. There may be a gradual taper in width from the ends of
the reduced section to the center, but the width at each end shall not be more than 1 % greater than the width at the center.
NOTE 2—The dimension T is the thickness of the test specimen as stated in the applicable product specifications.
NOTE 3—For some materials, a fillet radius R larger than 13 mm may be needed.
NOTE 4—Holes must be on centerline of reduced section, within 60.05 mm.
NOTE 5—Variations of dimensions C, D, E, F, and L may be used that will permit failure within the gage length.
FIG. 8 Pin-Loaded Tension Test Specimen with 50-mm Gage Length

6.2.3.2 Specimens shall be taken in the longitudinal direc- 6.2.4 Tube and Pipe—Specimens shall be taken in the
tion from the predominant section of the extrusion profile. The longitudinal direction.
specimens shall be taken from a location that most nearly 6.2.4.1 For all tube (Note 6), particularly sizes 25 mm and
satisfies the intent of Table 2. under in nominal outside diameter, and frequently for larger

5
 B 557M – 02a

Dimensions, mm
Nominal Diameter Standard Specimen Small-Size Specimens Proportional to Standard
12.5 9 6 4
G—Gage length 62.50 6 0.10 45.00 6 0.09 30.00 6 0.06 20.00 6 0.04
D—Diameter (Note 1) 12.50 6 0.25 9.00 6 0.10 6.00 6 0.10 4.006 0.05
R—Radius of fillet, min 9 8 6 4
A—Length of reduced section, min (Note 2) 75 54 36 24

NOTE 1—The reduced section may have a gradual taper from the ends toward the center, with the ends not more than 1 % larger in diameter than the
center (controlling dimension).
NOTE 2—If desired, the length of the reduced section may be increased to accommodate an extensometer of any convenient gage length. Reference
marks for the measurement of elongation should, nevertheless, be spaced at the indicated gage length.
NOTE 3—The gage length and fillets shall be as shown, but the ends may be of any form to fit the holders of the testing machine in such a way that
the load shall be axial (see Fig. 10). If the ends are held in wedge grips it is desirable, if possible, to make the length of the grip section great enough
to allow the specimen to extend into the grips a distance equal to two thirds or more of the length of the grips.
NOTE 4—On the round specimens in Fig. 9 and Fig. 10, the gage lengths are equal to five times the nominal diameter. In some product specifications
other specimens may be provided for, but unless the 5-to-1 ratio is maintained within dimensional tolerances, the elongation values may not be comparable
with those obtained from the standard test specimen.
NOTE 5—The use of specimens smaller than 6.00-mm diameter shall be restricted to cases when the material to be tested is of insufficient size to obtain
larger specimens or when all parties agree to their use for acceptance testing. Smaller specimens require suitable equipment and greater skill in both
machining and testing.
FIG. 9 Standard 12.5-mm Round Tension Test Specimen with 62.5-mm Gage Length and Examples of Small-Size Specimens
Proportional to the Standard Specimen

TABLE 1 Guidelines for Selecting Round Tensile Specimens curved grip faces are not available, it is acceptable to flatten
Specified Material Minimum Material (without heating) the grip ends of the test specimen. The gage
Thickness, mm Section Thickness Specimen length area shall not be deformed.
Length or Diameter, mm
Over Through Width, mm 6.2.5 Die Forgings—Round specimens shall be used for
6.30 9.50 40 4
section thicknesses over 12.50 mm. Either subsize round or
9.50 12.50 60 6 rectangular specimens may be used for section thickness from
12.50 16.00 80 9 8.0 to 12.5 mm. Rectangular specimens shall be used for
16.00 120 12.5
section thicknesses less than 8.0 mm. The direction of the
specimens shall be in the longitudinal grain direction, unless
specimens in the other directions are required. For aluminum
sizes, except as limited by the testing equipment, it is standard die forgings, the longitudinal grain direction is defined as
practice to use tension test specimens of full-size tubular orientations parallel, within 615°, to the predominate grain
sections. Snug-fitting metal plugs shall be inserted far enough flow. The long transverse grain direction is defined as perpen-
into the ends of such tubular specimens to permit the testing dicular, within 615°, to the longitudinal (predominate) grain
machine jaws to grip the specimens properly. The plugs shall direction and parallel, within 615°, to the parting plane. (Both
not extend into that part of the specimen on which the conditions must be met.) The short transverse grain direction is
elongation is measured. Fig. 11 shows a suitable form of plug, defined as perpendicular, within 615°, to the longitudinal
the location of the plugs in the specimen, and the location of (predominate) grain direction and perpendicular, within 615°,
the specimen in the grips of the testing machine. to the parting plane. Specimens shall be taken from the center
of the predominant or thickest part of the forging from which
NOTE 6—The term “tube” is used to indicate tubular products in a coupon can be obtained, from a prolongation of the forging,
general, and includes pipe, tube, and tubing. or from separately forged coupons from the same stock and
6.2.4.2 When it is not practical to test full-section speci- representative of the forging.
mens, 12.50-mm wide specimens in accordance with Fig. 7 6.2.6 Hand Forgings—Round specimens shall be used.
taken as in Fig. 12 shall be used if practical. Otherwise, round They shall be taken in the long-transverse direction, and when
specimens in accordance with 6.1.5 shall be taken from the specified, in the longitudinal and short-transverse directions. A
center of wall thicknesses through 40 mm; for thicknesses over longitudinal specimen shall be taken so that its axis coincides
40 mm, they shall be taken midway from center of thickness to with the longitudinal centerline of the forging. A long-
surface. If specimens of the type shown in Fig. 7 are used and transverse or short-transverse specimen shall be taken so that

6
 B 557M – 02a

Dimensions, mm
Specimen 1 Specimen 2 Specimen 3 Specimen 4 Specimen 5
G—Gage length 62.50 6 0.10 62.50 6 0.10 62.50 6 0.10 62.50 6 0.10 62.50 6 0.10
D—Diameter (Note 1) 12.50 6 0.25 12.50 6 0.25 12.50 6 0.25 12.50 6 0.25 12.50 6 0.25
R—Radius of fillet, min 9 9 9 9 9
A—Length of reduced section 75, min 75, min 100, approximately 75, min 75, min
L—Overall length, approximate 145 155 140 140 255
B—Length of end section (Note 2) 35, approximately 25, approximately 20, approximately 15, approximately 75, min
C—Diameter of end section 20 20 20 22 20
E—Length of shoulder and fillet section, approximate 15 20 15
F—Diameter of shoulder 15 15 15

NOTE 1—The reduced section may have a gradual taper from the ends toward the center with the ends not more than 1 % larger in diameter than the
center.
NOTE 2—On Specimen 5 it is desirable, if possible, to make the length of the grip section great enough to allow the specimen to extend into the grips
a distance equal to two thirds or more of the length of the grips.
FIG. 10 Various Types of Ends for Standard Round Tension Test Specimen

TABLE 2 Location of Axis of Specimen in Rod, Bar, and

Extrusion Profiles
Location of Axis of Specimen with
Section Diameter, Respect to Thickness (T) and Width (W)
Thickness or of Bar and Shapes or Diameter
Width, mm (D) of Rod
Thickness Width Diameter
Up through 40.0, incl T/2 W/2 D/2
Over 40.0 T/4 W/4 D/4

the midpoint of its axis lies on the longitudinal centerline of the

forging. Each specimen shall be so chosen that the distance
from the midpoint of its axis to the end of the forging is at least
half the thickness of the forging.
6.3 Type of Specimen from Sand and Permanent Mold
Castings:
6.3.1 Test specimens shall be separately cast or, if called for
by product specification or customer requirements, machined
from the casting itself.
6.3.2 Cast Test Specimens—Cast test specimens shall be
prepared in accordance with the appropriate product specifica-
tion.
6.3.3 Specimens Machined from Castings:
6.3.3.1 Round specimens in accordance with Fig. 9 shall be
used for section thicknesses over 12.50 mm.
6.3.3.2 Either small-size round specimens proportional to
the standard specimen in Fig. 9 or rectangular specimens in
accordance with Fig. 6 may be used for section thicknesses
from 8.0 to 12.50 mm, except as limited by 6.1.3.
NOTE 1—The diameter of the plug shall have a slight taper from the line
limiting the testing machine jaws to the curved section.
FIG. 11 Metal Plugs for Testing Tubular Specimens, Proper
Location of Plugs in Specimen and of Specimen in Heads of
Testing Machine
6.3.3.3 Rectangular specimens in accordance with Fig. 6
shall be used for section thickness less than 8.0 mm.
6.3.3.4 All test specimens must have a machined finish of
1.6 µm RMS (1.4 µm AA) or smoother.
6.4 Specimen for Die Castings—For testing die castings the
test specimen shown in Fig. 13 shall be used unless otherwise
provided in the product specifications.

7

NOTE 1—The edges of the specimen shall be cut parallel to each other.
FIG. 12 Location from Which Longitudinal Tension Test
Specimens Are to Be Cut from Large-Diameter Tube
6.5 Specimens for Powdered Metals—For testing powdered
metals the test specimens shown in Fig. 14 and Fig. 15 shall be
used, unless otherwise provided in the product specifications.
7. Procedure
7.1 Preparation of the Test Machine—Upon startup, or
following a prolonged period of machine inactivity, exercise or
warm up the test machine to normal operating temperatures to
minimize errors that may result from transient conditions.
7.2 Measurement of Dimensions of Test Specimens:
7.2.1 To determine the cross-sectional area of a tension test
specimen, measure the dimensions of the cross section at the
center of the reduced section. However, for referee testing of
specimens under 5.0 mm in their least dimension, measure the
dimensions where the least cross-sectional area is found.
Measure and record the cross-sectional dimensions of tension
test specimens 5.0 mm and over to the nearest 0.025 mm; the
cross-sectional dimensions less than 5.0 mm and not less than
2.5 mm to the nearest 0.01 mm; the cross-sectional dimensions
less than 2.5 mm and not less than 0.5 mm, to the nearest 0.002
mm and when practical, the cross-sectional dimensions less
than 0.5 mm, to at least the nearest 1 % but in all cases to at
least the nearest 0.002 mm.
NOTE 7—Measurements of dimensions presume smooth surface fin-
ishes for the specimens. Rough surfaces due to the manufacturing process
such as hot rolling, metallic coating, and so forth, may lead to inaccuracy
of the computed areas greater than the measured dimensions would
indicate. Therefore, cross-sectional dimensions of tension test specimens
with rough surfaces due to processing may be measured and recorded to
the nearest 0.025 mm.
7.2.2 Determine cross-sectional areas of full-size tension
test specimens of nonsymmetrical cross sections by weighing a
length not less than 20 times the largest cross-sectional
dimension and using the value of density of the material.
Determine the weight to the nearest 0.5 % or less.
7.2.3 When using specimens of the type shown in Fig. 7
taken from tubes, the cross-sectional area shall be determined
as follows:
If D/W # 6:
A 5 @~W/4! 3 ~D 2 2 W 2!1/2# 1 @~D 2/4!
2
3 arcsin ~W/D!# 2 @~W/4! 3 ~~D 2 2T! 2 W ! # 2 1/2
2 @~~D 2 2T!/2! 2 3 arcsin ~W/~D2 2T!!#
B 557M – 02a
where:
A = exact cross-sectional area, mm2,
W = width of the specimen in the reduced section, mm,
D = measured outside diameter of the tube, mm, and
T = measured wall thickness of the specimen, mm.
Arcsin values to be in radians
If D/W > 6, the exact equation or the following equation may
be used:
A5W3T (2)
where:
A = approximate cross-sectional area, mm2,
W = width of the specimen in the reduced section, mm,
and
T = measured wall thickness of the specimen, mm.
7.3 Gage Length Marking of Test Specimens:
7.3.1 The gage length for the determination of elongation
after fracture shall be in accordance with the product specifi-
cations for the material being tested. Gage marks shall be
stamped lightly with a punch, scribed lightly with dividers, or
drawn with an ink as preferred. For material that is sensitive to
the effect of slight notches and for small specimens, the use of
layout ink will aid in locating the original gage marks after
fracture.
7.3.2 In the absence of a product specification, the following
gage lengths shall be used:
7.3.2.1 For 12.5 mm-wide rectangular specimens and full
section specimens from tube and pipe, the gage length shall be
50 mm (Figs. 6-8, and Fig. 11).
7.3.2.2 For round specimens taken from products 4 mm or
larger, the gage length shall be 5D, except for wire for electric
conductors (Fig. 9).
7.3.2.3 For wire for electric conductors the gage length shall
be 250 mm.
7.3.2.4 For die cast specimens, the gage length shall be 50
mm (Fig. 13).
7.3.2.5 For powdered metal specimens, the gage length
shall be 25.4 mm (Figs. 14 and 15).
7.3.2.6 Elongation measurements are not required for extru-
sion profiles less than 1.6 mm in thickness and of wire, other
than electric conductors, 3.20 mm and less in diameter.
7.3.3 When required by the material specification, or when
making retests or referee tests of products other than wire when
the specified elongation is less than 3 % or the elongation
measured in the usual manner is less than 4 %, mark the
original gage length of the specimen and measure to an
accuracy of 60.05 mm.
7.4 Zeroing of the Test Machine—The testing machine shall
be set up in such a manner that zero force indication signifies
a state of zero force on the specimen. Any force (or preload)
imparted by the gripping of the specimen (see Note 8) must be
indicated by the force measuring system unless the preload is
physically removed prior to testing. Artificial methods of
removing the preload on the specimen, such as taring it out by
a zero adjust pot or removing it mathematically by software,
(1) are prohibited because these would affect the accuracy of the
test results.
NOTE 8—Preloads generated by gripping of specimens may be either
8
 B 557M – 02a

Dimensions, mm
G—Gage length 60.00 6 0.10
D—Diameter (see Note) 6.00 6 0.10
R—Radius of fillet, min 75
A—Length of reduced section, min 75
L—Overall length, min 250
B—Distance between grips, min 125
C—Diameter of end section, approximate 10
Note—The reduced section may have a gradual taper from the ends toward the center, with the ends not more than 0.10 mm larger in diameter than the center.
FIG. 13 Standard Tension Test Specimen for Die Castings

Approximate Pressing Area = v 650 mm2

Dimensions Specified except G, are Those of the Die.
Dimensions, mm Pressing Area of Unmachined Compact =v 100 mm2
Machining Recommendations
G—Gage length 25.40 6 0.10 1. Rough machine to 9-mm diameter
D—Width at center 5.72 6 0.03 2. Finish turn 6-mm diameter with radii and taper
W—Width at end of reduced section 5.97 6 0.03 3. Polish with 00 emery cloth
T—Compact to this thickness 5 to 6.5 4. Lap with crocus cloth
R—Radius of fillet 25
A—Half-length of reduced section 16 Dimensions, mm
B—Grip length 81
G—Gage length 30.00 6 0.10
L—Overall length 90
D—Diameter at center of reduced section 6.00 6 0.025
C—Width of grip section 8.71 6 0.03
H— Diameter at ends of gage length D + 0.025 to 0.050
F—Half width of grip section 4.36 6 0.03
R—Radius of fillet 6
E—End radius 4.36 6 0.03
A—Length of reduced section 32
FIG. 14 Standard Tension Test Specimen for Powdered Metal L—Overall length (die cavity length) 80
Products—Flat Unmachined Tension Test Specimen B—Length of end section 12
C—Compact to this end thickness 12.50 6 0.10
W—Die cavity width 12.5
tensile or compressive in nature and may be the result of such things as: E—Length of shoulder and fillet 9
grip design, malfunction of gripping apparatus (sticking, binding, and so F—Diameter of shoulder 8
J—End fillet radius, max 2
forth), excessive gripping force, and sensitivity of the control loop.
NOTE 9—It is the operator’s responsibility to verify that an observed Note—The gage length and fillets of the specimen shall be as shown. The
preload is acceptable and to ensure that grips operate in a smooth manner. ends as shown are designed to provide a total pressing area of approximately
600 mm.2 Other end designs are acceptable, and in some cases are required
Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that momentary (dynamic)
for high-strength sintered materials. Some suggested alternative end designs
forces due to gripping not exceed 20 % of the material’s nominal yield include:
strength and that static preloads not exceed 10 % of the material’s nominal 1. Longer ends, of the same general shape and configuration as the stan-
yield strength. dard, provide more surface area for gripping.
2. Shallow transverse grooves, or ridges, may be pressed in the ends to be
7.5 Speed of Testing: gripped by jaws machined to fit the specimen contour.
7.5.1 Speed of testing may be defined in terms of (a) FIG. 15 Standard Tension Test Specimen for Powdered Metal
free-running crosshead speed (rate of movement of the cross- Products—Round Machined Tension Test Specimen
head of the testing machine when not under load), ( b) rate of
separation of the two heads of the testing machine during a test,
(c) the elapsed time for completing part or all of the test, (d) necessary in order to obtain test values within acceptable
rate of stressing the specimen, or (e) rate of straining the limits. Suitable limits for speed of testing should be specified
specimen. For some materials the first of these, which is the for materials for which the differences resulting from the use of
least accurate, may be adequate, while for other materials one different speeds are of such magnitude that the test results are
of the others, listed in increasing order of precision, may be unsatisfactory for determining the acceptability of the material.

9
 B 557M – 02a
In such instances, depending upon the material and the use for 7.5.7.1 The speed of testing shall be such that the forces and
which it is intended, one or more of the methods described in strains used in obtaining the test results are accurately indi-
the following paragraphs is recommended for specifying speed cated.
of testing. 7.5.7.2 During the conduct of a test to determine yield
7.5.2 Free-Running Crosshead Speed—The allowable lim- strength the rate of stress application shall not exceed 12
its for the rate of movement of the crosshead of the testing MPa/s. The speed may be increased after removal of the
machine, with no force applied by the testing machine, shall be extensometer, but it shall not exceed 0.01 mm/mm of gage
specified in millimetres per millimetre (mm/mm) of length of length (or distance between grips for specimens not having
reduced section (or distance between grips for specimens not reduced sections) per second.
having reduced sections) per minute. The limits for the 7.6 Yield Strength—Determine yield strength by the offset
crosshead speed may be further qualified by specifying differ- method at an offset of 0.2 %. Acceptance or rejection of
ent limits for various types and sizes of specimens. The average material may be decided on the basis of Extension-Under-Load
crosshead speed can be experimentally determined by using a Method. For referee testing, the offset method shall be used.
suitable measuring device and a timing device. 7.6.1 Offset Method—To determine the yield strength by the
“offset method,” it is necessary to secure data (autographic or
7.5.3 Rate of Separation of Heads During Tests—The al- numerical) from which a stress-strain diagram may be drawn.
lowable limits for rate of separation of the heads of the testing Then on the stress-strain diagram (Fig. 16) lay off Om equal to
machine during a test shall be specified in millimetre per the specified value of the offset, draw mn parallel to OA, and
millimetre of length of reduced section for distance between thus locate r, the intersection of mn with the stress-strain
grips for specimens not having reduced sections per second. diagram (Note 10). In reporting values of yield strength
The limits for the rate of separation may be further qualified by obtained by this method, the specified value of “offset” used
specifying different limits for various types and sizes of should be stated in parentheses after the term yield strength.
specimen. Many testing machines are equipped with pacing or Thus:
indicating devices for the measurement and control of the rate
Yield strength ~ offset 5 0.2 %! 5 360 MPa (3)
of separation of the heads of the machine during a test, but in
the absence of such a device the average rate of separation of A Class B2 extensometer (see Practice E 83) would be
the heads can be experimentally determined by using a suitable sufficiently sensitive for most materials when using this
length measuring device and a timing device. method.
7.5.4 Elapsed Time—The allowable limits for the elapsed NOTE 10—Automatic devices are available that determine offset yield
time from the beginning of force application (or from some strength without plotting a stress-strain curve. Such devices may be used
specified stress) to the instant of fracture, to the maximum if their accuracy has been demonstrated to be satisfactory.
NOTE 11—If the force drops before the specified offset is reached,
force, or to some other stated stress, shall be specified in
technically the material does not have a yield strength (for that offset), but
seconds. The elapsed time can be determined with a timing
device.
7.5.5 Rate of Stressing—The allowable limits for rate of
stressing shall be specified in megapascals per second. Many
testing machines are equipped with pacing devices for the
measurement and control of the rate of stressing, but in the
absence of such a device the average rate of stressing can be
determined with a stopwatch by observing the time required to
apply a known increment of stress.
7.5.6 Rate of Straining—The allowable limits for rate of
straining shall be specified in millimetres per millimetre per
second. Some testing machines are equipped with pacing or
indicating devices for the measurement and control of rate of
straining, but in the absence of such a device the average rate
of straining can be determined with a timing device by
observing the time required to effect a known increment of
strain.
7.5.7 Unless otherwise specified, any convenient speed of
testing may be used up to one half the specified yield strength,
or up to one quarter the specified tensile strength, whichever is
smaller. The speed above this point shall be within the limits
specified. If different speed limitations are required for use in
determining yield strength, tensile strength, and elongation,
they should be stated in the product specifications. In the
absence of any more specified limitations on speed of testing FIG. 16 Stress-Strain Diagram for Determination of Yield Strength
the following general rule shall apply: by the Offset Method

10
 B 557M – 02a
the stress at the maximum force attained before the specified offset is
reached may be reported instead of the yield strength.
7.6.2 Extension-Under-Load Method—For tests to deter-
mine the acceptance or rejection of material whose stress-strain
characteristics are well-known from previous tests of similar
material in which stress-strain diagrams were plotted, the total
strain corresponding to the stress at which the specified offset
occurs will be known within satisfactory limits; therefore, in
such tests a specified total strain may be used, and the stress on
the specimen, when this total strain is reached, is taken to be
the value of the yield strength (Fig. 17). The total strain can be
obtained satisfactorily by use of a Class B2 extensometer. It is
recommended that this approximate method be used only after
agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser, with
the understanding that check tests be made for obtaining
stress-strain diagrams for use with the offset method to settle
any misunderstandings.
NOTE 12—There are two general types of extensometers, averaging and
non-averaging, the use of which is dependent on the product tested. For
most machined or reduced section specimens, there are minimal differ-
ences. However, for some materials such as some forgings and tube
sections, significant differences in measured yield strength can occur. For
these cases it is recommended that the averaging type be used.
7.7 Tensile Strength—Calculate the tensile strength by di-
viding the maximum force carried by the specimen during a
tension test by the original cross-sectional area of the speci-
men.
7.8 Elongation:
7.8.1 To determine elongation after fracture, carefully fit the
ends of the fractured specimen together and measure the
distance between the gage marks to the nearest 0.25 mm. A
percentage scale reading to 0.5 % of the gage length may be
used. The elongation after fracture is the increase in length of
the gage length, expressed as a percentage of the original gage
length. Report the elongation after fracture using both the
percentage increase and the original gage length.
7.8.2 If any part of the fracture takes place outside of the
middle half of the gage length or in a punched or scribed mark
FIG. 17 Stress-Strain Diagram for Determination of Yield Strength
by the Extension-Under-Load Method
11
within the reduced section, the elongation value obtained may
not be representative of the material. If the elongation so
measured meets the minimum requirements specified, no
further testing is required, but the location of fracture shall be
noted. If the elongation is less than the minimum requirements,
discard the test and test a replacement specimen as allowed in
8.1.
7.8.3 Elongation at fracture is defied as the elongation
measured just prior to the sudden decrease in force associated
with fracture. For many ductile materials not exhibiting a
sudden decrease in force, the elongation at fracture can be
taken as the strain measured just prior to when the force falls
below 10 % of the maximum force encountered during the test.
7.8.3.1 Elongation at fracture shall include elastic and
plastic elongation and may be determined with autographic or
automated methods using extensometers verified over the
strain range of interest (see 5.4). Use a Class B2 or better
extensometer for materials having less than 5 % elongation, a
Class C or better extensometer for materials having elongation
greater than or equal to 5 % but less than 50 %, and a Class D
or better extensometer for materials having 50 % or greater
elongation. In all cases, the extensometer gage length shall be
the nominal gage length required for the specimen being tested.
Due to the lack of precision in fitting fractured ends together,
the elongation after fracture using the manual methods of the
preceding paragraphs may differ from the elongation at fracture
determined with extensometers.
7.8.3.2 Percent elongation at fracture may be calculated
directly from elongation at fracture data and reported instead of
percent elongation after fracture as calculated in 7.8.1 and
7.8.2. However, the two parameters are not interchangeable.
Use of the elongation at fracture method generally provides
more repeatable results.
NOTE 13—When disagreements arise over the percent elongation re-
sults, agreement must be reached on which method to use.
7.8.4 When required by the material specification, or when
making retests, or for referee tests of products other than wire,
and the specified elongation is less than 3 % or the elongation
measured in the usual manner is less than 4 %, determine the
elongation of a round specimen as follows:
7.8.4.1 Prior to testing, the original gage length of the
specimen shall be marked and measured to an accuracy of
60.05 mm as required in 7.3.3.
7.8.4.2 After testing, remove any partly torn fragments that
might influence the final measurement from the broken ends of
the specimen.
7.8.4.3 Fit the fractured ends together with matched sur-
faces and apply an end load along the axis of the specimen
sufficient to close the fractured ends together. If desired, this
load may then be removed carefully, provided the specimen
remains intact.
NOTE 14—The use of an end load of approximately 15 MPa has been
found to give satisfactory results on test specimens of aluminum alloy.
7.8.4.4 Measure the final gage length to the nearest 0.05 mm
and report the elongation to the nearest 0.1 % in 62.5 mm or
0.2 % in shorter lengths.
 B 557M – 02a
7.9 Rounding—Round each value of strength to the nearest
0.5 MPa. Round each value of elongation determined in
accordance with 7.8.1 to the nearest 0.5 %, unless otherwise
specified. Round in accordance with Practice E 29.
7.9.1 If elongation is determined in accordance with 7.8.4,
round each value in accordance with 7.8.4.4.
7.9.2 For wire for electric conductors, measure and report
the elongation to the nearest 0.1 %.
8. Replacement Tests
8.1 Replacement Tests:
8.1.1 A test specimen may be discarded and a replacement
specimen selected from the same lot of material when (1) the
specimen had a poorly machined surface, was not of the proper
dimensions, or had its properties changed by poor machining
practice; (2) the test procedure was incorrect or the test
equipment malfunctioned; or (3) the fracture was outside the
middle half of the gage length, and the elongation was below
the specified value.
8.1.2 In the case of specimens machined from wrought
products or castings, discontinuities such as cracks, ruptures,
flakes, and porosity revealed in the fracture that are considered
indicative of inferior or defective material are not reasons for
the selection of a replacement test specimen.
8.1.3 In the case of separately cast test specimens, flaws
other than gas porosity, such as cracks or inclusion, are not the
cause of rejection of the castings based upon tensile properties,
and so the presence of such flaws in the fracture is justification
for replacement testing.
9. Retests
9.1 If one or more test specimens fail to conform to the
requirements of the product specification, the lot represented
by the specimen or specimens shall be subject to rejection
except as provided as follows.
9.2 If a material lot is subject to rejection, retests of that lot
will be permitted by:
9.2.1 Testing, for each specimen that failed, at least two
additional specimens from an area in the original sample
adjacent to the area represented by the failure or failures, or
9.2.2 Testing an additional specimen from the specified
location in each of at least two other samples for each sample
that failed from the same lot.
9.2.3 In the case of separately cast test specimens, testing
two additional cast specimens from the same lot for each
specimen that failed.
9.3 If any retest fails, the lot shall be subject to rejection,
except that the lot may be resubmitted for testing provided the
producer has reworked the lot, as necessary, to correct the
deficiencies or has removed the nonconforming material.
10. Report
10.1 Report test information on materials not covered by a
product specification in accordance with 10.2 or both 10.2 and
10.3.
12
10.2 Test information to be reported shall include the
following when applicable:
10.2.1 Material and sample identification,
10.2.2 Specimen type (see Section 6),
10.2.3 Yield strength and the method used to determined
yield strength (see 7.6),
10.2.4 Tensile strength (see 7.7), and
10.2.5 Elongation, including original gage length, percent-
age increase, and method used to determine elongation (see
7.9).
10.3 Test information to be available on request shall
include:
10.3.1 Specimen test section dimension(s) (see Section 6),
10.3.2 Equation used to calculate cross-sectional area of
rectangular specimens taken from large-diameter tubular prod-
ucts (see 7.2.3),
10.3.3 Speed and method used to determine speed of testing
(see 7.5),
10.3.4 Method used for rounding of test results (see 7.9),
10.3.5 Reasons for replacement specimens (see Section 8),
and
10.3.6 Reasons for retests (see Section 9).
11. Precision and Bias
11.1 Precision—An interlaboratory test program5 gave the
following values for coefficients of variation for the most
commonly measured tensile properties:
Coeficient of Variation, %
Tensile Yield Strength Elongation
Strength Offset, 0.2 % Gage Length,
5 Diameter
CV %r 0.9 1.4 2.8
CV %R 1.3 2.3 5.4
CV %r= repeatability coefficient of variation in percent within a laboratory
CV %R= repeatability coefficient of variation in percent between laboratories
11.1.1 The values shown are the averages from tests on six
frequently tested metals, selected to include most of the normal
range for each property previously listed. When these materials
are compared, a large difference in coefficient of variation is
found. Therefore, the preceding values should not be used to
judge whether the difference between duplicate tests of a
specific material is larger than expected. The values are
provided to allow potential users of these test methods to
assess, in general terms, their usefulness for a proposed
application.
11.2 Bias—The procedures in Test Methods B 557M for
measuring tensile properties have no bias because these prop-
erties can be defined only in terms of a test method.
12. Keywords
12.1 elongation; strain; stress; tensile strength; tensile test-
ing; yield strength
5
Supporting data can be found in Appendix X1 and additional data is available
from ASTM Headquarters. Request RR: E28-1004 and RR: E28-1006.
 B 557M – 02a
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. FACTORS AFFECTING TENSION TEST RESULTS
X1.1 The precision and bias of tension test strength and
ductility measurements depend on strict adherence to the stated
test procedure and are influenced by instrumental and material
factors, specimen preparation, and measurement/testing errors.
X1.2 The consistency of agreement for repeated tests of the
same material is dependent on the homogeneity of the material,
and the repeatability of specimen preparation, test conditions,
and measurements of the tension test parameters.
X1.3 Instrumental factors that can affect test results in-
clude: the stiffness, damping capacity, natural frequency, and
mass of the tensile test machine, the accuracy of force
indication and the use of forces within the verified range for the
machine, rate of force application, alignment of the test
specimen with the applied force, parallelism of the grips, grip
pressure, nature of the force control used, appropriateness and
calibration of extensometers used, and so forth.
X1.4 Material factors that can affect test results include:
homogeneity of the test material, sampling scheme, and
specimen preparation (surface finish, dimensional accuracy,
fillets at the ends of the gage length, taper in the gage length,
bent specimens, thread quality, and so forth).
X1.4.1 Test results for specimens with as-cast, as-rolled,
as-forged, or other non-machined surface conditions can be
affected by the nature of the surface (see Note 7).
X1.4.2 Test specimens taken from appendages to the part or
component, such as prolongs or risers, or from separately
produced castings (for example, keel blocks) may produce test
results that are not representative of the part or component.
X1.4.3 Test specimen dimensions can influence test results.
For cylindrical or rectangular specimens, changing the test
specimen size generally has negligible effect on the yield and
tensile strength but may influence elongation. Comparison of
elongation values determined using different specimens require
that the following ratio be controlled:
Lo/~Ao!1/2 (X1.1)
where:
Lo = original gage length of specimen, and
Ao = original cross-sectional area of specimen.
X1.4.3.1 Specimens with smaller Lo/(Ao)1/2 ratios generally
give greater elongation values. This is the case for example,
when the width or thickness of a rectangular tensile test
specimen is increased.
X1.4.3.2 Holding the Lo/(Ao)1/2 ratio constant minimizes,
but does not necessarily eliminate differences. Depending on
material and test conditions, increasing the size of the propor-
tional specimen of Fig. 9 may be found to increase or decrease
elongation values somewhat.
X1.4.4 Use of a taper in the gage length, up to the allowed
1 % limit, can result in lower elongation values. Reductions of
as much as 15 % have been reported for a 1 % taper.
13
X1.4.5 Changes in the strain rate can effect the yield
strength, tensile strength, and elongation values, especially for
materials which are highly strain-rate sensitive. In general,
yield strength and tensile strength will increase with increasing
strain rate, although the effect on tensile strength is generally
less pronounced. Elongation values generally decrease as the
strain rate increases. Aluminum alloys at room temperature are
not highly strain-rate sensitive; some exhibit a slightly higher
yield strength with increasing strain rate while others show the
opposite effect
X1.4.6 Brittle materials require careful specimen prepara-
tion, high-quality surface finishes, large fillets at the ends of the
gage length, oversize threaded grip sections, and cannot
tolerate punch or scribe marks as gage length indicators.
X1.4.7 Flattening of tubular products to permit testing does
alter the material properties, generally nonuniformly, in the
flattened region which may affect test results.
X1.5 Measurement errors that can affect test results in-
clude: verification of the test force, extensometers, microme-
ters, dividers, and other measurement devices, alignment and
zeroing of chart recording devices, and so forth.
X1.5.1 Measurement of the dimensions of as-cast, as-rolled,
as-forged, and other test specimens with non-machined sur-
faces may be imprecise due to the irregularity of the surface
flatness.
X1.5.2 If any portion of the fracture occurs outside of the
middle of the gage length, or in a punch or scribe mark within
the gage length, the elongation may not be representative of the
material. Wire specimens that break at or within the grips may
not produce test results representative of the material.
X1.6 Because standard reference materials with certified
tensile property values are not available, it is not possible to
rigorously define the bias of tension tests. However, by the use
of carefully designed and controlled interlaboratory studies, a
reasonable definition of the precision of tension test results can
be obtained.
X1.6.1 An interlaboratory test program5 was conducted
where six specimens each, of six different materials were
prepared and tested by each of six different laboratories. Tables
X1.1-X1.3 present the precision statistics, as defined in Prac-
tice E 691, for: tensile strength, 0.2 % yield strength, and %
elongation in 5D. In each table, the first column lists the six
materials tested, the second column lists the average of the
average results obtained by the laboratories (X), the third and
fifth columns list the repeatability standard deviation (sr) and
reproducibility standard deviation (sR), the fourth and sixth
columns list the coefficients of variation for these standard
deviations (sr/X and sR/X as a percent), and the seventh and
eighth columns list the 95 % repeatability limit (r) and repro-
ducibility limit (R).
 B 557M – 02a
TABLE X1.1 Precision Statistics—Tensile Strength, MPa
Material X sr sr/X, % sR sR/X, % r R
EC-H19 176.9 4.3 2.45 4.3 2.45 12.1 12.1
2024-T351 491.3 6.1 1.24 6.6 1.34 17.0 18.5
ASTM A105 596.9 4.1 0.69 8.7 1.47 11.6 24.5
AISI 316 694.6 2.7 0.39 8.4 1.21 7.5 23.4
Inconel 600 685.9 2.9 0.43 5.0 0.72 8.2 13.9
SAE 51410 1253.0 3.2 0.25 7.9 0.63 8.9 22.1
Averages: 0.91 1.30

TABLE X1.2 Precision Statistics—0.2 % Yield Strength, MPa

Material X sr sr/X, % sR sR/X, % r R
EC-H19 158.4 3.3 2.06 3.3 2.07 9.2 9.2
2024-T351 362.9 5.1 1.41 5.4 1.49 14.3 15.2
ASTM A105 402.4 5.7 1.42 9.9 2.47 15.9 27.8
AISI 316 481.1 6.6 1.36 19.5 4.06 18.1 54.7
Inconel 600 268.3 2.5 0.93 5.8 2.17 7.0 16.3
SAE 51410 967.5 8.9 0.92 15.9 1.64 24.8 44.5
Averages: 1.35 2.32

TABLE X1.3 Precision Statistics—% Elongation in 5D

Material X sr sr/X, % sR sR/X, % r R
EC-H19 14.60 0.59 4.07 0.66 4.54 1.65 1.85
2024-T351 17.99 0.63 3.48 1.71 9.51 1.81 4.81
ASTM A105 25.63 0.77 2.99 1.30 5.06 2.15 3.63
AISI 316 35.93 0.71 1.98 2.68 7.45 2.00 7.49
Inconel 600 41.58 0.67 1.61 1.60 3.86 1.88 4.49
SAE 51410 12.39 0.45 3.61 0.96 7.75 1.25 2.69
Averages: 2.96 6.36

X1.6.2 The averages (below columns four and six in each
table) of the coefficients of variation permit a relative compari-
son of the repeatability (within-laboratory precision) and
reproducibility (between-laboratory precision) of the tension
test parameters. This shows that the ductility measurement
exhibits less repeatability and reproducibility than the strength
measurements. The overall ranking from the least to the most
repeatable and reproducible is: % elongation in 5D, 0.2 %
offset yield strength, and tensile strength. Note that the
rankings are in the same order for the repeatability and
reproducibility average coefficients of variation and that the
reproducibility (between-laboratory precision) is poorer than
the repeatability (within-laboratory precision), as would be
expected.
X1.6.3 No comments about bias can be made for the
interlaboratory study due to the lack of certified test results for
these specimens. However, examination of the test results
showed that one laboratory consistently exhibited higher than
average strength values and lower than average ductility values
for most of the specimens. One other laboratory had consis-
tently lower than average tensile strength results for all
specimens.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

This section identifies the principal changes to this standard that have been incorporated since the last issue.

(1) References to several casting specifications were

removed from paragraph 6.3.2 and Referenced Documents.

14
 B 557M – 02a
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

15
 Designation: B 556 – 90 (Reapproved 2002)
Standard Guide for
Measurement of Thin Chromium Coatings by Spot Test1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 556; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This guide covers the use of the spot test for the
measurement of thicknesses of electrodeposited chromium
coatings over nickel and stainless steel with an accuracy of
about 620 % (Section 9). It is applicable to thicknesses up to
1.2 µm.2
NOTE 1—Although this test can be used for coating thicknesses up to
1.2 µm, there is evidence that the results obtained by this method are high
at thicknesses greater than 0.5 µm.3 In addition, for coating thicknesses
above 0.5 µm, it is advisable to use a double drop of acid to prevent
depletion of the test solution before completion of the test.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 504 Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Me-
tallic Coatings by the Coulometric Method4
B 568 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thickness
by X-Ray Spectrometry4
B 588 Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Trans-
parent or Opaque Coatings by Double-Beam Interference
Microscope Technique4
3. Summary of Guide
3.1 A drop of hydrochloric acid (test solution) is deposited
on the surface of the test specimen, and the time required for
the hydrochloric acid to penetrate through the chromium
coating (penetration time) is measured. The coating thickness
is proportional to this time.
1
This guide is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on Metallic and
Inorganic Coatings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B08.10 on
General Test Methods.
Current edition approved Feb. 23, 1990. Published April 1990. Originally
published as B 556 – 71. Last previous edition B 556 – 84.
2
Blum, W., and Olson, W. A., Proceedings, Am. Electroplaters Soc., Vol 28,
1940, p. 25.
3
DuRose, A. H., and Pierce, W. J., Metal Finishing, Vol 57, March 1959, p. 54.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
4. Significance and Use
4.1 The thickness of a decorative chromium coating is often
critical to its performance.
4.2 This procedure is useful for an approximate determina-
tion when the best possible accuracy is not required. For more
reliable determinations, the following methods are available:
Methods B 504, B 568, and B 588.
4.3 This test assumes that the rate of dissolution of the
chromium by the hydrochloric acid under the specified condi-
tions is always the same.
5. Test Solutions
5.1 For chromium on nickel the test solution is reagent
grade hydrochloric acid having a specific gravity at 16°C of
1.180 6 0.002. (This corresponds to 11.5 N 6 0.2 N, which
may be checked by titration.) For chromium on stainless steel
the test solution is 20 g/L of antimony trioxide dissolved in
reagent grade hydrochloric acid having a specific gravity at
16°C of 1.160.
NOTE 2—As received, reagent grade hydrochloric acid is normally
more concentrated than 11.5 N.
6. Preparation of Test Area
6.1 The test area must be free of foreign material. Clean by
rubbing the test area with a paste of magnesium oxide, rinse it,
and dry it with a clean cloth or filter paper. Draw a ring with a
diameter of about 6 mm on the test area with melted paraffin or
with a wax pencil.
7. Procedure
7.1 Let the test specimen, the test solution, and the dropper
stand long enough to reach room temperature, which should be
between 16 and 25°C. Temperatures up to 30°C are permis-
sible, but the measurements become less reliable at the higher
temperatures because of increasing sensitivity to temperature.
Thin test specimens should be set on a heavy metal plate to
avoid a rapid change in temperature which could be produced
in such specimens by the heat of reaction.
7.2 To determine the penetration time, t, deposit a drop
(0.03 to 0.05 mL) of the test solution inside the ring of wax,
and measure the time between the beginning of the gas
formation and the first appearance of nickel. Make this
 B 556 – 90 (2002)
measurement to the nearest 1⁄2 s with a stop watch. If the 7.5 Measure the room temperature near the test area to an
reaction, that is, the formation of gas bubbles, does not start accuracy of 0.2°C.
immediately, it can be started by touching the test surface
within the ring with a fine nickel wire. The end point of the 8. Calculation of Thickness
penetration is characterized by the cessation of the gassing and 8.1 Calculate the thickness of the chromium coating by the
the appearance of the yellow color of the nickel surface. There equation:
may be an uncertainty of 2 or 3 s in determining when the end
Thickness 5 ut (1)
point has been reached.
7.3 If the basis metal is 18-8 stainless steel, gassing will stop where:
at the end point; if it is 17 % chromium stainless steel, the rate t = penetration time, and
of gas liberation will decrease when the end point is reached. u = speed of dissolution of the chromium coating as a
7.4 When using the antimony trioxide-hydrochloric acid function of the test temperature (see Fig. 1).
solution, the absence of a black film will indicate that there is NOTE 3—Fig. 1 is applicable when chromium plate is deposited from
no chromium deposit; if a black film forms, but if there is little the conventional sulfate chromic acid solution under conventional oper-
or no gassing, the chromium is estimated to be less than 0.1 µm ating conditions. If these procedures are varied, it may be necessary to
thick. restandardize the test.

FIG. 1 Temperature Factor for Hydrochloric Acid (sp gr 1.180) and Antimony Trioxide (20 g/L) in Hydrochloric Acid (sp gr 1.160)

2
 B 556 – 90 (2002)
8.2 In case of duplex chromium coatings, the thickness will metric method covered by Method B 504.
correspond to the combined thickness of the two coatings.
9. Precision and Bias
9.1 This thickness determination has an uncertainty of about
620 %, and is, therefore, much less accurate than the coulo-

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 555 – 86 (Reapproved 2002)

Standard Guide for

Measurement of Electrodeposited Metallic Coating
Thicknesses by the Dropping Test1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 555; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 4. Significance and Use

1.1 This guide covers the use of the dropping test to 4.1 The thickness of a metal coating is often critical to its
measure the thickness of electrodeposited zinc, cadmium, performance.
copper, and tin coatings. 4.2 This procedure is useful for an approximate determina-
tion when the best possible accuracy is not required. For more
NOTE 1—Under most circumstances this method of measuring coating
thicknesses is not as reliable or as convenient to use as an appropriate reliable determinations, the following methods are available:
coating thickness gage (see Test Methods B 499, B 504, and B 568). Test Methods B 487, B 499, B 504, and B 568.
4.3 This test assumes that the rate of dissolution of the
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
coating by the corrosive reagent under the specified conditions
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
is always the same.
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- 5. Factors Affecting the Accuracy
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
5.1 The following factors will affect the accuracy of a
2. Referenced Documents coating thickness measurement made by this method:
5.1.1 Cleanliness of Surface—Any foreign material on the
2.1 ASTM Standards:
surface to be tested, including lacquer, grease, corrosion
B 487 Test Method for Measurement of Metal and Oxide
products, and conversion coatings, will interfere with the test
Coating Thicknesses by Microscopical Examination of a
and must be removed. Tarnish and conversion coatings can
Cross Section2
often be removed by mild burnishing with a soft, clean pencil
B 499 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thick-
eraser.
nesses by the Magnetic Method: Nonmagnetic Coatings on
5.1.2 Concentration of Test Solution—Variation from the
Magnetic Basis Metals2
stated concentrations will introduce an error unless the thick-
B 504 Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Me-
ness factor is adjusted accordingly. Test solutions cannot be
tallic Coatings by the Coulometric Method2
reused.
B 568 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thickness
5.1.3 Temperature—The thickness factor for a given solu-
by X-Ray Spectrometry2
tion, being a function of the temperature, must be known for
D 1193 Specification for Reagent Water3
the temperature at which the test is made. Specimens to be
3. Summary of Guide tested should be allowed to reach room temperature before
testing.
3.1 A dropping test4 consists of applying dropwise a corro-
5.1.4 Dropping Rate—The thickness factor is also a func-
sive solution, at a constant rate, to the electroplated surface,
tion of the dropping rate. The thickness factors given in Section
and measuring the time required to penetrate the coating and
10 are for a dropping rate of 100 drops/min and will remain
expose the substrate; this time is proportional to the coating
valid for the range of 95 to 105 drops/min.
thickness.
5.1.5 Solution Drainage—The thickness factors given in
Section 10 are valid only if the test solution is rapidly drained
1
This guide is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on Metallic and off, as from a flat surface inclined 45° from the horizontal. The
Inorganic Coatings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B08.10 on test cannot be made on a horizontal surface or at a location that
General Test Methods. does not permit rapid drainage.
Current edition approved January 31, 1986. Published March 1986. Originally
published as B 555 – 71. Last previous edition B 555 – 75 (1980)e1.
5.1.6 Drop Size—Variation in drop size may alter the
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05. penetration rate. The tip of the dropping apparatus should
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 11.01. conform to the dimensions given in Fig. 1 and should be kept
4
Such tests were described by Hull, R. O., and Strausser, P., Monthly Review, clean.
American Electroplaters Society, MRAEA, Vol 22, 1935, p. 9, and by Brenner, A.,
Proceedings, American Electroplaters Society, AEPPB, Vol 27, 1939, p. 204. 5.1.7 Alloy Layer—The presence of an alloy layer at the

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 555

A—Glass tube with one end open to atmosphere and one end submerged in the test
solution in funnel, C.
B—Rubber stopper forms air tight seal between tube, A, and funnel, C.
C—Separatory funnel.
D—Wide-bore rubber tubing (75 to 125 mm in length) or sealed glass joints.
E—Capillary tubing (140 mm in length, 0.64-mm bore).
F—Rubber tubing or sealed glass joints.
G—Capillary glass tip (with 12.7-mm taper to outside diameter of 3.5 mm).
H—Specimen.
I—Collector of spent solution.

NOTE 1—Solution head is constant as long as air is being drawn through tube, A.
FIG. 1 Dropping Funnel

coating-substrate interface may obscure the end point and 8. Test Solutions
introduce an uncertainty as to the amount of alloy included in 8.1 Solution for Cadmium and Zinc:
the thickness measurement.
5.1.8 Detection of End Point—The end point (the time at Chromic acid (CrO3) 200 g/L
which the coating has been penetrated and the substrate Sulfuric acid (96 % H2SO4, sp gr 1.84) 50 g/L or 27 mL/L
exposed) is characterized by a change in the appearance of the NOTE 2—Sulfuric acid is added slowly with stirring to at least 20 times
surface on which drops are falling. This is a matter of personal its volume of water.
judgment and may not always be clearly defined, depending
8.2 Solution for Cadmium only:
upon the coating-substrate combination and the extent of
Ammonium nitrate (NH4NO3) 110 g/L
alloying, if any. Such errors may be minimized by standardiz- Hydrochloric acid (37 % HCl, sp gr 1.19) 10 mL/L
ing the test method with identical specimens with a known
coating thickness determined by other means. 8.3 Solution for Zinc only:
5.1.9 Composition of Coating—The dropping tests de-
scribed in this document are intended for use on nominally Ammonium nitrate (NH4NO3) 100 g/L
Nitric acid (70 % HNO3, sp gr 1.42) 55 mL/L
“pure” coatings. The thickness factors listed in Section 10 are
expected to vary with gross variations in the composition of the 8.4 Solution for Tin:
coating, as might result from codeposition of an alloying Trichloroacetic acid (CHCl3COOH) 100 g/L
component. The specific effects, on the thickness factors, of 8.5 Solution for Copper:
impurities or of inclusions from brighteners or other addition
Hydrochloric acid (37 % HCl sp gr 1.19) 200 mL/L
agents can be appreciable. Uncertainty from these sources may Antimony trioxide (Sb2O3) 20 g/L
be minimized by standardizing the test method against stan- Glacial acetic acid (99.7 % CH3COOH) 250 mL/L
Ferric chloride (FeCl3·6H2O) 450 g/L
dards, prepared from the same type of plating solution, the
thicknesses of which have been determined by other methods. NOTE 3—For ease of preparation, dissolve the antimony trioxide in the
hydrochloric acid, add 150 mL of water and the glacial acetic acid, and
6. Apparatus then add the ferric chloride in small portions. Finally dilute to 1.00 L with
water.
6.1 Fig. 1 illustrates one form of apparatus used for drop- NOTE 4—Variations of 62 % in the composition of a test solution are
ping tests. Equivalent apparatus are commercially available, as permissible.
is a solenoid operated unit with a digital readout.
9. Procedure
7. Reagents and Materials 9.1 Clean the specimen and allow it and the test solution to
7.1 Purity of Reagents—Reagent grade chemicals shall be reach room temperature, which should be recorded. Support
used in the preparation of all test solutions. the specimen so that the surface to be tested makes a 45° angle
7.2 Purity of Water—Water used in the preparation of test with the horizontal, about 13 mm below the tip of the dropping
solutions shall be reagent water as defined in Specification apparatus. Drop the test solution onto the specimen at a rate of
D 1193. 100 drops/min. Note and record the time required for the

2
 B 555
solution to penetrate the coating at the point on which the drops Cadmium (chromic acid solution): 0.35 µm/s
fall. Zinc (chromic acid solution): 0.26 µm/s
Cadmium (nitrate solution): 0.25 µm/s
Zinc (nitrate solution): 0.25 µm/s
10. Computation of Thickness Tin 0.25 µm/s
10.1 Multiply the time required to penetrate the coating by Copper 0.13 µm/s
an appropriate thickness factor to obtain the coating thickness. 10.2.1 The first two thickness factors for cadmium and zinc
10.2 Below are the thickness factors, applicable to nomi-
and the chromic acid solution are only valid for a temperature
nally “pure” coatings (5.1.9), for the solutions given in Section
of 24°C; the factors for these metals and this test solution at
8. They are valid for a dropping rate of 100 drops/min from a
other temperatures are given in Fig. 2 and Fig. 3.
capillary tip, the dimensions of which are given in Fig. 1.

FIG. 2 Chart for Determining Thickness of Zinc Coating by the Chromic Acid Dropping Test

3
 B 555

FIG. 3 Chart for Determining Thickness of Cadmium Coating by the Chromic Acid Dropping Test

10.2.2 The last four thickness factors are valid for tempera-
tures in a range from 20 to 30°C.
11. Reproducibility and Accuracy
11.1 The reproducibility for a single operator is estimated to
be 62 drops (equivalent to 1.2 s) or 65 %, whichever is
greater.
11.2 The over-all accuracy may be substantially poorer than
the reproducibility, because of the uncertainties discussed in
Section 5, and will depend upon the control exercised over the
variables. For maximum accuracy, the test method should be
standardized with specimens identical to those being tested,
having known coating thicknesses determined by other meth-
ods. Sometimes a chemical can be added to the dropping
solution to aid in determining the end point, for example,
potassium ferricyanide (K3Fe(CN)6) has been added to the test
solution for zinc in 8.3.

4
 B 555
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 557 – 02a
Standard Test Methods of
Tension Testing Wrought and Cast Aluminum- and
Magnesium-Alloy Products1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 557; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope*
1.1 These test methods cover the tension testing of wrought
and cast aluminum- and magnesium-alloy products, excepting
aluminum foil2, and are derived from Test Methods E 8, which
cover the tension testing of all metallic materials.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—Exceptions to the provisions of these test methods may need
to be made in individual specifications or test methods for a particular
material.
NOTE 2—A complete metric companion to Test Methods B 557 has
been developed—Test Methods B 557M; therefore, no metric equivalents
are presented in these test methods.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on the
date of material purchase form a part of these test methods to
the extent referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards:
E 4 Practices for Force Verification of Testing Machines3
E 6 Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical Test-
ing3
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications4
E 83 Practice for Verification and Classification of Exten-
someter System3
E 345 Test Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Foil3
E 691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method4
1
These test methods are under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on
Light Metals and Alloys and are the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.05
on Testing.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2002. Published January 2003. Originally
published as B 557 – 71. Last previous edition B 557 – 02.
2
For test methods of tension testing of aluminum foil, see Test Methods E 345.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
E 1012 Practice for Verification of Specimen Alignment
Under Tensile Loading3
3. Terminology
3.1 The definitions of terms relating to tension testing
appearing in Terminology E 6 shall be considered as applying
to the terms used in these test methods.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 Tension tests provide information on the strength and
ductility of materials under uniaxial tensile stresses. This
information may be useful in comparisons of materials, alloy
development, quality control, and design under certain circum-
stances.
4.2 The results of tension tests of specimens machined to
standardized dimensions from selected portions of a part or
material may not totally represent the strength and ductility
properties of the entire end product or its in-service behavior in
different environments.
4.3 These test methods are considered satisfactory for ac-
ceptance testing of commercial shipments and have been used
extensively in the trade for this purpose.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Testing Machines—Machines used for tension testing
shall conform to the requirements of Practices E 4. The forces
used in determining tensile strength and yield strength shall be
within the verified force application range of the testing
machine as defined in Practices E 4.
5.2 Gripping Devices:
5.2.1 General—Various types of gripping devices may be
used to transmit the measured load applied by the testing
machine to the test specimens. To ensure axial tensile stress
within the gage length, the axis of the test specimen must
coincide with the centerline of the heads of the testing
machine. Any departure from this requirement may introduce
bending stresses that are not included in the usual stress
computation (load divided by cross-sectional area).
NOTE 3—The effect of this eccentric loading may be illustrated by
calculating the bending moment and stress thus added. For a standard
0.500-in. diameter specimen, the stress increase is 1.5 percentage points
 B 557 – 02a
for each 0.001 in. of eccentricity. This error increases to 2.24 percentage
points/0.001 in. for a 0.350-in. diameter specimen and to 3.17 percentage
points/0.001 in. for a 0.250-in. diameter specimen.
NOTE 4—Alignment methods are given in Practice E 1012.
5.2.2 Wedge Grips—Testing machines usually are equipped
with wedge grips. These wedge grips generally furnish a
satisfactory means of gripping long specimens of ductile metal.
If, however, for any reason, one grip of a pair advances farther
than the other as the grips tighten, an undesirable bending
stress may be introduced. When liners are used behind the
wedges, they must be of the same thickness and their faces
must be flat and parallel. For best results, the wedges should be
supported over their entire length by the heads of the testing
machine. This requires that liners of several thicknesses be
available to cover the range of specimen thickness. For proper
gripping, it is desirable that the entire length of the serrated
face of each wedge be in contact with the specimen. Proper
alignment of wedge grips and liners is illustrated in Fig. 1. For
short specimens it is generally necessary to use machined test
specimens and to use a special means of gripping to ensure that
the specimens, when under load, shall be as nearly as possible
in uniformly distributed pure axial tension (see 5.2.3, 5.2.4, and
5.2.5).
5.2.3 Grips for Threaded and Shouldered Specimens—A
schematic diagram of a gripping device for threaded-end
specimens is shown in Fig. 2, while Fig. 3 shows a device for
gripping specimens with shouldered ends. Both of these
gripping devices should be attached to the heads of the testing
machine through properly lubricated spherical-seated bearings.
The distance between spherical bearings should be as great as
feasible.
5.2.4 Grips for Sheet Materials—The self-adjusting grips FIG. 2 Gripping Device for Threaded-End Specimens
shown in Fig. 4 have proved satisfactory for testing sheet
materials that cannot be tested satisfactorily in the usual type of
wedge grips. 5.4.1 Extensometers with gage lengths equal to or shorter
5.2.5 Grips for Wire—Grips of either the wedge or snubbing than the nominal gage length of the specimen (dimension
types as shown in Fig. 4 and Fig. 5 or flat wedge grips may be shown as “G-Gage Length” in the accompanying figures) may
used. be used to determine the yield behavior. For measuring
5.3 Dimension-Measuring Devices—Micrometers and other elongation at fracture with an appropriate extensometer, the
devices used for measuring linear dimensions shall be accurate gage length of the extensometer shall be equal to the nominal
and precise to at least one half the smallest unit to which the gage length required for the specimen being tested.
individual dimension is required to be measured.
5.4 Extensometers—Extensometers used in tensile testing 6. Test Specimen
shall conform to the requirements of Practice E 83 for the 6.1 General:
classifications specified by the procedure section of these test 6.1.1 Test specimens shall be of the full section of the
methods. Extensometers shall be used and verified to include material whenever practical. Otherwise, machined specimens
the strains corresponding to the yield strength and elongation at of rectangular or round cross section shall be used.
fracture (if determined). 6.1.2 Improperly prepared test specimens often are the
reason for unsatisfactory and incorrect test results. It is
important, therefore, that care be exercised in the preparation
of specimens, particularly in the machining, to ensure the
desired precision and bias in test results.
6.1.3 The cross-sectional area of the specimen should be
smallest at the center of the reduced section to ensure fracture
within the gage length. For this reason, a small taper is
permitted in the reduced section of each of the specimens
described in the following sections.
6.1.4 Rectangular specimens shall be 0.500 in. wide in
FIG. 1 Wedge Grips with Liners for Flat Specimens accordance with Fig. 6 or Fig. 7 (for tubular products), and

2
 B 557 – 02a
FIG. 3 Gripping Device for Shouldered-End Specimens
FIG. 4 Gripping Devices for Sheet and Wire Specimens
shall be of the full thickness of the material when practical.
When necessary, 0.250-in. wide subsize specimens as shown in
3
FIG. 5 Snubbing Device for Testing Wire
Fig. 6 may be used, but elongation values from such specimens
are not applicable to specification requirements.
6.1.4.1 Pin ends as shown in Fig. 8 may be used. In order to
avoid buckling in tests of thin and high-strength materials, it
may be necessary to use stiffening plates at the grip ends.
6.1.5 Round specimens shall be the standard 0.500-in.
diameter specimen in Fig. 9, except when the dimensions of the
product make this impossible. In such cases, small-size speci-
mens proportional to the standard specimen shown in Fig. 9
may be used. Unless otherwise specified in the product
specification, the selection of round tension specimens shall be
as specified in Table 1. Unless permitted by the product
specification, the dimensions of the smallest specimen used
shall not be less than the following:
Wrought Cast
Diameter of reduced section, in. 0.160 0.250
Length of reduced section, in. 3⁄4 11⁄4
Radius of fillet, in. 1⁄8 3⁄16
Diameter of end section, in. 15⁄64 3⁄8
Overall length, in.
With shouldered ends 11⁄2 23⁄8
With threaded ends 2 3
With plain cylindrical ends 3 4
6.1.5.1 The shape of the ends of the specimens outside of
the gage length shall be suitable to the material and of a shape
to fit the holders or grips of the testing machine so that the
loads are applied axially. Fig. 10 shows specimens with various
types of ends that have given satisfactory results.
6.1.6 Special care is required in the manufacture and testing
of smaller specimens because the effects of machining (for
example, the amount of end load applied and the amount of
heat generated) and testing (for example, eccentricity and gage
marking) variables are greater upon them than upon larger
specimens. Therefore, the largest practical specimen shall
always be used. With some types of materials, notably castings,
the result of tests of small specimens may be more variable due
to the increasing significance of variations in metallic structure
or the character of the surfaces. Low values derived from small
specimens should be carefully evaluated in accordance with
8.1 to be certain that the results are valid.
6.1.7 While tensile strengths and yield strengths can prop-
erly be compared with results derived from test specimens of
various dimensions, elongation values may vary with specimen
size and type. Therefore, elongation values should be obtained
 B 557 – 02a

Dimensions, in.
Standard Specimen Sheet- Subsize Specimen
Type, 1⁄2-in. Wide 1⁄4-in. Wide

G—Gage length 2.000 6 0.005 1.000 6 0.003

W—Width (Note 1 and Note 2) 0.500 6 0.010 0.250 6 0.002
T—Thickness (Note 3) thickness of material thickness of material
R—Radius of fillet, min 1⁄2 1⁄4

L—Overall length, min (Note 4) 8 4

A—Length of reduced section, min 21⁄4 11⁄4
B—Length of grip section, min (Note 5) 2 11⁄4
C—Width of grip section, approximate 3⁄4 3⁄8

(Note 2 and Note 6)

NOTE 1—The ends of the reduced section shall not differ in width by more than 0.002 in. for the 2.00-in. gage length specimen or 0.001 in. for the
1.00-in. gage length specimen. There may be a gradual taper in width from the ends of the reduced section to the center, but the width at each end shall
not be more than 1 % greater than the width at the center.
NOTE 2—For each of the specimens, narrower widths (W and C) may be used when necessary. In such cases the width of the reduced section should
be as large as the width of the material being tested permits; however, unless stated specifically, the requirements for elongation in a product specification
shall not apply when these narrower specimens are used. If the width of the material is less than W, the sides may be parallel throughout the length of
the specimen.
NOTE 3—The dimension T is the thickness of the test specimen as stated in the applicable material specifications. Maximum nominal thicknesses of
1⁄2-in. and 1⁄4-in. wide specimens shall be 1⁄2 in. and 1⁄4 in., respectively.

NOTE 4—To aid in obtaining axial loading during testing of 1⁄4-in. wide specimens, the overall length should be as large as the material will permit,
up to 8 in.
NOTE 5—It is desirable, if possible, to make the length of the grip section large enough to allow the specimen to extend into the grips a distance equal
to two thirds or more of the length of the grips. If the thickness of 1⁄2-in. wide specimens is over 3⁄8 in., longer grips and correspondingly longer grip
sections of the specimen may be necessary to prevent failure in the grip section.
NOTE 6—The grip-end centerline of the 1⁄2 –in. wide and 1⁄4 –in. wide specimens shall coincide with the centerline of the reduced section within 0.01
and 0.005 in., respectively.
FIG. 6 Rectangular Tension Test Specimens

with specimens of the type from which the published tensile
properties were established.
6.2 Type, Direction, and Location in Wrought Products—
This paragraph and subparagraphs provide the standard re-
quirements for the testing of wrought products for the purpose
of quality control and lot release testing. Additions or excep-
tions to these requirements may need to be made in individual
specifications for a particular material or product
NOTE 5—These requirements also do not preclude the use of these test
methods for purposes other than quality control as desired for research,
material evaluation, or other purpose utilizing other test locations, test
directions, and test specimen sizes. In these cases, the general require-
ments in 6.1 should be followed for specimen type and the requirements
in Sections 5 and 7 shall be followed for test apparatus, testing, and
analysis.
6.2.1 Sheet and Plate:
6.2.1.1 Rectangular specimens shall be used for thicknesses
less than 0.500 in., and round specimens for all others.
6.2.1.2 For thicknesses 0.500 in. through 1.500 in., inplane
specimens shall be taken from the center of the thickness; for
larger thicknesses, they shall be taken midway from the center
to the surface. Short transverse specimens shall be taken so that
the midpoint of their axis lies on the plate mid-thickness.
6.2.1.3 For non-heat-treatable aluminum alloys, specimens
shall be taken parallel to the direction of rolling.
6.2.1.4 For heat-treatable aluminum alloys, specimens shall
be taken perpendicular to the direction of rolling (long-
transverse), unless otherwise specified in the material specifi-
cation. For widths too narrow for long-transverse standard
rectangular or 0.500-in. diameter specimens, specimens shall
be taken parallel to the direction of rolling.
6.2.1.5 For magnesium alloys, specimens shall be taken
parallel to the direction of rolling.
6.2.2 Wire, Rod, and Bar:
6.2.2.1 Full-section specimens shall be used when practical.
It is permissible to reduce the section slightly throughout the
test section in order to ensure fracture within the gage length.
Otherwise, round specimens shall be used, except that for
rectangles less than 0.500-in. thick rectangular specimens of
the full thickness may be used.

4
 B 557 – 02a

Dimensions, in.
G—Gage length 2.000 6 0.005
W—Width (Note 1) 0.5006 0.010
T—Measured thickness of specimen Note 2
R—Radius of fillet, min 1⁄2

A—Length of reduced section, min 21⁄4

B—Length of grip section, min (Note 3) 3
C—Width of grip section, approximate (Note 4) 11⁄16

NOTE 1—The ends of the reduced section shall not differ in width by more than 0.002 in. There may be a gradual taper in width from the ends of the
reduced section to the center, but the width at each end shall not be more than 1 % greater than the width at the center.
NOTE 2—The dimension T is the thickness of the tubular section as provided for in the applicable material specifications.
NOTE 3—It is desirable, if possible, to make the length of the grip section great enough to allow the specimen to extend into the grips a distance equal
to two thirds or more of the length of the grips.
NOTE 4—The grip-end centerline of the specimen shall coincide with the centerline of the reduced section within 0.05 in.
NOTE 5—For circular segment, the cross-sectional area shall be calculated using the formula shown in 7.2.3
NOTE 6—The radii of all fillets shall be equal to each other within a tolerance of 0.05 in., and the centers of curvature of the two fillets at a particular
end shall be located across from each other (on a line perpendicular to the centerline) within a tolerance of 0.10 in.
FIG. 7 Longitudinal Tension Test Specimens for Large-Diameter Tubular Products

Dimensions, in.
G—Gage length 2.000 6 0.005
W—Width (Note 1) 0.500 6 0.010
T—Thickness, max (Note 2) 5⁄8

R—Radius of fillet, min (Note 3) 1⁄2

L—Overall length, min 8

A—Length of reduced section, min 21⁄4
B— Length of grip section, min 2
C— Width of grip section, approximate 2
D— Diameter of hole for pin, min (Note 4) 1⁄2

E— Edge distance from pin, approximate 11⁄2

F— Distance from hole to fillet, min 1⁄2

NOTE 1—The ends of the reduced section shall differ in width by not more than 0.002 in. There may be a gradual taper in width from the ends of the
reduced section to the center, but the width at each end shall be not more than 1 % greater than the width at the center.
NOTE 2—The dimension T is the thickness of the test specimen as stated in the applicable product specifications.
NOTE 3—For some materials, a fillet radius R larger than 1⁄2 in. may be needed.
NOTE 4—Holes must be on centerline of reduced section, within 60.002 in.
NOTE 5—Variations of dimensions C, D, E, F, and L may be used that will permit failure within the gage length.
FIG. 8 Pin-Loaded Tension Test Specimen with 2-in. Gage Length

6.2.2.2 Specimens shall be taken in the longitudinal direc-
tion from the locations specified in Table 2.
6.2.3 Extrusion Profiles:
6.2.3.1 Round specimens shall be used whenever it is not
practical to use full-section specimens, except that for extru-
sion profiles less than 0.500 in. thick, rectangular specimens
may be used.
6.2.3.2 Specimens shall be taken in the longitudinal direc-
tion from the predominant section of the extrusion profile. The
specimens shall be taken from a location that most nearly
satisfies the intent of Table 2.
6.2.4 Tube and Pipe—Specimens shall be taken in the
longitudinal direction.

5
 B 557 – 02a

Dimensions, in.
Standard
Nominal Diameter Small-Size Specimens Proportional to Standard
Specimen
0.500 0.350 0.250 0.160
G—Gage length 2.000 6 0.005 1.400 6 0.005 1.000 6 0.005 0.6406 0.005
D—Diameter (Note 1) 0.500 6 0.010 0.3506 0.007 0.250 6 0.005 0.160 6 0.003
R—Radius of fillet, min 3⁄8 1⁄4 3⁄16 5⁄32

A—Length of reduced section, min (Note 2) 21⁄4 13⁄4 11⁄4 3⁄4

NOTE 1—The reduced section may have a gradual taper from the ends toward the center, with the ends not more than 1 % larger in diameter than the
center (controlling dimension).
NOTE 2—If desired, the length of the reduced section may be increased to accommodate an extensometer of any convenient gage length. Reference
marks for the measurement of elongation should, nevertheless, be spaced at the indicated gage length.
NOTE 3—The gage length and fillets shall be as shown, but the ends may be of any form to fit the holders of the testing machine in such a way that
the load shall be axial (see Fig. 10). If the ends are held in wedge grips it is desirable, if possible, to make the length of the grip section great enough
to allow the specimen to extend into the grips a distance equal to two thirds or more of the length of the grips.
NOTE 4—On the round specimens in Fig. 9 and Fig. 10, the gage lengths are equal to four times the nominal diameter. In some product specifications
other specimens may be provided for, but unless the 4-to-1 ratio is maintained within dimensional tolerances, the elongation values may not be comparable
with those obtained from the standard test specimen.
NOTE 5—The use of specimens smaller than 0.250-in. diameter shall be restricted to cases when the material to be tested is of insufficient size to obtain
larger specimens or when all parties agree to their use for acceptance testing. Smaller specimens require suitable equipment and greater skill in both
machining and testing.
NOTE 6—Four sizes of specimens often used have diameters of approximately 0.505, 0.357, 0.252, and 0.160 in., the reason being to permit easy
calculations of stress from loads, since the corresponding cross-sectional areas are equal or close to 0.200, 0.100, 0.0500, and 0.0200 in.2, respectively.
Thus, when the actual diameters agree with these values, the stresses (or strengths) may be computed using the simple multiplying factors 5, 10, 20, and
50, respectively.
FIG. 9 Standard 0.500-in. Round Tension Test Specimen with 2-in. Gage Length and Examples of Small-Size Specimens Proportional to
the Standard Specimen

TABLE 1 Guidelines for Selecting Round Tensile Specimens center of wall thicknesses through 1.500 in.; for thicknesses
Minimum Material over 1.500 in., they shall be taken midway from center of
Specified Material Section Thickness Specimen
Thickness, in Length or Diameter, in
thickness to surface. If specimens of the type shown in Fig. 7
Width, in are used and curved grip faces are not available, it is acceptable
0.250 through 0.374 11⁄2 0.160 to flatten (without heating) the grip ends of the test specimen.
0.375 through 0.499 21⁄2 0.250 The gage length area shall not be deformed.
0.500 through 0.624 31⁄4 0.350
0.625 and over 43⁄4 0.500 6.2.5 Die Forgings—Round specimens shall be used for
section thicknesses 0.500 in. and greater. Either subsize round
or rectangular specimens may be used for section thicknesses
6.2.4.1 For all small tube (Note 6), particularly sizes 1 in. from 0.312 to 0.499 in. Rectangular specimens shall be used
and under in nominal outside diameter, and frequently for for section thicknesses less than 0.312 in. The direction of the
larger sizes, except as limited by the testing equipment, it is specimens shall be in the longitudinal grain direction, unless
standard practice to use tension test specimens of full-size specimens in other directions are required. For aluminum die
tubular sections. Snug-fitting metal plugs shall be inserted far forgings, the longitudinal grain direction is defined as orienta-
enough into the ends of such tubular specimens to permit the tions parallel, within 615°, to the predominate grain flow. The
testing machine jaws to grip the specimens properly. The plugs long transverse grain direction is defined as perpendicular,
shall not extend into that part of the specimen on which the within 615°, to the longitudinal (predominate) grain direction
elongation is measured. Fig. 11 shows a suitable form of plug, and parallel, within 615°, to the parting plane. (Both condi-
the location of the plugs in the specimen, and the location of tions must be met.) The short transverse grain direction is
the specimen in the grips of the testing machine. defined as perpendicular, within 615°, to the longitudinal
NOTE 6—The term “tube” is used to indicate tubular products in (predominate) grain direction and perpendicular, within 615°,
general, and includes pipe, tube, and tubing. to the parting plane. Specimens shall be taken from the center
6.2.4.2 When it is not practical to test full-section speci- of the predominant or thickest part of the forging from which
mens, 0.500-in. wide specimens in accordance with Fig. 7 a coupon can be obtained, from a prolongation of the forging,
taken as in Fig. 12 shall be used if practical. Otherwise, round or from separately forged coupons from the same stock and
specimens in accordance with 6.1.5 shall be taken from the representative of the forging.

6
 B 557 – 02a

Dimensions, in.
Specimen 1 Specimen 2 Specimen 3 Specimen 4 Specimen 5
G—Gage length 2.000 6 0.005 2.000 6 0.005 2.000 6 0.005 2.000 6 0.005 2.000 6 0.005
D—Diameter (Note 1) 0.500 6 0.010 0.500 6 0.010 0.500 6 0.010 0.500 6 0.010 0.500 6 0.010
R—Radius of fillet, min ⁄
38 ⁄
38 ⁄
1 16 ⁄
38 ⁄
38

A—Length of reduced section 21⁄4 , min 21⁄4 , min 4, approximately 21⁄4 , min 21⁄4 , min
L—Overall length, approximate 5 51⁄2 51⁄2 43⁄4 91⁄2
B—Length of end section (Note 2) 13⁄8 , approximately 1, approximately 3⁄4 approximately 1⁄2 , approximately 3, min
C—Diameter of end section 3⁄4 3⁄4 23⁄32 7⁄8 3⁄4

E—Length of shoulder and fillet ... 5⁄8 ... 3⁄4 5⁄8

section, approximate
F—Diameter of shoulder ... ⁄
58 ... ⁄
58 ⁄
19 32

NOTE 1—The reduced section may have a gradual taper from the ends toward the center with the ends not more than 0.005 in. larger in diameter than
the center.
NOTE 2—On Specimen 5 it is desirable, if possible, to make the length of the grip section great enough to allow the specimen to extend into the grips
a distance equal to two thirds or more of the length of the grips.
FIG. 10 Various Types of Ends for Standard Round Tension Test Specimen

TABLE 2 Location of Axis of Specimens in Rod, Bar, and

Extrusion Profiles
Location of Axis of Specimen with
Section Diameter, Respect to Thickness (T) and
Thickness or Width, Width (W) of Bar and Shapes or
in. Diameter (D) of Rod
Thickness Width Diameter
Up through 1.500, incl T/2 W/2 D/2
Over 1.500 T/4 W/4 D/4

6.2.6 Hand Forgings—Round specimens shall be used.

They shall be taken in the long-transverse direction, and when
specified, in the longitudinal and short-transverse directions. A
longitudinal specimen shall be taken so that its axis coincides
with the longitudinal centerline of the forging. A long-
transverse or short-transverse specimen shall be taken so that
NOTE 1—The diameter of the plug shall have a slight taper from the line
the midpoint of its axis lies on the longitudinal centerline of the
limiting the testing machine jaws to the curved section.
forging. Each specimen shall be so chosen that the distance FIG. 11 Metal Plugs for Testing Tubular Specimens, Proper
from the midpoint of its axis to the end of the forging is at least Location of Plugs in Specimen, and of Specimen in Heads of
half the thickness of the forging. Testing Machine
6.3 Type of Specimen from Castings:
6.3.1 Test specimens shall be separately cast or, if called for
by product specification or customer requirements, machined accordance with Fig. 6 may be used for section thicknesses
from the casting itself. from 0.312 to 0.499 in., except as limited by 6.1.3.
6.3.2 Cast Test Specimens—Cast test specimens shall be
6.3.3.3 Rectangular specimens in accordance with Fig. 6
prepared in accordance with the appropriate product specifica-
shall be used for section thicknesses less than 0.312 in.
tion.
6.3.3 Specimens Machined from Castings: 6.3.3.4 All test specimens must have a machined finish of
6.3.3.1 Round specimens in accordance with Fig. 9 shall be 63 µin. RMS (57 µin. AA) or smoother.
used for section thicknesses 0.500 in. and greater. 6.4 Specimen for Die Castings—For testing die castings the
6.3.3.2 Either small-size round specimens proportional to test specimen shown in Fig. 13 shall be used unless otherwise
the standard specimen in Fig. 9 or rectangular specimens in provided in the product specifications.

7

NOTE 1—The edges of the specimen shall be cut parallel to each other.
FIG. 12 Location from Which Longitudinal Tension Test
Specimens Are to Be Cut from Large-Diameter Tube
6.5 Specimens for Powdered Metals—For testing powdered
metals the test specimens shown in Fig. 14 and Fig. 15 shall be
used, unless otherwise provided in the product specifications.
7. Procedure
7.1 Preparation of the Test Machine—Upon startup, or
following a prolonged period of machine inactivity, exercise or
warmup the test machine to normal operating temperatures to
minimize errors that may result from transient conditions.
7.2 Measurement of Dimensions of Test Specimens:
7.2.1 To determine the cross-sectional area of a tension test
specimen, measure the dimensions of the cross section at the
center of the reduced section. However, for referee testing of
specimens under 3⁄16 in. in their least dimension, measure the
dimensions where the least cross-sectional area is found.
Measure and record the cross-sectional dimensions of tension
test specimens 0.200 in. and over to the nearest 0.001 in.; the
cross-sectional dimensions less than 0.200 in. and not less than
0.100 in. to the nearest 0.0005 in.; the cross-sectional dimen-
sions less than 0.100 in. and not less than 0.020 in., to the
nearest 0.0001 in.; and when practical, the cross-sectional
dimensions less than 0.020 in., to at least the nearest 1 % but
in all cases to at least the nearest 0.0001 in.
NOTE 7—Measurements of dimensions presume smooth surface fin-
ishes for the specimens. Rough surfaces due to the manufacturing process
such as hot rolling, metallic coating, and so forth, may lead to inaccuracy
of the computed areas greater than the measured dimensions would
indicate. Therefore, cross-sectional dimensions of tension test specimens
with rough surfaces due to processing may be measured and recorded to
the nearest 0.001 in.
7.2.2 Determine cross-sectional areas of full-size tension
test specimens of nonsymmetrical cross sections by weighing a
length not less than 20 times the largest cross-sectional
dimension and using the value of density of the material.
Determine the weight to the nearest 0.5 % or less.
7.2.3 When using specimens of the type shown in Fig. 7
taken from tubes, determine the cross-sectional area as follows:
If D/W # 6:
A 5 [~W/4! 3 ~D 2 2 W 2!1/2# 1 [~D 2/4!
2
3 arcsin ~W/D!# 2 [~W/4! 3 ~~D 2 2T! 2 W ! # 2 1/2
2 [~~D 2 2T!/2! 2 3 arcsin ~W/~D 2 2T!!#
B 557 – 02a
where:
A = exact cross-sectional area, in.2,
W = width of the specimen in the reduced section, in.,
D = measured outside diameter of the tube, in., and
T = measured wall thickness of the specimen, in. arcsin
values to be in radians.
If D/W > 6, the exact equation or the following equation may
be used:
A5W3T (2)
where:
A = approximate cross-sectional area, in.2,
W = width of the specimen in the reduced section, in., and
T = measured wall thickness of the specimen, in.
7.3 Gage Length Marking of Test Specimens:
7.3.1 The gage length for the determination of elongation
after fracture shall be in accordance with the product specifi-
cations for the material being tested. Gage marks shall be
stamped lightly with a punch, scribed lightly with dividers, or
drawn with ink as preferred. For material that is sensitive to the
effect of slight notches and for small specimens, the use of
layout ink will aid in locating the original gage marks after
fracture.
7.3.2 In the absence of a product specification, the following
gage lengths shall be used:
7.3.2.1 For 1⁄2-in. wide rectangular specimens and full-
section specimens from tube and pipe, the gage lengths shall be
2 in. (Figs. 6-8, and Fig. 11).
7.3.2.2 For round specimens taken from products 0.125 in.
or larger, the gage length shall be 4D, except for wire for
electric conductors (Fig. 9).
7.3.2.3 For wire for electric conductors the gage length shall
be 10 in.
7.3.2.4 For die cast specimens, the gage length shall be 8D
(Fig. 13).
7.3.2.5 For powdered metal specimens, the gage length
shall be 1 in. (Figs. 14 and 15).
7.3.2.6 Elongation measurements are not required for extru-
sion profiles less than 0.062 in. in thickness and of wire, other
than electric conductors, 0.125 in. and less in diameter.
7.3.3 When required by the material specification, or when
making retests or referee tests of products other than wire when
the specified elongation is less than 3 % or the elongation
measured in a usual manner is less than 4 %, mark the original
gage length of the specimen and measure to an accuracy of
60.002 in.
7.4 Zeroing of the Test Machine—The testing machine shall
be set up in such a manner that zero force indication signifies
a state of zero force on the specimen. Any force (or preload)
imparted by the gripping of the specimen (see Note 8) must be
indicated by the force measuring system unless the preload is
physically removed prior to testing. Artificial methods of
removing the preload on the specimen, such as taring it out by
a zero adjust pot or removing it mathematically by software,
are prohibited because these would affect the accuracy of the
(1)
test results.
NOTE 8—Preloads generated by gripping of specimens may be either
tensile or compressive in nature and may be the result of such things as:
grip design, malfunction of gripping apparatus (sticking, binding, and so
8
 B 557 – 02a

Dimensions, in.
G—Gage length 2.000 6 0.005
D—Diameter (see Note) 0.250 6 0.005
R—Radius of filet, min 3
A—Length of reduced section, min 21⁄4
L—Overall length, min 9
B—Distance between grips, min 41⁄2
C—Diameter of end section, approximate 3⁄8

NOTE 1—The reduced section may have a gradual taper from the ends toward the center, with the ends not more than 0.005 in. larger in diameter than
the center.
FIG. 13 Standard Tension Test Specimen for Die Castings

Pressing Area = 1.00 in.2

Dimensions Specified except G, are Those of the Die.
Dimensions, in.
G—Gage length 1.000 6 0.005
D—Width at center 0.225 6 0.001
W—Width at end of reduced section 0.235 6 0.001
T—Compact to this thickness 0.200 to 0.250
R—Radius of fillet 1
A—Half-length of reduced section 5⁄8

B—Grip length 3.187 6 0.001

L—Overall length 3.529 6 0.001
C—Width of grip section 0.343 6 0.001
F—Half width of grip section 0.1715 6 0.0010
E—End radius 0.171 6 0.001

FIG. 14 Standard Tension Test Specimen for Powdered Metal Products—Flat Unmachined Tension Test Specimen

forth), excessive gripping force, and sensitivity of the control loop.
NOTE 9—It is the operator’s responsibility to verify that an observed
preload is acceptable and to ensure that grips operate in a smooth manner.
Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that momentary (dynamic)
forces due to gripping not exceed 20 % of the material’s nominal yield
strength and that static preloads not exceed 10 % of the material’s nominal
yield strength.
7.5 Speed of Testing:
7.5.1 Speed of testing may be defined in terms of (a)
free-running crosshead speed (rate of movement of the cross-
head of the testing machine when not under load), (b) rate of
separation of the two heads of the testing machine during a test,
(c) the elapsed time for completing part or all of the test, (d)
rate of stressing the specimen, or (e) rate of straining the
specimen. For some materials, the first of these, which is the
least accurate, may be adequate, while for other materials, one
of the others, listed in increasing order of precision, may be
necessary in order to obtain test values within acceptable
limits. Suitable limits for speed of testing should be specified
for materials for which the differences resulting from the use of
different speeds are of such magnitude that the test results are
unsatisfactory for determining the acceptability of the material.
In such instances, depending upon the material and the use for
which it is intended, one or more of the methods described in
the following paragraphs is recommended for specifying speed
of testing.
7.5.2 Free-Running Crosshead Speed—The allowable lim-
its for the rate of movement of the crosshead of the testing
machine, with no force applied by the testing machine, shall be
specified in inches per inch of length of reduced section (or
distance between grips for specimens not having reduced
sections) per minute. The limits for the crosshead speed may be
further qualified by specifying different limits for various types

9
 B 557 – 02a
7.5.5 Rate of Stressing—The allowable limits for rate of
stressing shall be specified in pounds per square inch per
minute. Many testing machines are equipped with pacing
devices for the measurement and control of the rate of
stressing, but in the absence of such a device the average rate
of stressing can be determined with a timing device by
observing the time required to apply a known increment of
stress.
7.5.6 Rate of Straining—The allowable limits for rate of
Pressing Area of Unmachined Compact = 1.5 in.2
Machining Recommendations straining shall be specified in inches per inch per minute. Some
1. Rough machine to 5⁄16-in. diameter testing machines are equipped with pacing or indicating
2. Finish turn 0.250-in. diameter with radii and taper devices for the measurement and control of rate of straining,
3. Polish with 00 emery cloth but, in the absence of such a device, the average rate of
4. Lap with crocus cloth
straining can be determined with a timing device by observing
Dimensions, in.
the time required to effect a known increment of strain.
G—Gage length 1.000 6 0.005
D—Diameter at center of reduced section 0.2506 0.001 7.5.7 Unless otherwise specified, any convenient speed of
H— Diameter at ends of gage length D + 0.001 to 0.002 in. testing may be used up to one half the specified yield strength,
R—Radius of fillet 1⁄4
or up to one quarter the specified tensile strength, whichever is
A—Length of reduced section 11⁄4
L—Overall length (die cavity length) 3 smaller. The speed above this point shall be within the limits
B—Length of end section 1⁄2 specified. If different speed limitations are required for use in
C—Compact to this end thickness 0.500 6 0.050 determining yield strength, tensile strength, and elongation,
W—Die cavity width 1⁄2

E—Length of shoulder and fillet 3⁄8
F—Diameter of shoulder 5⁄16
J—End fillet radius, max 1⁄16
NOTE 1—The gage length and fillets of the specimen shall be as shown.
The ends as shown are designed to provide a total pressing area of 1.00
in.2 Other end designs are acceptable, and in some cases are required for
high-strength sintered materials. Some suggested alternative end designs
include:
1. Longer ends, of the same general shape and configuration as the
standard, provide more surface area for gripping.
2. Shallow transverse grooves, or ridges, may be pressed in the ends to
be gripped by jaws machined to fit the specimen contour.
FIG. 15 Standard Tension Test Specimen for Powdered Metal
Products—Round Machined Tension Test Specimen
and sizes of specimens. The average crosshead speed can be
experimentally determined by using a suitable measuring
device and a timing device.
7.5.3 Rate of Separation of Heads During Tests—The al-
lowable limits for rate of separation of the heads of the testing
machine during a test shall be specified in inches per inch of
length of reduced section (or distance between grips for
specimens not having reduced sections) per minute. The limits
for the rate of separation may be further qualified by specifying
different limits for various types and sizes of specimens. Many
testing machines are equipped with pacing or indicating
devices for the measurement and control of the rate of
separation of the heads of the machine during a test, but, in the
absence of such a device, the average rate of separation of the
heads can be experimentally determined by using a suitable
length-measuring device and a timing device.
7.5.4 Elapsed Time—The allowable limits for the elapsed
time from the beginning of force application (or from some
specified stress) to the instant of fracture, to the maximum
force, or to some other stated stress, shall be specified in
minutes or seconds. The elapsed time can be determined with
a timing device.
they should be stated in the product specifications. In the
absence of any more specified limitations on speed of testing
the following general rules shall apply:
7.5.7.1 The speed of testing shall be such that the forces and
strains used in obtaining the test results are accurately indi-
cated.
7.5.7.2 During the conduct of the test to determine yield
strength, the rate of stress application shall not exceed 100 000
psi/min. The speed may be increased after removal of the
extensometer, but it shall not exceed 0.5 in./in. of gage length
(or distance between grips for specimens not having reduced
sections) per minute.
7.6 Yield Strength—Determine yield strength by the offset
method at an offset of 0.2 %. Acceptance or rejection of
material may be decided on the basis of Extension-Under-Load
Method. For referee testing, the offset method shall be used.
7.6.1 Offset Method—To determine the yield strength by the
“offset method,” it is necessary to secure data (autographic or
numerical) from which a stress-strain diagram may be drawn.
Then on the stress-strain diagram (Fig. 16) lay off Om equal to
the specified value of the offset, draw mn parallel to OA, and
thus locate r, the intersection of mn with the stress-strain
diagram (Note 10). In reporting values of yield strength
obtained by this method, the specified value of “offset” used
should be stated in parentheses after the term yield strength.
Thus:
Yield strength ~offset 5 0.2 %! 5 52 000 psi (3)
A Class B2 extensometer (see Practice E 83) would be
sufficiently sensitive for most materials when using this
method.
NOTE 10—Automatic devices are available that determine offset yield
strength without plotting a stress-strain curve. Such devices may be used
if their accuracy has been demonstrated to be satisfactory.
NOTE 11—If the force drops before the specified offset is reached,
technically the material does not have a yield strength (for that offset), but
the stress at the maximum force attained before the specified offset is
reached may be reported instead of the yield strength.

10
 B 557 – 02a
FIG. 16 Stress-Strain Diagram for Determination of Yield Strength
by the Offset Method
7.6.2 Extension-Under-Load Method—For tests to deter-
mine the acceptance or rejection of material whose stress-strain
characteristics are well-known from previous tests of similar
material in which stress-strain diagrams were plotted, the total
strain corresponding to the stress at which the specified offset
occurs will be known within satisfactory limits; therefore, in
such tests a specified total strain may be used, and the stress on
the specimen, when this total strain is reached, is taken to be
the value of the yield strength (Fig. 17). The total strain can be
obtained satisfactorily by use of a Class B2 extensometer. It is
recommended that this approximate method be used only after
agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser, with
FIG. 17 Stress-Strain Diagram for Determination of Yield Strength
by the Extension-Under-Load Method
11
the understanding that check tests be made for obtaining
stress-strain diagrams for use with the offset method to settle
any misunderstandings.
NOTE 12—There are two general types of extensometers, averaging and
non-averaging, the use of which is dependent on the product tested. For
most machined or reduced section specimens; there are minimal differ-
ences. However, for some materials such as some forgings and tube
sections, significant differences in measured yield strength can occur. For
these cases it is recommended that the averaging type be used.
7.7 Tensile Strength—Calculate the tensile strength by di-
viding the maximum load carried by the specimen during a
tension test by the original cross-sectional area of the speci-
men.
7.8 Elongation:
7.8.1 To determine elongation after fracture, carefully fit
ends of the fractured specimen together and measure the
distance between the gage marks to the nearest 0.01 in. A
percentage scale reading to 0.5 % of the gage length may be
used. The elongation after fracture is the increase in length of
the gage length, expressed as a percentage of the original gage
length. Report the elongation after fracture using both the
percentage increase and the original gage length.
7.8.2 If any part of the fracture takes place outside of the
middle half of the gage length or in a punched or scribed mark
within the reduced section, the elongation value obtained may
not be representative of the material. If the elongation so
measured meets the minimum requirements specified, no
further testing is required, but the location of fracture shall be
noted. If the elongation is less than the minimum requirements,
discard the test and test a replacement specimen as allowed in
8.1.
7.8.3 Elongation at fracture is defined as the elongation
measured just prior to the sudden decrease in force associated
with fracture. For many ductile materials not exhibiting a
sudden decrease in force, the elongation at fracture can be
taken as the strain measured just prior to when the force falls
below 10 % of the maximum force encountered during the test.
7.8.3.1 Elongation at fracture shall include elastic and
plastic elongation and may be determined with autographic or
automated methods using extensometers verified over the
strain range of interest (see 5.4). Use a Class B2 or better
extensometer for materials having less than 5 % elongation, a
Class C or better extensometer for materials having elongation
greater than or equal to 5 % but less than 50 %, and a Class D
or better extensometer for materials having 50 % or greater
elongation. In all cases, the extensometer gage length shall be
the nominal gage length required for the specimen being tested.
Due to the lack of precision in fitting fractured ends together,
the elongation after fracture using the manual methods of the
preceding paragraphs may differ from the elongation at fracture
determined with extensometers.
7.8.3.2 Percent elongation at fracture may be calculated
directly from elongation at fracture data and reported instead of
percent elongation after fracture as calculated in 7.8.1 and
7.8.2. However, the two parameters are not interchangeable.
Use of the elongation at fracture method generally provides
more repeatable results.
 B 557 – 02a
NOTE 13—When disagreements arise over the percent elongation re-
sults, agreement must be reached on which method to use.
7.8.4 When required by the material specification, or when
making retests or for referee tests of products other than wire
and the specified elongation is less than 3 % or the elongation
measured in the usual manner is less than 4 %, determine the
elongation of a specimen as follows:
7.8.4.1 Prior to testing, the original gage length of the
specimen shall be marked and measured to an accuracy of
60.002 in. as required in 7.3.3
7.8.4.2 After testing, remove any partly torn fragments that
might influence the final measurement from the broken ends of
the specimen.
7.8.4.3 Fit the fractured ends together with matched sur-
faces and apply an end load along the axis of the specimen
sufficient to close the fractured ends together. If desired, this
load may then be removed carefully, provided the specimen
remains intact.
NOTE 14—The use of an end load of approximately 2000 psi has been
found to give satisfactory results on test specimens of aluminum alloy.
7.8.4.4 Measure the final gage length to at least the nearest
0.002 in., and report the elongation to at least the nearest 0.1 %
in 2 in. or 0.2 % in shorter gage lengths.
7.9 Rounding—Round each value of strength to the nearest
0.1 ksi. Round each value of elongation determined in accor-
dance with 7.8.1 to the nearest 0.5 %, unless otherwise
specified. Round in accordance with Practice E 29.
7.9.1 If elongation is determined in accordance with 7.8.4,
round each value in accordance with 7.8.4.4.
7.9.2 For wire for electric conductors, measure and report
the elongation to the nearest 0.1 %.
8. Replacement Tests
8.1 A test specimen may be discarded and a replacement
specimen selected from the same lot of material when (1) the
specimen had a poorly machined surface, was not of the proper
dimensions, or had its properties changed by poor machining
practice; (2) the test procedure was incorrect or the test
equipment malfunctioned; or (3) the fracture was outside the
middle half of the gage length, and the elongation was below
the specified value.
8.2 In the case of specimens machined from wrought
products or castings, discontinuities such as cracks, ruptures,
flakes and porosity revealed in the fracture that are considered
indicative of inferior or defective material are not reasons for
the selection of a replacement test specimen.
8.3 In the case of separately cast test specimens, flaws other
than gas porosity, such as cracks or inclusions, are not the
cause of rejection of the castings based upon tensile properties,
and so the presence of such flaws in the fracture is justification
for replacement testing.
9. Retests
9.1 If one or more test specimens fail to conform to the
requirements of the product specification, the lot represented
by the specimen or specimens shall be subject to rejection
except as provided as follows.
12
9.2 If a material lot is subject to rejection, retests of that lot
will be permitted by:
9.2.1 Testing, for each specimen that failed, at least two
additional specimens from an area in the original sample
adjacent to the area represented by the failure or failures, or
9.2.2 Testing an additional specimen from the specified
location in each of at least two other samples for each sample
that failed from the same lot.
9.2.3 In the case of separately cast test specimens, testing
two additional cast specimens from the same lot for each
specimen that failed.
9.3 If any retest fails, the lot shall be subject to rejection,
except that the lot may be resubmitted for testing provided the
producer has reworked the lot, as necessary, to correct the
deficiencies or has removed the nonconforming material.
10. Report
10.1 Report test information on materials not covered by a
product specification in accordance with 10.2 or both 10.2 and
10.3.
10.2 Test information to be reported shall include the
following when applicable:
10.2.1 Material and sample identification,
10.2.2 Specimen type (see Section 6),
10.2.3 Yield strength and the method used to determine
yield strength (see 7.6),
10.2.4 Tensile strength (see 7.7), and
10.2.5 Elongation, including original gage length, percent-
age increase, and method used to determine elongation (see
7.8).
10.3 Test information to be available on request shall
include:
10.3.1 Specimen test section dimension(s) (see Section 6),
10.3.2 Equation used to calculate cross-sectional area of
rectangular specimens taken from large-diameter tubular prod-
ucts (see 7.2.3),
10.3.3 Speed and method used to determine speed of testing
(see 7.5),
10.3.4 Method used for rounding of test results (see 7.9),
10.3.5 Reasons for replacement specimens (see Section 8),
and
10.3.6 Reasons for retests (see Section 9).
11. Precision and Bias
11.1 Precision—An interlaboratory test program5 gave the
following values for coefficients of variation for the most
commonly measured tensile properties:
Coefficient of Variation, %
Elongation
Tensile Yield Strength
Strength Offset, 0.2 %
Gage Length,
4 Diameter
CV %r 0.9 1.4 2.8
CV %R 1.3 2.3 5.4
CV %r = repeatability coefficient of variation in percent within a laboratory.
CV %R = repeatability coefficient of variation in percent between laboratories.
11.1.1 The values shown are the averages from tests on six
frequently tested metals, selected to include most of the normal
5
Supporting data can be found in Appendix X1 and additional data are available
from ASTM Headquarters. Request RR:E28-1004 and E28-1006.
 B 557 – 02a
range for each property previously listed. When these materials
are compared, a large difference in coefficient of variation is
found. Therefore, the preceding values should not be used to
judge whether the difference between duplicate tests of a
specific material is larger than expected. The values are
provided to allow potential users of these test methods to
assess, in general terms, their usefulness for a proposed
application.
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. FACTORS AFFECTING TENSION TEST RESULTS
X1.1 The precision and bias of tension test strength and
ductility measurements depend on strict adherence to the stated
test procedure and are influenced by instrumental and material
factors, specimen preparation, and measurement/testing errors.
X1.2 The consistency of agreement for repeated tests of the
same material is dependent on the homogeneity of the material,
and the repeatability of specimen preparation, test conditions,
and measurements of the tension test parameters.
X1.3 Instrumental factors that can affect test results in-
clude: the stiffness, damping capacity, natural frequency, and
mass of the tensile test machine, the accuracy of force
indication and the use of forces within the verified range for the
machine, rate of force application, alignment of the test
specimen with the applied force, parallelism of the grips, grip
pressure, nature of the force control used, appropriateness and
calibration of extensometers used, and so forth.
X1.4 Material factors that can affect test results include:
homogeneity of the test material, sampling scheme, and
specimen preparation (surface finish, dimensional accuracy,
fillets at the ends of the gage length, taper in the gage length,
bent specimens, thread quality, and so forth).
X1.4.1 Test results for specimens with as-cast, as-rolled,
as-forged, or other non-machined surface conditions can be
affected by the nature of the surface (see Note 8).
X1.4.2 Test specimens taken from appendages to the part or
component, such as prolongs or risers, or from separately
produced castings (for example, keel blocks) may produce test
results that are not representative of the part or component.
X1.4.3 Test specimen dimensions can influence test results.
For cylindrical or rectangular specimens, changing the test
specimen size generally has negligible effect on the yield and
tensile strength but may influence elongation. Comparison of
elongation values determined using different specimens require
that the following ratio be controlled:
Lo/~Ao!1/2 (X1.1)
where:
Lo = original gage length of specimen, and
Ao = original cross-sectional area of specimen.
13
11.2 Bias—The procedures in Test Methods B 557 for
measuring tensile properties have no bias because these prop-
erties can be defined only in terms of a test method.
12. Keywords
12.1 elongation; strain; stress; tensile strength; tensile test-
ing; yield strength
X1.4.3.1 Specimens with smaller Lo/(Ao)1/2 ratios generally
give greater elongation values. This is the case for example,
when the width or thickness of a rectangular tensile test
specimen is increased.
X1.4.3.2 Holding the Lo/(Ao)1/2 ratio constant minimizes,
but does not necessarily eliminate differences. Depending on
material and test conditions, increasing the size of the propor-
tional specimen of Fig. 9 may be found to increase or decrease
elongation values somewhat.
X1.4.4 Use of a taper in the gage length, up to the allowed
1 % limit, can result in lower elongation values. Reductions of
as much as 15 % have been reported for a 1 % taper.
X1.4.5 Changes in the strain rate can effect the yield
strength, tensile strength, and elongation values, especially for
materials which are highly strain-rate sensitive. In general,
yield strength and tensile strength will increase with increasing
strain rate, although the effect on tensile strength is generally
less pronounced. Elongation values generally decrease as the
strain rate increases. Aluminum alloys at room temperature are
not highly strain-rate sensitive: some exhibit a slightly higher
yield strength with increasing strain rate while others show the
opposite effect.
X1.4.6 Brittle materials require careful specimen prepara-
tion, high-quality surface finishes, large fillets at the ends of the
gage length, oversize threaded grip sections, and cannot
tolerate punch or scribe marks as gage length indicators.
X1.4.7 Flattening of tubular products to permit testing does
alter the material properties, generally nonuniformly, in the
flattened region which may affect test results.
X1.5 Measurement errors that can affect test results in-
clude: verification of the test force, extensometers, microme-
ters, dividers, and other measurement devices, alignment and
zeroing of chart recording devices, and so forth.
X1.5.1 Measurement of the dimensions of as-cast, as-rolled,
as-forged, and other test specimens with non-machined sur-
faces may be imprecise due to the irregularity of the surface
flatness.
X1.5.2 If any portion of the fracture occurs outside of the
middle of the gage length, or in a punch or scribe mark within
the gage length, the elongation may not be representative of the
 B 557 – 02a
material. Wire specimens that break at or within the grips may
not produce test results representative of the material.
X1.6 Because standard reference materials with certified
tensile property values are not available, it is not possible to
rigorously define the bias of tension tests. However, by the use
of carefully designed and controlled interlaboratory studies, a
reasonable definition of the precision of tension test results can
be obtained.
X1.6.1 An interlaboratory test program5 was conducted
where six specimens each, of six different materials were
prepared and tested by each of six different laboratories. Tables
X1.1-X1.3 present the precision statistics, as defined in Prac-
tice E 691, for: tensile strength, 0.2 % yield strength, and %
elongation in 4D. In each table, the first column lists the six
materials tested, the second column lists the average of the
average results obtained by the laboratories (X), the third and
fifth columns list the repeatability standard deviation (sr) and
reproducibility standard deviation (sR), the fourth and sixth
columns list the coefficients of variation for these standard
deviations (sr/X and sR/X as a percent), and the seventh and
eighth columns list the 95 % repeatability limit (r) and repro-
ducibility limit (R).
X1.6.2 The averages (below columns four and six in each
table) of the coefficients of variation permit a relative compari-
son of the repeatability (within-laboratory precision) and
reproducibility (between-laboratory precision) of the tension
test parameters. This shows that the ductility measurement
exhibits less repeatability and reproducibility than the strength
measurements. The overall ranking from the least to the most
repeatable and reproducible is: % elongation in 4D, 0.2 %
offset yield strength, and tensile strength. Note that the
rankings are in the same order for the repeatability and
reproducibility average coefficients of variation and that the
reproducibility (between-laboratory precision) is poorer than
the repeatability (within-laboratory precision), as would be
expected.
X1.6.3 No comments about bias can be made for the
interlaboratory study due to the lack of certified test results for
these specimens. However, examination of the test results
showed that one laboratory consistently exhibited higher than
average strength values and lower than average ductility values
for most of the specimens. One other laboratory had consis-
tently lower than average tensile strength results for all
specimens.

TABLE X1.1 Precision Statistics—Tensile Strength, ksi

Material X sr sr/X, % sR sR/X, % r R
EC-H19 25.66 0.63 2.45 0.63 2.45 1.76 1.76
2024-T351 71.26 0.88 1.24 0.96 1.34 2.47 2.68
ASTM A105 86.57 0.60 0.69 1.27 1.47 1.68 3.55
AISI 316 100.75 0.39 0.39 1.22 1.21 1.09 3.39
Inconel 600 99.48 0.42 0.43 0.72 0.72 1.19 2.02
SAE 51410 181.73 0.46 0.25 1.14 0.63 1.29 3.20
Averages: 0.91 1.30

14
 B 557 – 02a
TABLE X1.2 Precision Statistics—0.2 % Yield Strength, ksi
Material X sr sr/X, % sR sR/X, % r R
EC-H19 22.98 0.47 2.06 0.48 2.07 1.33 1.33
2024-T351 52.64 0.74 1.41 0.79 1.49 2.08 2.20
ASTM A105 58.36 0.83 1.42 1.44 2.47 2.31 4.03
AISI 316 69.78 0.95 1.36 2.83 4.06 2.63 7.93
Inconel 600 38.91 0.36 0.93 0.85 2.17 1.01 2.37
SAE 51410 140.33 1.29 0.92 2.30 1.64 3.60 6.45
Averages: 1.35 2.32

TABLE X1.3 Precision Statistics—% Elongation in 4D

Material X sr sr/X, % sR sR/X, % r R
EC-H19 17.42 0.64 3.69 0.92 5.30 1.80 2.59
2024-T351 19.76 0.58 2.94 1.58 7.99 1.65 4.43
ASTM A105 29.10 0.76 2.62 0.98 3.38 2.13 2.76
AISI 316 40.07 1.10 2.75 2.14 5.35 3.09 6.00
Inconel 600 44.28 0.66 1.50 1.54 3.48 1.86 4.31
SAE 51410 14.48 0.48 3.29 0.99 6.83 1.34 2.77
Averages: 2.80 5.39

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

This section identifies the principal changes to this standard that have been incorporated since the last issue.

(1) References to several casting specifications were

removed from paragraph 6.3.2 and Referenced Documents.

15
 B 557 – 02a

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

16
 Designation: B 558 – 79 (Reapproved 2003)
Standard Practice for
Preparation of Nickel Alloys for Electroplating1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 558; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This practice is intended to serve as a guide for
producing adherent electrodeposits of nickel on nickel alloys.
Only those methods that are well known and generally prac-
ticed are included. Methods that have been used successfully
but not on a broad scale are not included. Once nickel is
applied, other metals may be electroplated on the product.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Cleaning
2.1 The following cleaning treatments may be used. The
choice of the procedure will be governed largely by the
condition of the surface.
2.1.1 Degreasing is used to remove the bulk of grease, oil,
and finishing compounds that may be present on the surface.
The cleaning may be vapor degreasing, solvent wash, emulsion
cleaning, or soak cleaning.
2.1.2 Electrolytic Alkaline Cleaning—Removal of final
traces of dirt, grease, and oil is accomplished best with
electrolytic alkaline cleaning. The solution may be either a
proprietary cleaner or a formulated one.
3. Activation
3.1 The procedure used for activating the nickel alloy
surface usually determines the soundness of the adhesion. The
choice of treatment is governed by the condition of the surface
and the type of alloy. A mild etching treatment should be used
on polished surfaces if a highly finished surface is required.
Too mild a treatment may result in a sacrifice of maximum
adhesion.
3.2 Anodic-Cathodic Sulfuric Acid—A 25 mass % sulfuric
acid solution, containing 166 mL of concentrated, 93 mass %
sulfuric acid (density 1.83 g/mL) diluted to 1 L is used for this
etching treatment in which the alloy is first etched anodically at
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on Metallic
and Inorganic Coatings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B08.02 on
Pre Treatment.
Current edition approved Feb. 10, 2003. Published May 2003. Originally
approved in 1972. Last previous edition approved in 1997 as B 558 – 79 (1997).
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
a low-current density of 2 A/dm2 for 10 min and then made
passive at 20 A/dm2 for 2 min and finally cathodic for 2 or 3 s
at 20 A/dm2. (Warning—Slowly add the sulfuric acid with
rapid stirring to the approximate amount of water required.)
When the initial mixture cools, dilute to exact volume. The
temperature of the solution should be in the range from 20 to
25°C (70 to 80°F). Chemical lead may be used for the
electrodes. Rinsing should be used before electroplating.
NOTE 1—This activation is not suitable for barrel operation.
3.3 Acid-Nickel Chloride Treatment—This procedure uses
an anodic treatment followed by a cathodic treatment in a
low-pH nickel chloride solution. The composition of the
solution is 240 g/L of nickel chloride (NiCl2·6H2O) and 31 mL
of concentrated 31.45 mass % hydrochloric acid (density 1.16
g/mL). The normal procedure is to make the alloy anodic for 2
min at 3 A/dm2 and then cathodic for 6 min at the same current
density. The temperature of the solution should be in the range
from 20 to 25°C. Nickel may be used for the electrodes.
Separate tanks are recommended for the anodic and cathodic
steps to avoid contamination of solution but a single tank may
be used. Rinsing should be used before electroplating except
where indicated in Table X1.1.
NOTE 2—Nickel anode materials containing greater than 0.01 % sulfur
are not recommended for use in acid nickel strike baths operating at pH
0.5, or lower, to avoid oxidation of sulfides by hydrochloric acid.
3.4 Anodic Etching in a Low pH Watts Bath—The compo-
sition of the low pH Watts Bath is 360 g/L of nickel sulfate
(NiSO4·7H2O), 45 g/L of nickel chloride (NiCl2·6H2O), and
37.5 g/L of boric acid (H3BO3). This procedure uses an anodic
treatment in a low-pH (2.0) bath for 10 min at 2 A/dm2. The
current is then reversed and the nickel is electroplated under
normal conditions. Electrolytic nickel may be used as the
opposing electrode material. No rinsing is needed if the alloy is
transferred to a chloride-containing electroplating bath.
3.5 Hydrofluoric Acid Etch—This procedure consists of a
10-s dip in a solution containing 500 mL of 47 mass %
hydrofluoric acid diluted to 1 L at room temperature. Rinsing
should precede electroplating.
4. Alloys
4.1 Recommended activating treatments for specific nickel
alloys are listed in the Appendix, Table X1.1.
 B 558 – 79 (2003)

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. RECOMMENDED ACTIVATION TREATMENTS FOR NICKEL ALLOYS

TABLE X1.1 Activation Treatments for Nickel Alloys

Alloy Activation Comment
Permanickel 300 3.2 ...
Duranickel 301 3.2 ...
Incoloy 801 3.3 no rinsing before electroplating
Incoloy 901 3.5 ...
Inconel 600 3.3 ...
Inconel 722 3.3 anodic step only 15 s
Inconel 750 3.3 ...
Invar Regular 3.2 3 min after onset of passivity
Invar 36 3.3 ...
42 % nickel-iron 3.2 3 min after onset of passivity
46 to 50 % nickel-iron 3.2 3 min after onset of passivity
Monel 400 3.2 5 min after onset of passivity
Monel K-500 3.2 5 min after onset of passivity
Monel R-405 3.2 5 min after onset of passivity
Monel 501 3.2 5 min after onset of passivity
Nickel 205 3.4 ...
Nickel 211 3.4 ...
Nimonic 75 3.3 ...
Nimonic 80A 3.3 ...
Ni-Span C902 3.2 ...
Ni-Resist Type 1 3.2 ...
Ni-Resist Type 2–5 3.2 ...

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 559 – 93 (Reapproved 2002)e1
Standard Specification for
Nickel-Coated, Copper-Clad Steel Wire for Electronic
Application1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 559; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
e1 NOTE—A cautionary note was moved into the section text editorially October 2002.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers nickel-coated, round, copper-
clad steel wire for electronic application.
1.2 Nickel coatings in mass percentages of the total mass of
the coated wire are as follows: 2, 4, 7, 10, and 27 %.
Nickel-coated wire having different minimum mass percent-
ages of nickel may be obtained by mutual agreement between
the manufacturer and the purchaser. For information purposes,
the thickness of coating in microinches provided by the
percentages listed above is shown in Table 1.
1.3 Four classes of nickel-coated, copper-clad steel wire are
covered as follows:
1.3.1 Class N30HS—Nominal 30 % conductivity, hard
drawn.
1.3.2 Class N30A—Nominal 30 % conductivity, annealed.
1.3.3 Class N40HS—Nominal 40 % conductivity, hard
drawn.
1.3.4 Class N40A—Nominal 40 % conductivity, annealed.
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only, except for resistivity, where the SI units are
to be regarded as the standard.
1.5 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
test method described in this specification. This standard does
not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any,
associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
standard to establish appropriate safety and health practices
and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior
to use. (Warning—Consideration should be given to toxicity
and flammability when selecting solvent cleaners.)
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B01 on
Electrical Conductors and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B01.06 on
Composite Conductors.
Current edition approved July 15, 1993. Published September 1993. Originally
published as B 559 – 72. Last previous edition B 559 – 88e1.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 193 Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor
Materials2
B 258 Specification for Standard Nominal Diameters and
Cross-Sectional Areas of AWG Sizes of Solid Round Wires
Used as Electrical Conductors2
B 452 Specification for Copper-Clad Steel Wire for Elec-
tronic Application2
E 75 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper-Nickel
and Copper-Nickel-Zinc Alloys3
2.3 American Chemical Society:
Standard Reagents Tests4
2.4 NIST Standard:
NBS Handbook 100—Copper Wire Tables5
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 lot—any amount of wire of one class and size pre-
sented for acceptance at one time, such amount, however, not
to exceed 10 000 lb (4500 kg) (Note 1).
NOTE 1—A lot should comprise material taken from a product regularly
meeting the requirements of this specification. Inspection of individual
lots of less than 500 lb (230 kg) of wire cannot be justified economically.
For small lots of 500 lb (230 kg) or less, the purchaser may agree to the
manufacturers’ regular inspection of the product as a whole as evidence of
acceptability of such small lots.
3.1.2 sample—a quantity of production units (coils, reels,
etc.) selected at random from the lot for the purpose of
determining conformance of the lot to the requirements of this
specification.
3.1.3 specimen—a length of wire removed for test purposes
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06.
4
Reagent Chemicals, American Chemical Society Specifications, American
Chemical Society, Washington, DC. For suggestions on the testing of reagents not
listed by the American Chemical Society, see Analar Standards for Laboratory
Chemicals, BDH Ltd., Poole, Dorset, U.K., and the United States Pharmacopeia
and National Formulary, U.S. Pharmaceutical Convention, Inc. (USPC), Rockville,
MD.
5
Available from National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), 100
Bureau Dr., Stop 3460, Gaithersburg, MD 20899-3460.
 B 559 – 93 (2002)e1
TABLE 1 Nickel Mass Percent and Thickness of Coating
Thickness of Nickel,µ in.
Diameter Cross-Sectional Area at 20°C
(for information only)
in. mm cmil in.2 mm2 2.0 % 4.0 % 7.0 % 10.0 % 27.0 %
0.0720 1.829 5 180 0.00407 2.63 334 637 1 181 1 703 4 892
0.0641 1.628 4 110 0.00323 2.08 298 566 1 050 1 514 4 349
0.0571 1.450 3 260 0.00256 1.65 266 505 936 1 350 3 880
0.0508 1.290 2 580 0.00203 1.31 236 450 833 1 200 3 452
0.0453 1.151 2 050 0.00161 1.04 211 401 743 1 071 3 077
0.0403 1.024 1 620 0.00128 0.823 202 357 661 953 2 738
0.0359 0.912 1 290 0.00101 0.653 167 318 589 849 2 439
0.0320 0.813 1 020 0.000804 0.519 149 283 525 757 2 174
0.0285 0.724 812 0.000638 0.412 133 252 467 686 1 937
0.0253 0.643 640 0.000503 0.324 118 224 415 598 1 719
0.0226 0.574 511 0.000401 0.259 105 200 371 535 1 536
0.0201 0.511 404 0.000317 0.205 94 178 330 475 1 366
0.0179 0.455 320 0.000252 0.162 83 158 294 423 1 216
0.0159 0.404 253 0.000199 0.128 74 141 261 376 1 080
0.0142 0.361 202 0.000158 0.102 66 126 233 336 965
0.0126 0.320 159 0.000125 0.0804 59 112 207 298 856
0.0113 0.287 128 0.000100 0.0647 53 100 185 267 768
0.0100 0.254 100 0.0000785 0.0507 47 89 164 237 680
0.0089 0.226 79.2 0.0000622 0.0401 41 80 146 211 605
0.0080 0.203 64.0 0.0000503 0.0324 ... 71 131 189 544
0.0071 0.180 50.4 0.0000396 0.0255 ... 63 116 168 482
0.0063 0.160 39.7 0.0000312 0.0201 ... 56 103 149 428
0.0056 0.142 31.4 0.0000246 0.0159 ... 50 92 132 381
0.0050 0.127 25.0 0.0000196 0.0127 ... 44 82 118 340
0.0045 0.114 20.2 0.0000159 0.0103 ... 40 74 106 306
0.0040 0.102 16.0 0.0000126 0.00811 ... ... 66 95 272
0.0035 0.089 12.2 0.00000962 0.00621 ... ... 57 83 238
0.0031 0.079 9.61 0.00000755 0.00487 ... ... 51 73 211

from any individual production unit of the sample.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information:
4.1.1 Quantity of each size.
4.1.2 Wire size (see Section 7 and Table 1).
4.1.3 Class of basis wire (see 1.3).
4.1.4 Mass percentage of nickel coating (see 1.2 and
Table 1).
4.1.5 Package size (see 14.2 and Section 14). Packaging
inspection, if required (see 9.1.3).
4.1.6 Special package marking, if required.
4.1.7 Place of inspection (see 13.1).
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 The basis material shall consist of copper-clad steel wire
conforming to the product description, quality and specifica-
tion requirements of Specification B 452.
5.2 The nickel-coated wire shall consist of the basis wire
coated with nickel (Note 2). The quality of the nickel-coated
wire shall be such that the finished product meets the properties
6.2 Resistivity—The electrical resistivity at a temperature of
20°C shall not exceed the values prescribed in Table 2. See
Note 3 for calculating electrical resistance.
NOTE 3—Relationships which may be useful in connection with the
values of electrical resistivity prescribed in this specification are shown in
Table 3. Resistivity units 1⁄58 V-mm2/m and 0.15328 V-g/m2 at 20°C are
respectively the international equivalent of volume and mass resistivity of
annealed copper equal to 100 % conductivity. The latter term means that
a copper wire 1 m in length and weighing 1 g would have a resistance of
0.15328 V. This is equivalent to a resistivity value of 875.20 V·lb/mile2,
which signifies the resistance of a copper wire 1 mile in length weighing
1 lb. The volume resistivity is equivalent, for example, to 1.7241 µV cm
of length of a copper bar 1 cm2 in cross section. A complete discussion of
this subject is contained in NBS Handbook 100. The use of five significant
figures in expressing resistivity does not imply the need for a greater
accuracy of measurement than that specified in Test Method B 193. The
use of five significant figures is required for complete reversible conver-
sion from one set of resistivity units to another.
TABLE 2 Resistivity
Resistivity, max at 20°C
Class of Wire Nickel V-mm2/m
Mass %

and requirements in this specification. N30A and N30HS 2 0.05906 (0.059062)

4 0.05951 (0.059513)
NOTE 2—Nickel on copper-clad steel wire provides a protective coating 7 0.06021 (0.060210)
for a prevention of oxidation of the copper either during fabrication or 10 0.06093 (0.060926)
27 0.06543 (0.065433)
service.
N40A and N40HS 2 0.04442 (0.044418)
6. General Requirements 4 0.04490 (0.044902)
6.1 Tensile strength and elongation of the nickel-coated 7 0.04561 (0.045614)
10 0.04636 (0.046362)
wire shall conform to the requirements of Specification B 452 27 0.05122 (0.051216)
for the applicable size and class of copper-clad steel wire.

2
 B 559 – 93 (2002)e1
TABLE 3 Equivalent Resistivity Values
Resistivity Equivalents at 20°C
Volume
Nickel
Conduc- Volume Mass
Class Mass
tivity at 20°C
% V·lb/
% IACS V·mm2/m V·cmil/ft µV·in. µV·cm V·g/m2
mile2
N40A and 2 38.814 0.044418 26.72 1.7489 4.4418 2067.2 0.36202
N40HS
4 38.379 0.044902 27.01 1.7679 4.4902 2089.7 0.36596
7 37.795 0.045614 27.44 1.7960 4.5614 2122.8 0.37176
10 37.185 0.046362 27.89 1.8254 4.6362 2157.6 0.37786
27 33.661 0.051216 30.81 2.0165 5.1216 2383.5 0.41742

N30A and 2 29.190 0.059062 35.53 2.3253 5.9062 2748.5 0.48135

N30HS
4 28.969 0.059513 35.80 2.3431 5.9513 2769.5 0.48503
7 28.633 0.060210 36.22 2.3706 6.0210 2802.0 0.49071
10 28.297 0.060926 36.65 2.3987 6.0926 2835.3 0.49654
27 26.349 0.065433 39.36 2.5762 6.5433 3045.0 0.53328

6.3 Continuity of Coating—The nickel coating shall be layer, firmly adherent to the surface of the copper. The wire
continuous. The continuity of the coating shall be determined shall be bright and free from all imperfections not consistent
on representative samples taken before stranding or insulating with good commercial practice.
and shall be determined by the sodium polysulfide test, in 8.2 The finish of the samples taken in accordance with Table
accordance with 10.2. Wire whose coating weight corresponds 4 shall conform to the requirements of 8.1. The number of units
to a thickness less than 50 µ in. (0.00005 in.) (1.3 µm) shall not in the sample showing surface defects not consistent with
be subject to this test. commercial practice shall not exceed the allowable defect
6.4 Adherence of Coating—The nickel coating shall be number c in Table 4. Failure to meet this requirement shall
firmly adhered to the surface of the copper-clad steel wire. The constitute failure to meet the finish conformance criterion.
adherence of coating on the wire shall be determined on
representative samples taken before stranding or insulating. 9. Sampling
The adherence of coating shall be determined by the wrapping, 9.1 The number of production units in a sample (Note 5)
and immersion test in accordance with 10.3. shall be as follows:
6.5 Mass of Coating—The mass of nickel coating expressed NOTE 5—Cumulative results secured on the product of a single manu-
in percent of the total mass of the wire shall be not less than the facturer, indicating continued conformance to the criteria, are necessary to
percentage specified and referred to in this specification or the ensure an over-all product meeting the requirements of this specification.
percentage as agreed on between the manufacturer and pur- The sample size and conformance criteria given for the various charac-
chaser at the time of the placing of the order. For ease of teristics are applicable only to lots produced under these conditions.
comparison, the thickness of coating for various percentages 9.1.1 For tensile strength, elongation, resistivity, mass of
has been included in Table 1. coating and adhesion and other defects, the sample shall
6.6 Joints—Necessary joints in the wire and rods prior to consist of four production units. For surface finish the sampling
final coating and drawing shall be made in accordance with shall be in accordance with Table 4. From each unit, one test
good commercial practice. specimen of sufficient length shall be removed for the perfor-
7. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations mance of required tests.
9.1.2 For dimensional measurements, the sample shall con-
7.1 The wire sizes shall be expressed as the diameter of the sist of a quantity of production units shown in Table 5 under
wire in decimal fractions of an inch to the nearest 0.0001 in. heading“ First Sample.”
(0.003 mm) (Note 4). For diameters under 0.0100 in. (0.254 9.1.3 For packaging inspection (when specified by the
mm), the wire shall not vary from the specified diameter by purchaser at the time of placing the order), the sample shall
more than + 0.0003 in. (0.009 mm) and − 0.0001 in. (0.003 consist of a quantity of production units as shown in Table 4.
mm) and for diameters of 0.0100 in. (0.254 mm) and over, the
wire shall not vary from the specified diameter by more TABLE 4 Sampling for Surface Finish and Packaging Inspection
than + 3 % and − 1 %, expressed to the nearest 0.0001 in. Allowable
(0.003 mm). Number of
Number of Units Number of
Units in
in Lot Defective
NOTE 4—The values of the wire diameters in Table 1 are given to the Sample, n
Units, c
nearest 0.0001 in. (0.003 mm) and correspond to the standard sizes given
1 to 30, incl all 0
in Specification B 258. The use of gage numbers to specify wire sizes is 31 to 50, incl 30 0
not recognized in this specification because of the possibility of confusion. 51 to 100, incl 37 0
An excellent discussion of wire gages and related subjects is contained in 101 to 200, incl 40 0
NBS Handbook 100. 201 to 300, incl 70 1
301 to 500, incl 100 2
8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance 501 to 800, incl 130 3
Over 800 155 4
8.1 The nickel coating shall consist of a smooth, continuous

3
 B 559 – 93 (2002)e1
TABLE 5 Sampling for Dimensional Measurements
First Sample Second Sample
Number of Units Allowable Number Allowable Number
in Lot Number of Units Number of Units
of Defects in n1 + n2 of Defects in Both
in Sample, n1 in Sample n2
Sample c1 Samples, c2
1 to 14, incl all 0 ... ... 0
15 to 50, incl 14 0 ... ... 0
51 to 100, incl 19 0 23 42 1
101 to 200, incl 24 0 46 70 2
201 to 400, incl 29 0 76 105 3
401 to 800, incl 33 0 112 145 4
Over 800 34 0 116 150 4

10. Test Methods
10.1 Tensile Properties—For tensile strength, elongation,
resistivity, dimensional measurement, and the quality of the
basis wire, the latest issue of Specification B 452 shall apply
and the tests shall be performed on the nickel-coated wire
(Note 6).
NOTE 6—It is known that the rate of loading during tension testing
affects the performance of the sample to a greater or lesser extent
depending upon many factors. In general, tested values of tensile strength
are increased and tested values of elongation are reduced with increase of
speed of the moving head of the testing machine. In the case of tests on
soft or annealed wire, however, the effects of speed of testing are not
pronounced. Tests of soft wire made at speeds of moving head which
under no-load conditions are not greater than 12 in./min (300 mm/min) do
not alter the final results of tensile strength and elongation determinations
to any practical extent. In the case of hard-drawn wire, these effects are
pronounced when the speed of the moving head is excessive. It is
suggested that tests be made at speeds of moving head which, under
no-load conditions, are not greater than 3 in./min (76 mm/min), but in no
case at a speed greater than that at which correct readings can be made.
10.2 Continuity of Coating:
10.2.1 Specimens:
10.2.1.1 Length of Specimens—Test specimens shall each
have a length of about 6 in. (150 mm). They shall be tagged or
marked to correspond with the coil, spool, or reel from which
they were cut.
10.2.1.2 Treatment of Specimens—The specimens shall be
thoroughly cleaned by immersion in a suitable organic solvent
such as benzene, ether, or trichloroethylene for at least 3 min,
then removed and wiped dry with a clean, soft cloth
(Warning—See 1.5). The specimen thus cleaned shall be kept
wrapped in a clean, dry cloth until tested. That part of the
specimen to be immersed in the test solution shall not be
handled. Care shall be taken to avoid abrasion by the cut ends.
10.2.2 Special Solution (sp gr 1.142)—Make concentrated
solution by dissolving sodium sulfide crystals (cp) in distilled
water until the solution is saturated at about 21°C (70°F), and
add sufficient flowers of sulfur (in excess of 250 g/L of
solution) to provide complete saturation, as shown by the
presence in the solution of an excess of sulfur after the solution
has been allowed to stand for at least 24 h. Make the test
solution by diluting a portion of the concentrated solution with
distilled water to a specific gravity of 1.142 at 15.6°C (60°F).
The sodium polysulfide test solution should have sufficient
strength to blacken thoroughly a piece of clean uncoated
copper wire in 5 s. A portion of the test solution used for testing
samples shall not be considered to be exhausted until it fails to
blacken a piece of clean copper as described above (Note 7).
NOTE 7—It is important that the polysulfide solution be of proper
composition and strength at the time of test. A solution which is not
saturated with sulfur or which has been made from decomposed sodium
sulfide crystals may give a false indication of failure. Therefore, the
requirement that the solution be treated by observing its blackening effect
on a bright copper wire is significant. Significant also is the requirement
that the solution be saturated with sulfur by allowing the solution to stand
at least 24 h after preparation. Attention is called to the necessity for the
use of sodium sulfide that has not deteriorated through exposure to air; and
if exposure has occurred, the crystals should be tested for purity. The
“Standard Reagents Tests” of the American Chemical Society are useful in
this connection.
10.2.3 Procedure—Immerse a length of at least 41⁄2 in. (114
mm) from each of the clean specimens for 30 s in the sodium
polysulfide solution (10.2.2) maintained at a temperature
between 15.6 and 21°C (60 and 70°F). After the immersion,
immediately wash the specimens in clean water and wipe dry
with a clean, soft cloth or tissue. After immersion and washing,
examine the specimens to ascertain if copper exposed through
openings in the nickel coating has been blackened by action of
the sodium polysulfide. Examine the specimen with the normal
eye against a white background. Consider the specimens to
have failed if by such blackening, exposed copper is revealed.
No attention shall be paid to blackening within 0.5 in. (13 mm)
of the cut end.
10.3 Adherence of Coating:
10.3.1 Specimens—Test specimens shall be approximately
12 in. (300 mm) in length and shall be tagged or marked to
correspond with coil, spool, or reel from which they are cut.
The specimens shall be thoroughly cleaned, if required, by
immersion in a suitable organic solvent such as benzene, ether,
or trichlorethylene for at least 3 min, then removed and dried
(Warning—See 1.5). The specimens thus cleaned shall be kept
wrapped in a clean, dry cloth until tested. That part of the
specimen to be immersed in the test solution shall not be
handled. Care shall be taken to avoid abrasion of the surface to
be subjected to test. Wire sizes 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) and smaller
may be cleaned after wrapping around the mandrel.
10.3.2 Procedure:
10.3.2.1 Wrapping—Wrap the test specimen slowly in a
suitable manner in an open helix around a wire of its own
diameter. Take care not to stretch the specimen during the
wrapping operation. The spacing of the consecutive turns shall
be approximately equal to the diameter of the wire. For wire
sizes 0.021 in. (0.53 mm) and smaller, use approximately six
helical turns for the test. For wire larger than 0.021 in., use
approximately three turns.
10.3.2.2 Immersion Test—Remove the helically wrapped

4
 B 559 – 93 (2002)e1
portion of the test specimen from the mandrel and completely
immerse it in the sodium polysulfide solution (10.2.2) for 30 s
at the temperature prescribed in 10.2.3. On removal from the
sodium polysulfide solution, rinse the specimen immediately in
clean water and remove the excess by shaking.
10.3.2.3 Examination of Specimens—Examine the outer
surface of the helically wrapped portion of the specimen under
magnification not to exceed 73 diameter. Any cracking or
flaking of the coating in this area shown by blackening of the
copper area shall be cause for rejection. A grayish appearance
of the coating after immersion shall not constitute failure.
10.4 Mass of Coating—Determine the conformance to the
mass requirement in accordance with Test Method A. In case of
disagreement, use Test Method B and the result obtained shall
be final. Test Methods A and B are given in the Annex.
10.5 Finish—Make the surface finish inspection with the
unaided eye (normal spectacles excepted).
11. Conformance Criteria (Note 5)
11.1 Any lot of wire, the samples of which comply with the
conformance criteria of this section, shall be considered as
complying with the requirements of Section 6. Individual
production units that fail to meet one or more of the following
criteria shall constitute cause for rejection of the lot. The
conformance criteria for each of the prescribed properties
given in a Section 6 are as follows:
11.1.1 The lot shall be considered conforming if the con-
formance criteria of Specification B 452 have been met for
tensile properties and the quality characteristics relative to the
basis wire.
11.1.2 Resistivity—The electrical resistivity of each of the
four specimens shall conform to the requirements of Table 2.
Failure to meet these requirements shall constitute failure to
meet the resistivity conformance criteria of 6.2.
11.1.3 Dimensions—The dimensions of the first sample
(Table 4) shall conform to the requirements of Section 7. If
there are no failures, the lot shall be considered as conforming
to these requirements. If there are failures, but the number of
these do not exceed the allowable defect number c2(Table 4)
for the respective number of units in the sample, a second
sample equal to n2 shall be taken and the total defects of the
n1 + n2 units shall not exceed the allowable defect number c2.
Failure to meet this requirement shall constitute failure to meet
the dimensional conformance criterion.
11.1.4 Continuity of Coating—The continuity of the coating
of each of the eight specimens shall conform to the require-
ments of 6.3. Failure of more than two specimens shall
constitute failure to meet the continuity criterion. If one or two
specimens fail to meet the continuity criteria, eight additional
specimens from the lot shall be tested, all of which shall
conform to the continuity criterion. However, any individual
production unit, the specimen from which failed to meet the
continuity criterion, shall be rejected.
11.1.5 Mass of Coating—The mass of coating of each of the
four specimens shall conform to the requirements of 6.5.
Failure of more than one specimen shall constitute failure to
meet the mass criterion. If only one specimen fails to meet the
mass criteria, four additional specimens from the lot shall be
tested, all of which shall conform to the mass criterion.
5
However, any individual production unit, the specimen from
which failed the mass criterion, shall be rejected.
11.1.6 Adherence of Coating—The adherence of the coating
of each of the eight specimens shall conform to the require-
ments of 6.4. Failure of more than two specimens shall
constitute failure to meet the adherence criterion. If there is
failure on not more than two specimens, eight additional
specimens from the lot shall be tested, all of which shall
conform to the adherence criterion. However, any individual
production unit, the specimen from which failed to meet the
adherence criterion, shall be rejected.
12. Density
12.1 For the purpose of calculating mass/unit length (Note
8), cross section, etc., the density of the wire shall be taken as
0.29444 lb/in.3(8.15 g/cm3) at 20°C for the material covered by
this specification.
NOTE 8—The term mass per unit length is used in the standard as being
more technically correct. It replaces the term “weights.”
13. Inspection
13.1 General—All tests and inspections shall be made at the
place of manufacture unless otherwise agreed upon between
the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of the purchase.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the
purchaser all reasonable facilities necessary to ensure that the
material is being furnished in accordance with this specifica-
tion (Note 5).
13.1.1 Unless otherwise agreed by the manufacturer and the
purchaser, conformance of the wire to the various requirements
listed in Section 6 shall be determined on samples taken from
each lot of wire presented for acceptance.
13.1.2 The manufacturer shall, if requested prior to inspec-
tion, certify that all wire in the lot was made under such
conditions that the product as a whole conforms to the
requirements of this specification as determined by regularly
made and recorded tests.
14. Packaging and Package Marking
14.1 The package size shall be agreed upon by the manu-
facturer and the purchaser in the placing of individual orders
(Note 9). The wire shall be protected against damage in
ordinary handling and shipping.
NOTE 9—Attention is called to the desirability for agreement between
the manufacturer and the purchaser on package sizes that will be
sufficiently large and yet not so heavy or bulky that the wire may likely be
damaged in handling.
14.2 Conformance to the packaging requirements specified
by the purchaser shall be determined in accordance with Table
4. The number of units in the sample showing nonconformance
to the requirements shall not exceed the allowable defect
number c in Table 4. Failure to meet this requirement shall
constitute failure to meet the packaging conformance criterion.
15. Keywords
15.1 clad steel electrical conductor; copper-clad steel elec-
trical conductor; copper-clad steel wire; electrical conductor;
nickel-coated; nickel-electrical/electronic application
 B 559 – 93 (2002)e1

ANNEX

(Mandatory Information)

A1. DETERMINATION OF THE MASS OF NICKEL ON NICKEL-COATED, COPPER-CLAD STEEL WIRE

A1.1 Test Method A—Electronic Determination a crayon, mark off the appropriate sample length from one end
(Explanatory Note A1.1) of the wire. Make this measurement as accurately as possible.
Specimens having 4-in. sample lengths should be given an
NOTE A1.1—Principle or Operation of the Electronic Thickness
Tester—The unit operates by anodically deplating a small surface area of open 180° bend half way between the crayon mark and the end
the specimen in a cell containing the test solution. The cell serves as to allow them to be submerged in the test solution without
cathode and the piece to be tested as the anode. touching the beaker.
At the start of the test and until the base metal is exposed, a voltage A1.1.3.4 Insert the wire sample into the terminal on the
characteristic of the plating exists across the cell; when all of the plating horizontal arm of the accessory unit; then tighten the terminal
has been removed from the test spot, this voltage changes sharply and so that the wire is held firmly in a vertical position. Lower the
assumes a new value which is now characteristic of the base metal. This
rapid voltage change is the “end point” of the test, and is amplified and
wire into the beaker until the liquid level is exactly at the
caused to operate a relay which turns off the instrument. The time required crayon mark. Adjust the arm so that the wire is in the
to dissolve the plating on the test spot is proportional to the thickness of approximate center of the beaker.
the deposit; by correlating the area of the test spot with the current used A1.1.3.5 Press the “Test Button” to start the test. When the
to strip the plating, the counter is made to read directly in units of test is complete, the instrument will turn off. Multiply the
thickness. counter readings by the factors corresponding to the size of the
Essentially, therefore, the electronic thickness tester embodies a minia-
wire tested as listed in Table A1.1. The result will be the
ture reverse-current plating cell in which the piece to be tested is the anode
and the cell itself is the cathode. thickness of the plating in microinches. The weight of nickel,
The test solution used is specifically designed to give 100 % anodic in percent of the total mass of the wire, may be calculated as
efficiency. It does not attack the plating unless current is flowing through follows (Note A1.2):
the test cell. The anode efficiency is further maintained by providing
agitation of the solution in the test cell. TABLE A1.1 Thickness Factors
A1.1.1 Apparatus and Reagent: Wire Size Test
Thickness,
A1.1.1.1 Electronic Thickness Tester with Accessory Unit“ Diameter, Length,
µ in.A
in. in.
WT”.6
A1.1.1.2 Solution R-54.6 0.0720 0.50 1.28
0.0641 0.50 1.44
A1.1.2 Limitations of Test Method A 0.0571 0.50 1.62
This test method is suitable for the determination of the 0.0508 0.50 1.80
thickness of coatings as follows: 0.0453 0.50 2.04
0 0403 0.50 2.32
Wire Size Diameter, Sample Length, 0.0359 0.50 2.56
in. in. 0.0320 0.50 2.86
0.0720 to 0.0240 0.50 0.0285 0.50 3.28
0.0239 to 0.0115 1.00 0.0253 0.50 3.70
0.0114 to 0.0058 2.00
0.0057 to 0.0031 4.00 0.0226 1.00 2.05
0.0201 1.00 2.30
A1.1.3 Procedure: 0.0179 1.00 2.55
A1.1.3.1 Connect the tester to 110 V, 60 Hz, ac. Insert the 0.0159 1.00 2.90
jack plug on accessory unit lead wire into the jack marked 0.0142 1.00 3.25
0.0126 1.00 3.70
“WT” on the left side of the thickness tester. Turn “Plate”
selector to setting marked “Nickel.” Turn power on and allow 0.0113 2.00 2.05
a 5-min warm-up period. 0.0100 2.00 2.30
0.0089 2.00 2.60
A1.1.3.2 Fill the stainless steel beaker to within 1⁄2 to 1⁄4 in. 0.0080 2.00 2.90
from the top with Solution R-54. Maintain temperature of 0.0071 2.00 3.25
solution at 20 to 25°C. 0.0063 2.00 3.65

A1.1.3.3 Cut a straight length of the wire to be tested, 0.0056 4.00 2.06
approximately 4 in. longer than the required sample length. 0.0050 4.00 2.32
0.0045 4.00 2.60
Lay the wire sample on a flat surface along a ruler and, using
0.0040 4.00 2.90
0.0035 4.00 3.28
0.0031 4.00 3.68
6 A
This apparatus and the reagent available from Kocour Co., 4800 S. St. Louis Values given must be multiplied by the gage reading to obtain the actual
Ave., Chicago, IL 60632 have been found suitable for this purpose. thickness.

6
 B 559 – 93 (2002)e1
Nickel, % 5 t/d 3 0.43628 3 1023 A1.1.4.3 Wire samples must be clean. If the wire is lac-
quered, remove the lacquer with a solvent before testing.
where: A1.1.4.4 Do not store test solutions in the stainless steel
t = thickness of plate µin., beaker. After daily use or after a series of tests have been
d = over-all diameter of wire, in. completed, return the test solution to a re-use storage bottle,
NOTE A1.2—The equation given for the mass of the nickel on the wire and rinse the beaker thoroughly with water and dry it. Do not
is for most purposes sufficiently accurate. However, in the case of heavy return used solutions to the original stock solution. Use a
coatings, the results obtained by the use of this equation will indicate a separate bottle for the used solution.
slightly higher percent mass than is actually present. The more correct A1.1.4.5 Test solutions may be reused. The extent to which
equation for all cases based on a density of 8.89 g/cm3 for nickel and 8.15
the solutions become exhausted depends upon the number and
g/cm3 for copper-clad steel is as follows:
size of the parts tested, as well as upon the thickness of the
Nickel, % 5 436.28/@1.3632 1 ~d/t! 1 ~t/~d– t!!# deposits which are stripped. In general, solutions may be
reused approximately eight or ten times, or until erratic results
where:
d = over-all wire diameter, in., and are obtained, before discarding.
t = thickness of plate, in. A1.1.4.6 The minimum thickness of deposit that can be
tested on a particular gage of wire is determined by multi-
A1.1.4 Precautions: plying the factor for the wire gage by 5.
A1.1.4.1 Make no adjustments at the specimen while instru-
ment is in operation. If an adjustment is necessary, stop the test A1.2 Test Method B—Gravimetric Determination
by pressing the “Stop” button, make the adjustment, and repeat A1.2.1 Procedure
the test with a new sample. The percentage of nickel shall be determined on samples
A1.1.4.2 Avoid spilling test solutions into the accessory having 50 to 150 mg nickel content in accordance with Test
unit. Methods E 75.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

7
 Designation: B 560 – 00

Standard Specification for

Modern Pewter Alloys1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 560; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements

1.1 This specification covers three alloy types, made from Composition, -wt%
Element Type 2 Sheet AlloyB
tin, antimony, and copper, used in the fabrication of pewter Type 1 Casting Type 3 Special
AlloyA Purpose Alloys
articles by casting, spinning, drawing, or forming. The metal
may be supplied in the form of bars, ingots, rolled sheet, and UNS Number L13911 L13912 L13963

circles.
Tin 90–93 90–93 95–98
1.2 Pewter alloy shall be defined as having a composition Antimony 6–8 5–7.5 1.0–3.0
within the range from 90 to 98 % tin, 1 to 8 % antimony, and Copper 0.25–2.0 1.5–3.0 1.0–2.0
0.25 to 3 % copper. Compositions are given in Table 1. Lead, max 0.05 0.05 0.05
Arsenic, max 0.05 0.05 0.05
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded Iron, max 0.015 0.015 0.015
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for Zinc, max 0.005 0.005 0.005
information only. A
Nominal Type 1 alloy composition: 92 Sn, 7.5 Sb, and 0.5 Cu.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the B
Nominal Type 2 alloy composition: 91 Sn, 7 Sb, and 2 Cu.
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- fabricators may choose compositions in the range given for
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- each type. A special-purpose alloy (Type 3), high in tin, is used
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. for articles requiring a softer metal. All types must conform to
the impurity limits shown in Table 1.
2. Referenced Documents 3.2 The following applies to all specified limits in this
2.1 ASTM Standards: standard: For purposes of determining conformance with these
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to specifications an observed value or a calculated value shall be
Determine Conformance with Specifications2 rounded “to the nearest unit” in the last right-hand place of
E 51 Method for Spectrographic Analysis of Tin Alloys by figures used in expressing the limiting value, in accordance
the Powder Technique3 with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
E 57 Method for Chemical Analysis of White Metal Bear-
4. Ordering Information
ing Alloys4
E 88 Practice for Sampling Nonferrous Metals and Alloys 4.1 Orders for material under this specification should
in Cast Form for Determination of Chemical Composition5 include the following:
4.1.1 Quantity,
3. Classification 4.1.2 Form—bars, sheet, or circles,
3.1 The hardness and workability of pewter varies with the 4.1.3 Type and composition (Table 1),
amount of antimony and copper alloyed with the tin. Casting 4.1.4 Size (sheet—thickness, width and length; circles—
alloys generally contain less copper and a slightly higher tin thickness and diameter), and
content than sheet alloys. The composition for castings (Type 4.1.5 Marking.
1) and sheet (Type 2) are shown in Table 1, but individual
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 The manufacturer shall use care to have each shipment
1
of each form as uniform in quality and composition as possible
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on and of a commercially satisfactory appearance.
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.02 on Refined Lead, Tin, Antimony, and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2000. Published November 2000. Originally
6. Chemical Composition
published as B 560-72. Last previous edition B 560-94.
2
6.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
3
Discontinued—see 1984 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06.
chemical composition specified in Table 1. Nominal composi-
4
Discontinued—see 1986 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05. tions, agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser, may be
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05. prescribed under this specification.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 560
7. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations
7.1 Sheet pewter is commercially available in thicknesses
from 0.031 to 0.064 6 0.002 in. (0.79 to 1.63 mm) (Table 2).
Thinner sheet down to a thickness of 0.010 in. (0.25 mm) can
be supplied to special order. Sheet can be supplied in widths up
to 2 ft (0.6 m) and lengths up to 4 ft (1.2 m).
7.2 Circles are available in diameters from 2 to 20 in. (50.8
to 508 mm) and in thicknesses from 0.031 to 0.064 6 0.002 in.
(Table 2).
7.3 Bars or ingots are nominally 5 lb (2.27 kg) in mass.
1000 lb (454 kg). The bars shall be selected at random,
preferably under such conditions that every piece in the lot is
accessible for selection (for example, while shipment is being
loaded or unloaded). A saw cut shall be made entirely through
the piece on its long axis and the saw chips collected. Sawings
thoroughly mixed and split into three parts shall constitute the
samples for chemical analysis (Practice E 88).
9.4 For sheet, circles, and discs, a sample shall consist of
clippings from not more than 2 % of the shipment. The
minimum mass of sample shall be 250 g.

8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance 10. Chemical Analysis

8.1 Surface defects in bars or ingots are of no importance.
Surface defects in sheet pewter or circles may be a cause for
rejection if the defects (pits or dents) cannot be removed to the
total satisfaction of the purchaser by polishing. Rejection of an
entire shipment should be made only if the surface defects are
present on a substantial percentage of the shipment.
9. Sampling
9.1 Unless otherwise agreed upon by the manufacturer and
the purchaser, heat (ladle) analyses furnished by the manufac-
turer shall be accepted as defining the composition of the
material furnished.
9.2 If samples for check analyses are desired, they shall be
so specified by the purchaser at the time of placement of the
order.
9.3 Check analyses samples shall consist of three bars or
ingots selected to represent a shipment of less than 1000 lb
(454 kg) and five bars or ingots to represent a shipment of over
10.1 In case of dispute, the chemical analysis shall be made
in accordance with Methods E 57 and E 51.
11. Rejection and Rehearing
11.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
12. Product Marking
12.1 At the option of the purchaser, the manufacturer’s
identifying mark shall be cast or stamped on each bar. The
numerical designation of the type shall be either cast on each
bar for identification or marked on the container. Sheet metal
shall be marked on the container as to type, for identification
purposes.

TABLE 2 Available Nominal Sizes and Mass of Pewter Metal Sheets

Gage 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Thickness:
in. 0.031 0.035 0.040 0.045 0.050 0.057 0.064
mm 0.79 0.89 1.02 1.14 1.27 1.45 1.63

Mass:
oz/ft2 19.0 22.0 25.0 28.1 31.3 35.9 40.6
kg/m2 5.8 6.7 7.6 8.6 9.5 10.9 12.4
Circles
Gage 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Diameter Nominal Mass
in. mm oz g oz g oz g oz g oz g oz g oz g
2 5.1 0.33 8.5 0.40 11.3 0.50 14.2 0.60 17.0 0.66 18.7 0.75 21.2 0.80 22.7
3 7.6 1.00 28.4 1.10 31.2 1.25 35.4 1.40 39.7 1.50 42.5 1.75 49.6 2.00 56.7
4 10.2 1.75 49.6 2.00 56.7 2.25 64.2 2.50 74.9 2.88 81.7 3.20 90.7 3.67 104
5 12.7 2.67 75.7 3.00 85.1 3.50 99.2 4.00 113 4.33 123 5.00 142 5.67 161
6 15.2 3.67 104 4.20 119 4.75 135 5.33 151 6.00 170 6.80 193 7.75 220
7 17.8 5.13 144 6.00 170 6.75 191 7.60 216 8.50 241 9.67 274 11.00 312
8 20.3 6.67 189 7.75 220 8.75 248 9.88 280 11.00 312 12.50 354 14.25 404
9 22.9 8.50 241 10.00 284 11.25 319 12.67 359 14.00 397 16.13 457 18.25 515
10 25.4 10.25 291 11.88 337 13.50 383 15.13 429 16.88 479 19.33 479 22.00 624
11 28.0 12.50 354 14.50 411 16.50 468 18.50 525 20.67 586 23.67 671 26.88 762
12 30.5 15.00 425 17.25 489 19.67 558 22.00 624 24.50 695 28.13 797 31.88 904
13 33.0 17.50 496 20.25 574 23.00 652 25.88 734 28.75 815 33.00 936 37.33 1068
14 35.6 20.33 576 23.50 666 26.75 758 30.00 851 33.50 950 38.33 1087 43.50 1233
15 38.1 23.33 661 27.00 766 30.75 872 34.50 978 38.50 1091 44.13 1251 50.00 1418
16 40.6 26.67 756 30.88 886 35.00 992 39.33 1115 43.75 1240 50.20 1424 56.88 1613
17 43.2 29.88 847 34.50 978 39.25 1113 44.13 1261 49.00 1389 56.30 1596 63.75 1807
18 45.7 33.67 955 39.00 1106 44.25 1255 49.75 1410 55.33 1569 63.50 1801 72.00 2041
19 48.3 37.40 1060 43.33 1228 49.25 1396 55.40 1571 61.50 1743 70.67 2003 80.00 2268
20 50.8 41.50 1177 48.00 1361 54.50 1545 61.33 1739 68.13 1931 78.25 2218 88.50 2509

2
 B 560
13. Keywords
13.1 bar; ingot; pewter; rolled sheet; tin–antimony–copper
alloys

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

X1.1 Modern pewter can be fabricated into decorative and but this is an advantage for spinning and forming. Typical
utilitarian articles. Articles made from modern pewter have a properties of an alloy containing 91 tin, 7 antimony, and 2
surface finish which very slowly tarnishes or discolors in the copper are:
atmosphere. Washing at intervals in soapy water, rinsing, and Density 0.263 lb/in.3(7.3 mg/m3)
immediately drying thoroughly removes surface grime and Liquidus 563°F (295°C)
Solidus 471°F (244°C)
renovates the appearance. Many pewter articles are designed to Casting temperature range 600–625°F (316–324°C)
dispense foods and beverages (mugs, tumblers, vegetable Hardness (HB):
As cast 23
dishes, water pitchers, etc.) and metal meeting this specifica- Cold-rolled sheet 13
tion is mandatory for these uses. Annealed sheet 18
Tensile strength, psi (MPa):
Pewter in the cast condition is harder than in any other form. Chill cast 9800 (67.6)
Rolling the cast metal alters the crystal structure and the rolled Cold-rolled sheet 7600 (52.4)
Annealed sheet 8600 (59.3)
sheet may be half as hard (see values below) as the cast metal,

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 562 – 95 (Reapproved 1999)

Standard Specification for

Refined Gold1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 562; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 4. Chemical Composition

1.1 This specification covers refined gold in cast bar form
(Note 1).
1.1.1 Grade 99.5—Gold having a minimum fineness of 995.
1.1.2 Grade 99.95— Gold having a minimum fineness of
999.5.
1.1.3 Grade 99.99— Gold having a minimum fineness of
999.9.
1.1.4 Grade 99.995— Gold having a minimum fineness of
999.95.
NOTE 1—Other forms of unfabricated gold of commerce are not to be
excluded under this specification.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications2
E 1446 Test Method for Chemical Analysis of Refined Gold
by Direct Current Plasma Emission Spectroscopy3
3. Materials and Manufacture
3.1 The metal may be produced by any process that yields a
product capable of meeting the requirements of this specifica-
tion. The purchaser, upon request, shall be informed of the
refining process used.
3.2 The bars shall be of a quality generally acceptable to the
trade.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-2 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.05 on Precious Metals.
Current edition approved Feb. 15, 1995. Published April 1995. Originally
published as B 562 – 72. Last previous edition B 562 – 86.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 03.06.
4.1 The refined gold shall conform to the chemical compo-
sition prescribed in Table 1.
NOTE 2—For purposes of determining conformance with this specifi-
cation, an observed value obtained from analysis shall be rounded to the
nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures used in expressing the
limiting value, in accordance with the rounding method of Practice E 29.
5. Sampling
5.1 On agreement between the manufacturer and the pur-
chaser, a sample may be taken from the melt before pouring
(Note 3). The sample shall be in the form of shot or pins (Note
4 and Note 5).
NOTE 3—A single melt or bar(s) cast from a single melt shall constitute
a lot for sampling.
NOTE 4—Pins of 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm) or other suitable diameter may be cast
into graphite molds or drawn into evacuated glass tubes. In some cases it
may be necessary to draw the glass tube pins through 60-grit emery paper
before acid leaching to remove adhering glass particles.
NOTE 5—In order to avoid surface contamination, the sample, irrespec-
tive of its nature, is to be leached in hot 1 + 1 HCl for 5 min, washed in
water, rinsed twice in alcohol or acetone, and dried in a muffle at 110°C
before portions are taken for analysis.
5.2 On agreement between manufacturer and purchaser an
alternative sampling procedure may be used.
5.3 The amount of sample taken shall be sufficient to supply
three portions for analysis; the mass of each portion shall be
sufficient to permit the determination of its composition as set
forth in Table 1.
5.4 After mixing thoroughly, the sample shall be divided
into three parts, each placed in a package and sealed; one for
the manufacturer, one for the purchaser, and one for the
umpire.
5.5 All tools required are to be reserved exclusively for this
work.
6. Method of Analysis
6.1 Chemical composition of the materials set forth in this
specification shall be determined, in case of disagreement, in
accordance with Test Method E 1446. The selection of test
methods for the determination of elements not covered by that

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 562 – 95 (1999)
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
Composition,%
ElementA
Grade 99.5 Grade 99.95 Grade 99.99 Grade 99.995
Gold, min 99.5 ... ... ...
Gold, min (by difference) ... 99.95 99.99 99.995
Silver + copper, max ... 0.04 ... ...
Silver, max ... 0.035 0.009 0.001
Copper, max ... 0.02 0.005 0.001
Palladium, max ... 0.02 0.005 0.001
Iron, max ... 0.005 0.002 0.001
Lead, max ... 0.005 0.002 0.001
Silicon, max ... ... 0.005 0.001
Magnesium, max ... ... 0.003 0.001
Arsenic, max ... ... 0.003 ...
Bismuth, max ... ... 0.002 0.001
Tin, max ... ... 0.001 0.001
Chromium, max ... ... 0.0003 0.0003
Nickel, max ... ... 0.0003 ...
Manganese, max ... ... 0.0003 0.0003
A
By agreement between manufacturer and purchaser analyses may be required and limits established for elements not specified in this table.

test method shall be a matter of agreement between the
manufacturer and the purchaser.
6.2 Chemical composition of materials required for Grade
99.5 refined gold shall be determined by a test method similar
to the fire assay test method listed in the appendix.
7. Rejection and Rehearing
7.1 Rejection:
7.1.1 Claims to be considered shall be made to the manu-
facturer in writing within 30 days of receipt of the material at
the purchaser’s plant, and the results of tests made by the
purchaser shall accompany such claims. The manufacturer
shall be given one week from the date of receipt of the
complaint to investigate his records, and shall then agree either
to satisfy the claim or to submit samples to an umpire. No
claim shall be considered unless a portion of the original gold
bars can be shown to the representative of the manufacturer.
7.1.2 Where the gold satisfies the requirements of this
specification, it shall not be condemned for defects in the
products in which it is used.
7.2 Investigation of Claims—In a question of chemical
composition, a sample shall be drawn by representatives of
both parties in accordance with Section 5. The sample shall be
suitably separated into three parts, each of which shall be
placed in a sealed package, one for the manufacturer, one for
the purchaser, and one for an umpire, if necessary. The
manufacturer and the purchaser shall each make an analysis,
and if the results do not establish or dismiss the claim to the
satisfaction of both parties, the third sample shall be submitted
to a mutually agreeable umpire, who shall determine the
question of fact, and whose determination shall be final.
8. Settlement of Claims
8.1 The expenses of the manufacturer’s representative and
of the umpire shall be paid by the loser or divided in proportion
to the concession made in case of compromise. In the case of
rejection being established, the damages shall be limited to the
payment of transportation charges both ways by the manufac-
turer for substitution of an equivalent weight of gold conform-
ing to this specification.
9. Product Marking
9.1 The brand by which the manufacturer can be identified
shall be cast or otherwise legibly marked upon each bar. The
bar shall be marked with the fineness together with the melt
number, bar number, and weight to the nearest 0.001 troy oz
(0.03 g).
10. Keywords
10.1 gold; refined gold

2
 B 562 – 95 (1999)
APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. TEST METHOD FOR CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF REFINED GOLD BY CUPELLATION FIRE ASSAY

X1.1 Scope X1.6.5 Load a set of 15 (three rows of five) 1 in. magnesite
X1.1.1 This test method covers the cupellation analysis of cupels into the muffle furnace (no air flow) at approximately
Grade 99.5 refined gold for gold content. 1225°C and allow to dry for 30 min. Calibrate the temperature
of the furnace by noting the temperature necessary to melt pure
X1.2 Summary of Test Method gold.
X1.2.1 The weighed sample along with required silver, X1.6.6 Carefully place each lead wrapped sample in a
copper, and lead is cupelled until all base metal is absorbed and cupel, starting with the next to the front row, as follows:
only the precious metals remain. The silver is then removed by B B B B B
3A P 3B P 3C
dissolution with nitric acid. The remaining gold is dried, 2A P 2B P 2C
annealed, and weighed. Synthetic proof samples of known 1A P 1B P 1C
amounts of gold are also assayed and the sample is corrected B B B B B
for gains or losses in the proof sample.
where:
X1.3 Interferences B = blank cupel, and
P = proof.
X1.3.1 The presence of the following elemental concentra-
Close the door and wait 2 to 3 min until all samples become
tions will lead to erroneous results.
molten. Open the draft and adjust after 1 min for sufficient draft
Element Max. %
Nickel, Iron, Tin 2.0
(fumes visibly rising off cupels and flowing back to vent in rear
Tungsten 0.5 of furnace).
Paladium, Platinum 0.01 X1.6.7 After 8 to 10 min the samples will appear silvery but
Iridium, Rhodium, Ruthenium, Osmium 0.01
not solidified. At this point remove the cupels from the furnace
X1.4 Apparatus one at a time and place in front of the furnace door, where the
X1.4.1 Muffle furnace, capable of maintaining 1250°C and samples will immediately solidify and blink.
having adjustable air flow control. X1.6.8 Once cooled, remove beads from cupels with flat
X1.4.2 Analytical balance, capable of weighing 60.002 pliers and place in dimpled porcelain trays.
mg. X1.6.9 Clean beads by squeezing bead with flat plier and
X1.4.3 Rolling mill. brushing away adhering bone ash.
X1.4.4 Platinum basket. X1.6.10 Flatten beads with one middle blow and several
end blows. Roll beads to about 0.040 in. by passing twice
X1.5 Reagents and Materials through hand roller, and anneal at 1550°F (843.3°C) for 7 min.
X1.5.1 Nitric acid, 22° Baumé, 1.169 6 0.01 specific X1.6.11 Roll beads to a thickness of 0.015 in. by passing
gravity by hydrometer. twice through hand roller, and anneal again at 1550°F
X1.5.2 Nitric acid, 32° Baumé, 1.285 6 0.01 specific (843.3°C) for 7 min. Finally roll beads to 0.012 in., and anneal
gravity by hydrometer. one final time at 1550°F (843.3°C) for 7 min. The edges of the
X1.5.3 Lead foil. rolled bead must be smooth and have no roughness. It is
X1.5.4 Silver wire, 99.99 % (<0.001 ppt Au) important that all fillets of each row are the same size and
X1.5.5 Copper disks, 25 mg thickness.
X1.5.6 Proof gold wire, 99.999 % X1.6.12 Coil fillets into “coronets” or spirals using thin-
nose pliers or rolling tool.
X1.6 Procedure X1.6.13 Place coronets in a platinum basket in a definite
X1.6.1 Sample Preparation—Wire brush chill pin samples pattern so as not to mix each coronet.
to remove glass particles from surface, then cut and roll. After X1.6.14 Place the basket in 22° Baumé nitric acid at 105°C
rolling, inspect the sample for inclusions or other signs of (boil gently) for 45 min, for full basket.
segregation. Drillings and grain samples are as is. X1.6.15 Remove the basket, rinse with hot deionized water
X1.6.2 Weigh samples in triplicate at 0.50____ g and place and place in 32° Baumé nitric acid at 110°C (boil gently) for 45
in 2.5-g lead cornucopias, along with 1.25 g of fine silver and min, for full basket.
1/2 disk of copper. X1.6.16 Rinse the basket first in hot deionized water, then a
X1.6.3 Prepare two proofs per sample. Weigh fine gold at hot 5 % ammonium hydroxide solution rinse, and three more
0.4975 6 0.00050 g. Add silver at 1.25 g, along with 1/2 disk hot deionized water rinses.
of copper. X1.6.17 Place the basket (still containing coronets) on the
X1.6.4 Close lead cornucopias and compress with pliers hot plate and dry.
into spheres to fit cupels. Place in numbered tray compart- X1.6.18 Place the basket in an annealing furnace at 1550°F
ments. (843.3°C) for 7 min.

3
 B 562 – 95 (1999)
X1.6.19 Cool gold coronets and weigh. A = Final gold weight, g,
B = Average of two proof factors, and
X1.7 Calculation
Initial proof gold weight, g
X1.7.1 Gold Concentration: Proof factor 5 Final proof gold weight, g
A 3 B 3 1000
Gold concentration in parts per thousand 5 C

where: C = Initial sample weight, g.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 561 – 94 (Reapproved 1999)e1

Standard Specification for

Refined Platinum1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 561; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

e1 NOTE—UNS number was added in June 1999.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements

1.1 This specification covers refined platinum as sponge, Composition, %

ElementA
cast bar, and wrought forms (Note 1) in two grades as follows: Grade 99.95 Grade
(UNS PO4995) 99.99
1.1.1 Grade 99.95 (UNS PO4995)— Platinum having a
purity of 99.95 %, min, and Platinum, min (by difference) 99.95 99.99
Rhodium, max 0.03 0.005
1.1.2 Grade 99.99— Platinum having a purity of 99.99 % Palladium, max 0.02 0.005
min. Ruthenium, max 0.01 0.002
Iridium, max 0.015 0.005
NOTE 1—Other forms of unfabricated platinum of commerce are not to Gold, max 0.01 0.005
be excluded under this specification. Silver, max 0.005 0.003
NOTE 2—For the purposes of determining conformance with this Lead, max 0.005 0.001
Tin, max 0.005 0.002
specification, an observed value obtained from analysis shall be rounded
Zinc, max 0.005 0.002
to the nearest unit in the last right hand place of figures used in expressing Iron, max 0.01 0.005
the limiting value, in accordance with the rounding off method of Practice Manganese, max 0.005 0.001
E 29. Copper, max 0.01 0.004
Silicon, max 0.01 0.005
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded Calcium, max 0.005 0.003
as the standard. SI units are provided for information only. Magnesium, max 0.005 0.003
Aluminum, max 0.005 0.004
2. Referenced Documents Nickel, max 0.005 0.001
Chromium, max 0.005 0.001
2.1 ASTM Standards: Antimony, max 0.005 0.002
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Arsenic, max 0.005 0.002
Bismuth, max 0.005 0.002
Determine Conformance with Specifications2 Tellurium, max 0.005 0.004
Cadmium, max 0.005 ...
3. Materials and Manufacture Molybdenum, max 0.01 0.004
A
3.1 The metal may be produced by any refining process that By agreement between the manufacturer and purchaser, analyses may be
required and limits established for elements or compounds, including ignition loss,
yields a product capable of meeting the chemical requirements not specified in this table.
of this specification. The purchaser, upon request, shall be
informed of the refining process used.
3.2 The surfaces of bars and wrought forms shall exhibit
5. Sampling
quality generally acceptable to the trade.
5.1 The value of this material is such that special attention
4. Chemical Composition must be paid to sampling procedures. The purchaser and
4.1 The refined platinum shall conform to the chemical manufacturer shall agree upon the sampling procedures used.
composition prescribed in Table 1. 5.2 Lot Size—Sampling lots shall consist of the following:
5.2.1 Sponge—A single refining lot, and
5.2.2 Other Forms— A single melt or primary consolida-
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-2 on tion.
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.05 on Precious Metals.
Current edition approved Feb. 15, 1994. Published April 1994. Originally
published as B 561 – 72. Last previous edition B 561 – 86.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 561
6. Methods of Analysis
6.1 Pending the development of standard ASTM methods of
chemical or spectrographic analysis, or both, the methods to be
used shall be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer
and the purchaser.
7. Rejection and Rehearing
7.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of this
specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported to
the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
supplier may make claim for rehearing.
7.1.1 If the platinum satisfies the requirements of this
specification, it shall not be rejected for defects in the products
in which it is used.
7.2 Investigation of Claims—In a question of chemical
composition, a new sample shall be drawn by representatives
of both parties in accordance with Section 5. The properly
mixed and quartered sample shall be divided into three parts,
each of which shall be placed in a sealed package, one for
manufacturer, one for the purchaser, and one for an umpire, if
necessary.
8. Product Marking
8.1 The material shall be legibly identified by mark, label,
or tag with the following information: platinum (Pt),
Grade______ , lot or melt number, and weight to the nearest
0.001 troy oz (0.03 g).
9. Keywords
9.1 platinum; refined platinum; sponge

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 563 – 01

Standard Specification for

Palladium-Silver-Copper Electrical Contact Alloy1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 563; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements

1.1 This specification covers an alloy containing palladium, Composition,

Element
weight %
silver, copper, platinum, and nickel in the form of wire, rod,
Palladium 43.0–45.0
and strip for electrical contacts. Silver 37.0–39.0
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded Copper 15.5–16.5
as the standard. The SI units given in parentheses are for Platinum 0.8–1.2
Nickel 0.8–1.2
information only. Total noble metal impurities 0.2 max
1.3 The following precautionary statement pertains to the Total base metal impurities 0.2 max
test method portion only, Section 7, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user 5. Mechanical Properties
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health 5.1 The contract or order may specify ultimate tensile
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita- strength, elongation, microhardness (Knoop or Vickers), hard-
tions prior to use. ness (Rockwell or Rockwell Superficial), or a combination of
2. Referenced Documents these mechanical properties as temper criterion. If the contract
or order does not specify a temper criterion, then the criterion
2.1 ASTM Standards:
for temper designation will be ultimate tensile strength and
B 476 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought
elongation.
Precious Metal Electrical Contact Materials 2
5.2 The material shall conform to the mechanical properties
E 8 Test Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials 3
shown in Table 2, Table 3, or Table 4.
E 384 Test Method for Microhardness of Materials 3
6. General Requirements
3. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 Specification B 476 shall apply to all materials produced
3.1 Raw materials shall be of such quality and purity that
to this specification.
the finished product will have the properties and characteristics
prescribed in this specification. 7. Test Methods
3.2 The material shall be finished by such operations (cold 7.1 Test methods are in accordance with Specification
working, heat treating, annealing, turning, grinding, pickling) B 476.
and are required to produce the prescribed properties.
4. Chemical Composition TABLE 2 Mechanical Requirements for Wire 0.003 to 0.020 in.
(0.13 to 0.51 mm) Diameter A
4.1 Material produced under this specification shall meet the
Temper
requirements of chemical composition shown in Table 1. Age
Property Units Solution Stress Hardened
Annealed Relieved
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on Tensile strength ksi 100–120 135–165 160–210
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee MPa 689–827 930–1137 1034–1344
B02.05 on Precious Metals. Elongation percent 20 min 8 min 1–10
Current edition approved May 10, 2001. Published June 2001. Originally Hardness, Knoop HK100 B 170–250 260–330 320–380
published as B 563 – 72. Last previous edition B 563 – 95. Hardness, Vickers HV100 B 170–240 240–330 290–370
2 A
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.04. See 7.1.
3 B
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01. See 7.3.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 563
TABLE 3 Mechanical Requirements for Wire Over 0.020 to 0.060 7.3 Hardness is in accordance with Test Method E 384. Test
in. (0.51 to 1.52 mm) Diameter A material 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) in thickness (diameter) and larger
Temper using a 100 g indenter load. Test material less than 0.005 in. in
Property Units Solution Age thickness (diameter) using a 50 g indenter load. Make a
Annealed Hardened minimum of five hardness indentations on each specimen.
Tensile strength ksi 100–120 160–210 Make all indentations so that the long axis of the Knoop
MPa 689–827 1000–1310
Elongation percent 15 min 1–10 indenter is parallel to the rolling or drawing direction of the
Hardness, Knoop HK100 B 170–250 340–400 material.
Hardness, Vickers HV100 B 170–240 310–390 7.4 Perform chemical analysis by spectrochemical or wet
A
B
See 7.1. analysis methods.
See 7.3.
7.5 Conduct all tests at room temperature (65 to 85°F), (18
to 29°C).
TABLE 4 Mechanical Requirements for Strip 0.003 to 0.015 in.
(0.076 to 0.38 mm) Thick A
8. Inspection and Testing
Temper
Property Units
Age 8.1 Material furnished under this specification shall be
Solution Stress Hardened
Annealed Relieved inspected and tested by the manufacturer as follows:
Tensile strength ksi 100–120 140–170 150–195
8.1.1 Visual inspection at 103 magnification,
MPa 689–827 965–1171 1034–1344 8.1.2 Tension or hardness tests, or both, for temper verifi-
Elongation percent 15 min 8 min 1–13 cation,
Hardness, Knoop HK100 B 170–250 260–330 320–380
Hardness, Vickers HV100 B 170–240 250–320 290–370
8.1.3 Dimensional inspection, and
A
See 7.1.
8.1.4 Chemical analysis when indicated by the purchase
B
See 7.3. order.

7.2 All tension tests are in accordance with Methods E 8 and 9. Keywords
tensile specimens are full cross-section size when practical. 9.1 contacts; electrical contacts; palladium alloy; palladium-
Elongation measurements should be based on a 2 in. (50 mm) silver-copper; low contact resistance; low energy contact; non
gage length. arcing contact

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. REFERENCE PROPERTIES FOR PALLADIUM ELECTRICAL CONTACT MATERIAL

X1.1 Table X1.1 contains a list of typical property values contact design and application.
which are useful for engineering calculations in electrical

2
 B 563
TABLE X1.1 Physical Properties
Solution Annealed A Stress Relieved A Age Hardened
Resistivity:
V·cmil/ft 185 180 155
µV·cm 30.7 29.9 25.8
Density, g/cm 3 10.8 10.8 10.8
Solidus temperature, °C 1032 1032 1032
Linear coefficient of thermal expansion,° C (23 to 100°C) 13.5 3 10 − 6 13.5 3 10 − 6 13.5 3 10 − 6
Thermal emf versus platinum (0–100°C), µV/°C −18 ... −23
Softening voltage, mV ... ... 200
Melting voltage, mV ... ... 390
Fatigue strength (rotating-bending) at 10° stress reversals:
ksi 45
MPa 310
Modulus of elasticity in tension:
ksi 16 3 10 3 16 3 10 3 16 3 10 3
MPa 110 3 10 3 110 3 10 3 110 3 10 3
A
Material in the solution-annealed and stress-relieved tempers may be age hardened by subjecting it to an elevated temperature for a specified period of time.
Temperatures ranging from 800 to 1000°F (430 to 540°C) at times from 10 to 45 min (the lower temperatures require the longer times) are ordinarily useful. When age
hardening is to be done by other than the material manufacturer, the manufacturer should be consulted for the time-temperature treatment most suitable for the purchaser’s
application.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 564 – 04

Standard Specification for

Nickel Alloy Forgings1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 564; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope* Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-

1.1 This specification2 covers forgings of nickel alloy UNS vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
N02200, Ni-Cu alloy UNS N04400, Ni-Cr-Fe alloys UNS health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
N06600, UNS N06603, and UNS N06690, Ni-Cr-Mo-Nb alloy limitations prior to use.
UNS N06625, Ni-Cr-Mo-Si alloy UNS N06219, low-carbon 2. Referenced Documents
Ni-Mo-Cr alloys UNS N10276 and UNS N06022, Ni-Cr-
Mo-W alloy UNS N06110, low-carbon Ni-Cr-Mo-W alloy 2.1 ASTM Standards: 3
UNS N06686, Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu alloy UNS N08825, Fe-Ni-Cr- B 880 Specification for General Requirements for Chemical
Mo-N alloy UNS N08367, low-carbon Ni-Cr-Mo alloys UNS Check Analysis Limits for Nickel, Nickel Alloys and
N06035, UNS N06058, and UNS N06059, low carbon Ni-Cr- Cobalt Alloys
Mo-Cu alloy UNS N06200, Ni-Mo-Cr-Fe alloy UNS N10242, E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
Ni-Mo alloys UNS N10665 and UNS N10675, low-carbon E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu alloy UNS N08031, Ni-Cr-W-Mo alloy UNS Determine Conformance with Specifications
N06230, Ni-Cr-Co-Mo alloy UNS N06617, Ni-Co-Cr-Si alloy E 76 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel-Copper
UNS N12160, Ni-Fe-Cr alloys, Ni-Mo alloy UNS N10629, Alloys4
Ni-Cr-Fe-Al alloy UNS N06025, Ni-Cr-Fe-Si alloy UNS E 112 Test Methods for Determining the Average Grain
N06045, Low-Carbon Ni-Mo-Cr-Ta alloy UNS N06210, Ni- Size
Mo-Cr-Fe alloy UNS N10624, and low-carbon Cr-Ni-Fe-N E 350 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Carbon Steel,
alloy UNS R20033*. Low-Alloy Steel, Silicon Electrical Steel, Ingot Iron, and
1.1.1 The nickel-iron-chromium alloys are UNS N08120, Wrought Iron
UNS N08800, UNS N08810, and UNS N08811. Alloy UNS E 1473 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel,
N08800 is normally employed in service temperatures up to Cobalt, and High-Temperature Alloys
and including 1100°F (593°C). Alloys UNS N08810, N08120, 2.2 Military Standards:5
and UNS N08811 are normally employed in service tempera- MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
tures above 1100°F where resistance to creep and rupture is MIL-STD-271 Nondestructive Testing Requirements for
required, and are annealed to develop controlled grain size for Metals
optimum properties in this temperature range. 3. Ordering Information
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for 3.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
information only. requirements that are necessary for material ordered under this
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the specification. Examples of such requirements include, but are
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the not limited to, the following:
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar 3.1.1 Alloy (Table 1).
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate 3.1.2 Condition (Table 2).
3.1.3 Quantity (mass or number of pieces).
3.1.4 Forging, sketch or drawing.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
3
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys. For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Current edition approved Feb. 1, 2004. Published February 2004. Originally contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
approved in 1972. Last previous edition approved in 2000 as B 564 – 00a. Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
2
For ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code applications see related Specifi- the ASTM website.
4
cation SB-564 in Section II of that Code. Withdrawn.
5
* New designations established in accordance with ASTM E 527 and SAE Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, DODSSP, Bldg. 4,
J1086, Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS). Section D, 700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 564 – 04
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
Composition, %
Nickel- Nickel- Nickel- Low-
Chromium- Chromium- Chromium- Carbon
Nickel- Nickel-
Nickel- Nickel-Iron Nickel-Iron- Nickel-Iron- Iron- Iron- Iron-Silicon Nickel-
Chromium- Chromium-
Copper Chromium Chromium Chromium Aluminum Aluminum Alloy UNS Molybdenum-
Element Iron Alloy Iron Alloy
Alloy UNS Alloy UNS Alloy UNS Alloy UNS Alloy UNS Alloy UNS N06045 Chromium-
UNS UNS
N04400 N08120 N08800 N08810 N06603 N06025 Tantalum
N06600 N06690
Alloy UNS
N06210
Nickel 63.0A min 72.0A min 58.0 minA 35.0–39.0 30.0–35.0 30.0–35.0 balanceA balance 45 min remainderA
Copper 28.0–34.0 0.5 max 0.5 max 0.50 max 0.75 max 0.75 max 0.5 max 0.10 max 0.3 max ...
Iron 2.5 max 6.0–10.0 7.0–11.0 remainder 39.5 minA 39.5 minA 8.0–11.0 8.0–11.0 21.0–25.0 1.0 max
Manganese 2.0 max 1.0 max 0.5 max 1.5 1.5 max 1.5 max 0.15 max 0.15 1.0 0.5 max
Carbon 0.3 max 0.15 max 0.05 max 0.02–0.10 0.10 max 0.05–0.10 0.20–0.40 0.15–0.25 0.05–0.12 0.015 max
Silicon 0.5 max 0.5 max 0.5 max 1.0 1.0 max 1.0 max 0.5 max 0.5 2.5–3.0 0.08 max
Sulfur, max 0.024 0.015 0.015 0.03 0.015 0.015 0.010 0.01 0.010 0.02
Chromium ... 14.0–17.0 27.0–31.0 23.0–27.0 19.0–23.0 19.0–23.0 24.0–26.0 24.0–26.0 26.0–29.0 18.0-20.0
Aluminum ... ... ... 0.40 max 0.15–0.60 0.15–0.60 2.4–3.0 1.8–2.4 ... ...
Titanium ... ... ... 0.20 max 0.15–0.60 0.15–0.60 0.01–0.25 0.1–0.2 ... ...
Columbium ... ... ... 0.4–0.9 ... ... ... ... ... ...
(Nb) +
tantalum
Molybdenum ... ... ... 2.50 max ... ... ... ... ... 18.0-20.0
Phosphorus ... ... ... 0.040 max ... ... 0.02 max 0.02 max 0.02 max 0.02 max
Tungsten ... ... ... 2.50 max ... ... ... ... ... ...
Cobalt, max ... ... ... 3.0 ... ... ... ... ... 1.0
Vanadium, ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.35
max
Nitrogen ... ... ... 0.15–0.30 ... ... ... ... ... ...
Boron ... ... ... 0.010 max ... ... ... ... ... ...
Lanthanum ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Aluminum + ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Titanium
Nickel + ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Molybdenum
Columbium ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
(Nb) max
Tantalum ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1.5-2.2
Zirconium, max ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.01–0.10 0.01–0.10 ... ...
Cerium ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.03–0.09 ...
Yttrium ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.01–0.15 0.05–0.12 ... ...
A
Element shall be determined arithmetically by difference.

2
 B 564 – 04
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements (continued)
Composition, %
Low-
Low- Iron-Nickel- Low- Low-
Carbon
Nickel- Nickel- Carbon Chromium- Carbon Carbon
Nickel-Iron Nickel-
Nickel-Iron- Chromium- Chromium- Nickel- Molyb- Nickel- Nickel-
Element Chromium- Molyb-
Chromium Molybdenum- Molybdenum- Molyb- denum- Chromium Chromium
Molybdenum- denum-
Alloy UNS Columbium Tungsten denum- Nitrogen Molyb- Molyb-
Copper Alloy Chro-
N08811 Alloy UNS Alloy UNS Chromium Alloy denum denum
UNS N08825 mium
N06625 N06110 Alloy UNS UNS Alloy UNS Alloy UNS
Alloy UNS
N10276 N08367 N06059 N06058
N06022
Nickel 30.0–35.0 58.0 minA 51.0 minA 38.0–46.0 remainderA remainderA 23.50–25.50 balanceA balance
Copper 0.75 max ... 0.50 max 1.5–3.0 ... ... 0.75 max 0.50 max 0.50 max
Iron 39.5 minA 5.0 max 1.0 max 22.0 minA 4.0–7.0 2.0–6.0 remainderA 1.5 max 1.5 max
Manganese 1.5 max 0.5 max 1.0 max 1.0 max 1.0 max 0.50 max 2.00 max 0.5 max 0.50 max
Carbon 0.06–0.10 0.10 max 0.15 max 0.05 max 0.010 max 0.015 max 0.030 max 0.010 max 0.010 max
Silicon 1.0 max 0.5 max 1.0 max 0.5 max 0.08 max 0.08 max 1.00 max 0.10 max 0.10 max
Sulfur, max 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.030 0.010 0.010
Chromium 19.0–23.0 20.0–23.0 28.0–33.0 19.5–23.5 14.5–16.5 20.0–22.5 20.0–22.0 22.0–24.0 20.0–23.0
Aluminum 0.15–0.60 0.4 max 1.0 max 0.2 max ... ... ... 0.1–0.4 0.40 max
Titanium 0.15–0.60 0.4 max 1.0 max 0.6–1.2 ... ... ... ... ...
Columbium ... 3.15–4.15 1.0 max ... ... ... ... ... ...
(Nb) +
tantalum
Molybdenum ... 8.0–10.0 9.0–12.0 2.5–3.5 15.0–17.0 12.5–14.5 6.00–7.00 15.0–16.5 19.0 - 21.0
Phosphorus ... 0.015 max 0.50 max ... 0.04 max 0.02 max 0.040 max 0.015 max 0.015 max
Tungsten ... ... 1.0-4.0 ... 3.0–4.5 2.5–3.5 ... ... 0.3 max
Cobalt ... ... ... ... 2.5 max 2.5 max ... 0.3 max 0.3 max
Vanadium, ... ... ... ... 0.35 0.35 ... ... ...
max
Nitrogen ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.18–0.25 ... 0.02 - 0.15
Boron ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Lanthanum ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Aluminum + 0.85–1.20 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Titanium
Nickel + ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Molybdenum
Columbium ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
(Nb), max
Tantalum ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Zirconium, ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
max
Cerium ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Yttrium ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
Element shall be determined arithmetically by difference.

3
 B 564 – 04
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements (continued)
Composition, %
Low- Low-
Low- Carbon Nickel- Carbon Nickel
Nickel
Carbon Nickel- Chromium- Nickel-Iron Chro- Nickel- Nickel-
Chromium-
Nickel- Chromium- Molyb- Chromium- mium- Molyb- Molyb-
Cobalt-
Chromium- Molyb- dnum- Molyb- Tungsten- denum denum
Element Molyb-
Molybdenum dnum- Silicon dnum- Molyb- Alloy Alloy
denum
Alloy Copper Alloy Copper denum UNS UNS
Alloy UNS
UNS Alloy UNS Alloy Alloy UNS N10629 N10665
N06617
N06035 UNS N06219 UNS N06230
N06200 N08031
Nickel remainderA remainderB balanceB 30.0–32.0 remainderA 44.5 min balance remainderA
Copper 0.30 max 1.3–1.9 0.50 max 1.0–1.4 ... 0.5 max 0.5 max ...
Iron 2.00 max 3.0 max 2.0-4.0 balanceB 3.0 max 3.0 max 1.0–6.0 2.0 max
Manganese 0.50 max 0.50 max 0.50 max 2.0 max 0.30–1.00 1.0 max 1.5 1.0 max
Carbon 0.050 max 0.010 max 0.05 max 0.015 max 0.05–0.15 0.05–0.15 0.010 max 0.02 max
Silicon 0.60 max 0.08 max 0.70-1.10 0.3 max 0.25–0.75 1.0 max 0.05 0.10 max
Sulfur, max 0.015 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.015 0.015 0.01 0.03
Chromium 32.25–34.25 22.0–24.0 18.0-22.0 26.0-28.0 20.0–24.0 20.0–24.0 0.5–1.5 1.0 max
Aluminum 0.40 max 0.50 max 0.50 max ... 0.20–0.50 0.8–1.5 0.1–0.5 ...
Titanium ... ... 0.50 max ... ... 0.6 max ... ...
Columbium ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
(Nb) +
tantalum
Molybdenum 7.60–9.00 15.0–17.0 7.0-9.0 6.0-7.0 1.0–3.0 8.0–10.0 26.0–30.0 26.0–30.0
Phosphorus 0.030 max 0.025 max 0.020 max 0.020 max 0.030 max ... 0.04 max 0.04 max
Tungsten 0.60 max ... ... ... 13.0–15.0 ... ... ...
Cobalt 1.00 max 2.0 max 1.0 max ... 5.0 max 10.0 min– 2.5 1.00 max
15.0 max
Vanadium, 0.20 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
max
Nitrogen ... ... ... 0.15-0.25 ... ... ... ...
Boron ... ... ... ... 0.015 max 0.006 max ... ...
Lanthanum ... ... ... ... 0.005–0.050 ... ... ...
Aluminum + ... ... ...
Titanium
Nickel + ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Molybdenum
Columbium ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
(Nb), max
Tantalum ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Zirconium, ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
max
Cerium ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Yttrium ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
B
Element shall be determined arithmetically by difference.

4
 B 564 – 04
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements (continued)
Composition, %
Low-
Carbon Nickel-
Nickel- Nickel-
Nickel- Nickel- Molyb-
Molyb- Cobalt- Chromium-
Molyb- Chro- Nickel denum
Element denum- Chro- Nickel-Iron-
denum mium- Alloy Chro-
Chromium- mium- Nitrogen
Alloy Molyb- UNS mium-
Iron Alloy Silicon Alloy UNS
UNS denum- N02200 Iron
UNS Alloy UNS R20033
N10675 Tungsten Alloy UNS
N10242 N12160
Alloy UNS N10624
N06686
Nickel 65.0 min remainderA remainder remainderA 99.0A min remainderA 30.0–33.0
Copper 0.20 max ... ... ... 0.25 max 0.5 max 0.30–1.20
Iron 1.0–3.0 2.0 max 5.0 max 3.5 max 0.40 max 5.0-8.0 balanceA
Manganese 3.0 max 0.80 max 0.75 max 1.5 max 0.35 max 1.0 max 2.0
Carbon 0.01 max 0.03 0.010 max 0.15 max 0.15 max 0.01 max 0.015 max
Silicon 0.10 max 0.80 max 0.08 max 2.4–3.0 0.35 max 0.10 max 0.50
Sulfur, max 0.010 0.015 0.02 0.015 0.01 0.01 max 0.01
Chromium 1.0–3.0 7.0-9.0 19.0–23.0 26.0–30.0 ... 6.0-10.0 31.0–35.0
Aluminum 0.50 max 0.50 max ... ... ... 0.5 max ...
Titanium 0.20 max ... 0.02–0.25 0.20–0.80 ... ... ...
Columbium ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
(Nb) +
tantalum
Molybdenum 27.0–32.0 24.0-26.0 15.0–17.0 1.0 max ... 21.0-25.0 0.50–2.0
Phosphorus 0.030 max 0.030 max 0.04 max 0.030 max ... 0.025 max 0.02 max
Tungsten 3.0 max ... 3.0–4.4 1.0 max ... ... ...
Cobalt 3.0 max† 1.00 max ... 27.0–33.0† ... 1.0 max ...
Vanadium, 0.20 ... ... ... ... ... ...
max
Nitrogen ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.35–0.60
Boron ... 0.006 max ... ... ... ... ...
Lanthanum ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Aluminum + ... ... ... ... ... ...
Titanium
Nickel + 94.0–98.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
Molybdenum
Columbium 0.20 ... ... 1.0 ... ... ...
(Nb), max
Tantalum 0.20 max ... ... ... ... ... ...
Zirconium, 0.10 ... ... ... ... ... ...
max
Cerium ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Yttrium ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
Element shall be determined arithmetically by difference.

5
 B 564 – 04
3.1.5 Certification— State if certification or a report of test TABLE 2 Continued
results is required (14.1). Yield Elongation
3.1.6 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—Whether Maximum Tensile
Strength, in
Section Strength,
samples for product (check) analysis should be furnished (see Material and Condition 0.2 % 2 in. or 50
Thickness, min, ksi
Offset, min, mm or 4D,
4.2). in. (mm) (MPa)
ksi (MPa) min, %
3.1.7 Purchaser Inspection—If the purchaser wishes to Over 4B 110 (758) 50 (345) 25
witness tests or inspection of material at the place of manu- (102) to
facture, the purchase order must so state indicating which tests 10 (254),
incl
or inspections are to be witnessed (12.1). Nickel-chromium- Up to 4 95 (655) 45 (310) 60
molybdenum-tungsten alloy (102), incl
4. Chemical Composition UNS N06110, annealed
Over 4 90 (621) 40 (276) 50
4.1 The material shall conform to the composition limits (102) to
specified in Table 1. 10 (254),
4.2 If a product (check) analysis is performed by the incl
Nickel-iron-chromium- ... 85 (586) 35 (241) 30
purchaser, the material shall conform to the product (check) molybdenum-copper alloy
analysis variations per Specification B 880. UNS N08825
Low carbon nickel-chrom- ... 100 (690) 41 (283) 40
5. Mechanical Properties and Other Requirements ium-molybdenum alloy
UNS N10276, annealed
5.1 Mechanical Properties—The material shall conform to Low-carbon nickel-chrom- ... 100 (690) 45 (310) 45
the mechanical properties specified in Table 2. ium-molybdenum alloy
UNS N06022
5.2 Grain Size—Annealed alloys (UNS N08810, N08120, Iron-nickel-chromium-molyb- ... 95 (655) 45 (310) 30
and UNS N08811) shall conform to an average grain size of denum-nitrogen alloy
ASTM No. 5 or coarser. UNS N08367
Low-carbon nickel-iron- ... 94 (650) 40 (276) 40
chromium-molybdenum-
6. Dimensions and Permissible Variations copper-alloy UNS N08031
6.1 Dimensions and tolerances shall be as specified on the Nickel-chromium-tungsten- ... 110 (758) 45 (310) 40
molybdenum alloy UNS
applicable forging sketch or drawing. N06230, annealedC
Nickel-chromium-cobalt- ... 95 (655) 35 (241) 35
7. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance molybdenum alloy UNS
N06617
7.1 The material shall be uniform in quality and condition, Nickel-molybdenum alloy ... 110 (760) 51 (350) 40
sound, and free of injurious imperfections. UNS N10665, annealed
Nickel-molybdenum alloy ... 110 (760) 51 (350) 40
A UNS N10675, annealed
TABLE 2 Mechanical Property Requirements Nickel-molybdenum- ... 105 (725) 45 (310) 40
chromium-iron alloy
Yield Elongation UNS N10242, annealed
Maximum Tensile
Strength, in Low-carbon nickel-chro- ... 100 (690) 45 (310) 45
Section Strength,
Material and Condition 0.2 % 2 in. or 50 mium-molybdenum-tung-
Thickness, min, ksi
Offset, min, mm or 4D, sten alloy UNS N06686
in. (mm) (MPa)
ksi (MPa) min, % Nickel-cobalt-chromium ... 90 (620) 35 (240) 40
Nickel alloy UNS N02200, ... 55 (380) 15 (105) 40 -silicon alloy UNS
annealed N12160, annealed
Nickel-copper alloy UNS ... 70 (483) 25 (172) 35 Low-carbon chromium- ... 109 (750) 55 (380) 40
N04400, annealed nickel-iron-nitrogen alloy
Nickel-chromium-iron alloy ... 80 (552) 35 (241) 30 UNS R20033
UNS N06600, annealed Nickel-molybdenum alloy ... 110 (760) 51 (350) 40
UNS N06690, annealed ... 85 (586) 35 (241) 30 UNS N10629, annealed
Low-carbon nickel-chromium Nickel-chromium- iron- Up to 4 98 (680) 39 (270) 30
molybdenum aluminum alloy UNS (102) incl.
Alloy UNS N06035 ... 85 (586) 35 (241) 30 N06025, annealed
Alloy UNS N06058 ... 110 (760) 52 (3600 40 Over 4 84 (580) 39 (270) 15
Alloy UNS N06059 ... 100 (690) 45 (310) 45 (102) to 12
Low carbon nickel-chromium ... 100 (690) 41 (283) 45 (305) incl
molybdenum-copper alloy Nickel-chromium- iron- ... 94 (650) 43 (300) 25
UNS N06200 aluminum alloy UNS
Nickel-iron-chromium alloys: N06603, annealed
Annealed (alloy UNS ... 90 (621) 40 (276) 30 Nickel-chromium-iron-silicon ... 90 (620) 35 (240) 35
N08120) alloy UNS N06045, annealed
Annealed (alloy UNS ... 75 (517) 30 (207) 30 Nickel-molybdenum- ... 104 (720) 46 (320) 40
N08800) chromium-iron
Annealed (alloys ... 65 (448) 25 (172) 30 alloy UNS N10624, annealed
UNS N08810 and Low-carbon nickel- ... 100 (690) 45 (310) 45
UNS N08811) molybdenum-chromium-
Nickel-chromium-molybenum- Up to 4 120 (827) 60 (414) 30 tantalum
columbium alloy UNS (102), incl alloy UNS N06210, annealed
N06625, annealed

6
 B 564 – 04

TABLE 2 Continued Test ASTM Designation

Chemical Analysis E 76, E 350, E 1473
Yield Elongation Tension E8
Maximum Tensile
Strength, in Rounding Procedure E 29
Section Strength,
Material and Condition 0.2 % 2 in. or 50 Grain Size E 112
Thickness, min, ksi
Offset, min, mm or 4D,
in. (mm) (MPa)
ksi (MPa) min, %
11.2 The measurement of average grain size may be carried
Nickel-chromium- ... 96 (660) 39 (270) 50
molybdenum-silicon alloy
out by the planimetric method, the comparison method, or the
UNS N06219 intercept method described in Test Methods E 112. In case of
A
Forging quality is furnished to chemical requirements and surface inspection
dispute, the“ referee” method for determining average grain
only. size shall be the planimetric method.
B
Over 4 to 10-in. (102 to 254-mm) diameter for parts machined from forged bar. 11.3 For purposes of determining compliance with the
C
Solution annealed at a minimum temperature of 2150° F (1177° C) followed by specified limits for requirements of the properties listed in the
a water quench or rapidly cooled by other means.
following table, an observed value, or a calculated value, shall
8. Sampling be rounded as indicated as follows, in accordance with the
rounding method of Practice E 29:
8.1 Lot Definition: Rounded Unit for Observed or
8.1.1 A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one heat. Test Calculated Value
Chemical composition nearest unit in the last right-hand place
8.1.2 A lot for mechanical properties and grain size testing of figures of the specified limit
shall consist of all material from the same heat, size, finish, Tensile strength, yield strength nearest 1000 psi (6.9 MPa)
Elongation nearest 1 %
condition, and processed at one time. Grain size:
8.2 Test Material Selection: 0.0024 in. (0.060 mm) or larger nearest multiple of 0.0002 in. (0.005 mm)
less than 0.0024 in. (0.060 mm) nearest multiple of 0.0001 in. (0.002 mm)
8.2.1 Chemical Analysis—Representative samples shall be
taken during pouring or subsequent processing. 12. Inspection
8.2.1.1 Product (check) analysis shall be wholly the respon- 12.1 Inspection of the material by the purchaser shall be
sibility of the purchaser. made as agreed upon between the purchaser and the seller as
8.2.2 Mechanical Properties and Grain Size—Samples of part of the purchase contract.
the material to provide test specimens for mechanical proper-
ties and grain size shall be taken from such locations in each lot 13. Rejection and Rehearing
as to be representative of that lot.
13.1 Material, tested by the purchaser, that fails to conform
9. Number of Tests to the requirements of this specification may be rejected.
Rejection should be reported to the producer or supplier
9.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per lot. promptly and in writing. In case of dissatisfaction with the
9.2 Mechanical Properties—One test per lot. results of the test, the producer or supplier may make claim for
9.3 Grain Size—For alloys N08810, N08120, and UNS a rehearing.
N08811, one test per lot.
14. Certification
10. Specimen Preparation 14.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
10.1 The tension test specimen representing each lot shall manufacturer’s certification shall be furnished to the purchaser
be taken from a forging or from a test prolongation. stating that material has been manufactured, tested, and in-
10.2 The axis of the specimen shall be located at any point spected in accordance with this specification, and that the test
midway between the center and the surface of solid forgings results on representative samples meet specification require-
and at any point midway between the inner and outer surfaces ments. When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
of the wall of hollow forgings, and shall be parallel to the report of the test results shall be furnished.
direction of greatest metal flow.
15. Product Marking
10.3 The specimens shall be the largest possible round type
shown in Test Methods E 8. 15.1 The material shall be marked legibly with the name of
the material, this specification number, the heat number and
11. Test Methods condition, and such other information as may be defined in the
contract or order.
11.1 The chemical composition, mechanical, and other
properties of the material as enumerated in this specification
16. Keywords
shall be determined, in case of disagreement, in accordance
with the following methods: 16.1 nickel alloy forgings

7
 B 564 – 04
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS

The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
inquiry, contract, or order, for agencies of the U.S. Government.

S1. Referenced Documents compensation is required for the examination. If acoustic

S 1.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date compatibility difference is between 25 % and 75 %, a change
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the in the gain or dB controls shall be accomplished to compensate
extent referenced herein. for the differences in acoustic compatibility. This method
S 1.1.1 Federal Standards: cannot be used if the ultrasonic noise level exceeds 50 % of the
Fed. Std. No. 102 Preservation, Packaging and Packing rejection value.
Levels S 5.2.2 Calibration:
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies) S 5.2.2.1 Shear Wave—The shear wave test shall be cali-
Fed. Std. No. 185 Identification Marking of Copper and brated on two notches, one notch cut into the inside and one
Copper-Base Alloy Mill Products into the outside surface. The notches shall be cut axially and
S 1.1.2 Military Standards: shall have a depth of 5 % of the material thickness of 1⁄4 in. (6.4
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage mm), whichever is less. Notch length shall not exceed 1 in.
S 1.1.3 Military Specification: (25.4 mm). Notches shall be made either in the piece to be
MIL-C-3993 Packaging of Copper examined or in a separate defect-free specimen of the same size
MIL-STD-792 Copper-Base Alloy Mill Products (within 6 1⁄8 in. (3.18 mm), shape, material, and condition, or
acoustically similar material. The position and amplitude of the
S2. Chemical Composition response from each notch shall be marked on the instrument
S 2.1 UNS alloy N04400 shall conform to the composition screen or a transparent overly, and these marks shall be used as
limits specified in Table 1 except as specified in Table S2.1 the evaluation reference. Indications that appear between these
points shall be evaluated on the basis of a straight line joining
S3 Mechanical Properties the two peak amplitudes.
S 3.1 Mechanical property requirements for UNS alloy S 5.2.2.2 Longitudinal Wave —The longitudinal wave test
N04400 forgings in the hot finished and hot finished/high shall be calibrated on a flat-bottomed reference hole of a given
tensile conditions shall be as specified in Table S3.1 diameter in accordance with Table S5.1 for specified material
thickness drilled either into the piece to be tested or into a
S4. Number of Tests separate defect-free specimen of the same size (within 6 1⁄8 in
S 4.1 One tensile specimen is required for each forging (3.18 mm), shape, material, and condition, or acoustically
greater than 250 pounds in as shipped weight. similar material. Holes are to be drilled to midsection and the
bottom of the hole shall be parallel to the entrant surface. The
S5. Nondestructive Tests ultrasonic test instrument shall be adjusted so that the response
S 5.1 When specified by the purchaser, each piece of each lot from the reference hole shall not be less than 25 % and not
shall be inspected. The purchaser shall specify if one or both more than 75 % of screen height.
tests are required. S 5.2.2.3 Recalibration—During quality conformance in-
S 5.2 Ultrasonic Tests: spection, any realignment of the search unit that will cause a
S 5.2.1 General Requirements: decrease in the calibrated sensitivity and resolution, or both, or
S 5.2.1.1 Ultrasonic testing shall be performed in accordance any change in search unit, couplant, instrument settings, or
with MIL-STD-271 as modified by the requirements specified scanning speed from that used for calibration shall require
herein. Testing shall be done by a longitudinal wave or shear recalibration. Recalibration shall be performed at least once per
wave technique as specified herein. 8-h shift.
S 5.2.1.2 Acoustic compatibility between the production S 5.2.3 Procedure—Paragraph S 5.2.3.1 through S 5.2.3.4
material and the calibration standard material shall be within describe the requirements for rod, bar, and simple forged
75 %. If the acoustic compatibility is within 25 %, no gain shapes.
S 5.2.3.1 Rod—Rod shall be testing using the longitudinal
wave technique. The scanning path shall be circumferential or
TABLE S2.1 Chemical Requirements
helical with the beam directed along a radius of the rod.
Composition Limits, %
S 5.2.3.2 Bar—Bar shall be tested using the longitudinal
Element UNS 04400 wave technique through one side of each pair of parallel sides
Carbon 0.2 max (thickness and width only).
Sulfur 0.015 max
Aluminum 0.5 max S 5.2.3.3 Ring and Hollow Round Products—Rings and
Lead 0.006 max other hollow cylindrical products shall be tested using the shear
Tin 0.006 max wave method by the contact or immersion technique. The shear
Zinc 0.02 max
Phosphorous 0.02 max wave entrant angle shall be such to ensure reflection from the
notch or notches used in calibration. For contact testing, the

8

TABLE S3.1 Mechanical Properties of UNS N04400 Forgings
Condition and Diameter Between Parallel Tensile Strength, min, psi
Surfaces, in. (mm)
Hot Finished -to 12 (305)
Hot Finished -over 12 (305)
Hot Finished/High Tensile - Rounds 3 to 6 (76 to
152) inclusive
Hot Finished/High Tensile - Rounds over 6 to 12
(152 to 305) and hex, squares, and flats 3 to 12
(76 to 305)
TABLE S5.1 Ultrasonic Testing Reference Hole for Rod, Bar,
Disc, Pancake Forgings, and Forgings
Material Thickness, in. (mm) Hole Diameter, in. (mm)
Up to and including 6 (152) ⁄ 5(3.18)
18
Over 6 (152) and including 16 (406) 1⁄4 (6.4)
Over 16 (406) As agreed upon
search unit shall be fitted with a wedge or shoe machined to fit
the curvature of the piece being inspected. The product also
shall be inspected with a longitudinal wave test from the
external circumferential and end surfaces.
S 5.2.3.4 Disc or Pancake Forgings—Disc or pancake
forgings shall be inspected with a longitudinal wave technique
from both parallel surfaces.
S 5.2.4 Acceptance Criteria:
S 5.2.4.1 Shear Wave—Any material that produces indica-
tions equal to or larger than the response from the reference
notch or higher than the straight line joining the two peak
amplitudes shall be rejected.
S 5.2.4.2 Longitudinal Wave—Any material that produces
indications equal to or larger than the response from the
reference hole, or that produces a complete loss of back
reflection shall be rejected. Material shall be tested using a
square, rectangular, or circular transducer having an effective
area of one square inch or less, but no dimension shall be
smaller than the diameter of the reference hole. In the event of
disagreement on the degree of back reflection loss, it shall be
determined by the contact method using a 1 to 1-1/8 in. (25.4
to 28.6 mm) diameter transducer or one whose area falls within
this range.
S 5.2.4.3 Reference Notch Removal—If reference notches or
flat-bottomed holes are made in the material to be tested, they
shall be so located than their subsequent removal will not
impair the suitability of the material for its intended use.
S 5.3 Liquid Penetrant Inspection:
S 5.3.1 Procedure —Liquid penetrant inspection shall be in
accordance with MIL-STD-271.
S 5.3.2 Surface Requirements—The surface produced by hot
working is not suitable for liquid penetrant testing Therefore,
liquid penetrant testing will not be applicable to products
ordered with a hot finished surface.
B 564 – 04
Yield Strength, min, psi (Mpa) Elongation in 2 in. or
(Mpa) (0.2% offset) 50 mm, or 4D, min, %
80 000 (552) 40 000 (276) 30
75 000 (517) 40 000 (276) 30
95 000 (655) 70 000 (483) 20
85 000 (586) 60 000 (414) 25
S 5.3.3 Acceptance Criteria—Linear defects revealed by
liquid penetrant inspection shall be explored by grinding or
other suitable means. Depth of defects shall not exceed the
dimensional tolerance of the material.
S6. Quality Assurance
S 6.1 Responsibility for Inspection:
S 6.1.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or pur-
chase order, the manufacturer is responsible for the perfor-
mance of all inspections and test requirements specified.
Except as otherwise specified in the contract or purchase order,
the manufacturer may use his own or any other suitable
facilities for the performance of the inspection and test
requirements unless disapproved by the purchaser at the time
the order is placed. The purchaser shall have the right to
perform any of the inspections or tests set forth when such
inspections and tests are deemed necessary to ensure that the
material conforms to prescribed requirements.
S7. Identification Marking
S 7.1 All material shall be properly marked for identification
in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 185 except that the ASTM
specification number and the alloy number shall be used. In
addition, the method and location of marking shall be in
accordance with MIL-STD-792. Forging stock shall be marked
with low stress die stamps or vibroetching.
S8. Preparation for Delivery
S 8.1 Preservation, Packaging, and Packing:
S 8.1.1 Military Agencies—The material shall be separated
by size, composition, grade, or class, and shall be preserved
and packaged level A or C, and packed Level A, B, or C as
specified in the contract or purchase order.
S 8.1.2 Civil Agencies—The requirements of Fed. Std. No.
102 shall be referenced for definitions for the various levels of
packaging protection.
S 8.2 Marking:
S 8.2.1 Military Agencies—In addition to any special mark-
ing required by the contract or purchase order, marking for
shipment shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-129.
S 8.2.2 Civil Agencies—In addition to any special marking
required by the contract or purchase order, marking for
shipment shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123.
9
 B 564 – 04
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B02 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(B 564 – 00a) that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) Added alloy N06035 to Scope. to Table 1 and Table 2, respectively.

(2) Added safety caveat to Scope. (4) Added correct alloy nomenclature to Table 1.
(3) Added alloy N06035 chemistry and mechanical properties

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

10
 Designation: B 566 – 04
Standard Specification for
Copper-Clad Aluminum Wire1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 566; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers bare round copper-clad alumi-
num wire for electrical applications.
1.2 Four classes of copper-clad aluminum wire are covered
as follows:
Class 10A—Nominal 10 volume % copper, annealed.
Class 15A—Nominal 15 volume % copper, annealed.
Class 10H—Nominal 10 volume % copper, hard-drawn.
Class 15H—Nominal 15 volume % copper, hard-drawn.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard, except for resistivity and density, where the SI
units are the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards: 2
B 193 Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor
Materials
B 258 Specification for Standard Nominal Diameters and
Cross-Sectional Areas of AWG Sizes of Solid Round Wires
Used as Electrical Conductors
2.3 National Institute of Standards and Technology:
NBS Handbook 100—Copper Wire Tables3
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 lot—a lot is any amount of wire of one class and size
presented for acceptance at one time; such amount, however,
not to exceed 100 production units.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B01 on
Electrical Conductors and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B01.06 on
Composite Conductors.
Current edition approved April 1, 2004. Published April 2004. Originally
approved in 1972. Last previous edition approved in 2002 as B 566 – 93 (2002).
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3
Available from National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), 100
Bureau Dr., Stop 3460, Gaithersburg, MD 20899-3460.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
3.1.2 sample—a quantity of production units (coils, reels,
and so forth) selected at random from the lot for the purpose of
determining conformance of the lot to the requirements of this
specification.
3.1.3 specimen—a length of wire removed for test purposes
from any individual production unit of the sample.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
the following information:
4.1.1 Quantity of each size and class;
4.1.2 Wire size, diameter in inches (see Section 7 and Table
1);
4.1.3 Class of wire (see 1.2 and Table 1);
4.1.4 Packaging and shipping (Section 14 and packaging
inspection if required, 13.1); and
4.1.5 Place of inspection (see 13.1).
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 The wire shall consist of a core of aluminum with a
continuous outer cladding of copper thoroughly bonded to the
core throughout and shall be of such quality as to meet the
requirements of this specification.
6. General Requirements
6.1 Tensile Strength and Elongation—The copper-clad alu-
minum wire shall conform to the tensile strength and elonga-
tion requirements of Table 1. For intermediate diameters not
listed in Table 1, the elongation requirements of the next
smaller size shall apply; in the case of tensile strength the
requirements of the next larger size shall apply.
6.2 Resistivity—The electrical resistivity at a temperature of
20°C shall not exceed the values prescribed in Table 2. See
Note 1 for calculating electrical resistance.
NOTE 1—Relationships which may be useful in connection with the
values of electrical resistivity prescribed in this specification are shown in
Table 3. Resistivity units are based on the International Annealed Copper
Standard (IACS) adopted by IEC in 1913, which is 1⁄58 V·mm2/m and the
value of 0.15328 V·g/m2 at 20°C are, respectively, the international
equivalent of volume and weight resistivity of annealed copper equal to
100 % conductivity. The later term means that a copper wire 1 m in length
and weighing 1 g would have a resistance of 0.15328 V. This is equivalent
to a resistivity value of 875.20 V·lb/mile2, which signifies the resistance
 B 566 – 04
TABLE 1 Tensile and Elongation Requirements for Copper-Clad 6.3 Cohesion—The copper-clad aluminum wire, when
Aluminum Wire tested in accordance with 10.4, shall be free from seams or
Elongation, min, splits. Examination of the wire shall be made at a magnification
Nominal
Tensile Strength % in 10 in.
Diameter
(or 250 mm)
not to exceed 103.
6.4 Adhesion—The copper-clad aluminum wire, when
Minimum All Maximum All
in. (mm) H Classes A Classes All H All A tested in accordance with 10.5, shall be free from cladding
Classes Classes delamination. Examination of the wire shall be made at a
ksi (MPa) ksi (MPa)
magnification not to exceed 103.
0.0349 8.252 16 110 20 138 1.5 15
0.2893 7.348 16 110 20 138 1.5 15 6.5 Joints—The finished wire shall contain no joints or
0.2576 6.543 18 124 20 138 1.5 15 splices.
0.2294 5.827 20 138 20 138 1.5 15
6.6 Copper Thickness—The minimum copper thickness,
0.2043 5.189 22 152 20 138 1.5 15 when tested in accordance with 10.6, shall be not less than the
0.1819 4.620 23 159 20 138 1.5 15 following:
0.1620 4.115 24 166 20 138 1.5 15
0.1443 3.665 25 172 20 138 1.5 15
6.6.1 Class 10A and 10H wire shall have a minimum
thickness of not less than 3.5 % of the wire radius.
0.1285 3.264 26 179 20 138 1.0 15 6.6.2 Class 15A and 15H wire shall have a minimum
0.1144 2.906 27 186 20 138 1.0 15
0.1019 2.588 28 193 20 138 1.0 15
thickness of not less than 5.0 % of the wire radius.
0.0907 2.30 29 200 20 138 1.0 15 6.7 Copper Volume (Area)—The copper volume (area) per
class, when tested in accordance with 10.6, shall meet the
0.0808 2.05 30 207 20 138 1.0 15
0.0720 1.83 30 207 20 138 1.0 15
following tolerances:
0.0641 1.63 30 207 20 138 1.0 15 6.7.1 Class 10A and 10H wire shall contain not less than
0.0571 1.45 30 207 20 138 1.0 15 8 % and not more than 12 % copper by volume (area).
0.0508 1.29 30 207 20 138 1.0 15
6.7.2 Class 15A and 15H wire shall contain not less than
0.0453 1.15 30 207 20 138 1.0 15 13 % and not more than 17 % copper by volume (area).
0.0403 1.02 30 207 20 138 1.0 15
0.0359 0.912 30 207 20 138 1.0 15 7. Dimensions, Mass and Permissible Variations
0.0320 0.813 30 207 20 138 1.0 15 7.1 The wire size shall be expressed as the diameter of the
0.0285 0.724 30 207 20 138 1.0 15 wire in decimal fractions of an inch to the nearest 0.0001 in.
0.0253 0.643 30 207 20 138 1.0 15 (0.003 mm) (Note 2). For diameters under 0.0100 in. (0.254
0.0226 0.574 30 207 25 172 1.0 10
mm), the wire shall not vary from the specified diameter by
0.0201 0.511 30 207 25 172 1.0 10 more than 60.0001 in. (60.003 mm) and for diameters of
0.0179 0.455 30 207 25 172 1.0 10 0.0100 in. (0.254 mm) and over, the wire shall not vary from
0.0159 0.404 30 207 25 172 1.0 10
0.0142 0.361 30 207 25 172 1.0 10 the specified diameter by more than 61 %, expressed to the
nearest 0.0001 in. (0.003 mm).
0.0126 0.320 30 207 25 172 1.0 5
0.0113 0.287 30 207 25 172 1.0 5 NOTE 2—The values of the wire diameters in Table 1 are given to the
0.0100 0.254 30 207 25 172 1.0 5 nearest 0.0001 in. (0.003 mm) and correspond to the standard sizes given
0.0089 0.226 30 207 25 172 1.0 5 in Specification B 258. The use of gage numbers to specify wire sizes is
not recognized in this specification because of the possibility of confusion.
0.0080 0.203 30 207 25 172 1.0 5
0.0071 0.180 30 207 25 172 1.0 5 A discussion of wire gages and related subjects is contained in “Copper
0.0063 0.160 30 207 25 172 1.0 5 Wire Tables,” NBS Handbook 100.
0.0056 0.142 30 207 25 172 1.0 5
0.0050 0.127 30 207 25 172 1.0 5 8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
8.1 The wire, when tested in accordance with 8.2, shall be
free from pits, slivers, exposed aluminum, or other imperfec-
TABLE 2 Resistivity
tions not consistent with good commercial practice.
Resistivity, max, at 20°C
8.2 For wire diameters of 0.0720 in. (1.829 mm) and larger,
Class of Wire V·mm2/m surface finish inspection shall be made with the unaided eye
10A and 10H 0.02743 (normal spectacles excepted), and for wire diameters smaller
15A and 15H 0.02676
than 0.0720 in., surface finish inspection shall be made at a
magnification not to exceed 103.
of a copper wire 1 mile in length weighing 1 lb. It is also equivalent, for 9. Sampling
example, to 1.7241 µV/cm of length of a copper bar 1 cm2 in cross section. 9.1 The number of production units in a sample shall be as
A complete discussion of this subject is contained in NBS Handbook 100.
The use of five significant figures in expressing resistivity does not imply
follows:
the need for greater accuracy of measurement than that specified in Test 9.1.1 For tensile strength, elongation, resistivity, adhesion,
Method B 193. The use of five significant figures is required for complete cohesion, and dimensional measurements, the sample shall
reversible conversion from one set of resistivity units to another. consist of a quantity of production units shown in Table 4

2
 B 566 – 04
TABLE 3 Equivalent Resistivity Values
Volume Con- Resistivity Equivalents at 20°C
Class ductivity at Volume Mass/Unit Length
20°C % IACS V·mm /m 2
V·cmil/ft µV·in. µV·cm V·lb/mile2 V·g/m2
10A and 10H 62.854 0.027430 16.500 1.0799 2.7430 526.26 0.092164
15A and 15H 64.416 0.026765 16.100 1.0537 2.6765 560.88 0.098227

TABLE 4 Sampling for Mechanical and Electrical Tests applied and be as near 10 in. as practicable and the final length
First Sample Second Sample shall be the distance between the jaws at the time of rupture.
Allowable The fracture shall be between gage marks in the case of
Allowable
Number Number of Number
Number of specimens so marked or between the jaws of the testing
Number of Defects
of Units Units in
Defects in of Units
n1 + n2 in Both
machine and not closer than 1 in. (25 mm) to either gage mark
Sample to in Sample, or either jaw.
Sample, n1 Samples to
Accept n2
Accept
Lot, c1 NOTE 3—It is known that the rate of loading during tension testing
Lot, c2
affects the performance of the sample to a greater or lesser extent
1–3 all 0 ... ... 0
4–8 4 0 ... ... 0 depending upon many factors. In general, tested values of tensile strength
9–15 4 0 5 9 1 are increased and tested values of elongation are reduced with increase of
16–25 5 0 9 14 1 speed of the moving head of the testing machine. In case of tests on soft
26–40 8 0 12 20 1 or annealed wire, however, the effects of speed of testing are not
41–65 12 0 18 30 1 pronounced. Tests of soft wire made at speeds of moving head which
66–100 19 0 23 42 1
under no-load conditions are not greater than 12 in./min (300 mm/min) do
not alter the final results of tensile strength and elongation determinations
to any practical extent. In the case of hard-drawn wire, these effects are
under heading “First Sample.” From each unit, one test pronounced when the speed of the moving head is excessive. It is
suggested that tests be made at speeds of moving head which, under
specimen of sufficient length shall be removed for the perfor- no-load conditions, are not greater than 3 in./min (76 mm/min), but in no
mance of the required tests. case at a speed greater than that at which correct readings can be made.
9.1.2 For surface finish and packaging inspection (when
10.1.2 For Classes 10H and 15H, the elongation may be
specified by the purchaser at the time of placing the order), the
measured by means of an extensometer or other device suitable
sample shall consist of a quantity of production units as shown
for measuring percent elongation in 10 in., and having a vernier
in Table 5.
reading to 0.01 in. (0.25 mm) attached to the test specimen at
10. Test Methods a load of approximately 10 % of the specified tensile strength.
The elongation shall be observed while applying a tension load
10.1 Tensile Strength and Elongation—The tensile strength, to the specimen and the reading when fracture occurs shall be
expressed in pounds-force per square inch (or megapascals), taken as the elongation of the specimen. Tests in which the
shall be obtained by dividing the maximum load attained by the elongation is less than specified, but in which the fracture has
specimen during the tension test, by the original cross-sectional occurred within 1 in. of the jaws or extensometer clamps, shall
area of the specimen. Tensile strength and elongation may be be disregarded.
determined simultaneously on the same specimen. 10.2 Resistivity—The electrical resistivity of the material
10.1.1 The elongation of wire may be determined as the shall be determined in accordance with Test Method B 193.
permanent increase in length, expressed in percent of the 10.3 Dimensional Measurements—Dimensional measure-
original length, due to the breaking of the wire in tension, ments shall be made with a micrometer caliper equipped with
measured between gage marks placed originally 10 in. (250 a vernier graduated in 0.001 in. (0.0025 mm). each coil shall be
mm) apart upon the test specimen (Note 3). The elongation of measured at three places, one near each end and one near the
wire shall be determined as described preceding or by mea- middle. From each spool approximately 12 ft (3.7 m) shall be
surements made between the jaws of the testing machine. unreeled and the wire measured in six places between the
When the latter method is used, the zero length shall be the second (approximately 0.6 m) and twelfth foot from the end.
distance between the jaws at the start of the tension test when 10.4 Cohesion Test—The wire shall be twisted three turns
approximately 10 % of the specified tensile strength has been per length equivalent to 15 diameters of the wire to be tested
and untwisted the same number of turns. An initial wire length
TABLE 5 Sample for Surface Finish and Packaging Inspection longer than specified may be used and the number of twists
Allowable Number of increased proportionately. The rate of applying the twist is not
Number of Units Number of Units
in Lot in Sample, n
Defects in Sample critical.
to Accept Lot, c
10.5 Adhesion Test—The wire shall be repeatedly reverse
1–3 all 0 bent to fracture by any convenient means.
4–8 4 0
9–15 9 0 10.6 Copper Thickness and Volume—Determination of the
16–25 14 0 minimum copper thickness or copper volume shall be per-
26–40 20 0 formed by microscopical examination of the polished end or by
41–65 30 0
66–100 42 0 a stripping method or by any other suitable method agreed
upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.

3
 B 566 – 04
11. Conformance Criteria
11.1 Any lot of wire, the samples of which comply with the
conformance criteria of this section, shall be considered as
complying with the requirements of Section 6. Individual
production units that fail to meet one or more of the require-
ments shall be rejected. Failure of a sample group from a lot to
meet one or more of the following criteria shall constitute
cause for rejection of the lot. The conformance criteria for each
of the prescribed properties given in Section 6 are as follows:
11.2 For tensile strength, elongation, resistivity, adhesion,
cohesion, and dimensional measurements, the sample shall
consist of a quantity of production units shown in Table 4
under heading “First Sample.” If there are no defects, the lot
shall be considered as conforming to these requirements. If
there are defects, but the number of these do not exceed the
allowable defect number c2 (Table 4) for the respective
number of units in the sample, a second sample equal to n2
shall be taken and the total defects of the n1 + n2 units shall not
exceed the allowable defect number c2. Failure to meet this
requirement shall constitute failure to meet the conformance
criterion.
11.2.1 Tensile Strength and Elongation—The tensile
strength and elongation of each of the specimens shall conform
to the requirements of 6.1 and Table 1.
11.2.2 Resistivity—The electrical resistivity of each of the
specimens shall conform to the requirements of 6.2 and Table
2.
11.2.3 Dimensions—The dimensions of each of the speci-
mens shall conform to the requirements of Section 7.
11.2.4 Cohesion—Cohesion of the copper cladding of each
of the specimens shall conform to the requirements of 6.3.
11.2.5 Adhesion—Adhesion of the copper cladding to the
aluminum of each of the specimens shall conform to the
requirements of 6.4.
11.3 For surface finish and packaging (when specified by
the purchaser at the time of placing the order), the sample shall
consist of a quantity of production units as shown in Table 5.
The number of units in the sample showing nonconformance to
the requirements shall not exceed the allowable defect number
c in Table 5. Failure to meet the requirements shall constitute
failure to meet the conformance criterion.
11.3.1 Finish—The surface finish of each of the samples
shall conform to the requirements of 8.1.
12. Density
12.1 For the purpose of calculating mass/unit length, cross
sections, and so forth, the density of the wire shall be taken as
shown in Table 6 (see Note 4).
NOTE 4—The term mass per unit length is used in this specification as
being more technically correct. It replaces the term “weights.”
13. Inspection
13.1 General—All tests and inspections shall be made at the
place of manufacture unless otherwise agreed upon between
the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of the purchase.
The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the
purchaser all reasonable facilities necessary to ensure that the
material is being furnished in accordance with this specifica-
tion (Note 5).
NOTE 5—Cumulative results secured on the product of a single manu-
facturer, indicating continued conformance to the criteria, are necessary to
ensure an overall product meeting the requirements of these specifications.
The sample sizes and conformance criteria given for the various charac-
teristics are applicable only to lots produced under these conditions.
13.1.1 Unless otherwise agreed by the manufacturer and the
purchaser conformance of the wire to the various requirements
listed in Section 6 shall be determined on samples taken from
each lot of wire presented for acceptance.
13.1.2 The manufacturer when requested, prior to inspec-
tion, shall certify that all wire in the lot was made under such
conditions that the product as a whole conforms to the
requirements of this specification as determined by regularly
made and recorded tests.
14. Packaging and Package Marking
14.1 The package size shall be agreed upon by the manu-
facturer and the purchaser in the placing of individual orders.
The wire shall be protected against damage in ordinary
handling and shipping.
15. Keywords
15.1 aluminum electrical conductor—copper-clad; alumi-
num wire; aluminum wire—copper-clad; copper-clad alumi-
num wire; copper-clad electrical conductors; electrical
conductor
TABLE 6 Density
Density, max, at 20°C
Class of Wire g/cm3(lb/in.3)
10A and 10H 3.32 (0.12000)
15A and 15H 3.63 (0.13118)

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 565 – 04
Standard Test Method for
Shear Testing of Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rivets and
Cold-Heading Wire and Rods1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 565; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope*
1.1 This test method covers the double shear testing of
aluminum and aluminum alloy rivets with round, solid shanks
and cold-heading wire and rod.2
NOTE 1—Exceptions to this test method may be necessary in individual
specifications or methods for tests for a particular material.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as standard. The values given in parenthesis are mathematical
conversions to SI units which are provided for information
only and are not considered standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The latest issues of the following documents form a part
of this standard to the extent referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards: 3
B 316/B 316M Specification for Aluminum and
Aluminum-Alloy Rivet and Cold-Heading Wire and Rods
B 769 Test Method for Shear Testing of Aluminum Alloys
B 831 Test Method for Shear Testing of Thin Aluminum
Alloy Products
E 4 Practices for Force Verification of Testing Machines
E 6 Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical Test-
ing
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light
Metals and Alloys , and is under the jurisdiction of Subcommittee B07.05 on
Testing.
Current edition approved March 1, 2004. Published March 2004. Originally
approved in 1972. Last previous edition approved in 2000 as B 565 – 94 (2000).
2
This product is covered by Specification B 316/B 316M.
3
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
3. Terminology
3.1 General—The definitions of terms relating to shear
testing in Terminology E 6 are applicable to the terms used in
this test method.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 The test consists of subjecting a length of wire or rod or
a rivet in full cross section, or a machined length of rod or rivet,
to double-shear loading, with a suitable test device in a tension
testing machine, and determining the shear stress required to
fracture the specimen (that is, the shear strength).
5. Significance and Use
5.1 This test method is intended solely for the shear testing
of rivets and cold-heading wire and rod, and is not generally
recommended for the determination of the shear strength of
other products. For rivets, this method is limited to rivets
having a shank length equal to or greater than 2d.
NOTE 2—The results of shear tests of specimens machined from
products other than wire, rod, and rivets may be greatly dependent upon
the orientation of the specimen within the original test material, and the
direction in which the force is applied relative to the grain flow in the
specimen.4 It is recommended that shear strengths of other products be
determined by Test Method B 769 for products greater than 0.250 in. (6.4
mm) and Test Method B 831 for products less than 0.250 in. (6.4 mm).
Shear strengths developed by this test method have been shown to vary
from those developed by other methods.4 If Test Method B 565 is used for
shear testing of other products, variables such as those described in Test
Method B 769 should be identified and controlled.
5.2 The results of shear tests are dependent upon the relative
and absolute lengths of specimen which are sheared out, and
those which are supported.4 The results of tests made in
accordance with this method should not be directly compared
with those determined in other types of tests in which the
methods of loading and supporting the specimen are different.
4
Kaufman, J. G., and Davies, R. E. “Effects of Test Method and Specimen
Orientation on Shear Strengths of Aluminum Alloys,” ASTM Proceedings, ASTEA,
Am. Soc. Testing Mats., Vol 64, 1964.
 B 565 – 04

d = nominal diameter of specimen (rivet, wire, or machined specimen),

d1 = actual diameter of hole (see Note), and
d2 = actual diameter of specimen
Clearance (d1−d2), maximum = 0.02 d + 0.005 in. (0.12 mm)
Note—The tolerance applicable to the diameter of the specimen being shear tested must be recognized in drilling the hole in the device. It is recommended that
the drilled hole size be equal to 1.02 d plus 0.005 in. (0.12 mm) less the minus tolerance applicable to the specimen.
S1 = d
S2 = S1 + 0.001 in. (0.025 mm)
S3 = 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) for d = 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) to 5⁄32 in. (4 mm)
= 1⁄2 in. (12 mm) for d = 3⁄16 in. (5 mm) to 3⁄8 in. (10 mm)
FIG. 1 Shear Test Device

5.3 The presence of a lubricant on the surfaces of the
specimen and device may result in shear strengths up to 3 %
lower than those determined in the absence of lubrication.
NOTE 3—In order to be able to test rivets having shanks as short as 2d,
the supported lengths of the specimen are 1⁄2 d (Fig. 1), although it is
recognized that higher values of shear strength would be obtained if the
supporting lengths were longer.
5.4 Investigations have determined that the shear strength
decreases slightly as the clearance between the specimen
diameter and the diameter of the test hole in the device
increases, and that the effect of the clearance decreases with
increasing specimen diameter. This test method (refer to Fig. 1)
permits clearances for production testing which should affect
shear strengths by no more than 2 %. For referee testing, the
maximum clearance shall be 0.001 in. (0.03 mm).5
6. Apparatus
6.1 Testing Machines—The testing machine shall conform
to the requirements as defined in Practices E 4. The forces used
5
Fenn, R. W., Jr. and Clapper, R. B. “Evaluation of Test Variables in the
Determination of Shear Strength,” ASTM Proceedings, ASTEA, Am. Soc. Testing
Mats., Vol 56, 1956.
to determine the shear strength shall be within the range of the
testing machine as defined as Practices E 4.
6.2 Shear Test Device—A shear device of the type shown in
Fig. 1 shall be used. It shall be made of hardened steel having
a hardness of not less than 52 HRC and the shearing edges of
the holes shall have a radius of no more than 0.0005 in. (0.013
mm). To minimize the possible effect of distortion of the device
under force, fitted machined steel bolts shall be used to hold the
components together. The mating surfaces between the tongue
and clevises shall be polished and shall have a finish of 16 µin.
Ra or better.
7. Test Specimens
7.1 Specimens shall consist of round, solid rivets or short
lengths of wire, either in full cross section or machined to a
smaller diameter. The minimum length of the specimen shall
be twice its diameter. The maximum length is not specified as
it has no effect on the results of the test.
7.2 For diameters up to and including 0.372 in. (9.45 mm),
the specimens shall be the full cross section of the rivet shank
or wire, except that the rivet shank or wire may be reduced up
to 30 % in area by machining to accommodate the device size.
In the case of wire, rod, or rivets over 0.372-in. (9.45-mm)

2
 B 565 – 04
diameter, it is permissible to turn down to 0.372-in. (9.45-mm) 10. Calculations of Shear Strength
diameter for testing. The machined finish shall be 32 µin. Ra or 10.1 Calculate the shear strength from the maximum force
better. as follows:
7.3 The maximum clearance between the specimen diam-
S 5 ½Pmax/A 5 ½Pmax/~pD2/4! 5 2Pmax/pD2 (1)
eter and the diameter of the test hole in the device shall not
exceed that allowed in Fig. 1. where:
S = the shear strength, psi (or MPa),
8. Test Specimen Measurement P max = the maximum force in the test, lbf (or N), and
8.1 Measure the diameter of the specimen to the nearest D = the measured diameter of the specimen, in. (or
0.001 in. (0.03 mm) for test specimens equal to or greater than mm).
0.1 in. (2.5 mm) in diameter, and to the nearest 0.0005 in. 11. Report
(0.013 mm) for test specimens less than 0.1 in. (2.5 mm) in 11.1 The report shall include the following for each speci-
diameter. men tested:
11.1.1 The ASTM shear test method.
9. Procedure
NOTE 4—In view of the influence of test methods on shear test results
9.1 The mating surfaces of the shear fixture should be as indicated in 5.2, it is important to reference the ASTM test method in
visually inspected before use for aluminum buildup around the reporting results.
test holes. Removal of the aluminum buildup can be accom- 11.1.2 Material and sample identification.
plished with crocus cloth or soaking the test device in a caustic 11.1.3 Specimen diameter, in. (or mm).
soda solution followed by a water rinse and drying. Before 11.1.4 Maximum force, lbf (or N).
referee testing, the test device should be cleaned in the above 11.1.5 Shear strength, ksi (or MPa).
manner followed by procedures in 9.2. 11.1.6 Test temperature, °F (°C).
9.2 Since lubrication may have an effect on results (see 5.3),
NOTE 5—For metric equivalents:
clean the specimens and test device before referee testing (for
. 1 in = 25.4 mm
example, clean ultrasonically in a suitable solvent) and take 1lbf = 4.448 N
care to avoid touching the specimen and test-hole area of the 1 ksi = 6.89 MN/m2 (MPa)
shear device with the hands after cleaning. 12. Precision and Bias
9.3 Place the specimen in the shear test device, assemble as
12.1 The precision and bias of this test method needs to be
in Fig. 1, and apply force at a uniform rate until complete
established. Subcommittee B07.05 is developing the precision
failure occurs.
and bias statements for this test method.
9.4 The cross-head speed during the test shall not exceed 3⁄4
in. (19.1 mm)/min and the loading rate shall not exceed 100 ksi 13. Keywords
(689 MPa)/min on the double-shear test cross section. 13.1 double shear loading; shear test device; shear alumi-
9.5 Determine the maximum force to fracture the specimen. num rivet

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B07 has identified the locations of selected changes
to this standard since the last issue (B 565 – 94 (2000)) that
may impact its use.
(1) Created 1.2 for the values statement.
(2) Replaced the designation “AA” with “Ra” (Roughness
average) in 6.2 and 7.2.
(3) Reordered the procedural steps in Section 9
(4) Added Section 12 on Precision and Bias.
(5) Replaced the word “load” with “force” throughout the
standard.
(6) Replaced the words “jig,” “grips,” and “fixture” with
“device” throughout the standard.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 567 – 98 (Reapproved 2003)
Standard Test Method for
Measurement of Coating Thickness by the Beta Backscatter
Method1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 567; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers the beta backscatter gages for
the nondestructive measurement of metallic and nonmetallic
coatings on both metallic and nonmetallic substrate materials.
1.2 The test method measures the mass of coating per unit
area, which can also be expressed in linear thickness units
provided that the density of the coating is known.
1.3 The test method is applicable only if the atomic numbers
or equivalent atomic numbers of the coating and substrate
differ by an appropriate amount (see 7.2).
1.4 Beta backscatter instruments employ a number of dif-
ferent radioactive isotopes. Although the activities of these
isotopes are normally very low, they can present a hazard if
handled incorrectly. This standard does not purport to address
the safety issues and the proper handling of radioactive
materials. It is the responsibility of the user to comply with
applicable State and Federal regulations concerning the han-
dling and use of radioactive material. Some States require
licensing and registration of the radioactive isotopes.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 International standard:
ISO 3543: Metallic and Nonmetallic Coatings—
Measurement of Thickness—Beta Backscatter Method
3. Terminology
3.1 Descriptions of Terms:
3.1.1 activity—the nuclei of all radioisotopes are unstable
and tend to change into a stable condition by spontaneously
emitting energy or particles, or both. This process is known as
radioactive decay. The total number of disintegrations during a
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on Metallic
and Inorganic Coatings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B08.10 on
Test Methods.
Current edition approved Oct. 1, 2003. Published October 2003. Originally
approved in 1972. Last previous edition approved in 1998 as B 567 – 98.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
suitably small interval of time divided by that interval of time
is called “activity.” Therefore, in beta backscatter measure-
ments, a higher activity corresponds to a greater emission of
beta particles. The activity of a radioactive element used in beta
backscatter gages4
is generally expressed in microcuries (1
µCi = 3.7 3 10 disintegrations per second).
3.1.2 aperture—the opening of the mask abutting the test
specimen. It determines the size of the area on which the
coating thickness is measured. This mask is also referred to as
a platen, an aperture plate, a specimen support, or a specimen
mask.
3.1.3 backscatter—when beta particles pass through matter,
they collide with atoms. Among other things, this interaction
will change their direction and reduce their speed. If the
deflections are such that the beta particle leaves the body of
matter from the same surface at which it entered, the beta
particle is said to be backscattered.
3.1.4 backscatter coeffıcient—the backscatter coefficient of
a body, R, is the ratio of the number of beta particles
backscattered to that entering the body. R is independent of the
activity of the isotope and of the measuring time.
3.1.5 backscatter count:
3.1.5.1 absolute backscatter count—the absolute backscat-
ter count, X, is the number of beta particles that are backscat-
tered during a finite interval of time and displayed by the
instrument. X will, therefore, depend on the activity of the
source, the measuring time, the geometric configuration of the
measuring system, and the properties of the detector, as well as
the coating thickness and the atomic numbers of the coating
and substrate materials. X0 is the count produced by the
uncoated substrate, and Xs, that of the coating material. To
obtain these values, it is necessary that both these materials are
available with a thickness greater than the saturation thickness
(see 3.1.12).
3.1.5.2 normalized backscatter—the normalized backscat-
ter, xn, is a quantity that is independent of the activity of the
source, the measuring time, and the properties of the detector.
The normalized backscatter is defined by the equation:
X 2 X0
xn 5 X 2 X
s 0
 B 567 – 98 (2003)

where: 4.3 The curve expressing coating thickness (mass per unit
X0 = count from the substrate, area) versus beta backscatter intensity is continuous and can be
Xs = count from the coating material, and subdivided into three distinct regions, as shown in Fig. 1. The
X = count from the coated specimen, and each count is for normalized count rate, xn, is plotted on the X-axis, and the
the same interval of time. logarithm of the coating thickness, on the Y-axis. In the range
Because X is always $X0 and # Xs, xn can only take values 0 # xn # 0.35, the relationship is essentially linear. In the
between 0 and 1. (For reasons of simplicity, it is often range 0.35 #xn # 0.85, the curve is nearly logarithmic; this
advantageous to express the normalized count as a percentage means that, when drawn on semilogarithmic graph paper, as in
by multiplying x n by 100.) Fig. 1, the curve approximates a straight line. In the range
3.1.5.3 normalized backscatter curve—the curve obtained 0.85 # xn #1, the relationship is nearly hyperbolic.
by plotting the coating thickness as a function of xn. 4.4 Radiation other than the beta rays are emitted or
3.1.6 beta particles—beta particles or beta rays are high- backscattered by the coating or substrate, and may be included
speed electrons that are emitted from the nuclei of materials in the backscatter measurements. Whenever the term backscat-
undergoing a nuclear transformation. These materials are ter is used in this method, it is to be assumed that reference is
called beta-emitting isotopes, beta-emitting sources, or beta made to the total radiation measured.
emitters.
3.1.7 coating thickness—in this test method, coating thick-
ness refers to mass per unit area as well as geometrical
thickness.
3.1.8 dead time or resolving time—Geiger-Müller tubes
used for counting beta particles have characteristic recovery
times that depend on their construction and the count rate.
After reading a pulse, the counter is unresponsive to successive
pulses until a time interval equal to or greater than its dead time
has elapsed.
3.1.9 energy—it is possible to classify beta emitters by the
maximum energy of the particles that they release during their
disintegration. This energy is generally given in mega-
electronvolts, MeV.
3.1.10 equivalent (or apparent) atomic number— the
equivalent atomic number of an alloy or compound is the
atomic number of an element that has the same backscatter
coefficient as the material.
3.1.11 half-life, radioactive—for a single radioactive decay
process, the time required for the activity to decrease by half.
3.1.12 saturation thickness—the minimum thickness of a
material that produces a backscatter that is not changed when
the thickness is increased. (See also Appendix X1.)
3.1.13 sealed source or isotope—a radioactive source
sealed in a container or having a bonded cover, the container or
cover being strong enough to prevent contact with and disper-
sion of the radioactive material under the conditions of use and
wear for which it was designed.
3.1.14 source geometry—the spatial arrangement of the
source, the aperture, and the detector with respect to each other.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 When beta particles impinge upon a material, a certain
portion of them is backscattered. This backscatter is essentially
a function of the atomic number of the material.
4.2 If the body has a surface coating and if the atomic
numbers of the substrate and of the coating material are
sufficiently different, the intensity of the backscatter will be
between two limits: the backscatter intensity of the substrate
and that of the coating. Thus, with proper instrumentation and
if suitably displayed, the intensity of the backscatter can be
used for the measurement of mass per unit area of the coating,
which, if the density remains the same, is directly proportional
to the thickness. FIG. 1 Normalized Backscatter

2
 B 567 – 98 (2003)
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The thickness or mass per unit area of a coating is often
critical to its performance.
5.2 For some coating-substrate combinations, the beta back-
scatter method is a reliable method for measuring the coating
nondestructively.
5.3 The test method is suitable for thickness specification
acceptance if the mass per unit area is specified. It is not
suitable for specification acceptance if the coating thickness is
specified and the density of the coating material can vary or is
not known.
6. Instrumentation
6.1 In general, a beta backscatter instrument will comprise:
(1) a radiation source (isotope) emitting primarily beta particles
having energies appropriate to the coating thickness to be
measured (see Appendix X2), (2) a probe or measuring system
with a range of apertures that limit the beta particles to the area
of the test specimen on which the coating thickness is to be
measured, and containing a detector capable of counting the
number of backscattered particles (for example, a Geiger-
Müller counter (or tube)), and (3) a readout instrument where
the intensity of the backscatter is displayed. The display, in the
form of a meter reading or a digital readout can be: (a)
proportional to the count, ( b) the normalized count, or (c) the
coating thickness expressed either in thickness or mass per unit
area units.
7. Factors Affecting the Measuring Accuracy
7.1 Counting Statistics:
7.1.1 Radioactive disintegration takes place randomly.
Thus, during a fixed time interval, the number of beta particles
backscattered will not always be the same. This gives rise to
statistical errors inherent to radiation counting. In consequence,
an estimate of the counting rate based on a short counting
interval (for example, 5 s) may be appreciably different from
an estimate based on a longer counting interval, particularly if
the counting rate is low. To reduce the statistical error to an
acceptable level, it is necessary to use a counting interval long
enough to accumulate a sufficient number of counts.
7.1.2 At large total counts, the standard deviation (s) will
closely approximate the square root of the total count, that is
s 5 =X; in 95 % of all cases, the true count will be within
X 6 2s. To judge the significance of the precision, it is often
helpful to express the standard deviation as a percentage of the
count, that is, 100=X/X, or 100/=X. Thus, a count of
100 000 will give a value ten times more precise than that
obtained with a count of 1000. Whenever possible, a counting
interval should be chosen that will provide a total count of at
least 10 000, which corresponds to a statistical error of 1 % for
the count rate. It should be noted, however, that a 1 % error in
the count rate can correspond to a much larger percentage error
in the thickness measurement, the relative error depending on
the atomic number spread or ratio between coating and
substrate materials.
7.1.3 Direct-reading instruments are also subject to these
statistical random errors. However, if these instruments do not
permit the display of the actual counting rate or the standard
3
deviation, the only way to determine the measuring precision is
to make a large number of measurements at the same coated
location on the same coated specimen, and calculate the
standard deviation by conventional means.
NOTE 1—The accuracy of a thickness measurement by beta backscatter
is generally poorer than the precision described in 6.1, inasmuch as it also
depends on other factors that are described below. Methods to determine
the random errors of thickness measurements before an actual measure-
ment are available from some manufacturers.
7.2 Coating and Substrate Materials—Because the back-
scatter intensity depends on the atomic numbers of the sub-
strate and the coating, the repeatability of the measurement will
depend to a large degree on the difference between these
atomic numbers; thus, with the same measuring parameters, the
greater this difference, the more precise the measurement will
be. As a rule of thumb, for most applications, the difference in
atomic numbers should be at least 5. For materials with atomic
numbers below 20, the difference may be reduced to 25 % of
the higher atomic number; for materials with atomic numbers
above 50, the difference should be at least 10 % of the higher
atomic number. Most plastics and related organic materials (for
example, photoresists) may be assumed to have an equivalent
atomic number close to 6. (Appendix X3 gives atomic numbers
of commonly used coating and substrate materials.)
7.3 Aperture:
7.3.1 Despite the collimated nature of the sources used in
commercial backscatter instruments, the backscatter recorded
by the detector is, nearly always, the sum of the backscatter
produced by the test specimen exposed through the aperture
and that of the aperture plate(n). It is, therefore, desirable to use
a material with a low atomic number for the construction of the
platen and to select the largest aperture possible. Measuring
errors will be increased if the edges of the aperture opening are
worn or damaged, or if the test specimen does not properly
contact these edges.
7.3.2 Because the measuring area on the test specimen has
to be constant to prevent the introduction of another variable,
namely the geometrical dimensions of the test specimen, it is
essential that the aperture be smaller than the coated area of the
surface on which the measurement is made.
7.4 Coating Thickness:
7.4.1 In the logarithmic range, the relative measuring error
is nearly constant and has its smallest value.
7.4.2 In the linear range, the absolute measuring error,
expressed in mass per unit area or thickness, is nearly constant,
which means that as the coating thickness decreases, the
relative measuring error increases. At or near xn = 0.35, the
relative errors of the linear and logarithmic ranges are about the
same. Thus, the relative error at this point may, for most
practical purposes, be used to calculate the absolute error over
the linear range.
7.4.3 In the hyperbolic range, the measuring error is always
large because a small variation in the intensity of the beta
backscatter will produce a large variation in the measured
coating thickness.
7.4.4 For instruments that indicate only backscatter count
rate and not thickness directly, the count rate is normally
converted to a thickness by means of an appropriate graph.
 B 567 – 98 (2003)
Such graphs are generally valid only within a specific range of
coating thicknesses so that extrapolation of a linear range
calibration curve (straight line on rectangular coordinates) into
the logarithmic thickness range will result in measurement
errors. Similarly, extrapolation of a logarithmic range calibra-
tion into the linear thickness range will also produce significant
errors. Many instruments that indicate coating thickness di-
rectly are limited to the combined linear and logarithmic
coating thickness ranges but will be in error if measurements
are attempted in the hyperbolic thickness range. The instru-
ment manufacturer’s instructions must be followed relative to
the limiting coating thicknesses beyond which the particular
instrument being used may give substantial errors.
7.5 Resolving Time of the Detector—Because of the dead
time of Geiger-Müller tubes (see 3.1.8), the number of pulses
displayed by the readout instrument is always less than the
actual number of backscattered beta particles. Normally, this
does not diminish the measuring accuracy significantly unless
the count rate is so high as to saturate the detector.
7.6 Source Geometry— The greatest measurement precision
is obtained with the source placed in a particular position with
respect to the test specimen. This position depends on the
collimation of the beam of beta particles from the source and
the location, form, and size of the aperture. If possible, most of
the beta particles emitted by the source should be backscattered
from the test specimen, and not from the aperture plate(n). The
instructions furnished by the manufacturer of the instrument
for mounting the source shall be followed exactly.
7.7 Curvature—This test method is sensitive to the curva-
ture of the test specimen. However, the normalized backscatter
curve remains nearly the same if the surface of the test
specimen does not protrude into the aperture of the platen by
more than about 50 µm. By the use of specially selected
aperture platens or masks where the isotope is premounted in
a fixed, optimum position, it is possible to obtain nearly
identical readings on both flat and curved specimens. This
permits the use of flat calibration standards for the measure-
ment of curved specimens. The relationship between maximum
aperture size and specimen surface curvature is peculiar, in
most cases, to the individual instrument design. These details
are therefore best obtained from the manufacturer’s data.
7.8 Substrate Thickness:
7.8.1 Test Specimens with Single-Layer Coatings:
7.8.1.1 This test method is sensitive to the thickness of thin
substrates, but for each isotope and material there is a critical
thickness, called “saturation thickness,” beyond which the
measurement will no longer be affected by an increase of the
substrate thickness. This thickness depends on the energy of
the isotope and on the density of material. If the saturation
thickness is not supplied by the manufacturer, it should be
determined experimentally.
7.8.1.2 If the substrate thickness is less than the saturation
thickness, effective saturation thickness can sometimes be
obtained by backing up the substrate with more of the same
material, but only if the substrate is not coated on both sides.
If the substrate is of constant thickness, the instrument may be
calibrated for that thickness of substrate. However, if the
substrate thickness is less than the saturation thickness and also
4
varies in thickness, this method will not yield a single value for
the coating thickness, but a range of values with an upper and
lower limit.
7.8.2 Test Specimens with Multiple-Layer Coatings:
7.8.2.1 If the intermediate layer adjacent to the coating is
thicker than the saturation thickness, this test method will not
be affected by any variations in the substrate thickness as long
as the instrument is calibrated with standards having the
intermediate coating material as the basis material.
7.8.2.2 If the thickness of the intermediate layer is less than
saturation thickness, but constant in thickness, the instrument
may be calibrated for that particular combination of materials.
However, if the thickness of this intermediate layer is less than
saturation thickness and varies in thickness, this method will
not yield a single value for the coating thickness, but a range of
values with an upper and lower limit.
7.9 Surface Cleanliness—Foreign material, such as dirt,
grease, and corrosion products, will produce erroneous read-
ings. Natural oxide coatings, which form on some metal
coatings, also tend to produce low readings, especially if the
measurement requires the use of an isotope having an energy of
less than 0.25 MeV.
7.10 Substrate Material—To obtain accurate thickness
readings, it is necessary that the backscatter produced by the
substrate materials of the test specimen and that of the
calibration standard be the same. If they are different, other
calibration standards will have to be used, or appropriate
corrections made. Beta backscatter instruments are available
that can automatically make these corrections.
7.11 Density of Coating Material—The beta backscatter
method is basically a method of comparing the mass per unit
area of the coating of the test specimen to that of the calibration
standard. If the instrument readout is in units of mass per unit
area, the linear thickness is obtained by dividing by the coating
density:
M 3 10
T5 D
If the instrument readout is in linear units and if there is a
difference between the coating densities of the calibration
standards and of the test specimens, a density correction must
be applied:
T* 3 D*
T5 D
where:
T = linear thickness of coating of test specimen, µm,
T* = linear thickness readout of instrument, µm,
D = density of coating of test specimen, g/cm3,
D* = density of coating of calibration standard, g/cm3, and
M = mass per unit area of coating of test specimen,
mg/cm2.
In addition to porosity, voids, and inclusions, codeposited
materials can influence the density of the coating. For most
metallic elements the effects are usually considered negligible
for deposits obtained under normal conditions from properly
maintained electroplating baths free of contamination. The
only documented exception is gold, the density of which is
dependent on the deposition process.
 B 567 – 98 (2003)
7.12 Composition of Coating—Because the composition of
a coating affects the mass of coating per unit area, it will also
affect the instrument response (amount of backscattered beta
radiation). This effect may be negligible with alloying elements
having densities close to each other, such as cobalt-nickel
alloys. Very small quantities of alloying elements, such as
those present in high gold alloy deposits, also have little effect.
7.13 Energy of Beta Particles:
7.13.1 Because the precision of the measurement is not
constant over the entire range of measurement for a given
isotope, but is the best in the logarithmic portion of the
normalized beta backscatter curve (see Fig. 1), the isotope
should, whenever possible, be selected in such a manner that
the expected measurements fall into the range
0.35 # xn # 0.85 of the normalized curve. See Appendix X2
for a list of isotopes used with beta backscatter gages.
7.13.2 In general, instructions for selecting the proper iso-
tope are furnished by the manufacturer.
7.14 Measurement Time—Too short a measurement time
will yield a poor measurement precision. The selection of the
measurement time will, therefore, depend on the measurement
precision that is required. Each time the measurement time is
increased by a factor of n, the counting measurement precision
will improve by a factor of approximately 1/=n.
7.15 Activity of Radioactive Source—The count rate is
dependent on the activity of the source. An old source may
have a low activity, requiring excessive time to make a good
measurement (see 6.1). As a practical guide, the source should
be replaced before its half-life has elapsed.
7.16 Coating-Substrate Combination—The measurement
precision depends on the difference between the atomic num-
bers of the coating and substrate materials. The greater this
difference, the better the precision (see also 7.2).
7.17 Surface Roughness—Measurement accuracy can be
significantly influenced by the roughness of the coating sur-
face, but the effect is minimized if the energy of the beta
particles is high and the atomic number of the coating is low.
7.18 Detector—Errors can be introduced by erratic opera-
tion of the detector. If instability or drift is suspected, the user
is advised to consult the manufacturer.
7.19 Wear of Calibration Standards:
7.19.1 Coating thickness standards used to calibrate beta
backscatter instruments are subject to wear when used and thus
to a decrease in thickness.
7.19.2 The thickness of a calibration standard should be
checked from time to time by comparing it with another
calibration standard or reference sample that has not been used
since the last check.
8. Calibration of Instruments
8.1 Beta backscatter instruments shall be calibrated with
standards before measurements are made and also each time
the measuring conditions are changed. To obtain the best
possible measurement precision, the largest possible aperture
suitable for the area to be measured should be selected. Select
the calibration measuring time, the number of calibration
measurements to be made on each calibration standard, and the
test piece measuring time in accordance with the manufactur-
er’s instructions to obtain the required measurement precision
5
(see 8.8) with the measuring time, aperture, isotope, and
number of readings to be used for measuring the test piece. For
certain types of measurement application, this may require
unusually long measuring times (greater than 80 s).
NOTE 2—A measurement is that value obtained under the same condi-
tions of time, aperture, isotope, and number of readings as used to measure
the test piece. It may be a single reading or an average of two or more
readings.
Before use, the calibration shall be checked as described in
8.8. During use, the calibration shall have been checked within
the preceding 4 h as recommended by the instrument manu-
facturer. Attention shall be given to the factors listed in Section
7 and the procedures in Section 10.
8.2 In addition to the zero point, the complete calibration
curve can be defined either by two points of the logarithmic
range, or by a single point, if the slope in the logarithmic range
is known. In the first case, two calibration standards are
required, in the second, only one.
8.3 The instrument shall be calibrated with standards having
a uniform coating thickness. Whenever possible, these stan-
dards shall have an accuracy of 65 % at a 95 % confidence
interval, or better. The coating and substrate materials of the
standard should have the same or equivalent atomic numbers as
the substrate and coating materials of the test specimen.
Standards corresponding to the bare substrate material and the
coating material are also considered to be “calibration” stan-
dards. Sometimes it is also possible to use foils of the coating
material for calibration. These are placed on, and in contact
with, the substrate. It is necessary that the foil be clean,
smooth, and uniform in thickness, and that the contact between
foil and substrate be intimate.
8.4 Before an instrument is calibrated, the condition of the
calibration standards shall have been checked. Scratched,
worn, or pitted standards shall not be used to calibrate the
instrument.
8.5 If coating materials have the same or equivalent atomic
numbers, but different densities, the normalized backscatter
curves will be essentially parallel in the logarithmic region.
Under these circumstances, thickness measurements must be
corrected for the difference in densities (see also 7.11). If
“equivalent” calibration standards are used for the calibration
of the instrument, their suitability shall be established prior to
the measurements.
8.6 The substrate thickness for the test specimen and the
calibration standards should be the same, unless the saturation
thickness as defined in 7.8.1 is exceeded. If they are different,
appropriate corrections have to be made (see 7.10).
8.7 The curvature of the calibration standard and of the test
specimen shall be the same, except if it can be demonstrated
that the readings from a flat or curved specimen are essentially
the same. If this is not possible, the readings will have to be
corrected.
8.8 Before use, the calibration should be checked as fol-
lows. Take 5 measurements on each calibration standard,
removing and replacing the standard after each reading, under
the same conditions of time, aperture, isotope, and number of
readings as the conditions to be used for measuring the test
piece. The average of each set of five measurements shall be
 B 567 – 98 (2003)
within 3 % of the stated thickness of the corresponding
calibration standard. Failure to meet these requirements invali-
dates the calibration.
NOTE 3—Failure to meet these requirements may indicate faulty (worn)
calibration standards, a worn aperture platen, improper standard position-
ing on the aperture platen, insufficient measuring time, or improper
compensation for isotope decay.
9. Referee Test
9.1 If a referee test is required to resolve a disagreement, it
shall be performed by using “suitable” Standard Reference
Material (SRM) thickness standards from the National Institute
of Standards and Technology (NIST), if such standards are
available.
9.2 A “suitable” SRM standard is an SRM standard of the
same substrate/coating combination for which the beta back-
scatter instrument was calibrated and the thickness of which is
within the range of the calibration, preferably close to that of
the test items being measured.
9.3 The SRM shall be measured five times, each measure-
ment being made under the same conditions as used for the
measurement of the test piece. If the average of the five
measurements of the SRM differs from the certified mass per
unit area or equivalent thickness by more than 10 %, the
calibration is not valid.
NOTE 4—SRMs are issued by the NIST2 and include “coating thick-
ness” SRMs for some coating systems. The stated mass per unit area of
each “coating thickness” SRM is certified to be within 5 % of the true
mass per unit area.
10. Procedure
10.1 Operate each instrument in accordance with the manu-
facturer’s instructions, paying attention to the factors listed in
Section 6. Calibrate the instrument in accordance with Section
8.
10.2 Check the calibration of the instrument at the test site
each time the instrument is put into service and at frequent
intervals during use in accordance with 8.1.
10.3 Precautions— Observe the following precautions:
10.3.1 Substrate Thickness—The substrate thickness shall
exceed the saturation thickness or the calibration shall be made
with a substrate having the same thickness and properties as the
test specimen (see 7.8).
10.3.2 Measuring Aperture—The size of the measuring
aperture depends on the size and shape of the test specimen.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations concerning the
choice of a measuring aperture. The measuring aperture shall
not be larger than the coated area available on the test
specimen. The test specimen shall be seated firmly and
securely against the measuring opening.
2
SRMs may be obtained from the Office of Standard Reference Materials,
National Institute of Standard and Technology, Gaithersburg, MD 20899.
6
10.3.3 Curved Specimens— It shall be verified that the
aperture used for the measurement is correct for the radius of
curvature of the test specimen and, if the calibration has not
been made with standards having the same curvature as the test
specimen, that the calibration is applicable to the measurement.
10.3.4 Substrate Material—The backscatter produced by
the substrate of the standard shall be the same as that produced
by the test specimen. Verify this by actual tests. If the two
differ, follow the manufacturer’s instructions regarding correc-
tions or use new standards that agree with the test specimen
(see 7.10).
10.3.5 Surface Cleanliness—Remove all foreign materials,
such as dirt, grease, lacquer, oxides, and conversion coatings,
from the surface before the measurement by cleaning without
removing any coating material. Avoid measuring specimen
areas having visible defects, such as flux and acid spots.
10.3.6 Measuring Time—Use a sufficient measuring time to
obtain a repeatability of readings that will yield the desired
precision.
11. Report
11.1 The report shall include the following information:
11.1.1 Type of instrument used,
11.1.2 Size of aperture,
11.1.3 Measurement time,
11.1.4 Description of test specimen and measurement area,
11.1.5 If applicable a statement that a correction for density
was made,
11.1.6 Type of calibration standards and the measurement
mode used,
11.1.7 Thickness of coating as determined from the mea-
surements,
11.1.8 Statistical measurement parameters of the measure-
ment series as required,
11.1.9 Identification of testing facility and operator,
11.1.10 Date of measurements.
12. Precision and Bias
12.1 The equipment, its calibration, and its operation shall
be such that the coating thickness can be determined with an
uncertainty of less than 10 % at 95 % confidence level.
12.2 Instruments suitable for compliance with section 12.1
are available commercially.
12.3 The measurement bias is the discrepancy remaining
between the measured thickness and the true thickness if all
random errors are eliminated. It is, therefore, no greater than,
and attributable to (1), the calibration error of the instrument
and (2) the quality of the calibration standard used to calibrate
the instrument.
13. Keywords
13.1 aperture, beta backscatter, coating thickness, isotope
 B 567 – 98 (2003)
APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. SATURATION THICKNESS AS A FUNCTION OF DENSITY FOR VARIOUS ISOTOPES

FIG. X1.1

7
 B 567 – 98 (2003)

X2. ISOTOPES USED WITH BETA BACKSCATTER GAGES

Approximate
Isotope or Source Symbol Emax, MeV Half-Life,
years

Carbon C-14 0.16 5750.7

Promethium Pm-147 0.22 2.8
Thallium T1-204 0.77 3
Lead-210 − bismuth-210 Pb-210 − Bi-210
Radium D + E Ra D + E 1.17 19.4
Strontium − yttrium Sr-90 − Y-90 2.27 28
Ruthenium − rhodium Ru-106 − Rh-106 3.54 1

X3. ATOMIC NUMBERS OF SOME COMMONLY USED COATINGS AND SUBSTRATES

Atomic
Element
Number

Aluminum 13
Cadmium 48
Chromium 24
Cobalt 27
Copper 29
Gold 79
Iron 26
Lead 82
Magnesium 12
Nickel 28
Organic materials ;6
Platinum 78
Rhodium 45
Silver 47
Tin 50
Titanium 22
Zinc 30

X4. REPRODUCIBILITY OF MEASUREMENTS

X4.1 The following table summarizes the results of a round ASTM Committee B08.3 Each laboratory measured two speci-
robin participated in by 46 laboratories and conducted by mens of gold on nickel, 0.7 and 1.3 µm, using an 0.8-mm

3
“An Interlaboratory Comparison of Gold Thickness Measurements by Fielding
Ogburn and John Mandel,” Plating and Surface Finishing Vol 72 No. 9, 1985 p. 48.

8
 B 567 – 98 (2003)
aperture with the promethium isotope. Measurement time was Thickness 0.7 µm 1.3 µm
30 s and calibration measurements were 240 s each. Each repeatability of a single measurement 0.015 µm 0.025 µm
between calibrations 0.014 0.027
specimen was measured ten times after the instrument was between laboratories 0.047 0.054
calibrated. The calibration and set of ten measurements were
repeated five times. Subsequent to the round robin, Section 8
on calibration was revised to incorporate tighter control of the These data indicate the overall performance of the laborato-
calibration procedure in order to reduce the variations between ries and not necessarily the adequacy of the test method even
laboratories. though the laboratories were instructed to follow this test
Standard Deviations method. Also similar measurements of other coating systems
(Square roots of components of variance for various sources of are likely to yield different results.
variability)

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

9
 Designation: B 568 – 98
Standard Test Method for
Measurement of Coating Thickness by X-Ray Spectrometry1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 568; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers the use of X-ray spectrometry to
determine thickness of metallic and some nonmetallic coatings.
1.2 The maximum measurable thickness for a given coating
is that thickness beyond which the intensity of the character-
istic secondary X radiation from the coating or the substrate is
no longer sensitive to small changes in thickness.
1.3 This test method measures the mass of coating per unit
area, which can also be expressed in units of linear thickness
provided that the density of the coating is known.
1.4 Problems of personnel protection against radiation gen-
erated in an X-ray tube or emanating from a radioisotope
source are not covered by this test method. For information on
this important aspect, reference should be made to current
documents of the National Committee on Radiation Protection
and Measurement, Federal Register, Nuclear Regulatory Com-
mission, National Institute of Standards and Technology (for-
merly the National Bureau of Standards), and to state and local
codes if such exist.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
E 135 Terminology Relating to Analytical Chemistry for
Metals, Ores, and Related Materials2
2.2 International Standard:
ISO 3497 Metallic Coatings—Measurement of Coating
Thickness—X-ray Spectrometric Methods
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of technical terms used in this test method
may be found in Terminology E 135.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-8 on Metallic
and Inorganic Coatingsand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B08.10on
General Test Methods.
Current edition approved Nov. 10, 1998. Published January 1999. Originally
published as B 568 – 72. Last previous edition B 568 – 91 (1997).
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 Excitation—The measurement of the thickness of coat-
ings by X-ray spectrometric methods is based on the combined
interaction of the coating and substrate with incident radiation
of sufficient energy to cause the emission of secondary radia-
tions characteristic of the elements composing the coating and
substrate. The exciting radiation may be generated by an X-ray
tube or by certain radioisotopes.
4.1.1 Excitation by an X-Ray Tube—Suitable exciting radia-
tion will be produced by an X-ray tube if sufficient potential is
applied to the tube. This is on the order of 35 to 50 kV for most
thickness-measurement applications. The chief advantage of
X-ray tube excitation is the high intensity provided.
4.1.2 Excitation by a Radioisotope—Of the many available
radioisotopes, only a few emit gamma radiations in the energy
range suitable for coating-thickness measurement. Ideally, the
exciting radiation is slightly more energetic (shorter in wave-
length) than the desired characteristic X rays. The advantages
of radioisotope excitation include more compact instrumenta-
tion essentially monochromatic radiation, and very low back-
ground intensity. The major disadvantage of radioisotope
excitation is the much lower intensities available as compared
with X-ray tube sources. X-ray tubes typically have intensities
that are several orders of magnitude greater than radioisotope
sources. Due to the low intensity of radioisotopes, they are
unsuitable for measurements on small areas (less than 0.3 mm
in diameter). Other disadvantages include the limited number
of suitable radioisotopes, their rather short useful lifetimes, and
the personnel protection problems associated with high-
intensity radioactive sources.
4.2 Dispersion—The secondary radiation resulting from the
exposure of an electroplated surface to X radiation usually
contains many components in addition to those characteristic
of the coating metal(s) and the substrate. It is necessary,
therefore, to have a means of separating the desired compo-
nents so that their intensities can be measured. This can be
done either by diffraction (wavelength dispersion) or by
electronic discrimination (energy dispersion).
4.2.1 Wavelength Dispersion—By means of a single-crystal
spectrogoniometer, wavelengths characteristic of either the
coating or the substrate may be selected for measurement.
 B 568
Published data in tabular form are available that relate spec-
trogoniometer settings to the characteristic emissions of ele-
ments for each of the commonly used analyzing crystals.
4.2.2 Energy Dispersion—X-ray quanta are usually speci-
fied in terms of their wavelengths, in angstroms (Å), or their
equivalent energies in kiloelectron volts (keV). The relation-
ship between these units is as follows:
~keV!~Å!512.396
where:
keV 5 the quantum energy in thousands of electron volts
and
Å 5 the equivalent wavelength in angstroms (10-10 m).
In a suitable detector (see 4.3.2), X rays of different energies
will produce output pulses of different amplitudes. After
suitable amplification, these pulses can be sorted on the basis
of their amplitudes and stored in certain designated channels of
a multichannel analyzer, each adjacent channel representing an
increment of energy. Typically, a channel may represent a span
of 20 eV for a lithium-drifted silicon detector or 150 to 200 eV
for a proportional counter. From six to sixty adjacent channels
can be used to store the pulses representing a selected
characteristic emission of one element, the number of channels
depending on the width of the emission peak (usually displayed
on the face of a cathode ray tube). The adjacent channels used
to store the pulses from the material under analysis are called
the “region of interest” or ROI.
4.3 Detection:
4.3.1 Wavelength Dispersive Systems—The intensity of a
wavelength is measured by means of an appropriate radiation
detector in conjunction with electronic pulse-counting cir-
cuitry, that is, a scaler. With wavelength dispersive systems, the
types of detectors commonly used as the gas-filled types and
the scintillation detector coupled to a photomultiplier tube.
4.3.2 Energy-Dispersive Systems—For the highest energy
resolution with energy dispersive systems, a solid-state device
such as the lithium-drifted silicon detector must be used. This
type of detector is maintained at a very low temperature in a
liquid-nitrogen cryostat (77K). Acceptable energy resolution
for most thickness measurement requirements can be realized
with proportional counters, and these detectors are being used
on most of the commercially available thickness gages based
on X-ray spectrometry. In setting up a procedure for coating-
thickness measurement using an energy-dispersive system,
consideration should be given to the fact that the detector
“sees” and must process not only those pulses of interest but
also those emanating from the substrate and from supporting
and masking materials in the excitation enclosure. Therefore,
consideration should be given to restricting the radiation to the
area of interest by masking or collimation at the radiation
source. Similarly, the detector may also be masked so that it
will see only that area of the specimen on which the coating
thickness is to be determined.
4.4 Basic Principle—A relationship exists between coating
thickness and secondary radiation intensity up to the limiting
thickness mentioned in 1.2. Both of the techniques described
below are based on the use of primary standards of known
coating thicknesses which serve to correlate quantitatively the
radiation intensity and thickness.
2
4.5 Thickness Measurement by X-Ray Emission—In this
technique, the spectrogoniometer is positioned to record the
intensity of a prominent wavelength characteristic of the
coating metal or, in the case of an energy-dispersive system,
the multichannel analyzer is set to accept the range of energies
comprising the desired characteristic emission. The intensity of
the coating’s X-ray emission (coating ROI) will be at a
minimum for a sample of the bare substrate where it will
consist of that portion of the substrate fluorescence which may
overlap the ROI of the coating and a contribution due to
background radiation. This background radiation is due to the
portion of the X-ray tube’s output which is the same energy as
the coating’s X-ray emission. The sample will always scatter
some of these X rays into the detector. If the characteristic
emission energies of the coating and substrate are sufficiently
different, the only contribution of the substrate will be due to
background. For a thick sample of the solid coating metal or
for an electroplated specimen having an “infinitely thick”
coating, the intensity will have its maximum value for a given
set of conditions. For a sample having a coating of less than
“infinite” thickness, the intensity will have an intermediate
value. The intensity of the emitted secondary X radiation
depends, in general, upon the excitation energy, the atomic
numbers of the coating and substrate, the area of the specimen
exposed to the primary radiation, the power of the X-ray tube,
and the thickness of the coating. If all of the other variables are
fixed, the intensity of the characteristic secondary radiation is
a function of the thickness or mass per unit area of the coating.
The exact relationship between the measured intensity and the
coating thickness must be established by the use of standards
having the same coating and substrate compositions as the
samples to be measured. The maximum thickness that can be
measured by this method is somewhat less than what is,
effectively, infinite thickness. This limiting thickness depends,
in general, upon the energy of the characteristic X-ray and the
density and absorption properties of the material under analy-
sis. The typical relationship between a coating thickness and
the intensity of a characteristic emission from the coating metal
is illustrated by the curve in the Appendix, Fig. 1.
4.6 Thickness Measurements by X-Ray Absorption—In this
technique the spectrometer, in the case of a wavelength-
dispersive system, is set to record the intensity of a selected
emission characteristic of the basis metal. In an energy-
dispersive system, the multichannel analyzer is set to accumu-
late the pulses comprising the same energy peak. The intensity
will be a maximum for a sample of the uncoated basis metal
and will decrease with increasing coating thickness. This is
because both the exciting and secondary characteristic radia-
tions undergo attenuation in passing through the coating.
Depending upon the atomic number of the coating, when the
coating thickness is increased to a certain value, the character-
istic radiation from the substrate will disappear, although a
certain amount of scattered radiation will still be detected. The
measurement of a coating thickness by X-ray absorption is not
applicable if an intermediate coating is present because of the
indeterminate absorption effect of intermediate layer. The
typical relationship between coating thickness and the intensity
 B 568
of a characteristic emission from the substrate is shown in the
Appendix, Fig. 2.
4.7 Thickness and Composition Measurement by Simulta-
neous X-ray Emission and Absorption (Ratio Method)—It is
possible to combine the X-ray absorption and emission tech-
niques when coating thicknesses and alloy composition are
determined from the ratio of the respective intensities of
substrate and coating materials. Measurements by this ratio
method are largely independent of the distance between test
specimen and detector.
4.8 Multilayer Measurements—Many products have multi-
layer coatings in which it is possible to measure each of the
coating layers by using the multiple-energy-region capability
of the multichannel analyzer of an energy-dispersive system.
The measuring methods permit the simultaneous measurement
of coating systems with up to 3 layers. Or the simultaneous
measurement of thickness and compositions of layers with up
to 3 components. Such measurements require unique data
processing for each multilayer combination to separate the
various characteristic emissions involved, to account for the
absorption by intermediate layers, and to allow for any
secondary excitation which may occur between layers. Typical
examples of such combinations are gold on nickel on copper
and nickel on copper on steel.
4.9 Mathematical Deconvolution—When using a multi-
channel analyzer a mathematical deconvolution of the second-
ary radiation spectra can be used to extract the intensities of the
characteristic radiation. This method can be used when the
energies of the detected characteristic radiations do not differ
sufficiently (for example, characteristic radiation from Au and
Br). This method sometimes is described as 8numerical filter-
ing’ in order to distinguish from the technique of setting fixed
Region of Interest (ROI) channel limits in the multichannel
analyzer.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 This is a sensitive, noncontact, and nondestructive
method for measuring the coating thickness (and in some
cases, coating composition) of metallic and some nonmetallic
coatings over a range of thicknesses from as little as 0.01 µm
to as much as 75 µm depending on the coating and substrate
materials. It can be used to measure coating and base combi-
nations that are not readily measured by other techniques.
5.2 The coating thickness is an important factor in the
performance of a coating in service.
6. Factors Affecting Accuracy
6.1 Counting Statistics—The production of X-ray quanta is
random with respect to time. This means that during a fixed
time interval, the number of quanta emitted will not always be
the same. This gives rise to the statistical error which is
inherent in all radiation measurements. In consequence, an
estimate of the counting rate based on a short counting interval
(for example, 1 or 2 s) may be appreciably different from an
estimate based on a longer counting period, particularly if the
counting rate is low. This error is independent of other sources
of error such as those arising from mistakes on the part of the
operator or from the use of inaccurate standards. To reduce the
statistical error to an acceptable level, it is necessary to use a
3
counting interval long enough to accumulate a sufficient
number of counts. When an energy-dispersive system is being
used it should be recognized that a significant portion of an
intended counting period may be consumed as dead time, that
is, time during which the count-rate capacity of the system is
exceeded. It is possible to correct for dead-time losses. The
manufacturer’s instructions for accomplishing this with his
particular instrumentation should be followed.
6.1.1 The standard deviation, s, of this random error will
closely approximate the square root of the total count; that is,
s 5 =N. The “true” count will lie within N 6 2 s 95 % of the
time. To understand the significance of the precision, it is
helpful to express the standard deviation as a percent of the
count, 100 =N/N 5 100/ =N. Thus, 100 000 would give a
standard deviation indicating 10 times the precision (one-tenth
the standard deviation) obtained from 1000 counts. This is
because ~100/=1000!/~100/=100 000! 5 10. This does not
mean that the result would necessarily be ten times as accurate
(see 7.2).
6.1.2 A counting interval should be chosen that will provide
a net count of at least 10 000. This would correspond to a
statistical error in the count rate of 1 %. The corresponding
standard deviation in the thickness measurement is a function
of the slope of the calibration curve at the point of measure-
ment. Most commercially available instruments display the
standard deviation directly in units of thickness.
6.2 Coating Thickness—The precision of the measurement
will be affected by the thickness range being measured. In the
curve shown in the Appendix, Fig. 1, the precision will be best
in the portion of the curve from approximately 0.25 to 7.5 µm.
The precision rapidly becomes poorer in the portion of the
curve above approximately 10 µm. The situation is similar for
the absorption curve shown in the Appendix, Fig. 2. At coating
thicknesses greater than approximately 10 µm, the intensity
changes very little with the coating thickness and, therefore,
the precision in that region is poor. These limiting thicknesses
are, in general, different for each coating material.
6.3 Size of Measuring Area—To obtain satisfactory count-
ing statistics (see 6.1) in a reasonably short counting period, the
exposed area of the significant surface should be as large as
practicably consistent with the size and shape of the specimen.
Caution must be exercised, however, to see that the use of a
large sample area in conjunction with high power input to the
X-ray tube does not result in a signal so large as to exceed the
count-rate capacity of the detection system.
6.4 Coating Composition—Thickness determinations by
X-ray methods can be affected by the presence of foreign
materials such as inclusions, codeposited material, and alloying
metals as well as by voids and porosity. The sources of error
will be eliminated by the use of calibration standards electro-
plated in the same type of solution under the same conditions
as those used in the production of the coatings to be measured.
If pores or voids are present, X-ray methods will give an
indication of coating mass per unit area but not of thickness.
6.5 Density—If the density of the coating materials differs
from that of the calibration standards, there will be a corre-
sponding error in the thickness measurement. Commercially
available X-ray fluorescence instruments allow the use of a
 B 568
density correction procedure to compensate for small differ-
ences between the density of the coating material to be
measured and the density of the calibration standards coating
material. This procedure is commonly used for the measure-
ment of hard gold coatings having a density of 17.5 g/cm3 with
calibration standards having a soft (pure) gold coating, which
has a density of 19.3 g/cm3. Variations in density can result
either from variations in composition or from variations in
plating conditions (see 6.4).
6.6 Substrate Composition—The effect of differences in
substrate composition will be relatively minor on thickness
measurements made by the X-ray emission method if an
intensity ratio is used and if the X rays emitted by the substrate
do not excite or overlap the radiation being measured. How-
ever, when thickness measurements are made by the X-ray
absorption method the substrate composition of the test speci-
mens must be the same as that of the standards.
6.7 Substrate Thickness—The effect of a thin substrate will
be slight on thickness measurements by X-ray emission pro-
vided that an intensity ratio is used and if the X rays emitted by
the substrate are not energetic enough to excite the radiation
being measured. Care must be taken that the coating and
substrate are thick enough to prevent the primary X-ray beam
from reaching and fluorescing the material on which the
sample is supported. However, when thickness is to be deter-
mined by the X-ray absorption technique, the thickness of the
substrate must exceed a certain minimum or critical thickness.
It must be established experimentally that the minimum
thickness requirements have been met for a particular
substrate-source combination, although it is sometimes pos-
sible to back up the test specimen substrates with a sufficient
thickness of materials of the same composition. The X-ray
absorption method cannot be used when one or more interme-
diate coating layers are present.
6.8 Surface Cleanliness—Foreign materials such as dirt,
grease, or corrosion products will lead to inaccurate thickness
determinations. Protective coatings such as lacquer or chro-
mate conversion coatings over the coating to be measured will
also affect the results.
6.9 Specimen Curvature—Thickness measurements should
be made on flat surfaces if practical. In those cases where the
measurement of thickness on curved surfaces cannot be
avoided, a collimator should be used on the excitation beam,
reducing the measurement area to a size that will minimize the
effects of curvature. Spatial relationships between the curved
surface, the excitation beam, and the detector are particularly
important, and variations in these relationships can introduce
errors in measurement. Calibration standards having the same
radius of curvature as that of the test specimens can also be
used to eliminate curvature effects.
6.10 Excitation Energy—The intensity of the characteristic
secondary radiation from either the coating or the substrate is
strongly affected by any variation in the excitation energy, that
is, by changes in potential applied to the X-ray tube or changes
in the tube current, or both. In general, the radiation intensity
varies directly with the current and the square of the potential.
Therefore, in any method based on a simple relationship
between intensity and thickness, the final adjustment of exci-
4
tation energy must be made with reference to the observed
intensity from a standard sample used to construct the working
curve. However, if the method is based on intensity ratios
rather than absolute intensities, minor variations in excitation
energy are compensated for.
6.11 Detector—Errors can be introduced by erratic opera-
tion of the detector system which includes the associated
scaling circuitry as well as the detector tube itself. If instability
is suspected, a series of twenty or more count measurements
should be made on the same specimen without moving the
specimen and the standard deviation of the series calculated.
Most modern industrial X-ray instrumentation will perform
this calculation automatically. The value should not be signifi-
cantly greater than the square root of one measurement, =N.
Some forms of instability become evident if the same specimen
is measured periodically.
6.11.1 All radiation-detection/pulse-processing systems
have limitations with respect to reliable count-rate capability.
Operation of the gas-filled and scintillation types above their
count-rate capabilities will result in loss of counts and errone-
ously low readings. Operation of an energy-dispersive system
at high-input pulse rates will require an excessively long time
to obtain a statistically valid total, even with “dead-time”
compensation (see 6.1).
6.12 Any extrapolation beyond the thickness range covered
by the calibration standards excluding infinite thickness can
result in serious measurement errors; therefore, it is necessary
to take additional steps for measurements outside this range.
6.12.1 When making measurements in the range between
the highest thickness standard and the saturation (or infinite
thickness) standard, especially in the so-called hyperbolic
range, one must always use additional thickness standards with
values slightly above and below the presumed thickness of the
test specimen. Instrument measurement precision will rapidly
decrease with increasing thickness in the hyperbolic range. For
this reason, significantly longer measurements times are usu-
ally required for measurement applications using the hyper-
bolic range.
6.12.2 The use of additional standards between the substrate
standard and the lowest thickness standard will also improve
the accuracy of the measurement in the lower range, which is
also called the linear range.
6.13 Filter to Absorb Secondary Radiation—When measur-
ing coating/substrate combinations having similar characteris-
tic emission energies it is often helpful to use an absorber or
filter made from an appropriate material to absorb the charac-
teristic X-ray emission of the substrate or coating material to
improve measurement accuracy and precision. In most com-
mercially available XRF systems this absorber is a thin metal
foil which is manually or automatically placed between the
detector and the test specimen.
7. Calibration
7.1 General—In taking instrument readings for the purpose
of establishing an instrument calibration, exactly the same
instrumental conditions, including collimator size, voltage, and
tube current, shall be used as those which will be used on test
specimens.
 B 568
7.2 Standards—Prolonged counting periods will not com-
pensate for inaccurate standards. Standards representing vari-
ous thickness ranges of a number of coatings on different
substrates are generally available from thickness gage manu-
facturers. Those that are certified for thickness (as opposed to
mass per unit area) are suitable provided they are used for
coatings of the same density and composition. Calibration
standards for gold coatings, certified as to mass of gold per unit
area, with an accuracy of 65 %, are available.3 If standards
representing a particular type of coating and substrate are not
available, their preparation may be undertaken only if thor-
oughly competent personnel in the fields of electroplating and
analytical chemistry are available.
7.2.1 Calibration standards must be used in such a manner
as to minimize wear and abrasion of the plated surface. If the
standards are visibly scratched or abraded they should be
replaced. It is recommended that two sets of standards be
maintained, that is, a set of primary standards and a set of
working standards. These should be used only to calibrate and
periodically check the condition of the working standards. At
the first signs of wear or discrepancy, the working standards
should be replaced.
7.3 The instrument shall be calibrated with thickness stan-
dards having the same coating and substrate materials as those
being measured. Exceptions are allowed if the intensity of the
characteristic coating material emission is not influenced by the
characteristic emission of the substrate material. An example of
this situation is the measurement of silver on copper. The
instrument calibration may be made with standards of silver on
nickel. The intensity of the characteristic silver emission is not
influenced by the characteristic emission of nickel or copper.
7.4 The coating of the calibration standards must have the
same X-ray emission (or absorption) properties as the coating
being measured. If the coating of the standards is electrode-
posited from the same bath and under the same conditions as
the coating to be measured, the X-ray properties may be
assumed to be the same. If the coating on the standard is gold,
but not electroplated under conditions known to be the same as
the coating being measured, the X-ray properties may be
assumed to be the same for mass per unit area measurements.
Under such circumstances, thickness measurements must be
corrected for density differences, unless density differences can
be shown to be insignificant.
7.5 If the thickness is to be determined by the X-ray
absorption technique, the substrate of the thickness standards
shall have the same X-ray emission properties as that of the test
specimen. This shall be verified by comparing the intensities of
the selected characteristic radiations of both uncoated substrate
materials.
7.6 In the X-ray absorption technique, the substrate thick-
ness of the test specimen and the calibration standards shall be
the same unless the critical thickness, as defined in 6.7, is
exceeded.
7.7 If the curvature of the coating to be measured is such as
to preclude calibration on a flat surface, the curvature of the
standard and that of the test specimen shall be the same.
3 4
Available from the National Institute of Standards and Technology, Office of
Standard Reference Materials, Gaithersburg, MD 20899.
5
8. Standard Less Techniques by Fundamental Parameter
Computer Simulation
8.1 If the software of the XRF instrument is capable to
model the true physical properties of the coating and basis
material characteristic X-ray emission (by fundamental param-
eter based computer simulation) then a measurement of coating
thickness and coating composition is obtained which is not
derived from an instrument calibration with standards. This
standard less measurement shall be corrected by means of
calibration standards. The standards correction procedure (cali-
bration) performs the same way as the procedure used for
establishing empirical instrument calibrations alone.
8.2 In cases when the coating(s) to be measured and the
available calibration standard do not meet the conditions of 7.3,
then the computer simulation based on the fundamental param-
eter technique will cover such situations, if the following
conditions are fulfilled:
(1) The composition of the coating(s) of standard and part to
be measured does not differ considerably;
(2) If the characteristic radiation of substrate components
influences the radiation intensities which are used for calculat-
ing the thickness and composition of the coating, the compo-
sition of the substrate of standard and specimen shall not differ
considerably.
9. Referee Test
9.1 If a referee test is required in order to resolve a
disagreement, it shall be performed by using suitable Standard
Reference Material (SRM)4 thickness standards from the
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), if such
standards are available. A suitable SRM standard is an SRM
standard of the same substrate/coating combination for which
the XRF gage was calibrated, the thickness of which is within
the range of the calibration, preferably close to that of the test
specimens being measured. The SRM shall be measured 5
times, each measurement being made under the same condi-
tions as used for the measurement of the test piece. If the
average of the 5 measurements of the SRM differs from the
certified mass per unit area of equivalent thickness by more
than 10 %, the calibration is not valid.
NOTE 1—SRMs are issued by NIST and include coating thickness
SRMs for some coating systems. The stated mass per unit area of each
coating thickness SRM is certified to be within 5 % of the true mass per
unit area.
10. Procedure
10.1 Operate each instrument in accordance with the manu-
facturer’s instructions, paying attention to the factors listed in
Section 6. Calibrate it in accordance with Section 7.
10.2 Calibration Checks—The instrument calibration shall
be checked periodically or before a test series, by remeasuring
one of the calibration standards or a reference specimen with
known mass per area or thickness. If there is a change of the
measured thickness that is large enough to preclude meeting
the requirements of section 11, recalibrate the instrument.
SRMs may be purchased from the Office of Standard Reference Materials,
National Institute of Standards and Technology, Gaithersburg, MD 20899.
 B 568
10.3 Observe the following precautions:
10.3.1 Substrate Thickness—If the X-ray absorption tech-
nique is used, verify that the substrate thickness of the test
specimens exceeds the critical thickness. If not, make sure that
the calibration has been made with a substrate having the same
thickness and emission properties as the test specimens.
10.3.2 Measurement Area—The size of the measurement
area will depend on the size of the collimator used to restrict
and control the size of the excitation beam. In no case shall the
measurement area be larger than the coated area available on
the test specimen. Suitable means must be provided to per-
fectly align the test specimen relative to the excitation beam.
10.3.3 Surface Cleanliness—Remove all foreign materials,
such as dirt, grease, lacquer, oxides, and conversion coatings
from the surface before the measurement by cleaning without
removing any of the coating material. Avoid specimen areas
having visible defects such as flux, acid spots, and dross in
making measurements.
10.3.4 Measuring Time—Use a sufficient measuring time to
obtain a repeatability that will yield the desired accuracy (see
6.1).
10.4 Computation of Results—Convert the intensity read-
ings to thickness units. The conversion is made automatically
by most commercial coating thickness instruments.
11. Precision and Bias
11.1 The equipment, its calibration, and its operation shall
be such that the coating thickness can be determined with an
uncertainty of less than 10 % at 95 % confidence level.
11.2 Although an uncertainty of less than 10 % may be
achieved consistently for a great number of applications, the
uncertainty may be greater when the coating thickness is less
than 1 µm.
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. CALIBRATION CURVES
X1.1 Since commercially available X-ray spectrometry
thickness gages give a direct display in thickness units, it is not
necessary for the user of such equipment to generate or to use
calibration curves. However, the general shapes of calibration
curves in the emission mode and in the absorption mode of
operation are given here as general information.
X1.1.1 Emission—A typical calibration curve for determin-
ing a nickel coating thickness by X-ray emission is shown in
Fig. X1.1. The intensities are background-corrected, that is, the
6
11.3 Instruments suitable for compliance with section 11.1
are available commercially. For many coating systems the
instruments are capable of making measurements with an
uncertainty of less than 5 % at 95 % confidence level.
11.4 The measurement bias is the discrepancy remaining
between the measured thickness and the true thickness if all
random errors are eliminated. It is, therefore, no greater than,
and attributable to (1) the calibration error of the instrument
and (2) the quality of the calibration standard used to calibrate
the instrument.
12. Report
12.1 The report shall include the following information:
12.1.1 Type of instrument used,
12.1.2 Size of collimator aperture,
12.1.3 Measurement time,
12.1.4 Description of test specimen and measurement area,
12.1.5 If applicable a statement that a correction for density
was made,
12.1.6 Type of calibration standards and the measurement
mode used,
12.1.7 Thickness of coating as determined from the mea-
surements,
12.1.8 Statistical measurement parameters of the measure-
ment series as required,
12.1.9 Identification of testing facility and operator, and
12.1.10 Date of measurements.
13. Keywords
13.1 absorption; collimator; emission; filter; ratio; x-ray
intensity for Ni Ka is obtained from a sample of the unplated
brass substrate and subsequently substracted for each of the
intensity readings obtained from electroplated samples.
X1.1.2 Absorption—A representative calibration curve for
determining a nickel coating thickness by X-ray absorption is
shown in Fig. X1.2. The intensities are background-corrected
as they were in the emission technique. The emission now
being measured comes from the substrate.
 B 568

NOTE—Intensity is that of the Ni Ka line after a subtraction of background intensity.

FIG. X1.1 Calibration Curve for the Determination of a Nickel Thickness by X-Ray Emission

NOTE—Intensity is that of the Cu Ka line from the brass substrate after subtraction of background intensity.
FIG. X1.2 Calibration Curve for the Determination of a Nickel Thickness by X-Ray Absorption

7
 B 568
The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

8
 Designation: B 569 – 04
Standard Specification for
Brass Strip in Narrow Widths and Light Gage for Heat-
Exchanger Tubing1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 569; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope*
1.1 This specification establishes the requirements for brass
strip in narrow widths and light gages produced from Copper
Alloys Nos. C23000, C26000, and C26130.
NOTE 1—This product is commonly used for the manufacture of
thin-wall tubes for water passages in heat exchangers for internal
combustion engines and other closed system heat sources.
1.2 Units—The values stated in inch-pound units are to be
regarded as standard, except for grain size, which is stated in SI
units. The values given in parentheses are mathematical
conversions to SI units, which are provided for information
only and are not considered standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2
B 248 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought
Copper and Copper-Alloy Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled
Bar
B 601 Classification for Temper Designations for Copper
and Copper Alloys—Wrought and Cast
B 846 Terminology for Copper and Copper Alloys
E 3 Practice for Preparation of Metallographic Specimens
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance With Specifications
E 112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
E 478 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper
Alloys
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—For definitions of terms used in this speci-
fication, refer to Terminology B 846.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper
and Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.01 on Plate,
Sheet, and Strip.
Current edition approved May 1, 2004. Published May 2004. Originally
approved in 1972. Last previous edition approved in 1998 as B 569 – 98.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 capable of—the test need not be performed by the
producer of the material. However, if subsequent testing by the
purchaser establishes that the material does not meet these
requirements, the material shall be subject to rejection.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Include the following information when placing orders
for products to this specification:
4.1.1 ASTM designation and year of issue (for example,
B 569–XX),
4.1.2 Copper Alloy UNS No. designation (for example,
C26000),
4.1.3 Temper (Section 7),
4.1.4 Dimensions: thickness, width, length (Section 10), and
4.1.5 Quantity: total weight each form, temper, and size.
4.2 The following options are available and should be
specified at the time of placing an order when required:
4.2.1 Heat identification or traceability details,
4.2.2 Certification, and
4.2.3 Mill test report.
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 Material:
5.1.1 The material of manufacture shall be cast bar, cake, or
slab of Copper Alloy UNS No. C23000, C26000, or C26130 of
such purity and soundness as to be suitable for processing into
the products prescribed herein.
5.1.2 In the event heat identification or traceability is
required, the purchaser shall specify the details desired.
NOTE 2—Because of the discontinuous nature of the processing of
castings into wrought products, it is not always practical to identify a
specific casting analysis with a specific quantity of finished material.
5.2 Manufacture:
5.2.1 The product width shall be no greater than 3 in. (76.2
mm), and thickness shall be less than 0.0181 in. (0.457 mm).
5.2.2 The product shall be manufactured by such hot-
working, cold-working, and annealing processes as to produce
a uniform wrought structure in the finished product.
5.2.2.1 The product shall be hot- or cold-worked to the
finished size, and subsequently annealed, when required, to
meet the temper properties specified.

5.2.3 Edges—Slit edges shall be furnished.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 The material shall conform to the chemical composi-
tional requirements in Table 1 for Copper Alloy UNS No.
designation specified in the ordering information.
6.1.1 These composition limits do not preclude the presence
of other elements. Limits shall be established and analysis
required for unnamed elements when agreed upon between the
manufacturer and the purchaser.
6.2 For alloys in which zinc is listed as “remainder,” zinc is
the difference between the sum results of all elements deter-
mined and 100 %.
6.3 When all elements listed in Table 1 are determined for
C26000 and C26130 the sum of results shall be 99.7 % min and
for C23000 the sum of results shall be 99.8 % min.
7. Temper
7.1 Products shall be produced in tempers H01 (1⁄4 hard),
H02 (1⁄2 hard), O81 (Annealed-to-Temper—1⁄4 hard), and O82
(Annealed-to-Temper—1⁄2 hard) as defined in Classification
B 601.
NOTE 3—The purchaser should confer with the manufacturer or sup-
plier for the availability of product in a specific temper.
8. Grain Size of Annealed Tempers
8.1 Annealed-to-Temper (O81 and O82) strip shall have an
average grain size of 0.015 mm maximum as determined by
Test Methods E 112.
9. Mechanical Property Requirement
9.1 Tensile Strength Requirement—The product furnished
shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Tables 2 and 3
for the temper specified in the ordering information when
tested in accordance with Test Methods E 8.
9.2 Yield Strength Requirement—The product furnished
shall be capable of conforming to the requirements prescribed
in Tables 2 and 3 for the temper specified in the ordering
information when tested in accordance with Test Methods E 8.
9.3 Elongation Test Requirement—The product furnished
shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Tables 2 and 3
for the temper specified in the ordering information when
tested in accordance with Test Methods E 8.
10. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations
10.1 Unless closer tolerances are specified in the contract or
purchase order, the product furnished shall conform to the
following thickness and width tolerances:
10.1.1 Thickness Tolerances—Table 4.
10.1.2 Width Tolerances—Table 5.
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
Copper Composition, %
Alloy UNS Lead, Iron,
Copper Arsenic
No. max max
C23000 84.0–86.0A 0.05 0.05 ... Remainder
C26000 68.5–71.5B 0.07 0.05 ... Remainder
C26130 68.5–71.5B 0.05 0.05 0.02–0.08 Remainder
A
Cu + Sum of Named Elements = 99.8 %.
B
Cu + Sum of Named Elements = 99.7 %.
B 569 – 04
10.2 Straightness Tolerances—The maximum edgewise
curvature (depth of arc) in any 72-in. (1830-mm) continuous
length shall not exceed 1⁄8 in. (3.18 mm).
11. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
11.1 The strip shall be free of defects, but blemishes of a
nature that do not interfere with normal commercial operations
are acceptable. It shall be well-cleaned and free of dirt. A
superficial film of residual light lubricant may be present and is
acceptable unless otherwise specified.
11.2 The surface finish and appearance shall be the normal
commercial quality for the alloy, thickness, and temper or-
dered. When application information is provided with the
purchase order, the surface shall be that commercially produc-
ible for the application. Superficial films of discoloration, or
lubricants, or tarnish inhibitors are permissible unless other-
wise specified.
12. Sampling
12.1 Sampling—The lot size, portion size, and selection of
sample pieces shall be as follows:
12.1.1 Lot Size—An inspection lot shall be 10 000 lb (4550
kg) or less of material of the same mill form, alloy, temper, and
nominal dimensions, subject to inspection at one time or shall
be the product of one cast bar from a single melt charge, whose
weight shall not exceed 25 000 lb (11 350 kg), that has been
processed continuously and subject to inspection at one time.
12.1.2 Portion Size—A portion shall be four or more pieces
selected to be representative of each lot. If the lot consists of
less than four pieces, representative samples shall be taken
from each piece.
12.1.2.1 Chemical Analysis—The sample for chemical
analysis shall be taken in accordance with Practice E 255 for
product in its final form. Unless otherwise required by the
purchaser, at the time the order is placed the manufacturer shall
have the option of determining conformance to chemical
composition by analyzing samples taken at the time the
castings are poured or samples taken from the semifinished
product if heat identity can be maintained throughout all
operations. If the manufacturer determines the chemical com-
position during manufacture, he shall not be required to sample
and analyze the finished product. The minimum weight of the
composite sample in accordance with Practice E 255 shall be
150 g.
12.1.2.2 Samples for All Other Tests—Samples for all other
tests shall be taken from the sample portion in 12.1.2 and be of
a convenient size to accommodate the test and comply with the
requirements of the appropriate ASTM product standards and
test methods.
13. Number of Tests and Retests
13.1 Tests:
13.1.1 Chemical Composition—Composition shall be deter-
Zinc
mined as per the element mean of results from at least two
replicate analyses of the sample and the results of each
replication must meet the requirements of the product specifi-
cation.
13.1.2 Other Tests:
2
 B 569 – 04
TABLE 2 Tensile Strength Requirements and Tension Test Values for Rolled-to-Temper Material
Tensile Strength, ksi (MPaA) Yield Strength, ksi (MPaA) % Elongation
Copper Alloy At 0.5 % In 2 in.
Temper Designation At 0.2 % Offset
UNS No. Extension Under Load (50 mm)
Standard Former Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum
C23000 H01 ⁄ Hard
14 44 (305) 54 (370) 25 (170) 48 (330) 23 (160) 48 (330) 18
C26000 and C26130 H01 1⁄4 Hard 49 (340) 59 (405) 33 (230) 48 (330) 30 (205) 45 (205) 12
C26000 and C26130 H02 1⁄2 Hard 58 (400) 68 (470) 43 (295) 58 (400) 40 (275) 55 (380) 10
A
See Appendix X1.

TABLE 3 Tensile Strength Requirements and Tension Test Values for Annealed-to-Temper Material
Tensile Strength, ksi (MPaA) Yield Strength, ksi (MPaA) % Elongation
Copper Alloy Standard At 0.5 % In 2 in.
At 0.2 % Offset
UNS No. Temper Extension Under Load (50 mm)
Designation Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum
C23000 O81 42 (210) 52 (360) 21 (145) 36 (250) 20 (140) 35 (240) 34
C26000 and C26130 O82 60 (415) 70 (485) 35 (240) 50 (345) 34 (235) 49 (340) 25
A
See Appendix X1.

TABLE 4 Thickness Tolerances 14. Specimen Preparation

Thickness Tolerance, 6in. (mm),A,B
Thickness, in. (mm)
3 in. (7.62 mm) and Under in Width 14.1 Chemical Analysis—The analytical specimen prepara-
0.006 (0.01) and under 0.0003 (0.008)
tion shall be the responsibility of the reporting laboratory.
Over 0.0006 to 0.009 (0.152 to 0.229) 0.0004 (0.010) 14.2 Grain Size—The test specimen shall be prepared in
Over 0.009 to 0.018 (0.229 to 0.330) 0.0005 (0.013)
accordance with Practice E 3.
A
When tolerances are specified as all plus or minus, double the values shown.
B
Some applications may require a closer tolerance control within any one coil 14.3 Tensile Test—The test specimen shall conform to the
even though the overall tolerance between coils or shipments can be to the requirements prescribed for the specific product described in
tolerance shown. Such special tolerance requirements shall be negotiated be-
tween the manufacturer or supplier and the purchaser at the time the order is
the Test Specimen section of Test Methods E 8. The test
placed. specimen shall be taken so that the longitudinal axis is parallel
to the direction of rolling.
TABLE 5 Width Tolerances for Slit Metal
Width Tolerances, 6in. (mm),A,B 15. Test Methods
Width, in. (mm) for Thicknesses 0.018 in. (0.330
mm) and Under 15.1 Chemical Analysis:
1.750 (44.45) and under 0.003 (0.08) 15.1.1 Composition shall be determined, in case of dis-
Over 1.750 to 3 (44.5 to 76.2) 0.005 (0.13)
A
agreement, as follows:
When tolerances are specified as all plus or minus, double the values shown.
B
Some applications may require a closer tolerance control within any one coil Element Test Method
even though the overall tolerance between coils or shipments can be to the
tolerance shown. Such special tolerance requirements shall be negotiated be- Copper E 478
tween the manufacturer or supplier and the purchaser at the time the order is Iron E 478
placed. Lead E 478 (AA)
Zinc E 478 (Titrimetric)

13.1.2.1 Grain Size—The average grain size of two speci-
mens shall be the arithmetic average of at least three determi-
nations, each in a different field and the test results for each
specimen shall be reported.
13.1.2.2 Tensile Strength and Elongation, shall be reported
from specimens prepared from each of two pieces selected in
12.1.2 and each specimen must meet the requirements of the
product specification.
13.2 Retests:
13.2.1 When requested by the manufacturer or supplier, a
retest shall be permitted when results of tests obtained by the
purchaser or supplier fail to conform to the requirements of the
product specification.
13.2.2 The retest shall be as directed in the product speci-
fication for the initial test except that the number of test
specimens shall be twice that normally required for the
specified test.
13.2.3 Test results for all specimens shall conform to the
product specification requirements in retest. Failure to conform
shall be cause for rejection.
15.1.2 Test method(s) used for the determination of ele-
ment(s) required by contractual or purchase order agreement
shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
15.2 Other Tests:
15.2.1 The product furnished shall conform to all other
requirements when subjected to test in accordance with the
following table:
Test Test Method
Grain Size E 112
Tensile Strength E8
15.2.1.1 Grain Size—In case of dispute, the intercept
method of Test Methods E 112 shall be followed.
15.2.1.2 Yield strength shall be determined by the
extension-under-load method of Test Methods E 8. When test
results are obtained from both full size and machined speci-
mens and they differ, the test results from the machined
specimens shall prevail.

3
 B 569 – 04
16. Significance of Numerical Limits
16.1 For purposes of determining compliance with the
specified limits for requirements of the properties listed in the
following table, an observed value or a calculated value shall
be rounded as indicated in accordance with the rounding
method of Practice E 29.
Rounded Unit for Observed or
Property
Calculated Value
Chemical composition Nearest unit in the last right-hand significant digit
used in expressing the limiting value
Tensile strength nearest ksi (nearest 5 MPa)
Yield strength nearest ksi (nearest 5 MPa)
Elongation nearest 1 %
Grain size nearest multiple of 0.005 mm
17. Inspection
17.1 The manufacturer or supplier shall inspect and make
tests necessary to verify that the product furnished conforms to
the requirements specified.
17.2 Source inspection of the material by the purchaser may
be agreed upon between the manufacturer or supplier and the
purchaser as part of the purchase contrast. In this case, the
nature of the facilities needed to satisfy the inspector repre-
senting the purchaser that the product is being furnished in
accordance with this specification shall be included in the
agreement. All test and the inspection shall be conducted so as
not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
17.3 The manufacturer or supplier and the purchaser, by
mutual agreement, may accomplish the final inspection simul-
taneously.
18. Rejection and Rehearing
18.1 Rejection
18.1.1 Product that fails to conform to the specification
requirements when tested by the purchaser, or purchaser’s
agent, may be rejected.
18.1.2 Rejection shall be reported to the manufacturer, or
supplier, promptly and in writing.
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. METRIC EQUIVALENTS
X1.1 The SI unit for strength properties now shown is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI). The
derived SI unit for force is the newton (N), which is defined as
that force which, when applied to a body having a mass of 1 kg,
gives it an acceleration of 1 m/s2 (N = kg·m/s2). The derived SI
4
18.1.3 In case of dissatisfaction with results of the test upon
which rejection was based, the manufacturer, or supplier, may
make claim for a rehearing.
18.2 Rehearing
18.2.1 As a result of product rejection, the manufacturer or
supplier may make claim for a retest to be conducted by the
manufacturer, or supplier, and the purchaser.
18.2.2 Samples of the rejected product shall be taken in
accordance with the product specification and tested by both
parties using the test method(s) specified in the product
specification, or, alternately, upon agreement of both parties, an
independent laboratory may be selected for the test(s) using the
test method(s) specified in the product specification.
19. Certification
19.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, the
purchaser shall be furnished certification that samples repre-
senting each lot have been either tested or inspected as directed
in this specification and the requirements have been met.
20. Test Report
20.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order, a
report of the test results shall be furnished.
21. Packaging and Package Marking
21.1 Packaging—The product shall be separated by size,
composition, and temper and prepared for shipment in such a
manner as to ensure acceptance by a common carrier for
transportation and to afford protection from the normal hazards
of transportation.
21.2 Package Marking—Each shipping unit shall be legibly
marked with the purchase order number, metal or alloy
designation, temper, size, shape, gross and net weight, and
name of supplier. The specification number shall be shown,
when specified.
22. Keywords
22.1 brass strip; heat exchanger tubing; internal combustion
engine; strip in light gage; strip in narrow width; UNS No.
C23000; UNS No. C26000; UNS No. C26130
unit for pressure or stress is the newton per square metre
(N/m2), which has been named the pascal (Pa) by the General
Conference on Weights and Measures. Since 1 ksi = 6 894 757
Pa, the metric equivalents are expressed as megapascal (MPa),
which is the same as MN/m2 and M/mm2.
 B 569 – 04
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B05 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (B 569 – 98)
that may impact the use of this standard. (Approved May 1, 2004.)

(1) This specification was revised to comply with the selected (3) Section 21 has been revised to list both Packaging and
wording of the B05 Outline of Form. Package Marking with subsection titles.
(2) The term “edges” was added to Section 5, Manufacture.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 570 – 01

Standard Specification for

Copper-Beryllium Alloy (UNS No. C17000 and C17200)
Forgings and Extrusions1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 570; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope * B 846 Terminology for Copper and Copper Alloys2

1.1 This specification establishes the requirements for E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3
copper-beryllium alloy forgings and extrusions produced from E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
the following alloys. Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials3
Nominal % Composition
E 112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size3
Copper Alloy UNS No. Beryllium
3. General Requirements
C17000 1.7
C17200 1.9
3.1 The following sections of Specification B 249/B 249M
form a part of this specification.
NOTE 1—Requirements for copper-beryllium alloy rod and bar appear 3.1.1 Terminology,
in Specification B 196/B 196M (Section 2).
3.1.2 Materials and Manufacture,
1.2 Unless otherwise specified, Copper Alloy UNS No. 3.1.3 Sampling,
C17200 shall be the alloy furnished whenever Specification 3.1.4 Number of Tests and Retests,
B 570 is specified without any alloy designation. 3.1.5 Sample Preparation,
1.3 Units—The values stated in inch-pound units are to be 3.1.6 Test Methods,
regarded as standard. The values given in parentheses are 3.1.7 Significance of Numerical Limits,
mathematical conversions to SI units, which are for informa- 3.1.8 Inspection,
tion only and are not considered standard. 3.1.9 Rejection and Rehearing,
1.4 The following hazard statement pertains only to the test 3.1.10 Certification,
method portions of the specification: 3.1.11 Mill Test Report,
1.4.1 This standard does not purport to address all of the 3.1.12 Packaging, Marking, Shipping and Preservation.
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the 3.2 In addition, when a section with a title identical to that
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- referenced in 3.1, appears in this specification, it contains
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- additional requirements that supplement those appearing in
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. Specification B 249/B 249M.
2. Referenced Documents 4. Terminology
2.1 ASTM Standards: 4.1 Definitions:
B 194 Specification for Copper-Beryllium Alloy Plate, 4.1.1 For definitions of terms related to copper and copper
Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar2 alloys, refer to Terminology B 846.
B 196/B 196M Specification for Copper-Beryllium Alloy 4.1.2 extrusion, n—a uniform metal shape, long in relation
Rod and Bar2 to its cross-sectional dimensions, produced by forcing a suit-
B 249/B 249M Specification for General Requirements for ably preheated billet or preformed piece through an orifice
Wrought Copper and Copper-Alloy Rod, Bar, Shapes and (die) of the desired cross section.
Forgings2 4.1.3 forging, n—a metal part worked to a predetermined
B 601 Classification for Temper Designations for Copper shape by one or more such processes as hammering, upsetting,
and Copper Alloys—Wrought and Cast2 pressing, rolling, and so forth.
5. Ordering Information
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper 5.1 Include the following information in orders for prod-
and Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.02 on Rod,
Bar, Wire, Shapes, and Forgings.
ucts:
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2001. Published January 2002. Originally
published as B 570 – 72. Last previous edition B 570 – 96.
2 3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 570
5.1.1 ASTM designation and year of issue, 9. Grain Size
5.1.2 Quantity: number of pieces or pounds, 9.1 The grain size, if required, shall be as agreed upon
5.1.3 Copper Alloy UNS No. (Section 1), between the purchaser and the manufacturer and shall be
5.1.4 Temper (Section 8) or condition (Section 12), determined in accordance with Test Methods E 112.
5.1.5 Drawing showing the shape, dimensions, and toler-
ances, if required, 10. Physical Property Requirements
5.1.6 If an extrusion: the length (or mass) required, straight- 10.1 Microstructure:
ness as required, 10.1.1 The product in the TF00 (precipitation-hardened
5.2 The following are options and should be included in the (AT)) condition shall have a microstructure with a minimum of
contract or purchase order, when required: second phase (beta) constituents. When present, beta shall be
5.2.1 Tension tests (Section 11), fine and well dispersed.
5.2.2 Special tests such as grain size,
5.2.3 Finish (see Section 15), 11. Mechanical Property Requirements
5.2.4 Grain size (see Section 9), and
11.1 Hardness:
5.2.5 When material is ordered for agencies of the U.S.
11.1.1 The product furnished under this specification shall
government.
conform to the hardness requirements prescribed in Table 2 for
6. Material and Manufacture the solution heat-treated condition and Table 3 after precipita-
tion heat treatment, unless tensile properties are required by the
6.1 Material: purchase order. Rockwell hardness shall be determined in
6.1.1 The material of manufacture shall be cast or wrought accordance with Test Method E 18.
billet of C17000 or C17200 of such purity and soundness as to 11.2 Tensile:
be suitable for processing into the products prescribed herein. 11.2.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order, the
6.1.2 The product heat number shall appear on the Certifi- tensile properties of the product furnished shall conform to the
cation or Test Report. properties in Table 2 or Table 3 depending upon temper
6.2 Manufacture: required. Tensile properties shall be determined in accordance
6.2.1 The product shall be manufactured by hot working with Test Methods E 8.
and heat treating as may be necessary to meet the properties
specified herein. 12. Heat Treatment
7. Chemical Composition 12.1 Solution Heat Treatment—Temper TB00 (A)—The
product shall be heated to a uniform temperature, nominally
7.1 The product composition shall conform to the chemical 1450°F (788°C) and quenched commensurate with the required
requirements shown in Table 1. property and structural integrity of the configuration.
7.2 These composition limits do not preclude the presence 12.2 Precipitation Heat Treatment—Temper TF00 (AT)—
of other elements. Limits may be established and analysis The product shall be heat treated to a uniform temperature in
required for unnamed elements by agreement between the the range from 600 to 700°F (316 to 370°C) for a minimum of
manufacturer and the purchaser. 2 to 3 h and then air cooled. This is the heat treatment for the
7.3 Copper, given as remainder, is the difference between acceptance tests shown in Table 3.
the sum of all elements analyzed and 100 %. When all the 12.3 Special combinations of properties may be obtained by
elements given in Table 1 are analyzed, the sum of the results special precipitation heat treatments. The requirements for
shall be 99.5 % minimum. these special heat treatments shall be agreed upon by the
manufacturer or supplier and purchaser.
8. Temper
8.1 The standard temper designations available under this 13. Purchases for the U.S. Government
specification and as prescribed in Classification B 601 are 13.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
solution heat-treated TB00 (A) and precipitation heat-treated product purchased for agencies of the U.S. government shall
TF00 (AT). conform to the special government regulations specified in the
Supplemental Requirements section.
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
Composition, %
14. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
Copper Alloy Copper Alloy 14.1 The dimensions and tolerances for these product forms
Element UNS No. UNS No. shall be those shown on the drawing that forms a part of each
C17000 C17200 order or as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
Beryllium 1.60–1.79 1.80–2.00 purchaser.
Additive elements:
Nickel + cobalt, min 0.20 0.20
Nickel + cobalt + iron, max 0.6 0.6 15. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
Aluminum, max 0.20 0.20 15.1 The product shall be free of defects; however, blem-
Silicon, max 0.20 0.20
Copper remainder remainder ishes that do not interfere with the intended application are
acceptable.

2
 B 570
TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties as Solution Heat Treated
Diameter or Copper Alloy UNS No.
Temper Designation
Thickness, in. C17000 C17200 C17000 C17200
Standard Former (mm) Tensile Strength, ksi (MPa)A,B, max Rockwell Hardness, max
B Scale
TB00 solution heat-treated (A) all sizes 85 (590) 85 (590) 85 85
A
ksi = 1000 psi.
B
See Appendix X1.

TABLE 3 Mechanical Properties After Precipitation Heat Treatment

Temper Designation
Rockwell
Tensile Strength, Yield Strength, ksi Elongation in 2 in. Hardness, min
Standard Former
ksiA (MPa)B,C (MPa), 0.2 % Offset, min (50 mm), min, %
C Scale
Copper Alloy UNS No. C17000
TF00 precipitation hardened (AT) 150–190 (1030–1310) 120 (820) 3 32–
Copper Alloy UNS No. C17200
TF00 precipitation hardened (AT) 165–200 (1140–1380) 130 (890) 3 36–
A
ksi = 1000 psi.
B
See Appendix X1.
C
The upper limits in the tensile strength column are for design guidance only.

15.2 The purchaser shall specify in the order the condition required by contractual agreement shall be as agreed upon
or finish required, such as, hot-worked, hot-worked and between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
cleaned by blasting, pickling, or machining.
17. Keywords
16. Test Methods
16.1 Chemical Composition: 17.1 copper beryllium; extrusions; forgings; UNS C17000;
16.2 The chemical composition shall, in case of disagree- UNS C17200
ment, be determined in accordance with the applicable method
in Annex A1 of Specification B 194.
16.3 Test method(s) for the determination of element(s)

SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS

The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the
inquiry, contract, or order, for agencies of the U.S. government.

S1. Referenced Documents S2. Quality Assurance

S1.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date S2.1 Responsibility for Inspection:
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the S2.1.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or pur-
extent referenced herein: chase order, the manufacturer is responsible for the perfor-
S1.1.1 ASTM Standard: mance of all inspection and test requirements specified. Except
B 900 Practice for Packaging of Copper and Copper-Alloy as otherwise specified in the contract or purchase order, the
Mill-Products for U.S. Government Agencies4 manufacturer may use his own or any other suitable facilities
S1.1.2 Federal Standards:5 for the performance of the inspection and test requirements,
Fed. Std. No. 102 Preservation, Packaging and Packing unless disapproved by the purchaser at the time the order is
Levels placed. The purchaser shall have the right to perform any of the
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies) inspections or tests set forth, when such inspections and tests
Fed. Std. No. 185 Identification Marking of Copper and are deemed necessary to assure that the material conforms to
Copper-Base Alloy Mill Products prescribed requirements.
S1.1.3 Military Standards:5
S3. Identification Marking
MIL-STD-105 Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspec-
tion by Attributes S3.1 All material shall be properly marked for identification
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 185 except that the ASTM
specification number and the alloy number shall be used.

4
S4. Preparation for Delivery
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01.
5
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700 S4.1 Preservation, Packaging, Packing:
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS. S4.1.1 Military Agencies—The material shall be separated

3
 B 570
by size, composition, grade or class, and shall be preserved and S4.2 Marking:
packaged, Level A or C, packed Level A, B, or C as specified S4.2.1 Military Agencies—In addition to any special mark-
in the contract or purchase order, in accordance with the ing required by the contract or purchase order, marking for
requirements of Practice B 900. shipment shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-129.
S4.1.2 Civil Agencies—The requirements of Fed. Std. No. S4.2.2 Civil Agencies—In addition to any special marking
102 shall be referenced for definitions of the various levels of required by the contract or purchase order, marking for
packaging protection. shipment shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123.

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. METRIC EQUIVALENTS

X1.1 The SI unit for strength properties now shown is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI). The
derived SI unit for force is the newton (N), which is defined as
that force which when applied to a body having a mass of 1 kg
gives it an acceleration of 1 m/s2 (N = kg·m/s2). The derived SI
unit for pressure or stress is the newton per square metre
(N/m2), which has been named the pascal (Pa) by the General
Conference on Weights and Measures. Since 1 ksi = 6 894 757
Pa, the metric equivalents are expressed as megapascal (MPa),
which is the same as MN/m2 and N/mm2.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

This section identifies principle changes to this specification since the 1996 issue as follows:

(1) Document was revised to meet the requirements of Form

and Style for ASTM Standards and the Committee B05 Outline
of Form of Specifications (OFS).

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 572 – 03

Standard Specification for

UNS N06002, UNS N06230, UNS N12160, and UNS R30556
Rod1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 572; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope Determine Conformance with Specifications5

1.1 This specification2 covers alloys UNS N06002, UNS
N06230, UNS N12160, and UNS R30556* in the form of rod
for heat resisting and general-corrosive service.
1.2 The following products are covered under this specifi-
cation:
1.2.1 Rods 5⁄16 to 3⁄4 in. (7.94 to 19.05 mm) exclusive in
diameter, hot or cold finished, solution-annealed, and pickled
or mechanically descaled.
1.2.2 Rods 3⁄4 to 31⁄2 in. (19.05 to 88.9 mm) inclusive in
diameter, hot or cold finished, solution annealed, ground, or
turned.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 880 Specification for General Requirements for Chemical
Check Analysis Limits for Nickel, Nickel Alloys and
Cobalt Alloys3
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials4
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved June 10, 2003. Published July 2003. Originally
approved in 1972. Last previous edition approved in 1998 as B 572 - 98a.
2
For ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code applications see related Specifi-
cation SB-572 in Section II of that Code.
* New designation established in accordance with ASTM E 527 and SAE J1086,
Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
3 5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
4 6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
E 55 Practice for Sampling Wrought Nonferrous Metals and
Alloys for Determination of Chemical Composition6
E 1473 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel,
Cobalt, and High-Temperature Alloys6
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 rod—product of round solid section furnished in
straight lengths.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
requirements that are necessary for material ordered under this
specification. Examples of such requirements include, but are
not limited to the following:
4.1.1 Alloy .
4.1.2 DimensionsNominal diameter and length. The shortest
useable multiple length should be specified (Table 1).
4.1.3 Certification—State if certification or a report of test
results is required (Section 16).
4.1.4 Purchaser Inspection—State which tests or inspec-
tions are to be witnessed (Section 13).
4.1.5 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
samples should be furnished (9.2.2).
5. Chemical Composition
5.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
chemical composition prescribed in Table 2.
5.2 If a product (check) analysis is made by the purchaser,
the material shall conform to the requirements specified in
Table 2 subject to the permissible tolerances in Specification
B 880.
6. Mechanical and Other Requirements
6.1 The mechanical properties of the material at room
temperature shall conform to those shown in Table 3.
6.2 Grain Size—Annealed alloy (UNS N12160) shall con-
form to an average grain size of ASTM Number 5 or coarser.
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 572 – 03
TABLE 1 Permissible Variations in Length of Rods 7. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations
Random mill lengths 2 to 12 ft (610 to 3660 mm) long with not more 7.1 Diameter—The permissible variations from the speci-
than 25 weight % under 4 ft (1.22 m).
Multiple lengths Furnished in multiples of a specified unit length, fied diameter shall be as prescribed in Table 4.
within the length limits indicated above. 7.2 Out-of-Roundness—The permissible variation in round-
For each multiple, an allowance of 1⁄4 in. (6.35
mm) shall be made for cutting, unless otherwise
ness shall be as prescribed in Table 4.
specified. At the manufacturer’s option, 7.3 Machining Allowances—When the surfaces of finished
individual specified unit lengths may be material are to be machined, the following allowances are
furnished.
Nominal lengths Specified nominal lengths having a range of not
suggested for normal machining operations:
less than 2 ft (610 mm) with no short lengths 7.3.1 As-finished (Annealed and Descaled)—For diameters
allowed. of 5⁄16 to 11⁄16 in. (7.94 to 17.46 mm) inclusive, an allowance of
Cut lengths A specified length to which all rods shall be 1⁄16 in. (1.59 mm) on the diameter should be made for finish
cut with a permissible variation of + 1⁄8 in.
(3.17 mm) − 0. machining.
7.4 Length:
7.4.1 Unless multiple, nominal, or cut lengths are specified,
TABLE 2 Chemical Requirements random mill lengths shall be furnished.
Composition Limits, % 7.4.2 The permissible variations in length of multiple,
Element
UNS N06002 UNS N06230 UNS N12160 UNS R30556 nominal, or cut length rod shall be as prescribed in Table 1.
Nickel remainderA remainderA remainderA 19.0–22.5 Where rods are ordered in multiple lengths, a 1⁄4 -in. (6.35-mm)
Iron 17.0–20.0 3.0 max 3.5 max remainderA length addition shall be allowed for each uncut multiple length.
Chromium 20.5–23.0 20.0–24.0 26.0-30.0 21.0–23.0
Cobalt 0.5–2.5 5.0 max 27.0-33.0 16.0–21.0
7.5 Ends:
Molybdenum 8.0–10.0 1.0–3.00 1.0 max 2.5–4.0 7.5.1 Rods ordered to random or nominal lengths shall be
Tungsten 0.2–1.0 13.0–15.0 1.0 max 2.0–3.5 furnished with either cropped or sawed ends.
Carbon 0.05–0.15 0.05–0.15 0.15 max 0.05–0.15
Silicon 1.00 max 0.25–0.75 2.4-3.0 0.20–0.80 7.5.2 Rods ordered to cut lengths shall be furnished with
Manganese 1.00 max 0.30–1.00 1.5 max 0.50–2.00 square saw cut or machined ends.
Phosphorus 0.04 0.030 max 0.030 max 0.04 max 7.6 Weight—For calculations of mass or weight, the follow-
Sulfur 0.03 0.015 max 0.015 max 0.015 max
Columbium ... ... 1.0 max 0.30 max ing densities shall be used:
Tantalum ... ... ... 0.30–1.25 Alloy Density
Aluminum ... 0.20–0.50 ... 0.10–0.50 lb/in.3 (g/cm3)
Zirconium ... ... ... 0.001–0.10 N06002 0.297 (8.23)
Lanthanum ... 0.005–0.050 ... 0.005–0.10 N06230 0.324 (8.97)
Nitrogen ... ... ... 0.10–0.30 N12160 0.292 (8.08)
Boron ... 0.015 max ... 0.02 max R30556 0.297 (8.23)
Titanium ... ... 0.20–0.80 ...
A
See 12.1.1. 7.7 Straightness—The maximum curvature (depth of chord)
shall not exceed 0.050 in. multiplied by the length of the chord
TABLE 3 Mechanical Property Requirements in feet (0.04 mm multiplied by the length in centimetres).
Tensile Yield Strength Elongation in
Strength, min, (0.2 % Offset), 2 in. (50.8 8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
UNS
ksi (MPA) min, ksi (MPa) mm) or 4DA
min, %
8.1 The material shall be uniform in quality and condition,
smooth, and free of injurious defects.
N06002 95 (660) 35 (240) 35
N06230B 110 (760) 45 (310) 40
N12160C 90 (620) 35 (240) 40 9. Sampling
R30556D 100 (690) 45 (310) 40
A
9.1 Lots for Chemical Analysis and Mechanical Testing:
D refers to the diameter of the tension specimen.
B
Solution annealed at a temperature between 2200 to 2275°F (1204 to 1246°C) 9.1.1 A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one heat.
followed by a water quench or rapidly cooled by other means.
C
9.1.2 A lot of bar for mechanical testing shall be defined as
Solution annealed at 1950°F (1065°C) minimum.
D
Solution annealed at 2100°F (1150°C) minimum.
the material from one heat in the same condition and specified
diameter.
9.2 Sampling for Chemical Analysis:

TABLE 4 Permissible Variations in Diameter and Out-of-Roundness of Finished Rods

Permissible Variations, in. (mm)
Specified Diameter, in. (mm) Diameter
Out of Roundness, max
+ −
Hot-Finished, Annealed, and Descaled Rods
5⁄16 to 7⁄16 (7.94–11.11), incl 0.012 (0.30) 0.012 (0.30) 0.018 (0.46)
Over 7⁄16 to 5⁄8 (11.11–15.87), incl 0.014 (0.36) 0.014 (0.36) 0.020 (0.51)
Over 5⁄8 to 3⁄4 (15.87–19.05), excl 0.016 (0.41) 0.016 (0.41) 0.024 (0.61)
Hot-Finished, Annealed, and Ground or Turned Rods
⁄ to 31⁄2 (19.05–88.9), incl
34 0.010 (0.25) 0 0.008 (0.20)

2
 B 572 – 03
9.2.1 A representative sample shall be obtained from each
heat during pouring or subsequent processing.
9.2.2 Product (check) analysis shall be wholly the respon-
sibility of the purchaser.
9.3 Sampling for Mechanical Testing—A representative
sample shall be taken from each lot of finished material.
10. Number of Tests and Retests
10.1 Chemical Analysis, One test per heat.
10.2 Tension Tests—One test per lot.
10.3 Retests—If the specimen used in the mechanical test of
any lot fails to meet the specified requirements, two additional
specimens shall be taken from different sample pieces and
tested. The results of the tests on both of these specimens shall
meet the specified requirements.
11. Specimen Preparation
11.1 Tension test specimens shall be taken from material
after final heat treatment and tested in the direction of
fabrication.
11.2 Tension test specimens shall be any of the standard or
subsized specimens shown in Test Methods E 8.
11.3 In the event of disagreement, the referee specimen
shall be the largest possible round specimen shown in Test
Methods E 8.
12. Test Methods
12.1 The chemical composition and mechanical properties
of the material as enumerated in this specification shall be
determined, in case of disagreement, in accordance with the
following ASTM methods:
12.1.1 Chemical Analysis—Test Methods E 1473. For ele-
ments not covered by Test Methods E 1473, the referee method
shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
purchaser. The composition of the remainder element shall be
determined arithmetically by difference.
12.1.2 Tension Test—Test Methods E 8.
12.1.3 Method of Sampling—Practice E 55.
12.1.4 Determining Significant Places—Practice E 29.
12.2 For purposes of determining compliance with the
limits in this specification, an observed value or a calculated
value shall be rounded in accordance with the rounding method
of Practice E 29:
3
Rounded Unit for Observed or
Requirements Calculated Value
Chemical composition and tolerance nearest unit in the last right-hand
place of figures of the specified
limit
Tensile strength and yield strength nearest 1000 psi (7 MPa)
Elongation nearest 1 %
13. Inspection
13.1 Inspection of the material shall be made as agreed upon
between the manufacturer and the purchaser as part of the
purchase contract.
14. Rejection and Rehearing
14.1 Material, tested by the purchaser, that fails to conform
to the requirements of this specification may be rejected.
Rejection should be reported to the producer or supplier
promptly and in writing. In case of dissatisfaction with the
results of the test, the producer or supplier may make claim for
a rehearing.
15. Certification
15.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
manufacturer’s certification shall be furnished to the purchaser
stating that material has been manufactured, tested, and in-
spected in accordance with this specification, and that the test
results on representative samples meet specification require-
ments. When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
report of the test results shall be furnished.
16. Product Marking
16.1 Each piece of material 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) and over in
diameter shall be marked with this specification number alloy,
name of the material, and size of the product.
16.2 Each bundle or shipping container shall be marked
with the name of the material; this specification number alloy;
the size; gross, tare, and net weight; consignor and consignee
address; contract or order number; and such other information
as may be defined in the contract or order.
17. Keywords
17.1 rod; N06002; N06230; N12160; R30556
 B 572 – 03
APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. HEAT TREATMENT

X1.1 Proper heat treatment during or subsequent to fabri- facturer shall be consulted for details.
cation is necessary for optimum performance, and the manu-

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 571 – 97 (Reapproved 2003)
Standard Practice for
Qualitative Adhesion Testing of Metallic Coatings1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 571; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This practice describes simple, qualitative tests for
evaluating the adhesion of metallic coatings on various sub-
stances.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Significance and Use
2.1 These tests are useful for production control and for
acceptance testing of products.
2.2 Interpreting the results of qualitative methods for deter-
mining the adhesion of metallic coatings is often a controver-
sial subject. If more than one test is used, failure to pass any
one test is considered unsatisfactory. In many instances, the
end use of the coated article or its method of fabrication will
suggest the technique that best represents functional require-
ments. For example, an article that is to be subsequently
formed would suggest a draw or a bend test; an article that is
to be soldered or otherwise exposed to heat would suggest a
heat-quench test. If a part requires baking or heat treating after
plating, adhesion tests should be carried out after such post-
treatment as well.
2.3 Several of the tests are limited to specific types of
coatings, thickness ranges, ductilities, or compositions of the
substrate. These limitations are noted generally in the test
descriptions and are summarized in Table 1 for certain metallic
coatings.
2.4 “Perfect” adhesion exists if the bonding between the
coating and the substrate is greater than the cohesive strength
of either. Such adhesion is usually obtained if good electro-
plating practices are followed.
2.5 For many purposes, the adhesion test has the objective
of detecting any adhesion less than “perfect.” For such a test,
1
These test methods are under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on
Metallic and Inorganic Coatings and are the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B08.10 on Test Methods.
Current edition approved May 10, 2003. Published July 2003. Originally
approved in 1979. Last previous edition approved in 1997 as B 571 – 97.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
one uses any means available to attempt to separate the coating
from the substrate. This may be prying, hammering, bending,
beating, heating, sawing, grinding, pulling, scribing, chiseling,
or a combination of such treatments. If the coating peels,
flakes, or lifts from the substrate, the adhesion is less than
perfect.
2.6 If evaluation of adhesion is required, it may be desirable
to use one or more of the following tests. These tests have
varying degrees of severity; and one might serve to distinguish
between satisfactory and unsatisfactory adhesion in a specific
application. The choice for each situation must be determined.
2.7 When this guideline is used for acceptance inspection,
the method or methods to be used must be specified. Because
the results of tests in cases of marginal adhesion are subject to
interpretation, agreement shall be reached on what is accept-
able.
2.8 If the size and shape of the item to be tested precludes
use of the designated test, equivalent test panels may be
appropriate. If permitted, test panels shall be of the same
material and have the same surface finish as the item to be
tested and shall be processed through the same preplating,
electroplating, and postplating cycle with the parts they repre-
sent.
3. Bend Tests
3.1 Bend the part with the coated surface away over a
mandrel until its two legs are parallel. The mandrel diameter
should be four times the thickness of the sample. Examine the
deformed area visually under low magnification, for example,
43, for peeling or flaking of the coating from the substrate,
which is evidence of poor adhesion. If the coating fractures or
blisters, a sharp blade may be used to attempt to lift off the
coating. With hard or brittle coatings, cracking usually occurs
in the bend area. Such cracks may or may not propagate into
the substrate. In either case, cracks are not indicative of poor
adhesion unless the coating can be peeled back with a sharp
instrument.
3.2 Bend the part repeatedly, back and forth, through an
angle of 180° until failure of the basis metal occurs. Examine
the region at low magnification, for example, 103, for sepa-
ration or peeling of the coating. Prying with a sharp blade will
indicate unsatisfactory adhesion by lift off of the coating.
 B 571 – 97 (2003)
TABLE 1 Adhesion Tests Appropriate for Various Coatings
Coating MaterialA

Adhesion Test Lead and Tin and

Nickel and
Cadmium Chromium Copper Lead/Tin Nickel Palladium Rhodium Silver Tin/Lead Zinc Gold
Chromium
Alloy Alloy
Bend + − + + + + + + + + + +
Burnish − + + − + + − − + − + −
Chisel/knife + + + + + − + − + + − +
Draw − − + − + + − − − − + −
File − + + + + + − + + + − +
Grind and + + − − + + + − − + + −
saw
Heat/quench − + + + + + − − + + − +
Impact + − + − + + − − − − + −
Peel − + + − + − − − + + − +
Push − − − − + + − − − − + −
Scribe − − + − + − − − − − − −
A
+ Appropriate; − not appropriate.

TABLE 2 Temperature Test Guide

Coating Material
Chromium,
Lead, Gold and
Substrate Nickel, Nickel + Tin, Zinc, Palladium, Rhodium,
Tin/Lead, Silver,
Chromium, Temperature, Temperature, Temperature, Temperature,
Temperature, Temperature,
Copper, °C °C °C °C
°C °C
Temperature, °C
Steel 250 150 150 150 250 350 185
Zinc alloys 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
Copper and 250 150 150 150 250 350 185
copper alloys
Aluminum and 220 150 150 150 220 220 185
aluminum alloys

4. Burnishing Test may be observed directly or evaluated further by techniques

4.1 Rub a coated area of about 5 cm with a smooth-ended
tool for approximately 15 s. A suitable tool is a steel rod 6 mm
in diameter with a smooth hemispherical end. The pressure
shall be sufficient to burnish the coating at each stroke but not
so great as to dig into it. Blisters, lifting, or peeling should not
develop. Generally, thick deposits cannot be evaluated satis-
factorily.
5. Chisel-Knife Test
5.1 Use a sharp cold chisel to penetrate the coating on the
article being evaluated. Alternatively the chisel may be placed
in back of an overhang area of the coating or at a coating-
substrate interface exposed by sectioning the article with a saw.
A knife may be substituted for the chisel with or without
hammering or light tapping. If it is possible to remove the
deposit, the adhesion is not satisfactory. Soft or thin coatings
cannot be evaluated for adhesion by this method.
6. Draw Test
6.1 Form a suitable sample about 60 mm in diameter into a
flanged cap approximately 38 mm in diameter, to a depth up to
18 mm, through the use of a set of adjustable dies in an
ordinary punch press.2 Penetration of the male die may be
continued until the cap fractures. The adhesion of the coating
described in Section 5 for detachment from the substrate. If
there is peeling or flaking of the coating or if it can be
detached, the adhesion is not satisfactory.
6.2 Results from this technique must be interpreted cau-
tiously, because the ductilities of both the coating and substrate
are involved.
7. File Test
7.1 Saw off a piece of the coated specimen and inspect it for
detachment at the deposit/substrate interface. Apply coarse mill
file across the sawed edge from the substrate toward the
coating so as to raise it, using an approach angle of approxi-
mately 45° to the coating surface. Lifting or peeling is evidence
of unsatisfactory adhesion.
7.2 This technique is not suitable for thin or soft coatings.
8. Grind-Saw Test
8.1 Hold the coated article against a rough emery wheel so
that the wheel cuts from substrate toward the deposit in a jerky
or bumpy fashion. A hack saw may be substituted for the
wheel, making sure to saw in the direction that tends to
separate the coating from the substrate. Lifting or peeling is
evidence of unsatisfactory adhesion.
8.2 This technique is especially effective on hard or brittle
coatings but is not suitable for thin or soft coatings.

2
Romanoff, F. P., Transactions, Electrochem. Soc., Vol 65, 1934, p. 385;
Proceedings, Amer. Electroplaters Soc. Vol 22, 1934, p. 155; Monthly Review,
Amer. Electroplaters Soc., Vol 22, April 1935, p. 8.
9. Heat-Quench Test
9.1 Heat the coated article in an oven for a sufficient time
for it to reach the temperature shown in Table 2. Maintain the

2
 B 571 – 97 (2003)
temperature of the oven within 10°C of the nominal. Coatings
and substrates that are sensitive to oxidation should be heated
in an inert or reducing atmosphere or a suitable liquid. Then
quench the part in water or other suitable liquid at room
temperature.
9.2 Flaking or peeling of the deposit is evidence of unsat-
isfactory adhesion. Blisters may erupt during the heat and
quench test when plating solution is entrapped in substrate
surface pits or pores which are bridged by the deposit. If the
deposited coating cannot be peeled or lifted from the substrate
in an area adjacent to the blister(s), the appearance of blisters
should not be interpreted as evidence of inferior adhesion.
9.3 Diffusion and subsequent alloying of metals may im-
prove the bond strength of electrodeposits. In some cases, a
brittle layer may be created by the materials involved causing
peeling as a result of fracture rather than poor adhesion. This
would not give a correct indication of the as-plated bond
strength.
9.4 This test is nondestructive if the procedure does not
create unwanted effects on parts.
10. Impact Test
10.1 Use a hammer or impact device coupled with a suitable
backing block to support the article to be tested to deform the
sample. Reproducible results are more easily obtained by the
use of a suitably modified impact tester where the force is
reproducible and the impact head contour is in the form of a
5-mm diameter ball, shock loaded by a falling weight or
swinging pendulum weight. The severity of the test may be
altered by changing the load and diameter of the ball. Exfolia-
tion or blisters in and around indentations are evidence of
inadequate adhesion.
10.2 This test is sometimes difficult to interpret. Soft and
ductile coatings are generally not suited for evaluation.
11. Peel Test
11.1 Bond a strip of steel or brass about 1.5 mm thick and
20 mm wide by solder or suitable adhesive to a properly flat
area of the coated surface of the article. Adhesive-backed tape
may be considered as a possible alternative. Heat curing of the
adhesive may be used, keeping in mind considerations noted in
9.3. The angle of pull shall be 90° to the surface. For
reproducible results, the rate of pull, the thickness and width of
the strip, and deposit thickness must be standardized. Failure in
the coating/substrate interface is evidence of inadequate adhe-
sion.
11.2 The tensile and shear strengths of adhesives and
solders limit the range of adhesion strengths that can be
evaluated. A quantitative analysis of the factors involved has
been published.3
3 4
Saubestre, E. B., Durney, L. J., Hajdu, J., and Bastenbeck, E., Plating, Vol 52,
October 1965, pp. 982–1000.
3
12. Push Test
12.1 Drill a blind hole 0.75 cm in diameter from the
underside until the point of the drill tip comes within approxi-
mately 1.5 mm of the deposit/substrate interface on the
opposite side. Supporting the material on a ring about 2.5 cm
in diameter, apply steady pressure over the blind hole using a
hardened steel punch 0.6 cm in diameter until a button sample
is pushed out.3 Exfoliation or peeling of the coating in the
button or crater areas is evidence of inadequate adhesion.
12.2 Soft, very ductile, and thin deposits are generally not
suited for this technique.
13. Scribe-Grid Test
13.1 Scribe three or more parallel lines or a rectangular grid
pattern on the article using a hardened steel tool ground to a
sharp (30°) point with a distance between the scribed lines of
approximately ten times the nominal coating thickness, with a
minimum distance of 0.4 mm. In scribing the lines, use
sufficient pressure to cut through the coating to the substrate in
a single stroke. If any portion of coating between the lines
breaks away from the substrate, the adhesion is inadequate.
13.2 When apparently satisfactory adhesion is indicated,
apply a pressure-sensitive tape, having an adhesion bond
strength of at least 45 g/mm, using firm finger pressure onto a
clean grid area. Make sure that any loose coating particles from
scribing do not remain. Shortly thereafter, remove the tape by
seizing a free end and pulling it off rapidly (not jerked) back
upon itself as close to an angle of 180° as possible. The
adhesion is not adequate if the tape has deposit adhering to it
that comes from the area between the scribed lines. Deposit
continuous to the scribed lines is not considered.
13.2.1 The tape supplier4 shall specify that their tape has a
sufficient adhesion bond strength. The tape shall be wide
enough to cover three or more parallel lines of the scribed area.
13.3 Generally, thick deposits are not suitable for evaluation
unless a chisel or other sharp instrument is used to pry the
exposed coating/substrate interface, in which case this tech-
nique becomes a variant of Section 5.
14. Test-Coating Systems
14.1 Recommended adhesion tests for a variety of coating
systems are given in Table 1.
15. Precision and Bias
15.1 No statement is made about the precision and bias of
these tests because of their qualitative nature.
16. Keywords
16.1 adhesion; metallic coatings
Permacel 99, a product of and manufactured by Permacel, New Brunswick, NJ
08903, is reported to be a suitable product for this purpose.
 B 571 – 97 (2003)
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 573 – 00

Standard Specification for

Nickel-Molybdenum-Chromium-Iron Alloys (UNS N10003,
N10242)* Rod1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 573; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 4. Ordering Information

1.1 This specification2 covers nickel-molybdenum-
chromium-iron alloys (UNS N10003 and UNS N10242)* rod
for use in general corrosive service.
1.2 The following products are covered under this specifi-
cation:
1.2.1 Rods 5⁄16to 3⁄4 in. (7.94 to 19.05 mm) excl in diameter,
hot or cold finished, annealed, and pickled or mechanically
descaled.
1.2.2 Rods 3⁄4to 31⁄2 in. (19.05 to 88.9 mm) incl in diameter,
hot or cold finished, annealed, ground, or turned.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 880 Specification for General Requirements for Chemical
Check Analysis Limits for Nickel, Nickel Alloys and
Cobalt Alloys3
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials4
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications5
E 1473 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel,
Cobalt, and High-Temperature Alloys6
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 rod—a product of round solid section furnished in
straight lengths.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Thier Alloys.
Current edition approved May 10, 2000. Published June 2000. Originally
published as B 573 – 72. Last previous edition B 573 – 95a.
2
For ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code applications see Specification
SB-573 in Section II of that Code.
* New designation established in accordance with ASTM E527 and SAE J1086,
Recommended Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06.
4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
requirements that are necessary for the safe and satisfactory
performance of material ordered under this specification.
Examples of such requirements include but are not limited to
the following:
4.1.1 Dimensions—Nominal diameter and length. The
shortest usable multiple length shall be specified (Table 1).
4.1.2 Certification— State if certification or a report of test
results is required (Section 15).
4.1.3 Purchaser Inspection—State which tests or inspec-
tions are to be witnessed (Section 13).
4.1.4 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
samples shall be furnished (9.2.2).
5. Chemical Composition
5.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to
chemical composition prescribed in Table 2.
5.2 If a product (check) analysis is made by the purchaser,
the material shall conform to the requirements specified in
Table 2 subject to the permissible tolerances in B 880.
6. Mechanical Properties and Other Requirements
6.1 The mechanical properties of the material at room
temperature shall conform to those shown in Table 3.
7. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
7.1 Diameter—The permissible variations from the speci-
fied diameter shall be as prescribed in Table 4.
7.2 Out-of-Roundness— The permissible variation in
roundness shall be as prescribed in Table 4.
7.3 Machining Allowances—When the surfaces of finished
material are to be machined, the following allowances are
suggested for normal machining operations:
7.3.1 As-finished (Annealed and Descaled)—For diameters
of 5⁄16to 11⁄16 in. (7.94 to 17.46 mm) incl, an allowance of 1⁄16 in.
(1.59 mm) on the diameter should be made for finish machin-
ing.
7.4 Length:
7.4.1 Unless multiple, nominal, or cut lengths are specified,
random mill lengths shall be furnished.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 573
TABLE 1 Permissible Variations in Length of Rods 9. Sampling
Random mill 2 to 12 ft (610 to 3660 mm) long with not more than
lengths 25 weight % under 4 ft (1.22 m).
9.1 Lots for Chemical Analysis and Mechanical Testing:
Multiple Furnished in multiples of a specified unit length, 9.1.1 A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one heat.
lengths within the length limits indicated above. For each
multiple, an allowance of 1⁄4 in. (6.35 mm) shall
9.1.2 A lot of bar for mechanical testing shall be defined as
be made for cutting, unless otherwise specified. At the material from one heat in the same condition and specified
the manufacturer’s option, individual specified unit diameter.
lengths may be furnished.
Nominal Specified nominal lengths having a range of not less 9.2 Sampling for Chemical Analysis:
lengths than 2 ft (610 mm) with no short lengths allowed. 9.2.1 A representative sample shall be obtained from each
Cut lengths A specified length to which all rods shall be cut with
a permissible variation of + 1⁄8 in. (3.17
heat during pouring or subsequent processing.
mm) − 0. 9.2.2 Product (check) analysis shall be wholly the respon-
sibility of the purchaser.
9.3 Sampling for Mechanical Testing—A representative
TABLE 2 Chemical Requirements sample shall be taken from each lot of finished material.
Composition, %
Element
UNS N10242 UNS N10003 10. Number of Tests and Retests
Chromium 7.0-9.0 6.0–8.0
Iron, max 2.0 5.0
10.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per heat.
Carbon 0.03 max 0.04–0.08 10.2 Tension Tests— One test per lot.
Silicon, max 0.80 1.00 10.3 Retests—If the specimen used in the mechanical test of
Cobalt, max 1.00 0.20
Manganese, max 0.80 1.00 any lot fails to meet the specified requirements, two additional
Tungsten, max ... 0.50 specimens shall be taken from different sample pieces and
Vanadium, max ... 0.50 tested. The results of the tests on both of these specimens shall
Molybdenum 24.0-26.0 15.0–18.0
Phosphorus, max 0.030 0.015 meet the specified requirements.
Sulfur, max 0.015 0.020
Aluminum plus titanium, max ... 0.50
Copper, max 0.50 0.35
11. Specimen Preparation
Boron, max 0.006 0.010 11.1 Tension test specimens shall be taken from material
Nickel remainder remainder
Aluminum, max 0.50 ... after final heat-treatment and tested in the direction of fabri-
cation.
11.2 Tension test specimens shall be any of the standard or
TABLE 3 Mechanical Property Requirements subsized specimens shown in Test Methods E 8.
UNS Tensile Strength, Yield Strength (0.2 Elongation in 2 in. 11.3 In the event of disagreement, the referee specimen
min, % Offset), min, ksi (50.8 mm) or 4DA shall be the largest possible round specimen shown in Test
ksi (MPa) (MPa) min, %
Methods E 8.
N10003 100 000(690) 40 000(280) 35
N10242 105 000(725) 45 000(310) 40
A
4D— D refers to the diameter of the tension specimen.
12. Test Methods
12.1 The chemical composition and mechanical properties
7.4.2 The permissible variations in length of multiple, of the material as enumerated in this specification shall be
nominal, or cut length rod shall be as prescribed in Table 1. determined, in case of disagreement, in accordance with the
Where rods are ordered in multiple lengths, 1⁄4 in. (6.35 mm) following ASTM methods:
length addition shall be allowed for each uncut multiple length. 12.1.1 Chemical Analysis—Test Methods E 1473.
7.5 Ends: 12.1.2 Tension Test— Test Methods E 8.
7.5.1 Rods ordered to random or nominal lengths shall be 12.1.3 Determining Significant Places—Practice E 29.
furnished with either cropped or sawed ends. 12.2 For purposes of determining compliance with the
7.5.2 Rods ordered to cut lengths shall be furnished with limits in this specification, an observed value or a calculated
square saw cut or machined ends. value shall be rounded in accordance with the rounding method
7.6 Weight—For calculation of mass or weight, the follow- of Practice E 29:
ing densities shall be used: Rounded Unit for Observed or
Requirements
Alloy lb/in3 g/cm3 Calculated Value
N10003 0.317 8.78
N10242 0.327 9.05 Chemical composition and tolerance nearest unit in the last right-hand place
of figures of the specified limit
7.7 Straightness— The maximum curvature (depth of Tensile strength and yield strength nearest 1000 psi (7 MPa)
chord) shall not exceed 0.050 in. multiplied by the length of the Elongation nearest 1 %

chord in feet (0.04 mm multiplied by the length in centimetres).

13. Inspection
8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance 13.1 Inspection of the material shall be made as agreed upon
8.1 The material shall be uniform in quality and condition, between the manufacturer and the purchaser as part of the
smooth, and free of injurious imperfections. purchase contract.

2
 B 573
TABLE 4 Permissible Variations in Diameter and Out-of-Roundness of Finished Rods
Permissible Variations, in. (mm)
Specified Diameter, in. (mm) Diameter
Out of Roundness, max
Plus Minus
Hot-Finished, Annealed, and Descaled Rods
5⁄16 to 7⁄16 (7.94 to 11.11), incl 0.012 (0.30) 0.012 (0.30) 0.018 (0.46)
Over 7⁄16 to 5⁄8(11.11 to 15.87), incl 0.014 (0.36) 0.014 (0.36) 0.020 (0.51)
Over 5⁄8 to 3⁄4 (15.87 to 19.05), excl 0.016 (0.41) 0.016 (0.41) 0.024 (0.61)
Hot-Finished, Annealed, and Ground or Turned Rods
⁄ to 31⁄2 (19.05–88.9), incl
34 0.010 (0.25) 0 0.008 (0.20)

14. Rejection and Rehearing 16. Product Marking

14.1 Material tested by the purchaser that fails to conform to
the requirements of this specification may be rejected. Rejec-
tion should be reported to the producer or supplier promptly
and in writing. In case of dissatisfaction with the results of the
test, the producer or supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
15. Certification
15.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
manufacturer’s certification shall be furnished to the purchaser
stating that material has been manufactured, tested, and in-
spected in accordance with this specification, and that the test
results on representative samples meet specification require-
ments. When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
report of the test results shall be furnished.
16.1 Each piece of material 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) and over in
diameter shall be marked with this specification number, name
of the material, and size of the product.
16.2 Each bundle or shipping container shall be marked
with the name of the material; this specification number; the
size; gross, tare, and net weight; consignor and consignee
address; contract or order number; and such other information
as may be defined in the contract or order.
17. Keywords
17.1 rod; UNS N10003; UNS N10242

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. HEAT TREATMENT

X1.1 Proper heat treatment during or subsequent to fabri-

cation is necessary for optimum performance, and themanu-
facturer shall be consulted for details.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 574 – 04

Standard Specification for

Low-Carbon Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum, Low-Carbon
Nickel-Molybdenum-Chromium-Tantalum, Low-Carbon
Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Copper, and Low-Carbon
Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten Alloy Rod1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 574; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification2 covers rod of low-carbon nickel-
chromium-molybdenum alloys (UNS N10276, N06022,
N06035, N06455, N06058, and N06059)*, low-carbon nickel-
molybdenum-chromium-tantalum (UNS N06210), low-carbon
nickel-chromium-molybdenum-copper alloy (UNS N06200),
and low-carbon nickel-chromium-molybdenum-tungsten
(UNS N06686) as shown in Table 1, for use in general
corrosive service.
1.2 The following products are covered under this specifi-
cation:
1.2.1 Rods 5⁄16 to 3⁄4 in. (7.94 to 19.05 mm), exclusive, in
diameter, hot or cold finished, solution annealed and pickled, or
mechanically descaled.
1.2.2 Rods 3⁄4 to 31⁄2 in. (19.05 to 88.9 mm), inclusive, in
diameter, hot or cold finished, solution annealed, ground or
turned.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Feb. 1, 2004. Published February 2004. Originally
approved in 1972. Last previous edition approved in 1999 as B 574 – 99a.
2 3
For ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code applications see related Specifi-
cation SB-574 in Section II of that Code.
* New designation established in accordance with ASTM E 527 and SAE J1086,
Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
2.1 ASTM Standards: 3
B 880 Specification for General Requirements for Chemical
Check Analysis Limits for Nickel, Nickel Alloys and
Cobalt Alloys
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications
E 55 Practice for Sampling Wrought Nonferrous Metals and
Alloys for Determination of Chemical Composition
E 1473 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel,
Cobalt, and High-Temperature Alloys
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 rod, n—a product of round solid section furnished in
straight lengths.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
requirements that are necessary for material ordered under this
specification. Examples of such requirements include, but are
not limited to the following:
4.1.1 Alloy—Table 1.
4.1.2 Dimensions—Nominal diameter and length. The
shortest useable multiple length should be specified (Table 2).
4.1.3 Certification— State if certification or a report of test
results is required (Section 15).
4.1.4 Purchaser Inspection—State which tests or inspec-
tions are to be witnessed (Section 13).
4.1.5 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
samples should be furnished (9.2.2).
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 574 – 04
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
Composition Limits, %
Element Alloy Alloy Alloy Alloy Alloy Alloy Alloy Alloy Alloy
N06035 N10276 N06022 N06455 N06059 N06058 N06200 N06210 N06686
Molybdenum 7.60–9.00 15.0–17.0 12.5–14.5 14.0–17.0 15.0–16.5 19.0 - 21.0 15.0–17.0 18.0–20.0 15.0-17.0
Chromium 32.25–34.25 14.5–16.5 20.0–22.5 14.0–18.0 22.0–24.0 20.0- 23.0 22.0–24.0 18.0–20.0 19.0-23.0
Iron 2.00 max 4.0–7.0 2.0–6.0 3.0 max 1.5, max 1.5, max 3.0 max 1.0 max 5.0 max
Tungsten 0.60 max 3.0–4.5 2.5–3.5 ... ... 0.3 max ... ... 3.0-4.4
Cobalt, max 1.00 2.5 2.5 2.0 0.3 0.3 max 2.0 max 1.0 ...
Carbon, max 0.050 0.010 0.015 0.015 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.015 0.010
Silicon, max 0.60 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.08 0.08 0.08
Manganese, max 0.50 1.0 0.50 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.75
Vanadium, max 0.20 0.35 0.35 ... ... ... ... 0.35 ...
Phosphorus, max 0.030 0.04 0.02 0.04 0.015 0.015 0.025 0.02 0.04
Sulfur, max 0.015 0.03 0.02 0.03 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.02 0.02
Titanium ... ... ... 0.7 max ... ... ... ... 0.02-0.25
Nickel remainderA remainderA remainderA remainderA Bal Bal remainderA remainderA remainderA
Aluminum 0.40 max ... ... ... 0.1–0.4 0.40 max 0.50 max ... ...
Copper 0.30 max ... ... ... 0.50 max 0.50 max 1.3–1.9 ... ...
Tantalum ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1.5–2.2 ...
A
See 12.1.1.

TABLE 2 Permissible Variations in Diameter and Out-of-Roundness of Finished Rods

Permissible Variations, in. (mm)
Specified Diameter, in. (mm) Diameter
Out of Roundness, max
+ −
5⁄16 Hot-Finished, Annealed, and Descaled Rods

5⁄16 –7⁄16 (7.94–11.11), incl 0.012 (0.30) 0.012 (0.30) 0.018 (0.46)
Over 7⁄16 –5⁄8 (11.11–15.87), incl 0.014 (0.36) 0.014 (0.36) 0.020 (0.51)
Over 5⁄8 –3⁄4 (15.87–19.05), excl 0.016 (0.41) 0.016 (0.41) 0.024 (0.61)
Hot-Finished, Annealed, and Ground or Turned Rods
34 ⁄ –31⁄2 (19.05–88.9), incl 0.010 (0.25) 0 0.008 (0.20)

5. Chemical Composition 7.3 Machining Allowances—When the surfaces of finished

5.1 The material shall conform to the composition limits
specified in Table 1.
5.2 If a product (check) analysis is made by the purchaser,
the material shall conform to the product (check) analysis
variations per Specification B 880.
material are to be machined, the following allowances are
suggested for normal machining operations.
7.3.1 As-finished (Annealed and Descaled)—For diameters
of 5⁄16 to 11⁄16 in. (7.94 to 17.46 mm) inclusive, an allowance of
1⁄16 in. (1.59 mm) on the diameter should be made for finish

6. Mechanical Properties and Other Requirements
6.1 The mechanical properties of the material at room
temperature shall conform to those shown in Table 3.
7. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
7.1 Diameter—The permissible variations from the speci-
fied diameter shall be as prescribed in Table 2.
7.2 Out of Roundness— The permissible variation in round-
ness shall be as prescribed in Table 2.
machining.
7.4 Length:
7.4.1 Unless multiple, nominal, or cut lengths are specified,
random mill lengths shall be furnished.
7.4.2 The permissible variations in length of multiple,
nominal, or cut length rod shall be as prescribed in Table 4.
Where rods are ordered in multiple lengths, a 1⁄4-in. (6.35-mm)
length addition shall be allowed for each uncut multiple length.
7.5 Ends:

TABLE 3 Mechanical Property Requirements

Elongation in 2 in.
Yield Strength (0.2 % Offset), min, psi
Alloy Tensile Strength, min, psi (MPa) (50.8 mm) or 4DA
(MPa)
min, %
N10276 100 000 (690) 41 000 (283) 40
N06022 100 000 (690) 45 000 (310) 45
N06035 85 000 (586) 35 000 (241) 30
N06455 100 000 (690) 40 000 (276) 40
N06058 110 000 (760) 52 000 (360) 40
N06059 100 000 (690) 45 000 (310) 45
N06200 100 000 (690) 41 000 (283) 45
N06686 100 000 (690) 45 000 (310) 45
N06210 100 000 (690) 45 000 (310) 45
A
D refers to the diameter of the tension specimen.

2
 B 574 – 04
TABLE 4 Permissible Variations in Length of Rods tested. The results of the tests on both of these specimens shall
Random mill lengths 2 to 12 ft (610 to 3660 mm) long with not more meet the specified requirements.
than 25 weight % under 4 ft (1.22 m).
Multiple lengths Furnished in multiples of a specified unit length, within
the length limits indicated above. For 11. Specimen Preparation
each multiple, an allowance of 1⁄4 in. (6.35
mm) shall be made for cutting, unless
11.1 Tension test specimens shall be taken from material
otherwise specified. At the manufacturer’s after final heat-treatment and tested in the direction of fabri-
option, individual specified unit lengths may be cation.
furnished.
Nominal lengths Specified nominal lengths having a range of not
11.2 Tension test specimens shall be any of the standard or
less than 2 ft (610 mm) with no short lengths subsized specimens shown in Test Methods E 8.
allowed. 11.3 In the event of disagreement, the referee specimen
Cut lengths A specified length to which all rods shall be cut
with a permissible variation of 61⁄8 in. (3.17 shall be the largest possible round specimen shown in Test
mm) − 0. Methods E 8.

12. Test Methods

12.1 The chemical composition and mechanical properties
7.5.1 Rods ordered to random or nominal lengths shall be of the material as enumerated in this specification shall be
furnished with either cropped or sawed ends. determined, in case of disagreement, in accordance with the
7.5.2 Rods ordered to cut lengths shall be furnished with following ASTM methods:
square sawcut or machined ends. 12.1.1 Chemical Analysis—Tests Methods E 1473, For ele-
7.6 Weight—For calculations of mass or weight, the follow- ments not covered by Test Methods E 1473, the referee method
ing densities shall be used: shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
Alloy Density purchaser. The nickel composition shall be determined arith-
lb/in.3 g/cm3
metically by difference.
N10276 0.321 8.87
N06022 0.314 8.69 12.1.2 Tension Test—Test Methods E 8.
N06035 0.296 8.18 12.1.3 Method of Sampling—Practice E 55.
N06455 0.312 8.64
N06058 0.318 8.80
12.1.4 Determining Significant Places—Practice E 29.
N06059 0.311 8.60 12.2 For purposes of determining compliance with the
N06200 0.307 8.50 limits in this specification, an observed value or a calculated
N06686 0.315 8.73
N06210 0.316 8.76
value shall be rounded in accordance with the rounding method
of Practice E 29:
7.7 Straightness— The maximum curvature (depth of Requirements Rounded Unit for Observed or
chord) shall not exceed 0.050 in. multiplied by the length of the Calculated Value
chord in feet (0.04 mm multiplied by the length in centimetres).
Chemical composition and nearest unit in the last right-hand place of
tolerances figures of the specified limit
8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance Tensile strength and yield nearest 1000 psi (7 MPa)
8.1 The material shall be uniform in quality and condition, strength
Elongation nearest 1 %
smooth, and free of injurious imperfections.
13. Inspection
9. Sampling
13.1 Inspection of the material shall be made as agreed upon
9.1 Lots for Chemical Analysis and Mechanical Testing:
by the manufacturer and the purchaser as part of the purchase
9.1.1 A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one heat.
contract.
9.1.2 A lot of bar for mechanical testing shall be defined as
the material from one heat in the same condition and specified
14. Rejection and Rehearing
diameter.
9.2 Sampling for Chemical Analysis: 14.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
9.2.1 A representative sample shall be obtained from each this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
heat during pouring or subsequent processing. to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
9.2.2 Product (check) analysis shall be wholly the respon- dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
sibility of the purchaser. supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
9.3 Sampling for Mechanical Testing—A representative
sample shall be taken from each lot of finished material. 15. Certification
15.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
10. Number of Tests and Retests manufacturer’s certification shall be furnished to the purchaser
10.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per heat. stating that material has been manufactured, tested, and in-
10.2 Tension Tests— One test per lot. spected in accordance with this specification, and that the test
10.3 Retests—If the specimen used in the mechanical test of results on representative samples meet specification require-
any lot fails to meet the specified requirements, two additional ments. When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
specimens shall be taken from different sample pieces and report of the test results shall be furnished.

3
 B 574 – 04
16. Product Marking
16.1 Each piece of material 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) and over in
diameter shall be marked with the specification number, alloy,
heat number, manufacturer’s identification, and size. The
markings shall have no deleterious effect on the material or its
performance and shall be sufficiently stable to withstand
normal handling.
16.2 Each bundle or shipping container shall be marked
with the name of the material; this specification number; alloy;
the size; gross, tare and net weight; consignor and consignee
address; contract or order number; and such other information
as may be defined in the contract or order.
17. Keywords
17.1 N06022; N06035; N06058; N06059; N06200;
N06210; N06455; N06686; N10276; rod

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. HEAT TREATMENT

X1.1 Proper heat treatment during or subsequent to fabri-

cation is necessary for optimum performance and the manu-
facturer shall be consulted for details.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B02 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(B 574 – 99a) that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) Added alloy N06035 correct nomenclature to Scope. (3) Added alloy N06035 chemistry and minimum mechanical
(2) Added safety caveat to Scope. properties and density to 7.6, Table 1, and Table 3.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 576 – 94 (Reapproved 1999)
Standard Guide for
Arc Erosion Testing of Electrical Contact Materials 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 576; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This guide covers the major variables which affect the
rate of arc erosion of electrical contact materials and serves as
a guide in developing more detailed specifications for arc-
erosion tests.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.3 Arc erosion testing involves some vaporization of ma-
terial. It is the responsibility of the user to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for the material being tested.
2. Significance and Use
2.1 The significance of the variables set forth in this guide
was proved by various laboratories using several test systems
at test currents ranging from 100 to 35 000 A. These variables
will be significant for any case where voltage and current are
sufficient to produce arcing.
3. Major Variables
3.1 Shape, Area, and Thickness:
3.1.1 The area, shape, and thickness of the contact affect the
erosion rates. As an example of shape effects, the radius of the
spherical crown affects the erosion in at least two ways: (1) it
changes the effective diameter of the contact and, ( 2) it affects
the manner in which the arc moves about on the surface of the
contact. A contact with a hemispherical crown presents no
sharp edges that would result in different amounts of erosion
products for a given amount of arcing and aids in the control of
the arc when operating in air and other gases.
3.1.2 The contacts may be given a type of normal shape and
surface roughness by a number of arcing operations prior to
recording the contact loss. There may be a difference in the
effect of shape and diameter for different environments.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-2 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.05 on Precious Metals.
Current edition approved April 15, 1994. Published June 1994. Originally
published as B 576–73. Last previous edition B 576–89.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
3.1.3 Contact mounting, attachment, and bond integrity can
affect the arc erosion of materials and should be specified.
3.2 Contact Velocity and Maximum Arc Length—The veloc-
ity of separation and the maximum arc length affect the erosion
rate and, therefore, should be specified in formulating a test.
3.3 Contact Orientation:
3.3.1 The orientation of the contacts with respect to the
earth’s gravitational field may affect the erosion rate and,
therefore, should be specified. For example, the mating planes
of the contacts might be vertical or horizontal.
3.3.2 If the contact’s mating planes are horizontal and a
direct test current is used, the specifications should state
whether the anode or cathode is in the upper position.
3.4 Environment:
3.4.1 The type, pressure, temperature, and humidity of the
gas atmosphere or the type, pressure, and temperature of the
surrounding oil, affect the erosion rate and should be specified.
3.4.2 The erosion rate in air may be quite different than that
under oil.
3.5 Arcing Current:
3.5.1 An increase in arc current will cause an increase in the
arc-erosion rate per coulomb of arcing, and thus it must be
specified.
3.5.2 It follows then that the wave form of the arc current is
important and source voltage and load current should be
specified.
3.6 Arcing Time—The time duration of individual arcs on an
electrical contact affects the erosion rate and thus it should be
specified.
3.7 Closing Force, Speed, and Bounce— The severity of the
damage caused by the closing arcs depends on the closing
speed, closing force, and the number of bounces. All these
three can be measured. The arc erosion that occurs because of
closing arcs caused by contact bounce can be duplicated by
properly specifying other items in this list with particular
emphasis on contact velocity and maximum arc length. Un-
wanted closing arcs can be effectively eliminated from a
contact test device, for example, by causing the test current to
flow through the contacts after the contacts have been closed.
3.8 Contact Body Temperature—The mating contacts of a
contact pair might have different temperatures and both should
be measured or specified just before the arcing operation.
 B 576
3.9 Total Number of Arcing Operations— The total number
of arcs or, in other words, the time duration of the tests, must
be specified for several reasons. First, the shape of the contact
may change as the test progresses; secondly, chemical actions
may take place to change the erosion rate as, for example, by
formation of silver oxide on silver or tungsten oxide on
tungsten.
3.10 Arc Motion—Arc motion produced by any means, such
as magnetic fields, is important and should be specified.
3.11 Polarity:
3.11.1 Polarity may affect erosion rates and should be
specified, that is, is it constant or alternating.
3.11.2 Tests in which the polarity is constant may give
different erosion rates than those in which the polarity changes.
Polarity effect could cause different surface conditions for
successive arcs.
3.12 Operation Rate—The operation rate affects the oper-
ating temperature of the contact and, therefore, the erosion rate.
3.13 Opening Speed and Opening Force—These two fac-
tors affect the severity of the damage caused by the opening
arc.
4. Keywords
4.1 arcing contacts; arc erosion; contacts; electrical con-
tacts; electrical erosion

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 575 – 04

Standard Specification for

Low-Carbon Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum, Low-Carbon
Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Copper, Low-Carbon Nickel-
Chromium-Molybdenum-Tantalum, and Low-Carbon Nickel-
Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten Alloy Plate, Sheet, and
Strip1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 575; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification2 covers plate, sheet, and strip of
low-carbon nickel-chromium-molybdenum alloys (UNS
N10276, N06022, N06455, N06035, UNS N06058, UNS
N06059)*, low-carbon nickel-chromium-molybdenum-copper
alloy (UNS N06200), low-carbon nickel-chromium-
molybdenum-tantalum alloy (UNS N06210), and low-carbon
nickel-chromium-molybdenum-tungsten alloy (UNS N06686)
as shown in Table 1, for use in general corrosive service.
1.2 The following products are covered under this specifi-
cation:
1.2.1 Sheet and Strip— Hot or cold rolled, solution an-
nealed, and descaled unless solution anneal is performed in an
atmosphere yielding a bright finish.
1.2.2 Plate—Hot or cold rolled, solution annealed, and
descaled.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Feb. 1, 2004. Published February 2004. Originally
approved in 1972. Last previous edition approved in 1999 as B 575 - 99a.
2 3
For ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code applications, see related Specifi-
cation SB-575 in Section II of that Code.
* New designation established in accordance with ASTM E 527 and SAE J1086,
Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
2.1 ASTM Standards: 3
B 906 Specification for General Requirements for Flat-
Rolled Nickel and Nickel Alloys Plate, Sheet and Strip
E 112 Test Methods for Determining the Average Grain
Size
E 140 Hardness Conversion Tables for Metals
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 cold-rolled plate, n—material 3⁄16 to 3⁄8 in. (4.76 to
9.52 mm), inclusive, in thickness.
3.1.2 hot-rolled plate, n—material 3⁄16 in. (4.76 mm) and
over in thickness.
3.1.3 plate, n—material 3⁄16 in. (4.76 mm) and over in
thickness.
3.1.4 sheet and strip, n—material under 3⁄16 in. (4.76 mm) in
thickness.
4. General Requirements
4.1 Material furnished to this specification shall conform to
the applicable requirements of Specification B 906 unless
otherwise provided herein.
5. Ordering Information
5.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
requirements that are necessary for material ordered under this
specification. Examples of such requirements include, but are
not limited to the following:
5.1.1 Alloy—Table 1,
5.1.2 Dimensions—Thickness (in decimals of an inch),
width, and length (inch or fractions of an inch),
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 575 – 04
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
Composition Limits, %
Element Alloy Alloy Alloy Alloy Alloy Alloy Alloy Alloy Alloy
N06035 N10276 N06022 N06455 N06059 N06058 N06200 N06210 N06686
Molybdenum 7.60–9.00 15.0–17.0 12.5–14.5 14.0–17.0 15.0–16.5 19.0 - 21.0 15.0–17.0 18.0–20.0 15.0-17.0
Chromium 32.25–34.25 14.5–16.5 20.0–22.5 14.0–18.0 22.0–24.0 20.0- 23.0 22.0–24.0 18.0–20.0 19.0-23.0
Iron 2.00 max 4.0–7.0 2.0–6.0 3.0 max 1.5, max 1.5, max 3.0 max 1.0 max 5.0 max
Tungsten 0.60 max 3.0–4.5 2.5–3.5 ... ... 0.3 max ... ... 3.0-4.4
Cobalt, max 1.00 2.5 2.5 2.0 0.3 0.3 2.0 max 1.0 ...
Carbon, max 0.050 0.010 0.015 0.015 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.015 0.010
Silicon, max 0.60 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.08 0.08 0.08
Manganese, max 0.50 1.0 0.50 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.50 0.5 0.75
Vanadium, max 0.20 0.35 0.35 ... ... ... ... 0.35 ...
Phosphorus, max 0.030 0.04 0.02 0.04 0.015 0.015 0.025 0.02 0.04
Sulfur, max 0.015 0.03 0.02 0.03 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.02 0.02
Titanium ... ... ... 0.7 max ... ... ... ... 0.02-0.25
Nickel remainderA remainderA remainderA remainderA Bal Bal remainderA remainderA remainderA
Aluminum 0.40 max ... ... ... 0.1–0.4 0.40 max 0.50 max ... ...
Copper 0.30 max ... ... ... 0.50 max 0.50 max 1.3–1.9 ... ...
Tantalum ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1.5–2.2 ...
A
Shall be determined arithmetically by difference.

TABLE 3 Grain Size for Annealed Sheet

5.1.3 Optional Requirement—Plate; state how plate is to be
ASTM Micrograin Size Average Grain Diameter,
cut (Specification B 906, Table A2.3), Thickness, in. (mm)
Number mm (in.)
5.1.4 Certification—State if certification or a report of test 0.125 (3.175) and 3.0 or finer 0.127 (0.0050)
results is required (Specification B 906, Section 21), under
Over 0.125 (3.175) 1.5 or finer 0.214 (0.0084)
5.1.5 Purchase Inspection—State which tests or inspections
are to be witnessed (Specification B 906, Section 18), and
5.1.6 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
samples should be furnished (Specification B 906, 7.2.2). 8. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations
6. Chemical Composition 8.1 Weight—For calculations of mass or weight, the follow-
ing densities shall be used:
6.1 The material shall conform to the composition limits
Density
specified in Table 1. Alloy lb/in.3 g/cm3
6.2 If a product (check) analysis is made by the purchaser,
the material shall conform to the requirements specified in N10276 0.321 (8.87)
N06022 0.314 (8.69)
Table 1 and Specification B 906. N06455 0.312 (8.64)
N06035 0.296 (8.18)
7. Mechanical Properties and Other Requirements N06058 0.318 (8.80)
N06059 0.311 (8.60)
7.1 Tensile Properties—The material shall conform to the N06200 0.307 (8.50)
room temperature tensile properties prescribed in Table 2. N06210 0.316 (8.76)
N06686 0.315 (8.73)
7.2 Hardness—The hardness values given in Table 2 are
informative only. 8.2 Thickness:
7.3 Grain Size for Sheet and Strip— Sheet and strip shall 8.2.1 Plate—The permissible variations in thickness of
conform to the grain sizes as illustrated in Plate 1 of Test plate shall be as prescribed in Specification B 906, Table A2.1.
Methods E 112. The requirements shall be as indicated in Table 8.2.2 Sheet and Strip— The permissible variations in thick-
3. ness of sheet and strip shall be as prescribed in Specification

TABLE 2 Mechanical Property Requirements

Yield Strength (0.2 % Elongation in 2 in.
Tensile Strength, min, psi Rockwell Hardness,B
Alloy Offset), min, psi (50.8 mm) or 4DA
(MPa) max
(MPa) min, %
N10276 100 000 (690) 41 000 (283) 40 100 HRB
N06022 100 000 (690) 45 000 (310) 45 100 HRB
N06455 100 000 (690) 40 000 (276) 40 100 HRB
N06035 85 000 (586) 35 000 (241) 30 100 HRB
N06058 110 000 (760) 52 000 (360) 40 100 HRB
N06059 100 000 (690) 45 000 (310) 45 100 HRB
N06200 100 000 (690) 41 000 (283) 45 100 HRB
N06686 100 000 (690) 45 000 (310) 45 100 HRB
N06210 100 000 (690) 45 000 (310) 45 100 HRB
A
D refers to the diameter of the tension specimen.
B
Hardness values are shown for information purposes only and are not to be used as a basis of acceptance or rejection. For approximate hardness conversions, see
Hardness Conversion Tables E 140.

2
 B 575 – 04
B 906, Table A2.2. The thickness shall be measured with the
micrometer spindle 3⁄8 in. (9.525 mm) or more from any edge
for material 1 in. (25.4 mm) or over in width and at any place
on material under 1 in. (25.4 mm) in width.
8.3 Width:
8.3.1 Plate—The permissible variations in width of rectan-
gular plates shall be as prescribed in Specification B 906, Table
A2.3.
8.3.2 Sheet and Strip—The permissible variations in width
for sheet and strip shall be as prescribed in Specification B 906,
Table A2.4.
8.4 Length:
8.4.1 Plate—Permissible variations in the length of rectan-
gular plate shall be as prescribed in Specification B 906, Table
A2.3.
8.4.2 Sheet and Strip— Sheet and strip may be ordered to
cut lengths, in which case a variation of 1⁄8 in. (3.175 mm) over
the specified length shall be permitted, with a 0 minus
tolerance.
8.5 Straightness:
8.5.1 The edgewise curvature (depth of chord) of flat sheet,
strip, and plate shall not exceed 0.05 in. (1.27 mm) multiplied
by the length in feet or 0.04 mm multiplied by the length in
centimetres.
8.5.2 Straightness for coiled strip is subject to agreement
between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
8.6 Squareness (Sheet)—For sheets of all thicknesses and
widths of 6 in. (152.4 mm) or more, the angle between adjacent
sides shall be 90 6 0.15° (1⁄16 in. in 24 in. of 2.6 mm/m).
8.7 Flatness—Plate, sheet, and strip shall be commercially
flat.
8.8 Edges:
8.8.1 Plates shall have sheared or cut (machined, abrasive
cut, powder cut, or inert arc cut) edges, as specified.
8.8.2 Sheet and strip shall have sheared or slit edges.
9. Product Marking
9.1 Each plate, sheet, or strip shall be marked on one face
with the specification number, alloy, heat number, manufactur-
er’s identification, and size. The markings shall have no
deleterious effect on the material or its performance and shall
be sufficiently stable to withstand normal handling.
9.2 Each bundle or shipping container shall be marked with
the name of the material; this specification number; alloy; the
size; gross, tare, and net weight; consignor and consignee
address; contract or order number; and such other information
as may be defined in the contract or order.
10. Keywords
10.1 N06022; N06035; N06058; N06059; N06200;
N06210; N06455; N06686; N10276; plate; sheet; strip

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. HEAT TREATMENT

X1.1 Proper heat treatment during or subsequent to fabri-

cation is necessary for optimum performance, and the manu-
facturer shall be consulted for details.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B02 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(B 575 – 99a) that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) Added alloy N06035 to Scope. (4) Added alloy N06035 chemistry and mechanical properties
(2) Added safety caveat to Scope. to 8.1, Table 1, and Table 2.
(3) General Requirements updated to Specification B 906.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

3
 B 575 – 04

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 577 – 93 (Reapproved 2004)

Standard Test Methods for

Detection of Cuprous Oxide (Hydrogen Embrittlement
Susceptibility) in Copper1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 577; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope* 3.1.2 embrittlement—the reduction of the normal ductility

1.1 These test methods describe procedures for determining
the presence of cuprous oxide (Cu2O) in products made from
deoxidized and oxygen-free copper.
1.2 Inch-pound units are the standard. SI values given in
parentheses are for information only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.4 The test methods appear in the following order:
Sections
in a metal as a result of a physical or chemical change.
3.1.2.1 Embrittlement, as it relates to these test methods, is
the loss of ductility caused by the reaction of cuprous oxide in
the copper material when exposed at elevated temperatures to
a reducing atmosphere.
3.1.3 oxygen-free copper—electrolytic copper produced
substantially free of cuprous oxide without the use of metallic
or metalloidal deoxidizers as determined by metallographic
examination at 753 under polarized light,
3.1.3.1 Oxygen may be present up to a maximum of 5 ppm
in Copper UNS No. C10100 and 10 ppm in Copper UNS No.
C10200.

Microscopical Examination without Thermal Treatment 9-11 4. Summary of Test Methods

Microscopical Examination after Thermal Treatment 12-14
Closed Bend Test after Thermal Treatment 15-17
4.1 The presence of cuprous oxide is determined either by
Reverse Bend Test after Thermal Treatment 18-20 microscopical examination under polarized light or by methods
that involve heating the test specimens in a hydrogen-rich
2. Referenced Documents atmosphere and rapidly cooling the specimens without undue
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2 exposure to air followed by a microscopical examination or a
E 3 Practice for Preparation of Metallographic Specimens suitable bend test.
E 883 Guide for Reflected-Light Photomicrography
5. Significance and Use
3. Terminology 5.1 These test methods determine whether copper products
3.1 Definitions: will be resistant to embrittlement when exposed to elevated
3.1.1 deoxidized copper—material produced substantially temperatures in a reducing atmosphere.
free of cuprous oxide, by the use of metallic or metalloidal 5.1.1 It is assumed that all who use these test methods will
deoxidizers, as determined by metallographic examination at be trained personnel capable of performing these procedures
753 under polarized light. skillfully and safely. It is expected that work will be performed
3.1.1.1 Oxygen may be present as residual deoxidation in a properly equipped facility.
products.
6. Apparatus
1
6.1 Test Method A—Metallographic equipment of the type
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper
described in Practice E 3 and Guide E 883 suitably equipped
and Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.06 on
Methods of Test. with a polarized light illuminating device.
Current edition approved May 1, 2004. Published May 2004. Originally 6.2 Test Methods B, C, and D:
approved in 1973. Last previous edition approved in 1998 as B 577 – 93 (1998). 6.2.1 Metallographic equipment of the type described in
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Practice E 3 and Guide E 883 provided with normal illumina-
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on tion.
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 577 – 93 (2004)
6.2.2 A furnace of sufficient capacity, capable of maintain- 10. Procedure
ing the required reducing atmosphere while the specimens are 10.1 The test specimens taken transverse to and bounded by
being heated. A rapid cooling device using either water or a an original surface of the material are mounted and polished in
reducing atmosphere is required. accordance with Practice E 3.
6.2.3 A machinist vise with replaceable matching pairs of
jaw mandrels of various radii contours. 10.1.1 Photomicrographs, when taken, are prepared in ac-
cordance with Guide E 883.
7. Sampling 10.2 The polished, but unetched, surface of the specimens
7.1 Sampling shall be in accordance with the requirements are examined under reflected polarized light at a minimum
of the specification under which the material was ordered. magnification of 753.
10.2.1 Cuprous oxide will appear as ruby-red particles.
8. Test Specimens 10.2.2 Cuprous oxide will appear as blue particles under
8.1 Longitudinal specimens, that is, specimens whose axes white light.
are parallel to the direction of working are preferable. How-
ever, equally reliable results can be obtained with specimens in 11. Application
which the axis is perpendicular to the directions of working.
11.1 This test method is applicable to Copper UNS Nos.
8.2 Specimens shall be of dimensions suitable for the
C10100, C10200, C10300, C10400, C10500, C10700, C11700,
performance of the required tests. Where necessary to cut a
and C12000.
specimen from an oversize piece of material, at least one of the
original surfaces of the material shall be retained in the test
TEST METHOD B—MICROSCOPICAL
specimen. Suggested dimensions for test specimens are given
EXAMINATION AFTER THERMAL TREATMENT
in the following table (for Procedures C or D):
Wrought Products Suggested Dimensions for
Test Specimens 12. Scope

Flats (wire, strip, sheets, bar, thickness—that of the product but should not
and plate) exceed 1⁄2 in. (13 mm)
width—approx. 1⁄2 in. (13 mm)
length—approx. 6 in. (152 mm)
Shapes and forgings To the extent that the dimensions of the ma-
terial permit, the dimensions of the test
specimens are those suggested for the flat
products specimens.
(Where the product dimensions, particularly
length, as in the case of forgings, do not
permit taking a specimen, the total
product may then become the test spec-
imen for examination by Procedures A
or B.)
Wire or rod diameter or distance between parallel
surfaces—that of the product but not to
exceed 1⁄2 in. (13 mm)
length—approx. 6 in. (152 mm)
Tubular products:
Diameter or distance between
parallel surfaces:
Up to 5⁄16 in. (8 mm), incl. full section of tube, approx 6 in. (152 mm)
long
Over 5⁄16 in. (8 mm) to 1 in. a slit half section of the tube, approx 6 in.
(25.4 mm), incl. (152 mm) long
Over 1 in. (25.4 mm) a slit section approx 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) wide and
6 in. (152 mm) long taken either trans-
verse or parallel to the tube axis
Refinery shapes a 0.080-in. (2.03-mm) diameter wire specimen
made by forging, swaging, hot rolling,
and cold drawing as may be necessary
8.3 All specimens made by cutting from larger stock shall
have their corners or edges deburred to a slight radius before
testing.
TEST METHOD A—MICROSCOPICAL
EXAMINATION WITHOUT THERMAL TREATMENT
12.1 This test method describes a procedure by which the
presence of cuprous oxide is determined by microscopical
examination under normal illumination at a minimum magni-
fication of 753 after thermal treatment of the specimens.
13. Procedure
13.1 Heat the cleaned and degreased specimens which
retain at least one original surface for 20 to 40 min in an
atmosphere of at least 10 % hydrogen within a furnace held at
a temperature of 1562 6 45°F (850 6 25°C).
13.2 After the heat treatment, immediately remove and
quench the specimens in water without undue exposure to air
or quickly cool the specimens in the same atmosphere.
13.3 The test specimens taken transverse to and bounded by
an original surface of the treated material are mounted and
polished, and etched when desired, in accordance with Practice
E 3.
13.3.1 Photomicrographs, when taken, shall be prepared in
accordance with Guide E 883.
13.4 Cuprous oxide (hydrogen embrittlement) when present
in the material tested will manifest itself by the open grain
structure (gassing) characteristic of embrittlement. For ex-
ample, the grain structure is outlined by a series of voids at the
grain boundary.
13.5 In case of controversy concerning the presence or
absence of cuprous oxide (hydrogen embrittlement), Method C
or D, as specified in the product specification, shall be
followed.

9. Scope 14. Application

9.1 This test method describes a procedure by which the 14.1 The method is applicable to Copper UNS Nos.
presence of cuprous oxide is determined by polarized light C10100, C10200, C10400, C10500, C10700, C10800, C11700,
microscopy examination at a minimum magnification of 753. C12000, C12200, and C14200.

2
 B 577 – 93 (2004)
TEST METHOD C—CLOSED BEND TEST AFTER
THERMAL TREATMENT
15. Scope
15.1 This test method describes a procedure by which the
presence of cuprous oxide (hydrogen embrittlement) is deter-
mined by bending thermally treated specimens into a flattened
“U” shape.
16. Procedure
16.1 Heat the cleaned and degreased specimen that retains
at least one of the original surfaces for a period of 20 to 40 min
in an atmosphere of at least 10 % hydrogen within a furnace
held at a temperature of 1562 6 45°F (850 6 25°C).
16.2 After the heat treatment, immediately quench the
specimens in water without undue exposure to air or quickly
cool the specimens in the same atmosphere.
16.3 Flatten all tubular specimens, after the thermal treat-
ment, in a vise or press with smooth surfaces, to twice the wall
thickness, before bending.
16.4 Make the bend test at ambient temperature as indicated
in Fig. 1 with an original surface of the material on the outside
of the bend.
16.5 Bend the test specimen in such a manner as to form a
“U” with the final closure being made by squeezing the legs of
the “U” together.
16.5.1 The formation of cracks on the outside surface of the
bend are evidence of the presence of cuprous oxide in the
copper.
17. Application
17.1 This test is applicable to Copper UNS Nos. C10100,
C10200, C10300, C10400, C10500, C10700, C11700, and
C12000.
TEST METHOD D—REVERSE BEND TEST AFTER
THERMAL TREATMENT
18. Scope
18.1 This test method describes a procedure in which the
presence of cuprous oxide (hydrogen embrittlement) is deter-
FIG. 1 Bend Test
3
mined by subjecting thermally treated specimens to a prede-
termined number of bends.
19. Procedure
19.1 Heat the cleaned and degreased specimens that retain
at least one of the original surfaces for a period of 20 to 40 min
in an atmosphere of at least 10 % hydrogen within a furnace
held at a temperature of 1562 6 45°F (850 6 25°C).
19.2 After the heat treatment, immediately remove and
quench the specimens in water without undue exposure to air
or quickly cool the specimens in the same atmosphere.
19.3 At ambient temperature, clamp the specimen lightly
between jaws with edges having a radius of two and a half
times the thickness (or diameter) of the material being tested.
19.3.1 An original surface of the material shall be so
positioned as to be on the outer bend radius.
19.4 Bend the specimen over one edge of the clamp jaws
through an angle of 90° and return the specimen to the original
position; this constitutes one bend.
19.5 Bend the specimen in the opposite direction through an
angle of 90° and return the specimen to the original position;
this constitutes a second bend.
19.6 Continue making bends in alternating directions until
the required number of bends have been made or the specimen
fractures.
19.7 Failure to withstand the required minimum number of
bends is evidence of the presence of cuprous oxide.
20. Application
20.1 This method is applicable to Copper UNS Nos.
C10100, C10200, C10300, C10400, C10500, C10700, and
C12000.
21. Precision and Bias
21.1 A precision and bias statement is not applicable since
the results of these test methods merely indicate whether there
is conformation to a criteria for success specified in the
particular procedure.
22. Keywords
22.1 cuprous oxide in copper; test methods; hydrogen em-
brittlement of copper; test methods
 B 577 – 93 (2004)
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

This section identifies the principle changes to this standard that have been incorporated since the last issue.

(1) Title change. (3) Each test method self contained.

(2) Sections describing each test method identified in scope.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 578 – 87 (Reapproved 1999)
Standard Test Method for
Microhardness of Electroplated Coatings1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 578; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers the determination of the hard-
ness of metallic coatings upon various substrates. The mea-
surements are made with the Knoop indenter under a test load
of 0.245 N (25 gf) or 0.981 N (100 gf).
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
E 384 Test Method for Microhardness of Materials2
3. Special Requirements
3.1 In addition to the requirements listed herein, the test
method shall be performed in accordance with Test Method
E 384.
3.1.1 The measurement shall be made on the cross section
with the long diagonal of the indentation parallel to the
substrate using a Knoop indenter.
NOTE 1—When a nondestructive test is necessary, the measurement
may be made normal to the surface provided that the whole of the
indentation is clearly delineated in the field of the microscope at the
magnification specified in Test Method E 384, and the coating thickness is
at least 0.7 that of the long diagonal. The outlines of the indentation must
be sharp and undistorted by any mechanical effects resulting from the
thinness of the coating such as “butterfly” fractures, etc. Values obtained
from measurements made normal to the electroplated surface may not be
equivalent to those obtained on microsections and are not, therefore,
reportable according to Section 6.
3.1.2 The thickness of the coating shall be at least 38 µm for
soft coatings such as gold, copper, and silver, and 25 µm for
hard coatings such as nickel, cobalt, iron, and hard gold. This
is approximately equivalent to 0.6 times the length of the long
Knoop diagonal.
3.1.3 Make the indentation near the center of the cross
section of the coating.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-8 on Metallic
and Inorganic Coatingsand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B08.10 on
General Test Methods.
Current edition approved Jan. 30, 1987. Published March 1987. Originally
published as B 578 – 73. Last previous edition B 578 – 80.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
3.2 No single test load is applicable to all coatings. Use a
load of 0.245 N for soft coatings (from 50 to 300 HK) and a
load of 0.981 N for hard coatings (greater than 300 HK).
3.2.1 A load of less than 0.245 N is not recommended.
However, when the length of the diagonal is great enough at a
load of 0.245 N, which may occur for very soft coatings such
as tin and indium, a lighter load or a lower magnification shall
be specified provided the requirements of 3.3 are met. When
testing extremely hard coatings, a load greater than 0.981 N
may be used provided this is specified in the purchase order.
The Knoop hardness number decreases appreciably with loads
from 0.245 N to 0.981 N especially for the higher hardness
numbers.
3.3 Measure the length of the long diagonal to within 0.25
µm or 0.4 %, whichever is larger, at the magnification specified
in Test Method E 384.
3.4 When readings are taken in a direction parallel to the
substrate, space them from each other by at least the length of
the long diagonal. When two readings are taken in the direction
of the short axis, separate them by at least the length of the
diagonal perpendicular to the substrate (short diagonal). In
such cases, the distance from the substrate and from the outer
surface of the coating to an edge of the indentation shall be at
least the width of the short diagonal.
3.5 If the electroplated coating is cracked, or if cracks or
“butterfly” markings (Test Method E 384, 7.2) appear when the
indentation load is applied or removed, the hardness measure-
ment is invalid.
4. Preparation of Test Specimen
4.1 Overplate the specimen to a thickness of at least 12 µm
with a metal of a contrasting color whose hardness approxi-
mates that of the coating.
4.2 Cut out a section of the specimen approximately per-
pendicular to the electroplated coating.
4.3 Mount and polish the section as described in Test
Method E 384.
NOTE 2—Procedures 4.1 and 4.2 are interchangeable at the discretion of
the operator. A light etch following polishing may remove significant work
hardening.
4.4 When the electrodeposit is a metal which may alloy with
the basis metal (for example, indium over copper or copper
alloys), or if the deposit has a low transformation temperature
(such as nickel-phosphorus alloys), a low-temperature mount-
ing procedure shall be used.

5. Procedure
5.1 Insert the mounted specimen into the testing machine so
that the test surface is parallel to the long axis of the indenter,
and measure the hardness in accordance with the manufactur-
er’s instructions and in accordance with Test Method E 384,
Section A.
6. Report
6.1 Test results shall be based on at least five measurements,
and the report shall include the following statistics:
6.1.1 The range, that is, the difference, in hardness units,
between the highest and lowest values.
6.1.2 The average (arithmetic mean):
x̄ 5 (x/n
6.1.3 The estimated standard deviation:
s 5 =(~x 2 x̄! 2/~n 2 1! or =~n(x 2 2 ~ (x! 2/n~n 2 1!
6.1.4 The coefficient of variation:
s the production parts have insufficient electroplating thickness
n 5 x̄
where, in 6.1.2-6.1.4:
s 5 the standard deviation,
x 5 an individual value,
x̄ 5 arithmetic mean of the set of individual values,
n 5 the number of measurements,
(x2 5 the sum of the squares of all of the individual
values,
((x)2 5 the square of the total of the individual values, and
n 5 the coefficient of variation.
6.2 Report the hardness as a Knoop hardness number (HK),
and indicate the load by subscript notation expressed as the
force, in newtons, divided by 0.00981 (a number equal to that
which is obtained when the test force is expressed in grams-
force). For example: 410 HK1 00, 30 HK50, 200 HK2 5.
B 578
NOTE 3—The International Organization for Standardization Technical
Committee 17 on Steel has agreed that the formula for calculation and the
system of designation for hardness shall be such that the numerical value
of the hardness number remains unaffected by the introduction of the SI
unit of force, the newton, in place of the old unit, kgf (or gf).
7. Precision and Bias
7.1 Precision—An interlaboratory comparison program is
now in progress which when completed will be the basis of a
statement on precision.
7.2 Bias—There is no basis for defining the bias of this test
method.
7.3 Reference hardness specimens of electroformed nickel
along with certified hardness readings as found by the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) are currently
(1)
available.3
8. Test Coupons
(2)
8.1 If specifically permitted by the governing specification
or the party requesting the test, test coupons may be used when
(3)
for measurement. The values obtained may not reflect the
“true” hardness of the thin coatings on production parts.
However, the values may be useful when they correlate with
other coating properties such as wear resistance. The test may
serve as a useful tool for electroplating bath control, particu-
larly in the case of coatings such as gold, for which the
hardness will be sensitive to the composition of the bath and
other electroplating variables. The electroplating conditions for
test coupons such as current density, temperature, agitation,
and solution composition, shall be kept as close as possible to
those employed on production parts in the plating process
under test.
3
Available from the Office of Reference Materials, NIST, Gaithersburg, MD
20899.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 579 – 73 (Reapproved 2004)
Standard Specification for
Electrodeposited Coatings of Tin-Lead Alloy (Solder Plate)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 579; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the requirements for electrode-
posited tin-lead coatings on fabricated articles of iron, steel,
copper, and copper alloys, to protect them against corrosion
(Note 1), to improve and preserve solderability over long
periods of storage, and to improve anti-galling characteristics.
NOTE 1—Some corrosion of tin-lead coatings may be expected in
outdoor exposure. In normal indoor exposure, tin-lead is protective on
iron, copper, and copper alloys. Corrosion may be expected at disconti-
nuities (pits or pores) in the coating. Porosity decreases as the thickness is
increased. A primary use of the tin-lead coating (solder) is with the printed
circuit industry as a solderable coating and as an etch mask material.
1.2 This specification applies to electrodeposited coatings
containing a minimum of 50 % and a maximum of 70 % tin.
The specification applies to mat, bright, and flow-brightened
tin-lead coatings.
NOTE 2—Tin-lead plating baths are composed of tin and lead fluobo-
rates and of addition agents to promote stability. The final appearance may
be influenced by the addition of proprietary brighteners. Without bright-
eners, the coatings are mat; with brighteners, they are semibright or bright.
Flow-brightened coatings are obtained by heating mat coatings to above
the melting point of tin-lead for a few seconds and then quenching; palm
oil, hydrogenated oils, or fats are used as a heat-transfer medium at a
temperature of 260 6 10°C (500 6 20°F), but other methods of heating
are also in use. The maximum thickness for flow-brightening is about 7.5
µm (0.3 mil); thicker coatings tend to reflow unevenly. The shape of the
part is also a factor; flat surfaces tend to reflow more unevenly than wires
or rounded shapes (Note 3).
NOTE 3—Volatile impurities in tin-lead coatings will cause bubbling
and foaming during flow-brightening resulting in voids and roughness.
The impurities can arise from plating solution addition agents and from
improper rinsing and processing.
1.3 This specification does not apply to sheet, strip, or wire
in the unfabricated form or to threaded articles having basic
major diameters up to and including 19 mm (0.75 in.).
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on
Metallic and Inorganic Coatings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B08.08.04 on Soft Metals.
Current edition approved April 1, 2004. Published April 2004. Originally
approved in 1973. Last previous edition approved in 1999 as B 579–73 (1999).
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2
B 183 Practice for Preparation of Low-Carbon Steel for
Electroplating
B 242 Guide for Preparation of High-Carbon Steel for
Electroplating
B 281 Practice for Preparation of Copper and Copper-Base
Alloys for Electroplating and Conversion Coatings
B 322 Practice for Cleaning Metals Prior to Electroplating
B 487 Test Method for Measurement of Metal and Oxide
Coating Thicknesses by Microscopical Examination of a
Cross Section
B 499 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thickness
by the Magnetic Method: Nonmagnetic Coatings on Mag-
netic Basis Metals
B 504 Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Metal
Coatings by the Coulometric Method
B 567 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thickness
by the Beta Backscatter Method
B 568 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Thickness
by X-Ray Spectrometry
E 105 Practice for Probability Sampling of Materials
E 122 Practice for Calculating Sample Size to Estimate,
With a Specified Tolerable Error, the Average for Charac-
teristic of a Lot or Process
2.2 Other Standards:
MIL-STD-105 Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspec-
tion by Attributes3
MIL-STD-414 Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspec-
tion by Variables for Percent Defective3
3. Classification and Service Condition
3.1 Orders for articles to be plated in accordance with this
specification shall specify, in addition to the ASTM designation
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
 B 579 – 73 (2004)
number and year of issue, the classification notation indicating 5.2 When required the basis metal shall be subjected to such
the basis metal and thickness of tin-lead coating required, or polishing or buffing operations as are necessary to yield
the service condition number indicating the severity of service deposits with the desired final appearance (Section 6).
required for the coating. In addition, when specifying a tin-lead 5.3 Proper preparatory procedures and thorough cleaning of
coating composition, the first number shall refer to the tin the basis metal surface are essential in order to assure satis-
content in percent. factory adhesion and corrosion performance of the coating.
3.1.1 Classification Notation: Accordingly, it is suggested that the following Practices for the
Symbol Classification preparation of various basis metals for electroplating be
Fe/ Iron or steel basis metals followed when appropriate: B 183, B 281, and B 322 and
Cu/ Copper or copper alloy basis metals
/Sn-Pb Tin-lead coating and its composition number, when re-
Guide B 242.
quired; for example, Sn60-Pb40 5.4 When necessary, preliminary samples showing the finish
Number Minimum coating thickness in micrometres shall be supplied to and approved by the purchaser. Where rack
(5 to 50)
marks are inevitable, their location shall be the subject of
Suffix Letter agreement between supplier and purchaser.
f flow-brightened
b bright 6. Physical Composition
m mat
6.1 Composition—The tin-lead coating composition shall
An example of complete classification notation is as follows: Cu/Sn60-Pb40/5F be as follows (Note 7):
Element Weight, %
3.1.2 Service Condition Number: Tin (Sn) 50 to 70
No. Service Condition Lead (Pb) remainder

4 very severe exposure 6.1.1 The tin percentage is calculated as follows:

3 severe exposure
2 moderate exposure Tin, % 5 134.1 3 ~L/A 2 1! (1)
1 mild exposure

NOTE 4—See Appendix X1 for additional description of exposure where:

conditions and examples of typical end uses. The coating thicknesses
given for each service condition are guidelines and are not intended to be
absolute values.
4. Significant Surfaces
4.1 Significant surfaces are defined as those surfaces nor-
mally visible (directly or by reflection) that are essential to the
appearance or serviceability of the article when assembled in
normal position; or those surfaces that can be the source of
corrosion products that will deface visible surfaces on the
assembled article. When necessary, the significant surfaces
shall be indicated on the drawing of the part, or by the
provision of suitably marked samples.
L = weight of lead coating, g, and
A = weight of alloy coating, g.
NOTE 7—Only the tin content need be determined. Lead is usually
determined by difference. A sample of the deposit can be obtained by
plating on a stainless steel panel from which the coating can be peeled or
by employing any recognized stripping method. The alloy composition of
the deposit can be determined by methods such as gravimetric or
volumetric analysis, density measurements, atomic absorption spectropho-
tometry, X-ray fluorescence, and beta backscatter.
In addition, the alloy composition produced by a plating solution may
be obtained by comparing the weight of a tin-lead coating deposited by a
given number of ampere-hours to the weight of lead coating produced in
a lead fluoborate coulometer in series with the plating bath.

NOTE 5—When significant surfaces include areas on which the speci-

6.2 Appearance—The tin-lead coating shall be smooth, fine
fied thickness of deposit cannot readily be controlled, such as threads, grained, continuous, adherent, and shall be free of visible
holes, deep recesses, bases of angles, and similar areas, the purchaser and blisters, pits, nodules, indications of burning, excessive build-
the manufacturer should recognize the necessity for either thicker deposits up, staining, and other defects. Flow-brightened coatings shall
on the more accessible surfaces or for special racking. Special racks may not have dewetted areas or beads, and shall be free of the oil
involve the use of conforming, auxiliary bipolar electrodes, or noncon- used in the fusion process.
ducting shields. 6.3 Thickness—The thickness of the coating on significant
5. Materials and Manufacture surfaces shall conform to the requirements in Table 1 and Table
5.1 Defects in the surface of the basis metal, such as
scratches, porosity, nonconducting inclusions, roll and die TABLE 1 Tin-Lead Alloy Coatings on Steel
marks, cold shuts, and cracks, may adversely affect the Service Classification
Minimum
Thickness
appearance and the performance of coatings applied thereto Condition Number
despite the observance of the best plating practices. Accord- µm mil
A
ingly, the plater’s responsibility for defects in the coating SC4 Fe/SnPb 30 30 1.2
SC3A Fe/SnPb 20 20 0.8
resulting from such conditions shall be waived, except when he SC2 Fe/SnPb 10 10 0.4
is also in the position of prime contractor supplying plated SC1 Fe/SnPb 5 5 0.2
parts. SC1 Fe/SnPb 5fB 5 0.2
A
An undercoat of 2.5 µm (0.1 mil) copper is recommended for SC3 and SC4.
NOTE 6—In order to minimize problems of this sort, the specifications B
f = flow brightened or
covering the basis material or the item to be plated should contain m = mat or
appropriate limitations on such basis metal conditions. b = bright

2
 B 579 – 73 (2004)
2. testing of lots of coated items. In order that the manufacturer
6.3.1 Thickness Measurements—Tin-lead alloy thickness (plater) may know the quality standard he is expected to meet,
measurements shall be made on those areas of the significant the plan selected should be made part of the purchase contract.
surfaces where the coating would be expected to be thinnest. 8.2 General information on sampling procedures is given in
The method of determining the thickness shall be agreed upon Recommended Practices E 105 and E 122. Standard sampling
by the manufacturer and purchaser. Several methods are plans are suggested in Military Standards MIL-STD-105 and
available depending upon the thickness of coating, the shape of MIL-STD-414.
the article, and the basis metal. They include beta backscatter,
coulometric, magnetic, microscopical, and X-ray fluorescence 9. Test Methods
test methods. The methods are outlined in 9.1. 9.1 Thickness:
9.1.1 To meet the thickness specifications of the coatings,
NOTE 8—Thicknesses determined by beta backscatter, coulometry, and
the plater is advised to:
X-ray fluorescence are a function of the composition as well as the
thickness of the coating. 9.1.1.1 Maintain regular control of all solutions,
9.1.1.2 Inspect the equipment at regular intervals, and
6.4 Adhesion—The adhesion of the coating shall be ad- 9.1.1.3 Check thickness at periodic intervals.
equate to pass the tests described in 9.2. 9.1.2 The following ASTM methods are acceptable for
6.5 Solderability: measuring local thickness of the coating: B 487, B 499, B 504,
6.5.1 When specified by the purchaser, the coating shall be B 567, and B 568.
tested by one of the methods described in 9.2. The results shall 9.2 Adhesion:
be evaluated in accordance with each procedure described in 9.2.1 Burnishing Test—Rub an area of not more than 630
that section. mm2(1 in.2) of the coated surface, selected at the discretion of
6.5.2 When specified by the purchaser, the coating on the inspector, rapidly and firmly for 15 s with a smooth metal
copper and copper alloys shall, before solderability testing, be implement. A suitable burnishing implement is a copper or
subjected to the preliminary artificial aging treatment described steel disk used edgewise and broadside. Maintain a pressure
in 9.3.6 to determine if they may be expected to retain their sufficient to burnish the coating at every stroke, but not so great
solderability during periods of storage. as to cut it. Poor adhesion will be shown by the appearance of
NOTE 9—See Appendix X2 for design considerations that have an effect a loose blister which grows as burnishing is continued. If the
on the selection of thickness of the coating and, ultimately, on the quality of the coating is poor also, the blister may crack and the
solderability of the electrodeposits. coating peel away from the basis metal.
9.2.2 Quenching Test—Heat the coating article in an oven
7. Hydrogen Embrittlement
for a sufficient time to reach 150 6 10°C (300 6 20°F) and
7.1 High-tensile strength steels, and severely cold-worked quench in room-temperature water. The adhesion is inadequate
steels, are susceptible to embrittlement by hydrogen in both if the coating blisters, cracks, or peels.
cleaning and plating operations. The embrittling hydrogen 9.2.3 Reflow Test—Parts may be evaluated by immersion in
shall be removed by heat treatment. Procedures for baking to a bath of palm oil at a temperature of 205 – 260°C (400 –
minimize embrittlement before and after plating are covered in 500°F) until the deposit melts. A bright coating completely
Sections 2 and 7 of Guide B 242. covering the significant surfaces indicates adequate adhesion.
9.2.4 Bend Test—Bend a sample, with the coated surface
8. Sampling
away, over a mandrel until its two legs are parallel. The
8.1 Test methods are time consuming and often destructive; mandrel shall have a diameter equal to the thickness of the
therefore 100 % inspection is usually impractical. The pur- sample. Examination at 43 magnification should show no
chaser should select a suitable sampling plan for the acceptance evidence of peeling or cracking.
9.3 Solderability:
TABLE 2 Tin-Lead Alloy Coatings on Copper, Copper AlloysA, 9.3.1 General:
and NonmetalsB 9.3.1.1 Methods for testing the solderability of tin-lead
Minimum coated articles are based on the measurement of the extent of
Service Classification Thickness
Condition Number wetting by molten solder or the determination of the minimum
µm mil time required to produce full or perfect wetting by solder.
SC4 Cu/SnPb 30 30 1.2 9.3.1.2 The extent of wetting can be observed by manual or
SC3 Cu/SnPb 15 15 0.6 automatic immersion in molten solder under controlled condi-
SC2 Cu/SnPb 8 8 0.3
SC1 Cu/SnPb 5 5 0.2 tions.
SC1 Cu/SnPb 5fC 5 0.2 9.3.1.3 Determine the minimum wetting time by carrying a
A
If the basis metal is a brass containing more than 15 % zinc, the tin-lead specimen in a fixture through a standing wave of solder at a
coating shall be preceded by an undercoat of at least 2.5 µm (0.1 mil) of copper controlled speed and by measuring the shortest time of
and nickel to prevent the diffusion of zinc into the tin-lead. The same undercoating
shall also be applied when the basis metal is beryllium copper to assure adhesion immersion that will give complete wetting.
of tin-lead coating. 9.3.2 Dip Tests (Non-Automated):
B
Nonmetals shall be suitably sensitized and metalized prior to tin-lead coating. 9.3.2.1 Sample—For small articles of suitable shape and
C
f = flow-brightened or
m = mat or size take the whole article for testing. For larger articles, cut a
b = bright portion of suitable size for testing. A recommended panel size

3
 B 579 – 73 (2004)
is 25 mm2 (1 in.2). For articles not falling into these categories,
take samples as agreed upon between the plater and the
purchaser.
9.3.3 Dip Tests (Automated)—The use of automated testers
eliminates possible operator errors and assures repeatable
results; in these units, the dipping operation, temperature
control, and timing sequences are automated. One available
unit provides a means for testing flat surfaces, wires, and
component terminations by vertical immersion into the solder;
in addition, a holding fixture is available to lower wire samples
horizontally and face down through the solder, the speed of
rotation being varied to produce a range of immersion times.
Progressively increase contact times with the solder using
separate specimens, and determine the least time required for
complete wetting and the onset of dewetting by visual exami-
nation of the series of specimens. The best conditions of
solderability would have the shortest wetting time, and would
show no signs of dewetting within the longest contact time
required. A minimum wetting time under 2 s is evidence of
good solderability. An auxiliary attachment is available for the
determination of spread values. The specimen is lowered onto
the surface of the solder and a delay timer built into the
equipment holds the test piece in contact with the solder for
any preselected time up to 10 s. Determine spread values as in
9.3.4.
9.3.4 Spread Test:
9.3.4.1 This method involves placement of a fixed volume
of solder on the surface of a specimen with a few drops of rosin
flux (Type W flux, MIL-F-14256) and heating the specimen for
a fixed period of time at a controlled temperature.
9.3.4.2 The area of spread can be measured with a planime-
ter.
9.3.4.3 The height of the solder blob can be measured with
a stage micrometer which can be set to subtract the thickness
of the basis metal and the “spread factor” calculated. A hot
APPENDIXES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. EXAMPLES OF APPROPRIATE SERVICE CONDITIONS
X1.1 SC4—Very severe service conditions require a com-
plete coating of tin-lead free of pores. If the coating is
subjected to abrasion or is exposed to corrosive liquids or
gases, a deposit of 30 to 125 µm (1.2 to 5.0 mil) may be
required to maintain maximum protection.
X1.2 SC3—Severe service conditions include exposure to
dampness and to industrial atmospheres. Coatings of 12 to 30
µm (0.5 to 1.0 mil) have been reported to be satisfactory,
particularly for preserving a solderable coating after a long
storage period (for example, 9 months). Another application
considered in this category is the use of the tin-lead as an etch
resist in the production of printed-circuit boards.
X1.3 SC2—Moderate service conditions include dry or
4
plate held at 250 6 5°C (480 6 9°F) may be substituted for the
oven, used in the Pessel method, as a source of heat.4
9.3.5 Globule Test:
9.3.5.1 This test method was devised for assessing the
solderability of wires, component leads, etc.
9.3.5.2 This method consists of lowering the specimen of
wire (or component lead) previously fluxed, horizontally onto
a molten globule of solder, which is thereby cut in two. The
time in seconds for the solder to flow around the wire and unite
above it is a measure of the solderability. Use a fresh pellet of
solder for each test, the size of the pellet being determined by
the diameter of the specimen wire. Commercial test machines
are available.
9.3.6 Artificial Aging (When Specified By the Purchaser):
9.3.6.1 Place the sample for test in a suitable vessel above
boiling water and leave it there, with the water boiling
continuously, for 24 h. Keep the vessel covered and ensure that
the sample does not come into contact with the wall of the
vessel and that its lower edge is not less than 50 mm (2 in.) or
more than 100 mm (4 in.) above the surface of the boiling
water. Arrange the cover on the vessel and the steam con-
denser, if used, so that they do not discharge condensed water
over the sample. Disregard any discoloration of the sample
occurring during this aging treatment. After the 24-h treatment,
remove the sample from the steam and allow it to dry in the air.
9.3.6.2 Test methods outlined in 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.3.4, or 9.3.5
are used to assess the solderability of the aged specimens.
10. Keywords
10.1 electrodeposited coatings, tin-lead alloy (solder plate);
solder, tin-lead alloy; tin-lead
4
Details of this modification are given in Pessel, “Plating,” Symposium on
Solder, ASTM STP 189, ASTM, 1965, p. 315. Although out of print, STP 189 is now
available from University Microfilms, Inc., 300 N. Zeeb Rd., Ann Arbor, MI 48106.
interior atmosphere. Coatings of 8 to 12 µm (0.3 to 0.5 mil),
including flow-brightening, have been reported to be satisfac-
tory, particularly for preserving a solderable coating for a
shorter storage period than that given in SC3. Also, as in SC3,
another application considered in this category is the use of the
tin-lead as an etch resist in the production of printed-circuit
boards.
X1.4 SC1—Mild service conditions with less severe re-
quirements than SC2. Deposits of 5 µm (0.2 mil) and less have
been reported satisfactory for providing and preserving a
solderable coating for short periods of storage (for example, 3
months).
 B 579 – 73 (2004)

X2. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

X2.1 General: X2.1.2.2 Interdiffusion between tin-lead coatings and cop-

X2.1.1 The properties of electrodeposited tin-lead coatings
satisfy the requirements of solderability, corrosion resistance,
etc., outlined in the scope of this specification and their use can
be recommended for most applications. Attention is drawn to
the effects of temperature and to long-term storage of tin-lead
plated articles which may be factors in designing for special
applications.
X2.1.2 Temperature Effects:
X2.1.2.1 Tin-lead coatings are soft and will withstand
considerable flexing and twisting of the basis metal without
serious damage. At room temperature, mat tin-lead coatings
will oxidize slowly but flow-brightened and bright tin-lead
coatings oxidize less readily.
per or copper alloys does take place. The diffusion is slow at
room temperature and rapid at elevated temperatures. Evidence
of diffusion is the formation of a layer of copper-tin compound
at the interface and, if the substrate is brass, diffusion of zinc to
the surface. Diffusion may lead to darkening of a thin coating
and impairment of its solderability, particularly after long
storage. With such thin coatings, a diffusion barrier of nickel
may be advantageous, but users should consider the use of a
thicker coating when solderability has to be maintained over a
period of years. An undercoat of nickel or copper must be used
as a diffusion barrier on brass.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 580 – 79 (Reapproved 2000)

Standard Specification for

Anodic Oxide Coatings on Aluminum1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 580; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Anodic Coatings Descriptions

1.1 This specification covers requirements for electrolyti- NOTE 1—Hard coatings may vary in thickness from 12 µm to more than
cally formed porous oxide coatings on aluminum and alumi- 100 µm. If the thickness of Type A is not specified, it shall be 50 µm min.
num alloy parts in which appearance, abrasion resistance, Type A coatings will not be sealed unless so specified.
electrical properties, and protection against corrosion are Type Coating (Industry) Description Minimum Film Thickness (µm)
important. Nonporous, barrier layer anodic coatings used for A Engineering Hard Coat 50
electrical capacitors are not covered. Seven types of coatings as B Architectural Class I 18
C Architectural Class II 10
shown in Table 1 are provided. Definitions and typical ex- D Automotive—Exterior 8
amples of service conditions are provided in Appendix X1. E Interior—Moderate Abrasion 5.0
F Interior—Limited Abrasion 3
NOTE 1—It is recognized that uses exist in which modifications of the G Chromic Acid 1
coatings covered by this specification may be required. In such cases the
particular properties desired by the purchaser should be the subject of
agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer. B 538 Method of FACT (Ford Anodized Aluminum Corro-
2. Referenced Documents sion Test) Testing5
B 602 Test Method for Attribute Sampling of Metallic and
2.1 ASTM Standards: Inorganic Coatings4
B 110 Test Method for Dielectric Strength of Anodically D 658 Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic
Coated Aluminum2 Coatings by Air Blast Abrasion6
B 117 Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Testing E 429 Test Method for Measurement and Calculation of
Apparatus3 Reflecting Characteristics of Metallic Surfaces Using Inte-
B 136 Test Method for Measurement of Stain Resistance of grating Sphere Instruments6
Anodic Coatings on Aluminum4 E 430 Test Methods for Measurement of Gloss of High-
B 137 Test Method for Measurement of Coating Mass per Gloss Surfaces by Goniophotometry6
Unit Area on Anodically Coated Aluminum4 2.2 Other Standards:
B 244 Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of An- MIL-STD-105 Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspec-
odic Coatings on Aluminum and of Other Nonconductive tion by Attributes7
Coatings on Nonmagnetic Basis Metals with Eddy-Current MIL-STD-414 Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspec-
Instruments4 tion by Variables for Percent Defective7
B 368 Test Method for Copper-Accelerated Acetic Acid-
Salt Spray (Fog) Testing (CASS Test)4 3. Manufacture
B 457 Test Method for Measurement of Impedance of 3.1 Defects in the surface of the basis metal, such as
Anodic Coatings on Aluminum4 scratches, porosity, inclusions, roll and die marks, cold shuts,
B 487 Test Method for Measurement of Metal and Oxide and cracks, will adversely affect the appearance and perfor-
Coating Thicknesses by Microscopical Examination of a mance of applied coatings despite the observance of best
Cross Section4 anodizing practices. Accordingly, defects in the coating that
result from such conditions shall not be cause for rejection.
NOTE 2—To minimize problems of this sort, the specifications covering
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on the basis material or the item to be anodized should contain appropriate
Metallic and Inorganic Coatings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee limitations on such basis metal conditions.
B08.07 on Chemical Conversion Coatings.
Current edition approved May 25, 1979. Published August 1979. Originally
published as B 580 – 73. Last previous edition B 580 – 73. 5
Discontinued; see 1986 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
2
Discontinued; see 1981 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 9. 6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 06.01.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.02. 7
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05. Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 580
3.2 The basis metal shall be subjected to such mechanical
finishing operations, cleaning, and chemical or electrolytic
pretreatments as are necessary to yield anodic coatings with the
final quality and appearance specified by the purchaser.
3.3 Except where specifically excluded, anodized parts shall
be sealed in water or aqueous chemical solutions of such
purity, composition, pH, and temperature, as to impart the
properties specified herein.
4. Significant Surfaces
4.1 Significant surfaces are defined as those normally vis-
ible (directly or by reflection) which are essential to the
appearance of serviceability of the article when assembled in
normal position; or those surfaces which can be the source of
corrosion products that will deface visible surfaces and inter-
fere with functional surfaces on the assembled article. When
necessary, the significant surfaces shall be the subject of
agreement between purchaser and manufacturer and shall be
indicated on the drawings of the parts, or by the provision of
suitably marked samples.
NOTE 3—When significant surfaces are involved on which the specified
thickness or density of the coating cannot readily be controlled, such as
threads, holes, deep recesses, and similar areas, the purchaser and the
manufacturer should recognize the necessity for either thicker films on the
more accessible surfaces or for special racking.
5. Manner of Specifying Requirements
5.1 Coating Description—When ordering articles to be
finished in accordance with this specification, the purchaser
shall state:
5.1.1 The ASTM designation number,
5.1.2 The coating type and description (see Table 1),
5.1.3 The minimum anodic film thickness,
5.1.4 Special post anodic treatments,
5.1.5 Applicable quality assurance requirements (see Sec-
tion 6),
5.1.6 Significant surface appearance requirements such as
color, texture, or reflectivity, and
5.1.7 The alloy to which the coating is to be applied.
5.2 Supplementary Coating—Any supplementary coating
that is required in addition to normal or special sealing must
either be described in detail along with its requirements or the
appropriate specification(s) must be referenced.
6. Quality Assurance
6.1 Anodic oxide coatings can be produced to have many
different characteristics. No single coating can be expected to
have all of these characteristics. Therefore, the quality assur-
2
ance requirements for a given coating should be selected to
control those properties necessary to the expected end use for
the product.
6.2 Anodic coatings supplied under this specification shall
meet the minimum requirements for film thickness as stated in
Table 1.
6.3 The following ASTM methods are applicable to anodic
coatings within the scope of this specification: B 110, B 117,
B 136, B 137, B 244, B 368, B 457, B 487, B 538, D 658,
E 429, and E 430. The selection of tests to be required and the
level of performance against each test, with the exception of
minimum film thickness, shall be subject to agreement between
purchaser and manufacturer. The Dye Stain Test, as described
in Method B 136, shall not be required for Type G coatings or
for Types B through F coatings sealed only in dichromate
solutions, or for unsealed Type A coatings.
7. Workmanship and Appearance
7.1 Workmanship—The anodic coatings shall be continu-
ous, smooth, adherent, uniform in appearance, and shall be free
of powdery areas (burns), loose films, stains, discolorations,
and discontinuities such as pits, breaks and scratches, or other
damage. The size and number of contact marks shall be the
minimum consistent with good practice. The location of
contact marks shall be in areas of minimum exposure to service
environmental conditions when important to the function of the
part.
7.2 Appearance—If applicable, the color and finish appear-
ance (bright, dull, or satin) shall be a reasonably close
approximation to that of a sample consisting of treated pieces
agreed upon as the standard range by the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
NOTE 4—This range, representing the limits that the manufacturer will
supply and that the purchaser will accept, should be established before any
work is performed to meet this specification.
8. Sampling
8.1 Test methods are time consuming and often destructive;
therefore 100 % inspection is usually impractical. The pur-
chaser should select a suitable sampling plan for the acceptance
testing of lots of coated items. In order that the manufacturer
may know the quality standard he is expected to meet, the plan
selected should be made a part of the purchase contract.
8.2 Information on sampling procedures is given in Method
B 602. Standard sampling plans are suggested in Military
Standards MIL-STD-105 and MIL-STD-414.
 B 580

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. DEFINITIONS AND TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF SERVICE CONDITIONS

TABLE X1.1 Definitions of Service Conditions and Examples of Typical Applications and Applicable Coating Types
Applicable
SC No. Definition Typical Applications Coating
Types
Very severe (5) Exposure to atmospheric weathering that can be expected Unmaintained exterior architectural facades, machinery A and B
to extend for many years or to prolonged high bearing load parts, marine
wear conditions.

Severe (4) Exposure that includes likely damage from denting, 1-Automotive—exterior, 2-maintained architectural C and D
scratching, and abrasive wear coupled with corrosive exterior
environments. facades, windows

Moderate (3) Exposure that is likely to include occasional wetting with Lighting reflectors—exterior, athletic equipment, E
coating subject to moderate wear or abrasion. appliances, nameplates, lawn furniture

Mild (2) Exposure indoors in normally dry atmospheres with coating Automotive—interior, houseware items, lighting F
subject to minimum wear or abrasion. reflectors—enclosed

Crevice condition (1) Exposure to humid atmospheres with little or no abrasive Spot-welded or riveted assemblies such as aircraft and G
condition. Particularly for lap joints. electronic components.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 582 – 02

Standard Specification for

Nickel-Chromium-Iron-Molybdenum-Copper Alloy Plate,
Sheet, and Strip1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 582; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials4

1.1 The specification2 covers plate, sheet, and strip of
nickel-chromium-iron-molybdenum-copper alloys (UNS
N06007, N06975, N06985, and N06030)* as shown in Table 1,
for use in general corrosive service.
1.2 The following products are covered under this specifi-
cation:
1.2.1 Sheet and Strip— Hot or cold rolled, solution an-
nealed, and descaled unless solution anneal is performed in an
atmosphere yielding a bright finish.
1.2.2 Plate—Hot or cold rolled, solution annealed, and
descaled.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 880 Specification for General Requirements for Chemical
Check Analysis Limits for Nickel, Nickel Alloys and
Cobalt Alloys3
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials4
E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2002. Published December 2002. Originally
published as B 582 – 73. Last previous edition B 582 – 97.
2
For ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code applications, see related Specifi-
cation SB-582 in Section II of that Code.
* New designation established in accordance with ASTM E 527 and SAE J1086,
Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
3 5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
4 6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications5
E 55 Practice for Sampling Wrought Nonferrous Metals and
Alloys for Determination of Chemical Composition6
E 140 Hardness Conversion Tables for Metals (Relationship
Between Brinell Hardness, Vickers Hardness, Rockwell
Hardness, Rockwell Superficial Hardness, and Knoop
Hardness)4
E 1473 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel,
Cobalt, and High-Temperature Alloys6
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 cold-rolled plate—material 3⁄16 to 3⁄8 in. (4.76 to 9.52
mm), inclusive, in thickness.
3.1.2 hot-rolled plate—material 3⁄16 in. (4.76 mm) and over
in thickness.
3.1.3 plate—material 3⁄16 in. (4.76 mm) and over in
thickness.
3.1.4 sheet and strip—material under 3⁄16 in. (4.76 mm) in
thickness.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
requirements that are necessary for material ordered under this
specification. Examples of such requirements include, but are
not limited to, the following:
4.1.1 Alloy—Table 1,
4.1.2 Dimensions—Thickness (in decimals of an inch),
width, and length (inch or fractions of an inch),
4.1.3 Optional Requirement, Plate—How the plate is to be
cut (see 7.1 and Table 2),
4.1.4 Certification—State if certification or a report of test
results is required (Section 16),
4.1.5 Purchaser Inspection—State which tests or inspec-
tions are to be witnessed (Section 14), and
4.1.6 Samples for Product (Check) Analysis—State whether
samples should be furnished (Section 5).
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 582 – 02
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
Composition Limits, %
Element
Alloy N06007 Alloy N06975 Alloy N06985 Alloy N06030
Nickel remainderA 47.0 to 52.0 remainderA remainderA
Chromium 21.0 to 23.5 23.0 to 26.0 21.0 to 23.5 28.0 to 31.5
Iron 18.0 to 21.0 remainderA 18.0 to 21.0 13.0 to 17.0
Molybdenum 5.5 to 7.5 5.0 to 7.0 6.0 to 8.0 4.0 to 6.0
Copper 1.5 to 2.5 0.70 to 1.20 1.5 to 2.5 1.0 to 2.4
Manganese 1.0 to 2.0 1.0 max 1.0 max 1.5 max
Cobalt, max 2.5 ... 5.0 5.0
Carbon, max 0.05 0.03 0.015 0.03
Tungsten 1.0 max ... 1.5 max 1.5 to 4.0
Silicon, max 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.8
Phosphorus, max 0.04 0.03 0.04 0.04
Sulfur, max 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.02
Columbium + tantalum 1.75 to 2.50 ... 0.50 max 0.30 to 1.50
Titanium ... 0.70–1.50 ... ...
A
See 13.1.1.

TABLE 2 Permissible Variations in Width and Length of Sheared, 7.2 Sheet and strip shall have sheared or slit edges.
Torch-Cut, or Abrasive-Cut Rectangular Plate
Permissible Variations in Widths and Lengths for 8. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
Dimensions Given, in. (mm)
Specified Thickness 8.1 Weight—For calculation of mass or weight, the follow-
Up to 30 (760), incl Over 30 (760), incl
ing densities shall be used:
+ − + −
Density
Inches Alloy lb/in.3 g/cm3
N06007 0.300 8.31
Sheared:
3⁄16 to 5⁄16 , incl N06975 0.295 8.17
⁄
3 16 ⁄
18 ⁄
14 ⁄
18
N06985 0.300 8.31
Over 5⁄16 to 1⁄2 , incl 14 ⁄ 18 ⁄ 38 ⁄ 18 ⁄
N06030 0.297 8.22
Abrasive-cut:
3⁄16 to 11⁄2 , incl ⁄
1 16 ⁄
1 16 ⁄
1 16 ⁄
1 16
8.2 Thicknesses:
Over 11⁄2 to 21⁄2 , incl 18 ⁄ 18 ⁄ 18 ⁄ 18 ⁄
Torch-cut:A 8.2.1 Plate—The permissible variations in thickness of
3⁄16 to 2, excl 12 ⁄ 0 12 ⁄ 0 plate shall be as prescribed in Table 4.
2 to 3, incl 58 ⁄ 0 58 ⁄ 0
8.2.2 Sheet and Strip—The permissible variations in thick-
Millimetres ness of sheet and strip shall be as prescribed in Table 5. The
Sheared: thickness shall be measured with the micrometer spindle 3⁄8 in.
4.76 to 7.94, incl 4.76 3.18 6.35 3.18
Over 7.94 to 12.70, incl 6.35 3.18 9.52 3.18
(9.52 mm) or more from any edge for material 1 in. (25.4 mm)
Abrasive-cut: or over in width and at any place on material under 1 in. (25.4
4.76 to 38.1, incl 1.59 1.59 1.59 1.59 mm) in width.
Over 38.1 to 63.5, incl 3.18 3.18 3.18 3.18
Torch-cut:A
8.3 Width:
4.8 to 50.8, excl 12.7 0 12.7 0 8.3.1 Plate—The permissible variations in width of rectan-
50.8 to 76.2, incl 15.9 0 15.9 0 gular plates shall be as prescribed in Table 2.
A
The tolerance spread shown for torch-cutting may be obtained all on the minus 8.3.2 Sheet and Strip—The permissible variations in width
side, or divided between the plus and the minus side, if so specified by the for sheet and strip shall be as prescribed in Table 6.
purchaser.
8.4 Length:
5. Chemical Composition 8.4.1 Plate—Permissible variations in the length of rectan-
gular plate shall be as prescribed in Table 2.
5.1 Heat Analysis—The material shall conform to the com- 8.4.2 Sheet and Strip—Sheet and strip may be ordered to cut
position limits specified in Table 1. lengths, in which case a variation of 1⁄8 in. (3.18 mm) over the
5.2 Product (Check) Analysis—If a product (check) analysis specified length shall be permitted, with a 0 minus tolerance.
is made by the purchaser, the material shall conform to the 8.5 Straightness—The edgewise curvature (depth of cord)
requirements specified in Table 1 subject to the permissible of sheet, strip, and plate shall not exceed 0.05 in./ft (4.2
tolerances in Specification B 880. mm/m).
6. Mechanical Properties and Other Requirements 8.6 Squareness (Sheet)—For sheets of all thickness and
6.1 Tensile Properties—The material shall conform to the widths of 6 in. (152.4 mm) or more, the angle between adjacent
mechanical property requirements prescribed in Table 3. sides shall be 90 6 0.15° (1⁄16 in. in 24 in. or 2.6 mm/m).
6.2 Hardness—The hardness values given in Table 3 are 8.7 Flatness—Plate, sheet, and strip shall be commercially
informative only. flat.

7. Edges 9. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance

7.1 Plates shall have sheared or cut machined, abrasive cut, 9.1 The material shall be uniform in quality and condition,
powder cut, or inert arc cut edges, as specified. smooth, and free of injurious imperfections.

2
 B 582 – 02
TABLE 3 Mechanical Property Requirements
Yield Strength Elongation in
Tensile Strength Rockwell Hardness,B
Alloy Thickness, in. (mm) (0.2 % Offset), 2 in. or 50.8 mm
min, psi (MPa) max
min, psi (MPa) or 4DA min, %
Annealed Plate

N06007 3⁄16 to 3⁄4 (4.76 to 19.05), incl 90 000 (621) 35 000 (241) 35 100 HRB
Over 3⁄4 to 21⁄2 (19.05 to 63.5), incl 85 000 (586) 30 000 (207) 30 100 HRB
N06975 3⁄16 to 21⁄2 (4.76 to 63.5), incl 85 000 (586) 32 000 (221) 40 100 HRB
N06985 3⁄16 to 3⁄4 (4.76 to 19.05), incl 90 000 (621) 35 000 (241) 45 100 HRB
Over 3⁄4 to 21⁄2 (19.05 to 63.5), incl 85 000 (586) 30 000 (207) 35 100 HRB
N06030 ... 85 000 (586) 35 000 (241) 30 ...

Annealed Sheet

N06985 Over 0.020 (0.51) 90 000 (621) 35 000 (241) 45 100 HRB

Annealed Sheet and Strip

N06007 Over 0.020 (0.51) 90 000 (621) 35 000 (241) 40 100 HRB
N06975 Over 0.020 (0.51) 85 000 (586) 32 000 (221) 40 100 HRB
N06030 Over 0.020 (0.51) 85 000 (586) 35 000 (241) 30 ...
A
D refers to the diameter of the tension specimen.
B
Hardness values are shown for information purposes only and are not to be used as a basis for rejection or acceptance. For approximate hardness conversions, see
Hardness Conversion Tables E 140.

TABLE 4 Permissible Variations in Thickness of PlateA 10.1.2 A lot of plate, sheet, or strip for mechanical testing
Permissible Variations in Thickness, in. shall be defined as the material from one heat in the same
Specified Thickness, in. (mm) (mm)B,C condition and specified thickness.
+ − 10.2 Sampling for Chemical Analysis:
⁄ to ⁄ (4.76 to 5.56), incl
3 16 7 32 0.021 (0.53) 0.010 (0.25) 10.2.1 A representative sample shall be obtained from each
Over 7⁄32 to 1⁄4 (5.56 to 6.35), incl 0.024 (0.61) 0.010 (0.25)
Over 1⁄4 to 3⁄8 (6.35 to 9.52), incl 0.027 (0.69) 0.010 (0.25) lot during pouring or subsequent processing.
Over 3⁄8 to 1⁄2 (9.52 to 12.70), incl 0.030 (0.76) 0.010 (0.25) 10.2.2 Product (check) analysis shall be wholly the respon-
Over 1⁄2 to 5⁄8 (12.70 to 15.88), incl 0.035 (0.89) 0.010 (0.25)
Over 5⁄8 to 3⁄4 (15.88 to 19.05), incl 0.040 (1.02) 0.010 (0.25) sibility of the purchaser.
Over 3⁄4 to 7⁄8 (19.05 to 22.25), incl 0.045 (1.14) 0.010 (0.25) 10.3 Sampling for Mechanical Testing:
Over 7⁄8 to 1 (22.25 to 25.4), incl 0.050 (1.27) 0.010 (0.25)
Over 1 to 21⁄2 (25.4 to 63.5), incl 5D 0.010 (0.25) 10.3.1 Representative samples shall be taken from each lot
A
Applicable to plate 48 in. (1.22 m) and under in width.
of finished material.
B
Measured 3⁄8 in. (9.52 mm) or more from any edge.
C
Buffing or grinding for removal of light surface imperfections shall be permitted. 11. Number of Tests and Retests
The depth of such buffed or ground areas shall not exceed the minimum tolerance
thickness. 11.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per lot.
D
Expressed as percent of thickness.
11.2 Tension Tests—One test per lot.
TABLE 5 Permissible Variations in Thickness of SheetA and Strip 11.3 Hardness Tests—One test per lot.
Permissible Variations in Thickness, 11.4 Retests—If one of the specimens used in the above
Specified Thickness, in. (mm) in.B,C (mm) (All Widths) tests of any lot fails to meet the specified requirements, two
+ − additional specimens shall be taken from different sample
0.020 to 0.034 (0.51 to 0.86), incl 0.004 (0.10) 0.004 (0.10) pieces and tested. The results of the tests on both of these
Over 0.034 to 0.056 (0.86 to 1.42), incl 0.005 (0.13) 0.005 (0.13) specimens shall meet the specified requirements.
Over 0.056 to 0.070 (1.42 to 1.78), incl 0.006 (0.15) 0.006 (0.15)
Over 0.070 to 0.078 (1.78 to 1.98), incl 0.007 (0.18) 0.007 (0.18)
Over 0.078 to 0.093 (1.98 to 2.36), incl 0.008 (0.20) 0.008 (0.20) 12. Specimen Preparation
Over 0.093 to 0.109 (2.36 to 2.77), incl 0.009 (0.23) 0.009 (0.23)
Over 0.109 to 0.125 (2.77 to 3.18), incl 0.010 (0.25) 0.010 (0.25) 12.1 Tension test specimens shall be taken from material in
Over 0.125 to 0.140 (3.18 to 3.56), incl 0.013 (0.33) 0.010 (0.25) the final condition and tested transverse to the direction of
Over 0.140 to 0.171 (3.56 to 4.34), incl 0.016 (0.41) 0.010 (0.25) rolling when width will permit.
Over 0.171 to 0.187 (4.34 to 4.75), incl 0.018 (0.46) 0.010 (0.25)
A
12.2 Tension test specimens shall be any of the standard or
Applicable to sheet 48 in. (1.22 m) and under in width.
B
Measured 3⁄8 in. (9.52 mm) or more from any edge. subsize specimens shown in Test Methods E 8.
C
Buffing for removal of light surface imperfections shall be permitted. The depth 12.3 In the event of disagreement, referee specimens shall
of such buffed areas shall not exceed the permissible minus variation.
be as follows:
12.3.1 Full thickness of the material, machined to the form
and dimensions shown for the sheet-type specimen in Test
10. Sampling
Methods E 8 for material under 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) in thickness.
10.1 Lots for Chemical Analysis and Mechanical Testing: 12.3.2 The largest possible round specimen shown in Test
10.1.1 A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one heat. Methods E 8 for material 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) and over.

3
 B 582 – 02
TABLE 6 Permissible Variations in Width of Sheet and Strip
Permissible Variations in Specified Width, in.
Specified Thickness, in. (mm) Specified Width, in. (mm) (mm)
+ −
Sheet
0.187 (4.76) and under 2 (50.8) and over 0.125 (3.18) 0
Strip (Slit Edges)
Over 0.020 to 0.075 (0.51 to 1.90), incl 24 (610) and under 0.007 (0.18) 0.007 (0.18)
Over 0.075 to 0.100 (1.90 to 2.54), incl 24 (610) and under 0.009 (0.23) 0.009 (0.23)
Over 0.100 to 0.125 (2.54 to 3.18), incl 24 (610) and under 0.012 (0.30) 0.012 (0.30)

13. Test Methods and Chemical Analysis 15. Rejection and Rehearing
13.1 The chemical composition and mechanical properties 15.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
of the material as enumerated in this specification shall be this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
determined, in case of disagreement, in accordance with the to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
following ASTM standards: dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
13.1.1 Chemical Analysis—Test Methods E 1473. For ele- supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
ments not covered by Test Methods E 1473, the referee test
method shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and 16. Certification
the purchaser. The composition of the remainder element shall
16.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
be determined arithmetically by difference.
manufacturer’s certification shall be furnished to the purchaser
13.1.2 Tension Test—Test Methods E 8.
stating that material has been manufactured, tested, and in-
13.1.3 Rockwell Hardness Test—Test Methods E 18.
spected in accordance with this specification, and that the test
13.1.4 Hardness Conversion—Hardness Conversion Tables
results on representative samples meet specification require-
E 140.
ments. When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
13.1.5 Determining Significant Places—Practice E 29.
report of the test results shall be furnished.
13.1.6 Method of Sampling—Practice E 55.
13.2 For purposes of determining compliance with the
17. Product Marking and Package Marking
specified limits for requirements of the properties listed in the
following table, an observed or calculated value shall be 17.1 Each plate, sheet, or strip shall be marked on one face
rounded in accordance with the rounding method of Practice with the specification number, heat number, manufacturer’s
E 29. identification, and size. The markings shall have no deleterious
Requirements Rounded unit for observed or calculated value effect on the material or its performance and shall be suffi-
ciently stable to withstand normal handling.
Chemical composi- nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures
tion and tolerances of the specified limit
17.2 Each bundle or shipping container shall be marked
Tensile strength and yield nearest 1000 psi (7 MPa) with the name of the material; this specification number; alloy;
strength the size; gross, tare, and net weight; consignor and consignee
Elongation nearest 1 %
address; contract or order number; and such other information
14. Inspection as may be defined in the contract or order.
14.1 Inspection of the material shall be made as agreed upon
between the manufacturer and the purchaser as part of the 18. Keywords
purchase contract. 18.1 plate; sheet; strip; N06007; N60975; N06985; N06030

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. HEAT TREATMENT

X1.1 Proper heat treatment during or subsequent to fabri-

cation is necessary for optimum performance, and the manu-
facturer shall be consulted for details.

4
 B 582 – 02
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 581 – 02
Standard Specification for
Nickel-Chromium-Iron-Molybdenum-Copper Alloy Rod1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 581; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification2 covers rod of Ni-Cr-Fe-Mo-Cu al-
loys (UNS N06007, N06975, N06985, N06030, and N08031)*
as shown in Tables 1-3, for use in general corrosive service.
1.2 The following products are covered under this specifi-
cation:
1.2.1 Rods 5⁄16 to 3⁄4 in. (7.94 to 19.05 mm) excl in diameter,
hot- or cold-finished, solution annealed and pickled or me-
chanically descaled.
1.2.2 Rods 3⁄4 to 31⁄2 in. (19.05 to 88.9 mm) incl in diameter,
hot- or cold-finished, solution annealed, ground or turned.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 880 Specification for General Requirements for Chemi-
cal Check Analysis Limits for Nickel, Nickel Alloys and
Cobalt Alloys3
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials4
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications5
E 55 Practice for Sampling Wrought Nonferrous Metals and
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2002. Published December 2002. Originally
approved in 1973. Last previous edition approved in 1997 as B 581 – 97.
2
For ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code applications see related Specifi-
cation SB-581 in Section II of that Code.
* New designation established in accordance with ASTM E 527 and SAE J1086,
Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
5 6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
Alloys for Determination of Chemical Composition6
E 1473 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel,
Cobalt, and High-Temperature Alloys6
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 rod—material of round solid section furnished in
straight lengths.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify all
requirements that are necessary for material ordered under this
specification. Examples of such requirements include, but are
not limited to the following:
4.1.1 Alloy—Table 1.
4.1.2 Dimensions—Nominal diameter and length. The
shortest useable multiple length shall be specified (Table 4).
4.1.3 Certification— State if certification or a report of test
results is required (Section 16).
4.1.4 Purchaser Inspection—State which tests or inspec-
tions are to be witnessed (Section 14).
4.1.5 Samples for Product (Check)Analysis—State whether
samples shall be furnished (10.2.2).
5. Chemical Composition
5.1 Heat Analysis— The material shall conform to the
composition limits specified in Table 1.
5.2 Product (Check) Analysis—If a product (check) analy-
sis is made by the purchaser, the material shall conform to the
requirements specified in Table 1 subject to the permissible
tolerances in Specification B 880.
6. Mechanical and Other Requirements
6.1 The material shall conform to the requirements of Table
2.
7. Straightness
7.1 The maximum curvature (depth of cord) shall not
exceed 0.050 in. multiplied by the length in feet (0.04 mm
multiplied by the length in centimetres).
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
 B 581 – 02
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
Composition Limits, %
Element
Alloy N06007 Alloy N06975 Alloy N06985 Alloy N06030 Alloy N08031
Nickel remainderA 47.0–52.0 remainderA remainderA 30.0-32.0
Chromium 21.0–23.5 23.0–26.0 21.0–23.5 28.0–31.5 26.0-28.0
Iron 18.0–21.0 remainderA 18.0–21.0 13.0–17.0 remainderA
Molybdenum 5.5–7.5 5.0–7.0 6.0–8.0 4.0–6.0 30.-7.0
Copper 1.5–2.5 0.70–1.20 1.5–2.5 1.0–2.4 1.0-1.4
Manganese 1.0–2.0 1.0 max 1.0 max 1.5 max 2.0 max
Cobalt, max 2.5 ... 5.0 max 5.0 max ...
Carbon, max 0.05 0.03 0.015 max 0.03 max 0.015
Tungsten 1.0 max ... 1.5 max 1.5–4.0 ...
Silicon, max 1.0 1.0 1.0 max 0.8 max 0.3
Phosphorus, max 0.04 0.03 0.04 max 0.04 max 0.020
Sulfur, max 0.03 0.03 0.03 max 0.02 max 0.010
Columbium + tantalum 1.75–2.50 ... 0.50 max 0.30–1.50 ...
Titanium ... 0.7–1.5 ... ... ...
Nitrogen 0.15-0.25 ... ... ... ...
A
See 13.1.1.

TABLE 2 Mechanical Property Requirements

Tensile Strength min, Yield Strength (0.2 % Elongation in 2 in. or
Alloy Specified Diameter, in. (mm)
psi (MPa) Offset), min, psi (MPa) 50.8 mm or 4D A min
N06007 5⁄16 to 3⁄4 (7.94 to 19.05), incl 90 000 (621) 35 000 (241) 35
Over 3⁄4 to 31⁄2 (19.05 to 88.9), incl 85 000 (586) 30 000 (207) 30
N06975 5⁄16 to 31⁄2 (7.94 to 88.9), incl 85 000 (586) 32 000 (221) 40
N06985 5⁄16 to 3⁄4 (7.9 to 19.05), incl 90 000 (621) 35 000 (241) 45
Over 3⁄4 to 31⁄2 (19.05 to 88.9), incl 85 000 (586) 30 000 (207) 35
N06030 ... 85 000 (586) 35 000 (241) 30
N08031 All sizes 94 000 (648) 40 000 (276) 40
A
D refers to the diameter of the tension specimen.

TABLE 3 Permissible Variations in Diameter and Out-of-Roundness of Rods

Permissible Variations, in. (mm)
Specified Diameter, in. (mm) Diameter
Out-of-Roundness, max
+ −
Hot-Finished, Annealed, and Descaled Rods
5⁄16 to 7⁄16 (7.94 to 11.11), incl 0.012 (0.305) 0.012 (0.305) 0.018 (0.457)
Over 7⁄16 to 5⁄8 (11.11 to 15.87), incl 0.014 (0.355) 0.014 (0.355) 0.020 (0.508)
Over 5⁄8 to 3⁄4 (15.87 to 19.05), excl 0.016 (0.406) 0.016 (0.406) 0.024 (0.610)
Hot-Finished, Annealed, and Ground or Turned Rods
34 ⁄ to 31⁄2 (19.05 to 88.9), incl 0.010 (0.254) 0 0.008 (0.203)

TABLE 4 Permissible Variations in Length of Rods
Random mill lengths 2 to 12 ft (61 to 366 cm) long with not
more than 25 weight % under 4 ft (122
cm).
Multiple lengths Furnished in multiples of a specified unit
length, within the length limits
indicated above. For each multiple, an
allowance of 1⁄4 in. (6.35 mm) will be
made for cutting, unless otherwise
specified. At the manufacturer’s
option, individual specified unit lengths
may be furnished.
Nominal lengths Specified nominal lengths having a
range of not less than 2 ft (61 cm)
with no short lengths allowed.
Cut lengths A specified length to which all rods will
be cut with a permissible variation of
+ 1⁄8 in. (3.17 mm), − 0.
8. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
8.1 Diameter—The permissible variations from the speci-
fied diameter and out-of-roundness shall be as prescribed in
Table 3.
8.2 Machining Allowances—When the surfaces of finished
material are to be machined, the following allowances are
suggested for normal machining operations:
8.2.1 As-Finished Rounds (Annealed and Descaled)—For
diameters of 5⁄16 to 11⁄16 in. (7.94 to 17.46 mm) incl, an
allowance of 1⁄16 in. (1.59 mm) on the diameter should be made
for finish machining.
8.3 Length—The permissible variations in length of finished
rods shall be as prescribed in Table 4. Unless otherwise
specified, random mill lengths shall be furnished. Rods ordered
to random or nominal lengths shall be furnished with either
cropped or saw-cut ends; material ordered to cut lengths shall
be furnished with square saw-cut or machined ends. Where
rods are ordered in multiple lengths, a 1⁄4-in. (6.35-mm) length
addition shall be allowed for each uncut multiple length.
8.4 Weight—For calculation of mass or weight, the follow-
ing densities shall be used:
Density
Alloy lb/in.3 g/cm3
N06007 0.300 8.31
N06975 0.295 8.17
N06985 0.300 8.31

2
 B 581 – 02
N06030 0.297 8.22
N08031 0.293 8.10
9. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
9.1 The material shall be uniform in quality and condition,
smooth, commercially straight, and free of injurious imperfec-
tions.
10. Sampling
10.1 Lots for Chemical Analysis and Mechanical Testing:
10.1.1 A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one heat.
10.1.2 A lot of rod for mechanical testing shall be defined as
the material from one heat in the same condition and specified
thickness.
10.2 Sampling for Chemical Analysis:
10.2.1 A representative sample shall be obtained from each
lot during pouring or subsequent processing.
10.2.2 Product (check) analysis shall be wholly the respon-
sibility of the purchaser and shall conform to the product
(check) analysis variations per Specification B 880.
10.3 Sampling for Mechanical Testing:
10.3.1 A representative sample shall be taken from each lot
of finished material.
11. Number of Tests and Retests
11.1 Chemical Analysis—One test per lot.
11.2 Tension Tests— One test per lot.
11.3 Retests—If the specimen used in the mechanical test of
any lot fails to meet the specified requirements, two additional
specimens shall be taken from different sample pieces and
tested. The results of the tests on both of these specimens shall
meet the specified requirements.
12. Specimen Preparation
12.1 Tension test specimens shall be taken from material
after final heat treatment and tested in the direction of
fabrication.
12.2 Tension test specimens shall be any of the standard or
subsized specimens shown in Test Methods E 8.
12.3 In the event of disagreement, the referee specimen
shall be the largest possible round specimen shown in Test
Methods E 8.
13. Test Methods and Chemical Analysis
13.1 The chemical composition and mechanical properties
of the material as enumerated in this specification shall be
determined, in case of disagreement, in accordance with the
following ASTM methods:
13.1.1 Chemical Analysis—Test Methods E 1473. For ele-
ments not covered by Test Methods E 1473, the referee method
3
shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and pur-
chaser. The composition of the remainder element shall be
determined arithmetically by difference.
13.1.2 Tension Test— Test Methods E 8.
13.1.3 Method of Sampling—Practice E 55.
13.1.4 Determining Significant Places—Practice E 29.
13.2 For purposes of determining compliance with the
limits in this specification, an observed value or a calculated
value shall be rounded in accordance with the rounding method
of Practice E 29:
Rounded Unit for Observed or Calculated
Requirements
Value
Chemical composition and toler- nearest unit in the last right-hand place
ances of figures of the specified limit
Tensile strength and yield strength nearest 1000 psi (7 MPa)
Elongation nearest 1 %
14. Inspection
14.1 Inspection of the material shall be made as agreed upon
by the manufacturer and the purchaser as part of the purchase
contract.
15. Rejection and Rehearing
15.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
16. Certification
16.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
manufacturer’s certification shall be furnished to the purchaser
stating that material has been manufactured, tested, and in-
spected in accordance with this specification, and that the test
results on representative samples meet specification require-
ments. When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
report of the test results shall be furnished.
17. Product Marking
17.1 Each piece of material 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) and over in
diameter shall be marked with this specification number, name
of the material, and size of the product.
17.2 Each bundle or shipping container shall be marked
with the name of the material; this specification number; alloy;
the size; gross, tare and net weight; consignor and consignee
address; contract or other number; or such other information as
may be defined in the contract or order.
18. Keywords
18.1 rod; N06007; N06975; N06985; N06030; N08031
 B 581 – 02
APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. HEAT TREATMENT

X1.1 Proper heat treatment during or subsequent to fabri- facturer shall be consulted for details.
cation is necessary for optimum performance and the manu-

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 584 – 00

Standard Specification for

Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 584; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope* Continuous Castings3

1.1 This specification covers requirements for copper alloy B 271 Specification for Copper-Base Alloy Centrifugal
sand castings for general applications. Nominal compositions Castings3
of the alloys defined by this specification are shown in Table B 369 Specification for Copper-Nickel Alloy Castings3
1.2 This is a composite specification replacing former docu- B 427 Specification for Gear Bronze Alloy Castings3
ments as shown in Table 1. B 492 Specification for Cast Copper-Nickel Ship Tailshaft
Sleeves4
NOTE 1—Other copper alloy castings are included in the following B 505 Specification for Copper-Base Alloy Continuous
ASTM specifications: B 22, B 61, B 62, B 66, B 67, B 148, B 176, B 271,
Castings3
B 369, B 427, B 492, B 505, B 763, B 770, and B 806.
B 763 Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for
1.2 Component part castings produced to this specification Valve Application3
may be manufactured in advance and supplied from stock. In B 770 Specification for Copper-Beryllium Alloy Sand Cast-
such cases the manufacturer shall maintain a general quality ings for General Applications3
certification of all castings without specific record or date of B 806 Specification for Copper Alloy Permanent Mold
casting for a specific casting. Castings for General Applications3
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded B 824 Specification for General Requirements for Copper
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are provided Alloy Castings3
for information purposes only. B 846 Terminology for Copper and Copper Alloys3
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)5
2. Referenced Documents
2.2 ASME Code:
2.1 ASTM Standards: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code6
B 22 Specification for Bronze Castings for Bridges and
Turntables3 3. Terminology
B 61 Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings3 3.1 Definitions of terms relating to copper alloys can be
B 62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal found in Terminology B 846.
Castings3
B 66 Specification for Bronze Castings for Steam Locomo- 4. General Requirements
tive Wearing Parts3 4.1 The following sections of Specification B 824 form a
B 67 Specification for Car and Tender Journal Bearings, part of this specification. In the event of a conflict between this
Lined3 specification and Specification B 824, the requirements of this
B 148 Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Sand Castings3 specification shall take precedence.
B 176 Specification for Copper-Alloy Die Castings3 4.1.1 Terminology,
B 208 Practice for Preparing Tension Test Specimens for 4.1.2 Other Requirements,
Copper Alloy Sand, Permanent Mold, Centrifugal, and 4.1.3 Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations,
4.1.4 Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance,
1
4.1.5 Sampling,
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper and
4.1.6 Number of Tests and Retests,
Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.05 on Castings
and Ingots for Remelting. 4.1.7 Specimen Preparation,
Current edition approved May 10, 2000. Published August 2000. Originally
published as B 584 - 73. Last previous edition B 584 - 98a.
2
The UNS system for copper and copper alloys (see Practice E 527) is a simple
4
expansion of the former standard designation system accomplished by the addition Discontinued—Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01.
5
of a prefix “C” and a suffix “00”. The suffix can be used to accommodate Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
6
composition variations of the base alloy. Available from the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, United Engi-
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01. neering Center, 345 E. 47th St., New York, NY 10017.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 584 – 00
TABLE 1 Nominal Compositions
Copper
Alloy Previous Alum- Man- Sili- Nio- Bis-
Classification Commercial Designation Copper Tin Lead Zinc Nickel Iron
UNS Designation inum ganese con bium muth
No.
Leaded red brass C83450 ... ... 88 21⁄2 2 61⁄2 1 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C83600 B 145-4A 85-5-5-5 or No. 1 composition 85 5 5 5 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C83800 B 145-4B commercial red brass, 83-4-6-7 83 4 6 7 ... ... ... ... ... ...
Leaded semi-red C84400 B 145-5A valve composition, 81-3-7-9 81 3 7 9 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
brass
C84800 B 145-5B semi-red brass, 76-21⁄2-61⁄2-15 76 21⁄2 61⁄2 15 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Leaded yellow brass C85200 B 146-6A high-copper yellow brass 72 1 3 24 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C85400 B 146-6B commercial No. 1 yellow brass 67 1 3 29 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C85700 B 146-6C leaded naval brass 61 1 1 37 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
High-strength yellow C86200 B 147-8B high-strength manganese bronze 63 ... ... 27 ... 3 4 3 ... ... ...
brass
C86300 B 147-8C high-strength manganese bronze 61 ... ... 27 ... 3 6 3 ... ... ...
C86400 B 147-7A leaded manganese bronze 58 1 1 38 ... 1 ⁄
12 ⁄
12 ... ... ...
C86400 B 132-A
C86500 B 147-8A No. 1 manganese bronze 58 ... ... 39 ... 1 1 1 ... ... ...
C86700 B 132-B leaded manganese bronze 58 1 1 34 ... 2 2 2 ... ... ...
Silicon bronze + C87300 B 198-12A silicon bronze 95 ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 4 ... ...
silicon brass
C87400 B 198-13A silicon brass 82 ... 1⁄2 14 ... ... ... ... 31⁄2 ... ...
C87500 B 198-13B silicon brass 82 ... ... 14 ... ... ... ... 4 ... ...
C87600 B 198-13C silicon bronze 91 ... ... 5 ... ... ... ... 4 ... ...
C87610 B 198-12A silicon bronze 92 ... ... 4 ... ... ... ... 4 ... ...
Bismuth selenium C89510A ... sebiloy I 87 5 ... 5 ... ... ... ... ... ... 1.0
brass
C89520B ... sebiloy II 86 51⁄2 ... 5 ... ... ... ... ... ... 1.9
Bismuth semi-red C89844 ... bismuth brass 841⁄2 4 ... 8 ... ... ... ... ... ... 3
brass
Tin bronze + leaded C90300 B 143-1B modified “G” bronze, 88-8-0-4 88 8 ... 4 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
tin bronze
C90500 B 143-1A “G” bronze, 88-10-0-2 88 10 ... 2 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C92200 B 143-2A steam or valve bronze-Navy “M” 88 6 11⁄2 41⁄2 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C92210 ... ... 88 5 2 4 1 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C92300 B 143-2B 87-5-1-4, Navy PC 87 8 1 4 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C92600 ... 87-10-1-2 87 10 1 2 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
High-lead tin bronze C93200 B 144-3B 83-7-7-3 83 7 7 3 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C93500 B 144-3C 85-5-9-1 85 5 9 1 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C93700 B 144-3A 80-10-10 80 10 10 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C93800 B 144-3D 78-7-15 78 7 15 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C94300 B 144-3E 71-5-24 71 5 24 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Nickel-tin bronze + C94700 B 292-A nickel-tin bronze Grade “A” 88 5 ... 2 5 ... ... ... ... ... ...
leaded nickel-tin
bronze
C94800 B 292-B leaded nickel-tin bronze Grade “B” 87 5 1 2 5 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C94900 ... leaded nickel-tin bronze Grade “C” 80 5 5 5 5 ... ... ... ... ... ...
Spinodal alloy C96800 ... ... 82 8 ... ... 10 ... ... ... ... 0.2 ...
Leaded nickel bronze C97300 B 149-10A 12 % leaded nickel silver 57 2 9 20 12 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C97600 B 149-11A 20 % leaded nickel silver 64 4 4 8 20 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C97800 B 149-11B 25 % leaded nickel silver 66 5 2 2 25 ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
Selenium 0.5.
B
Selenium 0.9.

4.1.8 Test Methods, 5.1.3 Copper alloy UNS Number (Table 1) and temper
4.1.9 Significance of Numerical Limits, (as-cast, heat treated, and so forth),
4.1.10 Inspection, 5.1.4 Pattern or drawing number, and condition (as-cast,
4.1.11 Rejection and Rehearing, machined, etc.),
4.1.12 Certification, 5.1.5 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code—compliance
4.1.13 Test Report, (Section 10),
4.1.14 Product Marking,
5.1.6 When material is purchased for agencies of the U.S.
4.1.15 Packaging and Package Marking, and
Government, the Supplementary Requirements of Specifica-
4.1.16 Supplementary Requirements.
tion B 824 may be specified.
5. Ordering Information 5.2 The following options are available and should be
5.1 Orders for castings under this specification should specified in the purchase order when required:
include the following information: 5.2.1 Chemical analysis of residual elements (7.3),
5.1.1 Specification title, number, and year of issue, 5.2.2 Pressure test or soundness requirements (Specification
5.1.2 Quantity of castings, B 824),

2
 B 584 – 00
5.2.3 Approval of weld repair or impregnation, or both TABLE 3 Suggested Heat Treatments
(Section 9), Copper Alloy
Solution Treatment Annealing Treatment
(not less than 1 h followed by (not less than 2 h followed
5.2.4 Certification (Specification B 824), UNS No.
water quench) by air cool)
5.2.5 Foundry test report (Specification B 824), C96800 1500°F (815°C) (Age to develop properties)
5.2.6 Witness inspection (Specification B 824), and 660°F (350°C)
Solution treatment (not less Precipitation hardening (5 h)
5.2.7 Product marking (Specification B 824). than 2 h followed by water
quench)
C94700 1425–1475°F 580–620°F
6. Manufacture (775–800°C) (305–325°C)
6.1 Copper alloy UNS Nos. C94700 and C96800 may be
supplied in the heat treated condition to obtain the higher
mechanical properties shown in Table 2. Suggested heat 7. Chemical Composition
treatments for these alloys are given in Table 3. Actual practice 7.1 The castings shall conform to the compositional require-
may vary by manufacturer. ments for named elements as shown in Table 4 for the copper
6.2 Separately cast test bar coupons representing castings alloy UNS numbers specified in the purchase order.
made in copper alloy UNS Nos. C94700HT and C96800HT 7.2 These specification limits do not preclude the presence
shall be heat treated with the castings. of other elements. Limits may be established and analysis
required for unnamed elements agreed upon between manu-
facturer or supplier and purchaser. Copper or zinc, when zinc
TABLE 2 Mechanical Requirements is 20 % or greater, may be given as remainder and may be
Tensile Strength,
Yield Strength,A min
Elongation in taken as the difference between the sum of all elements
Copper Alloy min 2 in. analyzed and 100 %. When all named elements in Table 4 are
UNS No. or 50 mm,
ksiB MPaC ksiB MPaC min, % analyzed, their sum shall be as specified in Table 5.
C83450 30 207 14 97 25
7.3 It is recognized that residual elements may be present in
C83600 30 207 14 97 20 cast copper alloys. Analysis shall be made for residual ele-
C83800 30 207 13 90 20 ments only when specified in the purchase order.
C84400 29 200 13 90 18
C84800 28 193 12 83 16
C85200 35 241 12 83 25 8. Mechanical Properties
C85400 30 207 11 76 20 8.1 Mechanical properties shall be determined from sepa-
C85700 40 276 14 97 15
C86200 90 621 45 310 18 rately cast test bar castings, and shall meet the requirements
C86300 110 758 60 414 12 shown in Table 2.
C86400 60 414 20 138 15
C86500 65 448 25 172 20
C86700 80 552 32 221 15
9. Casting Repair
C87300 45 310 18 124 20 9.1 The castings shall not be weld repaired without approval
C87400 50 345 21 145 18
C87500 60 414 24 165 16
of the purchaser (5.2.3).
C87600 60 414 30 207 16 9.2 The castings shall not be impregnated without approval
C87610 45 310 18 124 20 of the purchaser (5.2.3).
C89510 26 184 17 120 8
C89520 25 176 17 120 6
C89844 28 193 13 90 15 10. ASME Requirements
C90300 40 276 18 124 20 10.1 When specified in the purchase order to meet ASME
C90500 40 276 18 124 20
C92200 34 234 16 110 22 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code requirements, castings in
C92210 32 225 15 103 20 copper alloy UNS Nos. C92200, C93700, and C97600 shall
C92300 36 248 16 110 18 comply with the following:
C92600 40 276 18 124 20
C93200 30 207 14 97 15 10.1.1 Certification requirements of Specification B 824.
C93500 28 193 12 83 15 10.1.2 Foundry test report requirements of Specification
C93700 30 207 12 83 15 B 824.
C93800 26 179 14 97 12
C94300 24 165 ... ... 10 10.1.3 Castings shall be marked with the manufacturer’s
C94700 45 310 20 138 25 name, the copper alloy UNS number, and the casting quality
C94700 (HT) 75 517 50 345 5 factor. In addition, heat numbers or serial numbers that are
C94800 40 276 20 138 20
C94900 38 262 15 103 15 traceable to heat numbers shall be marked on all pressure-
C96800 125 862 100D 689D 3 containing castings individually weighing 50 lbs (22.7 kg) or
C96800 (HT) 135 931 120D 821D ... more. Pressure-containing castings weighing less than 50 lbs
C97300 30 207 15 103 8
C97600 40 276 17 117 10 (22.7 kg) shall be marked with either the heat number or a
C97800 50 345 22 152 10 serial number that will identify the casting as to the month in
A
Yield strength shall be determined as the stress producing an elongation under which it was poured. Marking shall be in such a position as to
load of 0.5 %, that is, 0.01 in. (0.254 mm) in a gage length of 2 in. or 50 mm. not impair the usefulness of the casting.
B
ksi = 1000 psi.
C
See Appendix X1. 10.2 The castings shall not be repaired, plugged, welded, or
D
Yield strength 0.2 %, offset. “burned in” unless permission from the purchaser has been

3
 TABLE 4 Chemical Requirements
Composition, % Max Except as Indicated
Copper
Major Elements Residual Elements
Alloy
UNS Nickel Nickel
Alumi- Manga- Sele- Anti- Phos- Alumi- Manga-
No. Copper Tin Lead Zinc Iron Incl. Silicon Bismuth Iron incl. Sulfur Silicon Lead
num nese nium mony phorus num nese
Cobalt Cobalt
C83450 87.0–89.0 2.0–3.5 1.5–3.0 5.5–7.5 ... 0.75–2.0 ... ... ... ... ... 0.30 0.25 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C83600 84.0–86.0 4.0–6.0 4.0–6.0 4.0–6.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... ... 0.30 0.25 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C83800 82.0–83.8 3.3–4.2 5.0–7.0 5.0–8.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... ... 0.30 0.25 ... 0.08 0.03 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C84400 78.0–82.0 2.3–3.5 6.0–8.0 7.0–10.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... ... 0.40 0.25 ... 0.08 0.02 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C84800 75.0–77.0 2.0–3.0 5.5–7.0 13.0–17.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... ... 0.40 0.25 ... 0.08 0.02 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C85200 70.0–74.0 0.7–2.0 1.5–3.8 20.0–27.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.6 0.20 1.0 0.05 0.02 0.005 ... 0.05 ...
C85400 65.0–70.0 0.50–1.5 1.5–3.8 24.0–32.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.7 ... 1.0 ... ... 0.35 ... 0.05 ...
C85700 58.0–64.0 0.50–1.5 0.8–1.5 32.0–40.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.7 ... 1.0 ... ... 0.80 ... 0.05 ...
C86200 60.0–66.0 0.20 0.20 22.0–28.0 2.0–4.0 ... 3.0–4.9 2.5–5.0 ... ... ... ... ... 1.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C86300 60.0–66.0 0.20 0.20 22.0–28.0 2.0–4.0 ... 5.0–7.5 2.5–5.0 ... ... ... ... ... 1.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C86400 56.0–62.0 0.50–1.5 0.50–1.5 34.0–42.0 0.40–2.0 ... 0.50–1.5 0.10–1.0 ... ... ... ... ... 1.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C86500 55.0–60.0 1.0 0.40 36.0–42.0 0.40–2.0 ... 0.50–1.5 0.10–1.5 ... ... ... ... ... 1.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C86700 55.0–60.0 1.5 0.50–1.5 30.0–38.0 1.0–3.0 ... 1.0–3.0 1.0–3.5 ... ... ... ... ... 1.0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
C87300 94.0 min 0.20 0.25 ... ... ... ... 0.8–1.5 3.6–5.0 ... ... 0.20 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C87400 79.0 min ... 1.0 12.0–16.0 ... ... ... ... 2.5–4.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.80 ... ... ...
C87500 79.0 min ... 0.50 12.0–16.0 ... ... ... ... 3.0–5.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.50 ... ... ...
C87600 88.0 min ... 0.50 4.0–7.0 ... ... ... ... 3.5–5.5 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
C87610 90.0 min ... 0.20 3.0–5.0 ... ... ... ... 3.0–5.0 ... ... 0.20 ... ... ... ... ... 0.25 ... ...
C89510 86.0–88.0 4.0–6.0 0.25 4.0–6.0 0.30 1.0 ... ... ... 0.5–1.5 0.35–0.70 ... 0.25 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C89520 85.0–87.0 5.0–6.0 0.25 4.0–6.0 0.20 1.0 ... ... ... 1.6–2.2 0.8–1.1 ... 0.25 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C89844 83.0–86.0 3.0–5.0 ... 7.0–10.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... 2.0–4.0 ... 0.30 0.25 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 0.2
C90300 86.0–89.0 7.5–9.0 0.30 3.0–5.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... ... 0.20 0.20 ... 0.05 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...

4
C90500 86.0–89.0 9.0–11.0 0.30 1.0–3.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... ... 0.20 0.20 ... 0.05 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C92200 86.0–90.0 5.5–6.5 1.0–2.0 3.0–5.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... ... 0.25 0.25 ... 0.05 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C92210 86.0–89.0 4.5–5.5 1.7–2.5 3.0–4.5 ... 0.7–1.0 ... ... ... ... ... 0.25 0.20 ... 0.05 0.03 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C92300 85.0–89.0 7.5–9.0 0.30–1.0 2.5–5.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... ... 0.25 0.25 ... 0.05 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C92600 86.0–88.5 9.3–10.5 0.8–1.5 1.3–2.5 ... 0.7A ... ... ... ... ... 0.20 0.25 ... 0.05 0.03 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
B 584 – 00

C93200 81.0–85.0 6.3–7.5 6.0–8.0 2.0–4.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... ... 0.20 0.35 ... 0.08 0.15 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C93500 83.0–86.0 4.3–6.0 8.0–10.0 2.0 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... ... 0.20 0.30 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C93700 78.0–82.0 9.0–11.0 8.0–11.0 0.8 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... ... 0.15 0.50 ... 0.08 0.15 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C93800 75.0–79.0 6.3–7.5 13.0–16.0 0.8 ... 1.0A ... ... ... ... ... 0.15 0.80 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C94300 67.0–72.0 4.5–6.0 23.0–27.0 0.8 ... 1.0ABC ... ... ... ... ... 0.15 0.80 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 ... 0.005 ...
C94700 85.0–90.0 4.5–6.0 0.10 1.0–2.5 ... 4.5–6.0 ... ... ... ... ... 0.25 0.15 ... 0.05 0.05 0.005 0.20 0.005 ...
C94800 84.0–89.0 4.5–6.0 0.30–1.0 1.0–2.5 ... 4.5–6.0 ... ... ... ... ... 0.25 0.15 ... 0.05 0.05 0.005 0.20 0.005 ...
C94900 79.0–81.0 4.0–6.0 4.0–6.0 4.0–6.0 ... 4.0–6.0 ... ... ... ... ... 0.30 0.25 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 0.10 0.005 ...
C96800 remainder ... 0.005 1.0 0.50 9.5–10.5 0.10 0.05–0.30 ... ... ... ... 0.02 ... 0.0025 0.005 ... ... ... ...
C97300 53.0–58.0 1.5–3.0 8.0–11.0 17.0–25.0 1.5 11.0–14.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.35 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 0.50 0.15 ...
C97600 63.0–67.0 3.5–4.5 3.0–5.0 3.0–9.0 1.5 19.0–21.5 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.25 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 1.0 0.15 ...
C97800 64.0–67.0 4.0–5.5 1.0–2.5 1.0–4.0 1.5 24.0–27.0 ... ... ... ... ... ... 0.20 ... 0.08 0.05 0.005 1.0 0.15 ...
A
In determining copper minimum, copper may be calculated as copper plus nickel.
B
It is possible that the mechanical requirements of copper alloy UNS No. C94700 (heat treated) will not be obtained if the lead content exceeds 0.01 %.
C
Niobium 0.10–0.30 %, boron 0.001 % max, bismuth 0.001 % max, magnesium 0.0005–0.15 %, and titanium 0.01 % max.
 B 584 – 00
TABLE 5 Sum of All Named Elements Analyzed
Copper Alloy
Copper Plus Major Elements, % Minimum
UNS Number
C83450 99.3
C83600 99.3
C83800 99.3
C84400 99.3
C84800 99.3
C85200 99.1
C85400 98.9
C85700 98.7
C86200 99.0
C86300 99.0
C86400 99.0
C86500 99.0
C86700 99.0
C87300 99.5
C87400 99.2
C87500 99.5
C87600 99.5
C87610 99.5
C89510 99.3
C89520 99.3
C89844 99.3
C90300 99.4
C90500 99.7
C92200 99.3
C92210 99.3
C92300 99.3
C92600 99.3
C93200 99.2
C93500 99.4
C93700 99.0
C93800 98.9
C94300 99.0
C94700 99.3
C94800 99.3
C94900 99.2
C96800 99.5
C97300 99.0
C97600 99.7
C97800 99.6

previously secured. This will be given only when the defects
are such that after the approved repair the usefulness and
strength of the castings has not been impaired.
10.3 Alloys in this specification are generally weldable.
Preparation for repair welding shall include inspection to
ensure complete removal of the defect. Repairs shall be made
utilizing welding procedures qualified in accordance with
Section IX if the ASME code and repair welding shall be done
by welders or welding operators meeting the qualification
requirements of ASME Section IX. The following records shall
be maintained:
10.3.1 A sketch or drawing showing the dimensions, depth,
and location of excavations,
10.3.2 Postweld heat treatment, when applicable,
10.3.3 Weld repair inspection results,
10.3.4 Casting identification number,
10.3.5 Weld procedure identification number,
10.3.6 Welder identification, and
10.3.7 Name of inspector.
11. Sampling
11.1 Test bar castings for copper alloy UNS Nos. C86200,
C86300, C86400, C86500, and C86700 shall be cast to the
form and dimensions shown in Figs. 1 or 2 of Practice B 208.
Test bar castings for all other alloys listed in this specification
shall be cast to the form and dimensions shown in Figs. 2, 3, or
4 of Practice B 208.
11.2 When castings are specified to meet the requirements
of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, for small
remelts the lot size shall not exceed 1000 lbs (455 kg) of
castings and shall consist of all of the metal from a single
master heat poured from an individual melting unit or group of
melting units operating during the course of one-half shift, not
to exceed 5 h.
12. Test Methods
12.1 Analytical chemical methods are given in Specification
B 824.
13. Keywords
13.1 copper alloy castings; copper-base alloy castings; sand
castings

5
 B 584 – 00

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. METRIC EQUIVALENTS

X1.1 The SI unit for strength properties now shown is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI). The
derived SI unit for force is the newton (N), which is defined as
that force that when applied to a body having a mass of one
kilogram gives it an acceleration of one metre per second
squared (N = kg · m/s2). The derived SI unit for pressure or
stress is the newton per square metre (N/m2), which has been
named the pascal (Pa) by the General Conference on Weights
and Measures. Since 1 ksi = 6 894 757 Pa, the metric equiva-
lents are expressed as megapascal (MPa), which is the same as
MN/m2 and N/mm2.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B05 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (B 584 - 98)
that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) Table 1 revised to include Bismuth Selenium Brass (3) Table 5 revised to include C89510.
C89510. (4) Table 2 revised to include C89510.
(2) Table 4 revised to include C89510.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 587 – 97 (Reapproved 2003)
Standard Specification for
Welded Brass Tube1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 587; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope*
1.1 This specification establishes the requirements for
round, rectangular, and square copper alloy welded tube for
general engineering applications.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are the standard
except for grain size which is stated in SI units. SI values given
in parentheses are for information only.
1.3 The following hazard statement pertains only to the test
method described in 18.2.3, 18.2.4, 18.2.6, and 18.2.7 of this
specification: This standard does not purport to address all of
the safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2
B 153 Test Method for Expansion (Pin Test) of Copper and
Copper-Alloy Pipe and Tubing
B 154 Test Method for Mercurous Nitrate Test for Copper
and Copper-Alloys
B 428 Test Method for Angle of Twist in Rectangular and
Square Copper and Copper Alloy Tube
B 601 Classification for Temper Designations for Copper
and Copper Alloys—Wrought and Cast
E 3 Practice for Preparation of Metallographic Specimens
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications
E 112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper
and Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.04 on Pipe
and Tube.
Current edition approved Oct. 1, 2003. Published November 2003. Originally
approved in 1973. Last previous edition approved in 1997 as B 587 – 97e1.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
E 243 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy Current) Exami-
nation of Copper and Copper Alloy Tubes
E 255 Practice for Sampling Copper and Copper Alloys for
Determination of Chemical Composition
E 478 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper
Alloys
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 average diameter (for round tubes only), n—the
average of the maximum and minimum outside diameters, or
the maximum and minimum inside diameters, whichever is
applicable, as determined at any one cross section of the tube.
3.1.2 coil—a length of the product wound into a series of
connected turns. The unqualified term “coil” as applied to tube
is normally understood as referring to a bunched coil.
3.1.2.1 mill length—lengths that can be conveniently manu-
factured in the mills.
3.1.2.2 mill lengths with ends—lengths, including ends, that
can be conveniently manufactured in the mills.
3.1.3 flash or bead—weld metal that protrudes beyond the
normal wall, both inside or outside.
3.1.4 lengths—straight pieces of the product.
3.1.4.1 ends—straight pieces, shorter than the nominal
length, left over after cutting the product into mill lengths,
stock lengths, or specified lengths. They are subject to mini-
mum length and maximum weight requirements.
3.1.4.2 specific—straight lengths that are uniform in length,
as specified, and subject to established tolerances.
3.1.4.3 stock—straight lengths that are mill cut and stored in
advance of orders. They are usually subject to established
tolerances.
3.1.5 scarfing—the removing of flash or bead by a cutting
operation.
3.1.6 tube—a hollow product of round or any other cross
section, having a continuous periphery.
3.1.6.1 welded—product made from sheet, strip, or plate
with a seam made by welding.
3.1.6.2 as-welded—a condition created as a result of shap-
ing sheet, strip, or plate into a tubular form and welding
without subsequent heat treatment or cold work, or both.
 B 587 – 97 (2003)
3.1.6.3 welded and annealed—welded tube that has been quality and soundness as to be suitable for processing into the
annealed to produce a uniformed grain size appropriate to the products described in this specification.
specified annealed temper. 6.2 Manufacture:
3.1.6.4 welded and cold-drawn—welded tube with internal 6.2.1 Tubes shall be welded by any process which produces
flash removed by scarfing and subsequently cold-drawn to forged or fusion welds.
conform to the specified temper. 6.2.1.1 Tube welded from cold-rolled strip can be regularly
3.1.6.5 fully finished—welded tube with internal and pro- furnished by welding standard strip tempers and shall have
cessed to conform to the specified temper. mechanical properties as agreed upon between the manufac-
turer or supplier and the purchaser.
4. Classification (Type) 6.2.2 Forged-welded tube shall be scarfed to remove both
4.1 The basic types of welded tube are: internal and external flash.
4.1.1 Type I—As-welded tube finished by passing through 6.2.2.1 Forged-welded tube to be drawn over a mandrel to
sizing and straightening rolls at ambient temperature. produce Types III and IV may have the internal flash com-
4.1.2 Type II—As-welded tube finished by sizing, straight- pletely removed.
ening, and annealing. 6.2.2.2 Forged-welded Types I, II, and III tube may contain
4.1.3 Type III—As-welded tube finished by cold reducing or a residual thickness at the weld not to exceed 0.006 in. (0.15
cold drawing over a plug or mandrel. mm) or 10 % of the nominal wall thickness, whichever is
4.1.4 Type IV—As-welded tube finished by both cold draw- greater.
ing over a plug or mandrel and annealing, and redrawing and 6.2.3 Fusion-welded tube shall be mechanically worked to
annealing when necessary to conform to a specified size and produce a smooth external and internal surface without the
temper. application of scarfing or other removal of the weld metal bead.
4.1.4.1 Type IV tube may be substituted for Types I, II, and
III by agreement between the manufacturer or supplier and the 7. Chemical Composition
purchaser. The temper of substituted Type IV tube shall be 7.1 The material shall conform to the chemical requirements
stated in the contract or purchase order. given in Table 1 for the specified alloy.
7.1.1 These composition limits do not preclude the presence
5. Ordering Information of other elements. Limits may be established and analysis
5.1 The contract or purchase order for product under this required for unnamed elements by agreement between the
specification should include the following information: manufacturer and the purchaser.
5.1.1 ASTM designation and year of issue (for example, 7.2 Either copper or zinc may be taken as the difference
B 587 – 97), between the sum of results of all elements determined and
5.1.2 Copper Alloy UNS3 No. (for example, C21000) (Sec- 100 %; however, when copper is so determined, that difference
tion 6), shall conform to the limits given in Table 1 for copper.
5.1.3 Classification (type) (Section 4), 7.3 When all elements in Table 1 for the specified alloy are
5.1.4 Temper (Section 8 and Table 2 and Table 3), determined, the sum of results shall be as follows:
5.1.5 Dimensions (diameter, distances between parallel sur- Copper Alloy Copper Plus Specified Elements,
faces, wall thickness and so forth) (Section 13), UNS No. min, %
5.1.6 How furnished (coils or lengths, specific or stock, with
C21000, C22000, C23000 99.8
or without ends), C26000, C26800, C27000, C27200 99.7
5.1.7 Number of coils or pieces, each size and type, and
5.1.8 Total weight, each size and type. 8. Temper
5.2 The following options are available under this specifi- 8.1 The material furnished shall be one of the tempers
cation and should be specified in the contract or purchase order indicated in Table 2 or Table 3.
when required: 8.1.1 Light-drawn and hard-drawn tempers are normally
5.2.1 Mercurous nitrate test (11.1), available in round tube only.
5.2.2 Hydrostatic test (12.2), 8.1.2 Special temper requirements are subject to agreement
5.2.3 Pneumatic test (12.3), between the manufacturer or supplier and the purchaser.
5.2.4 Certification (Section 22),
5.2.5 Mill test report (Section 23), and
5.2.6 Product marking (Section 24). TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
Copper Alloy Composition, %
6. Material and Manufacture UNS No. Copper Lead, max Iron, max Zinc
6.1 Material—The material shall be strip, sheet, or plate
C21000 94.0–96.0 0.05 0.05 remainder
produced of Copper Alloy UNS No. C21000, C22000, C23000, C22000 89.0–91.0 0.05 0.05 remainder
C26000, C26800, C27000, or C27200 and shall be of such C23000 84.0–86.0 0.05 0.05 remainder
C26000 68.5–71.5 0.07 0.05 remainder
C26800 64.0–68.5 0.15 0.05 remainder
C27000 63.0–68.5 0.10 0.07 remainder
3
Refer to Practice E 527 for explanation of the Unified Numbering System C27200 62.0–65.0 0.07 0.07 remainder
(UNS).

2
 B 587 – 97 (2003)
TABLE 2 Tensile Strength Requirements and Approximate Rockwell Hardness Values for Welded (Type I), Welded and Cold-Worked
(Type III), and Fully Finished (Type IV) Tube
Rockwell 30T Tensile Strength,
Copper Alloy Outside Diameter, in.
Temper Type Wall Thickness, in. (mm) Hard- min, ksiB
UNS No. (mm)
ness,A min (MPa)C
C21000 welded from annealed strip I all all 7 34 (235)
D D
C21000 welded from cold-rolled strip I all all
C21000 cold reduced or light drawn III, IV all all 34 37 (255)
C21000 cold reduced or hard drawn III, IV up to 1 (25.4) incl 0.020–0.119 (0.508–3.02) 52 46 (315)
over 1 to 2 (25.4 to 50.8) 0.035–0.119 (0.889–3.02)
incl
over 2 to 31⁄2 (50.8 to 88.9) 0.060–0.119 (1.52–3.02)
incl
C22000 welded from annealed strip I all all 10 37 (255)
D D
C22000 welded from cold-rolled strip I all all
C22000 cold reduced or light drawn III, IV all all 38 40 (275)
C22000 cold reduced or hard drawn III, IV up to 1 (25.4) incl 0.020 to 0.119 (0.508 to 55 52 (360)
3.02)
over 1 to 2 (25.4 to 50.8) 0.035 to 0.119 (0.889 to
incl 3.02)
over 2 to 31⁄2 (50.8 to 88.9) 0.060 to 0.119 (1.52 to
incl 3.02)
C23000 welded from annealed strip I all all 24 40 (275)
D D
C23000 welded from cold-rolled strip I all all
C23000 cold reduced or light drawn III, IV all all 43 44 (305)
C23000 cold reduced or drawn (general III, IV all all 43 44 (305)
purpose)
C23000 cold reduced or hard drawn III, IV up to 1 (25.4) incl 0.020 to 0.119 (0.508 to 65 57 (395)
3.02)
over 1 to 2 (25.4 to 50.8) 0.035 to 0.119 (0.889 to
incl 3.02)
over 2 to 31⁄2 (50.8 to 88.9) 0.060 to 0.119 (1.52 to
incl 3.02)
C26000, welded from annealed strip I all all 25 48 (330)
C26800,
C27000,
C27200
D D
C26000, welded from cold-rolled strip I all all
C26800,
C27000,
C27200
C26000, cold reduced or drawn (general III, IV all all 53 54 (370)
C26800, purpose)
C27000,
C27200
C26000, cold reduced or hard drawnE III, IV up to 1 (25.4) incl 0.020 to 0.119 (0.508 to 70 66 (455)
C26800, 3.02)
C27000, over 1 to 2 (25.4 to 50.8) 0.035 to 0.119 (0.889 to
C27200 incl 3.02)
over 2 to 31⁄2 (50.8 to 88.9) 0.060 to 0.119 (1.52 to
incl 3.02)
A
Rockwell hardness values shall only apply to: (a) tubes having a wall thickness of 0.012 in. (0.305 mm) or greater; (b) round tube having an inside diameter of 5⁄16
in. (7.94 mm) or greater; and (c) rectangular and square tube having an inside major distance between parallel surfaces of 3⁄4 in. (4.76 mm) or greater. Rockwell hardness
tests shall be made on the inside surface of the tube, and the value of the Rockwell hardness number of each specimen shall be established by taking the arithmetical
average of at least three readings. When suitable equipment is not available for determining the specified Rockwell hardness, other Rockwell scales and values may be
specified subject to agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
B
ksi = 1000 psi.
C
See Appendix X1.
D
Tube welded from cold-rolled strip can be regularly supplied by welding standard strip tempers and shall have mechanical properties as agreed upon between the
purchaser and the supplier.
E
Light-drawn and hard-drawn tempers are normally available in round tube only.

9. Physical Properties 10. Mechanical Properties

9.1 Grain Size:
9.1.1 Type II and Type IV tubes with tempers designated as
W060 (welded and soft-annealed) and W050 (welded and
light-annealed) shall conform to the requirements prescribed in
Table 3 for the specified copper alloy UNS No. and temper
when tested in accordance with Test Methods E 112.
9.1.2 Grain size shall be the basis for acceptance or rejection
based upon physical properties.
10.1 Tensile Strength Requirements:
10.1.1 Type I, Type III, and Type IV tube in drawn tempers
shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 2 for the
specified copper alloy and temper when tested in accordance
with Test Methods E 8.
10.1.2 The tensile test results shall be the basis for accep-
tance or rejection based upon mechanical properties.

3
 B 587 – 97 (2003)
TABLE 3 Grain Size Requirements and Approximate Rockwell Hardness Values for Welded Tube and Fully Finished Tube When
Furnished in the Annealed Temper

Copper Alloy Temper Outside Rockwell HardnessA Avg Grain Size, mm

Types Diameter, in. Wall Thickness, in. (mm)
UNS No. Designation Name Scale Max min max
(mm)
C21000 WO60 soft anneal II, IV all up to 0.045 (1.14) incl 30T 17 0.025 0.060
over 0.045 (1.14) F 61 0.025 0.060
B
C21000 WO50 light anneal II, IV all up to 0.045 (1.14) 30T 27 0.035
B
over 0.045 (1.14) F 68 0.035
C22000 WO60 soft anneal II, IV all up to 0.045 (1.14) incl 30T 30 0.025 0.060
over 0.045, (1.14) F 70 0.025 0.060
B
C22000 WO50 light anneal II, IV all up to 0.045 (1.14) incl 30T 37 0.035
B
over 0.045, (1.14) F 78 0.035
C23000 WO60 soft anneal II, IV all up to 0.045 (1.14) incl 30T 36 0.025 0.060
over 0.045, (1.14) F 75 0.025 0.060
B
C23000 WO50 light anneal II, IV all up to 0.045 (1.14) incl 30T 39 0.035
B
over 0.045 (1.14) F 85 0.035

C26000
C26800 up to 0.30 (0.762 incl 30T 40 0.025 0.060
} WO60 soft anneal II, IV all
C27000 {over 0.030 (0.762) F 80 0.025 0.060
C27200

C26000
B
C26800 up to 0.30 (0.762 incl 30T 60 0.035
} WO50 light anneal II, IV all B
C27000 {over 0.030 (0.762) F 90 0.035
C27200
A
Rockwell hardness values only apply to: ( a) tube having a wall thickness of 0.015 in. (0.38 mm) or greater; (b) round tube having an inside diameter of 5⁄16 in. (7.94
mm) or greater; and (c) rectangular and square tube having an inside major distance between parallel surfaces of 3⁄16 in. (4.76 mm) or greater. Rockwell hardness values
do not apply for other tube. Rockwell hardness tests shall be made on the inside surface of the tube and the value of the Rockwell hardness number of each specimen
shall be established by taking the arithmetical average of at least three readings. When suitable equipment is not available for determining the specified Rockwell hardness,
other Rockwell scales and values may be specified subject to agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
B
Although no minimum grain size is specified, the product must, nevertheless, have a fully recrystallized grain structure.

10.2 Rockwell Hardness—The approximate Rockwell hard-
ness value(s) for each copper alloy and temper given in Table
2 and Table 3 are for general information and assistance in
testing.
NOTE 1—The Rockwell hardness test offers a quick and convenient
method for checking for general conformity to the requirements for tensile
strength or grain size.
11. Performance Requirements
11.1 Mercurous Nitrate Test—When specified in the con-
tract or purchase order, specimens of annealed tube in all
copper alloys and tempers shall show no cracks when tested in
accordance with Test Method B 154.
11.2 Expansion Test—The annealed tube shall be expanded
in accordance with Test Method B 153 to the following
amounts.
Expansion in Outside
Standard Size, in. (mm) Diameter, %
3⁄4 (19.0) and under 20
Over 3⁄4 (19.0) 15
The expanded tube shall not show cracking or rupture visible
to the unaided eye.
11.3 Flattening Test:
11.3.1 The annealed tube flattened elements shall show no
cracking or rupture visible to the unaided eye.
11.3.1.1 The weld when visible or identifiable shall be at the
point of maximum bend on at least one half of the flattening
elements.
11.4 Reverse Bend Test—After bending, the annealed tube
test specimen shall show no evidence of cracks, or lack of
penetration in the weld, or of overlaps resulting from flash
removal visible to the unaided eye.
12. Nondestructive Testing
12.1 Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Examination—Each
tube up to and including 31⁄8-in. (79.4-mm) outside diameter or
within the capabilities of the testing unit shall be passed
through the testing unit adjusted to provide information on the
suitability of the tube for the intended application in accor-
dance with Practice E 243. Tube that does not actuate the
signalling device shall be considered as conforming with test
requirements.
12.2 Hydrostatic Test:
12.2.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
each tube shall withstand an internal hydrostatic pressure
sufficient to subject the material to a fiber stress of 6000 psi (41
MPa) without leakage.
12.2.2 The tube need not be tested at a gage pressure over
1000 psi (6.9 MPa) unless so specified in the contract or
purchase order.
12.3 Pneumatic Test—When specified in the contract or
purchase order, each tube shall withstand an internal air
pressure of 60 psi (415 kPa) minimum for 5 s without leakage.
13. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations
13.1 Tube diameter shall be expressed as outside diameter
or inside diameter in numerical fractions of an inch. Wall
thickness shall be expressed in decimal fractions of an inch.
13.2 Tolerances on a given tube may be specified with
respect to any two, but not all three, of the following: outside
diameter, inside diameter, and wall thickness.

4
 B 587 – 97 (2003)
13.3 For purposes of determining conformance with the 13.9.1 Round Tubes:
dimensional requirements prescribed in this specification, any
measured value outside the specified limiting values for any Specified Outside Diameter, Tolerance
dimension shall be cause for rejection. in. (mm)
13.4 Wall Thickness Tolerances—Wall thickness tolerances
Up to 5⁄8 (15.9), incl 0.010 in. (0.25 mm)
for round tube shall conform to the tolerances listed in Table 4. Over 5⁄8 (15.9) 0.016 in./in. (0.016 mm/mm) of diameter
Wall thickness tolerances for rectangular including square tube
shall be in accordance with Table 5. 13.9.2 Rectangular and Square Tube:
13.5 Diameter tolerances for round tubes furnished in
straight lengths only shall be in accordance with Table 6. Specified Distance Between Major Tolerance
Tolerances have not been established for tube furnished in Outside Parallel Surfaces, in. (mm)
coils. Up to 5⁄8 (15.9), incl 0.016 in. (0.41 mm)
13.6 Tolerances on distance between parallel surfaces for Over 5⁄8 (15.9) 0.025 in./in. (0.025 mm/mm) of distance
rectangular including square tube shall be in accordance with between outside parallel surfaces

Table 7. 13.10 Straightness Tolerances:

13.7 Lengths and Tolerances:
13.7.1 Tube in straight lengths shall be furnished in stock
lengths with ends unless the order requires specific lengths or
specific lengths with ends.
13.7.2 The tolerances on the length for tubes furnished in
straight lengths shall be in accordance with Table 8.
13.7.3 The schedule of ends for tubes furnished in specific
or stock lengths with ends shall be in accordance with Table 9.
13.7.4 The tolerances for tubes furnished in coils shall be in
accordance with Table 10, Table 11, and Table 12.
13.8 Roundness:
13.8.1 For as-welded from cold-worked strip, and redrawn
unannealed tube in straight lengths, the roundness tolerances
shall be in accordance with Table 13.
13.8.2 Compliance with the roundness tolerance shall be
determined by taking measurements on the outside diameter
only, irrespective of the manner in which the tube dimensions
are specified. The deviation from roundness is measured as the
difference between major and minor diameters as determined at
any one cross section of the tube.
13.8.3 Tolerances have not been established for redrawn
tube, annealed tube, tube as welded from annealed strip, any
tube furnished in coils, or tube whose wall thickness is under
0.016 in. (0.406 mm).
13.9 Squareness-of-Cut—For tube in straight lengths, the
departure from squareness at the end of any tube shall not
exceed the following:
13.10.1 Round Tubes—For round tubes of any drawn tem-
per or round tubes as welded from cold-rolled strip, 1⁄4 to 31⁄2
in. (6.35 to 88.9 mm) in outside diameter, inclusive, the
straightness tolerances shall be in accordance with Table 14.
Straightness tolerances have not been established for redraw
tube, tube as welded from annealed strip, or any annealed tube.
13.10.2 Rectangular and Square Tubes—For rectangular
and square tubes of any drawn temper or rectangular or square
tubes as welded from cold-rolled strip, the straightness toler-
ance shall be 1⁄2-in. (12.7-mm) maximum curvature (depth of
arc) in any 6-ft (1.83-m) portion of the total length. (Not
applicable to redraw tube, tube as welded from annealed strip,
or any annealed tube.)
13.11 Corner Radius, Rectangular and Square Tubes—The
permissible radii for commercially square corners applicable to
welded rectangular and square tubes shall be in accordance
with Table 15.
13.12 Twist Tolerances, Rectangular and Square Tubes—
The maximum twist about the longitudinal axis of drawn
temper and as welded from cold-rolled strip temper rectangular
and square tubes shall not exceed 1°/ft (0.305 m) length,
measured to the nearest degree, and the total angle of twist
shall not exceed 20° when measured in accordance with Test
Method B 428. The requirement is not applicable to any
annealed tubes, tubes as welded from annealed strip, or tubes
whose specified major dimension is less than 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm).

TABLE 4 Wall Thickness TolerancesA for Welded Brass Tube

NOTE 1—Maximum Deviation at any Point—The following tolerances are plus and minus. If tolerances all plus or all minus are desired, double the
values given.
Outside Diameters,C in. (mm)
B
Wall Thickness, in. (mm) Over 1⁄8 (3.18) to 5⁄8 Over 5⁄8 (15.9) to 1 Over 1 (25.4) to 2 Over 2 (50.8) to 31⁄2
⁄
1 32 (0.794) to 1⁄8 (3.18), incl
(15.9), incl (25.4), incl (50.8), incl (88.9), incl
Up to 0.017 (0.432), incl 0.002 (0.051) 0.001 (0.025) 0.0015 (0.038) 0.002 (0.051) ...
Over 0.017 (0.432) to 0.024 (0.610), incl 0.003 (0.076) 0.002 (0.051) 0.002 (0.051) 0.0025 (0.064) ...
Over 0.024 (0.610) to 0.034 (0.864), incl 0.003 (0.076) 0.0025 (0.064) 0.0025 (0.064) 0.003 (0.076) 0.004 (0.10)
Over 0.034 (0.864) to 0.057 (1.48), incl 0.003 (0.076) 0.003 (0.076) 0.0035 (0.089) 0.0035 (0.089) 0.005 (0.13)
Over 0.057 (1.48) to 0.082 (2.08), incl ... 0.0035 (0.089) 0.004 (0.10) 0.004 (0.10) 0.006 (0.15)
Over 0.082 (2.08) to 0.119 (3.02), incl ... 0.004 (0.10) 0.005 (0.13) 0.005 (0.13) 0.007 (0.18)
A
The thickness tolerance is the maximum deviation at any point from the specified thickness.
B
The wall thickness at the weld in Types I, II, and III tube may exceed the nominal wall thickness by an amount double the value shown in the tolerance table.
C
When round tube is ordered by outside and inside diameters, the maximum plus and minus deviation of the wall thickness from the nominal at any point shall not
exceed the values given in the table by more than 50 %.

5
 B 587 – 97 (2003)
TABLE 5 Wall Thickness TolerancesA for Rectangular and Square Welded Brass Tube

NOTE 1—Maximum Deviation at Any Point—The following tolerances are plus and minus. If tolerances all plus or all minus are desired, double the
values given.
Distance Between Outside Parallel Surfaces,B in. (mm)
Wall Thickness, in. (mm) ⁄
1 32 (0.794) to 1⁄8 Over 1⁄8 (3.18) to Over 5⁄8 (15.9) to 1 Over 1 (25.4) to Over 2 (50.8) to Over 4 (102) to
(3.18), incl 5⁄8 (15.9), incl (25.4), incl 2 (50.8), incl 4 (102), incl 6 (152), incl
Up to 0.017 (0.432), incl 0.002 (0.051) 0.002 (0.051) 0.0025 (0.064) 0.003 (0.076) ... ...
Over 0.017 (0.432) to 0.024 (0.610), incl 0.003 (0.076) 0.0025 (0.064) 0.003 (0.076) 0.0035 (0.089) ... ...
Over 0.024 (0.610) to 0.034 (0.864), incl 0.0035 (0.089) 0.0035 (0.089) 0.0035 (0.089) 0.004 (0.10) 0.006 (0.15) ...
Over 0.034 (0.864) to 0.057 (1.45), incl 0.004 (0.10) 0.004 (0.10) 0.0045 (0.11) 0.005 (0.12) 0.007 (0.18) 0.009 (0.23)

Over 0.057 (1.45) to 0.082 (2.08), incl ... 0.005 (0.13) 0.006 (0.15) 0.007 (0.18) 0.008 (0.20) 0.010 (0.25)
Over 0.082 (2.08) to 0.119 (3.02), incl ... 0.007 (0.18) 0.008 (0.20) 0.009 (0.23) 0.010 (0.25) 0.012 (0.30)
A
The thickness tolerance is the maximum deviation at any point from the specified thickness.
B
In the case of rectangular tube, the major dimension determines the thickness tolerance applicable to all walls.

TABLE 6 Average Diameter TolerancesA TABLE 8 Length Tolerances for Welded Brass Tube in Straight
Lengths
NOTE 1—Applicable to straight lengths only.
Outside Diameter NOTE 1—Tolerances are all plus; if all minus tolerances are desired, use
the same values; if tolerances plus and minus are desired, halve the values
Specified Diameter, in. (mm) Tolerance, plus and minus given.
in. (mm) Tolerances Applicable Only to
⁄ to 5⁄8 (6.35 to 15.9), incl
14 0.002 (0.051) Full-Length Pieces
Over 5⁄8 to 1 (15.9 to 25.4), incl 0.0025 (0.064) For Major
Over 1 to 2 (25.4 to 50.8), incl 0.003 (0.076) For Major Outside Di-
Over 2 to 3 (50.8 to 76.2), incl 0.004 (0.10) Outside Di- mensions
Over 3 to 31⁄2 (76.2 to 88.9), incl 0.005 (0.13) Length
mensions up Over 1 in.
to 1 in. (25.4 (25.4 mm) to
A
When tolerances are required for inside diameter, double the values shown. mm), incl 31⁄2 in. (88.9
mm), incl

TABLE 7 Tolerances on Distance Between Parallel Surfaces for in. (mm) in. (mm)
Rectangular and Square Welded Brass Tube Specific lengths:
Up to 6 in. (152 mm), incl ⁄ (0.79)
1 32 ⁄ (1.6)
1 16

NOTE 1—The following tolerances are plus and minus. If tolerances all Over 6 in. to 2 ft (152 to 610 mm), incl ⁄ (1.6)
1 16 ⁄ (2.4)
3 32

plus or all minus are desired, double the values given. Over 2 to 6 ft (0.610 to 1.83 m), incl 3⁄32 (2.4) ⁄ (3.2)
18

Over 6 to 14 ft (1.83 to 4.27 m), incl 1⁄4 (6.4) 1⁄4 (6.4)

Tolerances
Major Outside Dimensions,A in. (mm) Over 14 ft (4.27 m) 1⁄2 (13) 1⁄2 (13)

in. (mm) Specific lengths with ends 1 (25) 1 (25)

Stock lengths with or without ends 1A (25A) 1A (25A)
Up to ⁄ (3.18), incl
18 0.003 (0.076)
A
Over 1⁄8 to 5⁄8 (3.18 to 15.9), incl 0.004 (0.10) As stock lengths are cut and placed in stock in advance of orders, departure
Over 5⁄8 to 1 (15.9 to 25.4), incl 0.005 (0.13) from this tolerance is not practicable.
Over 1 to 2 (25.4 to 50.8), incl 0.006 (0.15)
Over 2 to 3 (50.8 to 76.2), incl 0.007 (0.18)
Over 3 to 4 (76.2 to 102), incl 0.008 (0.20) TABLE 9 Schedule of Tube Lengths (Specific and Stock) with
Over 4 to 5 (102 to 127), incl 0.009 (0.23) Ends for Welded Brass Tube
Over 5 to 6 (127 to 152), incl 0.010 (0.25) Shortest Per- Maximum Per-
Major Outside missible missible
A
The major outside dimension determines the tolerance applicable to minor Dimensions, in. Nominal Length, ft (m) Length,A % of Weight of
outside dimension. (mm) Nominal Ends, % of Lot
Length Weight
Up to 1 (25.4), incl 6 (1.83) to 20 (6.10), incl 70 20
Over 1 (25.4) to 2 6 (1.83) to 20 (6.10), incl 60 25
14. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance (50.8), incl
Over 2 (50.8) to 3 6 (1.83) to 20 (6.10), incl 55 30
14.1 Tubes covered by this specification shall be free from (76.2), incl
defects of a nature that interfere with normal commercial Over 3 (76.2) to 31⁄2 6 (1.83) to 20 (6.10), incl 50 40
(88.9), incl
applications. They shall be reasonably clean and free of dirt. A
Expressed to the nearest 1⁄2 ft (150 mm).

15. Sampling
15.1 The lot size, portion size, and number of sample pieces 15.1.2 Portion Size—The number of pieces to be randomly
to be taken shall be as follows: selected shall be in accordance with the following schedule:
15.1.1 Lot Size—The lot size shall be 10 000 lbs (4550 kg)
or fraction thereof.

6
 B 587 – 97 (2003)
TABLE 10 Coil Length Tolerances (Specific Lengths) TABLE 14 Straightness Tolerances for Tube in Drawn Tempers
Tolerances, in. (m), All Plus for Nominal and Welded from Cold-Rolled Strip
Lengths, ft (m)
Outside Diameter, in. (mm) NOTE 1—Applies to round tube in any cold-worked temper from 1⁄4
Over 50 (15.2) to
Up to 50 (15.2) incl (6.35) to 31⁄2 in. (88.9 mm) in outside diameter, inclusive.
100 (30.5) incl
Up to 11⁄2 (38.1) incl 12 (0.30) 24 (0.61) Maximum Curvature (Depth of
Length, ft (m)A
Arc), in. (mm)
Over 3 (0.914) to 6 (1.83), incl ⁄ (4.8)
3 16

TABLE 11 Coil Length Tolerances (Mill Lengths) Over 6 (1.83) to 8 (2.44), incl ⁄ (7.9)
5 16

Over 8 (2.44) to 10 (3.05), incl 1⁄2 (13)

Tolerances, %, for Nominal Lengths, ft (m)
A
Outside Diameter, in. (mm) Over 100 (30.5) to For lengths greater than 10 ft (3.05 m), the maximum curvature shall not
Up to 100 (30.5), incl exceed 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) in any 10-ft portion of the total length.
2000 (610), incl
Up to 1 (25.4), incl 5A or 2 ft (0.61 m), 10A
whichever is greater
Over 1 (25.4) to 11⁄2 (38.1) 5A or 2 ft (0.61 m), no tolerances TABLE 15 Permissible Radii for Commercially Square Corners
whichever is greater established for Rectangular and Square Welded Tube
Maximum Radii
A
Expressed to the nearest 1 ft (300 mm). Outside Inside
Wall Thickness, in. (mm)
Corners Corners
in. (mm) in. (mm)
TABLE 12 Schedule of Mill Lengths with Ends, in Coils Up to 0.058 (1.47), incl 3⁄64 (1.2) 1⁄32 (0.79)

Over 0.058 to 0.120 (1.47 to 3.03), incl 1⁄16 (1.6) 1⁄32 (0.79)
Shortest
Maximum Per- Over 0.120 to 0.156 (3.03 to 3.96), incl 3⁄32 (2.4) 1⁄32 (0.79)
Per-
missible
Outside Diameter, in. Nominal Length, ft missible
Weight of
(mm) (m) Length, % of
Ends, % of Lot
Nominal
Weight
Length
15.2.3 The number of samples taken during the course of
Up to 1 (25.4), incl Up to 100 (30.4), incl 70A 10
Over 1 (25.4) to 11⁄2 Up to 100 (30.4), incl 60A 20
manufacture shall be as follows:
(38.1), incl 15.2.3.1 When samples are taken at the time the castings are
Up to 1 (25.4), incl Over 100 (30.4) to 2000 50 50B poured, at least one sample shall be taken for each group of
(610), incl
castings poured simultaneously from the same source of
A
Expressed to the nearest foot (300 mm).
B
Short pieces may be included as follows: up to 10 % of lot weight between 50
molten metal.
ft (15.2 m) and one quarter of full length; and up to 40 % between one quarter and 15.2.3.2 When samples are taken from the semifinished
full length. product, at least one sample shall be taken to represent each
10 000 lbs or fraction thereof, except that not more than one
TABLE 13 Roundness Tolerances sample per piece shall be required.
t/D (Ratio of Nominal Wall
Roundness TolerancesA as % of Nominal
15.3 Other Tests:
Thickness to Nominal Outside 15.3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or pur-
Outside Diameter
Diameter)
chase order, specimens for all other tests shall be taken from
0.01 to 0.03, incl 1.5
Over 0.03 to 0.05, incl 1.0
two of the sample pieces taken in 15.1.2. In the event only one
Over 0.05 to 0.10, incl 0.8 or 0.002 in. (0.051 mm) whichever is sample piece is required, all specimens shall be taken from the
greater piece selected.
Over 0.10 0.7 or 0.002 in. (0.051 mm) whichever is
greater
15.3.1.1 When tube is furnished in coils, a length sufficient
A
for all necessary tests shall be taken from each coil selected for
Expressed to the nearest 1 ft (300 mm).
sampling. The remaining portion of the sampled coil shall be
included in the shipment with the permissible variation for
Number of Tubes in Lot Number of Pieces to be TakenA
such coils waived.
1 to 50 1
51 to 200 2 16. Number of Tests and Retests
201 to 1500 3
Over 1500 0.2 % of the total number of pieces in 16.1 Tests:
the lot, but not to exceed 10 pieces 16.1.1 Chemical Analysis—Chemical composition shall be
A
Each sample piece shall be taken from a separate tube. determined as the per element mean of results from at least two
15.2 Chemical Composition: replicate analyses of the sample.
15.2.1 The sample shall be taken in approximately equal 16.1.2 Other Tests—Grain size and tensile strength shall be
weight from each portion piece selected in 15.1.2 and in reported as the test results obtained from specimens prepared
accordance with Practice E 255. The minimum weight of the from each of two pieces selected in 15.1.2, except where only
composite sample shall be 150 g. one piece was required, and all specimens shall meet the
15.2.2 Instead of sampling in accordance with Practice minimum test requirement.
E 255, the manufacturer shall have the option of sampling at 16.2 Retests:
the time castings are poured or taken from the semifinished 16.2.1 When requested by the manufacturer or supplier, a
product. When chemical composition is determined during the retest shall be permitted when test results obtained by the
course of manufacture, sampling of the finished product is not purchaser fail to conform with product specification require-
required. ment(s).

7
 B 587 – 97 (2003)
16.2.2 Retesting shall be as directed in the product specifi-
cation for the initial test except for the number of test
specimens which shall be twice that normally required for the
test. Test results for all specimens shall conform to the product
specification requirement(s) in retest, and failure to comply
shall be cause for lot rejection.
17. Specimen Preparation
17.1 Chemical Analysis—Preparation of the analytical test
specimens shall be the responsibility of the reporting labora-
tory.
17.2 Grain Size—The test specimens shall be prepared in
accordance with Practice E 3. The test specimen surface shall
approximate a radial longitudinal section of round tube or a
longitudinal section of rectangular and square tube perpendicu-
lar to, and bisecting, the major dimensional surface.
17.3 Tensile Test—The test specimen shall be of the full
section of the tube and shall conform to the requirements
specified in the section Specimens for Pipe and Tube in Test
Methods E 8. Should limitations of the testing machine pre-
clude the use of such a specimen, specimens conforming to
Type No. 1 of Fig. 13, Tension Test Specimen for Large-
Diameter Tubular Products, of Test Methods E 8 may be used.
17.4 Rockwell Hardness:
17.4.1 The test specimen shall be of a size and shape to
permit testing by the available test equipment and shall be
taken to permit testing in a plane parallel or perpendicular to
the direction of deformation given to the product.
17.4.2 The surface of the test specimen shall be sufficiently
smooth and even to permit the accurate determination of
hardness.
17.4.3 The test specimen shall be free from scale and
foreign matter and care shall be taken to avoid any change in
condition, for example, heating or cold working.
17.5 Mercurous Nitrate Test—The test specimen shall be
prepared as described in Test Method B 154 and shall be
obtained without bending, springing, polishing, or any other
preparation.
17.6 Expansion (Pin Test)—The specimen shall be prepared
as described in the Test Specimen section of Test Method
B 153.
17.7 Flattening Test—Annealed test specimen shall be at
least 4 ft (1.22 m) in length cut from the end of the tube.
17.8 Reverse Bend Test—An annealed section approxi-
mately 4 in. (102 mm) in length taken from the end of the tube
shall be cut longitudinally (90° on each side of the weld when
visible or indentifiable) and flattened.
18. Test Methods
18.1 Chemical Analysis:
18.1.1 Composition shall be determined, in case of dis-
agreement, by the following appropriate test method:
Element Test Method
Copper E 478
Iron E 478
Lead E 478 (AA)
Zinc E 478 (Titrimetric)
8
18.1.2 Test method(s) used for the determination of ele-
ment(s) required by contractual or purchase order agreement
shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
18.2 The product furnished shall conform with the physical
and mechanical and other requirements enumerated in this
specification when tested in accordance with the following
appropriate test method:
Test Test Method
Grain size E 112
Tension E8
Angle of twist B 428
Expansion (pin test) B 153
Flattening 18.2.3
Reverse bend 18.2.4
Electromagnetic examination E 243
(eddy current)
Hydrostatic 18.2.6
Pneumatic 18.2.7
18.2.1 Grain Size—In case of dispute, grain size shall be
determined by the intercept method.
18.2.2 Tensile Strength:
18.2.2.1 Tensile strength shall be determined in accordance
with Test Methods E 8. Whenever test results are obtained from
both full-size and machined specimens and they differ, the test
results from the full-size specimens shall prevail.
18.2.2.2 Test results are not seriously affected by variations
in speed of testing. A considerable range of testing speed is
permitted; however, the rate of stressing to the yield strength
should not exceed 100 ksi (690 MPa)/min. Above the yield
strength the movement per minute of the testing machine head
under load should not exceed 0.5 in./in. (0.5 mm) of gage
length (or distance between grips for full-section specimens).
18.2.3 Flattening Test—The test specimen shall be flattened
on different elements throughout the length and each element
shall be slowly flattened by one stroke of a press. The weld,
when visible or identifiable, shall be placed in the position of
maximum bend on at least one half of the flattened elements.
The term“ flattened” shall be interpreted as follows: A mi-
crometer caliper set at three times the wall thickness shall pass
over the tube freely throughout the flattened part except at the
points where the change in element of flattening takes place.
18.2.4 Reverse Bend Test:
18.2.4.1 The specimen shall be bent around a mandrel with
a diameter four times the wall thickness with the mandrel
parallel to the length and in contact with the outside surface of
the tube.
18.2.4.2 For this test a reverse bend is the bending of the
tube opposite the formed radius of the tube.
18.2.5 Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Examination:
18.2.5.1 The artificial discontinuity calibration standard
shall be prepared in accordance with Option a or d of Practices
E 243, and the notch depth shall be 22 % of the nominal wall
thickness rounded to the nearest 0.001 in. (0.025 mm). The
notch depth tolerance shall be 60.0005 in. (0.013 mm).
Alternatively, when the equipment is speed insensitive and
equipped so that a fraction of the maximum unbalanced signal
can be selected, the following percent maximum unbalance
signal may be used.
 B 587 – 97 (2003)
Tube Size, in. (mm) Unbalanced Signal Magnitude, max, %
Up to 3⁄8 (9.4) incl 0.2
1⁄2 to 2 (12.7 to 50.8) 0.3
Over 2 to 3 (50.8 to 76.2) incl 0.4
18.2.5.2 Unless otherwise agreed upon, tube causing irrel-
evant signals because of visible and identifiable handling
marks may be retested by the hydrostatic or the pneumatic test,
and tube meeting the requirements of either test shall be
considered to conform when the dimensions are within the
prescribed limits.
18.2.5.3 Tubes with discontinuities indicated by the testing
unit, may at the option of the manufacturer, be reexamined or
retested to determine whether the discontinuity is cause for
rejection. Tube causing irrelevant signals because of minor
mechanical damage moisture, soil, and like effects shall not be
cause for rejection provided the tube dimensions are still within
prescribed limits and the tube is suitable for its intended
application.
18.2.6 Hydrostatic Test—The internal hydrostatic pressure
necessary to produce the required fiber stress shall be deter-
mined by the following equation for thin hollow cylinders
under tension.
P 5 2St/~D 2 0.8t!
where:
P = hydrostatic pressure, psi (or MPa);
t = thickness of tube wall, in. (or mm);
D = outside diameter of tube, in. (or mm); and
S = allowable fiber stress of the material, psi (or MPa).
18.2.7 Pneumatic Test—The test method shall permit easy
visual detection of leakage, such as having the material under
water or by the pressure differential method.
19. Significance of Numerical Limits
19.1 For the purpose of determining compliance with the
specified limits for requirements of the properties listed in the
following table, an observed value or a calculated value shall
be rounded as indicated in accordance with the rounding
method of Practice E 29:
Property Rounded Unit for Observed or Calculated Value
Chemical composition nearest unit in the last right-hand place of figures of
Hardness the specified limit
Tensile strength nearest ksi
Grain size up to 0.060 nearest multiple of 0.005 mm
mm, incl
20. Inspection
20.1 The manufacturer or supplier shall inspect and make
the test necessary to verify that the product furnished conforms
to the requirements specified.
20.2 Source inspection of the material by the purchaser may
be agreed upon between the manufacturer, or supplier, and the
purchaser as part of the purchase order. In which case, the
nature of the facilities needed to satisfy the inspector repre-
senting the purchaser that the product is being furnished in
accordance with the product specification shall be included in
the agreement. All tests and the inspection shall be conducted
so as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operations of the
works.
20.3 The manufacturer, or supplier, and the purchaser may
accomplish the final inspection simultaneously by mutual
agreement.
21. Rejection and Rehearing
21.1 Rejection:
21.1.1 Product that fails to conform to specification require-
ments when inspected or tested by the purchaser, or purchas-
er’s agent, may be rejected.
21.1.2 Rejection shall be reported to the manufacturer, or
supplier, promptly and in writing.
21.1.3 The manufacturer, or supplier, may make claim for a
rehearing when dissatisfied with test results upon which
rejection was based.
21.2 Rehearing—As a result of product rejection, the manu-
facturer or supplier may make claim for a retest to be
conducted by the manufacturer or supplier and the purchaser.
Samples of the rejected product shall be taken in accordance
with the product specification and tested by both parties as
directed in the product specification, or, alternatively, upon
agreement by both parties, an independent laboratory may be
selected for the test using the test methods prescribed in the
product specification.
(1)
22. Certification
22.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order, the
purchaser shall be furnished certification that samples repre-
senting each lot have been either tested or inspected as directed
in this specification and the requirements have been met.
23. Test Report
23.1 When specified in the purchase order, a report of the
test results shall be furnished.
24. Product Marking
24.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order, the
tube shall be identified throughout its length with a brown color
marking, not less than 3⁄16 in. (4.8 mm) in height, including a
legend repeated at intervals not greater than 3 ft (0.91 m). The
legend shall include the name or trademark of the manufac-
turer, or both, and an indication that the material is welded
tube.
25. Packaging and Package Marking
25.1 Packaging—The material shall be separated by size,
composition, and temper, and prepared for shipment in such a
manner as to acceptance by common carrier for transportation
and to afford protection from normal hazards of transportation.
25.2 Package Marking—Each shipping unit shall be legibly
marked with the purchase order number, UNS alloy designa-
tion, temper, size, shape, total length or piece count or gross
and net weight, or both, name of supplier, and whether the
tubes have been hydrostatic tested. The specification number
shall be shown when specified.
26. Keywords
26.1 brass tube; welded brass tube; welded tube
9
 B 587 – 97 (2003)

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. METRIC EQUIVALENTS

X1.1 The SI unit for strength properties now shown is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI). The
derived SI unit for force is the newton (N), which is defined as
that force which when applied to a body having a mass of one
kilogram gives it an acceleration of one metre per second
squared (N = kg·m/s2). The derived SI unit for pressure or
stress is the newton per square metre (N/m2), which has been
named the pascal (Pa) by the General Conference on Weights
and Measures. Since 1 ksi = 6 894 757 Pa, the metric equiva-
lents are expressed as megapascal (MPa), which is the same as
MN/m2 and N/mm2.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

This section identifies the location of selected changes to this specification that have been incorporated since
the 1988 issue as follows:

(1) Temper codes added to Section 9. (5) Table 5—Wall thickness, in. (mm) over 0.119 (3.02) to
(2) Table 2—Maximum wall thickness, in. (mm) to 0.119 0.164 (4.17), incl, and the tolerances deleted.
(3.02). (6) Table 5—The Distance Between Outside Parallel Surfaces,
(3) Table 3—Temper Codes added. in. (mm) in the last column decreased to 6 (152), incl.
(4) Table 4—Wall thickness, in. (mm) over 0.119 (3.02 to (7) Table 7—Major Outside Dimensions, in. (mm) over 6 to 8
0.164 (4.17), incl, and the tolerances deleted. (152 to 203), incl, and the tolerances deleted.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

10
 Designation: B 588 – 88 (Reapproved 2001)
Standard Test Method for
Measurement of Thickness of Transparent or Opaque
Coatings by Double-Beam Interference Microscope
Technique1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 588; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers the measurement of the thick-
ness of transparent metal oxide and metallic coatings by
utilizing a double-beam interference microscope.2
1.2 The test method requires that the specimen surface or
surfaces be sufficiently mirrorlike to form recognizable fringes.
1.3 This test method can be used nondestructively to mea-
sure 1 to 10µ m thick transparent coatings, such as anodic
coatings on aluminum. The test method is used destructively
for 0.1 to 10 µm thick opaque coatings by stripping a portion
of the coating and measuring the step height between the
coating and the exposed substrate. The stripping method can
also be used to measure 0.2 to 10 µm thick anodic coatings on
aluminum.
1.4 The test method is usable as a reference method for the
measurement of the thickness of the anodic film on aluminum
or of metallic coatings when the technique includes complete
stripping of a portion of the coating without attack of the
substrate. For anodic films on aluminum, the thickness must be
greater than 0.4 µm; the uncertainty can be as great as 0.2 µm.
For metallic coatings, the thickness must be greater than 0.25
µm; the uncertainty can be as great as 0.1 µm.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 504 Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Me-
tallic Coatings by the Coulometric Method3
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B08 on Metallic
and Inorganic Coatingsand is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B08.10on
Test Methods.
Current edition approved Feb. 26, 1988. Published April 1988. Originally
published as B 588 – 73. Last previous edition B 588 – 75 (1981)e2.
2
Saur, R. L., “New Interference Microscope Techniques for Microtopographic
Measurements in the Electroplating Laboratory,” Plating, PLATA, Vol 52, July
1965, pp. 663–666.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
3. Summary of Test Method
3.1 While observing the specimen surface through the
interference microscope, the top surface of the coating and the
substrate surface are located with white light interference
fringe group(s). Then the elevation difference between the two
surfaces is ascertained by counting the number of monochro-
matic fringes by which the white light fringes are displaced.
The number of fringes, multiplied by one half of the light
wavelength, is the film thickness.
3.2 When light is reflected, it undergoes a phase shift, the
magnitude of which depends on the material and on its
structure. The uncertainty of the thickness measurement due to
this phenomenon is, theoretically, less than 1⁄8 the wavelength
of the light for metals and 1⁄4 wavelength for nonmetallic
coatings on metal. Those uncertainties are included in those
given in 1.4. They can be eliminated for measurements made in
accordance with 1.3 and 7.1.2 by coating the specimen after the
stripping operation with a thin but uniform reflective layer of a
metal by evaporation. The two reflecting surfaces will then be
of the same material and the phase shifts will be the same.
3.3 The aperture of the microscope objective contributes to
the fringe displacement by an amount determined by the
aperture size. Therefore, a correction4 is added equal to a2/4
where a, expressed in radians, is the arc sine of the numerical
aperture of the microscope objective.
NOTE 1—When the angle is given in radians and is less than 0.6, the
angle is approximately equal to its sine.
3.4 With a reticle such as shown in the figures, the fringe
count is likely to have an uncertainty of 1⁄10 wavelength
(1⁄5fringe interval). More precise measurements can be made
with the aid of a filar micrometer eyepiece.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 The thickness of a coating is often critical to its
performance.
4.2 For some coating-substrate combinations, the interfer-
ence microscope method is a reliable method for measuring
coating thickness.
4.3 This test method is suitable for specification acceptance.
4
Bruce, C. F., and Thornton, B. S., Journal of Scientific Instruments, JSINA, Vol
34, 1957, p. 203.
 B 588
5. Apparatus
5.1 Interference Microscope equipped with a reticle or filar
micrometer eyepiece for linear measurements.
5.2 Incandescent and Monochromatic Light Sources.
6. Sample Preparation for Destructive Technique
6.1 Anodic Coating on Aluminum—After masking (Note 2),
the coating is stripped by immersion in a solution containing 33
g/L chromic acid (CrO3) and 0.5 cm3/L phosphoric acid
(H3PO4) (85%). Operating temperature is 85 to 95°C.
NOTE 2—Masking for both transparent and opaque coatings can be
accomplished by applying an adhesive tape such as 3M #470 or equivalent
with its edge at a location where the thickness measurement is desired.
The tape must be sufficiently adherent and impervious to protect the
coating beneath from subsequent stripping action.
NOTE 3—In certain cases, this method causes attack of the basis metal.
The attack is usually accompanied by pitting, which is easily observable
in the interference microscope by comparing the general contour exhibited
by the fringes on the unstripped portion with the general contour on the
stripped portion. If such attack occurs, the method is not valid.
6.2 Metallic Coatings on Metallic Substrates—After mask-
ing (Note 2), the coating is stripped without attack of the
substrate (see Appendix X1).
7. Thickness Measurement
NOTE 4—Many surfaces have microscopical ridges or valleys produced
by a previous operation (such as rolling or polishing). Measurements of
film thickness are made best with the fringes oriented in a direction
perpendicular to the directional surface roughness.
7.1 Transparent Coatings:
7.1.1 Nondestructive Technique:
7.1.1.1 As the surface of a specimen is viewed through the
interference microscope using the incandescent illuminator
(white light), adjust the microscope fine-focus knob and the
reference mirror controls so that a group of strong fringes
(arising from the coating-substrate interface) and a group of
weak fringes (arising from the coating-air interface) are both in
view as illustrated in Fig. 1A.
7.1.1.2 Determine the number of monochromatic fringes
between the centers of the white light fringe groups. Appendix
X2 indicates alternative ways of doing this.
7.1.1.3 Calculate thickness T as follows:
T 5 ~nl/2µ! @1 1 ~a 2/4!# (1)
FIG. 1 Anodized Aluminum Surface as Seen Through Interference Microscope Using White (A) or Monochromatic (B) Light
2
where:
n = number of fringes,
l = wavelength of monochromatic light, µm,
µ = refractive index of coating for light of wave length, l,
and
a = arc sine (numerical aperture of objective) in radians.
Thus for the thickness of the anodic coating on aluminum
represented in Fig. 1,
T 5 @~24 3 0.546!/~2 3 1.62!# @1 1 ~0.78 2/4!# 5 4.66 µm (2)
where the monochromatic source is a mercury green light
with a wavelength of 0.546 µm, where the refractive index of
the anodic coating is 1.62, and where alpha is equal to 0.78.
7.1.2 Destructive Technique:
7.1.2.1 Position the boundary between the stripped and
unstripped portion of the specimen in the field of view of the
microscope.
7.1.2.2 As the surface of the specimen is viewed through the
interference microscope using the white light, adjust the
microscope fine-focus knob and the reference mirror controls
so that the group of fringes arising from the bare substrate and
the weak fringes arising from the coating-air interface are both
in view, as illustrated in Fig. 2A.
7.1.2.3 Determine the number of monochromatic fringes
between the centers of the white light fringe groups. Appendix
X2 indicates alternative ways of performing this procedure.
7.1.2.4 Calculate thickness T as follows:
T 5 ~nl/2! @1 1 ~a 2/4!# (3)
where:
n = number of fringes,
l = wavelength of monochromatic light, µm, and
a = arc sine (numerical aperture of objective) in radians.
7.2 Opaque Coatings—Destructive Technique:
7.2.1 Position the boundary between the stripped and un-
stripped portions of the specimen in the field of view of the
microscope.
7.2.2 As the surface of the specimen is viewed through the
interference microscope using the incandescent illuminator,
adjust the microscope fine-focus knob and the tilt of the
reference mirror so that the fringe group on both sides of the
boundary is in the field of view, as illustrated in Fig. 3A.
 B 588

FIG. 2 Fringes Formed on Anodized Surface, on Which the Anodic Coating Has Been Completely Stripped from the Left Portion, as
Seen Through an Interference Microscope Using White (A) or Monochromatic (B) Light

FIG. 3 Nickel-Chromium Boundary as Seen Through Interference Microscope Using White (A) or Monochromatic (B) Light

7.2.3 Determine the number of monochromatic fringes be-
tween the centers of the white light fringe groups. Appendix
X2 indicates alternative ways of performing this procedure.
7.2.4 Calculate thickness T as follows:
T 5 ~nl/2! @1 1 ~a 2/4!# (4)
where:
n = number of fringes,
l = wavelength of monochromatic light, µm, and
a = arc sine (numerical aperture of objective) in radians.
8. Accuracy Requirement
8.1 Transparent Coating on Metal Substrate—The entire
procedure shall be such that the coating thickness can be
determined either within 60.2 µm or within 5 % of the coating
thickness, whichever is greater.
8.2 Metal Coating on Metal Substrate—The entire proce-
dure shall be such that the coating thickness can be determined
either within 60.1 µm or within 5 % of the coating thickness,
whichever is greater.
9. Precision and Bias
9.1 A satisfactory interlaboratory comparison of this test
method has not yet been conducted.

3
 B 588
APPENDIXES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. STRIPPING OF METALLIC COATINGS5
X1.1 The cell and electronic equipment used for the
coulometric method of measuring coating thickness, Method
5
Saur, R. L., and Basco, R. P., “Power Supply for Anodic Stripping of Chromium
on Nickel Electrodeposits,” Plating, PLATA, Vol 57, July 1970, p. 714.
X2. COUNTING MONOCHROMATIC FRINGES
X2.1 White Light Fringes—Chromatic aberrations impose
a limit to the way a microscope can be used, and the extent of
these aberrations should be determined. With white light and
with a specimen and the microscope adjusted so that the central
fringe of the color fringes crosses the center of the field, the
central fringe usually has a different color near the edge of the
field. For example, the central fringe may be black at the center
off the field and composed of contiguous red, black, and green
layers near the edge. If the fringe pattern is moved perpendicu-
larly across the field, the black central line may become
colored and an adjacent line becomes black so that the original
central line loses its identity.
X2.1.1 The change is associated with chromatic aberrations
that give rise to measurement errors. The operator is advised to
scan the field with the central fringe and to note the extent of
aberrations. The observations described in the following para-
graphs should be confined to those parts of the field within
which the central fringe of each fringe group does not change
color.
X2.2 For alternative means of measuring the fringe dis-
placement see X2.3, X2.4, X2.5, and X2.6. The methods of
X2.4 and X2.5 can be used if chromatic aberrations interfere
with the method of X2.3. The method of X2.6 completely
avoids any chromatic aberrations, but is difficult to use if the
fringe displacement is much more than about five fringes and
cannot be used for the nondestructive technique (7.1.1).
FIG. 4 Coating—Substrate Boundary with Parallel Reticle Using White Light At Beginning (A) and End (B) of Measurement (X2.3)
4
B 504, provides a convenient way of masking and stripping a
small area of coating. Chromium coatings may be stripped
from nickel or steel by anodic disolution at 5 to 10V in a 5 g/L
sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) solution using at least a full-wave
rectifier filtered with 10 000 µF capacitance.
X2.3 Monochromatic Fringes with Stationery White Light
Fringes—The microscope is adjusted as described in 7.1.1.1,
7.1.2.2, or 7.2.2 so that the two groups of color fringes are in
the field. The positions of the central fringes on the reticle and
the reticle interval between them are noted (Fig. 1(A), Fig.
2(A), and Fig. 3(A)). Monochromatic light is then substituted
for the white light without disturbing the specimen or micro-
scope settings, and the monochromatic fringes within the same
reticle interval are counted (Fig. 1(B), Fig. 2(B), and Fig. 3(B)).
X2.4 Monochromatic Fringes with Resetting of White Light
Fringes:
X2.4.1 The microscope is adjusted using white light so that
the eyepiece hairline is over the central fringe that locates the
coating (or substrate surface), Fig. 4(A). Using the fine focus
control on the “compensator” control (the compensator adjusts
the relative path lengths of the two interferometer beams), the
amount of adjustment required to bring the central fringe
locating the substrate (or coating) surface to the original
position of the first central fringe Fig. 4(B), is noted and is
estimated (from previous experience) in terms of number of
monochromatic fringes. The first position, Fig. 4(A), is rein-
stated, the monochromatic light is substituted for the white
light. The monochromatic fringes are shifted with respect to
the hairline by the previously estimated number of fringes.
Then with white light, it is noted what additional adjustment is
required to bring the second central fringe into position, and an
 B 588
improved estimate is made of the total adjustment required in
terms of the number of monochromatic fringes. Beginning with
reinstatement of the first position, the process is repeated
several times until the estimated number of fringes proves to be
the adjustment needed to bring the second central fringe into
position, Fig. 4(B).
X2.4.2 For accurate measurements, the procedure described
in X2.4.1 is used to determine the whole number of fringe
spacings. Additional displacement of less than one fringe
spacing is estimated directly from the monochromatic fringes
(Fig. 5).
X2.5 Stage Elevation—The microscope is equipped with a
means of precisely moving the stage relative to the microscope FIG. 5 Beveled Coating—Substrate Boundary With
Monochromatic Fringes
objective with the movement being calibrated using monochro-
matic fringes. The movement can be controlled with a canti-
lever system and micrometer, with a piezoelectric device, or that each monochromatic fringe can be followed across the
with the fine focus control. One measures the movement boundary, white light need not be used. The eyepiece hairline
required to shift the position of one central fringe to that of the is superimposed over one of the monochromatic fringes and
other, Fig. 4. one counts the number of fringes it traverses (Fig. 5); that is,
the number of fringes by which the fringe pattern is displaced.
X2.6 Beveled Boundary—If a boundary is formed by The method is difficult to use if the displacement is much more
stripping part of the coating and if the boundary is beveled so than about five fringes.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 589 – 94 (Reapproved 1999)e1

Standard Specification for

Refined Palladium1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 589; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

e1 NOTE—UNS number was added in June 1999.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements

1.1 This specification covers refined palladium as sponge, Composition, %

ElementA
cast bar, and wrought forms (Note 1) in one grade as follows: Grade 99.95
(UNS PO3995)
1.1.1 Grade 99.95 (UNS PO3995)— Palladium having a
purity of 99.95 %. Palladium, min (by difference) 99.95
Platinum, max ...
NOTE 1—Other forms of unfabricated palladium of commerce are not Rhodium, max ...
Ruthenium, max ...
to be excluded under this specification.
Iridium, max ...
NOTE 2—For the purposes of determining conformance with this
specification, an observed value obtained from analysis shall be rounded Total platinum group metals other than palladium, max 0.03
to the nearest unit in the last right hand place of figures used in expressing Gold, max 0.01
the limiting value, in accordance with the rounding method of Practice Silver, max 0.01
E 29. Lead, max 0.005
Tin, max 0.005
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded Zinc, max 0.0025
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for Iron, max 0.005
Copper, max 0.005
information only. Silicon, max 0.005
Magnesium, max 0.005
2. Referenced Documents Calcium, max 0.005
Aluminum, max 0.005
2.1 ASTM Standards: Nickel, max 0.005
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Chromium, max 0.001
Determine Conformance with Specifications2 Cobalt, max 0.001
Manganese, max 0.001
Antimony, max 0.002
3. Materials and Manufacture A
By agreement between manufacturer and purchaser analyses may be
3.1 The metal may be produced by any refining process that required and limits established for elements or compounds not specified in this
yields a product capable of meeting the chemical requirements table.
of this specification. The purchaser, upon request, shall be
informed of the refining process used. 5. Sampling
3.2 The surfaces of bars and wrought forms shall exhibit 5.1 The value of this material is such that special attention
quality generally acceptable to the trade. must be paid to sampling procedures. The purchaser and
4. Chemical Composition manufacturer shall agree upon the sampling procedures used.
5.2 Lot Size—Sampling lots shall consist of the following:
4.1 The refined palladium shall conform to the requirements 5.2.1 Sponge—A single refining lot, and
as to the chemical composition prescribed in Table 1. 5.2.2 Other Forms— A single melt or primary consolida-
tion.

1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-2 on
6. Method of Analysis
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee 6.1 Pending the development of standard ASTM methods of
B02.05 on Precious Metals.
Current edition approved Feb. 15, 1994. Published April 1994. Originally
chemical or spectrographic analysis, or both, the methods to be
published as B 589 – 73. Last previous edition B 589 – 82 (1987). used shall be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02. and the purchaser.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 589
7. Rejection and Rehearing
7.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of this
specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported to
the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
supplier may make claim for rehearing.
7.1.1 If the palladium satisfies the requirements of this
specification, it shall not be rejected for defects in the products
in which it is used.
7.2 Investigation of Claims—In a question of chemical
composition, a new sample shall be drawn by representatives
of both parties in accordance with Section 5. The properly
mixed and quartered sample shall be divided into three parts,
each of which shall be placed in a sealed package, one for the
manufacturer, one for the purchaser, and one for an umpire, if
necessary.
8. Product Marking
8.1 The material shall be legibly identified by mark, label,
or tag with the following information: palladium (Pd)
Grade_____ , lot or melt number, and weight to the nearest
0.001 troy oz (0.03 g).
9. Keywords
9.1 palladium; refined palladium; sponge

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 592 – 01

Standard Specification for

Copper-Zinc-Aluminum-Cobalt Alloy, Copper-Zinc-Tin-Iron
Alloy Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 592; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope * E 76 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel-Copper

1.1 This specification covers the requirements for plate, Alloys5
sheet, strip, and rolled bar in alloys C66300 and C68800.2 E 112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size4
E 255 Practice for Sampling Copper and Copper Alloys for
NOTE 1—Since alloy C68800 is frequently used in a variety of the Determination of Chemical Composition5
applications where yield strength and stress-corrosion resistance may be
E 478 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper
critical, it is recommended that drawings or samples of the part to be
fabricated and details of application be submitted for use in establishing Alloys6
temper and treatment of material. E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)
NOTE 2—Alloy C66300 is covered by a patent. Interested parties are
invited to submit information regarding the identification of an alterna- 3. General Requirements
tive(s) to this patented item to the ASTM headquarters. Your comments 3.1 The following sections of Specification B 248 constitute
will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible technical a part of this specification:
committee, which you may attend.
3.1.1 Terminology—Definitions,
1.2 Values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded as 3.1.2 Materials and Manufacturing,
the standard. Values given in parentheses are for information 3.1.3 Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance,
only. 3.1.4 Sampling, except for chemical analysis,
3.1.5 Number of Tests and Retests,
2. Referenced Documents
3.1.6 Specimen Preparation,
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on the 3.1.7 Test Methods, except for chemical analysis,
date of material purchase form a part of this specification to the 3.1.8 Significance of Numerical Limits,
extent referenced herein: 3.1.9 Inspection,
2.2 ASTM Standards: 3.1.10 Rejection and Rehearing,
B 248 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought 3.1.11 Certification,
Copper and Copper-Alloy Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled 3.1.12 Test Reports (Mill),
Bar3 3.1.13 Packaging and Package Marking, and
B 601 Classification for Temper Designations for Copper 3.1.14 Supplementary Requirements.
and Copper Alloys—Wrought and Cast3 3.2 In addition, when a section with a title identical to that
B 846 Terminology for Copper and Copper Alloys3 referenced in 3.1, above, appears in this specification, it
E 8 Test Methods forTension Testing of Metallic Materials4 contains additional requirements which supplement those ap-
E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell pearing in Specification B 248.
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials4
E 75 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper-Nickel 4. Terminology
and Copper-Nickel-Zinc Alloys5 4.1 Definitions—For definitions of terms used in this
specification, refer to Terminology B 846.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper 4.2 Definition of Term Specific to This Standard:
and Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.01 on Plate, 4.2.1 capable of—having the properties necessary for con-
Sheet, and Strip. formance to specification requirements when subjected to a
Current edition approved April 10, 2001. Published August 2001. Originally
published as B 592 – 73. Last previous edition B 592 – 98.
referenced test method.
2
The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting
the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned in 5. Ordering Information
this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the 5.1 Contracts or purchase orders for product under this
validity of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights are
entirely their own.
specification should include the following information:
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
5 6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 592
5.1.1 ASTM designation and year of issue (for example, requirements specified in Table 1.
B 592 - XX), 7.2 These composition limits do not preclude the presence
5.1.2 Copper Alloy UNS No. designation (for example, of other elements. Limits may be established and analysis
C68800), required for unnamed elements by agreement between the
5.1.3 Temper (see Section 8), manufacturer and the purchaser.
5.1.4 Dimensions, that is, thickness, width, length, etc. (see 7.3 For alloys in which copper is listed as “Remainder,”
Section 13), copper is the difference between the sum of results of all
5.1.5 Form, that is, plate, sheet, strip, or rolled bar, elements determined and 100 %. When all elements in Table 1
5.1.6 How furnished, that is, coils, specific lengths or stock are determined, the sum of the results shall equal at least
lengths, with or without ends, 99.5 %.
5.1.7 Quantity, that is, total weight each form, temper, and
size, and 8. Temper
5.1.8 Whether material is purchased for agencies of the U.S. 8.1 Products fabricated from these alloys are available in the
Government (see Section 12). tempers listed in Table 2 as defined in Classification B 601.
5.2 The following options are available under this specifi- 8.1.1 Rolled (H)—The standard tempers for rolled material
cation and should be specified in the contract or purchase order are as designated in Table 2 with the prefix “H”. Former
when required: designations and the standard designations as defined in
5.2.1 Type of edge, that is, slit, sheared, sawed, square Classification B 601 are shown.
corners, round corners, rounded edges, or full rounded edges, 8.1.2 Anneal to Temper (O)—The standard tempers of
and annealed-to-temper material are as designated in Table 2 with
5.2.2 Width and straightness tolerances (see Section 13). the prefix “O”. Former designations and the standard designa-
tions as defined in Practice B 601 are shown.
6. Material and Manufacture
6.1 Material: 9. Grain Size for Annealed Tempers
6.1.1 The material of manufacture shall be a cast bar, cake, 9.1 Although no grain size has been established, the product
slab, etc., of Copper Alloy UNS C66300 or C68800 of such must be fully recrystallized as determined by Test Method
purity and soundness as to be suitable for process in to the E 112.
products prescribed herein.
6.1.2 In the event heat identification or traceability is 10. Physical Property Requirements
required, the purchaser shall specify the details desired. 10.1 The electrical resistivity requirement of Copper Alloys
UNS C66300 and UNS C68800 are listed in Table 3 for
NOTE 3—Due to the discontinuous nature of the processing of castings
information only.
into wrought products, it is not always practical to identify a specific
casting analysis with a specific quantity of finished material. 11. Mechanical Property Requirements
6.2 Manufacturer: 11.1 Tensile Strength Requirements:
6.2.1 The product shall be manufactured by such hot work- 11.1.1 Product furnished under this specification will con-
ing, cold working, and annealing processes as to produce a form to the tensile requirements prescribed in Table 2 when
uniform wrought structure in the finished product. tested in accordance with Test Methods E 8.
6.2.2 The product shall be hot- or cold-worked to the 11.1.2 Acceptance or rejection based upon mechanical
finished size and subsequently annealed, when required, to properties shall depend only on tensile strength.
meet the temper properties specified. 11.2 Rockwell Hardness Requirements—The approximate
6.2.3 Edges—Slit edges shall be furnished unless otherwise Rockwell hardness values given in Table 2 are for general
specified in the contract or purchase order. information and assistance in testing and shall not be used as a
7. Chemical Composition basis for product rejection.
7.1 The material shall conform to the chemical composition NOTE 4—The Rockwell hardness test as determined by Test Methods
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements
Composition, % Composition, %
Element Copper Alloy UNS No. Element Copper Alloy UNS No.
C68800 C66300
Copper, incl silver remainder Copper, incl silver 84.5–87.5
Aluminum 3.0–3.8 Aluminum ...
Zinc 21.3–24.1 Zinc remainder
Zinc + aluminum 25.1–27.1 Zinc + aluminum ...
Cobalt 0.25–0.55 Cobalt 0.20 max
Nickel ... Nickel ...
Lead 0.05 max Lead 0.05 max
Iron 0.20 max Iron ...
Iron + Cobalt 1.4–2.4
Tin 1.5–3.0
Phos .35 max

2
 B 592
TABLE 2 Mechanical Requirements
Temper DesignationA Tensile Strength, ksiB (MPaC) Approximate Rockwell Hardness
B Scale 0.020 in. 30T Scale 0.012 in.
Standard Former Min Max (0.51 mm) and (0.31 mm) and
Over Over
Copper Alloy UNS No. C68800
O61 annealed 77 (530) 87 (600) ... 63–74
Copper Alloy UNS No. C68800
H01 quarter-hard 87 (600) 101 (695) 86–95 75–81
H02 half-hard 97 (670) 112 (770) 93–97 80–82
H04 hard 106 (730) 120 (825) 96–98 82–83
H06 extra-hard 113 (780) 127 (875) 97–99 82–84
H08 spring 123 (850) 133 (915) 98–100 83–84
H10 extra-spring 125 (863) ... 99 84
Copper Alloy UNS No. C66300
O82 annealed to temper–1⁄2hard 58 (400) 73 (503) 65–81 ...
Copper Alloy UNS No. C66300
H04 hard 76 (524) 91 (627) 84–91 68–77
H06 extra hard 88 (607) 103 (710) 87–94 75–83
H08 spring 95 (655) 110 (758) 92–96 79–87
H10 extra spring 100 (689) 114 (786) 94–97 82–88
H14 super spring 105 (724) 95 min 85 min
A
Standard designation defined in Practice B 601.
B
ksi = 1000 psi.
C
See Appendix X1.

TABLE 3 Electrical Resistivity 13.1.2.2 Tolerances for Square Sheared Metal—Table 5.

Copper Alloy UNS C66300 13.1.2.3 Tolerances for Sawed Metal—Table 6.
Electrical Resistivity Equivalent Conductivity 13.1.3 Length:
Temper at 20 °C (68 °F), at 20 °C (68 °F), 13.1.3.1 Tolerances for Straight Lengths—Table 7.
V · g/m2 % IACS
13.1.3.2 Schedule of Minimum Lengths with Ends—Table 8.
H04, H06, H08, H10, H14 0.6148 25 % min 13.1.3.3 Tolerances for Square Sheared Metal—Table 9.
HR04, HR08, HR10 0.6148 25 % min
O82 (1⁄2 HD ATT) 0.6148 25 % min 13.1.3.4 Tolerances for Sawed Metal—Table 10.
Copper Alloy UNS C68800
13.1.4 Straightness:
13.1.4.1 Tolerances for Slit Metal or Slit Metal Either
Temper Electrical Resistivity Equivalent Conductivity
at 20 °C (68 °F), at 20 °C (68 °F), Straightened or Edge Rolled—Table 11.
V · g/m2 % IACS 13.1.4.2 Tolerances for Squared-Sheared Metal—Table 12.
H01 H02, H04, H06, H08, H10 0.5768 18 % min 13.1.4.3 Tolerances for Sawed Metal—Table 13.
O61 0.5768 18 % min 13.1.5 Edges:
13.1.5.1 Tolerances for Radius of Square Edges—Table 14.
13.1.5.2 Tolerances for Radius of Round Corners—Table
E 18 offers a quick and convenient method of checking for general 15.
conformity to the specification requirements for temper, tensile strength, 13.1.5.3 Tolerances for Radius of Rounded Edges—Table
and grain size. 16.
12. Other Requirements 13.1.5.4 Tolerances for Radius of Full-Rounded Edges—
Table 17.
12.1 Purchases for U.S. Government Agencies—When
identified in the contract or purchase order, product purchased 14. Sampling
for agencies of the U.S. Government shall conform to the 14.1 Chemical Analysis:
special government requirements stipulated in the supplemen- 14.1.1 The sample for chemical analysis shall be taken from
tal requirements given in Specification B 248. the pieces selected and combined into one composite sample in
accordance with Practice E 255 for product in its final form.
13. Dimension, Mass, and Permissible Variations The minimum weight of the composite sample shall be 150 g.
13.1 The dimensions and tolerances for product described 14.1.2 Instead of sampling in accordance with Practice
by this specification shall be as specified in Specification B 248 E 255, the manufacturer shall have the option of taking
with particular reference to the following tables and related samples at the time the castings are poured or by taking
paragraphs in that specification: samples from the semi-finished product.
13.1.1 Thickness—Tolerances, Table 1. 14.1.2.1 When composition of the material has been deter-
13.1.2 Width: mined during the course of manufacture, sampling of the
13.1.2.1 Tolerances for Slit Metal and Slit Metal with Rolled finished product by the manufacturer is not required.
Edges—Table 4. 14.1.3 The number of samples to be taken for determination

3
 B 592
of chemical composition shall be as follows: Copper E 478
14.1.3.1 When sampled at the time the castings are poured, Iron E 76 (AA)
Lead E 478 (AA)
at least one sample shall be taken for each group of castings Nickel E 478 (Photomet-
poured from the same source of molten metal. ric)
14.1.3.2 When sampled from the semi-finished product, at Zinc E 478 (AA)

least one sample shall be taken to represent each 10 000 lb, or

fraction thereof, except that not more than one sample shall be 15.1.1 Test method(s) to be followed for the determination
required per piece. of element(s) resulting from contractual or purchase order
14.1.3.3 Only one sample need be taken from the semi- agreement shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer
finished product of one cast bar from a single furnace melt and the purchaser.
charge continuously processed.
16. Keywords
15. Test Methods 16.1 copper-zinc-aluminum-cobalt alloy plate; copper-zinc-
15.1 Chemical Analysis—Chemical composition shall, in aluminum-cobalt alloy rolled bar; copper-zinc-aluminum-
case of disagreement, be determined as follows: cobalt alloy sheet; copper-zinc-aluminum-cobalt alloy strip;
Element ASTM Test Method copper-zinc-tin-iron alloy plate; copper-zinc-tin-iron alloy
Aluminum E 478 rolled bar; copper-zinc-tin-iron alloy sheet; copper-zinc-tin-
Cobalt E 75 (Photometric) iron alloy strip

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. METRIC EQUIVALENTS

X1.1 The SI unit for strength properties now shown is in
accordance with the International System of Units (SI). The
derived SI unit for force is the newton (N), which is defined as
that force which when applied to a body having a mass of one
kilogram gives it an acceleration of one metre per second
squared (N = kg · m/s2). The derived SI unit for pressure or
stress is the newton per square metre (N/m2), which has been
named the pascal (Pa) by the General Conference on Weights
and Measures. Since 1 ksi = 6 894 757 Pa the metric equiva-
lents are expressed as megapascal (MPa), which is the same as
MN/m2 and N/mm2.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B05 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (B 592 – 98)
that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) Alloy C66300 was added to the scope of this standard. (3) Alloy C66300 chemistry was added to Table 1.
(2) Alloy C66300 tempers were added to Table 2 (4) Table 3 was added.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

4
 Designation: B 591 – 98a

Standard Specification for

Copper-Zinc-Tin and Copper-Zinc-Tin-Iron-Nickel Alloys
Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 591; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope * E 62 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper and

1.1 This specification covers the requirements for specified Copper Alloys (Photometric)5
copper-zinc-tin alloys and copper-zinc-tin-iron-nickel alloys in E 76 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Nickel-Copper
the form of plate, sheet, strip, and rolled bar. The alloys and Alloys5
nominal compositions are as follows: E 112 Test Methods for Determining the Average Grain
Copper Alloy Copper, Tin, Zinc, Phos., Iron, Nickel,
Size4
UNS No.2 % % % %% % % E 255 Practice for Sampling Copper and Copper Alloys for
Determination of Chemical Composition5
C40500 95 1 4
C40810 95.5 2.0 2.22 0.03 0.1 0.15
E 478 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Copper
C40850 95.5 3.0 1.27 0.03 0.1 0.1 Alloys6
C40860 94.8 2.0 3.04 0.03 0.03 0.1 E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)7
C41100 91 0.5 8.5
C41300 91 1 8
C41500 91 2 7
3. Terminology
C42200 87 1 12 3.1 Definitions— For standard terms related to copper and
C42500 88 2 10
C42520 89.8 2.0 7.97 0.03 0.1 0.1
copper alloys, refer to Terminology B 846.
C43000 85 2 13
C43400 85 0.7 14.3 4. General Requirements
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded 4.1 The following sections of Specification B 248 constitute
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for a part of this specification:
information only. 4.1.1 Terminology—Definitions,
4.1.2 Materials and Manufacturing,
2. Referenced Documents 4.1.3 Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance,
2.1 ASTM Standards: 4.1.4 Sampling—except for chemical analysis,
B 248 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought 4.1.5 Number of Tests and Retests,
Copper and Copper-Alloy Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled 4.1.6 Specimen Preparation,
Bar3 4.1.7 Test Methods—except for chemical analysis,
B 601 Practice for Temper Designations for Copper and 4.1.8 Significance of Numerical Limits,
Copper Alloys—Wrought and Cast3 4.1.9 Inspection,
B 846 Terminology for Copper and Copper Alloys3 4.1.10 Rejection and Rehearing,
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials4 4.1.11 Certification,
4.1.12 Test Reports (Mill),
4.1.13 Packaging and Package Marking, and
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper 4.1.14 Supplementary Requirements.
and Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.01 on
Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
Current edition approved Dec. 10, 1998. Published May 1999. Originally
published as B 591 – 73. Last previous edition B 591 – 98.
2
New designations established in accordance with Practice E 527. In the new
UNS system the designations for copper alloys are simply expansions of the present
5
standard designations by a prefix “C” and a suffix “00.” Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05.
3 6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.01. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.06.
4 7
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 591 – 98a
4.2 In addition, when a section with a title identical to that
referenced in 4.1 appears in this specification, it contains
additional requirements, which supplement those appearing in
Specification B 248.
5. Ordering Information
5.1 Contracts or purchase orders for product under this
specification should include the following information:
5.1.1 ASTM designation and year of issue (for example,
B 591-XX);
5.1.2 Copper Alloy UNS No. Designation (for example,
C42500);
5.1.3 Temper (see Section 8);
5.1.4 Dimensions, that is, thickness, width, length, and so
forth (see Section 12);
5.1.5 Form, that is, plate, sheet, strip, or rolled bar;
5.1.6 How furnished, that is, rolls, specific or stock lengths,
with or without ends;
5.1.7 Quantity, that is, total weight each form, temper, and
size; and
5.1.8 When material is purchased for agencies of the U.S.
Government the requirements of Section 11 shall apply.
5.2 The following options are available under this specifi-
cation and should be specified in the contract or purchase order
when required:
5.2.1 Type of edge, that is, slit, sheared, sawed, square
corners, round corners, rounded edges, or full rounded edges,
and
5.2.2 Width and straightness tolerances (see Section 12).
6. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 Material:
6.1.1 The material of manufacture shall be Copper Alloy
UNS No. C40500, C41100, C41300, C41500, C42200,
C42000, C43300, C43400, C40810, C40850, C40860, or
C42520 as specified in the ordering information.
6.1.2 In the event that heat identification or traceability is
required, the purchaser shall specify the details desired.
NOTE 1—Because of the discontinuous nature of the processing of
castings into wrought products, it is not always practical to identify a
specific casting analysis with a specific quantity of finished material.
6.2 Manufacture:
6.2.1 The product shall be manufactured by such hot work-
ing, cold working, and annealing processes as to produce a
uniform wrought structure in the finished product.
6.2.2 The product shall be hot or cold worked to the finished
size and subsequently annealed, when required, to meet the
temper properties specified in the ordering information.
6.2.3 Edges—Slit edges shall be furnished unless otherwise
specified in the contract or purchase order.
7. Chemical Composition
7.1 The material shall conform to the chemical composi-
tional requirements specified in Table 1 for the copper alloy
UNS No. designation specified in the ordering information.
7.1.1 These composition limits do not preclude the possible
presence of other unnamed elements. Limits may be estab-
lished and analysis required for unnamed elements by agree-
ment between manufacturer or supplier and the purchaser.
7.2 Zinc, given as the “Remainder,” is the difference be-
tween the sum of the results for all elements determined and
100 %.
7.2.1 Copper may be determined by difference; however,
when so determined, the results must conform to the require-
ments of Table 1.
7.3 When all elements specified in Table 1 for the desig-
nated alloy are determined, the sum of results shall equal at
least 99.7 %.
8. Temper
8.1 As Hot Rolled (M20) Material—This standard temper of
sheet and plate produced by hot rolling, where applicable, is
shown in Table 2. (See Table 3 for SI equivalents.)
8.2 H (Rolled Material)—The standard tempers of rolled
materials are as designated in Table 2 with the prefix “H.”
Special tempers not listed in this specification are subject to
agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
8.3 Annealed Material—The standard tempers of annealed
material are as designated in Table 4 in the column entitled
“Nominal Grain Size.” Special tempers not listed in this
specification are subject to agreement between the manufac-
turer and the purchaser.
8.4 Temper designations are defined in Practice B 601.

TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements

Copper Alloy Composition, %
UNS No. Copper Tin Lead, max Iron, max Phosphorus, max Nickel Zinc
C40500 94.0-96.0 0.7-1.3 0.05 0.05 ... ... remainder
C40810 94.5-96.5 1.8-2.2 0.05 0.08-0.12 0.028-0.040 0.11-0.20 remainder
C40850 94.5-96.5 2.6-4.0 0.05 0.05-0.20 0.02-0.04 0.05-0.20 remainder
C40860 94.0-96.0 1.7-2.3 0.05 0.01-0.05 0.02-0.04 0.05-0.20 remainder
C41100 89.0-92.0 0.30-0.7 0.10 0.05 ... ... remainder
C41300 89.0-93.0 0.7-1.3 0.10 0.05 ... ... remainder
C41500 89.0-93.0 1.5-2.2 0.10 0.05 ... ... remainder
C42200 86.0-89.0 0.8-1.4 0.05 0.05 0.35 ... remainder
C42500 87.0-90.0 1.5-3.0 0.05 0.05 0.35 ... remainder
C42520 88.0-91.0 1.5-3.0 0.05 0.05-0.20 0.02-0.04 0.05-0.20 remainder
C43000 84.0-87.0 1.7-2.7 0.10 0.05 ... ... remainder
C43400 84.0-87.0 0.40-1.0 0.05 0.05 ... ... remainder

2
 B 591 – 98a
TABLE 2 Tensile Strength Requirements and Approximate Rockwell Hardness Values for Rolled Tempers

NOTE 1—Plate is generally available in only the as hot-rolled (M20) temper. Required properties for other tempers shall be agreed upon between the
manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of placing the order.
NOTE 2—See Table 3 for SI unit equivalents.

Tensile Strength, Approximate Rockwell Hardness

Temper Designation
ksiA B-Scale Superficial 30T
0.020 to 0.036 in. (0.51 Over 0.036 in. 0.012 to 0.028 in. (0.30 Over 0.028 in.
Standard Former Min Max
to 0.91 mm), incl (0.91 mm) to 0.71 mm), incl (0.711 mm)
Copper Alloy UNS No. C40500
M20 As hot-rolled 35 50 ... ... ... ...
H01 Quarter hard 41 53 30-54 34-62 36-56 38-58
H02 Half hard 46 58 50-66 52-69 49-60 51-62
H03 Three-quarter hard 52 64 60-72 62-74 56-66 58-68
H04 Hard 58 70 66-76 68-78 60-68 62-70
H06 Extra hard 63 75 71-78 72-80 65-71 66-73
H08 Spring 68 80 75-81 76-83 67-72 68-74
H10 Extra spring 73 84 78-83 79-85 69-73 70-75
Copper Alloy UNS No. C40810
H02 Half hard 57 73 65-80 66-81 60-70 62-72
H04 Hard 76 88 78-89 80-90 67-74 69-75
H06 Extra hard 90 100 82-90 83-92 69-75 70-76
H08 Spring 94 102 85-92 86-94 71-77 72-78
Copper Alloy UNS No. C40850
H02 Half hard 57 73 65-80 67-81 60-69 62-72
H04 Hard 76 89 78-88 80-90 67-74 69-75
H06 Extra hard 90 100 82-91 83-93 69-75 70-76
H08 Spring 94 106 85-92 87-94 72-77 73-78
Copper Alloy UNS No. C40860
H02 Half hard 56 72 64-80 65-80 60-70 61-72
H04 Hard 74 87 77-89 79-90 66-74 68-75
H06 Extra hard 88 98 81-90 82-91 68-75 69-76
H08 Spring 92 105 84-92 85-94 70-77 71-78
Copper Alloy UNS No. C41100
M20 As hot-rolled 34 50 ... ... ... ...
H01 Quarter hard 42 54 32-60 34-63 37-57 38-64
H02 Half hard 49 60 51-68 52-70 50-62 51-67
H03 Three-quarter hard 55 66 62-75 63-77 58-66 59-70
H04 Hard 61 72 68-79 69-81 62-70 64-71
H06 Extra hard 67 78 74-82 76-84 66-73 67-72
H08 Spring 73 83 78-84 77-86 69-74 70-73
H10 Extra spring 78 ... 80 and over 80 and over 70 and over 71 and over
Copper Alloy UNS No. C41300
M20 As hot-rolled 37 50 ... ... ... ...
H01 Quarter hard 45 55 34-62 35-64 40-58 39-60
H02 Half hard 50 62 52-70 53-72 51-63 51-64
H03 Three-quarter hard 58 68 64-77 66-78 59-68 60-69
H04 Hard 65 75 71-80 72-81 63-70 64-70
H06 Extra hard 70 82 77-83 78-84 67-71 68-72
H08 Spring 76 86 81-86 82-87 70-73 70-74
H10 Extra spring 81 ... 85 and over 86 and over 72 and over 73 and over
Copper Alloy UNS No. C41500
M20 As hot rolled 38 50 ... ... ... ...
H01 Quarter hard 46 56 48-73 49-75 48-65 49-67
H02 Half hard 53 63 68-78 70-80 62-68 63-70
H03 Three-quarter hard 57 68 73-80 75-82 65-70 66-71
H04 Hard 64 75 78-85 79-87 69-72 69-74
H06 Extra hard 70 82 81-87 82-90 70-73 70-75
H08 Spring 78 89 86-92 87-93 73-76 73-77
H10 Extra spring 85 ... 89 and over 90 and over 74 and over 75 and over
Copper Alloy UNS No. C42200
M20 As hot-rolled 40 53 ... ... ... ...
H01 Quarter hard 47 57 42-68 44-70 43-62 46-65
H02 Half hard 54 65 64-74 66-76 58-68 61-70
H03 Three-quarter hard 60 72 71-80 73-82 64-69 66-71
H04 Hard 67 79 76-83 78-85 67-71 69-73
H06 Extra hard 75 85 80-85 82-87 69-73 70-74
H08 Spring 82 92 83-88 85-90 70-74 71-75

3
 B 591 – 98a

TABLE 2 Continued
Tensile Strength, Approximate Rockwell Hardness
Temper Designation
ksiA B-Scale Superficial 30T
0.020 to 0.036 in. (0.51 Over 0.036 in. 0.012 to 0.028 in. (0.30 Over 0.028 in.
Standard Former Min Max
to 0.91 mm), incl (0.91 mm) to 0.71 mm), incl (0.711 mm)
H10 Extra spring 88 ... 86 and over 86 and over 74 and over 74 and over
Copper Alloy UNS No. C42500
M20 As hot-rolled 40 54 ... ... ... ...
H01 Quarter hard 49 59 46-71 48-73 45-65 47-67
H02 Half hard 57 69 67-81 69-83 63-69 65-72
H03 Three-quarter hard 62 74 74-84 76-86 66-71 68-73
H04 Hard 70 82 81-88 83-90 70-74 72-76
H06 Extra hard 76 88 86-92 88-94 71-75 73-77
H08 Spring 84 94 89-93 91-95 73-77 74-78
H10 Extra spring 92 ... 92 and over 92 and over 76 and over 77 and over
Copper Alloy UNS No. C42520
H02 Half hard 67 82 68-83 70-85 64-71 67-73
H04 Hard 81 96 82-90 83-92 71-76 72-78
H06 Extra hard 92 107 85-94 87-96 72-77 73-79
H08 Spring 97 112 88-96 90-98 74-79 75-81
H10 Extra spring 103 118 91-101 92-102 76-82 77-83
Copper Alloy UNS No. C43000
M20 As hot-rolled 40 55 ... ... ... ...
H01 Quarter hard 47 60 41-68 45-72 47-64 50-67
H02 Half hard 55 69 64-79 67-82 58-70 60-72
H03 Three-quarter hard 65 78 72-83 75-86 64-72 66-74
H04 Hard 72 84 78-87 80-89 68-75 70-77
H06 Extra hard 83 93 83-89 85-91 70-77 72-79
H08 Spring 89 98 87-92 89-94 74-79 75-80
H10 Extra spring 90 ... 89 and over 91 and over 75 and over 76 and over
Copper Alloy UNS No. C43400
M20 As hot-rolled 37 50 ... ... ... ...
H01 Quarter hard 45 58 39-64 43-68 45-61 48-64
H02 Half hard 52 66 55-74 58-77 56-68 58-70
H03 Three-quarter hard 61 74 65-77 68-80 64-70 64-72
H04 Hard 68 80 73-84 75-86 65-74 67-76
H06 Extra hard 78 89 76-87 78-89 69-76 71-78
H08 Spring 85 94 81-89 83-91 73 and over 74-79
H10 Extra spring 88 ... 83 and over 85 and over 74 and over 75 and over
A
ksi = 1000 psi.

TABLE 3 Tensile Strength Conversion Values for Table 2 TABLE 4 Grain Size Requirements for Annealed Material
ksi MPa ksi MPa ksi MPa ksi MPa Temper Average Grain Size, mm
Copper Alloy UNS No.
41 [283] 61 [424] 79 [545] 94 [648] Designation Nominal Min Max
42 [290] 62 [427] 80 [552] 95 [655]
C40500, C40810, OS035 0.035 0.025 0.050
44 [303] 63 [434] 81 [558] 96 [662]
C40850, C40860, OS025 0.025 0.015 0.035
45 [310] 64 [441] 82 [565] 97 [669] A
C41100, C41300, OS015 0.015 0.025
46 [317] 65 [448] 83 [572] 98 [676]
C41500, C42200,
47 [324] 66 [455] 84 [579] 99 [683]
C42500, C42520,
49 [338] 67 [462] 85 [586] 100 [689]
C43000, and C43400
50 [345] 68 [469] 86 [593] 102 [703]
A
52 [359] 69 [476] 87 [600] 103 [710] Although no minimum grain size is required, this material shall be fully
53 [365] 70 [483] 88 [607] 105 [723] recrystallized.
54 [372] 72 [496] 89 [614] 106 [730]
56 [386] 73 [503] 90 [621] 107 [737]
57 [393] 74 [510] 91 [627] 112 [772]
58 [400] 75 [517] 92 [634] 118 [813] from each of two sampling portions and each specimen shall be
59 [407] 76 [524] 93 [641]
60 [414] 78 [538] within the limits prescribed in Table 4 when determined in
accordance with Test Methods E 112.
9.3 Grain size shall be determined on a plane parallel to the
flat surfaces of the product.
9. Grain Size for Annealed Tempers
9.1 Grain size shall be the standard requirement for all 10. Mechanical Property Requirements
products in the annealed tempers. 10.1 Tensile Strength Requirements:
9.2 Acceptance or rejection based upon grain size shall 10.1.1 Product in “H” (rolled) tempers shall conform to the
depend only on the average grain size of test specimen taken requirements prescribed in Table 2 for the temper and UNS

4
 B 591 – 98a
Alloy Number specified in the ordering information when 12.1.1 Thickness—Tolerances as in Table 1.
tested in accordance with Test Methods E 8. 12.1.2 Width:
10.1.2 Test specimens shall be taken so that the longitudinal 12.1.2.1 Tolerances for slit metal and slit metal with rolled
axis is parallel to the direction of rolling. edges as in Table 4.
10.2 Rockwell Hardness Requirements—The approximate 12.1.2.2 Tolerances for square-sheared metal as in Table 5.
Rockwell values given in Table 2 and Table 5 are given for 12.1.2.3 Tolerances for sawed metal as in Table 6.
general information and assistance in testing and shall not be 12.1.3 Length:
used as a basis for rejection. 12.1.3.1 Tolerances for straight lengths as in Table 7.
NOTE 2—The Rockwell hardness test offers a quick and convenient 12.1.3.2 Schedule of minimum lengths with ends as in Table
method of checking for general conformity to the specification require- 8.
ments for temper, tensile strength, and grain size. 12.1.3.3 Tolerances for squared-sheared metal as in Table 9.
11. Other Requirements 12.1.3.4 Tolerances for sawed metal as in Table 10.
12.1.4 Straightness:
11.1 Purchases for U.S. Government Agencies—When
12.1.4.1 Tolerances for slit metal or slit metal either
identified in the contract or purchase order, product purchased
straightened or edge rolled as in Table 11.
for agencies of the U.S. Government shall conform to the
12.1.4.2 Tolerances for squared-sheared metal as in Table
special government-stipulated requirements in the supplemen-
12.
tal requirements given in Specification B 248.
12.1.4.3 Tolerance for squared-sheared metal as in Table 13.
12. Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations 12.1.5 Edges:
12.1 The dimensions and tolerances for product described 12.1.5.1 Tolerances for radius of square edges as in Table
by this specification shall be as specified in Specification 14.
B 248, with particular reference to the following tables and 12.1.5.2 Tolerances for radius of round corners as in Table
related paragraphs in that specification: 15.
12.1.5.3 Tolerances for radius of round edges as in Table 16.
TABLE 5 Approximate Rockwell Hardness of Annealed Material 12.1.5.4 Tolerances for radius of full rounded edges as in
Temper Annealed Temper Approximate Rockwell HardnessA Table 17.
Designation Nominal Grain Size F Scale Superficial 30T
OS035 0.035 51-60 2-16 13. Sampling
OS025 0.025 55-61 8-18
OS015 0.015 60-75 16-37 13.1 Chemical Analysis:
Copper Alloy UNS No. C41100
OS035 0.035 57-63 15-26
13.1.1 The sample for chemical analysis shall be taken from
OS025 0.025 62-69 21-32 the pieces selected and combined into one composite sample in
OS015 0.015 63-75 26-37 accordance with Practice E 255 for product in its final form.
Copper Alloy UNS No. C41300
OS035 0.035 58-66 17-27
The minimum weight of the composite sample shall be 150 g.
OS025 0.025 63-72 22-33 13.1.2 Instead of sampling in accordance with Practice
OS015 0.015 66-79 27-42 E 255, the manufacturer shall have the option of taking
Copper Alloy UNS No. C41500
OS035 0.035 61-67 20-28 samples at the time the castings are poured or by taking
OS025 0.025 63-73 22-35 samples form the semi-finished product.
OS015 0.015 67-81 28-44
13.1.2.1 When composition of the material has been deter-
Copper Alloy UNS No. C42200
OS035 0.035 62-68 24-29 mined during the course of manufacture, sampling of the
OS025 0.025 65-74 26-36 finished product by the manufacturer is not required.
OS015 0.015 68-86 29-61
Copper Alloy UNS No. C42500
13.1.3 The number of samples to be taken for determination
OS035 0.035 67-73 28-35 of chemical composition shall be as follows:
OS025 0.025 69-75 30-42 13.1.3.1 When sampled at the time the castings are poured,
OS015 0.015 73-90 35-55
Copper Alloy UNS No. C43000 at least one sample shall be taken for each group of castings
OS035 0.035 63-74 20-39 poured from the same source of molten metal.
OS025 0.025 65-79 25-42 13.1.3.2 When sampled from the semi-finished product, at
OS015 0.015 68-85 28-50
Copper Alloy UNS No. C43400 least one sample shall be taken to represent each 10 000 lb or
OS035 0.035 59-69 19-24 fraction thereof, except that not more than one sample shall be
OS025 0.025 60-70 20-32 required per piece.
OS015 0.015 63-76 20-39
A
13.1.3.3 Only one sample needs to be taken from the
Rockwell hardness values apply as follows: The F scale applies to metal 0.020
in. (0.5 mm) in thickness and over; the 30T scale applies to metal 0.015 in. (0.38 semi-finished product of one cast bar from a single furnace
mm) in thickness and over. melt charge continuously processed.

5
 B 591 – 98a
14. Test Methods 14.1.2 Test methods(s) used for the determination of ele-
14.1 Chemical Analysis: ment(s) required by contractual or purchase order agreement
14.1.1 Chemical composition shall be determined, in case of shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
disagreement, by the following appropriate method: purchaser.
Element Test Method
15. Keywords
Copper E 478
Iron E 76 (AA) 15.1 copper-zinc-tin alloy plate; copper-zinc-tin alloy rolled
Lead E 478 (AA) bar; copper-zinc-tin alloy sheet; copper-zinc-tin alloy strip;
Nickel E 478 (Photometric)
Phosphorus E 62 copper-zinc-tin-iron-nickel alloy plate; copper-zinc-tin-iron-
Tin E 478 (Photometric) nickel alloy rolled bar; copper-zinc-tin-iron-nickel alloy sheet;
Zinc E 478 (AA) copper-zinc-tin-iron-nickel alloy strip

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B05 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue, B 591-98,
that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) Title has been changed to include copper-zinc-tin-iron- (6) Added to Table 2.
nickel alloys. (7) Added to Table 3.
(2) Added to the Scope, Section 1. (8) Added to Table 4.
(3) Added to 6.1.1.
(4) Added to Table 1. (9) Added to 14.1.1.
(5) Added to 8.1. (10) Added to Keywords, Section 15.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

6
 Designation: B 593 – 96 (Reapproved 2003)e1

Standard Test Method for

Bending Fatigue Testing for Copper-Alloy Spring Materials1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 593; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

e1 NOTE—Paragraph 1.2 was updated editorially in January 2004.

1. Scope* 4. Summary of Test Method

1.1 This test method describes procedures for the determi-
nation of the reversed or repeated bending fatigue properties of
copper alloy flat-sheet or strip-spring materials by fixed canti-
lever, constant amplitude of displacement-type testing ma-
chines. This method is limited to flat stock ranging in thickness
from 0.005 to 0.062 in. (0.13 to 1.57 mm), to a fatigue-life
range of 105 to 108 cycles, and to conditions where no
significant change in stress-strain relations occurs during the
test.
NOTE 1—This implies that the load-deflection characteristics of the
material do not change as a function of the number of cycles within the
precision of measurement. There is no significant cyclic hardening or
softening.
1.2 Units—The values stated in inch-pound units are re-
garded as standard. The values given in parentheses are
mathematical conversions to SI units that are provided for
information purposes only and are not considered standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
E 206 Definitions of Terms Relating to Fatigue Testing and
the Statistical Analysis of Fatique Data2
E 468 Practice for Presentation of Constant Amplitude Fa-
tigue Test Results for Metallic Materials3
3. Terminology
3.1 For terminology relating to this test method, refer to
Definitions E 206 and Practice E 468.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper
and Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.06 on
Methods of Test.
Current edition approved Apr. 10, 2003. Published June 2003. Originally
approved in 1973. Last previous edition approved in 1996 as B593 – 96.
2
Discontinued, see 1986 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
4.1 A prepared test specimen of a specific wrought copper
alloy flat-sheet or strip-spring material is mounted into a fixed
cantilever, constant-deflection type fatigue testing machine.
The specimen is held at one end, acting as a cantilever beam,
and cycled by flexure followed by reverse flexure until
complete failure. The number of cycles to failure is recorded as
a measure of fatigue-life.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The flexural fatigue test described in this test method
provides information on the ability of a copper alloy flat-spring
material to resist the development of cracks or general me-
chanical deterioration as a result of a relatively large number of
cycles (generally in the range 105 to 108) under conditions of
constant displacement.
5.2 This test method is primarily a research and develop-
ment tool which may be used to determine the effect of
variations in materials on fatigue strength and also to provide
data for use in selecting copper alloy spring materials for
service under conditions of repeated strain cycling.
5.3 The results are suitable for direct application in design
only when all design factors such as loading, geometry of part,
frequency of straining, and environmental conditions are
known. The test method is generally unsuitable for an inspec-
tion test or a quality control test due to the amount of time and
effort required to collect the data.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Testing Machine—The fatigue testing machine is a
fixed-cantilever, constant-deflection type. In this machine (Fig.
1) the test specimen shall be held as a cantilever beam in a
clamp at one end and deflected by a concentrated load applied
near the other end of the apex of the tapered section (Fig. 2).
Either the clamp or the loading member may be adjusted so
that the deflection of the free end of the cantilever is either
completely reversed (mean displacement equal to zero) or
greater in one direction of bending (mean displacement not
equal to zero).

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 593 – 96 (2003)e1
FIG. 1 Fatigue Machines
6.2 A suitable counter and monitoring circuit is required to
provide a direct readout of the number of cycles to complete
failure, that is, separation into two pieces.
7. Test Specimen
7.1 The test specimen shall be of the fixed-cantilever type.
Several such specimens which have been used successfully are
shown in Fig. 2.
7.2 It is important, therefore, that care be exercised in the
preparation of test specimens, particularly in machining, to
assure good workmanship. Improperly prepared test specimens
cause unsatisfactory test results.
7.2.1 The specimens are best prepared by cross milling a
stack, approximately 0.75 in. (19 mm) thick, including back-up
plates, for which 0.12-in. (3-mm) thick brass sheet stock may
be used.
7.2.1.1 It is necessary to ensure that any cutting or machin-
ing operation required to either rough cut the test specimen
from the blank, or to machine it to size does not appreciably
alter the metallurgical structure or properties of the material.
All cuts taken in machining should be such as to minimize
work hardening of the test specimen.
7.2.1.2 In selecting cutting speeds and feed rates, due regard
should be paid to the test-specimen material, and for finishing
cuts, to the quality of the surface finish required.
NOTE 2—It is not practicable to recommend a single procedure for
feeds, speeds, and depth of cut, since this will vary with the material
tested. The procedure used, however, should be noted in reporting test
results, since differences in procedure may produce variability in test
results among different laboratories.
7.3 The test specimen surface shall be in the as-received
condition. The edges shall not be roughed or smoothed, since
2
this tends to give an apparent higher fatigue strength.4 Burrs,
however, may be removed by light stoning.
7.4 Test specimens from material that is used in a thermally
treated condition, such as precipitation hardened or stress
relieved, shall be treated in a manner reflecting the way the
material will be used. The procedure used should be noted in
reporting test results.
8. Calculation of Stress
8.1 The maximum bending stress is calculated by using the
simple beam equation:
S 5 6PL/bd 2 (1)
where:
S = desired bending stress, lb/in.2,
P = applied load at the connecting pin (apex of triangle), lb,
L = distance between the connecting pin and the point of
stress, in.,
b = specimen width at length L from point of load appli-
cation, in., and
d = specimen thickness, in.
9. Machine Calibration
9.1 A loading fixture such as that shown in Fig. 3 may be
used to determine the load-deflection characteristics of the
specimen. In this fixture the specimen deflection and change in
moment arm under load are measured with the two microme-
ters for a given load. The vertical micrometer measures the
4
George, R. G., and Mantle, J. B., “The Effect of Edge Preparation on the
Fatigue Life of Flat-Plate Specimens”, Materials Research and Standards, MTRSA,
Am. Soc. Testing Mats., December 1962, p. 1000.
 B 593 – 96 (2003)e1

NOTE 1—All dimensions are in inches: in. 3 25.4 = mm.

FIG. 2 Sheet or Strip Fatigue Test Specimens

deflection of loading pin, d, which follows the motion of the
apex formed by the tapered sides. The horizontal micrometer,
e, measures the foreshortening of the moment arm as applied to
the same locus. An average load-deflection curve is then
plotted from this corrected data. A minimum of three speci-
mens should be used in this determination, representing the
minimum, mean, and maximum thicknesses of the material.
9.1.1 Electrical resistance strain gages may be attached to
the specimen for simultaneous strain measurement. Adequate
correction should be made, however, to compensate for gage
thickness and possible stiffening of the test specimen, espe-
cially for thin stock.5
9.1.2 Measure the machine displacement under dynamic
conditions. This may be accomplished by optical means. Use
specimens having foil-type electrical resistance strain gages
mounted on the tapered area to verify that static and dynamic
strains gages mounted on the tapered area to verify that static
and dynamic strains are identical for a given displacement.
From the load-deflection curve, plot a stress versus deflection

5
Perry, C. C., and Lissner, H. R., Strain Gage Primer, McGraw-Hill, New York,
NY.

3
 B 593 – 96 (2003)e1
FIG. 3 Load deflection test fixture for standard Bell Telephone Laboratories sheet metal fatigue test specimen
curve using as an approximation the distance from the load
point to the center of the tapered specimen area and the width
at that point for L and b, respectively.
NOTE 3—Since the specimen normally fails in the tapered region which
is designed to have a very nearly uniform outer fiber strain, the error
between this calculated stress value and that at the point of failure is small.
10. Procedure
10.1 Mount the test specimens in the machine and flex to
failure, that is, separation into two pieces. Determine the
number of specimens and displacement levels required for a
given sample by consulting ASTM STP 91-A.6
11. Report
11.1 Prepare reports in accordance with Practice E 468.
12. Precision and Bias
12.1 Precision—The following parameters are reported to
impact upon the precision of this test method:
6
A Guide for Fatigue Testing and the Statistical Analysis of Fatigue Data,
Second Edition, ASTM STP 91-A, AST-TA, 1963.
4
12.1.1 Characteristics of the specimen such as orientation of
grains relative to the axial stress, grain size, residual stress,
previous strain history, dimensions.
12.1.2 Testing conditions such as alignment of the speci-
men, temperature variations, conditions of test equipment, ratio
of error in load to the range in load values.
12.2 Bias—A statement of bias of this method requires
reference standard values for one or more materials based on
many measurements or round robin test data.7,8 Such standard
reference values or test data are presently not available.
13. Keywords
13.1 bending fatigue; bending fatigue testing; copper alloy
flat strip; copper alloy spring; fatigue testing
7
Torrey, M. N., and Gohn, G. R., “A Study of the Statistical Treatments of
Fatigue Data”, Proceedings ASTM, Vol 56, p. 1091, 1956.
8
Torrey, M. N., Gohn, G. R., and Wilk, M. B., “A Study of The Variability in The
Mechanical Properties of Alloy A Phosphor Bronze Strip”, Proceedings ASTM, Vol
58, p. 893, 1958.
 B 593 – 96 (2003)e1
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B05 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(B 593-85 (1990)) that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) Added Summary of Test Method and Keywords sections.

(2) Revised other sections to accomodate current ASTM form
and style requirements.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 594 – 02

Standard Practice for

Ultrasonic Inspection of Aluminum-Alloy Wrought Products
for Aerospace Applications1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 594; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope * of material purchase form a part of this practice to the extent

1.1 This practice covers the requirements for pulse-echo
ultrasonic inspection and includes criteria used to define
applicable quality levels of aluminum-alloy wrought products
for aerospace applications when performance of the ultrasonic
test by the producer is specified, or when ultrasonic inspection
is performed by the purchaser upon receipt.
1.2 This practice is not applicable if plastic deformation is
introduced into the material after delivery.
1.3 The ultrasonic test described in this practice is employed
to detect internal discontinuities oriented in a direction parallel
to, or nearly parallel to, the surface of the product. The test is
performed either by the immersion method or the contact
method using pulsed longitudinal waves which are transmitted
and received by a search unit containing either a single crystal
or a combination of electrically interconnected multiple crys-
tals. Ultrasonic tests employing either the through-transmission
or the angle-beam techniques are not included.
NOTE 1—Ultrasonic tests employing angle-beam techniques require
special reference blocks, search units, and scanning procedures and are
subject to negotiation between the purchaser and the seller when such tests
are required by the contract or purchase order.
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are mathemati-
cal conversions to SI units which are provided for information
only and are not considered standard.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date
referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards:
B 881 Terminology Relating to Aluminum- and
Magnesium-Alloy Products2
E 114 Practice for Ultrasonic Pulse-Echo Straight-Beam
Examination by the Contact Method3
E 127 Practice for Fabricating and Checking Aluminum
Alloy Ultrasonic Standard Reference Blocks3
E 214 Practice for Immersed Ultrasonic Examination by the
Reflection Method Using Pulsed Longitudinal Waves3
E 317 Practice for Evaluating Performance Characteristics
of Ultrasonic Pulse-Echo Testing Systems Without the Use
of Electronic Measurement Instruments3
2.3 American Society for Nondestructive Testing Standard:
ASNT Recommended Practice for Nondestructive Testing
Personnel Qualification and Certification—Ultrasonic
Testing Method, SNT-TC-1A4
2.4 National Aerospace Standard:
NAS-410 Certification of Inspection Personnel5
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Refer to Terminology B 881 for definitions
of product terms used in this practice.
4. Summary of Practice
4.1 The product is inspected ultrasonically by scanning
specified entry surfaces with a beam of pulsed longitudinal
waves oriented in a direction perpendicular to the entry
surface. The ultrasound is transmitted into the product either by
the direct contact or the immersion method. During the scan,
indications representing discontinuities are displayed on an
A-scan screen of the test instrument and may be detected by
auxiliary electronic monitors, if used.

2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.02.
1 3
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B07 on Light Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
4
Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B07.03 on Available from American Society for Nondestructive Testing, P.O. Box 28518,
Aluminum Alloy Wrought Products. 1711 Arlingate Ln., Columbus, OH 43228-0518.
5
Current edition approved April 10, 2002. Published June 2002. Originally Available from AIA—Aerospace Industries Association, 1250 Eye Street,
published as B 594 – 74. Last previous edition B 594 – 97. N.W., Washington, DC, 20005-3922.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 594
4.2 When the test system sensitivity level is appropriately
adjusted, detected discontinuities and variations in back reflec-
tion patterns are evaluated by comparing amplitudes of indi-
cations with the ultrasonic responses from selected ultrasonic
standard reference blocks. The evaluated ultrasonic disconti-
nuity responses are then classified and compared with appli-
cable acceptance criteria.
NOTE 2—Additional information describing ultrasonic tests by the
direct contact method and by the immersion method is available in
Practices E 114 and E 214.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 A number of factors such as the condition of the entry
and back surfaces of the inspected part, the inclination of the
ultrasonic beam with respect to the entry surface, and varia-
tions in the performance characteristics of the test system may
cause significant differences in amplitudes of discontinuity
indications and back reflections. These factors can seriously
impair the reliability and the quantitative value of the ultra-
sonic test outlined in this practice.
5.2 Accurate evaluations of discontinuity size are also
significantly affected by variations in search unit characteristics
and by irregularities in discontinuity surfaces which can
influence reflectivity. For these reasons, the discontinuity sizes
that may be implied by the ultrasonic comparisons outlined in
this practice must be regarded as “apparent” or “estimated” in
recognition of the limited quantitative value of the measure-
ment.
5.3 Because numerous interacting variables in a test system
can adversely influence the results of an ultrasonic inspection,
the actual quantitative effects of detected discontinuities upon
the mechanical properties of the inspected product are difficult
to establish. Although this practice provides a reliable control
of product quality during manufacture, it is not applicable as an
exclusive indicator of the ultimate quality and performance of
components fabricated from the inspected products covered by
this practice.
6. Special Requirements
6.1 When ultrasonic inspection of the finished product is
required of the producer, purchase orders or contracts shall
include the following information:
6.1.1 Special Acceptance Limits—Discontinuity class lim-
its, if other than those defined in Section 11, shall be subject to
negotiation between the purchaser and the producer and shall
be in accordance with an agreement established between the
purchaser and the producer at the time of quotation or
acceptance of purchase order or contract.
6.1.2 Engineering Drawings—When ultrasonic inspection
is specified for alloys, section thicknesses, and weights outside
limits established in applicable product specifications, the
special discontinuity class limits shall be as negotiated between
the purchaser and the producer and shall be indicated on zoned
engineering drawings describing the material to be inspected
on part machine drawings. The drawings shall also indicate
non-critical areas on the material and areas that will be
removed by machining.
6.1.3 Special Testing Procedures—Cylindrical sections or
specified areas of parts containing fillets may require additional
2
inspections employing special ultrasonic testing procedures
(for example, angle-beam, shear-wave technique) not covered
by this practice. Such special testing procedures and accep-
tance limits shall be established by negotiation and agreement
between the purchaser and producer.
7. Apparatus
7.1 The required ultrasonic test system shall consist of the
following:
7.1.1 Basic Test Instrument—Any electronic device that
produces electrical pulses to activate a search unit and displays
pulses representing ultrasonic reflections on an A-scan screen
is satisfactory if the minimum performance characteristics
specified in 7.1.3 are met. The instrument shall provide stable
linear amplification of received pulses at a selected test
frequency and required sensitivity levels within the specified
minimum performance limits.
7.1.2 Search Unit—The recommended search unit is the flat
nonfocusing type and contains a piezoelectric crystal which
generates and receives longitudinal waves at the rated fre-
quency when connected to the test instrument through a
suitable coaxial cable. A dual-crystal search unit containing
both a transmitting and a receiving crystal in one container may
be used provided the test instrument will accommodate two-
crystal operation. Special tests employing focusing search units
may be used provided such tests are established by negotiation
and agreement between purchaser and producer.
7.1.2.1 Search Unit Size—Any search unit of either circular
or rectangular configuration may be used for initial scanning.
For a circular configuration that provides an effective crystal
area greater than 1.00 in.2(6.45 cm2) and for all rectangular
search units a documented method of providing a uniform
entry surface for the full extent of the sound beam shall be
agreed upon between the purchaser and producer. A search unit
containing a circular crystal of an effective diameter no greater
than 0.75 in. (19.0 mm) is required to evaluate the ultrasonic
response from detected discontinuities. When connected to the
test instrument and used for initial scanning and evaluating
responses from discontinuities, the search unit shall meet or
exceed the required minimum performance characteristics at
the selected test frequency. Search units used only for initial
scanning of a part prior to evaluation of suspect discontinuities
shall, as a minimum, have adequate performance of sensitivity
and signal to noise ratio appropriate to the class of inspection
described in Section 11.
NOTE 3—The same search unit used for initial scanning may also be
used for evaluating discontinuities provided its effective crystal diameter
is no greater than 0.75 in. (19.0 mm) and minimum test system
performance requirements are satisfied. Rectangular search units may be
used for evaluation if the method of use is established in writing by the
producer and approved by the purchaser.
7.1.2.2 Effective Beam Width—The effective beam width of
the search unit shall be established by determining the total
traverse distance over which response is maintained within
limits specified below. The hole size in the standard Practice
E 127 reference block to be used for determining effective
beam width shall be in accordance with those listed in Table 1
for the applicable class of inspection. The metal distance of the
reference block shall be that which produces the smallest
 B 594
TABLE 1 Ultrasonic Classes
Single Discontinuity Linear Discontinuity
Multiple Discontinuities Loss of Back Reflection Noise
Class Response Length–Response
in. (mm)C,B (%)E in. (mm)F
in. (mm)A,B in. (mm)D
AAA ⁄
1 64 (0.40) or 25 % of 10 % of 0.12 (3.0)–10 % of 50 10 % of
⁄
3 64 (1.19) response 3⁄64 (1.19) response 3⁄64 (1.19) response 3⁄64 (1.19) response

AA ⁄
3 64 (1.19) 2⁄64 (0.79) 0.5 (12.7)–2⁄64 (0.79) response 50 alarm level
A ⁄
5 64 (1.98) 3⁄64 (1.19) 1.0 (25.4)–3⁄64 (1.19) response 50 alarm level
B 8⁄64 (3.18) 5⁄64 (1.98) 1.0 (25.4)–5⁄64 (1.98) 50 alarm level
C 8⁄64 (3.18) Not applicable Not applicable 50 alarm level
A
Any discontinuity with an indication greater than the response from a reference flat-bottom hole or equivalent notch at the estimated discontinuity depth of the size given
(inches diameter) is not acceptable.
B
NIST certified blocks are not available for 1⁄64 in. (0.40 mm) and 2⁄64 in. (0.79 mm) hole diameters. The following substitutions and correction factors are approximations
based on the area-amplitude relationships and shall be applied as follows:
A 3⁄64 in. hole reference block may be substituted for a 1⁄64 in. hole reference block by using a correction factor of 19 dB.
A 3⁄64 in. hole reference block may be substituted for a 2⁄64 in. hole reference block by using a correction factor of 7 dB.
C
Multiple discontinuities with indications greater than the response from a reference flat-bottom hole at the estimated discontinuity depth of the size given (inches
diameter) are not acceptable if the centers of any two of these discontinuities are less than 1.0 in. apart. Not applicable to class C.
D
Any discontinuity longer than the length given with maximum indications greater than the response given (flat-bottom hole or equivalent notch response) is not
acceptable. Not applicable to class C.
E
Loss of back reflection greater than the percent given, when compared to non-defective material in a similar or like part, is not acceptable when this loss of back
reflection is accompanied by an increase in noise signal (at least double the normal background noise signal) between the front and back surface. Applicable only to straight
beam tests.
F
Noise which exceeds the alarm level setting is not acceptable, except for re-forging stock.

clearly resolved hole indication. The same water distance to be
used for scanning shall be used to determine effective beam
width.
(a) For round search units, a maximum indication shall be
obtained from the hole and then the instrument gain control
shall be adjusted to obtain a hole indication that is equal to
80 % of the vertical limit. The effective beam width shall be the
traverse distance in the index direction over which the indica-
tion from the flat-bottom hole equals or exceeds 40 % of the
vertical limit.
(b) For rectangular search units, an indication shall be
obtained from the hole at any point along the longitudinal axis
of the search unit and then the instrument gain control shall be
adjusted to obtain a hole indication that is equal to 80 % of the
vertical limit. The effective beam width shall be the traverse
distance in the index direction over which the indication from
the flat-bottom hole equals or exceeds 40 % of the vertical
limit. The effective beam width establishes the maximum
allowable index distance used during the initial scan sensitivity
for each inspection.
7.1.2.3 Distance-Amplitude Characteristics—The dis-
tanceamplitude characteristics shall be established and re-
corded for each search unit by obtaining the ultrasonic re-
sponse from a complete distance-amplitude set of ultrasonic
standard reference blocks containing the No. 5 (0.078-in.
diameter (1.98-mm diameter)) flat-bottomed holes (see 7.4) at
a nominal sensitivity level to be used for evaluating the
estimated size of detected discontinuities. When using the
search unit during testing, a check of the established distance-
amplitude characteristics shall be conducted at least once per
8-h shift and shall be performed by noting the ultrasonic
response from at least three selected No. 5 distance-amplitude
reference blocks at the established sensitivity level. If the
response from any block differs by more than 610 % of the
original distance-amplitude curve established for the selected
search unit, the performance of the search unit shall be
reevaluated and the test system shall be restandardized to
ensure proper conformance to the requirements in this practice,
and all metal tested since the previous standardization shall be
retested.
NOTE 4—The distance amplitude curve may be established on one or
more sets of ultrasonic standard reference blocks, containing other than
No. 5 flat bottomed holes, when justified by the inspection class of Section
11.
NOTE 5—This section is not applicable when using the alternative
procedure allowed by 10.5.2.
7.1.2.4 Uniformity of Response for Rectangular Search
Units—Rectangular search units shall exhibit beam uniformity
within 610 % of the mean amplitude of indication from the
flat-bottomed hole during a traverse along the longitudinal axis
of the search unit at the scanning sensitivity established with
reference blocks for the applicable class (exclusive of end lobe
responses).
7.1.3 Test System Performance—When used with appropri-
ate auxiliary equipment described in subsequent paragraphs,
the test system shall be capable of meeting or exceeding the
minimum performance characteristics listed in Table 2 as
determined by procedures outlined in Practice E 317. If instru-
ment A-scan display dimensions exceed the 2.5-in. (63.5-mm)
vertical limit and the 3.5-in. (88.9-mm) horizontal limit, the
instrument shall be considered usable throughout the entire
A-scan screen height or width found to be linear with the
procedures prescribed in Practice E 317. All other minimum
characteristics listed in Table 2 remain applicable.
7.2 Auxiliary Equipment—In addition to the ultrasonic test
system previously described, the following equipment is nec-
essary:
7.2.1 Tank—For tests by the immersion method, any con-
tainer is satisfactory that will facilitate the accurate, stable
positioning of both the search unit and the product to be
inspected.
7.2.2 Scanning Apparatus—The search unit shall be sup-
ported by any one of the following devices:
7.2.2.1 Manipulator and Bridge—When a manipulator is
used in tests by the immersion method, the manipulator shall
adequately support a search tube containing a search unit and

3
 B 594
TABLE 2 Minimum Performance Characteristics Required for Ultrasonic Test Systems

NOTE 1—The minimum requirements shown in this table are applicable as indicated only for the selected frequencies used for the inspection. The test
system is required to meet the limits only for the test frequencies actually used.
Test Frequency, MHz
Performance Characteristics
2.25 5.0 10.0 15.0
Vertical limit, in. (mm), min 2.5 (63.5) 2.5 (63.5) 2.5 (63.5) 2.5 (63.5)
Upper linearity limit, minA 95 95 95 95
Lower linearity limit, maxA 10 10 10 10
Ultrasonic sensitivity, minA,B 50 100 80 50
Signal-to-noise ratio, minB,C 65:1 100:1 100:1 100:1
Entry surface resolution, in. (mm) of aluminum, max 0.7 (18) 0.5 (13) 0.3 (8) 0.2 (5)
Back surface resolution, in. (mm) of aluminum, max 0.3 (8) 0.2 (5) 0.1 (3) 0.1 (3)
Horizontal limit, in. (mm), min 3.5 (89) 3.5 (89) 3.5 (89) 3.5 (89)
Horizontal linearity, minD 85 85 85 85
A
% of vertical limit.
B
ASTM Reference Block 1-0300.
C
Applies to the electrical component.
D
% of horizontal limit.

shall provide fine adjustment of angle within 1° in two vertical same material as used in Practice E 127 blocks may be used.
planes that are perpendicular to each other. The bridge shall be 7.4.1 The distance-amplitude set shall consist of the appro-
of sufficient strength to provide rigid support for the manipu- priate number of groups, as defined by the applicable Class, of
lator and shall allow smooth, accurate positioning of the search Practice E 127 reference blocks (see Table 1). Discontinuity
unit within 60.05 in. (61.3 mm). During the inspection indications shall be compared with the response having the
procedure, the scanning apparatus shall permit measurement of same metal distance within 61⁄8in. (63.2 mm) for metal
both the scan distance and the index distance within 60.1 in. distances from 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) through 1.0 in. (25.4 mm),
(62.5 mm). within 61⁄4 in. for metal distances from over 1.0 in. through 3.0
7.2.2.2 Special Fixtures—Special search unit-supporting in. (76.2 mm), and within 61⁄2 in. (612.7 mm) for metal
fixtures such as bubblers and wheel search units may be used distances over 3.0 in. The above requirements can be met
provided they meet the requirements prescribed for a manipu- optionally with blocks having the hole sizes specified in Table
lator and bridge and provided the test results obtained with 1 and either of the following sets of metal distances:
special fixtures are equivalent to those obtained by the immer- in. (mm) in. (mm)
sion method.
7.2.2.3 Contact Scanning Unit—During tests by the contact 0.25 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4)
0.50 (12.7) 0.37 (9.4)
method, the search unit usually is supported and positioned 0.75 (19.0) 0.62 (15.7)
manually on the entry surface of the inspected product. 1.00 (25.4) 0.87 (22.1)
However, special fixtures for contact scanning may be em- 1.50 (38.1) 1.25 (31.8)
2.00 (50.8) 1.75 (44.4)
ployed provided their use ensures conformance to the require- 2.50 (63.5) 2.25 (57.2)
ments in this practice. 3.00 (76.2) 2.75 (69.8)
7.2.2.4 Manual Immersion Scanning—When part size or 4.00 (101.6) 3.25 (82.6)
5.00 (127.0) 4.25 (108.0)
geometry, or both, prevent the use of manipulating equipment, 6.00 (152.4) 5.25 (133.4)
transducer stand-off attachments which provide for the control
of water travel distance and sound beam angle shall be used. 7.4.2 Special Reference Standards—When required by the
Provisions shall be made to ascertain that wear of stand-off contract or purchase order instead of appropriate correction
attachments do not exceed limits which will degrade the test. factors, special reference blocks containing curved entry sur-
7.3 Couplant—Clean water at room temperature (see 9.3), faces shall be employed for tests of cylindrical or irregularly
free of visible air bubbles that could interfere with the test, is shaped products, when specified in the scan plan.
the recommended couplant for tests by the immersion method. 7.4.3 Ultrasonic Transmission Characteristics—The trans-
Inhibitors or wetting agents, or both, may be used. For tests by mission characteristics exhibited by the required ultrasonic
the contact method, the recommended couplant is clean, standard reference blocks shall be within 640 % of the
light-grade oil. transmission characteristics of the inspected product as deter-
mined with the test frequency and equipment to be used for the
NOTE 6—Other coupling liquids may be employed provided their use
does not adversely affect either the test results or the product.
inspection (Note 8). Differences in transmission characteristics
are determined by comparing the amplitude of a selected back
7.4 Reference Standards—The ultrasonic reference stan- reflection obtained from the inspected product with the ampli-
dards required for the inspection of aluminum-alloy products tude of the equivalent back reflection from a selected reference
shall be a distance-amplitude set of aluminum-alloy ultrasonic block at a constant test sensitivity level. The total length of the
standard reference blocks fabricated and checked in accor- reference block used for comparison shall be equal to the
dance with Practice E 127. thickness of the inspected product within 60.50 in. (612.7
NOTE 7—When side-wall reflections caused by sound-beam divergence mm). The back reflection from the block shall be obtained at a
prevents the use of Practice E 127 reference blocks, special blocks of the location midway between the center and the outside edge of the

4
 B 594
block entry surface to avoid an indication from the flat-bottom
hole.
NOTE 8—If the transmission characteristics of the reference blocks
exceed the specified 640 % limits, correction for significant differences in
the ultrasonic response may be required when adjusting test sensitivity for
initial scanning and for discontinuity response evaluation. Techniques for
ultrasonic response correction shall be subject to negotiation at the time of
quotation or acceptance of the purchase order or contract.
7.5 Attenuator Decade Switch Check—The ultrasonic in-
FIG. 1 A-scan Displays Corresponding to Decade Switch
struments shall meet the requirements of Tables 2 and 3, when Multiplier Check
evaluated in accordance with Practice E 317.
8. Personnel Requirements
8.1 The testing operator performing the ultrasonic examina-
tion prescribed in this practice shall be qualified and certified at
least to Level I—Ultrasonic Testing in accordance with at least
one of the following: NAS-410; or a practice meeting the
guidelines of ASNT Recommended Practice SNT-TC-1A; or
applicable customer requirements.
8.2 The required documentation supporting qualification
and certification of ultrasonic testing operators shall be estab-
lished by the certifying agency and shall be available upon
request by the purchaser at the location where the testing is
being performed.
9. Condition of the Inspected Product
9.1 The entry and back surfaces of the inspected product
shall be sufficiently clean, smooth, and flat to maintain a first
back reflection amplitude greater than 40 % of the vertical limit
while scanning an area in the product that does not contain
significant isolated ultrasonic discontinuities.
NOTE 9—At nominal test sensitivities, the amplitude of the first back
reflection usually exceeds the vertical limit. Therefore, tests to evaluate
the effect of surface conditions should be performed at reduced gain
settings to obtain an unsaturated first back reflection. Preferably, the
instrument should be equipped with an independent control of the back
reflection amplitude.
9.2 The roughness of the entry surface of the inspected part
shall not exceed 250 µin., arithmetic average, as measured by
a profilometer.
9.3 The temperature of the inspected part shall be 72 6
FIG. 2 dB Attenuator Check Data Sheet
30°F (22 6 15°C) during the test.
10. Procedure method or the immersion method. However, the immersion
10.1 Preferred Method—The ultrasonic tests specified in method is preferred. For tests by the immersion method, the
this practice may be performed by either the direct contact recommended water distance should be between 2.5 and 3.5 in.
(63.5 and 88.9 mm). Other water distances may be used;
TABLE 3 Allowable Response Height as a Function of the however, the selected water distance shall be such that the
Attenuator/Decade Switch Position second front reflection from the inspected part does not appear
Decade or Attenuator Switch Positions between the first front and back reflection. The water distance
0.1X 1X 10X shall be constant and not vary more than 0.25 in. (6.4 mm)
10 dB 30 dB 50 dB from the selected water distance for sensitivity standardization,
Allowable range for 10→90–100 or saturated initial scanning, and discontinuity evaluation.
A-scan response 10.2 Test Frequency—Of the four frequencies shown in
10→90–100 or saturated
height, percent
6–13←95 Table 2, select that test frequency which will ensure the most
6–13←95
effective detection and evaluation of discontinuities in the
→ inspected product. Other test frequencies between 2.0 MHz and
←
Switch direction 15 MHz may be used subject to negotiation and agreement
between purchaser and seller.

5
 B 594
TABLE 4 Surface Resolution Requirements
Material thickness (T), Resolution Requirements, in. (mm)
in. (mm) Forgings Other Product Forms
Up thru 1.249 0.125 (3.18) 0.125 (3.18)
(31.72)
1.250 thru 2.499 0.188 (4.78) T/10
(31.75 thru 63.47)
2.500 and over T/10, or 0.500 (12.70), whichever is less
(63.50 and over)
10.3 Scan Sensitivity Standardization:
10.3.1 To standardize the scanning sensitivity, select the
reference block containing the appropriate hole for the appli-
cable class (see Table 1) with a metal distance nominally equal
to the maximum thickness of the inspected product (Note 10).
Center the longitudinal axis over the reference block hole in
order to avoid the end lobe responses. Adjust the instrument
gain control to obtain a maximized response from the hole
equal to 80 % of the A-scan vertical limit. Adequate scan
sensitivity shall be verified over the full thickness range of the
product, from near surface resolution limit to maximum
thickness. The response shall be at least equal to the required
setup value, as determined from blocks, conforming to 7.4.1,
with the appropriate hole size for the class of inspection. The
reference blocks used for this verification shall be selected by
one of the following procedures:
(a) Determine the three blocks having metal path lengths
closest to: (1) the near surface resolution limit; (2) half of the
inspected part thickness; and (3) the inspected part thickness;
or
(b) Determine the one block which is known (through
routine Distance Amplitude checks on the particular instru-
ment, cable, and search unit in use) to be the lowest responding
block in the range, as determined from the near surface limit to
the maximum thickness of the inspected part.
In all cases, manipulate the search unit to obtain a maximum
response from the reference holes. Standardization of systems
with respect to sensitivity shall be performed prior to and
immediately after each inspection and after any changes in
instrument settings, modules, search unit, or cable, and at 2-h
intervals during continuous operation. If the sensitivity has
increased, only the reportable indications found since the last
calibration check need to be reexamined. If the sensitivity has
decreased more than 10 % since the last calibration check, the
test items examined during the interim shall be reexamined at
the correct sensitivity.
NOTE 10—A scan sensitivity level greater than that established by 10.3
may be employed provided excessive ultrasonic noise levels do not
interfere with the detection reliability of the test and provided attainable
entry surface resolution is not adversely affected.
10.4 Scanning—With no further adjustment of the instru-
ment gain controls, locate the search unit over one corner of the
inspected part and proceed to scan the entire selected surface of
the inspected part at a constant scanning rate. Maintain
alignment between the ultrasonic beam and the entry surface at
90 6 2° during the entire scan. In addition any misalignment
which would cause a decrease in the first back reflection to
50 % of the vertical limit or less shall require realignment of
6
the search unit. The inspection shall consist of a complete scan
of the product from one selected side (Note 11). When
inspecting die forgings, perform the initial scan with the
ultrasonic beam oriented perpendicular to the parting plane,
wherever possible. During scans of products with irregularly
contoured entry surfaces, adjust the position of the search unit
as required to maintain perpendicular alignment within 6 3°
between the ultrasonic beam and the entry surface.
10.4.1 Scan Rate—When the screen pattern on the A-scan
indicator is monitored visually by the test operator during the
inspection, without the aid of auxiliary alarms, the rate of scan
shall not be greater than 10 in./s (254 mm/s). Scanning rates
greater than 10 in./s (254 mm/s) may be employed if an
auxiliary monitoring apparatus is used, provided a capability to
maintain adequate detection reliability is demonstrated.
10.4.2 Scan Index Distance—The scan index distance for
the inspection prescribed in this method shall not exceed the
effective beam width determined previously at the test sensi-
tivity level used for the initial scan. To ensure total coverage
and maximum detection reliability, a scan index overlap
distance of approximately 10 % of the effective beam width is
recommended.
10.4.3 During the scan at the standardized scanning sensi-
tivity, note the occurrence of any one of three significant
conditions:
10.4.3.1 Isolated discontinuities exhibiting amplitudes
greater than 40 % of the vertical limit,
10.4.3.2 An increase in ultrasonic noise level, or multiple
indications, of at least twice the normal level observed during
the scan, or
10.4.3.3 A reduction in amplitudes of back reflections to
less than 50 % of the vertical limit. To ensure that the loss of
back reflection is not caused by surface interference, check the
conditions of both the entry and back surfaces of the inspected
product.
10.4.4 For subsequent estimation of discontinuity size and
evaluation, record the location of the isolated discontinuities
and areas exhibiting increased ultrasonic noise or substantial
reduction in back reflections on the entry surface of the
inspected part.
NOTE 11—Additional scans on opposite or adjacent sides shall be
subject to negotiation and agreement between purchaser and seller.
10.5 Evaluation of Discontinuity Response—Upon comple-
tion of the initial scan, reduce the instrument gain control
setting to the sensitivity level established previously for
determining the distance-amplitude characteristics of the ref-
erence blocks containing the hole sizes used to define the
applicable acceptance limits. Relocate the search unit over a
discontinuity detected previously and determine its depth
location beneath the entry surface using the horizontal sweep
calibration established for the distance-amplitude curves.
NOTE 12—In a number of instances, it is desirable to stop the initial
scan and to evaluate the discontinuity response immediately upon detec-
tion. This alternative procedure is satisfactory provided the procedures
outlined in 10.5 are followed.
10.5.1 Angulate and manipulate the search unit to obtain a
 B 594
maximum amplitude of indication from the detected disconti-
nuity and compare this maximum amplitude with the estab-
lished distance-amplitude curve defining the applicable accep-
tance limits. Record the results of the comparison (Note 13).
10.5.2 Alternative Procedure—If a pre-established distance-
amplitude curve is not used to evaluate discontinuity response,
adjust the instrument gain control setting to obtain an unsatur-
ated indication (approximately 50 % of the vertical limit) from
the detected discontinuity. Angulate and manipulate the search
unit for maximum response, and determine the depth location
of the discontinuity beneath the entry surface using a distance-
calibrated horizontal sweep. Select an appropriate reference
block used to define the applicable acceptance limits with a
flat-bottom hole located at a metal distance nominally equal to
the depth location of the detected discontinuity within:
60.12 in. (63.0 mm) for depths from 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) to 1.00 in. (25.4 mm)
60.25 in. (66.4 mm) for depths from 1.00 in. (25.4 mm) to 3.00 in. (76.2 mm)
60.50 in. (612.7 mm) for depths from 3.00 in. (76.2 mm) to 6.00 in. (152.4
mm)
Angulate and manipulate the search unit to obtain a maxi-
mum response from the selected reference block and compare
this response with the maximum response from the detected
discontinuity. Record the results of the comparison (Note 13).
10.5.3 Repeat either one of the two procedures to evaluate
the indications of each discontinuity detected during the initial
scan.
10.5.4 Curved-Entry Surfaces—When isolated discontinui-
ties are detected beneath curved-entry surfaces on cylindrical
or irregularly shaped products, correction is recommended for
the effect of the curved surface upon the estimated size of
discontinuity. The correction techniques shall include either the
use of established correction factors that account for known
losses due to specified radii of curvature or the use of special
ultrasonic standard reference blocks containing specified radii
of curvature with applicable sizes of flat-bottom holes used to
define acceptance limits. The selected method for compensat-
ing for the effect of entry-surface curvature shall be subject to
negotiation and agreement between the purchaser and the
seller.
NOTE 13—If the ultrasonic transmission characteristics of the reference
blocks used for this comparison exceed the 640 % limits established in
7.4.3, corrections for response differences in accordance with Note 6
should be included when indications from discontinuities are evaluated.
10.5.5 Multiple Discontinuities—Determine the distance
apart of multiple discontinuities by positioning the transducer
over the center of each discontinuity where the signal is a
maximum. Compare the distance between the centers of any
two discontinuities with the minimum allowed in the appli-
cable class described in Section 11.
10.6 Estimation of Discontinuity Length—When a discon-
tinuity is detected at the established scanning sensitivity during
the initial scan and appears to exhibit length, stop the scan,
angulate, and manipulate the search unit to obtain an amplitude
of indication equal to 50 % of the vertical limit from one end
of the discontinuity. Move the search unit over the length of the
discontinuity and determine the distance traversed by the
search unit while maintaining an amplitude of indication equal
to or greater than 50 % of the vertical limit. Subtract the
7
effective beam width of the search unit in the traversing
direction from the total distance traversed by the search unit to
establish the estimated length of the discontinuity. Record the
apparent length of the discontinuity.
10.7 Determination of Loss of Back Reflection—Stop the
scan whenever the ultrasonic noise level increases to twice the
normal level in an inspected part with parallel surfaces.
Determine the amount of back reflection loss attributable to the
increased ultrasonic noise as follows:
10.7.1 Manipulate the search unit over an area in the
inspected part exhibiting a normal ultrasonic noise level to
obtain either a maximum number or amplitudes of back
reflections. Adjust the instrument gain control to a sensitivity
where the amplitude of first back reflection from the normal
area is approximately 80 % of the vertical limit.
10.7.2 Relocate the search unit over the area in the part
exhibiting increased ultrasonic noise and manipulate the search
unit to obtain a maximum amplitude of first back reflection.
Check the condition of both entry and back surfaces to ensure
that surface irregularities are not contributing to the loss.
10.7.3 Compare the maximum amplitude of back reflection
obtained from the area exhibiting increased ultrasonic noise to
the amplitude of back reflection obtained from the area
exhibiting normal noise and record the ratio of the former
amplitude in percent of the amplitude of the reference back
reflection from the normal area in the inspected product.
NOTE 14—Other techniques for determining loss of back reflection may
be used providing the resulting determinations are equivalent to those
obtained with the foregoing procedures.
11. Discontinuity Class Limits
11.1 The ultrasonic discontinuity limits are classified into
five categories (AAA; AA; A; B; and C), as shown in Table 1
and as described in the following:
11.2 Class AAA:
11.2.1 Indications from a single discontinuity shall not
exceed the response for a 1⁄64 in. (0.40 mm) flat-bottom hole, or
25 % of a 3⁄64 in. (1.19 mm) flat-bottom hole, at the estimated
discontinuity depth.
11.2.2 Multiple indications in excess of the response from
10 % of a 3⁄64 in. (1.18 mm) flat-bottom hole, at the estimated
discontinuity depth, shall not have any two of these disconti-
nuities with indicated centers closer than 1.0 in. (25.4 mm).
11.2.3 Indications from a single discontinuity equal to or
greater than the response from 10 % of a 3⁄64 (1.18 mm)
flat-bottom hole, at the estimated discontinuity depth, shall not
be more than 0.12 in. (3.0 mm) in length.
11.2.4 Multiple discontinuities shall not be of such size or
frequency as to reduce the back reflection to 50 % or less of the
back reflection of normal material of the same geometry, when
associated with the doubling of the normal noise level, with the
ultrasonic beam perpendicular to the front and back surfaces, to
ensure that the loss of back reflection is not caused by surface
roughness or part geometry variation.
11.3 Class AA:
11.3.1 Indications from a single discontinuity shall not
exceed the response for a 3⁄64 in. (1.19 mm) flat-bottom hole at
the estimated discontinuity depth.
11.3.2 Multiple indications in excess of the response from a
 B 594
Space for producer’s name or trademark.

Space for test operator’s identification number or producer’s internal code for control pur-
poses.

Space for producer’s plant identification code letter or number.

Identification of applicable discontinuity class (A, B, C, or Z for zoned parts containing

more than one discontinuity class).

Number of this standard.

FIG. 3 Recommended Identification Stamp for Acceptable Products

⁄ in. (0.79 mm) flat-bottom hole at the estimated discontinu-

2 64
ity depth shall not have their indicated centers closer than 1.0
in. (25.4 mm).
11.3.3 Indications from a single discontinuity equal to or
greater than the response from a 2⁄64in. (0.79 mm) flat-bottom
hole at the estimated discontinuity depth shall not be more than
0.5 in. (12.7 mm) in length.
11.3.4 Multiple discontinuities shall not be of such size or
frequency as to reduce the first back reflection to 50 % or less
of the first back reflection from normal material of the same
geometry, with the crystal parallel to the front and back
surfaces to ensure that the loss of back reflection is not caused
by surface roughness or part geometry variation.
11.4 Class A:
11.4.1 Indications from a single discontinuity shall not
exceed the response from a 5⁄64in. (1.98 mm) flat-bottom hole
at the estimated discontinuity depth.
11.4.2 Multiple indications in excess of the response from a
3⁄64 in. (1.19 mm) flat-bottom hole at the estimated discontinu-
frequency as to reduce the first back reflection to 50 % or less
of the first back reflection from normal material of the same
geometry, with the crystal parallel to the front and back
surfaces to ensure the loss of back reflection is not caused by
surface roughness or part geometry variations.
11.6 Class C:
11.6.1 This class of discontinuity limits may apply to
non-critical areas and to some areas specified in zoned engi-
neering drawings.
11.6.2 Indications from a single isolated discontinuity shall
not exceed the response from a 8⁄64in. (3.18 mm) flat-bottom
hole at the estimated discontinuity depth.
11.7 Permissible Discontinuities—Evaluated discontinuity
indications greater than those included in the four specified
classes shall be permitted in the inspected product if it is
established that they will be removed by machining or that they
are located in non-critical areas not designated as Class C.

ity depth shall not have their indicated centers closer than 1.0
in. (25.4 mm).
11.4.3 Indications from a single discontinuity equal to or
greater than the response for a 3⁄64in. (1.19 mm) flat-bottom
hole at the estimated discontinuity depth shall not be more than
1.0 in. (25.4 mm) in length.
11.4.4 Multiple discontinuities shall not be of such size or
frequency as to reduce the first back reflection to 50 % or less
of the first back reflection from normal material of the same
geometry, with the crystal parallel to the front and back
surfaces to ensure the loss of back reflection is not caused by
surface roughness or part geometry variation.
11.5 Class B:
11.5.1 Indications from a single discontinuity shall not
exceed the response from a 8⁄64in. (3.18 mm) flat-bottom hole
at the estimated discontinuity depth.
11.5.2 Multiple indications in excess of the response from a
5⁄64 in. (1.98 mm) flat-bottom hole at the estimated discontinu-
ity depth shall not have their indicated centers closer than 1.0
in. (25.4 mm).
11.5.3 Indications from a single discontinuity equal to or
greater than the response for a 5⁄64in. (1.98 mm) flat-bottom
hole at the estimated discontinuity depth shall not be more than
1.0 in. (25.4 mm) in length.
11.5.4 Multiple discontinuities shall not be of such size or
12. Report
12.1 When required by the purchaser, a report shall be
prepared and shall include the date of test and a list of
parameters including the type (model number) of instrument
and search unit, the test method, frequency, the couplant, and
any correction factors employed for the inspection.
12.2 Preparation of a drawing showing the location of all
significant discontinuities in the inspected product is recom-
mended when the ultimate rejection or acceptance of the
product is to be determined by negotiation between the
manufacturer and the purchaser.
12.3 The identification of an acceptable product is desirable
and is recommended. For this purpose, a suitable stamp should
be employed to indicate conformance to this ultrasonic prac-
tice. The recommended stamp for identifying acceptable prod-
ucts should contain a symbol “U” and identification of the
inspection facility and the inspector. An example is shown in
Fig. 3.
13. Precision and Bias
13.1 No information is presented about either the precision
or bias of ultrasonic inspection for presence of discontinuities
since such inspections are based on comparative classifications
against reference blocks.

8
 B 594
14. Keywords
14.1 aerospace; aluminum-alloy wrought products; ultra-
sonic inspection

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee B07 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (B 594 – 97)
that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) In 1.4, added current ASTM wording for inch-pounds being
standard and SI units noted for information only.
(2) In 2.2, added reference to Terminology B 881.
(3) In Section 2, deleted reference to MIL-STD-410 (a now
cancelled document).
(4) In 2.4, added reference to NAS-410 (superseding document
to MIL-STD-410).
(5) In Section 3, added reference to Terminology B 881 and
deleted separate listing of definitions for product forms.
(6) In 7.2.2, relocated scan apparatus measurement tolerance to
7.2.2.1.
(7) In 7.2.2.1, relocated requirement for scanning apparatus
measurement tolerance for index distance and added applica-
bility to scan distance.
(8) In 7.2.2.4, added paragraph to recognize hand scanning
when part size or geometry, or both, prevents use of manipu-
lating equipment (duplicate wording from MIL-STD-2154,
Para. 5.2.9).
(9) In 7.3, added reference to 9.3, to clarify temperature at time
of inspection.
(10) In 7.4.1, clarified wording.
(11) In 7.4.2, clarified requirement that special reference block
be specified in the scan plan.
(12) In 7.5, added requirements of Practice E 317, Table 2 and
Table 3, thereby enabling deletion of sub-paragraphs.
(13) In 8.1, deleted references to MIL-STD-410 (now can-
celled) and ASNT CP-189, which is redundant with addition of
NAS-410. Added reference to applicable customer require-
ments.
(14) In 10.1, clarified recommended water distance.
(15) In 10.3, clarified scan sensitivity verification and ex-
panded procedures for selection of reference blocks used in
verification.
(16) In 10.4.1, incorporated previous Note 12 into the text of
the requirements. Renumbered subsequent notes accordingly.
(17) In Section 11 and subsections, added Class AAA defini-
tions. For all Classes, replaced hole number references with
hole diameter definitions, for compatibility with revised Table
1.
(18) In 12.3, included description of recommended stamp with
“U” identification.
(19) In Section 13, added statement of non-applicability.
(20) In Table 1, deleted previous table and replaced with
expanded, more comprehensive definitions for Ultrasonic
Classes (including addition of Class AAA), based on MIL-
STD-2154, Table VI.
(21) In Table 2, revised the signal-to-noise ratio entries to show
as ratios (XX:1); Added reference to note (B), Reference Block
1-0300, and new note (C), to clarify that signal-to-noise ratio
test frequency is applicable to the electrical component. Re-
vised ultrasonic sensitivity and signal-to-noise ratio entries,
note (B) to appear in the first column adjacent to title entries,
for editorial consistency.
(22) In Table 4, added new table, based on MIL-STD-2154,
Table V and Figure 11.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

9
 Designation: B 596 – 89 (Reapproved 1999)
Standard Specification for
Gold-Copper Alloy Electrical Contact Material1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 596; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers a wrought alloy containing
gold and copper in the form of wire, rod, strip, and tubing for
electrical contacts.
1.2 The values stated in either inch-pound or SI units are to
be regarded separately as standard. The values in parentheses
are for information only.
1.3 The following precautionary statement pertains to the
test method portion only, Section 7, of this standard: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
tions prior to use.
1.4 It is the responsibility of the user to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
duced by the manufacturer.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 476 Specification for General Requirements for Wrought
Precious Metal Electrical Contact Materials2
E 8 Test Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3
E 384 Test Method for Microhardness of Materials3
3. Materials and Manufacture
3.1 Raw materials shall be of such quality and purity that
the finished product will have the properties and characteristics
prescribed in this specification.
3.2 The material shall be finished by such operations (cold
working, heat treating, annealing, turning, grinding, pickling)
as are required to produce the prescribed properties.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-2 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.09 on Electrical Contact Materials.
Current edition approved Sept. 29, 1989. Published November 1989. Originally
published as B 596 – 74. Last previous edition B 596 – 84.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.04.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
4. Chemical Composition
4.1 Materials produced under the specification shall meet
the requirements of chemical composition shown in Table 1.
5. Mechanical Properties
5.1 The contract or order may specify ultimate tensile
strength, elongation, microhardness (Knoop or Vickers), hard-
ness (Rockwell or Rockwell Superficial), or a combination of
these mechanical properties as temper criterion. If the contract
or order does not specify a temper criterion, then the criterion
for temper designation will be ultimate tensile strength.
5.2 The material shall conform to the mechanical properties
shown in Table 2, Table 3, Table 4, or Table 5.
5.3 The material shall be free of stress corrosion (as tested)
in accordance with 7.3.
6. General Requirements
6.1 Specification B 476 shall apply to all materials produced
to this specification.
7. Test Methods
7.1 Test methods shall be in accordance with Specification
B 476.
7.1.1 Knoop hardness tests shall be in accordance with Test
Method E 384. Material 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) in thickness (or
diameter) and larger shall be tested using a 100-g indenter load.
A minimum of five hardness indentations shall be made on
each specimen. The hardness value reported shall be the
average of the five indentations. Material less than 0.005 in. in
thickness (or diameter) shall be tested with a 50-g indenter
load.
7.1.2 All tension tests shall be in accordance with Method
E 8 and test specimens shall be full cross section, when
practical.
7.1.3 All tests shall be conducted at room temperature, 65 to
85°F (18 to 29°C).
7.2 Chemical analysis shall be performed by spectrochemi-
cal or wet analysis methods. Fire assay is an acceptable
alternative method for gold analysis.
7.3 The stress corrosion test shall be performed as follows:
 B 596 – 89 (1999)
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements TABLE 5 Mechanical Properties of Tubing (0.025 to 2.0 in. (0.64
Element Weight, %
to 51 mm) outside diameter)
Gold 89.0–91.0 Temper,
Property
Copper balance 9.0–11.0 Annealed Hard Drawn
Total, noble metal impurities 0.2 max
Total, all other impurities 0.2 max Tensile strength, ksi (MPa) 75 max 90 min
(520 max) (620 min)
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, % 15 min 3 max
Hardness, Knoop, HK 100 A 170 max 200 min
TABLE 2 Mechanical Properties of Wire (0.005 to 0.020 in. (0.13 A
See 7.1.1.
to 0.51 mm) diameter)
Temper,
Property
Annealed Hard Drawn
7.3.2 Remove the samples, thoroughly rinse, and dry. Dis-
card the solution; do not reuse.
Tensile strength, ksi (MPa) 75 max 90 min
(520 max) (620 min) 7.3.3 Examine for cracks visible to the naked eye.
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, % 15 min 3 max 7.3.4 If no cracks are visible, carry out the following
Hardness, Knoop, HK 100 A 170 max 200 min procedure:
A
See 7.1.1. 7.3.4.1 Compress the ring or tube samples with pliers over
a mandrel whose outside diameter is approximately one half
TABLE 3 Mechanical Properties of Wire (Over 0.020 to 0.060 in. the inside diameter of the ring.
(0.51 to 1.52 mm) diameter) 7.3.4.2 Bend wire, rod or tube or strip samples 180° around
Temper, a pin whose diameter is approximately five times the wire or
Property
Annealed Hard Drawn strip thickness.
Tensile strength, ksi (MPa) 65 max 80 min 7.3.4.3 The material shall be considered free of stress
(450 max) (550 min) corrosion if the samples do not exhibit spontaneous cracking,
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, % 25 min 5 max
Hardness, Knoop, HK 100 A 170 max 200 min and if the samples do not show a greater tendency to crack than
A
See 7.1.1.
samples that have not been immersed in the test solution but
have been compressed in the same manner.
TABLE 4 Mechanical Properties of Strip (0.003 to 0.015 in. (0.076
8. Inspection and Testing
to 0.38 mm) thick)
Temper,
8.1 Material furnished under this specification shall be
Property inspected and tested by the manufacturer as listed below:
Annealed Hard Rolled
8.1.1 Visual inspection at 103 magnification.
Tensile strength, ksi (MPa) 75 max 90 min
(520 max) (620 min) 8.1.2 Tension or hardness test, or both, for temper verifica-
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, % 15 min 3 max tion.
Hardness, Knoop, HK 100 A 170 max 200 min 8.1.3 Dimensional inspection.
A
See 7.1.1. 8.1.4 Chemical analysis when indicated by the purchase
order.
7.3.1 Immerse test samples in a test solution of the follow- 8.1.5 Stress corrosion test.
ing proportions for 30 min at room temperature:
7.3.1.1 Ferric Chloride (Fe Cl 3)—20 g, 9. Keywords
7.3.1.2 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl) (conc)—80 mL, and 9.1 coin gold; contacts; electrical contacts; gold alloy; low
7.3.1.3 Distilled Water—250 mL. contact resistance; low energy contact; non arcing contact

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. REFERENCE PROPERTIES FOR GOLD—COPPER ELECTRICAL CONTACT MATERIAL

X1.1 The following is a list of typical property values Annealed

which are useful for engineering calculations in electrical Resistivity
V·cmil/ft 76.4
contact design and application. µV·cm 12.7
Density, g/cm 3 17.32
Solidus temperature,° C 930

2
 B 596 – 89 (1999)
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 595 – 95 (Reapproved 2000)

Standard Specification for

Sintered Aluminum Structural Parts1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 595; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 4.1.2 Chemical composition (see 6.1),

1.1 This specification covers sintered aluminum structural
parts made primarily from aluminum powders to which con-
trolled amounts of master alloys or elemental copper, magne-
sium, and silicon have been added by blending.
1.2 This specification covers the following variables:
1.2.1 Composition—Depending upon levels of copper, mag-
nesium, and silicon content, two grades, and
1.2.2 Density—Type.
1.3 Parts ordered to this specification will be in one of the
following conditions:
1.3.1 As-sintered,
1.3.2 As-repressed for additional density, or
1.3.3 All other conditions plus heat treated.
1.4 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
B 243 Terminology of Powder Metallurgy2
B 328 Test Method for Density, Oil Content, and Intercon-
nected Porosity of Sintered Metal Structural Parts and
Oil-Impregnated Bearings 2
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials3
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Definitions of powder metallurgy terms
can be found in Terminology B 243. Additional descriptive
information is available in the Related Material Section of
Volume 02.05 of the Annual Book of ASTM Standards.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material to this specification shall include the
following information:
4.1.1 Dimensions (see 9.1),
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B09 on Metal
Powders and Metal Powder Products and is the direct responsibility of Subcom-
mittee B09.05 on Structural Parts.
Current edition approved October. 10, 1995. Published December 1995. Origi-
nally published as B 595 – 73. Discontinued June 1991 and reinstated as B 595 – 95.
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
4.1.3 Density (see 7.1),
4.1.4 State of heat treatment,
4.1.5 Mechanical property requirements (see 8.1), and
4.1.6 Certification (see 14.1).
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 Structural parts shall be made by molding and sintering
metal powders to produce finished parts conforming to the
requirements of this specification.
6. Chemical Composition
6.1 The material shall conform to the requirements of Table
1.
6.2 The chemical analysis shall be made in accordance with
the methods prescribed in the latest edition of the Annual Book
of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.05, or any other approved method
agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
7. Density
7.1 The parts shall conform to the density range prescribed
in Table 2.
7.2 The density shall be measured in accordance with Test
Method B 328.
7.3 If the density does not vary more than 0.1 g/cm3 from
one section of the structural part to any other section, the
overall density shall fall within the limits prescribed in Table 2.
7.4 If the density varies more than 0.1 g/cm3 from one
section of the structural part to any other section, the manu-
facturer and the purchaser shall agree upon a critical section of
the part where the stresses are the highest. The density of this
critical section rather than the average density shall fall within
the limits prescribed in Table 2.
8. Mechanical Properties
8.1 The manufacturer and the purchaser shall agree on
qualification tests for the determination of mechanical proper-
ties.
8.2 These tests shall be performed on production parts.
8.3 These tests shall be determined after consideration of
the function of the part.
8.4 The limits and sampling plan shall be agreed upon
between the manufacturer and purchaser.
8.5 All shipments of parts subsequent to the establishment

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 595
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements from each lot. A representative sample of chips may be
Composition, % obtained by dry milling, drilling or crushing at least two pieces
Element
AXX-6061A ACXX-2014A with clean dry tools without lubrication. In order to obtain
Copper 0.5 max 3.5–5.0 oil-free chips, the parts selected for test shall have the oil
Magnesium 0.4–1.2 0.2–0.8 extracted in accordance with Test Method B 328, if necessary.
Silicon 0.2–0.8 1.2 max
Aluminum, min 96.0 91.5
11.3 Mechanical Tests—The manufacturer and purchaser
Total of other elements, 1.5 1.5 shall agree on a representative number of specimens for
determined by difference, mechanical tests.
max
A
An “XX” denotes position of thermal condition designation.
12. Inspection
TABLE 2 Density 12.1 Unless otherwise specified, inspection of parts sup-
Type Dry Density, g/cm 3 plied on contract shall be made by the purchaser.
I 2.30 to 2.45
II 2.45 to 2.60 13. Rejection and Rehearing
III 2.60 min
13.1 Parts that fail to conform to the requirements of this
specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported to
of testing conditions shall conform to the limits agreed upon. the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with test results, the producer or supplier may
NOTE 1—The mechanical properties in tension and compression that make claim for rehearing.
may be expected from standard specimens molded to size are given in
Appendix X1 of this specification.
14. Certification
9. Dimensions and Tolerances 14.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
9.1 Permissible variations in dimensions shall be within the producer’s certification shall be furnished to the purchaser that
limits specified on the drawings describing the structural parts the parts were manufactured, sampled, tested, and inspected in
accompanying the order or shall be within the limits specified accordance with this specification and have been found to meet
in the order. the requirements. When specified in the purchase order or
contract, a report of the test results shall be furnished.
10. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
14.2 The purchase order shall specify whether or not the
10.1 Structural parts shall be uniform in composition. certification includes chemistry.
10.2 When parts are cut or fractured, the exposed surface 14.3 Upon request of the purchaser in the contract or order,
shall be of uniform appearance. the certification of an independent third party indicating
11. Sampling conformance to the requirements of this specification may be
considered.
11.1 Lot—Unless otherwise specified, a lot shall consist of
parts of the same form and dimensions made from powders of
the same composition molded and sintered under the same 15. Keywords
conditions and submitted for inspection at one time. 15.1 as-repressed; as-sintered; density; interconnected po-
11.2 Chemical Analysis—If required by purchase agree- rosity; oil-impregnated; powder metallurgy; sintered alumi-
ment, at least one sample for chemical analysis shall be taken num; structural parts; thermal condition

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AND HARDNESS DATA

X1.1 Data for the mechanical properties of sintered alumi-
num specimens are given in Table X1.1. The data do not
constitute a part of this specification. They merely indicate to
the purchaser the mechanical properties that may be expected
from special tension specimens conforming to the density and
chemical requirements specified. It should be understood that
the values represent specimens molded to size and not speci-
mens cut from commercial parts. See Fig. 20 of Test Methods
E 8.

2
 B 595
TABLE X1.1 Typical PropertiesA
Ultimate Tensile Tensile Yield Elongation Apparent
Material Designation Strength Strength (0.2 % offset)
Type in 25 mm or 1 Rockwell
CodeB
MPa psi MPa psi in.,% Hardness

AT1-6061 I 83 12 000 62 9 000 4.0 60–65 HRH

AT4-6061 I 97 14 000 79 11 500 3.5 65–70 HRH
AT6-6061 I 138 20 000 131 19 000 0.5 80–85 HRH
AT1-6061 II 128 18 500 69 10 000 6.0 80–85 HRH
AT4-6061 II 159 23 000 103 15 000 5.0 50–55 HRE
AT6-6061 II 207 30 000 193 28 000 2.0 65–70 HRE
ACT1-2014 I 138 20 000 97 14 000 2.0 80–85 HRH
ACT4-2014 I 165 24 000 145 21 000 2.0 55–60 HRE
ACT6-2014 I 207 30 000 172 25 000 0.5 65–70 HRE
ACT1-2014 II 152 22 000 117 17 000 3.0 85–90 HRH
ACT4-2014 II 179 26 000 152 22 000 2.5 55–60 HRE
ACT6-2014 II 241 35 000 228 33 000 1.0 70–75 HRE
ACT1-2014 III 172 25 000 152 22 000 3.0 55–60 HRE
ACT4-2014 III 221 32 000 179 26 000 2.5 70–75 HRE
ACT6-2014 III 290 42 000 279 40 000 2.0 80–85 HRE
A
Typical sintering atmosphere for the above grades may be nitrogen, dissociated ammonia, or vacuum.
B
Description of Thermal Conditions:
T1 as-sintered.
T4 solution heat treated at (505 to 520°C) 940 to 970°F, cold water quenched and aged minimum of 4 days at room temperature.
T6 solution heat treated at (505 to 520°C) 940 to 970°F, cold water quenched and aged 18 h at (160 to 175°C) 320 to 350°F.

X1.2 Hardness values are given as apparent values, as

described in General Description of Production, Properties, and
Uses of Metal Powder Sintered Bearings, and Sintered Metal
Powder Structural Parts (see gray pages).

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

3
 Designation: B 598 – 98 (Reapproved 2004)

Standard Practice for

Determining Offset Yield Strength in Tension for Copper
Alloys1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 598; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense.

1. Scope*
1.1 This practice establishes the requirements for determin-
ing offset yield strength (0.01 %, 0.02 %, and 0.05 % offset) at
room temperature. It is intended for copper alloys in tempers
commonly used for spring applications, and materials thicker
than 0.010 in. (0.25 mm).
1.1.1 The primary application of this practice is intended for
flat strip materials that are used for springs; however, this
practice can be used for other product forms, such as wire, rod,
and bar.
1.2 The values stated in inch pound units are the standard.
The SI values given in parentheses are for information only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 The following documents in effect on the date that the
material is tested form a part of this practice, to the extent
referenced herein:
2.2 ASTM Standards: 2
E 4 Practices for Force Verification of Testing Machines
E 6 Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical Test-
ing
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
E 74 Practice for Calibration of Force Measuring Instru-
ments for Verifying the Load Indication of Testing Ma-
chines
E 83 Practice for Verification and Classification of Exten-
someters
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B05 on Copper and
Copper Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B05.06 on Methods
of Test.
Current edition approved May 1, 2004. Published May 2004. Originally
approved in 1974. Last previous edition approved in 1998 as B 598 – 98.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3. Terminology
3.1 The definitions of terms relating to mechanical testing in
Terminology E 6 apply.
4. Summary of Practice
4.1 To determine the offset yield strength, it is necessary to
acquire data (autographic or numerical) from which a stress-
strain diagram may be drawn. The stress at which a specified
deviation of strain from the linear portion of the stress-strain
curve occurs is the yield strength at that particular offset.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 This practice may be used for approximating a limiting
design stress at room temperature and, in some cases, for
approximating the range of elastic behavior. Elastic limit, or
the greatest stress that a material is capable of sustaining
without any permanent strain remaining upon complete release
of the stress, is a more technically accurate design parameter;
however, the elastic limit is extremely difficult to measure in
routine testing. Caution should be used in applying such values
to predict the behavior of flat or wire springs in bending,
torsion or other stress modes, or at temperatures other than that
at which the determination is made.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Standard testing machine of adequate capacity, con-
forming to the requirements of Practices E 4 and E 74.
6.2 Class B-1 or more accurate Extensometers, conforming
to the requirements of Practice E 83 and suitable to the tension
test specimen required for the application.
6.3 Extensometer Calibrator, or similar device accurate to
0.00002 in. (0.0005 mm).
7. Test Specimen
7.1 Tension test specimens shall be selected from Test
Methods E 8 as appropriate for the product form.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 598 – 98 (2004)
8. Procedure
8.1 Follow the accepted practices for preparation to perform
a tension test in accordance with Test Methods E 8. Special
care in the preparation of thin-gage samples, including contour
and edge preparation should be used.
8.2 Select the load range so that the yield strength falls
within the upper half of the chart load range used. Choose a
strain magnification so that the 0.0001, 0.0002 or 0.0005-in./in.
(or mm/mm) increment of strain can be readily determined
from the chart.
8.3 Apply a preload of nominally 10 % of the known or
anticipated offset yield strength to the test specimen to align the
grips and to remove all slack and curvature from the specimen.
8.4 Seat the extensometer firmly on the test specimen while
maintaining the preload. Apply the load uniformly until the
desired testing speed is attained. The rate of stress application
shall not exceed 100 000 psi/min (12 MPa/s). Take care that the
recording equipment is functioning correctly and indicating the
load properly.
8.5 Remove the extensometer when the curve indicates
adequate departure from linear behavior to reveal the desired
offset, without stopping the test.
8.6 Determine the offset yield strength from the stress-strain
diagram as described in Test Methods E 8.
cross section area is the yield strength and is reported as yield
strength (offset value).
10. Precision and Bias
10.1 Precision—The following parameters are reported to
impact upon the precision of this practice:
10.1.1 Characteristics of the specimen such as orientation of
grains relative to the axial stress, grain size, residual stress,
previous strain history, dimensions, and eccentricity.
10.1.2 Testing conditions such as alignment of the speci-
men, speed of testing, temperature, temperature variations,
conditions of test equipment, ratio of error in load to the range
in load values, and ratio of error in extension measurement to
the range in extension values.
10.1.3 Interpretation of data such as whether graphical or
digital data were taken, calibration of recording or data-logging
device, number of data pairs used to obtain slope of stress-
strain curve.
10.2 Bias—A statement of bias of this practice requires
reference standard values for one or more materials based on
many measurements or round-robin test data. Such standard
reference values or test data are presently not available.

9. Calculation and Report 11. Keywords

9.1 Determine the load where the offset line intersects the 11.1 offset yield; tensile test; yield strength
stress-strain curve. This load in pounds divided by the original

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

This section identifies the principle changes to this practice that have been incorporated since the 1992 issue
as follows.

(1) The practice has been extensively, editorially revised. No (2) Section 1.1.1 was added for amplification.
technical changes have been made. (3) Sections 1.2, 4, 5, and 7 were reworded for clarification.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

2
 Designation: B 599 – 92 (Reapproved 2003)e1
Standard Specification for
Nickel-Iron-Chromium-Molybdenum-Columbium Stabilized
Alloy (UNS N08700) Plate, Sheet, and Strip1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 599; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
e1 NOTE—Keywords were added editorially in November 2003.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers nickel-iron-
chromiummolydenum-columbium stabilized alloy (UNS
N08700)* plate, sheet, and strip in the solution-annealed
condition.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to become familiar
with all hazards including those identified in the appropriate
Material Safety Data Sheet for this product/material as pro-
vided by the manufacturer, to establish appropriate safety and
health practices, and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2
A 262 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranu-
lar Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steels
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
E 10 Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materi-
als
E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B02 on
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee
B02.07 on Refined Nickel and Cobalt and Their Alloys.
Current edition approved November 1, 2003. Published November 2003.
Originally approved in 1980. Last previous edition approved in 1992 as
B 599 – 92 (1997).
* New designation established in accordance with ASTM E 527 and SAE J1086,
Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
1
E 55 Practice for Sampling Wrought Nonferrous Metals and
Alloys for Determination of Chemical Composition
E 140 Hardness Conversion Tables for Metals (Relationship
Between Brinell Hardness, Vickers Hardness, Rockwell
Hardness, Rockwell Superficial Hardness, and Knoop
Hardness)
E 350 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Carbon
Steel, Low-Alloy Steel, Silicon Electrical Steel, Ingot Iron,
and Wrought Iron
E 353 Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Stainless,
Heat-Resisting, Maraging, and Other Similar Chromium-
Nickel-Iron Alloys
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 The terms plate, sheet, and strip as used in this
specification are described as follows:
3.1.1.1 plate—material 0.1875 in. (4.76 mm) and over in
thickness and over 10 in. (254 mm) in width.
3.1.1.2 sheet—material under 0.1875 in. (4.76 mm) in
thickness and over 24 in. (610 mm) in width.
3.1.1.3 strip—material under 0.1875 in. (4.76 mm) in thick-
ness and under 24 in. (610 mm) in width.
4. Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification should
include the following information:
4.1.1 Quantity (weight or number of pieces).
4.1.2 Name of material or UNS N08700.
4.1.3 Form (plate, sheet, or strip).
4.1.4 Dimensions.
4.1.5 Type of edge required (for strip only, see 9.4).
4.1.6 Finish (Section 10)—For sheet ordered with No. 4
finish, specify whether one or both sides are to be polished.
4.1.7 ASTM designation and year of issue.
4.1.8 Corrosion Test— State if intergranular corrosion test
is required (Section 8).
4.1.9 Marking—State if metal die identification is required
on plate 1⁄4 in. (6.35 mm) or thicker (Section 17).
 B 599 – 92 (2003)e1
4.1.10 Certification or Test Reports—State if certification or TABLE 2 Product (Check) Analysis
test reports are required (Section 16). Tolerances Over the Maximum
Element Limit or Under the Minimum
Limit, %
5. Materials and Manufacture
Nickel 0.20
5.1 Heat Treatment— The final heat treatment shall be a Chromium 0.20
solution anneal. Minor cold working such as flattening or Molybdenum 0.10
temper rolling may be performed after the final solution Columbium 0.05
Carbon 0.01
annealing treatment. Silicon 0.05
Manganese 0.04
NOTE 1—This recommended solution anneal consists of heating to a Phosphorus 0.005
minimum temperature of 2000°F (1090°C) and cooling rapidly to room Sulfur 0.005
temperature. Copper 0.03

6. Chemical Composition
6.1 The material sampled, in accordance with 11.2, shall 9.4.1 The various types of edges procurable shall be as
conform to the composition limits prescribed in Table 1. follows:
6.2 If a product analysis is subsequently made, the material 9.4.1.1 No. 1 Edge—Rolled edge, contour as specified.
shall conform to the composition limits with the product 9.4.1.2 No. 3 Edge—An edge produced by slitting.
analysis variation prescribed in Table 2. 9.4.1.3 No. 5 Edge—Approximately square edge produced
by rolling or filing, or both, after slitting.
7. Mechanical Requirements
10. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to the
10.1 The material shall be free of injurious imperfections
mechanical property prescribed in Table 3.
and shall correspond to the designated finish as described as
8. Intergranular Corrosion Test follows:
10.1.1 Sheet—The various types of finish procurable on
8.1 All material supplied to this specification shall be
sheet products shall be as follows:
capable of passing the intergranular corrosion test, but the test
10.1.1.1 No. 1 Finish— Hot rolled, annealed, and descaled;
need not be performed on any given lot unless it is specified on
produced by hot rolling to specified thicknesses followed by
the purchase order. If the test is specified, it shall be performed
annealing and descaling (see 10.2).
by the manufacturer on specimens taken in the as-shipped
10.1.1.2 No. 2D Finish— Dull, cold-rolled finish; produced
condition. Specimens shall be tested in the sensitized condition
by cold rolling to the specified thickness, annealing, and
(1 h at 1250°F (677°C)), and tested in accordance with Practice
descaling. The dull finish results from the descaling and
C of Practices A 262. The corrosion rate shall not exceed 2.5
pickling operations.
mils/month (165 mg/dm2·day).
10.1.1.3 No. 2B Finish— Bright, cold-rolled finish; pro-
9. Dimensions and Permissible Variations duced by giving a final light cold-rolled pass with polished
rolls, to a sheet that has been annealed and descaled.
9.1 Sheet—The material referred to as sheet shall conform 10.1.1.4 No. 4 Finish— General-purpose polished finish.
to the variations in dimensions prescribed in Tables 4-9, Following initial grinding with coarser abrasives, sheets are
inclusive. generally finished last with abrasives approximately 120 to 150
9.2 Cold-Rolled Strip—The material referred to as cold- mesh. Sheets can be produced with one or two sides polished.
rolled strip shall conform to the permissible variations in When polished on one side only, the other side may be rough
dimensions prescribed in Tables 10-13, inclusive. ground in order to obtain the necessary flatness.
9.3 Plate—The material referred to as plate shall conform to 10.1.1.5 Bright Annealed— Bright finish produced by cold
the permissible variations in dimensions prescribed in Tables rolling to thickness, then annealing in a protective atmosphere.
14-19, inclusive. 10.1.2 Strip—The type of finish procurable on cold-rolled
9.4 Edges for Cold-Rolled Strip: strip shall be as follows:
10.1.2.1 No. 1 Finish— Cold rolled to specified thickness,
TABLE 1 Chemical Requirements annealed, and pickled (see 10.2). Appearance of this finish is a
Element Composition, % dull gray.
Nickel 24.0–26.0
10.1.2.2 No. 2 Finish— Same as No. 1 finish, followed by
Iron remainderA a final light cold-rolled pass, generally on highly polished rolls.
Chromium 19.0–23.0 10.1.2.3 Bright Annealed— Bright finish produced by cold
Molybdenum 4.3–5.0
Columbium 8 3 carbon to 0.40
rolling to thickness, then annealing in a protective atmosphere.
Carbon, max 0.04 10.1.3 Plate—The types of finish procurable on plates shall
Silicon, max 1.00 be as follows:
Manganese, max 2.00
Phosphorus, max 0.040
10.1.3.1 Hot- or Cold-Rolled, Annealed—Scale not re-
Sulfur, max 0.030 moved (see 10.2).
Copper, max 0.50 10.1.3.2 Hot- or Cold-Rolled, Annealed, Descaled—Scale
A
Determined arithmetically by difference. removed by a blast cleaning or pickling operation (see 10.2).

2
 B 599 – 92 (2003)e1
TABLE 3 Mechanical Property Requirements
Tensile Strength, min, Yield Strength (0.2 % offset), Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, Rockwell Hardness (or
Form
ksi (MPa) min, ksi (MPa) or 4D, min, % equivalent)A
Sheet 80 (550) 35 (240) 30 75–90 HRB
Strip 80 (550) 35 (240) 30 75–90 HRB
Plate 80 (550) 35 (240) 30 75–90 HRB
A
Hardness values are shown for information only and shall not constitute a basis for acceptance or rejection as long as the other mechanical properties are met.

TABLE 4 Thickness Tolerances for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled TABLE 6 Width, Length, and Camber Tolerances for Hot-Rolled
Sheets and Cold-Rolled Sheets Not Resquared
Tolerance, over and Width Tolerances
Specified Thickness, in. (mm)
under, in. (mm) Tolerance for Specified Width,
in. (mm)
Over 0.145 to less than 0.1875 (3.68 to less than 4.76) 0.014 (0.36) Specified Thickness, in. (mm)
24 to 48 (610 to 48 (1219) and
Over 0.130 to 0.145 (3.30 to 3.68), incl 0.012 (0.30)
1219), excl Over
Over 0.114 to 0.130 (2.90 to 3.30), incl 0.010 (0.25)
Less than 3⁄16 (4.76) 1⁄16 (1.6) over, 1⁄8 in. (3.2)
Over 0.098 to 0.114 (2.49 to 2.90), incl 0.009 (0.23)
0 under over,
Over 0.083 to 0.098 (2.11 to 2.49), incl 0.008 (0.20)
0 under
Over 0.072 to 0.083 (1.83 to 2.11), incl 0.007 (0.18)
Length Tolerances
Over 0.058 to 0.072 (1.47 to 1.83), incl 0.006 (0.15)
Tolerance, in. (mm)
Over 0.040 to 0.058 (1.02 to 1.47), incl 0.005 (0.13) Specified Length, ft (mm)
Over Under
Over 0.026 to 0.040 (0.66 to 1.02), incl 0.004 (0.10)
Up to 10 (3050), incl 1⁄4 (6.4) 0 (0)
Over 0.016 to 0.026 (0.41 to 0.66), incl 0.003 (0.08)
Over 10 to 20 (3050 to 6100), incl 1⁄2 (12.7) 0 (0)
Over 0.007 to 0.016 (0.18 to 0.41), incl 0.002 (0.05)
Camber TolerancesA
Over 0.005 to 0.007 (0.13 to 0.18), incl 0.0015 (0.04)
Tolerance per Unit Length of any
0.005 (0.13) 0.001 (0.03)
Specified Width, in. (mm) 8 ft
(2440 mm), in. (mm)
24 to 36 (610 to 914), incl 1⁄8 (3.2)

TABLE 5 Width and Length Tolerances for Hot-Rolled and Cold- Over 36 (914) 3⁄32 (2.4)

Rolled Resquared Sheets (Stretcher Leveled Flatness) A

Camber is the greatest deviation of a side edge from a straight line, and
measurement is taken by placing an 8-ft (2440-mm) straightedge on the concave
Tolerance, in. (mm)
Specified Dimensions, in. (mm) side and measuring the greatest distance between the sheet edge and the
Over Under straightedge.
For thicknesses under 0.031 (0.79):
Widths up to 48 (1219), excl ⁄
1 16 (1.6) 0
Widths 48 (1219) and over 18⁄ (3.2) 0
Lengths up to 120 (3048), excl 1⁄16 (1.6) 0 11.2.2 Product analysis, if performed, shall be wholly the
Lengths 120 (3048) and over 1⁄8 (3.2) 0 responsibility of the purchaser.
For thicknesses 0.031 (0.79) and
over: 11.3 Sampling for Mechanical Tests:
All widths and lengths 14 ⁄ (6.4) 0 11.3.1 A sample of the material to provide test specimens
for mechanical tests shall be taken from such a location in each
lot as to be representative of that lot.
10.2 Spot grinding to remove surface imperfections is 11.3.2 When samples are to be taken after delivery, the
permitted for material produced in accordance with 10.1.1.1, purchaser of material ordered to cut lengths may request on the
10.1.2.1, 10.1.3.1, and 10.1.3.2, provided such grinding does purchase order additional material of adequate size to provide
not reduce the thickness or width at any point beyond the sample coupons for inspection purposes.
permissible variations in dimensions. 11.4 Sampling for Corrosion Tests—A sample for corrosion
testing shall be taken from a location chosen to be representa-
11. Sampling
tive of the lot.
11.1 Lots of Chemical Analysis, Mechanical Testing, and
Corrosion Testing: 12. Number of Tests and Retests
11.1.1 A lot for chemical analysis shall consist of one heat.
11.1.2 Plate—A lot of plate for testing and inspection 12.1 In the case of sheet or strip supplied in coil form, two
purposes shall consist of the products resulting from the rolling or more tension tests (one from each end of each coil), and one
of one heat of material in the same condition and specified or more hardness tests shall be made on specimens taken from
thickness, solution annealed by the same practice, but in no each end of the coil. When material is supplied in flat sheet, flat
case more than 25 000 lb (11 340 kg). strip, or plate, one tension and one or more hardness tests shall
11.1.3 Sheet and Strip— A lot of sheet or strip for testing be made on each 100 or less sheets, strips, or plates of the same
and inspection purposes shall consist of material from one heat lot. When specified, one corrosion test shall be conducted for
in the same form (sheet or strip), condition, finish, and each lot.
specified thickness, solution annealed by the same practice but 12.2 If any specimens selected to represent any lot fail to
in no case more than 25 000 lb (11 340 kg). meet any of the test requirements, the material represented by
11.2 Sampling for Chemical Analysis: such specimens may be retested. If there is valid reason to
11.2.1 A representative sample shall be taken from each lot believe the result is not representative, the material may be
during pouring or subsequent processing. re-reannealed and retested.

3
 B 599 – 92 (2003)e1
TABLE 7 Flatness Tolerances for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled Sheets
Sheets not Specified to Stretcher Leveled Standard of Flatness
Flatness Tolerance (max Deviation from a
Specified Thickness, in. (mm) Width, in. (mm)
Horizontal Flat Surface), in. (mm)
0.062 (1.57) and over to 60 (1524), incl ⁄ (12.7)
12

over 60 to 72 (1524 to ⁄ (19.1)

34

1829), incl
over 72 (1829) 1 (25.4)
Under 0.062 (1.57) to 36 (914), incl ⁄ (12.7)
12

over 36 to 60 (914 to ⁄ (19.1)

34

1524), incl
over 60 (1524) 1 (25.4)
Sheets Specified to Stretcher Level Standard of Flatness
Specified Thickness, in. (mm) Width, in. (mm) Length, in. (mm) Flatness Tolerance, in. (mm)
Under (4.76) to 48 (1219), incl to 96 (2438), incl ⁄
18 (3.2)
Under 3⁄16 (4.76) to 48 (1219), incl over 96 (2438) ⁄
14 (6.4)
Under 3⁄16 (4.76) over 48 (1219) to 96 (2438), incl ⁄
14 (6.4)
Under 3⁄16 (4.76) over 48 (1219) over 96 (2438) 1⁄4 (6.4)

TABLE 8 Diameter Tolerances for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled 14. Test Methods
Sheets, Sheared Circles
Tolerance Over Specified Diameter (No
14.1 Determine the chemical composition and properties of
Specified the material as enumerated in this specification, in case of
Tolerance Under), in. (mm)
Thickness, in.
30 to 48 (762 disagreement, in accordance with the following methods:
(mm) Under 30 (762) Over 48 (1219)
to 1219), incl
Over 0.097 1⁄8 (3.2) 3⁄16 (4.8) 1⁄4 (6.4) Test ASTM Designations
(2.46) Chemical analysis E 350, E 353A,B
Over 0.057 to ⁄
3 32 (2.4) ⁄
5 32 (4.0) ⁄
7 32 (5.6) Tension E8
0.097 (1.45 to Brinell hardness E 10
2.46), incl Rockwell hardness E 18
0.057 (1.45) and ⁄
1 16 (1.6) 18 ⁄ (3.2) ⁄
3 16 (4.8) Hardness conversion E 140
under Rounding procedure E 29
Method of sampling for product analysis E 55
Intergranular corrosion test A 262, Practice C
A
TABLE 9 Weight Tolerances for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled Iron shall be determined arithmetically by difference.
B
Sheets Test Method E 350 are to be used only for elements not covered by Test
Methods E 353.
It is not practicable to produce hot-rolled and cold-rolled sheets to exact
theoretical weight. Sheets of any one item of a specified thickness and size in 14.2 For purpose of determining compliance with the limits
any finish may be overweight to the following extent: in this specification, an observed value or a calculated value
(1) An item of five sheets or less, or an item estimated to weight 200 lb (90.7
kg) or less, may actually weigh as much as 10 % over the theoretical weight.
shall be rounded as indicated in accordance with the rounding
(2) An item of more than five sheets and estimated to weigh more than 200 method of Practice E 29.
lb (90.7 kg) may actually weigh as much as 71⁄2 % over the theoretical weight. Rounded Unit for Observed or
(3) The underweight variations for sheets are limited by the under thickness Requirements
Calculated Value
tolerances shown in Table 4. Chemical composition hardness and toler- Nearest unit in the last right-hand
For determining theoretical weight the factor, 42 lb/ft2·in. (0.0008 kg/cm2·mm) ance (when expressed in decimals) place of figures of the specified
thickness may be used. limit
Tensile strength and yield strength nearest 1000 psi (7 MPa)
Elongation nearest 1 %

13. Specimen Preparation 15. Rejection and Rehearing

13.1 Tension test specimens from material under 1⁄2 in. (12.7
mm) in thickness shall be of the full thickness of the material
and machined to the form and dimensions shown for the
sheet-type specimen in Test Methods E 8. Tension test speci-
mens from material 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) and over shall be of the
full thickness of the material, machined to the form and
dimensions shown for the plate-type specimen in Test Methods
E 8, or shall be the largest possible round specimen shown in
Test Methods E 8. Tension test specimens shall be taken from
material after final heat treatment and shall be selected in the
transverse direction unless prohibited by width.
13.2 Corrosion test specimens shall be prepared so that at
least one major surface represents the as-supplied surface, with
only light surface grinding permitted on this surface.
15.1 Material that fails to conform to the requirements of
this specification may be rejected. Rejection should be reported
to the producer or supplier promptly and in writing. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the producer or
supplier may make claim for a rehearing.
16. Certification
16.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
manufacturer’s certification shall be furnished to the purchaser
stating that material has been manufactured, tested, and in-
spected in accordance with this specification, and that the test
results on representative samples meet specification require-
ments. When specified in the purchase order or contract, a
report of the test results shall be furnished.

4
 B 599 – 92 (2003)e1
TABLE 10 Thickness TolerancesA,B ,C
for Cold-Rolled Strip for the Thicknesses and Widths Given, Over and Under
Width, in.
0.187 to 1, Over 1 to 3, Over 3 to 6, Over 6 to 9, Over 9 to Over 12 to Over 16 to Over 20 to
Specified Thickness, in.
incl incl incl incl 12, incl 16, incl 20, incl 24, incl
Thickness Tolerance, in.
Over 0.160 to less than 0.1875 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.006
Over 0.099 to 0.160, incl 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.005 0.005
Over 0.068 to 0.099, incl 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.004
Over 0.049 to 0.068, incl 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.004 0.004
Over 0.039 to 0.049, incl 0.002 0.002 0.0025 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.004 0.004
Over 0.034 to 0.039, incl 0.002 0.002 0.0025 0.0025 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003
Over 0.028 to 0.034, incl 0.0015 0.0015 0.002 0.002 0.0025 0.0025 0.003 0.003
Over 0.025 to 0.028, incl 0.001 0.0015 0.0015 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.0025 0.003
Over 0.019 to 0.025, incl 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.0015 0.002 0.002 0.0025 0.0025
Over 0.016 to 0.019, incl 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.0015 0.002 0.002 0.002
Over 0.012 to 0.016, incl 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.0015 0.002 0.002
Over 0.011 to 0.012, incl 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.0015 0.0015 0.0015
Over 0.010 to 0.011, incl 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.0015 0.0015
0.010 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.0015 0.0015
Width, mm
Over 25.4 to Over 76.2 to Over 152.4 to Over 228.6 to Over 304.8 to Over 406.4 to Over 508 to
Specified Thickness, mm 4.76 to 2.54
76.2, incl 152.4, incl 228.6, incl 304.8, incl 406.4, incl 508, incl 609.6, incl
Thickness Tolerance, mm
Over 4.06 to less than 4.75 0.05 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.15
Over 2.51 to 4.06, incl 0.05 0.05 0.08 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.13 0.13
Over 1.73 to 2.51, incl 0.05 0.05 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.10
Over 1.24 to 1.73, incl 0.05 0.05 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.10 0.10
Over 0.99 to 1.24, incl 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.10 0.10
Over 0.86 to 0.99, incl 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
Over 0.71 to 0.86, incl 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.08
Over 0.64 to 0.71, incl 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.08
Over 0.48 to 0.64, incl 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.06
Over 0.41 to 0.48, incl 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.05
Over 0.30 to 0.41 incl 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05
Over 0.28 to 0.30, incl 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Over 0.25 to 0.28, incl 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.04 0.04
0.25 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.04
A
For thicknesses under 0.010 to 0.005 in. (0.254 to 0.127 mm), incl, in widths up to and including 16 in. (406 mm), a tolerance of 610 % of the thickness applies. For
thicknesses under 0.010 to 0.005 in. (0.254 to 0.127 mm), incl, in widths over 16 to 24 in. (406 to 610 mm), excl, a tolerance of 615 % of the thickness applies. For thickness
tolerances on thicknesses under 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) in widths up to 24 in. (610 mm), excl, the producer should be consulted.
B
Thickness measurements are taken 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm) in from the edge of the strip, except that on widths less than 1 in. (25.4 mm) the tolerances are applicable for
measurements at all locations.
C
The tolerances in this table do not include crown tolerances.

TABLE 11 Crown Tolerances for Cold-Rolled Strip

Additional Thickness, at Middle of Strip Over That Shown in Table 10 for Edge Measurement, for
Widths and Thicknesses Given, in. (mm)
Specified Thickness, in. (mm) Width, in. (mm)
Over 12 to 24 (305 to
To 5 (127), incl Over 5 to 12 (127 to 305), incl
610), excl
0.005 to 0.010 (0.127 to 0.254), incl 0.0075 (0.19) 0.001 (0.02) 0.0015 (0.04)
Over 0.010 to 0.025 (0.254 to 0.635), incl 0.001 (0.02) 0.0015 (0.04) 0.002 (0.05)
Over 0.025 to 0.065 (0.635 to 1.65), incl 0.0015 (0.04) 0.002 (0.05) 0.0025 (0.06)
Over 0.065 to 0.1875 (1.65 to 4.76), excl 0.002 (0.05) 0.0025 (0.06) 0.003 (0.08)

17. Product Marking 18. Keywords

17.1 Each piece (plate, sheet, strip, or coil) shall be marked 18.1 plate; sheet; strip; N08700
legibly with the specification number, UNS number, heat
number, and the name of the manufacturer. When specified,
marking shall be by die stamping on plates 1⁄4 in. (6.35 mm) or
thicker.

5
 B 599 – 92 (2003)e1
TABLE 12 Width Tolerances for Cold-Rolled Strip on Edge Nos. 1, 5, and 3
Edge Nos. 1 and 5
Width Tolerance for Thickness and Width
Specified Edge No. Width, in. Thickness, in. Given, in.
Over Under
1 and 5 ⁄ and under
9 32 ⁄ and under
1 16 0.005 0.005
1 and 5 over 9⁄32 to 3⁄4 , incl 3⁄32 and under 0.005 0.005
1 and 5 over 3⁄4 to 5, incl 1⁄8 and under 0.005 0.005
5 over 5 to 9, incl 1⁄8 to 0.008, incl 0.010 0.010
5 over 9 to 20, incl 0.105 to 0.015 0.010 0.010
5 over 20 to 23 15⁄16 , incl 0.080 to 0.023 0.015 0.015
Edge No. 3
Width Tolerance for Thickness and Width Given, Over and Under, in.
Specified Thickness, in.
Under 1⁄2 to 3⁄16 , incl ⁄ to 6, incl
12 Over 6 to 9, incl Over 9 to 12, incl Over 12 to 21, incl Over 21 to 24, incl
Under 0.1875 to 0.161, ... 0.016 0.020 0.020 0.031 0.031
incl
0.160 to 0.100, incl 0.010 0.010 0.016 0.016 0.020 0.020
0.099 to 0.069, incl 0.008 0.008 0.010 0.010 0.016 0.020
0.068 and under 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.010 0.016 0.020
Edge Nos. 1 and 5
Width Tolerance for Thickness and Width
Specified Edge No. Width, mm Thickness, mm Given, mm
Over Under
1 and 5 7.1 and under 1.6 and under 0.13 0.13
1 and 5 Over 7.1 to 19.0, incl 2.4 and under 0.13 0.13
1 and 5 Over 19.0 to 127 3.2 and under 0.13 0.13
5 Over 127 to 229 3.2 to 0.203, incl 0.25 0.25
5 Over 229 to 508 2.7 to 0.381, incl 0.25 0.25
5 Over 508 to 608 2.0 to 0.584, incl 0.38 0.38
Edge No. 3
Width Tolerance for Thickness and Width Given, Over and Under, mm
Specified Thickness,
mm Under 12.7 to 4.76, Over 152 to 229, Over 229 to 305, Over 305 to 533, Over 533 to 610,
incl 12.7 to 152, incl incl incl incl excl
Under 4.76 to 4.09, incl ... 0.41 0.51 0.51 0.79 0.79
4.06 to 2.54, incl 0.25 0.25 0.41 0.41 0.51 0.51
2.51 to 1.75, incl 0.20 0.20 0.25 0.25 0.41 0.51
1.73 and under 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.25 0.41 0.51

TABLE 13 Length and CamberA Tolerances for Cold-Rolled Strip

Length Tolerances
Tolerance Over Specified Length (No
Specified Length, ft (mm)
Under Tolerance), in. (mm)
To 5 (1524), incl 3⁄8 (9.5)

Over 5 to 10 (1520 to 3050), incl 1⁄2 (12.7)

Over 10 to 20 (3050 to 6100), incl 5⁄8 (15.9)

Camber Tolerances
Tolerance per Unit Length of any 8 ft
Specified Width, in. (mm) (2440 mm), in. (mm)
To 11⁄2 (38.1), incl 1⁄2 (12.7)

Over 1 ⁄2 to 24 (38.1 to 610), excl

1 1⁄4 (6.4)

A
Camber is the deviation of a side edge from a straight line, and measurement
is taken by placing an 8-ft straightedge on the concave side and measuring the
greatest distance between the strip edge and the straightedge.

6
 B 599 – 92 (2003)e1
TABLE 14 ThicknessA Tolerances on PlatesB ,C

Width, in. (mm) Tolerance Over Specified Thickness, in. (mm)

Specified Thickness, in. (mm) To 84 (2134), incl Over 84 to 120 (2134 to Over 120 to 144 (3048 to Over 144 (3658)
3048), incl 3658), incl
⁄ to 3⁄8 (4.76 to 9.53), excl
3 16 0.046 (1.17) 0.050 (1.27)
⁄ to 3⁄4 (9.53 to 19.05), excl
38 0.054 (1.37) 0.058 (1.47) 0.075 (1.91) 0.090 (2.29)
3⁄4 to 1 (19.05 to 25.4), excl 0.060 (1.52) 0.064 (1.63) 0.083 (2.11) 0.100 (2.54)
1 to 2 (25.4 to 50.8), incl 0.070 (1.78) 0.074 (1.88) 0.095 (2.41) 0.115 (2.92)
A
Thickness is measured along the longitudinal edges of the plate at least 3⁄8 in. (9.53 mm), but not more than 3 in. (76.20 mm), from the edge.
B
For circles, the above over-thickness tolerances apply to the diameter of the circle corresponding to the width ranges shown. For plates of irregular shape, the above
over-thickness tolerances apply to the greatest width corresponding to the width ranges shown.
C
For plates up to 2 in. (50.8 mm), incl, in thickness, the tolerance under specified thickness is 0.01 in. (0.254 mm).

7
 B 599 – 92 (2003)e1
TABLE 15 Width and Length Tolerances for PlatesA,B
Tolerance Over Specified Width and Length for Given Width, Length, and Thickness, in.
Under 3⁄8 in. ⁄ to 1⁄2 , incl, in
38 Over 1⁄2 in Thickness
Width, in. Length, in.
Thickness
Width Length Width Length Width Length
48 and under 144 and under 18 ⁄ 3 16⁄ ⁄
3 16 14 ⁄ ⁄
5 16 38 ⁄
Over 48 to 60, incl ⁄
3 16 14 ⁄ 14 ⁄ 5 16⁄ 38 ⁄ ⁄
7 16

Over 60 to 84, incl 14 ⁄ 5 16⁄ ⁄

5 16 38 ⁄ ⁄
7 16 12 ⁄
Over 84 to 108, incl ⁄
5 16 38 ⁄ 38 ⁄ 7 16⁄ ⁄
12 ⁄
9 16

Over 108 38 ⁄ 7 16⁄ ⁄

7 16 ⁄
12 5⁄8 ⁄
11 16

48 and under over 144 to 240 ⁄

3 16 38 ⁄ 14 ⁄ ⁄
12 5⁄16 ⁄
58

Over 48 to 60, incl 14 ⁄ 7 16⁄ ⁄

5 16 5⁄8 3⁄8 3⁄4

Over 60 to 84, incl 38 ⁄ 12 ⁄ ⁄

7 16 11⁄16 1⁄2 3⁄4

Over 84 to 108, incl ⁄

7 16 12 ⁄ 3⁄4 5⁄8 7⁄8

Over 108 ⁄
12 ⁄ 58 58 ⁄ 7⁄8 11⁄16 1
48 and under over 240 to 360 1⁄4 1⁄2 ⁄
5 16 5⁄8 3⁄8 3⁄4

Over 48 to 60, incl 5⁄16 5⁄8 ⁄

38 3⁄4 1⁄2 3⁄4

Over 60 to 84, incl 7⁄16 11⁄16 ⁄

12 3⁄4 5⁄8 7⁄8

Over 84 to 108, incl 9⁄16 3⁄4 5⁄8 7⁄8 3⁄4 1

Over 108 5⁄8 7⁄8 11⁄16 1 7⁄8 1
60 and under over 360 to 480 7⁄16 11⁄8 1⁄2 11⁄4 5⁄8 13⁄8
Over 60 to 84, incl 1⁄2 11⁄4 5⁄8 13⁄8 3⁄4 11⁄2
Over 84 to 108, incl 9⁄16 11⁄4 3⁄4 13⁄8 7⁄8 11⁄2
Over 108 3⁄4 13⁄8 7⁄8 11⁄2 1 15⁄8
60 and under over 480 to 600 7⁄16 11⁄4 1⁄2 11⁄2 5⁄8 15⁄8
Over 60 to 84, incl 1⁄2 13⁄8 5⁄8 11⁄2 3⁄4 15⁄8
Over 84 to 108, incl 5⁄8 13⁄8 3⁄4 11⁄2 7⁄8 15⁄8
Over 108 3⁄4 11⁄2 7⁄8 15⁄8 1 13⁄4 3⁄4
60 and under over 600 1⁄2 13⁄4 5⁄8 17⁄8 3⁄4 17⁄8
Over 60 to 84, incl 5⁄8 13⁄4 3⁄4 17⁄8 7⁄8 17⁄8
Over 84 to 108, incl 5⁄8 13⁄4 3⁄4 17⁄8 7⁄8 17⁄8
Over 108 7⁄8 13⁄4 1 2 11⁄8 21⁄4
Tolerance Over Specified Width and Length for Given Width, Length, and Thickness, mm
9.5 to 12.7 mm incl, in
Width, mm Length, mm Under 9.5 mm Over 12.7 mm in Thickness
Thickness
Width Length Width Length Width Length
1219 mm and under 3658 and under 3.2 4.8 4.8 6.4 7.9 9.5
Over 1219 to 1524, incl 4.8 6.4 6.4 7.9 9.5 11.1
Over 1524 to 2134, incl 6.4 7.9 7.9 9.5 11.1 12.7
Over 2134 to 2743, incl 7.9 9.5 9.5 11.1 12.7 14.3
Over 2743 9.5 11.1 11.1 12.7 15.9 17.5
1219 mm and under over 3658 to 6096 4.8 9.5 6.4 12.7 7.9 15.9
Over 1219 to 1524, incl 6.4 11.1 7.9 15.9 9.5 19.1
Over 1524 to 2134 9.5 12.7 11.1 17.5 12.7 19.1
Over 2134 to 2743, incl 11.1 14.3 12.7 19.1 15.9 22.2
Over 2743 12.7 15.9 15.9 22.2 17.5 25.4
1219 mm and under over 6096 to 9144 6.4 12.7 7.9 15.9 9.5 19.1
Over 1219 to 1524, incl 7.9 15.9 9.5 19.1 12.7 19.1
Over 1524 to 2134 11.1 17.5 12.7 19.1 15.9 22.2
Over 2134 to 2743, incl 14.3 19.1 15.9 22.2 19.1 25.4
Over 2743 15.9 22.2 17.5 25.4 22.2 25.4
1524 mm and under over 9144 to 12 192 11.1 28.6 12.7 31.8 15.9 34.9
Over 1524 to 2134, incl 12.7 31.8 15.9 34.9 19.1 38.1
Over 2134 to 2743, incl 14.3 31.8 19.1 34.9 22.2 38.1
Over 2743 19.1 34.9 22.2 38.1 25.4 41.3
1524 mm and under over 12 192 to 15 240 11.1 31.8 12.7 38.1 19.1 41.3
Over 1524 to 2134, incl 12.7 34.9 15.9 38.1 22.2 41.3
Over 2134 to 2743, incl 15.9 34.9 19.1 38.1 22.2 41.3
Over 2743 19.1 38.1 22.2 41.3 25.4 44.5
1524 mm and under over 15 240 12.7 44.5 15.9 47.6 19.1 47.6
Over 1524 to 2134, incl 15.9 44.5 19.1 47.6 22.2 47.6
Over 2134 to 2743, incl 15.9 44.5 19.1 47.6 22.2 47.6
Over 2743 22.2 44.5 25.4 50.8 28.6 57.2
A
The tolerance under specified width and length is 1⁄4 in. (6.35 mm).
B
Rectangular plates over 1 in. (25.4 mm) in thickness are not commonly sheared and are machined or otherwise cut to length and width or produced in the size as rolled,
uncropped.

TABLE 16 Camber Tolerance for Plates

Maximum camberA = 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) in any 5 ft (1524 mm)
A
Camber is the deviation of a side edge from a straight line, and measurement
is taken by placing a 5-ft (1524-mm) straightedge on the concave side and
measuring the greatest distance between the plate and the straightedge.

8
 B 599 – 92 (2003)e1
TABLE 17 Diameter Tolerances for Circular Plates
Tolerance over Specified Diameter for Given Diameter and Thickness (No
Under Tolerance), in. (mm)
Specified Diameter, in. (mm)
Thickness
To 0.375 (9.53), excl 0.375 to 0.625 (9.53 to 15.88), excl 0.625 (15.88) and over
To 60 (1524), excl 1⁄4 (6.4) 3⁄8 (9.5) 1⁄2 (12.7)

60 to 84 (1524 to 2134), excl 5⁄16 (7.9) 7⁄16 (11.1) 9⁄16 (14.3)

84 to 108 (2134 to 2743), excl 3⁄8 (9.5) 1⁄2 (12.7) 5⁄8 (15.9)

108 to 130 (2743 to 3302), excl 7⁄16 (11.1) 9⁄16 (14.3) 11⁄16 (17.5)

TABLE 18 Flatness Tolerances for Plates

Flatness Tolerance (Deviation from a Flat Horizontal Surface) for Thickness and Width
Given, in.
Specified Thick-
Width, in.
ness, in.
48 and Over 48 to 60 to 72, 72 to 84, 84 to 96, 96 to 108, 108 to 120, 120 to 144, 144 and
Under 60, excl excl excl excl excl excl excl Over
⁄ to 1⁄4 , excl
3 16 ⁄
34 11⁄16 11⁄4 13⁄8 15⁄8 15⁄8 17⁄8 2
⁄ to 3⁄8 , excl
14 ⁄
11 16 3⁄4 ⁄
15 16 11⁄8 13⁄8 17⁄16 19⁄16 17⁄8
3⁄8 to 1⁄2 , excl 1⁄2 9⁄16 11⁄16 3⁄4 15⁄16 11⁄8 11⁄4 17⁄16 13⁄4
1⁄2 to 3⁄4 , excl 1⁄2 9⁄16 5⁄8 5⁄8 13⁄16 11⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄8 13⁄8
3⁄4 to 1, excl 1⁄2 9⁄16 5⁄8 5⁄8 3⁄4 13⁄16 15⁄16 1 11⁄8
1 to 11⁄2 , excl 1⁄2 9⁄16 9⁄16 9⁄16 11⁄16 11⁄16 11⁄16 3⁄4 1
11⁄2 to 4, excl 3⁄16 5⁄16 3⁄8 7⁄16 1⁄2 9⁄16 5⁄8 3⁄4 7⁄8

4 to 6, excl 1⁄4 3⁄8 1⁄2 9⁄16 5⁄8 3⁄4 1 11⁄8

Flatness Tolerance (Deviation from a Flat Horizontal Surface) for Thickness and Width Given, mm
Width, mm
Specified Thick-
ness, mm 1219 and Over 1219 1524 to 1829 to 2134 to 2438 to 2743 to 3048 to 3658
Under to 1524, 1829, excl 2134, excl 2438, excl 2743, excl 3048, excl 3658, excl and Over
excl
4.76 to 6.35, excl 19.1 27.0 31.8 34.9 41.3 41.3 47.6 50.8
6.35 to 9.53, excl 17.5 19.1 23.8 28.6 34.9 36.5 39.7 47.6
9.53 to 12.7, excl 12.7 14.3 17.5 19.1 23.8 28.6 31.8 36.5 44.5
12.7 to 19.05, excl 12.7 14.3 15.9 15.9 20.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 34.9
19.05 to 25.4, excl 12.7 14.3 15.9 15.9 19.1 20.6 23.8 25.4 28.6
25.4 to 38.1, excl 12.7 14.3 14.3 14.3 17.5 17.5 17.5 19.1 25.4
38.1 to 102, excl 4.8 7.9 9.5 11.1 12.7 14.3 15.9 19.1 22.2
102 to 152, excl 6.4 9.5 12.7 14.3 15.9 19.1 22.2 25.4 28.6

9
 B 599 – 92 (2003)e1
TABLE 19 Recommended Plate Flame-Cutting Tolerances to
Cleanup in Machining
Specified Thickness, in. (mm) Machining Allowance
per Edge, in. (mm)
2 (51) and under ⁄ (6.4)
14

Over 2 to 3 (51 to 76), incl 38⁄ (9.5)

Over 3 to 6 (76 to 152), incl 1⁄2 (12.7)

TABLE 20 Abrasive-Cutting Width and Length Tolerances

Tolerance OverA Specified Width and Length, in.
Specified Thickness,
(mm)
in. (mm)
Width Length
Up to 11⁄4 (32) 1⁄8 (3.2) 1⁄8 (3.2)

Over 11⁄4 to 23⁄4 3⁄16 (4.8) 3⁄16 (4.8)

(32 to 70)
A
The tolerance under the specified width and length is 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm).

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

10
 Designation: B 523/B 523M – 02

Standard Specification for

Seamless and Welded Zirconium and Zirconium Alloy
Tubes1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 523/B 523M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope
1.1 This specification2 covers three grades of zirconium and
zirconium alloy seamless and welded tubes.
1.2 Unless a single unit is used, for example corrosion mass
gain in mg/dm2, the values stated in either inch-pound or SI
units are to be regarded separately as standard. The values
stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
system must be used independently of the other. SI values
cannot be mixed with inch-pound values.
1.3 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test methods portion of this specification: This standard does
not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any,
associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
standard to establish appropriate safety and health practices
and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior
to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
of Steel Products3
B 551 Specification for Zirconium and Zirconium Alloy
Strip, Sheet, and Plate4
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials5
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications6
E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
and Tubing7
E 426 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Exami-
nation of Seamless and Welded Tubular Products, Austen-
itic Stainless Steel and Similar Alloys7
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B10 on
Reactive and Refractory Metals and Alloys and is the direct responsibility of
Subcommittee B10.02 on Zirconium and Hafnium.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2002. Published December 2002. Originally
published as B 523 – 70. Last previous edition B 523/B 523M – 01.
2
For ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Applications, see related Specifi-
cation SB–523 in Section II of that Code.
3
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.03.
4
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.04.
5
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.01.
6
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
7
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 03.03.
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 annealed—for purposes of this specification “an-
nealed” denotes material that exhibits a recrystallized grain
structure.
3.2 Lot Definitions:
3.2.1 castings—a lot shall consist of all castings produced
from the same pour.
3.2.2 ingot—no definition required.
3.2.3 rounds, flats, tubes, and wrought powder metallurgical
products (single definition, common to nuclear and non-
nuclear standards)—a lot shall consist of a material of the
same size, shape, condition, and finish produced from the same
ingot or powder blend by the same reduction schedule and the
same heat treatment parameters. Unless otherwise agreed
between manufacturer and purchaser, a lot shall be limited to
the product of an 8 h period for final continuous anneal, or to
a single furnace load for final batch anneal.
3.2.4 sponge—a lot shall consist of a single blend produced
at one time.
3.2.5 weld fittings—definition is to be mutually agreed upon
between manufacturer and the purchaser.
4. Classification
4.1 The tubes are furnished in three grades as follows:
4.1.1 Grade R60702—Unalloyed zirconium.
4.1.2 Grade R60704—Zirconium-tin alloy.
4.1.3 Grade R60705—Zirconium-niobium alloy.
5. Ordering Information
5.1 Orders for material under this specification should
include the following information:
5.1.1 Quantity (weight or number of pieces, or both),
5.1.2 Name of material (zirconium seamless or welded
tube),
5.1.3 Dimensions (diameter, wall thickness as either aver-
age or minimum, lengths),
5.1.4 ASTM designation and year of issue,
5.1.5 Grade number (see 4.1), and
5.1.6 Additions to the specification, if required. See 6.3.1,
7.3, 10.1, 12.7.3, 14.1, and 15.1 for additional optional
requirements for the purchase order.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 523/B 523M – 02
NOTE 1—A typical ordering description is as follows: 1000 pieces of TABLE 2 Permissible Variation in Product Analysis Between
seamless zirconium tubes, 2 in. (50 mm) in outside diameter by 0.06 in. Different Laboratories
(15 mm) in average wall thickness by 10 ft (3 m) in length, vacuum Permissible Variation in Product
Element
annealed, ASTM B 523 - 01, Grade R60702. Analysis, %
Hydrogen 0.002
6. Materials and Manufacture Nitrogen 0.01
6.1 Seamless tube shall be made by any seamless method Carbon 0.01
Hafnium 0.1
that will yield a product meeting the requirements of this Iron + chromium 0.025
specification. Tin 0.05
6.2 Welded tube shall be made from sheet or strip meeting Niobium 0.05
Oxygen 0.02
the requirements of Specification B 551 by an automatic
arc-welding process or other method of welding that will yield
a product meeting the requirements of this specification. Filler TABLE 3 Tensile Requirements
metal shall not be used. Welded tubing shall be supplied as UNS Grade Designation
follows:
R60702 R60704 R60705
6.2.1 As welded, or
Tensile strength, 55 (380) 60 (415) 80 (550)
6.2.2 As welded and further reduced. min, ksi (MPa)
6.2.3 Welds in grade R60705 shall be stress relief annealed Yield strength, min, 30 (205) 35 (240) 55 (380)
within 14 days after welding to prevent delayed hydride ksi (MPa)
Elongation in 2 in. 16 14 16
cracking. or 50 mm, min, %
6.3 The tube shall be furnished annealed.
6.3.1 Purchaser shall specify one of the following:
(a) annealed in air
(b) annealed in vacuum
of the tube, the variation in outside diameter shall not exceed
7. Chemical Composition those prescribed in Table 4.
7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to 9.2 Length—When tubes are ordered cut to length, the
chemical composition prescribed in Table 1. length shall be not less than that specified, but a variation of 1⁄8
7.2 The manufacturer’s ingot analysis shall be considered in. (3.2 mm) will be permitted on tube up to 10 ft (3 m),
the chemical analysis for tubing, except for hydrogen and inclusive. For lengths over 10 ft, an additional over-tolerance
nitrogen, which shall be determined on the finished product. of 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) for each 10 ft (3 m) or fraction thereof shall
7.3 When requested by the purchaser and stated in the be permissible up to 1⁄2 in. (13 mm), maximum.
purchase order, a product analysis for any elements listed in 9.3 Straightness—The tube shall be free of bends or kinks
Table 1 shall be made on the finished product. and the maximum uniform bow shall not exceed the values
7.3.1 The manufacturer’s analysis shall be considered as shown in Table 5.
verified if the check analysis confirms the manufacturer’s 9.4 Squareness of Cut—The angle of cut of the end of any
reported values within the tolerances prescribed in Table 2. tube up to 11⁄2 in. (40 mm) in outside diameter may depart from
square not more than 0.016 in./in. (mm/mm).
8. Tensile Requirements
8.1 The material, as represented by the test specimens, shall 10. Workmanship and Quality Level Requirements
conform to the tensile properties prescribed in Table 3. 10.1 The finished tube shall be clean and free of foreign
material, shall have smooth ends, free of burrs, and shall be
9. Permissible Variation in Dimensions
free of injurious external and internal imperfections in accor-
9.1 Diameter—At any point (cross section) along the length dance with standards of acceptability agreed upon between the
TABLE 1 Chemical RequirementsA manufacturer and the purchaser. Minor defects may be re-
moved provided the dimensional tolerances of Table 4 are not
Composition, %
exceeded.
Element UNS Grade Designation
R60702 R60704 R60705 11. Significance of Numerical Limits
B
Zirconium + hafnium, min 99.2 97.5 95.5 11.1 For the purpose of determining compliance with the
Hafnium, max 4.5 4.5 4.5
Iron + chromium 0.2 max 0.2 to 0.4 0.2 max specified limits for requirements of the properties listed in the
Tin ... 1.0 to 2.0 ... following table, an observed value or a calculated value shall
Hydrogen, max 0.005 0.005 0.005 be rounded as indicated in accordance with the rounding
Nitrogen, max 0.025 0.025 0.025
Carbon, max 0.05 0.05 0.05 methods of Practice E 29.
Niobium ... ... 2.0 to 3.0 Rounded Unit for Observed
Oxygen, max 0.16 0.18 0.18 Property or Calculated Value
A
By agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer, analysis may be
required and limits established for elements and compounds not specified in the Chemical composition, and toler- nearest unit in the last right-hand
table of chemical composition. ances (when expressed as decimals) place of figures of the specified limit
B
The value for zirconium + hafnium, min, is a warranted but not a measured Tensile strength and yield strength nearest 1000 psi (10 MPa)
value. Elongation nearest 1 %

2
 B 523/B 523M – 02
TABLE 4 Permissible Variations in Outside Dimensions Based on Individual Measurements
Permissible VariationsC in Wall
Outside Diameter, in. (mm) Diameter Tolerance, in. (mm)A,B
Thickness, t, %
Under 1 (25), excl 60.004 (60.100) 10
1 to 11⁄2 (25 to 40), incl 60.005 (60.125) 10
11⁄2 to 2 (40 to 50), excl 60.006 (60.150) 10
2 to 21⁄2 (50 to 65), incl 60.007 (60.180) 10
21⁄2 to 31⁄2 (65 to 90), excl 60.010 (60.250) 10
A
These permissible variations in outside diameter apply only to tubes as finished at the mill before subsequent swaging, expanding, bending, polishing, or other
fabricating operations.
B
Ovality is the maximum and minimum outside diameter of a tube measured at any one cross section. If the measurement is made with a ring gage, the following formula
shall apply: Ovality = specified OD tube + diameter tolerance +0.002 in. (.05 mm) (length of ring gage, 1 in. (25 mm)) 3 specified tube OD.
C
When minimum wall tubes are ordered, tolerances are all plus and shall be double the values shown.

TABLE 5 Straightness (a) The calibration tube shall contain, at the option of the
Length, ft (m)
Maximum Curvature Depth producer, any one of the following discontinuities to establish
of Arc a minimum sensitivity level for rejection. Place the disconti-
Over 3 to 6 (0.9 to 1.85), incl ⁄ in. (3.2 mm)
18
nuity in the parent metal.
Over 6 to 8 (1.8 to 2.5), excl ⁄ in. (5 mm)
3 16

Over 8 to 10 (2.5 to 3.0), incl 1⁄4in. (6.4 mm)
Over 10 (3.0) 1⁄4 in./any 10 ft (2.1 mm/m)
12. Number of Tests and Retests
12.1 One longitudinal tension test, see 13.1, shall be made
from each lot.
12.2 One chemistry test, see 7.2 and 13.7, for hydrogen and
nitrogen shall be made from each lot of finished product.
12.3 One flare test, see 13.5, shall be made from each lot.
12.4 One reverse, see 13.6, flattening test shall be made
from each lot of welded tubing.
12.5 Each tube shall be tested by a nondestructive electric
test, see 13.2. Seamless tubes shall be tested by the ultrasonic
test only, see 13.2.
12.6 Each tube shall be tested by either a hydrostatic or a
pneumatic test, see 13.3 and 13.4.
12.7 Retests:
12.7.1 If any sample or specimen exhibits obvious surface
contamination or improper preparation disqualifying it as a
truly representative sample, it shall be discarded and a new
sample or specimen substituted.
12.7.2 If the results of any tests of any lot do not conform to
the requirements specified, retests shall be made on additional
tubes of double the original number from the same lot, each of
which shall conform to the requirements specified.
12.7.3 Retesting after failure of initial retests may be done
only with the approval of the purchaser.
13. Test Methods
13.1 Tension Tests—Conduct the tension test in accordance
with Test Methods E 8. Determine the yield strength by the
offset (0.2 %) method. Determine the tensile properties using a
strain rate of 0.003 to 0.007 in./in. (mm/mm)/min through the
yield strength. After the yield strength has been exceeded, the
cross-head speed may be increased to approximately 0.05
in./in. (mm/mm)/min to failure.
13.2 Nondestructive Electric or Ultrasonic Test:
13.2.1 Test each tube with a nondestructive electric test in
accordance with Practices E 213 or E 426, or a purchaser-
approved procedure.
13.2.1.1 Eddy Current Testing:
(b) Drilled Hole—Drill a hole not larger than 0.031 in. (0.8
mm) in diameter radially and completely through the tube wall,
taking care to avoid distortion of the tube while drilling.
(c) Transverse Tangential Notch—Using a round tool or file
with a 0.25-in. (6.4 mm) diameter, file or mill a notch
tangential to the surface and transverse to the longitudinal axis
of the tube. The notch shall have a depth not exceeding 12.5 %
of the specified wall thickness of the tube or 0.004 in. (0.10
mm), whichever is greater.
(d) Longitudinal Notch—Machine a notch 0.031 in (0.8
mm) or less in width in a radial plane parallel to the material
axis on the outside of the tube to have a depth not exceeding
12.5 % of the specified wall thickness of the material or 0.004
in. (0.10 mm), whichever is greater. The length of the notch
shall be compatible with the testing method.
13.2.1.2 Ultrasonic Testing—For ultrasonic testing, the lon-
gitudinal calibration reference notches shall be at the option of
the manufacturer, and be any one of the three common notch
shapes in accordance with Practice E 213. The depth of the
notch shall not exceed 12.5 % of the specified wall thickness of
the material or 0.004 in. (0.10 mm), whichever is greater.
13.2.2 Set aside any tubes showing an indication in excess
of that obtained from the calibration standard and subject them
to rework, retest, or rejection. A tube, therefore, set aside may
be further examined for confirmation of the presence of a
defect and may be resubmitted for inspection by the same
technique if no defect is found. Any tube may also be
resubmitted for inspection if reworked so as to remove the
defect within the specified diameter and wall thickness toler-
ances as prescribed in Table 4. (Rework by weld repair is not
permitted.)
13.3 Hydrostatic Test:
13.3.1 Each tube, so tested, shall withstand, without show-
ing bulges, leaks, or other defects, an internal hydrostatic
pressure that will produce in the tube wall a stress of 50 % of
the minimum specified yield strength at room temperature,
except as restricted by 13.3.2. Determine the hydrostatic
pressure as follows:
P 5 2ST/D (1)
where:
P = minimum hydrostatic test pressure, psi (MPa),

3
 B 523/B 523M – 02
S = allowable fiber stress of one half the minimum yield
strength, psi (MPa),
t = wall thickness, in. (mm), and
D = outside diameter, in. (mm).
13.3.2 The maximum hydrostatic test pressure shall not
exceed 2500 psi (17.2 MPa) for sizes 3 in. (75 mm) and under,
or 2800 psi (19.3 MPa) for sizes over 3 in. (75 mm). Maintain
the hydrostatic pressure for not less than 5 s. When requested
by the purchaser and so stated in the order, test the tube in sizes
14 in. (350 mm) in diameter and smaller, to one and one half
times the specified working pressure, provided the fiber stress
corresponding to those test pressures does not exceed one half
the minimum specified yield strength of the material as
determined by the equation given in 13.3.1. When one and one
half times the working pressure exceeds 2800 psi (19.3 MPa),
the hydrostatic test pressure shall be a matter of agreement
between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
13.4 Pneumatic Test—Each tube so tested shall withstand
an internal air pressure of 150 psi (1.0 MPa), minimum, for 5
s, minimum, without showing evidence of leakage. Use the test
method that permits easy visual detection of any leakage, such
as by placing the tube under water or by using the pressure
differential method. Any evidence of leakage shall be cause for
rejection of that tube.
13.5 Flare Test—A section of the annealed tube, approxi-
mately 4 in. (100 mm) in length, shall be capable of being
flared without cracking visible to the unaided eye. Make the
flare with a tool having a 60° included angle until the specified
outside diameter has been increased by 15 %.
NOTE 2—Samples of tube supplied in tempers other than annealed may
be annealed before testing.
13.6 Reverse Flattening Test—Subject welded tube to a
reverse flattening test in accordance with Test Methods and
Definitions A 370. Open and flatten a section of the tube
approximately 4 in. (100 mm) long that is slit longitudinally
90° either side of the weld with the weld at the point of
maximum bend. No cracking is permitted
13.7 Chemical Tests—Conduct the chemical analysis by the
standard techniques normally used by the manufacturer.
14. Inspection
14.1 The manufacturer shall inspect the material covered by
this specification prior to shipment and, on request, shall
furnish the purchaser with certificates of test. If so specified in
the purchase order, the purchaser or his representative may
witness the testing and inspection of the material at the place of
manufacture. In such cases, the purchaser shall state in his
purchase order which tests he desires to witness. The manu-
facturer shall give ample notice to the purchaser as to the time
and place of the designated tests. If the purchaser’s represen-
tative does not present himself at the time agreed upon for the
testing, the manufacturer shall consider the requirement for the
4
purchaser’s inspection at the place of manufacture to be
waived.
14.2 The manufacturer shall afford the inspector represent-
ing the purchaser, without charge, all reasonable facilities to
satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
with this specification. This inspection shall be so conducted as
not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
15. Rejection
15.1 Rejection for failure of the material to meet the
requirements of this specification shall be reported to the
manufacturer within 60 calendar days from the receipt of the
material by the purchaser. Unless otherwise specified, rejected
material may be returned to the manufacturer at the manufac-
turer’s expense, unless the purchaser receives, within three
weeks of the notice of rejection, other instructions for dispo-
sition.
16. Certification
16.1 A producer or supplier shall furnish the purchaser with
a certificate that the material was manufactured, sampled,
tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification and
has been found to meet the requirements. The certificate shall
include a report of the test results.
17. Referee
17.1 In the event of disagreement between the manufacturer
and the purchaser on the conformance of the material to the
requirements of this specification or any special test specified
by the purchaser, a mutually acceptable referee shall perform
the tests in question. The results of the referee’s testing shall be
used in determining conformance of the material to this
specification.
18. Product Marking
18.1 Each length of tube 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) and larger in
outside diameter, manufactured in accordance with this speci-
fication shall be marked legibly, either by stenciling, stamping,
or rolling, with the manufacturer’s private identifying mark,
the ASTM designation, method of manufacture, the grade, and
heat number. On smaller than 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) in outside
diameter tubing that is bundled, the same information may be
stamped legibly on a metal tag securely attached to each
bundle.
19. Packaging and Package Marking
19.1 The tube shall be packaged in such a manner as to
assure safe delivery to its destination when properly trans-
ported by common carrier.
20. Keywords
20.1 tubes; tubing; zirconium; zirconium alloy
 B 523/B 523M – 02
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org).

5
 Designation: B 524/B 524M – 99

Standard Specification for

Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-
Alloy Reinforced (ACAR, 1350/6201)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 524/B 524M; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year
of original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval.
A superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to

1.1 This specification covers concentric-lay-stranded con- Determine Conformance with Specification3
ductors made from round aluminum 1350-H19 (extra hard) E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS)4
wires and round aluminum-alloy 6201-T81 (hard: solution heat 2.3 ANSI Standard:
treated, cold worked, and then artificially aged) core wires for ANSI H35.1 American National Standard for Alloy and
use as overhead electrical conductors (Explanatory Note 1). Temper Designation Systems for Aluminum5
ANSI H35.1[M] American National Standard for Alloy and
NOTE 1—The aluminum, alloy, and temper designations conform to Temper Designation Systems for Aluminum5
ANSI H35.1/ANSI H35.1[M]. Aluminum 1350 and Alloy 6201 corre-
spond to unified numbering system A91350 and A96201, respectively, in
2.4 NIST Document:
accordance with Practice E 527. NBS Handbook 100—Copper Wire Tables6
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound or SI units are to be 3. Ordering Information
regarded separately as standard. The values in each system are 3.1 Orders for material under this specification shall include
not exact equivalents; therefore, each system shall be used the following information:
independently of the other. Combining values from the two 3.1.1 Quantity of each size and stranding,
systems may result in nonconformance with the specification. 3.1.2 Conductor size (see 7.1),
1.2.1 For density, resistivity and temperature, the values 3.1.3 Total number of wires, aluminum 1350 and aluminum
stated in SI units are to be regarded as standard. alloy 6201 (Table 1 or Table 2),
2. Referenced Documents 3.1.4 Direction of lay of outer layer of wires if other than
right-hand (see 6.2),
2.1 The following documents of the issue in effect on date 3.1.5 Special tension test, if required (see 8.2),
of material purchase form a part of this specification to the 3.1.6 Place of inspection (see 14.1),
extent referenced herein: 3.1.7 Package size and type (see 16.1),
2.2 ASTM Standards: 3.1.8 Heavy wood lagging, if required (Section 16), and
B 230/B 230M Specification for Aluminum 1350-H19 Wire 3.1.9 Special package marking, if required (Section 15).
for Electrical Purposes2
B 263 Test Method for Determination of Cross-Sectional 4. Requirement for Wires
Area of Stranded Conductors2 4.1 Before stranding, the 1350-H19 wire used shall meet the
B 354 Terminology Relating to Uninsulated Metallic Elec- requirements of Specification B 230/B 230M.
trical Conductors2 4.2 Before stranding, the 6201-T81 wire used shall meet the
B 398/B 398M Specification for Aluminum-Alloy requirements of Specification B 398/B 398M.
6201–T81 Wire for Electrical Purposes2
B 682 Specification for Standard Metric Sizes of Electrical
Conductors2

1 3
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B-1 on Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.02.
4
Electrical Conductors and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee B01.07 on Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 01.01.
5
Conductors of Light Metals. Available from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd St.,
Current edition approved April 10, 1999. Published June 1999. Originally 13th Floor, New York, NY 10036.
6
published as B 524 – 70. Last previous edition B 524 – 97. Available from the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST),
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.03. Gaithersburg, MD 20899.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 524/B 524M
TABLE 1 Construction Requirements of Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum Alloy Reinforced

Required Construction Recommended Package SizesA

Conductor Size Nominal Approximate Approximate

Diameter
Number Outside Reel Length of Each Mass of Each
of Wires
of WiresB Diameter Designation Piece LengthC
cmil AWG mm2 in. mm in. mm ft m lb kg
3 000 000 1520 91 0.1816 4.613 1.998 50.74 RMT 90.45 3 200 975 9 100 4130
2 750 000 1393 91 0.1738 4.415 1.912 48.56 RMT 90.45 3 490 1065 9 100 4130
2 500 000 1267 91 0.1657 4.209 1.823 46.30 RMT 90.45 3 840 1170 9 100 4130
2 493 000 1263 91 0.1655 4.204 1.8207 46.25 RMT 96.60 6 500 1981 15 400 6970
2 338 000 1185 61 0.1958 4.973 1.7620 44.75 RMT 96.60 7 500 2286 16 700 7540
2 250 000 1140 91 0.1572 3.993 1.729 43.92 RMT 90.45 4 270 1300 9 100 4130
2 000 000 1013 91 0.1482 3.764 1.630 41.40 RMT 90.45 4 850 1480 9 100 4130
2 000 000 1013 61 0.1811 4.600 1.630 41.40 RMT 90.45 5 200 1585 9 760 4425
1 933 000 979 61 0.1780 4.522 1.6021 40.69 RMT 96.60 9 200 2804 16 700 7570
1 900 000 963 61 0.1765 4.483 1.588 40.35 RMT 90.45 5 470 1665 9 760 4425
1 800 000 912 61 0.1718 4.364 1.546 39.28 RMT 90.45 5 780 1760 9 760 4425
1 798 000 911 61 0.1717 4.361 1.5452 39.25 RMT 96.60 9 200 2804 15 600 7040
1 750 000 887 61 0.1694 4.303 1.525 38.73 RMT 90.45 5 940 1810 9 760 4425
1 703 000 863 61 0.1671 4.244 1.8380 46.68 RMT 96.60 9 000 2743 14 400 6530
1 700 000 861 61 0.1669 4.239 1.502 38.15 RMT 90.45 6 120 1865 9 760 4425
1 600 000 811 61 0.1620 4.115 1.458 37.04 RMT 90.45 6 500 1980 9 760 4425
1 534 400 777 61 0.1586 4.028 1.4274 36.26 RMT 96.60 10 000 3048 14 400 6530
1 500 000 760 61 0.1568 3.983 1.411 35.85 RMT 90.45 6 930 2110 9 760 4425
1 400 000 709 61 0.1515 3.848 1.364 34.63 RMT 90.45 7 430 2265 9 760 4425
1 361 500 690 61 0.1494 3.795 1.3446 34.15 RMT 96.60 11 250 3429 14 400 6530
1 300 000 659 61 0.1460 3.708 1.314 33.37 RMT 90.45 8 000 2440 9 760 4425
1 300 000 659 37 0.1874 4.760 1.312 33.32 RMT 84.45 6 065 1850 7 400 3355
1 277 000 647 61 0.1447 3.675 1.3022 33.08 RMT 96.60 12 000 3658 14 400 6520
1 250 000 633 61 0.1431 3.635 1.288 32.72 RMT 90.45 8 320 2535 9 760 4425
1 250 000 633 37 0.1838 4.669 1.287 32.70 RMT 84.45 6 310 1920 7 400 3355
1 200 000 608 61 0.1403 3.564 1.263 32.08 RMT 90.45 8 660 2640 9 760 4425
1 200 000 608 37 0.1801 4.575 1.261 32.02 RMT 84.45 6 565 2000 7 400 3355
1 198 000 607 37 0.1799 4.570 1.2596 31.99 RMT 96.60 12 850 3917 14 500 6550
1 172 000 594 37 0.1780 4.521 1.2458 31.64 RMT 96.60 14 400 4389 15 900 7180
1 109 000 562 37 0.1731 4.397 1.2119 30.78 RMT 96.60 13 850 4221 14 500 6540
1 100 000 557 61 0.1343 3.411 1.209 30.70 RMT 90.45 9 450 2880 9 760 4425
1 100 000 557 37 0.1724 4.379 1.207 30.65 RMT 84.45 7 160 2180 7 400 3355
1 080 600 548 37 0.1709 4.341 1.1963 30.39 RMT 96.60 15 600 4755 15 800 7170
1 024 500 519 37 0.1664 4.227 1.1648 29.59 RMT 96.60 15 000 4572 14 500 6540
1 000 000 507 61 0.1280 3.251 1.152 29.26 RMT 90.45 10 400 3170 9 760 4425
1 000 000 507 37 0.1644 4.176 1.151 29.23 RMT 84.45 7 880 2400 7 400 3355
950 000 481 37 0.1602 4.069 1.121 28.48 RMT 84.45 8 300 2530 7 400 3355
927 200 470 37 0.1583 4.021 1.1081 28.15 RMT 90.45 10 400 3170 9 050 4110
900 000 456 37 0.1560 3.962 1.092 27.73 RMT 84.45 8 760 2670 7 400 3355
853 700 433 37 0.1519 3.858 1.0633 27.01 RMT 96.60 18 000 5486 14 500 6540
850 000 431 37 0.1516 3.851 1.061 26.96 RMT 84.45 9 270 2825 7 400 3355
800 000 405 37 0.1470 3.734 1.029 26.14 RMT 84.45 9 850 3000 7 400 3355
750 000 380 37 0.1424 3.617 0.997 25.32 RMT 84.45 10 510 3200 7 400 3355
739 800 375 37 0.1414 3.592 0.9898 25.14 RMT 90.45 13 010 3965 9 020 4090
700 000 355 37 0.1375 3.493 0.962 24.45 RMT 84.45 11 260 3430 7 400 3355
653 100 331 19 0.1854 4.709 0.9270 23.55 RMT 84.45 9 910 3021 6 070 2760
650 000 329 37 0.1325 3.366 0.928 23.56 RMT 84.45 12 130 3695 7 400 3355
649 500 329 37 0.1325 3.365 0.9274 23.56 NR 66.28 6 890 2100 4 200 1910
600 000 304 37 0.1273 3.233 0.891 22.63† RMT 84.45 13 140 4005 7 400 3355
600 000 304 19 0.1777 4.513 0.888 22.56 RM 66.32 6 750 2060 3 800 1725
NR 66.28
587 200 298 19 0.1758 4.465 0.8790 22.33 NR 66.28 8 030 2448 4 430 2010
550 000 279 37 0.1219 3.096 0.853 21.67 RMT 84.45 14 330 4365 7 400 3355
550 000 279 19 0.1701 4.321 0.850 21.60 RM 66.32 7 360 2245 3 800 1725
NR 66.28
503 600 255 19 0.1628 4.135 0.8140 20.68 NR 66.28 8 030 2448 3 800 1730
500 000 253 37 0.1162 2.951 0.813 20.66 RMT 84.45 15 765 4805 7 400 3355
500 000 253 19 0.1622 4.120 0.811 20.60 RM 66.32 8 100 2470 3 800 1725
NR 66.28
450 000 228 19 0.1539 3.909 0.770 19.54 RM 66.32 9 000 2745 3 800 1725
NR 66.28
400 000 203 19 0.1451 3.685 0.726 18.42 RM 66.32 10 120 3085 3 800 1725
NR 66.28
350 000 177 19 0.1357 3.447 0.678 17.24 RM 66.32 11 560 3530 3 800 1725
NR 66.28
300 000 152 19 0.1257 3.193 0.628 15.96 RM 66.32 13 490 4115 3 800 1725
NR 66.28
250 000 127 19 0.1147 2.913 0.574 14.56 RM 66.32 16 190 4940 3 800 1725
NR 66.28

2
 B 524/B 524M

TABLE 1 Continued
Required Construction Recommended Package SizesA

Conductor Size Nominal Approximate Approximate

Diameter
Number Outside Reel Length of Each Mass of Each
of Wires
of WiresB Diameter Designation Piece LengthC
cmil AWG mm2 in. mm in. mm ft m lb kg
246 900 125 7 0.1878 4.770 0.563 14.31 NR 36.22 3 020 920 700 318
211 600 4/0 107 7 0.1739 4.417 0.522 13.25 NR 36.22 3 525 1075 700 318
195 700 99.1 7 0.1672 4.247 0.502 12.74 NR 36.22 3 810 1165 700 318
167 800 3/0 85.0 7 0.1548 3.932 0.464 11.80 NR 36.22 4 445 1355 700 318
155 400 78.7 7 0.1490 3.785 0.447 11.35 NR 36.22 4 800 1465 700 318
133 100 2/0 67.4 7 0.1379 3.503 0.414 10.52 NR 36.22 5 605 1710 700 318
123 300 62.5 7 0.1327 3.371 0.398 10.11 NR 36.22 6 050 1845 700 318
105 600 1/0 53.5 7 0.1228 3.119 0.368 9.35 NR 36.22 7 065 2155 700 318
77 470 39.3 7 0.1052 2.672 0.316 8.03 NR 36.22 9 630 2940 700 318
66 360 2 33.6 7 0.0974 2.474 0.292 7.42 NR 36.22 11 235 3430 700 318
48 690 24.7 7 0.0834 2.118 0.250 6.35 NR 36.22 15 315 4675 700 318
41 740 4 21.2 7 0.0772 1.961 0.232 5.89 NR 36.22 17 855 5455 700 318
30 580 15.5 7 0.0661 1.679 0.198 5.03 NR 36.22 24 390 7445 700 318
A
See Table 4 for dimensions of standard reels.
B
Recommended standard stranding combinations are shown in Table 5.
C
See Table 7 for mass per unit length for each stranding.

TABLE 2 Construction Requirements, Mass, Mass Per Unit Length, Recommended Reel Sizes, and Shipping Lengths of Conductors

NOTE 1—The sizes in boldface type indicate those preferred sizes from Specification B 682.

Conductor Diameter of Conductor Mass per Unit LengthA Recommended Package SizesB
Size, Wires, Diameter, 1350, kg/km 6201, kg/km Total, kg/km Related Strength Reel Designa- Nominal Length of Nominal Mass of
mm2 mm mm kN tionC Each Piece, m Each Length, kg
Stranding 72/19
1600 4.73 52.03 3559 934 4493 283 RMT 90.45 960 4315
1400 4.43 48.73 3092 812 3904 248 RMT 90.45 1060 4140
1250 4.18 45.98 2753 723 3476 221 RMT 90.45 1185 4120
1120 3.96 43.56 2471 648 3119 198 RMT 90.45 1320 4120
1000 3.74 41.14 2204 578 2782 180 RMT 90.45 1495 4160
Stranding 63/28
1600 4.73 52.03 3114 1377 4491 300 RMT 90.45 960 4310
1400 4.43 48.73 2705 1196 3901 263 RMT 90.45 1060 4135
1250 4.18 45.98 2409 1065 3474 234 RMT 90.45 1185 4115
1120 3.96 43.56 2162 956 3118 210 RMT 90.45 1320 4115
1000 3.74 41.14 1928 852 2780 190 RMT 90.45 1495 4155
Stranding 54/37
1600 4.73 52.03 2669 1819 4488 323 RMT 90.45 960 4310
1400 4.43 48.73 2319 1580 3899 283 RMT 90.45 1060 4135
1250 4.18 45.98 2065 1407 3472 253 RMT 90.45 1185 4115
1120 3.96 43.56 1853 1263 3116 226 RMT 90.45 1320 4115
1000 3.74 41.14 1653 1126 2779 204 RMT 90.45 1495 4155
Stranding 54/7
1000 4.57 41.13 2468 318 2786 166 RMT 90.45 1495 4165
900 4.33 38.97 2194 214 2478 148 RMT 90.45 1785 4425
800 4.09 36.81 1957 252 2209 133 RMT 90.45 2000 4420
710 3.85 34.64 1734 224 1958 118 RMT 90.45 2260 4425
630 3.63 32.67 1542 199 1741 107 RMT 90.45 2540 4420
560 3.42 30.78 1369 176 1545 96.1 RMT 9 .45 2860 4420
500 3.23 29.07 1221 157 1378 86.5 RMT 90.45 3210 4425
Stranding 48/13
1000 4.57 41.13 2194 591 2786 178 RMT 90.45 1495 4165
900 4.33 38.97 1950 525 2475 159 RMT 90.45 1785 4420
800 4.09 36.81 1740 469 2209 142 RMT 90.45 2000 4420
710 3.85 34.65 1542 415 1957 126 RMT 90.45 2260 4425
630 3.63 32.67 1371 369 1740 114 RMT 90.45 2540 4420
560 3.42 30.78 1217 328 1545 102 RMT 90.45 2860 4420
500 3.23 29.07 1085 292 1377 93.6 RMT 90.45 3210 4420

3
 B 524/B 524M

TABLE 2 Continued
Conductor Diameter of Conductor Mass per Unit LengthA Recommended Package SizesB
Size, Wires, Diameter, 1350, kg/km 6201, kg/km Total, kg/km Related Strength Reel Designa- Nominal Length of Nominal Mass of
mm2 mm mm kN tionC Each Piece, m Each Length, kg
Stranding 42/19
1000 4.57 41.13 1919 864 2783 192 RMT 90.45 1495 4160
900 4.33 38.97 1706 768 2474 773 RMT 90.45 1785 4415
800 4.09 36.81 1522 685 2207 154 RMT 90.45 2000 4415
710 3.85 34.65 1349 607 1956 137 RMT 90.45 2260 4420
630 3.63 32.67 1199 540 1739 123 RMT 90.45 2540 4415
560 3.42 30.78 1065 479 1544 110 RMT 90.45 2860 4415
500 3.23 29.07 950 427 1377 100 RMT 90.45 3210 4420
Stranding 33/28
1000 4.57 41.13 1508 1273 2781 206 RMT 90.45 1495 4160
900 4.33 38.97 1341 1131 2472 187 RMT 90.45 1785 4415
800 4.09 36.81 1196 1009 2205 167 RMT 90.45 2000 4410
710 3.85 34.65 1060 894 1954 148 RMT 90.45 2260 4415
630 3.63 32.67 942 795 1737 133 RMT 90.45 2540 4410
560 3.42 30.78 836 706 1542 119 RMT 90.45 2860 4410
500 3.23 29.07 746 630 1376 109 RMT 90.45 3210 4415
Stranding 33/4
630 4.66 32.62 1553 187 1740 104 RMT 90.45 2540 4420
560 4.39 30.73 1378 166 1544 92.4 RMT 90.45 3860 4415
500 4.15 29.05 1232 148 1380 82.6 RMT 84.45 2430 3355
450 3.94 27.58 1110 134 1244 74.4 RMT 84.45 2695 3355
400 3.71 25.97 984 119 1103 67.3 RMT 84.45 3040 3355
355 3.50 24.50 876 106 982 60.8 RMT 84.45 3415 3355
315 3.29 23.03 774 93 867 53.7 RMT 84.45 3865 3350
280 3.10 21.70 687 83 770 48.1 RMT 84.45 4350 3350
250 2.93 20.51 614 74 688 42.9 RMT 84.45 4875 3355
Stranding 30/7
630 4.66 32.62 1412 328 1740 113 RMT 90.45 2540 4420
560 4.39 30.73 1253 291 1544 100 RMT 90.45 2860 4415
500 4.15 29.05 1119 260 1379 89.5 RMT 84.45 2430 3350
450 3.94 27.58 1009 234 1243 80.6 RMT 84.45 3415 3350
400 3.71 25.97 895 208 1103 72.7 RMT 84.45 3040 3355
355 3.50 24.50 796 185 981 65.5 RMT 84.45 3415 3350
315 3.29 23.03 704 163 867 57.9 RMT 84.45 3865 3350
280 3.10 21.70 625 145 770 52.1 RMT 84.45 4350 3350
250 2.93 20.51 558 130 688 46.6 RMT 84.45 4875 3355
Stranding 24/13
630 4.66 32.62 1129 608 1737 125 RMT 90.45 2540 4410
560 4.39 30.73 1002 540 1542 111 RMT 90.45 2860 4410
500 4.15 29.05 896 483 1379 98.8 RMT 84.45 2430 3350
450 3.94 27.58 807 435 1242 89.0 RMT 84.45 2695 3345
400 3.71 25.97 716 386 1102 79.9 RMT 84.45 3040 3350
355 3.50 24.50 637 343 980 71.7 RMT 84.45 3415 3345
315 3.29 23.03 563 303 866 63.4 RMT 84.45 3865 3345
280 3.10 21.70 500 269 769 57.6 RMT 84.45 4350 3345
250 2.93 20.51 446 240 686 51.4 RMT 84.45 4875 3360
Stranding 18/19
630 4.66 32.62 847 889 1736 139 RMT 90.45 2540 4410
560 4.39 30.73 752 789 1541 123 RMT 90.45 2860 4410
500 4.15 29.05 672 705 1377 110 RMT 84.45 2430 3345
450 3.94 27.58 606 636 1242 99.2 RMT 84.45 2695 3345
400 3.11 25.97 537 563 1100 88.7 RMT 84.45 3040 3345
355 3.50 24.50 478 501 979 79.5 RMT 84.45 3415 3345
315 3.29 23.03 422 443 865 70.2 RMT 84.45 3865 3345
280 3.10 21.70 375 393 768 64.2 RMT 84.45 4350 3340
250 2.93 20.51 335 352 687 57.4 RMT 84.45 4875 3350
Stranding 12/7
280 4.33 21.65 488 283 771 57.6 RM 66.32 2235 1725
NR 66.28 2235 1725
250 4.09 20.45 435 252 687 51.4 RM 66.32 2505 1720
NR 66.28 2505 1720
224 3.87 19.35 389 226 615 46.0 RM 66.32 2795 1720
NR 66.28 2795 1720
200 3.66 18.30 348 202 550 41.6 RM 66.32 3125 1720
NR 66.28 3125 1720

4
 B 524/B 524M

TABLE 2 Continued
Conductor Diameter of Conductor Mass per Unit LengthA Recommended Package SizesB
Size, Wires, Diameter, 1350, kg/km 6201, kg/km Total, kg/km Related Strength Reel Designa- Nominal Length of Nominal Mass of
mm2 mm mm kN tionC Each Piece, m Each Length, kg
180 3.47 17.35 313 182 495 37.8 RM 66.32 3480 1725
NR 66.28 3480 1725
160 3.27 16.35 278 161 439 33.5 RM 66.32 3920 1720
NR 66.28 3920 1720
140 3.06 15.30 242 141 384 30.1 RM 66.32 4470 1715
NR 66.28 4470 1715
Stranding 15/4
280 4.33 21.65 609 162 771 50.8 RM 66.32 2235 1725
NR 66.28 2235 1725
250 4.09 20.45 544 144 688 45.3 RM 66.32 2505 1725
NR 66.28 2505 1725
224 3.87 19.35 487 129 616 40.6 RM 66.32 2795 1720
NR 66.28 2795 1720
200 3.66 18.30 435 115 550 36.9 RM 66.32 3125 1720
NR 66.28 3125 1720
180 3.47 17.35 391 104 495 33.6 RM 66.32 3480 8725
NR 66.28 3480 1725
160 3.27 16.35 348 92 440 29.8 RM 66.32 3920 1725
NR 66.28 3920 1725
140 3.06 15.30 304 81 385 26.5 RM 66.32 4470 1720
NR 66.28 4470 1720
Stranding 4/3
125 4.77 14.31 197.2 147.1 344.3 26.7 NR 36.22 930 320
112 4.51 13.53 176.3 131.5 307.8 23.9 NR 36.22 1040 320
100 4.26 12.78 157.3 117.3 274.6 17.2 NR 36.22 1160 320
80.0 3.81 11.43 125.8 93.9 219.7 17.2 NR 36.22 1455 320
63.0 3.39 10.17 99.6 74.3 173.9 13.7 NR 36.22 1835 320
50.0 3.02 9.06 79.1 59.0 138.1 11.2 NR 36.22 2315 320
40.0 2.70 8.10 63.2 47.1 110.3 8.95 NR 36.22 2895 320
31.5 2.39 7.17 49.5 36.9 86.4 7.01 NR 36.22 3695 320
25.0 2.13 6.39 39.3 29.3 68.6 5.57 NR 36.22 4650 320
20.0 1.91 5.73 31.6 23.6 55.2 4.48 NR 36.22 5785 320
16.0 1.71 5.13 25.3 18.9 44.2 3.59 NR 36.22 7205 320
A
Mass per Unit Length is based on a density of 2705 kg/m3 for 1350 and 2690 kg/m3 fir 6201.
B
For information only.
C
Recommended standars stranding combination are shown in Table 4.

5. Joints 6. Lay
5.1 In conductors composed of seven wires, only cold- 6.1 The preferred lay of a layer of wires is 13.5 times the
pressure welds and electric butt, cold-upset welds may be made outside diameter of that layer, but the lay shall be not less than
in the six outer finished wires. No welds are permitted in the 10 nor more than 16 times this diameter.
center core wire. In other conductors, cold-pressure welds, 6.2 The direction of lay of the outer layer shall be right-hand
electric-butt, cold-upset welds, or electric-butt welds may be unless specified otherwise by the purchaser. The direction of
made in the finished wires. Such joints in the same wire or any lay shall be reversed in successive layers.
other wire in the conductor shall be not closer than prescribed
in Table 3. Following welding, electric-butt welds in 6201 7. Construction
wires shall be annealed for a distance of at least 6 in. (150 mm) 7.1 The number and diameter of wires and the areas of cross
on each side of the weld (Explanatory Note 2). section of conductors shall conform to the requirements
prescribed in Table 1 or Table 2.
7.2 Recommended standard strandings are as shown in
TABLE 3 Minimum Distance Between Joints in the Completed Table 4.
Conductor
Number of Wires in Distance Between Joints,
ConductorA min. ft (m) TABLE 4 Recommended Standard Strandings
7 50B (15) Total No. of
No. of 1350-H19 Wires/No. of 6201-T81 Wires
19 50 (15) Wires
37 25 (7.5)
7 4/3 ... ... ...
61 and over 25 (7.5)
19 15/4 12/7 ... ...
A
Conductors of an intermediate number of wires shall conform to those having 37 33/4 30/7 24/13 18/19
the next smaller number. 61 54/7 48/13 42/19 33/28
B
Only cold-pressure welds and electric-butt, cold-upset welds are permitted in 91 ... 72/19 63/28 54/37
the six outer wires of conductors composed of seven wires.

5
 B 524/B 524M
TABLE 5 Dimensions of Standard Reels
(For Information Only)
Reel Dimensions

Reel Flange Drum Width Arbor Hole

Reel Capacity
DesignationA,B Diameter Diameter Inside Outside Diameter

in.3 m3 in. m in. m in. m in. m in. mm

NR 36.22 16 800 0.275 36 0.91 18 0.46 22 0.56 25 0.64 3 to 31⁄4 76 to 83
NR 66.28C 76 000 1.245 66 1.68 30 0.76 28 0.71 321⁄2 0.83 3 to 31⁄4 76 to 83
RM 66.32D 76 900 1.260 66 1.68 36 0.91 32 0.81 38 0.97 3 to 31⁄4 76 to 83
RM 68.38D 99 300 1.627 68 1.73 36 0.91 38 0.97 44 1.12 3 to 31⁄4 76 to 83
RMT 84.45E 152 700 2.502 78 1.98 42 1.07 45 1.14 52 1.32 5 to 51⁄4 127 to 133
(84) (2.13)
RMT 90.45E 187 000 3.064 84 2.13 42 1.07 45 1.14 52 1.32 5 to 51⁄4 127 to 133
(90) (2.29)
A
Prefix “NR” denotes wooden nonreturnable reel, “RM” metal returnable reel, and “RMT” metal returnable reel with I-beam tires.
B
Reels are not designed to withstand the forces required for breaking during tension stringing operations.
C
Reel RM 66.32 has flat rims.
D
Reels RM 66.32 and RM 68.38 have flat rims.
E
Reels RMT 84.45 and RMT 90.45 have 3-in. (76 mm) I-beam tires. Reels with similar dimensions except without I-beam tires are sometimes used.

strengths of the aluminum 1350 wires, calculated from their

8. Strength of Conductor specified nominal wire diameter and the appropriate specified
8.1 The rated strength of completed conductors shall be minimum average tensile strength given in Specification
taken as the aggregate strength of the aluminum 1350 and the B 230/B 230M. The strength contribution of the aluminum-
aluminum-alloy 6201 components, calculated as follows. The alloy 6201 wires shall be taken as that percentage, according to
strength contribution of the aluminum 1350 wires shall be the number of layers of aluminum-alloy 6201 wires, indicated
taken as the percentage indicated in Table 6, of the sum of the in Table 6, of the sum of the strengths of the aluminum-alloy
6201 wires, calculated from their specified nominal wire
diameter and the minimum stress at 1 % extension. This shall
TABLE 6 Rating Factors be considered to be 95 % of the minimum average tensile
Stranding Rating Factor, % strength specified for the wire diameter in Specification B 398.
Number of Wires Number of Layers A 8.2 Tests for determining the rated strength of the completed
1350-H19 6201-T81 conductor are not required by this specification but may be
1350-H19 6201-T81 1350-H19 6201-T81
made if agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser at
4 3 1 1 96 96
15 4 2 1 93 96 the time of placing an order. If tested, the breaking strength of
12 7 1 1 96 96 the completed conductor shall be not less than the rated
33 4 3 1 91 96
strength if failure occurs in the free length at least 1 in. (25
30 7 2 1 93 96
24 13 2 2 93 93 mm) beyond the end of either gripping device, or shall be not
18 19 1 2 96 93 less than 95 % of the rated strength if failure occurs inside, or
54 7 3 1 91 96
48 13 3 2 91 93
within 1 in. (25 mm) of the end of, either gripping device
42 19 2 2 93 93 (Explanatory Note 3).
33 28 2 3 93 91 8.3 Rated strength and breaking strength values shall be
72 19 3 2 91 93
63 28 3 3 91 91
rounded to three significant figures, in the final value only, in
54 37 2 3 93 91 accordance with the rounding method in Practice E 29.
A
For purposes of determining strength rating factors, mixed layers are consid- 8.4 Rated strength of conductors is given in Table 2 or Table
ered to be full layers for each material. 7.

6
 B 524/B 524M

TABLE 7 Conductor Mass Per Unit Length and Rated Strength

NOTE 1— Metric values represent a soft conversion and may not be the same as those metric masses that are calculated from the basic metric density.

Mass Per Unit Length Rated Strength

Conductor Size
1350 6201 Total
kips kN
cmil AWG mm2 lb/1000 ft kg/km lb/1000 ft kg/km lb/1000 ft kg/km
Stranding 72/19
3 000 000 1520 2247 3343 590 878 2837 4221 60.7 270
2 750 000 1393 2058 3063 543 808 2601 3871 55.6 247
2 500 000 1267 1871 2784 491 731 2362 3515 50.6 225
2 493 000 1263 1871 2785 491 731 2362 3515 50.4 224
2 250 000 1140 1640 2506 442 658 2126 3164 45.5 202
2 000 000 1013 1482 2206 389 579 1871 2785 41.0 182
Stranding 63/28
3 000 000 1520 1966 2926 869 1290 2835 4216 64.5 287
2 750 000 1393 1801 2680 796 1180 2597 3860 59.1 263
2 500 000 1267 1637 2436 724 1080 2361 3516 53.7 239
2 250 000 1140 1474 2193 652 970 2126 3163 48.3 215
2 000 000 1013 1297 1930 573 853 1870 2783 43.4 193
Stranding 54/37
3 000 000 1520 1686 2508 1150 1710 2836 4218 69.3 308
2 750 000 1393 1544 2297 1050 1570 2594 3867 63.5 282
2 500 000 1267 1403 2088 957 1420 2360 3508 57.7 257
2 493 000 1263 1403 2089 956 1423 2360 3512 57.6 256
2 250 000 1140 1263 1879 861 1280 2124 3159 52.0 231
2 000 000 1013 1112 1654 758 1130 1870 2784 46.6 207
Stranding 54/7
2 000 000 1013 1660 2470 214 318 1874 2788 37.9 169
1 900 000 963 1577 2346 203 303 1781 2649 36.0 160
1 800 000 912 1494 2223 193 287 1687 2510 34.1 152
1 750 000 887 1452 2161 187 288 1639 2439 33.2 148
1 700 000 861 1410 2098 182 271 1592 2369 32.2 143
1 600 000 811 1328 1976 171 255 1499 2231 30.4 135
1 500 000 760 1244 1852 161 239 1405 2090 28.4 127
1 400 000 709 1162 1729 150 223 1312 1952 26.6 118
1 361 500 690 1132 1685 146 217 1278 1902 26.3 117
1 300 000 659 1079 1605 139 207 1218 1812 25.5 112
1 277 000 647 1062 1580 137 204 1199 1784 24.6 110
1 250 000 633 1036 1542 134 199 1170 1741 24.1 107
1 200 000 608 996 1482 128 191 1124 1673 23.2 104
1 100 000 557 913 1358 118 176 1031 1534 21.6 95.9
1 000 000 507 829 1234 107 159 936 1393 19.8 87.9
Stranding 48/13
2 338 000 1185 1745 2597 470 700 2215 3297 47.5 211
2 000 000 1013 1476 2196 398 592 1874 2788 4.6 181
1 900 000 963 1402 2086 378 562 1780 2648 38.6 172
1 800 000 912 1328 1976 358 532 1686 2508 36.5 163
1 750 000 887 1291 1921 347 516 1638 2437 35.5 158
1 703 000 863 1259 1873 339 505 1598 2378 34.6 154
1 700 000 861 1253 1865 338 502 1591 2367 34.5 153
1 600 000 811 1181 1757 318 473 1499 2230 32.5 145
1 500 000 760 1106 1646 298 443 1404 2089 30.4 135
1 400 000 709 1033 1536 278 414 1311 1950 28.4 126
1 300 000 659 959 1427 258 384 1217 1811 26.8 119
1 250 000 633 921 1371 248 369 1169 1740 25.7 114
1 200 000 608 886 1318 239 355 1125 1673 24.7 110
1 100 000 557 811 1207 219 326 1030 1533 23.0 102
1 000 000 507 737 1097 199 296 936 1393 21.1 94.1
Stranding 42/19
2 338 000 1185 1527 2273 687 1022 2214 3295 51.5 229
2 000 000 1013 1291 1921 581 865 1872 2786 44.0 196
1 933 000 979 1250 1861 562 837 1813 2698 42.5 189
1 900 000 963 1226 1825 552 821 1778 2646 41.8 186
1 800 000 912 1162 1729 523 778 1685 2507 39.6 176
1 798 000 911 1163 1731 523 779 1686 2509 39.6 176
1 750 000 887 1130 1681 508 757 1638 2438 38.5 171

7
 B 524/B 524M

TABLE 7 Continued
Mass Per Unit Length Rated Strength
Conductor Size
1350 6201 Total
kips kN
cmil AWG mm2 lb/1000 ft kg/km lb/1000 ft kg/km lb/1000 ft kg/km
1 700 000 861 1097 1632 494 735 1591 2367 37.4 166
1 600 000 811 1033 1537 465 692 1498 2229 35.2 157
1 534 400 777 993 1477 446 664 1439 2141 33.8 150
1 500 000 760 968 1440 436 649 1404 2089 33.0 147
1 400 000 709 904 1344 407 605 1311 1950 30.8 137
1 300 000 659 839 1249 378 562 1217 1811 29.0 129
1 277 000 647 826 1229 372 553 1198 1782 28.4 126
1 250 000 633 806 1199 363 540 1169 1739 27.8 124
1 200 000 608 775 1153 349 519 1124 1672 26.7 119
1 100 000 557 710 1056 319 475 1029 1531 24.8 110
1 000 000 507 645 960 290 431 935 1391 22.9 102
Stranding 33/28
2 000 000 1013 1014 1509 856 1274 1870 2783 47.7 212
1 900 000 963 964 1434 813 1210 1777 2644 45.3 201
1 800 000 912 913 1358 771 1147 1684 2505 42.9 191
1 750 000 887 888 1321 749 1115 1637 2436 41.7 186
1 700 000 861 862 1282 727 1082 1589 2364 40.5 180
1 600 000 811 812 1208 685 1020 1497 2228 38.1 160
1 500 000 760 760 1131 642 955 1402 2086 35.7 159
1 400 000 709 710 1056 599 892 1309 1948 33.4 148
1 300 000 659 659 981 557 828 1216 1809 31.2 139
1 250 000 633 633 942 535 796 1168 1738 30.0 133
1 200 000 608 609 906 514 765 1123 1671 28.8 128
1 100 000 557 558 830 471 701 1029 1531 26.6 119
1 000 000 507 507 754 428 657 935 1391 24.8 110
Stranding 33/4
1 300 000 659 1086 1616 131 195 1217 1811 24.5 109
1 250 000 633 1045 1555 126 187 1171 1742 23.6 105
1 200 000 608 1003 1493 121 180 1124 1673 22.6 101
1 100 000 557 919 1367 111 165 1030 1532 20.7 92.3
1 000 000 507 836 1244 101 150 937 1394 18.9 83.9
950 000 481 794 1181 95.7 142 890 1323 17.5 79.7
900 000 456 753 1120 90.8 135 844 1255 17.0 75.5
850 000 431 711 1058 85.7 127 796 1185 16.0 71.3
800 000 405 668 994 80.6 120 749 1114 15.3 68.2
750 000 380 627 933 75.6 112 703 1045 14.5 64.0
700 000 355 585 870 70.5 105 656 975 13.6 60.7
650 000 329 543 808 65.5 97.4 608 905 12.7 56.3
600 000 304 501 746 60.4 89.9 561 835 11.8 52.4
550 000 279 460 684 55.4 82.6 515 767 10.8 48.1
500 000 253 418 621 50.4 74.9 468 696 10.0 44.4
Stranding 30/7
1 300 000 659 988 1469 229 341 1217 1810 26.6 118
1 250 000 633 950 1413 220 328 1770 1741 25.6 114
1 200 000 608 912 1357 212 315 1124 1672 24.5 109
1 198 000 607 913 1358 212 315 1124 1673 24.5 109
1 172 000 594 893 1329 207 308 1100 1637 24.0 107
1 109 000 562 845 1257 196 292 1041 1549 22.7 101
1 100 000 557 836 1244 194 289 1030 1533 22.5 100
1 024 500 519 780 1161 181 269 961 1431 20.9 93.2
1 000 000 507 760 1131 176 262 936 1393 20.4 91.0
950 000 481 722 1074 167 249 889 1323 19.4 86.4
900 000 456 684 1018 159 236 843 1254 18.4 81.9
853 700 433 650 968 151 225 801 1192 17.5 77.6
850 000 431 646 962 150 223 796 1185 17.4 77.3
800 000 405 608 904 141 210 749 1114 16.6 73.8
750 000 380 570 848 132 197 702 1045 15.6 69.2
700 000 355 532 791 123 184 655 975 14.7 65.5
650 000 329 494 735 115 171 609 906 13.7 60.8
600 000 304 456 678 106 158 562 836 12.8 56.8
550 000 279 418 622 97.0 144 515 766 11.7 52.1
500 000 253 380 565 88.1 131 468 696 10.8 48.0
Stranding 24/13
1 300 000 659 790 1176 426 633 1216 1809 29.3 131
1 250 000 633 760 1131 410 610 1170 1741 28.2 126
1 200 000 608 730 1086 393 585 1123 1671 27.1 121
1 198 000 607 730 1086 393 585 1123 1672 27.1 120

8
 B 524/B 524M

TABLE 7 Continued
Mass Per Unit Length Rated Strength
Conductor Size
1350 6201 Total
kips kN
cmil AWG mm2 lb/1000 ft kg/km lb/1000 ft kg/km lb/1000 ft kg/km
1 109 000 562 676 1006 364 542 1040 1547 25.0 111
1 100 000 557 669 995 360 536 1029 1531 24.8 111
1 080 600 548 658 980 355 528 1013 1508 24.4 109
1 024 500 519 624 929 336 500 961 1430 23.1 103
1 000 000 507 608 905 328 488 936 1393 22.6 101
950 000 481 577 858 311 463 888 1321 21.4 95.4
927 200 470 565 841 304 453 869 1294 20.9 93.2
900 000 456 547 814 295 439 842 1253 20.3 90.5
853 700 433 520 774 280 417 800 1191 19.3 85.8
850 000 431 517 769 279 415 796 1184 19.2 85.4
800 000 405 486 723 262 390 748 1113 18.2 81.2
750 000 380 456 679 246 366 702 1045 17.1 76.2
700 000 355 425 632 229 341 654 973 16.1 71.8
650 000 329 395 588 213 317 608 905 15.0 66.6
600 000 304 365 542 196 292 561 834 14.1 62.8
550 000 279 334 497 180 268 514 765 12.9 57.6
500 000 253 304 452 164 244 468 696 11.7 52.9
Stranding 18/19
1 300 000 659 593 882 622 926 1215 1808 32.7 146
1 250 000 633 570 848 598 890 1168 1738 31.5 140
1 200 000 608 547 814 575 855 1122 1669 30.3 135
1 172 000 594 536 797 562 837 1098 1634 29.5 131
1 100 000 557 501 746 547 784 1028 1530 27.7 123
1 080 600 548 494 735 518 771 1012 1506 27.2 121
1 000 000 507 456 678 479 713 935 1391 25.2 112
950 000 481 433 644 455 677 888 1321 23.9 106
900 000 456 411 611 431 642 842 1253 22.7 101
850 000 431 388 577 407 606 795 1183 21.4 95.3
800 000 405 365 543 383 570 748 1113 20.3 90.3
750 000 380 342 509 359 534 701 1043 19.0 84.7
739 800 375 338 503 355 528 693 1031 18.8 83.5
700 000 355 319 475 335 498 654 973 17.9 79.5
650 000 329 296 440 311 463 607 903 16.6 73.8
649 500 329 297 442 312 464 608 905 16.6 73.8
600 000 304 273 406 287 427 560 833 15.8 70.1
550 000 279 251 373 263 392 514 765 14.4 64.3
500 000 253 228 339 239 356 467 695 13.2 58.8
Stranding 15/4
600 000 304 444 661 118 175 562 836 12.5 55.4
587 200 298 436 648 115 172 551 820 12.2 54.3
550 000 279 407 606 108 161 515 767 11.4 50.8
503 600 255 374 556 99 147 473 703 10.5 46.5
500 000 263 370 550 98.1 146 468 696 10.4 46.2
450 000 228 333 496 88.3 131 421 627 9.35 41.6
400 000 203 296 440 78.5 117 375 557 8.43 37.5
350 000 177 359 385 68.7 102 328 487 7.47 33.2
300 000 152 222 331 58.9 87.7 281 418 6.50 28.9
250 000 127 185 225 49.1 73.0 234 348 5.49 24.4
Stranding 12/7
653 100 331 388 577 225 335 612 911 15.4 68.5
600 000 304 355 528 206 307 561 835 14.1 62.9
550 000 279 325 483 189 281 514 764 13.0 57.6
500 000 253 296 440 172 256 468 696 11.8 52.4
450 000 228 266 396 155 230 421 626 10.6 47.2
400 000 203 237 352 137 204 374 556 9.52 42.4
350 000 177 207 308 120 179 327 487 8.41 37.4
300 000 152 178 265 103 153 281 418 7.38 32.8
250 000 127 148 220 85.9 128 234 348 6.20 27.6
Stranding 4/3
246 900 125 132 197 98.7 147 231 344 6.04 26.9
211 600 4/0 107 113 168 84.6 126 198 294 5.18 23.0
195 700 99.1 105 156 78.2 116 183 272 4.79 21.3
167 800 3/0 85.0 89.8 134 67.0 99.7 157 234 4.11 18.3
155 400 78.7 83.2 124 62.1 92.4 145 216 3.84 17.1
133 100 2/0 67.4 71.3 106 53.2 79.1 124 185 3.31 14.7
123 300 62.5 66.0 98.2 49.3 73.3 115 171 3.07 13.65
105 600 1/0 53.5 56.5 84.1 42.2 62.8 98.7 147 2.69 12.0

9
 B 524/B 524M

TABLE 7 Continued
Mass Per Unit Length Rated Strength
Conductor Size
1350 6201 Total
kips kN
cmil AWG mm2 lb/1000 ft kg/km lb/1000 ft kg/km lb/1000 ft kg/km
77 470 39.3 41.5 61.7 31.0 46.1 72.5 108 2.01 8.94
66 360 2 33.6 35.6 52.9 26.5 39.5 62.1 92.4 1.75 7.79
48 690 24.7 26.1 38.8 19.5 29.0 45.6 67.8 1.29 5.76
41 740 4 21.2 22.3 33.2 16.7 24.8 39.0 58.0 1.12 4.97
30 580 15.5 16.4 24.4 12.2 18.2 28.6 42.6 0.826 3.67
Conversion Factors:
1 cmil 5 5.067 E − 04 mm2
1 mil 5 2.54 E − 02 mm
1 lb/1000 ft 5 1.488 E + 00 kg/km
1 ft 5 3.048 E − 01 m
1 lb 5 4.536 E − 01 kg
1 lbf 5 4.448 E − 03 kN

9. Density stranding may be the applicable value specified in 10.1 or may

9.1 For the purpose of calculating mass, mass per unit be calculated from the measured component dimensions of the
length, cross sections, and so forth, the density of 1350-H19 is sample under test. In case of question regarding area compli-
2705 kg/m3 (0.0975 lb/in.3) at 20°C and the density of ance, the actual mass increment due to stranding shall be
6201-T81 is 2690 kg/m3(0.097 lb/in.3) at 20°C. calculated.

10. Mass Electrical Resistance 12. Finish

10.1 The mass and electrical resistance of a unit length of
stranded conductor are a function of the length of lay. The
approximate mass per unit length and electrical resistance may
be determined using the standard increments shown in Table 8.
When standard accuracy is desired, the increment based on the
specific lay of the conductor may be calculated (Explanatory
Note 4).
10.2 In the calculation of the electrical resistance of a
completed conductor, the resistance of both the aluminum 1350
and the aluminum-alloy 6201 wires must be taken into consid-
eration.
11. Variation in Area
11.1 The total area of cross section of the conductor shall be
not less than 98 % of the area specified in Table 1 or Table 2.
Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the manufacturer
may have the option of determining the cross-sectional area by
either of the following methods, except that in case of question
regarding area compliance, the method given in 11.1.2 shall be
used.
11.1.1 The area of cross section may be determined by
calculations from diameter measurements, expressed to four
decimal places, of the component wires at any point when
measured perpendicularly to their axes.
11.1.2 The area of cross section of the wires of a conductor
may be determined by Test Method B 263. In applying that
method, the increment in mass per unit length resulting from
TABLE 8 Standard Increments Due to Stranding
Increment (Increase) of Linear
Size of Conductor, cmil (mm2)
Density and Electrical Resistance, %
4 000 000 to 3 000 001 4
(2027 to 1521), incl
3 000 000 to 2 000 001 3 15.1 The net mass, length, size, kind of conductor, strand-
(1520 to 1014), incl
2 000 000 (1013) and under 2 ing, and any other necessary identification shall be marked on
12.1 The conductor shall be free of all imperfections not
consistent with good commercial practice.
13. Mechanical and Electrical Tests
13.1 Tests for mechanical and electrical properties of com-
ponent wires shall be made before stranding (Explanatory Note
1).
13.2 Routine testing after stranding is not required. When
requested by the purchaser at the time of placing the order,
tension tests on wires before stranding may be waived and tests
may be made of wires removed from the completed conductor.
When so tested, the wires of aluminum 1350 and aluminum-
alloy 6201 shall have tensile strengths not less than 95 % of the
minimum tensile strengths prescribed for individual tests in
Specification B 230/B 230M in the case of aluminum 1350 and
in Specification B 398/B 398M in the case of aluminum-alloy
6201 (Explanatory Note 5).
13.2.1 The aluminum 1350 wires removed from a com-
pleted conductor shall be capable of meeting the bending
properties stated in Specification B 230/B 230M.
13.2.2 The aluminum-alloy 6201 wires removed from a
completed conductor shall be capable of meeting the bending
properties stated in Specification B 398/B 398M.
14. Inspection
14.1 All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of
final manufacture unless otherwise agreed upon between the
manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of purchase. The
manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the pur-
chaser all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material
is being manufactured in accordance with this specification.
15. Marking
a tag attached to the end of the conductor inside the package.

10
 B 524/B 524M
This same information, together with the purchaser’s order
number, the manufacturer’s serial number (if any), and all
shipping marks and other information required by the pur-
chaser shall appear on the outside of the package.
NOTE 2—Multiple lengths per package are allowable only when the
bare conductor is intended for remanufacture, such as adding a covering
or insulation. In such cases the position of each end of a length is to be
clearly marked and the length of each portion shall be shown on the
attached to the end of the conductor.
16. Packaging and Shipping
16.1 Package sizes and kind of package, reels or coils, shall
be agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
Recommended package sizes are shown in Table 1 or Table 2.
16.2 There shall be only one length of conductor on a reel.
16.3 The conductors shall be protected against damage in
ordinary handling and shipping. If heavy wood lagging is
required, it shall be specified by the purchaser at the time of
placing the purchase order.
17. Keywords
17.1 aluminum alloy electrical conductors; aluminum elec-
trical conductors; concentric-lay stranded aluminum conduc-
tors; aluminum alloy reinforced (ACAR, 1350/6201); electrical
conductors; electrical conductors - aluminum; electrical con-
ductors - aluminum alloy; overhead electrical conductors;
stranded conductors
EXPLANATORY NOTES
NOTE 1—For definitions of terms relating to conductors, reference
should be made to Terminology B 354.
NOTE 2—The behavior of properly spaced wire joints in stranded
conductors is related to both their tensile strength and elongation. Because
of its higher elongation properties, the lower-strength electric-butt weld
gives equivalent overall performance to that of a cold-pressure weld or an
electric-butt, cold-upset weld in stranded conductors with more than seven
wires.
NOTE 3—To test aluminum conductors, aluminum alloy reinforced, for
breaking strength successfully as a unit requires special devices for
gripping the ends of the wires without causing damage that may result in
failure below the actual strength of the conductor. Various special
dead-end devices are available, such as compression sleeves and split
sleeves, but ordinary jaws or clamping devices usually are not suitable.
NOTE 4—The increment of mass per unit length or electrical resistance
of a completed concentric-lay-stranded conductor (k) in percent is as
follows:
k 5 100 ~m 2 1!
where m is the stranding factor, and is also the ratio of the mass or
electrical resistance of a unit length of stranded conductor to that of a solid
conductor of the same cross-sectional area or of a stranded conductor with
infinite length of lay; that is, all wires parallel to the conductor axis. The
stranding factor m for the completed stranded conductor is the numerical
average of the stranding factors for each of the individual wires in the
conductor, including the straight core wire, if any (for which the lay factor
is unity). The stranding factor (m ind) for any given wire in a concentric-
lay-stranded conductor is as follows:
m ind 5 =1 1 ~9.8696/n 2!
where:
length of lay
n 5 diameter of helical path of the wire
The deriviation of the above is given in NBS Handbook 100. The factors
k and m are to be determined separately for the 1350-H19 wires and for
the 6201-T81 wires.
NOTE 5—Wire unlaid from conductor may have different physical
properties from those of the wire before stranding. This may be caused by
laying and straightening.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States. Individual
reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at 610-832-9585
(phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (http://www.astm.org).

11
 Designation: B 527 – 93 (Reapproved 2000)e1

Standard Test Method for

Determination of Tap Density of Metallic Powders and
Compounds1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation B 527; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

e1 NOTE—All referenced documents, except Practice B 215, were deleted editorially from Section 2.

1. Scope TABLE 1 Accuracy and Capacity of Balance

1.1 This test method specifies a method for the determina- Cylinder Capacity, cm3 Apparent Density, g/cm3 Mass of Test Portion, g

tion of tap density (packed density) of metallic powders and 100 >1 100 6 0.5
100 <1 50 6 0.2
compounds, that is, the density of a powder that has been 25 >7 100 6 0.5
tapped, to settle contents, in a container under specified 25 2 to 7 50 6 0.2
conditions. 25 <2 20 6 0.1
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- cm3 at 20°C, the height of the graduated portion being
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- approximately 135 mm. The graduations shall be at 0.2 cm3
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. intervals.
4.2.1.2 A 25-cm3 cylinder shall be used for powders of
2. Referenced Documents apparent density higher than 4 g/cm3, in particular for refrac-
2.1 ASTM Standards: tory metal powders, but may also be used for powder of lower
B 215 Practice for Sampling Finished Lots of Metal Pow- apparent density.
ders2 4.3 Tapping Apparatus,4 which permits the tapping of the
graduated cylinder against a firm base. The tapping shall be
3. Significance and Use such that a densification of the powder can take place without
3.1 This test method covers the evaluation of the tapped any loosening of its surface layers. The stroke shall be 3 mm
density physical characteristic of metallic powders and com- (0.118 in.) and the tapping frequency shall be between 100 and
pounds. The degree of correlation between the results of this 300 taps/min. An example of a tapping apparatus is shown in
test method and the quality of powders in use will vary with Fig. 1.
each particular application and has not been fully determined.
5. Test Specimen
4. Apparatus 5.1 For the quantities of powder required for each test, see
4.1 Balance, of appropriate capacity and accuracy to satisfy Table 1. Obtain test powder samples according to Practices
the requirements shown in Table 1. B 215.
4.2 Graduated Glass Cylinder,3 calibrated to contain 100 5.2 In general, the powder should be tested in the as-
cm3 at 20°C, the height of the graduated portion being received condition. In certain instances the powder may be
approximately 175 mm. The graduations shall be at 1 cm3 dried. However, if the powder is susceptible to oxidation, the
intervals, thus allowing a measuring accuracy of 6 0.5 cm3. drying shall take place in a vacuum or in inert gas. If the
For apparent densities over 4.0 g/cm 3, do not use the 100 cm3 powder contains volatile substances, it shall not be dried.
cylinder. 5.3 The test shall be carried out on three test samples.
4.2.1 Alternatively, the following may be used:
6. Procedure
4.2.1.1 Graduated Glass Cylinder, calibrated to contain 25
6.1 Clean the inside wall of the graduated cylinder (5.2)
with a suitable clean brush or, if necessary, by rinsing with a
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee B09 on Metal
Powders and Metal Powder Productsand is the direct responsibility of Subcommit-
4
tee B09.03on Refractory Metal Powders. The following have been found suitable: Shandon Southern Instruments, Inc.,
Current edition approved Dec. 15, 1993. Published April 1994. Originally Tap-Pak Volumeter Model JEL-ST2 (Manufactured by J. Engelsmann A.G. or
published as B 527 – 70. Last previous edition B 527 – 85 (1991).e1 Ludwigshafen 9. Rh. West Germany), 515 Broad Street, Sewickly, PA 15143;
2
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 02.05. Vankel Industries, Vanderkamp Tap Density Tester, 36 Meridian Road, Edison, NJ
3
Corning No. 3046, Pyrex brand has been found suitable. 08820; Quantachrome Corp., Dual Autotap, 6 Aerial Way, Syosset, NY 11791.

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

1
 B 527
NOTE 1—In practice, the minimum number of taps, N, such that no
further change in volume takes place would be determined. For all further
tests on the same type of powder, the cylinder would be subjected to 2N
taps, except where general experience and acceptance have established a
specific number of taps (no less than N taps) as being satisfactory. For fine
refractory metal powders, 3000 taps has been found to be satisfactory for
all sizes.
6.4 If the tapped surface is level, read the volume directly. If
the tapped surface is not level, determine the tape volume by
calculating the mean value between the highest and the lowest
reading of the tapped surface. Read the final volume to the
nearest 0.5 cm3 when using a 100 cm3 cylinder and to the
nearest 0.2 cm3 when using a 25 cm3 cylinder.

7. Calculation
7.1 The tap density is given in the following equation
M
Pt 5 V (1)

where:
Pt = tap density, g/cm3,
M = mass of powder, g, and
V = volume of tapped powder, cm3.

8. Report
8.1 Report the following information:
8.1.1 Reference to this test method,
8.1.2 All details necessary for identification of the test
sample,
8.1.3 The drying procedure, if the powder has been dried,
8.1.4 Cylinder capacity, mass of test portion and method
used,
8.1.5 The result obtained,
8.1.6 All operations not specified in this test method or
regarded as optional,
FIG. 1 Example of Tapping Apparatus 8.1.7 Details of any occurrence that may have affected the
result.

solvent, such as acetone. If a solvent is used, thoroughly dry
the cylinder before reuse.
6.2 Weigh, to the nearest 0.1 g, the mass of the test portion
as indicated in Table 1, using a balance (4.1).
6.3 Pour the test portion into the graduated cylinder. Take
care that a level surface of the powder is formed. Place the
cylinder in the tapping apparatus (4.3). Tap the cylinder until
no further decrease in the volume of the powder takes place
(see Note 1).
9. Precision and Bias
9.1 Precision and bias cannot be stated at this time because
this test method covers a broad range of powders and associ-
ated densities.
10. Keywords
10.1 apparent density; bulk density; density; density ratio;
metal powders; packed density; powder metallurgy; tap density

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.
Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at
610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).